* f i-o £ 



A TREATISE 



ON 



PHARMACY 



DESIGNED AS A 



TEXT-BOOK FOR THE STUDENT, 



AND AS A 



GUIDE FOR THE PHYSICIAN AND PHARMACIST, 



CONTAINING THE 



OFFICINAL AND MANY UNOFFICIAL FORMULAS, 

AND NUMEROUS 

EXAMPLES OF EXTEMPORANEOUS PRESCRIPTIONS. 



BY 

EDWARD PARRISH, 

LATE PROFESSOR OF THEORY AND PRACTICE OF PHARMACY IN THE PHILADELPHIA COLLEGE OF PHARMACY 

MEMBER OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA J AND OF THK 

AMERICAN PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION. 



FOURTH EDITION, 

ENLARGED AND THOROUGHLY REVISED 
BY 

THOS. S. WIEGAKD, 

GRADUATE OF THE PHILADELPHIA COLLEGE OF PHARMACY. 

WITH TWO HUNDRED AND EIGHTY ILLUSTRATIONS 




-■ 



PHILADELPHIA: 4 
HENEY C. LEA 
1874. 



< 



3-aV 



^V 



Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1874, by 

HENRY C. LEA, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress. All rights reserved. 



Philadelphia: 

collins, printer, 

705 Jay ire Street. 



TO 



WILLIAM PROCTER, Jr., 

PROFESSOR OF THEORY AND PRACTICE OF PHARMACY IN THE PHILADELPHIA COLLEGE OF PHARMACY, 
EDITOR OF THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PHARMACY. ETC., 



©bis Sloxli is Inscribe 



AS A TESTIMONIAL TO HIS ZEAL AND ABILITY 



PROSECUTING THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PHARMACY, 



TRIBUTE OF THE ENDURING FRIENDSHIP AND ESTEEM 



-THE AUTHOR. 



( Hi ) 



PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 



When the sudden and lamented death of Mr. Parrish occurred, 
in September, 1872, he had for some time been engaged in making 
preparations for a new edition of his Treatise on Pharmacy, in 
anticipation of the revised U. S. Pharmacopoeia. Stricken down 
while in the zealous discharge of his duties as a peace commis- 
sioner to the Indians, his papers were placed in the hands of 
the editor, who has endeavored to carry out the views of his 
deceased friend in so far as they were indicated by the MS. and 
notes which he left behind. 

Among the changes thus introduced will be observed an altera- 
tion in the general arrangement of the work. Part I. has been 
almost entirely rewritten, embodying new topics and some which 
were formerly in other portions of the volume. Part II. has also 
been much altered, and the order of the remaining divisions has 
been changed. 

The position which the work has assumed as a leading authority 
on Pharmacy, and the knowledge that the author had devoted to 
it so large a portion of the labors of an active and useful life, have 
made the editor realize fully the responsibility incurred in its 
revision. This responsibility he has endeavored to discharge con- 
scientiously, regardless of the labor which it involved. During the 
ten years which have elapsed since the appearance of the last edi- 
tion, the advance of pharmaceutical science has been marked, and it 
has been his endeavor to introduce whatever of value has been de- 
veloped by the investigations and improvements made during that 
period. In adapting the work, moreover, to the new edition of our 

(v) 



VI PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 

national Pharmacopoeia it became necessary not only to observe the 
changes in the list of preparations but to revise the nomenclature. 
The new notation of chemical substances has likewise been intro- 
duced, involving a very laborious revision of all the chemical 
formulas. 

These changes and additions have increased the size of the 
volume by about one hundred and fifty pages, notwithstanding 
the care with which all matter that could be considered obsolete 
has been omitted. It has been the object of the editor throughout 
to preserve strictly the practical and useful character of the work, 
and he hopes that it may be found not unworthy a continuance of 
the confidence which has hitherto been bestowed upon it. 

The use of syllabi in the scientific portions of the work has been 
continued, as designed by the author, experience having still further 
confirmed his impressions as to their advantage in displaying, in a 
condensed shape, all important facts connected with the substances 
described. In alluding to these syllabi it is proper to refer to the 
author's acknowledgment, in his previous edition, of the valuable 
assistance rendered by Prof. J. M. Maisch in their preparation. 

If it had been possible by any typographical arrangement to 
make a distinction between the new matter and the old, the editor 
would gladly have done so. The changes, however, have been so 
numerous and pervade the text so thoroughly that no system could 
be adopted for this purpose without distracting the attention of 
the reader to a degree that would be inadmissible. 

Philadelphia, March, 1874. 



HINTS 



TOWARD THE 



STUDY OF AND REFERENCE TO THE WORK. 



The syllabi are adapted to the student, and may be used by teachers 
of materia medica and pharmacy as affording classifications of the 
officinal preparations. 

Working formulas are inserted for the use of the practical manipu- 
lator; they are so displayed as, with ordinary care, to avoid mistakes in 
compounding. 

Comments upon the uses and properties of the officinal preparations 
follow the respective syllabi. 

The processes for preparing and dispensing medicines are separately 
described and illustrated in the first chapter in Part III., in the several 
chapters of Part IV., and in Parts V. and YI. 

Chemical compounds are displayed in the syllabi so as to show their 
composition, most prominent properties, and doses ; their composition is 
further given with the process for their preparation, and its rationale, 
in the text. 

In consulting the index, the. most read}' method of finding a prepa- 
ration is to refer to the class to which it belongs — a salt is best found 
under the Latin name of its base. 



(vii) 



CONTENTS. 



PAET I. 

PRELIMINARY. 
CHAPTER I. 

PAGE 

On the Furniture Necessary to the Shop or Dispensing Office 17 
Implements .....'... 39 

CHAPTER II. 
Store Room, Cellar, and Laboratory ..... 57 



PAET II. 

CHAPTER I. 
On Pharmacopoeias ........ 63 

CHAPTER II. 
Weights, Measures, and Specific Gravity . . . G9 

CHAPTER III. 
Temperature ......... 02 

CHAPTER IV. 
Modes of Measuring, Regulating, and Applying Heat . . 103 

Thermometer ........ 103 

Sand-bath . . . . . . . .104 

Water-bath . . . . . . . .105 

Steam-bath . . . . . . . .107 



PAET III 

INORGANIC PHARMACEUTICAL CHEMISTRY. 

CHAPTER I. 
Chemical Processes used in Pharmacy . . . . .109 

Distillation, fractional and destructive . . . . .119 

Sublimation . . . . . . . .120 

(ix) 



CONTENTS. 



Desiccation, calcination 

Ignition, torrefaction 

Reduction 

Oxidation 

Carbonic &cid processes 

Decolorizing 

Washing of -chemicals 

Precipitation 

Crystallization . 



PAGE 

121 
122 
122 
123 
123 
124 
125 
126 
127 



CHAPTER II. 

Non-Metallic Elements and their Medicinal Preparation 
Oxygen .... 
Ozone .... 
Chlorinium 

Chlorine disinfecting preparations 
Iodine and its preparations 
Bromine and its preparations 
Phosphorus and its preparations 
Sulphur and its preparations 



128 
128 
130 
132 
132 
134 
140 
143 
145 



CHAPTER III. 



On the Inorganic Acids 

Syllabus of mineral acids 



147 

148 



CHAPTER IV. 

The Alkalies and their Salts 

Alkaline salts derived from natural mineral deposits 
Alkaline salts derived from wood ashes 
Alkaline salts derived from common salt 
Alkaline salts derived from crude tartar 
Alkaline salts preparations of ammonia 



109 
174 
184 
192 
194 



CHAPTER V. 



The Earths and their Preparations . . . 


201 


Preparations of barium ..... 


201 


Preparations of calcium . . 


203 


Preparations of magnesium .... 


212 


Preparations containing aluminium 


220 


Cerium and its oxalate . . . . . 


223 


CHAPTER VI. 




Iron and Manganese ...... 


224 


Ferrum ....... 


224 


Preparations containing oxygen 


226 



CONTENTS. 



XI 



Preparations with the halogens . 

Manganese 

Preparations of manganese 



PAGE 

248 
254 
255 



CHAPTER VII. 

Preparations of Copper, Zinc, Nickel, and Cadmium 
Cuprum (copper) 
Preparations of copper . 
Zincum (zinc) 
Preparations of zinc 
Cadmium 

Preparations of cadmium 
Nickel . 

Preparations of nickel . 
Cobalt 



CHAPTER VIII 



Lead, Silyer, Bismuth 
Plumbum (lead) . 
Preparations of lead 
Argentum (silver) 
Preparations of silver 
Bismuthum 
Preparations of bismuth 



CHAPTER IX 



Antimony and Arsenic 
Antimony- 
Preparations of antimony 
Arsenic . 
Preparations of arsenic . 



260 
260 

260 
263 
264 
269 
270 
270 
271 
271 



272 
272 
272 
277 
277 
280 
280 



284 
284 
285 
291 
292 



CHAPTER X. 



ctry, Gold, and Platinum 


296 


Hydrargyrum (mercury) 


296 


Mercurial compounds .... 


297 


Aurum (gold) ..... 


307 


Preparations of gold .... 


3C8 


Platinum ...... 


310 



CHAPTER XI. 

On Tests, Qualitative and Quantitative 



311 



Xll 



CONTENTS. 



PAET IV. 

PHARMACY IN ITS RELATIONS TO ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 

CHAPTER I. 

Ligneous Fibre and its Derivatives 
Ligniii .... 
Collodium 

Products of the distillation of wood 
Aciduni aceticum 
Acetone .... 
Creasotum 

CHAPTER II. 

Farinaceous, Mucilaginous, and Saccharine Principles 
Syllabus of starches, etc. 
Gums and mucilages 
Sugars 

Tests for sugars . 
Glucosides 
Saccharine group of medicines 

CHAPTER III. 

Albuminous and similar Principles and certain Animal Products 
Protein compounds ...... 

Modified albuminous principles .... 

Animal products used in medicine containing protein compounds 
Gelatinous principles ...... 

Pepsin ........ 

CHAPTER IV. 

Fermentation, Alcohols and Ethers 

Alcohol ..... 
Etherea ..... 
Methylic alcohol and derivatives 
Medicinal preparations of methylic alcohol 
Chloroform .... 

Derivatives of butylic alcohol . 
Derivatives of amylic alcohol . 
Artificial fruit essences . 



CHAPTER V. 

Fixed Oils and Fats . 
Fatty acids 
Lead plaster 
Glycerin . 

Glonoin or nitro-glycerin 
Soaps used in medicine . 
Fixed oils and fats used in medicine 



CONTENTS. 



Xlll 



CHAPTER YI. 

On Yolatile Oils, Camphors, and Resins 
Volatile oils .... 

Adulterations and tests . 
Carbo-hydrogen essential oils . 
Plants yielding carbo-hydrogen essential oils 
Oxygenated oil . 
Plants yielding oxygenated oils 
Nitrogenated oils 
Sulphuretted oils 
Ernpyreurnatic volatile oils 
Camphors .... 

Caoutchouc and caoutchoucoids 
Resins ..... 
Syllabus of resins 



PAGE 

398 
398 
402 
405 
407 
408 
409 
416 
417 
418 
419 
421 
421 
422 



CHAPTER YII. 

Organic Acids .... 

Fruit acids .... 

Derivatives of the fruit acids 
Acids representing the medicinal virtues of pi 
Acids combined with vegetable alkalies 
Acids derived from or yielding essential oils 
Astringent or allied acids 
Acids of animal origin . 
Acids pertaining to coloring matters . 



nits 



429 
430 
434 
436 
441 
443 
454 
460 
462 



CHAPTER YIII 

On the Organic Alkalies or Alkaloids . 
Syllabus of natural quaternary alkaloids 
Syllabus of artificial quaternary alkaloids 
Syllabus of natural ternary alkaloids . 
Syllabus of artificial ternary alkaloids . 
Opium alkaloids and their salts 
Cinchona alkaloids and their salts 
General remarks on the cinchona alkaloids 
Alkaloids of strychnos and their salts . 
Alkaloids of the solanacese 
The ternary alkaloids 
Alkaloids of animal origin 



467 
474 
476 
476 
477 
481 
490 
498 
502 
506 
513 
517 



CHAPTER IX. 

On Neutral Organic Principles mostly peculiar to a limited 

number of plants, and possessed of medicinal principles 519 
Syllabus of plants and their characteristic principles . . . 520 

Remarks on some neutral principles ..... 528 
On the decomposition of organic bodies . . . .534 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



PAET V. 

PHARMACY PROPER (GALENICAL PHARMACY). 



CHAPTER I. 

On the Different parts of Plants, their Collection and Desic- 
cation ......... 



PAGE 

537 



CHAPTER II. 

On the Powdering of Drugs, and on Powders . 
Pulveres, U. 8. P. (syllabus) . 



542 
552 



CHAPTER III. 



On Solution and Filtration 
Officinal solutions, U. 8. P. 



553 

558 



CHAPTER IY. 

The Medicated Waters .... 
Aquse (syllabus) .... 

Working formulas from XI. 8. Pharmacopoeia . 
Remarks on distilled waters 



571 

572 
573 

574 



CHAPTER Y. 



Maceration and Infusion .... 


576 


Infusa, U. 8. P. (syllabus) 


582 


Unofficinal infusions .... 


584 


Processes requiring heat 


586 


Officinal decoctions .... 


588 


Remarks on decoctions . • . . 


5£8 



CHAPTER YI 

Percolation, or the Displacement Process 
The apparatus .... 
Management of the process 



590 
592 
596 



CHAPTER VII 



Tinctures ...... 


603 


Tincturse, U. 8. P. (syllabus) . 


605 


Working formulas 


611 


Unofficinal ..... 


G20 


Ethereal ...... 


622 



CONTENTS. 



XV 



CHAPTER VIII. 

Medicated "Wines, Vinegars, Elixirs, and Cordials 
Vina, U. 8. P. (syllabus) 
Remarks on the medicated wines 
Working formulas from'tlie U. S. Pharmacopoeia 
Unofficinal wines 
Aceta 

Syllabus of officinal vinegars 
Elixirs and cordials 
Formulas from Proceedings of Ai 



merican Pharmaceutical Association 



PAGE 

624 
624 
625 
625 
626 
629 
630 
631 
634 



CHAPTER IX, 

Preparations op Opium 

Syllabus of officinal preparations 
Remarks ..... 
"Working formulas 



639 
640 
640 



CHAPTER X. 
Evaporation and the Extracts 
Extracta, IT. S. P. (syllabus) 
Working formulas 
Unofficinal extracts 
Physical properties 



648 
652 
660 
665 
668 



CHAPTER XI. 

Fluid Extracts, and Oleoresins 
Extracta fluida . 
General remarks . 
Working formulas 
Unofficinal fluid extracts 
Oleoresinse, U. S. P. 
Working formulas for oleoresins 
Unofficinal oleoresins 

CHAPTER XII 

Syrups and Honeys . 

Syrupi, U. S. P. (syllabus) 

Working formulas for officinal syrups 

Unofficinal syrups 

Mellita .... 

Glycerita and glyceroles 

Flavoring syrups for soda water, etc. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

Conserves, Conpections, Electuaries, Pastes, Lozenges, and Can- 
dies ......... 726 

Confections ........ 727 

Pastes ......... 729 



670 
671 
671 
673 
684 
690 
691 



694 
696 
703 
709 

716 
717 
719 



XVI 



CONTENTS. 



Lozenges ..... 
Trochisci, IT. 8. P. (syllabus) . 
Working formulas for officinal lozenges 
Unofficinal lozenges 
Candy and drops 

CHAPTER XIV. 

ExTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES 

Resinse, U. 8. P. (syllabus) 
Remarks on officinal resinse 
Unofficinal concentrated remedies 



PAGE 

731 
733 
734 
738 
742 



742 
745 

745 

747 



CHAPTER XV. 

On Distillation, Distilled Products, and Perfumery 
Apparatus .... 

Galenical preparations made by distillation 
Aquae medicatse .... 
Olea destillata, U. 8. P. 
Spiritus, IT. 8. P. (syllabus) . / 
Working formulas for the officinal spirits 
On perfumery and toilet articles 
Colognes . 
Toilet Waters 
Vinegars . 
Musk perfumes 
Tooth preparations 
Sachet powders and fumigators 
Hair preparations 



759 
760 
764 
764 

765 
766 

767 
768 
769 

770 
772 
773 
774 
775 
777 



PAET VI. 

EXTEMPORANEOUS PHARMACY. 
CHAPTER I. 



On Prescriptions 

The language used in prescriptions 



779 

781 



CHAPTER II. 

The Art op Selecting and Combining Medicines 
The art of combinino; medicines 



794 
796 



CHAPTER III. 



On Powders, Pills, Suppositories, etc. 
Pulveres .... 
Pilulse .... 



798 
800 



CONTENTS. 








XVll 


PAGE 


Astringents .... ... 807 


Tonics and aromatics 










808 


Nervous stimulants and antispasmodics 










813 


Cerebral stimulants or narcotics 










814 


Rheumatic and gout pills 










815 


Excito-motor stimulants 












816 


Arterial sedatives 












816 


Emetics . 












816 


Cathartics and laxatives 












817 


Diaphoretics 












822 


Alteratives 












823 


Emmenagogues . 












823 


Trochisci . 












824 


Suppositories 












825 


CHAPTER IV. 


Liquid Preparations, Solutions, Mixtures, etc. . . 827 


Chemical and pharmaceutical incompatibles . 






830 


Extemporaneous solutions, mixtures, etc. 








834 


Astringents .... 








834 


Tonics 












836 


Arterial and nervous sedatives 












840 


Refrigerants and antacids 












843 


Antacids . 












845 


Demulcents and diu ics 












846 


Taraxacum mixtures 












847 


Expectorants 












848 


Emulsions of fixed oils . 












850 


Alteratives 












851 


Anthelmintics 












851 


Jellies 












852 



CHAPTER V. 
Styptic and Depilatory Powders, Lotions, Collyria, Injections, 



Enemas, Gargles, Baths, I 
Styptic powders . 
Lotions 


NHALA 


riONS, 


\ND Fl 


fMIGAT] 


oxs 


853 
853 
853 


Collyria . 
Injections 
Enemata . 












855 
856 
856 


Gargles . 
Baths . 












857 
858 


Inhalations, fumigations, disinft 


ctants, 


etc. 








858 



CHAPTER VI 



Cerates, Ointments, and Liniments ..... 

Cerates and ointments much used as vehicles for medicinal substances 

Those in which the medicinal substances are mixed by fusion and 

digestion ....... 

B 



861 
863 



XV111 



CONTENTS. 



Those in which the medicinal substances are incorporated by tritu 

ration with the unctuous ingredients 
Those in which the fatty ingredient is chemically changed 
Working formulas for preparing cerates and ointments 
Unofficinal cerates and ointments 
The officinal liniments . . . . . 

Unofficinal liniments . 



870 

870 

876 
881 



CHAPTER VII. 

Plasters, Plasmata, and Cataplasms 
Emplastra, XT. 8. P. (syllabus) . 
Remarks on the officinal plasters 
Working formulas from the Pharmacopoeia 
Unofficinal plasters 
Spreading of plasters 
Plasmata ..... 
Cataplasms .... 



885 
886 
886 
887 
890 
891 
896 
898 



CHAPTER VIII. 

On Dispensing and Compounding Prescriptions 
Dispensing .... 

Preparation and dispensing of pills 
Preparation of mixtures 
Management and discipline of the shop 
Rules of a pharmaceutical store 



899 
902 

911 
918 

927 



APPENDIX 



On the Management of a Sick Chamber .... 

Preparation op Dietetics for the Sick and Convalescent . 
Small Outfit for Physician ..... 

A more Complete Outfit ...... 

Recipes for some of the more Important Popular Medicines 



931 
935 
938 
939 
940 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 



FIG. 

1. Case of drawers 

2, 3. Cans, slanting top and round 

4. Camphor can . 

5. Salt-mouth bottle, mushroom stopper 

6. Salt-mouth, American blown 

7. Salt-mouth, moulded . 

8. Salt-mouth and stopper 

9. Tincture bottle, mushroom stopper 

10. Tincture bottle, ordinary blown 

11. Tincture bottle, American moulded 

12. Oil bottle 

13. Oil can with cap 

14. Syrup bottle, ball stopper 

15. Speciajar 

16. Common wide mouth packing bottle 

17. Extra wide mouth packing bottle 

18. Common packing bottle 

19. Extra packing bottle 

20. Emit jar 

21. Glass label 

22. Acid bottle, engraved label . 

23. Section of shelves 

24. Bracket for shelf 

25. 26. Show jars . 

27. "Window bracket 

28. Canopy-top jar 

29. Tie-over jar . 

30. Elat-top covered jar 

31. Gallipot 

32. Covered jar with tin case 

33. Patent safety can 

34. Section of drawers and covered shelves 

35. Front view of counter 

36. Back view of counter 

37. Eront view of prescription counter 

38. Back view of prescription counter 

39. Clamp for mortar . * 

40. Working counter and furnace 



PAGE 

18 
19 
19 
20 
20 
20 
21 
21 
21 
21 
22 
22 
22 
23 
23 
23 
23 
23 
24 
24 
25 
26 
26 
28 
28 
29 
29 
29 
29 
30 
30 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
36 
38 



(xix) 



XX 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, 



PIG. 

41. Prescription scale and case 

42. Prescription scale without standard 

43. Prescription scale, cheaper 

44. Troemner's army scale 

45. Cheap tea scales 

46. 47, 48. Sheet brass weights 

49. Aluminium weights . 

50, 51. Avery's weights . 

52. Nest of apothecaries' weights 

53. Graduated measure . 

54. Medicine-chest measure 

55. German graduated measure 

56. Minim measure 

57. Wedgewood mortar and pesth 

58. Porcelain mortar 

59. French porcelain mortar 

60. Iron mortar for contusion 

61. Spatula, tapering blade 

62. Spatula, balance handle 

63. Spatula, ordinary 

64. Graduated pill tile 

65. Pill roller 

66. Wooden pill machine 

67. Brass pill machine 

68. Porcelain funnel 

69. Improved glass funnel 

70. Evaporating dish 

71. Porcelain cup 

72. Capsule 

73. Plask . 

74. Tripod 

75. Fluted long prescription vial, flint glass 

76. Fluted long wide mouth, flint glass 

77. Plain prescription vial, flint glass 

78. Plain German flint vial 

79. Long old-fashioned green glass vial 
80 Short prescription vial, green glass 

81. Corks . 

82. Necked pill boxes 

83. Slipper pattern bed-pan 

84. Covered bed-pan 

85. Pamphlet case 

86. Ice vault and closet . 

87. Eange for store and laboratory 

88. Stove for store and laboratory 

89. Carboy siphon 

90. Series of apothecaries' weights 

91. Avoirdupois or commercial weights 

92. Burette 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, 



XXI 



PIG. 

93. Burette stand 

94. 4 ^ graduated measure 

95. Hodgson's graduated measure 

96. Minim measure 

97. Hydrostatic balance . 

98. 99. Specific gravity bottle and case 

100. Specific gravity bottle counterpoise 

101. Specific gravity bottle, plain . 

102. Loaded glass cylinder 

103. Hydrometers for liquids lighter than water 

104. Urinometer in case . 

105. Urinometer in use 

106. Saccharometer 

107. Glass spirit lamp 

108. Extemporaneous glass lamp . 

109. French hand furnace . 

110. Alcohol lamp 

111. Alcohol lamp stand . 

112. Mitchell's lamp 

113. Berzelius' lamp 

114. Lamp chimney 

115. Alcohol blast lamp and stand 

116. Crucible jacket 

117. Gas distributor 

118. Ground gas burner and hose 

119. Sections of gas burner and mercury cup 

120. Ground gas burner and cup . 

121. Curved support for gas tubes 

122. Argand burner 

123. Screen and support . 

124. Gas stove 

125. Gas stove, small 

126. Chimney and crucible support 

127. 128. Parrish's gas furnace 

129. Bunsen burner 

130. Horizontal Bunsen burner . 

131. Griffin's burner 

132. 133. McGlensey's gas burner 

134. Thermometers 

135. Diagram representing different thermometric scales 

136. Metallic water-bath . 

137. Porcelain water-bath 

138. 139, 140. Hecker's farina boiler 

141. TVater-bath for drying filters . 

142. Apparatus for hot filtration . 

143. Steam boiler and evaporating pan with steam jacket 

144. Plain retort, tubulated receiver, and adapter 

145. Ketort with quilled receiver . 

146. Distillation with plain retort . 



PAGE 

76 
77 
77 
78 
81 
83 
83 
83 
85 
89 
90 
90 
90 
93 
93 
93 
93 
93 
93 
94 
94 
95 
96 
96 
97 
97 
97 
97 



99 
100 
100 
101 
101 
102 
102 
103 
104 
105 
105 
106 
106 
106 
107 
110 
111 
112 



XX11 



LIST OF ILLUSTKATIONS, 



FIG. 

147. 

148. 
149. 
150. 
151. 

152. 
153. 
154. 
155. 
156. 
157. 
158. 
159. 
160. 
161. 
162. 
163. 
164. 
165. 
166. 
167. 
168. 
169. 
170. 
171, 
174. 
175. 
176. 
177. 
178. 
179. 
180. 
181. 
182. 
183. 
184. 
185, 
187, 
189. 
190. 
191. 
192, 
194, 
196. 
197- 
207. 
208. 
209. 
210. 



Tubulated retort 
Grummet 
Liebig's condenser 
Set of cork borers 
Kat-tail file 

Liebig's condenser, glass 
Stand for glass condenser 
Upright glass condenser (Squibb's) 
Liebig's brass condenser on retort stand 
General apparatus stand (Dr. Squibb's) 
Retort stand for use in distillations . 
Complete apparatus for distillations . 
Flask and safety tube 
Apparatus for subliming camphor in pulverulent 
Porcelain spatulas 
Platinum crucible 
Porcelain crucible 
Hessian crucible 
Reduction tubes 
Carbonic acid apparatus 
Spritz bottle and its use 
Hall's automatic washing apparatus 
Precipitating jar 
Oxygen apparatus 
172, 173. Gasogene 

Metallic chimney and crucible support 
Box for weighing mercury 
Collodion vial and brush 
Starch granules as seen under the microscope 
Benzoic acid apparatus 
Mortar and pestle for contusion 
Wedgewood mortar and pestle 
Tobacco knife . 
Hance's drug mill 
Harris' drug sieve 
Porcelain mortar 
186. Flannel strainer 
188. Apparatus for straining syrup 
Physick's jelly strainer 
Warner's oil filter 
Bag filter 
193. Siphons . 

195. Diagrams for folding filters 
Plain filter 

206. Diagrams for plaited filter 
Well formed funnel . 
Filter support . 
Filter for volatile liquids 
Hance's filtering and percolating apparatus 



form 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.. 



XXlll 



FIG. 


PAGE 


211. Use of guiding rod ...... 


570 


212. Alsop's infusion mug ...... 


577 


213. Squire's infusion pot ...... 


577 


214. Tincture press ...... 


578 


215. Clothes wringer press ..... 


579 


216. Percolator ....... 


592 


217. Percolator diaphragms ..... 


592 


218. Porcelain percolator ...... 


593 


219. Porcelain percolator diaphragms .... 


593 


220. Lamp chimney displacer and supports 


593 


221. Lamp chimney displacer with bulb .... 


593 


222. Tin displacer for volatile liquids .... 


593 


223. Dr. Squibb's displacer ..... 


594 


224. Glass syringe displacer ..... 


595 


225. Graduated bottle ...... 


596 


226. Bottle for continuous displacement and percolation 


598 


227. Smith's steam displacer ..... 


600 


228. Extemporaneous glass displacers .... 


602 


229. Large evaporating dish ..... 


649 


230. Application of radiated heat .... 


649 


231. Wiegand'g improved clasp for retort stand . 


650 


232. Steam coil for evaporations ..... 


651 


233. Percolator for ethereal tinctures with still for recovery of ether 


691 


234. Bag strainer ....... 


723 


235. Syrup kettle ....... 


723 


236. Frame for supporting strainer .... 


723 


237. Board, roller, and punch for making lozenges 


731 


238. Apparatus for making cylindrical lozenges . 


738 


239. Copper still and worm ...... 


760 


240. Tin retort with water joint . . . . . 


760 


241. Warner's condenser ...... 


761 


242. Pharmaceutical still ....... 


762 


243. Section of pharmaceutical still . 


762 


244. Pastille mould. . . 


776 


245. Tube and piston for introducing suppositories 


827 


246. Inhaler ....... 


859 


247. Ointment jar ........ 


862 


248. Plaster iron ........ 


893 


249. Plaster iron, larger ....... 


893 


250. Pattern for breast plaster ...... 


894 


251. Mammary abscess plaster ...... 


894 


252. Machine for spreading plaster cloth . 


895 


253. Paper for packages ....... 


904 


254. Paper packages ....... 


904 


255. Paper for powder ....... 


905 


256. Powder ........ 


905 


257. Envelope for powders ...... 


905 


258. Open end envelopes for powders ..... 


905 


259. German flint vial ... .... 


906 



XXIV 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, 



FIG. 

260. Tapering and straight corks . 

261. Spirit lamp 

262. Cork presser . 

263. Lochman's rotary cork press . 

264. Paste bottle and brush 

265. Bottle with drop guide 

266. Bottle for moistening pill masses 

267. Graduated pill tile 

268. Glass muller . 

269. Brass pill machine 

270. Pill roller 

271. Dusting bottle . 

272. Apparatus for silvering pills 

273. French porcelain mortar 

274. Measure for fixed oils . 

275. Strainer 

276. Proper method of holding bottle and 

277. Suppository mould 

278. Suppository mould in refrigerator 

279. Form for paper moulds 

280. Brass suppository mould 



graduated measure 



PAGE 

907 



910 
912 
912 
913 
913 
914 
914 
914 
915 
920 
920 
921 
924 
924 
924 
924 
925 



PRACTICAL PHARMACY. 



PART I. 

FURNITURE AND IMPLEMENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 

N~o directions can be given to suit all conditions and circum- 
stances for the arrangement of the pharmaceutical store. The 
most common limit to completeness in this is want of capital. 
Pharmacy is a profession in which knowledge, skill, and integrity 
constitute the leading elements of success, and most of those enter- 
ing it, and, from want of experience, consulting a work of this 
kind for advice, are limited to a few thousand dollars, which it is 
very important to economize. "What is here offered has the merit 
of being disinterested and the result of much experience and obser- 
vation, but completeness is not claimed for it. Druggists' sundry- 
men and wholesale drug houses issue illustrated and priced cata- 
logues, in which are described many articles of use and ornament 
which would unnecessarily cumber these pages ; they are freely 
accessible to all buyers. 

The chief objects of the arrangement of the store are the proper 
preservation of the goods in suitable quantities, and in positions 
readily accessible to those engaged in selling them, and the tasteful 
and attractive display of such as address themselves to the fancy 
of customers. 

The goods ordinarily contained in a pharmaceutical or dispensing 
shop in the United States, consist, 1st, of crude drugs of vegetable 
and animal origin, in which are included many articles not used in 
medicine, but appropriately associated with medicines in the stock 
of a drug store, chiefly employed in dyeing, in the arts, and in 
domestic economy ; 2d, chemicals, including some drugs, the chief 
uses of which are outside the range of medicine ; 3d, pharmaceutic 
preparations in great variety ; 4th, proprietary articles ; 5th, toilet 
articles and perfumery ; 6th, articles of diet for invalids and infants ; 
7th, apparatus for administering medicines, nursing bottles, etc. 
To these are added, in most stores, soda water on draught, and, in- 
many, a variety of so-called fancy articles not easily classified. 
2 (17) 



18 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



How to dispose of these to the best advantage in the store is the 
point now under consideration. The most obvious method is to 
take pattern by a store already furnished, but much may be gained 
by considering the requirements of the case and seeking to improve 
on the old methods. 

Stores furnished twenty years ago have numerous drawers, some- 
times a hundred or more, chiefly for the storage of the first of the 
above classes ; occasionally these were lined with tin, a useful pre- 
caution in those designed for the gum resins, oleo-resins, and the 
more perishable herbs and leaves. A modern improvement is to 
substitute for many of the drawers tin cans neatly and uniformly 
painted and labelled. Fig. 1 exhibits a case of drawers such as are 









Fig 


. 1. 










1 1 


" " 

1 




~\ 


, L 


~] 


II 














































I 


r 


J 


1 1 


1 


! 1 



Case of drawers. 

manufactured on a large scale, where lumber is cheap, with the aid 
of mortising machines, finished and faced with black walnut, at 
the establishment of John M. Maris & Co., Philadelphia. 

They are chiefly recommended by their cheapness, costing much 
less than similar drawers can be made for by a carpenter even under 
favorable circumstances. The material best suited to make these 
drawers of is well-seasoned poplar or clean white pine. It is to be 
remembered, however, that such drawers as are here described are 
not made well and smoothly enough to meet the requirements of a 
very particular pharmacist. The sizes found most convenient for 
the generality of retail stores are 5 J inches deep, 9 inches wide, 
and 10 inches long. The back and bottom of the frame or case in 
which the drawers are placed should be covered with tin or gal- 
vanized iron to prevent rats and mice from injuring the drugs placed 
in the drawers. The drawer-pulls are sometimes made of iron with 
an open frame for inserting a glass label; but most of the patterns 
are objectionable from the careless manner in which the label has 
been fitted to the frame ; the glass is also liable to be broken by 
rough usage. Paper labels are published in a variety of styles and 
patterns designed for drawers, cans, and bottles; they are very cheap, 
and serve a good purpose where cheapness is the leading motive. 

A gilt label painted directly upon the drawer, although an old 
style,"is perhaps the best. It is not always convenient to have this 
put on by an expert sign painter, and a good method is to obtain a 
plain glass sign and cement this upon the drawer-front in a way 
hereafter described for bottles. In this case, the drawer-pull may 



i 



CANS. 



19 




Cans (standing top and round). 



be dispensed with by hollowing a suitable slit on the lower edge of 
the drawer to allow of the fingers being inserted. 

Figs. 2 and 3 represent japanned tin cans, well suited to replace 
the drawers for such substances as flaxseed meal, mustard flour, 
and arrowroot, which would require a 

gallon size. Fig. 2, vanilla, saffron, laven- Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 

der-flowers, rosemary, and the like, vdiich, 
in a strictly retail store, might be placed 
in the quart size. When made of the 
pattern of Fig. 3, the lids should be large 
enough to slip easily on to the cans, which 
should be slightly tapering near the top, 
so that when the lid is evenly raised the 
weight of the can and its contents will 
cause it to drop on to the counter. 

Only those drugs which are bought in 
considerable quantities will require duplicate cans, or other vessels, 
in the store-room or cellar, and w r here a single receptacle is pro- 
vided, it should be of the size to hold the whole amount purchased 
at one time. It is very objectionable to allow paper packages of a 
variety of drugs to accumulate in a large drawer or other recepta- 
cle; beside the danger of the duplicate package being overlooked 
or forgotten, when the proper drawer or can is to be replenished, 
the contact of one package with another is often injurious to both. 

A few articles, such as carrageen, Iceland moss, and hops, un- 
pressed, are so bulky as to require especially large receptacles in the 
store ; for these a few cans of extra size should be appropriately 
located, so as not too much to break in upon the general plan. 

Fig. 4 shows a large can for camphor, having a solid diaphragm 
across the diameter about half-way from the top to the floor on 
which it stands ; a piece of glass is fitted into the 
lid by means of a small ledge soldered on to its Fig. 4. 

under surface, on this there is a gilt label. To di- 
minish its resemblance to similar cans in grocery 
stores it is japanned of a light-buif color, to match 
the cans on the shelves. 

It would extend this chapter too much' to give a 
list of drawers, cans, and bottles, and their appro- 
priate sizes. The experience obtained during ap- 
prenticeship, with an intelligent view of the popu- 
lation and general characteristics of the location 
selected, will give some idea of the shop furniture 
to be provided and the stock to be purchased. To 
some, the proper advice would be to buy very cau- 
tiously, leaving room for improvement as the business develops; 
others would require to be reminded of the importance of having 
every facility for business in advance, giving the idea of complete- 
ness the first place in the mind. 

Chemicals are almost universally kept in glass bottles, excepting 
borax, potash, saltpetre, pearlash, Glauber salts, Epsom salts, mu- 




20 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



riate of ammonia, carbonate of ammonia, and a few others sometimes 
sold in quantities of several pounds; drawers and tin cans are un- 
suited to some of these, and a few stoneware jars with suitable 
tight corks or caps should be located for their reception out of 
sight, but not too far from the dispensing counter. 

Most of the chemicals should be kept in quart salt-mouth bottles 
on the shelves ; these hold from one to three pounds of ordinary 
salts. Some of the more costly salts, such as iodide and bromide 
of potassium and chloral hydrate, are as well kept in pint salt- 
mouths; then there are a few, such as iron by hydrogen, the chlo- 
rides and iodides of mercury, the salts of bismuth, sulphates of 
quinia and cinchonia, which are appropriately kept in half-pint 
and four-ounce salt-mouths. 

The practice of keeping the ordinary small crystals and crystal- 
line powders in the original packages sent out by the manufacturers 
is not without advantages, but requires they should be kept in a 
chemical case, and this, when open to view, fails to impress with 
an idea of systematic arrangement and care. On the whole, it 
seems best to provide a regularly labelled shop-bottle for each of the 
chemicals, and to keep the original packages as duplicate bottles in 
a chemical case. Of the several kinds of salt-mouths, that shown 
in Fig. 5 is the most popular. Figs. 6 and 7 also represent approved 
kinds. The leading considerations which determine the quality of 
glassware are shape, surface, and weight. 



Fig. 5. 



Fig. 6. 



Fig. 7. 



c vT 





Salt-mouth mushroom 
stoppered. 



American blown salt- 
mouth. 




Moulded salt-mouth. 



The shape of the bottle, whether square shoulder or round 
shoulder, and whether relatively tall or short, may be partially de- 
termined by the height of the shelves, but is rather a matter of taste 
than of utility; the weight of the bottle is, however, of importance 
as determining its strength. The New England Glass Company 
make their quart salt-mouth and tincture bottles of ordinary thick- 



BOTTLES. 



21 



Fie:. 8. 



ness to weigh, about 19 ounces, including the stopper; they also 
make them extra heavy to weigh 2 pounds; the corresponding pints 
weigh 13 ounces and 19 ounces respectively; the ordinary half gal- 
lons weigh two pounds; extra heavy, 2 pounds 12 ounces. Their 
finest bottles are all carefully levelled and punted on the bottom. 
They are blown and finished without a 
mould, but the stoppers are now univer- 
sally made in a mould and are hollow, as 
shown in Fig. 8. The New England Com- 
pany's price upon the extra heavy bottles 
is from 30 to 35 cents per pound, accord- 
ing to circumstances. There are, however, 
other makers furnishing much cheaper 
wares, serving an equally good purpose. 

Bottles made in a mould have a less 
elegant surface, but are more uniform in 
shape, than blown bottles. Figs. 7 and 8 
represent such; they are mostly found of 
sizes below the quart. Since the inven- 
tion of cylindrical moulds of solid iron so 
thick as to retain the heat of the succes- 
sive charges of fused glass blown into them, the unpolished surface 
formerly produced by the sudden chilling of the glass on contact 
with the mould, has been greatly obviated, and a handsome bottle 
is the result. 




Salt-mouth and stopper. 



Fisr. 9. 



Fig. 10. 



Fig. 11. 






Tincture mushroom 
stopper. 



Ordinary blown 
tincture. 



American moulded 
tincture. 



Most of the numerous liquid pharmaceutical preparations are 
kept in bottles such as are here figured, called Tincture Bottles. 
The present prevailing style is the mushroom stopper, Fig. 9; it is 
in this respect superior to that shown in Fig. 10, that it always 
is in a correct position to the face of the bottle. The moulded 
tincture is adapted to range on the same shelf as the corresponding 



22 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



Fig. 12. 




Oil bottle. 



salt-mouth, Fig. 7, and it is often found convenient in the prescrip- 
tion case to adopt this kind, especially where an alphabetical 
arrangement is preferred. 

Fig. 12 represents a bottle which is admirably contrived to' keep 
fixed oils, for the purpose of dispensing. The lip of the bottle is 

furnished with a flange nearly at right 
angles to it, which is ground on the outer 
surface, so as to fit a cap shown separately 
in the right hand figure. Into the neck 
of the bottle is inserted a ground glass 
stopper, also shown separately in the 
drawing, which is perforated by a lipped 
tube, and has upon the side opposite the 
lip a groove for the admission of air in 
pouring out the oil. 

The object of this arrangement will be 
obvious. In drawing oil from the bottle 
it flows through the tubed stopper, run- 
ning in a thin stream from the lip, and 
any portion which runs down the outside 
collects in the gutter formed by the outer 
lip and runs back into the bottle through 
the groove in the side of the stopper. The cap keeps this oily por- 
tion from becoming dusty, and protects the contents from 'the action 
of the air. A bottle of this description may be used without 
becoming greasy on the outside. 

Fig. 13 represents a tin vessel for dispensing fixed oils; the lip 
around the neck of the can collects the waste oil, which flows back 
through a small hole into the vessel. It is covered by a tin cap, 
shown in the drawing, and is a cheap and durable substitute for 
the oil bottle, especially adapted to larger sizes and for oils retailed 

in large quantities for manufacturing 
purposes. 

Ordinary cans of tinned iron are 
objectionable for brandy and other 
liquids containing tannin, which by 
contact with the iron exposed at the 
edges are blackened and rendered in- 
elegant ; block tin is too soft to be 
durable ; it is only by preventing the 
edges of the tinned iron from contact 
with the contents, by special precau- 
tions, that this useful alloy can be 
rendered available for this class of 
liquids. 

Fig. 14 shows a furniture bottle 
designed for keeping syrups. In place 
of the ordinary tightly-fitting ground 
stopper, a loose stopper of glass is supported in the neck by a bulb 
resting on the lip, which is so flared as to cause a syrup to flow 



Fig. 13. 



Fig. 14. 




Oil can with cap. 



Syrup bottle, 
loose stopper. 



BOTTLES. 



23 



back into the bottle instead of flowing over on to the outside. 
Though not air-tight, these are sufficiently closed to keep out the 
dust, which is sufficient for ordinary dispensing purposes. 

Besides the foregoing, there are two kinds of bottles frequently 
employed, where cheapness is the chief consideration, viz. : — 



Fig. 15. 



Fig. 16. 




Specia jar. 




Common wide-mouthed packer. 



The specia jar, which consists of a wide-mouth bottle without a 
lip, the mouth of which is covered by a tin top. This is objection- 



Fig. 17, 



Fig. 18. 



Fig. 19. 





%l !JlllllllMlllllilMlllilllllllllllllli!J l^ 

Extra wide-mouthed packer. Common packing bottle. 




Extra packing bottle. 



able as not excluding the air, and it is also less neat and substantial 
than the ^alt-mouth. It is, however, less costly. 



24 



AREANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE 



Fte. 20. 




The packing bottle, which is made either with a wide mouth for 
solids, as in Figs. 16 and 17, or a narrow mouth for liquids, as in 
Figs. 18 and 19 ; these are stopped by corks, and are the least desir- 
able kind of furniture bottles, though very useful for transporting 
medicines, or for keeping extra supplies with which to replenish the 
regular furniture bottles. Packing bottles are comparatively cheap, 
and are generally made of stronger glass than salt-mouths or tinc- 
tures. They may be formed without a lip, called common (Fig. 18), 
or with a lip, called extra (Fig. 19). Those with the lip are the most 
approved, and hold somewhat more than their nominal capacity. • 

The use of colored bottles has been recommended in furnishing 
the shelves of the shop and laboratory, as tending to prevent the 
destructive influence of light on some salts of mercury and silver, 
and on certain organic substances, volatile oils, and tinctures. Of 
the various colors which have been recommended, blue was formerly 
preferred, though recent authorities maintain that blue has no 
action on the chemical rays, and advocate the adoption of red glass 
as the best adapted to prevent the injurious effect of light. Some 
photographers successfully protect the apartments in which they 
conduct their delicate manipulations by yellow glass, 
which suggests the use of this color in the manufac- 
ture of furniture bottles requiring such precautions. 
The free access of light may be prevented by a coating 
of black varnish, or by the less elegant method of 
pasting over the surface some dark-colored paper. 

Fig. 20 shows a form of air-tight bottle made for 

preserving fruits which is of strong green glass, and 

well adapted to keeping such substances as carbonate 

of ammonium and assafoetida, which are especially 

unsuited to ordinary salt-mouths. The mouth of the 

bottle is wide enough to introduce the hand into, and 

when the cap is brought into place the junction is so nearly air 

tight as to prevent the change of carbonate of ammonium into the 

soft and. pulverulent bicarbonate. 

In the case of bottles, displayed on the shelves, gilt labels are 
now very generally used. The New England Glass Company 
gild an appropriately-shaped space upon the bottle, and then put 
it into the fire so as to fuse a thin coating of glass over it, and the 
letters are afterwards put on with paint; but 
this is a very expensive process of gilding. A 
more common method is to apply the gold on 
the under surface of a curved glass label, on 
which the letters have been previously painted 
backward, then to cement this on the bottle with 
a dark-colored cement. The cement is composed 
of 3 parts of resin and 1 of wax. 
One of the advantages of this method is that the labels can be 
prepared systematically by expert letterers, then sent to the required 
place and applied to the bottles at leisure. They can also be re- 
moved at any time by the application of sufficient heat to soften 



Fruit jar. 



Fig. 21. 




Glass label. 



BOTTLES. 25 

the cement. The exposed surface of the glass is free from paint or 
gilding, and may be cleaned and polished without injury. On 
moulded bottles there is sometimes an indented label-space to hold 
a glass label of the kind described, so as to bring the surface of the 
label nearly into a line with the bottle, but to secure this is not 
practicable in making blown bottles. 

Bottles for acids are very commonly made in moulds with the 
name of the acid blown in the glass, or it is not uncommon to 
engrave the name of the acid upon the surface of blown 
glass bottles, as in Fig. 22. The new process for etching Fig. 22. 
on glass with a strong current of sand is quite appli- xr-? 

cable to this method ; the use of fluoric acid does not tj 

produce a sufficiently sharp and conspicuous label. ^ji^i^ 

The use of printed paper labels is so much less expen- 
sive than either kind heretofore mentioned, that it still 
prevails in a large class of stores, especially in the rural 
districts and suburbs of the cities. To meet the demand 
for these, and to promote the use of cprrect nomenclature, 
the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy formerly pub- 
lished several sets of Latin shop-labels for drawers and Acid bottle 
bottles, each set containing an assortment embracing 
several different sizes, according as the articles are usually kept in 
large or small quantities. These had a large sale, and it is an in- 
teresting item in the history of this pioneer institution for phar- 
maceutical education, that during a period of great monetary em- 
barrassment, the publication of Latin labels was one of its leading 
pecuniary resources. The enterprise of rival printers and litho- 
graphers has of late years put improved sets into the market, and 
the College has, for the present, ceased any further connection with 
the business, than to continue editing its own edition, published 
by Ketterlinus, of Philadelphia. 

After having pasted the label on the bottle or drawer, by means 
of mucilage of tragacanth, or other convenient paste, and stretched 
it tightly over the part, it should be smoothed by laying a piece 
of thin paper upon it, and pressing it uniformly with the thumb. 
When it has become dry, it may be sized by painting over it a 
thin coating of clear mucilage of gum Arabic. This should ex- 
tend a very little over the edges of the label. It should then be 
dried again, and varnished with spirit varnish ; this not only 
improves the appearance of the label, but renders it durable and 
impervious to moisture. 

It is customary in the arrangement of a store to place the drawers 
immediately above the washboard to the height of about 3 feet, 
and to surmount it by the shelving on which the bottles are placed. 
Where practicable the shelving should be limited in height so that 
the top row of bottles should "not exceed 6 feet 9 inches. It can 
then be reached from the floor; the cornice or finish surmounting 
the whole may be light or heavy according to taste and the 
height of the ceiling. Fig. 23, which is drawn ^ of -the full size, 
shows the arrangement of a section corresponding with a section 



26 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE, 



of drawers shown in Fig. 1. The top and shelves are here sup- 
ported by uprights of the same width as the shelves, and faced by 
an appropriate moulding ■ it will be seen by its length, which is 

Fig. 23. 




Section of shelves. 



5 feet 8 inches, that it will allow of 12 half-gallon and 32 quart 
bottles; if a row of pints were added, it would contain 64 bottles, 
but it would not come within the prescribed height, and would 
require a movable stepladder or stool to be always at hand. "Where 
the top shelf is just beyond reach from the floor, a permanent step 
is sometimes laid along the whole length, just high enough to 
escape the bottom drawer: Perhaps in a majority of instances it is 
rather impracticable to limit the height of the shelving as above 
indicated, on account of limited wall space, but another expedient 
would be to lower the height of the drawers by omitting one 
range, and thus obtain room for another shelf of bottles within 
the limit. A saving of wall space is also obtained by omitting 
the uprights and pilasters, and securing the shelves from behind. 

Fig. 24 shows an iron bracket used for 
this purpose ; these are made of various 
sizes and patterns, and, being larger in 
one direction than another, may serve by 
reversing them for sustaining a narrow or 
comparatively wide shelf. The width of 
a range of shelves is generally uniform, 
and does not exceed 7 inches, and is suffi- 
cient for the largest bottles. The omission 
of the uprights requires that the shelves 
should be upon the same level along the 




Shelf bracket. 



CASES. 27 

whole line of the wall, and thus giving continuous ranges of bottles 
of the same size and style. Where the bottles are handsome and 
handsomely labelled, this looks very well. It also favors an alpha- 
betical arrangement, beginning at A on each shelf and range of 
drawers, and running backward from the front of the store. The 
material of the shelving will be regulated partly by ideas of ex- 
pense, and in many first-class stores in the United States oiled 
black walnut is being substituted for painted pine, and certainly 
has a more substantial and rich appearance. Formerly the bottom 
row of bottles was of two-gallon size, then succeeded gallons, half 
gallons, and quarts, and in separate sections 5 or 6 narrow shelves 
of pints and half-pints, reaching from the bottom to the same 
height. These serve to* break the uniformity, and bring many im- 
portant articles, which are kept in small quantities, within con- 
venient reach ; the rarer articles on the top shelves are reached by 
a ladder. This has recently been so far changed as to omit the 
larger bottles ; a few half-gallon salt-mouths occupy the first shelf, 
and quart salt-mouths and tinctures the two shelves above ; the 
pints and half-pints are either placed in separate sections or arranged 
in a prescription case with four- and two-ounce bottles, some of 
which are duplicates of the larger bottles, and others calculated to 
contain the whole amount of stock of their respective contents. 

Cases. — Part of the wall space in a dispensing store is usually 
devoted to cases for proprietary articles, perfumery, and prepara- 
tions put up and labelled ready for sale. Sometimes these are on 
the top of the cases of drawers, under the bottles, but more fre- 
quently they break the uniformity of the continuous lines of bottles, 
sometimes affording a convenient division between salt-mouths and 
tinctures ; or they may occupy the whole of one side or end of the 
store to the exclusion of the furniture bottles. In the storage of 
this class of goods, one object is to keep them in full view of cus- 
tomers ; to this end show cases are also disposed upon the counters 
and even in the windows, and it is found by experience that goods 
so displayed, to use the commerical phrase, sell themselves. The 
professional idea of a pharmacy or dispensing store is rather adverse 
to the extensive sale of goods not directly demanded by the exigen- 
cies of sickness, but it must be admitted, that the public expecta- 
tion and demand is that the pharmacist should supply a great variety 
of articles touching only indirectly upon his ostensible pursuit, and 
it is undoubtedly true that a large number of pharmacists through- 
out the United States, owe the ability to conduct their business 
profitably to the demand upon them for proprietary articles, and 
articles of utility and ornament connected with the toilet. The 
vicinity of these to the counter and till will diminish the disturbance 
of dispensing operations in times of unusual pressure of business, 
but it should not be forgotten, as in keeping with the general ob- 
jects of the store, to bring into equal prominence such familiar and 
attractive drugs as will be recognized and appreciated by intelligent 
customers. 



28 ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 

Cut glass jars of choice gum Arabic, tragacanth, liquorice, ich- 
thyocalla, vanilla, rhubarb, and French rose may well occupy con- 
spicuous positions in the store. Figs. 25 and 26 represent forms 
of show jars which are adapted to this object. For supporting 
these and other ornamental bottles and jars in the windows and 



Fiss. 25 and 26. 



Fig. 27. 






A 




r 




\ 














^=j 




Show jars. 



Window bracket. 



other parts of the store, brackets such as are here shown, Fig. 27, 
are useful. The globes of colored liquids, which have been from 
time immemorial insignia of the craft, are generally mounted on 
such brackets. Care should be taken to have these liquids to 
contain sufficient alcohol or glycerin to prevent their freezing and 
bursting the globes, and discharging their contents perhaps over 
valuable goods. 

The drawers, salt mouth and tincture bottles, upright and flat 
cases, and fancy jars for the counters and windows will accommo- 
date such of the ordinary drugs as are sightly and desirable to be 
kept in proximity to the dispensing counter. Such apparatus as 
bedpans, urinals, syringes, nursing bottles, and nipple shields, should 
have deep drawers or closed cases allotted to them, where they can 
be kept in considerable variety, without deterioration or undue 
exposure in the general course of business. The stoneware jars 
already referred to, as adapted to heavy chemicals, may stand on 
shelves slightly elevated above the floor, under the back counter, 
in the cellar way, or in some appropriate closet readily accessible — 
rotten-stone, pumice-stone, and camphor are also suited to such a 
position. Sponges are so bulky as to require special provisions for 
their accommodation. Ornamental baskets or large jars for the front 
windows and counters are mostly used ; or the fine qualities are 
hung up upon the strings on which they came, and the coarser put 
away in a large drawer in the counter, or perhaps in a barrel in the 
cellar ; this article of commerce is among the least profitable in the 
store, but cannot be left out on that account. 

The fixed oils and fats should have a separate closet in the coup-' 
ter or elsewhere, appropriated to them ; if on the shelves even in 
oil bottles, Fig. 12, the oils will seldom be kept from soiling the 



29 



bottles and shelf. Some of them, as castor oil and sweet oil, re- 
quire to be kept in considerable quantity. Experience is against 
keeping cod-liver oil in any other way than in sealed bottles not 
exceeding one pint in capacity. The large oil cans may be kept in 
the cellar or vault, and used to replenish small ones or bottles in 
the ointment closet. A shallow tin tray of the size of the shelf is 
an advantageous arrangement; a few strips of tin edged up serve 
to prevent the soiling of the bottom of the bottle. 

Extracts require a separate closet, which may appropriately be 
in the counter, and should contain shelves for at least thirty jars 
of this very important class of preparations. Ointments and ex- 
tracts are usually kept in jars made of porcelain or queensware. 
These vary in quality, in color, and in shape. 
They should not be made of very porous ma- Fig. 28. 

terial, especially if designed for ointments, 
and should be well glazed, both on the inside 
and outside surfaces. The best are manufac- 
tured in Staffordshire, England, and at the 
royal manufactories of Prussia. 

In regard to the shape of jars: the variety 
called canopy-top (Fig. 28) is generally pre- 
ferred, as having a more finished appearance 
than the flat-top (Fig. 30). 

Jars should never be labelled on the top, as 
the tops, being of about the same size, are 
liable to be misplaced, and mistakes occasion- 
ally occur in this way. 

Ointments and extracts are also frequently 
put into queensware jars without tops, called cano P y-top jar. 

gallijiots and tie-overs (Figs. 29 and 31). These 

are cheaper than covered jars, but are inconvenient and ill adapted 
to the preservation of the substances kept in them. They are 
usually tied over with kid, bladder, or parchment. Extracts 
rapidly lose their moisture when kept in tie-overs or gallipots, and 
soon become deteriorated. 




Ointments also undergo a change under 

to S 



Fm\ 29. 



Fis. 30. 



Fis. 31. 




Tie-over jar. 



Flat-top covered jar. 



Gallipot. 



these circumstances, frequently becoming rancid. When tie-over 
jars or gallipots are used, it is well to cover the top with a piece 
of tin-foil or waxed paper previous to securing the skin over them, 
but as soon as this has been opened the contents are exposed to the 



30 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 




Eig. 32. influence of the air and to the accumulation of dust, 
and practically they are seldom tied over again. 

A device I have adopted for preserving extracts in 
the tie-over jars in which they are received from the 
manufacturers, is to inclose the jar in a tin box, just 
large enough to receive it, and having a well-fitting top 
which serves to keep out the dust and to prevent evapo- 
ration. Fig. 32 shows this ; A represents the body of the 
box, B the jar, and C the tin top or cap ; when weighing 
out a portion of the extract, the jar is removed from its 
box, and restored to it when finished. 

Volatile oils should be kept in stock in small quan- 
tities, except the few which are in large demand. Oil bottles, 
Fig. 12, of small size, are best suited for their preservation ; these 
may be made of colored glass, or, preferably, kept in a dark 
closet. When common vials are used, cans of appropriate size to 
hold the vials afford a good protection. Some careful pharmacists 
empty the original packages in w r hich the oils 
are received into small vials, carefully cleaned 
and dried ; these are filled to the neck, corked 
securely, and set away in a closet, to be opened 
only as required. 

The patent safety can here figured is very gene- 
rally used for the transportation and storage of 
oil of turpentine, benzine, and similar inflamma- 
ble liquids; it consists of a can of tinned iron 
inclosed in a wooden box, with a tubule for fill- 
ing it, and one for drawing the liquid from it. 
Such cans may appropriately replace glass ves- 
sels for the storage of the above-named class of 



Fig. 33. 




Patent safety can. 



substances. 



Counters. — In the proper construction of a pharmacist's counter 
there is much room for ingenuity ; the space which a counter may 
occupy, the uses to which it is to be put, and the necessity of stor- 
ing goods in it, or otherwise, and if so, what kind of goods, should 
all be carefully considered in planning it. In any but a small store 
there will generally be at least two counters, frequently there are 
three or even four. Nearest the entrance to the store we have in 
the United States what is seldom or never found in European 
pharmacies, the soda-water counter and draught apparatus. This 
consists of a panelled front and ends, thirty inches high, on which 
is a marble slab perforated for the passage of pipes into the draught 
apparatus. The most approved kinds of these are more or less 
elaborate marble cases containing metallic coolers, syrup cans, and 
ice ; the soda-w r ater coolers are connected with a draught pipe for 
each of the kinds of carbonic acid water, plain, Yichy, and Kissingen 
being the usual varieties, and the syrup cans, with ornamental fau- 
cets for drawing the syrups. This counter usually contains some 
shelves for glasses and extra syrups, and a large sink, with hydrant 



COUNTERS. 31 

and wash pipe for washing glasses. The soda-water is either 
bought in the fountains which are delivered as often as necessary 
into the cellar, and attached by a coupling to the pipes connected 
with the draught apparatus, or made with an appropriate gas gene- 
rator and force pump directly under the soda-water counter, in the 
cellar. The construction of this counter is so simple, and its use is 
so little within the range of pharmacy proper, that it need occupy 
no more space in this chapter. 

Passing the "soda fountain," as it is often called, we reach the 
main counter, on which articles are weighed, labelled, and wrapped, 
and over which they are sold. This counter may or may not be 
used also for compounding prescriptions and for other pharmaceu- 
tical processes, according to its length and the general arrangement 
of the store. 

A different method of arranging and furnishing the store of a 
pharmacist has long been advocated ; of late the method has so 
far been acted upon as to enable any one desirous of rendering his 
store both unique and conformable to this method to carry out this 
plan much more economically than it has heretofore been possible. 
The plan is to have the drawers and shelves made, as already de- 
scribed, in sections, each separate from the other, and placed at 
such distances apart as the space at his disposal will permit. The 
spaces on the wall between the cases of shelves can be appropriately 
used by securing ornamental brackets, whereon to support jars of 
tooth-powder, toilet articles, and such goods as are suitable for dis- 
play. 

In front of the shelving sash doors should be hung on slip hinges 
(for facility of removing them for the purpose of cleaning), glazed 
with glass of canary color or entirely opaque. Upon the inner sur- 
face of the glass ornamental lettering may be placed to relieve their 
blank appearance, and on the top of each glass the name of the 
class of preparations contained in the case might be conspicuously 
painted to serve as a directory to the assistants, and tend to impress 
the customer with the feeling that system was a ruling character- 
istic of the establishment. The location of the different cases is a 
matter of importance; the front of the store near the windows 
should be appropriated to the soda-water counter, and as there will 
be many who will call specially for soda-water, those classes of ob- 
jects which have the least immediate connection with the more 
strictly pharmaceutical portion of the business should be grouped 
in that part of the store; these will include the perfumery and 
toilet articles generally found in such stores, and next to this should 
be placed the cases devoted to proprietary articles, and those subr 
stances which are usually kept in parcels ready for sale; next to 
this should be placed the cases of shop furniture bottles, which 
contain those remedies in most constant demand for the ordinary 
calls of promiscuous trade, and then those which belong more to 
the dispensing of prescriptions and recipes for domestic practice. 
The accompanying figure illustrates the character and style of 
cases here recommended. 



32 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



Of course this is but a general outline of the plan which must 
be filled out in accordance with the judgment of the pharmacist to 



Fig. 34. 




Section of drawers and covered shelves. 



suit each particular case. The advantages belonging to this me- 
thod are facility of arrangement, classification of stock, and preser- 
vation of the contents of the bottles from the injurious effects of 
light, facility of removal in case of fire or change of business loca- 
tion, and economy in outfit when fixtures of equally good appear- 
ance are obtained in the ordinary method of building them espe- 
cially for the room they are to occupy. 

Fig. 35 shows the front of a dispensing counter. The casing along 
the front was adopted with a view to storing and displaying goods, 
the want of ample case room in the store having made additional 
accommodations of this kind desirable. It is liable to the criticism 
of the goods being too much below the line of vision to draw much 



COUNTERS. 



33 



attention to them, but this is diminished when customers are sitting 
on the chairs opposite. It is remarkable that, although this counter 
has been in use for many years, not a single light of glass has been 
broken on this front. The lights are French plate, but not of 
double thickness. 

















rf 








o 

} N 























I 






|! 














o 


1 






-■ 






< 








° 


1 
















j 














10 














o 


1 


hn 


CD 




J 


^ 


) 

} 


U. 












o 










I 
















o 


: | 








1; 






< 








Ld 


CO 




1 


















o 










1 














a 







| 1 












^ 



V-i o 

C Is 
o u 



a 
00 2 

*- o 



I 1 



a 44 
a w 

s » 

oft 

^5q 



^6 

DC ■ — 
03 £ 



C cS 

CO Q 



34 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE, 



HI 8 

c~" 55 os eo 

8 8 8 

- 8 8888 

CO s 

bb 

£ nr-i — — 

8 § § 

iff 


in 

!!■ 

! J 

8 8 
88 8 

8 S3 

§ 8 
J 8 § 

<M « 

8 8 

1- 00 



« cj oq 

13 © 3 

. h a 

<»-< 03 ~W 

° ~ ' 2 

09 — '© 



m 3 5 

-. +j 03 



ft2 



eu K 

o3 , 
SO 



© 



5 t ^ a 

w a ~ ! 

« ■? § § s 



— : — ; 

5 s cm 

£ © 



~j bo 

^.a 

o a 
ft '3 

Mfl 
C o 

'-5 ° • 

O ti M 

" .o 3 

a 



.O ~ i 



H-o 



3) 03 © — I 

> ,a bju a 

O o a d 






s^ 



o © 



0«M 



fe o 



O 



JO be"© ^ e3 § 

O (J Jl j) o o 
2 _> » 03 O m 



— j -a © ft © "^ 

_* 2 3 A ^"5 .-s 

*3 S 
a t. 
■a © 



03 



> © 



53 o> o •- 

3 ho© „ g o w 

s "£5 § g 2 5 

03 05 en 



eo 



£-5 P 



ft S 



O — i ™ c3 C"< "^ _a 



. Q} CO 

&ftS 

£ 03 

© O © 

5 a „ 

ft 03 02 

t- ^ a 

»- i S, 

§<S<5s 

CD t^ 00" 



W to 

© ** 

bJO-— 

C 09 

3 a 

e3 

a "a 
8 3 

ftg 



03 CD 



— ! 


"* 


a © a 

-£{ CO o 

M 03 o 


«* 


a 


<D O-O 


1—1 




_ 03 eg 


>> 




•** z. 


03 


a 

© 


!w V >j 


fl 


-^> © — ! 


► 


a 


mer 
ack 
ecte 


.2 




03 ,D -u 


TJ 


a ® tl 
03 -=3 ft 


o 




CJ 







SR ^ ° 

03 nj -u 

ft-g ^a 

EC O) 0) 

a © 



a g co 



.5 S5 

e.t: ° 
.St 2 

k5 O 

© si 
a — ' <° 

Ph 03 



09 -^ 0> 

, —j 03 © fn *i 

g'S © § © g ft-M 

, ^ .a s S g ?s 



^ * 2 2 • 2*S 2 



03 +j 
09 O 

o si 



'03^ g . 

°l"S ^ o _ ft . - ea 

« -e © Jg fl ^ ^ 
- ft^ 






SgagsS ft^ 



COUNTERS, 



35 



Fig. 36 exhibits the back view of the same counter, fourteen 
feet long, thirty-two and a half inches wide, and three feet high. 
The top is covered in part with marble, and back of the cases with 
oil-cloth ; a large glass show-case occupies the left-hand end, but 
not the whole width, the bottom being seven inches below the top 
level of the counter. The whole structure is movable, being in 
three parts, so accurately fitted together as not to show a seam or 
crack at the junction. It contains no sink, the washing of bottles, 
implements, etc. being accomplished in a large sink in the operating 
counter back. The prescription scales are in a case near the right 
hand end of the counter over the oak slide for folding powders, 
and near the drawers for boxes, pill tiles, etc. ; and the larger scales 
are near the middle, over the paper and label drawers. 

A small mahogany desk with writing materials, and containing 
in a drawer blank labels, slips, blanks for prescriptions, etc., is 
placed on the counter immediately adjoining the prescription scales, 
thus avoiding the carrying of every prescription and label to the 
large desk used for the accounts and the general writing purposes 
of the establishment. 

The prescription counter may appropriately be a distinct feature 
in the store, located further from the entrance, sometimes in a line 
with the dispensing counter, but more generally at right angles 
to it. Fig. 38 shows the back view of one recently constructed, 
and although with a minimum of appointments, found ample for 
a very considerable prescription business. It is drawn with a case 
of shelving upon it, which, in front, is a show-case. Fig. 37 shows 
the front view of this counter. 



Fio-. 37. 




Front of prescription counter. 



The dispensing counters have the front and ends of oiled walnut 
in panels, the drawers and shelving of the back of pine or poplar 
stained. All have white marble tops. The drawers are arranged, 



36 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



some with suitable compartments for labels, and others for pill 
machine, corks, paper, bottles, etc. ; while the open spaces afford 
the necessary room for cork-presser, mortars, pill tiles, spatulas, 
paste-pot, etc. These counters are well made, and the whole 
appears as a handsome piece of furniture. 

Fi«\ 37 shows the front, and Fig. 38 the back, of the largest size, 
7 feet long, 2 feet 3 inches wide at the floor ; top shelf 11 inches 
wide, and height over all 5 feet 6 inches. The front of the 

Fig. 38. 




Back of prescription counter. 

counter (Fig. 37) has four glass doors, with shelves 3 inches wide, 
forming a good show-case for the display of perfumery and fancy 
goods. The back has a scale case with glass door. On either side 
are shelves for the dispensing bottles— giving room for 10 pint, Zi) 
half-pint, 28 four-ounce, and 34 two-ounce. The relative distances 
of the shelves from each other can easily be varied. 

On the top of the prescription counter a frame should be screwed, 
about three-eighths of an inch thick, of hard wood, bevelled from 
below upwards, 3 or 4 inches in diameter. Two may be provided, 

of different diameters— in which to 
Fig. 39. set the mortar for trituration while 

in use. It is especially useful m 
making a pill mass, furnishing in 
either corner a firm rest for the mor- 
tar against the force exerted in tritu- 
ration ; this is shown in Fig. 39. 
Several devices may be mentioned in 
this connection, which may especially 
suit the circumstances of particular 
stores 

Near the dispensing counter should 
be placed the sink, with the requisite 

Clamp for mortar. MV " 1 




COUNTERS. 37 

supply of water, both hot and cold, if possible, and the shelves on 
which the mortars and pestles should be placed. These shelves 
should incline towards the sink, so that any water may run off 
from them into the sink. The shelf for pestles is best arranged by 
having boles bored large enough for the handles to pass through, 
but not the heads, so they will remain in their respective places. 

The best method of keeping those remedies which are of great 
activity, and consequently poisonous in overdoses, has engaged the 
attention of the most careful pharmacists, and much has been 
written both about their custody and dispensing. Some have 
adopted the plan of keeping them in a locked closet, which is per- 
haps the simplest and best method ; others add to this an arrange- 
ment by which the opening of it strikes a bell, and also attach to 
the door a spring or weight which prevents the door being shut 
until the vial is intentionally replaced, acting as a reminder of the 
class of remedies being used. 

In regard to the morphia salt, so often written for when the 
quinine salt is intended, a plan that has been pursued for years by 
some is to put only a few grains in the dispensing bottle at a time, 
so as to render it impossible that the number of grains of quinine 
ordinarily directed shall be dispensed without recourse to the dupli- 
cate bottle of morphia salt. 

The choice of the place where the poisons are kept is of con- 
siderable importance. It is best to have it so situated that the 
proprietor, or, in his absence, the person in charge, will have it in 
full view from the place he generally occupies ; it should be quite 
convenient to the prescription balance, as these articles are gene- 
rally used in small quantities, and always should be weighed with 
great exactness. A specific place should be arranged for each bottle, 
and it, with its appropriate place, should be numbered in duplicate, 
so that misplacing bottles would not be likely to occur. A list 
with the numbers of the bottles and their contents should also be 
fastened in some part of the case for convenient reference ; on this 
the maximum dose of each might well be written out in full. 

In the Prussian pharmacopoeias certain lists are published which 
prescribe the maximum doses to be dispensed, and in case of error 
the pharmacist is directed to ask the prescriber's attention before 
compounding such prescriptions. — American Journal of Pharmacy, 
1871, vol. xliii. 391. 

Where the top of the prescription counter is hardly large enough 
for all purposes, it may be extended by a lid upon hinges, which 
shuts away when out of use (shown in Fig. 36, at the right-hand 
end), and when powders are to be folded, may be raised or let down 
according to its position, and is then clean and ready. In the 
store of my friend James T. Shinn, of Philadelphia, there is such 
an arrangement, which renders available a space along-side of the 
prescription counter and over the steps leading into the cellar. If 
a slide immediately under the top of the counter is appropriated to 
folding powders, as in Fig. 36, it is apt to be drawn out and used 
incautiously for other purposes, and so becomes bruised and soiled ; 



38 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



while this is of light material and at an elevation above the level 
of the counter-top. In the same store there is a simple and satis- 
factory method of keeping cerates and ointments, in a convenient 
and accessible position, and at nearly the same temperature through- 
out the year. On the line of the steps leading into the cellar, a 
drawer is inserted horizontally, just below the floor, in which the 
ointments are arranged in flat-top jars. To reach them one has to 
descend about half way down the steps and pull out the drawer, 
when the required jar is readily removed. This, though a very 
cheap device and very economical of space, is less convenient to use 
than a dumb-waiter or elevator set into a closet, on which the oint- 
ments and very fermentable S}^rups are let down into the cellar and 
drawn up when required. 

The working counter may be located in the back part of the 
store, or where the establishment is large enough to employ sepa- 
rate hands in the manufacturing department, it may be in a separate 
laboratory or in the cellar. 

It is to be used for percolations, filtrations, evaporations, and 
small distillations, besides the making of syrups, spreading of 
plasters, and moulding of suppositories and other minor operations, 
when they are on too large a scale for the prescription counter. 

It should be immediately contiguous to the gas and water supply, 
and to the sink ; the top should be made of hard wood or oiled 
slate or soapstone, and have an inclination towards the sink. The 
top should project sufficiently to prevent liquids spilled on it from 
running into any drawer or receptacle beneath ; and to more effec- 
tually secure this object, a groove, three-eighths of an inch wide 
and one-fourth of an inch deep, should be made around the entire 
top half an inch from the edge. 

The best use to make of the room under the top of this counter 
is to fix shelves at such distances apart as will accommodate the 



Fiff. 40. 




Working counter and furnace. 



different utensils required to be used in the processes conducted at 
this part of the store; the dimensions of the counter will be limited 
to the space to be occupied ; when it is ample, and some of the 
operations, as making of syrups and fluid extracts, require heavy 



SCALES, 



39 



apparatus, the counter should be 3 feet 6 inches wide, and one part 
of it not more than 2 feet high. 

Fig. 40 shows a working counter drawn to a scale of a quarter 
of an inch to a foot. It will be seen that the space under the top 
is left open to accommodate the apparatus, measures, funnels, etc., 
required as above suggested. 

This counter should, if possible, be placed near a flue, in front of 
which a furnace is constructed with a closet at one side in the brick- 
work and communicating with the flue, so that all offensive vapors 
and gases may be carried off without annoyance to those in the 
apartment. 

Having noted the general features which should characterize the 
dispensing apartment of a pharmacist's establishment, it seems ap- 
propriate that we should now describe those implements which are 
in constant use in the daily routine of business. 

Scales. — The scales should be two in number: The Prescription 
scales, suitable for weighing one drachm and under, and the Dis- 
pensing scales, for weighing two drachms and upwards. 

There are different varieties of prescription scales; the most ap- 
proved is that with an upright pillar, into the top of which is set a 
fulcrum, containing planes of hard steel, on which rest knife edges 
of the same material, placed just above the centre of gravity of the 
beam. Such scales are usually made of brass; the beam and scale- 
dishes are, however, sometimes made of silver. They vary in price 



Ficr 41. 




Prescription scales and case. 



according to their material and workmanship, from ten to thirty dol- 
lars. To prevent injury from dust and the corrosive vapors which 
are frequently emitted from various substances in the store, an appro- 



40 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE 



priate case is necessary; but the chief sources of injury to which a 
delicate balance is liable are the jarring motion of the building, 
which, by its constant action on the knife-edges, tends to dull them ; 
the dust and vapors of the apartment ; and, most of all, the rough 
usage they receive from those who attempt to clean them. Most 
of these causes can be removed by a proper arrangement of the 
balance and its case. 

Fig. 41 (front and side view) represents the frame of the case, 
with a door which slides upward in a groove in front ; a brass plate 
is supported in grooves cut in each side of the case, reaching from 
the back of the case to three-eighths of an inch of the front; a glass 
plate is fastened in perpendicular grooves, and extends from the 
under side of the top of the case to the lower edge of the brass 
plate which rests close against it; these make a separation of the 
upper part of the case from the lower; in the centre of the brass 
plate a hole is drilled sufficiently large to permit the lifting-rod, 
which raises the beam and its fulcrum, to move steadily but freely ; 
directly under the knife-edges at each end of the beam a hole is 
drilled large enough to permit the free passage of the rods attached 
to the stirrups and hooks which rest on the knife-edges. It will be 
readily seen that dust or flies will be effectually prevented from 
coming in contact with the beam, and the only parts requiring fre- 
quent cleaning will be the stirrups and dishes which hang in the 

Fi<r. 42. 




Prescription scale without standard. 



lower part of the case. A number of small drawers are provided, 
suitable for keeping the weights, papers for prescription powders, 
small spatulas, and other utensils required about the balance. 



SCALES. 



41 



It is well to try the accuracy of the scales occasionally, as well by 
weighing exceedingly small quantities upon them when balanced 
by heavy weights, as by using two weights known to be equal and 
changing them to the opposite sides of the beam ; this will show, 
at once, if there be the least deflection in either arm of the beam. 

Owing to the comparative expensiveness of these scales, another 
kind is more generally purchased by physicians, in which the up- 
right pillar is omitted. These are imported from England, France, 
or Germany; they come in boxes of wood or tin, and have the 
advantage of being much more portable. The best are made in 
England, and have steel beams. The German variety is usually 
imported from Nuremberg, and this is very inferior, and, indeed, 
frequently worthless. The physician who administers strychnia, 
veratria, or morphia may as well judge of the quantity by the eye 
as by the use of a pair of common German scales, which frequently 
fail to indicate it within half a grain or even a grain. 

Fig. 42 exhibits the best form of prescription scale without 
upright pillar, as held when in use. The knife edges at the ends 
of the beam are of steel, inclosed; the movement at the fulcrum is 
free; and the scales are sufficiently accurate for ordinary purposes. 

A cheap form has the ends of the beam open, and the cords 
attached to the plates secured to a little 
hook, which is slipped on to the curved Fig. 43. 

ends, and readily movable ; this arrange- 
ment is shown in Fig. 43. It is not gene- n — 
rally so accurate as one with closed ends 
to the beam. 

Fig. 44 shows the new scales intro- 
duced for use in the army by Troemner, 
of Philadelphia. The upright, which is 

of brass, stands upon a box to which it is secured by a screw; the 
beam is of steel, seven inches long, and moves in a central fulcrum 



JTt 



Fia 44. 




Troemner's army scales. 



42 ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 

containing the knife edges. As it is necessary that the apparatus 
should be put away in travelling from place to place, the box is 
furnished with a drawer into which it fits compactly. The upright 
being unscrewed, the fulcrum lifted out, the beam unshipped, and 
the plates with their hanging attachments detached, the whole can 
be stowed away, with the weights, in the drawer. As the diameter 
of the plates would interfere with this, they are fitted with a hinge, 
which enables them to be bent in a line with their wire supports, 
as shown in the figure; in this position they occupy but little space. 

Both in convenience of arrangement and in economy, this scale is 
a great improvement on those heretofore supplied to physicians, 
and will, no doubt, be sold, when the Government demand abates, 
at a price placing it within the reach of all. 

Fig. 45 represents a kinds of scale for weighing ounces, which 
are selected on account of cheapness. These are manufactured of 
iron, varnished to protect them from rust, with a movable tin pan 
or scoop, and a platform arrangement of the beam. The instances 

Fig. 45. 




Cheap tea scales. 

are rare in which the country practitioner purchases any scales 
except a small pair for prescription purposes, and these have been 
introduced rather as an improvement on the frequent practice of 
guessing at quantity than as representing the best arrangement for 
accuracy. 

Large upright scales on the plan of those shown in Fig. 41 are 
perhaps most suitable to the purposes of the physician and phar- 
macist, though they are now less in use than formerly. 

The best kind of platform balance for the dispensing counter is 
Beranger's pendulum scale, which is imported from France. The 
bearings, which are complex, are protected from dust and corrosion, 
and insure great freedom of motion and consequent accuracy, com- 
bined with sufficient strength for considerable weights. 

The best location for the scales is on a level counter by itself, 
away from the jarring occasioned by the ordinary manipulations 
of the shop. It should be adjacent to the paper drawers, and should 
have room on it for both sets of weights. 



WEIGHTS. 



43 



Weights, although sometimes made in this country, are usually 
imported, of the smaller kinds, with the box scales. Those for ten 
grains and upwards are made of brass cut into squares, and marked 
with the officinal signs for denoting the different denominations of 
weight. Those for six grains and under are of sheet brass cut into 
squares, and variously marked with the number of grains, as shown 



in Figs. 



46, 47, and 48. 



Fig. 46. 



Fig. 47. 



6 




Fig. 


48. 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 






'■Q 



Weights of sheet brass. 

The inexperienced are liable to error in using these small weights, 
from the fact that they frequently have, besides the marks denoting 
the number of grains, a stamp placed on them by the manufacturer, 
which is the German sign corresponding with our gr. (grana). 
(See Fig. 47.) This is liable to be counted with the other indenta- 
tions, and to add one to the actual number of grains ; a two-grain 
weight is liable to be taken for a three-grain, a three-grain to be 
used instead of a four, and so on. Close observation, however, will 
exhibit a decided difference between the two kinds of indentations. 

The mode of marking shown in Fig. 46 is more liable to error 
than the others, especially when 

the weights become soiled and Fig. 49. 

a little corroded by use. 

The best form of weights of 
the smaller denominations for 
the use of the pharmacist is re- 
presented in Fig. 49. They are 
made of aluminium wire ; the 
shape indicates the relative 
number of grains in each weight ; the half-grain, being made of 
much thinner wire, is not liable to be mistaken for the one-grain. 

Within a few years past a description of weights from 3ij to 9ss 
has become common in our market, quite preferable to the German 
square weights of the same denomina- 
tions. These are round, or eight-sided, 
stamped out of brass plates, with very 
distinct inscriptions, as shown in Figs. 
50 and 51. They are imported from 
England, being the manufacture of 
W. and T. Avery, of Birmingham. 

Some trials made with common Ger- 
man weights convince me that few of 
those common^ met with are even 
reasonably accurate ; a 3j weight was found to weigh as high as 




Aluminium grain weights. 



Fig. 50. 



Fig. 51. 




Avery's weights. 



44 ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 

69.8 grains, and a gr. vj weight weighed 6.75 grains : others 
approximated more nearly ; a 3ss weighed 30.25 grains, a 3j 60.1 
grains, a 9ss 10.1 grains, a 3\j 120.5 grains, etc., while none of 
Avery's that were tried varied more than T ' n grain from their 
nominal weight. This inaccuracy may be partially due to care- 
lessness and partially to the fact that the apothecaries' weights of 
the different German States, though bearing the same names and 
divided like our own, have different values, as shown in the sequel. 
The larger apothecaries' weights, now superseded by the British 
Pharmacopoeia, but continued in use by that of the United States, 
are almost invariably in the shape of cups, fitting into each other ; 
the two inmost ones generally represent each two drachms, the 
next a half-ounce, the next an ounce, and so on up to sixteen ounces, 
in the larger nests. Now, as each cup represents a certain weight 
by itself, and as each is double that outside of it, excepting the 
two smallest, which are equal, the sum of any nest will be equal to 
that of any weight into which it fits; thus, the Ixvj weight will 
balance the nest within it, which consists of an eight-ounce, a four- 
ounce, a two-ounce, a one-ounce, a half-ounce, and two-quarter 
ounces, and the entire nest will weigh thirty-two ounces. 

This arrangement of weights, though very compact and conve- 
nient, and furnishing a prominent distinction between the apothe- 
caries' and ordinary commercial weights, is more expensive than 
might be desired, considering the utility to the apothecary and 
physician of having a good supply of such important implements 
of his art. 

The physician about commencing practice in the country, and 
desirous of economizing in this department of his outfit, may pro- 
cure sets of these weights ascending as high as four 
Fig. 52. ounces (Fig. 52), the nest weighing eight ounces. 
They will be found to answer his purpose in prepar- 
ing tinctures, syrups, etc., in small quantities; and 
in dispensing the vegetable medicines for infusions ; 
Nest of apothe- and in his weighing operations generally, less disad- 
caries' weights, vantage would flow from the exclusive use of apothe- 
caries' than of avoirdupois weights. The subject of 
weights and measures is more fully presented in the next chapter, 
where drawings will also be found of the other kinds of weights in 
use. 

Measures. — As liquid substances are generally dispensed by 
measure rather than by weight, and as the Pharmacopoeia directs 
the use of the officinal standard of measurement in preparations 
containing liquids, with but few exceptions, one or more graduated 
measures are necessarily embraced in the physician's outfit. A 
convenient one for dispensing operations is either a four or eight 
ounce conical measure, such as is shown in Fig. 53. These are of 
flint or of green glass, and are graduated down to one fluidrachm 
or half a drachm, which are the lowest denominations we gener- 
ally wish to measure, and they can be filled several times in sue- 




MEASURES, 



45 



Fig. 53. 



Fig. 54. 



A 


^+ 


?> 


__J~ 


z 


20 r 


*£ 


mJ- 


±~ 


?6 T 1 


l- 






z - / 




it 




Graduated measure. 



Medicine chest 
measure. 



Fig. 55. 



cession when it is desirable to 
measure a pint or a quart. 

In selecting a measure, the chief 
points to be observed are, to have 
a good lip for pouring the liquids 
from, and clear and distinct marks 
both on the fluidrachm and fluid- 
ounce columns ; the glass should 
not be very thick, as, by refract- 
ing the light, it interferes with 
accuracy in the measurement of 
small quantities. Large mea- 
sures, which are not to be used 
for quantities under an ounce, 
may be appropriately made of 
the form shown in Fig. 54. One-ounce graduates of this descrip- 
tion are sometimes made for medicine chests or saddle-bags where 
great economy of space is necessary, but they are too inaccurate for 
satisfactory use. 

Fig. 55 represents a form of graduated measure in use among 
German pharmacists, which has the advantage of great exactness 
in consequence of its narrow diameter, thus render- 
ing the vessel very desirable for measuring active 
medicines. 

The measures ordinarily offered for sale are so 
frequently inaccurately graduated that they should 
all be tested before being employed. This is 
best done by having a series of flasks of the sizes 
capable of containing, in the bulb and portion 
of the neck, which must be of small calibre, re- 
spectively one-half fluidounce, one fluidounce, four 
fluidounces, and eight fluidounces ; these flasks, 
when carefully counterpoised on a delicate balance, 
should have weighed into them respectively 227.84 
grains, 455.69 grains, 1822.77 grains, and 3645.55 
grains of distilled water at 60° Fahr. The place 
to which the liquid Alls the measure on the neck 
should be carefully marked with a file, observing 
first to add a minute drop of a solution of bichloride of mercury in 
alcohol, which secures a perfectly level surface to the liquid. For 
smaller measures we need a tube of very uniform calibre, of about 
one-quarter inch in diameter, which should be closed at one end, 
then counterpoised as before explained ; into this four and three- 
quarter grains of distilled water at 60° Fahr., the nearest approxi- 
mate weight to five minims, should be weighed, and the place 
marked with a file ; the same quantity of water should again be 
added, and the level marked. This should be repeated untif twelve 
weighings have been noted; with this the minim measures and 
the small divisions of a graduated measure may be tested. 




German graduated 
measure. 



46 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



Ffe. 56. 



Hodgson's improvement, which consists of a moulded measure of 
precisely uniform size, is spoken of in the chapter on metrology. 

Minim Measures. — For the division of a fluidrachm, the minim 
measure is employed. This is usually an upright cylinder of glass, 
with a lip at one extremity, and a glass pedestal at the other, and 
is graduated from sixty minims (one fluidrachm) to 
^ve minims. The kind used in fitting saddle-bags 
and physicians' pocket cases is made of glass tube 
with or without a foot, and does not occupy more 
space than an ordinary f3ij tube vial. The incon- 
venience of employing a measure of this kind has led 
to the use of drops in prescription, instead of minims, 
and as essential oils and spirituous liquids drop so 
differently from aqueous liquids, and as the same 
liquid drops very differently from different vessels, 
great discrepancies occur, unless the dispenser suffi- 
ciently understands and observes the distinction. 
(See tables of approximate measurement in next 
chapter.) 




Minim measure. 



Tin Measures. — Tin, but preferably tinned copper, 
measures of half pint, one pint, or two pints capacity, will be found 
very useful to the dispensing physician, and indispensable to the 
pharmacist. They may be used for water, alcohol, syrups, and 
most tinctures, whenever the full quantity they will contain is 
prescribed. 

Graduated measures of block tin, having ridges on their inner 
surfaces marking the quantities, are much used by G-erman phar- 
macists, and are well adapted to many purposes, though rarely 
kept by dealers in chemical wares in this country. 

Mortars. — Mortars are necessary in so many processes of phar- 
macy, as to be among the most important items of an outfit. I 
shall describe the kinds usually sold, with their different uses, 
leaving to the physician the choice of one or more varieties, accord- 
ing to circumstances. 

Wedgewood mortars are largely manufactured in England, and 
an inferior quality of similar ware has been made in this country. 
They differ somewhat in their texture, though designed to have 
sufficient roughness or grit to adapt them to the powdering of sub- 
stances by trituration. The best varieties are glazed enough to 
prevent their absorbing or becoming permanently stained by chemi- 
cals triturated in them, and yet are not so smooth as to allow sub- 
stances to slip about instead of being retained under the pestle. At 
least one good wedgewood mortar is necessary. It should be of the 
shape indicated in Fig. 57, slightly hollow in the middle of its base, 
so that it will stand firm during the process, and furnished with a 
good lip. The pestle should be, in shape, precisely adapted to the 
interior surface of the mortar; neither flattened nor pointed at its 



MORTARS, 



47 



lower extremity. As the larger sized pestles always consist of two 
pieces, a wooden handle, and the rounded portion which is of 
wedgewood ware, care should be taken to have the connection be- 




Wedgewood mortar and pestle. 

tween them, which is made with cement, perfectly tight. When 
they become loosened, they may be secured by a cement made of 
resin, two parts ; yellow wax, one part ; and Spanish brown, three 
parts ; melted together by heat. 

For the purpose of solution, a porcelain mortar is convenient ; such 
are frequently more shallow than the wedgewood variety. They 



Fisr. 58. 



Fis. 59. 





Porcelain mortar. 



French porcelain mortar. 



are perfectly smooth and highly glazed, and are not liable to be 
stained b}' chemical substances dissolved in them. They will also 
be found convenient in preparing such ointments and cerates as 



48 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STOR: 



Fig. 60. 



require to be introduced into a mortar, being more readily cleansed 
than wedge wood ware. The one shown in Fig. 58 has a pestle of 
the same material. Fig. 59 represents a French porcelain mortar 
well adapted to many purposes, as making emulsions ; the pestle, 
though having a handle of hard wood fitted to the porcelain part, 
requires no cement to secure them together ; wooden plugs are 
fitted into holes in the porcelain and wood, which render the con- 
nection secure. 

Glass mortars are frequently found in the office of the physician, 
and the shop of the apothecary. They are too soft for use in re- 
ducing hard substances to powder, 
but are adapted to forming solutions 
of readily soluble materials, and to 
use in making ointments. The small 
sizes are much employed in fitting up 
medicine-chests and medical saddle- 
bags. They are without doubt the 
best mortars for making solutions of 
the stronger alkaloids, and in using 
them the best plan is to place the 
mortar over a black surface, as most 
of the alkaloids are white or of light 
color, and triturate with the solvent 
until the solution has been effected. 
The smoothness which occasions 
substances to slip about under the 
pestle in manipulating with glass 
mortars, may be overcome by grind- 
ing fine emery and oil of turpentine 
in them. 

For large operations, as, for in- 
stance, in making syrup of bitter 
almonds, confection of roses, or mer- 
curial ointment, a marble mortar is 
most convenient ; a perfect block of 
hard and close-grained marble of 
requisite size is cut out into a shape 
adapted to trituration. The pestle 
is made of hard wood, or of the 
same material fastened upon a long 
wooden handle, which may be pro- 
jected into an iron ring above, se- 
cured properly over the centre of the 
mortar, so that, while the operator 
gives the requisite grinding motion 
to the lower extremity of the pestle, 
the upper is held securely in its 
place ; the use of this is, however, restricted to substances neither 
very hard nor of acid properties. 




Mortar and pestle for contusion. 



SPATULAS. 



49 



Mortars of the kinds above described are not adapted to contus- 
ing substances, either with a view to obtaining powders, or to em- 
ploying them in a bruised condition. If used for this purpose, 
they are very apt to be broken on the first trial. 

For contusion, an iron, brass, or bell-metal mortar, of the shape 
shown in Fig. 59, is best suited. Unlike mortars for trituration, 
these are somewhat flattened at the bottom, and the pestles termi- 
nate in a flattened ball ; they are tall in proportion to their diame- 
ter, as seen in the drawing. 

The laborious process of powdering drugs is greatly facilitated 
by the employment of mills ; some of the varieties of coffee and 
spice mills met with in iron or hardware stores are exceedingly 
useful in the comminution of vegetable substances for the prepara- 
tion of tinctures, infusions, etc., and even in their reduction to 
powder; one of these may well form part of an outfit. 

To the physician who prepares his own powders, one or more 
sieves will be found very useful. The most permanent and desira- 
ble kind is that made of wire-gauze, though hair and bolting-cloth 
sieves are somewhat less costly; the latter answer very well if kept 
clear of moths. A sieve with a covering at top and bottom is pre- 
ferable ; these coverings should be made of leather, secured by 
hoops rather than of wood, which is liable to warp and crack. 

Wire sieves are numbered by the manufacturers with reference 
to the number of wires in the linear inch, and the most desirable 
sizes, with reference to the preparation of tinctures and infusions, 
are Nos. 20, 40, 50, and 60. For separating powders to be taken 
in substance, the very finest sieves, as high as 2so. 80, are most 
desirable. 

Spatulas. — Of these there are several kinds. The plain steel 
spatula, or palette knife, shown in Fig. 63, is, perhaps, best adapted 
to the general purposes of dispensing. In selecting them, care 
should be taken to have one very flexible, and another quite stiff, 
while, of course, they should be of two or more sizes. The balance 
handle spatula (Fig. 62) is also useful in dispensing operations,., 



Fig. 61. 




Fig. 62. f~ =^» 



Fig. 63. I 



being generally reserved for folding powders, and for other neat 
manipulations. It -has the merit of lying on the table or counter 
without the blade coming in contact with it, a convenience when 
employed with pill masses or ointments. Three-inch spatulas may 
be made with a tapering blade, as shown in Fig. 61, so as to allow of 
4 



50 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE. 



their being introduced into rather narrow-mouthed bottles, such as 
are usually put into saddle-bags and medicine chests. 

The frequent loosening and breaking of the handles of spatulas 
have led to an improvement in their manufacture, which consists 
of riveting the pieces of which the handle is made on to a piece of 
steel which is a continuation of the blade ; these are by far the 
most durable spatulas that can be had. 

When spatulas are broken, the remainder is often converted into 
a most serviceable instrument by grinding off the broken end to 
the shape of the original end of the spatula. This is very useful 
for manipulating with very firm extracts, etc. For further re- 
marks see paper on this subject in Proceedings of Amer. Pharm. Asso- 
ciation for 1865, p. 242. 

Spatulas of glass, ivory, and bone are sometimes, though rarely, 
employed. They are useful in manipulating with corrosive sub- 
stances which would act upon steel, and the latter is especially 
adapted to manipulations with ointment of nitrate of mercury, and 
certain other ointments, though well replaced by an easily prepared 
wooden utensil. 

A pill tile (Fig. 64), made of porcelain or queensware, is useful in 
preparing certain ointments and pills. Tiles are made of various 
sizes, and are sometimes graduated, as seen in the drawing, to 
facilitate the division of masses into twelve or twenty-four pills. 



Fi<r. 64. 



Tiff. G6. 




Graduated pill tile. 

Fig. 65. 





Pill roller. 



Wooden pill machine. 



Fig. 65 shows a little implement adapted to rolling a pill mass 
on the tile or pill machine ; it is made of wood, and furnished at a 
very inconsiderable cost. 

The division of pill masses is best accomplished by the use of 
the machine shown in Figs. 66 and 67. These may be made of 



FUNNELS. 



51 



wood or of brass, and adapted to sizes of pills, and to making one 
two or more dozen pills at one time. In selecting them, care 



01 



should be taken that they have been so manufactured as to cut the 
mass with precision, whichever way the roller is applied ; most of 



Fte. 67. 




Brass pill machine. 



those heretofore manufactured have been defective in this respect. 
Those manufactured by Wurtz, of Philadelphia, are the most per- 
fect I have seen. The mode of using the machine is described in 
the chapter on Dispensing Medicines. 

A pill machine patented by Mr. Wilson claims to be an improve- 
ment, by enabling the operator to make pills of various sizes by 
elevating the guides at the sides of the machine, thus forming a 
thicker or thinner cylinder, out of which to make the pills ; the 
defect in the machine is, that, while the cylinder of mass varies, 
there is no correspondent variation in the size of the cutting plates; 
as one-fourth inch cutters require a cylinder of mass one-fifth of an 
inch in diameter, so must any change in the size of the mass be 
accompanied with a corresponding change in the cutters. 

The funnel, sometimes called tunnel, is an article of every-day 
use in the dispensing shop or office, as well as in 
the laboratory. A porcelain or weclgewood fun- Fig. 68. 

nel is represented by Fig. 68. The sides should 
be straight, and at an angle of 60° to each other. 
The tube should be smallest at its lowest ex- 
tremity, and should have one or more grooves 
upon its outer surface, to allow of the egress of 
air from a bottle, into the mouth of which it is 



fitted. Funnels which are grooved on their inner 
surface are generally preferred for filtration, as 
allowing a more ready downward passage of the 
liquid, especially when the plain filter is em- 
ployed. They may be made of glass, porcelain, 
Berlin or queensware, vulcanized rubber, and tin; 
those of glass are generally furnished physicians 
in their outfits; but the porcelain variety is far less liable to break- 
age, and is equally cleanly. 




The porcelain funnel. 



52 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE 



Fig. 09. 




Improved gla 
funnel. 



A very simple but useful improvement in glass funnels has been 
made of late years by grinding the smaller end of the neck off to an 
angle, as represented in Fig. 69. The liquid follows 
the neck to the lowest point, and does not have the 
tendency to flow back and close the space between 
the bottle neck and the tube of the funnel. For fil- 
tering volatile liquids the upper edge of the funnel 
should be ground to a level surface by rubbing on a 
flat stone with some fine emery ; this renders a piece 
of plate glass a tight cover when placed properly 
over it. 

Gutta-percha or vulcanized rubber has the advantage of light- 
ness and durability, and, not being affected by acids, leaves nothing 
to desire for the manufacture of a permanent funnel. 

The displacement apparatus recommended in the previous editions 
of this work as almost indispensable to the pharmacist and physi- 
cian, may be well replaced by a funnel in almost every small 
operation. For details of the mode of preparing displacement 
tubes extemporaneously and managing the process, see the chapter 
on Displacement or Percolation. 

One or more evaporating dishes of Berlin or fine porcelaiu ware, 
and a porcelain cup (Fig. 71), will be found convenient in the pre- 




Fig. 71. 




Evaporating dish. 



Porcelain cup. 



Fi£. 72. 



Capsule. 



paration of many of the galenical and most of the chemical prepa- 
rations appropriate to the office or shop. These dishes are of 
different prices according to quality, and range from the two 
gallon to the one fluidounce size. 

The flask (Fig. 73) is a cheap and convenient implement for 
small operations requiring heat, and especially for forming solutions 

of saline ingredients. 



Fig. 73. 



Fig. 74. 



The tripod (Fig. 74), or a retort stand, 
sold by dealers in apparatus, should not 
be forgotten, as being necessary to the 
convenient use of the foregoing. 

Vials. — The physician's outfit usually 
contains from half a gross to a gross of 
prescription vials, varying in size from 
f Sviij to fsss. As more of the smaller 
sizes are used than of the others, it is 
desirable to have about the following proportions in a gross : One 
doz. f^viij, one doz. fgvj, two doz. faiv, three doz. f^ij, three doz. 




Flask. 



Tripod. 



VIALS. 



53 



f^j, two doz. f^ss, though usually a larger number of the two 
smaller sizes are introduced at the expense of the three largest 
sizes. Several of the larger sizes should have wide mouths, for 
convenience in bottling solid substances, and also to adapt to the 
displacement apparatus. 

A few vials of half drachm, one drachm, and two drachms capa- 
city are very desirable for articles dispensed in these small quanti- 
ties. Vials in commerce are classified as flint, German flint, and 
green glass; as fluted and plain; and as long and short. Flint 
vials are considerably more expensive than the green; though they 
are far more elegant for prescription purposes. They are generally 
made in a mould. Of the fluted vials, the long (Fig. 75) are the 
most convenient for ordinary purposes; they admit of a larger 
label being pasted on them, which is sometimes desirable in case 
of prescriptions, and they are more convenient for medicines that 
are to be administered by drops. 

Fig. 76 represents a short fluted vial of the same size, and having 
a wide mouth, adapting it to solid substances. Fig. 77 is a flint 



Kir. 75. 



.* 



Fluted long prescription vial, 
of flint glass. 



Fig. TG. 




Wide-mouthed flint 
fluted vial. 



Fig. 77. 



A 



Plain prescription vial, 
of flint glass. 



vial, now very much in vogue, intermediate between the two pre- 
ceding in height, and without the fluted surface; these are apt to 
show a crease down their whole length, at the point where the two 
halves of the mould in which they are made come together in 
shutting it, a common feature in all bottles made in moulds which 
open and shut by what may be called a lateral suture. Figs. 78, 
79, and 80 represent vials blown without a mould, or in an open 
clay mould, and finished by hand. These have a handsomer and 
smoother surface, though less regular and uniform in shape, as here 
the shape depends on the skill of the finisher, not on the construc- 
tion of his tools. German flint vials are intermediate in price 
between those of flint and common green glass. They are very well 
adapted to ordinary dispensing purposes, and, as made by our best 
manufacturers, leave little to desire. 

The shape of the lip is one of the most important considerations 
in the selection of vials ; if the lip is too narrow or rounded, a con- 
stant source of annoyance will occur from the liquid trickling down 
the neck and sides of the vial after ponring from it, and it will be 
impossible to drop from it at all. Figs. 79 and 80 represent the 
old-fashioned cheap green glass blown vials ; the vial shown in 



54 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE, 



Fig. 79 has the disadvantage of not standing up, and is usually 
suspended by a string. Those who have the Proceedings of the 
American Pharmaceutical Association at hand (vols. xvii. 355 ; xx. 
90) will find several papers upon glassware, which will give infor- 
mation upon this whole subject. 



Fisr. 78. 



A 



Fig. 79. 

A 



U 



Plain German flint vial. 



Old-fashioned long 
green vial. 



Fig. 80. 



A 



Short prescription vial, 
green glass. 



Fi<r. 81. 



A few colored vials may be advantageously introduced into an 
outfit for use in dispensing solutions of nitrate of silver, or other 
solutions decomposable by light. Some pharmacists adopt the 
plan of dispensing poisonous preparations and liquids, designed for 
external use, in vials of peculiar shapes or colors, for the sake of 
distinction. The disadvantages of any attempt to substitute pre- 
cautions of this kind, for that constant vigilance in regard to medi- 
cines which is the only safeguard of the public, must have occurred 
to every person of experience. 

Corks. — These are exceedingly variable in quality ; the softest 
and most perfectly shaped varieties, though expensive, are so far 
preferable for use as to make them cheaper in the 
end. Tapering or "homoeopathic" corks possess 
the advantage of being fitted to vials of various 
sized necks with great facility, and if sufficiently 
" velvety," will bear thrusting tightly and securely 
into their place. These remarks are equally true 
of the larger sizes, called bottle corks ; of these we 
have pint corks, quart corks, demijohn corks, and 
flat or j)ot corks, the last being used chiefly for wide- 
mouth packing bottles and earthen jars. There is 
a variety called "citrate corks," introduced since the invention of 
citrate of magnesia solution, very uniform in size and quality, and 
an improvement on the ordinary pint corks. It is well to be sup- 
plied with a few of these, though vial corks constitute by far the 
largest proportion of the number required. 

Among the numerous gum-elastic implements which have come 
into use within a few years are suitably shaped stoppers, adapted 
to bottles of various sizes. These are not liable to the same objec- 
tions which apply to corks; they are not acted upon by the strong 
acids or alkalies nor by iodine. They are, however, comparatively 




Tapering and 
straight corks. 



PILL BOXES. 55 

expensive, and their surface is not so well adapted to the purpose 
as the soft, velvety surface of cork. 

Paper- of different kinds should not he overlooked in making up 
an outfit. The most useful is druggist's white wrapping-paper, 
which should be fine without being heavy or spongy in its texture; 
it should not crack at the edges when turned over sharply ; this 
paper is that sold to printers ordinarily ; it should be well calendered, 
so that the various materials will not adhere to it. The sizes met 
with in commerce are medium, about 19 x 24 inches, and double 
medium, 24 x 38 inches. The price of this paper is generally in 
proportion to its weight. It varies in the Philadelphia market 
from 12J to 20 cents per pound, varying with the quality and 
with the relation of supply and demand. For directions in regard 
to dividing the sheets, for dispensing medicines in packages, see 
chapter on Dispensing. 

The kind of paper called flat cap will be found very convenient 
in addition to the above, especially for putting up powders in small 
doses. 

Filtering paper should be without color, and of a porous texture, 
and yet sufficiently firm to sustain the weight of the liquid placed 
upon it. The market is now freely supplied with a superior article 
in circular sheets, called French filters. Swedish filtering paper is 
the very best, and is preferred for analytical processes; it is, how- 
ever, too expensive for common use in the shop. 

Envelope paper, though not white, and hence seldom used for 
ordinary dispensing purposes, is extremely useful as an outer wrap- 
per to packages requiring additional security. 

Fancy paper, employed for capping corks, or as a very nice outer 
wrapping to packages, is recommended to those who desire to prac- 
tise neatness and elegance in dispensing. Tin-foil is also required 
for covering jars of ointment, deliquescent powders, etc. 

Pill Boxes. — These are of three kinds: 1st. Paper pill boxes, 
adapted to dispensing pills. 2d. Wooden pill boxes, or chip boxes, 
made of shavings, and best suited for ointments, confections, etc.; 
of this article, a very beautiful style is imported from England, 
which commands nearly double the price of the American kind. 
The most perfect chip box yet produced is that made by rolling a 
thin shaving of wood around a steel mandrel, and coating the sur- 
face of the shaving with glue; when this has set, a second shaving 
is glued upon the first, the grain being reversed; after drying, the 
bottom and top, both of double thicknesses of shaving glued to- 
gether, are glued into their places; this box is impervious to grease 
and varnish, and will resist much hard handling. 3d. Turned 
boxes, which have been recently introduced for dispensing pills, and 
are certainly more substantial than either paper or chip boxes. 
They do not, however, serve so good a purpose for ointments; the 
bottom, being cut across the grain of the wood, soon becomes satu- 
rated with the grease, and soils everything it is set upon. AY hen 



56 



ARRANGEMENT OF DISPENSING STORE 




Fig. 82. these boxes are used for ointments, they should 

be lined with a good coating of glue, put on hot. 
Pill boxes are usually sold by the dozen nests, 
wrapped in paper. Sometimes a nest contains 
three, and sometimes four boxes, ranging from 
Neck pili boxes. about an ounce capacity to one-fourth that size. 
A new pattern of paper pill box, recently intro- 
duced in the best pharmaceutical establishments, is here figured. 
It is made with a shoulder; the top and bottom overlap the edges, so 
that they cannot be forced in by ordinary pressure. The diameter 
being large in proportion to the depth, they are conveniently car- 
ried in the waistcoat pocket. 

The physician should provide himself with a tin case, in the 
shape of a closed cylinder, in which to carry his gum catheters and 
bougies, and another for adhesive plaster cloth, which otherwise is 
liable to become useless in our climate. 

In severe illness, and especially after confinement, patients are 
frequently so situated as to be unable to be moved without great 

Fig. 83. 





Slipper bed-pan. 



Covered bed-pan. 



Fig. 85. 



inconvenience and danger, and a variety of urinals and bed-pans 
have been contrived. " The slipper" made of tin, upon the plan of 
Dr. Jos. Warrington, is adapted to the use of females, and is cer- 
tainly an improvement upon any contrivance for the purpose. It 
is of precisely the shape best adapted to slip in between the thighs 
and under the lower extremity of the back, without pain, and to 
receive the evacuations, whether alvine or urinal, without the 
danger of soiling the sheets. 

The bed-pan of planished tin, Fig. 84, is a wedge- 
shaped receptacle neatly covered by a movable lid, 
while the tubule is effectually closed by a brass 
screw, facilitating the complete closure of the ap- 
paratus till its removal from the apartment. 

Among the useful additions to the physician's 
and pharmacist's outfit is the pamphlet case here 
figured. It consists of a tin case of the size 
of a large octave volume, adapted to receiving 
and preserving the journals and other unbound 
publications, which will accumulate on the hands 
of any one who is properly alive to the current 




CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY. 57 

literature of his profession. By having several of these, one can be 
appropriated to each of the periodical issues, and one reserved for 
the occasional pamphlets, price currents, etc. At the end of the 
year, their contents may be sent to the binder, or tied in packages 
and laid away. 

In the selection of implements and utensils of all kinds, it should 
ever be remembered that those of the most durable materials and 
thorough workmanship are the most economical, giving satisfaction 
while in use, and often being valuable as old material w T hen no 
longer fit for the purposes for which they were obtained. 

The other items to be mentioned are a few pieces of fine Turkey 
sponge for surgical use, and one for the inhalation of ether, if a 
friend to anaesthesia in surgery and obstetrics ; a corkscrew", a ball 
of fine linen twine, a pair of scissors, a few coarse towels for wiping 
mortars, a tin cup for heating liquids, a sheepskin for spreading 
plasters, etc. 

The apparatus and furniture here described are such as may be 
regarded as necessary to the outfit of a country practitioner. I 
shall find occasion, in the subsequent parts of this work, to refer to 
many implements which it would be superfluous to describe in this 
place, though frequently included in the outfit. 



CHAPTER II. 

CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY. 

The cellar is an important part of the drug store, and yet some 
pharmacists, from their location, are debarred from any but very 
small underground accommodations. 

If large, dry, and light, the cellar will supplement the ground 
floor for important storage and laboratory uses. Besides the fuel, 
the ash-pit, the soda-water fountain, and ice-chest, it may contain 
the screw press, drug mill, mortar for contusion, packing material, 
boxes, shelving, drawers, and working counter. 

In some of the city stores, where the value of real estate prevents 
much extension of the ground floor, the cellar is made use of as 
a laboratory, being, extended under the pavement as well as under 
the store. In some wholesale establishments a steam-boiler, steam- 
engine, stills, evaporating pans with stirrers, also blue-mass mill, 
plaster machine, or any similar apparatus required by the nature of 
the business, are located in the cellar. The disadvantages of this 
arrangement are, the strong odor of the evaporating liquids per- 
vading the store, the jarring motion from the proximity of the 
machinery when in use, and the increased danger of an accidental 
fire in the basement, involving the destruction of the whole build- 
ing and its valuable contents. 



58 CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY. 

For the purposes of a retail business carried on in a building 
also occupied as a dwelling, a suitable portion of the cellar should 
be separated by a brick partition from that used by the family, and 
if practicable vaults should be dug, one for the coal bins and the 
other for the storage of highly inflammable liquids; this should 
communicate with the cellar by a passage, and a direct and easy 
ascent should be provided to the street and to the store. 

Upon the shelves, which should be situated in the coolest part of 
the cellar, and lighted by gas at night and if necessary during the 
day, should be arranged gallon, half-gallon, quart, and pint pack- 
ing bottles, to hold the full quantities of the respective waters, 
tinctures, spirits, syrups, fluid extracts, and similar preparations 
which the demands of the business require to be made or bought at 
one time, so as to replenish the furniture bottles in the store. It 
will be impossible, in organizing a new store, to make exactly the 
quantities required, and in the developments of the business these 
will probably be modified, if not uniformly increased. In the ab- 
sence of experience, the best rule to follow as to quantities is pro- 
bably that of the United States Pharmacopoeia, which generally 
directs about the quantity of each preparation appropriate to a 
retail store. Doubtless many beginners have found their first out- 
fit to last much longer than they expected, but, on the other hand, 
it is very promotive of business to have enough in stock to supply 
any unexpected demand, and to be able, without delay, to replenish 
the furniture bottle at any time that it may be emptied. There 
is no better place to keep this class of goods than a cellar of a low 
and nearly uniform temperature the year round, out of the reach 
of a strong sunlight, though not so dark as to render the reading 
difficult. 

The drawers and other receptacles in the cellar are adapted to 
the extra stock of sponges, corks, vials, bottles, jars, and similar 
articles for which there is not space in the store. Here baskets of 
sweet oil, boxes of Saratoga and other mineral waters, and barrels 
of whiting, rotten-stone, and the like, may also be kept — care being 
taken not to encumber any unoccupied corner with materials out 
of sight, and consequently likely to be forgotten. 

The cellar need not be plastered, and the joists will then afford 
support to narrow shelves, nailed on to their lower edge, which 
may be labelled on the under side so as to be easily read from 
below. These shelves will be appropriate depositories for such 
vials of volatile oils, syrup of iodide of iron, jars of pomade, and 
duplicate small packages as it is desirable to keep out of the 
light and heat of the store. The cellar may advantageously con- 
tain a heater, such as is now so extensively introduced into base- 
ments ; and if the demands of the store and upper rooms are moderate, 
one placed in a central position in the cellar, though designed to 
supply warm air to the store and upper rooms, will diffuse sufficient 
warmth around it to take off the dampness, which constitutes the 
greatest objection to an under-ground place of storage. 

In cellars and vaults the labels of the bottles and other permanent 



CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY. 



59 



receptacles of surplus stock should be written with black varnish, 
as they are not if thus marked liable to become obscure by fading 
as when lettered with ink; and the moulding of the paper, in the 
absence of a better material, can be prevented by washing it with 
a solution of corrosive sublimate. 

As a general rule, packages of chemicals which are in the least 
deliquescent, or of vegetable substances, whole or powdered, unless 
in tight glass or metal, are unsuited to storage in the cellar; but by 
weather-boarding the walls, or lining them with studding and lath 
apd plaster, flooring with boards laid upon joist, and ventilating 
suitabl}', and warming with stove or furnace, a dry, very satisfac- 
tory, and comfortable store-room and laboratory may be obtained 
under the store. 

If there is a vault, it should have shelving for bottles or demi- 
johns of ether, Hoffmann's anodyne, benzine, gasoline, and, if the 
cellar is warm, for the fruit juices and the more easily fermentable 
syrups, and for the summer supply of lard and certain ointments 
which require to be kept cold. The alcohol barrel and any carboys 
of acid or ammonia may have stands under the shelving, or in an- 
other part of the vault. As it is not desirable to introduce artificial 
light into the vault, bull's-eye glasses or the patent vault lights 
may be advantageously placed in the crown of the vault to light it 
during the day, and a similar glass may be cemented into a hole 
pierced in the wall, which will supply artificial light from the 
cellar at other times. 

An ice vault or chest is almost indispensable to a pharmaceutical 
store in the climate of the United States. If carbonic acid water 
is sold on draught, the ice supply is of sufficient importance to 
claim special arrangements for its preservation, and, in connection 
with this, means of refrigeration for fermentable liquids and bottled 
mineral waters should be provided. A vault communicating with 
the cellar and with an opening 
from the street may contain an 
ice closet such as is shown in 
Fig. 86 ; it is provided with a 
shoot and an opening from the 
street for the delivery of the ice 
into a box with a heavy wood- 
en slat floor perforated, or on a 
slant, so that the melted ice will 
flow off as soon as produced. 
Under this a metal or slate-lined 
box may be placed to receive 
any articles not injured by 
moisture which require to be brought to a temperature nearly 
approaching the melting point of ice. Adjoining the ice-box is a 
closet in which syrups, cream to be used in connection with the 
soda-water syrups, lard, and any preparations which require to be 
kept uniformly cold, may be set away upon shelves. Slate is a good 
material for lining such a closet and for constructing the shelves. 



Fis. 86. 




Ice vault and closet. 



60 CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY. 

There should be small openings between the ice-box and the closet 
to promote the circulation of air. There may also be a pipe con- 
necting with a flue so as to draw in a current of air from the ice 
through the refrigerator; but this will increase the melting of the 
ice, which is generally to be guarded against. Large refrigerating 
vaults are sometimes constructed on this principle, in contact with 
ice-houses, a few bricks being left out near the bottom of the par- 
tition between them ; but it is not practicable to keep large quan- 
tities of ice under the pavement in the city from season to season. 
A large bulk, not less than sixteen feet square and nearly the same 
depth, is considered the least quantity that will keep well. 

The Pharmaceutical Laboratory, erected for the manufacture of 
the varied products of our art in large quantities, to meet an ex- 
tensive wholesale demand, should be in the suburbs or manufactur- 
ing quarter of a large city, or in some readily accessible rural 
district ; while a retail or dispensing store requires a location either 
on a business thoroughfare where it can attract transient custom, 
or in the midst of the dwellings of the people ; and yet in some 
instances these two are so far combined that a laboratory of con- 
siderable size is directly attached to the dispensing store. 

This work is not written for the very few whose aim is to devote 
themselves to manufacturing pharmacy, or to one or other of the 
numerous specialties into which it is divided, so much as for the 
many whose chief business is to retail medicines over the counter, 
and to prepare for their own sales the numerous officinal and un- 
officinal preparations prescribed by physicians and demanded by 
the public. 

A comprehensive treatise on manufacturing pharmacy, giving 
the best forms of apparatus for large operations, and the details of 
the numerous processes, with reference to economy and perfect suc- 
cess, is a desideratum ; but it would pay neither the author nor the 
publisher for the great labor and expense it would involve, because 
it would not meet an extensive demand. 

The reader will be more profited by suggestions as to the arrange- 
ment of an apartment for producing pharmaceutical preparations 
in such quantities as are demanded by a dispensing store. The 
location of this store will be regulated by circumstances. The cellar 
has been already referred to as readily accessible from the store, 
and on that account desirable; but a location on the ground floor 
is in all respects to be preferred, and the top story is the next in 
eligibility ; here all noxious gases and the disagreeable vapors given 
off in evaporation are readily dissipated without annoyance, and 
in case of accident from fire, the destruction of the building is not 
so imminent. 

In the event of locating a laboratory up stairs, it should have a 
hatchway and tackle for the conveyance of heavy packages; and 
if steam is to be used as the means of heating, the boiler should be 
located in the cellar or on the ground floor, and should communi- 
cate with the laboratory by a steam pipe, which, with the water 
supply, waste pipe, and drip from the evaporating pans, should run 



CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY, 



61 



inside the walls or up and down a warm air flue, so as to avoid 
the danger of freezing in winter. The floor should he covered 
by tile or slate set in cement, and should slope in the direction of 
the corner in which the waste pipe takes its origin; here a sink 
may be let into the floor to collect the drippings. The laboratory 
may contain a kitchen range set in the chimney, with a water- 
back, which, in the absence of a steam boiler in the cellar, will 
give a limited supply of hot water for use wherever needed. To 
the store itself such a range is a useful addition, provided there 
is room to locate it out of sight of customers and in connection 
with a good flue. Fig. 87 shows a good range for pharmaceutical 



Fig. 87. 



^s^^s^^^^ 



Fiir. 88. 





Range for store and laboratory. 



Stove for similar uses. 



purposes. It furnishes accommodation for two vessels the con- 
tents of which can be kept boiling rapidly, while four others can 
be heated to different temperatures ; the ovens at either side will 
enable the operator to desiccate articles at the same time. In the 
absence of a kitchen range, a cooking stove will serve a good pur- 
pose, and may be arranged as shown in Fig. 88. The top will 
accommodate four vessefs at one time, and in the oven a number 
of articles may be gradually dried ; a sand-bath can be readily 
attached to this by causing the smoke and products of combustion 
to traverse a flat iron pipe before reaching the chimney; upon the 
upper side of this pipe a flange is turned up an inch or two all 
around, in which space the sand is to be placed. 

Although it is undesirable that the laboratory should be used for 
general storage, yet most of the substances to be employed in mak- 
ing the various preparations should be near at hand. If practica- 
ble, a store-room should adjoin the laboratory and communicate 
with it by a door, otherwise the wall on at least one side should be 
lined with shelves of sufficient width and at such distances apart 
as to admit of 2 gall., 1 gall., and J gall, bottles, demijohns, tin 
cans, and stoneware jars, containing the leading articles demanded 
in the course of the manufacturing processes. The products will 
mostly be stored in the cellar when completed, and the alcohol 
supply, where received in barrels, may be emptied into cans and 
apportioned between the cellar and laboratory. The alcohol dis- 
tillates collected in the process of concentration of extracts and 
fluid extracts, suited only to the same use again, will each need a 



62 



CELLAR, STORE-ROOM, AND LABORATORY- 



separate can or bottle. If the cheap mineral acids, ammonia, or 
glycerine are purchased in carboys, they may be placed under the 
shelving on a platform elevated about fifteen inches from the floor. 
A barrel of sugar will be needed, and should have an appropriate 
place allotted to it. Besides a counter like that already figured on 
page 38 (which may be greatly extended), there should be one for 
weighing, on which the laboratory scales should be kept. Pro- 
cesses in which fluids are used should be separated from those re- 
quiring perfect dryness; in fact, the folding of Seidlitz powders, 
the putting up of toilet powders and dentifrices, and similar opera- 
tions, which are largely pursued in some stores, are unsuited to the 
laboratory. 

Heavy percolators should stand on separate frames, and be sup- 
ported by iron bolts fastened firmly to the sides and resting in 
holes in the frames, just high enough to allow of conveniently 

packing them, with room to draw off" the 
percolate below. This permits their being 
inverted when the percolation is complete. 
A large box, suitable for convenient remo- 
val, should be always at hand for the re- 
ception of debris, which will rapidly accu- 
mulate; into this the ashes and sweepings 
may be thrown ; and a separate barrel for 
broken glass will bring a small revenue. 

Fig. 89 shows a carboy and siphon 
arrangement invented by Chas. Bullock, 
of Philadelphia, for drawing off acids, 
ammonia, and other liquids. 

This arrangement consists of a cap of 
stout sheet caoutchouc with two apertures, which are prolonged 
into small tubes, one of a size sufficient to permit the siphon tube to 
pass. The other, through which a small tube passes a few inches 
into the neck of the carboy, is smaller. The cap is fastened air- 
tight around both the tubes, and covers the outside of the neck of 
the carboy, around which it also is fastened airtight. Upon blow- 
ing steadily into the small tube, a pressure is exerted on the surface 
of the liquid, and it finds exit through the siphon, which continues 
in action until stopped by some appropriate cause. 




Carboy siphon. 



PART II. 



CHAPTER I. 

ON PHARMACOPOEIAS. 

Ever since medicine has been cultivated as a liberal profession, 
the necessity has been increasingly recognized of definite and 
authoritative standards to regulate the strength and purity of 
medicines; hence the adoption of Pharmacopoeias. In most Euro- 
pean countries the Pharmacopoeias have the authority of law, being 
edited by learned men appointed to the service by the respective 
governments. In the United States, where the State and national 
governments interfere but little with professional pursuits further 
than to grant acts of incorporation to organizations representing the 
several professions, the Pharmacopoeia originates with the medical 
and pharmaceutical colleges. Although each country possessing a 
Pharmacopoeia properly gives preference to its own, the mixed 
character of the floating population in all countries requires some 
acquaintance on the part of well-educated pharmacists with the 
officinal standards of other countries. A Universal Pharmacopoeia 
is a compendium of all the Pharmacopoeias for comparison and refer- 
ence to formulas and synonyms. The last issued is that of Jourdan, 
published in Paris, 1828. In it are formulas from more than thirty 
Pharmacopoeias, nearly all of which are national, a few only being 
limited to military or hospital purposes. Some of these have since 
been consolidated, as the London, Edinburgh, and Dublin into the 
British. The more important of those existing, omitting these 
three, are given in the following list, with their dates: — 

List of Pharmacopoeias. 

The Pharmacopoeias denoted by the asterisk * have been superseded by the German. 

Pharmacopoeia Austriaca Vienna. 

1792. Pharmacopoeia Amstelodamensis Nova .... Amsterdam. 

1850. Pharmacopoeia Batava Amsterdam. 

1859. Pharmacopoeia Bavarica Munich.* 

1856. Pharmacopoeia Belgica La Have. 

1868. Pharmacopoeia Danica Copenhagen. 

1777. Bispensatorium Pharmaceuticum Brunsvicence . Brunswick.* 

Pharmacopoeia Hispana Madrid. 

1866. Codex Medicamentarius sive Pharmacopoeia Gal- 

lica Paris. 

(63) 



64 ON PHARMACOPEIAS. 

1825. Pharmacopoeia Ferrarese Padua. 

1850. Pharmacopoeia Fermica Abo. 

1791. Pharmacopoeia Fuldense Frankfort sur le Main* 

1780. Pharmacopoeia Genevensis (Swiss) Geneve. 

1804. Pharmacopoeia Pauperum in usum Instituti Cli- 

nica Hambergensis. (Not in use.) Hambourg. 

1831. Pharmacopoeia Hannoverana Hanover.* 

1827. Dispensatorium Electorale Hessiacum .... Marbourg* 
1794. Dispensatorium Lippiacum genio Moderno Ac- 

commodatum Lenigo.* 

1801. Pharmacopoeia Oldenbergica Oldenbourg.* 

1826. Pharmacopoeia Lusitanica Lisbonne. 

1764. Dispensatorium Medico Pharmaceuticum Palati- 

natus Manheim.* 

1817. Pharmacopoeia Regni Polonise Varsovie * 

1822. Pharmacopoeia Castrensis Borussica Kcenigsburg.* 

1862. Pharmacopoeia Borussica Berlin.* 

Pharmacopoeia Rossica St. Petersburg. 

1837. Pharmacopoeia Saxonica Dresden.* 

1773. Pharmacopoeia Sardoa Turin. 

Pharmacopoeia Suecica Stockholm. 

1847. Pharmacopoeia Wurtembergica Stuttgard.* 

1796. Pharmacopoeia Herbipolitana Wurzbourg* 

1815. Pharmacopoeia in usum Noiscomii Militaris Wurz- 

burgensis Wurzbourg. 

1870. Pharmacopoeia Norwegica Christiania. 

1872. Pharmacopoeia Helvetica 

1872. Pharmacopoeia Germanica Berlin. 

The mere enumeration of the different Pharmacopoeias will show 
the great necessity there exists for one which shall have a quasi 
legal authority in a country the population of which is so mixed 
as that of the United States, and it also demonstrates the impos- 
sibility of having all the formulas of the various Pharmacopoeias 
consolidated into one for ourselves. The Pharmacopoeia is not 
to be looked to as a guide to novelties in Pharmacy, but as an 
authoritative rule by which to prepare those remedies which time 
and experience of the medical and pharmaceutical professions have 
determined to be of such utility as to deserve a place in the national 
code of medical formula?. 

The origin and manner in which our own Pharmacopoeia was 
brought into notice are now so well known that any history is 
unnecessary; it is only proper to say that the national convention, 
which authorizes its issue, provides for a stated (decennial) revision 
of it, thus enabling the professions interested to have a definite 
time to report their varied experience with the formulas already 
authorized, and to prepare new ones when they feel that such are 
required, either by the failure of the old ones or the omission of 
such as had not been sufficiently proven to be useful. 

The Pharmacopceial Convention of 1860 contained delegates from 
Medical and Pharmaceutical organizations in seven States and the 
District of Columbia, and from the army and navy of the United 
States. Its sessions were held in "Washington, and the Committee 
of Revision of Publication, which contained a majority of prac- 
tical pharmacists, met as heretofore in Philadelphia. The fourth 



ON PHARMACOPOEIAS. 65 

decennial revision was not completed till the summer of 1863, when 
the Pharmacopoeia was published ; the last revision of this Text 
Book, in part a commentary upon it, was immediately matured and 
put to press. Allusion has been made to the U. S. Dispensatory as 
having contributed largely to the establishment of the authority of 
our national standard, while it has promoted the diffusion of medi- 
cal and pharmaceutical knowledge. It remains to define the com- 
parative utility of the Pharmacopoeia and Dispensatory, especially 
as so many students confound the two works with each other. 
Every physician who practises pharmacy, as most country practi- 
tioners do, and every druggist and apothecary, should possess a 
copy of each of these works ; the Pharmacopoeia for use as a guide- 
book in making officinal preparations, and the Dispensatory for 
reference as an encyclopedia of materia medica, therapeutics, and 
pharmacy. 

The conciseness and brevity of the Pharmacopoeia, the clear and 
conspicuous type, and the absence of Unnecessary detail adapt it 
especially to the purpose of indicating the ingredients, the pro- 
portions, and the mode of putting up the officinal preparations. 
Liability to mistakes is greatly lessened by the clearness and accu- 
racy of a recipe, which should always be open before the operator, 
and should be continually consulted in the course of his manipu- 
lations. 

It will be in place to explain, in this connection, the use of the 
term Officinal in this work. While by some this word is meant to 
apply to all permanent preparations, by others it has an application 
to those only which are spoken of in the Dispensatory or in foreign 
Pharmacopoeias. In this work the use of the term is restricted to 
drugs and preparations mentioned in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and 
I have distinguished these throughout the work from such as are 
omitted from that standard ; this is the only limit of the term 
officinal which renders it definite and precise, and with this mean- 
ing it certainly is most useful in a work like the present. 

The Pharmacopoeias of London, Edinburgh, and Dublin, which 
were formerly much used in this country, and constituted the 
standards for the British empire, have been superseded by one con- 
solidated British Pharmacopoeia, and it was the design in the third 
edition of this work to introduce all the formulas of that, together 
with our own ; the long delay in the revision, consequent on the 
disagreement on the vexed question of weights and measures, has 
prevented this, and somewhat limited the sphere of the last edition. 
Many of the formulas of this Pharmacopoeia and its various direc- 
tions are embodied in this edition, and where change has been made 
it will be noted. 

Some idea of the plan of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and especially 
of the principles of nomenclature adopted in it, may be drawn from 
the following selections from the preface of the edition of 1850 : — 

" The contents of the work are arranged in the two divisions of 
Materia Medica and Preparations ; the former enumerating and 
denning medicines as they are derived from nature, or furnished by 
5 



66 ON PHARMACOPOEIAS. 

the manufacturer, the latter containing formulae, or rules, by which 
they are prepared for use. 

" Both in the Materia Medica and the Preparations, the alpha- 
betical arrangement has been adopted. In a work intended not 
for regular perusal but for occasional reference, it has the great 
merit of convenience. It has, moreover, the advantage that, making 
no claim to scientific classification, it is not liable to the charge 
of failure, so often and so justly urged against more ambitious 
systems. 

" The Pharmacopoeia was originally published both in the Latin 
and English languages. This was, at the time, an innovation upon 
general usage ; as codes of this kind had been almost always issued 
by the dignified bodies from which they emanated exclusively in 
the Latin, which was considered as the language of science. In 
the revision of 1840, the Latin was dropped ; as it did not offer 
advantages equivalent to the trouble of adapting a dead language 
to facts and processes for which it had no terms, and to the double 
cost of the work which it occasioned. The Latin names, however, 
of the medicines and preparations have been retained, and they 
are still generally, and often very conveniently, used in prescriptions ; 
and it is desirable that medicines should have designations by 
which they may be recognized in all civilized countries. 

"The system of nomenclature of the Pharmacopoeia of the United 
States is one of its chief merits. Adopted at a period when it was 
without example in other works of the kind, and improved with 
each successive revision, it now prevails to a considerable extent in 
all the Pharmaceutical codes recognized where our vernacular tongue 
is spoken. Its aim is to be simple, expressive, distinctive, and con- 
venient. In relation to medicines of vegetable origin, it adopts 
for those which have been long and well known, the names by which 
they have at all times been recognized, and which have withstood,, 
and will no doubt continue to withstand, all the mutations of science. 
In this category are such titles as Ammoniacum, Camphora, Galla, 
Opium, Senna, etc. For medicines of more recent origin, which 
had received no distinctive officinal designation, it takes either the 
generic or specific title of the plant or animal from which the medi- 
cine is derived. Thus, we have the generic names Anthemis from 
Anthemis nobilis, Ghimaphila from Chimaphila umbellata, JEupato- 
rium from Eupatorium perforatum, Gillenia from Gillenia trifoliata, 
Lobelia from Lobelia "mflata, etc. ; and the specific names, Senega 
from Polygala senega, Serpentaria from Aristolochia serpentaria. 
Taraxacum from Leontodon taraxacum (now Taraxacum dens- 
leonis), etc. A very large proportion of the names have been 
formed in this way ; and as the generic or specific title of the plant 
had its origin, in many instances, in the vernacular name, the origi- 
nal designation is thus fixed and perpetuated. 

" When it happens that two different medicines are obtained from 
different species of the same genus, it becomes necessary to adopt 
either for both, the whole botanical title of the plants, or for one 
of them the generic or specific name, and for the other the whole 



i 



ON PHAKMACOPCEIAS. 67 

name. Thus we have Cassia Fistula and Cassia Marilandica, 
Quercus alba and Quercus tinctoria, as titles both for the plants and 
their medicinal products ; and, in the case of the different species 
of Gentiana, the generic name Gentiana for the product of G. lutea, 
and the whole name, Gentiana Catesbcei, for that of the species de- 
signated in scientific arrangements. When different parts of the 
same plant are recognized as distinct medicines, they are designated 
by attaching to the generic or specific title the name of the part 
employed. Thus are formed the names Colchici Radix and Colchici 
Semen from Colchicum autumnale, and Stramonii Folia, Stramonii 
Radix, and Stramonii Semen from Datura Stramonium. When 
these names become established in pharmacy, it does not follow 
that they are to be changed with the changing scientific titles. 
On the contrary, it is generally best to retain them, unless, by 
doing so, injurious confusion may be occasioned. Thus we have 
Prunus Virginiana as the name of wild-cherry bark, though the 
tree from which it is derived is now usually designated by botanists 
as Cerasus serotina. It will be noticed that the Latin names are 
generally used in the singular number, even though the idea of 
plurality may be essentially connected with the medicine. Thus, 
Cantharis, Caryophyllus, Ficus, Galla, Limon, etc. are used instead 
of the plural of these terms respectively ; and, in reference to the 
names derived from the part of the plant employed, the same plan 
is mostly followed, as in the case of Stramonii Semen, Colchici 
Semen, etc. In this the example of the Roman medical writers, 
particularly of Celsus, has been followed. 

" In the use of English names, it is not deemed necessary that 
they should be literal translations of the Latin terms ; but that title 
is preferred which custom and the genius of the language seem to 
sanction. Thus, the English name corresponding to Linum is not 
flax, but Flaxseed ; and, on the same principle, Fozniculum is called 
Fennel-seed ; Ulmus, Slippery Elm Bark; Glycyrrhiza, Liquorice 
Root, etc. Nor are the English names always in the same number 
as the Latin. We may correctly say, Caryophyllus, Galla, Prunum, 
and Rosa; but the genius of our language requires that we should 
translate these terms Cloves, Galls, Prunes, and Roses. 

"The plan of nomenclature in relation to medicines of mineral 
origin is to give the proper scientific name, when convenience or 
some higher principle does not call for a deviation from that rule. 
Hence, the names of most mineral medicines are in strict accord- 
ance with existing scientific usage. But, in some instances, short 
and old established names are preferred to the scientific, especially 
when these happen to be somewhat unwieldy. Thus, Alumen, 
Calamina, and Creta have been preferred to the chemical names 
Alumince et Potassce Sulphas, Zinci, Carbonas Impurus, and Calcis 
Carbonas Mollis. In other instances the chemical designation is 
more or less unsettled, or the composition of the substance has not 
been decisively determined. In such cases, either an old name is 
retained, as Acidum Muriaticum instead of either Acidum Bydro- 
chloricum or Acidum Chlorohydricum ; or some name is preferred 



68 ON PHARMACOPOEIAS. 

generally expressive of the composition without aiming at chemical 
accuracy, as Calx Chlorinata, taken from the London Pharmacopoeia, 
and Ferrum Ammoniatum. 

"In other cases, it is considered safest to designate very active 
medicines, which, if their strict chemical titles were used, might be 
dangerously confounded, by names which, though upon the chemical 
basis, have some epithet attached expressive of their distinctive 
character, as mild chloride of mercury and corrosive chloride of 
mercury, instead of protochloride of mercury and bichloride of mercury. 
Sometimes, for convenience sake, when no risk of confusion can 
possibly arise, names are adopted sufficiently expressive of the nature 
of the substance, though not precisely so ; as sulphate of iron instead 
of sulphate of protoxide of iron, hydrated oxide of iron instead of 
hyclrated sesquioxide of iron, etc. If any part of the nomenclature 
of mineral bodies should seem at first sight somewhat incongruous, 
it will be found to have been adopted in accordance with some one 
of the principles here stated, or in some other way to have the ad- 
vantage of convenience or utility. Not a single name has been 
given or retained without careful consideration." 

The nomenclature of the last edition of our Pharmacopoeia has 
been changed somewhat, to render it more consistent with itself 
and more in accordance with the progress of chemical teachings. 
Formerly it was the usage of the Pharmacopoeia to allude to sul- 
phate of protoxide of iron as ferri sulphas, while the corresponding 
salt of sodium or potassium was termed sulphate of soda or sulphate 
of potassa, a distinction perfectly recognized by chemists a few years 
ago, but now the term used is sulphate of potassium or sodium ; this 
method has the advantage of uniformity, and does not attempt to 
define the mode of combination at all, and so may be considered 
more permanent than a method which attempted to decide what dif- 
ferent and equally good authorities considered unsettled questions. 

" When the officinal names of particular medicines may be sup- 
posed not to have yet become universally known, and the old names 
are still extensively used, the latter are given as synonymes in a 
subordinate type and position ; and those officinal titles which have 
been superseded by others adopted at the present revision, are 
inserted beneath, with a reference to the Pharmacopoeia of 1860 
[in the last edition]. 

" To one familiar with the British Pharmacopoeias, it will be 
obvious that, in the preparation of our own, many of the processes 
have been taken from them with little alteration. This has been 
done advisedly." 

It is of the highest importance that medicines having the same 
name should have the same composition; and as British works on 
medicine are much used in this country, it would lead to never- 
ending confusion if the substances they refer to by name should 
differ materially from those known by similar names with us. It 
has, therefore, been a general aim to bring our pharmacy into as 
near a correspondence as possible with that of Great Britain; but 
in all cases in which a greater purity or efficiency in the medicine, 



WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. 69 

or greater convenience and economy in the process, or any peculi- 
arity in the relation of the preparation to our own circumstances 
and wants, called for deviation from the British standards, modified 
or wholly original processes have been adopted. 

In the United States the Pharmacopoeias used in addition to our 
own are the British, Prussian, and French. The last two are used 
principally in the shops of German ajiothekes, to which the nume- 
rous German citizens naturally resort, and in the French pharma- 
cies, of which there is usually one or more in each large city. 

At the date of the present revision of this work, the last edition 
of the British Pharmacopoeia bears date 1867, of the Prussian 
(Pharmacopoeia Borussica), 1862, of the French (the Codex), 1872, 
the latter being now under revision. The United States Pharma- 
copoeia has just been issued for the sixth time. The convention 
which met in Washington in May, 1870, appointed a committee 
of revision, which, having met at intervals for nearly two years, 
and subjected the work of their predecessors and of the several 
colleges, which prepared preliminary reports, to a thorough revis- 
ion, have issued the result in a volume of 383 pages, which is of 
authority for the next decade. 

In the original and subsequent revisions of the present work, 
the object of supplying to physicians and pharmacists a more fre- 
quent and less restricted view of the progress of pharmacy, in 
connection with a practical treatise upon the science and art of 
pharmacy, has been attempted; in the present edition most of the 
working formulas of the Pharmacopoeia of 1870 are introduced, to- 
gether with a large number of unofficinal and extemporaneous 
formulas and prescriptions. 



CHAPTER II. 

ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

Metrology embraces the science of determining the bulk or ex- 
tension of substances, called measurement, their gravitating force, 
called weight, and the relation of these to each other, called spe- 
cific gravity. 

In the present essay it is not designed to enter into the subject 
further than is necessary to the student of medicine and pharmacy. 

"Weights and Measures. — So difficult has it been found to 
modify or materially alter the systems of measurement and weight 
handed down from the earliest antiquity, and tenacioushy adhered 
to by the mass of the people, and so inadequate have been the 
efforts of the British crown and Parliament to supply proper and 
invariable standards, that the present Troy and Avoirdupois 



70 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

weights are believed to be even less perfect and consistent with 
each other than the very ancient standards from which they were 
derived. The inconveniences attendant on the use of separate sets 
of weights and measures for different kinds of commodities have 
probably always been felt, and are only partially remedied by 
adapting these to one common unit to which all can be reduced. 
This adaptation, in the case of our different standards, is through 
the grain or unit of weight; the systems of Troy, Apothecaries' 
and Avoirdupois weights, and of Wine measure, are all readily 
compared through this common standard — the grain. 

Troy Weight is used by jewellers, and at the mints, in the ex- 
change of the precious metals. Its denominations are the pound, 
ounce, pennyweight (= 24 grs.), and grain. 

Apothecaries' Weight is used by apothecaries and physicians in 
mixing and prescribing medicines, and is officinal in the United 
States Pharmacopoeia. The denominations of the apothecaries' 
weight are pounds, ounces, drachms or drams, scruples, and grains. 
Its pound, ounce, and grain correspond with the Troy weight. 

Avoirdiqms Weight is used in general commerce, and by apothe- 
caries in their strictly commercial transactions, as in buying and 
selling medicines without the prescription of a physician, and also 
in compounding recipes for domestic purposes and for use in the 
arts. As at present used, it has pounds, ounces, and fractions of 
the ounce. Its higher denominations need not be named. 

Decimal Weight, or Metrical System. — By the use of a decimal 
system in measuring, which corresponds with the system of nota- 
tion universally in use, the calculations for reducing one denomi- 
nation of the old systems into another are avoided, the decimal 
mark being all that it is necessary to adjust. So great is this merit 
that men of science the world over now generally adopt it, and al- 
though neither of the pharmacopoeias in use in the United States 
uses it in their formulas, many regard its incorporation into phar- 
macy as only a question of time. It is quite necessary to the un- 
derstanding of modern chemical works to be acquainted with this 
system. 

The unit of length in the metric system is the metre, equal to 
39.37 English inches ; this is an arbitrary length, a standard metre 
having been prepared by authority of the French government, and 
preserved in Paris, from which all copies are made for use. 

After earnest discussion in the Committee of final revision and 
publication, appointed by the decennial Pharmacopoeial Convention 
of 1870, the use of apothecaries' ounce has been continued in the 
United States Pharmacopoeia, and this vexed question is set at rest 
among us for another decade. This abandonment of the pound 
and the use of the new officinal word troyounce remove the un- 
certainty formerly pertaining to the weights directed in the offi- 
cinal formulas, though the distinction between the officinal and 



i 



WEIGHTS. 71 

commercial weights needs to be kept in view in many pharmaceu- 
tical processes. 

In the General Council of Medical Education and Registration, 
to which the Consolidated British Pharmacopoeia was submitted for 
adoption, the modification of the previously existing weights, in- 
volving a change in the value of the grain, which had been adopted 
by the Pharmacopoeia Committee, was considered, and received a 
most decided negative. The Council resolved, "That the weights 
used in the British Pharmacopoeia be the imperial or avoirdupois 
pound, ounce, and grain; and that the terms 'drachm' and 'scruple,' 
as designating specific weight, be discontinued." 

The British Pharmacopoeia has furnished much material for the 
present edition of this work, and numerous formulas are inserted 
in which the avoirdupois or commercial weight is directed, and 
when this is intended care will be taken to indicate it in the text. 

A knowledge of these standards and their relations to each other 
— always a most important preliminary item in the study of Phar- 
macy — is now rendered indispensable by the fact that the two 
Pharmacopoeias used in this country and in Great Britain agree 
only in the unit of each system, the grain. 

In the following tables I have endeavored to display, in the 
simplest and most comprehensive manner, the value of each de- 
nomination in the respective weights, and the relation of these to 
each other: — 

Table of the U. S. P. Apothecaries' Weight. 

20 grains = 9j (one scruple) = gr. xx. 

60 grains = 3j (one drachm) = 9iij (3 scruples). 

480 grains = 3J (one troyounce) = 3viij (8 drachms). 

5760 grains = Ifoj (one pound) = £xij (12 troy ounces). 

Table of Avoirdupois Weights. 

437.5 grains = 1 oz. (one ounce). 

7000 grains = lfib (one pound, Com.) = 16 oz. 

The use of signs is here seen to be of importance, as designating, 
when correctly used, to which system of weights the particular de- 
nomination refers; thus, i§j means 480 grains; while one oz. means 
437.5 grains. The sign for designating the pound is not so distinc- 
tive; Ibj is applied equally to the apothecaries' pound, 5760 grains, 
and to the avoirdupois pound, 7000 grains. 

Comparison of the Apothecaries' and Avoirdupois Weights. 

The comparative value of the different parallel denominations may 
be thus expressed: — 

. The apothecaries' ounce (troyounce) contains 42J- grains more than 
the commercial. The pound (ixij) contains 1240 grains less than 
the commercial. 



72 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

The apothecaries' pound contains §xij ; the avoirdupois pound 
16 oz. 

480 grains, (Sj) X 12 = 5760 grains, ftj, U. S. P. 
437.5 u (1 oz.) x 16 = 7000 " 1 fi), Commercial. 

To the pharmacist who manipulates with large quantities of 
drugs, the use of apothecaries' weights is very inconvenient, and a 
convenient rule for converting one system into the other is a de- 
sideratum. The following is the simplest rule for the purpose with 
which I am acquainted, and gives the exact result. 

To convert a given weight troy into avoirdupois, reduce it to 
ounces, add one-tenth, divide by sixteen, and deduct one and a 
quarter grain for every ounce in the original question; the answer 
will be in avoirdupois pounds, thus: — 

124 + 12.4 = 136.4 -XL 6 — 155 grs. = 8 lb. 8 oz. 20 grs. 

To convert avoirdupois weight to troy, reduce to ounces, and 
multiply the number of ounces by .912, and from the result deduct 
4.16 grains for every pound in the original question; this gives the 
answer in troyounces : — 

24 ozs. av. x .912—6.24 = Sxxi. 3vii. 



United States Coins. 

A convenient standard by which to test weights used in phar- 
macy is furnished by the legal coins issued from the mint of the 
United States. Those of gold are to be preferred, and when new 
will rarely be found to vary more than one-tenth of a grain from 
the following weights: — 

grs. 



Double Eagle, 


$20 00, weighs 516 grs. 


Quarter Eagle, $2 50, weighs 64.5 


Eagle, 


10 00, " 258 " 


Three Dollar, 3 00, " 77.4 


Half Eagle, 


5 00, " 129 " 


One Dollar, 1 00, " 25.8 



Weights. — The balance, or scale, is of course indispensable to the 
idea of metrology, and the possession of masses of previously as- 
certained gravitating force, called weights, is equally necessary. 
Scales are of various styles, although, for use in pharmacy, the 
kinds figured in a former chapter among the necessary implements 

Fig. 90. 




Series of apothecaries' or cup weights. 



for furnishing the physician's office, answer every purpose. In this 
place, it will be proper to call attention especially to the usual 
forms of iveights of the different systems. The apothecaries' weights 
are invariably, for all denominations, made of brass or copper. The 



WEIGHTS. 



73 



Fig. 91. 




Commercial or avoir- 
dupois weights. 



larger weights come in the cup form, as shown in Fig. 90. Each 
cup is equal to the sum of all those which fit in it, or is twice the 
sum of the next smaller. These weights are expensive, and, un- 
fortunately, too little used by physicians, and even by some apothe- 
caries. The small weights which accompany the 
box scales, and figured in a former chapter, are 
used for all denominations up to two drachms, 
and then the common commercial or avoirdupois 
weights, which are cheaper than the brass cup 
weights, are frequently brought into use. 

These are usually in piles of iron, brass, or zinc, 
of the form shown in the annexed figure, each 
weight being half that of the one below it. In a 
large number of processes, officinal in the U. S. 
Pharmacopoeia, one ounce or two ounces are 
ordered, and in these cases, if the avoirdupois weight is used, a 
9'ij or 3j and 3 SS weight must be added from the small set. In 
the case of a pound being ordered, as there shown, 13 ounces from 
the pile, and a 3j from the small set, will nearly approximate the 
required weight. 

The Decimal System,. — The attention of pharmacists and of 
commercial men has recently been directed to the subject of re- 
forming the systems of weight and measurement in use in this 
country and in England, and the most prominent change now pro- 
posed is the entire substitution of the French decimal system for 
all those now in use. This system is now used in most analytical 
laboratories in this country, and throughout Europe, and although 
its adoption for the purposes of trade is, as yet, considered rather 
chimerical, yet it is worthy of careful study, and as it is so useful 
to all who pursue chemistry and pharmacy, the following table is 
inserted. 

Comparative Table of Decimal with Avoirdupois and Apothecaries 9 

Weights. 



Namks. 






Equivalent in 


Equivalent in 


Equivalent in 


Equivalent in 




Grammes. 


Grains. 


Avo'uup's Weight. 
lb. oz. gr. 


Apothe's Weight. 








lb. oz. dr. gr. 


Milligramme . . 


.001 


.0154 






Centigramme 






.01 


.1543 






Decigramme 






.1 


1.5434 




1.5 


Gramme . . 






1 


15.4340 




15.4 


Decagramme 






10 


154.3402 


0i 45 


2 34.0 


Hectogramme 






100 


1543.4023 


3i 12.152 


3 1 43.0 


*Kilogramme 






1000 


15434.0234 


2 3| 12.173 


2 8 1 14 


Myriagramme 






10000 


154340.2344 


22 Of 12 


26 9 4 20 



The starting point of this system, the metre, was supposed to be 
the one ten-millionth part of ,the quadrature of the earth's circum- 



* Abbreviated Kilo. 



74 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY, 



ference around the poles, and this was selected as being a natural 
and invariable standard from which to take a measure; the highest 
authorities have, however, shown this assumption of accuracy to 
be fallacious, and consequently not more worthy of regard than 
any other standard that might have been selected. The metre has 
been subdivided into decimetres, centimetres, and millimetres. A 
cubic decimetre is called a litre, and this is the unit of measures 
of capacity. It contains rather more than a quart. In order to 
obtain a unit of weight, a cubic centimetre of distilled water is 
weighed at the temperature of 4° Centigrade (39.2° F.), and is 
called a gramme. It is equal to 15.434 grains. The gramme is 
divided, as is shown in the table below, into tenths, hundredths, 
and thousandths, and multiplied in the same ratio, with names 
corresponding to the weights contained in the table. 

The apothecaries' weight of other civilized countries is sub- 
divided similarly to our own, though the value of the different 
denominations varies considerably, as will be seen from the an- 
nexed table. 

In Portugal, Spain, and Italy, all the subdivisions of the pound 
correspond to ours, except the scruple, which contains 24 grains, 
thus making the pound 6912 grains, one-fifth more in number 
than the troy grains contained in a troy pound. The medicinal 
weight of France is the gramme, and for an account of the weight 
about to become the standard in the German Zollverein, we refer 
to a notice in the Amer. Journ. of Pharm., 1859, p. 207. The Nu- 
remberg weight is the legal standard in Denmark, Norway, Sweden, 
Russia, and in nearly all the German States, with the exception 
of Austria, Prussia, Saxony, and Bavaria ; but its value varies in 
the different countries between 357.845 and 357.567 grammes, and 
is still less in Sweden. In the following table the pound is com- 
pared with grammes, and the different medicinal grains with the 
troy grain : — 

lib 



German Zollverein = 500. gram. 


1 korr 


I = 


0.259 


IYoy grs 


. = .0166 gram. 


Austria = 720.009 " 


1 grain = 


1.127 


" 


= .0729 


" 


Holland, Belgium, ) ^. ^^ u 

Switzerland J 


u 


= 


1.005 


u 


== .0651 


" 


England and TJ. S. = 373.246 " 


" 


= 


1. 


" 


= .0648 


it 


Bavaria, Greece = 360. " 


" 


= 


.965 


" 


= .0625 


n 


Eussia, Norway, ] 














Frankfort-on-the V = 357.845 " 


" 


= 


.959 


n 


= .0625 


a 


Main J 














Denmark, Holstein, j 














Hessia, Wurtem- > = 357.664 " 
berg J 
Hamburg == 357.629 " 


it 


= 


.959 


a 


= .0621 


a 


« 


= 


.959 


ti 


= .0621 


a 


Baden, Hanover, ) OKf - ^- ,, 
Oldenburg '}=35,'.o6< 


« 


= 


.959 


" 


= .0621 


" 


Berne == 356.578 " 


" 


= 


.955 


a 


= .0679 


a 


Sweden =356.227 " 


" 


= 


.954 


" 


= .0618 


" 


Prussia, Saxony, = 350.783 " 


" 


= 


.940 


a 


= .0609 


" 


Kome = 339.161 " 


" 


ESS 


.785 


it 


= .0491 


(< 


Spain = 345.072 " 


" 


= 


.770 


" 


= .0499 


a 


Portugal == 344.190 " 


" 


= 


.769 


a 


= .0498 


" 



I 



MEASURES. 75 

Measures of capacity are used for liquids, and, in the higher de- 
nominations, for corn and the cereal grains ; but the only table of 
these we need at present is that employed in medicine, called Wine 
Measure. The unit of this system is called a minim, and is equal 
to about .95 of a grain of pure water at 60° F. 

Table of the Wine Measure. U. S. P. 

60 minims are one fluidrachm. 

8 fluidrachms are one iluidounce. 
16 fluidounces are one pint. 

2 pints are one quart. 

4 quarts are one gallon. 

Or thus : — 

Minims. Grains of water. 

60 = f3j (one fluidrachm) = K . ] x = 56.9 

480 = f aj (one fluidounce) = f*3viij = 455.7 

7,680 = Oj (one pint) = f^xvj = 7,291.2 

61,440 = Cong, j (one gallon) = Oviij = 58,328.8 

Besides the discrepancy occasioned by the minim not being 
equal to one grain of the natural liquid standard, it will be per- 
ceived at once that a wide variation exists in the denominations 
above an ounce. The iluidounce contains 480 minims, as the 
apothecaries' ounce contains that number of grains ; but in the 
pint are 16 fluidounces, while the corresponding pound contains 
only 12 ounces. From these causes, the adjustment of proportions 
of solids to liquids, when accuracy is required, is a matter of no 
little calculation. 

In England this system of measures has been revived of latter 
years, so as to bring about a close relation between the solid com- 
mercial ounce and the fluidounce. In the Imperial measure, the 
minim is equal to .91 of a grain, and it is multiplied as follows : — 

Imperial Measure. Ph. Br. 

Minims. Grains of Water. 

60 = f3j (one fluidrachm) = m. Ix = 54.6 

480 = fgj (one fluidounce) = f3viij = 437.5 

9,600 = Oj (one pint) = fgxx = 8,750* 

76,800 = Cong, j (one gallon) =- Oviij = 70,000 

The Imperial pint is, within an inconsiderable fraction, exactly 
one-iifth larger than the wine pint. 

A wine pint = 28.875 cubic inches, or 7291.11 grains. 
Add one-fifth, = 5,775 " " or 1458.22 " 



34.650 " " 8749.333 " 

An Imperial pint = 34.659 " " 8750 

The same relation holds good in the case of the gallon. 

* Equal to 1 lb. 4 oz. avoirdupois weight. 



76 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



Fig. 92. 



Metrical Measure of Capacity. — It may be appropriate to this 
place to describe the measure of capacity adopted in France, which 
is frequently referred to in scientific works, and has of late years 
been introduced in analytical chemistry, for the purpose of avoiding 
the weighing of precipitates, and to facilitate analyses in general. 
The cube of one decimetre, which equals 3.937 English inches, is 
called a litre, and measures 2.1185 pints. The weight of one cubic 
decimetre of water at 4° C. (39.2° F.) is one kilogramme. The one- 
thousandth part is a cubic centimetre, or one millilitre, and con- 
tains 1 gramme of distilled water. The close relation between the 
measures of length, of capacity, and of gravity, renders it more easy 
to measure correctly than to weigh accurately. 

By calculation from the above, we shall find that one fluidounce 
of our officinal measure equals in capacity 29.53 cubic centimetres, 

and we have thereby a convenient 
Fig. 93. means of ascertaining the correctness 

of graduated measures without the 
necessity of weighing water at a cer- 
tain temperature on a delicate balance. 
All the subdivisions and the higher 
denominations may be easily calcu- 
lated, and all that is necessary is to 
measure the corresponding number of 
cubic centimetres of any liquid into- 
the graduate in order to ascertain its 
correctness. 

Glass tubes, which are graduated 
into the subdivisions of cubic centi- 
metres — burettes, as they are called, 
shown in Fig. 92 — are now exten- 
sively manufactured and sold by 
dealers in chemical apparatus. It 
must be remembered that all these 
instruments should be carefully tested 
before reliance is placed upon them, 
although they are generally correct. 

Since the introduction of volumetric 
solutions for analysis into the British 
Pharmacopoeia, the use of burettes has 
greatly increased, and a useful stand 
has been devised by Dr. Squibb for 
the purpose of supporting them. See 
papers in 21st volume of Proceedings of 
the American Pharmaceutical Association. Fig. 93 shows the arrange- 
ment of the stand when ready for use ; the burettes are prevented 
from slipping through the holes by sections of gum-elastic tubing 
being stretched around them. 

Graduated measures of glass of Oj, f^viij, fsvj, fliv, fjij, f^j, fjj 
capacity are manufactured, and sold by druggists; these are some- 
times quite inaccurate, but may be readily verified, as above, by 




Buiette. 



MEASURES. 



77 



Fig. 94. 




foiv graduated measure. 



balancing them on the scales, and gradually adding pure water until 
the required weight in grains, as shown in the tables, is attained. 
In the same way we may graduate measures, 
marking the denominations by the following 
ready process: — 

Having thinly coated one side of the glass 
with wax, balance it on the scales, adjust the 
weights, and add the required number of 
grains of pure water, observing to add it drop 
by drop toward the last; as soon as the 
weight is accurately counterpoised, remove the 
measure to a level table or counter, so high that 
it will be on a line with the eye, and carefully, 
with the jDoint of a pin, mark the line formed 
by the surface of the liquid, and opposite this 
the appropriate sign; this may be rendered 
more clear and distinct afterwards. In the 
same way mark the various other denominations, having regard to 
the temperature, which should not vary far from 60°. ]N"ow form 
a paste, by mixing a sufficient quantity of finely-powdered fluor- 
spar with sulphuric acid, and spread this over the marked surfaces, 
and set the measure aside for a day or two, after which wash it off 
and remove the wax ; the graduated measure is now indelibly and 
distinctly marked, and, if we have used the proper care, more ac- 
curately than is usual with those sold. I have compared two, in 
which the one fluid rachm mark of one corresponded nearly with 
the two fluidrachm mark of the other, and in other respects they 
were almost as much at variance. 

Fig. 95 exhibits a graduated measure, patented by W. Hodgson, 
Jr., of Philadelphia; it is made in a mould in which depressions 
are cut for the several denominations of the scale, 
and, on the reverse, for the corresponding approxi- 
mate measurements used in popular and domestic 
practice. By a plunger, which is graduated pre- 
cisely to the required bulk and thrust into the mould 
while the glass is fluid, the required measurement is 
accurately adjusted to each of these marks, and the 
necessity of further graduation is obviated. 

These measures are much more accurate than the 
ordinary kinds met with in the shops, though the 



glass is rather deficient in that perfect surface which 
characterizes blown-Hass vessels. The smaller sizes 




Hodgson's gradu- 
ated measure. 



are perfectly adapted to medicine chests and saddle- 
bags, and are much more satisfactory in measuring fluidrachms 
than the common kinds. 

A precaution to be observed, whether in graduating, or using a 
measure, particularly of small diameter, may be appropriately men- 
tioned here. 

Owing to the adhesion of the liquid to the sides of the measure, 
its surface is concave, and shows, from a side view, two lines ; one 



78 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



Fig. 96. 
P7 



N 



where the edge of the liquid adheres to the glass, and 
the other, the line of the lower surface of the con- 
cavity. In order to fix the true line in this case, it 
must be intermediate between the upper and lower 
edge of the liquid, and not at either surface. This is 
more obvious the smaller the diameter of the mea- 
sure, and, in the accompanying drawing, the dotted 
line has been made at the proper point for measure- 
ment. This concavity is readily corrected by a drop 
of alcoholic solution of corrosive sublimate, when the 
true line is at once seen. 

Besides the common forms of glass graduated mea- 
sures, a measure is used, especially by German phar- 
macists, made of block tin and graduated on the 
inside; each denomination is marked by a raised rim, 
and the quantity designated by an appropriate sign. This is 
especially convenient for measuring hot liquids, and if readily pro- 
curable, would soon be generally introduced. 

Approximate Measurement. — The approximate standards of mea- 
surement are very inaccurate, but they have no wider range than 
the doses of medicines, so that they are for the most part satisfac- 
tory. The following table exhibits those in common use: — 




Minim measure. 



A gill mug or teacupful 


. . 


. fSiv. 


A wineglassful . 


. 


. f^ij. 


A tablespoonful . 


. 


. f£ss. 


A dessertspoonful 


. 


• £3ij. 


A teaspoonful . 


. 


• fsj. 


A drop .... 


. from J 


to 1J minim 



Of the above, it may be remarked that the wineglassful is fre- 
quently less than two fluidounces, although the champagne glass 
is nearer four fluidounces. I have observed that the modern tea- 
spoons are larger than formerly, and that the silver spoons are 
generally larger than those of common metal of the same nominal 
size. 

The size of drops varies from various causes, of which the nature 
of the liquid, the size and shape of the lip of the vessel from which 
dropped, the extent to which the lip is moistened, and the rapidity 
of dropping are the most important. 

Four lists are appended: 1st. That by Elias Durand, originally 
published in the Journal of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, 
vol. i. p. 169, and copied into most of our standard works ; from 
this I have omitted several items, on account of their standard 
strength having been altered since the period of his experiments. 
2d. That of Prof. Procter, published in the tenth edition of the 
United States Dispensaiory \ and confined to different essential oils. 
The 3d and 4th lists I have prepared as the result of my own 
observations, chiefly confined to medicines not included in the fore- 



MEASURES. 



79 



A Table of the number of drops of different liquids equivalent to aflui- 
drachm U. S. P., as observed by JDurand and by Procter — A, from 
the bottles from which they are commonly dispensed, B, from a 
minim measure ; and Parrish, A {at 80° F.), from pint or half pint 
tincture bottles, and I>,from a 'minim measure. 



Name op Substaxcj 



Acetum opii 

Aciduni acet. cryst. . 

Acidum acet. commercial 

Acidum acet. dilut. . 

Acidum hydrocyanic. 

Acidum muriatic. 

Acidum nitric. . 

Aciduni nitric, dilut. . 

Acidum sulphuric. 

Acidum sulph. aromat. 

Acidum dilut. . 

Alcohol 

Alcohol, diluted 

Aqua 

Aqua ammonias . 

Oreasote . 

Chloroform 

Ether 

Ext. valerian, fid. 

Glycerine . 

Glycerine, average 

Infusion digitalis 

Liquor iodini comp. ., 

Liquor hydrarg. et arsen. iod. 

Liquor potassoe arsenitis 

Oil of almonds (sweet) 

Oil of aniseed . 

Oil of caraway . 

Oil of cloves 

Oil of chenopodium . 

Oil of cinnamon 

Oil of croton tiglium 

Oil of cubebs 

Oil of fennel 

Oil of gaultheria 

Oil of hedeoma . 

Oil of peppermint 

Oil of mint 

Oil of olives 

Oil of rosemary 

Oil of savine 

Oil of sassafras . 

Oil of tansy 

Oil of valerian . 

Spirits of nitrous ether 

Spirits of ether, comp. 

Syrup of gum Arabic 

Syrup of squills 

Tincture of assafcetida 

Tincture of aconite root 



Dur.vsd. Procter. 



120 

From f §j Tr. bot. 53. 



120 



45 

54 
84 

*90 
120 

138 

120 

45 
54 



150 



120 
120 

120 

120 



120 
120 



01 



8o 
106 
103 

97 
100 

*86 
103 
102 

91 
103 

89 

104 

102 

102 

92 

116 



95 



86 
108 
103 
100 
102 

96 

103 
101 

91 
109 

94 

105 
108 
100 
111 
110 



Parrish, 



A. 

90 

73 
55 
53^ 



62 

116 

54 

118 

98 

64.5 

49 

ISO 

lis 

53 
55 
62.5 
75 
52 
60 



80 



90 

90 

58 
85 

iis 



B. 

69 

102 
52.5 



44 

i48 
49 

143 

124.5 

46 

62 

276.5 

126 
135 

84.7 
60 
75 
52 
63 



92 



99 



148 
140 

56 

88 

i30 



80 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



Name of Substance. 


DtJRAND. 


Procter. 


Parrish. 






A. 


B. 


A. 


B. 


Tincture of chloride of iron 


132 






106 


151 


Tincture of digitalis .... 




120 












Tincture of guaiacura 




120 














Tincture of iodine 










ii3 


144 






Tincture of opium 




120 






106 


147 






Tincture of opium and camphor 










95 


110 






Tincture of tolu 










120 


138 






Vinegar, distilled 




*78 














Yinegar of colchicum 




78 






. . . 








Yinegar of squills 




78 






. . . 








Wine, Teneriffe .... 




78 






. . . 


. . . 






Wine, antimonial 




72 






62 


87 






Wine, colchicum 




75 














Wine, opium .... 




78 






'78 


*92 







The number of Drops of Water equivalent to f 5j dropped from f^j vials. 

1st trial 34. 2d trial 48. 3d trial 32. 4th trial 48. 

5th trial 60. 6th trial 50. 7th trial 65. Average 48.1. 

It will be observed from the above tables that the size of the 
drops of different liquids bears no relation to their density ; sul- 
phuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84, is stated in Durand's table as yielding 90 
drops to the fluidrachm, while water yields but 45, and oil of 
anise, sp. gr. 97, according to Prof. Procter, 85. It follows then 
that the weight of drops varies for most liquids. 

Specific Gravity. — As this text-book is designed to direct the 
practitioner of medicine and pharmacy in the necessary pursuits of 
his office or shop, I shall confine this essay to the specific gravity 
of solids and liquids, the most important branches of the general 
subject to this class of readers. 

It was said, at the commencement of this chapter, that while 
extension, and gravitation or weight, are each capable of a separate 
standard of measurement, it is impossible to bring them to a com- 
mon standard ; they are only capable of being compared with each 
other. 

The importance of understanding this branch of physics is now 
so universally acknowledged, that no argument will be presented 
to enforce its thorough study. It is well defined to be the relative 
weights of equal bulks of different bodies compared to some stan- 
dard. In the case of solids and liquids not aeriform, the adopted 
standard is distilled water at 60° F., and barometric pressure 30 
inches. As distilled water at 60° F., 30 inches barometric pressure, 
has been adopted as the standard for solids and liquids not aeriform, 
it follows, that it is only necessary to ascertain the weight of a 
bulk of water equal to the bulk of any given substance to ascer- 
tain the sp. gr. of that substance by the rule of proportion. 

The method of finding out the weight of a bulk of water equal 
to any substance which is insoluble in it is, after having ascertained 
its weight in air, to immerse it in water, and note the loss of weight 



SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



81 



Fig. 97. 




Hydrostatic balance. 



sustained by tins experiment. This follows from the law of Archi- 
medes, "that bodies immersed in any liquid are buoyed up with a 
force equal to the weight of the liquid displaced." The arrange- 
ment of apparatus by which this is most easily accomplished is 
shown in Fig. 97. 

A scale beam has one short stirrup to support a dish with a hook 
fastened to its under side, to which the substance to be examined is 
hung by a fine wire; a beaker glass 
containing distilled water is placed 
in the ring of a retort-stand, and 
after the substance has been weighed 
in the air, the glass is raised until 
the substance is entirely submerged, 
the loss is then noted, and is the 
weight of the water displaced. 
Should it happen, however, that the 
body is soluble in water, some other 
liquid must be used, the sp. gr. of 
which is already known. The fol- 
lowing formula for ascertaining the sp. gr. of bodies is applicable 
to all cases, namely: — 

1st term: The weight of the liquid displaced. 
2d term: Weight of the substance in air. 
3d term: The sp. gr. of the liquid used. 

For example, a piece of lead weighs 1133 grains; when weighed 
in water, it loses 100 grains. Divide the original weight by the loss 
in wafer (namely, 100 grains), and we find the sp. gr. 11.33. 

It sometimes occurs that we wish to ascertain the sp. gr. of a 
body soluble in water. To do this we employ some other liquid in 
which it is insoluble, the sp. gr. of which we have already ascer- 
tained; having learned the weight of the substance in air, we then 
weigh it in the liquid chosen. 

For example, a lump of alum, weighing in the air 10,000 grains, 
when immersed in oil of turpentine loses 5363 grains ; the sp. gr. of 
the oil of turpentine being .880, then — 

5363 : 10,000 : : .880 : 1.64. 

To ascertain the sp. gr. of a bod} 7 lighter than water, it is neces- 
sary to immerse it, by attaching some heavy substance which has 
previously been brought to a state of equilibrium when immersed: 
thus, a brass globe weighing 555 grains in the air requires, when 
immersed in water and attached to a counterpoise, which has been 
brought to a state of equilibrium after immersion, 1037 grains to 
restore the equilibrium ; this shows the amount of water displaced 
by the globe, and by the rule given we find — 

1037 : 555 : : 1 : .5351 sp. gr. 

Should we desire to ascertain the sp. gr. of a substance which is 
in small particles or fine powder, we first learn its weight in air, 
6 



82 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

and then introduce it into a sp. gr. bottle, which holds 1000 
grains of distilled water. "We now fill the bottle with water, and 
note its entire weight. From this we deduct the original weight of 
the powder, and we have thus learned the weight of the water in 
the bottle ; the difference between this and the 1000 grains, the 
capacity of the bottle, gives the weight of the bulk of water equal 
to that of the powder. Thus, 250 grains of powder, introduced 
into the bottle and the bottle filled with water, weighed 1209.75 
grains, from which we deduct the weight of the powder, 250 grains, 
which leaves 959.75 ; this subtracted from 1000 leaves 40.25, the 
weight of water equal to the bulk of the powder used; then — 

40.25 : 250 :: 1 : 6.21 sp. gr. of the powder. 

If we take a vial which will hold an ounce of water by weight, 
we find it will hold about an ounce and a half of nitric acid, and 
about three-quarters of an ounce of ether; hence we may say, ap- 
proximately, that nitric acid is twice as heavy as ether, or that it 
is half as heavy again as water, while ether is only three-quarters 
as heavy. We thus compare these two liquids with a common 
standard, and one which, being universally diffused in a state of 
tolerable purity, furnishes the most ready means of comparing solid 
or liquid substances together. The relation which the weight of a 
substance bears to that of water is, therefore, called its specific 
gravity. Water being assumed as 1 in the illustration just given, 
nitric acid would be 1 J or 1.5, and ether f or .75. Upon this princi- 
ple we may ascertain the specific gravity of all liquids by having a 
bottle, the capacity of which is well and accurately determined, 
filling it with these various liquids at a certain normal tempera- 
ture, ascertaining their weight, and by a simple calculation bringing 
them to this common standard. The specific gravity of substances, 
when accurately ascertained, constitutes one of their most impor- 
tant characteristics. In pharmacy, it is much employed to indi- 
cate the strength and purity of medicines, particularly acids, alco- 
hol, the ethers, and essential oils; and a physician is deficient in 
one of the most important aids to diagnosis who has not at hand 
the means of taking the specific gravity of urine. 

The apparatus for ascertaining the specific gravity of liquids is 
of two kinds: first, specific gravity bottles; and second, hydro- 
meters, or loaded tubes which mark the density of liquids by the 
depth to which they sink in them, according to known and purely 
artificial standards. The most convenient specific gravity bottles 
are graduated to hold 1000 grains, or 100 grains of pure water at 
60° F. Those made by Dr. W. H. Pile, of Philadelphia, are accu- 
rate and reliable; they are of two kinds, stoppered and unstop- 
pered. The former are most approved; they are accompanied by a 
little counterpoise to be placed on the opposite scale plate, which 
exactly balances the empty bottle, so that the weights which 
balance it, when filled and placed on the scale, indicate the weight 
of its contents. 

In filling the stoppered thousand grain bottle, it requires to be 



SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



83 



filled a little above the point in the neck to which the stopper will 
reach when replaced, so that this shall force out the air and a small 
portion of the liquid into the capillary tube drilled through it. 
The whole bottle is then wiped clean and dry, and weighed. 



VU 



Fig. 99. 




Fig. 100. 




Fi<?. 101. 




Stoppered specific gravity bottle, tin-box, and counterpoise. 

The unstoppered thousand grain bottle is marked by the scratch 
of a file opposite the point in the neck to which the liquid must 
reach; this line should be intermediate between the 
upper and lower edge of the concave surface of the 
liquid in the neck when filled. The hundred grain 
bottles are of the same description, and are used in the 
same way; they are convenient when only very small 
quantities can be obtained for testing, but are, of 
course, not quite so accurate. 

One particular merit of the 1000 and 100 grain bot- 
tles is, that the weight of a liquid, as obtained by 
filling and weighing them, expresses its specific gra- 
vity. The equation is this: as the weight of a certain 
bulk of water is to the weight of the same bulk of the 
liquid being tested, so is the specific gravity of water, which is 
unity, to the specific gravity of the liquid; or as 1000 is to the 
weight of the liquid, so is 1 to the specific gravity of the liquid. 
Having obtained the weight of this quantity of a liquid, we have 
its specific gravity, attention being required to the decimal mark 
merely. 

If, for instance, we fill the 1000 grain bottle with alcohol, and 
find it weighs 835 grains, we write its specific gravity .835, placing 
the decimal mark before the figures, because the weight is less than 
the unit adopted. If we fill it with chloroform, and find the weight 
to be 1490 grains, we state the specific gravity at 1.490, placing the 



Specific gra- 
vity bottle, un- 
stoppered. 



84 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

decimal after the first figure ; or, if we find it to hold 13,500 grains 
of mercury, we state the specific gravity 13.5, the decimal being 
varied for obvious reasons ; but no calculation is necessary to ascer- 
tain their relation to water. 

The specific gravity bottle I next proceed to describe does not 
exhibit the specific gravity of the liquid without a calculation, 
special in each case, but possesses the advantage of being cheap 
and extemporaneous, and, if carefully made, is nearly as accurate. 

Select a smooth and clean bottle, not too thick, with a ground 
glass stopper ; after first filing down the side of the stopper a small 
groove to subserve the purpose of the capillary orifice in the stop- 
per of the 1000 grain bottle, adjust it to one or more weights which 
counterpoise it, and put these aside for that use. I^ow find, by 
several trials, the exact weight of water it will hold at the proper 
temperature, and mark this on the bottle, or on a paper in which 
it is constantly wrapped ; this is used in the same way as the 1000 
or 100 grain bottle, except that it is necessary to make a calcula- 
tion, after each weighing, to ascertain the specific gravity of the 
liquid. Suppose it to be a f^ss bottle, and to contain, say 242.5 
grains of pure water, and the liquids tested to have weighed 256 
grains ; now, to ascertain its specific gravity, a sum must be made 
as above stated : as the weight of a certain bulk of water is to the 
weight of the same bulk of this liquid, so is the specific gravity of 
water to the specific gravity of this liquid : — 
242.5 : 256 : : 1 : 1.055; or divide the weight of the liquid by the 

256 
weight of the same bulk of water, thus ^ <r , r = 1.055, the sp. err. 
& 242.5 x to 

I have, though rarely, been able to select f^ss bottles, which, by 

modifying their size by filing the stopper, would hold exactly 250 

1000 i. i n- i + i 

grams, or--r— ; hence it was only necessary to multiply the ascer- 
tained weight by 4 to get the specific gravity. This plan of 
taking the specific gravity is so much more accurate than that by 
hydrometers, that these extemporaneous or home-made bottles, 
when well made, and used with good scales, are to be preferred to 
the best hydrometers, which rarely mark with precision more than 
the second decimal, a point reached without difficulty with a bottle, 
even when the scales do not indicate the fractions of a grain. Un- 
stoppered specific gravity bottles are still more readily made. 

Sometimes the quantity of liquid is but a drop or two, and re- 
course is had to the expedient of throwing it into some liquid in 
which it is insoluble, and bringing the sp. gr. of the latter to that 
of the drop so added, which is known by the drop floating at an v 
point in the liquid equally well; the sp. gr. of the liquid is then 
ascertained by weighing it in the sp. gr. bottle. 

This last method of finding the sp. gr. is the same in principle 
as that afforded by Lovi's beads, small glass balls of different 
weights and bulks so graduated that they will float at any point in 
the liquid in which they are placed ; this sp. gr. having been ascer- 



SPECIFIC GRAVITY, 



85 



102. 



tained, the bead is so marked, and then becomes an instrument 
useful for ascertaining that particular density. 

An instrument has been employed which has one advantage over 
the sp. gr. bottle, in that it is much more easily cleaned when soiled 
by viscid and tenacious matters. It consists of a piece 
of glass tube, shown in Fig. 102, partly tilled with 
mercury so that it will readily sink in liquids, then 
hermetically sealed, and the end drawn out into a 
hook or eye so that it can be readily attached to a scale 
beam ; it is then counterpoised and weighed in dis- 
tilled water at the temperature of 60° F., and the 
weight of water it displaces is noted for future ex- 
periments ; if when immersed in a liquid it displaces 
900 grains, and it displaced 1000 in water, we 
know the sp. gr. to be .900, because 1000 : 900 :: 1 
: .900. 

The greatest practical difficulty in accurately ad- 
justing a specific gravity bottle, and in taking the 
specitic gravity of liquids, has relation to the tem- 
perature. The proper temperature for liquids to be 
measured by the specific gravity bottle is 60° Fah- 
renheit's scale, which at certain seasons of the year, 
in our climate, is readily attainable, but in hot 
weather the temperature of water will reach 90° or 
more ; the dew-point then rises above 60°, so that if 
the water be brought to that temperature artificially 
and put into the bottle, the moisture deposited upon 
the outside of the bottle while weighing it will sensibly increase 
its weight. In order to obviate this difficulty, it is more conve- 
nient to have tables giving the variations of specific gravity by 
elevation or depression of temperature. The tables of this descrip- 
tion formerly in use are unsatisfactory and conflicting, and have led 
Dr. Pile to prepare an original table, founded upon many hundred 
trials at all temperatures from 50° to 93°. This he has kindly fur- 
nished me for publication. The utility of this table in verifying 
the accuracy of the specific gravity bottle at any temperature will 
be apparent. 

It may be remarked that the glass bottle itself expands and con- 
tracts, and experiment has shown it will contain about .013 grain 
more for every degree above 60°, and as much less below it. In 
weighing liquids above or below that temperature, we do not ob- 
tain directly the true specific gravity, but the conjoined result of 
the expansion or contraction of the water and the glass bottle. If 
the actual specific gravity is sought, it will be necessary to make 
the proper corrections both for the liquid on trial and for the glass 
bottle. This also has been done in the followino; table.* 




Loaded glas3 
cylinder. 



* For tables showing the variation in specific gravity of alcohol by changes of tem- 
perature, see Booth's "Encyclopaedia of Chemistry," art. Alcoholometry, Tables III. 
and IV. 



86 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 



Table of Apparent Specific Gravity of Water as observed in a Glass 

By 



W. H. 


Pile, M.D. 

Sp. Gr. in 






Sp. Gr. in 




Temp. Fahr. 


Glass Bottles. 


True Sp. Gr. 


Temp. Fahr. 


Glass Bottles. 


True Sp. Gr 


50° 


1000.54 


1000.67 


72° 


998.94 


998.78 


51 


1000.50 


1000.62 


73 


998.83 


998.66 


52 


1000.46 


1000.56 


74 


998.72 


998.53 


53 


1000.41 


1000.50 


75 


998.60 


998.40 


54 


1000.36 


1000.44 


76 


998.48 


998.27 


55 


1000.30 


1000.37 


77 


998.35 


998.13 


56 


1000.25 


1000.30 


78 


998.22 


997.99 


57 


1000.20 


1000.23 


79 


998.08 


997.84 


58 


1000.14 


1000.16 


80 


997.94 


997.68 


59 


1000.07 


1000.08 


81 


997.79 


997.52 


60 


L000.00 


1000.00 


82 


997.64 


997.36 


61 


999.92 


999.91 


83 


997.49 


997.20 


62 


999.84 


999.82 


84 


997.35 


997.04 


63 


999.72 


999.72 


85 


997.20 


996.87 


64 


999.68 


999.63 


86 


996.94 


996.60 


65 


999.60 


999.53 


87 


996.78 


996.43 


66 


999.51 


999.43 


88 


996.62 


996.26 


67 


999.42 


999.33 


89 


996.46 


996.08 


68 


999.33 


999.23 


90 


996.29 


995.90 


69 


999.24 


999.12 


91 


996.12 


995.72 


70 


999.14 


999.01 


92 


995.96 


995.54 


71 


999.04 


998.90 


93 


995.79 


995.36 



SchifF has proposed a very simple arrangement for the determi- 
nation of the specific gravity of solid and liquid bodies. It con- 
sists merely of a test glass of even width graduated into cubic 
centimetres from the bottom and resting in a wooden or cork foot. 
It is used by pouring a convenient quantity of any liquid into the 
tube, noting its height, and weighing the apparatus in grammes; 
the solid body is then introduced in a coarse powder, the apparatus 
weighed again, and the height of the liquid noted. The difference 
of weight indicates the weight of the body, the difference of mea- 
sure gives in cubic centimetres the amount of liquid displaced, and 
(as one cubic centimetre of water weighs one gramme) also the 
weight of distilled water in grammes displaced by the above body ; 
consequently the weight of the body divided by the difference of 
measure in cubic centimetres gives the specific gravity. 

To find the specific gravity of any given liquid, this is introduced 
into the tube previously weighed, the difference of weight in 
grammes after and before filling it is simply divided by the number 
of cubic centimetres occupied by the liquid, to furnish the specific 
gravity. 

The greatest density of water is at 39° F., and as the specific 
gravity "is usually taken at 60° F., there is a slight discrepancy in 
the weight of water, which is exactly one gramme for each cubic 
centimetre at 39° ; but the expansion of water between 32° and 
212° is not more than .012, and the difference of its weight at 39° 
and 60° so slight that for ordinary purposes it may be overlooked. 



HYDROMETERS. 8/ 

Hydrometers. — The specific gravity of liquids may be most readily 
ascertained by plunging in them instruments so adjusted as to mark 
their density by the depth to which they sink. These are called 
hydrometers, and although not capable of the same accuracy as 
specific gravity bottles, they furnish approximate results with great 
facility. 

The application of the hydrometer depends upon the well-ascer- 
tained law that a body floating in a liquid displaces its own weight 
of the same, and its use dates back to the discovery of that princi- 
ple, a period of about three hundred years before the Christian era. 

Hydrometers are named with reference to the class of liquids for 
which they are designed, and to the scale upon which graduated. 
The kinds most sold are called Baume's hydrometers or areometers; 
they are also called saccharometers, when adapted to the measure- 
ment of syrups; acidometers to acids ; elseometers for oils, and uri- 
nometers for urine. 

Cartier's hydrometer, which is somewhat used in France, is only 
applicable for light liquids ; it is a modification of Baume's Pese 
Esprit, and, having some points in the scale which correspond, is 
generally confounded with it. 

Without intending to confuse the student with unnecessary de- 
tails, I shall give in a few words the method of obtaining the 
standards on the respective scales, and the mode of converting them 
into specific gravity and the reverse rule, omitting the tables, which 
will be found in the U. S. Dispensatory and in chemical works. 

Baume had two instruments, one for liquids heavier than water, 
and one for liquids lighter than water; the former called Pese Acide, 
or Pese Sirop, and the latter Pese Esprit 

The zero for heavy liquids was water, and the point to which 
the instrument would sink in a solution containing fifteen percent, 
of salt was marked 15°. The interval doubled gave 30°, thejiext 
45°, and so on. The zero for lighter liquids, or pese esprit, was ob- 
tained by immersing the tube in water containing 10 per cent, of 
salt in solution, and the point to which it would sink in pure water 
he made 10°; dividing the stem into like intervals, he obtained 
20°, 30°, etc., the intermediate degrees by subdivision. 

Now it will be at once perceived that the slightest error made in 
obtaining the first interval by this process becomes increased in 
every extension, so that with all care and precaution to insure 
accuracy, scarcely any two instruments could be made to corre- 
spond precisely. 

This mode of graduating hydrometers has long since been super- 
seded by the equally practicable and more accurate method of ob- 
taining the specific gravity of two known liquids at a certain fixed 
temperature. These are placed at the extremes of the scale, and 
the intermediate space is accurately subdivided into the requisite 
number of degrees. 

The liquids ordinarily used for this purpose are, for liquids heavier 
than water, sulphuric acid and water; for those lighter than water, 
ether (highly rectified) and water — the specific gravity of these 



88 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

being of course ascertained before each trial by a standard hydro- 
meter, or by the use of the 1000-grain bottle: but authorities are 
not agreed precisely in fixing their specitic gravities, so that even 
the. most accurate manipulators are liable to error from this fact, 
unless by having a common definite rule accuracy is obtained. 
Another difficulty in regard to Baume's hydrometers, as usually 
imported, is, that they are marked by arbitrary numbers, which 
have no necessary connection with the specific gravity, and they 
can only be used with facility when access can be had to the tables 
published in chemical works, in which the degrees of Baume, with 
their corresponding specific gravity numbers, are represented. 

The following simple formula has been contrived for the purpose 
of finding the specific gravity of any liquid, the degree of Baume 
being known, or the reverse. 

For Liquids heavier than Water. 

1. To reduce Baume to specific gravity. Subtract the degree of 
Baume from 145, and divide into 145; the quotient is the specific 
gravity. 

2. To reduce specific gravity into Baume. Divide the specific 
gravity into 145, and subtract from 145 ; the remainder is the de- 
gree of Baume. 

For Liquids lighter than Water. 

1. To reduce Baume to specific gravity. Add the number of the 
degree to 130, and divide it into 140; the quotient is the specific 
gravity. 

2. To reduce specific gravity to Baume. Divide the specific 
gravity into 140, and subtract 130 from the quotient; the remain- 
der will be the degree of Baume. In this manner, the tables at the 
end of this article were calculated. 

The rationale of this formula is more difficult to understand than 
its application. The modulus or constant number here used is the 
proportion which the space of one degree (or the bulk which one 
degree occupies) bears to the space or bulk of the whole hydrometer 
below the water line. 

Or, it may be stated to be the proportion which the weight of water 
displaced by the hydrometer when floating in water, bears to the 
weight of water equal in bulk to one degree. 

For example: suppose the weight of a hydrometer to be 200 
grains, it is floated in water and marks the water line (10° B. in 
pese esprit, or 0° B. in pese acide); now to sink it one degree in the 
first case, T J T of its weight must be added, or 1.428 grain; 140 is 
therefore the modulus of the scale for light liquids; in the other 
case, we must withdraw T ^ of its weight, or 1.38 grain, to en- 
able the hydrometer to rise one degree; 145 is therefore the modu- 
lus of the pese acide: from this it will appear that the modulus 
determines the size of the degrees. That here presented was 



HYDROMETERS. 



89 



selected (as most consistent with the practice of manufacturing 
chemists, and according with the tables published in the United 
States Dispensatory) by Henry Pernberton, Practical 
Chemist, of this city, to whose able article, show- 
ing the inconsistency of the standards in use, pub- 
lished in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. 
xxiv. p. 1, the reader is referred. 



Fisj. 103. 



The inconvenience of an arbitrary scale, as that 
of Baume, has long been felt, and has led to the 
manufacture of the new style of hydrometer which 
is here figured ; these have the scale of Baume, with 
the actual specific gravity corresponding to it, writ- 
ten opposite each other on the tube. 

This article, as manufactured by Dr. W. H. Pile, 
before referred to, is unexceptionable. He makes 
a large size containing two in a series, one for liquids 
heavier, and the other for liquids lighter, than 
water, each having an extensive range; and also a 
small size, consisting of two for light and three for 
heavy liquids. The advantage of the series of five 
small instruments is, that the scales, having a much 
less range, are capable of exhibiting more accurately 
slight differences in sp. gr. than in the other case. 
In the drawing, one of the large instruments is ex- 
hibited, considerably reduced in size; and, as the 
scales with the two sets of figures could not be re- 
presented in a single view of the tube, the printer 
has appended on either side the figures representing 
the degree of Baume', and a part of those represent- 
ing the sp. gr. 

Besides these hydrometers, Dr. Pile makes others 
for special applications, and graduated to suit par- 
ticular objects; one of the most curious of these is the Lactometer, 
for the measurement of milk, which, as we get it in large cities, is 
liable to adulteration, and especially to dilution with water. (See 
Lac Yaccinum, Part IV.) 

Of all the practical applications of the art of determining specific 
gravity, none is more important and interesting to the physician 
than its use in ascertaining the qualities of urine. The urinometer 
is the most delicate of this class of instruments; it is a hydrometer 
tube with a very small range, only going from 1.000 to 1.060 
specific gravity ; within these limits, all the variations of urine from 
its normal standard may be ascertained. So delicate are these deter- 
minations, that the variations of temperature, important in all 
cases, here require special attention; and accordingly many of the 
urinometers are accompanied by a little thermometer to be plunged 
into the urine simultaneously with the tube; sometimes the thermo- 
meter is inclosed in the tube, and at others, as in the apparatus 



Hydrometer for 
liquids lighter than 
water. 



90 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 

Fig. 104, accompanies it in a neat box containing also a graduated 
glass for containing the urine. 

The thousand grain bottle, with proper observance of the thermo- 
meter, is, however, in this as in all other cases, the surest test of 
specific gravity. 

Fig. 105 represents the urinometer removed from the box and 
floated in the vessel accompanying it (in which the graduation 
marks are not seen). The graduation of the urinometer is such, 
that each degree represents 1-1000, thus giving the actual specific 
gravity by simply adding the number of degrees on the scale 
corresponding with the surface of the liquid to 1000. Thus, 
supposing the number cut by the surface of the fluid to be 30, as 



Fig. 104. 



Fisr. 105. 



Fig. 10G. 





Urinometer-box containing thermometer, 
graduated glass vessel, etc. 



Urinometer in use. 




shown in the figure, the specific gravity would then be 
1.030. The average density of healthy urine is about from 
10° to 25° of this scale, at 60° F., or sp. gr. 1.010 to 1.025. 
That of diabetic urine ranges from 30° to 60°, or sp. gr. 

1.030 to 1.060. TeteT" 

Some hydrometers for liquids heavier than water are 
manufactured of small size, for the special purpose of measuring the 
strength of syrups. Fig. 106 represents one of these, which is gradu- 
ated to Baume's scale. It floats at 30° in a solution of the sp. gr. 
1.26, the density of saturated simple syrup when boiling. 



HYDROMETERS. 



91 



BAUME S DEGEEES, "WITH THEIR CORRESPONDING SPECIFIC GRAVITY. 





Table for Liquids lighter 


than Water. Temp. 60° Fahr 




Degrees of 


Specific 


Degrees of 


Specific 


Degrees of 


Specific 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


10 


1.000 


31 


0.870 


51 


0.773 


11 


0.993 


32 


0.864 


52 


0.769 


12 


0.986 


33 


0.859 


53 


0.765 


13 


0.979 


34 


0.854 


54 


0.761 


14 


0.972 


35 


0.848 


55 


0.757 


15 


0.966 


36 


0.843 


56 


0.753 


16 


0.959 


37 


0.838 


57 


0.749 


17 


0.952 


38 


0.833 


58 


0.745 


18 


0.946 


39 


0.828 


59 


0.741 


19 


0.940 


40 


0.824 


60 


0.737 


20 


0.933 


41 


0.819 


61 


0.733 


21 


0.927 


42 


0.814 


62 


0.729 


22 


0.921 


43 


0.809 


63 


0.725 


23 


0.915 


44 


0.805 


64 


0.722 


24 


0.909 


45 


0.800 


65 


0.718 


25 


0.903 


46 


0.795 


66 


0.714 


26 


0.897 


47 


0.791 


67 


0.711 


27 


0.892 


48 


0.787 


68 


0.707 


28 


0.886 


49 


0.782 


69 


0.704 


29 


0.881 


50 


0.778 


70 


0.700 


30 


0.875 












Table for Liqm 


'ds heavier 


than Water. 1 


"emp. 60° Fahr 




Degrees of 


Specific 


Degrees of 


Specific 


Degrees of 


Specific 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


Hydrom. 


Gravity. 


1 


1.007 


26 


1.218 


51 


1.543 


2 


1.014 


27 


1.229 


52 


1.559 


3 


1.021 


28 


1.239 


53 


1.576 


4 


1.028 


29 


1.250 


54 


1.593 


5 


1.036 


30 


1.261 


55 


1.611 


6 


1.043 


31 


1.272 


56 


1.629 


7 


1.051 


32 


1.283 


57 


1.648 


8 


1.058 


33 


1.295 


58 


1.667 


9 


1.066 


34 


1.306 


59 


1.686 


10 


1.074 


35 


1.318 


60 


1.706 


11 


1.082 


36 


1.330 


61 


1.726 


12 


1.090 


37 


1.343 


62 


1.747 


13 


1.098 


38 


1.355 


63 


1.768 


14 


1.107 


39 


1.368 


64 


1.790 


15 


1.115 


40 


1.381 


65 


1.813 


16 


1.124 


41 


1.394 


66 


1.835 


17 


1.133 


42 


1.408 


67 


1.859 


18 


1.142 


43 


1.422 


68 


1.883 


19 


1.151 


44 


1.436 


69 


1.908 


20 


1.160 


45 


1.450 


70 


1.933 


21 


1.169 


46 


1.465 


71 


1.959 


22 


1.179 


47 


1.480 


72 


1.986 


23 


1.188 


48 


1.495 


73 


2.014 


24 


1.198 


49 


1.510 


74 


2.042 


25 


1.208 


50 


1.526 







92 



CHAPTER III. 

TEMPERATURE, GENERATION OF HEAT, ETC. 

Many of the processes directed in the Pharmacopoeia may he 
conducted on an ordinary cannon stove; as, making infusions and 
decoctions, syrups, some of the extracts, all of the ointments and 
cerates, and some of the plasters. The various kinds of cooking 
stoves are still hetter adapted to these purposes, each having its 
particular advantages, and nearly all offering facilities not only for 
performing the processes requiring the naked fire, but also being 
readily fitted with sand- and water-baths, and having ovens 
attached which answer the purposes of drying-chambers. Kitchen 
ranges, such as are now generally introduced into dwelling houses, 
are also adapted to the pharmaceutical laboratory; they may be so 
built as to allow of sheet-iron slides, or, better, metallic sash inclos- 
ing the space above the fire, so as to carry off the vapors from 
evaporating fluids, or the acid and other noxious fumes arising 
from chemical processes. If the iron slides are used, a light of 
glass should be introduced into one of them to facilitate the inspec- 
tion of the processes, and these slides or the sash should be supported 
at such a distance from the fire as to allow of a draft of air above 
the containing vessels, and to enable the operator to manipulate 
without exposure to the fumes. 

An advantage of these cooking ranges over stoves is found in the 
supply of hot water furnished by boilers or water-backs connected 
with them, a great convenience in a shop or laboratory. Drawings 
of these would be superfluous, as the situation and requirements of 
pharmacists are so various that each can best be suited by the exer- 
cise of a little ingenuity, and by availing himself of the experience 
and suggestions of those whose special calling is to furnish this 
kind of apparatus. 

The work on Pharmacy by Profs. Mohr and Redwood, edited in 
Philadelphia by Prof. Procter, and that on Chemical and Pharma- 
ceutical Manipulations, by Prof. Morfit, give drawings of different 
furnaces manufactured for the special uses of the chemist and 
pharmacist ; but few of these are in common use, and it has not 
been deemed important to present the subject in detail in this work. 

A notice of some cheap and portable forms of apparatus may ap- 
propriately preface an account of those pharmaceutical processes 
requiring heat. 

The common clay furnace may be used in open chimney-places, 
or in the open air, charcoal being the fuel ; a common bellows is 
employed when necessary to increase the intensity of the fire. 



HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 



93 



Similar furnaces are made of cast iron ; they possess no advan- 
tages for use with charcoal, but, by becoming hot, they facilitate 
the combustion of anthracite. 

The small French hand furnace, Fig. 109, is light and portable, 
and preferable to the ordinary clay furnaces for table operations. 

Many of the operations of the pharmaceutical laboratory are con- 
veniently performed with lamps, alcohol being the fuel. A neat 
and common alcohol lamp is that shown in Fig. 107 ; it has a 



Fiff. 107. 




Fiir- 108. 



^M&? 



Fig. 109. 




Glass spirit lamp. Extemporaneous glass lamp. 



French hand furnace. 



ground glass cap to prevent the waste of alcohol by evaporation. 
In the absence of such a lamp, a common glass bottle, with rather 
wide mouth, may be used ; a perforated cork with a small glass 
tube about an inch long is inserted in the neck of the bottle, as 
shown in Fig. 108, and the wick is made to pass through this into 
the alcohol contained in the bottle. 

A small tin alcohol lamp answers about as well as any for com- 
mon purposes, with the exception of having no cap to prevent 
evaporation from the wick ; such a one is shown in Figs. 110 and 
111, with a convenient stand in which to place it under a capsule 
or other vessel to be heated. 



Fig. 110. 



Fio-. 111. 



Fig. 112. 
b 




The alcohol lamp and stand. 




Mitchell's lamp. 



An alcohol lamp, familiar to chemical students, is Mitchell's 
argancl lamp, shown in section in Fig. 112. In this, which is usu- 
ally made of tin, an argand burner is placed in the centre of a 
cylindrical reservoir, r, with which it communicates at bottom by 
small lateral tubes ; the reservoir is furnished with a tube near the 
top at a, for the introduction of the fluid; this is stopped with a cork 



94 



TEMPERATURE, GENERATION" OF HEAT, ETC, 



having a slight perforation, so as to admit the air as the alcohol is 
consumed. The cylindrical wick 6, which is inserted in the burner, 
is kept saturated with alcohol, owing to its communicating with 
the reservoir. When lighted at its upper edge, it burns freely, 
having a draft of air within as well as without the cylindrical 
column of flame, and generates a large amount of heat. 

When no longer wanted for use, the lamp should be covered by 
a cap over the burner, or emptied of alcohol, otherwise waste will 
occur by continued evaporation from the wick. 

Fig. 113 represents Berzelius's lamp, which is adapted to alcohol 
or oil ; it is attached to a permanent stand, upon the upright rod 
of which it moves, being secured by a screw, which presses against 
the rod ; the reservoir is here separated from the burner, with which 



Pig. 113. 



Pig. 114. 




/^~N 



Lamp chimney. 



Berzelius's lamp. 



it communicates by a single tube. A 
little screw is arranged alongside the 
burner to raise or depress the wick. 

Fig. 114 is a chimney, which is adapted 
to confine the flame within narrow limits, 
and to increase the draught, thus dimin- 
ishing the tendency to smoke, and increasing the intensity of the 
heat. It may be applied either to Berzelius's or Mitchell's lamp. 

"The Universal Lamp/' constructed on the same principle as 
Berzelius's, but better adapted to support utensils to be heated, may 
also be obtained from the manufacturers and dealers in chemical 
apparatus. 

One of the best contrivances for generating an intense heat for 
those few processes in pharmacy to which it is essential, and for 
fusing insoluble silicates, and in glass-blowing and bending opera- 
tions, is the lamp next figured, which is called the alcohol blast 
lamp. 

This is shown in Fig. 115. It consists of a double copper cylin- 
der, a, inclosed at top and bottom, and surrounding an interior 
chamber, which extends somewhat below the bottom of the cylinder 
to a permanent copper bottom, as shown in the section. ^ Near the 
top of the cylinder, an open tube of the same material is soldered 



HEAT FOE PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 



95 



on at a, for the purpose of filling it, and nearly opposite, on the 
other side, a tube, 6, also of copper, is inserted; this is bent, as seen 
in the drawing, and, gradually tapering down to a small diameter, 
enters the internal chamber between the lower terminus of the 



Fig. 115. 





Alcohol blast lamp and stove. 

cylinder and the bottom; it is now curved upward, and terminates 
with a small orifice at c; a movable top, d, is fitted with a handle, 
and so constructed as to fit over the open top of the chamber. F 
represents a sheet-iron stove in which the lamp may be placed when 
used, and which serves as a support for crucibles, dishes, etc. The 
mode of using this lamp is to fill the cylinder with alcohol by 
means of the tube a till it commences to run out of the jet c, then 
cork up the open end of the tube a, observing not to secure the 
cork too tightly. About two fluidounces of alcohol are now poured 
into the central chamber, or sufficient to cover the bottom and rise 
to within an inch or two of the orifice at c. This spirit, being now 
ignited by a match, quickly heats that contained in the surround- 
ing cylinder, and as this boils, the vapor formed is forced through 
the tube b in a powerful jet, which, as it escapes at c, is ignited by 
the flame playing upon the surface of that in the chamber, and 
thus forms a jet of flame possessing an intense heating power; 
should any obstruction occur in the tube 6, or at the orifice c, the 
apparatus might explode, but that the cork at a would be likely 
to be thrown out. When it is desired to stop the flame, and 
whenever the apparatus is to be put out of use, the cover d is placed 
on the top. 

For accomplishing fluxions with carbonated alkali, where a very 
intense heat is required, this lamp is an admirable arrangement, 
doing away with the necessity of a counter blowpipe. In order to 
apply this jet to the greatest advantage for the purpose named, a 
crucible jacket, F, Fig. 116, may be placed upon the projections on 
the top of the stove F, Fig. 115, immediately over the flame of the 



96 



TEMPERATURE, GENERATION" OF HEAT, ETC, 




Crucible jacket. 



Fig. 116. lamp. This is a sort of chimney made of sheet- 

iron, and serving the double purpose of keeping 
the crucible from all currents of air but those 
highly heated by the flame, and of turning the 
flame back, somewhat as in a reverberatory furnace. 
The cheap and abundant lighting fluids sold 
under the names of kerosene, coal oil, etc., are too 
highly carbonaceous to serve a good purpose for 
heating, unless with apparatus constructed with 
special arrangements for securing the thorough 
combustion of the oil and the convenient applica- 
tion of the generated heat to the objects in view. 
Gasoline vapor is too smoky even when mixed 
w x ith atmospheric air; but the kind of gas made by the destruc- 
tive distillation of coal leaves nothing to be desired. 

The best fuel for pharmaceutical purposes is the gas now so freely 
and cheaply supplied in almost every considerable town. 

This gas may be conducted by pipes into the counter or table, 
and terminated at any convenient point just above its surface by a 
suitable burner ; or it may have soldered on to the iron pipe at its 
terminus a leaden one, which, being flexible, may be moved at 
pleasure to any desired part of the table. The gas distributor, 
shown in Fig. 117, is the best arrangement for 
supplying a number of burners at one time on the 
table ; it is made of brass on a marble foot, with 
three distributing stopcocks. This arrangement 
affords a neat and convenient means of using gas, 
from an ordinary pendant or bracket on the table, 
for three several purposes at the same time. A 
very good portable apparatus, capable of being 
used in any part of the room, or in any room in 
the house, is shown in Fig. 118. It consists of a flexible tube, which 
is terminated at one end by a cap to fit on to the burner of a com- 
mon chandelier, pendant, or side-light, such as are suspended from 
the ceiling or walls of apartments for the purposes of illumination. 
To the other end of this tube is a stand of metal attached, sur- 
mounted by a burner to be adapted to some of the various kinds 
of furnaces to be described in the sequel. 

Figs. 119 and 120 are sectional drawings to illustrate the different 
modes of connecting the flexible tube as above with the permanent 
pipe. Fig. 119 is the mercury cup arrangement ; a small cup is 
screwed on the burner at its base, into which are introduced a few 
ounces of mercury, and into this the cap of the conducting tube 
dips so as to form an air-tight joint, which is very readily shipped 
and unshipped. In this figure the cap is represented as having a 
flange covering the mercury cup, which, while it is in its place, 
protects the mercury from evaporation or from spilling out. When 
unshipped, however, the bath of mercury is unprotected, and becomes 
wasted, frequently requiring to be renewed, and leading to incon- 
venience. Fig. 120 is a ground burner and cap, such as are shown 




Gas distributor. 



HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES, 



97 



also in Fig. 118. The burner and cap are fitted and ground to each 
other, so as to make a direct air-tight connection when adjusted, 



Fie. 118. 





Fig. 120. 




G-as burner with mer- Ground gas burner 
cury cup and cap. and cap. 

Fiff. 121. 




Ground gas burner and hose. 



Curve for gas tubing. 



and yet are removable at pleasure. The screws by which the burner 
is attached to the pipe, and the cap to the flexible tube above, and 
also the internal construction of the fish-tail-burner, are shown in 
this section. 

There is now made a cap which fits upon any burner without 
being ground, and is used for drop-lights in illumination. These 
attachments are made by simply stretching a piece of gum-elastic 
tubing over the burner, and connecting the other end with a gas 
furnace or other appliance on the counter. There is a liability to 
inconvenience from the folding of the tube upon itself at the point 
at which it should curve, thus shutting off the flow of gas. To ob- 
viate this, a curved tinned iron support, shown in Fig. 121, may be 
slipped over the upper end of the tube into a position to give it the 
appropriate curve. 

Fig. 122 represents the argand burner with rim. The jet of gas- 
is here through the small holes at the top of the hollow cylinder, 
7 



98 



TEMPERATURE, GENERATION OF HEAT, ETC. 



Fig. 122. the funnel-shaped appendage above be- 

ing designed to spread the flame when 
used for illumination; the disk screwed 
on below is used to support the chim- 
ney, and is perforated with holes so as 
to allow a draft of air around the flame, 
while the hollow cylindrical shape of 
the burner favors the draft through its 
centre. The argand burner is shown in 
Tig. 118 as covered by a cylinder, Fig. 
125. 

Fig. 123 represents a cylindrical screen used to cover over any 
common burner, the object being to confine the heat, to prevent 
the flame being affected by draughts, and to afford a support for 
the vessel being heated. The door is convenient, when the top is 
covered, to light the flame, and to see its elevation and depression 
during the process. 




Argand burner. 



Fig. 123. 



Fig. 124. 




Screen and support. 



kJ 



Gas stove. 



Fig. 124 represents a cylinder of sheet copper, iron, or tin, which 
may vary in length from 5 to 8 inches, and in diameter from 2J to 
4 inches, with a "ring of the same material about an inch wide, and 
just large enough to slide over the cylinder. A piece of copper or 
brass wire gauze, a little larger than the diameter of the cylinder, 
is stretched over the top, and secured by passing the ring over it ; 
while the bottom is left open, and either supported on feet or made 
to stand directly upon the table, the lower margin being, as in this 
case, scalloped, so as to allow the free passage of air into it. 

The obstruction to the free passage of the mixed air and gas 
which fine gauze presents, causes the large amount of carbon in 
the flame observed in many of these furnaces; the gas accumulates 
in the top of the cylinder to the exclusion of the necessary propor- 
tion of atmospheric air; a gauze of from 30 to 50 apertures to the 



HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 



99 



Fi?. 125. 





Small gas stove. 



linear inch has the required fineness. The gas stove, as thus con- 
structed, is to be set immediately over a gas pipe, which may either 
be permanent or flexible, or it may be open at the 
end, or terminated by an ordinary bat-wing, or fish- 
tail, or argand burner; preferably by the latter. 

Fig. 125 is another form of cylinder, of tin: the 
bottom being removed, it will fit the rim of the ar- 
gand burner; the object of the little cap at bottom 
is to adapt it to an ordinary fish-tail or bat-wing 
burner. Many restaurants are supplied with similar 
apparatus, its construction being varied, so as to 
give support to the vessel to be heated. 

The mode of using these cylinders is to place them 
over the burner, and to allow the gas to escape into 
them and thus to become mixed with air, then to 
apply a light above the surface of the wire gauze. 
The gas, which, under ordiuary circumstances, burns 
with a bright yellow flame, indicating the presence 
of carbon in a state of incandescence, and depositing 
quence, a large amount of soot upon any cold body brought in con- 
tact with it, may now be so. completely diluted with air, by regu- 
lating the jet, as to burn with a light blue flame, containing no 
carbon. The combustion being much more complete, and spread over 
the whole surface of the gauze, gives an increased amount of heat, 
and so diffuses it over the bottom of the vessel as to diminish the 
liability to fracture. Where a smoky flame is obtained, the supply 
of atmospheric air should be increased, or that of the gas diminished. 

This kind of heating apparatus, when the fuel is accessible, is 
recommended by its cleanliness, as, when carefully used, it is as 
free from any residue or sooty deposit as alcohol itself. Gas is far 
cheaper than alcohol, even in towns where the price reaches §4 00 
per thousand feet. In Philadelphia it is but $2 50. It may 
be applied for an indefinite period without renewing, which in long 
evaporations is particularly desirable. It may also be regulated 
with perfect facility, and left burning during the absence of the 
operator, without the fear of a material increase or diminution of 
the flame, thus superseding, in many instances, the necessity of a 
sand-bath, to be described in a subsequent chapter. The reader 
may consult with advantage the papers of P. W. Bedford, in Pro- 
ceedings Amer. Pharm. Assoc., vol. xiii. pp. 155, 180. 

In some gas furnaces the rim used to secure the wire gauze over 
the top is made to project for a half inch or more above the gauze, 
and the inclosure is filled with pieces of pumice-stone or of brick 
about the size of a chestnut ; the advantages of this are, that the 
flame is not so liable to be blown out by a draught of air, the rim 
acting as a shield to it ; the incombustible material becoming hot, 
radiates heat besides the direct heating effect of the flame. It 
also protects the wire gauze from corrosion by liquids accidentally 
spilled, and diminishes the liability to its becoming so perforated 
that the flame may be communicated to the mixed gas in the 
interior of the stove. 



100 



TEMPERATURE, GENERATION OF HEAT, ETC. 



Fiff. 126. 




If the cylinder rests on the table, and is short, so that the fire is 
brought near the top of the table, the heat will 
scorch, and may inflame it. To avoid this, elevate 
the top of the cylinder, at least eight inches, or 
place it and the burner on a plaster tile. Putting a 
wire-gauze diaphragm between the gas burner and 
the top of the stove, with the view of mixing the 
gas and air more completely, seems unnecessary. 

In those instances where a gentle heat is re- 
quired, and especially when the vessel to be heated 
is small, the cylinder covered with wire gauze may 
be dispensed with, and an argand burner being 
used, a small chimney of metal or glass is set on 
its rim, as shown in Fig. 126; and, the jet of gas 
being small, and the object removed some distance 
above the flame, a steady and continuous heat is 
secured without a deposit of soot. 

Parrish's gas furnace, shown in Figs. 127, 128, is of cast iron, 
open at the bottom, of the shape shown in the drawing. A brass 
burner of two rings, a, Fig. 128, passes into the body of the fur- 
nace near the bottom ; the rings are perforated at suitable distances 
with small holes for the ignition of jets of gas. For all purposes 
requiring a moderate and diffused heat, this answers an admirable 
purpose. The scalloped rim allows the free passage of a draught 
of air from the flame when the furnace is covered by a receiving 
vessel, while the distance of this from the flame prevents the de- 
posit of soot upon it unless when the flame is at its highest, which 
it need not be for the purposes named. 



Chimney and 
crucible support. 



Fig. 127. 



Fig. 128. 




Parrish's gas furnace. 



Fig. 128 represents the wire-gauze attachment, adapted to ope- 
rations requiring a high heat. ; the lower casting, 6, fitting accu- 
rately into the throat of the furnace, is covered with wire gauze, 
which is secured in place by the upper, c\ this has three projecting 
arms for supporting the receiving vessel at the right elevation from 



MODIFICATION OF BUNSEN'S BURNER. 



101 



the flame. The small tripod, d, is useful for supporting smaller 
vessels and flasks, either when subjected to the high flame or to 
that designed for evaporation. 

Being open at the bottom, this furnace allows a free ingress of 
air to mix with the gas, which, being ignited above the diaphragm 
of wire gauze, produces perfect combustion without the least 
smoke, and with greatly increased evolution of heat. The great- 
est consumption of gas by this burner, under ordinary pressure, is 
from seven to ten cubic feet per hour, though this would smoke 
without the wire-gauze attachment; for evaporation without the 
attachment a much smaller flow of gas is required. 

A gallon of water in a pharmaceutical still of tinned iron, placed 
on the projecting arms over the wire gauze, was raised to the boil- 
ing point in thirteen minutes, though in an uncovered enamelled 
iron vessel it required nearly twenty minutes. In this, as in all 
other apparatus for burning gas, much depends on the flow of the 
gas, which is partly regulated by the stopcock, and partly by the 
pressure at the works. 

Bunsen's burner, Fig. 129, is familiar to most chemical students 
as furnishing a concentrated flame similar to that produced by a 
blowpipe, and useful for fusions, for blowing 
and bending glass, for bringing a crucible to Fig. 129. 

redness, and for many purposes in the labora- 
tory. For blowpipe operations the upright tube 
is fitted with another one, which is flattened 
laterally at the upper end, so that the orifice 
presents the appearance of a narrow slit, which, 
being cut off obliquely, gives to the blowpipe 
flame a downward direction. The tube of 
Bunsen's burner may be covered with a cylinder 
or support ; as the mixture of gas with atmo- 
spheric air is effected in the tube, this arrangement is not liable to 
the disadvantage of imperfect combustion. 

A modification of Bunsen's burner, Fig. 130, has been devised, 
in which most of the tube conveying the gas mixed with air is 

Pis. 130. 





Horizontal burner. 



kept in a horizontal plane, and the perforated head attached to a 
short pipe at right angles to the horizontal tubes. The operator is 
enabled to employ it in many cases where the usual upright tube 
is inadmissible. 

Another arrangement for the same purpose is to cover merely 
the upper end with a short cylinder fastened on a retort stand, 



102 TEMPERATURE, GENERATION OF HEAT, 



ETC, 




Griffin's burner. 



the top of which is covered with gauze; or, a still cheaper one, to 
place a piece of gauze upon the ring of a retort stand. In both 
these cases the gas may be lit either above or below the gauze, and 
the flame spread over its diameter or confined below it at pleasure. 
Bunsen's burner has been modified by J. J. Griffin, F.C.S., whose 
modification is figured in the Chemical News, London, November 2, 
1861. This arrangement is shown in Fig. 131. The 
most important improvement suggested by Griffin is 
a movable cap fitting over the air-box at the bottom, 
with holes so arranged as to diminish the supply of 
air at pleasure. A modified Bunsen burner with 
this arrangement is now sold by dealers in chemical 
apparatus; it can be adjusted to produce a yellow 
carbonized flame or an intense blue flame at plea- 
sure, and is regulated with ease so as to prevent 
either an excess of gas or of air. The principle of 
Griffin's attachment of a circular cast-iron box, with 
holes around the margin and on the top, designed to 
surmount the Bunsen burner and spread the flame 
for boiling and evaporation, was, I think, anticipated 
by McGlensey, of Philadelphia, whose patent burner is figured below. 
Fig. 182 (1, 2) shows a simple brass cylinder with attachment for 
the introduction of gas and atmospheric air. The orifice of the 

burner is about one-quarter 
Fig. 133. of an inch above the top of 

the holes for the admission 
of air, an important feature 
in determining the degree 
of force of the upward col- 
umn of mixed air and gas; 
this constitutes a Bunsen 
burner. The perforated co- 
nical top-piece is designed to 
be screwed on to the top of 
the tube, and spreads the 
flame by discharging the gas 
through the small orifices in 
the top. In other patterns 
of this, designed for larger tubes, this perforated disk is convex, 
and some of the holes are so near the outer edge as to spread the 
flame more thoroughly. Fig. 133 shows one of the numerous 
arrangements adopted by the patentee for the support of vessels 
over the burner. Various forms of apparatus constructed with 
McGlensey 's improvement are used for heating sad-irons, the cast- 
iron plates for batter cakes, and for radiating heat, as in warming 
bath-rooms and other small apartments. For boiling they are use- 
ful, but not so well adapted for evaporation. It is claimed that one 
of them will boil a quart of water in a tin vessel in ten minutes, 
burning at the rate of four cubic feet of gas per hour.* 

* See paper by Prof. P. W. Bedford, Proceedings of American Pharmaceutical 
Association, xiii. 155, 180. 




McG-lensey's gas burner. 



THERMOMETER. 103 



CHAPTER IV. 

ON THE MODES OF MEASURING, REGULATING, AND APPLYING HEAT FOR 
PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 

Thermometer. — The measurement of temperature, which is of 
practical importance in some heat operations, and in ascertaining 
the specific gravity of liquids, is effected by the use of 
a thermometer. These, as made for the measurement Fig. 134. 
of ordinary changes in the temperature of the atmo- ^ 

sphere, are of various cheap patterns, generally having a 



-^ , — ~_ . — ~ ^ — ^ — ~~i^ ^ , ^ j ^ — — _, — 

small range from a few degrees below zero of Fahren- 
heit, to about 120° above it. Fig. 134 represents a 
thermometer such as is convenient in a chemical or 
pharmaceutical laboratoiy. It is graduated by Fahren- 
heit's scale from — 20° to -f 640°, and adapted to im- 
mersing in liquids the temperature of which is to be 
measured. 

In the United States and Great Britain, Fahrenheit's 
scale is popularly used; but as the student is liable to 
see Centigrade and Reaumur's scales referred to in 
works written in continental Europe, and as the former 
is generally introduced into chemical laboratories every- 
where, and is mentioned in modern works on chemistry, 
a description of these is necessary, with the mode of 
converting them into Fahrenheit's. 

The Centigrade scale is the best adapted to the wants 
of the scientific, by its decimal arrangement; in it the 
freezing point is zero, and the boiling point of water 
100°, each degree being equal to 1.8 Fahrenheit's. 

Reaumur's scale has the boiling point of water at 80°, 
the zero being at freezing ; it has been superseded, where 
it was formerly used, by Centigrade. 

Fahrenheit's has the zero 32° below the freezing point, 
and 180° between freezing and boiling, so that the latter 
point marks 212°. 

To reduce Centigrade to Fahrenheit's, multiply by 9, 
divide by 5, and add 32. To reduce Fahrenheit's to 
Centigrade, subtract 32, multiply by 5, and divide by 9. 

To reduce Reaumur's to Fahrenheit's, multiply by 9, 
divide by 4, and add 32. To reduce Fahrenheit's to 
Reaumur's, subtract 32, multiply by 4, and divide by 9. 

The following diagram illustrates the relation of T hermo- 
these three scales to each other. Those who wish can meter. 



104 APPLYING HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 

consult tables of equivalent temperatures in Gray's Supplement to 
the Pharmacopoeia, folios 61-63. 



Fahrenheit. 



Fig. 135. 

Centigrade. 



Reaumur. 




212. 

192 

152 

132 

112 

92 

72 

52 

32. 




100, 
80 
60 
40 
20 





Diagram of different thermometers. 

In most of the operations of the pharmaceutical shop and labora- 
tory, the intervention of some conducting medium, between the 
fire and the vessel in which the operation is performed, is useful, 
either to prevent its too sudden elevation and depression of tem- 
perature, or to regulate the degree of heat applied. For these pur- 
poses, sand-, water-, and steam-baths were invented. 

The Sand-Bath. — This is used to prevent the sudden elevation 
and depression of temperature, and where arrangements for burning 
gas, such as are described in the last chapter, are at command, it may 
be dispensed with in nearly all cases. A convenient sand-bath, at 
all times ready during the winter season, is furnished by the top of 
a stove, such as is used with anthracite coal for warming apart- 
ments; a rim of sheet iron, stretched around the top and projecting 
from three to four inches above it, makes a good receptacle for the 
sand, which becomes more or less heated according as the fire is 
increased or not, and may be used to digest infusions, to dry pre- 
cipitates, and to evaporate any solutions the vapors of which would 
not contaminate the atmosphere injuriously. A shallow cast-iron 
pot, fitting, though not too closely, the top of a stove or furnace, is 
also a good arrangement; this is to be filled only so full of sand as 
is necessary completely to cover the bottom of the vessel to be set 
in it; as a general rule, the greater the amount of sand, the greater 
will be the waste of heat. In introducing a vessel to be heated, it 
may be plunged into the sand, so as to cover the bottom and sides 
more or less, according to the degree of heat required; and when 
the diameter of the sand-bath is greater than that of the fire below, 



WATER-BATH. 105 

there is a similar choice between placing it immediately over the 
source of heat, or in a less heated position near the edge. 

The Water-Bath. — An extemporaneous water-bath is prepared by 
procuring a rather shallow tin or copper cup, and an evaporating 
dish of just such size as will completely cover it, projecting slightly 
over its edge. Those glass evaporating dishes which have a pro- 
jecting edge turned over and downwards will fit more securely 
over the metallic vessel without being pushed out of place by the 
force used in stirring. They are also convenient from not allowing 
the ready escape of steam round the edge; this, being condensed, 
either passes back into the cup, or drops from the edge. 

The lower vessel is to be nearly filled with water, and the sub- 
stance to be heated placed in the evaporating dish, which being 
adjusted to its place, the whole is put over the fire. 

The temperature of boiling water under ordinary circumstances 
of pressure being- 212°, it is obvious that the contents of the evapo- 
rating dish cannot reach a higher point; it is found, practically, that 
two or three degrees of heat are lost in passing from the boiling 
water through the dish, so that, when the water below is boiling, 
the temperature of the contents of the dish will not exceed 210°. 
Aqueous liquids will not boil in a water- 
bath, but many of the solutions used for Fig. 136. 
the preparation of extracts, being alco- 
holic, undergo active ebullition at this 
temperature. 

A disadvantage attending upon an 
extemporaneous arrangement arises 
from the rapid escape of steam from 
the lower vessel on all sides of the cap- 
sule: now the quantity of vapor which Metallic water-bath. 
will be suspended in a given space in 

the atmosphere is constant at any given temperature, so that, in 
proportion as such space is saturated with moisture, further evapo- 
ration is retarded. 

A convenient water-bath, less liable to the above objection, is 
here figured ; it is constructed of tinned iron, or preferably of copper 
tinned, and consists of an outer vessel or jacket 
soldered on to a shallow dish made like a porce- Fig. 137. 

lain capsule, without seams, coated with tin, 
designed to contain the evaporating solution. 
The jacket is fed with water by the tube, which 
may be fitted more or less tightly with a cork. 
It is tightly corked when the vessel is to be 
tilted in pouring off the contents of the upper Por ceiain water-bath, 
part of the vessel, but loosely during the applica- 
tion of heat. In drying substances, and in all cases where it is 
desirable to prevent the escape of steam from the water in the 
jacket into the surrounding air, the cork may be perforated and 
fitted with a steam-pipe of glass conducted into a vessel of cold 
water (Fig. 136), into the flue of a chimney, or through a window. 





106 APPLYING HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES, 



Fig. 138. 



When put out of use, the water-bath should be carefully dried by 
wiping out the upper or evaporating vessel, and placing it in such a 
position that the jacket will be completely drained of its moisture. 
By adapting to the cork, as above, a tube of glass, and passing it 
into a vessel of mercury, steam may be obtained under pressure so 
as to raise the temperature of the bath somewhat above 212°, and 
this arrangement may be resorted to with advantage when a more 
rapid evaporation is desirable than that afforded at the ordinary 

water-bath temperature. .Steam with regu- 
lated pressure is applied on a large scale in 
a variety of manufacturing processes, as ex- 
plained in the sequel. 

Fig. 187 shows a porcelain water-bath, 
sold by the importers of Berlin ware, which 
is too small except for experimental pur- 
poses, or for the preparation of very small 
quantities of extracts or chemical products ; 
it is, however, very convenient in these 
cases, and not liable to corrosion. 

Figs. 138, 139, and 140 represent the 
so-called Hecker's farina boiler, which is 
useful for the preparation of farinaceous 
articles of food, particularly where milk is 
employed ; it obviates the danger of scorch- 
ing, which is constantly experienced in 
heating milk over a naked fire. Fig. 138 
is an outside tin vessel with a spout for 
the ready introduction of water. Fig. 139 
is the inner vessel fitting into the above for 
containing the farinaceous substance, and 
Fig. 140 shows the two as fitted together. 

Fig. 141 represents a little apparatus for 
applying the principle of the water-bath to 
drying precipitates on filters ; it consists of 
a kettle of water, surmounted by a steam jacket surrounding a fun- 
nel, which is closed at bottom, so that a substance laid into it is 
heated to about 212° when the water reaches the boiling point. 
Fig. 142 illustrates the application of the water-bath to filtering 



Piar. 139. 



Tier. 140. 




Hecker's farina 
boiler. 



Fi<z. 141. 



Fig. 142. 





Water-bath for drying filters. 



Apparatus for hot filtration. 



STEAM-BATH. 



107 



liquids while hot. Physick's jelly strainer, described in the chap- 
ter on Filtrations, operates on the same principle. 

The Steam-Bath. — A steam boiler, by arranging pipes to commu- 
nicate with suitable forms of apparatus, and by adapting the tit- 
tings and safety valve so as to regulate the pressure, may be made 
to supply the heat necessary for the processes of boiling, evaporating, 
digesting, distilling, drying, and even for heating apartments. 

In manufacturing establishments this is now generally adopted 
as the chief or only means of generating and applying heat, and its 
applications are so varied that it constitutes one of the leading 
topics of illustration and description in works on technology. The 
design and scope of the present work do not include the details of 
costly apparatus, and it will be sufficient here to advert to the 
principle on which steam-baths are constructed, and illustrate a 
practical apparatus for ordinary pharmaceutic use. 

Fig. 143 exhibits a steam boiler and still devised for the use of 
pharmacists where it is inexpedient to use large steam boilers. 



Pig. 143. 




Steam boiler and evaporating pan with steam jacket. 

This apparatus is adapted to the same purposes as the pharma- 
ceutical still, and for operations requiring a regulated temperature 
above that of a water-bath. A is a boiler of thick copper, capable 
of bearing high pressure ; it is one foot nine inches long by seven 
inches in diameter, held in position by an iron frame, and heated 
by a stand of Bunsen burners, supplied with gas through a flexible 
tube; seven burners are found sufficient. The water supply-pipe on 
the extreme left is furnished with a valve at H*, which closes when 
sufficient water is contained in the boiler; the water flows into this 
pipe through a flexible tube connected with a hydrant, or it may 
be filled from any vessel by the use of a funnel, the air having vent, 
and the elevation of the water being ascertained by means *of the 
gauge cocks at the other end of the boiler; G is a safety valve, and 
E and F are cocks for regulating the flow of steam. The boiler is 
connected by iron pipes, coupled together, with the steam jacket B, 



108 APPLYING HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 

which surrounds an evaporating pan of tinned copper ; this is se- 
cured to the dome C by means of brass flanges and clamps, between 
which a coil of common lampwick is interposed, rendering the 
junction steam-tight. The drip from the steam jacket may lead to 
an adjacent sink or be discharged in any receiving vessel ; it sup- 
plies an abundance of distilled water of sufficient purity for ordi- 
nary use. When this apparatus is used for distillation, it requires 
to be connected with a suitable condenser. A jacket of galvanized 
iron should be placed over the boiler, leaving a space of an inch on 
all sides so as to confine the heated air around it. 

As already stated, water boiling under ordinary circumstances of 
pressure does not exceed the temperature of 212° F., and the utility 
of the water-bath is limited to processes in which that degree of 
heat is sufficient; but if water be boiled underpressure, the temper- 
ature rises in direct and invariable proportion to the pressure, and 
in this way may be rendered available with great facility and cer- 
tainty in processes in the arts. 

In most almshouses, prisons, insane asylums, and hospitals, 
arrangements are made for the introduction of steam pipes either 
directly into the apartments to be warmed, or, preferably, into air 
chambers through which fresh air is made to pass by a system of 
ventilation into the several parts of the building. The two meth- 
ods are also advantageously combined. The boiler being located 
in a fire-proof basement, or at a suitable distance from the main 
building, the danger of conflagration is greatly lessened. 

To the physician, the study of these properties of steam, in their 
applications to the warming and ventilation of public buildings, is 
even more interesting and important than their manifold uses in 
pharmacy and the industrial arts, and it is to be regretted that no 
means of systematic instruction upon these and kindred matters of 
public utility are placed within the reach of those who are so liable 
to be called upon for advice in relation to what might be called 
architectural hygiene. 



PART III. 

INORGANIC PHARMACEUTICAL CHEMISTRY. 



CHAPTER I. 

CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 

In presenting to view the medicines derived from the mineral 
kingdom, such preliminary details will be given in regard to those 
which fall within the range of the shop as shall render their pre- 
paration as easy and as uniformly successful as possible, while those 
derived from the manufacturing chemist will be described chiefly 
with reference to their uses and the modes of ascertaining their 
purity, with incidental references to their sources, modes of prepa- 
ration, composition, and rationale. 

Some of the chemical substances among the preparations in the 
Pharmacopoeia are rarely made by the apothecary, while those in 
the list are chiefly interesting to the pharmaceutical student as 
illustrating the laws of chemical reaction, and as showing the 
marvellous agency of chemistry in meeting the requirements of 
medical science. Much of the detail appropriate to works on tech- 
nology, being destitute of practical value to the class for whom this 
book is mainly written, will be omitted. 

The laws of chemical reaction, of such utility not only to the 
physician, and pharmacist, but to every individual of whatever 
profession or pursuit, although not falling within the scope of the 
present work, are recommended to the careful study of its readers. 

The fact, which underlies the science of chemistry, that chemical 
substances combine with each other in definite proportions, forming 
compounds, the combining proportions of which are always equal 
to the sum of combining proportions of the elements they contain, 
is among the first to be thoroughly mastered by the student ; and 
he will find advantage in the study of the numbers given along 
with the symbolic formulae under each heading contained in Part 
III. These have been revised for the present edition in accordance 
with the views of modern chemists. 

Nothing so facilitates the acquisition of scientific knowledge as 
an intelligible, concise, and familiar nomenclature. This has been 
the subject of much discussion recently, and an attempt has been 
made to modify the nomenclature of the Pharmacopoeia to corre- 
spond with recent chemical works. 

Notwithstanding the elementary and practical character of this 
work, I have not hesitated, as in former editions, to employ the 

(109) 



110 CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 

abbreviated method of notation in use among chemists, by which 
the rationale of the formation and the composition of complex 
bodies is expressed by clear and intelligible symbols with numbers 
attached to designate the equivalent proportions of the elements 
concerned. The composition and relations of compound bodies 
can only be shown at a glance in this way, and it is earnestly re- 
commended to the pharmaceutical student that he will in no case 
neglect to address himself to a full comprehension of these sym- 
bolic formulas, as a necessary groundwork of his studies. 

The recent modifications of the views of chemists have resulted 
in the introduction of new formulae. For expressing these, which 
as they are now used in the chemical text-books are so different 
from those formerly in use as to produce some confusion in the 
minds of those educated a few years ago, we have generally given 
both ; but their full explanation would extend the text beyond the 
plan of this work, and the student is referred to Dr. Attiield's 
General and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, a work written with especial 
view to the needs of the student in this respect. 

Chemical Processes. 

By way of preface to the study of the modes of preparation of 
the chemical substances treated of in the subsequent chapters, the 
following brief description of some chemical processes, the most 
of which are practicable on a small scale in the pharmaceutical 
laboratory, is appended: — 

1st. Processes of separation founded on volatility. 

Distillation, Fractional Distillation, Destructive Distillation, 
Sublimation, Dehydration, Calcination, Ignition, Torre- 
faction. 
2d. Processes of reduction and absorption. 

Reduction of Oxides, Oxidation, Generation and Absorption 
of Gases. 
3d. Processes of purification. 

Decoloration, Washing, Decantation, Filtration. 
4th. Collection of chemical solids. 

Granulation, Crystallization, Precipitation, Fusion. 

Distillation, when conducted in a small way, is chiefly accom- 
plished by the use of glass retorts, with or without receivers or 
other means of condensation. 

Fig. 144. 




Plain retort, tubulated receiver, and adapter. 



DISTILLATION" 



111 



Fig. 145. 



Fig. 144 exhibits a plain retort with an adapter a, by which it 
is connected with a tubulated receiver 6, thus furnishing the two 
conditions of an apparatus for distillation (see page 110)— a vessel 
for heating a liquid to be distilled, and a surface to be refrigerated 
for the condensation of the vapor formed. 

The substance to be distilled being introduced into the retort and 
heat applied, the vapor given off passes at once into its beak or 
neck, and, if this is not refrigerated, into the receiver. In some 
cases, particularly in treating very volatile liquids, it is found more 
convenient to apply cold directly to 
the beak, as in Fig. 145, in which 
pieces of linen or cotton cloth, folded 
several thicknesses and laid length- 
wise on the beak, are kept constantly 
wet by the dropping of water from 
a funnel suspended above it. At the 
point <2, below the lower edge of the 
wet cotton, a piece of lampwick, or 
waxed string, is tied tightly round 
the beak, to conduct off the descend- 
ing water. The receiver here shown, 
though not tubulated as in the other 
plate, is quilled or drawn out into a 
fine tube, which enters the receiv- 
ing vessel below ; this, being fully 
refrigerated, insures the complete condensation of the liquid. 

When the liquid to be distilled will condense at a moderate 
elevation of temperature, the mode of refrigeration last mentioned 
is conducted without the use of a receiver, the distillate being col- 
lected directly from the beak of 




Retort with quilled receiver. 



the retort, from which it drops as 
fast as it accumulates. Some- 
times the receiver is refrigerated, 
and not the beak of the retort, 
and this is perhaps the most com- 
mon arrangement for retort dis- 
tillation. It is shown in Fig. 
146, which represents a plain re- 
tort, a common flask adjusted to 
it as a receiver, and set into a 
basin, which, by being kept filled 
with water, would also facilitate 
the refrigeration of the flask by 
wet cloths laid upon it. Where 
this arrangement is adopted, care 
should be taken not to secure the 
beak of the retort tightly into 
the neck of the receiver, in which 
case the expansion of the heated 



Fig. 146. 




Distillation with tubulated retort and 
receiver. 



112 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 



air and vapors, on commencing the operation, would lead to a 
rupture of some part of the apparatus. 

The plain retort is almost superseded of late years by the tubu- 
lated, which has the advantage of allowing the more ready intro- 
duction of substances to be 
Fig. 147. distilled, and, by loosening the 

stopper, the prevention of acci- 
dents from the too great tension 
of the vapor, and from the too 
sudden refrigeration of the re- 
tort, which would cause some 
condensed distillate to flow 
back, endangering the safety of 
the retort. 

A little ring, made frequently 
of straw and bound with twine, 
known to chemists as a grummet, furnishes an excellent rest for 
flasks and retorts, which would be likely to be fractured if set upon 
any substance that conducts heat rapidly. A recent improvement 
in this article, shown in Fig. 148, is to make it of India-rubber 
hose joined by passing the two ends over a plug of wood which fits 




Tubulated retort. 



Fig. 148. 





Grummet. 

tightly into it. To make it more satisfactory, however, three short 
transverse sections of similar hose, of a size sufficiently large to pass 
over the hose composing the ring, are placed one over the joint and 
the others at equal distances apart. This arrangement permits a 
circulation of air around the bottom of the flask, or if the flask is 
placed in a water-bath a constant yet quiet circulation of fluid takes 
place around it. For a full description see paper of Dr. Squibb in 
Proceedings of Amer. Pharm. Assoc, for 1873. 

Fig. 149 represents the well-known Liebig's condenser, which 
may be constructed on a variety of patterns, and of different 
materials. 

It consists of a tin tube 18 inches long and 2J inches in diameter, 
and having the ends reduced to 1J inch. The funnel a is the upper 
termination of a very small tin tube, which, passing down the 
whole length of the apparatus, enters it near the lower extremity, 
where it is extended by a bent leaden tube, as shown by the 
dotted lines, to the very bottom, at b. A short piece of thin lead 
pipe, c, leads from near the apex of the condenser, and, passing 



DISTILLATION, 



113 



out through a perforation into which it is soldered, terminates 
about two inches below, dd is a glass tube one inch in diameter, 
drawn out and bent at its lower end, which passes through the 

Fig. 149. 




Fis:. 150. 



Liebig's condenser. 

whole length of the apparatus, being secured at either end by 
the perforated corks e e, which must be perfect and as soft as can 
be obtained. / is a stout piece of sheet copper soldered on to 
the main tube, and made to work by a screw upon the wooden 
upright g. 

A smooth and even perforation may be made by a 
brass cork-borer, Fig. 150, or a rat-tail file, Fig. 151, or 
both, so as to constitute a water-tight joint. A shoe- 
maker's file, which is a straight cut file on one side, 
and a. rasp on the other, one half being curved on the 
face and the other half flat, will be found to be of 
great advantage in fitting corks to the different uses 
they are to be applied to. 

The use of cement or luting to surround the cork is 
necessary if they are not very perfect and very com- 
pletely fitted, and as no alco- 
holic liquids will come in 
contact with them, dissolved 
sealing-wax is found to an- 
swer a good purpose. Gum- 
elastic perforated stoppers may be advantageously sub- 
stituted for corks, and require no luting. The expense 
of a condenser such as here described is from $3.50 to 
$5. The bottom of the wooden stand should be grooved 
on the under side and filled in with melted lead, to pre- 
vent the ill effects of warping, and to give solidity to 
the whole. 



Fig. 151. 



Rat-tailed file. 



Set of cork- 
borers. 



114 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY 



Fig. 152 represents Liebig's condenser made entirely of heavy 
glass tubes, fitted together by means of perforated gum-elastic 
stoppers. The cold water supply and discharge pipes consist entirely 



Fig. 152. 



Fig. 153. 



Liebig's condenser, of glass. 




Stand for condenser, of glass. 



Fig. 154. 



of gum-elastic hose; the end tube is not bent or drawn to a small 
opening, and may be cleansed with facility by a swab. The chief 
disadvantage of these is their liability to breakage from rough 
handling or sudden changes of temperature when in use. They are 
very neat, however, and with care serve a good while. Fig. 153 
is a convenient form of condenser stand, which, 
by raising and depressing either end, gives the 
proper inclination to the tube. Where there is 
a deficiency of room on the operating counter, 
the condenser may be hung from the ceiling or 
from brackets, being drawn into position when 
needed. A tin trough is a good support under 
these circumstances. 

The objection due to the space taken up by 
Liebig's condenser upon the operating table has 
been overcome by Dr. E. R. Squibb by an ar- 
rangement in which the vapor tube is doubled, 
forming a U, shown in Fig. 154. This arrange- 
ment, besides, renders the condenser more effec- 
tive. The outer lines represent the water case 
tube, v v the vapor tube of U shape, with a 
small opening at the lower end from which 
condensed liquid escapes to a proper recipient, 
w T hile any uncondensed vapor passes to the 
other leg of the tube, and is there condensed 
by the cooled surface and downward flow of 
condensed liquid. R is the refrigerating tube, 
descending to the lower end of the water case, 
through which cold water is supplied ; while e 
is the exit tube for the refrigerating water after 
it has performed its function. The apparatus is 
supported by a ring and suitable clamp in the 
general apparatus holder, devised by Dr. Squibb, 
and hereafter to be noticed. A more lengthened 
description will be found in Proceedings of Ame- 
rican Pharmaceutical Association, vol. xxi. 

Fig. 155 represents a condenser supported on 
a retort stand, having freedom of motion in 
every direction; x is a cast-iron foot, in which is fixed a solid rod 
of iron z. The condenser, as here represented, is designed to be 




Squibb's upright con 
denser, of glass. 



DISTILLATION, 



115 



made of brass, with a glass tube fitted into it with corks, as in the 
other case; the comparative size of the outer tube, as here shown, 
is much smaller, which requires a much more rapid passage of the 
cold water through it, especially in distilling very volatile liquids. 
The Gay-Lussac holder a, and the rings, are usually made of brass 



in this arrangement. 




Liebig's brass condenser in retort stand. 

A mechanical support for the retort and refrigerating apparatus 
is, of course, absolutely necessary in the arrangement of the distil- 
latory apparatus. At least one retort stand is quite necessary, even 
in connection with the Liebig's condenser, Fig. 155; in which case 
one of the rings might have a sufficiently long handle, connecting 
it with the screw that clasps the upright rod, to hold a retort or a 
flask at a sufficient distance from the condenser to be adjusted to 
it for use; but this is not the case with any that I have seen, and 
would render the whole apparatus unsteady when loaded with the 
liquid. In Fig. 145, it will be seen that as many as three retort 
stands are used in a small operation. The frequent necessity for 
using several retort stands in one operation, and its consequent in- 
conveniences, induced Dr. E. "R. Squibb to devise what he has 
justly termed a general apparatus stand ; which consists of a cast-iron 
plate 9 by 15 inches, into which near the centre an upright wrought- 



116 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 



iron pipe, f inch external diameter, is firmly secured. A round- 
bottomed circular sand-bath, with a horizontal flange around the 
brim, notched to receive wires for fastening any vessel in the bath, 
is attached to a suitable and peculiar clamp, which grasps the 
upright rod and thus supports it in its place. In two adjustable 
rings, of cast-iron, three movable rods are made to slide to or 
from the centre, through holes made at equal distances apart; 
these rods are square and are fixed in any desired position by 
thumb screws; their direction is somewhat oblique to the horizon- 
tal plane of the rings. The rings may be placed upon the rod with 
the thumb screws up or down, and are secured by the same device to 
the supporting rod. A long sand-bath, 6 by 17 inches, and } inch 
in depth, is attached to the rod in the same manner ; it may also be 
used as a drying table. Two thin cast-iron plates, 16J inches long 
by 3J wide, also arranged with clamp to attach to the upright rod, 

Fig. 156. 



QQQQOoO r~— ^-SQQ 
000000° 




"t 



T 



^^ 



£ 



je5}Q 




General apparatus stand. 



are perforated with a number of holes of various sizes, and four 
slots of gradually increasing width furnish ready means of sup- 
porting test-tubes, flasks, and a variety of vessels having tube 
necks; they also serve as shelves for the support of any vessels 



DISTILLATION, 



11' 



during the various operations for which the apparatus is adapted. 
Fig. 156 illustrates this apparatus; but for a more detailed account, 
the reader should consult the Proceedings, as before mentioned. 

Fig. 157 will give an idea of the arrangement of the retort and 
vessel for supplying the condenser with water and that for catch- 



Fig. 157. 




Retort stand for use in distillation. 

ing the waste water upon one retort stand, which, however, must 
be in due proportion to the size of the condenser. 

When put together, the apparatus for distillation will be com- 
plete as arranged in Fig 158. The tin bucket A has a small brass 
cock, which is so regulated in using the apparatus as to drop the 
water either slowly or rapidly as the warming of the water in the 
condenser may require. 

The only use of the funnel m is to prevent the splashing of the 
water as it falls from the condenser. By placing the heavy receiv- 
ing vessel n on the wooden base of the retort stand, the weight of 
the retort I is counterbalanced. 

Gum-elastic tubes often become hard, and can be rendered flexible 
by soaking with glycerine. 

A flask with perforated cork and glass tube, as shown in Fig. 
159, may be substituted for the retorts before described, an arrange- 
ment well adapted to distilling very volatile liquids, and those 
which boil with great violence. This figure also shows a tube for in- 



118 CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACT, 

Fig. 158. 




Complete apparatus for distillation. 



Fig. 159. 



troducing fresh portions of the liquid with- 
out removing the cork ; the tube, being bent, 
retains a portion of liquid in the bulb and 
adjacent curve, which prevents the escape of 
vapor from the interior. It is designed to 
extend only a little below the cork. In case 
of any stoppage in the apparatus by which 
an accumulation of vapor might take place 
in the flask or retort, this tube would serve 
as a safety valve, and the liquid being forced 
out would allow of the escape of the accu- 
mulated steam. 

From the description and illustration of 
apparatus now given, the reader will have a 
good idea of the apparatus as constructed 
on a small scale. In using it, a volatile liquid 
or mixture containing a volatile ingredient 
being introduced into a retort or flask con- 
nected as before described, and heat applied, 
the volatile ingredient will rise in vapor, and, 
being cooled by contact with the neck of the 
retort, the receiver, or the glass tube of the Liebig's condenser, will 
be condensed, and may be collected in a liquid and pure condition. 




Flask and safety tube. 



DISTILLATION. 119 

It is a necessary precaution, in manipulating with alcoholic or ethe- 
real liquids, as in the preparation of spirit of nitric ether, to use a 
water-bath for the regulation of the temperature, and for protection 
in case of a fracture of the retort. The use of a saturated solution 
of alum, which boils at 220°, and of chloride of zinc, which is avail- 
able for any temperature below 320°, and of fixed oils, which boil 
at from 500° to 600° F., will occasionally serve good purposes in 
the* process of distillation. In all processes the heat and refrigera- 
tion must be carefully adjusted, so that no portion of uncondensed 
vapor shall escape, especially if of a poisonous, corrosive, or inflam- 
mable nature. 

One of the chief practical difficulties in distilling arises from the 
irregularity of the boiling of liquids in glass vessels, occasioning 
violent bumping, and sometimes the fracture of the vessel. In 
treating resinous substances in this way, and in the preparation of 
hydrocyanic acid, where a large amount of heavy precipitate is 
present in the liquid, this renders the operation one of great diffi- 
culty and annoyance. The best remedy for this is found in the 
diffusion of the heat over the whole surface of the retort in contact 
with the liquid, and in the interposition of angular fragments of 
insoluble material, such as rock crystal or broken glass, among the 
particles of the liquid. It is entirely prevented by a glass rod or 
a coil of metallic wire reaching from the bottom to the surface of 
the liquid, which serves to diffuse and equalize the heat. Advan- 
tage is gained by covering the bottom of the glass vessel with 
wire gauze, or by coating the retort with metallic silver on its 
inner surface. This may be done by reducing a solution of ammo- 
nio-nitrate of silver, by boiling it in the vessel to be plated, with 
oils of cinnamon and cloves dissolved in alcohol. Flasks may be 
coated on the outside with metallic copper, so as to answer an ex- 
cellent purpose, by the aid of a battery. 

Fractional distillation is that modification of the process by 
which ingredients of different volatility are separated from one 
another. It requires special precautions for ascertaining the tem- 
perature applied, and for changing the receiving vessel so as to 
collect the products volatilized at each successive boiling point as 
the process proceeds. A thermometer inserted into the retort or 
still through a cork, or a tube passing near to the bottom, will 
serve to indicate the variations of temperature, and a quilled re- 
ceiver will be found to facilitate the collection of the successive 
products ; when a bath is used, the temperature may be ascertained 
by immersing the thermometer in it. 

Destructive distillation is a process by which organic bodies are 
subjected to a gradually increased temperature, whereby the origi- 
nal condition is entirely broken up, the resulting products being 
of a less complex composition. To guard as much as possible 
against oxidation by the atmospheric oxygen, the operation is con- 
ducted in strong glass retorts, or, on a larger scale, in iron or 
earthenware retorts or cylinders. Complex organic bodies yield 
generally a large quantity of incondensable gases, consisting of 



120 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 



carbo-hydrogens of varying composition, an aqueous liquor con- 
taining formic or acetic acid, an oily liquid composed of creasote, 
carbolic acid, empyreumatic oils, etc., and a dark brown or black 
body of a honey-like consistence, like tar. If nitrogen is present 
in the original substance in other forms than nitric acid, it is found 
usually in the most volatile portions in the form of ammonia and 
various other ternary organic alkalies (see Syllabus of Organic Al- 
kalies). The residue in the retort consists of carbon mixed with 
the inorganic bases, which are combined with mineral acids, except 
nitric acid, which is decomposed. In their crude state a peculiar 
smoky odor is attached to all the products obtained by this pro- 
cess, which odor is called empyreumatic. 

Instances of products of dry distillation are pyroligneous acid, 
oil of tobacco, oil of amber, resin oil, coal oil, and illuminating gas. 

Sublimation. — The dry distillation of solid substances which yield 
at once a solid volatile product, either pre-existing in the substance 
or the result of the decomposing influence of heat, is called subli- 
mation. The apparatus consists essentially of a subliming vessel 
and a condensing vessel, varied by the volatility of the sublimed 
product. The condensing surface must invariably be out of the 
fire, but so adjacent that the required temperature can be main- 
tained till the vapor reaches it. In the separation of benzoic acid 
from benzoin, and pyrogallic acid from galls or their aqueous ex- 
tract, a shallow iron pot covered by a diaphragm of porous paper 
and surmounted by a cap of glazed paper constitutes a suitable 
apparatus ; it may be heated on a sand-bath, the heat being so regu- 
lated and the diaphragm and cap so arranged that none of the 
vaporized acid shall escape. In the manufacture of muriate and 
carbonate of ammonium, and of corrosive sublimate and calomel, 
arrangements are required for operating on a large scale and with 
precautions suggested by experience, the vapor in the latter case 

Fig. 160. 





Apparatus for subliming camphor in pulverulent form. 

being condensed in a condition of very minute division, by a cur- 
rent of cold air, aqueous vapor, or water. Camphor is refinedor 
freed from impurities by sublimation into large glass balloons, which 
are afterwards broken ; and the condensation of subliming iodine, 



DEHYDRATION AND CALCINATION. 121 

in order to avoid loss, is effected in a series of globular condensers 
connected with one another. 

In many small operations, glass tubes closed at one end, called 
reduction tubes, or two flasks, one adjusted to the other and placed 
in such position that one may be plunged in a sand-bath below the 
level of the contained material while the other is cooled, may serve 
a good purpose. 

Fig. 160 shows an apparatus for subliming camphor in fine pow- 
der for pharmaceutical uses. It is a modification of that proposed 
by John C. Lowd, of Boston. {Proceedings Amer. Thar, Association, 
1871.) The retort is of copper, and the receiving vessel of tinned 
iron or pasteboard; the large admixture of air dilutes the vapor so 
that the camphor is deposited in a fine dry powder. 

Dehydration and Calcination. — The application of heat to inor- 
ganic crystalline substances is sometimes with a view to the sepa- 
ration of water, and sometimes for the expulsion of carbonic acid 
or other volatile constituent. Water is present in chemical com- 
pounds either as water of hydration or of crystallization. In this 
form it may be regarded as a weak acid combined with a base 
(KO,H 2 0), or as an essential constituent of certain salts, basic water. 
"Water of hydration cannot, in most instances, be removed by heat, 
or, if expelled, the nature of the compound is altered. (See Sodii 
Pyrophosphas.) 

Fig. 161 exhibits the porcelain spatulas, which are useful for 
stirring the mass, which first dissolves in its own water of crystal- 
lization, and afterwards dries, requiring 
much stirring. Fig. 161. 

For dehydrating, a water-bath heat f p. 

is sometimes sufficient, since water of " 

crystallization is generally driven off i s /> 

at a temperature of 212° F., and a heat ' ' \ 

much above that is apt to decompose the 

salt ; but for sulphate of iron, complete ] ^ ^^ " :^Bj) 
dehydration requires 300° F., and for Porcelain spatulas. 

alum 450° F. is directed ; for sulphate 

and carbonate of sodium, which are efflorescent, a lower temper- 
ature is sufficient. 

In organic substances this water may sometimes be replaced by 
weak acids, the weaker bases, or certain salts, and is then called 
constitutional water: thus, cane sugar, C 12 H 18 9 +2II 2 0, combines 
with oxide of lead to form C 12 H ]8 9 + 2PbO. 

The carbonates of the alkalies, potassa, soda, and lithia, do not 
lose their carbonic acid by a high heat, while those of the alkaline 
earths, baryta, lime, and magnesia, and of the heavier metallic 
oxides, are decarbonated by calcination, the former, especially, re- 
quiring a very high heat. In the processes of metallurgy, calcina- 
tion is often used, not only with the view of expelling volatile 
products, but also for the purpose of oxidizing certain elements 



122 CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IX PHARMACY. 

present in the ores, especially sulphides. The process is then termed 
roasting. 

The chief use of calcination in pharmacy is in the preparation of 



Incineration and Ignition are the same as calcination, except when 
applied to organic substances with a view to burning up the car- 
bonaceous principles, converting them into carbonic acid, which re- 
mains combined with the alkali present. The free admission of air 
is essential for this purpose, and may be facilitated by inclining the 
crucible. The last portions of carbon, when consumed with diffi- 
culty, may be oxidized by the careful addition of a little nitric acid 
to the cold residue, and heating again to redness. 

Tiff. 162. Fig. 163. 






Porcelain, platinum, and hessian crucibles. 

Figs. 162, 163, and 164 exhibit different kinds of crucibles used 
for calcination and ignition in small operations. 

Torre/action or Boasting is a process by which organic substances 
are changed in their qualities by the modification of some constit- 
uents without altering others. The most familiar instance of this 
is the roasting of coffee by which some empyreumatic principles are 
generated without destroying its peculiar principle, caffeina, which 
is itself volatile ; by this process coffee, is adapted to the purposes 
of a beverage. Ehubarb subjected to the process of torrefaction, 
care being taken to have it in a suitable coarse powder, and to pre- 
vent its being carbonized, loses its cathartic properties without 
impairing its astringency. This is doubtless due to the volatiliza- 
tion of the active principle chrysophanic acid. Burnt sponge, an 
old remedy of great repute in scrofulous diseases, has been super- 
seded since the introduction of iodine; in preparing it, the process 
is carried somewhat further than in the foregoing, and leaves little 
else than the porous charcoal combined with the inorganic constit- 
uents of the sponge, iodides, chlorides, etc. It furnishes an instance 
of carbonization or charring. 

Reduction of Oxides, etc. — This process, so largely practised in the 
manufacture of iron and other metals from their ores, and in other 
extensive chemical operations, is useful to the pharmacist in the 
extraction of metallic arsenic from arsenious acid (As 2 3 ), a prelim- 
inary operation to the preparation of iodide of arsenic. In this in- 
stance carbon is the reducing agent employed; by its combustion it 



i 



CARBONIC ACID PROCESSES. 123 

combines with the oxygen from the arsenious acid, and leaves the 
metal to be sublimed. In a small way, this process may be con- 
ducted in reduction tubes, which are shown in Fig. 165. Another 

Fig. 165. 




Reduction tubes. 



and still more useful application of the process is that for obtaining 
pure metallic iron from its oxide, in which hydrogen is the reducing 
agent, and the resulting preparation is one of the most important 
of the numerous medicinal preparations of iron. The deoxidation 
of inorganic salts by various chemical means is also termed reduc- 
tion; sesquichloride and tersulphate of iron are, by digesting their 
solutions with metallic iron, reduced to protochloride and protosul- 
phate of iron. The reduction of the oxides of the so-called noble 
metals, silver, gold, and platinum is effected without any reducing 
agent, simply by the suitable application of high heat. 

Oxidation. — This change, the reverse of the foregoing, is accom- 
plished, in the dry way, by the combustion of substances having a 
strong affinity for oxygen; at a high temperature these absorb this 
element from the air. In the combustion of metallic zinc, it is 
converted into oxide of zinc (ZnO), and in the cupellation or fusion 
of ores of lead and silver, the semivitrified oxide of lead, litharge, 
is evolved. This method is not adopted in any of the familiar 
operations of pharmacy, but oxidation by nitric acid is resorted to 
in several officinal processes, as in the conversion of protosulphate 
into persulphate of iron, and in the preparation of red oxide of 
mercury. This method, founded upon the facility with which 
nitric acid gives up a portion of its oxygen to substances having an 
affinity for it, is detailed under its several appropriate heads. 

Carbonic Acid Processes. — The conversion of caustic alkalies into 
carbonates is done by heating in contact with carbonaceous ma- 
terial, as in the ignition of potash to form pearlash, and in the 
incineration of organic matters containing alkali, before referred 
to. Dry carbonates may also be further charged with carbonic 
acid by simple exposure to an atmosphere charged with it, as in 
the conversion of pearlash into saleratus, and of partially dried 
carbonate of soda into bicarbonate. The generation of the carbonic 
acid gas is accomplished by decomposing either of the cheap and 
abundant carbonates of lime with a mineral acid ; muriatic is the 
cheapest, and in large operations the best, from its forming a solu- 
ble residue. 

Fig. 166 shows the process of generating this gas, in the bottle «, 



121 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 



Fig. 166. 




Carbonic acid apparatus. 



washing it by passing it through water in the bottle b, by means 
of the pipe d, which passes through a pipe e, of large bore, to the 

bottom; and, finally, through/, con- 
ducting it into a solution to be 
charged with it. This is the process 
as used in the preparation of bicarbo- 
nate of potassium, the vessel c being 
filled with solution of carbonate of po- 
tassium; as the bicarbonate is formed 
the silica present in the carbonate, 
combined with the potassa, is thrown 
out of solution, and the bicarbonate, 
being in crystals, is quite pure and 
combined with a definite proportion 
of water. 

In the manufacture of carbonic acid water, incorrectly called soda 
water, the refrigerated water is charged with an excess of the gas, 
which is generated in a strong close vessel connected with the foun- 
tain by suitable pipes ; in the appropriate place an apparatus for its 
extemporaneous preparation is figured. 

In the preparation of chlorine water, the oxidation of substances 
by the use of nitric acid, and the generation of hydrosulphuric acid, 
special precautions are necessary to prevent the too rapid evolution 
of the noxious gases and their diffusion in the atmosphere. A 
chimney flue furnishes the means of carrying these off, and in the 
construction of a furnace as before described ample facilities may 
be secured. 

The mode of saturating water either with chlorine or hydrosul- 
phuric acid was formerly by the use of a series of Woolf 's bottles, 
figured in works on chemical manipulation. The preparation of 
these involves so much trouble and delay as to operate as a dis- 
couragement to the preparation of the solutions. An extemporane- 
ous process found quite successful is to pass the conducting tube 
from the wash bottle, or the fiask in which they are prepared, into 
a pretty large narrow-mouthed bottle about one- third full of water, 
having another at hand to substitute for it as this becomes filled 
with gas ; these may be dexterously shifted, so as to be alternately 
filled and shaken a few times with the heavy gas, by which means 
it will be more effectually brought into contact with and dissolved 
by the water than it can be by bubbling through a still solution for 
a long time. 

Decoloration, viewed as a process of pharmacy, is mainly accom- 
plished by digesting the substance in solution with charcoal in a 
granular condition. The utility of this decolorizer is in propor- 
tion to its porosity, and hence animal charcoal, which contains 
bone phosphate of lime insinuated among its pores in the process 
of its formation, furnishes a very superior decolorizer. The same 
property which fits the charcoal for this use causes it to absorb 



WASHING OF CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES. 



125 



Fig. 167. 



other constituents of solutions, so that, unless the precaution is 
taken to percolate the charcoal thoroughly with fresh portions of 
some solvent, a portion of the most desirable constituents may be 
lost. In forming solutions of resins, as that of jalap, Professor 
Procter recommends that their powders should be mixed with an 
equal bulk of charcoal, introduced into a percolator on top of a 
layer of charcoal, and then treated with alcohol until the resin 
is dissolved out. In the preparation of the vegetable alkalies, 
animal charcoal is almost invariably employed to decolorize the 
product previous to its final crystallization. 

Washing of Chemical Substances. — In order to remove adhering 
impurities, freshly precipitated powders or recent crystals are fre- 
quently subjected to the process of washing. This is sometimes 
accomplished on a plain filter, Fig. 167, by the aid of a spritz, 
which, besides aiding the removal of 
the solid material on to the filter, is well 
adapted to directing a strong thin cur- 
rent of water or other liquid upon the 
contents of the filter. The concave sur- 
face naturally assumed by the contents 
of a filter is the most favorable to an 
equal diffusion of the liquid through its 
mass. The spritz may be constructed 
by inserting a single tube with a capil- 
lary orifice through a cork into a bottle. 
The bottle being partly filled with water, 
the contained air is compressed by blow- 
ing into it, so that when the bottle is 
quickly inverted it forces out the water 
through the orifice in a jet. The kind 
shown in use in the drawing is more 
complete in its operation; it has two 
tubes, one dipping below the surface of 
the liquid, bent to an acute angle and 
drawn out to a small orifice; the other, 
designed for blowing into the upper part of the bottle, so as by 
compressing the air to induce a stream from the orifice. If a flask 
is substituted for the bottle, the liquid may be heated over a lamp 
or sand-bath, and the washing accomplished by boiling water or 
alcohol. 

Fig. 168 shows an ingenious apparatus, invented by my friend C. 
Wager Hull, of New York, for washing photographic prints, but 
also applicable to any washing process requiring a repeated and 
entire change of water. Being entirely self-acting, it requires no 
care or attention. It consists of A, a water-tight box of any shape ; 
B, a feed-pipe with a faucet; 0, a lead pipe around the inside, per- 
forated with small brad-awl holes, through which the water is evenly 
sprinkled upon the articles to be washed. For paper photographs the 
awl holes should be made at an angle so that the jets will be in the 




Spritz bottle and its use. 



126 



CHEMICAL PROCESSES USED IN PHARMACY. 



Fi£. IRS. 




Hull's automatic washing-box. 



same direction, and thus cause a 
constant current to float the paper 
around the box. A tray of wire 
or a network of twine or any 
suitable perforated diaphragm may 
be placed above and near the bottom 
of the box to receive the articles. 
A siphon enters the box through a 
hole in the bottom, having a broad 
flange of lead which is nailed to 
the bottom, and then passes down 
sufficiently to make a suitable curve 
to the point F, which should be 
one or two inches below the top of 
the box; here it curves again to 
6r, or any point below the line of 
the bottom of the box. The longer the leg D of the siphon, the 
faster will the liquid flow; it is generally connected with a waste 
pipe carrying off the washings into the sewer, and the feed pipe 
may be connected with the street mains or with any suitable reser- 
voir above the box. The successful action of the apparatus depends 
upon the relative size of the feed pipe and siphon ; the former 
should be smaller than the latter; then as soon as the box is filled 
by the action of the sprinklers up to the top of the siphon at F, 
the discharge w^ill begin and go on rapidly till the entire liquid 
contents have run out; then the siphon will cease to act till the 
box fills up again, when it will be discharged in the same way. 
The superiority of this over ordinary tubs for the purpose consists 
in its completely emptying itself at intervals, so that every fresh 
charge of the liquid is pure and free from contamination with pre- 
vious charges, a point of great importance in washing photographic 
prints. 

The subjects of filtration and decantation will be so fully presented 
under the head of Solutions, in the fifth part of this work, that 
they need claim no further notice in this connection. 



Precipitation. — The term precipitation refers to the separation of 
a solid substance, whether in crystal, in powder, or in a moist, tena- 
cious mass, called a magma; whether it falls to the bottom, floats 
in flocculse, collects near the surface, or remains diffused through- 
out the liquid. 

This separation is brought about by a chemical or other change 
affecting solubility, and the substance added to produce it is called 
the precipitant; the solid substance produced, the precipitate. 
Precipitation is frequently produced by the play of affinities, afford- 
ing an insoluble substance from elements which, as previously com- 
bined, constituted soluble compounds ; for, where solutions of chlo- 
ride of sodium and of nitrate of silver are added to each other, 
chloride of silver and nitrate of sodium are produced, the former 
an insoluble salt, and hence precipitated. 




CRYSTALLIZATION. 127 

Whenever two or more chemical substances in solution are 
mixed, if the elements of an insoluble compound are present, that 
insoluble compound will be precipitated. 

Another cause of precipitation is any change in a liquid by 
which it ceases to be a solvent for the particular substance in solu- 
tion. Substances soluble in alcohol, such as iodine, camphor, and 
the resins, on the addition of water, are precipitated, because the 
alcohol forms with water a liquid in which they are insoluble. 

With a view to collecting precipitates deep vessels should be 
employed, preferably larger at the bottom, as in the 
drawing; they favor the ready decantation of the 
liquid. 

The strength of the solutions mixed determines the 
density of the precipitate, and hence, in cases where this 
quality is desirable in the product, and where it is an 
object to collect the precipitate in small bulk with refer- 
ence to its convenient washing, the solutions are made 
correspondingly strong. Hot solutions should be used 
in preference to cold, with a view to the same object, 
and also, in the case of iodide of lead and biniodide of reC jar. a ing 
mercury, which are soluble in the hot liquid, to pro- 
duce handsome and well-defined crystals on cooling. 

Crystallization. — The most characteristic physical phenomena of 
chemical substances are those mathematical forms which they spon- 
taneously assume in passing from the liquid or gaseous to a solid 
condition, and the crystalline form is the purest attainable of chem- 
ical substances. 

Crystals are formed from some volatile substances by the process 
of sublimation, already referred to ; by fusion, in a few instances, 
such as sulphur, some of the metals, and a few anhydrous salts ; but 
more generally on the cooling or gradual evaporation of a solvent, 
or by the production of a less soluble crystalline substance by some 
chemical change in a solution. The vessels best adapted to crys- 
tallization are rather shallow evaporating dishes, or, for large 
operations, wooden or earthenware crystallizers. A hot saturated 
solution being filtered into the vessel for crystallization is to be set 
away in a suitable place, and should not then be disturbed till the 
liquid has become cool or has been nearly all evaporated. The last 
portion of the liquid poured off from the crystals is called the 
mother-liquor, and contains the residuary and most soluble portions 
in concentrated solution, with the less crystallizable impurities. In 
manipulating with costly materials, the mother-liquor is retained 
for admixture with other lots, or subjected to further evaporation 
to obtain another crop of crystals. The size and transparency of 
crystals are most influenced by the slowness and uniformity of their 
deposition, the clearness and purity of the filtered solutions, and 
their proper strength. When a solution is evaporated to a very con- 
centrated condition, shown by the formation of a pellicle or crust 
upon its surface, it generally throws down a confused crystalline 



128 ON THE NON-METALLIC 

mass, but when set aside before it has quite reached its point of satu- 
ration, the gradual evaporation insures a slow formation of large and 
more perfect crystals. The circumstances which promote perfect 
crystallization are thus the reverse of those by which the finest and 
most dense powders are obtained, and, as a general rule, those sub- 
stances most desirable to obtain in the form of powder are not 
those which form elegant crystals. 

Some chemical substances, much used in solution, are preferably 
made in small, imperfectly formed crystals ; sulphate of zinc and 
sulphate of magnesia are familiar instances of this. Some, which 
are crystallizable with great difficulty, are collected from their clear 
solutions by granulation, a process accomplished by constantly stir- 
ring the evaporating solution from the time it begins to thicken 
till the water is entirely driven off. Carbonate and citrate of po- 
tassium are familiar instances of this ; in the case of the latter salt, 
the heat must be carefully managed or the product may be burned. 
{See Powders.) 



CHAPTER II. 

CHEMICAL PROCESSES ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS AND THEIR 
MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS. 

The distinction usually recognized by chemists between the non- 
metallic elements and metals, though arbitrary, is yet well under- 
stood and convenient, and will furnish the basis for the division 
adopted in the present work. Of the thirteen non-metallic elements, 
nearly all enter into medicinal preparations, but only the six fol- 
lowing will require notice in the present chapter — in the following 
order : — 

Oxygen, 0, 16 Iodine, I, 127 Phosphorus, P, 31 

Chlorine, CI, 35.5 Bromine, Br, 80 Sulphur, S, 32 

Compounds containing carbon constitute the larger number of 
organic chemicals treated of in Part IV., while carbonic acid and 
its aqueous solution are appropriately considered in the chapter 
on the mineral acids. The same applies to boron, which forms an 
oxyacid, and hydrogen, which is chiefly useful in the inorganic king- 
dom in water in its well-known acid combination w T ith chlorine ; 
while nitrogen enters into one of the most important of the series 
of acids, and into the equally important alkali, ammonia. 

Oxygen. ( + 0) = 16. 

In a state of combination oxygen is the most extensively diffused 
body in nature, forming one-fifth part of the atmosphere, entering 
as a constituent into water, into nearly all the mineral substances 
composing the crust of the earth, and into most organic products. 



OXYGEN. 



129 



With other elements oxygen unites to form anhydrous acids, as 
formerly denominated, though called by modern chemists anhy- 
drides, as carbonic, C0 2 , sulphurous, S0 2 , and phosphoric acid, P 2 5 , 
which, with water, form the well-known acids so much used in 
chemistry and pharmacy. Some of the compounds of oxygen are 
neutral substances, such as water, H^O, carbonic oxide, CO, and 
nitrous oxide, N 2 0, the first named of which is of great chemical 
interest in connection with the study of salts. The bases, of so much 
interest, were formerly regarded as compounds of the metals with 
proportions of oxygen ; but the term is not used by modern writers, 
who regard the salts as direct compounds of the metals with the 
respective acids — a view so far adopted in the U. S. Pharmacopeia 
as to be recognized in the nomenclature of the last edition. The 
direct combination of oxygen with other bodies is attended with 
the evolution of heat, and sometimes light, which occasions the 
process of oxidation to be much resorted to for the production of 
heat and light without reference to the compounds produced. 
Where a body combines rapidly with oxygen, it is said to be burned, 
and the process of rapid oxidation is called combustion. 

Although oxygen is not used in medicine, except for inhalation 
as an antidote to carbonic oxide or carbonic acid gas, it is an ele- 
ment of great interest not only to the physician and pharmacist, 
but to persons in every department of life. 

Oxygen is prepared by heating binoxideof manganese in an iron 
retort, or more readily, on a small scale, by heating chlorate of 
potassium in a retort of hard glass or a Florence flask. This salt 
contains potassium combined with chloric acid, K,C10 3 , and yields 
the whole of its oxygen (39.2 per cent.) by heating, chloride of 
potassium remaining as a residue ; thus, KC10 3 =KC1 and 30. The 
tubule of the retort, or, if a flask is employed, a bent tube of glass 
secured to it by a cork is carried into a bell glass or other receiver 
filled with water and inverted in a vessel of water; the gas grad- 
ually displaces the water occupying the vessel, which may be 
removed and replaced by another until the whole is collected ; half 
an ounce of chlorate yields 270 cubic inches, 
or nearly a gallon, of oxygen. The chief incon- Fig. 170. 

venience in this process arises from the liability 
to softening of the glass of the retort or to its 
fracture by the intense heat required ; this may 
be partially obviated by mixing two parts of 
the powdered chlorate with one of the binoxide 
of magnesia, Mn0 2 , previously well dried, and by 
subjecting this to a somewhat less intense heat 
the gas will be obtained. The best form of appa- 
ratus for obtaining oxygen is shown in Fig. 170. 
It consists of a copper flask, and a tube bent at 
right angles, secured by a gallows screw to the 
head of the flask ; the lower end of the tube is 
carried below water, and the gas as it rises is 
caught in appropriate bell glasses. 0xyg en apparatus. 




130 ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

To collect this gas for inhalation it should be passed into a tubu- 
lated bell jar, over the tubule of which a collapsed and softened 
bladder, or, preferably, a bag of gum-elastic, has been secured. By 
submerging the jar the gas ascends into the bag, and it may then 
be secured arid administered by a breathing tube. 

In cases where, from the stoppage of flues or deficient ventilation 
in chambers, individuals are subjected to the inhalation of noxious 
products of combustion, carbonic acid and carbonic oxide gases, 
producing more or less complete narcotism, sometimes resulting in 
death, oxygen gas, administered by the lungs before respiration has 
ceased, or by means of artificial or induced respiration, is found to 
be a most valuable antidote. 

Ozone and Antozone. 

This allotropic condition of oxygen, discovered by Schonbein, 
seems likely to produce remarkable changes in the generally received 
opinions in regard to numerous phenomena, both natural and arti- 
ficial. It was first recognized by a peculiar odor accompanying 
discharges of electricity, especially when silently emitted, and has 
since been obtained by a variety of processes, among which the 
following are the most important : Into a large salt-mouth bottle 
of air place a stick of phosphorus, recently scraped ; cover it 
partially with water, introduce the stopper, and set it away in a 
room at a temperature of from 60° to 70°. In the process of oxid- 
izing the exposed phosphorus, a portion of the oxygen passes into 
the condition of ozone and antozone, which are diffused in the air, 
though never in large proportion ; if long kept, these are lost by 
combining with and oxidizing the phosphorus ; by washing and 
decantation, the ozonized air may be deprived of the vapor of phos- 
phorus, and preserved. Ozone is also a product of the slow com- 
bustion of ether; if a small quantity of ether is placed in a bottle 
and a rod of iron or glass heated to just 500° is introduced, the 
atmosphere of the jar will acquire the properties of ozone, while 
the ether possesses the characteristics of antozone. As a more 
permanent source of ozone, Boettger has recommended the opaque 
olive-green mixture of two parts of permanganate of potassa with 
three parts of strong sulphuric acid ; subjected to the atmospheric 
oxygen it continues for a long time to give out ozone. As obtained 
by these processes it is always largely diluted with air ; certain 
liquids, however, have a strong affinity for it; of these, oil of tur- 
pentine, oil of cinnamon, oil of lemon, and flaxseed oil, either pos- 
sess the power of inducing its formation, or, by their solvent power, 
become reservoirs of it. How far its presence may account for 
those changes of properties of oil of lemon, camphene, and other 
carbo-hydrogens, which are so well known but so ill explained, is 
worthy of investigation. Oils of cinnamon and of turpentine when 
• charged with it exhibit bleaching properties. 

Ozone is readily absorbed by solution of an alkaline iodide, con- 
verting it intoiodate; it oxidizes moistened silver leaf and thin 



OZONE AND ANTOZONE. 131 

strips of arsenic, and antimony in the cold. From the metallic 
iodides it liberates iodine ; oxidizes protosalts of lead and man- 
ganese to peroxides ; converts sulphides into sulphates, and ferro- 
cyanides into ferridcyanides. Taken into the lungs it produces 
catarrh and contraction of the chest; it destroys organic coloring 
matter with the greatest energy ; bleaches blue litmus without first 
reddening it; discharges the color of sulphate of indigo by contact 
alone ; turns paper, impregnated with aniline or pyrogallic acid, to 
brown ; renders cork and caoutchouc brittle and destroys them ; 
decomposes tannic acid, oxalic acid being a product. 

These changes are all due to oxidation, and oxides are the result. 
The following are the usual tests for ozone: Schbnbeiri's test is made 
by dissolving one part of pure iodide of potassium (free from iodate) 
in two hundred parts of pure water, then adding ten parts of starch, 
in fine powder, and gently heating till the starch is dissolved. 
White paper is soaked in this liquid, then dried and cut into strips, 
which are to be preserved in stoppered bottles. This paper, exposed 
to the air in a spot sheltered as much as possible from rain, light, 
and foul effluvia for a period of from six to twenty-four hours, will 
show the presence of ozone in the atmosphere by changing to brown, 
and when wetted, from a pink to blue color, according to the pro- 
portion of ozone in the air. Paper soaked in an alcoholic solution 
of guaiacum and dried in the dark acquires a bright blue color by 
contact with ozone. 

The presence of this active form of oxygen in the atmosphere is 
deemed of importance in the study of those mysterious influences 
connected with the cause of malarious and contagious diseases, but 
the subject has not yet been sufficiently studied. The most re- 
markable properties of ozone appear to grow out of its peculiar 
relations to oxygen, from which it is produced by electricity, while 
by a heat of 450° to 600° it is always convertible into oxygen. 
Certain well-known disinfectants and bleaching agents are now 
found to owe their properties to this constituent ; this is especially 
the case with the alkaline permanganates, and the solution of per- 
manganate of potassium has been introduced under the name of 
ozonized water as a deodorizer in medical practice. Magnetic oxide 
of iron is also said to contain oxygen in the state of ozone, and a 
filter is in use in England in which this mineral is the active ma- 
terial for the purification of water hx oxidizing and destroying all 
organic matters contained in it. The principal oxides in w T hich 
the oxygen appears to exist as ozone, called by Schonbein ozonides, 
are as follows: Mn 2 7 , Mn0 2 , Mn0 3 , PbO„ Ag0 2 , Cr0 3 , Bi0 5 , Xi 2 3 , 
C0 2 3 , among which peroxide of lead (Pb0 2 ) appears to have the 
most energetic action, displaying some of the characteristic reac- 
tions of ozone without the addition of any acid to decompose it. 

Antozone has been less studied than ozone. It appears to be pro- 
duced whenever ozone is formed either by electrical action or oxida- 
tion. Some chemists believe ordinary oxygen to be a compound of 
ozone and antozone. Of the methods for preparing antozone, the 
following will suffice: a little concentrated sulphuric acid is poured 



132 ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

into a small bottle, and into this are thrown some fragments of pure 
peroxide of barium Ba0 2 ; when gas is liberated, the air of the bottle 
will be found to be charged with antozone. Sometimes it is neces- 
sary to introduce the bottle into a moderately warmed water-bath ; 
at other times the reaction is required to be allayed by applying cold 
water. Antozone is a gas with odor somewhat resembling ozone, 
though different and more disagreeable; it is less permanent than 
ozone, being very readily converted into ordinary oxygen. 

If air charged with antozone is made to bubble through water, it 
will raise as it ascends a thick white mist or cloud, which may be 
collected and poured from one vessel to another, and is deposited 
as drops of water only when the antozone has become converted 
into ordinary oxygen, or entered into combination. It is through 
the existence of antozone, that water may be oxidized into perox- 
ide of hydrogen, H 2 2 , an object of scientific interest not utilized 
either in medicine or the arts. 

Chlorinium. CI = 35.5. (Chlorine.) 

Chlorine is a dense, suffocating, corrosive gas, 2.5 times as heavy 
as atmospheric air, and of a pale yellowish-green color. Under the 
pressure of about four atmospheres it condenses into a yellow liquid, 
sp. gr. 1.33. It is one of the most active of chemical agents, enter- 
ing into combination with nearly all the other elements, especially 
with the metals, but not existing in nature uncombined. The 
chlorides are remarkable for solubility, and consequently find a 
place among the constituents of sea water, common salt, EaCl, 
being obtained in large proportion from that great reservoir. 

The chief use of uncombined chlorine is as a disinfectant and a 
bleaching agent, both of which properties it appears to owe to its 
relation with hydrogen. In contact with most organic substances 
it decomposes them, eliminates a portion of their hydrogen as 
hydrochloric acid, and enters also into compounds by substitution 
for the hydrogen in their composition. 

To the physician and pharmacist chlorine is most interesting 
in the form best adapted to liberate it into the atmosphere for its 
uses as a disinfectant. The reader is referred to the chapter on the 
alkalies and alkaline earths for its loose combinations with lime 
and soda; in this place it will suffice to notice the chlorine mixture 
especially adapted to hospitals, and the Aqua Chlorinii of the Phar- 
macopoeia. 

Chlorine Disinfecting Preparation. 

This consists of packages of a dry powder and a bottle of diluted 
sulphuric acid, put up together for extemporaneous admixture, as 
follows : — 

The Common Salt Mixture. 

Take of Common salt, well dried 1800 parts. 

Binoxide of manganese, containing 72 per cent . 1875 parts. 

Grind them together into a fine powder, and put up the powder 
in packages containing about 195 grains each, and put 130 of these 



CHLORINE. 133 

packages in a pasteboard box to accompany the sulphuric acid 
mixture. 

Each of these packages requires half a fluidounce of the sulphuric 
acid mixture, and } 7 ields about 57 cubic inches of chlorine. This 
quantity, when thus liberated gradually in a space containing 
about 20,000 times its volume of air, is borne without inconveni- 
ence by persons generally, and is not injurious even in pulmonary 
diseases. It should never be used in such quantities as to produce 
discomfort or bronchial irritation. 

The Sulphuric Acid Mixture, 

Take of Sulphuric acid, sp. gr. 1.845 45 parts. 

Water 21 parts. 

Mix them carefully, and when cold put the mixture into strong 
bottles, with accurately ground stoppers, each bottle to contain 
sixty-five nuidounces. 

Half a fluidounce of this to be used for each package of the com- 
mon salt mixture. 

Directions for Use. — One package of the common salt mixture, 
placed in a saucer or plate and thoroughly mixed with half a fluid- 
ounce of the sulphuric acid mixture, is to be placed under every 
alternate bed at night and allowed to remain there three days. 
Upon the second night, the beds which were omitted should be 
supplied in the same way and for the same length of time, and the 
process repeated at the end of three days, or sooner, according to 
circumstances. Should the wards be badly ventilated, or contain 
many sloughing wounds, or be subject to epidemic disease or low 
forms of fever, the mixtures should be renewed every third day. 
Otherwise once a month may be sufficient; and, when thorough 
cleanliness and ventilation are attained, the process is unnecessary 
for occupied wards. In disinfecting unoccupied wards, water- 
closets, latrines, etc. by chlorine, they should be cleansed, closed 
up as perfectly as practicable, and two packages used for each 600 
cubic feet of space. 

The rationale of the liberation of chlorine from the mixed chlo- 
ride of sodium and binoxide of manganese, on the addition of sul- 
phuric acid, may be thus expressed: 2£TaCl + 2H 2 S0 4 + Mn0 2 = 
Na 2 S0 4 + MnS0 4 + 2H 2 4- CI. 

Aqua Chlorinii. {Chlorine Water.) IT. S. P. 

Liquor Chlori. (Solution of Chlorine.) Ph. Br. 

Take of Black oxide of manganese, in fine powder, half a troyounce. 
Muriatic acid, three troyounces. 
Water, four nuidounces. 
Distilled water, twenty nuidounces. 

Introduce the oxide into a flask, add the acid previously diluted 
with two fluidounces of the water, and apply a gentle heat. Con- 
duct the generated chlorine, by suitable tubes, through the re- 
mainder of the water contained in a small intermediate vessel, to 



134 ON THE NON-METALLIC 

the bottom of a four-pint bottle containing the distilled water and 
loosely stopped with cotton. When the air has been entirely dis- 
placed by the gas, disconnect the bottle from the apparatus, and, 
having inserted the stopper, agitate the contents, loosen the stopper 
from time to time, until the gas ceases to be absorbed. Lastly, 
pour the chlorine water into a bottle, of just sufficient capacity to 
hold it, stop it securely, and keep it in a cool place, protected from 
the light. 

Black oxide of manganese is used in this process because of its 
facility for yielding oxygen under the circumstances to hydrogen 
of the muriatic acid to form water, while the chlorine of the acid 
unites in part with the manganese, and is in part set free ; the reac- 
tion which occurs is thus formulated: Mn0 2 -f 4HC1 = 2H 2 0-f- 
MnCl 2 4- 2C1. Great care should be taken in liberating and ma- 
nipulating with chlorine to avoid inhaling it ; when taken into the 
lungs, unless very largely diluted with air, it is extremely corrosive. 

This process requires the adjustment of flask and tubes, as figured 
on page 124. The great solubility of chlorine in water forbids the 
use of more than a limited quantity in the intermediate (wash) 
bottle; this is designed to absorb any portion of the undecomposed 
muriatic acid which may pass from the flask. The size of the re- 
ceiving bottle is important as determining the quantity of chlorine 
in the resulting preparation. This mode of receiving and dissolv- 
ing the gas is considered an improvement on the Wolff's bottles 
formerly in use; about three pints of chlorine are by this arrange- 
ment conveniently collected and dissolved in the twenty fluidounces 
of water prescribed. With a view to warming the flask and not 
the receiving bottle, the connecting glass tube should be ten or 
twelve inches long, and should have one or more joints of gum- 
elastic tube. 

Chlorine water is a yellowish-green fluid, smelling strongly of 
chlorine. It is used chiefly as an antiseptic and stimulant to the 
liver, applied externally and internally. The dose is from one to 
two fluidrachms, largely diluted. This preparation furnishes a 
good means of liberating the gas for inhalation, or for diffusion as 
a disinfectant. When a fluidounce of it is mixed with a solution 
of ten grains of pure sulphate of protoxide of iron in two flui- 
drachms of water, the mixture does not produce a blue precipitate 
with ferridcyanide of potassium (red prussiate of potassium). (See 
Vapor Chlori.) 

Iodine and its Preparations.* 

Iodinium, I. Solid crystalline scales, sp. gr. 4.95. 

Potassii iodidum, KI. In cubical crystals. Dose, gr. ij to gr. v. 

Sodii iodidum, Nal. Cubical crystals. Dose, gr. ij to v. 

Ammonii iodidum, NH 4 I. Very deliquescent. Dose, gr. v to x. 

Calcii iodidum. 

Tinctura iodinii. 5ss to f§j alcohol, externally used. 

" iodinii composita, I, gr. xv, KI, 5ss to f§j. W]_ xv to xxx. 
Liquor iodinii compositus, I, gr. xxijss, KI, gr. xlv to f§j. ti\ x to xx. 



* Most of the iodine salts are described under the several heads of their metallic 

bases. 



IODINE AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 135 

lodinium. 1=127. (Iodine.) U. S. P. 
lodum. (Iodine.) Ph. Br. 

This non-metallic element, existing in sea-water and marine 
plants, is procured for use in medicine from the fused and vitrified 
ashes of sea-weed called kelp, which is prepared in the "Western 
Islands, North of Scotland and Ireland, and on the coast of France, 
at Cherbourg, and at LeConquet, near Brest. According to the 
report on the medical and pharmaceutical products at the Great 
Exhibition of 1862, Tissier & Son, of the latter place, produced of 
iodine and iodide of potassium, each, from 8000 to 10,000 lbs., bro- 
mine, 1500 to 1800 lbs., and bromide of potassium, 1100 to 1300 
lbs. annually. The process of preparation is briefly as follows: — 

The kelp, being broken and lixiviated, yields about half its weight 
of soluble sodium, potassium, and magnesium salts. The common 
salt, and carbonate and sulphate of sodium, and chloride of potas- 
sium are crystallized out on evaporation. The mother-liquor contains 
iodides of sodium, potassium, and magnesium, to which sulphuric 
acid is added, liberating carbonic acid, sulphuretted hydrogen, and 
sulphurous acid, by effervescence, and sulphur which is deposited. 
The acid lye is next distilled from peroxide of manganese, which 
liberates the iodine, and it is condensed in cooled glass receivers. 
This process, as applied to iodide of sodium, is explained by the 
following formula: 2NaI + 2HS0 4 +Mn0 2 = Na 2 S0 4 + MnS0 4 + 
2H 2 + 2L 

Iodine is in bluish-black crystalline scales with a metallic lustre, 
sp. gr. 4.948, fusing at 225°, boiling at 347°, and evaporating at 
ordinary temperature, especially when damp. It melts when heated, 
its vapor is of a splendid violet color, odor like chlorine, and sub- 
limes in very heavy violet vapors. Free iodine precipitates starch 
in the cold, of a dark blue color, which reaction is its most familiar 
and delicate test. Water dissolves about T ^V^h of its weight of 
iodine, being slightly discolored by it, but, on the addition of either 
of the alkaline iodides, or of chloride of sodium, it becomes ex- 
tremely soluble; it is also very soluble in alcohol and ether. It 
dissolves in alkaline solutions, forming iodides and iodates. With 
the metals and most of the non-metallic elements, it combines with 
avidity, and several of its combinations are officinal; of these, the 
iodides of mercury, of lead, zinc, cadmium, iron, arsenic, and sul- 
phur are considered under the head of their metallic elements, 
while the several preparations which owe their value exclusively 
to iodine are introduced here. 

Locally applied, iodine is an irritant and vesicant, staining the 
skin brown or orange color, causing itching, redness, and desqua- 
mation. This discoloration of the skin may be best removed by 
ammonia or by hyposulphite of soda. Applied by inunction, it is 
absorbed, producing its characteristic stimulating effect; inhaled 
as vapor in a very diluted form, vapor iodi, it exercises its alterative 
effect on the mucous membrane of the respiratory passages. Its 
influence is chiefly exerted on the glandular and absorbent "systems. 



136 ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

The element itself and its salts are used both internally and topi- 
cally for an immense number of diseases requiring alterative treat- 
ment; when given internally, it is always in solution or combina- 
tion. {See Solution and Tinctures, page 138.) 

Potassii Iodidum. KI = 165.5. Iodide of Potassium. U. S. P. 

{Hydriodate of Potassa.) 

Potassii lodium. Iodide of Potassium. Ph. Br. 

This salt was formerly directed to be made by combining iodine 
with iron, and decomposing the iodide of iron with carbonate of 
potassium, precipitating the carbonate of iron, filtering, and crys- 
tallizing. A modification of this process is to combine 400 parts 
of iodine with 508 of bicarbonate of potassium and sufficient water, 
and then add 112 parts iron filings in divided portions ; boil, filter, 
evaporate, and granulate the iodide. This process, which is, in 
some respects, the most convenient to the pharmacist, is not adopted 
in the United States or British Pharmacopoeia, where the plan is 
prescribed of adding iodine simply to a solution of caustic potash, 
thus forming the mixed iodide of potassium and iodate of potas- 
sium (6KHO + 3I 2 = 5KI, + KI0 3 + 3H 2 0). This being heated to 
redness in contact with charcoal, the iodic acid, I0 3 , parts with 
its oxygen, and the iodate, KI0 3 , is reduced to iodide of potassium, 
KX The process of Liebig, as modified by W. Stevens Squire, of 
London, consists of treating the iodine with a small proportion of 
phosphorus in water, thus converting it into hyclriodic acid, which 
is then mixed with lime, and the iodide of calcium formed is first 
fused and then decomposed by sulphate of potassium into sulphate 
of lime, which is precipitated, and iodide of potassium, which re- 
mains in solution, is collected and crystallized. (See Amer. Journ. 
Pharm., vol. xxxiv. p. 437.) 

This salt is in white, shining, semi-opaque cubes, with a charac- 
teristic marine odor, an acrid saline taste, resembling common salt ; 
soluble in two-thirds its weight of cold water, and freely in alco- 
hol. Either chlorine, ozone, or nitric acid decomposes its solution, 
yielding iodine, and if starch be subsequently added, the charac- 
teristic blue iodide of amylum is produced. 

Tartaric and other acids do not liberate iodine immediately, but 
the acid compound, hydriodic acid (HI); hence the old name of the 
salt, hydriodate of potassa. 

Iodide of potassium is liable to adulteration with bicarbonate or 
carbonate of potassium ; the latter renders it very damp, and they 
both occasion effervescence with acids, and throw down a precipitate 
with sulphate of iron. Chloride of platinum should color its solu- 
tions reddish-brown, without causing a precipitate. The presence of 
a chloride maybe determined by nitrate of silver, which throws down 
nothing from the pure salt but iodide of silver, which is almost in- 
soluble in ammonia, while chloride of silver is readily soluble in it. 
The iodide of silver, precipitated from 10 grains of iodide of potas- 
sium, weighs, when washed and dried, 14.1 grains. When acetate 



IODINE AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 137 

or nitrate of lead is added to iodide of potassium, it throws down 
a yellow iodide of lead, soluble in boiling water. Bromide may be 
detected by adding nitric acid, and observing the vapors that arise; 
those of bromine are red ; those of iodine purple. Sometimes iodate 
of potassa is present, which may be detected by tartaric acid libe- 
rating iodine, perceptible by the starch test. 

This salt contains no water of crystallization. Every four grains 
contain about three grains of iodine. The aqueous solution is capa- 
ble of taking up a large quantity of iodine, forming a liquid of a 
deep brown color. 

Iodide of potassium is considered to possess the same medicinal 
virtues as iodine, though preferred by some physicians to obtain the 
constitutional effects of the alterative. It is used very exten- 
sively, both alone and combined with iodine, and with other altera- 
tive remedies ; it is incompatible with the preparations of mercury 
generally, greatly increasing their activity. Dose, gr. ij to gr. v. 

Iodide of Calcium. Cal = 147. 

This is prepared, according to Malme, by treating a solution of 
iodide of iron with milk of lime, filtering, and evaporating. The 
liquid thus treated yields crystals of iodide of calcium. Although 
recommended as preferable to any other iodide in phthisis, it does 
not seem to have been much employed. The dose is from one to 
four grains after each meal. 

Iodide of Sodium. Eal = 149.6. 

Sodii lodidum. — This salt may be prepared from a freshly-pre- 
pared solution of iodide of iron or zinc, by precipitating it with 
pure carbonate of sodium, or by modifications of the processes men- 
tioned under the head of iodide of potassium, evaporating and 
allowing it to crystallize at a temperature exceeding 120° F., or it 
may be evaporated to dryness and granulated. Below the temper- 
ature named, it crystallizes with four equivalents of water in deli- 
quescent, flat, hexagonal prisms ; crystallized as above, it forms 
cubes which contain no water, and are very soluble in water and 
also in alcohol. 

It has been used as a substitute for iodide of potassium ; its ad- 
vantage over the potassium salt consists in its having 85 per cent., 
while the other has only 76 per cent., of iodine in combination. • 

Ammonii lodidum, U. S. P. NH 4 I = 144. (Iodide of Ammonium.) 

Take of Iodide of potassium, in coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Sulphate of ammonium, in coarse powder, a troyounce. 
Boiling distilled water, two fluidounces. 
Alcohol, water, each a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the salts, add them to the boiling water, stir well, and allow 
the mixture to cool ; then add a fluid ounce of alcohol, mix well, 
and reduce the temperature by a bath of ice-water to about 40° ; 
throw the mixture into a cooled glass funnel stopped with moist- 



138 ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

ened cotton, and when the clear solution has passed, pour upon the 
salt a fluidounee of a mixture of two parts of water and one of 
alcohol. Lastly, evaporate the solution rapidly to dryness, stirring 
constantly, and preserve the residue in a well-stopped bottle. 

It crystallizes in cubes, and is very deliquescent. It has been 
used as a substitute for iodide of potassium on account of the loose- 
ness with which the iodine is combined. It is one of the most 
useful of chemical agents in the hands of the photographer. 

Internally it has been prescribed in doses as high as 10 grains ; 
externally in ointments of from 9j to 3j to an ounce of lard. 

Tinctura Iodinii, IT. S. P. {Simple Tincture of Iodine.) 

To make Oj. To make fgj. 

Take of Iodine 3j. £>ss. 

Alcohol Oj. fgj. 

Dissolve the iodine in the alcohol. This may be done either by 
triturating it with successive portions of alcohol in a glass or por- 
celain mortar, or by circulatory displacement ; the iodine should 
be put into a syringe tube, the lower end of the tube dipping 
below the surface of the alcohol ; as the iodine dissolves, the fresh 
portions of alcohol rise, and continue the process till it is completed. 
This tincture contains one grain in 16 minims, or about 35 drops; 
it is not adapted to internal use, as, on the addition of water, the 
iodine is precipitated, and exercises its peculiar irritating topical 
effect on the coats of the stomach. This precipitation is partially 
obviated by the gradual formation of the hydriodic acid, where 
there is water present ; but the use of strong alcohol as the solvent 
is said to prevent the formation of this acid. Tincture iodi, Ph. Br., 
contains iodine £ oz. av., iodide potassium \ oz. av., rectified spirit 
1 pint imp. It is much weaker than that of the U. S. Pharma- 
copoeia, and more nearly resembles the compound tincture. Tinc- 
ture of iodine is applied to the skin as a powerful irritant in cuta- 
neous and subcutaneous inflammation. In treating erysipelas, and 
when the surface to be treated is circumscribed, it is applied with a 
camel-hair brush. 

Tinctura Iodinii Composita^V. S. P. (Compound Tincture of Iodine.) 

To make Oj. To make f .ij. 

Take of Iodine gss gr. xv. 

Iodide of potassium §j gss. 

Alcohol Oj . fgj. 

Dissolve the iodine and iodide of potassium in the alcohol. 

This is adapted to the same use as the foregoing: by the pres- 
ence of the iodide of potassium, the precipitation of iodine on 
contact with aqueous liquids is prevented. It is weaker than 
Lugol's solution, and may be used internally in doses of nixv to 
xxx. 

These tinctures are included under the general head Tincturce, 
U. S. P., while the following is placed under the head Liquores: — 



BROMINE PREPARATIONS. 139 

Liquor Iodinii Compositus, U. S. P. (LugoVs Solution.) 

To make Oj. To make f 3j. 

Take of Iodine Jvj gr. xxijss. 

Iodide of potassium £iss gr. xlv. 

Distilled water Oj I3J. 

Lugol's solution, as originally proposed, contained twenty grains 
of iodine, and forty of iodide of potassium, to f.ij of water; the 
present officinal preparation is adjusted to the proportions con- 
venient for a pint, and, as is seen above, is somewhat stronger. 
The liquor iocli, Ph. Br., contains iodine twenty grains, iodide 
potassium thirty grains to the fluidounce. Dose, ^ix to xx. 

In iodine and compound iodine ointments, U. S. P., we have 
nearly the same proportions as in the tinctures, substituting lard 
for alcohol and water. (See Extemporaneous Preparations.) 

Soluble Iodide of Starch. 

Take of Iodine 12 parts. 

Starch 100 parts. 

Ether 20 parts. 

Dissolve the iodine in the ether, pour the solution over the starch, 
triturate till the ether is evaporated ; introduce into a water-bath, 
and continue the heat for half an hour with occasional stirring. 
A portion of the iodine vapor has escaped, but tbe starch which 
has now become soluble will be combined with about 4 per cent, 
of iodine. 

Syrup of Iodide of Starch. 

Take of Iodide of starch 25 parts. 

Water 345 parts. 

Sugar 635 parts. 

Dissolve the iodide in the water, and add the sugar. 
This syrup contains one part of iodine in a thousand. Dose, a 
teaspoonful. 

Chlorides of Iodine. I,C1. I,C1 3 . 

There are two chlorides of iodine, both formed by the absorption 
of chlorine by dry iodine. When the iodine is in excess, a liquid 
protochloride is the result. It is a reddish or yellow liquid, of an 
oily consistence, sharp odor, feebly acid, astringent taste, soluble in 
water and alcohol. If the chlorine is added in excess, a yellow, 
solid, crystallizable terchloride is formed ; it fumes in the air, has 
an acrid odor, and is soluble in w T ater. The long-continued action 
of chlorine, in excess, upon iodine results in the formation of 
hydrochloric and iodic acids. 

Bromine Preparations. 

Bittern. The mother-liquor after the crystallization of common salt. 

Brominum. Heavy, very volatile liquid, sp. gr. 2.96. 

Ammonii Bromidum, NH 4 Br. White granular salt, gr. ij to x. 

Brominii Chloridum, BrCl 5 . Very powerful caustic, etc. ; fluid. 

Potassii bromidum, KBr. White cubical crystals. Dose, gr. v to x. 

Liquor ferri bromidi. Solution of bromide with excess of bromine. Dose, n\v to x. 



140 ON THE NON. 

Brominium, U. S. P. Bromiim, Br. Ph. Bromine. Br=80. 

Bromine is a heavy, liquid, non-metallic element, of a red color, 
stilling odor, and acrid taste; very volatile and fuming, on which 
account it is generally kept in bottles under a stratum of water, 
soluble in ether and alcohol, and to a small extent in water ; it 
precipitates starch of an orange color. Associated with iodine in 
sea-water and numerous mineral springs, it is largely extracted 
from bittern, the liquor left after the ciystallization of common 
salt, whether from sea-water or from certain salt springs. The 
process consists in passing chlorine gas or a mixture of binoxide of 
manganese and muriatic acid, which liberates chlorine, into the 
bittern, and on distillation the bromine passes over below the boil- 
ing temperature. At the salt works in Western Pennsylvania, 
West Virginia, and Ohio, this bittern is preserved for the extrac- 
tion of the bromine, and the American bromine prepared there is 
fully equal to the imported article. According to Prof. Chandler, 
the product for the year 1870 reached 120,000 pounds, and the 
price has been constantly depreciating since 1867, and it is now 
sold at $3 00 to $4 00. 

Care should be taken in handling bromine, especially in warm 
weather, or near a fire; it boils at about 117° F., liberating stifling 
red fumes, which have the sp. gr. 5.39. Few vapors are so corro- 
sive or so dangerous to those exposed to their inhalation. 

Bromine has been prescribed as an antiseptic in purifying the 
atmosphere of hospitals where erysipelas, gangrene, scarlatina, and 
smallpox exist, and is used locally in some of these diseases, and 
internally in diphtheria, and in cases in which iodine has lost its 
effect from habitual use. With a view to facilitate its employment 
Dr. J. Lawrence Smith has proposed the following solution: — 

Take of Bromine A troyounce. 

Bromide of potassium 160 grains. 

Distilled water Sufficient to make f 3iv. 

Dissolve the bromide of potassium in about two fluidounces of 
water, add the bromine, agitate, and finally add the remainder of 
the water. It should be kept in small ground-stoppered vials. 
The dose of this would be from one to two drops. 

Bittern, as obtained from the salt works, is a heavy liquid, with- 
out color, and having a caustic taste and highly stimulating pro- 
perties. Its chief medicinal use is to produce a counter-irritant 
and alterative effect, and, by continued rubbing of the part, a 
pustular eruption. It is a useful application in rheumatism and 
in glandular swellings, being absorbed, and producing the alterative 
effects of the iodine and bromine salts. 

Bibron's Antidote to the Poison of the Rattlesnake. — This combina- 
tion has been found an efficient antidote in a number of cases of 
poisoning by the rattlesnake's bite. 



BROMINE PREPARATIONS. 141 

Mix Iodide of potassium Four grains. 

Corrosive chloride of mercury . . Two grains. 

Bromine Five drachms. 

Diluted alcohol . . ■ . . . . . Seven nuidounces and a half. 

Take ten drops in a tablespoonful of brandy, repeated as required. 

Ammonii Bromidum. Bromide of Ammonium. AmBr. 
XL S. P., Br. Ph. 

Take of Bromine, two troyounces. 

Iron, in the form of wire cut in pieces, a troyounce. 
Water of ammonia, four nuidounces and a half. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Add the iron and then the bromine to half a pint of distilled 
water contained in a two-pint glass flask, loosely cork the flask, 
and agitate until there is no odor of bromine and the liquid is of 
a greenish color. Mix the water of ammonia with half a pint of 
distilled water, and add it to the mixture in the flask; agitate the 
mixture, and heat by a water-bath for half an hour; then filter, 
and when the liquid has all passed, wash the precipitate on the 
filter with boiling distilled water. Evaporate the solution in a 
porcelain capsule until a pellicle begins to form, then stir it con- 
stantly with a glass rod at a moderate heat until it granulates. 

A white granular salt, becoming brown by exposure to the air, 
freely soluble in water, and slightly so in alcohol. It 3-ields a 
3 T ellow precipitate with nitrate of silver, and the clear liquid, after 
the precipitate subsides, gives only a cloud on the further addition 
of the nitrate. 

Chloride of Bromine. BrCl 5 . 

This compound is prepared by passing a stream of chlorine gas 
through bromine in a freezing mixture, or at a low temperature. 
It is a reddish liquid, very fluid and volatile, soluble in water, and 
having a penetrating odor and disagreeable taste. 

It has been used externally as a caustic, in combination with 
chlorides of zinc, antimony, etc., and internally in doses of a frac- 
tion of a drop, as a powerful stimulant to the lymphatic system. 

Iodine forms two compounds with bromine, but they are little 
known, and not used in medicine. 

Potassii Bromidum, U. S. P., Br. Ph. KBr = 119. (Bromide of 

Potassium.) 

Bromide of potassium is obtained by similar processes to iodide, 
substituting an equivalent quantity of bromine for the iodine. It 
closely resembles the iodide in most of its properties, and, like it, 
is an anhydrous salt. It is believed to possess similar medicinal 
properties to iodide, acting as a powerful alterative, adapted to 
scrofulous and syphilitic complaints and chronic skin diseases; but 
its chief use is in cases of excessive wakefulness, "over-worked 
brain," as a remedy in epilepsy, and as a sedative to the organs of 
generation. Dose, 10 to 60 grains in 24 hours. Elixir of Calisaya 
is a good vehicle to disguise its taste. 



142 ON" THE NON-METAL LIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

Tests. — It is very soluble in cold water, more so in hot, slightly 
soluble in alcohol. By heat it decrepitates, and at a red heat fuses 
without decomposition or loss of weight. Its aqueous solution 
does not affect the color of litmus or turmeric, and is not precipi- 
tated by chloride of barium. When mixed with starch and heated 
with HS0 4 it becomes yellow ; 10 grains of it require 14.28 grains of 
nitrate of silver for complete precipitation, and the precipitate 
formed lias a yellow color. If iodine is present it will be shown 
by adding a few drops of chlorine water to the solution, and then 
introducing starch-paper, which will show the characteristic blue 
color caused by iodine. 

Monobromated Camphor. C 20 H 15 BrO 2 = 231. 

Thirteen ounces of camphor in small pieces are taken, and as 
much placed in the neck of a quart retort as will fill it; the re- 
mainder is put into the body of the retort, and twelve ounces of 
bromine are added in portions of from two to four ounces at a 
time, the larger portions being used at first. The neck of the re- 
tort is inclined upwards, so that any liquid which condenses therein 
will flow back into the retort. To the neck of the retort a tube is 
attached, which is inserted in a bottle so as to pass just below the 
cork. A second tube is bent twice at right angles and reaches 
nearly to the bottom of the bottle, and the other end extends into 
an open bottle containing eight ounces of water in which an alkali 
is dissolved for the absorption of the hydrobromic acid. 

After the reaction has taken place, the dark oily liquid becomes 
paler, and the monobromated camphor is purified by crystallizing 
from petroleum benzine. Further particulars may be obtained by 
consulting a paper by Prof. J. M. Maisch in Amer. Jonrn. of JPharm. 
for 1872, p. 337. It is used in doses of one or two grains, frequently 
repeated, in cases of infantile convulsions. It has also been used in 
hysteria, headache, and delirium tremens. 

Bromide of Sodium. EaBr == 103. 

This salt is prepared from bromide of ammonium by adding an 
equivalent quantity of caustic soda or carbonate of sodium. The 
solution yields on evaporation eight molecules of the anhydrous 
salt; at low temperatures it crystallizes in hexagonal tables con- 
taining two molecules of water. Its dose is about 15 per cent, less 
than that of bromide of potassium, ranging from 5 to 40 grains. 
Its taste is that of common salt. 

lAquor Ferri Bromidi. 

This preparation was introduced to notice by Dr. Gillespie, of 
Freeport, Armstrong Co., Pa., who, besides being a practitioner of 
medicine, is engaged in the bromine manufacture in connection 
with the salt springs near that place. Dr. G-. recommends this so- 
lution very highly as a tonic alterative, and it has been successfully 
used by numerous other practitioners. It is made by macerating 



PHOSPHORUS. 143 

iron filings with bromine under water till they have combined, 
an excess of bromine being used. The solution, as made by Dr. 
Gillespie, is given in the dose "ivtox, three times a day, increased 
to "ixxv. 

Phosphorus. P = 31. 

Phosphorus has, ever since its discovery in 1669, been regarded 
as a substance of considerable interest, though until our time little 
used in the arts, and to meet only limited and unusual indications 
in medicine; its manufacture has, of latter years, received a great 
impulse from its use in the odorless matches now so extensively in- 
troduced. Phosphorus exists in the mineral, vegetable, and animal 
kingdoms variously combined, the phosphates of calcium, lead, iron, 
copper, and manganese being its principal native mineral com- 
pounds. Phosphate of calcium, potassium, and iron, and free phos- 
phoric acid are extensively diffused in plants, and from these sources 
it is furnished as a constituent of animal tissues. The bones of ani- 
mals contain a large proportion of triphosphate of calcium, Ca 3 P 2 8 , 
and are used for the preparation of phosphoric acid and phosphorus. 
The albuminous and fibrinous tissues, "proteine compounds,'"' and 
the brain contain the element phosphorus, though in minute quan- 
tity and in an uncertain state of combination. This element, as is 
well known, is a constituent in animal excrements, and especially 
in urine; it is diffused in the air, combined with hydrogen, and is 
a very important ingredient in a certain class of manures. 

Preparation and Properties. — Phosphorus is obtainable from bones, 
by calcining, treating with oil of vitriol, then subliming with 
charcoal, and purified. The phosphorus is thus collected, and, 
being cast into moulds, is found in commerce nearly colorless, in 
translucent or white cylinders, having a peculiar, almost waxy 
consistence. It is luminous in the dark, from formiug phosphorous 
acid (P0 3 ), and is kept under water to prevent gradual oxidation, 
and to guard against accident from its ready inflammability. When 
freshly cut it has an odor reminding of garlic, but this is overcome 
under ordinary conditions by the odor of ozone already referred to. 
It should be handled with care, and not intrusted to children, who 
frequently procure it for experiment, without due precaution. Its 
sp. gr. is 1.8. Melting point, 110° F. It is soluble in ether, oils, 
naphtha, and bisulphide of carbon, but not in water or alcohol. 
It is readily powdered by fusion in a vial or flask of moderately 
warm water or, preferably, diluted alcohol, and shaking up as it 
cools. 

Phosphorus, when taken internally, enters the circulation, im- 
parts to the breath, urine, and sweat a garlic smell, and makes these 
secretions luminous in the dark; it is absorbed by the skin, and 
after its solution in a fixed oil has been rubbed upon the stomach 
all the exhalations are luminous. 

Although possessed of very energetic properties, phosphorus is 
frequently employed internally. In small doses it acts as a stimu- 
lant, diuretic, and diaphoretic; in larger doses, one grain and more, 



144 

as a corrosive poison; ether and fixed oils, in which phosphorus is 
soluble, increase and hasten its action. Externally, in the form of 
liniment, it has been employed with marked success in severe 
rheumatism, gout, and similar affections. G-reat caution is neces- 
sary in its use. 

Red phosphorus is an allot ropic variety which is very different 
from the foregoing in many of its properties; it is not poisonous, 
but may be administered in considerable doses. If the ordinary 
kind is kept for several days at a temperature between 465° to 480°, 
red phosphorus is found at the bottom of the vessel, while the 
supernatant mass is a mixture of both varieties, from which the 
ordinary kind may be extracted by bisulphide of carbon. 

Red phosphorus is much less inflammable, fusible, and luminous 
than the ordinary kind; in the presence of moisture and oxygen 
it is gradually oxidized to an acid liquid, but without phospho- 
rescence; after having been so oxidized, it appears not to be con- 
vertible into the translucent or ordinary kind. Phosphorus dis- 
solved in cod-liver oil, or dissolved in ether and mixed with a fixed 
oil, is not unfrequently prescribed with a view to repair the waste 
of nerve tissue ; the dose under these circumstances may be one- 
thirtieth of a grain. A pill of phosphorus is also made, preferably 
by dipping it in a melted fat, and afterwards protecting the pills 
by gelatine or other suitable coating; but great care is necessary in 
giving so powerful a remedy. 

Black phosphorus is another allotropic variety, sometimes ob- 
tained by the repeated distillation of the ordinary kind, but more 
recently prepared by heating phosphorus with a minute quantity 
of mercury, from which it may be separated; it is more volatile 
than normal phosphorus, and is insoluble in bisulphide of carbon. 

The application of physiological science to the theory and practice 
of medicine has recently given rise to numerous experiments upon 
the usefulness of phosphorous compounds, as nutritive tonics de- 
signed to remedy abnormal conditions of the secretions, and to 
supply the elements wasted in disease. 

The late Prof. Samuel Jackson, of the Chair of Institutes in the 
University of Pennsylvania, whose progressive ideas have had con- 
siderable influence upon the methods of practice pursued in this 
country, was for ten or fifteen years in the habit of prescribing cer- 
tain preparations containing the phosphates of calcium, iron, sodium, 
and potassium, in the treatment of anaemic and other low forms of 
disease. The popularity reached by these preparations has led to 
the extensive introduction of other remedies prepared on the same 
principles, and, subsequently, the announcement by Dr. J. Francis 
Churchill, of Paris, of important properties in the hypophosphites, 
in which phosphorus is loosely combined, adapting these to the 
treatment of phthisis, has led to their widespread employment. 
These salts are described under the heads of their several metallic, 
alkaline, and earthy bases. 

Tests. — To detect impurities in phosphorus, it is best to oxidize 
it by nitric acid; antimony then remains undissolved, while arsenic, 



SULPHUR AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 145 

lead, bismuth, copper, and iron may be detected by their various 
tests ; arsenic will produce a yellow precipitate with sulphuretted 
hydrogen; any sulphur present has been converted into sulphuric 
acid, with which nitrate of baryta causes an insoluble precipitate. 
The metals are left behind when phosphorus is purified by dissolv- 
ing it in bisulphide of carbon; sulphur is not detected in this way, 
but if pieces of phosphorus are just covered with water, sulphuretted 
hydrogen will be emitted, which produces a black color with acetate 
of lead. 

Phosphorus combines in four proportions with oxygen : — 

Phosphoric acid, HP 2 5 (three modifications). (See Mineral Acids.) 

Phosphorous acid, H 3 P 2 3 . By gradual oxidation of phosphorus in the atmosphere. 

Hypophosphorous acid, P 2 0. By the decomposition of the phosphuret of an alkaline 

earth by water. 
Phosphoric oxide, P 4 0. By the oxidation of phosphorus under water. 

The existence of the last-named compound is denied by some 
chemists, who assert it to be identical with amorphous (red) phos- 
phorus. 

Sulphur and its Preparations. 

Sulphur. Sublimed sulphur. Yellow crystalline powder. Dose, gr. x to 5'ij. 

" lotum praecipitatum. A light and very fine powder. " " 

Sulphuris iodidum, IS 2 . Blackish crystalline masses, used in ointment. 

Sulphur Sublimatum, IT. S. P. S = 32. (Flowers of Sulphur, 

Sublimed.) 
Sulphur is a very abundant substance in the mineral kingdom, 
existing in combination with the metals, as sulphides or sulphurets 
and sulphates. Virgin sulphur is a native, tolerably pure form, 
abundant in Naples, Sicily, and the Roman States, from whence it 
is imported. By fusion, and running into moulds, roll sulphur or 
rolled brimstone is prepared, while flowers of sulphur is the result 
of subliming and condensing it in suitable chambers. 

Sulphur has a characteristic yellow color, sp. gr. 1.98, it is with- 
out taste and without odor, entirely volatilized by heat, and com- 
bustible, burning with a blue color, yielding sulphurous acid gas 
(S0 2 ), which is a powerful disinfectant and bleaching agent- 
Flowers of sulphur, or sublimed sulphur, is a crystalline powder, 
of a harsh and gritty character; wholly insoluble in water, alcohol, 
and ether; soluble in oil of turpentine with the aid of heat; it is 
the form of sulphur much administered as an alterative and laxative 
remedy in small doses; being absorbed, it enters the circulation and 
is given off from the skin as sulphuretted hydrogen. Externally, 
it is used as a slight stimulant to the skin, and has the power of 
destroying the acarus scabiei, or itch insect, for which it is popu- 
larly known as a remedy. 

Dose, as an alterative, gr. x to 5ss; as a laxative, 3ss to 5ij, alone 
or combined with bitartrate of potassium. 

Sulphur Lotum. ( Washed Sulphur.) U. S. P. 
This is prepared by sifting the sulphur into a pan containing 
water, and when it has settled to the bottom, throwing the whole 
10 



146 ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, ETC. 

on a muslin strainer and passing clear water through it till the 
washings show no acid reaction with litmus paper, then drying 
and keeping in close bottles. It is preferred by some physicians as 
less likely to produce griping when administered. 

Sulphur Prcecipitatum, TJ . S. P. (Milk of Sulphur, Lac Sulphuris.) 

Made by boiling sulphur and lime together till they combine, 
forming bisulphuret and hyposulphite of calcium, then adding 
muriatic acid, which abstracts the calcium, forming chloride, while 
the sulphur is precipitated as a bulky, light powder. This has a 
soft and very fine consistence, a grayish-yellow color, and is adapted 
to suspending in liquids, though little used internally. It should 
be completely volatilized by heat. Very considerable quantities 
are consumed in the preparation of hair dressings, in which it is 
generally combined with acetate of lead, and, by supplying the de- 
ficiency of sulphur in hair which has become white or gray, aids in 
restoring its color. Dose, the same as the foregoing. 

Sulphuris Iodidum. SI =158.3. (Bisulphuret of Iodine.) 

Take of Iodine §iv. 

Sulphur |j. 

Rub the iodine and sulphur together in a glass or porcelain 
mortar till they are thoroughly mixed. Put the mixture into a 
matrass, close the orifice loosely, and apply a gentle heat so as to 
darken the mass without melting it. When the color has become 
uniformly dark throughout, increase the heat so as to melt the 
iodide, then incline the matrass in different directions, in order to 
return into the mass the portions of iodine which may have con- 
densed on the inner surface; lastly, allow the vessel to cool, break 
it, and put the iodide into bottles, which are to be well stopped. 

A suitable vessel for a small operation is a test-tube, or a com- 
mon, cheap bottle should be selected thin at the bottom. The 
iodide is in grayish-black, radiated crystalline masses, in odor re- 
minding of iodine, staining the skin yellow, soluble in 60 parts of 
glycerin; insoluble in water, but decomposed when boiled with it. 
Two equivalents of sulphur are combined with one of iodine, so 
that it may be regarded as a bisulphuret. 

Internally, this is rarely or never prescribed, but it is much used 
in the form of ointment applied to chronic and obstinate skin 
diseases. 

Bisulphide of Carbon. CS 2 . 

This is prepared by passing vapor of sulphur over charcoal heated 
to redness in cast-iron cylinders. It is purified by repeated wash- 
ings with water, digestion on quicklime for twenty-four hours, and 
distilling it into a" vessel containing a large quantity of copper 
turnings. Sp.gr. 1.272. When used internally it acts as a dif- 
fusible~stimulant. It is largely used in the arts as a solvent, espe- 
cially for fatty bodies, sulphur, phosphorus, bromine, and iodine. 



ON THE INOKGANIC ACIDS. 147 



CHAPTER III. 

ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

All the inorganic acids employed in pharmacy are compounds 
rich in oxygen, with the exception of hydriodic, hydrochloric, 
hydrohromic, and hydrosulphuric, in all of which that element is 
wanting. The oxides formerly called by chemists acids are now 
termed anhydrides ; the name acid being applied to their combina- 
tion with water. 

Acids usually have a sour taste, change the blue color of litmus 
to red, and affect other vegetable colors similarly ; with alkalies, 
whether vegetable or mineral, they form neutral salts in which the 
properties of both the ingredients are measurably lost, while new 
properties are acquired. They also unite with the proper metals, 
forming a great variety of valuable compounds, which frequently 
exhibit slightly acid reactions and usually retain the peculiarities 
of the metal from which they are prepared, modified by the nature 
of the acid ingredient. 

The names of the mineral acids formed from the same element 
vary in their terminations according as the number of equivalents 
of oxygen they contain is high or low: thus, sulphunc acid, HS0 4 , 
sulphurous acid, H 2 S0 3 , Nitne, HN0 3 , Nitrons, HN0 2 , Phosphonc, 
H 3 P0 4 , Phosphoiws, H3PO3, Hypophosphorous, H 3 P0 2 , the degree 
of acidification being marked by the terminations ic and 011s, and 
further by hypo, which indicates the acid containing less oxygen 
than that to which its name allies it, or per or hyper, which indi- 
cates a higher oxidation. 

The strong acids act upon cork, and should be kept in ground- 
stoppered bottles, which, as made of extra strength, of green glass, 
are called acid bottles. Unless the stopper and neck are very well 
ground and fitted to each other, they require to be cemented or 
luted together to prevent the escape of the acid ; this may be done 
by warming the stopper in the flame of a spirit lamp, and inserting 
it in the neck of the bottle till the two surfaces are dried and 
warmed, then coating it with a thin stratum of melted wax, and 
inserting it securely in its place, and tying it over with kid or 
bladder. The more common mineral acids are found in commerce 
of three qualities ; the commonest and cheapest, used for manu- 
facturing purposes, the medicinally pure, M. P., and the chemically 
pure C. P. The use of the latter is chiefly in analysis. The specific 
gravity furnishes a ready means of testing the strength of the liquid 
acids, and the Pharmacopoeia indicates this with precision in each 
case. 



148 



O^ THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 



The mineral acids generally belong to the class of tonics with 
refrigerant and astringent properties. Externally, they are caustic, 
and require to be applied with care, as many know from experience 
who have used them, nitric acid especially, for warts. JSTitric acid is 
also used as an alterative in syphilitic and other forms of disease, and 
nitro-muriatic acid for its effect upon the liver in hepatic diseases. 

Acids are apt to injure the teeth, upon which they also produce 
a very unpleasant and characteristic sensation. To obviate this in 
taking them, they should be largely diluted, and should be sucked 
through a small glass tube, which may be made by scratching a 
piece of the tube sold in the shops with a file ; this enables the 
operator to break it at the point required, and then, by heating the 
sharp broken edges over an alcohol or gas flame till the glass melts, 
a rounded edge is left. 

One of the most important facts in connection with the strong 
mineral acids is their occasional use accidentally, or for suicide, in 
poisonous doses. They are among the most powerful of poisons, 
owing to their corrosive properties producing the most painful and 
dangerous symptoms. The best antidotes are large draughts of 
alkaline and oily liquids ; the alkali to neutralize the acid, and the 
oil to obtund its action upon the delicate mucous surfaces. Fre- 
quently the most ready resort on such emergencies is soap, which 
should be made into a very strong solution and given ad libitum. 

Of the mineral acids, the following are used in medicine, and, 
except those in Italics, are officinal in the U. 8. Pharmacopoeia of 
1870:— 

Syllabus of Mineral Acids. 



Name. 


Composition, etc. 


Sp. gr. 


Dose, etc. 


Acid, arseniosum 


As 2 3 . See Preparations of 
Arsenic. 

H 3 B0 3 +2H 2 crystals 

5 measures C0 2 to 1 water (aq. 

ac. carbonic.) 
CrO, deep red crystals 


1.479 

1*160 

1.038 
1.420 

1.068 

1.&43 

1.082 

l.'()35 
1.056 
1.1*12 


To S rain - 
gr. x to 3j ? 

Caustic. 


" boracicum 

" carbonicum 




Gaseous HCl-j- water 


n\ iij to v. 
TT^ xv to XXX. 

tt\J toiv - 
TTLJ to iv. 
TT^ xv to XXX. 
n\ iij to v. 
nx xv to xxx. 
tt\J t( > y- 


" " dilutum 


^j in f^iv diluted acid 

2HN0 3 4-3H 2 




2HNO s +3H 8 0+N a O s 

2iij in Oj diluted acid 




" nitromuriaticum 

" " dilutum 
" sulphuricum 


^iij nitric to ^v muriatic 

§j in f§iv dilute acid 

HS0 4 

5ij in f5xvj dilute acid 




rr^ xv to xxx. 

TT^ XV tO XXX. 

Externally. 


" " aromat 

" sulphurosum 


-[-Alcohol, cinnamon, ginger... 
HJSO,, in solution 


" phosphoricum glaciale.. 
" " dilutum.. 


H 3 P0 4 (variable) 

§j to f|xij water-f HN0 3 ^ij... 

HBr 

Liquid HI-}- water 

Gaseous H 2 S in solution 

H„PC\,4-9 aq 


gr. ij to iij. 
rr\, xv to xxx. 


" hydriodicum 

" hydrosulphuric 


? n\, xv to xxx. 
(Test, etc.) 


" hypophosphorous 

" chlorohydrocyanicum... 
" sulphohydrocyanicum .. 


TT\, xv to xxx. 
Externally. 









AQUA AC1DI CARBONICI. 149 

Acidam Carbonicurn. C0 2 =44. 

This acid ordinarily exists as a gas, though capable of being 
liquefied and even reduced to a solid form by pressure. It is an 
invariable constituent of the atmosphere, being exhaled from the 
lungs of animals and given off from fermenting saccharine liquids 
and from the combustion of carbonaceous fuel. It is artificially 
procured by the decomposition of carbonates by any of the strong 
acids; chalk and marble dust, carbonates of calcium, are the two 
principal minerals employed for the purpose, and sulphuric or muri- 
atic acid is selected for cheapness and availability. The application 
of heat is unnecessary, the gas easily escaping with effervescence. 
It should be passed through a vessel of water to deprive it of any 
soluble impurity. This gas extinguishes flame, does not support 
animal life, and is distinguished by rendering lime-water turbid in 
consequence of converting the hydrate of lime in solution into the 
insoluble carbonate. The specific gravity of this gas as compared 
with lrfdrogen gives its combining number 44, compared with 
atmospheric air it is 1.529 (53 per cent, heavier than the air). 
Cold water dissolves rather more than an equal volume of this gas, 
and the solution sparkles when decanted. The most important 
uses of carbonic acid to the manufacturing pharmacist are in 
the preparation of the bicarbonates of sodium and potassium and 
of carbonic-acid water, misnamed soda water. 

Aqua Acidi Carbonici, U. S. P. 

This solution is directed to be made by throwing into a receiver 
nearly filled with water, a quantity of carbonic acid gas equal to 
five times the bulk of the water ; this is to be done by connecting 
the fountain with a generator by means of suitable pipes and coup- 
lings. 

The receiver, which is called a fountain, is usually made of cop- 
per lined with tin, of the capacity of 15 gallons. A majority of 
pharmacists purchase the carbonic-acid water from the regular 
manufacturers, either owning or hiring the fountains ; but those 
to whom the sale of the article as a beverage is a source of sufficient 
profit to justify the expense frequently have apparatus for manu- 
facturing it on the premises. 

In the first edition of this work two of these were figured, but as 
they are described in the illustrated circulars of the makers, which 
are numerous and accessible to all who wish to acquaint themselves 
with their relative advantages and prices, I omit them here and 
insert the following convenient form of apparatus. 

Fig. 171 represents a French gasogene, such as are imported of 
various sizes, from one quart to five gallons capacity. 

This is a strong glass vessel consisting of two bulbs joined to- 
gether at their point of union by a tube of about half an inch bore 
extending into the upper one to near the top. The upper bulb is 
surmounted by a metallic cap, on to which is screwed a draught 
pipe with a valve, opened by pressing with the thumb upon the 



150 



ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 



button at the upper extremity of a rod ; attached to this draught 
pipe is a long glass tube of small diameter, passing through the 
larger tube, occupying the central space, to near the bottom of the 
apparatus. The object of this mode of construction is to permit 
the charging of water, placed in the lower bulb, with gas gene- 
rated from carbonated alkali and acid placed in the upper bulb, 
without contaminating the water with the salts. 

Fig. 172 shows a section of the upper part, with the mode of filling 
the lower bulb with water by a long funnel, <?, extending through 
the cap and neck of the apparatus, 3, into the large tube, /; this 
obviously prevents any portion of water escaping into the upper 
bulb ; the lower bulb is designed to be filled in this way about 
three-fourths full of cold water. 



Fig. 171. 



rig. 172. 






Oasogene. 

Fig. 173 illustrates the ingenious arrangement for introducing 
the bicarb, soda and tartaric acid (one of which should be in crys- 
tals partially powdered) into the upper bulb ; a is a rod with a me- 
tallic cone, 6, of a diameter greater than the glass tube, /, and a 
leather washer, c, which is thrust into the tube and completely 
closes it. The wide-mouth funnel, e, is introduced into the cap and 
neck of the apparatus, and the dry salts, mixed, thrown into it ; 



MINERAL WATER COOLERS. 151 

these, falling over the cone, 6, lodge in the upper bulb ; the rod and 
funnel are now removed, and the draught pipe screwed on. 

By tilting the apparatus some of the water runs through the 
larger tube into the upper bulb, and partially dissolving the mixed 
powders, sets them to combining ; a brisk evolution of carbonic 
acid ensues, and, by shaking, its absorption by the water is facili- 
tated. By opening the valve in the draught pipe, the charged 
water, by its own elasticity and the pressure of the excess of gas, is 
driven up the narrow tube and through the valve, and escapes. 
The object of the wire coating is to protect from injury in case of 
explosion, a purpose it but imperfectly fills. 

The water introduced may be flavored with syrup, or it may be 
drawn into a glass containing the flavoring ingredient. The ab- 
sorption of the gas is greatly facilitated by the refrigeration of the 
water, and by frequent ly shaking in up. 

This apparatus may serve the purpose of pharmacists who do not 
desire to dispense carbonic-acid water as a beverage, but need to 
keep it on hand for prescription purposes. Gasogenes are chiefly 
imported from Paris, and sold for six dollars and upwards. The 
siphon bottle now sold by many manufacturers of mineral waters 
is an admirable substitute for the gasogenes, enabling pharmacists 
to dispense carbonic-acid water in small quantities, pure and with- 
out trouble to themselves. 

The chief use of carbonic-acid water in prescription is for dissolv- 
ing saline substances in making aperient and antacid draughts, for 
suspending magnesia, for making solutions of citrate of potassium, 
and occasionally by itself as a grateful drink to allay thirst and 
lessen nausea. As a vehicle for magnesia or saline cathartics, eight 
fluidounces are usually prescribed, to be taken at once, or in divided 
portions frequently repeated. It parts with the gas upon exposure, 
and should, therefore, be used as soon as possible after the cork has 
been drawn. Sometimes, when prescribed in small doses, it is dis- 
pensed in one-ounce or two-ounce vials, which are to be kept cold 
and securely corked, the contents of each being taken separately, 
directly from the mouth of the vial. 

The chief impurities to which carbonic-acid water is liable are 
the carbonates of copper and lead, derived from the fountain and 
pipe from which it is drawn. These, particularly the former, render 
carbonic-acid water not only worthless, but injurious; they may be 
detected by the metallic taste they impart to it, by the addition of 
ammonia, which gives a blue tint to the salts of copper, and by the 
ferrocyanide of potassium, which gives a garnet-colored precipitate, 
if copper is present. Iodide of potassium indicates the presence of 
lead by a yellow precipitate. 

Soda-water coolers and syrup holders are necessary to all who dis- 
pense this beverage. One of the forms of cooler consists of a coil 
of half-inch pipe disposed around the inside of a circular cedar tub 
placed under the counter; the pipe is terminated by a small air 
chamber, in which any excess of the gas is allowed to collect, so as 
to be drawn off by a screw; this appendage may be omitted where 



152 ON" THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

the bore of the pipe exceeds | of an inch, and where it is not very 
long. The size of the tub and length of the pipe may be regulated 
by circumstances; where the demand for the water is constant in 
hot weather, the tub should hold half a bushel of ice, and the pipe 
be at least fifty feet in length. An objection to this arrangement 
is found in the fact that the portion of the pipe between the top of 
the tub and the end of the draught pipe is not refrigerated, and 
the water it contains and the first which passes through it are 
invariably drawn off first into the glass This is obviated by the 
construction of coolers upon the counter, which may or may not 
supersede the necessity of the cooler just described. 

The cooler for the counter may combine an ornamental vase or 
box and draught pipe with the advantage of a coil surrounded by 
ice. Connected with this, the cooling of the syrups, also, is a de- 
sideratum, and many years ago I contrived a vase, which consists 
of a central, oval cylinder of galvanized iron, closed at the lower 
end, and containing a coil of block-tin pipe thirty feet long, coupled 
on to a lead pipe communicating with the copper fountain under- 
neath, and is terminated by a draught pipe in the side of the vase; 
this central cylinder holds about half a peck of broken ice ; outside 
of this, and fitting closely against it, were eight syrup cans with a 
plated faucet at the base of each, arranged as closely as possible to 
admit of their being conveniently used, and all proceeding from the 
part of the vase facing behind the counter. This ice cylinder and 
series of cans formed a perfect circle with straight sides, and over 
the hole a tin casing fitted accurately, having the proper external 
contour to form a graceful vase, and the intervening space between 
this and the inside cylinders was occupied by an air-chamber, 
which furnished a non-conducting medium between the ice and the 
external warmth. In order to have the syrup cans movable for the 
purpose of repairs, the faucets were all on a line corresponding with 
the floor of the vase, and the external casing had scallops cut out- 
at its base corresponding with these and the draught pipe, so that 
the whole fitted accurately together, and could be taken apart at 
pleasure. 

This apparatus was well adapted to an establishment where the 
sale was limited or the supply of ice small. It was of too little 
capacity for a large establishment, requiring to be too frequently 
replenished with ice. The number of syrups this cooler contained 
being limited, a further assortment was required to be kept in 
bottles, or in a separate syrup cooler. 

The same principle has since been carried out on a much larger 
scale in coolers of a great variety of sizes and constructions, which, 
being well protected by laj^ers of non-conducting material, or con- 
structed of marble, and holding a large quantity of ice, require re- 
plenishing only once or twice a day in the hottest weather; some of 
these have twelve syrup cans of half a gallon to one gallon each, 
enough for a full assortment of syrups. 

The inconvenience, in drawing syrups from a faucet, of a drop 
collecting at the tip of the pipe after it has been shut off, is obvi- 



ARTIFICIAL MINERAL WATERS. 153 

atecl by an invention of Isaac S. Williams, of Philadelphia, by 
which a flat disk of metal moves with the lever and closes the end 
of the pipe as soon as the flow is stopped; by this contrivance the 
intrusion of flies and ants into the faucet is guarded against. An- 
other form of faucet is so constructed as to measure the quantity 
of syrup, delivering just enough for a single draught each time it 
is opened. 

Artificial Mineral Waters. 

Some pharmacists, who dispense largely carbonic-acid water, 
connect with this branch of their business the following, which 
they draw from separate draught pipes connected with fountains 
in the cellar, or, as in the case of Saratoga water according to the 
following formulas, they add the pure salts and the pure carbonic- 
acid water in the glass: — 

Artificial Saratoga Water. 

Mix Chloride of sodium %]. 

" magnesium, solution* f&ij. 

Bicarbonate of sodium 5j- 

Solution of iodine (Lugol's) f^ss. 

Tincture of chloride of iron f ^ss. 

Carbonic-acid water Ojss. 

Filter. Into a Oj tumbler introduce f 3J of the mixture, fill it up 
with carbonic-acid water, and drink immediately. 

Artificial Kissingen Water.\ 

Chloride of potassium . 2.20 Sulphate of calcium . 3. 

" of sodium . . 44.70 Phosphate of " . .04 

Bromide of sodium . . .64 Carbonate of " .8.14 

Nitrate of " . . .07 " of iron. . . .24 

Chloride of lithium . . .15 Silicic acid 10 

" of magnesium . 2.34 Ammonia 007 

Sulphate of " .4.50 Water Oj 

Carbonate of " . .13 

Acidum Boracicum. (BoracicAcid. H 3 B0 3 = 62.) 
For medicinal purposes this acid is prepared from, borax. Mits- 
cherlich recommends the following process: Four parts of borax 
are dissolved in ten parts of boiling water, and decomposed by two 
,and a half parts of strong muriatic acid; on cooling, hydrated bo- 
racic acid separates in shining scaly crystals, which are purified by 
recrystallization. 

Muriatic acid is preferable to sulphuric acid for its extraction, 
because the boracic acid can be easily purified from the former acid 
adhering to it, while sulphuric acid can only be entirely expelled 
by exposing the product to a strong heat, or by precipitating the 
hot solution with a sufficient quantity of nitrate of baryta. 

The acid is free of odor, has a bitter taste, dissolves in 20 parts 
of cold water and 5 parts of alcohol. It reddens litmus, its weak 

* Commercial muriatic acid saturated with magnesia, 
f For other formulas see Pharmacist for 1870, p. 169. 



154 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

solution giving a brownish wine red, and imparts to curcuma 
paper a peculiar brown color. On boiling the solution much acid 
evaporates with the aqueous vapor; its alcoholic solution burns 
with a green flame. 

Impurities which it may contain are detected by alcohol, which 
leaves most of them behind; sulphuretted hydrogen, if metallic 
salts are present ; chloride of barium, if sulphuric acid, and nitrate 
of silver, if muriatic acid is present. The salts of boracic acid are 
all soluble, and are decomposed in solution by most acids. 

Boracic acid is classified as a sedative; it is not much used in 
medicine, except in combination with soda, as borax, and with bi- 
tartrate of potassium, which it renders soluble. (See Potassii et 
JBoracis Tartras.) 

Acidum Chromicum. {Chromic Acid. Cr,0 3 ^ 50.75.) IT. S. P. 

Prep. — To 100 parts, by measure, of cold saturated solution of 
bichromate of potassium, 150 parts of pure sulphuric acid are added 
and allowed to remain till cool ; the sulphuric acid unites with the 
potassa, and the chromic acid crystallizes in deep red needles — very 
soluble and deliquescent. It is a powerful oxidizing and bleaching 
agent, and acts as a solvent of organic matter. In medicines its 
chief use is a caustic application, which, it is said, is less painful 
than most others, and, when rightly managed, does not spread be- 
yond the prescribed limits, and so soon as its corrosive operation is 
finished passes into the state of inert pulverulent sesquioxide ; 
diluted with two parts of water, it has been used with success as 
an injection in uterine hemorrhage. When heated to a tempera- 
ture between 356° and 374° it melts into a reddish-brown liquid, 
which, on cooling, becomes a red, opaque, brittle mass. If a few 
drops of alcohol are allowed to fall on a small portion of the acid, 
a vigorous action takes place, attended with an increase in bulk, 
and the liquid formed becomes yellowish-brown. 

Acidum Muriaticum. (Hydrochloric or Chlorohydric Acid. HC1 = 36.5.) 
Prepared by the action of sulphuric acid and water on chloride 
of sodium (common salt); bisulphate of sodium and hydrochloric 
acid are formed; the latter gas is distilled over, the process being 
conducted in a retort or flask, connected with a receiver containing 
water, which absorbs it rapidly in proportion as it is refrigerated. 
A colorless or slightly yellow transparent liquid, giving off white 
acid fumes on exposure to the air. The sp. gr. of the medicinal acid 
is 1.16, which contains 31.8 per cent, of real acid. 

Rationale. — In the reaction two equivalents of chloride of so- 
dium and one of sulphuric acid are used, and the hydrogen of 
the sulphuric acid is replaced by the sodium of the chloride of 
sodium, sulphate of sodium and hydrochloric acid being the result: 
2ETaCl + H 2 SO, = 2HC1 + Na 2 SO r Or, an equivalent of each being 
used, one-half the quantity of hydrochloric acid is obtained, and 
the acid sulphate of sodium : NaCl 4- H 2 S0 4 = HC1 4- KaHS0 4 . 
Only one-half of the hydrogen in each molecule of sulphuric acid 



ACIDUM NITRICUM. 155 

is here replaced by sodium, and this, combining with the one 
equivalent of chlorine of the chloride of sodium, forms one equiva- 
lent of muriatic acid. 

Tests. — It should not dissolve gold leaf, as shown by the acid 
after digesting with it giving no precipitate with protochloride of 
tin. The absence of metallic and saline impurities is shown by its 
being entirely volatile, and yielding no precipitate with chloride 
of barium, hydrosulphuric acid, or ammonia in excess. 

Reactions. — Muriatic acid may be recognized by the evolution of 
chlorine on treating a muriate with HS0 4 and Mn0 2 ; by the 
white precipitate occasioned by a soluble lead salt which is insolu- 
ble in ammonia and acids but soluble in much hot water; by the 
white precipitate produced in proto-salts of mercury, which are 
rendered black by ammonia, which dissolves very slowly in boil- 
ing muriatic or nitric acids, but readily in chlorine water and in 
aqua regia; by the white precipitate with nitrate of silver, which 
acquires a dark, ultimately black color in the sunlight, and is in- 
soluble in nitric acid, but readily soluble in ammonia. 

Acidum Muriaticum Dilution, U. S. P. 

Take of Muriatic acid 4 troyoimces. 

Distilled water A sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acid, in a glass vessel, with sufficient distilled water to 
make the diluted acid measure a pint. 

The specific gravity is 1.038. By the early editions of the Phar- 
macopoeia fluid measure was designated instead of weight, so that the 
strength of the resulting diluted acid was dependent upon the weight 
of the strong acid employed ; by directing the weighing of the 
strong acid any deficiency in its specific gravity is compensated by 
an increase of quantity, so that the resulting diluted acid cannot 
vary widely from the standard. Its dose, as a tonic, is from 15 to 
40 minims, largely diluted. 

Acidum Hydrochloriewn Dilutum, Ph. Br. 

Take of Hydrochloric acid 8 fluidounces (Imp.). 

Distilled water A sufficiency. 

Dilute the acid with 16 ounces of the water, then add more 
water so that at the temperature of 60° F. it shall measure 26} 
fluidounces, or mix 3060 grains of the acid with sufficient water to 
measure one pint; the specific gravity of this is 1.052; six flui- 
drachms contain one equivalent of 86.5 grains of hydrochloric acid, 
HC1. Its strength, compared with the diluted muriatic acid of the 
U. S. P., is as 51 to 32. Its dose is from 10 to 30 minims, largely 
diluted. 

Acidum Nitricum, IT. S. P. {Nitric Acid. 2H,ISr03 + 3H 2 = 90.) 

_ Prepared by the action of sulphuric acid upon nitrate of potas- 
sium (saltpetre) in a glass retort, when, on the application of heat, 
nitric acid and sulphate of potassium are formed. The acid, being 
volatile, is distilled over by the application of heat. It is a color- 



156 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

less, transparent liquid, with powerfully acrid odor, and is exceed- 
ingly corrosive, staining the skin yellow. The strongest acid, con- 
taining one equivalent of water, has the specific gravity 1.521; but, 
owing to the presence of water in the ingredients used in its pre- 
paration, and its mixing readily in all proportions with water, it 
is usually weaker, and has its specific gravity reduced in proportion 
to its dilution. In the Pharmacopoeia of 1840 the officinal strength 
was 1.5, but it has been changed in the more recent editions to 
1.42, as stated in the Syllabus, the object being to adapt it more 
nearly to the usual strength of the commercial article, and to 
establish a standard easily attained. The portion added to water 
in making the diluted acid was changed to correspond, and in the 
last edition, by the substitution of weight for measurement in 
designating the quantity, greater uniformity was secured. 

If nitric acid of a higher specific gravity than 1.42 be distilled, a 
stronger acid passes over first, and the boiling point of the residue 
in the retort gradually rises to 253°, when the officinal acid of 1.42 
is distilled. An acid lighter than 1.42 also boils at a lower tem- 
perature, distilling a still weaker acid, the boiling point gradually 
rising to 253°, when it remains stationary ; the officinal acid now 
distils, containing 60 per cent. ILN"0 3 , and 40 per cent. H 2 0. 

Rationale. — The formation of nitric acid in heating equal weights 
of nitrate of potassium and sulphuric acid, is thus explained in ac- 
cordance with the views of modern chemists. 

IQTO3 + HS0 4 = KS0 4 + HM) 3 . 

If half the quantity of sulphuric acid is taken, the neutral sul- 
phate of potassium, which is hard and only slightly soluble, and 
hence difficult to remove from the retort, is the residuum. - The 
formula would be as follows : — 

2K£T0 3 + HS0 4 = K 2 S0 4 + 2HISF03. 

Tests. — The principal impurities are, nitrous acid, which is shown 
by a red color ; sulphuric acid, which may be detected by adding 
to the diluted acid a solution of chloride of barium; and chlorine 
or muriatic acid, which would occasion a white precipitate with 
nitrate of silver. 

Reactions. — Nitric acid is remarkable for furnishing salts which 
are invariably soluble, except some basic salts, of which the officinal 
subnitrate of bismuth is an example. 

Cyanide of potassium, mixed with a nitrate and heated on pla- 
tinum foil, causes detonation and ignition. 

Copper filings, if mixed with a nitrate, will cause the evolution 
of red nitrous acid fumes after the addition of concentrated sul- 
phuric acid. 

The solution of a nitrate, to which concentrated sulphuric acid 
has been added, and afterwards a crystal of protosulphate of iron, 
acquires a deep brown color around the crystal, which disappears 
on agitation or on heating. Added to morphia or one of its salts, 
nitric acid strikes a blood-red color, which changes to yellow ; a 



ACIDUM NITRICUM DILUTUM. 157 

reaction which may also be produced by heating a nitrate in a test- 
tube with a drop of sulphuric acid, and then adding morphia; the 
same effect is produced by brucia and commercial strychnia. 

Acidum Nitricum Dilutum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Nitric acid, three troy ounces. 

Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acid in a glass vessel with sufficient distilled water to 
make the diluted acid measure a pint. 

The specific gravity of this is 1.068. Dose, 15 to 40 minims, 
largely diluted. 

Acidum Nitricum Dilutum, Ph. Br. 

Take of Nitric acid, six fluidounces. 

Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Dilute the acid with 24 fluidounces of the water, then add more 
water so that at the temperature of 60° F. it shall measure 31 fluid- 
ounces (imperial) ; or take of nitric acid 2400 grains to sufficient 
water to make a pint. 

The specific gravity of this acid is 1.101. Dose, 10 to 30 minims, 
largely diluted. 

Nitrous acid (though, correctly speaking, the name is applied 
to a red-colored gas, having the composition HN0 2 , formed when- 
ever binoxide of nitrogen, NO, escapes into the air) is commonly 
understood in trade to apply to fuming red-colored nitric acid, such 
as passes over chiefly at the commencement and close of the process 
of distilling nitrate of potassium with sulphuric acid, as above. 
This kind of nitric acid contains nitrous acid fumes, which the 
manufacturers usually separate from the acid of commerce by boil- 
ing, thus rendering it colorless. The best and most distinctive 
name for the article under consideration is nitroso-nitric acid. Its 
chief use to the apothecary is in making Hope's camphor mixture, 
which is elsewhere spoken of as having peculiar value when made 
with this form of acid. As the preparation of nitric and nitroso- 
nitric acid may often be desirable to the physician or apothecary, 
and as it is an easy and instructive experiment to the tyro, a de- 
scription of the process, as practised in a small way, is appended. 

A retort and receiver, such as are figured in Chapter I., Fig. 146, 
will answer the purpose. If the receiver is well refrigerated, there 
will be no difficulty in collecting the acid ; no luting of any kind 
is used. Nitrate of potassium, with half its weight of oil of vitriol 
(one equivalent of each), is now distilled ; at about 250° the acid 
commences to pass over, afterwards the heat is increased, when the 
apparatus becomes filled with red fumes, which are absorbed by the 
nitric acid in the receiver, and with oxygen, which escapes ; when 
the acid ceases to come over, the process is completed. 

On first decomposing the nitre, the sulphuric acid unites with 
one-half of the potassium, to form bisulphate of potassium, which, 
above 400°, acts on the other half of the nitre, setting nitric acid 
free, which is decomposed into nitrous acid and oxygen. 



158 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

The red fuming acid should be put away for use in glass-stop- 
pered bottles ; if the colorless N0 3 is preferred, it is heated or ex- 
posed to the air, to allow of the escape of the nitrous fumes. 

An extemporaneous process for the production of nitrous fumes 
in nitric acid is to drop, into a vial containing it, a few chips of 
some pure kind of wood ; on this, part of the HN0 3 will act, pro- 
ducing oxidation of the ligneous matter, and liberating red fumes. 
This process is only suggested where the last is impracticable. 

When free nitrous acid is mixed with a considerable quantity of 
water, it is instantly resolved into nitric acid, which unites with 
the water, and binoxide of nitrogen escapes with effervescence, but 
this change does not occur in the presence of nitric acid, for which 
nitrous acid has a strong affinity. 

Acidum Nitromuriaticum, U. S. P. (Aqua Regia.) 

Take of Nitric acid, three troyounces. 
Muriatic acid, five troyounces. 

Mix them in a glass vessel, and, when effervescence has ceased, 
keep the product in a well-stoppered bottle, in a cool place, pro- 
tected from the light. 

This forms a deep yellow, corrosive, fuming liquid, containing 
chlorine and nitric oxide in au unknown state of combination. 
The acid dissolves gold, from the free chlorine present. It should 
be made in small quantities as required, care being taken, in dis- 
pensing it, to allow the effervescence to cease before securing the 
stopper in the bottle. 

Acidum Nitromuriaticum Dilutum, U. S. P. 

Take of Nitric acid, a troyounce and a half. 

Muriatic acid, two troyounces and a half. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acids in a well-stopped bottle having the capacity of a 
pint. Shake them together occasionally during twenty-four hours, 
and then add sufficient distilled water to make the diluted acid 
measure a pint. Lastly, keep it in a cool place, protected from the 
light. 

This diluted acid is a new officinal and a convenient and long- 
needed preparation for the practitioner. The eminent usefulness 
of nitromuriatic acid as a tonic and stimulant to the liver makes 
it important that a preparation of convenient strength for use 
should be provided by the pharmacist. The chlorine and nitric 
oxide eliminated from the strong acid are fully retained in solution 
in the water here added to them. The dose is from 15 to 30 drops, 
which should be administered in a considerable quantity of sugar 
and water, preferably sucked through a glass tube so as not to affect 
the teeth. 

Acidum Sulphuricwn, IT. S. P. (Oil of Vitriol, Sulphuric Acid, H 2 S0 4 .) 

Made by burning sulphur and nitrate of potassa together in 
leaden chambers. Sulphur, when burned, forms sulphurous acid 



ACIDUM SULPHURICUM DILUTUM. 159 

(S0 2 ), which, in contact, in the form of vapor, with nitrous acid 
from the burning nitre, and water, becomes more highly oxidized 
into sulphuric acid, HS0 4 . 

It is an oil} T -looking, very heavy liquid (sp. gr. 1.843), without 
color when pure, having no odor, but an intensely acid caustic taste. 
It becomes darkened in color by contact with vegetable substances, 
which it chars by abstracting from them the elements of water. 
When mixed with water, it readily combines with it, disengaging 
heat ; its strong affinity for water is one of its useful properties. 
"When largely diluted with water, it is apt to deposit a white pre- 
cipitate of sulphate of lead derived from the leaden vessel used in 
concentrating it. It unites with alkalies and alkaline earths, and 
separates all other acids more or less completely from their com- 
binations with these. 

Reactions. — It is easy to determine the nature of this acid, whether 
free or in combination ; its characteristic reaction is a white pre- 
cipitate with all soluble salts of barium, which is insoluble in water, 
in acids, and alkalies. 

Impurities. — Sulphate of lead is apt to be present in sulphuric 
acid, and may be detected and separated by dilution with an equal 
bulk of water, which will separate it as a white cloud. Arsenic is 
an occasional impurity, which may be detected by sulphuretted 
hydrogen, giving a yellow precipitate when passed through it. 
Arsenic, if present in sulphuric acid, may be removed by adding 
some muriatic acid, and heating, when, by double decomposition, 
water and chloride of arsenic are formed, the latter readily volatil- 
izing ; it is necessary to evaporate the excess of water from the acid 
afterwards (Buchner's method). To avoid this, Loewe proposed to 
add chloride of sodium to the heated acid gradually, as long as 
arsenical vapors are emitted ; the sulphuric acid will be contami- 
nated with a little sulphate of soda, which, however, does not 
render it unfit for any ordinary purpose. 

Medical Properties. — It is only prescribed internally in one of the 
officinal diluted forms which follow, though occasionally the strong 
acid is used in ointments. It is a powerful tonic, an antiseptic, 
and a refrigerant, and, externally, is used as a caustic, though 
rather unsuited for that use. 

Acidum Sulphuricum Dilution, U. S. P. 

Take of Sulphuric acid, two troyounces. 

Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Add the acid gradually to fourteen fluidounces of distilled water, 
and mix them ; after twenty -four hours filter through paper and 
pass sufficient distilled water through the filter to make the diluted 
acid measure a pint. TJie specific gravity of this is 1.082. The 
white precipitate at first formed, on mixing with water (sulphate 
of lead), will be separated on the filter, leaving the pure diluted 
acid. Its dose is from 15 to 40 minims, freely diluted. 



160 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

Acidum Sulphuricum Aromaticurn, U. S. P. {Elixir of Vitriol.) 
Take of Sulphuric acid, six troy ounces. 

Ginger, in coarse powder, a troyounce. 

Cinnamon, in coarse powder, a troyounce and a half. 

Alcohol, a sufficient quantity to make two pints. 

Add the acid gradually to Oj alcohol, and allow the liquor to 
cool. Mix the ginger and cinnamon, and, having put them into a 
percolator, pour alcohol gradually upon them until a pint of tinc- 
ture is obtained. Lastly, mix the diluted acid and the tincture. 

Formerly, the tincture was made by treating the powdered aro- 
matics directly with the mixed alcohol and acid. The present 
process is an improvement, giving a clearer and more elegant tinc- 
ture, though still liable to precipitate an apothemelike deposit. 
Elixir of vitriol is stronger than diluted sulphuric acid, though its 
dose in drops is usually about the same, the alcoholic liquid giving 
smaller drops than the aqueous. 

This preparation is very extensively used as a refrigerant, tonic, 
and astringent. It is a popular remedy for night-sweats in phthisis, 
and for debility generally. In making solutions and pills of qui- 
nine, also in the officinal infusions of cinchona, it has important 
pharmaceutical uses. 

Acidum Sulphurosum, U. S. P. (Sulphurous Acid.) 

Take of Sulphuric acid, eight troy ounces. 

Charcoal, in coarse powder, a troyounce. 
Distilled water, thirty-six fluidounces. 

Pour the acid upon the charcoal, previously introduced into a 
matrass, and shake them together. Connect the matrass with a 
washing bottle, and this, by means of a bent glass tube reaching 
nearly to the bottom of it, with a two-necked bottle containing the 
distilled water. To the other neck of this bottle attach another 
bent tube, and let it dip slightly into a solution of carbonate of so- 
dium. All the joints having been properly luted, apply heat to the 
matrass until gas ceases to be evolved, preventing the temperature 
of the distillate from rising, by means of cold water applied to the 
bottle containing it. Lastly, pour the sulphurous acid into half- 
pint bottles, which must be well-stopped, and kept in a cool place. 

When sulphuric acid, H 2 S0 4 , is heated in contact with certain 
oxidizable substances, among which is common charcoal, it parts 
with one equivalent of oxygen, and is converted into sulphurous 
acid, S0 3 ; this is a gas very soluble in water, and by passing it into 
a vessel containing water it is absorbed, and constitutes the liquid 
acid. The intervention of a wash-bottle containing water and of 
an additional bottle of carbonate of sodium is to remove any por- 
tions of sulphuric and carbonic acids, the latter a product of the 
oxidation of the carbon. This is a new* preparation in the Phar- 
macopoeia ; it is adapted to the treatment of certain skin diseases, 
but practitioners have as yet but little familiarity with its uses. 
It is a powerful antiseptic and bleaching agent, and the gas, when 
liberated, is corrosive and suffocating. 

It is a colorless liquid, having the odor of burning sulphur, and 



PHOSPHORIC ACID. 161 

a sulphurous, sour, and somewhat astringent taste. Its specific 
gravity is about 1.035. When saturated with ammonia, and then 
treated with an excess of chloride of barium, it should afford a clear 
or nearly clear solution on the addition of muriatic acid in excess. 

Acidum Phosphoricum Glaciate, U. S. P. {Phosphoric Acid. H 3 P0 4 .) 

This is prepared from calcined bones (bone phosphate of lime), 
by decomposing them with sulphuric acid, by which process a 
superphosphate of lime is produced (the article used as a basis for 
the manure known by that name). The superphosphate is neu- 
tralized by carbonate of ammonium, which generates phosphate of 
ammonium in solution with precipitation of phosphate of calcium. 
By calcining phosphate of ammonium at a red heat, the volatile 
ingredient is expelled, and the solid H 3 P0 4 remains combined with 
1, 2, or 3 equivalents of water, or is a mixture of the tri-, the bi-, 
and the monobasic acid; the amount of water being dependent on 
the temperature. 

This acid hence exists in three allotropic modifications: 1, the 
ordinary tribasic, which is capable of uniting with three equivalents 
of a metallic oxide, and precipitating silver salts yellow; 2, pyro- 
phosphoric acid, prepared by calcination of a phosphate, which 
unites w T ith but 2 equivalents of a base, and precipitates silver salts 
white; 3, meta-phosphoric acid, obtained by burning phosphorus in 
oxygen or atmospheric air; this unites w T ith only one equivalent of 
a base, precipitates silver salts white, and has the property of co- 
agulating albumen. To convert the two lower hydrates into the 
tribasic acid, Prof. Maisch recommends the use of nitric acid, as in 
the formula for the diluted acid. He finds that of three specimens 
examined, the percentage of anhydrous H 3 P0 4 was respectively 
70.2, 77.19, and 83.48 per cent. 

To obtain glacial phosphoric acid pure, the fusion must take 
place at a considerable elevation of temperature in a platinum 
vessel; vessels of clay, porcelain, and glass, which are generally 
employed by large manufacturers, are objectionable for this pur- 
pose, as the resulting acid is more or less contaminated with lime,, 
magnesia, and silicic acid, which render the crystals slow of solu- 
tion. Even silver vessels are corroded by the melted acid. Two 
specimens taken from the same jar, of Merck's manufacture, were 
found by Prof. Maisch (see American Journal of Pharmacy, 1860, 
p. 193) to be contaminated in the one case with .794 per cent., and 
in another with .818 per cent., of these impurities. 

As far as I am acquainted with the source of the phosphoric acid 
in the American market, it is all of the manufacture of Merck, of 
Darmstadt, although it is also made by Morson & Son, of London,, 
and by several other manufacturers on the Continent of Europe,. 
who exhibited specimens at the Industrial exhibition in London. 
It is in transparent, glossy looking, solid and very hard, though, 
slightly deliquescent, masses, of an intensely sour taste, without 
odor, and freely, though somewhat slowly, soluble in water and 
alcohol, dissolving with a characteristic crackling sound. 
11 



162 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

"Its aqueous solution is not precipitated by hydrosulphuric acid, 
and no precipitate takes place after the liquid has stood for forty- 
eight hours. Chloride of barium causes a white precipitate, which 
is readily dissolved by an excess of the acid. Ammonia in excess 
produces but a slight turbiduess, and caustic potassa in excess 
evolves no ammonia." 

There are many curious properties of phosphoric acid compounds 
which show them to occupy an intermediate place among chemical 
agents, between mineral and organic bodies, to possess most unusual 
polymeric properties, and a pliancy of constitution which, to use 
the language of Graham, "peculiarly adapts the phosphoric above 
all other mineral acids to the wants of the animal economy." 

Acidum Phosphoricum Dilutum, IT. S. P. (Diluted Phosphoric Acid.) 

Take of Phosphorus, three hundred and sixty grains. 

Nitric acid, five troyounces, or a sufficient quantity. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix five troyounces of nitric acid with half a pint of distilled 
water, in a porcelain capsule, of the capacity of two pints. Add 
the phosphorus, and invert over it a glass funnel of such dimen- 
sions that its rim may rest on the inside of the capsule, near the 
surface of the liquid. Place the capsule on a sand-bath, and apply 
a moderate heat until the phosphorus is dissolved and red vapors 
cease to arise. If the reaction become too violent, add a little dis- 
tilled water ; and if the red vapors cease to be evolved before the 
phosphorus is all dissolved, gradually add nitric acid, diluted to the 
same extent as before with distilled water, until the solution is 
effected. Then, removing the funnel, continue the heat until the 
excess of nitric acid is driven off, and a syrupy liquid, free from 
odor and weighing two ounces, remains. Lastly, mix this, when 
cold, with sufficient distilled water to make it measure twenty 
fluidounces, and filter through paper. 

Diluted phosphoric acid may also be prepared by dissolving a 
troyounce of glacial phosphoric acid in three fluidounces of distilled 
water, adding to the solution forty grains of nitric acid, boiling it 
until reduced to a syrupy liquid, free from the odor of nitric acid, 
and then adding sufficient distilled water to make the diluted acid 
measure twelve fluidounces and a half. 

The first of these processes is too inconvenient to be generally 
followed by pharmacists who have ready access to the glacial acid. 
It is founded on the well-known power of nitric acid to part with 
two equivalents of its oxygen by contact with substances having a 
strong affinity for that element. Of these, phosphorus is a remark- 
able instance, and unless precautions are taken to check the reac- 
tion, as in the formula, it is accompanied by violent explosion, with 
danger of the ingredients being thrown out of the vessel; the use 
of an inverted funnel to prevent this is an admirable expedient. 

The second process, founded on the experiments of Prof. Maisch, 
on the conversion of the monohydrated into common or tribasic 
acid, contains a modification of the process given in the last edition 



ACIDUM HYDRIOBICUM DILUTUM. 163 

of this work, by the introduction of nitric acid, which is afterwards 
driven off by boiling; the resulting acid is then of the kiud that 
unites with three equivalents of a base, and precipitates the salts of 
silver yellow. 

It is a colorless liquid without odor, of an agreeable acid taste, sp. 
gr. 1.056. It is used in the dose prescribed in the Syllabus as a tonic. 
It is employed in the preparation of the phosphatic lozenges and of 
the syrups of phosphate of lime and other preparations of the kind. 

The vapors of boiling diluted phosphoric acid are without action 
on litmus-paper; the acid is not rendered turbid by alcohol, and no 
precipitate is occasioned by the dilute solution of a barium salt, 
which remains not entirely dissolved in an excess of phosphoric 
acid, nor is it soluble in nitric and muriatic acids, but freely in 
muriate of ammonium. Arsenic is sometimes present, either from 
the phosphorus or the sulphuric acid employed, and it is then in 
the state of arsenic acid ; to detect it, the acid is first mixed with 
sulphurous acid and heated to expel the excess added, after which 
the addition of sulphuretted hydrogen causes a yellow precipitate. 
Solution of sulphate of calcium produces a white precipitate soluble 
in acids. Magnesium salts in the presence of free ammonia cause 
a white precipitate insoluble in ammonia and ammonia salts, but 
dissolving in acids. 

A solution of a phosphate acidulated with muriatic acid pro- 
duces with a drop or two of sesquichloride of iron, and the subse- 
quent addition of acetate of potassium, a gelatinous, white precipi- 
tate of phosphate of sesquioxide of iron. 

Acidum Hydriodicum Dilutum. HI + Aq. 

Take of Iodine, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix thirty grains of iodine with five fluidounces of distilled 
water in a tall glass-stoppered bottle, having the capacity of half a 
pint, and pass into the mixture hydrosulphuric acid gas until the 
color of the iodine entirely disappears, and a turbid liquid remains. 
Detach the bottle from the apparatus employed for introducing the 
gas, and gradually add the remainder of the iodine, stirring at the 
same time. Then reattach the bottle, and again pass the gas until 
the liquid becomes colorless. Decant the liquid into a small ma- 
trass, which it is nearly sufficient to fill, boil it until it ceases to 
emit the odor of hydrosulphuric acid, and filter through paper. 
Then pass sufficient distilled water through the filter to bring the 
filtered liquid to the measure of six fluidounces. Lastly, keep the 
liquid in a well-stopped bottle. 

The hj-drosulphuric acid gas required in this process may be 
obtained by mixing, in a suitable apparatus, a troyounce and a half 
of sulphuret of iron, two troyounces of sulphuric acid, and six 
fluidounces of water. 

The rationale of the process is this: the sulphydric acid, the for- 
mula of which is H 2 S, reacts upon 21, forming 2HI and free sulphur, 
which separates upon the filter. 

It is considered to possess the medicinal properties of free iodine 



164 ON THE INORGANIC ACIDS. 

without its local irritating effects if diluted with water ; it has 
been given in doses commencing with a few drops, gradually in- 
creasing, two or three times a day. It is a good solvent for iodine. 
Diluted hydriodic acid is a sour liquid, colorless when recently 
prepared, and having the specific gravity of 1.112. It is wholly 
volatilized by heat, and is decomposed by nitric and sulphuric 
acids, with the liberation of iodine. When kept in contact with 
the air, it gradually becomes brown, and acquires an iodine odor. 

Acidum Hydrobromicum. HBr. 

This acid may be readily obtained by decomposing bromide of 
potassium with a concentrated solution of phosphoric acid ; it is also 
a secondary product in the preparation of monobromated camphor. 

Acidum Hydrosulphuricum, Hydrothionicum. HS. — Sulphuretted 
hydrogen occurs naturally in the so-called sulphur springs, many of 
which have a high reputation as remedial agents. The White 
Sulphur Springs, in Virginia, and the far-famed Aix la Chapelle, 
Warmbrun, and Baden Springs, in Germany, and the springs at 
Harrowgate, in England, Moffat, in Scotland, Bareges, Cauterets, 
in France, and many others, owe their celebrity, in part, to sulphu- 
retted hydrogen. These springs never contain it alone to the ex- 
clusion of other gases; nitrogen, oxygen, carburetted hydrogen, 
and carbonic acid are often found in the same waters. 

This acid is prepared artificially by mixing an ounce and a half 
of black sulphuret of iron with two ounces of sulphuric acid, and 
six of water, in a flask, and conducting the gas through a glass 
tube and wash bottle into water. The iron, being oxidized by the 
oxygen of the water, liberates the hydrogen, which, in its nascent 
state, combines with the nascent sulphur to form this gaseous acid, 
which, after being washed by passing it through a little water, is 
conducted into distilled water, kept well refrigerated. 

It is a colorless liquid, of a penetrating, disagreeable odor, like 
rotten eggs, and when inhaled acts as a poison. 

In contact with air, it is decomposed, hydrogen being oxidized 
to water, and sulphur precipitated. Hydrosulphuric or sulphydric 
acid precipitates a large class of metallic salts, and is, on that ac- 
count, very much used as a test liquid in analytical researches. 

It is free of sulphuric acid if no precipitate occurs with chloride 
of barium, and of muriatic acid if the filtrate from the precipitate 
with nitrate of copper occasions no precipitate with nitrate of silver. 

The natural sulphur waters are much used in rheumatic and 
cutaneous diseases; externally as baths, and also freely in large 
draughts. 

The aqueous solution of this acid is not, I believe, prescribed as 
a medicine. 

Acidum Hypophosphorosum. H 3 P0 2 . 

Hypophosphorous acid is a compound of phosphorus and oxygen, 
one equivalent of each, PO. It requires, however, not less than 
three equivalents of water to form the liquid acid, and of these, 



ACIDUM SULPHOHYDROCYANICUM. 165 

two equivalents enter into its salts, one only being replaced by bases. 
When heated, these salts emit phosphuretted hydrogen, a peculiar 
self-inflammable gas (fire-damp), of an odor reminding some of 
garlic. They are permanent in the air, but in solution, by heat, 
are liable to absorb oxygen ; they are all soluble in water, and a 
few are crystalline. Several processes have been used to produce 
these salts. Rose recommends boiling phosphorus in a solution of 
caustic baryta till all the phosphorus disappears, and the vapors 
have no longer the garlic odor. Lime is found to answer the same 
purpose, and is commonly used. Hypophosphite of lime is perhaps 
the most important of these salts; by oxidation in the animal 
economy, it is probably converted into readily assimilable nascent 
phosphate of calcium, and by decomposition it furnishes the other 
salts of this acid and the acid itself. 

So far as I am aware, this acid has not been prescribed in a free 
state, but it is highly probable that it may come into use. Any 
claims which phosphoric acid may possess as an agent to supply the 
waste of phosphorus and phosphates in the human economy, must 
be more than equalled by this acid. Hypophosphite of barium is 
the salt which is most eligible for the preparation of this acid, but 
it is convenient to prepare it from the calcium salt, viz. : — 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium . . 480 grains. 

Crystallized oxalic acid . . . 350 grains, or sufficient. 
Distilled water 9 lluidounces. 

Dissolve the hypophosphite of lime in six ounces of the water and 
the acid in the remainder, with the aid of heat ; mix the solutions, 
pour the mixture on a white paper filter, and when the liquid has 
passed, add distilled water carefully till it measures ten fluid- 
ounces, and evaporate this to eight and a half fluidounces. 

The solution thus prepared contains about ten per cent, of terhy- 
drated hypophosphorous acid (H 2 + 2II 2 0,PO), a teaspoonful rep- 
resenting six grains of the acid, which contains two and a quarter 
grains of phosphorus. The dose of this acid solution would vary 
from ten minims to a teaspoonful. 

Acidum Chlorohydrocyanicam. — If fulminating silver is decom- 
posed by muriatic acid, chloride of silver is precipitated, hydrocy- 
anic acid evolved, and the liquid contains chlorohydrocyanic acid — 

2AgO,C 2 M) + 7HC1 = 2AgCl + HC 2 ^ + 4HO + C 2 H 2 XC1 5 . 
It was discovered by Liebig. 

It has been employed by Drs. Turnbull and Turner in paralytic 
and torpid diseases of the eye and the ear, by exposing the diseased 
parts for half a minute to the vapors of one drachm of the acid 
contained in a sponge in a proper vial. It acts as a stimulant, pro- 
ducing a slight irritation and sensation of heat, and dilates the 
pupil 3 less than hydrocyanic acid. 

Acidum Sulphohydrocyanicum, Rhodanicitm. — It has been found 
in the seed of mustard and other cruciferse, and in the saliva of 
animals ; but it is uncertain whether pre-existino* or the result of a 
decomposition by reagents. To prepare it, powdered anhydrous 



166 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

ferrocyanuret of potassium is fused with flowers of sulphur at a 
moderate heat, dissolved in water, some oxide of iron precipitated 
by potassa, the filtrate evaporated, and the concentrated solution 
distilled with phosphoric acid. 

It is a colorless liquid, of a sour taste, which, when concentrated, 
is readily decomposed on keeping, but keeps unaltered for a con- 
siderable time in a diluted state. Its characteristic property is to 
impart a blood-red color to all neutral persalts of iron, and to as- 
sume the same color in contact with paper, cork, and other organic 
bodies containing oxide of iron. 

It has been used by Dr. Turnbull in diseases of the eye, in a 
manner similar to chlorohydrocyanic acid. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

Alkalies are electro-positive bodies ; they may be divided into 
inorganic alkalies, which are oxides of peculiar, light, and very 
combustible metals, and organic alkalies or alkaloids. Ammonia 
forms a connecting link between these, and may be classed with 
either, though most conveniently with the former. The four alka- 
lies used in medicine, and to be presented in the present chapter, 
are, potassa, soda, lithia, and arrimonia. They possess in common 
the property of turning vegetable reds to green or blue, and the 
yellow color of turmeric, and some other vegetable yellows, to 
brown. They neutralize acids, deprive them more or less of acidit}^, 
and form with them salts which are sometimes acid, sometimes 
alkaline, and sometimes neutral, according to the proportions and 
relative strengths of the acids employed. 

The laws which govern the formation of salts have been very 
thoroughly studied, and are fully laid down in works on chemistry; 
a knowledge of these, in connection with the system of nomencla- 
ture founded on them, is in the highest degree important, whether 
to the practical or theoretical chemist. 

The plan of this work embraces only such reference to the laws 
of combination as the pharmaceutical history of some of the lead- 
ing chemicals will necessarily bring into view. The officinal names 
are partly chemical and partly empirical, being, as more fully ex- 
plained in the chapter on the Pharmacopoeia and its Nomenclature, 
framed with a view to distinctness and adaptation to the purpose, 
rather than to chemical accuracy or elegance. 

In chemical works, the classification of these is in accordance 
with their chemical relations and affinities, while in treatises^ on 
materia medica, they are arranged according to their therapeutical 
properties. In a pharmaceutical work like the present, it will^ be 
w^ell, perhaps, to present yet a different arrangement, and bring 
them into view with reference to their commercial sources and 



THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 167 

modes of preparation. The following arrangement is adopted in 
this chapter. The alkaline salts are classified into syllabi, and 
treated in the same rotation in the text. 

Group 1st. — Alkaline Salts prepared from natural mineral deposits. 
" 2d. — Salts, starting with wood ashes. 
" 3d. — Salts, starting with common salt. 
" 4th. — Salts, starting with crude tartar. 
" 5th. — Preparations of ammonia. 

Potassa, soda, lithia, and ammonia, in their caustic condition (or 
combined with carbonic acid, which rather modifies than changes 
their medicinal properties), are used in medicine chiefly for neutral- 
izing excess of acids existing in the secretions. In the case of 
ammonia, this use is combined with a powerful arterial stimulant 
property, adapting it to low forms of disease. The salts formed by 
these alkalies with the acids vary in their therapeutical properties. 
Some have a special tendency to the skin, some to the kidneys, 
some to the bowels, etc. Their physical properties are no less va- 
rious; although they are mostly crystalline, some assume a pulver- 
ulent or amorphous form. The salts of potassium are generally dis- 
posed to deliquesce or become damp, while those of sodium effloresce, 
or lose their water of crystallization, falling into powder. Those 
of ammonium, by decomposition, liberate their volatile and alkaline 
base, known by its pungency and by the production of a white 
cloud when brought in contact with vapor of muriatic acid. 

The class of salts formed by muriatic acid with the alkalies and 
earths have been found to be compounds of chlorine with the 
metallic radicals of these, and might be considered with the so- 
called hydriodates (iodides) among the halogen compounds, but are 
usually classed with the oxysalts. 

The oxysalts of the alkalies are nearly all soluble. The bitar- 
trates of potassium and ammonium, and the antimoniate of sodium, 
which occur as white crystalline precipitates, constitute exceptions, 
and in their production furnish tests for potassa and soda respec- 
tively. The great solubility of the alkalies and their compounds 
constitutes a prominent distinction between them and the earths, 
to be presented in another chapter. 

Most alkalies, both organic and inorganic, may be detected by 
forming with bichloride of platinum, especially in the presence of 
free muriatic acid, yellow crystalline double chlorides of platinum 
and the alkali, which, with the exception of soda and a few organic 
alkalies, are precipitated from a concentrated solution, by alcohol. 

If a potassium salt is heated in the blowpipe flame, the outer 
flame is colored violet ; the same color is produced on igniting alco- 
hol mixed with a salt ; in both cases soda ought not to be present, 
as the color is obscured by it. Soda imparts an intensely yellow 
color to flame. 

It will be noticed that the names of the alkaline salts are changed 
in the termination of their basic constituents. This is in accordance 
with the nomenclature adopted by the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, as no- 
ticed in Part II. 



168 



THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 





C3 ^-^ 


JjHoOOOOOHQ 
VJ^l-^CiCTSrH.C-. 




















C5 rH HH ,-H 0> O H< © 










£3 


Ojeoco^mfowO* 


T e 








!>: "* oq co -h -* *— :,-h 






•S a 


WiOt^coooooOo 


$■» 








^3 S 


OiC^CMCO-^CSOil,-! 










O T3 










GQ*3 

«N.S 

O 


















S£io<MrHH^2HHt~ 

©oqocooroM 


s 








n3 








CO 1> ai ?q tjJ O tjh P 


d 








THrHi-IC<JCOC^^-l-H 


03 








o,a 

E 03 




a 

3 


I 












C3 03 

„ o 


Qp^cocoS^riicoo 


^d 

o 


So 






£ m 
d "£ 


050r-imOHCC<X) 


a 

c3 


Fn 






r-t i— I i— 1 OS rH 








'g g, 




^3 






Jo 
o cm 

P h 


OO^ w y5oooom 




8 






o ^ 


^05oOo6(ohoJ 


Tbonate in 
mical powe 
bt of citric 


Cr> 




m 
p 

P 

<1 


rH»— li— 1 OJcq rH i— 1 


,g 

CO 




O3GQ*-<CO00-*COC£5 




Sh d 

03 ^ 
O 

P^ 
-H> 

£ a 

.3 ^ 


©QOO^^'d^r-i 


ount of ca 
her in chei 
t. by weig' 


to 

CO 

o 




En 

o 

1— 1 
H 

P 

H 

0Q 


HHlMlNCCCNHH 


.3 

H— 1 




C3 
P 

d 


"tO £ 
CO 

03 .-. 

■S £ 

o % 


00 ©P CO 00 CM IOCS 
r-lCQCQ(MCO<M»-HrH 


xte the am 
to each ot 
, 7 per cen 


a. 


CD 

03 

s 


O^^oOOoOCO 


c3 

d 

5 


03 bC 


©r-JCOOOO^cdeO 


column will saturi 
column are equal 
ns, on an average, 


CO 


r c- 


CQ 


du^^ 


WcM02CQ^O«rHrH 


o 


P 


Tartaric Acid, Carbon 
im, and Carbonate of JV 
two places of decimals. 




rQ 

s 

o 

5- 


H 


P 

H 
«4 


o 

. ■ .ib . . . .Jg 

00 ° 

• -3 • • • -II 






• • II • • • II 1 

« ■» Jo log 

A ' -LOp O'O csi 

IgoS^pK^ 


n in any 
;e in any 
9) contai 








"ic Acid, 
Ammonii 
Exact to 


acid give; 
carbonal 
. gr. 1.03 


8 

CO 






6 ° 


© ii rf e '.q& 5 o" 










ghts of 

arbonate 
portions. 


P -f - £ ^ cs d O 
Op". 3 S c | c S 

•"^ cc c3 d .2 O > — ' 


mount 
mount 
a-juice 








&.P g'S-S'S e^ 


03 03 o 








•53 « 2 


itric Acid (H 3 C, 
artaric Acid, H. 
arbonate of Pot 
icarbonate of P 
arbonate of Sod 
icarbonate of S< 
arbonate of Am 
arb. of Magnes. 


03 03 £ 










HPP 








quivalent 

of Sodii 
for othe 










W 


Or-OPOPOO 












OJ<Mc^co^<rqO«rH 



hhinimmNhh 



Ohm rf) Ocq oo t- 

rHrHr-l iH OJ i-l 



^«5«oOcoi-M05 

HHri «C^ i-l rH 



!>.QOO-rH OO^H 
hhN<mwwhh 



CiOOil>QO<IMcOCO 

rH(N(MCQCOCSiTHT-l 



Ocq«*C50^<i>CO 





03 




c 




c 


03 

C 
C 
^2 


^2 

03 

O 


03 


P 


o 


W 


p 


X 

X 




03 






03 


O 


O 


P 


P 






b 


?= 


3 


d 


X 

•x 


CK 


C3 



03 c3 
g G 



c»p 



O 03 



03 O 
SP 
P^ 

fl O 

"o o _2 

<! 03 03 

ol g 

03 O^g 
■£ -g 03 

c3 3 -S 
HOP 



s g C 03 

ai O - — ' — . 

>*yi , — i 



^£•-•2 

.2 O 03 

02c^<1^ 

O 03 O O 
03 "^ 03 03 
03 5 03 03 

d 2 d d 
o T, o o 

-g 03-grO 

o3 -2 o3 03 
OPOO 



o O 



03 



C^J 



.3 CO §J> 

- ^ol^ 

is 

.„ 03 03 

d £^3 

O rj O 

S 3 .-§ ' a 

.3 a E2 Ph 

03^.g O 
^ 03 *3 ^ 
bJOd g & 

3 'd C 03 

° I 3 

rc .2 o 

O ^, QQ M 

P bOc^ c3 

^oo °t 
° || $ o 

03 II 03 - 

03 ,^-t c d 

,Q^ 03 
03 .gO « 

S 03 



X' 



P 



O g 

CO ' ' 

° H -s £ 

K^ g 03 

.d o fcc-g 

C3 COH g 



-73 

*d 
^> 

03 
tn 

d 

"o3 

Sh 

bo 

o 

aT 
o 

d 
o 
^d 
'd 



'o 
C3 



^ H o3 d 
^3^ O.S 

"O *3 ^ d 

<<H!=3 > 

.^ 1— I r— 03 

03 ,cS o 

C^l § 03 ^ 
.. "£ 03 I— i . 

" 2 J3 

d 3 * . 
*5, -% £ ^ 
_ oq d a g 

d 
o 

a 



bog- 

c3 



■T5 .S 

03 03 ro 
03 r^2 O 

^ fnCO 

CO O c+_ 
,rH ^ O 

» « Q) rf 

03 ^ g r-i ^ s 
EH ,5 o <•-< 'S, o 
03 'S ^ ° .d° £ 

H^ S^ ^P 

"$P 3.5 



03 

°*d 

CO ,r 



CUBIC NITRE. 169 



The Alkalies and their Salts. 
Group 1.— Alkaline Salts— Prepared from Natural Mineral Deposits. 

Potassii nitras, KN0 3 . From incrustations on the soil in India and elsewhere. 

Salprunelle, KN0 3 . Fused with a little sulphur, and containing a trace of sulphate. 

Potassii chromas, K 2 ,Cr0 4 . From chrome iron ore and nitrate of potassium by fusion, etc. 

Potassii bichromas, K 2 .Cr0 4 ,Cr0 3 . From chromate by an acid. 

Potassii bisulphas, KI1S0 4 . The residuum of the process for nitric acid. 

Potassii sulphas, K 2 S0 4 . By adding KO to the residuum of the process for nitric acid. 

Sodii boras, 2NaB0 2 ,2HB0 2 ,9H 2 0. Found native in Thibet, and purified. 

Sodii nitras, NaN0 3 . Found native in desert in Peru. 

Sodii tungstas, NaW0 4 . From native tungstate of calcium. 

Sel de Vichy, Na 2 C0 3 . By separating Vichy spring water. 

Lithia, LiO. Existing in several minerals and mineral waters. 

Lithii carbonas, LiC0 3 . Precipitated by carb. ammonium from the chloride. 

Potassii Nitras.. (Nitre. EN"0 3 .) 

Nitre, or Saltpetre, is imported from the East Indies, where it is 
extracted from the soil by mixing them with a little wood-ashes, 
lixiviating with water, and crystallizing. It is refined in this 
country by recrystallization, and then exists in large six-sided, 
nearly colorless prisms, anhydrous, soluble in four parts of cold 
water, and with a cooling, rather sharp taste. 

Among the uses of nitrate of potassium in pharmacy, are the 
preparation of nitric acid, of spirit of nitric ether, and of collodion. 
Owing to the immense consumption of it in a pure form by the 
manufacturers of gunpowder, they are resorted to for procuring the 
best qualities for medicinal use. Dupont, near Wilmington, Dela- 
ware, furnishes a fine article both in crystals and in the form of a 
granular powder. It is one of the most popular of the refrigerant, 
diuretic, and sedative medicines. Dose, gr. v to 9j. In over- 
doses it acts as a corrosive poison. 

Test. — Much of the saltpetre of commerce is adulterated with 
nitrate of sodium and chloride of sodium (common salt). In the 
absence of these, 100 grains of the dry salt, treated with 60 grains 
of sulphuric acid, and the whole ignited in a crucible till it ceases 
to lose weight, yield 86 grains of sulphate of potassium. The 
presence of chlorides may be shown by treating a weak solution 
with a few drops of solution of nitrate of silver, which would throw 
down a white insoluble precipitate of chloride of silver. 

Sal Prunelle. — This is fused saltpetre run into round moulds about 
the size of a filbert, of a white color, and possessing the properties 
of the nitrate. From the use of sulphur in its fusion, it often con- 
tains sulphate of potassium. It is used to dissolve in the mouth in 
affections of the throat. 

Sodii Nitras. (Cubic Nitre. Na,ls0. y ) 

This salt is found in the desert of Atacama, in Peru, where it 
forms beds of vast extent. The natural deposits contain chlorides 
and sulphates of sodium, and other bases in variable proportions. 
The native salt, therefore, requires to be purified by recry stall iza- 



170 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

tion from twice its weight of boiling water, when it is generally 
sufficiently pure for medicinal purposes. It is used in the manu- 
facture of sulphuric and nitric acids, and of manures. In a state 
of purity, suitable for use in medicine, it may be made by neutral- 
izing carbonate of sodium with nitric acid, evaporating, and crys- 
tallizing. It has been highly recommended in dysentery in a dose 
of from half an ounce to an ounce in a day, in mucilage. 

It crystallizes in rhombohedrons, detonates less violently than salt- 
petre upon burning charcoal, when it shows a yellow flame. Its 
solution in distilled water is not disturbed by any reagent, except 
those few precipitating the soda ; chlorides are detected as above. 

Potassii Chromas. K 2 ,Cr0 4 . 

This salt is obtained in large manufactories as a preliminary step 
to the preparation of the bichromate, by melting powdered chrome 
iron ore (FeO,Cr 2 3 ) with saltpetre, dissolving it out with water, 
evaporating, and crystallizing. For pharmaceutical use it may be 
conveniently made by adding carbonate of potassium to a solution 
of the bichromate until it has acquired a slight alkaline reaction. 
It occurs in lemon-yellow prisms of a bitter, almost styptic taste, 
requiring little more than two parts of water at 60° for its solution, 
which has an alkaline reaction ; it is insoluble in alcohol. 

It is an irritating resolvent, alterative, and emetic ; the dose is 
one-eighth of a grain every two or three hours ; or from 2 to 4 grs. 
as an emetic. It is used in the preparation of a cheap writing fluid 
with extract of logwood. 

Potassii Bichromas. K 2 ,Cr0 4 ,Cr0 3 . 

This salt is prepared from chromate of potassium, by adding to 
a solution of the latter sulphuric acid, which abstracts an equiva- 
lent of the base from two of the chromate, and leaves one equiva- 
lent of the bichromate in solution. As obtained in commerce it is 
sufficiently pure for medicinal purposes ; it crystallizes in prisms, 
which are isomorphous with the anhydrous bisulphate of potas- 
sium, but the latter, owing to its greater solubility in water, can 
be easily removed by recrystallization if present. Bichromate of 
potassium has an orange-red color and a cooling, bitter, metallic 
taste; it is soluble in 10 parts of water at ordinary temperature, 
but is insoluble in alcohol. 

It has been employed as a powerful alterative in the dose of o'o 
to T V grain, repeated two or three times daily. In larger doses, 
f to 1 grain, it acts as an emetic, but its use is dangerous on account 
of its irritating poisonous properties. It has been externally em- 
ployed as a caustic and irritant in the form of a concentrated solu- 
tion, and in powder. In pharmacy it is employed as an oxidizing 
agent in the preparation of valerianic acid. 

Tests. — Muriatic acid or common salt is detected by nitrate of 
silver; sulphuric acid or sulphate of potassium by chloride of 
barium; salts of sodium by antimoniate of potassium; lime and 



BORAX. 171 

magnesia (as nitrates, from imperfect purification) by carbonate of 
potassium ; metallic oxides by sulphuretted hydrogen and ferrocya- 
nide of potassium. 

Potassii Bisulphas. {Bisulphate of Potassium. KHS0 4 .) 

Contained in the residuum of the preparation of nitric acid from 
nitrate of potassium, or obtained from the neutral sulphate by fusing 
it together with an excess of sulphuric acid, and recrystallizing it. 

It is readily soluble in water, and has a bitter acid taste; it con- 
tains 2H 2 0. It is used occasionally in cases of constipation when 
the tonic effect of an acid is desired. The dose is one or two 
drachms. 

Potassii Sulphas. ( Vitriolated Tartar. K 2 ,S0 4 .) 

Sulphate of potassium is prepared from bisulphate, the residuum 
left after treating nitrate of potassium with sulphuric acid, for the 
distillation of nitric acid; it is also a residuary product in the 
manufacture of sulphuric and of tartaric acid. To obtain the sul- 
phate from bisulphate, lime is added, which on boiling abstracts 
the excess of sulphuric acid, and is precipitated as sulphate of cal- 
cium ; by boiling with carbonate of potassium the excess of lime and 
sulphate of calcium is removed, and the sulphate of potassium is 
then obtained pure by crystallization. The crystals are hard, heavy, 
and usually regular in their shape, being short six-sided prisms, 
terminated by corresponding pyramids. It is slowly soluble in 9 J 
times its weight of cold and less than 4 times its weight of boiling 
water. It consists of one equivalent of sulphuric acid 96, and one 
of potassium 78.2 = 174.2. 

It is used in the preparation of Dover's powder, but in this 
country is rarely given alone or in any other combination. It is 
esteemed a cathartic in doses of 3j to 3\j? and often prescribed as 
such in Europe, especially in cases of pregnancy. 

Tests. — Lime or its sulphate is detected by oxalate of potassium; 
muriatic acid or chlorides by nitrate of silver; metallic oxides by 
sulphuretted hydrogen. It is not often adulterated or sophisticated. 

Sodii Boras. {Borax. 2¥aB0 2 ,2HB0 2 ,9H 2 0.) 

Borax is found native in Thibet, and imported in a crude condi- 
tion from India, also manufactured from native boracic acid in 
Tuscany. In its refined condition it is in large and handsome 
white crystals, semi-transparent, with slight alkaline reaction, and 
slightly alkaline not disagreeable taste, soluble in 12 parts of cold 
water. Borax consists of two equivalents of boracic acid and one 
of sodium. The proportion of water of crystallization appears to 
vary with the process of crystallization, though generally, as stated 
in the syllabus, ten equivalents. This salt is called fo'-borate of 
sodium, because it contains two equivalents of its acid constituent, 
and 5w6-borate of sodium because it is alkaline in its reaction. It 
is thus anomalous in its relation to nomenclature. 



172 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

It is a diuretic and antacid, and by some is said to promote con- 
traction of the uterus, to which end it is associated with ergot. It 
is a very favorite addition to gargles and mouth-washes — being 
much prescribed for the sore mouth of infants, triturated with 
sugar, 1 part to 7, and touched to the tongue, or blown into the 
mouth through a quill. 

It is remarkable for its whitening effect upon ointment, upon 
which it seems to act by its sub-alkaline properties, partially saponi- 
fying them without materially diminishing their bland and emol- 
lient effects. 

Tests. — Alum is detected by a white precipitate occasioned by 
carb. of potassium; metallic oxides by sulphuretted hydrogen; sul- 
phuric acid by nitrate of barium, if the precipitate is insoluble in 
water; muriatic acid by nitrate of silver, if the precipitate is insolu- 
ble in nitric acid. 

Tungstate of Sodium. Na,W0 4 4- 2H 2 0. 

This salt has been introduced as a preservative of cotton and 
other textile materials from lire. Tungstic acid consists of three 
equivalents of oxygen combined with one of the metal tungsten; it 
is obtained from the native tungstate of calcium by digesting it with 
hydrochloric acid; chloride of calcium is dissolved, and tungstic 
acid precipitates. It is also obtained from wolfram, a native tung- 
state of manganese and iron, by digesting it in nitrohydrochloric 
acid, which dissolves the oxides of iron and manganese, and leaves 
the tungstic acid as a yellow powder. This acid is quite insoluble 
in water and acids, but dissolves in alkaline solutions. Tungstate 
of sodium may be formed by fusing the wolfram with carbonate of 
sodium, and digesting in water, which dissolves out the sodium 
salt, and on evaporation yields it in crystals containing two 
equivalents of water. 

The mode of using it upon clothing to be protected from fire is 
as follows: — 

To three parts of good (dry) starch, add one part of tungstate of 
sodium, and use the starch in the ordinary way. 

If the material does not require starching, mix in the proportion 
of one pound of tungstate of sodium to two gallons of water — well 
saturate the fabric with this solution, and dry it. 

The heat of the iron in no way affects the non-inflammability of 
the fabric. 

Vichy Salt for making Artificial Vichy Water. 

There are two saline substances under this name, obtained by 
evaporating the water of the celebrated Vichy spring, in Germany ; 
the one, consisting chiefly of carbonate of sodium, crystallizes out 
when the waters are evaporated to a sp. gr. of about 1.200; the 
other is produced by evaporating to such an extent that^ the resid- 
ual saline mass sets upon cooling, and therefore contains nearly 
if not quite all the mineral constituents not susceptible of decom- 



CARBONATE OF LITHIUM. 173 

position by the process. The first of these salts is used for making 
Vichy water extemporaneously, the second for baths. 

Lithia. LiO=23. 

This alkali is the oxide of a rare metal resembling sodium, which 
floats on rock oil, and is the lightest of all known solids. Sp. gr. 
.5986. It belongs to the class of alkalies, as its carbonate is solu- 
uble and has an alkaline reaction. 

Lithia exists in small quantities in the minerals spodumene or 
triphane, petalite, and lepidolite, but the most abundant source of 
it has been a native phosphate Triphylene, found in Bavaria, con- 
sisting of phosphates of iron, manganese, and lithium. This mine- 
ral is dissolved in hj'drochloric acid, the iron peroxidized by £T0 3 , 
the solution diluted, and the phosphate of iron thrown down by 
ammonia. The manganese is removed byH 2 S, and the Altered 
liquid on evaporation calcined and treated with alcohol, which 
takes up the chloride of lithium. This source of lithia is said to 
be now exhausted. It is also prepared from lepidolite or lithium 
mica, in which it is associated with silica, alumina, and potash, and 
from the waters of Kreuznach, in Prussia, and of certain mineral 
springs of Baden. 

All the salts of lithium impart a red color to flame, similar to 
that from strontium ; sodium hides this color. The double phos- 
phate of lithium and sodium is a very insoluble salt, requiring 1400 
parts of water at 59° for solution; hence, phosphate of sodium is 
used as a test for its soluble salts. 

Lithii Carbonas. (Carbonate of Lithium, Li,C0 3 = 36.95.) 

Carbonate of lithium is slowly precipitated from a solution of 
chloride by the addition of carbonate of ammonium in excess ; it 
is then washed with alcohol and dried. 

In the year 1843, Alexander Ure, of London, drew attention to 
an observation of Lipowitz, that a solution of carbonate of lithium 
exerts a remarkable solvent power upon uric acid, and suggested 
that advantage might be taken of this fact by injecting into the 
bladder such a solution, with a view to dissolve or disintegrate 
uric acid calculi. 

In 1857, Dr. Garrod, of London, commenced its administration 
internally in cases of gouty diathesis and chronic gout. The 
atomic weight of this alkali being very low, it possesses a propor- 
tionate saturating power upon acids, and it has been found by ex- 
periments that carbonate of lithium will dissolve urate of sodium 
from a piece of gouty cartilage more efficiently than either bicar- 
bonate of potassium or of sodium. Dr. Garrod found that in doses 
of one to four grains, dissolved in water, and repeated two or three 
times a day, it produced no physiological symptoms, but exerted a 
marked influence in cases where the patients were voiding uric 
acid gravel, causing the formation of these deposits to diminish and 



174 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

even to cease. In gout it is found to diminish the frequency and 
severity of the attacks. 

The carbonate is a white powder, having a decidedly alkaline 
taste, not unlike that of bicarbonate of sodium ; it requires about 
100 times its weight of water for solution. For internal use the 
solution is made very dilute, and, advantage being taken of the 
solvent action of carbonic acid, it is usually dissolved in the pro- 
portion of five to ten grains in a half pint of carbonic-acid water. 
Dose, a wineglassful three or four times a day. In cases of gout, 
where more decidedly alkaline solutions are indicated, it may be 
associated with bicarbonate of sodium or of potassium. The 
maximum dose is four grains three times a day. 

Group 2. — Salts, Starting with Wood-ashes. 

Potash. Lixivium from ashes of forest trees evaporated to a dark hard mass. 

Potassii carbonas irapura. Ignited potash. Pearlash. 

Saleratus. Dry pearlash subjected to gaseous C0 2 . 

Potassii carbonas, K 2 C0 3 ,3H 2 0. Solution pearlash filtered and granulated. 

Potassii bicarbonas, KHC0 3 . Passing C0 2 into solution carbonate, etc. 

Potassii carbonas pura, K 2 C0 3 ,3H 2 0. Calcining bicarbonate, granulating. 

Liquor potassse. Boiling carbonate with hydrate lime, sp. gr. 1.065. 

Potassa, KHO. Evaporating liquor potassse to dryness, and fusing. 

Potassa cum calce. Equal parts potassaa and lime triturated and sometimes fused 

together. 
Potasii acetas, 2KAc. Neutralizing acetic acid with carbonate, and crystallizing. 
Potassii citras, 3KCi. Neutralizing citric acid with carbonate, and granulating. 
Liquor potassii citratis. A variety of extemporaneous processes. 
Potassii phosphas, 2KH 3 P0 4 . By combining 3HP0 4 with 2 eq. K 2 C0 3 . 
Potassi hypophosphis, KH 3 P0 2 . By precipitating hypophosphite lime with carbonate 

potassium. 
Potassii chloras, 2K,C10 3 . Passing excess of chlorine through solution potassae. 
Sodii chloras, NaC10 3 . Decomposing chlorate of potassium with bitartrate of sodium. 
Potassii silicas. Fusing together silica and K 2 C0 3 . 
Potassii picras. Saturating picric acid with KHO. 

It is remarkable that the only available source of carbonates of 
potassium is from the combustion of vegetable organizations, which, 
by absorbing the salts of the alkalies in solution in the water per- 
meating the soil, have assimilated these into their structure, and 
on their combustion they are obtained in the ashes, remaining un- 
consumed. By lixiviating the ashes of forest trees and evaporating 
the lye, potash is obtained, and by subjecting this to the action of 
flame it is converted into pearlash. 

Potash and pearlash, though important in their relations to the 
arts and to domestic economy, are seldom employed in medicine, 
except in the preparation of the other forms of caustic and carbo- 
nated alkali, and the other salts of potassium enumerated in the 
table. 

Saleratus is a useful and tolerably pure sesquicarbonate of potas- 
sium, prepared by subjecting pearlash to the fumes of fermenting 
substances, from which it absorbs additional carbonic acid. It 
occupies a position intermediate between the carbonate and bicar- 
bonate, and is much used in baking to furnish the carbonic acid 
which raises the bread, rendering it light and porous. Light cakes 



BICARBONATE OF POTASSIUM. 175 

made with it are generally considered less objectionable by dyspep- 
tics than those made with yeast. Recently most of the saleratus 
of the shops is an imperfectly carbonated bicarbonate of sodium. 

In the last edition of the British Pharmacopoeia a series of test 
solutions has been directed, termed volumetric solutions from the 
fact that each measure of them (by volume) contains a definite 
quantity of the given chemical ; and when a given volume of test 
liquid is consumed, it is at once known how much of the chemical 
has been used; then by the table of equivalents the purity of the 
chemical tested by the volumetric solution can be ascertained at 
once. The facility with which these solutions can be used makes 
it a subject of surprise that they have not been introduced much 
more generally long since, as the same method has been employed 
in assays of silver by Gay-Lussac's method for nearly if not quite 
fifty years. 

Potassii Carbonas. (Salt of Tartar. K 2 C0 3 3II 2 0.) 

Made by dissolving pearlash in an equal weight of cold water, 
filtering or decanting to separate insoluble matters, and evaporating, 
stirring actively so as to form a granular powder, which is very 
deliquescent, and usually contains water in the proportion of three 
equivalents to every two of salt. It is soluble in its weight of 
water. It contains traces of sulphate of potassium and chloride 
of potassium, which do not interfere with its medicinal uses ; it 
also contains silica in the form of silicate of potassium, which, on 
absorbing C0 2 from the air, is precipitated. Dose, gr. x to 3ss, 
largely diluted, as an antacid; externally it is prescribed in lotions 
containing 3\j to Oj of water. 

A new source of supply for the potassium salts has been lately 
pointed out by Mr. Herbert Hazard, viz., the ashes of the corn-cob. 
(See Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1872, page 152.) 

Potassii Bicarbonas. (Bicarbonate of Potassium. K,HC0 3 .) 

Made by passing carbonic acid gas (generated by the action of 
diluted sulphuric or muriatic acid on chalk or marble) into a solu- 
tion of carbonate of potassium in about three parts of water unto 
saturation, then evaporating at a heat not exceeding 160°, and 
crystallizing. 

This operation may be conducted with an arrangement of bottles 
such as is shown in Fig. 166, the gas being passed through water 
to free it from impurities, and then discharged into the solution of 
carbonate in a beaker or other suitable containing vessel. The 
point of saturation may be judged proximately by the bubbles of 
gas ceasing to diminish in size as they escape through the body of 
the solution. 

If the solution is saturated, the formation of crystals will com- 
mence in the containing vessel as soon as the requisite quantity of 
the gas has been absorbed. The rationale of the process is, that the 
carbonate of potassium, having a strong affinity for carbonic acid, is 



176 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

converted into bicarbonate by absorbing an additional equivalent, 
a reaction which, in this instance, requires one equivalent of water, 
which gives to this salt a determinate and uniform composition — 
K 2 C0 3 -j- H 2 + C0 2 = 2KHC0 3 . Bicarbonate of potassium is in large 
transparent crystals, with a mild alkaline taste, soluble in about 
four parts of water. 

The uniformity of this salt fits it for use as a test for the strength 
of acids, and it is directed in the Pharmacopoeia as the test to ascer- 
tain the strength of acids, which it neutralizes in the ratio of their 
strength. 

The following table exhibits the proportion of bicarbonate of 
potassium which neutralizes 100 grains of each of the acids 
named : — 

Acetic acid, strong, 60 grains. Diluted, 7.5 grains. 
Diluted nitric acid, 20 grains. 
Diluted sulphuric acid, 25 grains. 
Citric acid, crystallized, 150 grains. 
Tartaric acid, crystallized, 133.5 grains. 

Tests. — The bicarbonates, if fully bicarbonated, do not precipitate 
sulphate of magnesium, by which they may be known from car- 
bonates. 

The presence of monocarbonate of potassium is proved by a red- 
dish precipitate occasioned with corrosive sublimate. 

A precipitate by an excess of caustic alkalies shows the presence 
of earthy or metallic oxides. 

A residue after treating the salt with nitric acid, evaporating and 
redissolving in water, proves the presence of silicic acid ; a precipi- 
tate in this solution, with silver or baryta salts, indicates muriatic 
or sulphuric acid. 

By being calcined, this salt loses 30.7 grains of water and carbonic 
acid, forming the pure carbonate of the Pharmacopoeia. 

Uses. — As a medicine, bicarbonate of potassium acts as a direct 
and efficient antacid, more pleasant and efficient than bicarbonate 
of sodium and more acceptable to the stomach than the carbonate. 
It readily neutralizes free acid in the stomach ; the excess being 
absorbed renders the blood and urine decidedly alkaline, and it is 
hence considered alterative in its action. It is used to liberate car- 
bonic acid, and for making the saline preparations of potassa is 
preferred to carbonate, being free from silica. Dose, 9j to 3j- 

Potassii Carbonas Pura. 

The ignition of the potash forming pearlash deprives it of organic 
matter, and brings it more completely into the condition of a carbo- 
nate. The solution, filtration, and granulation of this deprive it 
of some inorganic impurities, but leave it contaminated with silica. 
Charging it with a further dose of carbonic acid precipitates this 
impurity; and, finally, calcination at a red heat will drive off the 
additional dose of carbonic acid and the water of crystallization, 
and leave the pure carbonate. This is directed to be dissolved 




Metallic chimney 



SOLUTION OF POTASSA. 177 

and granulated, by which it will absorb water as 
in the case of the ordinary carbonate. The only 
use to which it is applied is as a test, and when 
absolute purity is required. An iron crucible is 
directed in the Pharmacopoeia for this purpose, but 
a porcelain or a platinum crucible will serve in 
small operations. 

Fig. 174 shows the mode of suspending a cru- 
cible of small size over a gas lamp chimney by a 
bent wire; a similar arrangement may be adopted 
in using the Russian or other alcohol lamps. I 
have illustrated and described this more fully, be- 
cause on a small scale it is readily practicable, and and "crucible 
it is frequently difficult to obtain the chemically port. 
pure carbonate. Formerly this was directed to be 
prepared by igniting bitartrate of potassium, hence the name salt 
of tartar now frequently applied to both the carbonates. 

Sesquicarbonate of Potassium. — Under this name the "Eclectic" 
practitioners prescribe an alkaline powder prepared by dissolving 
bicarbonate in water and evaporating " by means of heat raised a 
very few degrees above the boiling point," till " sufficiently concen- 
trated," the resulting precipitate is then dried by "a gentle heat." 
It is well ascertained that the bicarbonate of potassium loses C0 2 
by an elevation of temperature, but it is nonsense to claim for 
it that as thus prepared it is a true sesquicarbonate. This powder 
is described as being permanent in dry air, while the ordinary car- 
bonate is deliquescent. The synonym "vegetable caustic" applied 
to it in Dr. King's Dispensatory is more properly applied to caustic 
potassa, KHO. 

Liquor Potassce, U. S. P. (Solution of Caustic Potassa.) 

Reduced. 

Take of Bicarbonate of potassium, fifteen troyounces .... gxv. 

Lime, nine troyounces £ix. 

Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the bicarbonate in four pints (reduced, f^viij) of distilled 
water, and heat the solution until effervescence ceases. Then add 
distilled water to make up the loss by evaporation, and heat the 
solution to the boiling point. Mix the lime with four pints (re- 
duced, f o viij) of distilled water, and, having heated the mixture to 
the boiling point, add it to the alkaline solution, and boil for ten 
minutes. Then transfer the whole to a muslin strainer, and, when 
the liquid portion has passed, add sufficient distilled water, through 
the strainer, to make the strained liquid measure seven pints (re- 
duced, fsxiv). Lastly, keep the liquid in well-stopped bottles of 
green glass. 

Solution of potassa, thus prepared, has the specific gravity of 
1.065, and contains five and eight-tenths per cent, of hydrate of 
potassa. 

An improved process, by John Abraham, of Liverpool, directs 
12 



178 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

that the carbonate of potassium be put into a stoneware vessel and 
the water added, then to boil, and then to add little by little the 
hydrate of lime, stirring during half an hour; after subsidence the 
solution may be poured off clear. A practical advantage is gained 
by adding the hydrate of lime to the alkaline solution, instead of 
vice versa. 

Solution of potassa may also be prepared in the following 
manner: — 

Take of Potassa, a troy ounce (reduced, gss). 
Distilled water, a pint (reduced, f^j). 

Dissolve the potassa in the distilled water, and allow the solution 
to stand until the sediment subsides. Then pour off the clear 
liquid and keep in well-stoppered bottles of green glass. 

This preparation, by the first process as above, may be con- 
veniently made with the apparatus ordinarily at hand. An evap- 
orating dish and two beaker glasses, or salt-mouth bottles of 
sufficient size, and a strainer stretched over a frame or funnel are 
sufficient. The use of a strainer may be avoided by allowing the 
precipitated carbonate of calcium to subside, and drawing off the 
liquid with a siphon, or decanting it carefully. 

The second process is chiefly resorted to extemporaneously, and 
by those who use but small portions ; it is only satisfactory where 
the caustic potassa is of standard quality; as frequently found in 
drug stores, it is deteriorated by deliquescence and the absorption 
of carbonic acid. 

This solution is a colorless liquid with an intensely acrid taste ; 
sp. gr. 1.065. It should not effervesce with acids or precipitate 
when mixed with two or three measures of strong alcohol. Metallic 
impurities are detected as in the case of bicarbonate of potassium. 
It has a very strong affinity for carbonic acid, which it continually 
abstracts from the air. It attacks flint glass; hence the direction 
to keep it in green glass bottles. Its effect upon the skin is to 
produce an oily or soapy sensation, due to the destruction of the 
cuticle; it also destroys or greatly injures vegetable fibre. 

Its use in medicine is chiefly confined to neutralizing free acid in 
the stomach and in the secretions. It is applied to the treatment 
of scrofulous and cutaneous affections, and to the arrest of the uric 
acid deposits in the urine. The dose is from n\,v to f3ss. When 
given internally, it should be largely diluted with milk. Dr. E. 
"Wilson, of this city, has used it with success in a case of extreme 
obesity for reducing the accumulation of fat ; by pushing the dose, 
dilated as above, to ^1x1 three times a day, his patient, a female, 
lost 48 lbs. weight in a few months, so that from weighing 198 lbs. 
at the commencement of the treatment, she weighed only 150 lbs. 
at its close. 

Potassa, U. S. P. ( Vegetable Caustic, Caustic Potassa, Hydrate of 
Potassa. KEO.) 

This preparation is made from the foregoing by evaporating it 
in an iron vessel to dryness, fusing it, and running it into moulds. 



POTASSII ACETAS. 179 

It is usually found in the shops of two qualities — one in sticks 
somewhat thicker than a quill, of a bluish-gray color and peculiar 
earthy odor; the other quite white, frequently thinner than the 
other, and more free from organic impurities. It is so deliquescent 
as to become moist on exposure for a few minutes to the air, and 
should be kept well and tightly closed ; sometimes a few coriander 
seeds are placed with it in the bottle ; they keep it dryer, and pre- 
vent its contact with the glass, upon which it acts. 

It is a very powerful caustic, destroying the part to which it is 
applied, and producing a deep eschar. Its chief use is in opening 
abscesses, forming issues, etc. One of its chief disadvantages for 
these applications arises from its deliquescence, which occasions the 
spread of its corrosive influence to adjacent parts. 

Potassa cum Calce, U. S. P. 

Take of Potassa, 

Lime, of each, a troyounce. 

Rub them together into a powder, and keep the mixture in a 
well-stopped bottle. This powder is designed to be applied in the 
form of paste, made with a little alcohol, but by a modification of 
the process, a similar article is produced, which is run into sticks, 
and is found in the shops in that form, resembling common caustic 
in appearance. It is milder from the dilution with lime, and less 
deliquescent. 

Potassii Acetas. (Sal Diureticus. 2K,Ac + 2H 2 0.) 

Made by neutralizing acetic acid with bicarbonate of potassium. 
The potassa combines with the acetic acid, liberating the carbonic 
acid with effervescence ; the process is completed by evaporating 
by a carefully regulated heat till it fuses and crystallizes, or dries 
into a powder. This preparation is difficult to prepare in perfec- 
tion ; the finest specimens found in this market are imported from 
France, in foliated satiny masses, unctuous to the touch, and of a 
pungent saline taste ; it is neutral in its reactions, and extremely 
soluble and deliquescent, so much so as to be very difficult to 
manipulate with. 

In medicine it is used as a diuretic, refrigerant, and alterative. 
Recently it is much prescribed in acute rheumatism. The acid it 
contains being consumed in passing through the system, the alkali 
is found as carbonate in the urine, which is much increased in 
quantity. The dose of acetate of potassium is from gr. x to 3ij- 

Soluble in half its weight of water and in twice its weight of 
alcohol ; the aqueous solution is without action on litmus. Metallic 
or earthy impurities are detected as in the case of bicarbonate of 
potassium ; hyposulphurous acid is detected by the gray precipitate 
obtained with a solution of protonitrate of mercury ; the pure salt 
affords a white precipitate. 

The crystallized salt is expensive, and very liable to deteriorate 
by deliquescence, and when deliquesced is of variable state of hy- 



180 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

d ration, so that some pharmacists find it desirable to make the 
salt in concentrated solution, and dilute it as required. The follow- 
ing formula, by James T. Shinn, of Philadelphia, is adapted to this 
purpose: — 

Take of Carbonate of potassium .... 4 ounces, 6 drachms. 

Acetic acid 11^ ounces, or sufficient. 

Add the acid gradually to the carbonate of potassium until effer- 
vescence ceases, and the liquid is neutral to test paper, and water 
sufficient to make a pint. Each fluidrachm of this solution con- 
tains half a drachm of acetate of potassium, and it may thus be 
"weighed by measure" to suit each prescription presented. 

A recipe is given among the Extemporaneous Preparations for a 
ready mode of preparing acetate of potassium in a liquid form, 
suitable for use. 

Potassii Citras, U. S. P. (Citrate of Potassium. 3K,Ci ) 

Reduced. 

Take of Citric acid, %x £x. 

Bicarbonate of potassium, 5xiv 3xiv. 

Water, q. s. (Oij) f^iv. 

Dissolve the citric acid in the water, add the bicarbonate gradu- 
ally, and when effervescence has ceased, strain and evaporate to 
dryness, stirring constantly after the pellicle has begun to form till 
the salt granulates, then rub it in a mortar (wedgewood), pass it 
through a coarse sieve, and put it in a bottle, which should be kept 
closely stopped. In this process, as in the foregoing, by single 
elective affinity the base combines with the acid, liberating the 
gaseous ingredient with effervescence. As citric acid of commerce 
varies in the precise quantity of water it contains, these propor- 
tions may be changed so as to insure complete saturation, though 
the presence of a slight excess of the acid is not objectionable. 
The potassium <is here added in the full proportion to form a basic 
salt; there are, however, two other salts of citric acid and potassium 
having one and two equivalents of the base, respectively. The salt 
is a granular powder, soluble in twice its weight of water, from 
which alcohol precipitates a more concentrated solution, deliques- 
cent, and in its effects refrigerant and diaphoretic. Its dose is 
from 3j to 3ss. 

Earthy and metallic oxides are precipitated by alkalies, sulphu- 
retted hydrogen, and ferrocyanide of potassium; sulphuric and 
muriatic acids by salts of barium and silver; tartaric acid by the 
addition of muriatic acid. 

Among the diaphoretic solutions, under the head of Extempora- 
neous Preparations, this salt in various liquid forms is again in- 
troduced. 

Potassii Chloras. {Chlorate of Potassium. K,C10 3 .) 

Chlorate of potassium may be prepared by passing chlorine gas 
into a solution of potassa or its carbonate ; at first, chloride of potas- 



POTASSII CHLORAS. 181 

sium and hypochlorite of potassium are formed ; with these, a 
further proportion of chlorine produces changes resulting in the 
conversion of the hypochloric into chloric acid, which exists in 
combination with the potassa as chlorate of potassium; this is sepa- 
rated by crystallization from the more soluble chloride of potassium. 
There are modifications of this process by which a larger yield and 
greater economy of materials are produced. For a description of it, 
see 13th ed. Wood and Bache's Dispensatory, page 702. The process 
in use for commercial purposes consists in passing chlorine gas into a 
moistened mixture of three parts of chloride of potassium and ten 
of slaked lime until saturated, and well boiling the product. Chlo- 
rinated lime is first formed; this, on boiling with water, splits up 
into chloride of calcium and chlorate of calcium, and the latter, 
reacting on the chloride of potassium, yields chloride of calcium 
and chlorate of potassium, Ca2C10 3 + 2KCl=CaCl 2 +2KC10 3 . 

This salt is anhydrous. It appears in heavy crystals of a pearly 
lustre, sp. gr. 1.989. Its taste is cooling, sharp, resembling that of 
nitre; it readily fuses, enters into ebullition, and gives off oxygen, 
leaving as a residue, when the process is pushed to completion, 
chloride of potassium. 

It is soluble in two parts of boiling and sixteen parts of cold 
water; is very explosive when mixed with inflammable substances 
(sulphur, charcoal, etc.). If dropped in concentrated HS0 4 , the 
chloric acid of the salt is decomposed into hyperehloric and chlorous 
acids, which latter suddenly decomposes into chlorine and oxygen, 
thereby causing a violent explosion. 

This property renders it necessary that pharmacists and those 
dispensing chlorate of potassium should remember that all sub- 
stances in which carbon is loosely combined will produce the same 
result. Sugar, tannic acid, etc., when incorporated with one an- 
other, should always be powdered separately and mixed in a paper 
by means of a wooden spatula. 

Its cold solution is not affected by any tests except such as pro- 
duce precipitates with potassa (tartaric acid and chloride of plati- 
num). The presence of saltpetre is detected by the alkaline reac- 
tion of the salt after having been exposed to a strong heat. 

The uses of chlorate of potassium in the arts are as an oxidizing 
agent in calico printing, and in the fabrication of friction matches 
and explosive compounds. 

In medicine, it is much prescribed as an alterative, diuretic, ner- 
vine, and antiseptic, and for its asserted effect as an oxidizer of the 
blood. The great variety of diseases to which it has been applied 
and its general popularity with the profession have, of late years, 
made it a leading article in the shop of the apothecary. It is as- 
serted to be useful in treating diphtheria, a very prevalent and 
dangerous epidemic. It is mostly given in solution, and its sparing 
solubility is often quite overlooked by physicians; 5ss to f Jj of water 
is the limit of concentration. Chlorate of sodium is more soluble, 
and has been recommended as a substitute. The dose of chlorate 



182 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

of potassium is from gr. x to 3ss; externally from 5j to 3iij to a 
pint of water as a urethral injection, mouth-wash, etc. 

In tubercular affections it is highly recommended by some prac- 
titioners. Though considered as rather an innoxious remedy, it is 
capable of producing serious consequences in overdose, as shown 
in the case of Dr. Fountain, an esteemed physician of Davenport, 
Iowa, who had experimented with various doses, till, having ex- 
ceeded half an ounce with impunity, he ventured upon one ounce 
at a dose, and fell a victim to his temerity. 

Sodii Chloras. (Chlorate of Sodium. E"aC10 3 .) 

By mutual decomposition of strong solutions of chlorate of potas- 
sium and bitartrate of sodium, bitartrate of potassium is precipi- 
tated while chlorate of sodium is retained in solution, from which 
it crystallizes on evaporation ; the mother-liquor is best poured off 
from the first crystals formed, which are chiefly bitartrate of potas- 
sium; or the crystals are dissolved in the least possible quantity of 
cold water, so as to leave the crystals of cream of tartar behind. 

It crystallizes in rhombohedrons, dissolves in alcohol, and in three 
parts of cold water, and is fusible, evolving some oxygen. It has 
been recommended as milder in its action than chlorate of potas- 
sium, and on account of its greater solubility. 

The salt detonates when fused, if it contains tartaric acid. 

Chlorate of sodium may be used in the dose of gr. xv to f3ss, in 
the cases for which chlorate of potassium is prescribed. 

Phosphate of Potassium. 2KH 3 P0 4 . 

Of the three phosphates of potassium, that corresponding in com- 
position to the ordinary phosphates of sodium and ammonium is 
the one used in medicine. It may be prepared by boiling glacial 
phosphoric acid, to change it into H 3 P0 4 , and then adding two 
equivalents of carbonate or bicarbonate of potassium, or by decom- 
posing bone phosphate of lime with sulphuric acid as in the officinal 
process for phosphate of sodium, p. 187, and adding carbonate of 
potassium ; the prpper proportions are given below : — 

Take of Bone, "burnt to whiteness and powdered . . . Ten parts. 

Sulphuric acid Six parts. 

Bicarbonate of potassium Sufficient. 

Mix the powdered bone with the sulphuric acid, in an earthen 
vessel ; then add ten parts of water, and stir them well together, 
digest for three days, occasionally adding a little water, and fre- 
quently stirring; then pour on ten parts of boiling water, and 
strain through linen; set by the strained liquid that the dregs may 
subside, from which pour off the clear solution, and boil it down to 
eight parts; to this add bicarbonate of potassium previously dis- 
solved in hot water until effervescence ceases ; filter and evaporate 
to dryness. 

This salt is slightly acid to test paper, though called the neutral 
phosphate; it is white, amorphous, deliquescent, and freely soluble. 



HYPOPHOSPHITE OF POTASSIUM. 183 

It has been given as an alterative in scrofula and phthisis in the 
dose of ten to twenty grains, and as an ingredient in some of the 
compounds- used as tonics. 

Hypophosphite of Potassium. KH 3 P0 2 . 
This salt is prepared from the hypophosphite of calcium and car- 
bonate of potassium, which decompose each other, yielding hypo- 
phosphite of potassium and insoluble carbonate of calcium which 
is separated. The proportions are as follows: — 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium 6 oz. 

Granulated carbonate of potassium of oz. 

Water Sufficient. 

Dissolve the hypophosphite in a pint and a half and the carbon- 
ate in half a pint of water. Mix the solutions, and separate the 
carbonate of calcium on a filter; after draining, pass water through 
the precipitate till it ceases to dissolve out the soluble salt; then 
evaporate, stirring toward the last to granulate the salt. 

Hypophosphite of potassium is a white, opaque, deliquescent salt, 
very soluble in water and alcohol Its greater tendency to absorb 
moisture renders it less eligible for prescription than the sodium 
salt. Its dose is from three to five grains, and it enters into a num- 
ber of the syrups of the mixed hypophosphites, though rarely pre- 
scribed separately. 

Potassii Silicas. — The several kinds of glass are mixed silicates: 
those of sodium and calcium constitute window glass; potassium 
and calcium, crown glass, and potassium and lead, Hint glass. It 
is, however, remarkable that the alkaline silicates by themselves 
are soluble in water and decomposable by acids; this solubility is 
increased by excess of alkali and by heat, especially by superheated 
steam. 

. Silicate of potassium is a transparent, vitreous mass, deliquescent 
and soluble in water; it is formed by fusing together silica and 
carbonate of potassium. Soluble glass is now manufactured on a 
large scale in Philadelphia, for use as an impervious coating to 
casks, as an ingredient in soaps, and for many economic uses. It 
has been asserted to be a powerful solvent for arthritic calculi com- 
posed of urate of sodium; the dose is ten to fifteen grains twice 
daily, dissolved in much water. 

Potassii Picras, vel Carbazotas, Picrate of Potassium. — This salt is 
obtained by neutralizing picric acid with potassa or its carbonate, 
and crystallizing from hot water. It appears in fine yellow needles 
of a persistent bitter taste, which are insoluble in alcohol, not very 
soluble in cold water, requiring 260 parts at 60° F., but dissolves 
w T ith facility in boiling water; it contains no water of crystalliza- 
tion. It has been used by Braconnot as a substitute for quinia in 
intermittent fevers, with good success; the dose is stated to be from 
two to five grains, in pills or powders on account of its sparing 
solubility; great care should be observed in rubbing the salts of 
this acid to powder, as they explode when struck with violence. 



184 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

Group 3. — Alkaline Salts, starting with Common Salt. 

Sodii chloridum, NaCl. Obtained by evaporation of certain natural spring waters. 

Sodii sulphas, Na 2 SO 4 ,10H 2 O. By action of sulphuric acid on common salt. 

Sodii carbonas, Na 2 CO 3 J0H 2 O. By calcining the sulphate with carbon, chalk, etc. 

Sodii carbonas exsiccat, Na 2 C0 3 . By simple calcination of carbonate. 

Liquor sodse, NaHO-|-aqua. By Nnling the carbonate with lime; sp. gr. 1.071. 

Soda, NaHO. By evaporating the last mentioned solution. 

Sodii bicarbonas, 2NaHC0 3 . By passing gaseous C0 2 into a box containing effloresced 
crystals of the carbonate. 

Sodii phosphas, Na 2 HP0 4 ,12H" 2 0. By neutralizing superphosphate of calcium with 
carbonate of sodium, filtering, and evaporating. 

Sodii hypophosphis, Na 2 HP0 2 . By precipitating hypophosphite of calcium with Na 2 C0 3 . 

Liquor sodse chlorinata. By treating the carbonate in solution with chlorinated lime. 

Sodii hyposulphis, Na 2 S 2 3 ,5H 2 0. From sulphur and carbonate of sodium by combustion, 
etc. 

Sodii acetas, NaAc. An intermediate salt in the preparation of acetic acid. 

Sodii citr as, Nn 3 Ci. By saturating citric acid with Na 2 C0 3 . 

Liquor sodii tartro-citratis. By combining bicarbonate of sodium with T and Ci. 

Sodii valerianas, Na,Va. An intermediate salt in the preparation of other valerianates. 

Sodii benzoas, NaBz. By neutralizing benzoic acid with NaC0 3 . 

Sodii sulphovin as, NaC 2 H 6 ,S0 4 . From sulphovinate of barium with NaC0 3 . 

Ammonii benzoas, NH 3 Bz. By saturating benzoic acid with water of ammonia and eva- 
porating. 

Sodii Chloridum. {Common Salt. ISTaCl = 58.5.) 

Common salt is a native mineral substance found in various parts 
of the world, and, in solution, a constituent of numerous springs, 
from which it is readily obtained by evaporation. It is also one of 
the products of the evaporation of sea-water. 

It is found, in commerce, in crystals called rock salt, or usually 
in a granulated or fine dry powder. It is soluble in about three 
parts of water; nearly insoluble in alcohol, and contains no water 
of cry stallization ; its chief use, that of a condiment and antiseptic, 
is well known. It is an emetic in large doses ; externally stimu- 
lant. Salt-baths, with or without friction, are useful appliances* of 
the physician. 

Tests. — Adulterations with lime or magnesia are shown by a 
precipitate with carbonate of sodium; metallic salts by sulphuretted 
hydrogen or ferrocyanide of potassium ; sulphates by a barium salt. 

Sodii Sulphas. (Glauber's Salts. Na 2 SO 4 ,10H 2 O == 322.) 

It is produced from the residuum in making muriatic acid and 
chlorinated lime, and is one of the most abundant antl cheap articles 
of chemical manufacture. It exists in sea-water, and in many 
spring waters. It is usually in very large white efflorescent crystals. 
Neutral, very soluble, with a bitter*, nauseous, and saline taste; its 
composition is two equivalents of sodium, one of sulphuric acid, 
and ten of water; the water, which forms 55 per cent, of its weight, 
is nearly all lost in effloresced specimens. Its dose, as a cathartic, 
is ^ss to 3j (one-half when effloresced), though chiefly used as a 
purge for horses in much larger quantities. It is the principal in- 
gredient in the so-called Cheltenham salts. It has been prescribed 
in doses of 3ss in dysentery. 



LIQUOR SODJ3. 185 

The presence of chlorides may be detected by nitrate of silver, of 
metallic salts as above. It is not often adulterated. 

Sodii Carbonas. (Sal Soda. Washing Soda. Na 2 CO 3 ,10H 2 O=286.) 

Carbonate of sodium is found native, and is also extracted from 
the ashes of sea plants, in which case it is called barilla, or kelp ; 
it is, however, chiefly produced on a very large scale by calcining 
sulphate of sodium with small coal and chalk, which, by the ab- 
straction of oxygen, reduces it into sulphuret, and then from the 
presence of the chalk into carbonate of sodium and sulphuret of 
calcium, ]STa 2 S + CaC0 3 = CaS 4- Na 2 C0 3 . The carbonate is sepa- 
rated by digestion with hot water, evaporated, further carbonated, 
redissolved, and crystallized. 

The chief use of carbonate of sodium is in the arts and in do- 
mestic economy as a detergent, and in the preparation of numerous 
officinal and other carbonates and salts of sodium. It is extremely 
soluble in water, and efflorescent, and contains 62 per cent, of 
water of crystallization, which may be dissipated by heat. 

The presence of common salt is detected by supersaturating with 
nitric acid and adding solution of nitrate of silver; sulphate of 
sodium by solution of nitrate of barium. It is not commonly 
adulterated. Dose, as an antacid, gr. x to 5ss. 

Sodii Carbonas Exsiccata. (Dried or Calcined Carbonate of Sodium. 

Ka 2 CO 3 =106.) 

Take of Carbonate of sodium, a convenient quantity. 

Expose it to a heat in a clean iron (or porcelain) vessel until it is 
thoroughly dried, stirring constantly with an iron (or porcelain) 
spatula, then rub into powder. 

This is the form in which carbonate of sodium is most conveni- 
ently given in powder or pill. It is a milder antacid than the cor- 
responding salt of potassium. The dose of dried carbonate of 
sodium is gr. v to xv. It enters into the composition of some tonic 
and antacid pills. 

Liquor Sodce, U. S. P. NaHO in Aq. 

Take of Carbonate of sodium, twenty-six troyounces. 
Lime, eight troyounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the carbonate in three pints and a half of distilled 
water, and heat the solution to the boiling point. Mix the lime 
with three pints of distilled water, and, having heated the mixture 
to the boiling point, add it to the solution of the carbonate, and 
boil for ten minutes. Then transfer the whole to a muslin strainer, 
and, when the liquid portion has passed, add sufficient distilled 
water, through the strainer, to make the strained liquid measure 
six pints. Lastly, keep the liquid in well-stopped bottles of green 
glass. 



186 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

Solution of soda has the specific gravity 1.071, and contains five 
and seven-tenths per cent, of hydrate of sodium. 

A colorless liquid, having an extremely acrid taste, and a strono- 
alkaline reaction. It causes no effervescence when added to a di- 
luted acid, and yields no precipitate with bichloride of platinum. 
When saturated with diluted nitric acid, it gives no precipitate, or 
only a slight one, with carbonate of sodium, chloride of barium, 
or nitrate of silver. 

This is a new officinal in the Pharmacopoeia of 1860, in which it 
is placed under the general head Liquores. In the process and 
rationale it scarcely differs from solution of caustic potassa. The 
carbonate of sodium of commerce is considered of sufficient purity 
to yield on the abstraction of the carbonic acid a solution of caustic 
soda, adapted to medicinal and ordinary chemical uses. Its em- 
ployment in medicine will be as an antacid and antilithic; it is well 
adapted to replace solution of potassa, being somewhat milder in 
its action. Dose, kv to 5ss, largely diluted with milk. 

Soda. (Caustic Soda. NaHO = 40.) 

Hydrate of caustic soda is prepared from its solution precisely 
like caustic potassa ; it is seldom used in medicine, but is employed 
in some chemical operations, where the presence of potassa is not 
admissible, and in the manufacture of hard soaps. Under the name 
of concentrated lye this form of alkali has been introduced into com- 
merce in small iron boxes for domestic use. 

Sodii Bicarbonas. (Supercarbonate of Sodium. !N"a,HC0 3 = 85.) 

The best process for preparing this salt is a modification of that 
originally proposed by Dr. Franklin E-. Smith, of Bellefonte, Pa. 
The crystallized carbonate partly effloresced, or a mixture of the 
crystallized and dried, in proper proportion, is placed in a wooden 
perforated box, and carbonic acid gas (generated by the action of 
dilute sulphuric acid on marble) is passed into it. Owing to the 
strong affinity of the monocarbonate for a further dose of carbonic 
acid, the bicarbonate is generated in this simple way. Another 
process consists of stirring together chloride of sodium, dissolved 
in three times its weight of water, and carbonate of ammonium, 
which has chiefly passed into bicarbonate — equal weights; the two 
salts decompose each other, producing bicarbonate of sodium, which 
is sparingly soluble and precipitates in crystalline grains, and mu- 
riate of ammonium, which remains in solution, NH 4 HC0 3 and 
NaCI = NaHC0 3 and NH 4 C1. As met with in the shops, bicarbo- 
nate of sodium is a dry, white powder, slightly alkaline, permanent 
in the air, soluble in thirteen parts of cold water, decomposed by a 
boiling temperature. The commercial article I have generally 
found to contain some sesqui- or monocarbonate. The taste betrays 
this, as also the fact of its readily precipitating carbonate of mag- 
nesium from a cold solution of Epsom salts, which well-made bicar- 
bonate will not ; also the formation of a reddish precipitate with 



SODII PHOSPHAS. 187 

corrosive sublimate. This impurity, the result of defective prepa- 
ration, although not very important, renders this remedy less agree- 
able, and, in view of its employment in effervescing powders, etc., 
less effective. The proportion of carbonic acid given off from bi- 
carbonate of sodium by treating it with acids exceeds 50 per cent., 
so that it is one of the most productive articles for this purpose. It 
enters into effervescing soda, Seidlitz, yeast, and some other pow- 
ders, in which tartaric acid is employed to decompose it; the pro- 
portion being thirty-five parts of the acid to forty of the bicarbo- 
nate. 

Sodium saleratus is now employed in immense quantities as an 
adulteration of the proper saleratus, and as a substitute for bicar- 
bonate of sodium ; it is, generally, an imperfect substitute for the 
officinal bicarbonate of sodium. 

Bicarbonate of sodium is used in medicine as a mild antacid ; it 
is very cheap, though, I think, inferior to bicarbonate of potassium 
for the purpose. Dose, 9j to 5j, in carbonic-acid water if at hand. 

(For effervescing powders, see Extemporaneous Prescriptions.) 

Sodii Bicarbonas. Bicarbonate of Sod "turn, U. S. P. (XaHC0 3 .) 

Take of Commercial bicarbonate of sodium, in powder, 61 troyounces. 
Distilled water, six pints. 

Introduce the powder into a suitable conical glass percolator, 
cover it with a piece of wet muslin, and pour the water gradually 
upon it. When the liquid has ceased to drop, or when the wash- 
ings cease to precipitate a solution of sulphate of magnesium, 
remove the bicarbonate of sodium from the percolator, and drop it 
on bibulous paper in a warm place. 

This is a new officinal in the last edition of the U. S. Pharmaco- 
yazia, and is much to be preferred for medicinal uses to the com- 
mercial article ; the tests above given for the commercial article are 
appropriate to this. 

Sodii Phosphas. Phosphate of Sodium, IT. S. P. (Xa 2 HP0 4 ,12H 2 0.) 

Phosphate of sodium is formed by digesting bone-ash (phosphate 
of calcium) in sulphuric acid, thus liberating phosphoric acid. The 
superior affinity of sulphuric acid for the lime causes them to unite 
at the expense of the phosphoric acid, which is thus liberated; the 
sulphate of calcium being separated, carbonate of sodium is added to 
the phosphoric acid till neutralized, and by crystallizing, the pure 
phosphate of sodium is produced in large, transparent, efflorescent 
crystals. 

It is a tribasic salt, consisting of one equivalent of phosphoric 
acid, two of soda, and one of water, and twelve of water of crys- 
tallization. The enormous proportion of water, 62.3 per cent, of 
its weight, is a remarkable property of this salt. 

It dissolves in four times its weight of cold water, and fuses in 
its water of crystallization when moderately heated. It is insolu- 
ble in alcohol. The solution has an alkaline reaction, and does not 
effervesce with acids. 



188 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

The precipitates with nitrate of silver (yellow), chloride of barium, 
and acetate of lead are all soluble in nitric acid. The presence of 
lime is found by a white precipitate with oxalate of ammonium. 

Sometimes it contains arseniate of sodium, which is detected by 
saturating the solution with gaseous sulphuretted hydrogen, heating 
slightly, and afterwards carefully adding pure phosphoric acid, 
when sulphuret of arsenic will be precipitated. 

Phosphate of sodium is a mild saline cathartic and diuretic. 
Dose, from 3ij to §j, and is chiefly recommended by its taste, which 
resembles that of common salt. 

Hypophosphite of Sodium. !N~a 2 HP0 2 . 

This is prepared by double decomposition between hypophosphite 
of calcium and crystallized carbonate of sodium. 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium . . . . 6 oz. 
Crystallized carbonate of sodium . . 10 oz. 
Water A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the hypophosphite in four pints of water, and the car- 
bonate in a pint and a half, mix the solutions, pour the mixture on 
a filter, and lixiviate the precipitate of carbonate of calcium, after 
draining, with water, till the filtrate measures six pints. Evapo- 
rate this liquid carefully till a pellicle forms, and then stir con- 
stantly, continuing the heat till it granulates. In this state the 
salt is pure enough for medical use; but, if desired in crystals, treat 
the granulated salt with alcohol sp. gr. .835, evaporate the solution 
till syrupy, and set it by in a warm place to crystallize. 

Hypophosphite of sodium crystallizes in rectangular tables with 
a pearly lustre, is quite soluble in water and in ordinary alcohol, 
and deliquesces slightly when exposed to the air. It is given with 
the other salts of hypophosphorous acid as a tonic, especially appli- 
cable to phthisis. Dose, 5 grains three times a day. 

Liquor Sodce Chlorinatce,~U . S. P. (Labarraque's Disinfecting Solution.) 

Reduced. 

Take of Chlorinated lime, twelve troy ounces ^j. 

Carbonate of sodium, twenty -four troy ounces . . . . §ij. 
"Water, twelve pints Oj. 

Dissolve the carbonate of sodium in three pints of the water, 
with the aid of heat. Triturate the chlorinated lime, a little at a 
time, with small portions of the water, gradually added, until a 
smooth, uniform mixture is obtained. Mix this intimately with 
the remainder of the water, and set the mixture aside for twenty- 
four hours. Then decant the clear liquid, and, having transferred 
the residue to a muslin strainer, allow it to drain until sufficient 
liquid has passed to make, with the decanted liquid, eight pints. 
Mix this thoroughly with the solution of carbonate of sodium, 
transfer the mixture to a muslin strainer, and allow it to drain, 
adding water, if necessary, towards the close, until eleven pints 
and a half of liquid have passed. Lastly, keep the liquid in well- 
stopped bottles, protected from the light. 



HYPOSULPHITE OF SODIUM. 189 

The necessity for the aid of heat in dissolving the carbonate of 
sodium may be overcome by the use of the mortar and pestle, as 
directed in the chapter on Solutions. The solution of the chlo- 
rinated lime is conveniently accomplished by mixing it with some 
clean sand and packing it rather loosely into a funnel with a pledget 
of cotton in the neck, then pouring the water upon it. In the ab- 
sence of a precipitating jar in which to mix the solutions, wide- 
mouthed bottles may be substituted, being well adapted to allow 
the precipitated carbonate of lime to subside. 

Labarraque's is a transparent liquid, of a greenish-yellow color, 
having a slight odor of chlorine, and a sharp, saline taste. Its 
specific gravity is 1.045 ; it contains an excess of carbonate of 
sodium. Its value will be chiefly dependent on the quality of the 
chlorinated lime used ; if this is moist and has a faint odor, it will 
make inferior Labarraque's solution. It rapidly decolorizes solu- 
tion of indigo, and produces a copious, light-brown precipitate with 
solution of sulphate of iron. It owes its therapeutic and antiseptic 
properties to containing hypochlorous acid, which is readily liberated 
on the addition of even a weak acid, and, on exposure to the air, 
by the absorption of carbonic acid. It is used in malignant fevers 
as an antiseptic and stimulant, and to correct fetid eructations and 
evacuations ; it is a favorite addition to gargles in ulcerated sore- 
throat. One of its principal uses is. to purify the air in sick-rooms, 
in which case it acts by decomposing sulphuretted hydrogen, against 
which gas, when inhaled, it is also an antidote. The dose is f5ss, 
diluted with water or mucilage. In gargles, fsss or fUj may be 
used in Oss. 

A demand for this solution has grown out of the now fashionable 
art of skeletonizing and bleaching leaves and seed-vessels of plants. 
A solution of chloride of lime serves a good purpose for bleaching 
skeletonized plant structures which are deprived of their chlorophyl, 
but for ferns, which are to be bleached without any previous pro- 
cess, solution of chlorinated soda has been found greatly superior. 

Sodii Hyposulphis. (Hyposulphite of Sodium. N"a 2 S 2 3 ,5H 2 0=248.) 

This salt, which is very extensively used by photographers for 
the solution of the unaltered iodide of silver, may be economically 
prepared by the following process : 16 oz. finely-powdered crystal- 
lized carbonate of sodium are mixed with 5 oz. flowers of sulphur, 
and heated in a porcelain dish with constant agitation, until it 
takes fire and burns to sulphite of sodium; this is dissolved in 
w^ater and boiled w T ith sulphur, by Which another equivalent of this 
element is taken up, so as to form the hyposulphite Na 2 -f S0 3 -f 
S = ]^a 2 S 2 3 ; it is then evaporated to crystallization. 

The crystals are large, colorless, rhombic prisms, of a cooling, 
afterwards bitterish, somewhat alkaline, sulphurous taste, and easily 
soluble in water; the solution gradually deposits sulphur, leaving 
sulphite of sodium, or if in contact with the air, sulphate of sodium, 
in solution. 



190 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

It has been recommended in various diseases as a resolvent, alter- 
ative, and sudorific, and also as a solvent for biliary concretions ; 
3ss to 3j of it is given in the course of a day in solution or prefer- 
ably in syrup. Externally it has been employed as a bath in quan- 
tities of from 1 to 4 ounces dissolved in the necessary quantity of 
water, and with the subsequent addition of 3 fluidounces of diluted 
sulphuric acid for each ounce of the salt, so as to liberate the hypo- 
sulphurous acid which immediately decomposes into sulphur and 
sulphurous acid. 

Sodii Acetas. Na,Ac 4- 3Aq. = 160. 

This is officinal in the list, being formed by double decomposition 
between acetate of calcium obtained by neutralizing the acid from 
the destructive distillation of wood, with carbonate of sodium, as 
explained under the head of Acetic Acid. It is made officinal with 
a view to the preparation of acetic acid by its decomposition ; it is 
also made as follows : — 

Acetate of lead is decomposed by carbonate of sodium, a precipi- 
tate of carbonate of lead is formed, and the acetate of sodium 
remains in solution ; or such a solution is obtained by neutralizing 
acetic acid with carbonate of sodium ; it is then evaporated to 
crystallization. The salt crystallizes in prisms of a saline, bitter 
taste, which effloresce in warm dry weather, and are fusible and 
very soluble in water. 

It has been used for the same purpose for which acetate of potas- 
sium is employed, and is said to be rather milder in its action ; the 
dose is 9j to 3ij. 

Metals are detected in the solution of this salt by sulphuretted 
hydrogen and ferrocyanide of potassium ; sulphuric acid (sulphate 
of sodium) by the characteristic precipitate with acetate of barium. 

Sodii Citras. (Citrate of Sodium. !N~a 3 Ci = 276.) 

Citric acid being a tribasic acid furnishes three salts with sodium, 
of which the most desirable appears to be that, the composition of 
which is given above. It is easily made by adding two equivalents 
of bicarbonate of sodium to one of citric acid, evaporating, and 
crystallizing. These proportions would indicate approximately one 
ounce of bicarbonate of sodium to ten drachms of citric acid. It 
forms needles of a pleasant sub-acid taste. If the basic citrate is 
prepared the proportion of bicarbonate should be increased to one 
ounce and a half, and the salt would then correspond more nearly 
with the officinal citrate of potassium. Its taste is free from bitter- 
ness, and it is recommended as a pleasant saline cathartic. Dose, 
six to twelve drachms. 

Solution of Tartro-Citrate of Sodium. 

Tartro-citrate of sodium has been recommended, in solution, as 
furnishing a more permanent and cheaper purgative lemonade than 



SODII SULPHOVINAS. 191 

the justly celebrated citrate of magnesium. I have had but little 
experience with it, but propose the following as a practicable formula 
for its preparation : — 

Take of Tartaric acid 3vj. 

Bicarbonate of sodium 3vss or q. s. 

Water f^xss. 

Dissolve the acid in the water, and add the sodium salt till it is 
nearly neutral, then filter and add — 

Simple syrup f^iss. 

Tincture of fresh lemon peel f 3ss. 

And lastly — ■ 

Citric acid, 

Bicarbonate of sodium, of each 3j. 

Cork and bottle immediately and securely. Dose, one bottle, as 
a cathartic. 

Sodii Citro-Tartras Effervescens, Ph. Br. 

Take of Bicarbonate of sodium 17 parts. 

Citric acid parts. 

Tartaric acid 8 parts. 

Mix them and heat to 200 to 220° until the particles aggregate 
to a granular condition. It should be kept in well-closed bottles. 

Sodii Vcderianas. XaVa = 124.3. 

Valerianate of sodium is made by saturating solution of caustic 
soda with valerianic acid, as produced by the distillation of amylic 
alcohol or fusel oil from a mixture of sulphuric acid and bichromate 
of potassium, by which it is converted into valerianic acid, which 
combines with the soda. The valerianate is obtained dry by evapo- 
ration and fusion, and being broken, is in soft white crystalline 
pieces, very soluble, deliquescent, with the odor of valerianic acid, 
and a taste at first styptic and afterwards sweetish ; it melts with- 
out loss at 285°, and concretes on cooling. If 100 grains of the 
salt, dissolved in 600 grains of water heated to 200°, be mixed with 
a solution of 100 grains of sulphate of zinc in the same quantity of 
water, crystals of valerianate of zinc will be formed on the surface 
of the mixture before it cools. Its use is to prepare the other vale- 
rianates by double decomposition. It should be soluble in absolute 
alcohol. {See Acidum Valerianicum.) 

Sodii Sulphovinas. XaC 2 H 6 ,S0 4 + 2Aq. 

Sulphovinate of sodium is prepared by mixing about equal parts 
of concentrated sulphuric acid and strong alcohol, and heating after- 
wards by means of a water-bath; water is then added, and carbonate 
of barium to saturation; the solution of sulphovinate of barium is 
then exactly decomposed by a solution of sulphate of sodium, and 
the filtrate evaporated to crystallization. It crystallizes in hexa- 
gonal tables, is deliquescent and very soluble in water; it fuses at 



192 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

187°, and is decomposed above 212°; its taste is pleasantly saline 
and sweet. 

This salt has been recommended for delicate constitutions afflicted 
with weakness of the digestive organs and flatulency. The dose, as 
a laxative, is from half an ounce to one ounce. 

The impurities might be barium, detected by sulphuric acid, or 
sulphate of sodium, detected by chloride of barium. 

Sodii Benzoas. (Benzoate of Sodium. E"a,Bz = 144.) 

If benzoic acid is saturated with carbonate of sodium, the solu- 
tion yields, on evaporation and cooling, needles, which are little 
soluble in alcohol. It has been recommended in cases of gout on 
account of benzoic acid being changed by the animal economy into 
hippuric acid. 

Group 4. — Alkaline Salts, starting with Crude Tartar. 

Crude argols, or tartar. Deposited in the casks during the refining of wines. 

Potassii bitartras, KHT. Purified by repeated crystallization, etc. 

Potassii et sodii tartras, KNaT -f- 4H 2 0. Boiling carb. sodium with bitartrate. 

Potassii tartras, K 2 T. Boiling pure carbonate potassium with bitartrate. 

Potassii et boracis tartras, KNaT -\- 2KHB0 3 T -{• 2Aq. Boiling borax with bitartrate; 

deliquescent. 
Potassii boracico-tartras, KHB0 3 T. Boiling boracic acid with bitartrate; permanent. 

' Crude argols are imported from the wine-producing countries of 
two kinds, the red and the white tartar of commerce. Eecently 
tartar has been produced, though not in large quantities, in the 
vicinity of Cincinnati, Ohio. It consists of potassa combined with 
an excess of tartaric acid, some tartrate of calcium, coloring matters, 
etc., the lees and settlings of the wine which have separated during 
the conversion of the sugar of the grape-juice into alcohol, and col- 
lected as a mass on the bottom and sides of the casks. 

Potassii Bitartras. (Cream of Tartar. KHT" + H 2 = 207.1.) 

Cream of tartar is made by treating argols w 7 ith hot water, mix- 
ing with clay, which absorbs the coloring matters, purifying by 
crystallization, and reducing to powder. It is a white somewhat 
gritty powder, of an agreeable acid taste, sparingly soluble in the 
mouth, soluble in 184 parts of cold water, and in 18 parts of boiling 
water, which deposits it on cooling. It consists of one equivalent 
of potassium, one of water, and one of tartaric acid, though formerly 
considered, as its name implies, a bitartrate; the combined water 
contained in it is capable of being replaced by other bases, as in the 
two salts which follow, and in the tartrate of iron and potassium, 
and the tartrate of antimony and potassium, described in subsequent 
chapters. The reader is referred to page 75, 40th vol., American 
Journal of Pharmacy, for another and more efficient method of 
purifying cream of tartar and its derivatives, by Prof. E. S. Wayne, 
of Cincinnati. 



POTASSII TARTRAS. 193 

Cream of tartar in closes of 3ss to 3j, and in smaller quantities, is 
a very common and well-known hydragogue cathartic, refrigerant, 
and diuretic. It is usually given diffused in water, being sparingly 
soluble. 

Tests. — It is very liable to adulteration, which may be detected 
by its solubility as above, and by the following tests: — 

It should be completely soluble in liquor potassse and liquor am- 
monias. 

Tartrate of calcium, which should not exceed five per cent, in a 
commercially pure specimen, is discovered in the neutralized solu- 
tion by a white precipitate with phosphate of sodium, or neutral 
oxalate of ammonium. 

Sulphuric acid, sulphate of calcium, alum, and sulphate of potas- 
sium by an insoluble precipitate, in cold solution, with chloride of 
barium. 

Metals (copper, iron, etc.), by precipitates with sulphuretted hy- 
drogen and ferrocyanuret of potassium. 

Potassii et Sodii Tartras. (Rochelle Salt KNaT + Aq.= 283.1.) 

Rochelle salt is prepared by combining one equivalent of carbonate 
of sodium with one of bitartrate of potassium. The sodium of the 
carbonate uniting with the excess of tartaric acid of the bitartrate 
to form a neutral salt, carbonic acid is evolved. The crystals of 
this salt are usually large, transparent, slightly efflorescent, of a 
saline not very unpleasant taste, and soluble in five parts of water. 
It is incompatible with most acids and acidulous salts, which by 
combining with the sodium throw down bitartrate of potassium. 
It is commonly sold in powder, and combined with one-third its 
weight of bicarbonate of sodium constitutes the so-called Seidlitz 
mixture. It is a mild and pleasant purgative. Dose, from 3\j to sj. 

Tests. — The presence of tart rate of calcium, except in small quan- 
tity, renders the solution, in 1\ to 3 parts of cold water, milky. 

Lime, metals, and sulphuric acid are detected as in cream of 
tartar; in the latter case, after acidulating with nitric acid. 

Potassii Tartras. (Soluble Tartar. K 2 Y « 227.2.) 

Soluble tartar is a salt in which the excess of tartaric acid in 
bitartrate of potassium is combined with potassium; by boiling one 
equivalent of the carbonate of that alkali with one equivalent of 
bitartrate, the carbonic acid escapes; the reaction closely resembles 
that last described, substituting potassium for sodium. Tartrate of 
potassium is either in white crystals, or a granulated powder slightly 
deliquescent and freely soluble; it is less agreeable to the palate than 
the foregoing, which it resembles in medical properties and uses. 
The close is from 3j to 3J. 

Tests. — A solution in 2 parts cold water shows the presence of 
tartrate of calcium if milky. 

Lime is detected by phosphate of sodium or neutral oxalate of 
ammonium. 
13 



194 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

Metals (iron, copper, tin), by ferrocyanide of potassium and sul- 
phuretted hydrogen, the latter after acidulating with muriatic acid. 

Sulphuric and muriatic acids are found in the solution acidulated 
with nitric acid by the precipitate with nitrate of barium and ni- 
trate of silver. 

Potassii et Boracis Tartras. KNaT + 2(KEB0 3 T) + 3 Aq. 

The tartarus boraxatus of the Gentian Pharmacopoeias is prepared 
by dissolving 3 parts of crystallized pure cream of tartar in a 
solution of 1 part borax in 5 parts water, and evaporating with 
constant agitation to dryness. It is soluble in 2 parts of water, 
deliquescing in the air, and has a mild, agreeably sour taste. Its 
medicinal properties are similar to those of the other neutral tar- 
trates. 

In its solution metallic oxides, lime, and mineral acids are de- 
tected as above. 

Potassii Boracico- Tartras. KHB0 3 T. 

The tartarus boraxatus, or tartras borico-potassicus, of the French 
Codex, as originally made by Soubeiran, is prepared by dissolving 
1 part of boracic acid and 4 of cream of tartar, in 24 parts of water, 
and evaporating to dryness at or near the boiling point, so as to 
prevent the premature separation of the excess of bitartrate of 
potassium. The salt resembles the foregoing in appearance and pro- 
perties, except that it keeps in the air without attracting moisture. 

Borax in solution precipitates the mucilage of gum Arabic, Ice- 
land moss salep, etc. ; it colors curcuma paper brown, and dissolves 
in 2 parts boiling, and 12 cold water. Moistened with HS0 4 , it 
colors the flame of alcohol green. 

Group 5. — Alkaline Salts — Preparations of Ammonia. 

Ammonii chloridum (Ammoniae murias, 1860), NH 3 HC1 = NH 4 C1. Neutral, odorless, 

much used in the arts. 
Ammonii chloridum purificatum. Made by purifying the commercial NH 4 C1. 
Ammonii sulphas, (NH 4 ) 2 S0 4 . Manufactured from gas liquors. 
Ammonii et magnesii sulphas. A constituent of the H 3 B0 3 lagoons in Tuscany. 
Ammonii phosphas, 2NH 4 P0 4 . By precipitating phosphate calcium with carbonate of 

ammonium. 
Ammonii hypophosphis, NH 4 H 2 P0 2 . By precipitating hypophosphite of calcium with 

carbonate of ammonium. 
Ammonii nitras, NH 4 ,N0 3 . By heat furnishes N 2 0. 

Aqua ammoniae. Aqueous solution of caustic ammonia, sp. gr. .960. 

Aqua ammoniae fortior. Aqueou3 solution of caustic ammonia, sp. gr. .900. 
Spiritus ammoniae. Alcoholic solution of caustic ammonia, sp. gr. .831. 

Spiritus ammonise aromaticus. Alcoholic solution of carbonate of ammonium with 

aromatics. 
Ammonii carbonas, (NH 4 ) 2 HC0 3 . Hard, translucent, pungent. 

Ammonii bicarbonas, NH 4 HCO a . White, pulverulent, odorless. 

Liquor ammonii acetatis. Neutral and mild solution of 4NH 4 Ac. 
Ammonii citras, 3NH 4 Ci. In solution a diuretic. 
Ammonii valerianas, NH 4 Va. Antispasmodic. Used in solution. 
Ammonii sulphuretum, NH 4 HS. Test liquids forming sulphurets of metals. 
Ammonii benzoas, NH 4 Bz. Used in gout. 



AMMONII SULPHAS. 195 

Ammonii Chloridum. {Ammonice Marias, 1860. NH 4 C1 = 53.5.) 

Muriate of ammoniac, sal ammoniac, or chloride of ammonium is 
in the list of the Pharmacopoeia; it is prepared on a very large 
scale in England from the residuary products of the destructive 
distillation of coal, and from other empyreumatic products contain- 
ing ammonium. It is in white, translucent, fibrous masses, which are 
convex on one surface and concave on the other; it has a pungent 
saline taste, but no odor. It cannot be conveniently powdered by 
contusion or trituration, and is best reduced, in a small way, by 
dissolving, evaporating, and granulating at a moderate heat. It is 
a very soluble salt, being dissolved by less than three parts of cold 
water, and in alcohol; it is incompatible with strong acids, which 
liberate muriatic acid, and with alkalies, which disengage ammo- 
nia, as in some of the processes which follow. It is frequently 
prescribed, especially by German practitioners, as a stimulating 
alterative in catarrhs, combined with expectorants. Dose, from 
gr. v to xx. 

Tests. — The reactions of ammonia are similar to those of potassa ; 
bichloride of platinum produces a yellow precipitate; tartaric acid 
a crystalline white precipitate, which is somewhat more soluble 
than cream of tartar. 

The characteristic test to distinguish its salts from the potas- 
sium salts, is the evolution of ammonia on triturating them with 
hydrated lime, or with caustic potassa ; ammonia is recognized by its 
peculiar odor and the white fumes occasioned on the approach of a 
rod moistened with muriatic acid. The salts of ammonia, except 
those with fixed mineral acids, are volatilized by a red heat. 

Muriate of ammonia should be perfectly white, and entirely dis- 
sipated by heat. Copper, lead, and tin are detected by sulphuretted 
hydrogen; iron by ferrocyanide of potassium; sulphuric acid by 
chloride of oarium. 

Ammonii Chloridum Purificatum. 

Take of Chloride of ammonium, in small pieces, twenty troyounces. 
Water of ammonia, five nuidrackms. 
"Water, two pints. 

Dissolve the chloride of ammonium in the water, in a porcelain 
dish, with the aid of heat ; add the water of ammonia, and con- 
tinue the heat for a short time; filter the solution while hot, and 
evaporate to dryness, with constant stirring, at a moderate heat, 
until it granulates. 

It is soluble in 2J parts of cold and its own weight of boiling 
water, has a faint acid reaction, and is not discolored by tannic acid. 

Ammonii Sidphas. (NH 4 ) 2 S0 4 = 75. 
This salt, which is seldom met with in the shops, is now manu- 
factured on a large scale both in Philadelphia and in New York, 
from the washings of coal gas. It is a very soluble salt, chiefly 
produced from the otherwise useless residuary liquids obtained from 



196 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

the gas works, and is chiefly consumed in the manufacture of am- 
monia alum and of ammonia on a large scale. It is also available 
for the preparation of carbonate of ammonium and the solutions 
of caustic ammonia, though it is said to impart to these products 
a more empyreumatic odor than the muriate. 

Ammonii et Magnesii Sulphas. NH 4 ,S0 4 + Mg,S0 4 4-6Aq? 
This is a new commercial source of the preparations of ammonia, 
derived from the boracic acid lagoons in Tuscany. It crystallizes 
out of the solutions formed in the purification of the boracic acid 
in England. This double sulphate is readily made available in the 
preparation of the salts of ammonium, and is said to yield products 
devoid of the empyreumatic odor so perceptible in the ammonium 
salts obtained from the gas liquor products. 

Ammonii Nitras. NH 4 ,1TO3=80. 

Nitric acid is saturared with carbonate of ammonium and eva- 
porated. It occurs in prisms, which are deliquescent, and have a 
cooling saline taste. 

If thrown in a red-hot crucible it burns with a yellow flame, and 
has, therefore, received the name of nitrum flammans. When not 
too suddenly heated, it is decomposed exactly into 2H 2 and N 2 
— oxide of nitrogen, or "laughing gas." 

It is given in similar complaints with saltpetre and nitrate of 
sodium, in doses ranging from 10 grains to 2 scruples. 

Aqua Ammonia ., U. S. P. (Preparations), and Aqua Ammonia 
Fortior, U. S. P. (List). 

Solution of ammonia (spirits of hartshorn) and stronger solution of 
ammonia are obtained from chloride of ammonium by the action 
of quicklime, which, combining with the acid, liberates the caustic 
alkali in the form of gas, NH 4 C1 + CaO = NH 3 HO + CaCl. The 
gas is passed by suitable contrivances into water, which absorbs it 
with avidity, especially if refrigerated. 

The usual commercial strength is somewhat below that of the 
officinal aqua ammoniw, which has the sp. gr. 960. The strongest 
marks 900, and contains twenty-six per cent, of the gas. It should 
be handled with great caution in warm weather, serious accidents 
being liable to occur from its sudden and violent effervescence. 
Both of these preparations are used externally, the latter rarely, in 
various combinations for immediate vesication. They are too 
caustic to be given by the stomach unless largely diluted and modi- 
fled by emollient or mucilaginous excipients. The dose of the 
officinal aqua ammonia? (not fortior), or of spiritus ammonias, is 
n\,x to xxx. Several liniments and lotions introduced under the 
appropriate heads contain one or other of these preparations. 

Spiritus Ammoniai, U. S. P. 
The composition of spirit of ammonia is similar to the foregoing, 
except that alcohol is used as the solvent for the gas ; it has nearly 



AMMONII CARBONAS. 197 

the strength of the officinal solution of ammonia, and is made by 
passing a stream of the caustic gas into a vessel of alcohol sur- 
rounded with ice-cold water. Its only advantage over aqua am- 
nionic is for admixture with tinctures, which would be incompatible 
with an aqueous liquid. It should be kept in small and well- 
stopped bottles, and like the aqueous solutions of this volatile gas, 
should be kept in a cool part of the premises, and dispensed with 
special reference to preventing waste by evaporation. 

For internal use the aromatic spirit of ammonia is preferred ; 
they should be carefully distinguished from each other. 

Ammonii Carbonas. (NH 4 ) 2 HC0 3 . 

Carbonate of ammonium (sesquicarbonate) is prepared by treating 
a mixture of chloride or sulphate of ammonium and chalk (soft 
carbonate of calcium). When chloride of ammonium is used, chlo- 
ride of calcium and carbonate of ammonium are formed ; the latter, 
being volatile, sublimes, and is collected in a colorless, almost trans- 
parent sublimate, with powerful pungent odor and acrid taste. 
This may be considered as a compound of protocarbonate and bi- 
carbonate of ammonium, one equivalent of each, or as a sesqui- 
carbonate. 

No less than twelve different compounds of ammonium carbonic 
acid and water are described by Rose. The officinal salt is trans- 
lucent, or white, usually in irregular lumps from the breaking of 
a large dome-shaped mass at first obtained ; it is very hard, and on 
that account liable to fracture a glass bottle in which it is placed ; 
pungent, soluble in about 4 times its weight of cold water and 
freely in weak alcohol ; its taste is sharp and penetrating ; by ex- 
posure to the air it undergoes a change into bicarbonate, which is 
unsuited to many uses. 

The stimulant and antacid properties of this salt are very well 
known ; it is given in various modes of combination, some of which 
will be noticed under the head of Extemporaneous Preparations. Its 
dose is gr. v. 

Hydrated Protocarbonate of Ammonium.^.) — Smelling salts are fre- 
quently made directly from the powdered sesquicarbonate, or from 
the mixture of about five parts of granulated chloride of ammonium 
and seven parts of carbonate of potassium with a little water of 
ammonia and appropriate flavor. The hydrated protocarbonate of 
ammonium is, however, preferable for the purpose, and may be con- 
veniently made by mixing 2 parts of commercial (sesqui-) carbonate 
of ammonium in coarse powder with one part of the strongest 
water of ammonia, in a well-stoppered bottle, and stirring them 
together occasionally for a week, then setting the mass aside to 
solidify, after which it may be powdered, perfumed, and transferred 
to pungents for sale. 



198 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

Spiritus Ammonice Aromaticus, IT. S. P. (Spirit Sal. Volat.) 
Take of Carbonate of ammonium, a troyounce. 

Water of ammonia, three fluidounces. 

Oil of lemon, two fluidrachms and a half. 

Oil of nutmeg, forty minims. 

Oil of lavender, fifteen minims. 

Alcohol, a pint and a half. 

Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the carbonate in the water of ammonia, previously mixed 
with four fluidounces of water. Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, 
mix the two solutions, and add sufficient water to make the whole 
measure two pints. 

This is a very convenient new formula, superseding the former 
process, which, requiring the use of a retort and receiver, was seldom 
practised by the apothecary, but it furnishes a less pleasant prepa- 
ration than the old process. It will be observed that, besides the 
neutral carbonate, it contains a small proportion of caustic ammonia. 
This is necessary to make it correspond in pungency to the old 
preparation. It is believed that the formula now offered for this 
valuable remedy will add greatly to its uniformity, while, at the 
same time, it places it among the preparations readily made in the 
shop. 

Few of our medicines have a wider and more useful sphere than 
this well-known antacid and stimulant ; combined with tinctures 
and other neutral preparations, it is found to add to their diffusi- 
bility, while in doses of from nixx to f3j it meets some very com- 
mon indications in disease. 

Ammonii Bicarbonas. NH 4 ,HC0 3 . 

Bicarbonate of Ammonium. — By long exposure to the air, parti- 
cularly in small fragments, the sesquicarbonate loses its pungency, 
falls into powder, and by the loss of gaseous ammonia becomes con- 
verted chiefly into bicarbonate. By the use of a small quantity of 
water, protocarbonate may be dissolved out of the commercial car- 
bonate and the less soluble bicarbonate remain. The use of this is 
as a milder and less stimulating diaphoretic and antacid. Dose, 
gr. x to 9j. 

In using carbonate of ammonium for its direct stimulating effect, 
care should be taken that it is free from the pulverulent, white 
bicarbonate; and where it has deteriorated by the formation of 
this on the surface of the lumps, they should be scraped away, and 
cracked, till the vitreous looking hard portion is reached. For 
saturating acids in the formation of neutral salts, the bicarbonate 
will answer a good purpose. 

Liquor Ammonii Acetatis, U. S. P. (Solution of Acetate of Ammonia, 
Spirit of Mindererus.) 

Take of Diluted acetic acid Two pints. 

Carbonate of ammonium .... A sufficient quantity. 

Add the carbonate of ammonium gradually to the acid until it 

is saturated, and filter. 



AMMONII VALERIANAS. 199 

Diluted acetic acid, elsewhere stated, is made by adding one fluid- 
ounce of acetic acid to seven fluidounces of water, making eight. 
It will be found convenient and desirable to consume, in making 
this preparation, the bicarbonate or the partially bicarbonated 
sesquicarbonate, which falls readily into powder, and is almost use- 
less for other purposes. By making it in a tincture-bottle in which 
toward the last the stopper is kept, the solution will be made to 
absorb a large amount of carbonic acid gas, and to sparkle when 
decanted. The point of saturation may be determined proximately 
by the taste, and it is generally not desirable to continue adding 
the carbonate of ammonium till it is perfectly saturated, as it is far 
more agreeable to be a little acid than alkaline. This solution 
should always be made in small quantities, and is generally better 
to be prepared when required. There is no necessity for tiltration 
if the ingredients are perfectly pure and free from contamination 
with dust. It is very much prescribed as a mild stimulant and 
diaphoretic. Dose, f 3 j to f^ss; as an antidote to alcoholic liquids, 
given while the patient is intoxicated, from f oSS to f 3 j. 

Ammonii Citras. {Citrate of Ammonium. 3£sTI 4 ,Ci = 243.) 

This salt is seldom met with in commerce, but in the form of 
solution made by saturating lemon juice with carbonate of am- 
monium, it furnishes a stimulating diaphoretic similar to solution 
of acetate. The dose of the salt is from 3ss to 3j. 

Ammonii Valerianas, IT. S. P. NH 4 ,Va = 119. 
Take of Valerianic acid, four fluidounces. 

From a mixture, placed in a suitable vessel, of chloride of am- 
monium, in coarse powder, and an equal weight of lime, previously 
slaked and in powder, obtain gaseous ammonia, and cause it to 
pass, first through a bottle filled with pieces of lime, and afterwards 
into the valerianic acid, contained in a tall, narrow glass vessel, 
until the acid is neutralized. Then discontinue the process, and 
set the vessel aside, that the valerianate of ammonium may crystal- 
lize. Lastly, break the salt into pieces, drain it in a glass funnel, 
dry it on bibulous paper, and keep it in a well-stopped bottle. 

Valerianate of ammonium is a white salt in the form of quad- 
rangular plates, having the disagreeable odor of valerianic acid, and 
a sharp, sweetish taste. It deliquesces in moist air, but effloresces 
in a dry atmosphere, and is very soluble in water and in alcohol. 
It is decomposed by potassa with evolution of ammonia, and by 
the mineral acids with separation of the valerianic acid, which 
rises to the surface in the form of an oil. 

This is a new officinal preparation in the edition of 1860. The 
formula is an improvement on that of B. J. Crew, by which the 
gaseous acid and volatile alkali were brought together, so as to 
crystallize in a receiver. Few remedies have had so large a share 
of popularity, for several years past, as this diffusible stimulant and 



200 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. 

antispasmodic. It is used in neuralgia, hysteria, and other nervous 
disorders, in a dilute solution, proposed by Pierlot, and published 
under another head; and also more recently in the form of elixir of 
valerianate of ammonium, 

Ammonii Benzoas. OT3 4 Bz = 139. 

The neutral salt has been employed in medicine ; it is obtained 
by dissolving benzoic acid in strong ammonia by the aid of heat, 
not quite to saturation. It is very soluble in water, deliquescent 
in the air — loses ammonia and becomes solid again. In common 
with benzoate of sodium, it has been used in gout, also, as an anti- 
spasmodic, though in the latter case the activity may be due to the 
empyreumatic oil which it retains. A correspondent of the London 
Lancet recommends it in anasarca with albuminuria following 
scarlatina. The dose for a child of six years was 5 grains three 
times a day. 

Ammonii Sulphur etum. {Hydrosulphate of Ammonium. NH 4 HS.) 

Water of ammonia saturated with hydrosulphuric acid gas. 

It is a yellowish liquid, of a disagreeable fetid smell, which is 
much used in analytical chemistry for the detection of some of the 
metals. 

It has been recommended as a sedative and in diabetes in the dose 
of five or six drops largely diluted with water. 

It has also been applied to the removal of nitric acid stains, with 
some caustic potassa, scraping off the colored portion and washing 
with very dilute HS0 4 . Callus and indurated skin may be removed 
in a similar manner. 

Phosphate of Ammonium. 2KH 4 P0 4 =131. 

This has a similar composition to the other medicinal alkaline 
phosphates. It may be made by saturating a strong solution of 
phosphoric acid with ammonia, evaporating, and setting the solu- 
tion aside that crystals may form; or by saturating the excess of 
acid in superphosphate of calcium with carbonate of ammonium, 
and procuring the salt by evaporation and crystallization, previously 
adding ammonium to a 'slight alkaline reaction. It is a white salt, 
in efflorescent, rhombic prisms, losing water and ammonia, very 
soluble in water, but insoluble in alcohol. It was formerly much 
in vogue as a remedy for gout and rheumatism. Dose, 10 to 40 
grains. 

Hypophosphite of Ammonium. NH 4 H 2 ,P0 2 . 

This is prepared from hypophosphite of calcium and sulphate or 
carbonate of ammonium. 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium, G oz. 

Sesquicarbonate of ammonium (translucent), 7.23 oz. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 



PREPARATIONS OF BARIUM. 201 

Dissolve the calcium salt in four pints of water, and the am- 
monium salt in two pints of water, mix the solutions, drain the 
resulting carbonate of calcium, and wash out the retained solution 
with water. The nitrate should then be evaporated carefully to 
dryness, then dissolved in alcohol, filtered, evaporated, and crystal- 
lized. 

This salt is deliquescent in the air, very soluble in alcohol and 
water, and, when carefully heated, evolves ammonia, leaving hy- 
drated hypophosphorous acid. It is used for the same purposes as 
the other alkaline hypophosphites in a dose of 4 to 5 grains three 
times a day. 



CHAPTER V. 

ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

The earths are distinguished from the alkalies by the insolubility 
of their carbonates; and the fact, that the carbonates of some have 
an alkaline reaction and of others have not, has given rise to the 
distinction between the class of alkaline earths, to which baryta, 
lime, and magnesia belong, and earths, including alumina, and 
several of less importance to the physician and pharmacist. 

The order in which they are treated in this work is as follows: — 

1st. Preparations of barium. 

2d. Preparations of calcium. 

3d. Preparations of magnesium. 

4th. Salts containing aluminium. 

5th. Cerium and its oxalate. 

Baryta. BaO=153. 

Like the alkalies and other earths, baryta has a metallic base, 
wmich is the white readily oxidizable metal Barium. 

This alkaline earth is not itself used in medicine, but is the base 
of several officinal preparations. 

Test for Baryta. — The best and most reliable test for baryta is 
the precipitate which its solutions throw down with free sulphuric 
acid and all soluble sulphates, even with sulphate of calcium. Sul- 
phate of barium is insoluble in acids and alkalies. 

1st Group. — Of Earths — Preparations of Barium. 

Barii carbonas, Ba,C0 3 . Native witherite. Soluble in strong acids. 

Barii chloridum, BaCl 2 ,2Aq. Poisonous; used only in solution. 

Liquor barii chloridi, ]|j to f§iij water. Dose, five drops. 

Barii iodidum, Bal. Poisonous; an alterative in scrofula and morbid growths. 



202 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

Barii Carbonas. BaC0 3 =197. 

Carbonate of barium is a rather rare mineral, being chiefly im- 
ported from Sweden, Scotland, and the north of England, in masses 
of a light grayish color and fibrous texture. 

It is soluble in muriatic acid with effervescence, forming salts, 
which, if soluble, furnish in solution the best tests for sulphuric 
acid, throwing down a white precipitate insoluble in boiling nitric 
acid. The solution in muriatic acid is not colored nor precipitated 
by ammonia, nor hydrosulphuric acid, and when sulphuric acid is 
added in excess, the solution yields no precipitate with carbonate 
of sodium. 

Barii Chloridum. BaCl 2 ,2Aq. = 208.5. 

When muriatic acid is added to carbonate of barium, the muri- 
atic acid displaces the carbonic, with effervescence, and with the 
barium forms chloride of barium and water, BaC0 3 and 2HC1= 
BaCl 2 + H 2 and C0 2 . By evaporation, the chloride may be obtained 
in flat, flour-sided crystals, which lose their water of crystallization 
below 212° F. 

It is a white, freely soluble, permanent salt, with a bitter acrid 
taste, and imparts a yellow color to flame. Its solution is not 
affected by ammonia or hydrosulphuric acid. When sulphuric 
acid is added in excess, no further precipitate is produced by the 
addition of carbonate of sodium. If the crystals deliquesce the 
presence of another earthy chloride may be inferred. It is poison- 
ous, as are all the other barium salts ; it is chiefly used in medicine 
in the form of 

Liquor Barii Chloridi, IT. S. P. 

Take of Chloride of barium f Jj. 

Distilled water f ^iij. 

Dissolve the chloride in the water, and filter if necessary. 

This solution is almost too strong for convenient use ; it is stated 
to be deobstruent and anthelmintic. The dose is about five drops, 
but it is very rarely prescribed. It is, however, much employed as 
a test for sulphuric acid or any soluble sulphate. 

Barii lodidum. Bal=264. 

Is obtained by dissolving carbonate of barium in hydriodic acid, 
forming iodide of barium and water with the evolution of carbo- 
nic acid, or by adding to an alcoholic solution of iodine finely- 
powdered sulphuret of barium, and evaporating the filtrate by a 
moderate heat. Sulphur is precipitated, which is separated by fil- 
tration. 

It occurs in colorless, deliquescent needles, which are decomposed 
by the carbonic acid of the atmosphere. It is very poisonous, and 
has been recommended as a discutient and alterative in scrofulous 
diseases, internally, in the dose of one-eighth to a grain twice daily, 
and externally in ointments containing 20 to 30 grains to the ounce. 



PREPARATIONS OF CALCIUM. 203 

2d Group. — Of Earths — Preparations of Calcium. 

Marmor (marble). Native hard carbonate of calcium. 

Creta (chalk). Native soft carbonate of calcium. 

Creta proeparata, CaC0 3 . Levigated and elutriated nodules. Dose, gr. x to gj. 

Testa (oyster shells). The shell of Ostrea edulis. 

Testa praeparata. Levigated and elutriated small nodules. Dose, gr. x to 3J- 

Calx, CaO. Lime recently prepared by calcination. 

Liquor calcis. Lime-water, contains 9.7 grs. to Oj. 

Calcii chloridum, CaC] 2 . Dissolving carbonate in HC1, and evaporating. 

Liquor calcii chloridi. By dissolving one part of CaCl 2 in 1.5 of distilled -water. 

Dose, n\ xxx to f^j. 
Calcii carbonas prascipitata. From CaCl 2 by adding Na 2 CO s . Very fine white powder. 
Calx chlorinata, CaCl 2 2 -(-CaCl 2 . Bleaching salt. Disinfectant. 

Calcii phosphas prsecipitata, Ca 3 2P0 4 . Calcined bones precipitated from solution in HC1. 
Syr. calc. phosphat. Durand. 2 gr. phosph. calcium to f^j + 4 g»'- phosph. acid. 
Syr. calc. phosphat. "Wiegand. 5 gr. phosph. calcium to f^j -j- muriatic acid. 
Calcii hypophosphis, Ca2PH 2 2 . By boiling lime and phosphorus. 
Syr. calc. hypophos. Procter. 3^ gr. hypophosphite to f'5i- 
Syr. hypophosphis comp. Parrish. 5 gr. mixed calcium, sodium, and potassium salts 

to f 3 j. 
Liquor calcii bicarbonatis. Solution of carbonate in carbonic-acid water. 
Calx sacchctratum. A Hyrup containing caustic lime in union with sugar. 
Liquor calcis saccharatus. Ph. Br. 7.11 gr. lime to l§j solution. 
Calcii sulphis. By saturating Ca2HO with HS0 4 . 
Calcii iodidum. An alterative and poisonous remedy. 
Calcii sulphuretum. Used in sulphur baths, etc. 

Marmor and creta are the names given in the list to two native 
unorganized forms of carbonate of calcium, while testa is applied 
to the shell of the common oyster. Besides these, there is another 
form of hard carbonate of calcium, called limestone, which, though 
not officinal, is employed for the preparation of lime. 

Creta Pr&parata and Testa Prceparata. CaCO 3 =100. 

Carbonate of calcium for use in medicine requires to be prepared 
by mechanical processes adapted to furnishing a pure and fine 
article. Chalk and oyster-shell are subjected to the process of elu- 
triation; being powdered and diffused in water, to allow of the 
subsidence of crystalline particles, the turbid liquid is drawn off 
into other vessels, allowed to settle, and dried by being dropped 
from a suitable orifice on to a drying slab, thus presenting the car- 
bonate in nodules or small pyramidal masses, readily falling into a 
very fine, impalpable, white powder. In this way prepared chalk 
and prepared oyster-shell are produced. The precipitated carbonate 
of calcium is very differently prepared, by means of a chemical 
process, described, along with the medical properties of the carbo- 
nate, on page 205. 

Tests for the determination of Lime. — Soluble salts of lime impart 
to alcohol a yellowish-red color. The neutral salts are precipitated — 

By carbonates and phosphates of the alkalies; the white precipi- 
tates are soluble in muriatic and nitric acids. 

By oxalic acid; the precipitate soluble in muriatic and nitric 
acids ; not in ammonia or excess of oxalic acid. 

Sulphuric acid and soluble sulphates throw down a precipitate 



204 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

of sulphate of calcium from concentrated solutions, soluble in much 
water and in diluted acids. 

Only in very concentrated solutions does a precipitate take place 
by caustic potassa. 

Calx. {Lime. CaO=56.) 

Lime is the oxide of a light metal called calcium, Ca=40. This 
oxide exists to a very great extent in the mineral kingdom, being 
the most familiar of the so-called alkaline earths. It is obtained 
from the soil by plants, and through them becomes incorporated 
into the structure of animals, entering specially into their bones, 
shells, and teeth. 

Lime itself is prepared from the carbonate, mostly from lime- 
stone, by calcining along with carbonaceous matters. Sometimes 
with wood, furnishing wood-burnt lime; and at other times with 
coal, furnishing a more common article. The action of an intense 
heat drives off the carbonic acid, which escapes, leaving the lime in 
its caustic state. 

On the addition of water, lime becomes slaked, a high heat is 
produced, and it is found to have absorbed one equivalent of water = 
Ca2HO=74. Lime is less soluble in hot than in cold water, is 
iusible before the blowpipe, and entirely soluble in muriatic acid. 
Silicic acid remains undissolved on the addition of this acid. 
Phosphate of calcium, if the solution is acid, is thrown down on neu- 
tralization with ammonia. Alumina, magnesia, and oxide of iron 
are thrown down from this solution by a slight excess of ammonia. 

Liquor Calais, U. S. P. Solution of Lime. (Lime- Water.) 

Take of Lime Four ounces. 

Water One gallon. 

Upon the lime first slaked with a little water, pour the remainder 
of the water, and stir them together, then immediately cover the 
vessel, and set it aside for three hours. The solution should be 
kept standing upon the undissolved lime in stopped glass bottles, 
and poured off clear when required for use. 

Lime is soluble to a limited extent, and more so in cold than in 
hot water. The proportion contained in lime-water is from nine to 
ten grains to the pint; its dose is from f^ss to f^ij. It is particu- 
larly useful, in small doses, to allay irritation of stomach and 
nausea, and, as an astringent antacid, is adapted to dyspepsia ac- 
companied with acidity of stomach and diarrhoea. Its taste and 
caustic properties are best disguised by admixture with milk; and a 
mixture of lime-water and milk is much used as food for infants. 

Tests. — Lime-water of full strength is rendered turbid on appli- 
cation of heat. If prepared from lime obtained from common 
limestone, it is apt to contain caustic soda, from the decomposition, 
by lime, of some silicate of sodium; it is recognized by passing car- 
bonic acid (exhaled air) into it until the lime is precipitated, when 
the alkaline reaction will not have disappeared. 



CALCII CARBONAS PR^ICIPIT ATA. 205 

Calcii Chloridum. CaCl 2 =lll. 

The chloride is prepared by dissolving chalk or marble in muri- 
atic acid and evaporating to dryness, after which it may be fused. 
It is then a white, amorphous mass or powder, with an acrid, bitter, 
saline taste, very soluble in water and alcohol, and so deliquescent 
as to be used for drying gases, and for depriving various liquid 
substances of water. It is also capable of crystallizing, when it 
absorbs six equivalents of water=CaCl 2 +6H 2 0. If the heat does 
not exceed 300° in evaporating to dryness, the salt will have the 
composition CaCl 2 +2H 2 0. 

Metallic oxides, if present, may be detected by precipitates in 
the solution with ammonia and sulphuretted hydrogen. A pre- 
cipitate by solution of sulphate of calcium would indicate baryta. 

Liquor Calcii Chloridi, U. S. P. 

Solution of chloride of calcium is directed, in the Pharmacopoeia, to 
be made by obtaining the chloride as above, and dissolving it in 
water in about such proportion that 2.5 parts of the solution shall 
be equal to one part of the salt. 

The officinal process is as follows: — 

Take of Marble, in small pieces Six troyounces. 

Muriatic acid Twelve troyounces. 

Distilled water A sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acid with half a pint of distilled water, and gradually 
add the marble. Towards the close of the effervescence apply a 
gentle heat, and, when the action has ceased, pour off the clear 
liquid and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the residue in one and a 
half times its weight of distilled water, and filter through paper. 

It is rarely prepared or prescribed, although considered a deob- 
struent and alterative remedy, adapted to scrofulous diseases and 
goitre. Dose, "ixxx to f 3j. 

Ccdcii Carbonas Prcecipitata, IT. S. P. CaCO 3 =100. 

Is prepared by adding carbonate of sodium in solution to the 
solution of chloride of calcium as above, till effervescence ceases. 
By double decomposition, carbonate of calcium is formed and pre- 
cipitated as a white powder, while chloride of sodium remains in 
solution and is separated by washing. The fineness of this precipi- 
tate is dependent upon the degree of concentration and the tem- 
perature of the solutions. If dilute and cold, the result would be 
the formation of a crystalline powder destitute of that softness 
and miscibility with liquids which adapt it to convenient use. 
The Pharmacopoeia, therefore, directs strong solutions and a boiling 
temperature at the time of mixing them. 

When properly made, this is a fine white powder, free from 
grittiness, insoluble in water, but soluble without residue in diluted 
muriatic acid, with abundant disengagement of carbonic acid. It 
is used as an antacid, with astringent properties, adapting it espe- 
cially to diarrhoea. Dose, from gr, x to 3j. 



206 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

As compared with prepared chalk, with which it is identical in 
composition, this is a far handsomer preparation, and, though less 
distinctly amorphous, and, therefore, not so thoroughly suspended 
in liquid forms of preparation, it is preferred for most prescription 
purposes. It is also well substituted for chalk in dentifrice. 

Tests, — Sulphate of calcium, which is an occasional adulteration, 
may be detected by washing the preparation with distilled water, 
in which, after filtration, chloride of barium and oxalic acid will 
produce precipitates. 

Phosphate of calcium is left behind on treatment with diluted 
acetic acid ; it is dissolved by muriatic acid, in which solution the 
phosphoric acid is proved by perchloride of iron and acetate of po- 
tassium in excess. 

Calx Chlorinata, U. S. P. {Chlorinated Lime.) 

Under the name of chloride of lime, or bleaching powder, this sub- 
stance is extensively manufactured and used as a bleaching agent. 
It is made from slaked lime by subjecting it to an atmosphere of 
chlorine gas till completely saturated, and has a complex and varia- 
ble composition, being a mixture of hypochlorite of calcium, 
CaCl 2 2 , chloride of calcium, CaCl 2 , and lime, Ca2HO. It is a grayish- 
white, lumpy powder, having the odor of chlorine, which it gives 
off on exposure to the air. It is deliquescent, absorbing both 
moisture and carbonic acid from the air. 

For the full advantage of the liberation of chlorine the addition 
of an acid is necessary, though the spontaneous evolution of that 
gas is usually relied on for common disinfecting purposes. The 
chief popular use of chlorinated lime is as a disinfectant about 
cesspools, sewers, and places rendered offensive and unwholesome 
by the products of decomposition. 

It is also used in the manufacture of chloroform and for the pre- 
paration of liquor sodce chlorinates, which is used as a substitute for 
it for internal and external use in medicine. 

Tests. — A very moist consistence argues the presence of a con- 
siderable proportion of chloride of calcium, and is an indication of 
inferiority. It is only partially soluble in water, and wholly soluble 
in muriatic acid ; its solution quickly destroys most vegetable colors. 

The Pharmacopoeia gives the following test which shows an 
amount of chlorine available for disinfecting and medical purposes, 
of at least twenty-five per cent., and indicates a good commercial 
quality. 

When forty grains, triturated with a fluidounce of distilled 
water, are well shaken with a solution of seventy-eight grains of 
crystallized ferrous sulphate, and ten drops of sulphuric acid in 
two fluidounces of distilled water, a liquid is formed which does 
not yield a blue precipitate with ferridcyanide of potassium (red 
prussiate of potash). 

This test is based on the oxidation of the iron under the influence 
of chlorine to sesquioxide; but aside from other objections, the 



SYRUP OF PHOSPHATE OF CALCIUM. 207 

difficulty of keeping the sulphate of irou entirely unaltered renders 
this test inaccurate ; a better result is obtained by treating thirty- 
six grains chloride of calcium with fifty -three grains ferrocyanide 
of potassium, and, after heating to the boiling point, testing with a 
salt of sesquioxide of iron, which must not furnish a blue precipi- 
tate. 

By the influence of chlorine, the ferrocyanide is changed into 
ferridcyanide of potassium ; if less than 25 per cent, of chlorine is 
present, a part of the ferrocyanide remains unaltered, and reacts 
with the chloride of calcium, the resulting ferrocyanide of potas- 
sium and calcium is taken up by boiling water, and throws down 
a precipitate of Prussian blue with sesquisalts of iron. 

Calcii Phosphas Prcecipitata, U. S. P. Ca 3 2PO 4 =310. 

This salt is made by calcining bones and dissolving them in mu- 
riatic acid, from which solution, on the addition of ammonia-water, 
the phosphate is precipitated. 

After washing and drying it is a white insoluble powder, free 
from odor and taste; soluble in muriatic, acetic, and phosphoric 
acids. 

This phosphate is used as a remedy for scrofulous diseases, de- 
fective nutrition, etc. Dose, from gr. x to 3ss, repeated three times 
a day. It forms the basis of several of the phosphatic preparations 
now so popular ; it is said to be essential in animals, as well as 
plants, to the formation of cells, and seems to be useful in certain 
pathological states of the system characterized by defective nutri- 
tion. 

Tests. — It is insoluble in water, soluble in nitric, sulphuric, hydro- 
chloric, and carbonic acids ; its solution in nitric acid is precipitated 
by oxalate of ammonium; the neutralized nitric solution should 
give a yellow precipitate of phosphate of silver. 

Carbonate of calcium, if present as an adulteration, is detected 
by its effervescing with acids. Sulphate of calcium is left behind 
on dissolving the salt in muriatic acid; the residue dissolves in 
much distilled water, and yields the characteristic precipitate with 
barium salts. 

The granular and rather insoluble character of this powder, as 
found in commerce, renders it less efficient than desirable, and has 
led to the preparation of the following syrups, which contain it in 
a soluble form. See, also, Compound Syrup of Phosphates among 
the preparations of iron. 

DuranoTs Syrup of Phosphate of Calcium. 

Take of Precipitated phosphate of calcium .... 128 grains. 

Glacial phosphoric acid 240 " 

Sugar, in coarse powder 7£ oz. (offic.) 

Distilled water 4 fluidounces. 

Essence of lemon 12 drops. 

Mix the phosphate of calcium with the water in a porcelain cap- 
sule, over a spirit or gas lamp, or in a sand-bath, add gradually the 



208 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

phosphoric acid until the whole of the phosphate of calcium is dis- 
solved. To this solution add sufficient water to compensate for the 
evaporation, then dissolve the sugar by a very gentle heat, and, 
when perfectly cold, add the essence of lemon. The syrup of phos- 
phate of calcium, thus prepared, is colorless, transparent, of an acid 
taste, and contains two grains of the phosphate of calcium and 
nearly four grains of phosphoric acid to each teaspoonful. "When 
diluted by the patient previously to its being taken, it forms a 
phosphoric lemonade not unpleasant to the taste. Dose, a tea- 
spoonful. 

In a paper in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxvi. 
p. 112, noticing the above, T. S. Wiegand remarks upon the acidity 
of the preparation as an objection to its use in some cases, and pro- 
poses the following modified recipe, containing muriatic acid in- 
stead of phosphoric acid, a much smaller proportion being required 
to constitute a permanent solution. 

Wiegand's Syrup) of Phosphate of Calcium. 

Take of Calcii phosphatis preecip J-j. 

Acidi chlorobydrici f^iv. 

Aquas, q. s. ft flvij. 

Sacchari, q. s. ft fo x y» 

Dissolve the phosphate of calcium, previously mixed with an 
ounce of water, by means of the acid, filter, then add the remaining 
water to this; add the sugar until the bulk is increased to twelve 
fluidounces, and strain. Dose, a teaspoonful. 

Calcii Hypophosphis. {Hypophosphite of Calcium. Ca2PIT 2 2 =136.) 

When phosphorus is boiled with milk of lime, it gradually dis- 
appears, with evolution of spontaneously inflammable phosphuret- 
ted hydrogen, which explodes as it reaches the atmosphere, with 
the formation of water and phosphoric acid. When the strong 
odor of phosphuretted hydrogen ceases to be given off, the liquid 
contains, besides the excess of lime, nearly half of the phosphorus 
as phosphate of calcium, and the remainder, deducting the con- 
siderable portion which has escaped into the air as phosphuretted 
hydrogen, is hypophosphite of calcium. When the process is con- 
ducted in a flask, it requires a constant ebullition of the liquid to 
prevent the explosion consequent upon the entrance of the atmos- 
pheric air. To avoid this result, it has been found safer to employ 
a deep, open vessel. The constant evolution of gas and vapor, 
which keeps a froth on the surface, excludes the atmosphere in a 
great degree, so that the yield is not much diminished, whilst the 
safety and ease of the process are greatly increased. The process 
should be conducted under a hood with a strong draught, or in the 
open air, to avoid the disagreeable fumes which are evolved. 

Take of Lime, recently burned 4 lbs. av. 

Phosphorus 1 lb. " 

Water 5 galls. 



SYRUP OF HYPOPHOSPHITE OF CALCIUM. 209 

Slake the lime with a gallon of the water, put the remainder in a 
deep boiler, and as soon as it boils add the slaked lime, and mix to 
a uniform milk. The phosphorus is now added, and the boiling is 
kept up constantly, adding hot water from time to time, so as to 
preserve the measure as nearly as may be, until it is all oxidized 
and combined, and the strong odor of the gas has disappeared. 
The mixture froths much, and but little of the phosphorus reaches 
the surface. Then filter the solution through close muslin, wash 
out that portion retained by the calcareous residue with water, and 
evaporate the filtrate till reduced to six pints. The concentrated 
liquid should now be re-filtered to remove a portion of carbonate of 
calcium which has resulted from the action of the air on the lime 
in solution, and again evaporated till a pellicle forms, when it may 
be crystallized by standing in the drying room, or the heat may be 
continued with stirring till the salt granulates, when it should be 
introduced into bottles. 

Scheffer prepares it by a modification of this process, which, he 
says, saves the great waste occurring in the above, and has the 
advantage of liberating very little of the offensive gas produced by 
it. He first oxidizes the phosphorus by fusing it under water, and 
pumping atmospheric air into it; the phosphorus burns somewhat, 
and swells up, having become partially converted into oxide of 
phosphorus, P 2 0, and now combines with milk of lime without 
boiling, most readily at 180° F., the gas given off being chiefly 
hydrogen, and not, as in the other case, the offensive compound of 
phosphorus and hydrogen, the production of which is so great an 
annoyance in the neighborhood of chemical manufactories. 

Hypophosphite of calcium is a white salt with a pearly margarin- 
like lustre, and crystallizes in flattened prisms. It is soluble in six 
parts of cold water, and in not much less of boiling water; slightly 
soluble in diluted alcohol, but insoluble in alcohol of sp. gr. .835. 

This is the most important of the salts of hypophosphorous acid ; 
it is the source from which the acid itself and most of its medici- 
nal salts are made. Immense quantities of it have been prescribed 
since it was first proposed by Dr. Churchill as a remedy in phthisis, 
and though the sanguine expectations enkindled by its first an- 
nouncement have not been realized, it has assumed a prominent 
place among the remedies adapted to cases of nervous and general 
debility and ill health. Its dose is five grains three times daily, in 
sugar and water. 

Syrup of Hypojrttosphite of Calcium. (Procter.) 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium 1 ounce. 

Water 9^ riuidouuces. 

White sugar 12 troyounces. 

Fluid extract of vanilla £ fluidounce. 

Dissolve the salt in the water, filter, add the sugar, dissolve by 
aid of heat, and add the vanilla. The dose is from a teaspoonful 
(three and a half grains) to a tab.lespoonful (fourteen grains), ac- 
cording to the circumstances of the case, three times a da v. 
14 



210 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

Parrish's Syrup of the Hypophosphites.* 

The presence of preparations of iron in these compounds was not 
called for by the original discoverer of their therapeutic value, who 
considers the alkaline and earthy hypophosphites as superior to any 
of the ordinary hcematogens, and in practice I believe the following 
very simple preparations have been found fully equal to those in 
which iron is introduced with an excess of hypophosphorous acid. 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium ^iss. 

" sodium jfss. 

" potassium gss. 

Sugar ffij, 12 oz. (com.) 

Hot water Oj fgiv. 

Orange-flower water f^j. 

Make a solution of the mixed salts in the hot water, filter 
through paper, dissolve the sugar in the solution by the aid of heat; 
strain and add the orange-flower water. Dose, a teaspoonful, con- 
taining nearly Rye grains of the mixed salts. 

The glycerole of hypophosphites has the same composition as the 
foregoing, except that the solution is formed with a less proportion 
of water, to which a smaller portion of sugar is added, and the 
quantity made up with glycerin. "We modify the flavor, also, by 
the use of a little oil of bitter almonds, to distinguish it from the 
corresponding syrup. 

Some pharmacists omit the sugar altogether, and propose this 
course in making all glyceroles, using glycerin as the solvent, as 
well as for its nutritive and remedial properties. I do not find 
this to furnish a pleasant preparation to take, as the saline ingre- 
dients have, perhaps, as strong a taste in this form as in an aqueous 
solution, and in view of the acridity of glycerin as usually met 
with, I think a teaspoonful a pretty large dose, unless diluted more 
than is usual with such preparations as glycerole of the hypophos- 
phites which is frequently taken directly from the bottle. 

The inferior kinds of glycerin must be avoided in this prepara- 
tion, as from contact with the salts or other causes they are apt to 
acquire very offensive properties. 

Liquor Calcii Picarbonatis. 

This bicarbonate cannot be obtained in the dry state. It is often 
contained in spring waters, to which it imparts the property of 
reacting as acids on litmus and as alkalies on logwood paper. A 
solution of this salt has been used in England, under the name of 
Maugham's Carrara water, which is made by dissolving Carrara 
marble, or any other pure carbonate of calcium, in water, saturated 
with carbonic acid. 

It has been used as an antacid absorbent, alterative, and a mild 
astringent in a number of diseases, particularly in various forms of 
dyspepsia. The dose of this water is one or two wineglassfuls and 
.more, to the amount of about two quarts per day. 

* See Preparations of Iron, Procter's .Syrup of Hypophosphites, etc. 



CALCII SULPHIS. 211 

Calx Saccharatum. Syrwpus Colds. 

Trousseau used the following proportions for producing a solution 
of lime by the aid of sugar: 1 part of slaked lime, 10 parts water, 
and 100 parts of syrup are boiled together for a few minutes, 
strained, and diluted with four times the weight of simple syrup. 

This syrup has an alkaline taste and reaction, and is the solu- 
tion of a chemical compound of sugar and lime. It is used for 
the same purposes as lime-water, but on account of its causticity it 
is necessary to dilute it considerably. It is given to children in 
the quantity of 20 to 30 grains during the day; adults take from 
2 to 3 drachms during the same time. 

Liquor Calcis Saccharatus, Ph. Br. (Saccharated Solution of Lime.) 

Take of Slaked lime, one ounce (avoird.). 

Refined sugar, in powder, two ounces (avoird.). 
Distilled water, one pint (imperial). 

Mix the lime and sugar by trituration in a mortar. Transfer 
the mixture to a bottle containing the water, and, having closed 
this with a cork, shake it occasionally for a few hours. Finally, 
separate the clear liquor with a siphon, and keep it in a stoppered 
bottle. The sp. gr. is 1.052 ; one fluidounce required for neutrali- 
zation 254 grain measures of the volumetric solution of oxalic 
acid, which corresponds to 7.11 grains of lime in one fluidounce. 

It should be kept in a well- stopped bottle, and given in the dose 
of from 20 to 60 minims in a glass of water two or three times a 
day, after eating. This is stated to be a powerful antacid and tonic, 
adapted to cases of obstinate dyspepsia connected with too little 
secretion of gastric juice, as well as to those with too great secre- 
tion. It is said to be particularly serviceable to gouty constitu- 
tions, though of less use in hysterical and anaemic cases. So far 
from increasing constipation, it is stated gradually to remove that 
symptom. 

Calcii Sulpliis. (Sulphite of Calcium. CaS0 3 =122.) 

Neutral sulphite of calcium is prepared by passing gaseous sul- 
phurous acid over hydrate of lime, spread upon hurdles to the depth 
of one or two inches, or preferably, according to another manufac- 
turing chemist of Prague, by passing the gas into the lime in a 
barrel, which is made to revolve, by which the contact between 
it and the lime is increased ; the color of the lime is changed from 
white to a pale yellow in from four to eight hours, and the salt is 
then removed. It is soluble in about 800 parts of water, and on 
the addition of most acids, liberates sulphurous acid (HS0 3 ), which 
is its principal use. Added to cider in the proportion of a few 
ounces to a barrel it liberates this acid, and arrests the process of 
fermentation, a desideratum in this branch of manufacture; the 
sparing solubility of the salt and of the precipitate formed adapts 
it to the end in view; no foreign odor or taste is imparted to the 
cider. This salt, as also the bisulphite and hyposulphite of calcium, 



212 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

which are more soluble, has been recommended in the purulent 
stage of consumption as checking the absorption of purulent 
matter and favoring the cicatrization of vomicae. 

Calcii Iodidum. Cal 2 = 294. 

The iodide may be prepared by dissolving lime or carbonate of 
calcium in hydriodic acid, or by digesting a solution of iodide of 
iron with hydrate of lime, filtering and evaporating the filtrate to 
crystallization. 

It is a deliquescent salt, easily soluble in water, and has a bitter 
taste. It has been used in scrofulous affections internally, in doses 
ranging from £ to 2 grains three times daily, and externally in 
ointments, containing 2 drachms or less to the ounce. 

Calcii Sulphuretum. {Impure Sulphide of Calcium.) 

If lime diffused in water is decomposed by a current of sulphu- 
retted hydrogen, a solution results, which on evaporation yields a 
white soft mass, of a sulphurous odor and taste. 

It has been used as a depilatory by applying a paste formed with 
water to the parts, and washing it off after about a quarter of an 
hour. 

The similar compound, prepared by dissolving sublimed sulphur 
in boiling milk of lime, and diluting the solution, has been em- 
ployed for the cure of itch, by washing the body with such a solu- 
tion, or by adding a sufficient quantity to a bath. 

The sulphur springs generally contain more or less of this sulphide, 
which, with hydrosulphuric acid, forms the most active of their 
constituents. 

3d Group. — Of the Earths , etc. — Preparations of Magnesium, 

Magnesii sulphas, MgS0 4 ,7H 2 0. From native carbonate, etc. Dose, ^j. 

Magnesii carbonas, 3MgC0 3 ,Mg2HO,4H 2 0. From sulphate by Na 2 C0 3 . 

Magnesii carbonas ponderosa. From the same in more concentrated solution. 

Magnesii bicarbonas. Fluid magnesia solution with gaseous C0 2 . 

Magnesia, MgO. By calciniug the carbonate. Dose, gj. 

Liquor magnesii citratis. ^j of the salt in solution in ^xij bottles. 

Magnesii citras, 3MgCL By fusing citrie acid and adding MgO. 

Prepared citrate magnesia. Effervescing powder, mixed citrate bicarb, potass, etc. 

Moxon's effervescent magnesia contains MgS0 4 + ^H 2 with NaC0 3 and acid, tartar. 

Magnesii acetas. In solution with orange syrup. 

Magnesii et potass, borotartras. Soluble and mild salt. 

Magnesii sulphuretum. Gelatinous alterative. Dose, 5 to 30 grs. 

Magnesia, like baryta and lime, has for its base a metal, mag- 
nesium. This has a brilliant gray color, and sp. gr. of 2.2. 

Tests for the detection of Magnesia. — Magnesia is precipitated by 
the fixed alkalies and their carbonates. The precipitate is soluble 
in ammonia ; so also is the precipitate occasioned by oxalate of 
ammonium; phosphate of sodium in conjunction with ammonia 
causes a crystalline white precipitate of MgNH 4 P0 4 , which is in- 
soluble in ammonia and ammoniacal salts, but dissolves easily in 
acids. 



MAGNESII CARBONAS. 213 

Magnesii Sulphas. {Epsom Salt. MgS0 4 ,7H 2 = 246.) 

Epsom salt is chiefly prepared from magnesian limestone, called 
by mineralogists dolomite, and from a native carbonate of mag- 
nesium called magnesite brought from the island of Euboea. By 
the action of sulphuric acid the magnesia is converted into the 
soluble sulphate, and the mineral being in excess, the addition of a 
little freshly precipitated magnesia carries down with it the iron 
and manganese, so that the sulphate is nearly pure, and by stirring 
as it passes into a solid consistence is obtained in acicular crystals. 
At the Jarrow chemical works, South Shields, England, where 
Epsom salt is produced to the extent of one thousand tons annu- 
ally, the material employed is the impure sulphate of magnesium, 
which crystallizes from the residual liquors of the Yorkshire Alum 
Works. Epsom salt in crystals is soluble in an equal weight of 
water; it contains over 50 per cent, of water of crystallization, and 
effloresces slowly by exposure, becoming white and pulverulent. 
Its sensible properties are familiar to most. In doses of from 3ss 
to j§j, Epsom salt is a brisk saline cathartic ; in small doses, a laxa- 
tive and diuretic. It is much combined with senna, senna and 
manna, etc., in well-known and very disagreeable infusions. 

Tests. — Its solution is not colored nor precipitated by ferrocy- 
anuret of potassium, and gives off no hydrochloric acid on the 
addition of sulphuric acid. The Pharmacopoeia also directs the 
following test of this salt: 100 grains dissolved in water, and mixed 
with sufficient boiling solution of carbonate of sodium completely 
to decompose it, yield a precipitate of carbonate of magnesium, 
weighing, when washed and dried, 34 grains. 

Magnesii Carbonas. 3MgC0 3 ,Mg2HO,4H 2 = 382. 

The carbonate, called also magnesia alba, is usually made from 
sulphate of magnesium, by adding carbonate of sodium, and boil- 
ing the mixed solutions. Sulphate of sodium and carbonate of 
magnesium result from the play of affinities; the former is soluble 
and is washed out, while the latter is collected, pressed into oblong 
squares, called bricks, dried at a moderate heat, and wrapped in 
paper for sale. It is very light, pulverulent, insoluble, tasteless, 
soft, though somewhat granular and variable in these respects. It 
is a compound of about one equivalent of bihydrate of magnesia 
and three of hydrated carbonate of magnesium. It is used as an 
antacid and laxative, but requires to be given in a larger dose than 
the calcined ; lump magnesia is often carried about by those who 
use it habitually for heartburn and acidity of stomach. 

By boiling it with pure water, this does not acquire an alkaline 
reaction, nor yield a precipitate with chloride of barium or nitrate 
of silver. It is wholly dissolved with effervescence by diluted 
sulphuric acid, and the solution is not precipitated by oxalate of 
ammonium. 



214 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

Heavy Carbonate of Magnesium. 

This is the result of a similar process to the foregoing, except 
that the solutions are much more concentrated, or are boiled to- 
gether until effervescence ceases. It is heavier than the common 
carbonate, though very similar in composition, and is found in a 
white rather dense powder, preferred from its small bulk. 

Carbonate of magnesium is used chiefly as an antacid, in doses of 
9j to 3j, though liable to the objection of liberating carbonic acid 
gas in the stomach, producing eructations and distension. 

Bicarbonate of Magnesium 

Is a salt quite soluble in water, but which is not permanent, and 
exists only in solution. The so-called fluid magnesias, of which 
Murray's, Dinneford's, and Husband's are the best known, are 
solutions of this salt. They are conveniently prepared by passing 
a stream of carbonic acid gas into freshly precipitated by d rated 
carbonate of magnesium, or preferably by forcing the gas into a 
strong fountain, such as is used for carbonic-acid water, containing 
the freshly precipitated carbonate. The quantity contained in these 
solutions is necessarily small, and they have a tendency to deposit 
the salt as they lose the free carbonic acid; their usefulness is 
limited to the case of children, and to the treatment of acidity of 
stomach in adults. The taste is more alkaline and disagreeable 
than that of the insoluble carbonate, or of magnesia itself. 

According to Graham, the crystals deposited from such solutions 
are compounds of mono-carbonate of magnesium with one, two, or 
four equivalents of water. 

Magnesia. MgO = 40. 

Usually prepared by calcining the carbonate at a high heat, until 
it presents a peculiar luminous appearance, called brightening. 
This preparation is very various in its physical properties, owing to 
the various modifications of the process for its preparation; it will 
not be necessary in this work to describe these. The reader is re- 
ferred, for an account of some interesting experiments made in my 
laboratory by Thomas H. Barr, of Terre Haute, la., and by Thomas 
Weaver, of Philadelphia, to the American Journal of Pharmacy, 
vol. xxvi. p. 193, and vol. xxviii. p. 214. 

Common calcined magnesia is a very light white powder, almost 
insoluble and tasteless, but imparting a sensation of grittiness to 
the tongue, which renders it a disagreeable medicine to most per- 
sons. It should be entirely soluble in diluted muriatic acid, with- 
out effervescence. The presence of lime would be shown by a 
white precipitate in a neutral solution, with sulphuric or oxalic 
acid, by which acids magnesia is not precipitated. When moist- 
ened it changes turmeric paper brown, but water which has been 
boiled on it should not be alkaline, nor give a precipitate with 
chloride of barium or nitrate of silver. 



HrSBA^D'-. 


Ellis's. 


Sp. gr. 3.326. 


Sp. gr. 3.38 


84.306 


94.04 


11.400 


.80 


3.008 


4.41 



MAGNESIA. 215 

The best varieties in commerce are the English ponderous mag- 
nesia, sold in bulk, and Henry's, Husband's, and Ellis's, sold in 
bottles. ' 

The ponderous is not much used in this country ; it has the advan- 
tage of smallness of bulk, but lacks the extreme softness of the bot- 
tled article. Henry's leaves nothing to desire ; it is very heavy, 
soft, and smooth, and is highly esteemed among the more wealthy 
classes; its price, which is enhanced by the payment of duty, almost 
puts it out of the reach of the middle and poorer classes. Husband's 
is somewhat cheaper and equally good, though, as would be inferred 
from the ascertained composition, it requires a little larger dose. 
Ellis's is the most recent make; it maintains the same price in bot- 
tles as the last named, and approaches it in quality. This is also 
obtainable by the pound at a somewhat reduced price. 

The following abridgment of Barr's table of the composition of 
these three kinds will show the relative purity of the specimens 
examined: — 

Henry's. 
Sp. gr. 3.404. 

Magnesia 94.40 

Water 50 

Sulphate of magnesium and sodium, iron, etc. 5.81 

The dose of magnesia as a cathartic is about 5j? or, of the com- 
mon kind, near a tablespoonful ; of the heavy kinds, about a tea- 
spoonful; as an antacid, smaller doses are used. 

The following excellent process for a dense and soft magnesia is 
that of the late Thomas Weaver, of Philadelphia: — 

Take of Sulphate of magnesium £iv and ^ij. 

Bicarbonate of sodium 5iij. 

Nitric acid, 

Carbonate of sodium, 

Water, of each Sufficient. 

Dissolve the sulphate of magnesium in six ounces of water, add 
a few drops of nitric acid, and boil for fifteen or twenty minutes; 
then add sufficient carbonate of sodium, dissolved in a little water, 
to produce a slight precipitate, and continue boiling for some time, 
filter, and set aside to cool. Triturate the bicarbonate of sodium 
with about eight ounces of cold water, and add it to the cold solu- 
tion of sulphate of magnesium; after frequent agitation filter, trans- 
fer to a porcelain capsule and boil quickly till reduced to a small 
bulk, collect the precipitate, wash thoroughly, and when nearly 
dry transfer to a crucible free from iron, and calcine at a low heat 
just approaching to redness. The first part of this process is de- 
signed to separate traces of iron as sesquioxide, which it accom- 
plishes most effectually and economically, and the last, to decom- 
pose the sulphate at such a temperature as to insure a soft and 
heavy product. Elevation of the heat above redness seems to pro- 
duce the grittiness characteristic of common qualities of magnesia. 



216 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

Liquor Magnesii Citratis. 

In presenting a formula for this very popular cathartic beverage, 
I shall depart from the usual custom of following the Pharmacopoeia. 
It is to be regretted that from taking the officinal directions of 
1850 many pharmacists have been so unsuccessful as to give up 
the preparation of the solution, and purchase a less active prepara- 
tion, so that its manufacture is thrown very much into a few hands. 
One druggist in Philadelphia has frequently sold a gross of bottles 
of the citrate per day, on an average, for thirty days in succession. 

The recipe below is that which I have used for some years; it is 
original with myself, and I believe seldom fails to furnish a satis- 
factory article. 

To make one doz. To make one bottle. 

Take of Citric acid .... £ix (offic.) gvj. 

Magnesia 3 ij -f 3 v, or sufficient 3j -h gr. xlv. 

Syrup of citric acid . 12 iiuidounces f gj. 

Water 1 gallon, or sufficient f^xss. 

Make an acid solution of citrate of magnesium with the citric 
acid, magnesia, and 3 pints of the water (f§iv in making a single 
bottle); to this add the lemon syrup, and divide the whole among 
12 f^xij bottles (or put into one bottle if the smaller quantity), fill 
these with the remainder of the water, adjust the corks, and add to 
each bottle about 9ij of crystallized bicarbonate of potassium. 

The quantity of magnesia here indicated is adjusted to an article 
of average purity; sometimes this weight is found too much and 
must be diminished to 95 or 100 grains; if, on the other hand, the 
magnesia is rather poorly calcined, and contains some carbonate, it 
may be best to increase the proportion from 105 to 110, or even 120 
grains to the bottle, though this must be done with great caution, 
as the slightest excess may occasion the precipitation of a large 
amount of the hydrated citrate. The strong solution as at first 
prepared will not keep without precipitation, so that it is necessary 
to bottle and dilute it without much delay. If the preparation is 
not decidedly acid, it will be disagreeable to take, and will possess 
no advantage over the common saline cathartics, but if too strongly 
acid, it w T ill be almost equally objectionable. The bicarbonate of 
potassium has the great advantage of neutralizing a portion of the 
acid, while it forms a very soluble and agreeable salt. If carbonate 
of magnesium were used to liberate the gas, the tendency to deposit 
would be increased, which is the greatest practical difficulty with 
this solution. 

The size of the bottle is another point to be observed ; it must not 
fall short of f ^xij. Bottles are made for the purpose both with and 
without the name of the preparation blown in the glass, which are 
very appropriate. 

The following is the process of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia for 
1870:— 



LIQUOR MAGNESII CITRATIS. 217 

Liquor Magnesii Citratis, U. S. P. (Solution of Citrate of Magnesium.) 

Take of Carbonate of magnesium 200 grains. 

Citric acid 400 grains. 

Syrup of citric acid 2 fluidounces. 

Bicarbonate of potassium 40 grains. 

"Dissolve the citric acid in four fluidounces of water, and, having 
added the carbonate of magnesium, stir until it is dissolved. Filter 
the solution into a strong twelve-ounce bottle containing the syrup 
of citric acid, then add the bicarbonate of potassium and enough 
water to nearly fill the bottle, which must be closed with a cork 
and secured with twine. Lastly, shake the mixture occasionally 
until the bicarbonate is dissolved." 

Although the above recipes are perfectly satisfactory for one or 
two dozen bottles when they are to be sold in a few weeks, it does 
not answer the purpose of the wholesale manufacturer, or the phar- 
macist who prepares it for use on shipboard. We are indebted 
to F. Stearns, of Detroit, for the following practical recipe adapted 
to these purposes. 

Precipitate sulphate of magnesium by adding to it a hot solution 
of carbonate of sodium (12 lbs. of the carbonate suffice for 10 \ lbs. 
of the sulphate), wash the precipitated carbonate of magnesium 
upon a linen filter, drain, and having ascertained the amount of 
water contained in a sample of known weight by drying and cal- 
cining it, introduce the moist hydrate into a suitable apparatus; 
and to every 1280 grains of anhydrous magnesia the moist hydrate 
contains, add one gallon of clean soft water (allowing of course for 
the water already mechanically combined with the hydrate), then ■ 
subject the whole to the action of carbonic acid gas under a pres- 
sure of ten atmospheres for 24 hours, or until the magnesia is dis- 
solved. 

Having drawn it off, filter and prepare the solution of the citrate 
as follows: introduce into fsxij strong bottles, ten and a half fluid- 
ounces of the solution, and one and a half ounce of lemon syrup, 
not acidulated, and having the corks ready and softened, introduce 
into each 366 grains of citric acid in crystals, cork and wire im- 
mediately. A bottling machine greatly facilitates this operation. 

Each bottle of the solution as made by either of these recipes 
holds a full cathartic dose ; divided portions may be taken for its 
refrigerant and aperient effects, the cork being always carefully 
secured and the bottle inverted in the intervals of taking the doses. 

Soluble Citrate of Magnesium. 

Citrate of magnesium is insoluble in water as precipitated from 
a solution, but is more soluble if made by the direct union of its 
constituents in a dry condition. The proportion employed must 
be varied according to the purity of the magnesia and the condition 
of the acid. Citric acid is what is called a tribasic acid, having 
three equivalents of basic water (see Organic Acids); as found in 
commerce, it is liable to contain, in addition, either one or two 



218 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

equivalents of water of crystallization, so that its saturating power 
is not uniform. The basic citrate (3MgO,Ci) is the neutral and 
soluble salt aimed at, and the proportion contained in the follow- 
ing recipe will furnish it in a tolerably eligible form with the use 
of the commercial acid and magnesia. 

Take of Citric acid (crystallized) 100 grains. 

Calcined magnesia 35 grains. 

Water 15 drops. 

Dissolve the acid in the water and its water of crystallization 
by the aid of heat, then stir in the magnesia; a pasty mass will 
result, which soon hardens, and may be powdered for use. The 
chief practical difficulty in the process results from the great com- 
parative bulk of the magnesia, and the very small quantity of the 
fused mass with which it is to be incorporated. A portion of the 
magnesia is almost unavoidably left uncombined, and the salt is, 
consequently, not neutral. This uncombined magnesia should be 
dusted off the mass before powdering it. Care must be taken to 
avoid a high temperature, which renders the salt less soluble. 

M. E. Pobiquet suggests the following formula and manipula- 
tion : — 

Take of Citric acid 35| parts. 

Carbonate of magnesium 21^ parts. 

Boiling water 10 £ parts. 

Powder the citric acid and dissolve it in the boiling water. 
"When the solution is cold and before it crystallizes, pour it into a 
wide earthen vessel, and by means of a sieve distribute the carbon- 
ate of magnesium evenly and rapidly over its surface without 
stirring ; the reaction takes place slowly ; when it ceases, beat the 
mixture rapidly so long as it retains its pasty consistence. 

According to this authority the elevation of temperature occur- 
ring during this process is due to a change in the molecular condi- 
tion by which the salt becomes insoluble ; for this reason he 
recommends that the dish should be placed in a vessel of cold water, 
and that the salt should be dried at a temperature not exceeding 
70° Fahr. 

By a modification recently proposed the citric acid and magnesia 
are triturated together into a powder, and laid away to combine 
gradually under the influence of atmospheric moisture ; I have 
found this process to yield a slowly soluble salt. 

The citrate prepared by these several processes is slowly soluble 
when first made ; it becomes less readily soluble by keeping, and is 
liable to run into masses which are hard and unmanageable. 

The granular powder made in Paris and London, and sold as 
citrate of magnesia, is composed as follows, according to X. 
Landerer : — 

Take of Bicarbonate of sodium 360 grains. 

Citric acid 20 grains. 

Tartaric acid 300 grains. 

Sulphate of magnesium 72 grains. 

Oil of lemon 5 grains. 



EFFERVESCENT MAGNESIA. 219 

The tartaric acid and bicarbonate of sodium are heated in a por- 
celain dish just to fusion, allowed to cool, and then mixed with, the 
other ingredients. 

It will be seen that this preparation is very incorrectly named, 
as are most ot those sold under similar designations. 

The prepared citrate of magnesium, of Charles Ellis, Son & Co., is 
made from the salt as prepared by fusion, combined so as to furnish 
an effervescmo; draught, which though not clear contains the un- 
dissolved portion so nicely suspended as to be taken without incon- 
venience. The recipe is as follows : — 

Take of Powdered citrate of magnesium 3iv. 

Powdered sugar I§viij. 

Powdered citric acid ^iiss. 

Powdered bicarbonate of sodium . ^iij. 

Oil of lemon vc\k. 

Combine the acid and sugar and rub into a fine powder; dry all 
the water of crystallization from the acid over a water-bath. Add 
the citrate of magnesium and oil of lemon, and mix intimately; 
then add the bicarbonate of sodium and triturate the whole into a 
fine powder, which must be preserved in a bottle properly excluded 
from the air. The dose for an adult is from one to three table- 
spoonfuls mixed in a tumbler of water and drank in a state of 
effervescence. 

Moxon's Effervescent Magnesia. 

The following, from Gray's Supplement, is for a popular though 
rather disagreeable aperient : — 

Take of Carbonate of magnesium ■ • oj- 

Sulphate of magnesium ,|ij. 

Tartrate of potassium and sodium gij. 

Bicarbonate of sodium ,§ij. 

Tartaric acid fij. 

To be perfectly freed from the water of crystallization, and mixed 
and kept in a well-corked bottle. 

Dose, from a teaspoonful to a tablespoonful dissolved in water 
and drank immediately. 

Acetate of Magnesium. — This is very deliquescent and difficult to 
crystallize; in the dry state it is generally found as a gummy mass. 
It has been proposed as a substitute for citrate of magnesium. 
Renault recommends to dissolve 120 parts of carbonate of mag- 
nesium in acetic acid and evaporate to 300 parts, which solution, 
when wanted for use, is to be mixed with three times its weight 
of orange or some other agreeable syrup. It is more agreeable if, 
like citrate of magnesium, it contains a quantity of free carbonic 
acid. 

Garrot recommended a syrup of acetate of magnesium, prepared by 
dissolving 10 parts calcined magnesia in 50 parts acetic acid, and 
adding 150 parts of some agreeable fruit syrup. Of similar compo- 
sition is the elixir of acetate of magnesium, prepared by dissolving 



220 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

10 parts calc. magnesia in 40 parts acetic acid, and adding 40 parts 
alcohol and 70 of an aromatic syrup. 

Magnesii Sidphuretum. — If a boiling solution of sulphate of mag- 
nesium is mixed with a concentrated solution of sulphuret of potas- 
sium, a white gelatinous mass is precipitated, which, on account of 
its weaker taste and smell, and milder action, has been recommeuded 
for internal use, instead of the true sulphurets of magnesium. Its 
dose is 5 to 10 grains for children; it operates slightly as a laxative. 

Magnesii et Potassii Borotartras. — 100 parts of borotartrate of 
potassium, 24 parts carbonate of magnesium, and 600 parts of 
water are to be gradually mixed and evaporated. Dissolved with 
citric acid it has been recommended as a purgative, for which pur- 
pose G-arrot has proposed the following proportions : borotartrate 
of magnesium and potassium 3j> citric acid 3 SS > lemon syrup ,lij, 
water ix. 

4th Group. — Of Earths — Salts containing Aluminium. 

Alumen (ammonia-alum), 2NH 4 ,S0 4 -f- Al 3 3S0 4 -j- 24Aq. From sulphate of ammonia, 

etc. 
Aluminii et potassii sulphas (potassa-alum), K 2 S0 4 -f-Al 4 3S0 4 -f-24Aq. Manufactured 

from alum earths. 
Alumen exsiccatum. Deprived of its water of crystallization by heat. 
Alumina, A1 2 3 ,3H 2 0. Precipitated by alkalies from alum. 

Aluminse sulphas, Al 2 3S0 4 ,9H 2 0. By dissolving alumina in HS0 4 , and crystallizing. 
Aluminii acetas, Al 2 Ac-(-H 2 0. 

Aluminium is the name of the metallic radical of the earth 
alumina, a, white, faintly bluish metal, which has recently attracted 
attention from the discovery of an economical process for its ex- 
traction; its extraordinary lightness, beauty of color, and indif- 
ference to the oxidizing influences of the atmosphere causing it to 
be recommended as fitted to displace silver, and even platinum, for 
many purposes in the arts. Experience has not, however, justified 
its early promise, and it remains among the rare metals. 

Alumina, A1 2 3 , is an earth without alkaline properties, existing 
largely in the mineral kingdom, and the chief constituent of clay. 
It may be artificially prepared from alum as follows : — 

Dissolve alum in six times its weight of boiling water, add solu- 
tion of carbonate of sodium in slight excess, agitate for a few 
minutes, filter, and wash the precipitate with distilled water; the 
product is hydrate of alumina. It may be further purified by dis- 
solving in diluted muriatic acid, precipitating with ammonia, and 
again washing with water; dried on bibulous paper, it retains three 
equivalents of combined water, but by a high heat it becomes an- 
hydrous. Pure ammonia-alum, by calcining to a white heat, be- 
comes converted into anhydrous alumina. The hydrated precipi- 
tate is freely soluble in diluted acids and in caustic potassa solution. 

Alumina is much used as a base for coloring matters, as in the 
lake pigments. In medicine it is used as an antacid and astringent, 
with which it combines the properties of an absorbent; it has been 



DRIED ALUM. 221 

used in purulent and catarrhal affections of the eye. The dose is 
Rye to twenty grains three or four times a day. 

Tests for Alumina. — Alumina is recognized by being precipitated 
white by fixed alkalies, redissolved by an excess of the same, and 
reprecipitated by chloride of ammonium. Compounds of alumina, 
ignited upon charcoal before the blowpipe, and then moistened 
with a little protonitrate of cobalt and ignited again, yield an 
unfused mass of a deep sky blue color. 

Alumen. {Alum.) Sulphate of Aluminium and Ammonium. 
Al 2 3S0 4 ,2NH 4 ,S0 4 +24Aq. 

The alum now most common is ammonia-alum, which is officinal 
under the name alumen; this is made by the use of sulphate of 
ammonium, as prepared from the residuary liquor of the gas- 
works, instead of a salt of potassium, as in the old processes, and 
its composition is as shown in the syllabus. 

This complex salt is found in commerce in large crystalline 
masses, very cheap and abundant, being largely produced for use. in 
the arts. Formerly it was produced from a peculiar ore or schist 
occurring largely in many parts of the world, and had the compo- 
sition given above as that of potash -alum. 

The properties of the two are so similar that they are seldom 
distinguished from each other. Where this is desirable, it may be 
readily accomplished by heat, which dissipates the sulphuric acid 
and ammonia from ammonia-alum, leaving pure alumina, while in 
the case of potassa-alum, potassa is a constituent of the residue, 
and will dissolve on the addition of water, and may be detected by 
its appropriate tests. Ammonia-alum will also give an odor of 
ammonia if moistened and triturated with potassa or lime. 

Alum is slightly efflorescent in dry air from the loss of a portion 
of its large amount of water of crystallization; it is soluble in 
about 15 times its weight of cold water ; it is incompatible with 
alkalies and their carbonates, and, also, with vegetable astringents. 

Its uses as an astringent, emetic, and antispasmodic are well 
known; its dose is from 2 to 10 grains, given to children for whoop- 
ing-cough; from 20 to 30 grains as an emetic in croup, repeated, if 
necessary ; and from 3ss to 3j as a purge in lead colic. As a com- 
mon astringent wash and gargle it is used in solutions of various 
proportions, from 5 to 30 grains to the ounce. 

Alumen Exsiccatum, U. S. P. (Dried Alum.) 
Take of Alum, in coarse powder, four troyounces. 

Expose it in a suitable vessel to a temperature not exceeding 
400°, until the residue weighs two troyounces and one hundred 
and twenty grains; then reduce it when cold to fine powder. 

Dried or burnt alum differs from the crystallized salt in contain- 
ing no water; 474.5 grains of the crystals should yield 258 grains 
of the anhydrous salt, which is consequently nearly doubted in 
strength. Care should be taken not to push the heat so far as to 



222 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 

drive off a portion of the sulphuric acid. Dried alum is less solu- 
ble in water than alum, but no portion of it should be wholly in- 
soluble. 

Dried alum is used exclusively as an external application, as a 
mild escharotic; it is often reduced in the process of desiccation 
almost to pure alumina, and in this dry condition is preferred by 
some physicians, being an excellent absorbent. 

Iron alum, iron and ammonia alum, chrome alum, and manganese 
alum are compounds in which the alumina is substituted by other 
bases. {See Preparations of Iron .and Manganese.) 

Aluminii Sulphas. {Sulphate of Aluminium. A1 2 3S0 4 ,9H 2 0= 504.8.) 

This salt is made officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia for 1860, 
among the preparations. It is to be made by dissolving equal parts 
of ammonium alum and carbonate of sodium in separate portions 
of boiling water, mixing them, and digesting till the evolution of 
carbonic acid ceases. The alumina thus precipitated is to be col- 
lected, washed, and dissolved in sulphuric acid somewhat diluted, 
and evaporated at a moderate heat to dryness. It is in thin flexi- 
ble plates of a pearly lustre, sweet and astringent taste, and acid 
reaction. Soluble in twice its weight of cold water, but not in 
alcohol. 

Its chief use is as an antiseptic in foul ulcers, etc. A solution of 
one pound in two pints of water is used to preserve dead bodies ; 
as a lotion it may be used in a somewhat less concentrated form. 

Under the name of benzinated solution of alumina, Mentel pro- 
posed the following preparation as a styptic, and, largely diluted 
with water, as an injection in leucorrhcea and various ulcerated 
affections: eight ounces of sulphate of aluminium are dissolved in 
sixteen ounces of water, and saturated with hydrated alumina ; 
six drachms of selected gum benzoin are digested with it for six 
hours, then cooled and filtered. It has an agreeable odor, and a 
balsamic, astringent taste. This solution contains 2A1 2 3S0 4 , and is 
precipitated by a large quantity of water, A1 2 S0 4 being separated 
while the neutral salt remains in solution. 

Aluminii Acetas. {Acetate of Aluminium. Al 2 3 Ac.) 

A solution of this salt is obtained by saturating acetic acid with 
hydrated alumina, and cannot be evaporated without the loss of 
acetic acid. It has a faint smell of acetic acid and a sweetish taste, 
and possesses antiseptic properties. 

It has been used medicinally on account of its astringent proper- 
ties, in diarrhoea and gleet in doses of a half to one drachm within 
twenty-four hours, and as an injection in various affections requir- 
ing astringent applications. 



CERIUM. 223 

5th Group. — Cerium and its Oxalate. 

Cerium. Ce = 91.3. 

This metal is associated with lanthanum and didymiurn in cerite, 
allanite, and a few other rare minerals. The most abundant of 
these is cerite, which is found in Sweden ; it contains the oxides of 
the three metals, together with silicic acid, lime, copper, bismuth, 
molybdenum, and oxide of iron. The metal is a gray powder, 
which acquires the metallic lustre by pressure, decomposes water 
slowly at ordinary temperatures, quickly at the boiling heat. It 
forms two oxides, protoxide CeO, and sesquioxide Ce 2 3 , the former 
of which enters into its medicinal salt. 

Cerii Oxalas. 2CeC 2 4 + 3H 2 0. 

To prepare this salt the mineral cerite is to be powdered and 
formed into a paste with sulphuric acid in a porcelain dish, the 
dish is then to be heated until the mass ceases to swell up, and no 
longer absorbs additional HS0 4 , which must be added cautiously. 
This mass, being now dried and powdered, is placed in a Hessian 
crucible, in which it is exposed to the heat of an anthracite fire 
until it has assumed a pale brownish-red color. It is now to be 
lixivated with hot water and subsequently with diluted nitric acid, 
and the solution treated with sulphuretted hydrogen to precipitate 
the heavy metals. Some hydrochloric acid is now added to hold in 
solution the oxalate of lime to be formed and then oxalic acid is 
added to throw down the oxalates of cerium, lanthanum, and didy- 
miurn. This precipitate is to be washed with warm water, then 
transferred to a mortar and formed into a paste with one-half the 
weight of the mineral in carbonate of magnesia, which paste is to 
be dried on a porous fire-brick, then rubbed fine and calcined in an 
open stove until the powder has assumed the color of cinnamon. 
In this condition it contains the cerium in the form of peroxide, 
which readily dissolves in concentrated nitric acid to be carefully 
arkled in a beaker, and heated by a water-bath. After freeing the 
°-)lution of some of the excess of HK0 3 by evaporation and diluting 
it with water, it is to be added to boiling water containing a little 
more than J per cent, of oil of vitriol. There should be about a 
quart of water to every ounce of the mineral worked. A yellow 
precipitate of basic sulphate of sesquioxide of cerium is formed, 
while a little of the neutral sulphate of the same oxide and all the 
lanthanium and didymiurn remain in solution. The yellow basic 
sulphate is now washed, dissolved in sulphuric acid, and then re- 
duced to a protosulphate by the addition of a few crystals of hypo- 
sulphite of sodium. The liquid is now finally precipitated by oxalic 
acid, and yields oxalate of protoxide of cerium. This is the process 
of Prof. F. F. Mayer, of New York. (See American Journal of Phar- 
macy, 1860.) 

In the Medicial Times and Gazette, Sept. 17, 1859, Prof. Simpson, 
of Edinburgh, published a description of the use of this salt as a 



224 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

remedy for obstinate vomiting in pregnancy, since which time it 
has been extensively prescribed in Europe and in the United States 
as a sedative tonic to the stomach, resembling in some degree the 
salts of bismuth, though with peculiar and, perhaps, specific applica- 
tion to the cure of obstinate vomiting, and although, of course, in 
many cases it has disappointed the expectations of practitioners, it 
has, I think, justified the claim made for it, that it will arrest 
obstinate vomiting in a greater number of cases than any other 
single remedy. The dose is from one to two grains three times a 
day in pills. 

Oxalate of cerium is a white powder, insoluble in water but solu- 
ble in HS0 4 , by which it is distinguished from the other insoluble 
oxalates of the earths. Its solution yields a precipitate with caustic 
alkalies, even in presence of chloride of ammonium, which is not 
soluble in an excess of the precipitant. A shade of pink or rose 
color indicates the presence of didymium, and perhaps few com- 
mercial specimens of the oxalate of cerium are entirely without this 
impurity. 



CHAPTER VI. 

IRON AND MANGANESE. 

Ferrum. (Iron. Fe = 56.) 

This indispensable metal is too well known to require a descrip- 
tion of its sensible properties. It has a specific gravity of 7.7; 
though not acted on by the dry atmosphere or by pure water, it is 
rapidly oxidized by water containing carbonic acid, hence the pro- 
duction of protocarbonate of iron with evolution of hydrogen ; the 
subsequent conversion of this into l^drated sesquioxide constitutes 
the ordinary phenomenon of rusting. Its purest common form is 
that of wire, or preferably card teeth. The filings (Ferri Ramenta), 
when obtained as a residuum from the manufactories, are apt to be 
contaminated with other metals. They are also liable to rust, 
which is objectionable in some instances. 

The salts of iron used in medicine are numerous, including salts 
of the protoxide, of the sesquioxide-, and of the black or magnetic 
oxide, and also halogen salts. The salts of protoxide, FeO, are now 
generally termed by chemists ferrous salts, and are accordingly 
named ferrous sulphate, ferrous carbonate, etc., while the salts of 
the peroxide (sesquioxide), Fe 2 3 , are named ferric salts, as ferric 
sulphate, ferric oxalate, etc., and the salts of the black oxide, which 
may be regarded as a compound of the proto- and sesquioxide 
(FeO,Fe 2 3 ), are named ferroso-ferric salts, and the chlorides, iodides, 
etc., follow the same rule. This rule, which gives simplicity and 
accuracy to the nomenclature of this and of the other metals, is not 



iron. 225 

yet adopted in the Pharmacopoeia, and the terms are only employed 
in this work as synonyms. 

The officinal names of the halogen and analogous compounds are 
likewise different in some instances from those adopted by modern 
chemists, for while the compounds of chlorine are called chlorides, 
those of sulphur have the termination uret ; the cyanogen com- 
pounds, formerly terminated in the same way, are in the recent 
edition called cyanides and ferrocyanides. 

Iron is conveniently recognized in its protosalts (ferrous salts) by 
the following tests. They have a pale-green color in solution, 
potassa and soda throw down a white hydrate, which changes by 
exposure to the air to gray, green, bluish-black, and then to the red 
sesquioxide. Alkaline carbonates affect them similarly. They are 
not precipitated by sulphuretted hydrogen, as many metallic salts 
are, but give a black precipitate with alkaline sulphurets. They 
give a nearly white precipitate when free from sesquisalts, with 
ferrocyanide of potassium ; by exposure this becomes blue ; by fer- 
ridcyanide an intense blue is immediately produced. Tannic acid 
only blackens these salts when they contain sesquisalts. 

The sesquisalts of iron (ferric salts) have generally a yellowish- 
brown tint, but by dissolving an excess of ferric oxide become 
brownish-red. Alkalies and alkaline carbonates throw down a 
red-brown precipitate of hydrated sesquioxide ; sulphuretted hy- 
drogen converts them into protosalts with precipitation of sulphur ; 
ferrocyanide of potassium throws down Prussian blue, but the fer- 
ridcyanide has no effect, except upon protosalts. Tannic acid pro- 
duces a bluish-black precipitate, the basis of common black ink ; in 
the presence of some vegetable acids no precipitate occurs with 
alkalies, and no blackening with tannic acid if the acid is in excess. 

Perhaps no class of remedies, certainly none derived from the 
mineral kingdom, are so universally esteemed for tonic and astrin- 
gent properties as the salts of iron, and accordingly pharmacists 
have expended much ingenuity and skill in improving their quality 
and extending their number, till they have become leading articles 
of materia medica, while some of them, by being formed into solu- 
tions, tinctures, wines, syrups, and elixirs, are rendered unusually 
eligible for common use. 

In presenting the numerous preparations of iron used in medicine 
in the form of syllabi and in detail, various methods of classifying 
them have suggested themselves, but none which seemed to offer 
sufficient advantages to compensate for the increased complexity 
necessarily given to the subject by the attempt. The natural divi- 
sion into oxy-salts and the halogen compounds seemed the only one 
which could be profitably introduced, and I have accordingly 
grouped the fifty-six preparations which follow under these two 
heads, consulting convenience and their natural relations to each 
other in the subordinate arrangement. 
15 



226 



IRON AND MANGANESE 



Syllabus of Preparations of Iron. 

(See Second Group — Halogen Compounds.) 

1st G-roup. — Oxy salts and Preparations from them. 



Name. 


Composition, etc. 


Dose. 


Description, etc. 


Ferri Sulphas 


FeS0 4 +7Aq 

FeS0 4 ,Aq 

FeC0 3 -f Fe,0 3 ,2Aq 

f FeC0 3 -f-Meland 1 

\ sacchar. j 

FeC0 3 in 3isa 

Fe 

Fe 2 3S0 4 in Aq 

Excess of Fe 2 0„ 

Fe 2 6HO 


gr. v 

gr- iij 
gr. x to 9j 

gr. x to 9j 

3 iss 

gr.j to gr.ij 


Green crystals. 
Whitish powder. 
Reddish-brown powder. 

Dark pilular mass. 

Granulated powder. 
Gray impalpable powder. 
Red- brown, sp. gr. 132. 
Ruby-red, sp. gr. l.£52. 
Reddish-brown magma. 
Colorless octohedrons. 


Ferri Sulphas Exsiccata 


Pilulse Ferri Carbonatis 

Ferri Carb. Effervescentes.... 
Ferrum Redactum 


Liquor Ferri Tersulphatis... 
Liquor Ferri Subsulphatis .. 
Ferri Oxidum Hydratum.... 

Ferri et Quinise Sulphas 

Ferri et Ammonii Sulphas... 




f 3 j to f§ss 
gr. j to iv 
gr. iij to vj 


(Fe 4 3S0 4 (NH 4 ) 2 l 

1 S0 4 -f 24H 2 / 

3JFe 2 3 Ciinf5ij 

Fe 2 3 Ci 

Fe 2 3 ,NH 4 0,Ci 

gr. j in 6 grs. 

gr. j about in 100 grs. 


Violet tinted crystals. 

Red syrupy liquid. 
Garnet- red scales. 


Ferri Citras 


gr. iij to v 
gr. iij to v 
gr. iij to v 
gr. j to iij 
gr. j to iij 
gr. iij to xij 
VCl xx to f5j 
UL xx to f£j 
gr. v to x 

f3J 
f3J 

f3J 
gr. v 

f3J 


Ferri et Ammonii Citras 

Ferri et Quinise Citras 

Ferri et Strychniee Citras... 
Ferri et Zinci Citras 


Greenish-brown scales. 
Garnet-red scales. 
Brownish-green scales. 
Greenish-yellow scales. 
Citrate of magnetic oxide. 
Citrate of protoxide. 
Slate-colored powder. 
With excess of P0 5 . 

(Jos. Roberts'.) 

Red. "Chemical food." 
f Apple-green scales, 
I soluble. 
No ferruginous taste. 

i Not found in commerce. 


Ferri et Magnesii Citras 




3J t0 f 5J 

Si t0 *8 

Variable 

gr. v to f5j syrup 

r gr- ivss to f^j-f- j 

\ gr. iijss H 3 P0 4 / 

Complex 

f 2Fe 2 3 H 3 P0 4 + -1 

I 2NH 4 Ci+ H 2 / 

gr. ij to f3j 

Fe2HP0 2 

Fe 2 3 3HP0 2 

gr. j to 3j syrup 

Complex 

FeL? 

Fe 2 Ac? 

11.43 percent. Fe 2 Ac 

contains acetic ether 


Syr. Ferri Frotocitratis 


Syr. Ferri Superphosphatis ... 
Syr. Ferri et Amman. Phospli. 
Syr. Ferri et Calcii. Phosph... 


Syr. Ferri Pyrophosphatis ... 

Ferri Hypophosphis (Proto). 

" " (Sesqui). 

Syr. Ferri Hypophosphitis ... 

" " " Comp. 

it a n (« 


m 

f3J 
gr. ij to v 


Used in phthisis. 
(Thompson.) 
(Procter.) 
Greenish-white grains. 




Only in solution. 




Sp. gr. 1.143. 
Agreeable. 
(Rademacher.) 
Black, insoluble. 


Tr. Ferri Acetat. ^Fthereus ... 


f3ss 
f^ss to f3J 

gr. x 
gf. j to ij 
gr. x to xx 

i i 

TTl V to XV 
Tl\ v to XV 

TT^ V tO X 


Ferri Tannas 


Fe 2 fan 

Fe 2 3Va" 

KFeT+Aq 

NH 4 Fe 2 T-fAq 

Fef ? 
Fe 2 6N0 3 +Aq 
FeN0 3 in Syr. 
Fe 2 HC10 4 in Aq 




Dark-red, amorphous. 


Ferri et Potassii Tartras 

Ferri et Ammonii Tartras ... 


Reddish-brown scales. 
<« «< 

Crystals or powder. 

Sp. gr. 1.0C, pale amber. 


Liq Ferri Nitratis 


Syr. Ferri Protonilratis 

Liq. Ferri Hyper chloratis .... 



GRANULATED SULPHATE OF IRON. 227 

Ferri Sulphas. {Ferrous Sulphate, Copperas, Green Vitriol. 
FeS0 4 + 7Aq = 278.) 

Prepared by dissolving iron wire in diluted sulphuric acid. One 
eq. of iron, decomposing one of water, combines with its oxygen, 
and forms protoxide, which last unites with one eq. of sulphuric 
acid to form sulphate of protoxide of iron, Fe -f H 2 4- S0 3 = 
FeS0 4 + H 2 . The hydrogen is liberated in a gaseous form, and 
may be collected for experiment. Green vitriol, or copperas of 
commerce, which is used in the arts, is an impure sulphate, con- 
taining peroxide; it is prepared from the native sulphuret, and may 
be purified by digestion with iron and recrystallization. 

"When pure, sulphate of iron is in light bluish-green rhomboidal 
prisms, having an astringent, styptic taste. It dissolves in about 
one and a half times its weight of cold water; is insoluble in alco- 
hol; when exposed to air and moisture it oxidizes, and becomes 
covered with a brownish-yellow persalt. It effloresces in dry air, 
becoming white on the surface. 

The presence of copper may be detected by placing a clean polished 
spatula in the solution; if copper is present, it will be precipitated 
with its characteristic color on the surface of the iron. 

Ferri Sulphas Exsiccata. — Owing to the large amount of water in 
these crystals, the salt is inconvenient to dispense, in combination 
with vegetable substances, in the form of powder or pill ; and hence, 
in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, is directed to be exposed to a heat in- 
creased to 300°, till it ceases to lose weight, and is converted into 
a dry whitish mass, which is to be reduced to powder. By this it 
loses six equivalents of water, and is consequently much stronger 
than the crystallized salt (Fe,S0 4 + 7Aq = 278—108 = 170). 

In addition to the "haematic" virtues common to the iron salts, 
sulphate is decidedly astringent. It is prescribed internally in cases 
attended with immoderate discharges, and is also used in injections, 
though less frequently than sulphates of zinc and copper. Dose, in 
crystals, five grains; dried, three grains. 

This is one of the cheapest and best of disinfectants, especially 
when mixed with lime, which, by neutralizing a portion of the 
sulphuric acid, liberates the oxide of iron, and this, by its affinity 
for additional oxygen, destroys effete matter. 

Ferri Sulphas Granulata, Ph. Br. {Granulated Sulphate of Iron.) 

Take of Iron wire 4 ounces (avoirdupois). 

Sulphuric acid 4 fluidounces (imp. meas.). 

Distilled water 1 pint and a half (imp. meas.). 

Kectified spirit 8 fluidounces (imp. meas.). 

Pour the water on the iron placed in a porcelain capsule, add the 
sulphuric acid, and, when the disengagement of gas has nearly 
ceased, boil for ten minutes, and then filter the solution into a jar 
containing the spirit, stirring the mixture so that the salt shall 
separate into minute granular crystals. Let these, deprived by 
decantation of adhering liquid, be transferred on filtering paper to 
porous tiles, and dried by exposure to the atmosphere. They should 



228 IRON" AND MANGANESE. 

be kept in closed Lotties. Its chemical composition is the same as 
the last described salt. 

Ferri Subcarbonas. (Precipitated Carbonate of Iron.) 

Made by decomposing sulphate of iron by means of an alkaline 
carbonate, as the carbonate of sodium. The sulphuric acid unites 
with the soda to form sulphate of sodium, which remains in solu- 
tion, while the carbonic acid unites with protoxide of iron to form 
protocarbonate of iron, which precipitates. When first formed, it 
is a bulky greenish, almost white, precipitate, which may be converted, 
by admixture with honey and sugar, into Vallette's mass; but when 
dried in air, it becomes much darker, and finally brown, from more 
or less conversion into the sesquioxide and loss of carbonic acid. 
If the drying is carried on at a temperature not exceeding 80° F., 
this change is only partial, and the preparation effervesces when 
thrown into acids, and has a brown color. This is a much more 
soluble form, and to be preferred to the bright red-colored powder 
obtained by heating. 

It should be wholly dissolved by dilute muriatic acid with slight 
effervescence, forming a solution from which the oxides of iron are 
completely precipitated by an excess of ammonia; the liquid re- 
maining should not be colored by hydrosulphuric acid or ferro- 
cyanide of potassium. 

The subcarbonate of iron is one of the most popular of the chaly- 
beate salts. It has, to a less extent, the medical properties attri- 
buted to iron reduced by hydrogen, with a more agreeable effect 
from swallowing it. The carbonate is not astringent, and produces 
little or no action upon the mucous membranes of the alimentary 
canal. Dose, gr. v. to 9j. 

Pilulaz Ferri Carbonatis, IT. S. P. ( Vallette's Mass.) 

Take of Sulphate of iron Eight troy ounces. 

Carbonate of sodium Nine troyounces. 

Clarified honey Three troyounces 

Sugar, in coarse powder Two troyounces. 

Boiling water Two pints. 

Syrup A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the salts separately, each in a pint of the water, a fluid- 
ounce of syrup having been previously added to each pint. Mix 
the two solutions, when cold, in a bottle just large enough to hold 
them, close it accurately with a stopper, and set it by that the car- 
bonate of iron may subside. Pour off the supernatant Hquid, and, 
having mixed water, recently boiled, with syrup in the proportion 
of a pint to the fluidounce, wash the precipitate with the mixture 
until the washings no longer have a saline taste. Place the pre- 
cipitate on a flannel cloth to drain, and having expressed as much 
of the water as possible, mix it immediately with the clarified 
honey and sugar. Lastly, by means of a water-bath, evaporate the 
mixture, constantly stirring, until it is brought to the weight of 
eight troyounces. 

This valuable preparation is made by nearly the same process as 



IRON BY HYDROGEN — QUEVENNE'S IRON. 229 

the foregoing, except that the bulky greenish precipitate thrown 
down by the carbonated alkali, instead of being dried in contact 
with the air, is mixed with a suitable proportion of saccharine in- 
gredients, to protect it from contact with atmospheric oxygen and 
to embody it in a pilular mass; it is well adapted to use as a vehicle 
for tonics, especially dry powders, in the form of pill. Much that 
is met with in commerce is too soft even for this use; when desired 
of firmer consistence it will be found advantageous to use three 
troyounces of sugar and two of honey ; made strictly by the officinal 
directions it will be found a convenient pilular mass, though be- 
coming softer by exposure. 

The dose is ten grains to a scruple. 

Syrupus Ferri Protocarbonatis. 

The formula given under this head in the late edition of this 
work was extracted from the journals without having been suffi- 
ciently tried. Subsequent experience has proved that it is too im- 
perfect to justify its republication, and the efforts made to improve 
it have not as yet been successful in producing a permanent syrup, 
containing a sufficient proportion of the ferruginous salt to be avail- 
able. A good formula for a liquid preparation of the protocarbon- 
ate of iron is still one of the pharmaceutical desiderata. 

Effervescing Carbonate of Iron* 

Take of Tartaric acid 3 troyounces. 

Bicarbonate of sodium 5 

Sulphate of iron 10 drachms. 

Powdered white sugar 14 " 

Citric acid 2 " 

Mix the sulphate of iron with the sugar and part of the tartaric 
acid. Mix the citric acid with the remainder of the tartaric acid 
and bicarbonate. Stir the two mixtures together and thoroughly 
unite them by sifting ; then put the whole into an open metallic 
vessel, in a water-bath, and stir until it is well granulated. These 
proportions are designed to furnish four grains of protocarbonate 
of iron in every drachm and a half (teaspoonful) of the powder, 
which must be kept dry in a well-stopped bottle, and will furnish 
an elegant chalybeate preparation, adapted to being dissolved in a 
glass of water and taken during the effervescence produced. 

Ferrum Redactum. Fe = 56. {Ferri Pulvis, U. S. P. 1850. Iron 
by Hydrogen — Quevenne's Iron.) 

Prepared by passing a stream of hydrogen over the washed and 
calcined subcarbonate (dry sesquioxide) contained in a wrought iron 
reduction tube of four inches in diameter heated to low redness, 
continuing the now of hydrogen till vapor of water is no longer 

* The above formula is that of Dr. T. Skinner, as published in the London Chemist 
and Druggist, Nov. 1861. See also formula of Prof. J. M. Maisch, Proc. of Am. Ph. 
Assoc. 1856, p. 55. 



230 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

given off and till the reduction tube has cooled ; the oxygen of the 
oxide combines with hydrogen, forming water, and leaves the metal 
in soft masses of impalpable iron, which, on trituration, yield the 
Quevenne's iron of commerce. 

It is an impalpable powder, of a steel-gray color, soluble in sul- 
phuric acid diluted with 60 parts of water, with rapid evolution of 
hydrogen which should not be contaminated with sulphur. It 
oxidizes when exposed to damp air, and should be kept in closely- 
stopped bottles. It is usually contaminated with a little carburet, 
black oxide, and occasionally sulphuret of iron. These impurities 
give it a dull black color. When well prepared, it will burn on 
the application of a lighted taper ; and a small portion of it, struck 
on an anvil with a hammer, forms a scale having a brilliant metallic 
lustre. 

Reduced iron possesses in a high degree the property of restoring 
to the blood this essential ingredient, when it is deficient. From 
its extreme fineness, it is readily soluble in the stomach, and the 
chief objection to its use is that occasionally it produces eructations 
of hydrogen; or, if it contains sulphuret or carburet of iron, sul- 
phuretted or carburetted hydrogen is evolved. 

This, like other iron preparations, is apt to produce astringent 
effects, though less so than the persalts ; hence the occasional use 
of mild purgatives during its administration. It also blackens the 
stools. It is usually given in the dose of one or two grains three 
times a day. Given in lozenges, made with chocolate, its taste is 
pretty well disguised. In pills it is either combined with the tonic 
extracts or given alone. 

Liquor Ferri Tersulphatis, U. S. P. (Solution of Tersulphate of Iron.) 

Take of Sulphate of iron, in coarse powder, twelve troy ounces. 
Sulphuric acid, two troyounces and sixty grains. 
JSTitric acid, a troyounce and three hundred and sixty grains. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acids with half a pint of water in a capacious porcelain 
capsule, and, having heated the mixture to the boiling point, add 
the sulphate of iron, one-fourth at a time, stirring after each addi- 
tion until effervescence ceases. Then continue the heat until the 
solution acquires a reddish-brown color, and is free from nitrous 
odor. Lastly, when the liquid is nearly cold, add sufficient water 
to make it measure a pint and a half. 

This process consists in the conversion of the sulphate of pro- 
toxide of iron, Fe,S0 4 -4- 7Aq, into the tersulphate of sesquioxicle, 
Fe 2 3S0 4 , which is in solution in the preparation when finished. 
The addition of nitric acid to a salt of an oxide having so great a 
tendency to pass into a higher state of oxidation effectually changes 
its composition, and the additional sulphuric acid added is for the 
complete saturation of the resulting sesquioxide. 

In MonseFs solution which follows, the proportions are varied so 
as to secure an excess of sesquioxide, and a less caustic and acid 
solution. 



PERSULPHATE OF IROX. 231 

This preparation is made officinal chiefly for the extemporaneous 
preparation of the hydrated sesquioxide of iron, and for use in 
effecting the formation of other sesqui-salts of iron by double de- 
composition. 

It is a light reddish-brown liquid, nearly devoid of odor, and of 
an acid and extremely styptic taste. Its specific gravity is 1.320. 
It mixes with water and with alcohol in all proportions without 
decomposition. A fluidounce of it should yield, on the addition 
of ammonia in excess, a bulky reddish-brown precipitate, which is 
free from black discoloration, and which, when washed, dried, and 
ignited, weighs sixty-nine grains. 

Liquor Ferri Subsulphatis, U. S. P. (MonseVs Solution.) 

Take of Sulphate of iron, in coarse powder, twelve troyounces. 
Sulphuric acid, a troyounce and thirty grains. 
jSTitric acid, a troyounce and three hundred grains. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acids with half a pint of distilled water in a capacious 
porcelain capsule, and, having heated the mixture to the boiling 
point, add the sulphate of iron, one-fourth at a time, stirring after 
each addition until effervescence ceases. Then keep the solution 
in brisk ebullition until nitrous vapors are no longer perceptible, 
and the color assumes a deep ruby-red tint. Lastly, when the 
liquid is nearly cold, add sufficient distilled water to make it 
measure twelve fluidounces. 

After all that has been heretofore published on the preparation 
of Monsel's solution, this new recipe of the Pharmacopoeia of 1860 
commends itself to favor as simple, and readily practicable. It is a 
stronger solution than the solution of tersulphate of iron, and dif- 
fers from it in containing an excess of the sesquioxide, so that it is 
less irritating and produces its styptic and hemostatic effect with- 
out causing sloughing ; dentists use it as an application to spongy 
gums and bleeding surfaces, and to produce that contraction of tis- 
sues which it is often so desirable to hasten. Perhaps no applica- 
tion is so efficient to arrest hemorrhage, or so useful in treating 
bleeding from bone, from erectile tissues, or from hemorrhoids ; it 
is also used with success in the treatment of varices. 

Monsel's solution is an inodorous, syrupy liquid, of a ruby-red 
color, and of an extremely astringent taste, without causticity. Its 
specific gravity is 1.552. It mixes with water and with alcohol in 
all proportions without decomposition, and yields, with ammonia, 
a bulky reddish-brown precipitate. It is used internally in a dose 
of 5 to 10 drops for hemorrhages, and where an astringent is indi- 
cated. 

Persulphate of Iron. 2Fe 2 ,5S0 4 (?) 

The salt is so very deliquescent as to be considered ineligible for 
use in any other form than that of solution, and when dried on 
plates of glass, as the citrate of iron is obtained, it is often difficult 
to remove on account of its adhesion. It is recommended to dry it 



232 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

by artificial heat in a stove, or, by Dr. Lawrence Smith (see Am. 
Journ. Pharmacy, 1863, page 203), to concentrate the solution to 
the sp. gr. 1.60, and form it into shallow plates from one-quarter to 
one-sixteenth of an inch in depth, mixed with a little of the dry 
salt previously desiccated and powdered, and place it near escaping 
steam (as from a steam jacket) at a temperature of 75° to 100° P. 
Under these circumstances he finds the salt to become dry and pul- 
verulent with very little disposition to deliquesce. If produced in 
this way it would, undoubtedly, be much used as a direct applica- 
tion in the form of powder. It has a yellow color, and forms a 
clear solution, on standing, with water. 

Ferri Oxidum Hydratum. (Fe 2 6HO = 98.) (Uydrated Oxide of Iron. 
Ferri Sesquioxidum Hydratum. Uydrated Ferric Oxide.) 

This is made by adding ammonia in excess to the solution of ter- 
sulphate as above. The alkali neutralizes the sulphuric acid, and 
throws down the oxide of iron as a reddish-brown precipitate. 
This, if designed for use as an antidote for arsenic, is to be collected 
on a strainer, water being passed through it to dissolve out the sul- 
phate of ammonia, and then squeezed out, and the moist brown 
magma transferred to a wide-mouth bottle and kept under a stratum 
of water. In cases where poisoning has taken place, it is advisable 
not to wait until all the sulphate of ammonium has been washed 
out, as the slightly stimulating effect produced by the ammonia is 
in nowise hurtful. It has been ascertained, however, that by long 
standing, under these circumstances, the hydrated oxide loses 
wholly or in part its power of neutralizing arsenious acid, hence 
the necessity of keeping the solution of persulphate and reserving 
the addition of ammonia till the emergency requiring its use shall 
occur. As will appear in several of the recipes which follow, the 
hydrated sesquioxide comes in play in making some of the persalts 
of iron; it is also an eligible medicine for producing the usual tonic 
effect of the iron preparations, and may be dried at a temperature 
not exceeding 180° F., without losing its constitutional water; at 
a red heat it becomes anhydrous. 

Its dose in the form of magma is f 5j ; as an antidote f gss every 
five or ten minutes till a large excess has been given. Should the 
poisoning have occurred from the use of liq. potassii arsenitis, it 
will be proper to add a small quantity of dilute acetic acid to the 
first two or three doses of the antidote. 

Ferri et Quinice Sidphas. 

Take of Sulphate of iron 125 grains. 

Sulphuric acid 14 minims. 

Nitric acid 25 minims, or sufficient. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the sulphate of iron with the sulphuric acid in the water 
and boil it, adding the nitric acid gradually, till it ceases to pro- 
duce a dark color; when cold, add — 

Sulphate of quinia A troyounce, 



LIQUOR FERRI CITRATTS. 233 

in water, with sufficient sulphuric acid to form a solution ; set this 
aside that crystals may form, which may require several months. 
It is in colorless octohedrons of a strongly bitter taste, and nearly 
insoluble in water. 

The salt combines the virtues of iron and quinia, and may be 
prescribed in doses of from one to -five grains. It is stated to be 
more astringent than the citrates of these bases, and perhaps does 
not possess advantages to compensate for its great cost. 

Ferri et Ammonii Sulphas. Fe 4 ,3S0 4 -f (KH 4 )S0 4 + 24 Aq. 
(Amrnonio-ferric Alum.) 

Take of Solution of tersulphate of iron . 2 pints. 

Sulphate of ammonium .... 4 troy ounces and a half. 

Heat the solution of tersulphate of iron to the boiling point, add 
the sulphate of ammonium, stirring until it is dissolved, and set 
the liquid aside to crystallize. Wash the crystals quickly with 
very cold water, wrap them in bibulous paper, and dry them in the 
open air. (U. S. P.) 

This salt is in elegant violet-tinted crystals of a more or less octo- 
hedral form; soluble in one and a half parts of water at 60°, and in 
less than its weight of boiling water; potassa added to the solution 
gives a reddish-brown precipitate; when rubbed with potassa and 
moistened, the salt emits the odor of ammonia. Its peculiar merit 
consists in its marked astringency without the stimulating proper- 
ties of some of this class of salts. It is easily assimilated when 
taken internally. Dose, 3 to 6 grains ; while it controls excessive 
discharges, it is often useful in correcting their cause. It is, per- 
haps, more employed as an injection in leucorrhoea than for any 
other use ; the proportions prescribed for this purpose may vary 
from half an ounce to an ounce to the pint. It has a wide range 
of application, and may be applied as alum is in the form of powder 
diluted with sugar. 

Though called an alum, this salt contains no alumina; it is similar 
to the double sulphate of potassium and iron, which is called iron 
alum, though this is more soluble. 

Liquor Ferri Citratis, U. S. P. 

Take of Citric acid, in coarse powder, five troyounces and three hundred 
and sixty grains. 
Solution of tersulphate of iron, a pint. 
Water of ammonia, twenty fluidounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

To the water of ammonia, mixed with 2 pints of distilled water, 
add the solution of tersulphate of iron, previously mixed with 2 
pints of distilled water, stirring constantly; transfer the precipitate 
formed to a muslin strainer, and wash it with water until the 
washings are nearly tasteless. When the precipitate is drained, put 
half of it in a porcelain capsule on a water-bath heated to 150°, 
add the citric acid, and stir the mixture until the precipitate is 
nearly dissolved. Then add so much of the reserved precipitate as 



234 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

may be necessary fully to saturate the acid. Lastly, filter the 
liquid, and evaporate it, at a temperature not exceeding 150°, until 
it is reduced to the measure of a pint. 

The above process, which occurs under the head of Liquores in 
the Pharmacopoeia, consists in the precipitation of hydrated sesqui- 
oxide of iron, washing the magma with water, and combining it 
with an equivalent of citric acid forming a clear solution, which is 
to be evaporated to a pint for each eight troy ounces of the con- 
tained salt. This solution is convenient to keep on hand for dis- 
pensing, and for compounding the various liquid preparations con- 
taining the citrate. This salt is more soluble when freshly prepared 
than when old, and although it is slowly and imperfectly soluble 
in cold water, under ordinary circumstances, it is readily obtained 
and kept in this concentrated solution, which, being of known 
strength, may be readily diluted to the point desired. 

Ferri Citras. Fe 2 Ci=322. {Citrate of Sesquioxide of Iron. 
Ferric Citrate.) 

Of the several citrates of iron, the acid citrate of the sesquioxide 
is most commonly used. It is made by evaporating the officinal 
solution as above, to the consistence of a syrup, and spreading it 
on glass or porcelain plates, where it speedily dries in thin layers, 
which are separated and broken into fragments. If evaporated at 
too high a temperature, it is apt to become adhesive, and cannot 
be separated in scales. 

It is in beautiful garnet-red colored plates, slightly soluble in 
cold water, readily in boiling, and has an acid ferruginous taste. 
Dose, gr. iij to v. 

Ferri et Ammonii Citras. (Citrate of Iron and Ammonium.) 

Take of Solution of citrate of iron, a pint. 
Water of ammonia, six fluidounces. 

Mix the solution of citrate of iron with the water of ammonia, 
evaporate the mixture at a temperature not exceeding 150° to the 
consistence of syrup, and spread it on plates of glass so that in dry- 
ing the salt may be obtained in scales. ( U. S. P.) 

This salt differs but little from the foregoing ; the presence in it 
of a notable proportion of citrate of ammonium renders it more 
soluble than the acid citrate ; it is in garnet-red translucent scales ; 
it does not change the color of litmus or turmeric, and does not 
yield a precipitate with ferrocyanide of potassium. It may be dis- 
tinguished from the acid citrate by giving off ammonia on the 
addition of solution of potassa; they both throw down hydrated 
sesquioxide of iron on this addition. 

Ferri et Quinice Citras. (Citrate of Iron and Quinia.) 

Take of Solution of citrate of iron, ten fluidounces. 
Sulphate of quinia, a troyounce. 
Diluted sulphuric acid, 
Water of ammonia, 
Distilled water, each, a sufficient quantity. 



CITRATE OF IRON AND STRYCHNIA. 235 

Triturate the sulphate of quinia with six fluidounces of distilled 
water, and, having added sufficient diluted sulphuric acid to dis- 
solve it, cautiously pour into the solution water of ammonia, with 
constant stirring, until in slight excess. Wash the precipitated 
quinia on a filter, and, having added it to the solution of citrate of 
iron, maintained at the temperature of 120° hy means of a water- 
bath, stir constantly until it is dissolved. Lastly, evaporate the 
solution to the consistence of syrup, and spread it on plates of glass, 
so that, on drying, the salt may be obtained in scales. (U. S. P.) 

In this very simple and practicable formula sulphate of quinia 
is directed to be dissolved by the aid of sulphuric acid, and the 
organic alkali is then precipitated from it by ammonia; this is then 
combined with the excess of citric acid in the acid citrate of iron, 
and the mixed salt dried in scales in the usual way. 

This very popular preparation, as met with in commerce, is of 
uncertain strength, partly in consequence of there having been, 
until the publication of the recent edition of the Pharmacopoeia, no 
authoritative formula for its preparation; the composition of the 
officinal article, founded on the relative doses of its two principal 
ingredients, is five grains of citrate of iron to one of citrate of 
quinia. It has the bitter taste of the quinia, and is best adapted 
to use in the form of pill. 

It is in thin transparent scales, varying in color from reddish- 
brown to yellowish-brown, with a tint of green, according to the 
thickness of the scales. It is slowly soluble in cold water, more 
readily so in hot water, but insoluble in ether and officinal alcohol. 
Ammonia, added to the aqueous solution, deepens its color to 
reddish-brown, and causes a whitish curdy precipitate of quinia, 
but no sesquioxide of iron is thrown down. The dose is gr. ij to gr. v. 

Ferri et Strychnice Citras. {Citrate of Iron and Strychnia.) U. S. P. 

Take of Citrate of iron and ammonium, five hundred grains. 
Strychnia. 

Citric acid, each, five grains. 
Distilled water, nine fluidrachms. 

Dissolve the citrate of iron and ammonium in a fluidounce, and 
the strychnia and citric acid in a fluidrachm, of the water. Mix 
the two solutions, evaporate the mixture by means of a water-bath 
at a temperature not exceeding 140°, to the consistence of syrup, 
and spread upon plates of glass, so that the salt, when it is dry, 
may be obtained in scales. 

The proportion suggested by Prof. Procter, as giving a suitable 
dose of the strychnia with the dose of iron salt usually prescribed, 
was 1 grain in 49 of the salt. C. A. Heinitsh, of Lancaster, Pa., 
and Jos. Abel, of Pittsburg, Pa., have since recommended a prepa- 
ration of about half the proportion of strychnia, 1 part to 100 of 
citrate of iron, which has been adopted in the TJ. S. Pharmacopoeia 
as above. Used in atonic dyspepsia, chorea, and suppressed men- 
struation. Dose, 3 to 6 grains. 



236 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

Ferri et Zinci Citras. 

If carbonate of zinc is added to a solution of citric acid, it be- 
gins to precipitate an insoluble salt before the point of saturation 
is attained; this precipitate being collected before it contains an 
excess of carbonate, and ammonia and citrate of iron added, a 
dark green solution is formed, which, concentrated and dried on 
glass, gives brownish-green scales, very soluble in water. The 
quantity of citrate of iron may be varied from the equivalent pro- 
portions, to four parts of citrate of iron and one of citrate of zinc, 
with a similar product. The latter proportion exists in the " mo- 
dified wine of iron," of which a formula is given under the appro- 
priate head. 

Dose of the double citrate, 1 to 3 grains. 

Ferri et Magnesii Citras. 

It appears in greenish-yellow scales, which are obtained by dis- 
solving freshly-precipitated sesquioxide of iron in citric acid, 
saturating with carbonate of magnesium, and evaporating. 

It has a sweetish, slightly ferruginous taste, and is soluble in 
water. It is used in some cases as a mild chalybeate, which is 
easily assimilated, and is given in doses of from three to twelve 
grains. 

Syrupus Ferri Citratis. {Syrup of Citrate of Magnetic Oxide of Iron.) 

Take of Citric acid £v. 

Sulphate of iron lj. 

Water, 

Solution of ammonia, of each Sufficient. 

Sugar Iviij. 

By the process given for liquor ferri tersulphatis, convert one- 
half of the sulphate of iron into sulphate of the sesquioxide ; mix 
this in solution with the remaining ^ss of the sulphate, and add the 
solution of ammonia until it ceases to throw down a precipitate of 
the black or magnetic oxide. Having collected and washed this, 
add it to the citric acid, dissolved in f^j of water, heat to about 
150° F. and filter; dilute the filtered liquid with water to make 
f^v; in this dissolve the sugar, and a clear dark-colored syrup will 
be the result. 

This contains 3j of the salt to f^j (by calculation), and is a very 
eligible preparation in the dose of ^ixx to f 5j. 

Syrupus Ferri Protocitratis. {Syrup of the Proto-Citrate of Iron.) 

Take of Sulphate of iron giijss. 

Carbonate of sodium 3iv. 

Sugar, 

Water, of each Sufficient. 

Citric acid ^ss. 

Simple syrup f ^iv. 

Dissolve the sulphate of iron and carbonate of sodium in equal 
portions of water, and add the one to the other in a beaker or pre- 



COMMON PHOSPHATE OF IRON. 237 

cipitating glass. "Wash the precipitated protocarbonate of iron with 
water, in which a small portion of sugar has been dissolved, and 
add it to a concentrated solution of the citric acid ; evaporate to a 
greenish, deliquescent mass, and dissolve in the syrup. This is a 
greenish-brown liquid, containing nearly 3j of the salt to f *j. Dose, 
n^xxx to f3j. It is liable to deposit the salt by long keeping. 

The syrup of citrate of iron of Beral is a saccharine solution of 
the citrate of ammonium and sesquioxide of iron. 

Ferri Oxalas. {Oxalate of Iron, XL S. P. FeOx.) 

Take of Sulphate of iron . . . Two troyounces. 

Oxalic acid .... Four hundred and thirt}'-six grains. 
Distilled water ... A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the sulphate of iron in thirty fiuidounces and the oxalic 
acid in fifteen fiuidounces of distilled water. Filter the solutions, 
and having mixed them with agitation, set aside the mixture until 
the precipitate is deposited. Decant the clear liquid, wash the pre- 
cipitate until the washings cease to redden litmus, and dry it with 
a gentle heat. 

A lemon-yellow crystalline powder, insoluble in water but soluble 
in muriatic acid. Heated in contact with the air, it decomposes 
with a faint combustion, and leaves a residue of not less than forty- 
eight per cent, of red oxide of iron. This salt of iron is but slightly 
soluble and has but little disposition to change ; it possesses the 
tonic properties of the iron salts but not their astringency, and is 
given in doses of two or three grains three times a day. (See Am. 
Journ. Pharm. 1868, 77-111.) 

Ferri Phosphas. {Common Phosphate of Iron.) 

The officinal phosphate of iron is formed by double decomposition 
between solutions of two equivalents of sulphate of protoxide of 
iron and one equivalent of phosphate of sodium. Its composition 
as thus prepared is variable, being a mixture of phosphate of pro- 
toxide of iron, and phosphate of sesquioxide in different proportions. 
"Witts tein gives a very full account of it, with specific directions 
for its preparation. As first precipitated it is white, and is then 
stated to be nearly pure phosphate of protoxide, 2Fe,H,P0 4 ; the 
reaction is thus represented, 2(Fe,S0 4 ) + 2Na,H,P0 4 = 2Fe,H,P0 4 + 
2(^a,S0 4 ); the soluble sulphate of sodium being washed away and 
tbe salt dried, it is found to have acquired a slate color, more or 
less green, the protoxide of iron having become partially changed, 
as before stated, into sesquioxide, and combined with phosphoric 
acid. It is soluble in acids like phosphate of lime, but not in water. 

Phosphate of iron has long been in use in medicine for the general 
purposes to which the ferruginous salts are applicable, though until 
the recent introduction of several preparations containing it in solu- 
tion, it has been little known to practitioners. Dose, gr. v to x. 

Phosphate of sesquioxide of iron, Fe 2 3P 2 4 = 9H 2 0, is the white pre- 
cipitate occasioned by phosphate of sodium in sesqui salts of iron ; 



238 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

it has been used in medicine in cases like the foregoing, and in 
similar doses. (See Phosphate of Iron.) 

Syrup of Superphosphate of Iron. 

This syrup is prepared by adding freshly precipitated phosphate 
of iron to saturation in a boiling solution of glacial phosphoric acid. 
On concentrating and cooling, it congeals into a soft mass, which is 
freely soluble in water in all proportions, and free from inky taste. 

The syrup is made from this, by dissolving five grains in each 
fiuidrachm of simple syrup. Dose, a nuidrachm or less. 

Syrup of Phosphate of Iron and Ammonium. (Joseph Roberts^ 

Take of Sulphate of iron 278 grains. 

Phosphate of sodium 359 grains. 

Glacial phosphoric acid 396 grains. 

Liquor ammonia? Sufficient. 

Sugar 5^ ounces. 

Water Sufficient. 

Dissolve the phosphate of sodium and the sulphate of iron sepa- 
rately. Mix the solutions, and wash the resulting precipitate of 
phosphate of iron. Then to one-half the phosphoric acid dissolved 
in one ounce of water, add water of ammonia until it is saturated. 
To the other half of the phosphoric acid dissolved in a like quantity 
of water, add the moist phosphate of iron and dissolve by a gentle 
heat, then add the solution of phosphate of ammonium and the 
sugar, and evaporate to seven nuidounces. This preparation con- 
tains 4J grains of phosphate of iron, 4f grains of phosphate of am- 
monium, and 3 J grains of phosphoric acid, to a nuidrachm or 
teaspoonful. 

It is remarkable for holding the ferruginous phosphate perma- 
nently in perfect solution. The dose is a teaspoonful or less. 

Parrish's Compound Syrup of Phosphates. 

Take of Protosulphate of iron gx. 

Phosphate of sodium 3xij. 

Phosphate of calcium ........ ^xij. 

Phosphoric acid, glacial 3xx. 

Carbonate of sodium §ij. 

Carbonate of potassium 3j. 

Muriatic acid, 

Water of ammonia, of each Sufficient. 

Powdered cochineal ,5ij. 

Water Sufficient. 

Sugar fltij ^viij, offic. 

Orange-flower water f 5j. 

Dissolve the sulphate of iron in f^ij of boiling water, and the 
phosphate of sodium in f 3iv of boiling water. Mix the solutions, 
and wash the precipitated phosphate of iron till the washings are 
tasteless. Dissolve the phosphate of calcium in four nuidounces of 
boiling water with sufficient muriatic acid to make a clear solution; 
when cool precipitate it with water of ammonia, and wash the 
precipitate. 



COMPOUND SYRUP OF PHOSPHATES. 239 

To the freshly-precipitated phosphates, as thus prepared, add the 
phosphoric acid previously dissolved in water; when clear add the 
carbonates of sodium and potassium, previously dissolved in water, 
and muriatic acid to dissolve any precipitate. low dilute with 
water till it reaches the measure of twenty-two fluidounces, add the 
sugar, and towards the last, the cochineal; dissolve by the aid of 
heat, strain, and when cool add the orange-flower water. 

As thus made, each teaspoonful contains about two and a half 
grains of phosphate of calcium, one grain of phosphate of iron, 
with fractions of a grain of phosphates of sodium and potassium, 
besides free phosphoric and hydrochloric acids. The solution is 
perfect, the taste agreeably acid, and the flavor pleasant. The dis- 
position to precipitate a bulky sediment of the insoluble phos- 
phates is one of the greatest annoyances in this preparation, when 
made on a large scale, and can be obviated best by substituting 
hj-drochloric acid for a suitable portion of the phosphoric acid 
used, taking care to separate the liquid into two portions, and 
adding the carbonate of sodium and potassium to that consisting 
exclusively of the phosphoric acid solution, lest portions of chloride 
of sodium and chloride of potassium should be formed and con- 
taminate the resulting solution. 

Owing to the uncertain strength of phosphoric acid of commerce, 
being a mixture of the monobasic, bibasic, and tribasic acids, as 
described under that head, and always being contaminated with 
earthy phosphates, there is some uncertainty about the proportions 
to be employed in the above formula. These considerations have 
induced the trial of a method by double decomposition, which 
should always furnish a uniform strength of acid from a cheap and 
accessible source. 

E. Schefier, of Louisville, Ky., has proposed to take 49.25 drachms 
of phosphate of calcium, 34.125 monohydrated sulphuric acid, 
diluted with three times its weight of water, put them in a thin 
dish and heat on a water-bath for half a day. By this process 
only 37.25 drachms of phosphate of lime will be decomposed by 
the sulphuric acid, which combines with the lime of these 37.25 
drachms to form sulphate of calcium, while the phospiioric acid is 
set free and holds the other twelve drachms of phosphate of calcium 
in solution. After it has cooled, the magma is pressed, macerated 
with fresh water, and again pressed, and the liquid evaporated, if 
necessary, to twenty fluidounces, cooled, and filtered. The phos- 
phate of iron and carbonates of potassium and sodium are now 
added as in my own recipe, and the whole made into a syrup secun- 
dum artem. 

The washing of the precipitated sulphate of calcium is best per- 
formed in a funnel, the water being thrown upon the middle in a 
kind of reservoir formed by raising the precipitate on the sides of 
the funnel; the last portions are collected separately and evaporated 
until, with the stronger portion, they have the desired measure. 

Dr. Joseph G-. Richardson, of Philadelphia, has proposed to use 
citric acid as the solvent for the phosphates in the compound syrup; 



240 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

this substitution, though probably modifying the therapeutic pro- 
perties of the preparation, furnishes it in a very agreeable form. 
His recipe from the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxx. p. 19, 
was published in the second edition of this work. 

Under the synonym of "Chemical Food," this preparation has 
attained a wide popularity with the medical profession, both in the 
United States and in Great Britain. When skilfully made, it is 
one of the most agreeable, as it is certainly one of the most efficient, 
of the chemical nutritive tonics, which^ in accordance with im- 
proved methods of treating chronic diseases, have become so 
desirable to the physician. 

The excess of acid, though in a few cases disagreeing with the 
stomach, is perhaps generally useful in promoting the efficiency of 
the medicine, as a tonic, to the digestive function; it may be 
avoided when objectionable, by presenting the insoluble phosphates 
in a hydrated form, as suggested by Prof. Procter, thus: — 

Syrups of the Undissolved Phosphates. 

Take of Protosulphate of iron (cryst.) gij. 

Chloride of calcium (fused) £iss. 

Phosphate of sodium (cryst.) ^vij. 

Syrup of ginger, 

Distilled water, of each f^iv. 

Triturate the chloride of calcium with the phosphate of sodium 
and three fluidounces of the water, till the decomposition is com- 
plete and a smooth mixture is obtained, then add the syrup, and 
finally the sulphate of iron, previously dissolved in a fluidounce of 
the water. The resulting mixture consists of the hydrated phos- 
phates of iron and calcium, with about two drachms of sulphate of 
sodium, and a little common salt, the whole suspended and ren- 
dered palatable by the syrup. 

Ferri Pyrophosphas. 2Fe 2 3P 2 7 + 2KH 4 Ci + 13Aq. 

Take of Phosphate of sodium, seven troyounces and a half. 

Solution of tersulphate of iron, seven fluidounces, or a sufficient 

quantity. 
Citric acid, two troyounces. 
Water of ammonia, five fluidounces and a half, or a sufficient 

quantity. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Heat the phosphate of sodium, in a porcelain capsule, until it 
undergoes the watery fusion, and continue the heat until it becomes 
dry. Transfer the dry salt to a shallow iron capsule, and heat it to 
incipient redness, without fusion. Then dissolve it in three pints 
of water, with the aid of heat, and, having filtered the solution and 
cooled it to the temperature of 50°, add solution of tersulphate of 
iron until, this ceases to produce a precipitate. Stir the mixture 
thoroughly, and pour it upon a muslin strainer, and, when the pre- 
cipitate has drained, wash it with water until the washings pass 
nearly tasteless, and transfer it to a weighed porcelain capsule. 

To the citric acid, contained in a suitable vessel, add water of 



PYROPHOSPHATE OF IRON. 241 

ammonia until the acid is saturated and dissolved. Then add the 
solution to the precipitate in the weighed capsule, stir them together, 
and evaporate until the liquid is reduced to sixteen troyounces. 
Spread this on plates of glass or porcelain, so that, on drying, the 
salt may be obtained in scales. Lastly, preserve it in a well-stopped 
bottle, protected from the light. ( U. S. P.) 

When the officinal phosphate of sodium is heated to redness it 
undergoes a change, the phosphoric acid it contains being converted 
into bibasic phosphoric acid, so that by recombination it will furnish 
a different class of salts; the first step in the above formula is de- 
signed to produce this change. After expelling the water of crystal- 
lization, the heat is raised to incipient redness to expel the water 
of hydration (basic water), pyrophosphate of 'sodium being produced; 
this is anhydrous, and soluble with difficulty unless by heat; when 
crystallized from its solution it combines with ten equivalents of 
water. In making the salt directly from pyrophosphate of sodium 
the quantity should be about three troyounces of the anhydrous, or 
five troyounces of the crystallized salt, instead of seven troyounces 
and a half of ordinary phosphate of sodium ordered in the recipe. 
It now remains to form the bibasic salt of iron ; by precipitating 
solution of tersulphate of iron with the pyrophosphate of sodium, 
taking care to operate at a temperature below 50° F., we obtain a gela- 
tinous precipitate, which has the property of dissolving with facility 
in citrate of ammonium; this ingredient, as formed by the direct 
union of its elements, is accordingly added, and the solution evapo- 
rated till of suitable consistence to be spread on plates of glass to 
dry ; as thus prepared it is in thin apple-green scales, having a 
slightly saline (not metallic) taste, wholly and freely soluble in 
water; it consists of about one-half pyrophosphate of iron, one-third 
citrate of ammonium, and the remainder water. 

The composition given at the head of this article is inferred by 
Dr. Squibb from the ingredients and proportions used in its pre- 
paration, and is not the result of analysis, a remark which applies 
to other formula? given in this and similar works. Much of the 
pyrophosphate of iron that is met with in commerce is imperfectly 
soluble. 

This preparation has come into very extensive use within the 
past few years, having been first brought into view as a remedial 
agent by M. Robiquet. The officinal formula is a modification of 
that of Dr. Squibb, published in the Am. Journ. of Pharm., 1860, p. 
36 ; to which accurate and reliable chemist we are indebted for much 
that is known of its properties. 

It is remarkably well adapted to those delicate conditions of the 
system in which iron is so often indicated, and has the great merit 
of being free from the ferruginous taste. The presence of the citrate 
of ammonium sometimes reproduces a tendency to diarrhoea in cases 
of great susceptibility of the mucous membrane, as in late stages 
of phthisis; it may then be combined with astringents, but gene- 
rally the absence of astringency is a great recommendation of this 
salt. The dose is five grains. 
16 



242 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

Syrup of Pyrophosphate of Iron. 

The difficulty of procuring the pyrophosphate perfectly soluble, 
or rather the fact that the article as found in commerce is so gene- 
rally deficient, makes it desirable that the pharmacist should pre- 
pare the syrup from the ingredients as given in the officinal formula 
for the salt; that the process may be shortened where it is intended 
to convert the salt into the form of syrup, Dr. Squibb recommends 
that the solution resulting from the addition of the solution of 
citrate of ammonium to the magma of freshly precipitated pyro- 
phosphate of iron, as evaporated ready for drying on glass, should 
be added to simple syrup; the following proportions sufficiently 
approximate the required dose. 

Take of Solution of pyrophosphate of iron .... 2 fluidounces. 
Syrup 1 pint. 

Mix them (add flavor to taste). 

Dose, a fiuidrachm. 

If a pure and soluble article of the pyrophosphate of iron in scales 
is at hand, it may be dissolved in simple syrup in the proportion of 
sixteen grains to the fluidourjce, which will nearly correspond with 
the above. 

Hypophosphites of Iron. 

There are two hypophosphites of iro*h in use in the preparations 
which follow, hypophosphite of sesquioxide (ferric hypophosphite), 
Fe 2 3P0 2 , as suggested by Prof. Procter, and hypophosphite of pro- 
toxide (ferrous hypophosphite), Fe2HP0 2 , proposed by W. S. 
Thompson, of Baltimore. The first named is prepared by precipi- 
tating a solution of hypophosphite of sodium or ammonium with 
solution of sesqui sulphate of iron. It is necessary to avoid the 
presence of an alkaline carbonate, or the precipitate will be con- 
taminated with free sesquioxide of iron. After washing the gela- 
tinous precipitate thrown clown by the mixed liquids, which must 
be done with care, as in this state it is soluble, it may be dried 
into an amorphous, tasteless white powder, freely soluble in hydro- 
chloric and hypophosphorous acids. 

The hypophosphite of protoxide of iron is present in two of the 
syrups for which recipes are given below, and is recommended in 
this form of preparation by being more permanent than the sesqui- 
salt, which, as observed by W. S. Thompson, continually tepds to 
pass into proto-salt in saccharine solution; the proto-salt is also 
more soluble; it is, I believe, not met with in commerce in a solid 
form. 

. Syrup of Hypophosphite of Iron. {Containing Ferrous Hypophosphite.) 

Take of Protosulphate of iron 185 grains. 

Carbonate of sodium 240 grains. 

Hypophosphorous acid (sp. gr. 1.036) 3^ ounces. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Sugar 12 ounces. 



COMPOUND SYRUP OF H YPO PH OSPHITES. 243 

Dissolve the sulphate of iron and carbonate of sodium, each 
separately, in four fluidounces of water, and mix the solutions. 
Wash the precipitated carbonate of iron thoroughly with sweet- 
ened water, and drain it on a muslin filter; then transfer to a dish, 
add a small portion of water, heat gently, adding hypophosphorous 
acid till it forms a clear solution ; then add water till it reaches 
eight nuidounces, and add the sugar and flavor to taste. The dose 
of this is a fluidrachm. 

Thompson's Syrup of Hypophosphites. {Containing Ferrous 
Hypophosphite.) 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium 256 grains. 

Hypophosphite of sodium 192 grains. 

Hypophosphite of potassium 128 grains. 

Protosulphate of irou, crystallized 185 grains. 

Carbonate of sodium 240 grains. 

Hypophosphorous acid (sp. gr. 1.036) . . . . 3£ fl. ounces. 

Sugar 12 ounces. 

Dissolve the protosulphate of iron and carbonate of sodium, each 
separately, in four nuidounces of water, and mix the solutions. 
Wash the precipitated carbonate of iron thoroughly with sweetened 
water, and drain it on a muslin filter. Having placed the salts of 
calcium, sodium, and potassium in a suitable porcelain dish, add 
about two fluidounces of water, and one fluidounce of hypophos- 
phorous acid; heat the mixture gently, and add the moist carbonate 
of iron, in small portions, from time to time, alternately with the 
hypophosphorous acid, until the solution is complete. Add water 
enough to make the wdiole measure ten fluidounces ; pour it into a 
bottle containing the sugar, and agitate as before. Dose, a flui- 
drachm. {Journ. and Trans, of Maryland College of Pharmacy, June, 
1858.) 

Procter's Compound Syrup of Hypophosphites. {Containing Ferric 

Hypophosph ite.) 

Take of Hypophosphite of calcium 256 grains. 

Hypophosphite of sodium ........ 192 grains. 

Hypophosphite of potassium 128 grains. 

Hypophosphite of iron* (recently precipitated) . 96 grains. 
Hypophosphorous acid solution ... q. s. or 240 grains. 

White sugar 9 ounces. 

Extract of vanilla i ounce. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the salts of calcium, sodium, and potassium in six 
ounces of water; put the iron salt in a mortar, and gradually add 
solution of hypophosphorous acid till it is dissolved; to this add 
the solution of the other salts, after it has been rendered slightly 
acidulous with the same acid, and then water, till the whole mea- 

* This quantity, 96 grains, of hypophosphite of iron is obtained when 128 grains 
of hypophosphite of sodium, dissolved in two ounces of water, is decomposed with 
a slight excess of solution of tersulphate of iron, and the white precipitate well 
washed on a filter with water. 



244 iron and manganese. 

sures twelve fluidounces. Dissolve in this the sugar, with heat, 
and flavor with the vanilla. Dose, a fluidrachm. 

Without flavoring, this syrup is not unpleasant. 

Among the preparations of lime an4 of manganese the reader 
will find other eligible combinations containing hypophosphorous 
acid, and, in fact, the above are less prescribed than those which do 
not contain iron, the acid ingredient itself being possessed of those 
hcematogen properties which are sought in this class of tonics. 

Ferri Lactas. FeL + Aq? U. S. P. 

Take of Lactic acid, a fluidounce. 

Iron, in the form of filings, half a troyounce. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acid with a pint of distilled water in an iron vessel, add 
the iron, and digest the mixture on a water-bath, supplying dis- 
tilled water, from time to time, to preserve the measure. When 
the action has ceased, filter the solution, while hot, into a porcelain 
capsule, and set it aside to crystallize. At the end of forty-eight 
hours, decant the liquid, wash the crystals with a little alcohol, and 
dry them on bibulous paper. By evaporating the mother-water in 
an iron vessel to one-half, filtering while hot, and setting the 
liquid aside, more crystals may be obtained. (U. S. P.) 

By this new officinal process the iron filings are oxidized into 
protoxide of iron, which combines with the lactic acid, yielding 
this salt, which, being rather insoluble, separates in greenish- white 
crystalline crusts or grains of a mild, sweetish, ferruginous taste, 
soluble in forty-eight parts of cold, and twelve of boiling water, 
but insoluble in alcohol. 

Exposed to heat it froths up, gives out thick, white, acid fumes, 
and becomes black, sesquioxide of iron being left. If it be boiled 
for fifteen minutes with nitric acid, of the specific gravity of 1.20, 
a white granular deposit of mucic acid will occur on the cooling 
of the liquid. 

Lactate of iron has the advantage of less solubility than some of 
the other salts, and hence a less powerful taste ; it is regarded as a 
superior preparation, on the supposition that all the combinations 
of iron are converted into lactates upon their entrance into the 
stomach. It has been incorporated with flour in the preparation 
of bread, and is well adapted to the form of lozenge, of chocolate 
drops, etc. 

The lactate has been found beneficial in chlorosis, and the kin- 
dred forms of disease, in which iron is indicated, and is said to 
possess a marked influence upon the appetite. Dose, gr. j to gr. v, 
repeated at suitable intervals. 

Ferri Acetas. {Acetate of Iron.) 
The Dublin Pharmacopoeia directs a tincture of this salt, pre- 
pared by double decomposition between tersulphate of iron and 
acetate of potassium, in alcoholic solution, and removing the crystal- 



TARTRATE OF IRON AND POTASSIUM. 245 

line precipitate of sulphate of potassium ; it has a deep-red color, 
and a strong ferruginous taste. 

A much pleasanter preparation is the Tinctara ferri acetatis, 
(Ether ea, of the Prussian Pharmacopoeia, which, as a first step, orders 
an aqueous solution of this salt, Liquor ferri acetatis, prepared by 
dissolving fresh sesquioxide of iron in acetic acid, so that the solu- 
tion contains 8 per cent, of iron, or 11.43 of oxide of iron, and has 
a sp. gr. of 1.143. 

To make the ethereal tincture, nine ounces of this liquor, two 
ounces strong alcohol, and one ounce (all by weight) of acetic ether, 
are mixed. It is a very agreeable preparation, and largely em- 
ployed in Europe in doses of about 5ss. 

Duilos has proposed a basic acetate as an antidote to arsenious 
and arsenic acid, especially when combined with alkalies. It is 
prepared by completely saturating acetic acid with sesquioxide of 
iron. The solution contains Fe 2 ,Ac, and in cases of poisoning by 
arseniates or arsenites, is to be freely used, largely diluted with 
warm water. 

Bademacher's tinctura ferri acetici is prepared by boiling an inti- 
mate mixture of 2 oz. 7 dr. protosulphate of iron, 3 oz. acetate of 
lead, 6 oz. of distilled water, and 12 oz. wine-vinegar, in an iron 
vessel, and, after cooling, adding 10 oz. alcohol. This mixture is 
set aside for several months, and when it has assumed a deep-red 
color, is filtered and preserved. Age improves this tincture in taste 
and smell. It is used in the same cases as other mild ferruginous 
preparations, in doses of from thirty to sixty drops. 

Ferri Tannas. {Tannate of Iron, Ferric Tannate.) 

All sesquisalts of iron, if not too acid, are precipitated by tinc- 
ture of galls or tannic acid; the precipitate is of a bluish-black 
color, insoluble in water, and tasteless. It has been highly recom- 
mended as a chalybeate, which is well adapted to weak stomachs. 
Dose, in chlorosis, ten grains or more. 

A syrup has been proposed, containing 2J drachms citrate of iron, 
1 drachm extract of galls, to 4 ounces raspberry syrup, and twelve 
ounces simple syrup. The dose is a tablespoonful several times a 
day. 

Ferri Valerianas. {Valerianate of Iron. Fe 2 3Va.) 

This preparation is made by the decomposition of valerianate of 
sodium by tersulphate of iron; it is a dark red amorphous powder, 
having a faint odor and taste of valerianic acid. It is insoluble in 
cold water, decomposed by hot water, and is soluble in alcohol. In 
hysterical affections complicated with chlorosis, it is prescribed in 
doses of about a grain repeated several times a day. 

Ferri et Potassii Tartras. K,Fe 2 T 4- Aq? {Tartrate of Iron and 

Potassium.) 
This double salt is directed to be prepared by heating together, 
to 140° F., hydrated sesquioxide of iron from one pint of solution 



246 IRON" AND MANGANESE. 

of tersulphate with seven troyounces of bitartrate of potassium in 
four pints of water. The excess of tartaric acid in the latter salt is 
saturated by the ferric oxide, forming an uncrystallizable salt. 
This is obtained by evaporation in a thick, syrupy liquid, which is 
poured on plates of glass to dry. As thus prepared, it forms ruby- 
red scales, having the physical characters of the citrate; soluble in 
seven times its weight of water, and becoming damp on exposure. 

In solution it does not change the color of litmus, and, at common 
temperatures, does not yield a precipitate with potassa, soda, or 
ammonia. Ferrocyanide of potassium does not render it blue until 
an acid be added. 

Its astringency is much less than that of the ferruginous pre- 
parations generally, and its stimulating influence less obvious. 
From its slight taste and ready solubility, it is one of the best pre- 
parations for children. Dose, gr. x to xx. 

Ferri et Ammonii Tartras. NH 4 Fe 2 T-h Aq? (Ammonio- Tartrate 

of Iron.) 

This double salt resembles the foregoing; it is prepared by satu- 
rating 6 troyounces of tartaric acid in solution with carbonate of 
ammonium, then adding 6 troyounces additional of the acid; 
hydrated sesquioxide of iron from two and a half pints of the solu- 
tion of tersulphate is now precipitated and washed and added to 
the solution of bitartrate of ammonium, which is kept at the tem- 
perature of 150° until it ceases to take up the oxide. It is then 
filtered and evaporated to the consistence of syrup, and spread on 
plates of glass, so that on drying the salt may be obtained in 
scales. 

These are transparent garnet-red, with a " saccharine taste." It 
is much more soluble than the tartrate of iron and potassium, being 
slowly dissolved by little more than its weight of water, but is in- 
soluble in alcohol and ether. It is neutral to test paper, not pre- 
cipitated by the fixed alkalies, nor rendered blue by ferrocyanide 
of potassium. When incinerated it yields twenty-nine per cent, 
of sesquioxide of iron. 

Ammonio-tartrate is one of the best preparations of iron for com- 
mon use, especially adapted to children; it is, however, less pre- 
scribed than the ammonio-citrate. Dose, gr. x to xx. 

Ferri Prototartras. FeT + 4 Aq ? (Prototartrate of Iron. Ferrous 

Tartrate.) 

Is obtained as a crystalline powder, by digesting iron filings with 
tartaric acid in solution. It is little soluble in water, has a mild 
ferruginous taste, and contains 13 per cent, water of crystallization. 

It may be used like the other mild forms of iron. 



SYRUP OF FERROUS NITRATE. 247 

Liquor Ferri Nitratis, U. S. P. (Solution of Nitrate of Iron. Ferric 

Nitrate.) 

Take of Iron, in the form of wire cut in pieces, two troyounces and a half. 
Nitric acid, five troyounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the iron with 'twelve fluidounces of distilled water in a wide- 
mouthed bottle; add to the mixture, in small portions at a time, 
with frequent agitation, three troyounces of the nitric acid, pre- 
viously mixed with six fluidounces of distilled water, moderating 
the reaction by setting the vessel in cold water, in order to pre- 
vent the occurrence of red fumes. When the effervescence has 
nearly ceased, agitate the solution with the undissolved iron until 
a portion of the liquid, on being filtered, exhibits a pale-green 
color. Then filter the liquid, and, having poured it into a capa- 
cious porcelain capsule, heat it to the temperature of 130°, and add 
the remainder of the nitric acid. When the effervescence has 
ceased, continue the heat until no more gas escapes, and then add 
sufficient distilled water to bring the liquid to the measure of thirty- 
six fluidounces. 

This improved formula from the Pharmacopoeia is designed to 
furnish a permanent solution not liable to precipitate the bulky 
subnitrate upon standing, which, as made by the old process, was 
invariably the case. 

The acid is now directed to be weighed instead of being measured, 
so that an apparent variation exists in the proportion ; this, however, 
is nearly the same as in the old process, the differences in the old 
and new formula being in the mode of oxidizing the iron and form- 
ing the salt. The protonitrate is first formed by the addition of 
diluted acid to the iron immersed in a large quantity of water, 
keeping down the temperature by a cold water-bath; an additional 
portion of nitric acid is then added after filtration, and the solu- 
tion heated, which peroxidizes the iron and forms pernitrate, 
Fe 2 ,6^0 3 . 

The liquid has a pale amber color, and a sp. gr. between 1.060 
and 1.070; it does not afford a blue precipitate with ferridcyanide 
of potassium. A fluidounce of it should contain from eight to ten 
grains of anhydrous sesquioxicle of iron, combined with nitric acid. 

It is used as an astringent in diarrhoea, and in hemorrhages from 
the bowels, uterus, etc., in individuals of pale and feeble constitu- 
tions. As a remedy in dysentery, it probably has no superior. A 
physician of considerable experience writes: "I regard it as much 
a specific as quinine is for ague." Dose, n\,v to xv. 

Syrupus Ferri Prtotonitratis. (Syrup of Ferrous Nitrate.) 
Take of Iron wire (card teeth), in pieces . . Two ounces. 

Citric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) Three fluidounces. 

Water Thirteen fluidounces. 

Sugar, in powder Two pounds. 

Put the iron in a wide-mouthed bottle, kept cool by standing in 
cold water, and pour upon it three fluidounces of water. Then 



248 



IKON" AND MANGANESE. 



mix the acid with ten fluid ounces of water, and add the mixture 
in portions of half a fluidounce to the iron, agitating frequently 
until the acid is saturated, using litmus paper. When all the 
acid has been combined, filter the solution into a bottle containing 
the sugar and marked to contain thirty fluidounces. If the whole 
does not measure that bulk, pour water on the filter until it does. 
When all the sugar is dissolved, strain, if necessary, and intro- 
duce the syrup into suitable vials, and seal them. 

It requires a particular course of manipulation to dissolve iron 
in nitric acid, without a large portion passing to the higher stage 
of oxidation. This manipulation is adopted in the first part of 
the formula for solution of pernitrate of iron as above, and in this 
formula, the iron is used in excess ; care is taken to prevent its 
peroxidation by the large dilution of the acid, and the refrigera- 
tion of the liquid. As thus obtained the solution has a light- 
greenish color when filtered, and is precipitated of a greenish color 
by ammonia. It is necessary for the solution to stand on the iron 
for several hours after the last addition of acid. 

This preparation is, I believe, used for nearly the same purposes 
as the foregoing, though perhaps less distinctly astringent. Dose, 
niv to xv. 

Liquor Ferri Hyperchloratis. {Solution of Perchlorate of Iron.) 

This salt has been recommended in certain forms of disease, on 
account of the large quantity of oxygen it contains. It is prepared 
by dissolving sesquioxide of iron in hyperchloric acid. This acid 
is obtained by distilling from perchlorate of potassium and sul- 
phuric acid, or by the decomposition of the perchlorate with fluo- 
silicic acid. (See works on Chemistry.) The solution contains 
Fe.,HC10 4 . It is given in mucilaginous liquids, in doses of about 
ten drops. 

Preparations of Iron. 

(See First Group, page 226.) 

2d Group. — Compounds of Iron with Halogens and Sulphur. 



Name. 


Composition, etc. 


Dose. 


Description, etc. 


Ferri chloridum 


Fe 2 Cl 6 +6H 2 

Fe 2 Cl 5 in Aq. sp.gr. 1.355 

gr. 59 Fr fi C1 6 to f£j 

gr. 1 5 to i%j 

15 per cent. Fe 2 Cl 6 

Fe 4 Fcy 3 


gr. j to v 


Orange-yel'w crystals 








n\ xv 

n\ xxx 

gr. v to x 

gr. ij to v 
TT\,xx 
gr. ij to v 
n\ xx 

IT^VtOX 

gr. v 

gr. v 


Yellowish-brown. 


Spt. ferri chlorati cethereus... 


Prussian Ph. 




Orange-colored grs. 


Ferri ferrocyanidum 


Pure Prussian blue. 


"Ferri hgdrocyanatum" 


Poisonous. 


Fel 2 

gr. 7 Fel 2 to f5j 

FeBr 2 


Decomposes in air. 




Light-green color. 




Brick-red powder. 




Greenish syrup. 






See Bromine. 




FeS 
FeS,K 2 S,K 2 S 5 


i In baths. 


Ferri et potassii sulphuretum 



CHLORIDE OF IKON. 249 

Ferri Chloridum. Fe 2 Cl -f 6H 2 0=433. (Chloride of Iron.) 

Take of Iron, in the form of wire, and cut in pieces, two troyounces. 
Muriatic acid, twelve troyounces. 
Nitric acid, a troyounce, or a sufficient quantity. 

To eight troyounces of the muriatic acid, introduced into a two- 
pint flask, add the iron, and apply a gentle heat until the acid is 
saturated and effervescence has ceased. Filter the solution, add to 
it the remainder of the muriatic acid, heat the mixture nearly to 
the boiling point in a four-pint porcelain capsule, and add nitric 
acid in successive portions until red fumes are no longer evolved, 
and a drop of the liquid ceases to yield a blue precipitate with 
ferridcyanide of potassium. Transfer the liquid to a smaller cap- 
sule, evaporate it by a gentle heat, on a sand-bath, until reduced to 
eight troyounces and three hundred and sixty grains, and set it 
aside, covered with glass, for several days, in order that it may 
form a solid, crystalline mass. Lastly, break this into pieces, and 
keep the fragments in a well-stopped bottle, protected from the 
light. (U. S. P.) 

This preparation is made officinal by a simple and readily practi- 
cable process in the edition of 1860; by the action of muriatic acid 
upon metallic iron protochloride results, which, by heating with 
nitric acid, is converted into sesquichloride (N0 2 yielding oxj^gen 
to IIC1, and thus evolving CI, which converts FeCl into Fe 2 Cl fi ). A 
gentle heat is directed to prevent the evaporation and decomposi- 
tion of a portion of the dissolved chloride. The salt, as obtained 
by this process, is in yellow crystalline masses, very deliquescent 
and inconvenient to weigh or manipulate with. 

It is wholly soluble in water, alcohol, and ether. Its solution in 
water affords with ammonia a brown precipitate of by d rated ses- 
quioxide of iron, and does not yield a blue one with ferridcyanide 
of potassium (red prussiate of potassium). 

Perchloride of iron has been very highly recommended, espe- 
cially by the French surgeons, for both internal and external use 
as an astringent. Internally it is used, chiefly in the form of syrup 
in intestinal hemorrhages, and as a local haemostatic it has been 
chiefly used in solution, known as Pravaze's solution, for which an 
elaborate formula was published in the last edition of this work. 
By the above officinal process we may prepare the salt with great 
facility, and from the salt, the solution. The strength of the solu- 
tion is, moreover, greatly varied for different purposes — from ^lx 
to 3ij to each f 3j. For internal use gr. j to gr. v may be admin- 
istered in a spoonful of syrup. In cases of obstinate local hemorrhage 
it is recommended to apply the soft, deliquesced salt by means of a 
brush of spun glass, the pointed and softened end of a stick, or 
other suitable appliance. 

Solution of Perchloride of Iron. — The Prussian Pharmacopoeia di- 
rects an aqueous solution of sesquichloride of iron, which contains 
ten per cent, of its weight of iron ; this is probably never used in- 



250 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

ternally, but kept as a convenient solution for readily obtaining 
the peroxide of iron, and for the preparation of the following: — ■ 

Spiritus Ferri Chlorati JEthereus ; Bestucheff's Nervine Tincture ; 
Lamotte's Golden Drops. — It is prepared by mixing one part (by 
weight) of solution of perchloride of iron with one and a half 
part of strong alcohol, and one-half part of ether, exposing the 
mixture in well-corked white bottles to the sun until it becomes 
colorless, and subsequently allowing it to oxidize again in contact 
with the air until it has obtained a yellowish color. 

It probably contains some chloric ether and acetic acid, and 
nearly the whole of the iron as a protosalt. This remedy acquired 
much celebrity during the last century, and is still much used in 
Europe as a mild ferruginous preparation, agreeably modified by 
the presence of ether. Its medium dose is tt^xxx. 

Syrupus Ferri Chloridi. 

Take of Chloride of iron Half a troyounce. 

Simple syrup . One pint. 

Mix (flavor to taste). 

Dose, a teasooonful, as a tonic and astringent, adapted to weak 
and relaxed conditions of the stomach and bowels, and to anaemic 
symptoms generally. 

Liquor Ferri Chloridi, U. S. P. {Solution of Chloride of Iron.) 

Take of Iron, in the form of wire and cut in pieces, three troyounces. 
Muriatic acid, seventeen troyounces and a half. 
Nitric acid, 
Distilled water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the iron into a flask of the capacity of two pints, 
pour upon it eleven troyounces of the muriatic acid, and allow the 
mixture to stand until effervescence has ceased. Then heat it to 
the boiling point, decant the liquid from the undissolved iron, filter 
it through paper, and, having rinsed the flask with a little boiling 
distilled water, add this to it through the filter. Pour the filtered 
liquid into a capsule of the capacity of four pints, add the remain- 
der of the muriatic acid, and, having treated the mixture nearly 
to the boiling point, add a troyounce and a half of nitric acid. 
When effervescence has ceased, drop in nitric acid, constantly stir- 
ring, until it no longer produces effervescence. Lastly, when the 
liquid is cold, add sufficient distilled water to make it measure a 
pint. Its specific gravity is 1.355. 

This is a new officinal in the U. S. P. 1870, designed to furnish 
a solution from which the tinctura ferri chloridi can be readily 
prepared; the formula is a slight modification of one proposed by 
Dr. E. R. Squibb, and yields a more uniform preparation than that 
made from the subcarbonate of iron. One fluidounce of this solu- 
tion yields a precipitate with ammonia, which, when washed, dried, 
and ignited, amounts to 113 grains. 



FERROCYANIDE OF IRON. 251 

Tincture of Ferri Ghloridi. Tincture of Chloride of Iron. 1870. 

Take of Solution of chloride of iron Half a pint. 

Alcohol A pint and a half. 

Mix them and preserve the mixture in a well-stoppered bottle. 

In prescribing this tincture it should be remembered that the 
drops are very small, so that, although its dose is from ten to twenty 
minims, twice that number of drops may be given. It should not 
be prescribed with strong mucilage, which it has the property of 
gelatinizing. It is most frequently presented alone, dropped into 
water. 

It is one of the most popular of the iron preparations. Besides 
the properties which are common to these, it is astringent, used in 
passive hemorrhages, and a diuretic which adapts it to a variety 
of cases. It is also one of the best solvents and vehicles for sul- 
phate of quinia. 

Ferrum Ammoniatum. (Ammoniated Iron. Flores Martiales.) 

Subcarbonate of iron is mixed with muriatic acid in a glass 
vessel; water and sesquichloride of iron are formed'; a solution of 
the latter is then evaporated along with a solution of muriate of 
ammonia; a mixture of the two salts is the result, in about the pro- 
portions of iifteen per cent, of the former to eighty-five of the latter. 

It is met with in the shops in the form of small orange-colored 
pulverulent grains, sometimes quite crystalline, having a feeble 
odor and a styptic saline taste. It is deliquescent and soluble in 
diluted alcohol and water. It also sublimes almost without residue. 

In consequence of the small proportion of iron present, it is little 
esteemed as a chalybeate, and has been omitted from the last two 
editions of the Pharmacopoeia. The large amount of muriate of 
ammonia contained in it renders it alterative, and in large doses 
aperient. It has been used with advantage in amenorrhoea, scrofula, 
etc. Also as a deobstruent in glandular swellings. Dose, gr. iv to x. 

Ferri Ferrocyanidum. {Ferrocyanide of Iron. Prussian Blue. 

Fe 4 Fcy 3 .) 

Obtained by a double reaction ensuing upon mixture of solutions 
of ferrocyanide of potassium and solution of tersulphate of iron. 

It is an insipid, inodorous substance, in porous cakes, of a rich 
velvety blue color. Insoluble in water, alcohol, and diluted mineral 
acids; diluted muriatic acid after boiling on it should yield no pre- 
cipitate on the addition of ammonia; alkalies decompose it, leaving 
sesquioxide of iron, and dissolving an alkaline ferrocyanide. Red 
oxide of mercury, boiled with Prussian blue, affords the soluble 
cyanide of mercury, with an insoluble mixture of oxide and cyanide 
of iron. 

Tonic and sedative. It has been recommended in intermittent 
and remittent fever; also in epilepsy and facial neuralgia. Dose, 
gr. v-xv. 



252 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

Hydrocyanate of iron is the name given to a preparation manufac- 
tured and sold by Tilden & Co. It appears to be a mixed com- 
pound of the ferrocyanide of potassium and ferrocyanide of iron, 
probably made by adding an excess of cyanide of potassium to pro- 
tosulphate of iron in solution, and either omitting washing it, or 
washing imperfectly. The close is smaller than the foregoing; 
J gr. to 1 gr. 

An accident resulting fatally is said to have occurred by the sub- 
stitution of this for the official ferrocyanide. 

Ferri Iodidum. Fel 2 4- Aq. {Iodide of Iron. Ferrous Iodide.) 

Take of Iodine ^ij. 

Iron filings §j. 

Distilled water Ojss. 

Mix the iodine with Oj water, in a glass or porcelain vessel, and 
gradually add the iron filings, stirring constantly. Heat the mix- 
ture gently, until of a light-green color. Filter, and pour upon it 
the remaining Oss of water, boiling hot. Evaporate the filtered 
liquor at a temperature not exceeding 212°, in an iron vessel, to 
dryness. Keep in a closely stopped bottle. One eq. of iron is here 
made to unite directly with two eq. of iodine, forming an iodide, 
Fel 2 . It is in the form of amorphous masses, containing a small 
but variable portion of water, exceedingly deliquescent, and pos- 
sessed of a styptic, chalybeate taste. It is partially soluble in water, 
imparting to a solution the odor and taste of iodine. By exposure 
to the atmosphere, it decomposes into free iodine and sesquioxide 
of iron. 

It should be remembered that the proportion of iron in the 
iodide is small, and that it is a comparatively powerful prepara- 
tion. Dose, gr. j to ij. Owing to its liability to decompose and its 
extraordinary deliquescence, it has been omitted from the late 
edition of the Pharmacopoeia, and is rarely prescribed, except in 
the form of the syrup next described, or in that of pilulse ferri 
iodidi, introduced among Extemporaneous Preparations. 

Syrupus Ferri Iodidi, IT. S. P. 

Liquor Ferri Iodidi, U. S. P. 1850. 

Take of Iodine, two troyounces. 

Iron, in the form of wire and cut in pieces, three hundred grains. 
Distilled water, three fluidounces. 
Syrup, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the iodine, iron, and distilled water in a flask of thin glass, 
shake the mixture occasionally until the reaction ceases, and the 
solution has acquired a green color and lost the smell of iodine. 
Then, having introduced a pint of syrup into a graduated bottle, 
heat it by means of a water-bath to 212°, and, through a small 
funnel, the neck of which, when inserted in the mouth of the bottle, 
passes beneath the surface of the syrup, filter into it the solution 
already prepared. When this has passed, close the bottle, shake it 
thoroughly, and, when the liquid has cooled, add sufllcient syrup 



BROMIDE OF IRON. 253 

to make the whole measure twenty fluidounces. Lastly, again 
shake the bottle, and transfer its contents to two-ounce vials, which 
must be well stopped. 

The present officinal formula for this preparation differs from the 
foregoing chiefly in containing a larger proportion of sugar, which 
entitles it to the name of a syrup instead of that of solution as 
heretofore. It is an instance of the direct union of two elements 
at ordinary temperatures by contact, which is rendered less rapid 
and more complete by the intervention of water. 

The use of heat, to promote the union of iron and iodine, is un- 
necessary; the reaction, which is the same as that in the process 
for making the solid iodide, will take place satisfactorily in the 
cold. 

The result is a solution of the iodide of iron, which is preserved 
by admixture with syrup ; it is a transparent liquid, of a pale-green 
color, deposits no sediment by keeping, and does not tinge solution 
of starch blue. Mixed with sulphuric acid it becomes brown, and 
the mixture emits violet vapors when heated. 

The use of sugar as a preservative of this compound is an impor- 
tant improvement, introduced about the year 1830, and has brought 
this important salt within the reach of the practitioner in a very 
permanent and eligible form. Iodide of iron produces the valuable 
effects of the ferruginous salts, in addition to those of iodine; it is 
peculiarly applicable to the treatment of scrofulous diseases in 
anaemic patients, and is very much prescribed. This syrup con- 
tains about t l\ grains of salt to f 3j. Dose, nixx to xl. 

It dissolves small proportions of the iodides of mercury, copper, 
etc., and is incompatible with most chemical agents, but may be 
mixed with the syrups and fluid extracts of the vegetable altera- 
tives, or, what is perhaps better, prescribed in a separate vial, to 
be dropped into the syrup at the time of taking it. 

A preparation is sometimes prescribed in Philadelphia under the 
name of Dr. Hays's Syrup of Iodide of Iron: the formula is published 
in the Amer. Journ. of Med. Sciences for 1840, p. 449. It is made 
from 400 grains of iodine, and 160 of iron, and two ounces of sugar 
to f^iv. Dose, ttiv. 

Ferri JBromidum. {Bromide of Iron. FeBr 2 =136.) 

This salt is obtained by adding bromine to iron filings, in ex- 
cess, under water, and submitting them to a moderate heat. When 
the liquid assumes a greenish-yellow appearance, it is filtered and 
evaporated rapidly to dryness in an iron vessel. Bromide of iron 
is a brick- red, very deliquescent salt, of an acrid styptic taste, and 
requires to be kept closely stopped in glass vials. This bromide 
has been used quite extensively in Pittsburg, Pa., as a tonic and 
alterative, and is considered by some physicians a highly efficacious 
preparation. 



254 IKON AND MANGANESE. 

Syrup of Bromide of Iron. 

Take of Bromine 200 grains. 

Iron filings 85 grains. 

"Water ' . . 4£ fluidounces. 

Sugar 3 ounces. 

Make a solution in the manner directed for preparing the offici- 
nal syrup of iodide of iron. Dose, t^xx, three times a day, grad- 
ually increased. (See Medical Examiner, vol. vii. p. 162.) 

For the preparation of a solution of bromide of iron with excess 
of bromine, see Bromine. 

Sulphur ets of Iron. 

Several sulphurets have been proposed, as stimulating alteratives, 
and as antidotes against the poisonous action of arsenic, lead, 
mercury, and other metals, which are precipitated by hydrosul- 
phuric acid. As this latter acid may be set free by the intestinal 
acids, and in larger quantities has itself a poisonous action, the free 
use of these sulphurets seems to require care. 

Ferri sidphuretum, called black sulphuret of iron, is prepared by 
fusing together iron and sulphur. If well prepared it has a 
yellowish-gray or blackish color, without odor or taste, and is 
wholly soluble in dilated acids, with evolution of sulphuretted hy- 
drogen. It is chiefly used for the preparation of this gas, but has 
been given in scrofulous and chronic skin diseases, in doses of 5 or 
10 grains, twice a day. 

Ferri et Potassii sulphxiretum, prepared by fusing together equal 
parts of iron filings and carbonate of potassium, with \ part of 
flowers of sulphur, is a brown mass, of the odor of sulphuretted 
hydrogen. It has been recommended as an antidote against 
arsenic, and also as a powerful alterative in doses of 5 grains, and 
in larger doses, diluted, in cases of poisoning; externally it has 
been employed as an addition to baths in the quantity of 1 to 3 
ounces. 

Manganese. Mn=55. 

This is a metal resembling iron in its therapeutical as well as in 
some of its chemical properties. It forms several oxides, of which 
the protoxide, MnO, is present in its most important oxy salts, which 
have a rose color, or are colorless. The salts of protoxide of man- 
ganese are not incompatible with vegetable astringents, which is 
their chief pharmaceutical merit. 

Tests for Protoxide of Manganese. — The salts in which protoxide 
of manganese forms the base are recognized as follows: — 

Sulphuretted hydrogen produces in alkalies and sulphuret of 
ammonium, in neutral solutions, a flesh-colored precipitate of MnS, 
turning to brown in contact with air, soluble in acids. 

Alkalies cause a whitish precipitate of MnO,HO; carbonates of 
the alkalies a similar precipitate of Mn,C0 3 . By exposure to the 
air, they are partly oxidized, and turn brown. 



PREPARATIONS OF MANGANESE. 255 

Carbonate of sodium, fused with compounds of manganese in the 
outer flame before the blowpipe, assumes from NaO,Mn0 3 , a green 
color, turning to a turbid blue green after cooling. 

Preparations of Manganese. 

Manganesii oxidum nigrum, Mn0 2 . Native impure mineral. 

Manganesii sulphas, MnS0 4 -j- 4Aq. Pale rose-colored crystals, soluble. 

Manganesii carbonas, MnC0 3 -f- Aq. Whitish insoluble powder. 

Manganesii acetas, MnAc. By dissolving carbonate in Ac. 

Manganesii lactas, 2MnL + 10Aq. Dose, gr. j. Rose-colored crystals. 

Manganesii phosphas, 3MnHP0 4 -f- 4Aq. Dose, gr. j to v. White insoluble powder. 

Syr. manganesii phosphatis, gr. v to f5J. Dose, f 3J ■ 

Syr. manganesii hypophosphitis. Dose, §ss, contains 2\ grs. of the salt. 

Manganesii chloridum, MnCl 2 . Milder than sulphate. Dose, gr. v. 

Syrupus manganesii iodidi. Contains f5j to each f§j. Dose, tt^ x. 

Syrupus ferri et manganesii iodidi. Same strength as syr. ferri iod. 

Potassii permanganas, K 2 Mn 2 O g . Purple crystals, or green powder. 

The native impure form of manganese in commerce, that of black 
oxide, is used to prepare all the rest, it is imported in lumps and 
in powder, and should have a dark, shining, crystalline appearance; 
its combining number is 87. 

Manganesii Sulphas. (Sulphate of Manganese. Manqanous Sulphate. 
MnS0 4 + 4Aq = 241.) 

This salt may be prepared as follows: — 

Mix in a sand crucible the black oxide of manganese with sul- 
phuric acid until of a thick pasty consistence. Cover with a 
smaller crucible and expose the mixture to a red heat for half an 
hour. At the end of this interval, remove the crucible from the 
fire, and when cool reduce the dark brown mass to a coarse powder. 
Introduce this into a crucible, and saturate as before with sulphuric 
acid. Again apply heat and continue it till white vapors cease to 
be expelled. The mass remaining contains the sulphate, which 
may be obtained impure by solution and evaporation. To purify 
this from iron, the following directions are given: The filtered solu- 
tion is to be heated in a porcelain capsule, and when nearly boiling, 
drop' into it carbonate of manganese in small portions at a time 
until all the iron shall have been precipitated and the liquid changes 
from a dark red to a pale rose tint. Now evaporate and crj^stallize. 
Some processes recommend the heating of black oxide with carbon 
previous to adding the sulphuric acid, others direct the addition 
of the moist carbonate to diluted sulphuric acid. 

These crystals are of a pale rose color, containino; when formed 
below 42° F. 7Aq, between 42° and 68° 5 Aq, and between 68° and 
86° 4H 2 0; they have a styptic taste, are freely soluble in water, 
and may be given as a tonic in a dose of gr. v; as a cholagogue 
cathartic, 3j to 3ij is required. The solution is not disturbed by 
tincture of nutgall, but affords with caustic alkalies a white pre- 
cipitate, which soon becomes brown by exposure to the air. Hydro- 
sulphate of ammonium throws down a flesh-colored precipitate, and 
ferrocyanide of potassium, a white one. 



256 IRON AND MANGANESE. 

Carbonate of Manganese. MnC0 3 + Aq == 133. 

This is made by precipitating sulphate with a carbonated alkali, 
or directly from the native black oxide, as follows: — 

Take of black oxide of manganese ibj, in powder, put it in a 
porcelain dish on a sand-bath or other source of heat; pour on it 
muriatic acid Oij, and stir well. Chlorine is evolved, which makes 
it necessary to operate in the open air or under a chimney. Muri- 
atic acid should be added until it is nearly dissolved. To get rid 
of free muriatic acid and sesquichloride of iron, add carbonate of 
sodium, boiling, after each addition, as long as the carbonate pre- 
cipitated is contaminated with iron, or until a portion of the solu- 
tion tested with yellow prussiate of potassium does not produce a 
blue color. The solution of chloride of manganese, being now 
separated from the oxide of iron by filtration, will furnish, on the 
addition of an excess of carbonate of sodium, a bulky white preci- 
pitate, which, being washed in cold boiled water and dried, con- 
stitutes carbonate of manganese. 

It is a white or pale rose-colored powder, insoluble in water, and 
liable to pass into a higher state of oxidation ; it may be given in 
powder, close, gr. v, or in the form, of saccharine powder, or made 
into a mass with honey. 

Manganesii Acetas. MnAc? 

By dissolving the carbonate in acetic acid and evaporating, color- 
less or rose-colored prisms are obtained, which are permanent in the 
air, have an astringent metallic taste, and are soluble in alcohol, 
and in three and a half parts of water. It is considered one of the 
mildest medicinal salts of manganese, and is given in a dose of five 
grains. 

Manganesii Lactas. 2MnL 4- lOAq. 

Prepared by dissolving carbonate of manganese in lactic acid, 
and evaporating; it crystallizes in four-sided prisms of a pale rose- 
color, is efflorescent, and dissolves in twelve parts of cold water. 
It has been used together with lactate of iron in doses of one grain, 
in chlorosis. 

Phosphate of Manganese. 3MnHP0 4 + 4Aq. 

This salt is prepared by mixing solutions of sulphate of man- 
ganese four parts, and phosphate of sodium five parts, washing the 
precipitated phosphate till the sulphate of sodium is completely 
removed, and drying at a moderate heat. It is a white, nearly in- 
soluble powder, and may be made into pills or lozenges, and given 
in a dose of from one to five grains. 



SYRUP OF MANGANESE. 257 

Syrup of Phosphate of Manganese. 

Take of Sulphate of manganese (in crystals) . . . ^iss, gr. xvij. 

Phosphate of sodium 3iiss or q. s. 

Muriatic acid f 5iv. 

"Water, q. s. to make f^vij. 

Sugar, q. s. to make, with the foregoing . . fgxiiss. 

Dissolve the salts separately, each in half a pint of water, and 
acid the solution of phosphate of sodium to the solution of sul- 
phate of manganese, as long as it produces a precipitate, which 
wash with cold water, and dissolve by means of the muriatic acid; 
dilute till it measures seven fluidounces, then add ten troy ounces 
of sugar, or sufficient to make up the bulk of twelve and a half 
fluidounces. Each f'3j contains five grains of the salt. 

The following have also been occasionally supplied for physi- 
cians' prescriptions. 

Syrup of Hypophosphite of Manganese. 

Take of Sulphate of manganese 240 grains. 

Hyposulphite of calcium 160 " 

Water Sufficient. 

Sugar lhij. 

Orange-flower water f£ss. 

Dissolve the hypophosphite and sulphate in separate portions of 
water and mix ; then wash the precipitate, evaporate the filtrate to 
one pint, dissolve in this the sugar by the aid of heat, and add the 
orange-flower water. Dose, a tablespoonful, containing 2J grains 
of hypophosphite of manganese. 

Syrup of Iodide of Manganese. 

Take of Sulphate of manganese §ij. 

Iodide of potassium £ij, ^iij. 

Sugar 3xij. 

Water, 

Syrup, of each Sufficient. 

Dissolve the sulphate and iodide each in f^iij of cold water, to 
which f 3ij of syrup have been added, mix them in a glass-stop- 
pered bottle, and, after the crystals of sulphate of potassium cease 
to precipitate, throw the solution on a filter of fine muslin, and 
allow it to pass into a pint bottle containing the sugar ; add suffi- 
cient water to the filter to bring up the measure of the resulting 
syrup to exactly a pint. This contains about 3j of the iodide to 
each fsj. Dose, ^i x. {Procter's Process.) 

Process of J. Creuse. 

Take of Iodine 1 troyounce. 

Iron filings 360 grains. 

Peroxide of manganese, washed . . 2 troyounces. 

Warm water q. s. or 6 fluidounces. 

Sulphite of sodium ■ 2 or 3 grains. 

Granulated sugar 9 troycunces. 

Pour the water and the iron filings into a glass matrass ; add the 
17 



1:05 IKON AND MANGANESE. 

iodine in the usual manner for making iodide of iron ; when this 
is completed place the matrass on a sand- or water-bath, and add 
the peroxide of manganese by small portions, as long as a new 
addition causes the liquid to assume a deep-red color, becoming 
light brown by agitation, and bring slowly to ebullition. The 
liquid is then of a light-brown color, due to some free iodine, but 
contains no trace of iron, as may be ascertained by means of tinct. 
of nutgalls. Dissolve the sulphite of soda in a drachm of water, 
add it drop by drop to the liquid till it is dissolved, filter, wash 
the precipitate well, evaporate to five fluidounces, and dissolve in 
it the sugar, so as to obtain ten fluidounces of syrup. 

The syrup of iodide of manganese thus obtained is almost free 
from color, presenting only the characteristic light rosy tint of 
manganese salts. Its taste is saline and not unpleasant. The 
strength of it is the same as that of the officinal syrup of iodide of 
iron, that is, about 7.33 grains of the salt to the fi uidrachm. 

The following equation may explain the chemical reaction: 
3Mn0 2 + 4Fe + 31 = 3MnI + 2Fe 2 3 . But it is in reality more 
complicated than that. When peroxide of manganese is added to 
iodide of iron, some iodide of manganese is formed, some iodine set 
free, and some sesquioxide of iron formed, as this equation shows: 
4FeI + 3Mn0 2 ^= 3MnI -f 2¥efi 3 + I. The liberated iodine com- 
bines then with the excess of metallic iron, forming more iodide 
of iron, which is again decomposed in the same manner by the per- 
oxide of manganese, and so on ad infinitum. This also explains the 
presence to the end of a slight quantity of free iodine ; this quan- 
tity, however, is small, as it requires hardly a grain of the sulphite 
to discolor it. {The Physician and Pharmacist, Feb. 1872.) 

Sypup of Iodide of Iron and Manganese. (Procter.) 

This preparation nearly represents the officinal solution of iodide 
of iron, and is used for the same purposes, and in the same doses. 

Take of Iodide of potassium 1000 grains. 

Protosulpliate of iron 630 grains. 

Protosulphate of manganese 210 grains. 

Iron filings (free from rust) ....... 100 grains. 

White sugar (in coarse powder) 4800 grains. 

Distilled and boiled water q. s. 

Triturate the sulphates and the iodide separately to powder, mix 
them with the iron filings, add half a fluidounce of distilled water, 
and triturate to a uniform paste. After standing a few minutes, 
again add half a fluidounce of distilled water, triturate, and allow 
it to rest fifteen minutes. A third addition of water should now 
be made and mixed. The sugar should then be introduced into a 
bottle capable of holding a little more than twelve fluidounces, and 
a small funnel, prepared with a moistened filter, inserted into its 
mouth. The magma of salts should then be carefully removed 
from the mortar to the filter, and when the dense solution has 
drained through, distilled or boiled water should be carefully 
poured on in small portions, until the solution of the iodides is 



CHLORIDE OF MANGANESE. 259 

displaced and washed from the magma of crystals of sulphate of 
potassium. Finally, finish the measure of twelve ounces by adding 
boiled water, and agitate the bottle until the sugar is dissolved. 
The solution of the sugar may be facilitated, when desirable, by 
standing the bottle in warm water for a time, and then agitating. 

Each'fluidounce of this syrup contains fifty grains of the mixed 
anhydrous iodides in the proportion of three parts of iodide of iron 
to one part of iodide of manganese, and the dose is from ten drops 
to half a iluidrachm. 

For papers on the preparations of manganese and iron, including 
effervescing powders, lozenges, pills, chocolate, and syrup, see 
American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxv. p. 174; also vol. xxii. p. 
297. 

Potassii Permamganas. K 2 Mn 2 8 . (Permanganate of Potassium. 
Chameleon Mineral.) 

This salt, which is sometimes called hypermanganate of potassium, 
may be made by mixing equal parts of very finely-powdered deut- 
oxide of manganese and chlorate of potassium, with rather more 
than an equal part of caustic potassa, dissolving in a little water, 
evaporating to dryness, and exposing to a temperature just short 
of redness. The mass, on treatment with hot water, yields a 
deep purple solution of this salt, which on evaporation crystallizes, 
or, if evaporated to dryness, the salt is obtained as a dark-green 
powder. The crystals are purple, and dissolve in 16 parts of water. 

The uses of this preparation are, internally as a remedy in dia- 
betes, dose three grains three times a day, gradually increased, and 
externally as a caustic and u deodorizer" in treating foul ulcers. 
It is applied in powder, dusted on to the part, or in solution, from 
one to ten grains to the ounce. For the remarkable relations of 
this salt to ozone, and its uses as a deodorizer, see page 131. 

Chloride of Manganese. MnCl 2 4- 2H 2 0=162. 

The residuary liquid obtained in preparing chlorine, by dissolv- 
ing binoxide of manganese in hydrochloric acid, consists of chloride 
of manganese contaminated with sesquichloride of iron; to free it 
of this it should be boiled to expel the excess of the acid, and then 
boiled with a magma of carbonate of manganese, which precipitates 
the whole of the iron salt. 

It crystallizes in thick tables of a rose color, soluble in water and 
alcohol; its medical properties are little known, but probably bear 
relation to those of the sulphate, similar to that of the correspond- 
ing salts of iron. Its dose is five grains. 



260 PREPARATIONS OF COPPER, ZINC, NICKEL, ETC, 



CHAPTER VII. 

preparations of copper, zinc, nickel, and cadmium. 

Cuprum. Cu=63.4. (Copper.) 

The properties of metallic copper are generally familiar; it is 
found native in large masses near the shores of Lake Superior, 
whence the United States are chiefly supplied. It furnishes, by 
oxidation and combination with acids, some important medicines, 
which are also, in excessive doses, corrosive poisons. The best 
antidote is white of egg, milk, or other bland liquid; magnesia 
will aid in the case of sulphate, by decomposing that salt. Copper 
is apt to contaminate stewed fruit, from the use of copper vessels 
in their preparation; it may be detected by immersing a clean 
spatula in the suspected liquid, which deposits a film of metallic 
copper. 

Reactions. — The presence of copper is also detected by the follow- 
ing reactions of the solutions of its oxide. 

Potassa causes a blue precipitate, and its carbonate a pale green, 
soluble in an excess of the precipitant in the presence of some 
organic bodies. If grape sugar is present the clear solution on 
boiling precipitates red suboxide of copper. 

Ammonia precipitates them greenish, an excess redissolves the 
precipitate with a beautiful blue color. 

Sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphuret of ammonium produce a 
black or deep brown precipitate, soluble in N0 3 . 

Iodide of potassium causes a white precipitate of Cu 2 I; free iodine 
is liberated at the same time. 

Ferrocyanide of potassium causes a brown-red precipitate soluble 
in alkalies. 

Copper Preparations. 

Cupri sulphas, CuS0 4 + 5H 2 0. Blue vitriol. Dose, tonic, \ gr., emet, gr. v. 
Cupri carbonas, CuC0 3 -}- CuO,HO. Pale green color. Dose, gr. v. 
Cupri ozidum, CuO. Black color. Dose, £ to 1 gr. 

Cupri nitras, Cu2N0 3 + 3H a 0. Blue deliquescent crystals. Dose, •§- to £ gr. 
Cupri chloridum, CuCl + 2H 2 0. Green soluble needles. Dose, T X g- to i gr. 
Cuprum ammoniatum, CuS0 4 -J- H 2 0,2NH 4 . Blue amorphous moist powder, or pris- 
matic crystals. 
Cupri subacetas, Cu 2 02Ac -|- 6H 2 0. Verdigris ; amorphous green masses. Externally 
Cupri acetas, Cu2Ac. " Distilled verdigris" crystals. Neutral acetate. 
Cuprum aluminatum. Lapis divinus. 

Cupri Sulphas. CuS0 4 +5H 2 0= 124.4. {Blue Vitriol. Blue Stone.) 

Four methods are in use for obtaining this salt. 1st. By evapo- 
rating the waters which flow through copper mines, and which 



CUPRI OXIDUM. 261 

hold it in solution. 2d. Roasting copper pyrites, lixiviating the 
residuum to dissolve the sulphate, and evaporating so as to obtain 
crystals. The S of the pyrites abstracts from the air, and becomes 
S0 4 , and the Cu uniting forms sulphate of copper. 3d. Another 
mode is to sprinkle plates of copper with sulphur, which are next 
heated to redness and plunged into water; the sheets are entirely 
corroded; a sulphuret is formed, which, by the action of heat and 
air, gradually passes into a sulphate ; this is dissolved in water, and 
crystals obtained by evaporation. 4th. By dissolving the scales, 
obtained in the process of annealing sheet copper, in diluted sul- 
phuric acid, evaporating, and crystallizing. The salt is in large, 
rhombic, blue crystals, with a styptic metallic taste; it contains 
&ve equivalents of water. It effloresces slightly in dry air; soluble 
in water, precipitated by ammonia, but redissolved in an excess, 
forming a rich blue solution. The impurities contained in it, when 
in crystals, seldom affect its value as a medicine. 

Sulphate of copper is much used as a tonic and astringent (dose gr. 
I to gr. J), and as a prompt and powerful emetic in five-grain doses; 
as an injection in gonorrhoea, etc., it is dissolved in water in the pro- 
portion of 2 to 8 grains to f^j. A crystal, polished by trituration 
on a damp cloth, is applied as an astringent to inflamed or gran- 
ulated eyelids, and to the troublesome ulceration of the mouth 
which is so common. This method of modifying the shape and 
surface of this crystal is quite preferable to scraping it with a knife. 
The crystals, deprived of their water of crystallization by drying, 
are used to detect water in alcoholic solutions; the slightest trace 
of water giving a blue color to the cupreous powder. 

Tests. — If sulphate of copper contains iron, its precipitate with 
ammonia leaves a brown residue on being dissolved in an excess of 
the precipitant. 

Zinc is detected by the white precipitate produced by sulphuretted 
hydrogen in a solution previously precipitated by potassa. 

Capri Carbonas. CuC0 3 + CuO,HO. {Hydrated Subcarbonate of 
Copper. Mineral Green.) 

Sulphate of copper is precipitated by carbonate of sodium; the 
precipitate is a pale green tasteless powder, which is to be washed 
and dried at a moderate temperature. 

It has been used in neuralgia in doses amounting to about one 
drachm (?) in twenty-four hours. 

It is wholly soluble in muriatic acid; the solution yields no pre- 
cipitate with chloride of barium. 

Cupri Oxidum. CuO = 79.4. 

If the carbonate or the nitrate of copper is heated to redness, 
until it ceases to lose weight, the salt is converted into the prot- 
oxide, which is of a fine black color. 

This oxide, which is also much employed in elementary organic 
analysis, has been recommended in preference to the carbonate in 



262 PREPARATIONS OF COPPER, ZINC, NICKEL, ETC. 

doses of one-quarter to one grain three or four times a day, and for 
indurated glands, in ointments containing one drachm to the 
ounce. 

It is wholly soluble in dilute muriatic acid, and the solution, 
after precipitating the copper by sulphuretted hydrogen, and filter- 
ing, leaves no residue on evaporation. 

Cupri Nitras. Cu2N0 3 + 3H 2 = 241.5. 

Nitrate of copper is obtained by dissolving copper, its oxide or 
carbonate, in nitric acid, and evaporating to crystallization, when 
it crystallizes in deep blue prisms, which are deliquescent and solu- 
ble in alcohol. Dissolved in mucilaginous liquids it Las been given 
in doses of one-eighth grain; it is used locally as an injection in 
gonorrhoea and similar complaints. In substance or in concentrated 
solution it has been employed as a caustic in ulcerated throat, in 
syphilis, etc.; from the deliquescent nature of the salt, care is 
necessary to prevent its spreading. 

The solution yields no precipitate with nitrate of barium (SOJ, 
nitrate of silver (HC1), sulphuric or muriatic acids (lead, etc.). 

Cupri Chloridum. CuCl 2 = 99. 

Muriatic acid dissolves oxide or carbonate of copper; the solution 
by evaporation yields green needles, which are easily soluble in 
alcohol and water. 

It has been occasionally used as a powerful alterative in doses 
commencing with T ' g grain. 

Cuprum Ammoniatum. CuS0 4 ,H 2 0,2NE 4 . {Ammoniated Copper. 
Ammonio-Sulphate of Copper^) 

Sulphate of copper, half a troy ounce, and carbonate of ammonium, 
six drachms, are rubbed together in a glass mortar until effervescence 
ceases; the ammoniated copper is wrapped in bibulous paper, and 
dried with a gentle heat. When thus rubbed together, these salts 
give out part of their water of crystallization, by which the mix- 
ture becomes moist, and, at the same time, a portion of the carbonic 
acid of the sesquicarbonate escapes, producing effervescence, and 
the compound assumes a deep azure blue color; it should be kept in 
a well-stopped bottle. 

Its composition, as thus prepared, may be stated as above, with 
a variable excess of carbonate of ammonium. A salt of the above 
composition is obtained in beautiful blue crystals from a solution 
of sulphate of copper, precipitated and redissolved by ammonia; if 
alcohol is poured over the surface and set aside the water is gradu- 
ally abstracted by the alcohol and the salt crystallizes. 

It may be considered pure if it has the proper color, and dissolves 
in twice its weight of water without residue. 

Ammoniated'copper is regarded as a tonic and antispasmodic. 
It is occasionally prescribed in combination with assafoetida in pill. 
Dose, \ gr. repeated. 



zincum. 263 

Cupri Subacetas. {JErugo. Impure Subacetate of Copper. Verdigris.) 

Made by exposing copper plates to the action of the fermenting 
refuse of the wine-press, or to pyroligneous acid, when this salt 
forms on the surface. 

It is obtained in powder, or amorphous masses, or consisting of 
very minute crystals, of variable color, with a peculiar metallic 
odor, and styptic metallic taste; it is resolved by water into a solu- 
ble neutral acetate, and insoluble tris-acetate; when treated with 
sulphuric acid it gives off acetic acid fumes; from the solution, 
ammonia precipitates the oxide, but redissolves it when in excess. 

Verdigris, as it occurs in commerce, is of variable composition 
and shade of color. The light green appears to be a mixture of 
various basic salts, while that of a greenish-blue color has the com- 
position Cu o 02Ac + 6H 2 (Berzelius). It is used exclusively in the 
shape of ointment. 

Verdigris ought to be nearly soluble in dilute acetic acid, and 
the solution, if precipitated by ammonia, must be wholly taken up 
by the excess of it. 

Cupri Acetas. Cu2Ac. {Neutral Acetate of Copper.) 

The neutral acetate is prepared by dissolving the above in dilute 
acetic acid and evaporating to crystallization. It is met with in 
commerce under the name of distilled verdigris, and occurs in dark 
green crystals, soluble in 5 parts of boiling water. Rademacher 
uses a tincture of this salt prepared by double decomposition from 
3 ounces sulphate of copper, and 3f ounces acetate of lead, to 30 
ounces (weight) diluted alcohol. But it is scarcely ever prescribed. 

Cuprum Aluminatum. {Lapis Divinus. Lapis Ophthalmicus St. Yves.) 

The European Pharmacopoeias have a preparation under this name 
and synonyms, and the Prussian Pharmacopoeia directs sulphate of 
copper, nitrate of potassium, and alum, of each two ounces, to be 
fused by a moderate heat in a copper or earthen vessel, and after 
mixing in one drachm powdered camphor, the mass is poured out 
upon a cold slab and kept in well-stoppered bottles. It is used 
externally, frequently in solution as an astringent eye-wash. 

Zincum. Zn=65. (Zinc.) 

This metal occurs in nature in two principal forms: as a sul- 
phuret, blende, and as a carbonate or silicate, calamine, from which 
the metal is extracted, by distilling them with carbonaceous matters. 
The purest zinc found in commerce is that produced in Bethlehem, 
Pennsylvania, from the native ore, found in great abundance in 
that vicinity. 

It is a bluish-white crystalline metal, soluble in dilute hydro- 
chloric and sulphuric acids, with evolution of hydrogen, also in 
nitric acid; melted and dropped into water, it constitutes gran- 



264 PREPARATIONS OF 

ulated zinc. It is used in pharmacy for the preparation of the sul- 
phate, acetate, and chloride, which are officinal, and other salts. 

From its salts, oxide of zinc is precipitated by alkalies and their 
carbonates, white, soluble in an excess of alkali. Sulphuretted 
hydrogen, from neutral or alkaline solutions, white. Sulphuret of 
ammonium, white; the last two are insoluble in alkalies, soluble in 
acids. Ferrocyanide of potassium, white, insoluble in dilute HC1. 

Preparations of Zinc. 

Calamina. Native, impure carbonate of zinc. A gray, coarse powder. 

Tulia. A product of smelting lead ores containing zinc. Slate colored. 

Zinci sulphas, ZnS0 4 -f- 7H 2 0. Small, white, efflorescent crystals. Emetic, gr. x. 

Zinci carbonas praecipitata, ZnC0 3 ,2ZnH 2 2 (?) A pure white, very light powder. 

Zinci oxidum, ZnO. A pure white powder, not effervescing with acids. 

Zinci acetas, Zn2Ac-f- 2H 2 0. Micaceous, freely soluble crystals. 

Zinci chloridum, ZnCl 2 . White, translucent plates or masses. Very deliquescent. 

Zinci cyanidum, ZnCy 2 . White powder, insoluble, poisonous. Gr. £ to j. 

Zinci ferrocyanidum, Zn 2 FeCy 6 . 

Zinci iodidum, Znl 2 . White, deliquescent, caustic. 

Zinci lactas, Zn2L-f- 6H 2 0. White, styptic crystals or plates. 

Zinci phosphidum, Zt> 3 P 2 . 

Zinci valerianas, ZnVa. White, pearly scales, soluble in alcohol. Dose, gr. j to ij. 

Calamina. (Calamine. Native Impure Carbonate of Zinc.) 

This mineral is found abundantly in Germany, England, and the 
United States. It is, however, as recently procured, very impure, 
and seldom contains a considerable proportion of carbonate of zinc. 
For use, it must be brought to the condition of an impalpable 
powder, when it constitutes calamina prceparata (of the former 
Pharmacopoeias). 

It is in the form of a pinkish or gray powder, of an earthy ap- 
pearance. It should be almost entirely soluble in sulphuric acid, 
and the precipitate thrown down by ammonia and potassa should 
be redissolved by these reagents. The calcination of calamine 
drives off a quantity of C0 2 and water, so that little remains except 
oxide of zinc and earthy impurities. The precipitated carbonate 
or oxide of zinc may be substituted with advantage. 

It is only used externally as a dusting powder and exsiccant, or 
in the form of cerate as a mild astringent. 

Tutia. {Impure Oxide of Zinc. Tutty.) 

This oxide is formed during the smelting of lead ores containing 
zinc ; it is, as I have seen it, usually in little nodules, like those of 
prepared chalk, of a bluish or slate color. It is said to be much 
adulterated, some specimens factitious, and is very properly re- 
placed by the officinal oxide of zinc. 

Zinci Sulphas. ZnS0 4 4- 7H 2 0= 287. (Sulphate of Zinc. White 

Vitriol.) 

Prepared by dissolving zinc in dilute sulphuric acid, evaporating, 
and crystallizing. Water is decomposed in the presence of the acid 



PRECIPITATED CARBONATE OF ZINC. 265 

and metal, hydrogen is liberated, the zinc oxidized, and the oxide 
formed combines with the sulphuric acid. 

A cheaper process lately practised in the U. S. A. Laboratory 
consists in dissolving zinc white, a nearly pure oxide of zinc, in 
dilute sulphuric acid and crystallizing. 

Usually in small, four-sided colorless prisms of the same form as 
sulphate of magnesia, possessing a disagreeable, metallic, styptic 
taste, soluble in 2J times their weight of water, insoluble in alcohol, 
slightly efflorescent, precipitated, and again redissolved by am- 
monia. "When heated, it dissolves in its water of crystallization, 
and by prolonged ignition, the acid is all expelled, and oxide of 
zinc is left. Six equivalents of water are expelled at 212° F., one 
equivalent remaining as constitutional water. A hydrate contain- 
ing only 2 equivalents of water is precipitated as a white powder, 
when a concentrated solution of sulphate of zinc is mixed with 
sulphuric acid. (Kuhn.) 

Iron is detected by a bluish precipitate with ferrocyanuret of 
potassium ; copper by the dark precipitate with sulphuretted hy- 
drogen; magnesia by the residue left on dissolving it in caustic 
potassa. 

In small doses this salt acts as an astringent and tonic; in large 
doses, as a quick, direct emetic; externally, as a powerful astringent. 
It is used as a tonic chiefly in diseases affecting the nervous system, 
and when gradually increased, tolerance soon becomes established; 
sometimes it is given as an astringent in chronic passive discharges. 
As an emetic, it is used when the rapid emptying of the stomach 
is desired without the production of much depression, as in narcotic 
poisoning. Externally, in solutions of different strengths, it is em- 
ployed as a lotion or injection, in ophthalmia, gleet, etc. 

Dose, gr. ss to ij in pill. As an emetic, gr. x. The strength of 
a solution for external employment may be from gr. j to x to fsj 
water. 

Zinci Carbonas Prcecipitata. ZnC0 3 ,2ZnH 2 2 ? {Precipitated 
Carbonate of Zinc.) 

Solutions of carbonate of sodium and sulphate of zinc, equal 
parts, are mixed together; and double decomposition takes place; 
sulphate of sodium is formed in solution, and carbonate of zinc is 
precipitated as a white flocculent powder, resembling magnesia; it 
should be frequently washed till the washings are tasteless; the 
powder is dried by a gentle beat. It must be wholly soluble in 
diluted acids ; impurities are then detected as with oxide. Chemists 
disagree in regard to its composition; that stated above agrees with 
some of the best authorities. 

Uses same as those of calamine. In the form of the officinal 
cerate, it is much used as a dressing for burns. 

Zinci Oxidum. ZnO=81. (Oxide of Zinc. Flowers of Zinc.) 

This is made by exposing the precipitated carbonate to a low 
red heat, by which C0 2 is driven off, and the residue is the oxide 



2bD PREPARATIONS OF COPPER, ZINC, NICKEL, ETC. 

of zinc, or by the combustion of the metal in a stoneware crucible, 
collecting the oxide as it ascends, or a hydrate may be obtained 
by precipitating a soluble salt with a caustic alkali. 

In the solution in nitric acid, the following impurities may be 
detected : — 

Lead or copper, by a black precipitate with sulphuretted hydro- 
gen; cadmium, tin, antimony, or arsenic by a yellowish precipitate 
by the same reagent; earthy oxides, by the white precipitate with 
carbonate of ammonium, insoluble in an excess of the precipitant; 
sulphuric and muriatic acids, by barium and silver salts; iron, by 
a bluish precipitate with ferrocyanide of potassium. 

It is a white or yellowish-white powder, becoming yellow at a 
high heat, and recovering its whiteness on cooling, without odor or 
taste; insoluble in water, but soluble in diluted hydrochloric and 
other acids without effervescence, and in ammonia and potassa. 

Oxide of zinc is a tonic, especially to the nervous system ; also 
somewhat astringent; used in chorea, epilepsy, and neuralgia. 
Locally, it is slightly astringent and desiccant, and constitutes an 
excellent application to excoriated surfaces, and to chapped or 
cracked nipples. An ointment of oxide of zinc is officinal. 

Zinci Acetas. Zn2Ac + 2H 2 0= 219. (Acetate of Zinc.) 

It may be procured in either of the following ways : 1. By dis- 
solving oxide of zinc in acetic acid, and crystallizing the saturated 
solution. 2. By double decomposition between a solution of sul- 
phate of zinc and a solution of acetate of lead. 3. The officinal 
process, granulated zinc six, is added to a solution of oxij of acetate 
of lead in water Oiij, and agitated occasionally till no precipitate 
is formed on the addition of iodide of potassium. The familiar 
experiment of forming the " zinc," or lead-tree, leaves this salt in 
solution. In concentrating the solution to one-fifth its bulk, pre- 
viously to crystallizing, a little of the acetic acid is apt to be dissi- 
pated, and should be replaced by dropping in a small excess of the 
acid. 

Should the crystals be discolored they should be dissolved, the 
solution heated to ebullition, and successive portions of freshly 
precipitated carbonate of zinc dropped in until the liquid filters 
colorless; it may then be acidulated with acetic acid and again set 
aside to crystallize. 

When carefully crystallized, it is in the form of very handsome 
pearl}' or silky hexagonal crystals, which effloresce in a dry air. 
As found in commerce, it is sometimes in white micaceous scales; 
very soluble in water, moderately soluble in alcohol, and has an 
astringent metallic taste. When heated, it fuses and gives out an 
inflammable vapor, having the odor of acetic acid ; the mineral 
acids decompose it with the liberation of acetic acid vapors. 

It is used as a topical remedy, in the form of collyrium, in oph- 
thalmia, and as an injection in gonorrhoea, gleet, leucorrhcea, etc. 



ZINCI CHLOKIDUM. 267 

Liquor Zinci Chloridum. ZnCl 2 =136. (Solution of Chloride of Zinc. 

Butter of Zinc.) 

Take of Zinc, in small pieces, six troyounces. 
Citric acid (sp. gr. 1.42), 

Precipitated carbonate of zinc, each, one hundred and sixty grains. 
Muriatic acid, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

To the zinc, in a glass or porcelain vessel, add gradually suffi- 
cient muriatic acid to dissolve it; then strain, add the nitric acid, 
and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the dry mass in water, add the 
precipitated carbonate of zinc, and agitate the mixture occasionally 
during twenty-four hours, then filter through paper, adding enough 
distilled water through the filter to make the liquid measure a pint. 

This beautiful preparation is well prepared by the above process 
of the Pharmacopoeia. The chloride of zinc being first formed by 
the action of the muriatic acid on the metal, the next step is to 
separate the iron derived from the muriatic acid and from the 
zinc ; this is done by the use of nitric acid, which peroxidizes the 
iron, and, on evaporation to dryness, dissolving, treating with pre- 
cipitated carbonate of zinc, and filtering, the peroxide is left behind. 

Zinci Chloridum, IT. S. P. 
Take of Solution of chloride of zinc, a convenient quantity. 

Evaporate the solution to dryness in an evaporating dish, fuse 
the dry mass, pour the liquid on a flat stone, and when it has con- 
gealed break the mass into pieces, and keep the fragments in a well- 
stopped bottle. 

A white deliquescent salt, wholly soluble in water, alcohol, and 
ether. Its aqueous solution yields, with nitrate of silver, a white 
precipitate, insoluble in nitric acid. It forms white precipitates 
with ferrocyanide of potassium and hydrosulphate of ammonium. 

The final concentration of the liquid requires care, as, by pushing 
the heat too far, the chloride is decomposed, and contaius a portion 
of insoluble subchloride or oxide; on the other hand, care must be 
taken to free it entirely of water, otherwise it will not harden into 
solid and dry masses. The proper point is ascertained by dipping 
into it a glass rod, on which it should thicken into a hard, dry con- 
dition. The mass, in its fused condition, is poured on to a dry 
marble slab, and, when nearly cool, is broken into fragments, 
and put immediately into dry salt-mouth bottles, usually of 3j 
capacity. 

A mixture of chloride, with a sufficient quantity of oxide of 
zinc, forms a good filling for teeth, becoming very hard by time. 

It is used as a powerful escharotic, and as a remedy for tooth- 
ache. In solution, it is an antiseptic, especially adapted to dissect- 
ing-room purposes ; it is convenient to employ a solution of zinc in 
muriatic acid, without either purifying or concentrating it. 

The following solution is a good antiseptic for this purpose : — 



268 PREPARATIONS OF COPPER, ZINC, NICKEL, ETC. 

Take of Zinc ft iv. 

Hydrochloric acid ft> iv or q. s. 

Water 9 quarts. 

Dissolve, avoiding excess of acid. The solution contains about 
one part of chloride of zinc in twelve. 

Zinci Cyanidum. ZnCy 2 = 119. (Cyanuret of Zinc.) 

Prepared by double decomposition between solutions of cyanide 
of potassium and sulphate of zinc, or by conducting gaseous hy- 
drocyanic acid into a solution of acetate of zinc. The latter is the 
better process. 

It is a brilliant white powder, insoluble in water, soluble in 
dilute mineral acids ; it is tasteless and inodorous, but, when tritu- 
rated, the odor of prussic acid is given off. 

It combines the properties of hydrocyanic acid with those of 
zinc, and has been used in epilepsy, chorea, and similar diseases, in 
doses of one-half to one grain. 

It is wholly soluble in muriatic acid, precipitated white by car- 
bonate of ammonium, dissolved again in an excess ; and in this 
solution no precipitate is caused by phosphate of sodium ; a white 
precipitate by sulphuret of hydrogen. 

Zinci Ferrocyanidum. (Ferrocyanuret of Zinc. Zn 2 FeCy 6 .) 

This salt has sometimes been mistaken for the cyanide of zinc, 
and care is necessary to distinguish them, as the cyanide is poison- 
ous in the medicinal doses of the ferrocyanide. This is prepared 
by precipitating sulphate of zinc by ferrocyanide of potassium. 

It is a white powder, similar in appearance to the former but 
little soluble in boiling muriatic acid. It has been used in similar 
complaints in doses of two grains and more. 

It may be considered pure if it is of a purely white color, and 
yields nothing to cold muriatic acid. 

Zinci Iodidum. Znl 2 = 319. 

Two parts iodine, one part zinc, and four parts water, are digested 
until the color of iodine has disappeared ; after filtration, it is 
evaporated until, when poured upon a cold slab, it hardens ; a little 
iodine has then been expelled. 

It is in white, very deliquescent pieces, forming a turbid solution 
with water and alcohol. It should be wholly soluble in carbonate 
of ammonium. 

It is caustic and poisonous, and used only topically in aqueous 
solution, or in ointments, containing gr. xv to xxx to the ounce. 

Zinci Lactas. Zn2L + 6II 2 = 351. (Lactate of Zinc.) 

The lactate is prepared by dissolving carbonate of zinc in lactic 
acid, or by double decomposition between hot concentrated solu- 
tions of lactate of potassium or calcium and chloride of zinc. 

It crystallizes in four-sided prisms, of an acid reaction, and a 



CADMIUM. 269 

sour styptic taste ; they require 58 parts of cold water for solution, 
and are nearly soluble in alcohol. 

It is used in epilepsy in doses of two grains three times a day, 
gradually increasing the dose. 

Zinci Phosphidum. Zn 3 P 2 = 257. 

Tliis is to he prepared, according to Proust, by passing a mixture 
of phosphide of hydrogen and nitrogen through a porcelain tube, 
heated to redness, containing a porcelain tray upon which is placed 
metallic zinc. The nitrogen is obtained by heating a mixture of 
chloride of ammonium and nitrate of potassium, and the phos- 
phide of hydrogen from phosphide of calcium and muriatic acid. 
It is spongy or crystalline, with vitreous fracture, easily pulveri- 
zable, and gives off phosphide of hydrogen by contact with acids. 
The nitrogen counteracts the inflammability of the phosphide of 
hydrogen in the process. 

Zinci Valerianas. ZnVa = 166. ( Valerianate of Zinc.) 

Prepared by decomposing two troy ounces and seven drachms of 
sulphate of zinc with two and a half troyounces of valerianate of 
sodium in solution at 212° F. On evaporation, crystals of the 
valerianate collect on the surface, and are skimmed off, washed 
with cold water to separate adhering sulphate of sodium, and dried; 
a second evaporation secures a second crop of crystals. 

The salt is in pearly scales with a faint valerian odor, astringent 
metallic taste; soluble in 160 parts of water, and in 60 of alcohol 
of sp. gr. .833. Its solutions have an acid reaction, and become 
turbid when heated and clear again on cooling. "When the salt is 
distilled with sulphuric acid, the distillate added to a concentrated 
solution of acetate of copper does not disturb its transparency. 

It is a good deal prescribed, perhaps as much so as any other salt 
of valerianic acid, being adapted to a variety of nervous affections. 
Dose, gr. j to ij in pill, repeated at intervals. 

Cadmium. Cd = 112. 

Cadmium is a rare metal which usually accompanies the zinc 
ores ; it was discovered in 1817 as an impurity in medicinal prepa- 
rations of zinc. It has a white tin color, a high metallic lustre, is 
very malleable, and oxidizes slowly in the air : its specific gravity 
is 8.6. Its salts are isomorphous with the corresponding salts of 
zinc. Its compound with oxygen is oxide of cadmium, CdO=128. 

Tests for Oxide of Cadmium. — Sulphuretted hydrogen and sul- 
phuret of ammonium cause a bright yellow precipitate, insoluble 
in an excess ; ammonia a white precipitate, easily soluble in excess; 
potassa and the alkaline carbonates a white insoluble precipitate ; 
zinc precipitates the metal. The compounds of cadmium when 
mixed with oxalate of potassium and exposed to the inner flame 
of the blowpipe, produce a brownish-yellow incrustation without 
any metallic globules. 



270 preparations of copper, zinc, nickel, etc. 
Preparations of Cadmium. 

Cadmii sulphas, CdS0 4 -f-4H 2 0. Colorless crystals, soluble in water. 
Cadmiv iodtdum, Cdl 2 . Soluble in alcohol and water. 

Sulphate of Cadmium. CdS0 4 + 4H 2 0= 280. 

The metal cadmium is dissolved in nitric acid diluted with an 
equal bulk of water, by the aid of heat; carbonate of sodium is then 
added (three parts to two of the N0 4 used), which precipitates the 
carbonate of cadmium; this is washed until the water passes taste- 
less, and dissolved in sulphuric acid diluted with water; it is then 
evaporated and set aside to crystallize. 

Sulphate of cadmium is in colorless, prismatic crystals, efflorescent 
in the air, and very soluble in water. Its solution, even when 
rendered decidedly acid, yields, on the addition of hydrosulphate 
of ammonium, a yellow precipitate, insoluble in an excess of the 
precipitant. 

It is used almost exclusively in nervous and inflammatory diseases 
of the eye and ear, in solutions containing a grain to an ounce or 
two of rose-water, or in ointments, about five grains to a drachm 
of ointment; for injections to the ear, somewhat stronger. 

Iodide of Cadmium. Cdl 2 = 366. 

This salt has been proposed as a substitute for iodide of lead, 
the intense yellow color of which is sometimes objectionable, as 
liable to discolor the skin. It is prepared by dissolving iodine with 
granulated cadmium under water, and evaporating the solution, 
when the salt crystallizes in colorless six-sided tabular crystals, 
soluble in alcohol and water, and fusible on the application of heat. 
It is extensively used in photography. 

C. L. Heinitsh, of Lancaster, proposes an ointment containing 3j 
of the salt to 3J of lard, perfumed with oil of neroli. He triturates 
the iodide with 20 drops of ether till in fine powder, then mixes 
with the lard. 

Nickel. lN"i = 58. 

This is a metal obtained from an ore of arsenic found in West- 
phalia. It is fixed in the fire, and is hence left behind after the 
distillation of arsenic, and when purified is found in commerce as a 
white, hard, malleable magnetic metal, capable of receiving a lustre 
rivalling silver, sp. gr. 8.82; it is not oxidized by the air, and is 
little attacked by acids, except in the presence of nitric acid, which 
dissolves it freely ; it forms two oxides, a proto and sesquioxide, 
the medicinal sulphate being a salt of the protoxide; the protosalts 
are all of a green color. 

Nickel is recognized by the following tests: Caustic alkalies give 
a pale apple-green precipitate, insoluble in excess, but soluble m 
solution of carbonate of ammonium, yielding a greenish- blue liquid. 
Ammonia gives a similar precipitate, soluble in excess, and yielding 



PROTOXIDE OF COBALT. 271 

a deep purplish-blue solution. Ferrocyanide of potassium gives a 
greenish-white precipitate. Sulphuretted hydrogen occasions no 
change in solutions of nickel containing free mineral acids, but in 
alkaline solutions gives a black precipitate. 

Niccoli Sulphas. {Sulphate of Nickel JS T iS0 4 + 711,0= 280.) 

This salt is formed by dissolving carbonate or oxide of nickel in 
dilate sulphuric acid, and gently concentrating by evaporation so 
that crystals may form. 

It is in emerald-green prismatic crystals, efflorescent, soluble in 3 
parts of cold water, insoluble in alcohol and ether. It has a sweet, 
astringent taste, composition £Ti,S0 4 -l-7Aq; crystallized at a higher 
temperature it contains only 6Aq. 

This salt is used as a tonic. Prof. Simpson employed it success- 
fully in a case of obstinate periodic headache. The dose is from J 
grain to 1 grain, three times a day, given in the form of pill or 
simple solution. 

Cobalt. Co=60. 

This metal is found, like the foregoing, in ores of arsenic, and 
the crude mineral, sold as fly-stone by druggists, appears to be an 
ore containing cobalt and arsenic. The metal itself is white, brittle, 
strongly magnetic, unchanged in the air, feebly acted on by dilute 
hydrochloric and sulphuric acids. 

Solutions of the salts of cobalt are known as follows: Solution of 
ammonia gives a blue precipitate, slightly soluble in excess, with a 
brownish-red color. Solution of potassa a blue precipitate, turning 
to violet and red when the liquor is heated. Sulphuretted hydrogen 
produces no change in acid solutions, but with ammonia gives a 
black precipitate. Melted with borax before the blowpipe, it gives 
a bead of magnificent blue color. 

Protoxide of Cobalt. CoO=76. 

This is the only compound used in medicine; it is a powder of 
an ash-gray color, and has been employed as a remedy in rheuma- 
tism. It is formed by precipitation from the nitrate or chloride 
with carbonate of sodium, washing and i^nitincr. Its chief use is 
in forming beautiful blue colors in glass, enamels, etc, Its dose as 
an emetic is 10 grains, as an alterative much less. 



272 OK LEAD, SILVER, BISMUTH. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ON LEAD, SILVER, BISMUTH. 

Plumbum. Pb=207. (Lead.) 

Metallic lead is not used in medicine, nor is it officinal for use 
in preparing any of its salts. It is abundantly diffused in the form 
of galena, a native sulplmret, which is extensively worked in this 
country for the production of the metal. Exposed for a long time 
to its influence, individuals exhibit symptoms of slow poisoning, 
called lead colic. In over-doses its salts are poisons. 

Lead is a soft bluish-colored metal, very malleable and fusible; 
its properties are familiar to most. It forms live oxides, of which 
the one most important in a pharmaceutical point of view is the 
protoxide. 

The lead salts show the following reactions: — 

A brown or black precipitate by sulphuretted hydrogen and sul- 
phuret of ammonium; a white precipitate by muriatic acid and 
soluble chlorides, soluble in much w T ater; a yellow precipitate by 
iodide of potassium, soluble in boiling solutions of alkaline chlo- 
rides and iodides; a yellow precipitate by chromate of potassium, 
scarcely soluble in dilute nitric acid ; a gray metallic precipitate by 
tin and zinc; a white precipitate by ferrocyanuret of potassium. 

Preparations oe Lead. 

Plumbi oxidum (litharge), PbO. Yellow or reddish flakes or powder. 
Emplastrum plumbi. See fixed oils, also plasters. 
Plumbi oxidum rubrum, Pb 3 4 . Red lead. Bright red powder. 
Plumbi acetas, Pb2Ac -j- 3H 2 0. Matted, acicular crystals, whitish by efflorescence. 
Liquor plumbi subacetatis, Pb 2 OAc in Aq. A clear heavy liquid, depositing white car- 
bonate. 
Liquor plumbi subacet. dilutus. f5"j liq. plumb, subacet. to Oj. 
Plumbi carbonas 2(PbC0 3 )-f- Pb2HO ? A heavy, white, opaque powder. 
Plumbi nitras, Pb2N0 3 . White crystals, soluble in water, disinfectant. 
Plumbi iodidum, Pbl 2 . A bright yellow amorphous powder, used in ointment. 
Plumbi chloridum, PbCl 2 . Flat needle-shaped crystals, used externally. 
Plumbi tannas (cataplasma ad decubitum). 

Plumbi Oxidum Semivitreum. PbO = 223. (Semivitrified Oxide of 

Lead. Litharge.) 

This, which is a common variety of protoxide of lead (PbO), is 
generally obtained as a secondary product in the cupellation of 
argentiferous galenas, when the oxide becomes fused or semivitri- 
fied, and is driven off in hard particles of a scaly texture. English 
litharge is the best. 



SUGAR OF LEAD. Zid 

It is in the form of small red or orange-red scales, devoid of smell 
or taste ; soluble, or almost entirely so, in dilute nitric acid. It is 
occasionally contaminated with iron and copper, and contains a 
little carbonic acid. If carbonate of lead is present, effervescence 
takes place with dilute nitric acid ; this solution has a green color 
if copper, and a yellow or brownish color if iron is present. 

It is chiefly used for its effect on fixed oils, with which it com- 
bines, and hence occasions paint, to which it is added, to dry and 
harden rapidly. (See Emplastrum Plumbi.) 

Plumbi Oxidum Rubrum. Pb.0 4 =685. (Red Lead. Minium.) 

The yellow protoxide of lead, which is commercially known by 
the name of massicot, and which differs from litharge in its mode 
of preparation and properties, though similar in composition, is in- 
troduced into a reverberatory furnace, there calcined for 48 hours, 
heated to redness, and allowed to cool slowly. Or the hot massicot 
is cooled by being sprinkled with water, and after levigation heated 
in closed tin boxes to redness ; the slower the product is allowed to 
cool, the finer will be the color. 

It is a heavy scaly powder of a bright red color, which appears 
yellow when rubbed upon paper. Before the blowpipe upon char- 
coal it is wholly reduced to the metallic state ; exposed to the light 
it is blackened somewhat, by being partially reduced. 

Its chief use is as a red paint ; it enters into the composition of 
a few ancient plasters. (See Emplastra.) 

Plumbi Acetas. Pb2Ac -f 3Aq= 325. (Saccharum Saturni. 
Sugar of Lead.) 

Made by dissolving litharge in acetic acid, evaporating the solu- 
tion, and crystallizing; also by the direct action of vinegar upon 
sheets of lead partially exposed to the air, so as to become oxidized, 
when, the oxide being dissolved in the acid, the salt may be obtained 
in spongy masses composed of interlaced acicular crystals, possess- 
ing an acetic odor and a sweet metallic taste; exposed to the air it 
effloresces slightly, is soluble in twice its weight of cold water, and 
less of boiling water, communicating a turbidness to the solution 
from taking up C0 2 , which water generally holds ; this turbidness 
may be removed by the addition of a little acetic acid or vinegar. 

It is precipitated as a white carbonate by carbonate of sodium ; 
a yellow iodide by iodide of potassium, and a black sulphuret by 
sulphuretted hydrogen. It is also incompatible with all acids, and 
with numerous soluble salts. If sugar of lead contains iron, fer- 
rocyanide of potassium will cause a bluish precipitate; if copper is 
present, the precipitate will have a reddish color. 

Sugar of lead is very extensively employed, both internally and 
externally. It ranks as a sedative astringent, checking morbid dis- 
charges, diminishing the natural secretions, and is capable by 
various combinations of filling a variety of indications in disease. 
One of the chief uses of this salt is as an ingredient in preparations 
18 



274 02T LEAD, SILVER, BISMUTH. 

for the hair which are designed to produce a gradual change of 
color, while by its astringency, it promotes the healthy and in- 
creased growth of the hair. The too free use of these applications 
' is believed to have produced serious cephalic diseases. Dose, gr. ss 
to iij in pill, care being taken not to induce its poisonous effects. 
Externally, it is used in solution from gr. j to gr. viij to f t lj as a 
sedative, astringent, and desiccant to inflamed parts. 

Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis, IT. S. P. Pb 2 OAc in Aq= 491. (Solution 
of Diacetate of Lead. ■ Goulard's Extract Strong Lead Water.) 

Reduced. 

Take of Acetate of lead ^vxj ^ij. 

Semi vitrified oxide of lead, in fine powder . 5 ixss gixss. 
Distilled water Oiv Oss. 

Boil them together in a glass or porcelain vessel for half an hour, 
occasionally adding distilled water so as to preserve the measure, 
and filter through paper; keep the solution in closely-stopped 
bottles. By the action of litharge on acetate of lead, an additional 
equivalent of the oxide enters into the composition of the salt, 
forming diacetate which remains in solution, while a basic acetate 
is separated on the filter. 

This is one of the simple preparations, readily prepared, even by 
the country practitioner. The litharge should be in very fine 
powder before commencing the process, and care should be taken, 
by constant stirring, to prevent its caking, and the consequent 
fracture of the vessel ; an evaporating dish will be found convenient, 
and in filtering, a covered funnel will be useful ; the filter should 
be strengthened by a small filter set into the funnel at its narrowest 
part, in which the plaited filter may rest. 

Solution of subacetate of lead is a clear colorless^ liquid, sp. gr. 
1.267, with an alkaline reaction, and sweet, metallic astringent 
taste ; agrees with the acetate in most of its properties, except that 
it precipitates arabin and numerous coloring matters and organic 
principles not precipitated by Pb 2 Ac. It is remarkable for its great 
affinity for carbonic acid, which occasions a precipitate of carbonate 
of lead, merely on exposure to the air. If this solution should be 
contaminated with copper, this metal will be removed by im- 
mersing a strip of bright metallic lead in it. 

Diluted with water, it is applied as a sedative lotion to sprains, 
bruises, etc. (See Ceratum, and Linimentum Plumbi Subacetatis.) 

Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Lilutus, U. S. P. (Lead Water.) 

Take of Solution of subacetate of lead fqiij* 

Distilled water Oj. 

Mix them. 

The water, containing carbonic acid, will produce a precipitate of 
carbonate of lead, which exposure to the air will increase, so that 
the preparation is liable to become inert, and should be mixed 
when required. Lead-water is generally regarded as a very weak 
preparation, and but for its popular employment as a cooling wash, 



NITRATE OF LEAD. 275 

might be made much, stronger, as may be readily done by extem- 
poraneous prescription. The proportion indicated in the last edi- 
tion of the Pharmacopoeia is f Jiij to Oj ; previously it had been 
f3ij to Oj. 

Lead- water should be made with distilled water as directed, com- 
mon water frequently containing carbonates or carbonic acid, which 
impart a cloudiness as above mentioned; the habit of rendering the 
solution clear by means of acetic acid is improper, as the chemical 
character of the solution is changed. 

Plumbi Carbonas. 2(PbC0 3 ) + Pb2HO == 775. ( White Lead.) 

This important substance, w T hich, as ground in oil, is extensively 
used as a pigment, is obtained by two methods: 1. By passing a 
stream of C0 2 through a solution of subacetate of lead. The C0 3 
combines with the excess of Pb, and precipitates as Pb,C0 3 , while 
a neutral acetate of lead remains in solution; this is boiled with a 
fresh addition of PbO, and a°;ain brought to the condition of sub- 
acetate, and treated as before with C0 2 . This plan is pursued by 
the French and Swiss manufacturers. 2. Our own manufacturers 
cast the lead into thin sheets, which are then rolled into cylinders, 
five or six inches in diameter, and seven or eight high; each cylin- 
der is placed in an earthen pot, containing Oss vinegar, the lead 
being supported by projecting pieces from contact with the vinegar. 
Strata of these pots are arranged in sheds, with refuse stable mate- 
rials, which are giving off C0 2 , and have a certain elevation of 
temperature due to fermentation. At the end of six weeks, the 
stacks are unpacked, and the sheet lead is found almost entirely 
converted into a flaky, white, friable substance, which is the white 
lead. This is separated, and reduced to fine powder. Carbonate 
of lead is a heavy, opaque substance, in powder or friable lumps, 
insoluble in water, of a fine w T hite color, great opacity, inodorous, 
and nearly insipid. The analyses of Mulder and others, of different 
specimens of white lead, show that it contains various proportions 
of carbonate, PbC0 3 , and hydrated oxide, Pb2HO, so that its 
combining proportion is not uniformly as above. 

Carbonate of lead, to furnish a cheaper paint, is often mixed with 
sulphate of barium, calcium, or lead, or with carbonate of calcium 
(chalk) ; the last impurity will remain behind when the article is 
dissolved in caustic potassa; the former are all insoluble in diluted 
nitric acid, wdiich readily dissolves the carbonate of lead. 

This is regarded as the most poisonous of the lead salts; it is 
employed externally as a dusting powder in excoriations of chil- 
dren, and as an astringent and sedative dressing to ulcers and in- 
flamed surfaces. (See Unguentum Plumbi Carbonatis.) 

Plumbi Nitras. Pb2^0 3 = 381 . (Nitrate of Lead.) 

Litharge is dissolved in nitric acid, by the aid of heat; the liquid 
filtered, and set aside to crystallize; the Pb unites directly with 
the N0 4 to form the nitrate, which is an anhydrous salt, in beauti- 



2<b ON LEAD 

ful white, nearly opaque, octobedral crystals, permanent in the air, 
of a sweet astringent taste, soluble in water and alcohol. 

It is an effectual disinfectant, decomposing sulphuretted hydro- 
gen, and the hydrosulphurets contained in putrescent animal fluids. 

Ledoyen's Disinfecting Fluid, which is greatly esteemed abroad, 
is a solution of this salt in water 3j to f §j. It may be made directly 
by dissolving carbonate of lead, or litharge, in diluted nitric acid, 
to saturation, and will be found extremely useful in sick chambers, 
where the alvine discharges are fetid and infectious. 

Plumbi Nitras Fusa. — If nitrate of lead is fused at a tempera- 
ture not high enough to decompose much of it, it may be moulded 
like lunar caustic, and applied in a similar manner. 

Plumbi Iodidum. Pbl 2 =461. (Iodide of Lead.) 

Take of Nitrate of lead, 

Iodide of potassium, each, four troyounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

"With the aid of heat, dissolve the nitrate of lead in Oiss, and the 
iodide of potassium in Oss of the distilled water, and mix the 
solutions. Allow the precipitate formed to subside, and having 
poured off the supernatant liquid, wash it with distilled water, and 
dry it with a gentle heat. ( U. S. P.) 

This process may be readily accomplished with the apparatus 
usually pertaining to a country practitioner's outfit; in fact, it is 
one of the easiest processes of the Pharmacopoeia. The two salts, 
dissolved separately, may be mixed in a wide-mouth bottle, and 
the precipitate collected in a plain filter. 

Iodide of lead is a bright yellow, heavy, tasteless, inodorous 
powder, which dissolves in 1235 parts of cold and 194 parts of boil- 
ing water, and in acetic acid and alcohol. A hot saturated solution 
on cooling deposits -the salt in brilliant golden scales. It fuses 
and sublimes yellow, but soon gives off violet vapors from decom- 
position. It may be considered pure for medicinal use if two 
grains of it dissolve in one fluidounce of boiling water, and sepa- 
rate on cooling in brilliant crystalline powder. 

This preparation is supposed to have the resolvent properties of 
iodine, combined with those peculiar to lead, and hence it is used 
in ointment to reduce indolent tumors, scrofulous and syphilitic. 

Plumbi Chloridum. PbCl 2 = 278. 

Chloride of lead is obtained by precipitating a soluble lead salt, 
and may be crystallized from its hot solution in anhydrous flat 
needles, soluble in 135 parts of cold water. 

It has been recommended as preferable to chloride of zinc in some 
diseases, especially cancer ; externally as fomentations by dissolving 
from one-half to one drachm in a quart of water, and in ointments 
containing about 9j or 3ss to the ounce. 



PREPARATIONS OF SILVER. 277 

PlumU Tannas. (Tannate of Lead.) 

Under the name of catajplasma ad decubitum, the Prussian Phar- 
macopoeia prepares tannate of lead in the following mauner : 2 oz. 
oak bark, boiled with a sufficient quantity of water down to eight 
ounces, is mixed with two ounces of solution of subacetate of lead, 
the precipitate separated by filtration, and used while still moist, 
mixed with two drachms of alcohol. 

The tannate of lead is also prepared by precipitating tannic acid 
or an infusion of galls by acetate of lead. The precipitate is much 
darkened during washing and drying; it is made into an ointment 
by mixing one drachm of it with an ounce of lard or other 
unctuous ingredient. 

Argextum. Ag = 108. (Silver.) 

This well-known metal is placed in the list of the Pharmacopoeia 
on account of its use in preparing the several salts. It is found 
most abundantly as sulphuret combined with copper, lead, and 
antimony; the argentiferous galena, already referred to as furnish- 
ing litharge, is the most abundant source of silver. 

Its physical properties are sufficiently familiar. It is very malle- 
able and ductile; its hardness is between that of copper and gold; 
sp. gr. 10.475 to 10.500. 

Silver is freely soluble in nitric acid, and dissolves in sulphuric 
acid by the aid of heat. Its surface is rapidly tarnished by sul- 
phuretted hydrogen. Its nitric acid solution should be nearly 
colorless, and when treated with an excess of chloride of sodium, 
should give a white precipitate entirely soluble in ammonia, the 
liquor filtered from the precipitate with excess of HC1 should not 
be discolored by sulphuretted hydrogen. The alkaline carbonates, 
oxalates, and ferrocyanides precipitate solutions of silver white, the 
alkaline arsenites and phosphates yellow. The arseniates red — the 
fixed alkalies brown — on the surface of metallic copper or zinc it 
is thrown down as pure silver. All silver salts are more or less 
blackened by the influence of light, hence their use in photography. 

Preparations of Silver. 

Argenti nitras, AgN0 3 (crystals). Colorless; soluble in water; staining the skin. 
Argeuti nitras fusa. In sticks thickness of a quill ; usually wrapped in paper. 
Argenti oxidum. Ag 2 0. An olive-brown insoluble powder; soluble in ammonia. 
Argenti cyanidum, AgCy. A wbite 2 odorless, tasteless, insoluble powder. 
Argenti chloridum, AgCl. White, curdy precipitate, changing color. 
Argenti iodidum, Agl. Pale yellow, less soluble in ammonia. 

Argenti Nitras. AgJTO 3 = 170. (Crystallized Nitrate of Silver.) 

This salt is made by dissolving silver in nitric acid, evaporating 
the solution, and crystallizing. The crystals are anhydrous and 
colorless. Its purity is proven by precipitating its solution in dis- 
tilled water with muriatic acid ; the filtrate on evaporation must 
leave no residue. It is soluble in its weight of water, stains the 



278 on 

skin black, and, when moistened and applied, acts as a caustic, 
which is its chief use. The crystallized article is preferred for 
solution, being less liable to be adulterated, and to decompose by 
the action of light, than the fused and wrapped article. Internally 
it is given in pill with a tonic extract, preferably extract of quassia, 
as an astringent and alterative affecting the nervous system. When 
administered a long time it is liable to stain the whole surface of 
the body blue or lead color. Dose, gr. J to gr. j. 

Argenti Nitras Fusa. Ag£K) 3 = 170. {Lunar Caustic.) 

This is made as the preceding, except that, instead of crystallizing 
it, the evaporation is carried further, and after becoming dry it is 
fused, and when it runs like oil is poured into moulds. It is thus 
obtained in sticks of suitable sizes for application as a caustic ; it 
is, however, crystalline in structure, and very brittle. When the 
sticks have cooled, they are wrapped tightly in paper, in which 
they are sold. The crystals are more economical to the purchaser 
from having less paper weighed with them. The heat applied in 
the fusion, and the contact with organic matter, reduce a portion 
to the metallic condition, so that it has a gray color, and is not 
entirely soluble. The fusible nature of this salt enables us to in- 
troduce it readily into silver catheters and other surgical instru- 
ments, and also, by a very ready expedient, to point the sticks and 
alter them in size, thus: — 

Heat a half dollar held in a pair of pincers over a lamp, and 
apply to it the end of the stick of caustic, rotating it at such an 
angle as to give the requisite sharpness ; if the coin is hot enough, 
the caustic will fuse at the point and take the shape desired. 

The extensive use of the nitrate and its high price lead to the 
admixture of nitrate of potassium, especially with the fused article; 
this adulteration may be detected as described in the case of the 
crystallized article, or by passing a stream of sulphuretted hydrogen 
into its solution till it ceases to throw down sulphuret of silver, 
then filtering and evaporating ; there should be no residue. If 17 
grains of the nitrate are dissolved in water, it should precipitate 
entirely the chlorine of 6 grains of common salt. The following 
is an elegant method of testing approximately the amount of silver 
in a specimen of nitrate of silver : — 

Into a good velvet bottle cork insert a handle, which may be of 
wire, and in the opposite end cut a small cavity sufficient to hold 
15 grains of the nitrate, which is to be weighed and pressed securely 
in ; now apply a spirit-lamp flame, which will ignite the end of the 
cork and melt the nitrate. The fused nitrate, by contact with the 
heated carbon, will be reduced, suddenly bursting into an intense 
flame of a peach-blossom hue. On the subsidence of the flame there 
will be found a mass of spongy silver, which, when washed and 
dried, should weigh about 9.5 grains, thus : Agl^0 3 = 170 and 
Ag = 108. As 170 : 108 : : 15 : 9.53. 

Chloride of silver is much introduced of latter years for the pur- 



PROTOXIDE OF SILVER. 279 

pose of rendering the fused nitrate less brittle. This admixture 
should always be distinctly announced on the label. It renders the 
salt only partially soluble in water, and opaque white instead of 
translucent. 

The stain of nitrate of silver on the fingers and on articles of 
clothing is sometimes very inconvenient ; it may generally be re- 
moved by a little cyanide of potassium, or by moistening the part 
with tincture of iodine and immediately applying ammonia, and 
then washing it off. 

So numerous are the incompatibles of nitrate of silver that it 
should generally be prescribed in pill, and singly except with some 
vegetable excipient, as white turpentine. It generally forms a 
w 7 hite cloud, with the purest unclistilled water, from the presence 
of chlorides, and in water containing organic matter after a time 
throws down a brown precipitate. 

Argenti Chloridum. AgCl= 143.5. 

When a silver salt is brought in contact with muriatic acid, or 
a solution of a chloride, the result is always a white curdy precipi- 
tate of chloride of silver, which is insoluble in nitric acid, but 
dissolves freely, without residue, in ammonia. 

It has been used in syphilis, epilepsy, dysentery, and other dis- 
eases, in doses from one to three grains several times a day. 

Argenti Iodidum. Agl=235. 

It is a pale yellow precipitate, caused in solution of silver by 
hydriodic acid or iodides; insoluble in nitric acid, and nearly in- 
soluble in ammonia. 

It has been used in similar complaints to those in which the 
chloride is prescribed, when the modified effect of an iodide is 
desired. The dose is one or tw T o grains. 

Argenti Oxidum. Ag 2 0=232. {Protoxide of Silver.) 

Take of Nitrate of silver, four troy ounces. 
Distilled water, half a pint. 
Solution of potassa, a pint and a half, or sufficient. 

Dissolve the nitrate of silver in the water, and add the solution 
of potassa as long as it produces a precipitate; wash this repeatedly 
with water, until the washings are nearly tasteless. Lastly, dry 
the precipitate, and keep it in a well-stopped bottle, protected from 
the light. (U.S. P.) 

This is an olive-brown powder, nearly insoluble in water, but 
soluble in ammonia and in acids. It may be considered pure if it 
is wholly soluble in ammonia and in nitric acid, and if the latter 
solution, when treated like the nitrate, leaves no residue, and if on 
being precipitated by chloride of sodium in excess, the supernatant 
liquid is not discolored by H 2 S. 

It is used instead of nitrate of silver for the tonic effects of the 
silver salts. Dose, gr. ss to gr. ij. 



280 ON LEAD, 

Argenti Cyanidum. AgCy = 134. {Cyanide of Silver.) 

The salt is elsewhere described in connection with its use in pre- 
paring hydrocyanic acid. It is a tasteless, white powder, insoluble 
in water, soluble in ammonia and in cyanide of potassium ; and 
when decomposed by muriatic acid, the solution must not contain 
any fixed matter. When heated, it yields cyanogen and metallic 
silver. 

Bismuthum. Bi=210. (Bismuth.) 

This is a metal, of a pinkish-white color, found native; very 
brittle ; fuses readily, and crystallizes ; soluble in diluted nitric 
acid, and the nitrate is precipitated by water. It is chiefly pre- 
pared in Germany, whence it is exported; it generally contains 
both arsenic and copper, to free it from w T hich the following dry 
process is recommended. Heat to redness, in a covered crucible, a 
mixture of oxide or subnitrate of bismuth, with half its weight of 
charcoal, or mix sixteen ounces of the metal, powdered, with two 
ounces of carbonate of sodium, and two drachms of sulphur; mix, 
fuse for an hour, and separate the metal from the scoriae. 

Bismuth is used in the composition of type metal, solder, pewter, 
and fusible metals. The following proportions yield useful alloys, 
adapted to baths, and to taking impressions of plaster casts, etc. 
The alloy of 8 parts bismuth, 5 lead, 3 tin, melts at 202° F. That 
composed of 2 bismuth, 1 lead, 1 tin, melts at 200.75° F. 

It is little affected by the air ; burns when strongly heated ; sp. 
gr. 9.8 to 9.9. Sulphuretted hydrogen gives a black precipitate 
with its salts; the nitric solution is not precipitated by sulphuric 
acid. Chromate of potassium gives a yellow precipitate, differing 
from that of lead by being soluble in 1TO 3 , and insoluble in KO. 
By alkalies a white precipitate is thrown down, insoluble in an 
excess; by carbonate of potassium, white; by ferrocyanuret of 
potassium, white; by iodide of potassium, brown; by iron, zinc, 
copper, cadmium, tin, and lead, in the metallic state. The soluble 
salts of bismuth are remarkable for a dazzling white precipitate, 
produced on throwing their solution into a large amount of water. 

Preparations of Bismuth. 

Bismuthi subnitras,BiON0 3 .H 2 0. Insoluble powder. Dose, gr. v to gj. 

Bis-muthi subcarbonas, Bi 2 O 2 C0 3 . Insoluble powder. Dose, gr. v to ^<s. 

Bismuthi valerianas. Remedy in neuralgia. Dose, gr. ss to gr. ij. 

Bismuthi tannas, Bi,Tan. Insoluble powder. Dose, ^ss. 
Liquor bismuthi et ammonise eitratis, Ph. Br. 

Bismuthi Subnitras. BiONO 3 -fAq=306. 

Take of Bismuth, in pieces, two troyounces. 
Nitric acid, 

Carbonate of sodium, each, ten troyounces. 
Water of ammonia, six fluidounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix four troyounces and a half of the nitric acid with four fluid- 
ounces of distilled water, in a capacious glass vessel, and, having 



SUBNITRATE OF BISMUTH. 281 

added the bismuth, set the whole aside for twenty- four hours. 
Dilute the resulting solution with ten fluidounces of distilled 
water, stir it thoroughly, and, at the end of twenty-four hours, 
filter through paper. 

Dissolve the carbonate of sodium in twenty fluidounces of dis- 
tilled water with the aid of heat, and filter the solution through 
paper. To this, when cold, slowly add the solution of nitrate of 
bismuth, with constant stirring. Transfer the whole to a strainer, 
and, after the precipitate has been drained, wash it with distilled 
water until the washings pass tasteless, and drain again as com- 
pletely as possible. Then place the moist precipitate in a capacious 
vessel, gradually add the remainder of the nitric acid and after- 
wards four fluidounces of distilled water, and set the solution aside. 
At the end of twenty-four hours, filter through paper, and to the 
filtered liquid, previously diluted with four pints of distilled water, 
slowly add the water of ammonia, with constant stirring. Trans- 
fer the whole to a strainer, .and, after the precipitate has been 
drained, wash it with two pints of distilled water, drain it again. 
Lastly, dry it upon bibulous paper with a gentle heat, and rub it 
into powder. 

The simple formula formerly adopted for this preparation has 
been so greatly modified in the present officinal directions, that it 
is deemed proper to introduce them, as above, in detail. The addi- 
tion of diluted nitric acid to bismuth results in the oxidation of 
the metal at the expense of the acid, giving off red fumes; the 
oxide formed dissolves in the remainder of the acid; this is a solu- 
tion of ternitrate of oxide (Bi,3^T0 3 ). Formerly the preparation 
was finished by throwing this into water, by which four equiva- 
lents were resolved into three of basic, generally called subnitrate 
(Bi0 3 N"0 3 ), and one of the " nine nitrate 1 ;" Bi0 3 9^0 3 , the latter re- 
maining in solution, while the officinal salt went down as a heavy, 
white, insoluble powder. The modified process now inserted in 
the Pharmacopoeia directs the precipitation of the solution of the 
ternitrate with carbonate of sodium, by double decomposition, 
yielding nitrate of sodium in solution and insoluble subcarbonate 
of bismuth, which, by washing, is obtained pure; and is then dis- 
solved in a fresh portion of nitric acid; in this way, the arsenic 
which may have been contained in the first solution is separated 
in a soluble form by the addition of the carbonated alkali and the 
subsequent washing. The solutions are directed to be diluted till 
precipitation commences, and exposed for twenty-four hours, by 
which the remaining arseniate of bismuth, which is rather insol- 
uble in dilute acid solutions, is separated; the precipitate is then 
removed by filtration, and the subnitrate obtained by the addition 
of distilled water, and then ammonia. This last named addition 
increases the precipitate by neutralizing any excess of nitric acid, 
which otherwise holds in solution much of the bismuth. 

Subnitrate of bismuth is a heavy, white powder, of a somewhat 
satiny appearance. It has a faintly acid odor and taste, and, when 
moistened on litmus paper, a decidedly acid reaction. It is entirely 



282 on 

soluble, without effervescence, in nitric acid, and the solution yields 
no precipitate with dilute sulphuric acid. Upon being heated to 
redness it loses twenty per cent, of its weight. When mixed with 
dilute sulphuric acid in excess, and subjected to Marsh's test, it 
yields no arsenic, or merely a trace. 

Subnitrate of bismuth is a sedative and antispasmodic of very 
useful and peculiar properties; its chief use is in gastrointestinal 
affections, diarrhoea, and nausea. The dose is one to six or ten 
grains. It is also employed as a cosmetic, from its white and satiny 
appearance. The presence of arsenic, in the commercial varieties 
and in specimens prepared by the old process, is believed by some 
physicians to have a bearing upon its therapeutic properties, and 
perhaps to add to its efficiency. 

Bismuthi Subcarbonas. Bi 2 2 C0 3 = 512. 

Take of Bismuth, in pieces, two troyounces. 

Nitric acid, eight troyounces and a half. 
Water of ammonia, live fluidounces. 
Carbonate of sodium, ten troyounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix four troyounces and a half of the nitric acid with four fluid- 
ounces of distilled water in a capacious glass vessel, and, having 
added the bismuth, set the whole aside for twenty -four hours. 
Dilute the resulting solution with ten fluidounces of distilled water, 
stir it thoroughly, and, after twenty-four hours, filter through paper. 
To the filtered liquid, previously diluted with four pints of distilled 
water, slowly add the water of ammonia, with constant stirring. 
Transfer the whole to a strainer, and, after the precipitate has been 
drained, wash it with two pints of distilled water and drain it 
again. Then place the precipitate in a proper vessel, add the re- 
mainder of the nitric acid, and afterwards four fluidounces of dis- 
tilled water, and set the solution aside. At the end of twenty-four 
hours, filter through paper. 

Dissolve the carbonate of sodium in twenty fluidounces of dis- 
tilled water, with the aid of heat, and filter the solution through 
paper. To this, when cold, slowly add the solution of nitrate of 
bismuth, with constant stirring. Transfer the whole to a strainer, 
and, after the precipitate has been drained, wash it with distilled 
water until the washings pass tasteless. Lastly, dry it on bibulous 
paper with a gentle heat, and rub it into powder. (U. S. P.) 

The elaborate process of the Pharmacopoeia for this new remedy 
has been transferred entire as above, so as to furnish the pharma- 
cist, who is disposed to follow it through its several steps, a pure 
preparation. It will be seen that the first part of the process is 
nearly that formerly used for the preparation of subnitrate of bis- 
muth with the addition of ammonia in the first precipitation; this 
is a useful addition as aiding the more complete separation of the 
subnitrate. A solution of this freshly precipitated subnitrate, in 
additional nitric acid, by the aid of heat, is the next step in the 
process ; this solution of nitrate is now diluted till it begins to be 



CITRATE OF BISMUTH AND AMMONIA.. 283 

milky, and then set aside for twenty-four hours (still longer is to 
be preferred) in order that any arsenic present may be precipitated 
as arseniate of bismuth; it is now filtered and gradually added to 
a solution of carbonate of sodium, which, by double decomposition, 
yields nitrate of sodium which remains in solution, and subcar- 
bonate of bismuth which precipitates as a white insoluble powder; 
by washing and drying, this is obtained ready for use. 

Subcarbonate of bismuth is a white or yellowish-white powder, 
without taste or smell, insoluble in water, but soluble with effer- 
vescence in dilute nitric acid. Upon being heated to redness, it 
loses nine and a half per cent, of its weight. When mixed with 
dilute sulphuric acid in excess, and subjected to Marsh's test, it 
yields no arsenic or merely a trace. 

The carbonate is a new officinal preparation originally introduced 
as a purer and more uniform salt than the subnitrate, more soluble 
in the juices of the stomach, and adding to the peculiar sedative 
and absorbent properties of that salt a decided antacid property. 
The dose is from five to thirty grains, given in powder or pill. 

Bism villi Valerianas. 

Prepared by adding gradually an aqueous solution of ternitrate 
of bismuth (Bi3X0 3 ), prepared as in the process for subnitrate or 
carbonate, to valeriante of sodium ; the white precipitate is washed 
with water containing a small quantity of valerianic acid, and dried 
by a very gentle heat. 

It has been brought to the notice of the medical profession as a 
remedy for neuralgic affections, in doses of from one-half to two 
grains three or four times a day. 

Bismuthi Tannas. 

Tannate of bismuth is prepared by first precipitating the oxide 
of bismuth from a solution of 44 parts of the crystallized nitrate by 
an excess of caustic soda, this precipitate is collected on a cloth and 
carefully washed, it is then triturated in a mortar with 29 parts of 
pure tannic acid. The magma is then diluted with water, the 
whole is thrown on a cloth, washed, and then dried either in the 
open air or in a slightly heated closet. 

This is a yellowish, insoluble, nearly tasteless powder, which has 
been introduced as a remedy for obstinate diarrhoea. The dose 
mentioned in the journals is 30 grains. 

Liquor Bismuthi et Ammonii Citratis. Ph. Br. (Solution of Citrate 
of Bismuth and Ammonia.) 

Take of Purified bismuth, four hundred and thirty grains. 
Nitric aeid, two rluidounces (hnperial measure). 
Citric acid, two ounces (avoirdupois). 
Solution of ammonia, 
Distilled water, of each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the nitric acid with a sufficient quantity of distilled water, 
and add the bismuth in successive portions. When effervescence 



284 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

has ceased, apply, for ten minutes, a heat approaching that of 
ebullition, and decant the solution from any insoluble matter that 
may be present. Evaporate the solution until it is reduced to 
two fluidounces; then add the citric acid previously dissolved in 
four fluidounces of distilled water, and afterwards the solution of 
ammonia in small quantities at a time, until the precipitate formed 
is redissolved and the solution is neutral or slightly alkaline to 
test paper. Dilute with distilled water to the volume of one pint 
(imperial measure). 

This is a new officinal preparation in the Ph. Br. made after the 
plan of Mr. Tichborne. For various hints on the process, the reader is 
referred to American Journal of Pharmacy, January 1865, January 
1866. 



CHAPTER IX. 

ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

Antimony. Sb=122.* 

This metal, which was one of the first introduced into medicine, 
is imported from France under the name of Regulus of Antimony ; 
it is a brittle metal, usually of a lamellated texture, of a bluish- 
white color; its Latin name, Stibium, as abbreviated Sb, furnishes 
its symbol. It forms three combinations with oxygen, teroxide, 
Sb 2 3 , antimonious acid, Sb 2 4 , and antimonic acid, Sb 2 5 . Teroxide 
and the tersulphuret enter into the officinal compounds. 

Tests for Antimony. — In its soluble salts, antimony is recognized 
by the following tests: — 

Sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphuret of ammonium cause in 
acid solutions an orange-colored precipitate; alkalies and their car- 
bonates, a white, bulky one; zinc, a black powder of the metallic 
antimony ; zinc and sulphuric acid evolve antimoniuretted hydro- 
gen, SbH 3 , which burns with a bluish-green color; on a porcelain 
cup, held in the flame, a black spot of very little lustre is deposited ; 
if the antimoniuretted hydrogen is passed through a tube, the 
middle of which is heated to redness, a bright metallic mirror is 
formed in the cooler part of the tube; this mirror will disappear if 
a stream of dry sulphuretted hydrogen is passed through the tube, 
while the metallic mirror is heated, aud sulphuret of antimony of a 
reddish or blackish color will make its appearance; this disappears 
entirely if through the tube be passed a stream of dry muriatic acid 
gas, by which chloride of antimony is carried over and may be 
condensed in water, there to be recognized by the precipitates with 
the above tests. Before the blowpipe, oxide of antimony, when 

* The combining number formerly given for this metal, 129, has been reduced by 
recent authorities. 



PREPARATIONS OF ANTIMONY. 285 

mixed with carbonate of sodium and cyanide of potassium, yields 
globules, and a white pulverulent and crystalline incrustation of 
the oxide. 

Antimonic Acid. — Its salts are insoluble with the exception of 
antimonate of potassium, which is a test for sodium salts. This 
antimoniate may be recognized by yielding precipitates with the 
soluble salts of all other bases; these precipitates, when mixed with 
chloride of ammonium and heated, are decomposed into water, 
chloride of antimony, chloride of the metallic base and ammonia; 
the chloride of antimony is volatile. For the quantitative deter- 
mination of antimonic acid, H. Rose uses the antimoniate of sodium, 
and calculates from the remaining chloride of sodium the equivalent 
quantity of antimonic acid. If insoluble antimoniates are boiled 
with muriatic acid, with the addition of some tartaric acid, ter- 
chloride of antimony enters into solution, there to be recognized 
like the salts of oxide of antimony. 

Preparations of Antimony. 

Antimonii sulphuretum, Sb 2 S 3 . Native black sulphuret, or crude antimony. 

Antimonii sulphuratum, Sb 2 S 3 -f- Sb 2 3 . Reddish-brown powder. 

Antimonii oxysulpburetum, Sb 2 3 -f- ~Sb 2 3 . Dark- brown powder. Kermes mineral. 

Sodii et antimonii sulphuretum, 3Na 2 S-f? Sb 2 S 5 . Colorless crystals. 

Antimonii quinque sulphuretum, Sb 2 S g . Orange-colored powder. Golden sulphur. 

Calcii et antimonii sulphuretum, Sb,0 3 ,Sb 2 S 3 ,CaS. Light-brown powder. 

Antimonii chloridum, SbCl 3 . Colorless or yellowish liquid (butter of antimony). 

Antimonii oxidum, Sb 2 3 . Antimonic oxide, antimonious acid. White, inodorous 

powder. 
Potassii a?ilimonias, K 2 Sb 4 0,, -f- H 2 0. White, insoluble powder. 
Antimonii et potasii tartras, 2KSbT-j- 3R" 2 0. Translucent crystals. 
Vinum antimonii. Gr. ij to f^j white wine = | gr. to f3J. 
Pulvis antimonialis. Variable mixture of Sb 2 3 Sb 2 3 with Ca 3 2P0 4 . 

Antimonii Sulphuretum. Sb 2 S 3 =340. {Black Sulphuret of 

Antimony.) 

This drug should be procured in powder somewhat purified by 
fusion and levigated, in which condition it is kept by the drug- 
gists; it may then be considered as tolerably pure Sb 2 S 3 . 

It should be soluble in boiling muriatic acid, giving off sulphu- 
retted hydrogen, terchloride remaining in solution. The solution 
yields a white precipitate when added to water, and the resulting 
liquid, after nitration, affords an orange-red precipitate with sul- 
phuret of ammonium. 

It often contains arsenic, which may be found out by fusing it in 
small quantities with pure saltpetre, and testing the solution with 
nitrate of silver; antimoniate of silver is white, the arseniate has 
a reddish-brown color. 

Antimonii Sulphur atum,TJ.$.¥. Sb 2 S 3 + Sb 2 3 + 16Aq. Antimonii 
Sulphuretum Prcecipitatum, U. S. P. of 1850. (Precipitated Sul- 
phuret of Antimony. Sulphurated Antimony.) 

This officinal salt is made by boiling black sulphuret of anti- 
mony, six troyounces, with solution of potassa, four pints, diluted 



286 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

with twelve pints of water, straining it, and, while }^et hot, drop- 
ping into it diluted sulphuric acid as long as it produces a pre- 
cipitate, which, being washed with hot water and dried, and rubbed 
into a Hue powder, constitutes the officinal precipitated sulphuret. 

In this process, the alkali decomposes a portion of the black sul- 
phuret, forming sulphuret of potassium, and holds in solution both 
the undecomposed tersulphuret and the teroxide liberated by the 
alkali. On the addition to this of an acid, the sulphuret of potas- 
sium being decomposed, and the excess of potassa neutralized, the 
mixed tersulphuret and teroxide are thrown down, so that this 
powder has the complex composition represented in the syllabus. 
According to Liebig it is amorphous hydrated tersulphuret of an- 
timony, which loses part of its water by drying, the other part is 
only given off by exposure to a temperature of 480°. 

This powder is of a color varying from brownish-red to reddish- 
brown, insoluble in water, but nearly soluble in solution of potassa, 
and in twelve times its weight of muriatic acid, by the aid of heat ; 
this solution, when added to water, deposits a white powder. 

It is used as an alterative and diaphoretic, especially in combi- 
nation with calomel and guaiacum, as in Plummer's pills, or with 
extract of conium or hyoscyamus in the treatment of chronic rheu- 
matism. As its action depends very much upon the amount of 
acid in the stomach, it is of varying activity. Its dose is from gr. 
j to iij, twice a day. 

Antimonii Oxy sulphur etum, IT. S. P. {Oxy sulphuret of Antimony. 
Kermes Mineral. Sb 2 3 + 2Sb 2 S 5 .) 

The various processes heretofore published for this preparation 
are now superseded by the introduction into the U. S. Pharmaco- 
poeia of 1860 of the following formula: — 

Take of Sulphuret of antimony, in very fine powder, a troyounce. 
Carbonate of sodium, twenty-three troyounces. 
Water, sixteen pints. 

Dissolve the carbonate of sodium in the water previously heated 
to the boiling point, and, having added the sulphuret of antimony, 
boil for an hour. Then filter rapidly into a warm earthen vessel, 
cover this closely, and allow the liquid to cool slowly. At the end 
of twenty-four hours, decant the supernatant liquid, drain the pre- 
cipitate on a filter, wash it with boiled water previously allowed to 
become cold, and dry it without heat. Lastly, preserve the powder 
in a well-stopped bottle, protected from the light. (U. S. P.) 

By the long boiling of the native sulphuret of antimony with 
carbonate of sodium, the sulphuret is partially decomposed, forming, 
as in the foregoing process, sulphuret of potassium and teroxide of 
antimony ; after filtering to separate the undecomposed sulphuret of 
antimony, the solution is allowed to cool slowly and then precipi- 
tates the kermes, which has a tolerably uniform composition, con- 
taining, as stated above, a much larger proportion of the teroxide 
than the sulphurated antimony which is precipitated by the aid 
of an acid. 



SULPHUKET OF ANTIMONY. 287 

Oxy sulphuret of antimony is a purplish -brown, tasteless powder, 
soft and velvety to the touch, wholly and readily soluble in muri- 
atic acid with evolution of hydrosulphuric acid gas, and partly 
soluble in a hot solution of potassa, leaving a residue soluble in 
tartaric acid. 

The dose, in view of this various composition, may be stated at 
from gr. J to gr. iij. It is a more active preparation than the fore- 
going. 

Sodii et Antimonii Sulphur etum. 3Na 2 S + Sbj3 5 + 18 Aq. (Antimonio- 
Sulphuret of Sodium.) 

This double salt, which is officinal in the Pharmacopoeias of 
Slesvie-Holstein, Saxony, and others, is remarkable for its readiness 
to crystallize with an unvariable composition, and for its use in the 
preparation of golden sulphur. It was discovered by Sehlippe. 

It is prepared by slaking 2 parts of burned lime in an iron vessel, and 
dissolving in it 2 parts of sulphur by boiling with 40 parts of water ; 
the clear liquid is decomposed by 6 parts of crystallized carbonate 
of sodium ; the filtrate boiled with 2 parts of finely-powdered black 
sulphuret of antimony, evaporated, a little caustic soda added, and 
crystallized. 

Another method is to fuse for half an hour a mixture of equal 
parts of anhydrous sulphate of sodium, sulphuret of antimony, 
and a quarter part of charcoal, and, after separating the metal and 
powdering the mass, boiling it in water and crystallizing as above. 

It occurs in colorless or yellowish tetrahedrons, easily soluble in 
water, insoluble in alcohol, and decomposed by acids, alkalies, and 
metallic salts. It contains 45.29 per cent, of Sb 2 S 5 . 

Golden Sulphuret of Antimony. Sb 2 S 5 =404. {Golden Sulphur. 
Quinque Sulphuret of Antimony.) 

Antimonii sulphuretum aureum, as formerly prepared, was deposited 
on the addition to the solution from which kermes has been pre- 
cipitated, of an acid; it thus varied in composition and in color 
according to the degree of change which has taken place sponta- 
neously, and the consequent proportion of sulphur thrown down 
with the antimonial sulphuret and oxide. 

As now prepared, it is of a uniform composition, being the 
quinque sulphuret of antimony, which contains 61.8 per cent, metallic 
antimony. The sulphuret of antimony and sodium, as above, is 
dissolved in 6 parts of distilled water, and the solution gradually 
added to a mixture of T ' n strong sulphuric acid and 10 of water; 
the precipitate is well washed and rapidly dried. 

It is a dark orange-colored powder, nearly tasteless and inodorous, 
insoluble in water and alcohol; by alkalies it is decomposed, an 
antimonio-sulphuret being dissolved and antimoniate of alkali left 
behind; it is soluble without residue in sulphuret of ammonium. 
The quinque sulphuret of antimony is given in doses of \ to 1 grain. 



288 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

Calcii et Antimonii Sulphuretum. Mixed Sb 2 3 ,Sb 2 S 3 ,CaS. 

This soluble sulphuret, as used by Hufeland, was an uncertain 
preparation, containing sulphuret of antimony and calcium, sulphate 
and antimoniate of calcium. It was prepared by exposing to a red 
heat a mixture of carbonate of calcium, sulphur, and sulphuret of, 
or metallic, antimony. 

~No double sulphuret with calcium has yet been obtained resem- 
bling the foregoing antimonio-sulphuret of sodium. Duflos proposes 
to mix intimately 1 part of Liebig's kermes with 4 parts of sul- 
phuret of calcium, by which process a brownish powder is obtained, 
almost entirely soluble in water, and decomposed by acids into sul- 
phuretted hydrogen, and a bright red sulphuret of antimony. 

It is a mixture of the two sulphurets with oxide of antimon}', 
and has no claims to the rank of a chemical compound. It has 
been used in various skin diseases, etc., in larger doses than the 
other antimonials. 

Antimonii Chloridnm. SbCl 3 = 228.5. {Batter of Antimony.) 

In accordance with the Prussian Pharmacopoeia, this preparation 
is made by dissolving 1 lb. of black sulphuret of antimony in 4 lbs. 
of crude muriatic acid. These proportions are nearly those of our 
Pharmacopoeia, in the preliminary process for oxide of antimony. 
Sulphuretted hydrogen is evolved, which makes it necessary to 
operate in the open air, or conduct the gas into water or a chimney. 
After nitration, it is evaporated to 1 j- lb., and a mixture of § lb. 
muriatic acid, and 1J lb. water, is added. 

It is a colorless or yellowish liquid, sp. gr. 1.4, free from arsenic and 
lead, and is decomposed by water, oxide of antimony with some 
chloride being precipitated ; this precipitate was formerly employed 
in medicine under the name of Pulvis Algerothi. 

Chloride of antimony has been used as a caustic, producing a 
white scab with little pain ; it may be made into ointments con- 
taining one drachm to the ounce, or if intended for diseases of the 
eye, from 10 to 15 grains to an ounce. 

Antimonii Oxidum. Sb 2 3 = 292. (Oxide of Antimony. Ter oxide 
of Antimony. Antimonic Oxide. Antimonious Acid.) 

Take of Sulphuret of antimony, in very fine powder, four troyounces. 
Muriatic acid, eighteen troyounces. 

Nitric acid, a troyounce and one hundred and twenty grains. 
Water of ammonia, a fluidounce and a half. 
Water, 
Distilled water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the sulphuret into a flask, of the capacity of two pints, 
and, having added the muriatic acid, digest, by means of a sand- 
bath, until effervescence ceases. Then, having removed the flask 
from the sand-bath, add the nitric acid gradually; and, when 
nitrous acid vapors cease to be given off, and the liquid has grown 
cold, add to it half a pint of water, and Alter. Pour the filtered 



ANTIMONIAL POWDERS. 289 

liquid gradually into twelve pints of water, constantly stirring, and 
allow the precipitate to subside. Decant the supernatant liquid, 
and wash the precipitate twice by decantation, using, each time, 
eight pints of water. Then transfer it to a muslin filter to drain, 
and, after the draining is completed, wash it with water until the 
washings cease to have an acid reaction. Next introduce it into a 
suitable vessel, and subject it to the action of the water of ammonia 
for two hours ; at the end of which time, transfer it to a moistened 
muslin filter, and wash it with distilled water as long as the wash- 
ings produce a precipitate with nitrate of silver. Lastly, dry the 
precipitate upon bibulous paper with the aid of a gentle heat. 
(U.S. P.) 

This new officinal process is designed to furnish a pure oxide of 
antimony, for use in making tartar emetic, and for separate employ- 
ment in medicine. The sulphuret being digested with muriatic 
acid forms chloride of antimony, with the liberation of hydrosul- 
phuric acid gas, which should be conducted into a flue, or the pro- 
cess should be conducted in the open air. (Sb 2 S 3 + 6HC1 = 2SbCl 3 
+ 3HS,3H.) The addition of nitric acid aids the complete decom- 
position of the sulphuret, and oxidizes the iron to ferric oxide. By 
pouring the solution into a large quantity of water, it is decomposed, 
oxide of antimony contaminated with some undecomposed chloride 
being precipitated, while chloride of iron and other foreign chlorides 
remain in solution. This precipitate, formerly called oxy chloride or 
powder of Algeroth, is directed to be washed and treated with water 
of ammonia, which decomposes any chloride, converting the whole 
into the teroxide, which is insoluble in excess of ammonia, and being 
collected, washed, and dried, is a permanent and uniform product. 

Oxide of antimony is a grayish-white powder, insoluble in water, 
but readily and wholly soluble in muriatic and tartaric acids. It 
fuses at a dull red heat, forming a yellowish liquid, which concretes, 
on cooling, into a crystalline mass of a pearl-color. Its solution in 
tartaric acid in excess gives no precipitate with nitrate of silver or 
with ferrocyanide of potassium. 

Oxide of antimony is adapted to supersede the more uncertain 
precipitated sulphuret and oxysulphuret, and probably will be found 
a good substitute for small doses of tartar emetic, as an alterative 
and sedative. The dose may vary from ^ 2 th of a grain to one grain. 

It is most frequently prescribed in the following :— ~ 

Tyson's Antimonial Powder, No. 1. 

Take of Oxide of antimony 2 grains. 

Phosphate of calcium 18 grains. 

Mix well. 

Tyson's Antimonial Powder, No. 2. 

Take of Oxide of antimony 2 grains. 

Phosphate of calcium. 

Sulphate of potassium, of each 9 grains. 

Mix well. 

These powders are used in doses of from 5 to 10 grains. 
19 



290 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

Potassii Antimonias. K 2 Sb 4 O n + Aq. 

Formerly preparations were employed in medicine under the 
name of antimonium diaphoreticum non-ablutum and ablutum, which 
were of variable composition. A preparation similar to the last 
named is officinal in the Prussian Pharmacopoeia, which is nearly 
pure antimoniateof potassium. It is prepared by throwing into a 
red-hot crucible small quantities of an intimate mixture of 1 part 
metallic antimony and 2 parts nitrate of potassium, continuing the 
heat for half an hour, and washing with water. 

It is a white, inodorous, and tasteless powder, which is a diapho- 
retic in doses of J to 1 grain. 

Antimonii et Potassii Tartras. 2KSbT -f 3H 2 0(?) Antimonii 
Potassio Tartras. {Tartar Emetic.) 

This preparation, as its name implies, is a double salt, consisting 
of the oxide of antimony and potassium, united with tartaric acid. 
The first step in its preparation is the precipitation of teroxide of 
antimony, Sb 2 3 , by the new officinal process already detailed. 
Four parts of the oxide are then to be boiled with five of bitartrate 
of potassium in water till the combination is complete, and the 
solution after filtration is set aside to crystallize. The oxide 
unites witb the tartaric acid of the bitartrate, forming a double 
tartrate of antimony and potassium, in the same way that iron is 
combined so as to form with the bitartrate the double tartrate of 
iron and potassium, etc. (See, also, Sodii et Potassii Tartras and 
Potassse Tartras.) Cream of tartar being a bitartrate, the explana- 
tion as above given is correct. 

Tartar emetic crystallizes in beautiful colorless, rhombic, octa- 
hedral crystals, which effloresce and become opaque by exposure to 
the air. It is wholly soluble in 20 parts (14 parts, Graham) of cold 
water. Its solution does not yield a precipitate with chloride of 
barium, or, if very dilute, with nitrate of silver. Hydrosulphuric 
acid gas causes an orange-red precipitate. The watery solution is 
remarkable for decomposing rapidly, forming algae. 

The Pharmacopoeia gives this test: a solution containing one part 
in forty of water is not disturbed by an equal volume of a solution 
of eight parts of acetate of lead in thirty-two of water and fifteen 
of acetic acid. 

If arsenic should be present, it may be discovered by fusing a 
sample of the tartar emetic with pure nitrate of potassium, and test- 
ing the neutralized solution with nitrate of silver, which by pro- 
ducing a reddish-brown precipitate, shows a contamination with 
arsenic. 

It is insoluble in alcohol and incompatible with acids, alkalies, 
and alkaline carbonates. Astringent solutions precipitate the an- 
timony in an insoluble form. 

Internally administered, tartar emetic, in doses of gr. ij to iv, is 
a powerful emetic; in doses of gr. T ' g to J, it is a diaphoretic and 
expectorant ; gr. J to gr. j, is a decided sedative. It is very much 



ARSENICUM. 291 

prescribed, and in a great variety of diseases, both alone and com- 
bined with other remedies. Externally it is applied in ointment to 
raise a peculiar pustular eruption. {See Unguentum Antimonii.) 

This salt is now largely used in the process of d}-eing with ani- 
line colors ; combined with tannin it serves the purpose of fixing 
them upon cotton fabrics. 

Vinum Antimonii, U. S. P. {Antimonial Wine.) 

Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassium, thirty-two grains. 
Boiling distilled water, a fluidounce. 
Sherry wine, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the salt in the distilled water, and while the solution is 
hot add sufficient sherry wine to make it measure a pint. 

Dose, as an expectorant diaphoretic, ^Ix to xxx, at intervals ; its 
chief use is to furnish a convenient method of giving very divided 
doses of the salt ; f3j contains J grain. 

Pulvis Antimonialis. (Pulvis Jacobi. James's Powder.) 

This is directed to be made by mixing black sulphuret of anti- 
mony with horn shavings, throwing into a red-hot crucible, and 
stirring till vapor no longer rises, then rubbing the residue to 
powder and heating it to redness for two hours. Reduced to a fine 
powder, the resulting compound is constituted chiefly of a mix- 
ture in variable quantities of teroxide of antimony (Sb 2 3 ), anti- 
raonic acid (Sb 2 5 ), with phosphate of calcium. It is a white, in- 
odorous, tasteless, insoluble powder, which was formerly much in 
use as an alterative and diaphoretic, and was officinal previous to 
1830. Tyson's antimonial yowder, No. 2 (p. 289), resembles James's 
powder in its properties, and may be substituted for it by physi- 
cians in their prescriptions. Its dose is gr. iij to gr. x, every three 
or four hours, in fevers. 

Arsenicum = 75. 

This metal, which is made officinal on account of its use in pre- 
paring its iodide, exists in nature in combination with nickel and 
cobalt. Owing to its volatile and oxidizable character, it is con- 
veniently collected as arsenious acid, during the smelting of these 
ores. When pure, metallic arsenic is brittle and granular, steel- 
colored, but usually dull and blackish on the surface ; density, 5 to 
5.96. When heated, it sublimes, giving off a garlicky odor, and 
if exposed to the air in the condition of vapor, absorbing oxygen 
and passing into arsenious acid, AS 2 3 . It forms, by higher oxfda- 
tion, arsenic acid, As 2 5 ; and also combines readily with sulphur. 

Pure metallic arsenic may be readily obtained by mixing, in a 
suitable reduction tube, arsenious acid with three parts of black 
flux or charcoal, and applying heat, when the metal will be sublimed. 

Arsenic may be detected in minute quantities ; though its de- 
tection requires many nice and difficult manipulations. 

It is well for the inexperienced to avoid the responsibility of 



292 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

such examinations in important cases, as there are many precautions 
necessary to an accurate and definite result. 

The following are the most important reactions : — 

Tests for Arsenious Acid. — Nitrate of silver produces a yellow 
precipitate, soluble in nitric acid and ammonia ; sulphate of copper 
causes a yellowish-green precipitate ; alkaline arsenites with an 
excess of alkali, throw down when boiled with a few drops of sul- 
phate of copper, a red precipitate of suboxide of copper, oxidizing 
at the same time the arsenious to arsenic acid ; sulphuretted hy- 
drogen and sulphuret of ammonium cause in acid solutions a yel- 
low precipitate of As 2 S 3 , soluble in alkalies, their carbonates, bi- 
carbonates, and sulphurets, nearly insoluble in muriatic acid, 
decomposed and dissolved by nitric acid, and depositing a metallic 
mirror, if mixed with carbonate of sodium and suddenly subjected 
to an intense heat in a glass tube through which a current of per- 
fectly dry hydrogen passes. 

Compounds of arsenious acid, if subjected to the influence of 
water, zinc, and sulphuric acid, yield arseniuretted hydrogen, Asll, 
which burns with a bluish color, the flame at the same time giving 
off white vapors of garlic odor, which condense upon cold objects. 
Upon a porcelain dish held in the flame, metallic arsenic will be 
deposited in blackish-brown spots, of a bright metallic lustre. Ar- 
seniuretted hydrogen passed through a tube heated to redness 
yields a bright metallic mirror; this in a feeble stream of sulphu- 
retted hydrogen is converted into yellow sulphuret of arsenic, which 
is not affected by a current of muriatic acid gas. 

Compounds of arsenious acid, if mixed with carbonate of sodium 
and cyanide of potassium, and heated to redness in a glass tube 
through which a slow stream of dry carbonic acid passes, yield in 
the colder parts a beautiful metallic mirror; this is a most delicate 
test for arsenious acid. 

Before the blowpipe upon charcoal, arsenious acid, whether free 
or in compounds, is reduced and reoxidized, thus producing a 
characteristic garlic odor. 

Tests for Arsenic Acid. — Sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphuret of 
ammonium cause in acid solutions a yellow precipitate of As 2 S 5 ; 
nitrate of silver produces a reddish-brown precipitate, sulpbate of 
copper a greenish-blue ; sulphurous acid reduces it to arsenious acid ; 
before the blowpipe, with cyanide of potassium and with zinc and 
sulphuric acid, the reactions are as above. 

Preparations op Arsenic. 

Acidum arseniosum, As 2 3 . White, opnque, sometimes translucent, masses. 

Liquor potassii arsenitis, As 2 3 and KHC0 3 4- Aq. Each 04 grs. to Oj ; gr. iv As0 3 

to fgj; 
Liquor sodii arsenitis, As 2 3 Na 2 TJC0 3 . 60 grains each, to Oj ; gr. 3| As 3 to fgj. 
Acidum arsenicum, As 2 5 . Not used in medicine. 
Ammonii arsenias, 2NH 4 HAs0 4 . Colorless rhombic prisms. 
Liquor ammonii arseniatis, gr. j to f^j . Biette's arsenical solution. 
Sodii arsenias, Na 2 HAs0 4 + 7H 2 0. 

Liquor sodii arseniatis, gr. j to fjj. Contains one-seven-hundredth As. 
Ferri arsenias, Fe 3 2As0 4 . Dark green powder. 
Arsenici iodidum, Asl 3 . A soluble orange-red salt. 
Liquor hydrargyri et arsenici iodidi. Asl 3 and Hgl 2 , of each, 70 grains to Oj. 



fowler's solution. 293 

Acidum Arseniosum. As 2 3 =198. {White Arsenic.) 

As before stated, this compound is a collateral product irj, the 
smelting of cobalt ores. These ores, which are worked extensively 
in Bohemia and Saxony, furnish the supplies of arsenic to com- 
merce. It comes in broken masses, with a conchoidal fracture, 
sometimes translucent, and sometimes, especially when old, opaque, 
white, or buff-colored. Soluble in about 100 parts of cold water; 
more soluble in boiling water, which, on cooling, deposits octahe- 
dral crystals; its solubility varies very much, however, the trans- 
parent variety being the more soluble. It should be preferred for 
chemical uses in mass, as the powder is liable to adulteration. In 
medicine, it is used as an alterative and febrifuge. Dose, -Jg to £ 
grain. Externally it is occasionally applied to cancerous affections. 

Arsenious acid is well known to be a violent corrosive poison, 
and being cheap and abundantly sold as a poison for rats and for 
other purposes, is apt to be taken accidentally or with criminal 
design. Its sale is restricted in most of the States by law. The 
best antidote is hydrated peroxide of iron, which, as described in its 
appropriate place, should be given in tablespoonful doses, repeated 
every ten minutes, till a large excess has been given. 

Liquor Potassii Arsenitis, U. S. P. (Foivlei^s Solution.) 

Take of Arsenious acid, in small fragments. 

Bicarbonate of potassium, each, sixty-four grains. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 
Compound spirit of lavender, half a fluidounce. 

Boil the arsenious acid and bicarbonate of potassium in a glass 
vessel (or porcelain capsule) with half a fluidounce of distilled 
water, till the acid is entirely dissolved; to the solution, add twelve 
fluidounces of distilled water; then add the compound spirit of 
lavender, and afterwards enough distilled water to make it measure 
a pint. 

This very popular medicine is so simple in its mode of prepara- 
tion as to be conveniently made by the country practitioner. It 
will be found to facilitate its completion, to triturate the arsenic 
into a "fine powder before introducing it into the flask or capsule. 
The officinal recipe now directs bicarbonate of potassium, 2KHC0 3 , 
but it is more common to use the granulated carbonate K 2 C0 3 , 
which is usually contaminated with a little silica, and is not uni- 
form in its combining proportion by reason of its deliquescence. 
Fowler's Mineral Solution has a characteristic reddish, almost 
opalescent appearance, a faint odor of lavender, and very little 
taste; by some it is stated to be a solution of arsenious acid in the 
alkaline solution; by others, a solution of arsenite of potassium. 
This is a very common alterative and antiperiodic medicine, used 
in lepra and other cutaneous affections, and much employed in 
intermittent fever. Four grains of arsenious acid are contained in 
each fluidounce. Dose, ^liij to xv. 



294 ANTIMONY AND ARSENIC PREPARATIONS. 

Liquor Sodii Arseyiitis. (Harle's Solution.) 

This preparation is very similar to Fowler's solution; the princi- 
pal difference being the substitution of a sodium salt for one of 
potassium. 30 grains, each, of arsenious acid and dried carbonate 
of sodium are digested with six ounces of distilled water, and after 
solution, sufficient cinnamon water is added to make the whole 
measure eight fluidounces. 

It is used for the same purposes and in the same doses as Fowler's 
solution. 

Arsenic Acid. H 3 As0 4 =142. 

If arsenious acid diffused in water is heated, and nitric acid in 
small quantities added until nitrous acid fumes cease to be given off, 
the solution contains arsenic acid. An addition of muriatic acid to 
the water accelerates the reaction, but is not indispensably necessary. 

"When evaporated to dryness and fusion without carrying the 
heat too high, arsenic acid appears as a colorless or white vitreous 
mass, free from water of crystallization, deliquescent, and some- 
times forming crystals containing water. It is exceedingly poison- 
ous, has not been used in medicine in its free state, but the follow- 
ing compositions have been prescribed. 

Ammonii Arsenias. (Arseniate of Ammonium.) 

To prepare the dry salt, a concentrated solution of arsenic acid 
is mixed with strong solution of ammonia until a precipitate com- 
mences to appear; on setting aside, colorless oblique rhombic prisms 
are deposited ; they are efflorescent in the air, and lose ammonia. 

It is a very poisonous salt, exhibiting in a high degree the altera- 
tive effects of arsenic; the dose is 2 ' ? to j$ grain. 

Liquor Ammonii Arseniatis. (Biette's Arsenical Solution.) 

One grain of arseniate of ammonium is dissolved in one ounce 
of water; the dose is 20 minims to half a drachm. 

Sodii Arsenias, U. S. P. E"a 2 HAs0 4 +7H 2 0. {Arseniate of Soda.) 

This is made by calcining 480 grains of arsenious acid, 408 grains 
of nitrate of sodium, and 264 grains of dried carbonate of sodium 
with a full red heat. Put the fused mass while still warm into four 
fluidounces of distilled water, and stir until dissolved. Filter the 
solution, and set aside to crystallize. Drain the crystals, and dry 
rapidly on filtering paper. Keep them in a well-stopped bottle. 

Liquor Sodii Arseniatis, IT. S. P. (Pearson's Arsenical Solution.) 

Take of Arseniate of soda, rendered anhydrous by heat not above 300°, 
sixty-four grains. 
Distilled water, a pint. 

Dissolve the arseniate of sodium in the water. 

This solution contains rather more arsenic than Biette's liquor; 



IODIDE OF ARSENIC. 295 

it is considered milder, and given in the same doses; in minute 
doses, it is asserted to be a reliable remedy against salivation. 

Ferri Arsenias. (Arseniate of Iron.) 

Arseniate of sodium or ammonium produces in the solution of 
protochloride of iron a white precipitate, which, during washing 
and drying, assumes a dirty green color by being converted into a 
ferrosoferric salt. In cancer, psoriasis, etc., it has been given in 
doses of -^ to j 1 ^ grain, usually combined with phosphate of iron; 
externally it is used in ointments containing about half a drachm 
to an ounce. 

Arsenici Iodidum. Asl 3 =456. {Iodide of Arsenic.) 

Take of Arsenic (the metal), sixty grains. 
Iodine, three hundred grains. 

Rub the arsenic in a mortar until reduced to a fine powder, then 
add the iodine, and rub them together till they are thoroughly 
mixed. Put the mixture into a small flask or test-tube, loosely 
stopped, and heat it very gently until liquefaction occurs, then in- 
cline the vessel in different directions in order that any portion of 
the iodine which may have condensed on its inner surface may be 
returned into the fused mass. Lastly, pour the melted iodide on a 
porcelain slab, and when it is cold break it into pieces and keep it 
in a well-stopped bottle. (U. S. P.) 

This is an orange-red crystalline solid, readily reduced to powder, 
entirely soluble in water, and wholly volatilized by heat. It is 
seldom prescribed extemporaneously, being little known to practi- 
tioners, although doubtless capable of valuable therapeutic applica- 
tions. 

It is made officinal for the purpose of furnishing a ready means 
of forming the solution which follows: — 

Liquor Arsenici et Hydrargyri lodidi, U. S. P. (Donovan 9 s Solution.) 

Take of Iodide of arsenic, 

Red iodide of mercury, each, thirty-five grains. 
Distilled water, half a pint. 

Rub the iodides with half a fluidounce of the water, and when 
they have dissolved, add the remainder of the water and filter. Of 
course, the mixed powder should be entirely dissolved. 

Donovan's solution is a clear, very pale straw-colored, or colorless 
liquid, with a slightly styptic taste. It should not be prescribed 
with other chemical preparations, as a general rule. It is a power- 
ful alterative, said to be particularly adapted to the treatment of 
venereal diseases. Dose, t^v to xx. Each fgj contains about §• 
grain of arsenic estimated as arsenious acid. 



296 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM, 



CHAPTER X. 

MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

Hydrargyrum. Hg=200 vel 100. (Mercury.) 

Mercury is obtained chiefly from its bisulphuret, native cinna- 
bar, by distillation with lime ; sometimes it is met with in its me- 
tallic state, and rarely, combined with chlorine. Very rich cinnabar 
is found in California, from which a considerable proportion of our 
mercury is obtained; the mines of New Almaden alone have pro- 
duced in a single year 30,000 flasks of 76J lbs. each. The chief 
uses of mercury are for the extraction of noble metals, the making 
of vermilion, silvering mirrors, the manufacture of barometers and 
thermometers, and the preparation of its salts used in medicine. 

When pure, mercury is a brilliant white, metallic liquid, becoming 
solid at — 39° F., boiling at 662° F. ; sp. gr. 13.5 ; entirely vaporized 
by heat; when small globules of it are rolled slowly on a sheet of 
paper, not a particle should adhere. It dissolves many metals, as 
tin, bismuth, zinc, silver, and gold, forming amalgams with them. 
It may be separated from these, when they contaminate it, by dis- 
tillation. It is not attacked by muriatic nor by cold sulphuric 
acid, though the latter acid, at a boiling temperature, forms with 
it a persulphate, sometimes called bipersulphate. Nitric acid 
oxidizes and dissolves it, forming two nitrates. Mercury forms 
numerous salts, a number of which are officinal preparations. 

In the two classes of salts formed by the suboxide (protoxide) and 
protoxide (deutoxide) of mercury, these oxides are recognized in the 
following way : — 

Tests for the Protoxide. — Sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphuret of 
ammonium cause a black precipitate, insoluble in diluted acids; 
alkalies cause a black precipitate; muriatic acid throws down a 
white precipitate of calomel; iodide of potassium a greenish-yellow, 
darkened by excess of precipitant; protochloride of tin precipitates 
the metallic mercury. 

Tests for the Deutoxide {Red Oxide). — Sulphuretted hydrogen and 
sulphuret of ammonium at first produce a white precipitate, which 
on the further addition of the precipitant turns yellow, orange, 
brown, and black; fixed alkalies, in the absence of ammonia, cause 
a reddish-brown precipitate, which is yellow with an excess of the 
precipitant; the precipitate caused by ammonia is white; proto- 
chloride of tin at first throws down calomel; when in excess, the 
metal is reduced. 

The following convenient test for the mercurials is very delicate, 
and well adapted to pill masses, etc. : — 

On to a copper coin brightened with a little N0 3 , a small portion 
of the suspected substance is placed and moistened with a drop or 



SYLLABUS OF MERCURIAL COMPOUNDS, 



£97 



two of water into a pasty consistence; a small fragment of KI is 
added to it, and on washing it a mercurial stain will remain. Nu- 
merous so-called " vegetable," and other "quack" pills will be found 
to show the presence of calomel in this way. The reaction in the 
case of blue mass is less rapid, though equally certain. 

The combining number adopted by chemists recently for mer- 
cury is 200; that which the leading pharmacologists of this country 
have adopted heretofore is also 200; to prevent any discrepancy it 
will be seen throughout the Pharmacopoeia that in the adoption of 
officinal names, those chosen are such as would be equally applica- 
ble in either case. It will be seen that practically there is no dif- 
ference in the proportions employed, in the preparations, nor in 
their testings; the results are the same, though the chemical names, 
and the explanations of the reactions, are different. More recent 
authorities adopt 200, and in the following syllabus and in the 
text their views will be followed; this will tend to less confusion, 
as these views are likely to prevail in future, and will be in har- 
mony with the lessons of those familiar with the U. S. Dispensatory. 

Syllabus of Mercurial Compounds. 



Off. name. 


Composition, etc. 


Uses. 


Doses. 


Hydrargyri chloridum corro- 


HgCl 2 


Alterative, an- 


TZ t0 i S p - 


sivura 




tiseptic, etc. 




Hydrargyri chloridum mite... 


HgCl 


Cathartic and 
alterative 


-^ to 20 grs. 


" sulphas flava 


IIg 3 2 S0 4 


Emetic and er- 
rhine 


Emetic, 8 grs. 


" iodidum rubrum.. 


Hgl, 


Alterative in 
syphilis, etc. 


xV t0 1 s r - 


" iodidum viride.... 


Hgl 


" 


i to 1 gr. 


" io didu m ftavum.... 


Hgl -f IJgT a 


a 


i t0 i gr- 


Iodide of calomel 

Biniodide of calomel 

Potassii ct hydrargyri iodidum 




t < 

< t 


J T to £gr. 

-r 1 ^ tO 4- M'. 




KI,2HgI 2 


1 -5 4 & 


Syrup of iodohydrargyrate of 
iron 




Alterative 


gtt. XX to XXX. 






Syrup of iodohydrargyrate of 


rigI 2 +FeI + Aq 


" 


m- 


potassium and iron 








Hydrargyri bibromidum 


HgBr 2 


" 


tV t0 i P r - 


" bromidum 


HgBr 


Cathartic and 


T V to G grs. 






alterative 




c< cyanidum 


HgCy 2 


Alterative 


T6 t0 8 S r - 


" sulphuretum ru- 


HgS 


Alterative fu- 




brum 




migations 




" sulphuretum ni- 




Mild alterative 


gr. v to 5j. 


grum 






" oxiduni rubrum... 


HgO 


Externally, 
stimulant 




" " nigrum... 


Hg 2 


Alterative, sia- 


i to 3 grs. 






lagogue, etc. 




11 aectas 


Hg 2 OAc" 
HgXG 3 in Aq 


Alterative 


i to 1 gr. 
gtt. iij. 


" prolcnitruiis liquor 


it 


" binitratis liquor ... 


Hp-2N0 3 in Aq 


" 




' ' phosph as 


2(ITs 2 0)HP0 3 


a 


£ to 2 grs. 


Hydrargyrum ammoniatum... 


NH 2 HgCl 


Externally in 
ointment 




" cum creta 


3partsTTg-f 5pCaC0 3 


Antacid and 
alterative 


| to 3 grs. 



298 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

Hydrargyri Chloridum Corrosivum, U. S. P. (Hydrargyri Perchlo- 
riduin, Ph. Br. HgCl 2 = 275. Chloride, Perchloride, Bichloride 
of Mercury. Mercuric Chloride. Corrosive Sublimate.) 

By the action of boiling sulphuric acid on mercury, the persul- 
phate (HgSOJ is first formed. When this is heated with common 
salt, mutual exchange takes place, and chloride of mercury and 
sulphate of sodium, the former of which sublimes, are produced. 
The changes are represented in the formula Hg,S0 4 +2!NaCI= 
HgCl a +Na,S0 4 . _ 

Corrosive sublimate is in heavy white crystalline masses, of a 
styptic and metallic taste; soluble in about sixteen parts of cold 
and three of boiling water, in three parts of alcohol, and four of 
ether; it melts and entirely sublimes when heated. Its watery 
solution, precipitated by alkalies or lime-water, throws down the 
red or yellowish binoxide. (See Yellow Wash.) When this pre- 
cipitate is heated, it gives off oxygen, and runs into globules of 
metallic mercury; a solution of corrosive sublimate precipitates 
albumen, and forms with it a definite insoluble compound, to which 
property its use as an antiseptic is due. 

It is a very powerful irritant; when taken in large doses, it 
causes burning at the epigastrium, vomiting, and purging; applied 
to the skin, it is corrosive. It is less apt to produce salivation 
than the other preparations of mercury, and in very small doses it 
is useful as an alterative in chronic affections, syphilitic or not ; 
locally it may be used as a lotion, gargle, injection, or ointment, 
in chronic skin diseases, ulcerated sore throats, and chronic dis- 
charge from mucous membranes. 

Dose, t \ gr. to I gr. in solution, or pill with crumb of bread. The 
solution for external use is usually made in the proportion of \ or 
\ gr. to f 3j of water. It is much used in solution with chloride of 
ammonium, which increases its solubility as a poison for bedbugs ; 
the proportions to be used are one ounce of corrosive sublimate, 
half an ounce of chloride of ammonium to two pints of water. 
When taken in poisonous doses, recourse should be had imme- 
diately to albuminous liquids; eggs, if at hand, should be ad- 
ministered freely, or a thin paste of wheat flower or milk, care 
being taken to evacuate the bowels and to carry off completely the 
precipitated material, which, though comparatively insoluble, is by 
no means inert. 

Hydrargyri Chloridum Mite. HgCl= 235.5. (Mild Chloride of 
Mercury. Mercurous Chloride. Calomel.) 

To prepare this, the persulphate of mercury first formed, as 
explained under the head of corrosive chloride, is afterwards, by 
being rubbed with a second equivalent of the metal, reduced to 
a condition capable of forming, when heated, the subsulphate 
(Hg 2 S0 4 ) ; and this, by the action of the common salt, is converted 
into the subchloride of mercury, sulphate of sodium being produced 
at the same time, Hg a S0 4 +N"aCl=Hg a Cl+N"aS0 4 . 



TURPETH MINERAL. 299 

Calomel, when sublimed, occurs in cakes, with a crystalline struc- 
ture; but as a drug, it is met with in the form of a white, or 
yellowish-white, heavy powder, without odor or taste; sublimes 
with heat ; treated with potassa, it is blackened, from the pre- 
cipitation of the protoxide, which, when heated, runs into metallic 
globules. 

Under the name of English or hydro-sublimed calomel, a prepa- 
ration is found in commerce, which is preferred by some physicians 
to the kind made in the manner described above ; it is prepared in 
accordance with Wcehler's suggestion, by conducting the calomel 
vapors during the process of sublimation into a chamber through 
which steam is passed; or, as proposed by Dann, by condensing the 
calomel in a current of cold atmospheric air. Any corrosive sub- 
limate present in the vapors is washed out by the condensed water 
of Woehler's process. 

Calomel must be entirely free of corrosive sublimate; if treated 
with alcohol or boiling water, the filtrate must yield no precipitate 
with sulphuretted hydrogen and nitrate of silver. Calomel is 
entirely volatile; most foreign admixtures are left behind on heat- 
ing upon platinum foil. 

By the action of nitric and muriatic acids, calomel is slowly con- 
verted into corrosive sublimate; soluble chlorides, and even con- 
tinued boiling with water or alcohol, alone have a similar action. 
Chlorine, hypochlorites, iodine, iodides, hydrocyanic acid, and cya- 
nurets decompose calomel; the chlorides producing corrosive sub- 
limate ; it should therefore not be prescribed at the same time with 
muriate of ammonia or nitro-muriatic acid, which last is specially 
indicated in torpor of the liver ; symptoms of violent gastric irri- 
tation have been unexpectedly produced from neglecting this pre- 
caution. 

The peculiarities of calomel, as a mercurial agent, are, that it 
produces little local irritation ; it acts as a purgative by increasing 
the secretion of bile and other intestinal fluids, and hence is much 
relied on in affections of the liver, and obstructions to the portal 
circulation. It is much combined with other remedies, being 
greatly modified in its effects by judicious combination with seda- 
tives, cathartics, astringents, etc. 

Dose, as a purgative, 5 grs. to 9j ; to produce ptyalism, J grain to 
1 grain, frequently repeated. It has become customary to admin- 
ister exceedingly minute quantities of this preparation, so low as 
-o^th of a grain, repeated every hour or two, the constitutional 
effects being perceptible after a grain has been given in this way. 
I am informed that its power to salivate is greatly increased by 
long trituration with sugar of milk, perhaps on account of the 
extremely fine division to which it is thus brought, and of some 
chemical change not yet investigated. 

Hydrargyri Sulphas Flava. Hg 3 2 S0 4 . ( Turpeth Mineral.) 

The persulphate of mercury, formed by the action of boiling sul- 
phuric acid on the metal, and mentioned in the two preceding 



300 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

formulas, is readily decomposed by reducing it to powder and sub- 
mitting it to the action of warm water, which changes its composi- 
tion and properties, producing a yellow-colored insoluble subsalt 
Hg 3 2 S0 4 . This is used almost exclusively as an errhine, variously 
diluted with snuff, powdered liquorice root, lycopodium, etc. 

Hydrargyri Iodidum Bubrum. Hgl 2 =454. {Bed Iodide or 
Biniodide of Mercury. Mercuric Iodide.) 

Take of Corrosive chloride of mercury ... A troyounce. 

Iodide of potassium Ten drachms. 

Distilled water A sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the chloride of mercury in a pint and a half of water 
by trituration in a mortar, adding small quantities of this solvent 
at a time, and pouring it into a precipitating jar, till the salt is 
completely taken up ; then dissolve the iodide of potassium in half 
a pint of hot water by shaking them together in a vial. Now 
pour the solution of iodide into the solution of chloride contained 
in the precipitating jar, both liquids being hot at the time of mix- 
ing them ; this will produce immediately a brilliant scarlet-colored 
precipitate of biniodide of mercury, leaving in solution the very 
soluble chloride of potassium. Now fold a plain filter, and, having 
poured off the supernatant liquid from the precipitated biniodide, 
throw the latter on the filter in a funnel, and wash it by adding 
repeatedly fresh portions of pure water. Wrap the filter up in soft 
paper, and lay it away with a weight on it, in a warm place to dry. 

Biniodide of mercury is a beautiful scarlet-colored powder (in 
fine crystals, if the boiling hot solution has been allowed to cool 
slowly); insoluble in water, but soluble in alcohol, and in solutions 
of iodide of potassium and chloride of sodium. It is wholly sub- 
limed by heat, condensing in scales which are at first yellow, but 
afterwards red. 

The two iodides of mercury resemble the two chlorides in their 
relative medicinal activity. This is, like corrosive sublimate, a 
powerful poison. 

It is conveniently given in pill, but perhaps more frequently in 
solution of iodide of potassium with or without the addition of 
vegetable alterative preparations. Dose, ^ to \ gr. 

Hydrargyri Iodidum Viride. HgI—327. (Subiodide, Brotiodide, 
or Green Iodide of Mercury.) 

Take of Mercury A troyounce. 

Iodine Five drachms. 

Stronger alcohol Sufficient. 

Rub the mercury and iodine together, adding half a fluidounce 
of stronger alcohol to form a soft paste, and continue the tritura- 
tion till the ingredients are thoroughly incorporated. Stir the mix- 
ture occasionally, and, at the end of two hours, triturate again, 
with considerable pressure, until it is nearly dry. Then rub it up 
with stronger alcohol, gradually added, until it is reduced to a 
uniform thin paste; and having transferred this to a filter, wash it 




YELLOW IODIDE OF MERC UK Y. 801 

with stronger alcohol until the washings cease to produce a per- 
manent cloudiness when dropped into a large quantity of water. 
Lastly, dry the iodide in the dark with a gentle heat, and keep it 
in a well stopped bottle, protected from the light. (U. S. P.) 

By this process, though a slight excess of mercury is used, a 
small quantity of the red iodide is formed, which is directed to be 
removed by dissolving it out with the alcohol. 

The mercury is conveniently weighed b} 7 balancing a small paper 
pill-box on the scales, and giving to one side of it a little crimp, as 
shown in Fig. 175 ; so that a small stream of the metal 
may be poured out conveniently. The accurate ad- Fig. 175. 
justment of the quantity is troublesome. The iodine 
also requires care in weighing, owing to its corrosive 
action on the metals. The most convenient method 
is to balance a pair of watch-glasses by filing away 
the heavier of the two, or by pasting on to the ligher 
a small piece of tinfoil, and then to lay them away 
for weighing corrosive substances. In the absence of this, a piece 
of thick and well glazed writing-paper may be put on to each plate 
and balanced. If the scales are kept in a case, as shown in the 
first chapter, they should be taken out whenever iodine is to be 
weighed on them, as the vapor becoming diffused through the air 
inside the case will corrode the metal. 

Green iodide of mercury is a greenish-yellow powder, insoluble 
in water, alcohol, or solution of chloride of sodium, but soluble in 
ether. Officinal stronger alcohol, when shaken with it and sepa- 
rated by filtration, gives but a transient cloudiness on being drop- 
ped into water, and when evaporated from a porcelain surface 
leaves only a faint red stain. Heated quickly, it sublimes in red 
crystals, which afterwards become yellow by age; it is converted into 
teriodide, which has a yellow color, and is believed to be more active. 

It is used as an alterative, usually in pill. Dose, I gr. to 1 gr. ; 
it is incompatible with iodide of potassium, wmich converts it into 
biniodide with separation of mercury. 

Hydrargyri Iodidum Flavum. Hgl4-Hgl 2 . {Yellow Iodide of 

Mercury.) 

Owing to the instability of the protiodide of mercury, it is not 
very reliable as a medicine for internal use; as a substitute for it, a 
yellow iodide has been proposed, which is unalterable by exposure 
and age. It is made by precipitating protonitrate, or some other 
protosalt of mercury, by iodide of potassium, to which one-sixth of 
its weight of iodine has been previously added. 

It is a bright lemon-yellow powder, insoluble in water and alco- 
hol; it sublimes when heated in red crystals, which turn yellow 
on cooling. It is decomposed by hydriodic acid and by iodides 
which are incompatible with it. It is given in doses of one-eighth 
or one-quarter grain. 



302 

Iodides of Calomel. 

Boutigny has proposed for medicinal use two preparations which 
have been called respectively iodide and biniodide of calomel (sub- 
iodide and iodide). The former is prepared by heating four equi- 
valents of calomel in a retort until it commences to sublime, when 
gradually two equivalents of iodine are added. The salt appears 
to be a mixture of two equivalents of calomel, one of iodide, and 
one of chloride of mercury. 

The biniodide of calomel is prepared in a similar manner from 
equal equivalents of calomel and iodide, and must therefore contain 
one equivalent each of bichloride and biniodide of mercury. 

G-obley (see Am. Journ. Pharm., xxx. 168) prepares these iodides 
by triturating the material together, introducing it into a retort, 
and heating it in a sand-bath to fusion. 

It is evident that the two preparations must be of different 
intensity in their medicinal properties. They have been given in 
doses of one-sixteenth to one-eighth grain, and employed externally 
in the proportion of a scruple to half a drachm in one ounce of 
ointment. 

Potassii et Hydrargyri lodidum. KI,2HgI 2 . {Iodohydrar gyrate of 

Potassium.) 

A hot solution of iodide of potassium dissolves three equivalents 
of biniodide of mercury, one of which crystallizes out on cooling, 
afterwards yellow prisms are separated having the composition 
stated in the syllabus; they are soluble in alcohol and ether, but 
decomposed by water. 

It is said to be less apt to produce salivation than other mer- 
curial preparations. It is given in doses of one-twelfth to one- 
eighth grain, and in ointment of the same strength as the other 
mercurial iodides. When intended for use in solution, it has been 
recommended to make it extemporaneously with an excess of iodide 
of potassium, or dissolve it in a solution of this iodide. One of its 
most useful applications is to the testing of organic alkalies, which see. 

Syrup of Iodohydrargyrate of Iron. 

This preparation is recommended to be made by dissolving one 
part of red iodide of mercury in three thousand parts of the officinal 
syrup of iodide of iron. The dose is from twenty to thirty drops 
as an alterative tonic. 

Syrup of Iodohydrargyrate of Potassium and Iron. 

J. E. Young, of Williamsburg, N". Y., offers this preparation, 
made by combining sixty-four grains of iodine in three drachms of 
water with iron, and filtering the solution into three and a half 
fiuidounces of syrup ; two grains of red iodide of mercury, and 
one and a half grain of iodide of potassium are dissolved in one 
drachm of water, and added to the syrup, the whole to measure 



CYANIDE OR CYANURET OF MERCURY. 303 

four fluidounces. Some orange-flower water may be added to im- 
prove the flavor. The dose is a teaspoonful. 

Hydrargyri Bibromidum. HgBr 2 =360. {Bibromide of Mercury.) 

This corrosive poison is prepared by combining two parts of bro- 
mine with five parts mercury under water. 

It crystallizes from water in white shining scales, from alcohol 
in needles; is soluble in water, more so in alcohol and ether, and 
sublimes when heated. 

In its action it is stated to be analogous to corrosive sublimate, 
and is employed in the same doses. 

Hydrargyri Br omidum. IigBr=280. {Bromide of Mercury.) 

Nine parts of bromide of mercury are mixed with five parts of 
mercury and sublimed, or a subsalt of mercury is. precipitated by 
bromide of potassium. 

It appears as a soft white powder or in thin prismatic crystals, 
insoluble in water and alcohol, but decomposed by the continued 
action of bromides or iodides. 

It is said to resemble calomel in its action, and is given in me- 
dium doses of four to five grains. 

Hydrargyri Cyanidum. IIgCy 2 =252. {Cyanide or Cyanuret of 

Mercury.) 

Take of Ferrocyanide of potassium, five troyounces. 

Sulphuric acid, four troyounces and one hundred and twenty 
. grains. 

Red oxide of mercury, in fine powder, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the ferrocyanide of potassium in twenty fluidounces of 
water, and add the solution to the sulphuric acid, previously diluted 
with ten fluidounces of water, and contained in a glass retort. 
Distil the mixture nearly to dryness into a receiver containing ten 
fluidounces of water and three troyounces of red oxide of mercury. 
Set aside two fluidounces of the distilled liquid, and to the re- 
mainder add, with agitation, sufficient red oxide to destroy the 
odor of hydrocyanic acid. Then filter the solution, and, having 
added the reserved liquid, evaporate the whole in a dark place, in 
order that crystals may form. Lastly, dry the crystals, and keep 
them in a well-stopped bottle, protected from the light. {U. S. P.) 

In white prismatic crystals, wholly soluble in water. When 
muriatic acid is added to the solution, hydrocyanic acid is evolved, 
made evident by its odor, and bichloride of mercury is left, which 
is entirely volatilized by heat. When cyanide of mercury is heated, 
cyanogen is given off, and a blackish matter is left containing glo- 
bules of mercury. 

Cyanide of mercury is, like the corrosive chloride, a powerful 
poison, differing from that remedy in producing no epigastric pain 
in its operation. Some practitioners prefer it to corrosive chloride 
in the same doses, and for the same purposes. 



304 

Its solution should not be precipitated by muriatic acid or caustic 
potassa. 

Hydrargyri Sulphuretum Bubrum. HgS=232. {Bed Sulphide or 
Sulphur et of Mercury. Artificial Cinnabar.) 

When melted sulphur is brought in contact with mercury, direct 
union ensues ; and if the compound is afterwards sublimed, it con- 
sists of dark scarlet, shining, crystalline masses, forming, when 
powdered, a beautiful scarlet color, known by the name of vermi- 
lion. It is insoluble in water and alcohol, volatilizes entirely when 
heated alone, but with potassa it is reduced to metallic globules. 

When the fumes are brought into contact with the surface of 
the body, the drug acts as a topical alterative, and becomes ab- 
sorbed, affecting the system the same as other mercurials. It is 
used as a fumigator in some syphilitic skin diseases ; 5ss, thrown 
on a hot iron, and placed beneath the patient wrapped in a blanket, 
will effect the object. The vapor should not be allowed to enter 
the lungs. 

Hydrargyri Sulphuretum Nigrum. {Black Sulphide of Mercury. 
Ethiops Mineral.) 

Made by rubbing equal parts of mercury and sulphur together 
till the globules disappear and a powder is formed. This was for- 
merly officinal, but has been omitted from the Pharmacopoeia since 
its revision in 1860. 

Ethiops is an insoluble black powder, which is rarely used for 
any purpose. It may be safely given in doses of from gr. v to 3j> 
though marked by no very active properties. 

Hydrargyri Oxidum Bubrum. HgO=216. {Peroxide of Mercury. 
Mercuric Oxide. Bed Precipitate.) 

Prepared by dissolving with heat, mercury, Ibiij, in a mixture of 
nitric acid, foij, and water, Oij ; evaporating the liquor, and tritu- 
rating what remains to a powder. This is put into a very shallow 
vessel, and heated till red fumes cease to arise, the nitrate is decom- 
posed by heat, nitrous acid fumes being disengaged and oxide of 
mercury remaining. 

Red oxide is in orange-red, shining, crystalline scales; when 
strongly heated, it yields oxygen and metallic mercury, without 
the production of red fumes. It is insoluble in water, but soluble 
in nitric and hydrochloric acids. 

It is used only externally, as a stimulant and escharotic ; it is 
much applied as an ointment to the eye; as an escharotic, in powder, 
alone, or mixed with sugar, to specks in the cornea, over chancres, 
and fungous ulcers. 

The directions of our Pharmacopoeia enjoin great care in reducing 
the red oxide of mercury to a very fine powder; as it is yery apt 
to be gritty from containing crystalline portions. 



LIQUOK HYDRARGYRI NITRATIS. 305 

The preparation is produced, uniform, smooth, and satisfactory 
by the following formula of T. S. Wiegand : — 

Take of Bichloride of mercury 550 grains. 

Caustic potassa, in solution 116 " 

Dissolve the chloride in one pint of boiling water, and pour the 
solution into the solution of caustic potassa, diluted with two pints 
of water, wash with water till there is no taste, and dry on a porous 
tile; the powder is smooth, dense, and well suited for the purpose 
of admixture with fatty matters. 

Hydrargyri Oxidum Nigrum. Hg 2 0=216. (Protoxide of Mercury, 
Mercurous Oxide. Mack Oxide of Mercury.) 

Made by triturating colomel with a solution of caustic potassa. 
Protoxide of mercury precipitates, while chloride of potassium re- 
mains in solution, and is removed by washing. This preparation 
was omitted from the U. 3. Pharmacopoeia in 1860. 

Black oxide of mercury is in powder, which becomes olive-colored 
by the action of light. It is wholly dissipated by heat, metallic 
globules being sublimed. It is insoluble in water, but is wholly 
dissolved by acetic acid. 

As a medicine, it is like calomel in its action, and is sometimes 
substituted for it, but is said to be liable, from occasionally contain- 
ing deutoxide, to operate harshly. 3ij, placed on a hot iron, answers 
the purposes of a mercurial vapor bath. Triturated with lard, it 
replaces mercurial ointment. Its dose, as an alterative, is a quarter 
to a half grain daily; as a sialagogue, gr. j to iij, three times a day, 
in pill. 

Hydrargyri Acetas. Hg 2 OAc=259. (Acetate of Mercury. Mercurous 

Acetate.) 

This salt crystallizes from a hot solution of protoxide of mercury 
in acetic acid, or from a mixture of the hot solutions of the proto- 
nitrate of mercury and acetate of potassium. 

It separates in soft scales, is slightly oxidized by the air, and 
blackened by the light while moist. 

It is used in similar complaints as the other mercurial salts, 
in the dose of one-sixth of a grain to one grain. 

Liquor Hydrargyri Nitratis. Hg2K0 3 in Aqua. U. S. P. 

Take of Mercury, three troyounces. 
Nitric acid, five troyounces. 
Distilled water, six nuidrachms. 

Dissolve the mercury, with the aid of a gentle heat, in the acid, 
previously mixed with the distilled water. "When reddish vapors 
cease to arise, evaporate the liquid to seven troyounces and a half, 
and keep it in a well-stopped bottle. 

In this process part of the nitric acid is decomposed, furnishing 
oxygen to the mercury, and the oxide of mercury combines with 
20 



306 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

the acid to form the nitrate of protoxide, formerly regarded as bi- 
nitrate of deutoxide of mercury, in solution. The nitric acid is 
designedly present in considerable excess. 

This solution is made officinal for the preparation of citrine 
ointment; it is too concentrated for use except with great care 
as a caustic. It is used in cancerous and other malignant affec- 
tions, and is similar to, though not identical with, the preparation 
formerly in use under the name of Acid Nitrate cle Mercure. 

It is a transparent, nearly colorless, acid liquid, having the spe- 
cific gravity 2.165. It is not precipitated by the addition of dis- 
tilled water; the diluted solution affords, with potassa, a dirty- 
yellow precipitate, and with iodide of potassium, a bright-red one, 
soluble in an excess of the precipitant. When dropped on a bright 
surface of copper, the diluted solution instantly deposits a coating of 
mercury. 

Liquor Hydragyri Subnitratis. HgN0 3 in Aq. 

The German Pharmacopoeia contains a solution of the protonitrate 
of mercury, prepared by digesting mercury in excess with nitric 
acid and water, equal parts, and diluting the solution until it has 
the specific gravity of 1.1, and contains in twelve parts one part of 
mercury. It is used in venereal diseases in the medium dose of 
two drops. 

If the solution should contain binoxide, this may be detected by 
precipitating it with chloride of sodium, and testing the filtrate 
with sulphuretted hydrogen, which will produce a yellowish pre- 
cipitate changing to black. 

Hydrargyri Phosphas. 2(Hg 2 0)H,P0 3 =497. (Mercurous Phosphate. 
Subphosphate of Mercury.) 

A solution of a subsalt of mercury is precipitated by phosphate 
of sodium, and the precipitate well washed. 

It is a white crystalline powder, insoluble in water, and has been 
employed in doses of about one grain, once or twice a day. 

There is also a mercuric phosphate which is not used in medicine, 
having the composition 2(Hg)II,P0 3 . 

Hydrargyrum Ammoniatum. NH 2 HgCl== 251.5. {Mercuric Amido- 
Chloride. White Precipitate of Mercury.) 

When ammonia is added to a solution of corrosive sublimate, a 
peculiar compound, and not the oxide of mercury, is precipitated. 

This is a white, amorphous powder, in irregular masses, frequently 
bearing the impression of the fabric on which it is drained and 
dried. It is decomposed and dissipated by heat ; is insoluble in 
water, but decomposed by continued washing; dissolves in hydro- 
chloric acid without effervescence; and, when heated with potassa, 
gives off ammonia, and becomes yellow from the formation of the 
red oxide of mercury. Acetic acid which has been digested with 
it does not yield with iodide of potassium either a yellow or blue 



AURUM — GOLD. 307 

precipitate ; it is not blackened when rubbed with lime-water. It 
is a compound of amidogen or amide (NH 2 ) with chloride of mercury. 
This salt is never used internally ; it is applied externally, to 
chronic skin affections, in the form of ointment. {See Unguenta.) 

Hydrargyrum cum Greta. {Mercury with Chalk. Gray Powder.) 

Made by triturating three parts of mercury with five parts of 
prepared chalk, till it loses its fluidity and metallic lustre, and the 
whole assumes the form of a dark-gray powder. 

This process is one of great labor; and other modes of preparation 
have been employed. Those which oxidize part of the mercury 
into red oxide are objectionable, as rendering this mild powder 
drastic and violent in its action. It is much less used than blue 
mass, which it resembles in its action. The proportion of mercury 
is larger than in blue mass, but is said to be equally mild when 
well made. Dr. J. C. Beck, of Cincinnati, has examined a speci- 
men containing 15 per cent, of red oxide of mercury. A good sub- 
stitute is formed by mixing powdered blue mass with prepared 
chalk, extemporaneously. 

It is described as a gray powder, partly dissipated by heat. 
When a small portion is treated with dilute acetic acid in excess, 
it is partly dissolved, nothing remaining but mercury in the form 
of minute globules, visible by the aid of a magnifying glass. The 
solution, on the addition of muriatic acid, is rendered opalescent ; 
and, when filtered after this addition, and treated with hydros ul- 
phuric acid, does not yield a black precipitate. 

In a paper by Mr. Joseph P. Remington, read before the Amer. 
Pharm. Association in Sept. 1868, the formula used by Dr. E. R. 
Squibb, of Brooklyn, N". Y., is detailed, in which 10 parts of mer- 
cury and 2 parts of honey are shaken together in a properly con- 
structed apparatus for six hours; to this mixture 31 parts of precipi- 
tated chalk, mixed into a paste with about 38 parts of water, are 
added and thoroughly mixed ; the whole is then transferred to a 
muslin strainer, dried, and powdered. In nine samples of this 
preparation examined by Mr. Remington the amount of oxide 
varied from .265 to 25.69, thus accounting for the great variation 
complained of by medical practitioners. 

Its chief use is in treating the complaints of children, the chalk 
neutralizing acid in the stomach, while the mercury increases the 
biliary secretion. Dose, for a child, from half a grain to three grains. 

For other mercurial preparations, see Pills and Ointments. 

Aurum. (Gold=197.) 

Gold is a soft metal, of a peculiar yellow color, and a lustre 
which is not affected by exposure to the air or heat; it is extremely 
malleable, being readily drawn into very fine w T ire, or beaten into 
leaves of sTroWfrth of an inch in thickness, or, if plated on to 
silver, not exceeding the one twelve-millionth part of an inch. Its 
specific gravity is 19.5 ; its fusing point 1300° F. Commercially the 



308 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

quality of gold is designated by the term carat, which expresses 
its fineness, not weight ; pure gold is 24 carat ; 23 carat gold con- 
tains 23 parts of gold to one of alloy, 18 carat gold 18 of gold to 
6 of alloy. At the mint the proportion of pure gold is expressed 
by thousandths. American coin is 900 thousandths, 900 parts pure 
gold to 100 of alloy. To find the carat of a specimen of known 
percentage of pure gold, multiply the weight of pure gold by 24, 
and divide the product by the weight of the mass. American coin 
is of 21.6 carats, thus: — 

900x24 _ 216 
1000 

To find the percentage of pure gold in gold of known carat, 
multiply the weight by the carat and divide by 24, thus: — 

1000x21.6 



24 



= 900. 



Gold is not attacked by acids, except by nitromuriatic acid, 
which solution is the starting point for all preparations of gold. 

It combines with oxygen in two proportions, forming a suboxide, 
AuO, and a peroxide, Au0 3 . 

Gold leaf, like silver leaf, is used for coating pills containing nau- 
seous or strong-smelling substances. 

Test for Peroxide of Gold. — Sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphuret 
of ammonium cause a black precipitate, soluble in sulphuretted 
alkaline sulphurets ; potassa produces a reddish-yellow precipitate ; 
ammonia a precipitate of a similar color, which is fulminating 
gold ; protochloride with a little perchloride of tin, throws down a 
purple red precipitate, insoluble in muriatic acid. 

Preparations of Gold. 

Auri pulvis, Au. Obtained by precipitation or by mechanical division. 

Auri oxidum, Au0 3 . Anhydrous blackish-brown powder, easily decomposed by heat. 

Auri chloridum, AuCl 3 . Yellow or reddish ; crystalline, combining with metallic chlo- 
rides. 

Sodii et auri chloridum, NaCl,AuCl 3 -|- 4Aq. Yellow crystals, not deliquescent. 

Auri iodidum, Aul 3 . Dark green ; readily decomposed, combining with iodides. 

Auri cyanidum, AuCy. Yellow, crystalline, insoluble , combining with alkaline cya- 
nides. 

Auri Pulvis. (Pulverized Gold.) 

When solution of gold in nitromuriatic acid is mixed with a 
solution of protosulphate of iron, a pulverulent precipitate of a 
cinnamon-brown color is produced, which is metallic gold, aurum 
prwcipitatum. By filing pure gold, may likewise be obtained, in a 
pretty fine powder, auri limatura; or by rubbing gold leaf with 
sulphate of potassium to a fine powder, and dissolving out the po- 
tassium salt, aurum prozparatum. 

Gold, in its metallic form, is supposed to act as a tonic and 
alterative, and to be considerably milder than any of its compounds.. 
Its dose is one-half to one grain two or three times a day. 



CHLORIDE OF SODIUM AND GOLD. 309 



Auri Oxidum. Au 2 3 =442. (Sesquioxide or Ter oxide of Gold.) 

Chloride of gold, or the solution of gold in nitromuriatic acid, 
is treated with magnesia, the precipitate washed with water, and 
then decomposed by nitric acid, which extracts the magnesia, and 
a reddish-yellow powder is obtained, which, on drying, turns chest- 
nut brown. 

It is somewhat irritating, but has the general properties of pow- 
dered gold; in scrofula, syphilis, etc., it has been used in doses of 
one-tenth to one-half grain twice a day. 

Liquor Auri Nitro-muriatis. 

This is a solution of six grains of chloride of gold in one ounce 
of nitromuriatic acid, which has been used as a caustic in cancerous 
affections; it produces a whitish scab. 

A stronger solution has been employed for syphilitic and scrofu- 
lous ulcers. 

Auri Chloridum. AuCl 3 = 303.5. (Sesqaichloride or Tcrchloride of 

Gold.) 

This salt is contained in the solution of gold in nitromuriatic 
acid, from which it is obtained by evaporation to dryness, and con- 
stant stirring towards the end of the process. Care should be taken 
in the evaporation not to waste the salt, which is volatile. It is a 
reddish crystalline powder, very deliquescent; soluble in water, 
alcohol, and ether. Metals, many metallic salts, and organic com- 
pounds reduce the gold from its solution. 

It is caustic, producing much irritation; when given for some 
time it is apt to salivate ; it is very poisonous. The dose is one- 
twentieth to one-eighth grain once a day, and very cautiously in- 
creased to several doses a day. 

Variously diluted with chloride of sodium this salt is used in the 
photographic art. 

Sodii et Auri Chloridum. EaCl,AuCl 3 + 4Aq. {Chloride of Sodium 

and Gold.) 

This double salt is obtained by preparing the perchloride from 
three and a half parts of pure gold, dissolving it in water, and 
mixing therewith one part pure anhydrous chloride of sodium. On 
evaporating this solution, long four-sided prisms are obtained, which 
are of a yellow color and unchangeable in the air. 

This salt is officinal in some pharmacopoeias, most of which, how- 
ever, direct an excess of chloride of sodium, and to rub the evap- 
orated mass into a fine powder. 

Of the preparations of gold, this double chloride is most employed. 
Its action is similar to that of the perchloride, but much milder. 
The dose is one-twelfth to one-quarter grain a day of the pure salt. 



310 MERCURY, GOLD, AND PLATINUM. 

Auri Iodidum. Aul 3 . {Iodide of Gold.) 

If a solution of perchloride of gold is gradually added to iodide 
of potassium, the resulting precipitate is at first redissolved on agi- 
tation, a soluble double iodide being formed ; subsequently the 
iodide of gold is precipitated, leaving the supernatant liquor free 
of color. 

It is a dark-green powder, easily soluble in hydriodic acid. It 
must be kept in well-stoppered bottles, as in contact with the air it 
gradually loses iodine until metallic gold is left behind. 

Like other preparations of gold, it is of an alterative effect, but 
on account of its spontaneous decomposition, it is not very reliable; 
the dose is about one-sixteenth of a grain. 

Auri Cyanidum. AuCy. {Cyanide of Gold.) 

The cyanide of gold which has been used in medicine appears to 
be the protocyanide. The percyanide is in white tabular crystals, 
fusing at 112°, giving off hydrocyanic acid and cyanogen, and is 
easily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether. That employed medi- 
cinally is insoluble in those liquids, but soluble in alkaline cyanides, 
ammonia, and sulphuret of ammonium ; properties which agree 
with the protocyanide of gold. It is prepared by dissolving ful- 
minating gold, obtained by precipitating a solution of seven parts 
of gold by ammonia, in a hot solution of six parts of cyanide of 
potassium, and treating the solution with muriatic acid in excess, 
which leaves the proto-cyanicle as a yellow crystalline powder. 

It is stated to be one of the mildest compounds of gold, and has 
been used as an alterative, resolvent, and emmenagogue, in doses 
of one-twelfth to one-half grain once or twice a day. 

All the above preparations of gold are also used externally in 
ointments, and in cases of syphilis for frictions on the gums and 
tongue. For the latter purpose, they are generally mixed with 
twice or three times their weight of some inert powder, and the 
friction is commenced with about one-sixth grain of the mixture a 
day, and gradually increased ; the milder preparations are used in 
somewhat larger proportions. The quantity employed in ointments 
varies with the nature of the case, the preparation used, and with 
the effect desired ; from two to twenty grains are employed to an 
ounce of ointment. 

Platinum. Pt = 197.4. 

This metal is remarkable for its resistance to chemical agents, and 
for its infusibility. It is soft, of a silver-gray color ; very malleable 
and ductile, though inferior in these respects to gold. Its valuable 
physical and chemical properties render it indispensable for the 
preparation of the necessary utensils for a chemical laboratory. 

Platinum dissolves in nitromuriatic acid ; with oxygen it unites 
in two proportions, forming an oxide, PtO, and a binoxide, Pt0 2 ; 
with the halogens and sulphur it forms compounds of corresponding 
composition. 



TESTS. 311 

Tests for Binoxide of Platinum. — Platinum in solution is recog- 
nized by the following behavior towards reagents: Sulphuretted 
hydrogen and sulphuret of ammonium cause a blackish-brown pre- 
cipitate of PtS 2 , insoluble in muriatic and nitric acid, soluble in 
alkaline sulphurets and potassa. In the presence of chlorides, or 
of free muriatic acid, potassa and ammonia produce a crystalline 
yellow precipitate, soluble in alkalies. Solutions containing free 
muriatic acid are changed by protochloride of tin to a deep 
brownish-red color. 

Platini Perchloridum. PtCl 4 = 340. 

Bichloride of platinum is obtained by dissolving the metal in 
aqua regia, and evaporating to dryness. It is a red crystalline mass, 
turning brown by expelling the water of crystallization ; deli- 
quescent ; soluble in water and alcohol ; it is much used as a test 
for the inorganic and organic alkalies, with which it forms yellow 
double chlorides. 

It is poisonous, producing convulsions and death in overdoses. 
In doses of one-eighth to one-fourth grain, given in mucilaginous 
liquids, it has been employed like chloride of gold in syphilis, 
epilepsy, etc., also externally, about fifteen grains to one ounce of 
ointment. 

Sodii et Platini Chloridum. NaCl + PtCl 4 + 6Aq = 486.5. 

By mixing solutions of bichloride of platinum and chloride of 
sodium yellow prisms are obtained by evaporation, which are soluble 
in water and alcohol. 

Its effects are similar to the former, only milder, and it is given 
in somewhat larger doses. 



CHAPTER XI. 

TESTS, 

In the last edition of the British Pharmacopoeia there are appended 
two series of tests, both in the state of solution; the one series for 
qualitative examination of substances, the other for quantitative 
experiment. It has been deemed best to arrange these tests sepa- 
rately in this place rather than scatter them throughout the work 
under various headings. These solutions will enable the careful 
pharmacist to determine with certainty the quality of those sub- 
stances he may be supplied with. 

Solution of Acetate of Copper, 

Take of Subacetate of copper of commerce, in fine powder, half an 
ounce (avoirdupois). 
Acetic acid, one fluidounce (Imperial). 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 



312 TESTS. 

Dilute the acid with half a fiuidounce of the water: digest the 
subacetate of copper in the mixture at a temperature not exceeding 
212° with repeated stirring, and continue the heat until a dry 
residue is obtained. Digest this in four fiuidounces of boiling dis- 
tilled water, and by the addition of more of the water make up the 
solution to five nuidounces, and filter it. 

Solution of Acetate of Potassium. 

Dissolve half an avoirdupois ounce of acetate of potassium in five 
fiuidounces (Imperial) of distilled water,* and filter. 

Solution of Acetate of Sodium. 

Dissolve half an avoirdupois ounce of acetate of sodium in five 
fiuidounces (Imperial) of distilled water, and filter. 

Solution of Albumen. 

Mix, by trituration in a mortar, the white of one egg and four 
fiuidounces (Imperial) of distilled water, and filter through clean 
tow previously moistened with distilled water. This solution should 
be prepared when wanted for use. 

Solution of Ammonio-nitrate of Silver. 

Take of Nitrate of silver, in crystals, a quarter of an ounce (avoir.). 

Solution of ammonia, half a fluidounce (Imp.), or a sufficiency. 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Dissolve the nitrate in eight fiuidounces of the water, and to the 
solution add the ammonia until the precipitate first formed is nearly 
dissolved. Filter, and add distilled water so that the bulk may be 
ten fiuidounces (Imperial). 

Solution of Ammonio-nitrate of Copper. 

Take of Sulphate of copper, in crystals, half an ounce (avoir.). 
Solution of ammonia, 
Distilled wate*r, of each, a sufficiency. 

Dissolve the sulphate in eight fiuidounces (Imperial) of the water, 
and to the solution add the ammonia until the precipitate first 
formed is nearly dissolved. Filter, and then add distilled water, so 
•.that the bulk maybe ten fiuidounces (Imperial). 

Solution of Ammonio-sulphate of Magnesia, 

Take of Sulphate of magnesia, one ounce (avoirdupois). 

Chloride of ammonium (muriate of ammonia), half an ounce 

(avoirdupois). 
Solution (water) of ammonia, half a fluidounce. 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Dissolve the sulphate and the chloride in eight fiuidounces (Im- 
perial) of the water, and to the solution add the ammonia and as 
much distilled water as will make up the bulk to ten fiuidounces 
\ (Imperial). 



SOLUTION OF CHLORIDE OF TIX. 313 

Solution of Boracic Acid. 

Dissolve fifty grains of boracic acid in one fiuidounce (Imperial) 
of rectified spirit, and filter. 

Solution of Bromine. 

Upon ten minims of bromine, in a bottle furnished with an ac- 
curately fitting glass-stopper, pour iive fluidounces (Imperial) of 
distilled water, and shake several times. Keep the solution ex- 
cluded from the light. 

Solution of Carbonate of Ammonium. 

Take of Carbonate of ammonium in small pieces, half an ounce (avoir.). 
Distilled water, ten fluidounces (Imperial). 

Dissolve and filter. 

Solution of Chloride of Ammonium. Solution of Hydrochlorate of 

Ammonia. 

Dissolve one ounce (avoirdupois) of chloride of ammonium in 
ten fluidounces (Imperial) of distilled water, and filter. 

Saturated Solution of Chloride of Calcium. 

Dissolve four ounces (avoirdupois) of chloride of calcium in five 
fluidounces (Imperial) of distilled water, and filter. 

Solution of Chloride of Gold. 

Take of Fine gold, reduced by a rolling machine to thin laminae, sixty 
grains. 
Nitric acid, one fluidounce and a half (Imperial). 
Hydrochloric acid, seven fluidounces (Imperial). 
Distilled water, a sufficiency 

Place the gold in a flask with the nitric acid and six fluidounces 
of the hydrochloric acid, first mixed with four fluidounces of the 
water, and digest until it is dissolved. Add to the solution the 
additional fluidounce of hydrochloric acid, evaporate at a heat not 
exceeding 212° until acid vapors cease to be given off, and dissolve 
the chloride of gold thus obtained in five fluidounces (Imperial) of 
distilled water. The solution should be kept in a stoppered bottle. 

Solution of Chloride of Tin. 

Take of Granulated tin, one ounce (avoirdupois). 

Hydrochloric acid, three fluidounces (Imperial). 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Dilute the acid in the flask with one fluidounce of the water, and 
having added the tin apply a moderate heat until gas ceases to be 
evolved. Add as much of the water as will make up the bulk to 
five fluidounces, and transfer the solution, together with the undis- 
solved tin, to a bottle with an accurately ground stopper. 



314 TESTS. 

Solution of Gelatin. 

Take of Isinglass (Icthyocolla), in shreds, fifty grains. 

Warm distilled water, five fluidounces (Imperial). 

Mix and digest for half an hour on a water-bath with repeated 
shaking, and filter through clean tow moistened with distilled 
water. 

Solution of Iodate of Potash. 

Take of Iodine, 

Chlorate of potash, each, fifty grains. 

JSTitric acid, eight minims. 

Distilled water, ten fluidounces and a half (Imperial). 

Rub the iodine and chlorate of potash together to a fine powder; 
place the mixture in a Florence flask, and, having poured upon it 
half a fiuidounce of the water acidulated with the nitric acid, digest 
at a gentle heat until the color of the iodine disappears. Boil for 
one minute, then transfer the contents of the flask to a capsule, and 
evaporate to perfect dryness at 212°. Finally, dissolve the residue 
in the remaining ten fluidounces of distilled water, filter the solu- 
tion, and keep it in a stoppered bottle. 

Solution of Iodide of Potassium. 

Dissolve one ounce (avoirdupois) of iodide of potassium in ten 
fluidounces of distilled water, and filter. 

Solution of Oxalate of Ammonia. 

Take of Oxalate of ammonia, half an ounce (avoirdupois). 
Warm distilled water, one pint (Imperial. ) 

Dissolve and filter. 

Solution of Perchloride of Platinum. 

Take of Thin platinum foil, a quarter of an ounce (avoirdupois). 
Nitric acid, 

Hydrochloric acid, each, a sufficiency. 
Distilled water, seven fluidounces (Imperial). 

Mix a fluidounce of the nitric acid with four fluidounces of the 
hydrochloric acid and two fluidounces of the water ; pour the mix- 
ture into a small flask containing the platinum, and digest at a 
gentle heat, adding more of the acid mixed in the same proportion, 
should this be necessary, until the metal is dissolved. Transfer the 
solution to a porcelain capsule, add to it a fluidrachm of hydro- 
chloric acid, and evaporate on a water-bath until acid vapors cease 
to be given off. Let the residue be dissolved in the remaining five 
fluidounces of distilled water, filter, and preserve in a stoppered 
bottle. 

Solution of Phosphate of Soda. 

Dissolve one ounce (avoirdupois) of crystallized phosphate of 
soda in ten fluidounces of distilled water, and filter. 



SOLUTION OF FERROCYANIDE OF POTASSIUM. 315 

Solution of Bed Prussiate of Potash. Solution of Ferridcyanide 

of Potassium. 

Dissolve a quarter of an ounce (avoirdupois) of crystallized red 
prussiate of potash in five fluidounces (Imperial) of distilled water, 
and filter. 

Solution of Sulphate of Indigo. 

Take of Indigo, dry and in fine powder, five grains. 
Sulphuric acid, ten nuidounces (Imperial). 

Mix the indigo with a fluidrachm of the acid in a small test- 
tube, and apply the heat of a water-bath for an hour. Pour the 
blue liquid into the remainder of the acid, agitate the mixture, 
and, when the undissolved indigo has subsided, decant the clear 
liquid into a stoppered bottle. 

Solution of Sulphate of Iron. 

Dissolve ten grains of granulated sulphate of iron in one fluid- 
ounce (Imperial) of boiling distilled water, and filter. This solu- 
tion should be prepared when wanted for use. 

Solution of Sulphate of Lime. 

Take of Plaster of Paris, a quarter of an ounce (avoirdupois). 
Distilled water, one pint (Imperial). 

Rub fhe plaster of Paris in a porcelain mortar for a few minutes 
with two fluidounces of the water, introduce the mixture thus ob- 
tained into a pint bottle (Imperial) containing the rest of the water, 
shake well several times, and allow the undissolved sulphate to 
subside ; when this has occurred, filter. 

Solution of Sulphide of Ammonium. 

Take of Solution of ammonia, five fluidounces. 

Put three fluidounces of the ammonia into a bottle and conduct 
into this a stream of sulphuretted hydrogen so long as this gas 
continues to be absorbed ; then add the remainder of the ammonia, 
and transfer the solution to a green-glass bottle, furnished with a 
well-ground stopper. 

Solution of Tartaric Acid. 

Dissolve one ounce (avoirdupois) of crystallized tartaric acid in 
eight fluidounces of distilled water, add two fluidounces (Imperial) 
of rectified spirit, and keep the solution in a stoppered bottle. The 
spirit is added to preserve the solution. 

Solution of Yellow Prussiate of Potash. Solution of Ferrocyanide 

of Potassium. 

Dissolve a quarter of an ounce (avoirdupois) of crystallized 
yellow prussiate of potash in five fluidounces (Imperial) of distilled 
water, and filter. 



316 TESTS. 

Quantitative Tests. — The design in directing this series of tests is 
to supply suitable solutions with which to determine the quantity 
of any particular substance that may be under examination. Being 
all in solution, they are known as volumetric solutions in the British 
Pharmacopoeia. 

The solutions are made so that each grain-measure represents a 
definite quantity of the article in solution, and when a given 
number of measures is used, the quantity of the reagent is at once 
known. To make the tests as easy and simple as possible, the solu- 
tion is generally made to the measure of 10,000 grains, and these 
solutions should be rendered uniform before being used, and pre- 
served in closely-stopped bottles to prevent change by atmospheric 
action or evaporation. 

Volumetric Solution of Bichromate of Potassa. EX)2Cr0 3 = 147.5. 

Take of Bichromate of potassa, 147.5 grains. 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Put the bichromate into a 10,000-grain flask, and, having half 
filled the flask with the water, allow the salt to dissolve ; then 
dilute the solution with more water until it has the exact bulk of 
10,000 grain-measures. 

The quantity of this which fills the burette to (1000 grain- 
measures) contains one-tenth of an equivalent in grains (14.75 
grains) of the bichromate of potash, and when added to a protosalt 
of iron acidulated with hydrochloric acid, is capable of converting 
one-tenth of six equivalents of iron (16.8 grains) from the state of 
a protosalt to that of a persalt (sesquisalt). In practising this 
volumetric process, it is known that the whole of the protosalt has 
been converted into a persalt when a minute drop of the solution 
placed in contact with a drop of the solution of ferridcyanide of 
potassium on a white plate ceases to strike with it a blue color. 

By this test it is very evident that the quantity of any ferrous 
salt may be estimated in whatever compound it may be present. 
In the case of ferrous salts the rationale is this: two equivalents of 
bichromate of potassa, which contain two equivalents of chromium 
and six of oxygen, yield three equivalents of oxygen, and become 
three equivalents of sesquioxide of chromium to the six equiva- 
lents of the ferrous salt (6FeO), converting them into three of the 
ferric salt (3Fe 2 3 ). 

Volumetric Solution of Hyposulphite of Soda. NaOS 2 2 + 5H 2 = 124. 

Take of Hyposulphite of soda, in crystals, two hundred and sixty grains. 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Dissolve the hyposulphite in 10,000 grain-measures of distilled 
water. Fill a burette with this solution, and drop it cautiously 
into 1000 grain-measures of the volumetric solution of iodine until 
the brown color is just discharged. Note the number of grain- 
measures (n) required to produce this effect ; then put 8000 grain- 
measures of the same solution into a graduated jar, and augment 



VOLUMETRIC SOLUTION OF NITRATE OF SILVER. 317 

this quantity by the addition of distilled water until it amounts to 

grain-measures. If, for example, n=950, the 8000 

grain-measures of solution should be diluted to the bulk of 
q. =8421 grain-measures. Of this solution 1000 grain- 
measures contain 24.8 grains of the hyposulphite ( T \j of 2(NaOS 2 2 + 
5H 2 0), in grains, and therefore correspond to 12.7 grains of iodine 
(yVjth of an equivalent). This solution is used for estimating free 
iodine, an object which it accomplishes by forming with iodine, 
iodide of sodium and tetrathionate of soda. 1000 grain-measures 
of it include one-tenth of two equivalents of the hyposulphite in 
grains, and therefore correspond to 12.7 grains of free iodine. 

Volumetric Solution of Iodine. 1=127. 

Take of Iodine 127 grains. 

Iodide of potassium 180 grains. 

Distilled water A sufficiency. 

Put the iodide of potassium and iodine into the 10,000-grain 
flask, fill the flask to about two-thirds of its bulk with the distilled 
water, gently agitate until solution is complete, and then dilute 
the solution with more of the water, until it has the exact volume 
of 10,000 grain-measures. Of this solution 1000 grain-measures 
contain y^th of an equivalent in grains (12.7) of iodine, and therefore 
correspond to 1.7 grain of sulphuretted hydrogen, 3.2 grains of 
sulphurous, and 4.95 grains of arsenious acid. 

This solution was made for use in determining the amount of 
sulphuretted hydrogen or of a metallic sulphuret in a liquid, but 
its principal use is for estimating the quantity of sulphurous and 
arsenious acids. It is to be dropped from the burette into the liquid 
under examination until free iodine begins to be apparent in the 
solution. 

Volumetric Solution of Nitrate of Silver. AgO]N"O 5 =170. 

Take of Nitrate of silver 170 grains. 

Distilled water A sufficiency. 

Put the nitrate into a 10,000-grain flask, and having half filled 
the flask with the water, allow the salt to dissolve: then dilute the 
solution with more of the water until it has the exact bulk of 
10,000 grain-measures. The solution should be kept in an opaque 
stoppered bottle. Of this solution 1000 grain-measures contain 
-/oth of an equivalent in grains of nitrate of silver (17 grains). 
When this solution is dropped into dilute hydrocyanic acid rendered 
alkaline by soda, the precipitate at first formed is redissolved, and 
continues to be so until the whole of the cyanogen of the acid has 
united with the sodium and silver, forming the double cyanide of 
sodium and silver. In such experiments "1000 grain-measures of 
the solution indicate that 5.4 grains of absolute hydrocyanic acid 
have entered into combination. 



318 TESTS. 

Volumetric Solution of Oxalic Acid. 2HO,C 4 O +4HO=126. 

Take of Purified oxalic acid, in crystals quite dry, but not effloresced, 
six hundred and thirty grains. 
Distilled water, a sufficiency. 

Put the oxalic acid into a 10,000-grain flask, fill the flask to about 
two-thirds of its bulk with the water, allow the acid to dissolve, 
and then dilute the solution with more of the water until it has 
the exact volume of 10,000 grain-measures. Of this solution 1000 
grain-measures contain half an equivalent in grains (63) of oxalic 
acid, and are therefore capable of neutralizing one equivalent in 
grains of an alkali or an alkaline carbonate. 

Volumetric Solution of Soda. NaO,HO=40. 

Take of Solution of soda, 

Distilled water, of each, a sufficiency. 

Fill a burette with the solution of soda, and cautiously drop this 

into 63 grains of purified oxalic acid dissolved in about two ounces 

of the water, until the acid is exactly neutralized, as indicated by 

litmus. ETote the number of grain-measures (n) of the solution used, 

and having then introduced 9000 grain-measures of the solution 

of soda into a graduated jar, augment this quantity by the addition 

n . .-1 .. , 9000x1000 • jn , 

of water until it becomes gram-measures. If, tor ex- 

n fc 

ample, n=930, the 9000 grain-measures should be augmented: 

9000 xl000 ==9677 crrain.measures. Of this solution 1000 grain- 

930 & 

measures contain one equivalent in grains (40 grains) of hydrate of 
soda, and will, therefore, neutralize oire equivalent in grains of any 
monobasic acid. (Br.) 



PART IT. 

PHARMACY IX ITS RELATIONS TO ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 



CHAPTER I. 

LIGNEOUS FIBRE AND ITS DERIVATIVES. 

Organic chemistry refers to the properties and composition of 
substances which have been formed in vegetables and animals 
under the influence of life, and their derivatives; the vast variety 
of these compounds, and the fact that their differences are not so 
much in the variety of their ultimate constituents as in the number 
of atoms of these and their peculiar and inexplicable modes of com- 
bination, make their study almost a distinct branch of chemical 
science. 

Most vegetable substances used in medicine come into the hands 
of the pharmacist in a crude condition, and the first scientific inquiry 
in connection with their modes of preparation relates to the action 
of solvents upon them, which to some extent involves investigation 
of their chemical characteristics. 

All plants are composed of organic proximate principles, which, 
when further resolved, are found to consist of carbon, oxygen, and 
hydrogen; when the two latter elements are combined in the pro- 
portion in which they exist in water, they are termed carbohy- 
drates; others consist of carbon and hydrogen only, while another 
class is distinguished by containing also nitrogen, and some of 
these phosphorus and sulphur. 

The predominance of one or other of these proximate principles 
in any group of animal or of vegetable products, usually adapts its 
individual members to certain modes of preparation and use in 
medicine, and constitutes a strong feature of resemblance among 
them. This characteristic is still more marked when associated, 
as it often is, with similar botanical relations, but even in the ab- 
sence of these it is very apparent; substances which owe their 
utility to the starch they contain are naturally associated as fari- 
naceous, while the gums are well and familiarly classed together. 
So with the aromatics, containing essential oils and resins; the nar- 
cotics, containing vegetable alkalies, etc. 

The proximate principles of plants are capable of division into 
two main classes: these are, First, Those which are nutritious or 
inert, and are generally diffused throughout the vegetable king- 

( 319 ) 



320 

dom, including a few obtained from animals also; this class consists 
of cellulose, starch, gums, sugar, fixed oils and fats, and the nitro- 
genized or protein compounds. Second, Those which are generally 
not nutritious, but medicinal or poisonous, and are less diffused, 
being in some instances confined to a very few families of plants; 
these are the crystallizable and uncrystallizable neutral principles, 
the vegetable acids and alkalies, the essential oils and resins, etc. 

In treating of these principles, and some of the important drugs 
in which they are found, the organic materia medica will be 
brought into view in a different aspect from that under which it is 
usually studied. 

Cellulose. C 6 H 10 O 5 . (Cellulin. Lignin.) 

This is an inert, colorless, sometimes translucent, tasteless, in- 
odorous, organized substance, which is present in the cell walls of 
all plants, and is the basis of woody fibre. 

By long continued boiling with diluted sulphuric acid it be- 
comes " crummy ," and finally is converted into soluble cellulose, 
dextrin; for its behavior with cold diluted sulphuric acid see 
Parchment Paper; cold concentrated sulphuric and muriatic acids 
render it gelatinous and finally dissolve it This solution contains 
dextrin, a modified lignin which is soluble in water, and another 
form precipitated by water. 

Schweizer's solvent for lignin is an ammoniacal solution of oxide 
of copper, the solvent action of which is in proportion to the amount 
of copper it contains, but decreases with age in consequence of the 
absorption of carbonic acid, and is prevented by acids, salts, or sugar. 
Acids precipitate the lignin in an amorphous condition, drying to 
a horn-like mass. These solutions are precipitated by the addition 
of salts, gum Arabic, dextrin, and alcohol. 

The substances belonging under this head, and allied compounds, 
are soluble in Schweizer's solvent in the following order: silk, cot- 
ton, paper, linen, animal bladder, and wool, the latter requiring the 
aid of heat; muslin dissolves readily; starch is insoluble, but forms 
a paste when aided by heat; gun-cotton is insoluble in this solution. 

With pure cellulose a solution of iodine in iodide of potassium 
and chloride of zinc produces a blue color, which appears also after 
brisk boiling with strong potash lye, on the addition of iodine. 
When boiled with solution of potassa, lignin is decomposed into 
numerous acid compounds, containing from one to four equivalents 
of carbon; fusing hydrate of potassa forms with lignin oxalic acid. 

Pharmaceutical manipulations are chiefly directed to freeing 
from lignin, by the aid of various menstrua, those active principles 
which it incloses, excluded from external influences, and safely 
locked up in their natural repositories till needed for the relief of 
suffering or the restoration of health. 

Lignin is officinal under the name of gossypium, cotton, which, 
in its condition of raw cotton, or carded cotton, is much used in 
surgery, and forms the basis of the singular and interesting com- 



PARCHMENT PAPER. 321 

pounds known as gun-cotton, pyroxylin, and the other forms of 
prepared cotton entering into collodion and blistering collodion. 

Another form of lignin, which is of interest to the surgeon, is 
that of patent lint, prepared from the fibres of the flax plant 
(Linum usitassimum), or from old white linen cloth scraped so as 
to make it soft and woolly ; much of the lint of commerce con- 
tains a certain portion of cotton fibre, which the manufacturers 
assert is not injurious for the purposes for which it is used. 

Paper may be mentioned under this head as one of the most 
important forms of lignin. Wrapping paper is referred to among 
the necessary articles of an outfit. This is produced of various 
qualities, but the pharmacist who aims at a high reputation 
should not be parsimonious in the purchase of an article, by the 
quality of which his character for neatness is so likely to be 
estimated. 

Parchment paper is a useful modification of ligneous fibre, pre- 
pared by exposing common unsized paper to the action of a mixture 
of two parts by measure of strong sulphuric acid and one of water 
for no longer time than is taken in drawing it through the acid, 
and immediately washing in. water containing a little soda or 
ammonia. If the acid varies much from the proper strength, the 
paper will be charred or else changed into dextrin, and if too long- 
exposed the latter change will take place. It is tough, firm, imper- 
vious, and though very similar to parchment, not, like it, decom- 
posed by heat and moisture. It is not a compound of lignin, but 
consists of fibre changed in its chemical and physical properties. 

Water does not filter through parchment paper, but passes 
gradually through it by endosmotic action. In this passage through 
the paper it carries with it all dissolved compounds which are crys- 
tallizable, while those which exist in an amorphous condition do 
not penetrate. These latter have been called by G-raham colloids, 
the former crystalloids, and the process, which is well adapted for 
separating minute quantities of the latter from the first group, 
dialysis. The crystalloids do not dializewith the same rapidity, and 
the process may be, therefore, employed for approximately separating 
two or more cry stall izable substances of different dializing power. 

One of the most beautiful exhibitions of ligneous fibre is the skele- 
ton separated from leaves by the maceration and decay of the cel- 
lular structure, and the purification and bleaching of the remaining 
fibrous portions. No ornament is more chaste and elegant than a 
bouquet of these, and, it being within the capacity of any person 
of taste to produce them, the art is well adapted to occupy the 
leisure of ladies. See The Phantom Bouquet, a small work by the 
author, published by J. B. Lippincott & Co., Philadelphia. 

The most reliable tests for distinguishing cotton from linen are:. 
1, boiling with concentrated solution of potassa, which colors linen 
in two minutes deep yellow; cotton remains nearly white; 2, strong 
sulphuric acid destroys cotton in one-half to two minutes; 3, olive 
oil renders cotton transparent, but not linen; 4, tincture of madder 
dyes cotton light yellow, linen yellowish-red ; 5, cotton fibres appear, 
21 



322 LIGNEOUS FIBRE, ETC. 

under the microscope, as Hat, ribbon-like joints, frequently spirally 
turned and with large channel; linen fibres are straight, long, 
slender tubes. Wool and silk may be distinguished from the 
above vegetable fibres and all other carbohydrates by perchloride 
of tin, which bleaches the latter on heating. 

The following principles may be considered as peculiar forms of 
lignin: — 

Peculiar Forms of Lignin. 

Medullin, the pith of plants after it is freed from all soluble compounds. 
Fungin, the skeleton of fungi. 

Pollenin, the pollen granules freed from all soluble matter ; it still contains some 
nitrogen. 

Pyroxylon, TJ. S. P. {Soluble Gun-cotton.) 

Take of Cotton, freed from impurities, half a troyounce. 
Nitric acid, three troyounces and a half. 
Sulphuric acid, four troyounces. 

Mix the acids gradually in a porcelain or glass vessel, and, when 
the temperature of the mixture has fallen to 90°, add the cotton ; by 
means of a glass rod imbue it thoroughly with the acid, and allow 
it to macerate for fifteen hours; then transfer it to a larger vessel 
and wash it first with cold water until the washings cease to have 
an acid taste, and then with boiling water. Drain the cotton on 
filtering paper, and dry it by means of a water-bath. 

If the acids of the proper strength cannot be easily obtained, 
use, for the above quantity of cotton, of nitric acid, having a spe- 
cific gravity from 1.382 to 1.390, four troyounces, and sulphuric 
acid, having specific gravity 1.833, two troyounces, and proceed as 
directed. 

By the above treatment one, two, or three atoms of hydrogen 
are replaced by an equal number of equivalents of peroxide of 
nitrogen (M) 2 ), the resulting preparations being, respectively — 

Mononitrocellulin ..... C 6 H ]0 O 5 + HK0 3 = C 6 j ^ J0 5 -r-H,0 

Dinitrocellulin C 6 H 10 O 5 + 2HK0 3 = C 6 j ^ } 5 + 2H 2 

Trinitrocellulin C 6 H 10 O 5 + 3HN0 3 = C 6 j ^ J 5 + 3H 2 

It is the dinitrocellulin that furnishes the pyroxylon of the 

Pharmacopoeias. 

Collodium, U. S. P. {Ethereal Solution of Prepared Cotton.) 

Braconnot discovered in 1833 that cotton, linen, and starch might 
be converted into a substance remarkable for its ready combusti- 
bility. This observation attracted little attention until Prof. 
; Schonbein, in 1845, made some practical applications of this sub- 
stance, from which it received the name gun-cotton ; its chemical 
i names are xyloidin, pyroxylin, and nitrocellulose. 

Its solution in ether was first recommended as an adhesive sub- 



SOLUTION OF PREPAEED COTTON". 323 

stance adapted to the wants of the surgeon, in an article in the 
Boston Medical and Surgical Journal under date of March 22, 1848, 
by S. L. Bigelow. He then stated that he had accidentally dis- 
covered its remarkable adaptation to the rapid union of wounds by 
the first intention, and had tested its efficacy by a number of expe- 
riments, which induced him to make it public. The next number 
of the same journal, issued one week later, contained an article on 
the same subject, by John P. Maynard, of Dedham, Mass., in which 
he claims to have been the first to use the preparation as an adhesive 
plaster, and proceeds to detail its advantage, as proved by a number 
of experiments made by himself, and by numerous physicians and 
surgeons in Boston. 

On the first introduction of the article in Philadelphia, my 
lamented friend, W.W. D. Livermore, then in my employ, and my- 
self, jointly pursued a series of experiments in its preparation, the 
result of which we announced in a paper, published in the American 
Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xx. p. 181, stating the best formula that 
we had tried for the preparation of this solution. It prescribed 
the mixing of equal portions of nitric and sulphuric acids, and the 
maceration in it of clean bleached cotton for twelve hours. The 
proper strength of the nitric acid was then known to be a matter 
of importance, the acid of 1.5 sp. gr. furnishing the most satis- 
factory results. 

This cotton, after washing and thorough drying, was to be dis- 
solved in a certain proportion of ether, free, or nearly free, from 
water. 

The recipe was accompanied by such practical suggestions as our 
experiments led to, and although some of the views advanced in 
that paper were afterwards abandoned, the recipe, with slight modi- 
fications, has continued to give satisfaction to this time, and is sub- 
stantially that now most approved by some leading manufacturers. 

Other essays soon appeared on the subject in our own and foreign 
journals, among which, that of M. Mialhe, recommending im- 
mersing cotton in a mixture of nitrate of potassium and sulphuric 
acid was most approved, and his formula found favor with the com- 
mittee of revision of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia for 1850. 

In the fourth number of the Am. Journ. of Pharm., 1849, 1 pub- 
lished the result of some further experiments upon the new adhe- 
sive solution, giving a modified formula, which was recommended, 
as allowing the preparation of a larger quantity at one time, and 
with far less trouble; as avoiding the exposure of the operator to 
corrosive acid fumes, while stirring the cotton with the semi-fluid 
mass, which, in the other case, makes it necessary to work either 
in a well-ventilated apartment, or in the open air; and as facilitating 
the washing of the product, which comes out from the mixed acids 
with no solid crystalline ingredient contaminating it, and may be 
purified with the utmost facility. 

The proportions then indicated were as follows : Fuming nitric 
and sulphuric acids, of each, four fluidounces ; clean cotton, half an 
ounce ; ether, three pints ; and alcohol, sufficient. 



324 LIGNEOUS FIBRE, ETC. 

The cotton was directed to be thoroughly saturated with the 
acids, previously mixed and allowed to become cool, and macerated 
for twelve hours. The nitrated cotton, being then removed, was to 
be washed in a large quantity of water and freed from water by 
successive washings in alcohol and dissolved in the ether. 

Few subjects claimed more attention in the chemical and phar- 
maceutical journals for some years than this, and in view of the 
great utility of the employment of a film of the collodion in photo- 
graphy, its manufacture soon became an important branch of 
business. 

In the previous editions of this work the principal essays on the 
subject were noticed in detail, but it has not been deemed important 
to add to the foregoing, except to call attention to an elegant ex- 
pedient directed in the formula, suggested by the late W. W. D. 
Livermore : to drain off the water by pressure, and then to macerate 
the cotton a few minutes in alcohol, which, by its affinity for the 
water, rapidly extracts it, and then may be sufficiently separated 
by expression, as it is not incompatible with the ethereal solution, 
which, in fact, it improves. 

Rehn's patent for this process of washing prepared cotton for 
collodion dates long since this suggestion, and ever since its public 
announcement by me in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. 

The present officinal process for collodion is a modification of that 
of Mialhe, directing the maceration of the cotton in the mixed 
nitrate of potassium and sulphuric acid for twelve hours (instead 
of four minutes as originally prescribed), and adopting Livermore's 
process of washing by alcohol instead of the dangerous drying by 
heat as before indicated. The officinal formula is given in detail 
as one of the practicable processes for collodion, although there are 
others in use, especially by photographers, which may serve their 
purposes better. 

Dr. Fresenius recommends gun-cotton as a vehicle for applying 
permanganate of potassium in surgical dressings, since it does not 
decompose the solution as ordinary cotton does. 

Collodium, IT. S. P. {Collodion.) 
Take of Pyroxylon, two hundred grains. 

Stronger ether, twelve fluidounces and a half. 
Stronger alcohol, three fluidounces and a half. 

Mix the ether and alcohol in a suitable bottle, and having added 
the pyroxylon to the mixture, agitate occasionally until dissolved. 

Collodion is a slightly opalescent liquid of a syrupy consistence. 
By long standing it deposits a layer of fibrous matter and becomes 
more transparent. This layer should be reincorporated by agitation 
before the collodion is used. When applied it should form a color- 
less, transparent, flexible, and strongly contractile film. 

Straining and expressing collodion are often necessary when it 
contains a large amount of undissolved fibre, as the last portions in 
a bottle from which the clear liquid has been from time to time 
decanted ; a slight precaution may save the operator a great deal 



COLLODION. 325 

of trouble and mortification from his hands becoming coated with 
it beyond remedy. "When about to squeeze the strainer, or to 
thrust the hands into the liquid for any purpose, be careful to have 
a towel at hand, and instantly, on removing them, wipe them 
thoroughly dry before time is allowed for evaporation and the con- 
sequent deposit of the pellicle. This plan will be found effectual. 

The contraction of the collodion pellicle in drying is a decided 
objection to its use in some surgical cases. C. S. Sand was the first 
to propose Venice turpentine as an addition to obviate this effect. 

Collodium Flexile, IT. S. P. 

Take of Collodion A pint. 

Canada turpentine 320 grains. 

Castor oil 160 grains. 



Mix them and keep in a well-stopped bottl 



e. 



Hand's Modified Collodion. 

Take of Prepared cotton gij. 

Venice turpentine 3ij. 

Sulphuric ether f^v. 

Dissolve, first, the cotton in the ether; add the turpentine, and, 
by slight agitation, complete the solution. 

The resulting collodion, when applied to the skin, forms a trans- 
parent pellicle, more difficult to remove than that of ordinary col- 
lodion. Being more pliable, it yields to the motion of the skin, and 
will not crack even after several days' application. It might be 
supposed that the turpentine would render it more irritating, but 
this does not seem to be the case, owing to the absence of that 
mechanical stimulus so powerfully displayed in ordinary collodion. 
The addition of two drachms of mastic to the above may be at 
times advisable, if the pellicle be required of great toughness and 
strength ; but it dries more slowly, and remains opalescent longer 
than that containing Venice turpentine alone. This preparation is 
more suitable for the purpose of a varnish than as an application to 
the skin, and is especially adapted to coating labels on vials, which 
it renders impervious to cold and hot water and alcohol. Castor oil 
has also been found to be an excellent addition to collodion for the 
prevention of this contraction. 

Properties. — Collodion is a colorless, opalescent liquid, of a syrupy 
consistence, becoming thinner by age, with a strong odor of ether; 
wdien applied to a dry surface, it evaporates spontaneously, yielding 
a transparent pellicle without whiteness, possessed of remarkable 
adhesiveness and contractility, and quite impervious to moisture or 
to the action of any ordinary solvents, ether and alcohol excepted. 

A piece of linen or cotton cloth covered with it, and made to 
adhere by evaporation to the palm of the hand, will support, after 
a few minutes, without giving way, a weight of from 20 to 30 
pounds. Its adhesive power is so great that the cloth will some- 
times be torn before it loosens. Collodion is frequently not a per- 



326 LIGNEOUS FIBRE, ETC. 

feet solution of cotton; but contains, suspended and floating in it, 
a quantity of vegetable fibre which has escaped the solvent action 
of the ether. The liquid portion may be separated from these 
fibres by decantation or straining, but this is a disadvantage for 
surgical use. In the evaporation of the liquid, these undissolved 
fibres, by felting with each other, appear to give a greater degree 
of tenacity and resistance to the dried mass, without destroying its 
transparency ; and the Pharmacopoeia directs that the layer of fibrous 
matter should be re-incorporated by agitation before the collodion 
is used. 

An adhesive stimulating plaster may be made by dissolving a 
large proportion of mastic in collodion. 

Thajpsia Plaster. 

Take of Alcohol 3.5 parts. 

Ether 11.5 parts. 

Pyroxylon paper 1 parts. 

Eesin thapsia 10 parts. 

Spread with a brush on a piece of plaster at the moment it is 
required. 

It is recommended when a local irritant and revulsive are indi- 
cated. 

Mode of Preservation. — Collodion is one of those liquids which, 
owing to extreme volatility, it is objectionable to use from a large 
bottle, not only from the waste by evaporation every time the 
stopper is drawn, and the consequent inspissation of the liquid; 
but, also, from the explosive nature of the vapor of ether when it 
comes in contact with flame; it should, therefore, be put up in 
small vials, from which it may be used with economy and safety. 

Formerly the manufacturers usually put it in ground stoppered 
vials, of one or two ounce capacity ; but an improvement has been 
made in the substitution for these of cork stoppered, one-ounce vials. 
Cork, by its elasticity, can be made to fit the neck of a vial more 
tightly than the best glass stopper, and is, therefore, less liable to 
be thrown out on an elevation of temperature of the contained vola- 
tile liquid. 

Collodion is generally applied by the aid of a camel's-hair brush, 
but if one of these is allowed to dry, after being im- 
Fig. 176. mersed in the liquid, it is apt to be too stiff to use 
again. To obviate this disadvantage, a contrivance, 
such as is shown in the accompanying figure, is re- 
sorted to; it consists of a long fsj vial, with a cork 
stopper, which is perforated with the smallest cylinder 
of the cork borer, or with the rat-tail file, and into 
this perforation a thin piece of wood with a turned 
cap about the diameter of the cork is tightly inserted; 
this plug of wood has the diameter of the quill of a 
camel's-hair brush of medium size, and it is long 
enough to project below the cork, so that the quill 
collodion viai. will fit on to it and be secure. The bottle being 




COLLODION. 327 

now nearly filled and the cork inserted, the brush will dip into the 
collodion, and, by constant immersion, will keep moist and always 
ready for use. 

Where, from exposure, a part of the ether has evaporated, the 
addition of more ether will serve to redissolve the gelatinous 
residue, unless it has dried beyond a certain point, at which it is 
apt to become quite insoluble. 

Uses of Collodion. — The chief use of this interesting liquid is in 
photography, which has already extended so as to become one of 
the most important of the modern arts. In medical practice its 
principal application is to ordinary superficial sores, as cuts and 
abrasions of the skin, and also to some skin diseases, where the 
indication is to protect the part from external irritating influences, 
and where violent itching is one of the most troublesome symptoms. 
Prof. Simpson, of Edinburgh, recommends it for sore nipples, which 
it completely protects, without interfering with the sucking of the 
infant ; for this purpose, Eand's preparation would be best suited. 
It was first principally recommended for the application of band- 
ages, and is used in France as a substitute for dextrin in permanent 
splints, which, by its use, may be applied over a less extended surface 
without diminishing the strength and permanence of the dressing. 

In cases of burns, where the cuticle has been removed and the 
symptoms of acute pain allayed by suitable applications, collodion 
is capable of one of its most useful applications, though for this 
purpose its contractility should be obviated by adding Venice tur- 
pentine or castor oil, as before indicated. 

By combining collodion with the ethereal tincture of chloride of 
iron, a compound is produced which is said to furnish a much more 
resisting and pliable, though thinner pellicle, and one adapted to 
the treatment of erysipelas. 

Collodion Tinctura Prceparat (London Skin Hospital.) 

Take of Collodion One ounce. 

Palm oil ,10 grains. 

Alkanet root Tocolor it. 

Mix. 

Causticum Hydr. Bichloridi. (London Skin Hospital.) 

Take of Corrosive sublimate One drachm. 

Prep, collodion 6 drachms. 

Mix. 

The composition of collodion has excited much discussion, and 
some ingenious hypotheses. The discovery of Prof. Leidy, of this 
city, of a beautiful crystalline deposit in inspissated collodion, and 
a similar and independent observation in London, are among the 
most remarkable facts bearing upon the composition and chemical 
relations of the group of principles to which lignin belongs. 

M. Bechamp, professor in the school of pharmacy at Strasburg, 
has succeeded in reproducing cotton from pyroxylin, by heating it 
at the temperature of 212° with a concentrated solution of proto- 



328 LIGNEOUS FIBRE, ETC. 

chloride of iron. The chloride deepens in color, and very soon 
there is a disengagement of pure nitric oxide. When this has 
ceased, and the cotton has been washed with hydrochloric acid, to 
remove the peroxide of iron impregnating it, the cotton is found 
to have lost the properties of pyroxylin. In the same way amidon 
has been produced from xyloidin. 

Iodinal Collodion. (J. T. Shinn.) 

Take of Iodine Half an ounce. 

Canada balsam Half an ounce. 

Collodion A pint. 

Dissolve the iodine and balsam in the collodion. 
Used as a substitute for iodine ointment. 

Belladonna! Collodion. (J. T. Shinn.) 

Take of Select belladonna leaves, powdered . . . Eight ounces. 

Ether Twelve fluidounces. 

Alcohol (95 per cent. ) Sufficient. 

Canada balsam Half an ounce. 

Collodion wool (prepared cotton) .... A drachm. 

Macerate the leaves in the ether with four fluidounces of alcohol, 
for six hours, pack in a percolator, and pour on alcohol till a pint 
of tincture is obtained ; in this dissolve the cotton and balsam. 
This is a desirable substitute for belladonna plaster. A similar 
preparation may be made, free from color, by dissolving atropia in 
collodion. 

Aconital Collodion may be made from aconite root by a similar 
formula. 

Collodium cum Cantharide, II. S. P. (Cantharidal Collodion. 
Blistering Collodion.) 

Take of Cantharides, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 

Cotton, prepared by the process for collodion, and dry,, one hun- 
dred grains. 
Canada turpentine, three hundred and twenty grairs. 
Castor oil, one hundred and sixty grains. 
Stronger ether, a pint and a half. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the cantharides into a cylindrical percolator, and, 
having pressed them firmly, gradually pour on the ether. When 
fifteen fluidounces have passed, set aside the liquid in a close vessel, 
and continue the percolation with stronger alcohol until half a pint 
more of liquid is obtained. Set this in a warm place for sponta- 
neous evaporation, and, when it is reduced to a fluidounce, mix it 
with the reserved liquid. Then add the pyroxylon, Canada tur- 
pentine, and castor oil to the mixture, and agitate occasionally until 
it is dissolved. Lastly, keep the solution in a well-stopped bottle. 

By this formula, blistering collodion can be readily and uni- 
formly produced by any one having the prepared cotton at hand ; 
this may be purchased of dealers" in photographic materials, or 
made by the process for pyroxylon. 



PRODUCTS OF THE DISTILLATION OF WOOD. 329 

The great merit of blistering collodion is its applicability to cir- 
cumscribed surfaces, the fact that it requires no covering of any 
kind, and that it cannot be improperly removed by the patient, as 
in cases of insanity, etc. Its action is greatly hastened by repeat- 
ing the application till the coating is thick, and covering the pelli- 
cle before it is dry with a piece of oiled silk or bladder. 

Styptic Collodion. 

Take of Tannin 5ij. 

Stronger alcohol f giv. 

Stronger ether f^xij. 

Pyroxylon 12.5 grains. 

Canada balsam 7.5 grains. 

Introduce the pyroxylon into a suitable bottle, pour on it two 
fluidrachms of the alcohol, shake well, then add ten fluidrachms 
of the ether, agitate frequently until dissolved; dissolve the tannic 
acid in a mixture pf the remainder of the alcohol and ether, mix 
with the first liquid, add the balsam, allow to stand till clear, then 
pour off. 

The above formula for styptic collodion, with a number of others, 
was suggested by Mr. C. L. Mitchell, in an inaugural treatise pre- 
sented to the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and published in 
vol. 44, fol. 241, Amer. Journ. of Pharmacy. 

Products of the Distillation of Wood. 

By the distillation of wood in close vessels, a variety of inter- 
esting compounds are produced, which are useful in the arts and in 
medicine. Of these, charcoal (carbo ligni), acetic acid, pyroacetic 
and pyroxylic spirit, and creasote may be mentioned as of special 
interest to the physician, and a short notice of each is appended. 

Carbo Ligni, Wood Charcoal, and Carbo Animalis, Animal Charcoal. 

The former of these two kinds of charcoal is used in medicine, 
while the latter is most employed in chemical processes as a de- 
colorizing agent. 

Willow charcoal, the variety preferred in this country, is chiefly 
obtained from the manufacturers of gunpowder, who devote much 
attention to the production of a pure and fine powdered article. In 
Europe the charcoal obtained from the linden tree, Tilia LJurojxea, 
is usually employed in medicine. A charcoal prepared from areca 
nuts is much esteemed as a dentifrice in England. 

Charcoal is wholly insoluble, tasteless, and inodorous; it absorbs 
moisture and gases from the air, and a small portion of it consists 
of the incombustible saline materials of the wood, from which it 
may be freed by digestion in diluted muriatic acid, although this 
precaution is not necessary as a preparation for medicinal use. 

The dose of powdered charcoal as an absorbent disinfectant is 
about a teaspoonful; as an aperient, a tablespoonful, or less, mixed 
with magnesia. 



330 

Animal charcoal , or bone-black, is made from bones by calcination, 
and, besides carbon, contains phosphate and carbonate of calcium 
in abundance; these important constituents have much to do with 
the peculiar porosity which gives to this substance the power of 
absorbing coloring matters and gases, and adapts it for the various 
uses in the arts and in pharmaceutical chemistry to which it is 
applied. It is not very convenient to use in fine powder, and is 
hence generally prepared in a granular condition. 

Carbo animalis purificatus, JJ. S. P., is among the preparations 
designed to be made by the apothecary. It is prepared by digesting 
a pound of animal charcoal with twelve fluidounces each of muri- 
atic acid and water, for two days, at a moderate heat, pouring off 
the liquid, and washing the charcoal thoroughly with water. 

This is adapted to many uses to which the crude powder would 
be unsuited, owing to its saline ingredients. 

In the preparation of the alkaloids, gallic acid, and numerous 
other chemical substances, animal charcoal is used to absorb the 
associated coloring matters; but it should not be forgotten that the 
same property which adapts it to take up the coloring matter also 
occasions, to some extent, the absorption of the alkaloid or other 
principle, so that the loss by the decolorizing process is sometimes 
considerable, unless means are resorted to for the subsequent extrac- 
tion of the absorbed portions. 

To its absorbent property animal charcoal owes its utility as a 
disinfectant and antidote to the powerful vegetable poisons, which, 
as proved by Dr. B. H. Rand, may be rendered innoxious in their 
effects by a large admixture of this inert but porous powder. 

Acidum Acetum. Ac=H,C 2 H 3 O 2 =60. 

The acid liquid distilled over when charcoal is prepared from 
wood, in close cylinders without access of air, contains this valuable 
acid in a very impure state. By subjecting this to further distilla- 
tion, the liquid is collected which is known as wood vinegar, or 
pyroligneous acid. By saturating this acid with lime, acetate of 
calcium is produced, which, by decomposition with sulphate of 
sodium, furnishes sulphate of calcium and acetate of sodium; the 
latter salt, being crystallized in a state of purity, yields, by distilla- 
tion with sulphuric acid, pure hydrated acetic acid in solution in 
water. 

The officinal acetic acid is directed in the Pharmacopoeia to have 
a specific gravity of 1.047, which, however, is a less satisfactory 
assurance of its strength than its saturating power, which is such 
that 100 grains saturate 60 of crystallized bicarbonate of potassium, 
and contain 36 grains of monohydrated acid. 

The monohydrated acid, C 2 H 3 2 H 2 (glacial), is prepared by the 
careful distillation of one equivalent of fused acetate of sodium 
with two of sulphuric acid, and placing the distillate on ice, the 
congealed product is then suffered to drain by inverting the bottle; 
the crystals constitute the glacial acid. It is a very caustic, deli- . 



METHYLIC ALCOHOL, ETC, 



331 



quescent substance, having the specific gravity 1.067 ; it contains 
about 98 per cent, of acetic acid, is volatile, colorless, inflammable, 
and dissolves camphor, resins, volatile oils, etc. Its chief use is in 
perfumery, for forming a very pungent perfume for smelling bottles. 

Acetic acid of about the officinal strength is now so cheaply and 
abundantly produced for use in the arts, that it is placed in the 
Pharmacopeia among the articles of materia medica; the process 
above given is selected from a variety in common use. Acetate of 
lead is also one of its sources of production. 

Acetic acid is also produced by the oxidation of alcoholic liquids, 
especially cider and wine, and in this impure and diluted form is 
called vinegar (Acetum, IT. S. P.); in chemical works it is generally 
classed among the derivatives of alcohol. 

Much of the vinegar of commerce is largely adulterated or so- 
phisticated, although, according to the experiments of A\ T . W. D. 
Livermore, the use of sulphuric acid is less common than has been 
supposed. Of sixteen specimens of commercial vinegar obtained 
from different sources, none were adulterated with sulphuric acid. 
Tested for malic acid, gum, and extractive matter, believed to be 
always present in cider vinegar, all but two gave evidence of con- 
taining one or more of these products by throwing down a precipi- 
tate with subacetate of lead, soluble in nitric acid. 

The strength of the different specimens was ascertained by him 
as follows : The numbers represent the number of grains of bicar- 
bonate of potassium saturating 100 grains of viuegar: — 

No. 1 . . .9 grains. No. 10 . . .4 grains. 



1 


9 grains. 


No 


10 . 


• 4 { 


2 


. 4 


" 


" 


11 . 


• &A 


3 


. 8 


<( 


«< 


12 . 


. 8 


4 


• • 4^ 


tt 


u 


13 . 


• *A 


5 


. 6 


" 


" 


14 . 


• 5t% 


7 


. 8 


(< 


(I 


15 . 


• 8 T V 


8 


■ • 8 T V 


a 


" 


16 . 


• 7A 


9 


. 6 


it 









The normal saturating power is about 7 f grains of the bicarbonate 
to 100 grains of vinegar. 

Acetone, or Pyroacetie Spirit, C 3 H 6 0, and Methylic Alcohol, Pyroxylic 
Spirit, or Wood Naphtha, CH 3 ,HO. 

These are products of the distillation of wood, which are sepa- 
rated from the acid liquors, after they are saturated with lime, by 
simple distillation and repeated fractional rectification. 

It is very difficult, however, to obtain them in a perfectly pure 
state by this process. Acetone is formed by the dry distillation of 
acetates, and is rendered pure by rectification over lime, and finally 
over chloride of calcium. 

They are both colorless, or slightly yellow, inflammable, volatile, 
pungent liquids, closely resembling each other in sensible and 
medical properties, nearly always mixed and impure, and generally 
confounded with each other in commerce; they may be known 
apart by their reactions with chloride of calcium. 



332 LIGNEOUS FIBRE, ETC. 

While pyroacetic spirit does not dissolve or mix with a saturated 
solution of chloride of calcium, pyroxylic spirit instantly mixes 
when dropped into it. 

The normal specific gravity of each is about the same, .792 to 
.798; but, as found in commerce, they oftener reach .820 to .846. 

Impure wood naphtha yields, with binoxalate of potassium and 
sulphuric acid, a crystallizable ether, which, by distillation with 
water, decomposes into oxalic acid and pure methylic alcohol. 
Treated with bichromate of potassium, acetone yields acetic and 
carbonic acids, while methylic alcohol furnishes formic acid. 

Under the name of methylic spirit, hydrated oxide of methyl, 
OH 3 HO, pyroxylic spirit is extensively used in England as a cheap 
substitute for alcohol, and is sometimes substituted for it in the 
preparation of chloroform. Dr. Hastings, of London, introduced 
it several years ago as a remedy for consumption, and both this and 
pyroacetic spirit are sometimes prescribed, though not so much as 
formerly, in connection with cough medicines. Dose, about 10 to 
40 drops. 

Creasotum, U. S. P. (Creasote. Kreosot.) 

This is a secondary empyreumatic product of destructive distilla- 
tion which the Pharmacopoeia describes as being obtained from 
wood tar. As found in commerce, it is an oily liquid obtained in- 
discriminately from various kinds of tar, especially that from 
bituminous coal, and varies in composition. 

Creasote is colorless and transparent, having a high refractive 
power and oleaginous consistence. Its odor, when diffused, is pe- 
culiarly smoky, its taste burning and caustic; its specific gravity 
is about 1.046. It is freely soluble in alcohol, ether, acetic acid, 
caustic potassa, and in water to the extent of six or ten drops to the 
ounce. 

The article now generally sold as creasote is imported from Ger- 
many, and is much cheaper than the kind which formerly came 
from England, and was obtained from wood tar. The present 
article, which is remarkable for readily assuming a brown color on 
exposure to the light and air, is prepared from coal tar. It has a 
specific gravity of 1.062, and boils at 386°. In an article on this 
subject, in the New York Journal of Pharmacy, Oct. 1853, Professor 
Edward N. Kent has given a method of manufacture and purifica- 
tion which has proved successful in his hands, and expresses the 
opinion that carbolic acid, as he considers it, is creasote in a purer 
form than that obtained from wood tar. Recent investigations 
render it probable that creasote, though not identical, is homologous 
with phenylic acid, and it is probable that it consists of several 
analogous alcohols. (See Phenylic Acid.) 

Under the name of Carbolic Acid a crystalline substance resem- 
bling creasote, but asserted to be less odorous, has been introduced 
into commerce by F. Grace Calvert, of Manchester, England. It is, 
perhaps, more freely soluble in water than ordinary creasote, and 
is well adapted to use as an antiseptic. 



ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 333 

The principal use of creasote internally is to check nausea ; for 
this purpose, about two drops may be dissolved in an ounce of water, 
and a little gum and sugar added. Dose, a tablespoonful (equal to 
one drop), frequently repeated. 

Dropped upon a fragment of cotton, after dilution with alcohol, 
ether, or chloroform, and inserted into the cavity of a tooth, it re- 
lieves toothache when the pain is occasioned by the exposure of the 
nerve, and is popularly regarded as the most certain remedy. 

Very painful and distressing accidents are liable to occur from 
attempting to drop this liquid into the cavity of a tooth .from a 
vial. 

As an external caustic, creasote may be applied, undiluted, with 
a camel's-hair pencil ; but it is usually prepared in the form of oint- 
ment (Unguentum creasoti), or in solution in water (Aqua croasoti). 
In hemorrhages, it acts as a most efficient styptic, and is successfully 
applied in solution,. in the proportion of about six drops to the 
ounce of water. 

Creasote is one of the remedies which the apothecary is most fre- 
quently called upon to apply. Large quantities are also consumed 
by dentists. 



CHAPTER II. 

ON FARINACEOUS, MUCILAGINOUS, AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

Starch, C 6 H 10 5 , having the same composition as cellulose, differs 
from it widely in physical properties ; it exists in a granular form 
in various parts of plants, especially in seeds, 
tubers, and bulbous roots, in minute cells, 
which may be distinguished by a microscope 
of moderate power. The size and shape of the 
granules have been made special subjects of 
investigation by pharmacologists, and their 
study has been found to aid in the recogni- 
tion of the different varieties of fecula, and 
in detecting adulterations. The envelope of 
these starch granules is insoluble in cold water, 
but is ruptured by the application of heat, so 
that the contents are exposed and become 
dissolved. Hence starch is said to be insoluble 
in cold, but soluble in hot water. For this in- 

, -i , , i*i • ,i l . . , . Starch granules as seen 

ternal matter which gives the characteristic under a microS cope. 

chemical reactions of starch the term amidin 

has been applied ; it forms about 995 parts in every thousand of 
the entire starch granules. But a solution may be effected with 
cold water, if the envelope of the granules has been torn by con- 
tinued trituration with sand or other gritty substances. Certain 




334 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

salts, such as chloride of zinc, produce a perfect solution of starch 
in the cold. By the action of heat, and a very small proportion of 
strong infusion of malt, starch is converted into dextrin, a soluble 
principle isomeric with it, intermediate between the gums and 
grape sugar, and so named from its power of causing the plane of 
polarization to deviate to the right. This is also formed from cel- 
lulose by the action of diluted acids, which also ultimately convert 
it into grape sugar. One of the most striking characteristics of 
starch is its reaction in cold solution with iodine, with which it 
forms a rich blue-colored iodide, which loses its color by heat. 
These two substances thus become tests for each other. With bro- 
mine it produces an orange-colored precipitate, which cannot be 
dried without decomposition. Nitric acid converts starch into 
oxalic acid, and by heating starch with potassa in excess oxalate of 
potassium is produced. For an elaborate account of starch and its 
isomeric principles, Inidin, from Inula Helena and other sources, 
Lichenin, from Cetraria Islandica, etc., see Gmelin's Handbook of 
Chemistry, Cav. Soc. edition, vol. xv. 

All the cereal grains owe their utility as articles of food to the 
presence of starch mingled with a due proportion of a nitrogenized 
principle; gluten. In many drugs, starch exists to an extent which 
interferes with their convenient preparation for use in medicine, 
while it is an important element in certain demulcent and nutri- 
tious articles used in medicine, as food for infants, etc. 

Syllabus of Starches, Amylaceous Medicines, etc. 

Amylum, starch ; the fecula of The fecula from maize is an excellent substitute for 
Triticum vulgare and Zea arrowroot, and has almost entirely displaced wheat 
mays. starch. In Europe, the fecula of the potato is largely 

used as starch : it yields a transparent jelly with 
muriatic acid, and is used for adulterating arrow- 
root ; sulphuric acid evolves a disagreeable odor. — 
Proc. A. Ph. Ass., 1862, 168. 

Maranta, arrowroot , the fecula Bermuda arrowroot, the best ; next the Jamaica, Li- 
of Maranta arundinacea. beria, Florida, and Georgia. Must be well pre- 

served from moisture and odorous drugs. See 
paper by Br. R. Battey in Proc. of A. Ph. Ass., 
1858, 332; and by E. T. Ellis, ibid., 1862, 212. It 
yields an opaque jelly with concentrated muriatic 
acid. 

Arum esculentum. Native in the Sandwich Islands, where it is used as 

food to a great extent after the acrid matter has 
been dissipated by heat. 

Arum maculatum. Formerly officinal in Dublin Pharmacopoeia. 

Arum tryphyllum. Officinal in U. S. P.; contains about 17 per cent, of 

fecula. 

Canna, tous-les-mois ; the fecula The starch granules are very large, and exhibit a 
of Canna edulis, etc glistening or satiny appearance. The jelly is very 

tenacious, but not very translucent. Comes from 
the island of St. Kitts. Rare with us. 

Curcuma arrowroot. From the East Indies. Used, in England, only for 

adulterations. 

Sago ; the prepared pith of Sa- Bietetic and nutritive, in small granules prepared by 
gus rumphii, etc. the aid of heat. 

Tapioca; the fecula of the root Bietetic and nutritive, coarse irregular grains pre- 
of Janipha manihot. pared by the aid of heat, partially soluble in cold 

water. 



gums. 335 

Syllabus of Stakciies, Amylaceous Medicines, etc. {Continued.) 

Avense farina, oatmeal; the meal Contains the husk ground with the seed. Relieves 

of Avena sativa. constipation ; easily digested and very nutritive. 

Hordeum, barley; the decorti- Demulcent, nutritive, and slightly astringent. See 

cated seeds of Hordeum dis- Decoctum hordei. 

tichon, etc. 

Oryza, rice; the seeds of Oryza Bland, nutritive, demulcent, and somewhat astrin- 

sativa, deprived of the hulls. gent. By long boiling forms a jelly. 

Cetraria, Iceland moss; Cetraria Contains lichenin and a bitter principle; the latter 

Islandica. may be removed by an alkali ; the residue may be 

used as a dietetic. 

Chondrus, carrageen; Chondrus Contains carrageenin, mucilage, and various salts. 

crispus. 

Inula, elecampane; the root of Contains, like the root of other compositae, inulin, 

Inula helenium. bitter principle, and mucilage. A domestic expec- 
torant. 

Symphytum officinale, comfrey ; See Inula. 

the root. 

Lappa, burdock ; the root of See Inula. 

Lappa major. 

Iris Florentina, orrisroot ; the Contains starch, resins, and volatile oil. Used an an 

rhizoma of Iris Florentina. infant and toilet powder, and as an ingredient in 

dentifrice. 

Gums. 

Gums differ from starch chiefly in the absence of the granular 
condition, and their partial or complete solubility in cold water. 
They are obtained from certain plants in amorphous masses, mostly 
exuding spontaneously or upon a puncture of the bark. A solution 
of gum is not affected by iodine, but precipitated by alcohol. Oxi- 
dized by nitric acid, they produce mucic acid; but when continually 
boiled with diluted acids, a kind of dextrin and, finally, sugar is 
formed. 

There are probably numerous kinds of gums, but on account of 
their similarity in physical and chemical properties they are diffi- 
cult to recognize and to separate from allied compounds. They 
have been classed into gums which are soluble, and gums which 
mostly swell up in cold water. The following are the types of 
these two classes: — 

Ar a bin = C l2 II 22 O n , is derived largely from the acacias; it is ex- 
tremely soluble in water, forming a clear and colorless though viscid 
solution, almost free from taste, which is coagulated by alcohol, 
borax, and precipitated by silicate of potassium, strong solution of 
perchloride of iron, also, like most organic acids, coloring principles, 
etc., by subacetate of lead. Incinerated it yields about three parts 
of ashes, which some chemists assert are the bases of the salt arabin, 
the acid of which is obtained by decomposing the aqueous solution 
with muriatic acid and precipitating by alcohol, and is insoluble in 
the latter menstruum only in the presence of a mineral acid. 

Bassorin = C }2 H ]0 O ]0 , is an insoluble variety, swelling with water 
and dissolving in alkalies. This predominates in gum tragacanth, 
and, according to some, in salep. Those bodies which are usually 
termed Mucilages belong to one of these two classes ; they are met 



336 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

with in many seeds (flaxseed, quince seed), leaves (buchu), etc., and 
some kinds are precipitated by neutral acetate of lead. 

Cerasin, the insoluble ingredient in cherry-tree gum, much re- 
sembles bassorin, if it is not identical with it. M. Fremy asserts 
it is only metagummate of lime. 

Mezquite is a name proposed for a gum, to which attention has 
been called by Dr. Geo. Shumard, produced abundantly in Texas 
and ~New Mexico — parts of our own country as yet but little 
explored ; it is extremely soluble, and differs from Arabin principally 
in not being precipitated by subacetate of lead. 

.All the above compounds are carbohydrates of the composition 
C 24 H 20 O, , or C 24 H 22 22 ; the group of pectin compounds, though not 
strictly belonging to the above, is however nearly allied to thegums. 

Gum is associated in some plants with resin; and gum resins, a 
remarkable natural class of drugs, will be hereafter referred to in 
treating of resins. 

Variously associated with other proximate principles, gum is 
present in a great variety of vegetables, and like starch, it plays an 
important part in the physiology of the plant ; it enters as an ele- 
ment into a great number of articles, both of food and medicine. 
In its important relations to the art of prescribing and compound- 
ing medicines, we shall have occasion to refer to it frequently 
throughout the subsequent parts of the work, and now introduce 
it only for the purpose of calling attention to a few drugs contain- 
ing it. 

Pectin and Pectic Acids. — Many plants contain, in different organs, 
especially in succulent roots and acidulous fruits, a body called pec- 
tose, which, through the influence of a peculiar ferment called pec- 
tase, the organic acids, and light and heat, undergoes a change into 
other bodies of the same relative combinations. 

Pectin, parapectin, and metapectin C 32 H 40 O 28 4H 2 

Pectosic acid C 32 H 20 O 28 3H 2 

Pectic acid C 1G H 22 15 2H 2 

Parapectic acid C 24 H 15 21 2H 2 

Metapectic acid C 21 H 32 27 2H 2 

The unripe fruits contain only pectose; while ripening, pectin and 
parapectin, and, subsequently, metapectic acid, are formed, so that 
the change of the consistence of fruits is less dependent on a change 
of the cellulose, than owing to this transformation. Green fruits 
exhale oxygen in daylight; with the alteration of pectose, the for- 
mation of sugar sets in, carbonic acid is exhaled, the green color 
disappears, and the free acids (citric, malic, tartaric, etc.) become 
neutralized by potassium, calcium, etc., or their taste is masked by 
the increase in the quantity of sugar. 

Pectin is the cause of the gelatinizing of the juices of currants, 
raspberries, etc., and of gentian, dandelion, rhubarb, and other roots. 
The salts of the above acids are uncrystallizable ; those with the 
metallic oxides are mostly gelatinous precipitates, while those with 
alkalies are soluble in water, but gelatinize on cooling. 



SUGARS. 



337 



Syllabus of Gums axd Mucilaginous Medicines. 



Acacia, gum Arabic ; the exu- 
dation of Acacia vera, etc. 

Tragacantha, the exudation of 

Astragalus verus. 
Salep, the tubers of Orchis mas- 

cula, etc. 
Ulmus, elm bark ; the inner bark 

of Ulmus fulva. 



Sassafras medulla, the pith of 

Sassafras officinale. 
Cydonium, quince seed; the seed 

of Cydonia vulgaris. 
Sesami folium, benue ; the leaves 

of Sesamum orientale. 
Althaea (radix), niarshmallow "| 

root. 
Altliaex florcs, marshmallow [ 

flowers from Althsese offici- | 

nalis. J 

Althcea rosea, hollyhock ; the 

flowers. 
Hibiscus esculentus; ochra, the 

fruit. 

Linum, flaxseed; the seeds of 
Linum usitatissimum. 

Papaver, poppy heads ; the ripe 
capsules of Papaver somnife- 
rum. 

Buehu, the leaves of Barosma 
crenata, etc. 



Mild expectorant and demulcent, used in form of 
mucilage (1 part to 2 water), also as syrup and 
powder as a vehicle. 

Consists chiefly of bassorin ; Mucilago tragacanthse 
(^j to aquae Oj) ; a useful paste. 

Five grs. of the powder render one ounce of hot water 
highly mucilaginous. See Castillon's Powders. 

Contains much mucilage, the fine powder as a mild 
expectorant and vehicle for bitter medicines; much 
used for making a demulcent drink to be used in 
irritation of the mucous surfaces, especially of the 
urinary organs, and in dysenteric affections ; the 
coarser powder for poultices. 

Forms with water a rich mucilage; used in eyewashes 
and in Jackson's pectoral syrup. 

Rarely used internally; externally in inflamed eyes 
and for bandoline. 

Grown in gardens; used as a mild astringent in the 
summer complaint of children. 

The mucilage of these last three are not precipitated 
by alcohol. 

Contain starch, mucilage, and asparagin ; highly 
demulcent. Syrup best prepared from cold infu- 
sion. 

Similar in properties to former. 

Used in the U. S. in soups called Gumbo ; in East 
Indies a decoction ^iij in Oiss, boiled down to Oj, 
sweetened and strained. 

Internally in the form of infusion, diuretic, and de- 
mulcent; externally, the meal for poultices; the 
oil readily becomes rancid in the powder. 

Demulcent, not considered narcotic when ripe. 



Mucilage associated with essential oil; diuretic, used 
in infusion and fluid extract. 



Sugars. 

Sugars are of many kinds, closely allied to each other and to the 
foregoing ternary principles, in composition. They are distin- 
guished by a sweet taste, and a more or less distinctly crystalline 
form. They are mostly soluble in water and somewhat soluble in 
alcohol. 



22 



338 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 



Syllabus of Sugars. 
(1.) True Sugars. Composition C l2 H x O x . {Carbohydrates.) 

a. Directly fermentable. (Group of Glucose.) 



Grape sugar, Glucose 
C e H 12 6 +2H 2 



Fruit sugar, uncrystal- 
lizable sugars, Chula- 



In grapes, the fruit of Ro- 
sacese, etc., in diabetic 
urine — from starch by 
the action of sulphuric 
acid — the granular depo- 
sit of honey. 

In fruits, the liquid portion 
of honey, etc. 



Deviates polarized light to right ;* 
soluble in 11 part cold water, 
insoluble in absolute alcohol ; 
with HN0 3 , yields oxalic acid. 



Rotating left; easily soluble 
water and diluted alcohol. 



b. Not directly fermentable by yeast. (Group of Cane Sugar.) 
a.. Fermenting readily with yeast by being converted into fruit sugar. 



Cane sugar 
C 12 H 22 O u 


In sugar-cane, Chinese 
sugar-cane, corn-stalks, 


Rotating right ; easily soluble in 
water, little in alcohol ; yields 




beets, sugar maple, seve- 


oxalic acid with HN0 3 . 




ral palms, numerous ripe 
fruits, etc. 




Melitose 


In Australian manna from 


Rotating right ; crystallizes in 


C 12 H 12 O n 3H E 


Eucalyptus mannifera. 


needles ; reactions similar to 


Synanthrose 

C 12 H 22 11 


In the tubers of the Synan- 
therea. 


cane sugar. 
No rotating power ; deliquescent ; 
very soluble in water; slightly 
in alcohol. 



/?. Fermenting with difficulty in contact with yeast, but readily after treatment with 

dilute acids. 



Melezitose 


In the exudation of 


the 


Rotating power right; sweet like 




larch, Larix 


communis 


glucose; very soluble in water, 




{Ft. meleze). 






almost insoluble in alcohol ; 
yields oxalic acid by HN0 3 . 


Mycose 


In ergot. 






Rotating power right ; easily so- 


C 12 H 22 O u 2H 2 








luble in water, almost insoluble 
in alcohol. 


Trehalose 


In Trehala, an 


oriental 


ex- 


Resembling the former ; soluble in 


C 12 H 22 O n 2H 2 


crescence of 


a species of 


hot alcohol ; with HN0 3 , yields 




Echinops. 






oxalic acid. 


Lactin, sugar of milk 


In milk. 






Rotating power right; very hard 


^12 H 24^12 








prisms ; soluble in 6 parts cold 
water; insoluble in ether; 
slightly soluble in alcohol ; by 
dilute acids, converted into lac- 
tose, and then easily fermentable; 










yields mucic and some oxalic 
acid with HN0 3 . 



* Polarization of light, which is stated as characteristic in the case of the several 
sugars, consists of a change produced upon light by the action of certain media and 
surfaces by which it ceases to present the ordinary phenomena of reflection and trans- 
mission. Instruments employed to exhibit this change are called polariscopes. By 
the use of these, differences may be readily detected between substances which are 
nearly identical in chemical properties. 



SUGARS. 



339 



(2.) Saccharoids. Composition C 12 B x O x . (Carbohydrates.) 

Not fermentable with yeast or after boiling with HS0 4 . 



Eucalyne 



Inosite (Phaseomannite) 
C 6 H 12 6 4H 2 



Scyllito 



Sorbin, sorbite 



Phloroglucin 
C 6 H 6 3 



In Australian manna accom- 
panying melitose. 



In muscular flesh, and in 
the unripe kidney bean, 
Phaseolus vulgaris. See 
Dr. L. C. Lane's process 
in A. J. Ph., ix. 492. 



In the kidneys and liver of 
some fishes. 

In the berries of sorbus 
aucuparia. 



Product of decomposition 
of Phloretin and querci- 
trin. 



Uncrystallizable ; even after treat- 
ment with HS0 4 , not susceptible 
of fermentation ; reduces alka- 
line tartrate of copper. 

Efflorescing ; soluble in water, little 
soluble in alcohol ; not altered by 
diluted acids; with concentrated 
HN0 3 , nitroinosite ; evaporated 
with dilute HN0 3 and moistened 
with NH 3 and CaCl, is colored 
rose-red. 

Resembles inosite ; but is less 
sweet, less soluble, and dissolves 
unaltered in hot HN0 3 . 

Rotating power left ; soluble in £ 
water, little in boiling alcohol ; 
hard crystals, not altered by di 
luted HSO 
with 
copper. 

Sweet prisms; very soluble in 
water and alcohol. 



, yields oxalic acid 
HN0 3 ; reduces oxide of 



(3.) Pseudo-Sugars of the Composition C u II x O 



x—2- 





Not fermenting. 




Mannite 


In manna, mushrooms, etc. 


No rotating power; soluble in 5 


C 6 H 14 6 




parts cold water, scarcely in cold 
alcohol, with HN0 3 yields sac- 
charic and oxalic acids ; HN0 3 , 
at a low temperature, produces 
a fermentable sugar. 


Dulcoee, Dulcite 


From an unknown plant in 


No rotating power; easily soluble 


C 6 H U°6 


Madagascar. 


in water, with difficulty in alco- 
hol ; yields mucic, oxalic, andra- 
cemic acid with HN0 3 


Quercite 


In acorns. 


Sublimes in needles; with nitric 


C 6 tfi2°5 




acid, yields oxalic acid. 


Pinite 


In Pinus Lambertina. 


Rotating power right; very sweet ; 


C 6 H 12 5 




readily soluble in water ; nearly 
insoluble in boiling alcohol. 


Mel ampy rite 


In Melampyrum nemoro- 


No rotating power; soluble in 25 


^12"30^13 


sum ; Scrophularia, no- 


parts water, 1362 parts alcohol ; 




dosa, etc 


not altered by diluted HS0 4 ; with 
HN0 3 , mucic and oxalic acids. 



340 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 



b. Of other compositions. 


Glycerin 


The basic principle of fats. 


Oily liquid ; miscible with water 


C 3 H 5 3HO 




and alcohol; insoluble in ether; 
with HN0 3 yields glonoio. 


Erythromannite 


Product of decomposition of 


Supposed to be identical with 


C 4 H 10 O 4 


erythrin. 


pbycite. 


Phycite 


En Proctococcus vulgaris 


No rotating power: easily soluble 


C 4 H 10 O 4 


Algce. 


in water, with difficulty in alco- 
hol ; with HNO3 oxauc ac id. 


Glycyrrhizin 


In Glycyrrhiza glabra, and 


Uncrystallizable and yellowish ; 


C 24 H 36 9 . 


eschinata. 


slightly soluble in cold water 
and alcohol ; precipitates most 
metallic salts ; combines with 
bases, acids, and salts. 


Panaquilon 


In Panax quinquefolium. 


Amorphous, yellow, readily solu- 


C 24 H 25°18 




ble in water and alcohol; insol- 
uble in ether ; precipitated by 
tannin. 


Orcin, Orcite 


By boiling certain lichens 


Sweet prisms, very soluble in al- 


C w H 8 4 +2Aq 


or their constituents. 


cohol and water ; precipitated 
by PbAc and Fe 2 Cl 6 ; yields 
oxalic acid by HN0 3 ; deep red 
by air, water, and ammonia 
(orceine). 


Beta orcine 


By dry distillation of usnic 


Soluble in water, alcohol, and 


C 34 H 18°6 ? 


acid. 


ether ; red by NH 3 H 2 and air. 



REMARKS ON THE SUGARS. 

Cane sugar is mostly prepared from the juice of the sugar cane; 
considerable quantities are made in Europe from beet root. The 
juice is boiled with quicklime, strained, and reduced by evapora- 
tion to a thick syrup, when the whole is cooled and granulated in 
shallow vessels ; it is now raw sugar of commerce. By purification 
or refining, which is accomplished by the aid of animal charcoal, it 
is obtained as loaf, or more commonly as broken-down or crushed 
sugar — the condition in which it is mostly preferred for use in 
pharmacy. 

In the granulation of raw sugar, the uncrystallizable portion 
which remains is drawn off and constitutes molasses of commerce. 
Molasses, by careful manipulation, is made to yield a further por- 
tion of sugar, and then constitutes sugar-house molasses, or, as it is 
called abroad, treacle. 

Cane sugar is one of the sweetest of the sugars ; when pure it is 
white or crystallized in translucent double oblique prisms, soluble 
in alcohol but not in ether. It is soluble in J its weight of water; 
its solution heated in contact with salts of copper, mercury, gold, 
and silver, decomposes them. Its watery solution with yeast under- 
goes the vinous fermentation, the cane sugar being previously con- 
verted into fruit sugar. Lump sugar is permanent in the air, and 
phosphorescent in the dark when struck or rubbed. Its tendency 
to crystallize or form a translucent candy is prevented by the addi- 
tion of cream of tartar and acids, or acid salts, generally fruit sugar 



REMARKS ON SUGARS. 341 

and subsequently grape sugar being formed. By the application of 
a beat of 320° F. it melts and cools to a glassy amorphous mass 
(barley sugar)\ if heated to 425° it is changed into caramel; long 
boiling diminishes its tendency to crystallize and increases its color. 

Rock candy is a very pleasant form of cane sugar, prepared by 
crystallizing it slowly upon a string from a strong solution; it is 
preferred for coughs from the slowness with which it dissolves in 
the mouth, and is very often used to sweeten mucilaginous and 
acid drinks used in catarrhs. 

The peculiar brown coloring matter called caramel, C 12 H g 9 , is 
produced by heating sugar to a temperature of 425°, until it fuses, 
evolves the vapors of water, and turns to a deep brown color; it 
then consists of unaltered sugar, caramel, and a bitter substance 
called assamar ; it is freely soluble in water, and has a bitter and 
not disagreeable empyreumatic taste. It is much used to color 
liquors, as in the fabrication of brandy, and is a useful addition to 
soups. 

For the effect of heat on cane sugar, as observed by Gelis and 
Pohl's method for preparing pure caramel, consult Proceed. Am, Ph. 
Ass., 1862, 165. 

Sugar combines with bases, forming saccharates, which are un- 
crystallizable, and those of the alkalies deliquescent. Saccharate 
of calcium is used in medicine under the name of Syrupus Calcis 
(p. 211). 

Common salt combines with sugar to a deliquescent crystallizable 
compound. The alkaline saccharates precipitate the soluble salts 
of lead, copper, silver, and mercury. 

Fruit sugar. — "Whether the sweet fruits all contain the same 
sugar is uncertain ; the absence of crystalline forms, constant changes 
in" the process of ripening, and the difficulty of freeing one kind 
from another impede the investigations; its rotating power is 
greatly influenced by different degrees of temperature. 

Grape sugar is found in grapes and in acid fruits associated with 
fruit sugar. It constitutes also the sugar of diabetes. The most 
economical method of obtaining it is by acting on starch or lignin 
with diluted sulphuric acid; it may also be obtained in an impure 
state, by scraping off the white powder deposited on old raisins, 
and much purer by drying the deposit of honey upon brick tiles. 
Grape sugar, under the name of glucose, has of late years become an 
article of great commercial importance; it is largely consumed by 
brewers in the production of sparkling ales, etc., and in pharmac}^ 
in syrups, in which increased body without corresponding sweet- 
ness is desirable. It is found in two forms — a dense transparent 
syrup, and in whitish or grayish-white masses; and is made in the 
large waj- by heating 56 parts of sulphuric acid and 5600 parts of 
water to 212°. Equal amounts of acid and water are mixed at a 
temperature of 86° F. in a wooden vessel, and 2200 parts of starch 
meal are stirred and heated to 100° F. ; the latter mixture is then 
gradually added to the first, and heated to 212° for a short time, 
and then to 320° for two or three hours, or until the starch has been 



342 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

converted to glucose ; this is then drawn off into tanks, and 168 
parts of pure chalk stirred up with 500 parts of water are gradually 
added ; when all the acid has been neutralized, the sulphate of 
calcium is filtered out on a muslin filter, and the solution concen- 
trated and clarified by bone-black and renewed filtration. 

As already stated, by the action of diluted acids upon lignin and 
starch, they are converted into a soluble form called dextrin, and 
"ultimately pass into grape sugar, this change may be produced by 
long boiling alone ; it is also produced in starch by nitrogenized 
ferments, especially by that peculiar substance known as diastase. 
By the same means, cane sugar is spontaneously converted into 
fruit sugar, and this into alcohol, and ultimately into acetic acid ; 
and, in fact, the alcoholic and acetic liquors of commerce are pro- 
duced in this way from the various starchy and saccharine vege- 
table products used in their manufacture. Glucose combines with 
alkalies in the cold, but these compounds are decomposed by heat. 

Sugar of milk is not manufactured in this country, but is chiefly 
imported from Switzerland, where it is made on a large scale from 
whej^; it is crystallized upon sticks or strings in masses not unlike 
stalactites in appearance. The greatest consumption of this is by 
the homoeopathists, who use it as a vehicle for almost all their 
medicines in the form of powders and pillets. It is said by them 
to have the least action upon the system of any substance they 
have experimented with ; and hence its employment as a diluent 
for the infinitesimal doses, which, according to their theory, are 
increasingly powerful in proportion to their dilution. Its physical 
condition of hardness or resistance to mechanical action adapts it 
to develop the latent efficiency of those medicines which they assert 
are only rendered active by long attrition. {See the observations 
of Dr. R. Luboldt on its fermentation, in Am. Jour. Ph., 1861, 409.) 

Glycyrrhizin may be prepared, according to Mr. Jos. Hirsch, by 
making a hot infusion with dilute acetic acid, neutralizing with 
soda, crystallizing out the acetate of sodium, and concentrating the 
infusion containing the glycyrrhizin. 

Another process is to percolate liquorice root with alcohol, heat 
to the boiling point, filter, and evaporate. 

Mannite may be prepared by several processes: — 

First. By digesting manna in boiling alcohol, and filtering while 
hot. As the liquid cools it precipitates the mannite in tufts of 
slender colorless needles ; these may be purified, if necessary, by re- 
solution and crystallization. 

Second. By mixing manna with cold water in which the white 
of an egg has been beaten, boiling for a few minutes, and straining 
the solution through linen while hot; the strained liquid forms a 
semi-crystalline mass on cooling; this is to be pressed strongly in a 
cloth, then mixed with its own weight of cold water and again 
pressed, then mixed with a little animal charcoal dissolved in boil- 
ing water, and filtered while hot into a porcelain dish over the fire; 
the solution is now to be evaporated till a pellicle forms, and set 
aside to crystallize in large transparent quadrangular prisms. 



TESTS FOR SUGARS AND OTHER CARBOHYDRATES. 343 

Third. By dissolving manna in water, precipitating gummy and 
coloring matters with subacetate of lead, removing lead from the 
filtrate by carefully dropping into it sufficient sulphuric acid, 
though not in great excess, evaporating and crystallizing. 

Fourth. Artificially, by acting upon glucose prepared from 
dextrin and concentrated to 15° Baume, with ^ve per cent, of 
wheat flour, Rye of molasses, and five of common malt vinegar at 
100° F. ; after fermentation for three days, concentrating, and digest- 
ing with alcohol, crystals of mannite are obtained. {Am. Jour. 
Pharm., February, 1871.) 

Mannite fuses between 320° and 330° F., and crystallizes again 
at about 284°. In sealed tubes mannite may be heated to 482° 
without altering, except that a small portion turns into mannitan 
= C a H 12 5 (anhydrous mannite), which may be obtained by many 
processes calculated to abstract the water of crystallization: it is a 
neutral syrupy sweetish substance, scarcely liquid, insoluble in ether, 
slowly soluble in anhydrous alcohol, freely soluble in water, in con- 
tact with air it absorbs water, liquefies, and crystallizes to ordinary 
mannite. 

Though mannite is not fermentable under ordinary circumstances, 
it may be converted into fermentable sugar, by leaving it in con- 
tact under peculiar circumstances with animal tissues. (See Am. 
Jour. JPharm., vol. xxix. p. 450.) 

Tests for the Sugars and other Carbohydrates. 

Under this head the several processes for testing the presence of 
sugar are introduced; they are particularly applicable to grape 
sugar and to the examination of urine. When urine has a high 
specific gravity, and other symptoms of diabetes appear, the phy- 
sician finds it of the utmost importance to make a chemical ex- 
amination. The pharmacist is very liable to be called on for 
this, and will find it an advantage to be supplied with a reliable 
urinometer {see Specific Gravity), a test rack and tubes, and the 
necessary chemical reagents. 

Separation of pure sugar is usually difficult; free acids and bases 
must be avoided during the evaporation. The microscope furnishes 
the best criterion; the taste is no proof whatever. 

Fermentation sets in directly on the addition of yeast {see Sylla- 
bus) ; sometimes treatment with dilute HS0 4 is advisable, but never 
necessary with urine; the amount of C0 2 evolved indicates the 
quantity of sugar. To rely on the formation of yeast cells may be- 
come deceptive through similar though different vegetations. 

Polarized light would, to a certain extent, indicate the kind of 
sugar, but many substances have similar optical behavior. 

MoorJs Test. — Boiling with concentrated potash lye produces, 
with grape and milk sugar, a yellowish -brown and ultimately a 
deep brown color; with cane sugar only after its transformation 
into glucose. ^ Supersaturating with an acid liberates a peculiar 
odor of burning sugar. 



844 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

Heller's Test. — The urine is mixed with solution of caustic potassa, 
the mixture divided in two test-tubes of equal width, one of 
which is heated to boiling. The presence of sugar is indicated by 
a darker color, which is ascertained by comparison with, the un- 
healed liquid. 

LehmanrCs Test. — The solution of the saccharine matter in 90 
per cent, alcohol yields, with a solution of KO,HO in absolute alco- 
hol, a sticky or flocculent precipitate, readily soluble in water and 
reducing an alkaline solution of CuO. 

Hor sley's Test. — Five or six drops of diabetic urine produce a 
deep sap-green coloration in a boiling solution of chromate of po- 
tassium containing free alkali. 

Knapp proposes a volumetric test solution: an alkaline solution 
of cyanide of mercury of known strength is heated to the boiling 
point ; to this is added the sugar solution from a burette. The opera- 
tion is known to be completed when a drop of the mixture is ap- 
plied to a piece of the best Swedish filtering paper stretched over 
a beaker-glass containing sulphide of ammonium. A brown spot 
appears as long as the mercurial salt is present, and fresh addition 
of glucose is necessary. 

Trommer's test is based on the reduction by grape sugar of oxide 
of copper to suboxide, in an alkaline solution, and is applied by 
mixing the urine or other saccharine liquid with some caustic 
potassa in a test-tube, and then adding a diluted solution of sulphate 
of copper, 'drop by drop, and with constant agitation, until the 
occasioned precipitate just commences to remain undissolved; the 
mixture is then raised to the boiling point, and if it contains grape 
sugar, deposits the orange-red hydrated suboxide of copper. 

But many substances, like uric acid, some vegetable acids, hemat- 
oxylin, alkapton (Proc. Am. Ph. Assoc., 1862, p. 173), reduce CuO 
under the same circumstances; kreatine, peptone, protein com- 
pounds, and' some alkaloids interfere with the separation of the 
Ou 2 0. 

Fehling's Quantitative Test for Grape Sugar is an improvement on 
the method originally suggested by Barreswill. The test liquid is 
prepared by dissolving 40 grammes of crystallized sulphate of cop- 
per in 160 grammes of distilled water, and mixing this solution 
with 160 grammes of neutral tartrate of potassium dissolved in a 
little water ; from 600 to 700 grammes of solution of caustic soda, 
specific gravity 1.12, are then added, and sufficient water to make 
the whole measure at 60° F. (15° C.) 1154.4 cubic centimetres. As 
one equivalent of glucose (C 6 H 12 G ) reduces 10 equivalents of oxide 
of copper to suboxide, 1 litre of the above solution requires 5 
grammes, or 10 cubic centimetres .05 gramme of grape sugar. 

The saccharine solution is diluted until it contains not over 1 per 
.cent, of grape sugar. 10 cubic centimetres of the test are diluted 
•with 4 cubic centimetres of water, heated to boiling, and the sac- 
charine liquid gradually added until it ceases to produce a red pre- 
cipitate of suboxide of copper; the quantity of the liquid used 
.contained .05 gramme of sugar. The quantity of sugar may like- 



TESTS FOR SUGARS AND OTHER CARBOHYDRATES. 345 

wise be calculated from the amount of suboxide of copper obtained, 
which is separated by nitration, well washed, and dried. 10 equi- 
valents of protoxide (CuO) yield 5 equivalents of suboxide (Cu 2 0); 
the weight of equivalent of the latter beingl42.8, 5 equivalents weigh 
142.8 x 5 = 714 ; the equivalent of grape sugar (C 6 H 12 6 ) weighs 
180, and if we express the ascertained weight of suboxide of copper 
by s, the weight of grape sugar = x is calculated by the following 
proportion — 714 : 180 = s : x, or by adding one-half and T 4s part of 
the weight of the suboxide. 

Fehling's test is not affected by pectin, tannin, or mucilage, but 
when several weeks old it is acted on by acetic, tartaric, oxalic, and 
the aromatic acids. In small well-corked vials, if protected from 
contact with the air, it keeps well for some time, but it is always 
safest to prepare it when wanted for use; the copper solution may 
be kept ready for mixing with a freshly prepared solution of the 
tartrate, and with the caustic soda, preserved in well-stoppered 
vials. Free uric acid reduces the test liquid, which fact must not 
be lost sight of in analysis of urine, which ought to be used quite 
fresh. 

Cane sugar and starch cause no reaction with the test, but when 
they have been previously converted into grape or fruit sugar by a 
continued boiling with diluted sulphuric acid, the oxide of copper 
will be reduced, and from the ascertained quantity of grape sugar 
95 per cent, indicates the weight of cane sugar (C H 12 Oj, and 90 
per cent, that of starch (C 6 H 10 O 5 ). 

The test is likewise applicable to milk sugar, which reduces for 
each equivalent 7 equivalents of oxide of copper, so that 1 litre of 
the test liquid requires 7.143 grammes of sugar of milk for its 
reduction. 

Boettger's Test. — A tablespoonful of urine and of sodium solution, 
containing one part of crystallized carbonate of sodium to three 
parts of water, is boiled with as much officinal nitrate of bismuth 
as will cover the point of a knife; glucose imparts a grayish or 
black color to the nitrate. Albumen is to be previously separated 
by coagulation ; cane sugar and all organic substances usually pre- 
sent in urine are without action. 

Haider's Test. — Indigo is dissolved in strong sulphuric (better 
^Nordhausen) acid, the liquid over-saturated with carbonate of po- 
tassium, to render it alkaline. This, when used, is sufficiently 
diluted to be of a light blue color, and boiled; if now a trace of 
grape or fruit sugar be added, the blue color is changed to green 
and purple; from a larger proportion of sugar, the color passes 
through red into- yellow. If afterwards the liquid is shaken, the. 
purple passes through green into blue, but the yellow through the 
above shades into green or greenish-blue. Cane sugar is not 
affected. 

VogeVs test is the same as Mulder's, litmus being substituted for 
indigo. 

LoewenthaU s Test. — 60 grms. tartaric acid, 240 grms. crystallized 
Xa 2 C0 3 , 5 grms. crystallized Fe 2 Cl 6 , and 500 cam. hot water vield 



346 ON FARINACEOUS AND SACCHARINE PRINCIPLES. 

a solution remaining yellow on boiling, but turning brown with a 
trace of glucose and separating with a more voluminous precipitate. 

Peligofs quantitative determination of cane sugar is based on the 
solution of lime in sugar; C 12 H 22 O u dissolve 3CaO, the quantity of 
which is determined by measure analysis with HS0 4 . If glucose 
is present, a second assay is made with boiled solution of the sac- 
charate; the grape sugar is destroyed by boiling, and the result 
indicates cane sugar; the difference between the second and first 
assay expresses the grape sugar. 

Runge's Test. — Yery dilute HS0 4 , evaporated with the suspected 
solution by a water-bath to dryness, scarcely colors grape sugar; 
with cane sugar a black spot is produced ; a similar spot also with 
starch and some other compounds. 

Pettenkofer' s Test. — Bile and concentrated HS0 4 , produce, with 
sugar, a red color. 

Maum.ene's. — Chlorine at a temperature at and above boiling 
water causes a brown color, deepening to black on drying. Carbo- 
hydrates, like lignin, hemp, linen, cotton, starch, etc., suffer a simi- 
lar decomposition. A strip of white woollen, merino (which is not 
altered), is saturated with a solution of perchloride of tin and dried ; 
a single drop of a saccharine or similar solution put on the strip, 
and heated over a lamp to a little above the boiling point of water, 
instantly effects a black stain. Even ten drops of diabetic urine in 
ten cubic centimetres of water produce a brownish-black color. 

0. Schmidt's Test. — 3PbO,Ac and NH 3 produce, in solution of 
cane and grape sugar, white precipitates ; on boiling the latter only 
changes the color to red. 

Sugar in Urine. — It has been ascertained by Professor Briicke, 
and corroborated by Dr. Bence Jones, that grape sugar is a normal 
ingredient of urine, and it is, therefore, necessary to determine its 
quantity in disease ; for this purpose Fehling's test is applicable, 
the inaccuracy of which arising from the presence of uric acid may 
be removed by precipitating the urine with oxalic acid or with ^ 
of its measure of muriatic acid of 1.10 specific gravity, setting it 
aside for twenty-four hours in a cool place, after which time it 
contains but traces (.0001 p.) of uric acid. 

Owing to the ammonia contained or readily formed in urine, 
which keeps some suboxide of copper in solution, Trommer's test 
does not show the small proportion of sugar in healthy urine, but 
it generally reacts with the urine of pregnant or nursing women. 
Minute quantities of sugar are not indicated by Boettger's test, if 
the black color of bismuth should be owing to the formation of 
sulphuret ; a black coloration will, in this case, also be obtained by 
digesting the urine with levigated litharge. Heller's test is the 
most reliable for detecting very small proportions of sugar, but in 
a deeply-colored urine the changes produced by boiling may not be 
visible, and another experiment with Boettger's test be advisable. 

Glucosides. — This term is applied to those organic principles 
which, by a peculiar decomposition, are resolved into grape sugar 
(glucose) and an altered or new principle. This change may be 



SYLLABUS OF SACCHARINE GROUP OF MEDICINES. 347 

effected: 1. By the action of mineral acids at a boiling tempera- 
ture. 2. By heating the glucoside with alkaline solutions or 
baryta water. 3. By the action at mean temperatures of nitrogen- 
izecl principles associated with the glucosides in the plants pro- 
ducing them, or otherwise ; and 4. By yeast and saliva. Many of 
the vegetable acids and neutral principles described in this work 
might be classified as glucosides, but as this peculiarity in their 
chemical characters is less obvious and characteristic than others 
by which they are generally classified, it has not been thought best 
to form them into a distinct class, but by way of illustration and 
for convenient reference the following syllabus of some principles 
capable of this classification has been prepared. 

Syllabus of some (xlucosides. 



G-lucoside. 


Process. 


Product beside 
Glucose 


Reaction. 


Gallo-tannic 


By acidsf 


Gallic acid 


C a1 Ho 2 17 +4H a O=3C 1 H G 5 -r-C 6 H 12 6 . 


acids 








Arbutin 


do.J 


Hydrokinone 


CjoH^O; + H 2 O=C c H Oo+CV,H 12 O 6 . 


Colocynthi 


do. 


Colocynthein 


C cc Ho 4 Oo :! +HoO = C 4 4H 12 0,o+2C ( ,H 1 ,0 6 . 


Amygdalin 


By emulsin and 


Oil of bitter almond 


C.,,H." 7 NO n -|-2HoO=C 7 H d+HCN+ 




water 


& hydrocyanic acid 


2C 6 Hi 2 6 . 


.^Esculin 


By acids 


JEsculetin 


Cfn Ho 1 Or 3 +3HoO=C q H 6 4 +2C,-,H r 6 . 


Convallarin 


do. 


Convallaretin 


20; i 4H : .,O n 4-2HoO=2Co 8 H. N +2C G H 1 <,0 6 
C3iH 3 4O 19 +4HoO=2C G H 1 oO +O 10 H 18 Oi 1 . 


Daphnin 


do. 


Daphnetin 


Datiscin 


do. 


Datiscetin 


C 42 H 34 0.> 4 = C : „ ,H ,,,0, o+ C 6 H 12 6 . 


Digitalin* 


do. 


Digitaletin 


O„ 7 H 40 O ] -,-(-2H 2 O=2C^H 1 oO s +C lf Ho-,O 5 . 


GMycyrrhizin 


do. 


Glycyrretin 


Oo 4 H 3G 9 + Ho0=C 6 H 1 ,0,,+C 1> H.v,O 4 . 


Helicin 


Acids, emulsin, 
alkalies, or 
yeast 

By acids 


Salicylous acid 


13 H 1G 7 + H 3 O=C e H 12 O G -f<J 7 II O 2 . 


Jalapin 


Jalapinal 


C3iH 50 O 16 +5HoO=3C 6 H Ja O G +C 1 ,H 24 O 3 . 


Populin 


do. 


Benzoic acid, 


O r ,H 17 (0 7 H- ) 0)0 7 +H. 2 0=C G H ] oO G 4- 






saliretin 


C 7 H 6 0.>-fC 1 H G 0. 


Salicin 


By emulsin 


Saligenin 


C 13 H 1S 7 + H,0=C G H l2 6 +C 7 R\0 3 . 


Solania 


By acids 


Solanidin 


C 43 H 71 N0 1G +3H 2 = 3(J r ,Hi«0 6 - r -Co,,H., 1 NO 

20, o nooO ] o+4HoO=2CV,H 1 ..0 6 +0.: I I. ( ) 16 
C 23 H 28 O 1 4+3H i O=2U H I ,O G +O :i H i ;O 5 . 


Thujin 


do. 


Thujetin 


Xanthorhamnin 


do. 


Rhamnetin 



Besides this class, in which glucose is a product, there are others 
in which peculiar sugars are formed, and others in which the de- 
compositions are more complex, resulting in two or more new com- 
pounds; for descriptions of these and of the foregoing, the reader 
is referred to the principles themselves, as treated of under the 
several heads of organic neutral principles and acids; also to Gme- 
lin's Handbook of Chemistry, Cav. Soc. Edit., vol. xv. p. 340. 



Syllabus of the Saccharine Group of Medicines. 



Names and origin. 
Saccharum, sugar ; from Sac- 

charum officinarum. 
Theriaca, treacle, molasses ; 

the concentrated uncrystal- 

lizable juice of Saccharum 

officinarum. 



Properties and uses. 

Expectorant and laxative; in the form of powder and 
syrup ; mostly as a vehicle and corrective. 

A tenacious excipient for pills, may be purified by 
solution in alcohol and digesting with animal char- 
coal. 



"■Kosmanrs. 



f Also by spontaneous fermentation. J Also by contact with emulsin. 



348 



THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 



Syllabus of the Saccharine Group of Medicines. {Continued.) 



Names and origin. 
Mel, honey ; the liquid pre- 
pared by Apis mellifica. 



Saccharum lactis, lactin; from 
milk. 



Glycyrrhiza, liquorice root; "] 
the rhizoma of Glycyr- [ 
rhiza glabra. j 

Extractum glycyrrhizee. J 

Manna ; the concrete juice of 
Ornus Europsea. 

Mannitum, mannite ; from man- 
na. 

Ficus, the fig ; the fruit of Ficus 
carica. 

Prunuin, prunes ; the dried 
fruit of Prunus domestica. 

Uva passa, raisins ; the dried 
fruit of Vitis vinifera. 

Cassia fistula, purging cassia; 
the fruit. 

Carofce radix, wild carrot; the 
root of Daucus carota. 



Properties and uses. 

Expectorant with more active medicines, combined with 
astringents in gargles ; as an addition to poultices 
and as a vehicle ; a factitious article is made from 
Havana sugar. 

Used as a vehicle for powders, which are required in 
a very fine condition ; has little taste and is very 
hard ; recently used as food for feeding infants; less 
apt to produce acidity than cane sugar. 

Expectorant; in syrups, as a vehicle and corrective 

for unpleasant medicines ; as constituent for pills. 
The liquorice ball is formed into sticks. (See Extracts.) 

Laxative. In syrups, mostly combined with senna and 

saline laxatives. 
Laxative in doses of §j to §ij. Used as a vehicle and 

corrective. 
Laxative. Used in confections. (Conf. sennse.) 

Laxative. Used in confections. (Conf. sennse.) In 

Europe as a popular vehicle for infusion of senna, to 

prevent griping. 
Laxative. Mostly as a corrective in a few tinctures, 

in gruel, etc. 
Laxative. The pulp is employed as an ingredient in 

conf. sennoe. 
Diuretic and laxative, in the form of the expressed or 

inspissated juice; also as poultice. 



Honey contains uncrystallizable fruit sugar and grape sugar ; the 
latter is apt to be deposited, on standing, in a granular form ; a 
volatile odorous principle and a little wax are generally present. 
For medicinal use, it requires clarifying. This is accomplished by 
heating it in a suitable vessel to a very moderate degree, and main- 
taining the temperature till it ceases to separate a scum, which is 
to be skimmed off as it rises to the surface. 

Mel despumatum is also prepared by adding to honey an equal 
bulk of water and a little tannin, which, on being precipitated by 
lime-water carefully added, carries down with it the impurities ; it 
is then to be evaporated to its original weight, the scum being 
carefully removed. 



CHAPTER III. 



ON ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES, AND CERTAIN ANIMAL 

PRODUCTS. 



All plants and animals contain, besides the ternary proximate 
principles consisting of C, H, and 0, others in which E" is asso- 
ciated with the three former elements. Mulder was the first to 
prove that these vegetable principles, so essential for the sustenance 
of animal life, are not materially different from those occurring in 



THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 349 

the animal kingdom, and that they all yield, after treatment with 
water, alcohol, ether, dilute muriatic acid, and strong potassa solu- 
tion — protein, which he ascertained has the composition C 36 H 25 N 4 O 10 . 
Liebig, Dumas, and Cahours calculate the formula C 48 H 36 N 6 I4 . 
A more recent analysis by Luberkuhn gives its formula as 
C 72 H 112 R 2 N ]8 22 S, R denoting an atom of univalent metal. This 
radical, it was asserted, yields with S and P in various proportions 
those proximate principles which have received the name of protein 
compounds. 

It has, however, been proved that protein is always a product of 
decomposition, differing from the original compound from wdiich 
derived in other respects besides the absence of S and P; the rela- 
tions of these bodies to each other has not been cleared up, though 
it seems probable that they are copulated compounds. 

Few of the protein compounds occur naturally in an insoluble 
condition ; they are mostly met with in aqueous solution from which 
they are readily separated in an insoluble form by aid of heat 
(coagulation). They are characterized by the following reactions: — 

Alkalies dissolve them, separating all or a portion of sulphur; 
cold nitric acid colors them yellow, forming xanthoproteinic acid; 
concentrated muriatic acid in the presence of air produces a violet 
or blue color ; iodine solution a yellow coloration ; sugar and con- 
centrated HS0 4 generate a bright red color, similar to the one pro- 
duced with biliary acids; a similar color is also obtained by a 
solution of protonitrate of mercury containing nitrous acid(Millon's 
test). Their solutions in acetic acid are precipitated by neutral 
salts and by ferro- and ferricyanide of potassium. With the salts 
of many heavy metals, they form insoluble compounds, mostly con- 
taining the protein body, acid, and base ; this explains the adaptation 
of albumen and the allied principles as antidotes in poisoning by 
corrosive sublimate, blue vitriol, and other salts. 

Prolonged boiling with mineral acids or alkalies decomposes 
them into leucina, tyrosina, and various other products, which are 
also formed by their putrefaction. Chromic acid and binoxide of 
inanganium with HS0 4 evolve volatile acids of the composition 
C 9l H, l 4 , hydrocyanic and benzoic acids. 

Protein compounds in a putrefying condition act as ferments to 
many organic compounds, and on that account their removal by 
coagulation or precipitation with alcohol is provided for in many 
permanent pharmaceutical preparations. 

Protein has been prescribed by physicians as a nutritive tonic 
and in the treatment of impetigo capitis. Dose, for young children 
5 grains three times a day. As it is a subject of controversy by 
chemists, the remedy may be called — 

Pure Insoluble Albumen. — Mix white of egg with its own bulk 
of water, filter and evaporate at 104° F. to the original bulk, 
then add a concentrated solution of caustic potash ; the whole soon 
forms a translucid, yellowish, elastic mass ; this is to be broken up, 
exhausted by cold water, avoiding exposure to the air, then dis- 
solve it in boiling water or boiling alcohol, and precipitate the 
albumen by acetic acid or phosphoric acid. 



350 



THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES, 



The largest supply of albumen is from the blood of animals. In 
Pesth and JSTorth Germany it is used as a mordant for dyeing yarns 
and cloth. The serum which separates when the blood coagulates is 
largely albuminous • 3000 pounds of blood yield about 110 pounds 
of albumen. 

Syllabus of the Protein Compounds. 



Name. 



Albumen 



Casein 



Legumin or vegetable 
casein 



Crystallin 



Hsemoglobulin 



Fibrin 



Syntonin 



Source. 



In eggs, blood, chyle, pus, 
and other excretions and 
secretions, and in the 
juices of plants. 



In milk ; probably also in 
some other animal secre- 
tions. 



In the seeds of Leguminosse 
and in oily seeds. 

In the lens of the eye. 



In the blood-corpuscles. 



In the plasma of blood, 
sometimes in exudations. 



In the fibrilles of muscles. 



Description, etc. 



Coagulates between 130°&170°F.; 
rendered uncoagulable by eva- 
poration in direct sunlight, but 
when evaporated in diffused day- 
light is soluble ; if it has become 
uncoagulable, it may be restored 
v to solubility by small quantities 
of acetic, tartaric, citric, or formic 
acids ; precipitates most of the 
salts of the earths and heavy 
metals (antidote to corrosive 
sublimate, etc.). Turns polar- 
ized light to left ; contains from 
.7 tol.7 per cent. S. 

Coagulates in the form of a skin 
upon the surface of its solution, 
by acids and by rennet in flocks ; 
precipitated by MgS0 4 and 
CaCl. Contains .8 to 1 per 
cent. S. 

Coagulates on evaporation in films, 
in behavior almost identical 
with animal casein. 

Precipitated by C0 2 , not by ren- 
net ; coagulates not below 195° ; 
the filtrate from it is acid ; 
readily reduced to an impal- 
pable powder ; resembles in 
many respects the globulin of 
blood. 

Known only in combination with 
haematin; soluble in aqueous 
ether; coagulates at about 760°; 
forms by the influence of light 
and air hcema- crystallin, color- 
less or red crystals, which are 
not precipitated by HgClAgNO s 

or 2Pb, Ac. 

Coagulates spontaneously in the 
air: contains 1.2 per cent. S 
and some Fe ; the coagulation 
retarded by KN0 3 and salts of 
the alkaline earths ; promoted 
by beating ; forms while putre- 
fying soluble albumen. 

Coagulates spontaneously in the 
air; becomes gelatinous and dis- 
solves in water containing y-^-g- 
HC1. Muscles contain various 
protein compounds coagulating 
at different temperatures. 



SYLLABUS OF THE PROTEIN COMPOUNDS, 



851 



Syllabus of the Protein Compounds. {Continued.) 



Name. 


Source. 


Description, etc. 


Emulsin, s. synaptas 


In almonds and otber seeds 


Not precipitated by Ac, precipi- 
tated by alcohol ; decomposes 
amygdalin into HCy, etc. ; loses 
this property by heat, but not 
when heated in the dry state to 
212°. 

Decomposes myronic acid into oil 


Myrosin 


In white and black mustard. 






of mustard and sugar; loses 






this property by heat and strong 






alcohol. 


Aleurou 


In the albumen of nutmeg 


Crystalline; more or less soluble 




and other seeds. 


in water, acids, alkalies, gly- 
cerine, and syrup. 


Vitellin 


In the yelk of birds' eggs. 


Resembles fibrin, but does not de- 
compose H0 2 . 


Ichthidin, "] 






Ichthulin, 


In the eggs of fishes and 


Crystalline or granular. 


Icbthin, and [ 


amphibii. 




Einydin J 






Glutin 


In wheat, rye, and other 


Left on washing wheat flour with 




cereals. 


water to remove starch ; con- 
sists of three or four com- 
pounds; the nourishing part of 
flour. 


Zymome, s. coagulated 


The residue of crude gluten 


Soluble in alkalies, in HP0 3 , and 


vegetable albumen 


after boiling with alcohol. 


Ac ; after heating to 212°, in- 
soluble in NH 3 ; softens with 
water. 


Gliadin 


The portion of gluten solu- 


Soluble in acids and alkalies ; 




ble in boiling alcohol and 


causes the formation of dough, 




precipitated by water. 


on kneading flour with water. 


Mucin (see page 352) 


In the mother-liquor of 


Soluble in water, not precipitated 




gliadin. 


by HgCl 2 and lead salts ; in- 
soluble in acetic acid. 



Tests. — The physician has frequent occasion in the examination 
of urine to search for albumen and mucus (which is modified 
albumen), among the abnormal constituents of that secretion. 

To test urine for albumen, it should be slowly heated in a test- 
tube to boiling. Unless the urine is very alkaline it will coagulate 
and separate in flakes. The precipitate may consist of phosphates, 
which will readily dissolve in a little nitric acid, though if the acid 
is added in excess, it will, after dissolving the phosphates, throw 
down albumen if present. 

If a precipitate is produced by nitric acid and none by boiling, an 
excess of uric acid is probably present. If the urine was alkaline, 
this precipitate may be albumen, as an excess of alkali prevents its 
precipitation by heat. To confirm this test it is recommended to 
wash this precipitate and dissolve it in a little potash solution, then 
on the addition of a drop or two of the cupropotassic tartrate a rich 
violet color is obtained, unless the solution is too dilute. 

For the estimation of albumen, Boedeker measures its solution 



352 



THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 



in acetic acid with an aqueous solution of 1.309 grm. ferrocyanide 
of potassium in 1000 c.c. ; each c.c. precipitates .01 grm. albumen. 

Besides the bodies enumerated in the above syllabus, there are 
many protein compounds found in various healthy and morbid 
secretions, which are as yet little known, and may probably be 
modifications of some above enumerated. Though they are of 
little interest to the pharmacist, we append a syllabus of the 
most important. 

Modified Albuminous Principles. 



Name. 


Source. 


Description, etc. 


Para-albumen 


In the liquid of dropsical 


Scarcely turbid on boiling; by- 


(of Scherer) 


ovaries. 


Ac and heat, floccules which 
cannot be filtered clear; the 
precipitate by alcohol soluble in 
water. 


Meta-albumen 


In dropsical liquids. 


The solution in Ac not precipi- 
tated by KCfo ; precip. by HC1, 

not by Ac. 


Pancreatih 


In the pancreatic liquid. 


Coagulates at 162°, by HS0 4 and 






HNO s , not by HC1, Ac7 or HP0 3 ; 
alcoholic precipitate soluble in 
water; used of late years in 
treatment of disease. 


Mucin (see p. 351) 


In the secretion of the mu- 


Not precipitated by heat, KCfo, 




cous membranes. 


HgCl 2 , or tannin ; precip. by 
alcohol, soluble in water, by 
Ac insol. in excess. 


Pyin 


In pus. 


No precipitate by heat ; precipi- 
tated by Ac, alcohol, PbOAc, 
and HgCl 2 . 



Animal Pkoducts used in Medicine containing: Pkotein 
Compounds. 



Name. 



Source. 



Description, etc. 



'cS 



Phasianus galli. 



Lac vaccinum, cow's milk 



Serum lactis, whey 



Bos taurus. 



From milk by boiling with 
.1 per cent, alum, T, wine, 
etc., and straining. 



Consists of ovi testa (90 to 96 per 
cent. CaC0 3 ), now rarely if 
ever used in medicine ; ovi al- 
bumen (about 85 H 2 0, 12 albu- 
men, sugar, carbonates), used 
for clarifying syrups, etc., and 
for emulsionizing; ovi vitellus 
(about 16 vitellin, 30 fat with 
color, 52 Aq, 1| ashes), used 
for emulsionizing oils and oleo- 
resins. 

Contains 4 casein, 3.5 fat, 5.25 
milk sugar, .7 salts, 87 Aq ; 
used as a dietetic, rarely as a 
vehicle for medicines. 

Contains the sugar, salts, and 
water of milk; used as a die- 
tetic in certain diseases, and as 
a vehicle. 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 



853 



Animal Products used in Medicine containing Protein 
Compounds. {Continued.) 



Name. 


Source. 


Description, etc. 


Buiyrum, butter 
Caro, meat 


The fat of cow's milk. 

The flesh of various animals. 


Used in ointments as an elegant 
substitute for lard; ung. hy- 
drarg. oxidi and ung. hydrarg. 
nitr. made with butter, keep 
very well. (See Amer. Journ. 
Pharm., xxx. 103.) 

Contains kreatina, kreatinina, sar- 
kina, inosit, organic salts, chlo- 
rides, phosphates, extractive 
albumen, syntonin, fibres, 72 to 
80 per cent, water. 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 

Eggs. — When used for the clarification of syrups, etc., in phar- 
macy, the albumen of eggs must be dissolved in the cold liquid, 
which is to be gradually heated to the boiling point. The'coagu- 
lum incloses mechanically the impurities suspended in the liquid. 

The yelk is preferred for emulsionizing oleoresinous and volatile 
oils; for this purpose it is much better adapted than the albumen 
or gum Arabic, owing to its containing a considerable portion of 
a fat oil in which the volatile oils are soluble. 

The shell or testa, powdered and levigated, is considered more 
acceptable to delicate stomachs than other forms of carbonate of 
lime, being very intimately mixed with a small proportion of 
organic matter. 

Eggs are often desired by the sick and convalescent, and are 
sometimes allowable ; there are one or two forms of acute disease 
in which they may be used with advantage. In cholera infantum, 
the stomach being irritable and the digestive process exceedingly 
imperfect, the yelk of an egg that has been boiled till it is dry 
(fifteen minutes or more), and reduced to a fine powder, may be 
appropriated by the infant in divided portions, without aggravating 
the intestinal irritation. In cases of dysentery of a low type, 
which frequently occur in malarial districts, where the patient is 
visited with fearful prostration, and the demand for support is im- 
perative, and the stomach rejects the ordinary nutriment, the ces- 
sation of vomiting and nausea may often be brought about by the 
administration of the yelk of an uncooked egg taken in an un- 
broken state from the shell, or from a wineglass'containing a little 
iced water or brandy and water. 

No animal product is more universally employed in domestic 
economy and in the preparation of articles of diet for the sick ; per- 
haps none is more really useful except milk. 

Oil of Eggs. — Under this name a preparation is prescribed in 
some parts of England, and on the continent of Europe, as an emol- 
lient for sore nipples and excoriations, and it is sometimes called 
23 



354 THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 

for in this country. It may be prepared by gently heating yelks 
of eggs until they coagulate and the moisture evaporates ; then 
breaking into fragments, digesting in boiling alcohol, Altering while 
hot, and evaporating. The Paris Codex directs the yelks to be ex- 
hausted with ether. A dozen eggs yield about an ounce. This oil 
contains sulphur, and was formerly used to " cut" mercury. 

Milk is the natural and invariable food of the mammalia during 
infancy, and its properties adapt it perfectly to this use, besides 
fitting it for innumerable dietetic applications. It is one of the 
disadvantages of residing in large cities that this indispensable 
article is often furnished in a diluted state or of inferior quality. 

By examination under the microscope, the oily ingredient, in 
exceedingly minute globules, is seen floating in the serous-looking 
white fluid ; being lighter than the liquor in which they are sus- 
pended, a portion of these rise to the surface by standing, carrying 
with them some casein, and forming cream. 

The quantity of cream ordinarily varies from 5 to 22 per cent, 
by measure, though, as obtained from certain very superior cows, 
the proportion is much greater. The milk from which cream is 
separated is called skim-milk. 

Buttermilk approaches skim-milk in composition, but contains 
even less of the fatty globules. Dr. Grloninger, of Philadelphia, 
informs me that he has found it a valuable corrective of nausea, 
in the case of drunkards ; Dr. Wm. Ashmead also uses it in the 
treatment of dysentery. Its use as an application to " sunburn" is 
well known to country people. 

Curds and whey are made up of all the elements of milk, but the 
form in which they exist is changed by the addition of the rennet; 
the curd contains most of the fatty globules, while the whey con- 
sists of the sugar of milk and salts in solution. Whey is some- 
times used with success as a diet for young infants whose digestion 
is impaired so that they cannot bear any of the ordinary forms of 
milk diet. Mixed with wine it is also a grateful diet for adults in 
low forms of disease. {See Appendix.) 

Cream cheese consists of the moist curd which has been deprived 
of the greater portion of the whey by pressure. 

Ordinary cheese, which contains little or much of the oily in- 
gredient of milk, according as it contains the cream or is made 
from skim-milk, is made by precipitating the curd, and subjecting 
it to great pressure. 

The lactometer is an apparatus for finding the specific gravity of 
milk, which, although it varies from 1.008 to 1.031, should reach 
nearly 1.030. Skim-milk is heavier, so that it will bear dilution 
with a little water to bring it to the normal specific gravity. The 
absence of the cream is, however, so easily detected by the blue 
tinge of color, and want of the characteristic rich taste, that this 
variation in the instrument is of little account. The specific 
gravity is not usually marked on the instrument, but the degrees 
i of dilution instead, which, of course, are only approximative. The 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 355 

microscope forms the best test for the purity and richness of milk, 
showing the proportion of the oil-globules. 

Full directions for the quantitative analysis of milk, and tables 
of its relative richness as modified by circumstances, will be found 
in Dr. HasselPs work on Adulterations in Food and Medicine. 

Solidified milk may be prepared by adding to 112 lbs. of fresh 
milk 28 lbs. of white sugar, and a half ounce of bicarbonate of 
sodium, and evaporating on a water-bath at a temperature much 
below boiling. The arrangements for stirring must be such as to 
prevent too much agitation, which would churn the cream into 
butter. A current of air should be established over the surface of 
the evaporating pans. 

Solidified milk is extensively introduced into commerce in tablets, 
and put up in tin boxes, in a granular condition. It dissolves with 
facility in warm water ; the milk produced from it is quite superior 
to much that is met with on shipboard and elsewhere, and is found 
to be an exceedingly useful article, especially for infants disordered 
by ordinary milk, or, from other causes, requiring to be weaned. 

Analysis of 5 specimens of condensed milk, by L. Kofler, are 
given on page 457, vol. 42, American Journal of Pharmacy, by 
which it appears to be a very reliable preparation, yielding the full 
average of cream. 

One pound will make three quarts of rich pure milk. For tea, 
coffee, or chocolate, it can be put upon the table and used as sugar 
but should be allowed to dissolve in the cup a moment before being 
stirred, as the cream globules will then remain unbroken. For 
young children, a tablespoonful dissolved in a teacupful of water 
is sufficient. 

Oil of butter is the name given to a good emollient, perhaps 
slightly astringent preparation, well adapted to treating the sum- 
mer complaint of children. It furnishes a suitable vehicle for the 
small doses of calomel, or mercury with chalk, and opium, so much 
prescribed in that complaint. It is made by warming butter float- 
ing on water, and when it is fluid skimming it off for use. 

Meat. — The domestic uses of meat and its application for nourish- 
ment are well known; by long-continued boiling in water all its 
soluble constituents will dissolve, leaving behind only the fibre and 
a small quantity of earthy phosphates. 

Liebig's Broth. — Liebig has recommended a broth for convales- 
cents, which is prepared by chopping J lb. of beef, mixing it well 
with J drachm table salt, 4 drops muriatic acid, and 18 oz. distilled 
water, macerating for one hour, and straining through a fine hair 
sieve without expression. Dose, a teacupful. It contains all the 
soluble constituents of meat together with the hsematin ; the muri- 
atic acid aids in digestion. This preparation is rendered more 
palatable and is found to agree with the stomach better if filtered, 
its appearance is also much improved. 

Extractum carnis, preserved juice of meat, may be made by subject- 
ing beef in iron cylinders heated by steam to a temperature of 220° 
for about three hours; on cooling, the small amount of juice ob- 



356 THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 

tained solidifies, and may be freed from fat. This is introduced 
into small tin cans, which are heated till the air is expelled, and 
then soldered to exclude the atmosphere. By the addition of 4 
parts of boiling water this will make a strong beef-tea. The vari- 
ous manufacturers of this and similar preparations have modified 
processes for extracting and preserving the soluble parts of beef, 
each claiming superiority for his own, some preferring liquid and 
others the solid form. Hager recommends that extract of beef 
should be regarded as below standard if it contains more than 22 
per cent, of moisture, and over 27 per cent, of matter insoluble in 
alcohol .833 sp. gr. Gallotannic acid should not precipitate more 
than 20 per cent, of its weight, and should not yield more than 
8 per cent, argentic chloride. 

Kreatin is the name applied to those principles which form the 
chief part of the cell walls of horn and epithelium. They contain 
about 50 per cent. C, nearly 17 per cent. N, and 5 per cent. S (in 
hair); by continued boiling with dilute sulphuric acid, leucina and 
tyrosina are formed; concentrated muriatic acid produces gradually 
a violet color, nitric acid a yellow, and sugar with sulphuric acid 
a red color. Caustic alkalies render the cells more distinct. 

Horn is not now used in pharmacy, except for preparing some 
utensils, scale dishes, spatulas, spoons, and scoops, which are adapted 
to cases where metal would be corroded. 

Gelatinous Principles. 

Two varieties have been distinguished: one occurring in bone 
and animal membranes, epidermis, fish bladders, etc., called collagen 
or osseine, which yields on prolonged boiling with water gelatine 
or common glue; it is not precipitated by alum, sulphate of alumin- 
ium, ferric chloride, trisacetate of lead, or protonitrate of mercury ; 
gelatinizing in the presence of alum is prevented by acetic and 
other acids; the addition of nitric acid keeps the solution in a 
liquid form; the so-called liquid glue is made in this manner. It is 
a test for tannin, with which it produces an insoluble precipitate. 

The other kind, chondrogen, is contained in permanent cartilage, 
and yields by continued boiling with water chondrin, a glue, which 
is precipitated by the above-named salts. 

The purest natural form of collagen is isinglass, which is found 
in commerce, prepared from the swimming bladder of the sturgeon 
and other fish. Gelatine is the basis of a variety of artificial pre- 
parations used as food. 

The solubility of glue in glycerine is deserving attention as a 
means of suspending remedies of an unpleasant character; while in 
analysis, a solution in glycerine would be permanently kept in 
good condition as a quantitative test for tannic acid. (See paper of 
Prof. J. M. Maisch in Am. Jour. Phar., vol. 42, fol. 518.) _ 

Ichthyocolla. (Isinglass.) — Numerous articles are met with in our 
markets under this name. One of the cheapest is that called fish 
glue, used almost exclusively for clearing coffee, as a substitute for 



COURT AND ISINGLASS PLASTER. 357 

white of egg; this, I believe, is identical with the ISTew England 
isinglass described as being prepared from the air-bladder of the 
common hake (Gadus merluccius), which, being macerated in water 
a little while, is then taken out and passed between rollers, by 
which it is pressed into thin ribbons of several feet long, from an 
inch and a half to three inches in width. It is an inferior variety, 
unfit for internal use. (See Report by C. T. Carney, Proceedings 
Am. Pharm. Assoc., 1857.) 

Russian Isinglass is met with principally in the form of sheets, 
or folded into compact and twisted forms, called staples. Some- 
times it is in fine shreds. In sheets and shreds it is esteemed the 
best, but is very expensive, and on that account mostly superseded 
by the articles next to be described. 

Cooper's Gelatine comes in sheets 9 inches long, and 3} wide, and 
about J inch thick, in a very light opaque form, nearly white color, 
and marked with the nets on which they have been dried; some- 
times these are cut up into small pieces. 

French Gelatine is in cakes which are rather smaller, very thin, 
and quite transparent, similarly marked by the drying nets; some- 
times it is imported in shreds, put up in boxes with directions for 
use. It is readily clarified, and makes a good jelly. Sometimes 
the French is colored red. 

Coxe's Sparkling Gelatine is a superior article, put up in packages, 
and extensively introduced throughout the United States. 

In the preparation of jellies from Cooper's or the French variety," 
the soaking of the gelatine previous to making the jelly is made 
necessary by the slight taste they acquire at the surface or point of 
contact with the air and moisture. It should be soaked at least 
an hour in cold water, which should then be thrown away, and the 
gelatine, after draining a little, is fit for use. 

Calves' feet are still in request by many who believe gelatine, as 
manufactured from ordinary animal tissues, to be altogether inferior. 
The extract of calves' feet, prepared by John Mackay, of Edinburgh, 
though not, when first dissolved, furnishing so clear a jelly as some 
others, is, when clarified by white of egg, exceedingly brilliant, 
and possesses a peculiar softness and richness upon the palate, 
which connoisseurs recognize as that of the true calves' feet jelly. 

Court Plaster and Isinglass Plaster. 

This popular and useful plaster has the merit of neatness and 
facility of application, adhering readily on the application of 
moisture. By some manufacturers it is made by coating sheets of 
silk or other fine material with a solution of New England isin- 
glass (fish glue); by others the finest Eussian isinglasses applied, 
and the choice of a superior quality of silk, and the application to 
it of a balsamic varnish to render the unspread surface impervious 
to moisture, insures a better plaster. 

The original Liston's isinglass plaster, or gum-cloth, was made 
by spreading several c.oats of strong solution of isinglass in very 



358 THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 

dilute alcohol over the surface of animal membrane, previously 
prepared for the purpose from the peritoneal membrane of the 
caecum of the ox. 

The following is an approved recipe for isinglass plaster : — 

Take of Isinglass 3j. 

Water f^viij. 

Dissolve with heat — 

Benzoin ^ij. 

Alcohol f|ij. 

Dissolve, strain, and mix the two solutions together, and, with a 
brush, apply several coats of this mixture, while it is kept fluid by 
a gentle heat to silk stretched on a frame ; each successive coat 
being allowed to dry before applying the next. Then paint a layer 
of the following solution on the other side of the silk: — 

Venice turpentine 3jj. 

Tincture of benzoin , f^ij. 

Mix. 

Black and flesh-colored silk are both used for court-plaster. 

Os,TT. S. P. {Bone). — Bones are officinal for their uses in the prepa- 
ration of bone phosphate of calcium, and the phosphates of sodium 
and ammonium; they are also used in preparing animal charcoal. 
Bones consist of gelatinous tissue, into which earthy and saline 
matters have been deposited until they have acquired solidity and 
firmness. By soaking in muriatic acid, the phosphate and carbonate 
of calcium are dissolved, and the osseine is left as a tough, flexible, 
nearly transparent mass, having nearly the same form as the bone. 

Fel {Bile). — This is a yellow-greenish, viscid, oily liquid, with a 
bitter taste, followed by a sweetish after-taste, which is separated 
from the blood of animals by the liver, and collected in the gall- 
bladder. It is entirely miscible with water, and its solution froths 
like one of soap. Its composition varies with different animals, but 
it consists mainly of two salts of sodium in which that base is com- 
bined with two remarkable nitrogenized substances, choleic and 
cholic acids ; another constituent is a peculiar crystallizable fatty 
substance called cholesterin. "With nitric acid it shows a peculiar 
polychrome, depending on its coloring matters ; sugar and sulphuric 
acid produce a red color the result of a reaction with the biliary 
acids and their derivatives. 

Inspissated ox-gall {Fel bovinum) is occasionally prescribed in dys- 
peptic affections connected with habitual costiveness. It is prepared 
for use by being heated and strained, and then evaporated in a 
water-bath, or by well-managed radiated heat, to a pilular consist- 
ence. The dose, when thus inspissated, is from five to ten grains. 

Ox-gall is also much used as a detergent, and in a refined or 
clarified condition is adapted to the use of landscape painters as a 
delicate green pigment. 

Sodii Choleinas — Choleinate of Sodium — has been used, though a 
preparation which has no claim to being a pure chemical salt ; the 



pepsin. 359 

mode of preparing it from animal gall is as follows : The fresh ox- 
gall is evaporated to one-half, slimy and coloring matters are pre- 
cipitated by an equal hulk of alcohol, the filtrate is treated with 
animal charcoal, the alcohol distilled off, and the residue washed 
with ether. The choleinate of soda then remains behind as a white, 
somewhat sticky mass, of a penetrating odor, and a peculiar, sweet- 
ish, afterwards bitter taste ; it is easily soluble in water, and dis- 
solves albumen and casein. 

Being a natural constituent of bile, it has been employed with 
successln affections where a tonic with particular tendency to the 
biliary organ is desired. The dose is from 5 to 15 grains, two to 
four times a day. 

Pepsin. 

Pepsin is the name given to a neutral principle obtained from 
the gastric juice of animals, and which, associated with lactic and 
muriatic acids, has the property of digesting certain kinds of food. 
As it would be impossible to collect the gastric juice from living 
animals for the purpose of extracting the pepsin for use in medi- 
cine, recourse is had to the little tubes upon the inner surface of 
the stomach, in which it is secreted. Some of the processes apply 
to the lining membrane of the stomach of calves and sheep, others 
to the porous parts of the stomach of the hog, an omniverous animal 
approaching nearer to man in the digestive function. Freed from 
the glandulous membrane, these are cut, and repeatedly macerated 
with water for twenty-four hours. The older processes directed that 
the filtered liquids be precipitated by sugar of lead, the precipitate 
washed with water, decomposed by sulphuretted hydrogen, filtered, 
evaporated by a very gentle heat to a syrupy consistence, and 
mixed with alcohol ; pepsin is slowly precipitated as a white vo- 
luminous mass, which is washed with alcohol and dried. 

At the date of the third edition of this work, the American 
market was chiefly supplied with pepsin from abroad ; but when 
the value of the remedy began to be recognized, the ingenuity of 
American pharmacists was exerted in perfecting processes for its 
production. 

Of several modified processes which have from time to time been 
published, that of Mr. Wittich, originally published in Pfluger's 
Archives, consisted in macerating the bruised and minced mucous 
membranes in concentrated glycerine ; after twenty-four hours it 
was acidulated, and found to be capable of digesting fibrine rapidly. 
Pepsin was separable from this on dilution, filtration, and the addi- 
tion of alcohol. Dr. L. S. Beale, as long ago as 1858, described, in 
Archives de Medecine, a process which consisted of quickty drying 
on plates of glass the mucus expressed from the stomach glands, 
powdering the dried mass, and preserving it in stoppered vials ; of 
this, eight-tenths of a grain are said to dissolve one hundred grains 
of coagulated albumen. 

From this powder an easily filtered solution of great activity can 
be prepared. Dr. Beale uses a portion of this solution with gly- 



360 THE ALBUMINOUS AND SIMILAR PRINCIPLES. 

cerine in preparing tissues for dissection and examination under the 
microscope. 

To Emil Schefter, of Louisville, Kentucky, belongs the credit of 
having solved the problem of an economical and effective process 
for the preparation of pepsin, both in the form of powder and in 
that of liquid, and the articles now manufactured by him are 
justly esteemed as meeting the demand for an artificial aid to the 
digestive process. In several papers in the Am. Journ. Phar., vol. 
xlii. 98, vol. xliii., and vol. xl., he gives the results of numerous 
experiments on the preparation and properties of pepsin. The best 
method of separating it from the extraneous matters with which it 
is associated affords a product nearly free from impurities, and pos- 
sessing the solvent powers of the natural gastric juice. This process 
• depends upon the insolubility of pepsin in saturated solution of 
common salt. The mucous membrane of the hog's stomach is dis- 
sected off, chopped finely, and macerated for several days with fre- 
quent stirring in water acidulated with muriatic acid; the liquid is 
then separated from the stomach and set aside for ten to twelve 
hours, until the mucus has settled ; common salt (chloride of 
sodium) is then added until the liquid is saturated. After stand- 
ing a short time, the pepsin separates and floats on the surface ; this 
can be readily removed with a spoon, and should then be placed on 
a paper filter to drain. Finally, it is submitted to strong pressure, 
to free it, as far as possible, from the salt solution. "When removed 
from the press and dried spontaneously, this pepsin is a tough sub- 
stance, resembling parchment paper, varying from a dim straw- 
yellow to a brownish-yellow color. 

For dispensing, the pepsin, fresh from the press, is triturated to 
powder witb a weighed quantity of sugar of milk (lactin). This 
powder is reweighed after having been air-dried, and the amount 
of pepsin it contains is found by deducting the weight of the lactin 
employed. Finally, the powder is tested by ascertaining how much 
coagulated albumen it will dissolve at a temperature of 100° F. in 
from five to six hours ; sufficient sugar of milk is then added to 
result in a preparation of such a strength, that 10 grains, dissolved 
in 1 fluidounce of water witb 6 drops of muriatic acid, will dis- 
solve 120 grains coagulated albumen at a temperature of 100° F. 

Recently precipitated pepsin, as prepared by the above process, is 
very soluble in water; when dried, however, and put into water it 
swells like glue, but dissolves only slowly and in small quantities. 
The aqueous solution has a nearly neutral reaction, is coagulated by 
boiling, and precipitated by alcohol, tannin, bichloride of mercury, 
and salts of lead and copper. It has little action on coagulated albu- 
men, but the addition of a little muriatic acid develops its solvent 
powers and renders it soluble. The digestive power of the solution 
seems to be greatest when it contains about 6 drops of acid (sp. gr. 
1.17) to the fluidounce; a larger proportion increases the time re- 
quired to effect the solution of the albumen. According to Scheffer, 
1 grain of purified pepsin in 4 ounces of acidulated water dis- 
solves 500 grains of coagulated albumen at a temperature of 105° F. 



PEPSIN. 361 

in six hours. At a temperature of 75° only 400 grains are dissolved 
after eighteen hours. If the amount of pepsin is increased, the time 
of solution is not proportionately diminished, but the pepsin seems to 
communicate its digestive power to the dissolved albumen (peptone 
or albumenose), so that practically its solvent action is almost un- 
limited. If, for example, 500 grains of coagulated albumen are 
dissolved in 4 fl uidounces of water acidulated by the aid of a mini- 
mum quantity of pepsin, and an equal volume of acidulated water is 
added, a digestive fluid is produced, quite as energetic as the first. 
By adding to this solution an equal volume of saturated salt solu- 
tion, we shall obtain a copious white separate, which dissolves in 
water, forming a solution not coagulated by heat, but precipitated by 
alcohol slowly, and by bichloride of mercury and chloride of sodium. 
The solution in water has a slight acid reaction, but does not act 
on coagulated albumen. On adding a few drops of hydrochloric 
acid, however, it manifests digestive powers similar to pepsin itself. 
In one experiment, half a grain of pepsin dissolved 240 grains of 
coagulated albumen; the solution yielded on the addition of chlo- 
ride of sodium a precipitate, which weighed when dry 12 grains. 
This peptone precipitate was found capable of dissolving 1200 
grains of coagulated albumen; the solution yielded 120 grains pep- 
tone precipitate, 1 grain of which was capable of dissolving further 
about 25 grains coagulated albumen. Pepsin as prepared by 
Scheffer contains a small proportion of chloride of sodium. When 
freed from this, it loses to a very considerable extent its solvent 
powers. The addition, however, of a larger quantity of salt does 
not seem to promote its activity ; on the contrary, if the amount 
exceeds 5 grains to the ounce, its digestive action is decidedly re- 
tarded. Alcohol in all proportions diminishes the solvent power 
of pepsin. If the amount is greater than 20 per cent, of the fluid, 
the albumen is scarcely at all acted upon, but acquires the peculiar 
sour odor which characterizes discharges from a stomach over- 
loaded with beer or wine. 

A small quantity of carbonate of soda will precipitate pepsin 
from its solution unchanged ; a larger quantity redissolves the pre- 
cipitate, but so modifies it that it no longer possesses digestive 
powers. The alkaline solution becomes putrid, and acts on coagu- 
lated albumen only after putrefaction sets in with development of 
a genuine fecal odor. The alkaline solution, however, will act on 
partially digested albumen. 

In regard to its stability, the experiments of SchefTer go to show 
that all watery solutions of pepsin undergo changes which in a 
short time render them inert. Even strongly acidulated solutions, 
although they did not undergo putrefaction, 'became in a few weeks' 
inactive and were no longer precipitated by chloride of sodium. 
Liquid pepsin prepared with glycerine retains its efficiency for a 
longer period. The precipitated pepsin, when kept in a moist state 
or mixed with sugar of milk as in saccharated pepsin, seems to 
retain its properties perfectly, specimens examined after twelve 
months proving to have lost nothing of their strength. 



362 FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS, 



CHAPTER IV. 

FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 

Fermentation is the process, whether spontaneous or artificially 
induced, by which the ternary compounds considered in Chapter II. 
are decomposed, and resolved into more stable and unorganized 
forms. It has been stated, in describing these, that under the in- 
fluence of diastase, a peculiar principle found in germinating seeds 
and buds, the insoluble principle, starch, becomes converted into 
the more soluble dextrin and grape sugar ; also that, under the 
influence of chemical agents, a similar change may be made to take 
place in cane sugar and in lignin. 

Associated with these ternary principles, we find constantly in 
plants nitrogenized or quaternary principles treated of in the last 
chapter, which, by favoring these changes, are continually tending 
to the production of grape or fruit sugar and to their further meta- 
morphose into alcohol and carbonic acid. 

The circumstances necessary to produce fermentation are, a solu- 
tion containing starch or sugar, at a moderate elevation of tempera- 
ture, say from 70° to 90° F., which, however, rises as the process 
proceeds ; and a ferment, or nitrogenized principle itself in a state 
of decomposition. The juice of the apple furnishes one of the most 
familiar illustrations of the presence of these indispensable condi- 
tions. We have in that liquid the ternary compounds associated 
with vegetable albumen, a nitrogenized material capable of playing 
the part of a ferment, and at the season of the year when the juice 
is extracted, the requisite elevation of temperature. As a conse- 
quence, fermentation takes place. The vegetable albumen absorbs 
oxygen from the air, runs into decomposition, sets the whole of the 
starchy and saccharine constituents of the juice to fermenting, and 
they are converted into alcohol, which is present in the resulting 
cider, and carbonic acid, which is given off", producing the well- 
known frothing of the liquid. 

In the production of wine, we have another instance of spon- 
taneous fermentation — the expressed juice of the grape, set aside in 
large casks, undergoes spontaneously the necessary change ; if the 
sugar is in excess, and the nitrogenized matter deficient, a sweet 
wine is produced ; if these conditions are reversed, and the whole 
of the sugar is changed into alcohol, a dry wine results. If the 
wine is bottled before the alcohol has been produced in sufficient 
proportion to coagulate the albumen, the process goes on after it 
has been corked up, the carbonic acid is confined, and a sparkling 
wine results. 



FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 363 

The composition of alcohol is expressed by the formula C 2 H 6 0, 
and its production by the decomposition of grape sugar is thus ex- 
plained : one equivalent of grape sugar = C 6 H 12 O ft , is broken up into 
2 of alcohol, C 2 H 5 HO,+ 2 of carbonic acid, C0 2 , thus — 

nC 2 H 5 — pi tt r\ 

2C0 2 =C, A 

C 6 H 12 6 

This breaking up of sugar into alcohol and carbonic acid is, how- 
ever, never complete ; a small portion of the sugar is, under these 
circumstances, always converted into glycerine, mannite, succinic, 
and other acids ; fusel oil or amylic alcohol is likewise a product 
of fermentation, though the precise conditions under which these 
bodies are formed are unknown. 

The acetic fermentation consists in the oxidation of alcohol by 
long exposure to the air in a very divided condition and the removal 
of a portion of the hydrogen, or in contact with ferments, as when 
cider is allowed to remain in open casks until it passes into vinegar. 
Under the head of Aceta, the preparation of vinegar for use as a 
menstruum in pharmacy is spoken of, as also its substitution by 
diluted acetic acid. 

The lactic and butyric fermentations are produced in milk by the 
action of the nitrogenized principle, casein, upon sugar present in 
the whey. (See also Malic Acid.) 

The viscous fermentation takes place in certain complex saccha- 
rine and mucilaginous mixtures by the action of ferments ; its 
results are carbonic acid, hydrogen, alcohol, lactic acid, and mannite. 

Fermentation is artificially produced in the process of manufac- 
turing most of the spirituous liquors and beer; the insoluble 
yellowish viscid matter deposited from the infusion of malt in the 
process of making beer, called yeast, Fermentum cerevisice, is the 
best substance for producing the "catalytic" effect in starchy and 
saccharine solutions. Added to an infusion of rye and Indian corn, 
it produces, by fermentation, the so-called rye whiskey ; to potatoes 
ground to pulp and mixed with hot water, potato spirits ; to mo- 
lasses, rum, etc. In each case a portion of malt is used to facilitate 
the process by furnishing diastase. 

Malt is barley which has been steeped in water till much swollen 
and softened, and then piled in heaps, to undergo a species of fer- 
mentation, or rather germination, during which a portion of its 
starch has passed into sugar and become soluble, and the peculiar 
ferment before mentioned as diastase is produced ; the seed is then 
kiln-dried, to destroy its vitality. 

Malt liquors are obtained by subjecting malt to infusion with 
water, mixing this with a due proportion of hops, which give the 
taste and tonic properties, and subjecting to the requisite fermenta- 
tion. Under the head of Medicated Wines, a recipe was given for 
wine of tar, or Jew's beer, a medicated, fermented liquor. 

The so-called neutral sweet spirit, or neutral spirit, is whiskey, 
which has been diluted and rectified by passing through charcoal, 



364 



FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 



which abstracts from it the fusel oil; when redistilled it ranges 
from first to fourth proof in strength. 

Holland gin is manufactured from malted barley, rye meal, and 
hops, and distilled from juniper berries, to which it owes its flavor. 
The Schiedam Schnapps, so extensively advertised, is stated to be 
Holland gin, of good quality, though an inferior article is also sold 
under that name. Arrack is the spirit from the fermentation of 
rice; it possesses a peculiar flavor, the origin of which has not been 
divulged. 

The origin of alcohol and other spirituous liquors which have 
apparently no foreign odor, can be found out by agitation of about 
two fluidounces of the liquor with five grains of caustic potassa dis- 
solved in a little water, and subsequently evaporating until about 
1J to 2 fluidrachms remain, which residue is to be mixed with 
about seventy minims of dilute sulphuric acid, when the character- 
istic odor will be immediately diffused ; the origin of the spirit 
obtained from grain is thus unmistakably discovered. 

Table of the Proportion, by measure, of Alcohol, sp. gr. .825, contained 
in 100 parts of the Liquids named. 



Wines 



Port (strongest) . 






25.83 


" (weakest) . 






19.00 


Madeira (strongest) 






24.42 


" (weakest) 






19.24 


Sherry (strongest) 






19.81 


" (weakest) 






18.00 


Teneriffe . . 






. 19.79 


Lisbon .... 






18.94 


Malaga .... 






17.26 


Claret (strongest) 






17.11 


" (weakest) . 






12.91 


Malmsey . . . 






16.40 


Sauterne . . . 






14.22 


Burgundy . 






14.57 


Hock .... 






12.08 


Champagne . . 






12.61 



Wines. 

Cincinnati 9.00 

Currant wine 20.55 (?) 

Gooseberry wine . . . . 11.84 

Orange " . . . . 11.26 

Elder " . . . . 8.79 

Cider (strong) .... 9.88 

" (weak) .... 5.21 

Burton ale 8.88 

Edinburgh ale .... 6.20 

Brown stout 6.80 

London porter .... 4.20 

Small beer 1.28 

Brandy 55.39 

Whiskey (Irish) . . . . 52.20 

Kum 53.68 

Gin 51.78 



These figures, which are compiled from the tables of Brande and others, are, of course, 
only approximative. They are believed to be generally too high. 



Properties of Common or Ethylic Alcohol and its Derivatives. 



Product. 



Alcohol, absolute alcohol 
ethylic alcohol C 2 H 6 



Process. 



From the fermentation of 
sugars by distillation. 



Description, etc. 



Sp. gr. .796; boiling point 172°F.; 
not solidifiable by cold; com- 
bines with water with conden- 
sation, burns with blue flame; 
chemically indifferent ; replaces 
in some compounds water of 
crystallization ; solvent for re- 
sins, volatile oils, most fats, 
sugars, alkaloids, organic acids, 
alkalies, their sulphides and 
cyanides, many salts, iodine, 
and some other elements. 



ALCOHOL AND ITS DERIVATIVES. 



365 



Properties of Common or Ethylic Alcohol and its Derivatives. — Con. 



Product. 



Ether, ethylic ether 
C 4 H 10 O 



Nitric ether C 4 H 10 NO 3 



Nitrous ether, hyponi- 
trous ether C 4 H 10 NO 2 



Sulphovinic acid C 2 H 6 S0 4 



Heavy oil of wine, s. 
oleum sethereum 
C 2 H 6 S0 4 +C 2 H 5 S0 4 



Light oil of wine C 2 H 4 



Aldehyde, acetaldehyde 



Acetic acid 



Acetic ether C 2 H 6 C 2 H 3 2 



Process. 



By the decomposition of 
alcohol by H 2 S0 4 ,H 3 As0 4 , 
H 3 P0 4 ,SbCl s ,SnCl 2 ,ZnCl, 
etc., with the aid of heat. 



By distilling 250 grms. each 
of alcohol and HN0 5 sp, 
gr. 1.40, and 33 grms 
urea. 



By conducting gaseous NO ; 
into alcohol: by distilling 
HN0 3 and alcohol with Cu 
or with FeCl. 



and alcohol at 
about 200°, and removing 
excess of H 2 S0 3 by BaC0 3 



By distilling alcohol with 
much H 2 S0 3 ; by the dry 
distillation of sulphovi- 
nates. 



By the decomposition of 
heavy oil of wine with 
■water or alkalies. 



By the oxidation of alco- 
hol ; by distilling dry for- 
miate with acetate of lime. 



By the slow oxidation of 
alcohol and aldehyde. 

By the distillation of an 
acetate with H 2 S0 3 and al- 
cohol, and separating by 



Description, etc. 



Colorless liquid ; odor penetrat- 
ing ; taste sweetish, burning ; 
6p. gr. .712; boils at 950; crys- 
tallizes at — 48; very inflam- 
mable and volatile ; dangerously 
explosive when mixed with ; 
soluble in 9 parts water ; dis- 
solves -^ water ; solvent for I, 
Br, P, and a few salts, all fats, 
volatile oils, many resins, alka- 
loids, etc. 

Colorless liquid ; odor pleasant ; 
taste sweetish; boils at 1850; 
detonates violently at a higher 
heat; sp.gr. 1.112; burns with 
white flame ; soluble in alco- 
hol ; nearly insoluble in water. 

Pale yellowish liquid; odor fruit- 
like and vinous; taste burning; 
poisonous when inhaled; sp.gr. 
.947 ; boiling point 570.5 ; very 
inflammable ; burns with white 
flame ; soluble in alcohol ; spar- 
ingly soluble in water; decom- 
poses spontaneously. 

Clear oily liquid ; strongly acid ; 
soluble in alcohol and water, 
insoluble in ether ; easily de- 
composed by heat into H 2 S0 3 and 
ether when concentrated, or 
alcohol when dilute ; salts solu- 
ble in alcohol and water. 

Yellowish oil; sp. gr. 1.13; boil- 
ing point 5350 ; odor penetrat- 
ing; readily soluble in alcohol 
and ether ; decomposed in con- 
tact with water into sulphuric 
acid and light oil of wine. 

Colorless oil, lighter than water; 
decomposed spontaneously into 
ethcrin, long, tasteless, and in- 
odorous needles, and etherole, 
pale yellowish oil; sp. gr. .921 ; 
persistent aromatic odor ; both 
soluble in alcohol and ether. 

Colorless liquid ; odor ethereal ; 
sp. gr. .79; boiling point 710; 
inflammable ; soluble in all pro- 
portions of water, alcohol, and 
ether. 

See Products of Distillation of 
Wood. 

Colorless liquid ; odor and taste 
fruit-like, penetrating ; sp. gr. 
.91; boiling point 1650; very 
inflammable ; soluble in alcohol 
and 7^ parts water. To detect 
alcohol in ether add to the sus- 
pected ether an equal bulk of 
glycerine in a test-tube, shake 
up well ; any alcohol present will 
be seized upon by the glycerine 
and diminish the bulk of the 
ether under examination. 



366 



FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 



Medicinal Preparations from Alcohol and its Derivatives. 



Alcohol fortius. 
Alcohol. 

Alcohol dilutum. 
Amylicum. 

iEther. 

iEther fortior. 

Oleum sethereum, oil of wine. 

Spiritus eetheris compositus, 
Hoffmann's anodyne. 

Spiritus setheris nitros, sweet 
spirit of nitre. 



Spiritus cetheris chloridi, s. 
spiritus salis dulcis. 



Sp. gr. .817. Used in the preparation of ether, collo- 
dion, certain tinctures, for "cutting" castor oil, etc. 

Sp. gr. .835. Used for preparing resinous and other 
tinctures, some extracts and fluid extracts. 

Sp. gr. .941. Used for preparing most tinctures, ex- 
tracts, and some fluid extracts. 

Sp. gr. .818. Boils from 268° to 272°; used princi- 
pally to prepare valerianic acid by means of oxidiz- 
ing agents. 

Sp. gr. .750; sp. gr. of vapor 2.586. Colorless, vola- 
tile, highly refractive. 

Sp. gr. not exceeding .728, used for preparing collo- 
dion and for some other purposes. 

Used only for preparing Hoffmann's anodyne ; its ano- 
dyne effects are similar or superior to those of ether. 

Ether f^viij, alcohol Oj, ethereal oil f^vj ; nearly 
colorless liquid ; odor ethereal and aromatic ; be- 
comes milky with water. 

Colorless or yellowish liquid ; odor fragrant, fruity, 
without pungency ; boiling point 1560 to 1580; sp. 
gr. .840 to .841 ; soluble in all proportions in water, 
alcohol, and ether. 

From NaCl 8, Mn0 2 3, H 2 S0 4 6, and alcohol 24 parts ; 
distil 21 p. Its composition is not definitely known. 
Colorless, neutral ; odor sweetish, aromatic ; be- 
comes turbid with water. Used like similar com- 
pounds as refrigerant, diuretic, and diaphoretic. 

Used like the other ethers, chiefly in hysterical com- 
plaints. Dose, gtt. 10 to 15 and more. 

Acetic ether 1 part, alcohol 3 parts. Colorless, neutral ; 
odor, taste, and use of acetic ether, but milder. 

Obtained by distilling the spirit from wines. Should 
contain from 48 to 56 per cent, alcohol. 

Obtained from distillation of fermented grain. Should 
contain from 48 to 56 per cent, alcohol. 

Alcohol. 

This useful solvent is obtained by distillation from whiskey 
(Spiritus frumenti, U. S. P.), which, as procured from the farmers, 
is generally the product of the distillation of fermented infusion of 
Indian corn [Zea mays), mixed with rye; the smallest proportion of 
the latter ingredient that answers well is one part to two of the 
corn. A "mash" may consist of 20 bushels of grain, viz. 14 Indian 
corn, 4 rye, 2 malt ; 34 gallons of water are added to each bushel of 
grain ; after dilution with water to cool, it contains 1 bushel in 
50 gallons. The temperature for u mashing" varies from 158° to 
190°. 50 gallons of the beer yield about 4 gallons of whiskey, 
sometimes, however, the yield is but 3J gallons from each bushel 
of grain. Some distillers of alcohol make their own whiskey, while 
others buy it. In the western States, much of the -whiskey is pro- 
duced by the fermentation and distillation of the refuse from flour 
or grist-mills. The whiskey is inspected by an officer appointed by 
the State government, whose business it is to fix the value of every 
lot, by ascertaining the proportion of alcohol it contains. 

The terms first, second, third, and fourth proof spirits, apply to 
the relative strength of specimens, according to arbitrary standards 



JEther acetivus, s. naphtha acetis. 
Spiritus cetheris acetici. 
Spiritus vini gallici. 
Spiritus frumenti. 



ALCOHOL. 367 

fixed by law, but varying in the several States. The standard of 
the United States custom-houses is fixed by the tables of Prof. E. S. 
MeCulloh, published by order of Congress, entitled Report of the Com- 
putation of the Manual of Tables to be used with the Hydrometer, and 
The Manual for Inspectors of Spirits. 

The standard of proof is fifty per cent, by volume or measure of 
absolute alcohol, and fifty per cent, of water, sp. gr. .936. This is 
15 per cent, weaker than London proof spirits. Second proof has 
52J per cent, alcohol, sp. gr. .931. Third proof is 55J per cent. 
alcohol, sp. gr. .925. Fourth proof 58 per cent, alcohol, sp. gr. .920; 
this is London proof. 

The instrument used for testing the sp. gr. of spirits, sometimes 
called an alcoholometer, is a modification of the ordinary hydro- 
meter made by Luhme & Co., and Greiner, of Berlin, and sold by 
importers of chemical apparatus. These have thermometers in the 
bulb to indicate the changes of temperature, and consequent varia- 
tions in specific gravity. 

Considerable uncertainty exists in stating the proportion of alco- 
hol in spirits, owing to some tables being founded on the percentage 
by weight, and others the percentage by volume; the alcoholometers 
above referred to have scales indicating both. 

The rectification of alcohol is accomplished in appropriate appa- 
ratus, consisting chiefly of large stills, some capable of taking a 
charge of 60 gallons. These are chiefly made of copper, and con- 
sist of the body and head, which are connected with a furnace, and 
the worm, wbich is inclosed in an appropriate refrigerating tub. 
The whiskey being turned into the body, and the apparatus closed, 
heat is applied ; the vapor formed, passing into the cooler, is con-, 
densed and runs out at the lower end. The first and last por- 
tions that come over are collected separately from the rest as of 
inferior quality, and the main body of the distillate is transferred 
to barrels which have been charred on the inside, and constitutes 
commercial alcohol. 

This, the most common variety in this country, is called druggists' 
alcohol. It varies with the care used in its preparation, and especi- 
ally with the heat employed. Sometimes, by urging the process 
too rapidly with a hot fire, the alcohol has an odor of fusel oil, and 
is too weak; the former may be detected by its odor, which reminds 
of whiskey, and the latter, by its sp. gr., which exceeds the officinal 
standard .835. Sometimes it is discolored, from deficient charring 
of the cask in which it is kept. 

Besides this quality, the common or old sort of deodorized alcohol 
is made. For preparing this, the whiskey is submitted to extensive 
filtration through long tubes containing charcoal, and is then dis- 
tilled from a fresh portion of charcoal, which is placed with it into 
the body of the still ; the charcoal is suited by its property, noticed 
in a previous chapter, of absorbing odorous and coloring matters, 
for abstracting the fusel oil, and hence rendering the whiskey free 
from that impurity, while, by careful distillation, it is highly recti- 
fied and adapted to the purposes of the perfumer. Another quality 



363 FERMENTATION", ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 

is the so-called absolute alcohol. This term properly applies to the 
anhydrous article, but is used commercially to designate the strong- 
est kind sent out by the manufacturers, and nearly corresponding 
with alcohol fortius of the Pharmacopoeia. The peculiarity in the 
preparation of this is the moderate heat employed, and the conse-r 
quent very slow distillation. It usually has from 90 to 95 per 
cent, of alcohol, and is very useful as a solvent of some articles 
which resist the ordinary commercial article. Castor oil is one of 
these; when the alcohol is in small proportion, a perfect solution 
will not result, unless the so-called absolute alcohol is used. 

The expansion and contraction of alcohol by changes of tempera- 
ture are of practical importance in purchasing it and in measuring 
it for use or sale. The following tables, prepared, as the result of ex- 
periment, by E. B. Shuttle worth, are taken from the Canadian 
Pharmaceutical Journal, Feb. 1872. 

Table exhibiting the volume which 100 Gallons of Alcohol, 65 over 
proof, at 60°, will have when measured at different temperatures. 



Temperature. 


Volume of spirit. 


Centigrade. 


Fahrenheit, 




15.55 


60 


100. 


12.77 


55 


99.7 


10.00 


50 


99.4 


7.22 


45- 


99.2 


4.44 


40 


98.8 


1.66 


35 


98.6 


— 1.11 


30 


98.3 


— 3.88 


25 


98.0 


— 6.66 


20 


97.6 


— 9.44 


15 


97.3 


—12.22 


10 


97.0 


—15.00 


5 


96.6 


—17.77 





96.3 


—20.55 


— 5 


96.0 


—23.33 


—10 


95.7 


—26.11 


—15 


95.4 


—28.88 


—20 


92.2 



From this it will be seen that in falling in temperature from 
-f 60 to — 20, or 80 degrees, the diminution of volume is 0.048, 
making the average contraction for each degree to be equal to .0006 
of the volume. This agrees within .00001 with the average deduced 
from a table of G-ay-Lussac, which gives the expansion from 60° F. 
to the boiling point. 

Atwood's patent, which has now expired, required the rectification 
of druggists' alcohol, by distilling it from manganate of potassa, 
which decomposes the fusel oil, and renders the product unexcep- 
tionable. 

The chemical tests for fusel oil, commonly prescribed, are: 1st. 
A weak solution of nitrate of silver (1 part in 40 parts of water) is 
added to the alcohol, in the proportion of 25 minims to 4 fluid- 
ounces, and the liquid exposed to a bright light for twenty-four 
hours. If any fusel oil is present, a black precipitate will separate. 
This being separated in a filter, which has been previously washed 
with diluted nitric acid, and again exposed, if the alcohol is reasona- 



SULPHURIC ETHER — STRONGER ETHER. 369 

bly pure will form no precipitate, though if in excess, a further 
separation of the black oxide will be produced. 2d. To a test-tube 
half tilled with alcohol, slowly add an equal bulk of sulphuric acid; 
if the spirit be pure it will remain colorless, otherwise the amount 
of impurity will be shown by the depth of the tint produced. 

The three strengths of alcohol officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia 
have the following specific gravities: Alcohol fortius, sp. gr. .817; 
alcohol, sp.gr. .835; alcohol dilutum (alcohol mixed with an equal 
bulk of water), sp. gr. .941. For some of the pharmaceutical facts 
in regard to alcohol and diluted alcohol, the reader is referred to 
the chapter on Tinctures. 

Mther et Miher Fortior, U. S. P. (Sulphuric Ether. Stronger Ether.) 

Ether is prepared by mixing stronger alcohol and sulphuric acid 
in a glass retort or flask adapted to a suitable condenser, and apply- 
ing heat of 284° F. ; the very volatile ether, contaminated with a 
little alcohol, is driven over at a low temperature, and collected in 
the receiver. This is the case as long as the requisite proportions 
are maintained; but when the acid is largely in excess, which soon 
comes to be the case unless a continuous supply of alcohol is kept 
up, the boiling point rises, and other products are produced, among 
which is ethereal oil, to be referred to again as one of the consti- 
tuents of Hoffmann's anodyne. 

The highly volatile and inflammable nature of ether makes its 
preparation dangerous, except in establishments where every con- 
venience and safeguard is provided. The direct application of flame 
to the retort or flask is attended with great danger, and in the event 
of a fracture or leakage occurring either in the retort or receiver, 
the proximity of fire might entail the most disastrous consequences. 
The ether of commerce is made exclusively by manufacturing 
chemists, who produce it on a large scale by the use of costly leaden 
apparatus. It is generally pure enough for most of the uses to which 
it is applied, though not for inhalation. Where alcohol is an im- 
purity, it may be readily separated by shaking up the ether with 
water, allowing the mixed water and alcohol to subside, and pour- 
ing off the ether; it will now be what is called in commerce washed 
ether, or hydrated ether. This contains a small percentage of water, 
and is the kind adapted for making tannic acid from galls. 

Miher fortior of the Pharmacopoeia is placed among the prepara- 
tions, and directed to be made by shaking ether with an equal bulk 
of water, as above, decanting it and agitating it with finely pow- 
dered chloride of calcium and lime, a troyounce of each to three 
pints, allowing it to stand for twenty-four hours, then decanting 
the ether and distilling half the original quantity, refrigerating 
with ice-cold water. 

It is thus described in the Pharmacopoeia: — 

Stronger ether has a specific gravity not exceeding 0.728. It is 
extremely inflammable, and does not redden litmus. Shaken with 
an equal bulk of water, it loses from one-tenth to one-eighth of its 
24 



370 

volume. It boils actively in a test-tube, half filled with it and in- 
closed in the hand, on the addition of small pieces of glass. Half a 
fluidounce of the liquid, evaporated from a porcelain plate by causing 
it to flow to and fro over the surface, yields a faintly aromatic odor 
as the last portions pass off, and leaves the surface without taste 
or smell, but covered with a deposit of moisture. 

Ether causes intense cold by evaporation; the greatest reduction 
of temperature yet produced is from its admixture with solid car- 
bonic acid. The great volatility of ether, the highly inflammable 
nature and high specific gravity of its vapor, which is 2.586, com- 
bine to make it a most dangerous substance to handle, or even to 
decant, in the vicinity of flame. It should be kept in bottles of 
not exceeding a pound capacity in cold situations, as cellars where 
fire is never kindled, and should always be decanted by daylight. 
Many disastrous accidents have happened from neglecting this pre- 
caution. 

Several theories have been advanced to explain the generation of 
ether; it was supposed to depend on the affinity of S0 3 forH 2 0; 
then it was asserted to be due to the catalytic force of HS0 4 ; Liebig 
believed the affinity of HS0 4 for C 4 H 10 O and the decomposition of 
the resulting sulphovinic acid to be the cause; while Rose found in 
the basic properties of H 2 0, which decomposes the compound of 
HS0 4 , and ether, the true explanation. Williamson, guided by the 
composition of the compound ethers, which contain the radicals of 
two alcohols, doubles the formula and regards it as alcohol (C 2 H 5 ,H)0, 
in which H is replaced by C 2 H 5 , thus making it (C 2 H„C 2 H 5 )0 2 . 
The formation of ether from sulphovinic acid and alcohol is ex- 
plained by the following diagram : — 

C 2 H 5 HO + C 2 H 5 ,HS0 4 = 2C,H 5 ,0+ H.SO, 

Alcohol -f- Sulphovinic acid = Ether -f Sulphuric acid. 

Oleum JEthereum. {Ethereal Oil. Heavy Oil of Wine.) 

This product is distilled from a mixture of fifty-five troyounces 
of sulphuric acid with two pints of stronger alcohol, between the 
temperatures of 302° and 315°, until the liquid ceases to come over, 
or until a black froth begins to arise in the retort. The yellow 
ethereal distillate collected in the receiver is exposed to spontane- 
ous evaporation, separated from the watery portion on a filter, 
washed with water, and added to an equal bulk of ether. This 
addition is made to prevent decomposition, which is apt to occur if 
the oil of wine is kept in its pure and concentrated condition. As 
thus distilled, ethereal oil is a transparent, nearly colorless, volatile 
liquid, of a peculiar aromatic ethereal odor, and a sharp bitter taste. 
It is neutral to litmus paper not previously moistened, and has the 
specific gravity 0.91. 

Ethereal oil is rarely met with in commerce, though Dr. Squibb 
prepares it for sale of standard purity. Some specimens I have met 
with were sophistications. It is only used in the preparation of 
.Hoffmann's anodyne. 



HOFFMANN'S ANODYNE. 371 

Spiritus JEtheris Compositus, IT. S. P. (Hoffmann's Anodyne.) 

Take of Ether, half a pint. 
Alcohol, a pint. 
Ethereal oil, six fluidrachms. 

Mix them. 

If in possession of the pure ingredients, this preparation is readily 
made; the proportion of the ethereal oil has been doubled in con- 
sequence of its being now diluted with an equal bulk of ether. 

Hoffmann's anodyne is, however, rarely made by the officinal 
formula; usually it is prepared by a process which, in its very 
nature, is certain to give varying results. In the distillation of 
ether, as already stated, the resulting liquor is liable to vary accord- 
ing to the proportions of the ingredients in the retort. If the 
alcohol be in due proportion, and the boiling point consequently 
low, a tolerably pure ether will pass over; but when the acid ingre- 
dient comes to be in large excess, sulphurous acid, water, and 
ethereal oil will come over. Now it is usual with the manufac- 
turers to push the process as far as possible in the first instance, 
getting a product which contains ether, alcohol, and water, con- 
taminated with light oil of wine and a very small portion of 
ethereal oil. This is rectified by a second distillation, the first 
portion (as long as it comes over at or below 54° Baume) being 
reserved as rectified ether. The less volatile products are now 
driven over, and are found to consist of ether, alcohol, and water, 
impregnated with the oils of wine. This is now made into Hoff- 
mann's anodyne by mixing it with ether, alcohol, or water, as may 
be required to give it nearly the sensible properties of a standard 
specimen kept on hand. These properties, however, furnish a very 
poor criterion of quality to the manufacturer or to the consumer; 
the milkiness occasioned by dilution with water is varied by the 
relative proportions of alcohol and ether. If too much alcohol is 
present, this milkiness is deficient. If too much ether, the opale- 
scence is not diffused, the oil-globules having a tendency to run 
together, and thus varying the appearance. Professor Procter an- 
alyzed five specimens of Hoffmann's anodyne, four from leading 
chemical manufacturers, and one made by the officinal recipe. 
These he found to differ in sensible properties, in specific gravity, 
and in composition. While the U. S. P. specimen marked .8151, 
one of the others had a sp. gr. .8925, the others being intermediate; 
one of the manufactured specimens contained very little ether, be- 
ing chiefly alcohol and water ; another contained less alcohol, but 
more ether; a third had less water than the others, but more alco- 
hol than one, and more ether than the other; while the fourth 
approached nearer the officinal proportions, though neither of them 
contained the full proportion of ether. The proportion of heavy oil 
of wine was not ascertained, as there is no known practicable method 
of estimating this. It was proved, however, that all the specimens 
but that by the officinal recipe were deficient in this important 
ingredient, the odor of which is quite characteristic, and very per- 
ceptible, in genuine Hoffmann's anodyne. 



372 FEKMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 

According to the officinal standard, Hoffmann's anodyne is a 
colorless, volatile, inflammable liquid, having an aromatic, ethereal 
odor, and a burning, slightly sweetish taste. Its specific gravity is 
0.815. It is neutral or but slightly acid to litmus. It gives only 
a slight cloudiness with chloride of barium ; but, when a fluidounce 
of it is evaporated to dryness with an excess of this test, it yields a 
precipitate of sulphate of barium, which, when washed and dried, 
weighs six and a quarter grains. "When a few drops are burned on 
glass or porcelain, there is no visible residue, but the surface will 
be left with an acid taste and reaction. A pint of water, by the 
admixture of forty drops, is rendered slightly opalescent. 

Notwithstanding the deficiencies in the commercial article, this 
medicine has a great and wide-spread reputation, and indeed there 
is no medicine of its class so much used ; it is prescribed for internal 
use almost to the exclusion of ether, being adapted to admixture 
with aqueous solutions. 

Some of its favorite combinations will be found under the head 
of Extemporaneous Pharmacy. Its dose is from 20 drops to f5j. 

Spiritus JEthereus. 

This is the name for the German Hoffmann's anodyne, which is 
simply a solution of one part (by weight) of ether in two parts of 
alcohol. It is used for the same purposes and in the same dose as 
the article officinal with us. 

Spiritus JEtheris Nitrosi, IT. S. P. (Spt. jEtheris Nitrici, Ph. 1850. 
Sweet Spirit of Nitre.) 

Take of Nitric acid, four troyounces and a half. 
Stronger alcohol, seven pints. 
Sulphuric acid, three troyounces and a half. 
Copper, two troyounces. 

Add the sulphuric acid gradually to twenty iluidounces of the 
stronger alcohol; when the mixture has become cool, put it into a 
glass retort connected with a Liebig's condenser, and add the copper 
and four troyounces of nitric acid. Then cautiously apply heat, 
and distil thirteen fluidounces at a temperature not exceeding 180°. 
Remove the heat, let the contents of the retort cool to 90°, add the 
remainder of the nitric acid, and distil two fluidounces as before. 
Mix the distillate with the remainder of the alcohol, and transfer 
the mixture immediately to half-pint bottles, which must be well 
stopped and protected from the light. ( U. S. P.) 

This process, which has been adopted from the British Pharma- 
copoeia, was suggested by Prof. Redwood of London, and has been 
found to give a satisfactory result; the design in using copper and 
sulphuric acid is to reduce the nitric to nitrous acid by the copper 
with which the sulphuric acid unites and leaves the nitrous acid 
free to convert the alcohol into nitrous ether, which distils over 
and is afterwards dissolved in the alcohol. 

Much of the sweet spirit of nitre is of very deficient strength as 



SWEET SPIRIT OF NITRE. 373 

regards its ethereal ingredient, being mixed with water and alcohol 
to suit the price charged. It is said that the term spirit, nitri dulc. 
is applied by some of the wholesale dealers to the weak article, and 
spirit. (Ether, nit. to the strong. If skilfully adulterated, its specific 
gravity would be preserved at about the normal standard, but to 
an experienced observer it would be deficient in the proper odor, 
and the sweet and rather pleasant taste. In view of its use as a 
mild diaphoretic and sedative, especially for children, its admixture 
with alcohol is highly injurious and criminal. 

According to the Pharmacopoeia, spirit of nitrous ether is a vola- 
tile, inflammable liquid, of a pale-yellow color inclining slightly to 
green, having a fragrant, ethereal odor, free from pungency, and a 
sharp, burning taste. 

It slightly reddens litmus, but does not cause effervescence when 
a crystal of bicarbonate of potassium is dropped into it. When 
mixed with half its volume of officinal solution of potassa, previously 
diluted with an equal measure of distilled water, it assumes a yellow 
color, which slightly deepens, without becoming brown, in twelve 
hours. A portion of the spirit in a test-tube half-filled with it, 
plunged into water heated to 145°, and held there until it has 
acquired that temperature, will boil distinctly on the addition of 
a few small pieces of glass. 

Spirit of nitrous ether has the specific gravity 0.837, and contains 
from four and three-tenths to five per cent, of its peculiar ether. 
It should not be long kept, as it becomes strongly acid by age. 

The strength of this spirit may be ascertained by putting a small 
quantity in a test-tube, mixing with it double its bulk of a satu- 
rated solution of chloride of calcium, and shaking together. If one 
per cent, of the ether rises to the surface, it will be evidence that 
it contained five per cent., as but one-fifth of the ether is set free 
by this experiment. 

The late eminent Prof. Hare recommended the careful prepara- 
tion of nitrous ether by the manufacturing chemist, and the ad- 
mixture of this by the dispensing pharmacist, as follows: — 

Mtrous ether, 8 parts; acetic ether, 2 parts; alcohol, 90 parts. 
The changeable nature of the nitrous ether seems an objection to 
this otherwise desirable process. 

A process for the preparation of this important remedy on a scale 
adapted to ordinary pharmacists is given in the Arner. Journal of 
Pharmacy, vol. xxviii. p. 289. 

Uses. — Spirit of nitrous ether is very extensively used as a mild 
refrigerant and diaphoretic ; in febrile complaints, it is much com- 
bined with antimonial wine, citrate of potassium, etc.; as a diuretic 
it is used in connection with the preparations of digitalis and squill. 

Its dose is from ten drops for a child, to two fluidrachms for an 
adult. 



374 



FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 



Methylic Alcohol and Dirivatives. 



Name. 



Methylic alcohol. 

Wood spirit. 

CH 3 HO 
Bichloride of methyl 



Formic acid Fo 
HCH0 2 

Formic ether. For 
mo-ethylic ether 
H,C,0,0,C 2 H 5 

Chloroform. Ter- 
chloride of formyl 
CHCI, 



Chloral hydrate 
C 2 HC1 3 0,H 2 



Iodoform. Teriodide 
of formyl 
CHI 3 



Bromoform. Terbro- 
mide of formyl 
CHBr 



Among the products of 
dry distillation of wood. 

From gaseous chloride of 
methyl and chlorine ex- 
posed to sunlight. 

In ants; by distilling 1 
p. starch, 4 p. Mn0 2 , 
and 4 p. water. 

By distilling 8 parts dry 
NaO,Fo, 7 alcohol, and 
lip. H 2 S0 4 . 

By distilling methylic or 
ethylic alcohol with 
chloride of calcium. 



By passing dry chlorine 
gas through anhydrous 
alcohol so long as it is 
absorbed. 

By dissolving 5 p. KO, 
C0 2 and 6 p. I, in 12 
p. water, and heating 
with 6 p. alcohol until 
decolorized. 

By action of bromine on a 
solution of potassa in 
wood spirit. 



Description, etc. 



Resembles common alcohol in most phy- 
sical properties; sp. gr. .79; boiling 
point 1420. 

Colorless liquid ; odor like chloroform ; 
sp. gr. 1.344; boiling point 1420. 

Colorless liquid ; odor penetrating acid ; 
caustic ; reduces the oxides of the 
noble metals. 

Colorless aromatic liquid ; sp. gr. .945 ; 
boiling point 130O; pretty soluble in 
water, readily in alcohol and ether. 

Colorless volatile liquid ; odor and taste 
ethereal sweet; sp. gr. 1.50; boiling 
point 1440 ; the vapors not inflamma- 
ble ; burns with a wick ; not acted on 
by H 2 S0 4 ; boiling KO decomposes it 
into KO,Fo and KC1. 

It is a white crystalline solid, unacted on 
by H 2 S0 4 , but decomposed by alkalies : 
fuses at 100O.8, boils at 2390 ; soluble 
in alcohol, water, ether, and oils. Its 
aqueous solution should be neutral. 

Lemon yellow crystals ; odor saffron-like ; 
taste sweetish aromatic ; insoluble in 
water, soluble in alcohol and ether ; 
volatile. 

Colorless liquid ; boiling at 150O-152O; 
congeals at 30; sp. gr. 2.9. 



Medicinal Preparations of the Group of Methyl. 

Spiritus formica. Distil two parts from one part ants, two parts alcohol, 

and one part water. Its activity depends chiefly on 
the formic acid ; now little used, in rheumatism, gout, 
neuralgia, etc., externally as a rubefacient. Dose, gtt. 
40-60. 

Used internally nnd externally ; as an anaesthetic in 
quantities of fgj-iij. Dose, gtt. 10 to 60. 
- Alcoholic solution of chloroform, adapted to dilution. 
Dose, fgj. 

Antiseptic and antimiasmatic ; produces the effects of 
iodine without irritation ; used for inhalation in lung 
diseases, and externally in suppositories and oint- 
ments. Dose, gr. 1-7. 



Chloroformum. 

(As above.) 
Spiritus chloroformi, 
monly chloric ether. 
lodoformum. 

(As above.) 



Chloroformum Venale et Chloroformum Purificatum, IT. S. P. (Com- 
mercial Chloroform and Purified Chloroform.) 

Of these products, the first named is placed in the list of the 
Pharmacopoeia among the products derived from the manufacturing 
chemist, while the last is a preparation for which a formula is given. 

The process for making chloroform consists in distilling alcohol 
from chlorinated lime ; it is practised on a large scale by many 



PURIFIED CHLOROFORM. 375 

chemists, both in this country and Europe. In England, methylated 
spirit is resorted to for preparing it, on account of the high price 
of alcohol ; if properly prepared and purified, this is identical with 
that from alcohol. On the manufacture of chloroform, see M. Pe- 
tattakofer and B. Hirsch, Amer. Journ. Ph., 1861, p. 421, and 1862, 
p. 42. 

Commercial chloroform is a colorless liquid, sp. gr. 1.45 to 1.49 ; it 
is contaminated with some impurities, the results of the process, 
but is cheaper than the purified product, and equally well adapted 
to use as a solvent in the preparation of liniments, solution of gutta 
percha, etc. The Pharmacopoeia test for the commercial variety is 
as follows : — 

Shaken with an equal volume of officinal sulphuric acid in a 
bottle closed with a glass stopper, it forms a mixture, which sepa- 
rates by rest into two layers ; the upper one colorless, and the lower, 
consisting of the acid, of a brownish hue, which, after the lapse of 
twenty-four hours, becomes darker, but never quite black. 

Chloroform Purificatum. {Purified Chloroform.) 

Take of Commercial chloroform, one hundred troy ounces. 
Sulphuric acid, twenty troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, twelve troyounces. 
Carbonate of sodium, five troyounces. 
Lime, in coarse powder, half a troyounce. 
Water, ten fluidounces. 

Add the acid to the chloroform, and shake them together, occa- 
sionally, during twenty-four hours. Separate the lighter liquid 
(chloroform), and add it to the carbonate of sodium, previously 
dissolved in the water; agitate the mixture thoroughly for half an 
hour, and set it aside; then separate the chloroform from the super- 
natant layer and mix it with the alcohol. When the mixture has 
separated into two transparent layers, transfer the chloroform into 
a dry retort, add the lime, and distil, by means of a water-bath, into 
a well cooled receiver, taking care that the temperature in the retort 
does not rise above 153°, until one troyounce of residue is left ; 
keep the distilled liquid in well-stopped bottles. 

A colorless, volatile liquid, not inflammable, of a bland ethereal 
odor, and hot, aromatic, saccharine taste. Its specific gravity is 
1.480. It boils at 142°. It is slightly soluble in water, and freely 
so in alcohol and in ether. When mixed w T ith an equal volume of 
officinal sulphuric acid in a bottle closed by a glass stopper, and 
allowed to remain in contact for twenty-four hours, no color is im- 
parted to either. When one fluidrachm is evaporated spontaneously 
with one drop of a neutral aqueous solution of litmus, the color of 
the latter is not reddened. The result of the test is the same, if 
the chloroform, contained in a white glass bottle, has been pre- 
viously exposed to sunlight for ten hours. 

The following additional facts may be useful in examining speci- 
mens found in commerce: — 

Chloroform is liable to undergo decomposition by age, shown by 



376 

the evolution of chlorine gas ; in order to preserve it from this 
deterioration when commenced, the addition of eight drops of alco- 
hol to each fluidounce is recommended. Alcohol is, however, a 
common adulteration of chloroform, and may be detected as fol- 
lows: Potassium does not decompose pure chloroform, the surface 
of the metal being only covered with small gas bubbles; if much 
alcohol be present, the entire mixture becomes quite colored, attended 
with the liberation of acid fumes. Chloroform, on being shaken 
with the nearly pure orange-colored mixture of bichromate of potas- 
sium, sulphuric acid, and water, and allowed to remain quietly for 
a time, assumes a light-green color; if 5 per cent, of alcohol is 
present the mixture separates into two sharply-divided layers, the 
lowest having a green color. The same occurs when ether is pres- 
ent. If water is present, potassium immersed in it will be rapidly 
oxidized. 

The chief impurities, however, are products of the reaction, 
which, in properly rectified chloroform, or chloroform made from 
pure alcohol, are never present ; these subtle carbohydrogen com- 
pounds are sometimes perceptible as oily-looking globules, floating 
through the liquid, and are always shown by the color imparted 
by admixture with sulphuric acids as above. 

Hager announces the following conclusions from his experiments 
on chloroform: 1st. Chloroform does not decompose by action of 
solar rays only. 2d. Rapid decomposition takes place under the 
combined action of air and solar rays; and hydrochloric acid, car- 
bonylchloride, formic, and traces of oxalic result, and in some 
cases free chlorine. 3d. If the air has access to chloroform even 
in the dark, decomposition ensues. 4th. An admixture of from 
.75 to 1 per cent, of alcohol suffices to preserve it and prevent 
decomposition. 5th. Commercial chloroform contains, besides chlo- 
roform, other chlorinated compounds, which are separated with 
difficulty. (For further remarks, see Proc. Amer. Ph. Assoc, for 1870, 
243, 244.) 

Chloroform was first prepared, under the name of " Chloric 
Ether," in 1831, by Samuel Guthrie, of Sackett's Harbor, New York. 
A medicine of American origin, it has become known and exten- 
sively used in all parts of the civilized world. 

One of the chief uses of chloroform in medicine, as first an- 
nounced by Prof. Simpson, of Edinburgh, is for the purpose of pro- 
ducing an anaesthetic or benumbing effect during surgical opera- 
tions and parturition. This effect is produced by the inhalation of 
its vapor, which appears to be absorbed by the blood, and, by act- 
ing on the nervous centres, to suspend their functions. One of the 
chief causes of the fatal effects of chloroform given by inhalation 
has been its occasional imperfect quality, as found in commerce. 
Though the increase of its use of latter years is well known, the 
number of deaths reported has been greatly diminished, and the 
explanation is undoubtedly found in the improved quality of the 
article of commerce, as well as in the greater care and judgment 
with which it is now administered. The quantity necessary to be 



SOLUTION OF GUTTA-PERCHA. 377 

inhaled varies in different individuals, though perhaps the most 
usual dose by the lungs is of chloroform f 3j to f 3iij — of ether f ^ss 
to f sij. It is also given by the stomach. Dose, 20 to 60 drops; 
and used externally in anodyne liniments. 

It is recommended as a remedy against sea-sickness ; in doses of 
from five to ten drops, given in a little syrup or cognac, it alleviates 
the nausea and resuscitates the patient from his extreme prostration. 
I have tried this, as I confidently believe, with advantage, though 
not with complete relief. 

It is a powerful solvent of camphor, caoutchouc, gutta-percha, 
wax, resins, iodine, and of the vegetable alkalies and neutral crys- 
talline principles generally. Its property of dissolving camphor in 
so large proportion adapts it as a vehicle for that medicine, espe- 
cially for topical applications. 

Spiritus Chloroformi, U. S. P. ("Chloric Ether.") 

Take of Purified chloroform, a troyounce. 

Diluted alcohol, twelve fluidounces. 

Dissolve the chloroform in the stronger alcohol. 

This is a new officinal, of utility to the physician as a substitute 
for chloroform itself, in cases where it is to be used by the stomach. 
The proportions are adjusted to prevent ready separation of the 
ingredients on admixture with ordinary tinctures and aqueous 
mixtures , it may be given in doses of a fluidraehm or two in 
cases of flatulence, colic, etc., and is a useful addition to various 
anodyne combinations. 

Liquor Gutta-perchce, U. S. P. (Solution of Gutta-percha.) 

Take of Gutta-percha, in thin slices, a troyounce and a half. 
Purified chloroform, seventeen troyounces. 
Carbonate of lead, in fine powder, two troyounces. 

To twelve troyounces of the chloroform, contained in a bottle, 
add the gutta-percha, and shake occasionally until it is dissolved. 
Then add the carbonate of lead, previously mixed with the re- 
mainder of the chloroform, and, having several times shaken the 
whole together at intervals of half an hour, set the mixture aside, 
and let it stand for ten days, or until the insoluble matter has sub- 
sided, and the solution become limpid, and either colorless or of a 
pale straw-color. Lastly, decant the liquid, and keep it in a well- 
stopped bottle. In practice it has been found much easier to add 
three times as much chloroform to the gutta-percha, and, having 
marked on a retort the measure which the resulting preparation 
should make from the solution when filtered through paper into 
the retort, draw off sufficient chloroform to leave the required 
amount of solution in the retort. 

This new officinal preparation is placed in the Pharmacopoeia 
under the head of Liquores. Like collodion, it is designed to be 
applied to cuts or abrasions, on evaporation leaving a film which 
protects the part to which it is applied, preventing the drying 



378 FERMENTATION, ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS. 

action of the atmosphere, and promoting the healing process. The 
carbonate of lead is used to precipitate the coloring matter of the 
gutta-percha, so that the solution is transparent and of a light straw- 
color. It may be dispensed in vials connected with a camel-hair 
pencil secured to the cork, as described under the head of Collodion. 

Chloral, U. S. P. 

This is a new officinal in the list of the Pharmacopoeia, 1870, and, 
although discovered in 1832, was not introduced into medical prac- 
tice till Dr. Leibreich, of Berlin, in 1869, called the attention of 
the medical profession to its powers as a hypnotic. 

The reactions which result in the formation of chloral are thought 
to be as follows: Aldehyd and hydrochloric acid are first formed ; 
and these, with some of the alcohol, yield monochlorinated ether, 

O TT ) 
O IT 01 l ^' wn * cn on further additions of chlorine gives tetrachlo- 

O TT ) 

rinated ether, p -?tA [ 2 , and this with water furnishes chloral, 

some alcohol, and some hydrochloric acid. The action of chloral 
hydrate generally is supposed to depend upon its decomposition by 
contact with the alkalies in the system, developing chloroform in 
its purity and in a manner peculiarly adapted for its best medical 
effect. The close is from ten to fifty grains; the medicine is given 
in solution, with a little syrup added at the time of taking it. (For 
interesting papers on this subject see Proc. Amer. Phar. Assoc, vol. 
xix. 245, 543.) 

Iodoform, U. S. P. 

This preparation has been made officinal in the last edition of the 
Phamaacopoeia. It may be made by mixing two parts of carbonate 
of potassium, two of iodine, one of alcohol, and five of water, heat- 
ing till colorless, and then pouring off into a suitable vessel to 
deposit; it is then thoroughly washed and dried. It is in lemon- 
yellow plates, of a peculiar and very persistent odor; it is sparingly 
soluble in water, more so in alcohol, ether, and oils. 

It has been recommended in those cases where iodine is indicated, 
but is free from the irritating action that characterizes the iodine 
salts; the usual dose is from one to three grains three times a day, 
given in pilular forms. 

Bromal Hydrate. 

A series of trials of bromoform were made in the Berlin Patho- 
logical Institute under the direction of Leibreich ; according to the 
observations bromal hydrate undergoes the same change that chloral 
does, bromoform being formed by the action of the alkalies in the 
blood; the method adopted was to give fourteen grains soda biscuit 
in the morning and mid-day, and at night two to six grains of 
bromal hydrate. 



DERIVATIVES OF BUTYRIC AND AMYLIC ALCOHOL. 379 

Brornoform. 

Dr. Robertson has used this remedy and found the effects similar 
to those produced by chloroform ; the dose is not stated. 



Derivatives of Butylic Alcohol. 



Name. 



Butylic alcohol 
C 4 H 9 HO 

Butyric acid, But 
HC 4 H,0 2 

Butyric ether 
CH 7 2 C 2 H 5 



Source. 



In the fusel oil of alcohol 
from beet molasses. 

By fermenting milk sugar 
■with old cheese at 85° 
and adding CaC0 3 . 

From 2 p. But, 2 p. alcohol 
and lp. H 2 S0 4 at 175°; 
or by distilling CaO, 
But, H 2 SC\, and alco- 
hol. 



Description, etc. 



Colorless liquid ; odor more pleasant 
than fusel oil; soluble in 10 parts 
■water ; "with fusing KO yields But. 

Colorless liquid ; odor of rancid butter ; 
sp. gr. .96 ; boiling point 328°; solu- 
ble in water, alcohol, and ether. 

Colorless liquid ; odor of pineapples ; 
sp. gr. .904 ; boiling point 289° ; solu- 
ble in alcohol and ether in all propor- 
tions, little in water. 



Derivatives of Amylic Alcohol. 



Name. 



Amylic alcohol, fusel 



Nitrite of amyl 



Valerianic acid, Val 
C 5 H 9 0,OH 



Amylo-valerianic 



Amylo-acetic ether 



Source. 



Formed by the fermenta- 
tion of potatoes and 
grain ; contained in 
whiskey. 



In valerian ; by distilling 
10 p. K 2 Cr0 4 ,Cr0 3 , 15 

P- " 
oil 



The oil floating on the 
distillate in preparing 
Val. 

By distilling 2 p. KAc, 1 
p. H 2 S0 4 , and 1 p. fusel 
oil, and rectifying over 
lime. 



Description, etc. 



Colorless liquid ; odor penetrating, ex- 
citing to coughing; taste burning; 
sp. gr. .818 ; boiling point 270°; crys- 
tallizes at — 4° F. ; inflammable; 
soluble in alcohol and ether in all pro- 
portions, little in water. 

Yellowish liquid; sp. gr. .877; boiling 
at 96° C. ; spicy odor, fruity taste; 
soluble in alcohol and ether; insoluble 
in water. 

Colorless oily liquid ; odor of valerian 
and old cheese; taste burning acid; 
sp. gr. .937 ; boiling point 347° ; in- 
flammable ; soluble in 30 p. water, in 
all proportions in alcohol and ether; 
dissolves camphor and some resins. 

Colorless oily liquid ; odor of apples; 
sp. gr. .88 ; boiling point 370°. 



Colorless liquid ; odor of pears ; sp. gr. 
.857 ; boiling point 272° ; decomposed, 
by KO. 



Butyric Acid. But = HC 4 H 7 2 . 

As obtained by the saponification of butter, some difficulties are 
presented in freeing it of capry lie, caprinic, and vaccinic acids ; it is 
therefore best to prepare it artificially by butyric fermentation, for 
which purpose 100 parts of starch sugar or cane or milk sugar are 
dissolved in water, and set aside in a warm place, with 10 parts of 
old cheese; or a mixture of 100 parts of sugar, 150 parts milk, and 



380 

50 parts of powdered chalk, is allowed to ferment in a warm 
place ; if diluted with water, fermentation takes place readily. 
After the cessation of the evolution of gas, the liquid, on evapora- 
tion, furnishes butyrate of calcium, 10 parts of which are to be dis- 
solved in 40 parts of water, and distilled with 3 or 4 parts of muri- 
atic acid ; from the distillate the acid is separated by saturating it 
with chloride of calcium, the oily liquid is rectified, and that portion 
coming over at 327° is preserved as pure concentrated butyric acid. 

Alcohol Amylicum, U. S. P. {Fusel Oil = C 5 H n HO.) 

To obtain this in a state of purity from the ordinary grain fusel 
oil, which may be obtained at distilleries, the crude fusel oil is 
agitated with an equal bulk of solution of table salt, the water 
removed and the oil distilled with about its own weight of water; 
the potato fusel oil distils with the vapors of water, and the receiver 
contains water holding the last traces of alcohol in solution, upon 
which the amylic alcohol floats. 

An oily, nearly colorless liquid, having a strong, offensive odor, 
and acrid, burning taste. Its specific gravity is 0.818, and its boil- 
ing point between 268° and 272°. It is sparingly soluble in water, 
but unites in all proportions with alcohol and ether. It does not 
take fire by contact with flame, and, when dropped on paper, does 
not leave a permanent greasy stain. 

The inhalation of its vapor and its internal administration are 
poisonous, producing coughing, nausea, vomiting, vertigo, fainting, 
prostration of the lower extremities, convulsions, asphyxia, and 
death. Ammonia has been recommended to counteract these de- 
leterious effects. 

It is not used in medicine, except rarely as an external irritant in 
rheumatic and other painful affections, but has attained considera- 
ble importance in the arts, chiefly for the artificial production of 
perfumes and fruit essences, and for the preparation of valerianic 
acid by the use of oxidizing agents. 

Nitrite of Amyl. 

Nitrite of amyl is made, according to Prof. Maisch's process, by 
mixing in a capacious retort an equal bulk of amylic alcohol, 
purified, and nitric acid, applying a moderate and gradually in- 
creasing heat until the mixture approaches the boiling point, when 
the fire is removed and the reaction allowed to proceed ; this sub- 
stance has been tried as an anaesthetic, and is very powerful in its 
action; it stimulates the heart more powerfully than any other 
remedy. 

Artificial Fruit Essences. 

The artificial fruit essences now so largely employed for making 
artificial fruit syrups, and as flavors for culinary purposes and con- 
fectionery, belong to this class of ethers; they are solutions of com- 
pounds of organic acids with ordinary ether and amylic ether, in 



ESSENCES. 381 

deodorized alcohol. But little practical information has been pub- 
lished with reference to their preparation, the manufacturers keep- 
ing their processes secret, in consequence of which the quality of 
the essences, as they occur in commerce, varies exceedingly. 

The following processes for some of the most prominent of these 
essences, in connection with the foregoing syllabi, will be found to 
facilitate their preparation, which, to be successful, must be con- 
ducted with care and with close attention to the results of expe- 
rience. 

Jargonelle year essence is an alcoholic solution of amylo-acetic 
ether, as given in the syllabus, in proportions indicated by conve- 
nience. 

Bergamot pear essence is a solution of five parts of amylo-acetic 
ether, one and a half parts of acetic ether, in from 100 to 120 parts 
of alcohol. 

Apple oil consists of an alcoholic solution of one part of amylo- 
valeriauic ether dissolved in six or eight parts of alcohol. 

Pineapple essence consists of one part of butyric ether dissolved 
in eight or ten parts of alcohol ; or the potassa soap of butter is dis- 
solved in alcohol, and this solution distilled with an excess of sul- 
phuric acid. Prepared by the latter process, the odor is somewhat 
modified by the presence of capronic, caprylic, and caprinic ethers. 

Banana essence consists of a mixture of amylo-acetic ether, and 
some butyric ether dissolved in alcohol. A more perfect imitation 
is that made with acetate of amyl alone. 

Essence of raspberries is usually made by mixing acetic ether with 
an alcoholic essence of orris root. 

Quince Essence. — In making this essence pelargonic acid has to be 
prepared as a first step. This acid is contained in the oil of Pelar- 
gonium roseum, from which it may be obtained by combining it 
with potassa; but it is more advantageously made from oil of rue, 
by heating it in a retort with nitric acid previously diluted with 
an equal measure of water, removing from the fire as soon as the 
reaction commences, afterwards boiling with cohobation until 
nitrous acid vapors cease to be evolved ; the oily acid is then re- 
moved, washed with water, combined with potassa, and a neutral 
strong-smelling oil separated, after which the solution of pelargo- 
nate of potassium is decomposed by sulphuric acid. 

Pelargonic acid is now sufficiently pure for the preparation of 
the ether ; it still contains a resinous substance, from which it may 
be purified by rectification, combining with caustic baryta, and 
decomposing the crystallized salt with diluted sulphuric acid. 
Pelargonic acid, by a continued digestion with alcohol, is converted 
into pelargonic ether, which is obtained purer and in a shorter 
time, by saturating an alcoholic solution of pelargonic acid with 
muriatic acid gas, washing the separated ether with water, and 
drying it over chloride of calcium. If the pure ether is sought this 
may be rectified ; it consists of C 2 H 5 ,C 9 H 18 2 . 

The pelargonic, also called wnanihic, ether, dissolved in alcohol, 
constitutes the essence of quince. An impure pelargonic ether is 



382 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

said to be used in England for imparting to potato spirit the flavor 
of whiskey. 

Fusel oil of wine was supposed to be oenanthic ether, and has been 
frequently confounded with pelargonic ether. According to late 
investigations of Fischer, it is a mixture of caprinic, caprylic, and 
other allied ethers. Probably, however, the fusel oil contained in 
the different wines varies in the kinds and proportions of the ethers. 
This fusel oil is the cause of the persistent smell of all or most 
wines, and is quite distinct from their bouquet, which in some wines 
is wanting altogether. It is obtained by careful distillation of the 
ferment of wines mixed with half its measure of water, a little 
cenanthic acid may be removed by agitation of the distillate with 
some carbonate of sodium, the liquid in then heated, the ether rises 
to the surface, and is obtained free of water by standing over chlo- 
ride of calcium. 

The bouquet of wines, which is formed after fermentation, is pro- 
bably due to the presence of acetic, butyric, valerianic, and other 
ethers ; but our knowledge of its true chemical nature is very 
limited. 

Most alcoholic liquors are subject to adulteration and sophistica- 
tion, for which purposes some of the artificial ethers are used, usu- 
ally together with sweet spirits or alcohol freed from fusel oil. 
Thus formic ether is used to impart to alcohol the flavor of arrack, 
and constitutes the chief ingredient in what is called essence of 
arrack ; and butyric, valerianic, and caprylic ethers enter into the 
composition of the so-called essence of rum. 



CHAPTER V 

FIXED OILS AND FATS. 



The fixed oils and fats form so natural a group that they may be 
conveniently classed together, though derived respectively from 
animal and vegetable kingdoms. 

They resemble the preceding groups of ternary organic principles 
in being nutritious in the sense in which that term applies to non- 
nitrogenized principles. The very large proportion of carbon they 
contain peculiarly adapts them to maintain, by combustion in the 
lungs and capillaries, the heat required in the various processes of 
the economy. In medicine, they are used for this in connection 
with certain demulcent, alterative, and cathartic properties, pertain- 
ing to particular individuals of the group. They constitute the 
chief vehicles for medicines to be applied externally, whether in 
ointments in which the ojl is usually not decomposed, or in lini- 
ments and plasters, in some of which a decomposition of the oil is 
intentionally effected. The fixed oils enter largely into the food 



ADULTERATIONS. 383 

of animals, and of the human race ; they are accumulated particu- 
larly in the fruit and seeds of plants, and exist, associated with 
other nutritive materials, in the straw and stalks as well as the seed 
of the cereal grasses. 

The following proportions of fixed oils have been ascertained to 
exist in the several substances named : in Indian corn, 8.8 per cent. ; 
oats, 6.9 ; fine wheat flour, 1.4; bran from wheat, 4.6 ; rice, 0.25; 
hay and straw from 3 to 5 ; olive seeds, 54 ; flaxseed, 22 ; almonds, 
46 ; walnuts, 50 ; cocoa-nut, 47 ; yelk of eggs, 28 ; cow's milk, 3.13 
per cent. 

Adulterations. — The chief adulterations to which the fixed oils 
are subject, are mixtures of the finer and more expensive kinds with 
the cheaper. These may be detected by variations of the specific 
gravity from the normal standard, though as the several oils only 
vary from 865 to .970 sp. gr., this means of detection becomes a 
matter of considerable nicety. It has been proposed to apply this 
test at the temperature of boiling water, but we have too little data 
to make this generally available. The sp. gr. of each of the fixed 
oils mentioned in this work, as far as known, is given in the sylla- 
bus which follows. 

The odor of oils, if carefully observed, will be found a good 
means of detecting their adulterations, especially when heat is ap- 
plied. A known pure sample, being obtained, may be heated in a 
spoon and compared with a quantity of the suspected oil similarly 
heated. 

The presence of fish oil in the vegetable oils is detected by passing 
a stream of chlorine through them. The pure vegetable oils are 
not materially altered, but a mixture of the two turns dark brown 
or black. 

On adding a drop of concentrated sulphuric acid to about ten 
drops of a fixed oil, coloration is produced, varj'ing with the dif- 
ferent oils: fish oils turn reddish or violet; rape seed and oil of 
black mustard greenish-blue; olive oil yellowish, then greenish; 
linseed oil dark-brown and black. 

Solubility in alcohol is another fact which is useful in determin- 
ing the genuineness of oils. Castor oil is soluble in its own weight 
of alcohol of .820 sp. gr. Croton oil dissolves in the same propor- 
tion in alcohol of .796 sp. gr. Olive oil is nearly insoluble. Oil of 
almonds dissolves in 25 parts of cold and 6 parts of boiling alcohol. 

The boiling point of fixed oils varies from 500° to 600° F., so 
that we might detect the admixture of the volatile oils, hydro- 
carbons from coal, etc., by raising the temperature and noticing the 
point at which ebullition commences, and the nature of the distil- 
late. The melting and the solidifying points of solid fats are liable 
to variations in the case of those yielding glycerin by saponifica- 
tion. If allowed to cool while in a melted state, their temperature 
after first sinking becomes constant for a time, and then exhibits 
a sudden rise. This occurs at a definite point for each fat, which 
is therefore called the natural point of solidification, although the 
fat may be considered at a time in a state of supervision. Other 



384 



FIXED OILS AND FATS. 



fats exhibit only one point of solidification, which coincides with 
the melting point. 

Chemical History. — The vegetable and animal fats are mixtures 
of different proximate constituents, each of which consists of a 
fatty acid and a base, analogous in behavior to the ethers treated 
of in the last chapter, with the difference that it requires three 
equivalents of acid for saturation. Separated from its acid it com- 
bines with water so that its alcohol glycerin is obtained. The ether 
which exists in the fats has been called by Berzelius oxide of 
lipyle, and has also received the name of oxide of glyceryle; glycerin 
being its hydrated oxide. 

When a fixed oil is treated with an alkali, the latter combines 
with the fatty acids and forms a soap. Soaps, therefore, are salts, 
the acids of which are derived from the fixed oils ; if the base is 
an alkali they are soluble in water, and to a certain extent also in 
alcohol; the soaps of the alkaline earths and the metallic oxides are 
insoluble in both menstrua ; the term soap is for this reason not 
commonly applied to those compounds, and the Pharmacopoeia recog- 
nizes one of them, the lead soap, by the name of Mnplastrum Plumbi. 

The acids which are present in the natural fats are mostly homo- 
logous compounds of the general formula C w H n 2 . The first two of 
the series, formic acid, OH 2 2 , and acetic acid, C 2 H 4 2 , are thin 
liquids, readily soluble in water and alcohol; the next two, pro- 
pionic, C 3 H 6 2 , and butyric acid, C 4 H 8 2 , are oily liquids, soluble 
in water, but separated from their solutions by chloride of calcium, 
and boil at 287° and 314°. 6 respectively. The following acids of 
the series are oily and but sparingly soluble in water: — 



Valerianic acid 
Capronic " 
(Enanthylic " 

Caprylic " 

Pelargonic " 



C 5 H 10°2 

C 6 H 12 2 
C 7 H u O a 



C 9 H 18 2 



In valerian root, and the fat of the dolphin ; boils at 34JO. 

In cow butter, and cocoa-nut oil ; boils at 3880. 

Formed in the oxidation of castor oil, etc., besides other 

products; boiling point 4250. 
In cow butter, cocoa-nut oil, human fat, and in the fusel oil 

of rye, rice, and beet-root spirit; boiling point 45TO. 
In pelargonium roseum, and by the oxidation of oil of rue ; 

boiling point 500O. 

All the above liquid acids possess a strong odor; some of them 
having been sufficiently treated of in the last chapter, and others 
being reserved for the chapter on organic acids, we may pass to a 
series of the solid fatty acids, which, with the exception of the first, 
are destitute of odor. 

In cow and goat butter, cocoa-nut oil, various fusel oils, 

etc. ; fusible at 80O.5. 
Laurostearic acid. In the fruit of Laurus nobilis, in cocoa- 
nut oil, pichurim beans, and in spermaceti ; fusible at 

110O.5. 
In the expressed oil of nutmegs; fusible at 1260.8. 
In palm oil, in Chinese wax, tallow, suet, in human fat, 

butter, lard, olive oil, cocoa-nut oil, wax, spermaceti ; 

I of myrtle wax is this acid ; by fusing oleic acid with 

HO,KO; fusible at 1430.6. 
Is a mixture of 10 p. stearic and 90 palmitic acid. 
In suet, lard, cocoa-nut oil, and most other animal and 

vegetable fats ; fusible at 1560.6. 
In the fruit of Arachis hypogaea; fusible at 1C70. 



Caprinic acid 


C 10 H 20^2 


Laurinic 


a 


C 12 H 24 2 


Myristic 
Palmitic 


it 


^14^28^2 
C 16 H 32°2 


Margaric 
Stearic 


a 


C 17 H 3t 2 

C 18 H 36°2 


Arachic 


«( 


^20 H 40°2 



CHEMICAL HISTORY. 



It will be observed that the members of the series commencing 
with caprinic acid differ from the next following by C 2 H 4 ; whether 
there are any natural fatty acids between those mentioned in the 
syllabus has not been definitely settled. Some other fatty acids, 
containing more C than the above, have been discovered, but it is 
asserted that they have not been obtained in a pure state; we 
name only — 

g 22 h 44 o 2 



Bebenic acid 
Cerotinic " 



In the Behen oil from Moringa aptera. 
In beeswax, in the free state, and in Chinese wax ; fusible 
at 170O. 

Besides these acids there occur others in fats of the composition 
C ri H n _ 2 2 ; the series is not nearly as complete as the foregoing, and 
it is uncertain even whether the first one mentioned in the syllabus 
really belongs to it. The following comprises the few that are 
known : — 



Carbonic acid C 2 4 



Acrylic 

Crotonic 

Damaluric 

Moringic 

Hypogseic 

Geadic 
Oleic 

Elaic 

Balsenic 
Erucic 



C 4 H 6 2 

C 7 II 12 2 

<W> 2 



^19^36^2 

C 22 H 42 2 



= (2C0 2 ). Gaseous. 

By the oxidation of acrolein ; liquid. 

In croton oil ; not acrid nor purgative ; liquid. 

In the urine of man, the cow, and the horse ; liquid. 

In the oil of Moringa aptera; solid at 32. o 

Physetic acid. In the oil of Arachis bvpogaea and the 
liquid fat of the Cetacese; fusible at 93 b 

By 1S'0 3 from the former; fusible at 100.O 

In the fat of most animals, and in all the undrying vege- 
table oils; solid at 250 ; oxidizes readily. 

From oleic acid by N0 3 ; inodorous, tasteless; fusible at 
llio. 

In the oil of Balcena rostrata ; solid at 40°. 

Sinapic acid. In the oil of mustard ; fusible at 930. 



A few other acids of a different composition are met with in 
some fixed oils, among which we mention — 

Olinic acid. Compos. (?) In the drying oils, linseed, nut, hemp-seed, poppy-seed 

oil, etc. 
Ricin-oleic acid C 18 H 34 3 In castor oil ; solid at about 15°. 

Most of these acids are combined, as has been stated above, with 
the ether of a triatomic alcohol, the oxide of glyceryle; but some 
fatty bodies contain, either besides this or altogether, other bases, 
of which the following syllabus will give a view; they are the 
ethers of monatomic alcohols: — 

Oxide of cetyle C I6 H ?3 (OH) In spermaceti with palmitic acid (cetin). 
" ceryle C 27 H 55 (OH) In Chine.se wax with cerotinic acid. 

" metyleC 30 H 60 (OH) In beeswax, the portion insoluble in boiling alcohol, with 
palmitic acid (myricin). 

The compounds of the fatty acids with the oxide of glyceryle are, 
by common consent, called by the name of the acid, changing the 
termination ic into in. Thus myristin is C 3 rI s 3 ,3C 14 H 28 2 ; pal- 
mitin, C 3 H 8 03,3C 16 H 3 ,0 2 ; stearin, C 3 H 8 3 ,3C 18 H3 b 2 ; arachin, C 3 H 8 3 , 
3C 20 H 40 2 ; olein, C 3 Ii 8 3 ,3C 18 H 34 2 . All these fats contain three 
equivalents of acid, but others with two and one equivalent have 
been obtained artificially ; they are designated in organic chemistry 
by prefixing to the former the word tri, to the next di, and to the 
last mono. Ordinary stearin is, according to the chemical nomen- 
25 



386 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

clature, tristearin ; the artificial distearin has the formula C 3 H 8 3 , 
HO,2C ]8 H 36 2 , and the monostearin C 3 H s 3 ,2HO,C ]8 H 3l 2 . 

To obtain these acids in a pure state is usually a matter of diffi- 
culty ; fractional precipitation must be frequently resorted to. 

Emplastrum Plumbi, U. S. P. {Lead Plaster.) 

Take of Oxide of lead, in fine powder, thirty troy ounces. 
Olive oil, fifty-six troyounces. 
"Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Sift the oxide of lead into the oil, contained in a suitable vessel, 
of a capacity equal to twice the bulk of the ingredients. Then add 
half a pint of boiling water, and boil the whole together until a 
plaster is formed ; adding from time to time, during the process, a 
little boiling water, as that first added is consumed. 

This is made usually on a large scale by manufacturing pharma- 
cists, some of whom make it, with its kindred preparations, their 
leading or exclusive article of manufacture. 

The process requires that olive oil (lard oil does not produce a 
nice product) should be boiled with finely-powdered oxide of lead 
(litharge) and water for a long time, until they unite into a mass 
of a soft solid consistence, which is tenacious, and readily rolled 
upon a wet marble slab into rolls of suitable size, which are allowed 
to harden by maceration in a trough of cold water and subsequent 
exposure to the air ; one gallon of oil yields about twelve pounds 
of plaster. 

Lead plaster is usually found in commerce, in rolls of various 
sizes, from half an ounce to half a pound in weight, called simple 
diachylon, or lead plaster; sometimes, though rarely, it is spread 
upon cotton cloth by machinery, and sold by the yard like adhesive 
plaster cloth. It is milder and less irritating in its action upon 
highly inflamed surfaces, though less adhesive than that well-known 
and useful application. Postponing to another chapter the practical 
details in regard to these, and the numerous compounds into which 
they enter, it will be appropriate in this place to introduce to 
notice, what was formerly a residuary product of the manufacture 
of lead plaster, but is now made directly from fixed oils. 

Glycerin. C 3 H 8 3 . 

Glycerin is a colorless, odorless, sweet liquid, resembling syrup, 
having a sp. gr. of from 1.25 to 1.2667 ; it may be classified among 
pseudo sugars (see page 376), but in chemical behavior it is a tria- 
tomic alcohol of the hypothetical radical glyceryle, C 3 H 5 . Glycerin 
is separated from oils in the process of their saponification, and may 
be obtained by evaporation from the water in which lead plaster 
has been made, care being taken to precipitate any lead held in 
solution by sulphuretted hydrogen, and to drive oft' the excess of 
this gas by heat. 

There are several qualities of glycerin in our markets ; the 
cheapest is made from the waters from which soap has been sepa- 



GLYCERIN. 387 

rated ; that which is collected as a residuary product from the 
plaster manufacturer has been almost superseded by that distilled 
from fats by highly heated steam. 

Of the latter, which is the best variety, that imported from Price's 
Candle Co., London, and that made by Henry Bower, of Phila- 
delphia, are to be preferred; they are both destitute of odor, and 
have nearly the requisite specific gravity. These articles are be- 
lieved to be made from palm oil, while that obtained from the refuse 
of the manufacture of stearin candles, from lard, is seldom destitute 
of an odor when heated, which is fatal to its use for a large number 
of the purposes for which it is designed. 

When made by distillation, glycerin is liable to be contaminated 
with acrolein, a peculiar volatile principle to which it owes its 
acridity. Pecent chemical investigations show that acrolein is 
formed during the dehydration of glycerin even in vacuo. Some 
specimens have a saline taste, evincing important impurities in 
view of the uses to which it is applied. Among the impurities 
noted by different writers, are oxalic and formic acids, although 
this is denied by others; nitric acid has been observed by Schepky, 
and butyric acid by Perutz. In the common grades the bad-smell- 
ing fatty acids are often observable. 

Glycerin is sometimes used to impart sweetness (age) and an oily 
appearance (body) to liquors, and thus labelled is sold to dealers for 
those purposes. 

The following description of glycerin is from the U. S. Pharma- 
cojyosta : — 

A colorless, inodorous, syrupy liquid, of a sweet taste, and having 
the specific gravity of 1.25. It is soluble in water and in alcohol, 
but not in ether. Exposed to a full red heat, it takes fire, and 
burns with a blue flame. It is destroyed by distillation in contact 
with air, but may be distilled unchanged with steam. It combines 
with potassa and baryta, and also with sulphuric acid. "When di- 
luted with water, it affords no precipitate with hydrosulphate of 
ammonia or ferrocyanide of potassium. 

It is much employed as a substitute for oils, having a remarkable 
property of soothing irritable conditions of the mucous surfaces, 
and at the same time mixing in all proportions with water, and 
with most aqueous mixtures. 

It is a most useful application in the dry and parched condition 
of the mouth so often present in disease, to which it may be applied 
either b}^ painting it over the dry surface with a brush, or by swal- 
lowing it diluted with water. Highly concentrated glycerin will 
tend to increase the dryness of the mouth by its power of absorbing 
moisture, and for this reason should be diluted before being used 
for this purpose. For a certain form of deafness resulting from 
dryness of the tympanic membrane it is one of the best of remedies. 
It is used in certain scaly skin diseases, as lepra. It is a useful ap- 
plication to sore nipples, also to burns and excoriated surfaces, and 
is added to poultices to keep them moist. Its substitution for 
almond and olive oil, in the preparation of delicate ointments, is 



388 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

seldom productive of advantage ; it must be remembered that it is 
not perfectly miscible with the fixed oils. It is not liable to become 
rancid as oils are, and it imbibes the essential oils from plants di- 
gested in it with remarkable avidity, so that it is well adapted to 
the preparation of liniments and lotions ; it is also miscible with 
soaps. From its remarkable solvent power over chemical agents it 
is much used in pharmacy, and the name glyceroles (gtycerites, U. 
S. P.) is applied to solutions containing it. Glycerin is an excel- 
lent vehicle for subacetate of lead, which, on admixture with 
common oils, as in Goulard's cerate, is always converted into a 
compound of the oil-acid with oxide of lead ; and, on admixture 
with water, as in lead-water, immediately begins to be decomposed, 
depositing carbonate of lead, so that the solution in a short time 
becomes inert. Glycerin is miscible in all proportions with liquor 
plumbi subacetatis, and under the name of Linimentum plumbi sub- 
acetatis, a formula is inserted which I think an improvement on 
any of the old preparations of lead. 

The solvent power of glycerin is so great, that since its general 
introduction to popular use in pharmacy, many substances hereto- 
fore prescribed with little satisfaction have been used with great 
success by reason of their combination with glycerin. The follow- 
ing is a list of the class of substances generally soluble in it : — 



Bromine, 


Alkalies, 


Tannin, 


Iodine, 


Alkaline earths, 


Vegetable alkalies, 


Iodide of sulphur, 


Neutral salts, 


Salicin, 


Chloride of potassium, 


Vegetable acids, 


Santonin. 



Nitro-glycerin or Glonoin. C 3 H 5 (^0 2 ) 3 3 . 

This compound, which for years past has attracted some little 
attention as a remedy for headache, is prepared by adding J oz. an- 
hydrous glycerin, with constant agitation, to a mixture of 2 oz. 
sulphuric and 1 oz. fuming nitric acid, pouring it into 50 oz. water, 
and washing it upon a filter. 

It is a colorless oil possessing a sweet taste, sp. gr. 1.28, soluble 
in 180 p. water and very readily soluble in alcohol and ether ; when 
heated it frequently explodes; even at ordinary temperature 
nitrous acid is sometimes evolved and the residue consists of oxalic 
acid and glyceric acid. A drop of the acid brought in contact with 
the lips, or even the vapors produce the most distressing headache. 
It is said to have been prescribed by homoeopathic practitioners. 

The chief use of this article is in the arts as a substitute for gun- 
powder in blasting, it possessing far greater power ; but the terrible 
destruction which results from its accidental explosion renders it 
as dreadful as it is efficient. 

As before mentioned, only the alkaline soaps are soluble in water 
and alcohol ; their consistence varies with the alkali, the potassa 
soap being the softest, the soda soap invariably harder than the 
former. The following list comprises those which are most usually 



FIXED OILS AND FATS USED IN MEDICINE. 



employed in medicine, though occasionally the soap of a finer oil 
than olive oil, like the cocoa-nut oil soap, or some highly oclorized 
one, like Windsor soap, is preferred. 



Soaps used in Medicine. 



Sapo, Castile soap. 



Sapo vulgaris, common soap. 



Sapo viridis, S. niger, S. mollis, 
soft green or black soap. 

Emplastrum plumbi, lead plas- 
ter. 



From olive oil and soda; ■white or mottled; used as 
an antacid, excipient in pills, linimentum saponis. 
U. S. Ph. 1860. 

From animal oil and soda ; used externally only in 
the preparation of opodeldoc, linim. saponis cam- 
phor. U. S. Ph. 1850. 

From potassa and various animal and vegetable fats; 
used in itch. 

From litharge and olive oil ; forms the basis of most 
plasters. {See Emplastra.) 



Of the soaps, perhaps none is more really useful for ordinary 
domestic and for surgical purposes than the genuine Castile soap, 
abundantly and cheaply supplied in our markets. Palm soap is 
second only to this in its emollient properties. The introduction 
of suet (soap-fat) is a common means of increasing the frothing 
properties of soap, and the foregoing being quite destitute of this 
ingredient are unsuited to use in shaving. Soluble glass, silicate 
of alkali, is now introduced into the cheap soaps of commerce, by 
which an immense saving of the fatty ingredient is attained, and 
the use of resin, formerly employed for the same purpose, is super- 
seded. 

In the Z7. S. Pharmacopoeia of 1860, only Castile soap is officinal ; 
it is designated Sapo, soap made with soda and olive oil. Sapo 
vulgaris, common soap, formerly officinal for the preparation of 
solid opodeldoc, has been dismissed with that preparation. Soap 
made with vegetable oils is generally soluble in cold alcohol; that 
made with suet and animal oils is insoluble in alcohol except by 
the aid of heat. 



List of the Principal Fixed Oils and Pats used in Medicine. 



Oleum olivas (sweet oil or 
olive oil). 



Oleum amygdalae dulcis. 



Oleum sesami (benne oil). 
Oleum arachidis (ground- 
nut oil). 
Oleum lini (flaxseed oil). 



Oleum behen (behen oil). 



1. Vegetable Oils. 

From the fruit of Olea Europaea, by expression, sp. gr. .9109 
to .9176 ; a light yellow ; nearly inodorous ; of sweet oily 
taste ; in ointments, plasters, for culinary purposes, and 
perfumery. 

From kernels of fruit of A. communis by expression, sp. gr. 
.917. Solid at — 12°; light yellow; very bland ; in oint- 
ments and perfumery. Hager states that true oil of almonds 
when shaken in a test-tube with 25 per cent, of nitric acid 
forms a white emulsion-like mass, which remains white or 
faintly colored with yellow even when heated ; while oil of 
peach kernels or apricots becomes yellowish at once, and 
depens to a reddish -yellow in half an hour. 

From the seeds of Sesamum indicum and orientale. 

From the kernels of fruit of Arachis hypogaea by expression, 
sp. gr. .918. 

From the seed of Linum usitatissimum, sp. gr. .9347 ; its 
soaps are very soft ; in liniments ; rarely internally ; much 
used in the arts. 

From the fruit of Moringa aptera ; in ointments and pomades. 



390 



FIXED OILS AND FATS. 



Oleum bertholetice (Brazil 
nut oil). 

Oleum theobromse (butter 
of cocoa, oil of choco- 
late nuts). 

Oleum fagi (Beech oil). 

Oleum lauri (bayberry 
oil). 

Oleum cocois (cocoa-nut 

oil). 
Oleum gossypii (cotton 

seed oil). 
Oleum macidis (solid). 

Oil of mace. 
Oleum myristicce. 

Oleum palmce (solid). 

Palm oil. 
Oleum papaveris (poppy 

oil). 

Oleum ricini (castor oil). 
Oleum tiglii (croton oil). 



Cera Japonica (Japan 
wax) 



Adeps (lard). 

Butyrum (butter). 

Sevum (mutton suet). 

Oleum adipis (lard oil). 

Oleum bubulum (neat's 
foot oil). 

Oleum cetacei (spermaceti 
oil). 

Oleum Halicorce (dugong 
oil). 

Oleum morrhuse (cod- 
liver oil). 



Vegetable Oils. (Continued.) 
From kernels of fruit of B. excelsa, sp. gr. .917. 

From roasted seeds of Theobroma cacao, sp. gr. .892. Solid 
at 80°. For ointments, suppositories, and soaps. 

From the fruit of Fagus sylvatica ; very bland soap, soft ; 

in Germany as a substitute for olive oil. 
Expressed from the fruit of Laurus nobilis ; green ; buty- 

raceous, granular very fragrant ; taste bitter, aromatic ; 

in ointment. 
From the kernel of the Cocos nucifera; white; of sweet 

taste ; yields an excellent soap. 
From the seeds of Gossypium herbaceum ; refined, sp. gr. 

.921. 
From the arillus of the fruit of Myristica fragrans ; resem- 
bles the next. 
Expressed from the nutmeg of Myristica fragrans ; reddish ; 

aromatic odor and taste ; in ointment and perfumery. 
Obtained from the fruit of Elais guiniensis ; orange-yellow; 

consistence of butter; agreeable odor; turns easily rancid. 
From the seeds of Papaver somniferum, sp. gr. .9243; light 

yellow; nearly inodorous; is a drying oil used for culinary 

purposes, and as adulteration for olive oil. 
From seeds of Ricinus communis, sp. gr. .9612 ; nearly color- 
less or yellowish ; used as purgative. 
From the seeds of Croton tiglium, sp. gr. .947 to .953 ; light 

to dark yellow ; readily soluble in alcohol ; very acrid and 

drastic ; blisters the skin. 
Said to be obtained from the fruit and leaves of Rhus succe- 

danea; white; hard; fracture conchoidal. 



2. Animal Oils. 



Prepared fat of Sus scrofa, the hog. 

From cream by mechanical agitation. 

The prepared suet or fat, from Ovis aries. 

The olein separated from lard by expression, sp. gr. .9003. 

From the bones of Bos domesticus, the ox. 

From the cavity in the upper jaw of Physeter macrocephalus. 

From the Halicora dugong and Australis ; recommended as 

a substitute for cod-liver oil. 
From the livers of Gadus morrhua, sp. gr. .9230 to .9315. 



3. Allied Bodies not Containing Glycerin. 



Cera flava (beeswax). 

Cera alba (white wax). 
Cera Chinensis (Chinese 

wax). 
Cera Myricse. 

Cetaceum (spermaceti). 



The substance used by the bees for constructing their cells ; 
used in ointments, cerates, plasters, and in the arts. 

Beeswax bleached by the sunlight ; used like the former. 

According to St. Julien, prepared by Coccus ceriferus, like 
beeswax ; used in the arts. 

Obtained by decocting the fruit in boiling water, and remov- 
ing the wax when it has cooled. 

In the head of Physeter macrocephalus; in ointments and 
the arts. 



REMARKS ON THE FIXED OILS. 



Of the foregoing list several are quite bland, agreeable, and desti- 
tute of active properties ; of these oleum sesami, oleum papaveris, oleum 



REMARKS ON THE FIXED OILS. . 391 

arachidis, oleum cacao, oleum olivce, oleum amygdala}, ruay be substi- 
tuted for each other, and are adapted too for internal use. 

Olive oil, of the finest quality met with in commerce, virgin oil, 
salad oil, has a pale yellow or greenish-yellow color, and a very 
faint and agreeable odor; its taste is bland and pleasant, though 
sometimes a little acrid; its specific gravity, at 77° F., is stated at 
.9109, .9176 at 59° F. It is soluble in one and a half times its 
weight of ether, but almost insoluble in alcohol; it generally con- 
tains a solid deposit of stearin and palmitin in cold weather, which 
is readily fused by a slight elevation of temperature. The best 
generally comes in bottles which hold from fjxij to fsxxiv, or in 
small flasks covered by wicker work, which, after they are emptied, 
come in play for small chemical operations. The common impure 
oil is generally rancid, acrid, and disagreeable, and often abounds 
in green coloring matter; it is obtained by expressing at an elevated 
temperature or by boiling the expressed residue with water and 
skimming off the oil. 

The detection of adulterations in olive oil is a matter of no great 
difficulty to the connoisseur, as any admixture of inferior oils affects 
the taste perceptibly. The following are, however, more generally 
applicable. 

Pure olive oil, when shaken in a vial half filled, gives a bead 
which rapidly disappears, but if adulterated the bubbles continue 
longer before they burst. Pure olive oil completely solidifies if 
immersed in ice, but if one-third of poppy oil is present it does not 
freeze at all at the temperature of ice. When carefully mixed with 
one-twelfth part of its volume of a solution of four ounces of mer- 
cury, in eight fluidounces and six drachms of nitric acid, sp. gr. 
1.5, it becomes a firm fat in three or four hours, without any separa- 
tion of liquid oil. The other edible oils do not solidify with acid 
nitrate of mercury, and the hardness of this mass is dependent on 
the purity of the oil. Animal oils solidify with this nitrate, but 
if olive oil is mixed with them it floats on the surface of the co- 
agulum and may be decanted. And when heated this coagulum 
exhales the well-known odor of rancid fats. A few drops of it 
treated with a little nitric acid containing some nitrous acid readily 
solidifies, the oleic acid being converted into the solid isomeric 
elaic acid; if adulterated by a drying oil, it remains soft or solidifies 
much slower. 

Pelouze has investigated the subject of the acidification of fixed 
oils, and confirms the fact already known, that foreign substances 
with which fatty bodies are contaminated exert an action upon 
them similar to that which a ferment exerts upon saccharine fluids, 
setting free fatty acids. He has also found that when oleaginous 
seeds are crushed so as to break up their cells and bring their con- 
tents into close contact, the neutral fatty bodies contained in them 
are spontaneously converted into fatty acids and glycerin. This 
phenomenon is analogous to what takes place in the grape, the 
apple, and other fruits, the sugar contained in which is converted 
into alcohol and carbonic acid as soon as the cells which separate it 



392 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

from the ferment are destroyed. When extracted immediately, 
these oils are perfectly free from any traces of acid. The difference 
in quality between good and bad olive oil is thus explained, the 
former being extracted before the lapse of time has allowed of this 
peculiar fermentative action. Dr. R. C. Langlies adds to 3 parts of 
the oil to be tested, in a small flask, 1 part of nitric acid (prepared 
by mixing 3 parts acid, sp. gr. 1.33, and 1 part water), and heats 
in a water-bath ; if the oil assumes a lighter color it is pure, if it 
becomes red the presence of oil from seeds may be considered cer- 
tain. 

Almond oil is procured from the kernels by expression, the best 
in our wholesale market being imported in jugs from England. 
Some few pharmacists in the United States have presses, with 
which they prepare this elegant product in great purity and per- 
fection. It has about the specific gravity of olive oil, and is with- 
out its green tinge of color, so that it generally makes a whiter 
ointment. Almond oil is soluble in 25 parts of cold and 6 parts of 
boiling alcohol. In selling and prescribing it, care should be taken 
that it be not confounded with the essential oil of bitter almond. 
The name has been changed in the late edition of the Pharmacopoeia 
to Oleum Amygdala? Dulcis. 

It is well known that some wholesale drug houses fraudulently 
substitute for this valuable oil, oil of poppy seed, which has little 
over half its money value; the fraud may be detected by mixing 
upon a glass or porcelain slab a few drops of the suspected oil with 
about an equal number of drops of nitric acid ; the oil of poppies, 
being a drying oil, retains its fluidity, while the almond oil soon 
becomes hard. 

Oil of Benne Seed. — Sesamum orientale has been produced in this 
country, and is recommended as a desirable production to add to 
our agricultural resources. The plant grows well, particularly in 
the South, and has been estimated to yield ten bushels of the seed 
to the acre; the yield of oil approaches two and a half gallons to 
the bushel. The seeds should be planted as soon as the frost is out 
of the ground in drills three feet apart, and six inches distance 
along the drills. 

Poppy seed oil is imported in casks in considerable quantity from 
Germany, where it is frequently employed as a substitute for sweet 
oil for table use, and by some practitioners is preferred to oil of al- 
monds. In this country it is made use of for the same purposes, 
and is besides often fraudulently substituted for or mixed with 
olive and almond oil, which see. 

Oil of Groundnuts. — A fine oil is now extensively made both in 
France and in this country, by expressing groundnuts between hot 
plates in the same way that linseed oil is prepared. Its chief use, 
as far as I can learn, is to adulterate almond and olive oils. It is 
remarkably free from unpleasant properties, and if thrown into 
commerce under its own proper name, would no doubt answer many 
purposes in the arts, in medicine, and in domestic economy. Oil 
of groundnuts has been employed in place of neat's-foot oil for 



oils. 393 

citrine ointment, which, however, is apt to be too soft when thus 
prepared. 

Oleum Theobromce. — Cacao butter, the solid oil of chocolate nuts, 
softens, without quite fusing, at the temperature of the body ; its 
odor and taste are peculiarly agreeable, and besides its application 
to chapped lips, its extensive use in suppositories, and its occasional 
employment as a coating to pills, it has been given internally as a 
substitute for cod-liver oil and other fats; it is liable to adultera- 
tion with solid animal fats, and I have met with specimens contain- 
ing wax in considerable proportion. (A full account is given in the 
Proc. Amer. Pharrn. Assoc, xv. 347.) 

Oleum adipis, oleum lini, oleum bubulum, oleum bertholetiee, oleum 
myristicce expressum, oleum macidis, oleum cocois, oleum paimcc, oleum 
cetacei, and oleum gossipii, are seldom used for any internal form 
of administration, but in common with olive and almond oil have 
their special adaptations and uses in the arts, and for topical appli- 
cations in medicine. 

Lard oil, which is a tolerably pure form of olein when freshly 
and skilfully prepared, is, however, seldom met with in commerce 
free from a disagreeable rancid odor; on this account it is rarely 
employed in medicine. It is said to be largely exported for fraudu- 
lent admixture with olive oil. 

Linseed or flaxseed oil is chiefly used to mix with the carbonates 
of lead and zinc in the manufacture of the pigments known as white 
lead and zinc white; it is sometimes superseded for this use by a 
variety of inferior oils, which possess similar drying or oxidizing 
properties. Boiled linseed oil, particularly if litharge or acetate of 
lead is mixed with it in boiling, is remarkable for the rapidity 
with which it dries into a hard varnish-like material. This oil is 
sometimes used as a " healing" cathartic in doses of one or two 
ounces, for which purpose the cold expressed oil is preferable. In 
this dose it is highly recommended for piles, and for burns a lini- 
ment, made with liq. calcis, is used with admirable effect, and 
known in Scotland as carron oil from its frequent use at theCarron 
Iron Works. 

Neat's foot oil, as usually met with, is so offensive that it has been 
omitted from the one officinal preparation in which it was for- 
merly directed — unguentum hydrargyri nitratis. It may be made 
pure and good enough for internal use, and in England it is said to 
be employed for frying fritters; it does not thicken by age. 

Oil of brazil-nuts (oleum bertholetias), when properly made, is of a 
bright amber color, has the peculiar smell and taste of the nut, and 
congeals at 24° F. Dr. Donnelly, of Philadelphia, has used it as a 
substitute for olive oil in plasters and ointments, and found it to be 
well adapted for such purposes, one gallon of oil requiring six 
pounds of litharge to saponify, and yielding a good plaster of a 
rich cream color, and 12 oz. of a superior glycerin. 

Expressed oil of nutmegs, as it occurs in commerce, is of the con- 
sistence of suet, and has a mixed white and yellow color, and a 
strong odor of nutmegs; it is prepared in the East India Islands by 



394 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

exposing the bruised nutmegs contained in a bag to the vapors of 
boiling water and subjecting them to pressure between heated plates. 
It is entirely soluble in boiling ether; leaves nearly one-half behind 
on being treated with cold ether ; the residue is white, pulverulent, 
inodorous. It is chiefly used for external applications where a mild 
stimulant is required. 

Expressed oil of mace is now very seldom met with in commerce; 
it is prepared in a manner similar to the above, has the consist- 
ency of butter, a reddish color, and an agreeable strong odor and 
taste of mace. 

Cocoa-nut oil is obtained by expression from the kernel of the 
cocoa-nut; it is of the consistence of suet between 40° and 50°, 
and semifluid between 75° and 85°; it is liable to have a peculiar 
odor owing to the presence of caprylic and capronic acids in small 
quantities, of which the greater part may be removed by digesting 
the oil for several hours with coarsely-powdered charcoal, and fil- 
tering through paper in a warm place. It has been proposed as 
a substitute for lard, especially in ointments which contain much 
vegetable matter, or aqueous mixtures, of which it is able by tri- 
turation to take up one-third more than lard. Its keeping well 
without getting rancid admirably adapts it for such purposes, and 
also for hair oil; it is readily absorbed by the skin, and, therefore, 
is not so apt to stain the garments and bedclothes. Burnett's 
cocoaine is understood to be chiefly composed of this oil. 

Paha oil is consumed largely in the manufacture of soap, to which 
it imparts its peculiar odor and yellow color; of these, however, it 
is deprived by exposure to air and light. It is a very extensive 
article of commerce in England, entering into many of the cheaper 
varieties of soap, and in pharmacy being used in the manufacture 
of plasters, certain pomades and ointments, and in the manufac- 
ture of glycerin by distillation. It is a soft solid, melts at 117J° 
F., sp. gr. .968. 

Spermaceti oil is the clearest and thinnest of the whale oils; it is 
remarkably adapted for greasing heavy machinery, for which pur- 
pose it is in great demand; it is also a fine oil for burning, but 
is rarely used in medicine or pharmacy, except by those few prac- 
titioners who believe it a good substitute for cod-liver oil. 

Cotton-seed oil is obtained by expression as a very dark, almost 
black, tenacious oil, which, until the introduction of certain pro- 
cesses for its purification and bleaching, was deemed of no com- 
mercial value; it has since become a very large article of commerce, 
and is used in the arts for many of the purposes to which the 
bland fixed oils are applicable, and also for the adulteration of 
olive oil and the other more expensive oils. It has been used 
successfullv in several officinal ointments. (See Am. Journ. Pharm., 
1861, p. 208.) 

Oleum ricini, oleum tiglii, oleum morrhum, and oleum halicorce are 
medicinal, and used as internal remedies. 

Castor oil is a viscid, transparent, light yellow-colored oil, specific 
gravity .9575, at 77°. Its taste and smell, when of a fine quality, 



CASTOR OIL. 395 

are very slight, though its extreme viscidity renders it disagreeable. 
It is peculiar in being rniscible with absolute alcohol in all propor- 
tions, and in rendering other oils, mixed with it in certain propor- 
tions, also soluble; it also dissolves some alcohol, but this property 
diminishes with the strength of the alcohol. The principal kinds 
found in the commerce of the United States are, the American oil, 
which is produced principally iii the "Western States and comes 
in casks; a variety said to be expressed principally in New York 
from seeds imported from the East Indies ; and the East India oil, 
which is imported in tin cans from Bombay and Calcutta. The 
latter article is, I think, generally the best, either from the agita- 
tion to which it is subjected in the hold of the vessel during a long 
voyage, a great part of the time in the tropics, producing a separa- 
tion of its albuminous ingredient, and thus clarifying it, or from 
some peculiarity in its preparation. A can of this oil is often found 
cloudy near the bottom, while the upper portion may sometimes 
be racked off remarkably clear and free from odor and taste. 

The English castor oil, so much esteemed here, has been selected 
from the best East India oil and submitted to nitration, and after- 
wards bleached by exposure to the sun. The blue tinge of color of 
bottles in which it is sold, by neutralizing the yellow rays reflected 
from the oil, give it the appearance of great freedom from color. 
(See Pharmaceutical Notes of Travel, by the author, Am. Journ. 
Pharm., vol. xxx. p. 114.) 

The Palma Christi, which produces the valuable seed yielding this 
oil, is a beautiful annual plant, readily cultivated in our climate 
from the seed. It grows to the height of from six to ten feet, and 
is one of the most ornamental of annuals for garden or lawn. 

The seeds are powerfully acrid and cathartic. The activity of 
these and the oil depends upon an acrid principle, said to be resi- 
noid, which is invariably present in it, and is modified by the 
bland demulcent properties of the oil, rendering it one of the most 
useful of cathartics. 

The leaves of Palma Christi have come into use within a few 
years as an application to the mammae, with a view to promote the 
flow of milk ; an extract prepared from them is spread upon cotton 
cloth and applied to the mammse; an infusion is recommended for 
the same purpose, to be taken internally. 

Great quantities of castor oil are consumed in the preparation of 
applications for the hair, it being now generally preferred to bear's 
oil, which was formerly much in vogue for this purpose. For 
greasing the hair, it should have a small admixture of alcohol to 
diminish its viscid properties, while for hair restoratives, such as 
are called katharion, tricopherous, etc., the alcohol is in larger pro- 
portion, the oil being added to diminish the drying and crisping 
properties of the spirits used. Recipes for preparations of this 
composition are given in the chapter on Perfumery and Toilet Pre- 
parations. 

Croton oil, like the foregoing, is the product of the seeds of one 
of the family Euphorhiaceae. It is imported in bottles holding 



396 FIXED OILS AND FATS. 

about twenty ounces. Its powerful irritant and drastic cathartic 
properties, in doses of from one to two drops, are well known. In 
applying it as a local irritant for producing a pustular eruption, it 
is usually diluted with twice the quantity of olive oil ; it should 
then be carefully and conspicuously marked for external use. 

Pure croton oil is soluble in about its own bulk of very strong 
alcohol, but in two or three days nearly all the oil separates. One 
of the most ready ways of testing its quality is to try its effect 
upon the skin ; if pure, the speedy appearance of the eruption may 
be anticipated. (See Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1860, p. 306.) 

Dr. Isaac Hays, of Philadelphia, has often succeeded in pro- 
ducing the pustular eruption by mixing an equal bulk of oil of 
spearmint with croton oil when the pure oil failed to produce the 
desired effect. 

Cod-liver oil, as supplied to the American market, is largely pre- 
pared upon our New England coast, and that of Newfoundland, in 
connection with the cod fisheries. Three different commercial 
varieties are produced, which vary in quality according to the skill 
and care expended in their preparation. Pale cod-liver oil is pre- 
pared in New England by cutting up the fresh livers and throwing 
them into water in a large tank arranged for the application of 
heat. A fire being kindled, the oil rises to the surface and is 
skimmed off; by standing, even after being barrelled, a deposit sepa- 
rates which allows of the clear oil being racked off. It is abun- 
dant in our markets within a few years, being used exclusively in 
medicine, and commanding a price, by the gallon, of from $2 to $3. 

The other most common variety is the dark-brown oil. The livers, 
being thrown into a heap exposed to the sun, are thus allowed to 
become decomposed, and the oil is collected as it flows out from the 
corrupting mass. The dark-brown oil is rancid, having a disagree- 
able empyreumatic odor, and a taste which is bitter, besides being 
acrid, as in the other case. It is used extensively by curriers. Its 
price is usually about $1 per gallon. 

The pale-brown cod-liver oil is intermediate in its properties be- 
tween the foregoing; it is by some preferred to either, and by several 
customers with whom I have met is said to disagree less with the 
stomach. This variety is not so common in commerce. Many 
dealers do not procure it at all. I have obtained it by the gallon 
at from $1 25 to $1 75 per gallon. There are all grades of quality 
between the finest and commonest oils. 

The large admixture of other fish than the cod in the produce of 
the New England fisheries, and the consequent admixture of the 
livers, has induced a very general opinion that the Newfoundland 
oil, as representing the oil of the livers of the cod exclusively, is to 
be preferred. This is the kind of oil sold chiefly in England, and 
upon which the reputation of the oil was mainly founded in the 
first instance. Excellent cod-liver oil is made in London from the 
livers of the fresh fish brought to that market. The firm of Allen 
and Hanburys supply their extensive demand from this source. 
The livers are placed in a large iron pan over a coal fire, and 



COD-LIVER AND DUGONG OILS. 397 

heated to about 180° F., stirring constantly until they break clown 
into a uniform pulpy liquid mass; this is immediately transferred 
to calico bags, whence the oil drains out. After filtration, while 
still warm, the oil is ready for use. In this state the oil separates, 
at the temperature of 60° F., a considerable deposit, which it is 
the practice of some to remove by filtration, while others allow it 
to remain as probably quite as efficient as the more fluid part. 

The composition of cod-liver oil, as inferred from the analysis of 
Dr. De Jongh, is similar to that of other fatty oils, with the ex- 
ception of a peculiar organic substance of biliary origin called by 
him gaduin, and also some of the constituents of bile, with traces 
of iodine, bromine, etc. 

More recently, Dr. F. L. Winckler has investigated its chemical 
nature, and regards this oil as an organic whole of a peculiar che- 
mical composition, differing from that of all other fatty oils hither- 
to employed as medicines. According to this eminent chemist, 
some glycerin is replaced by oxide of the organic radical propyle 
(C 3 H), a compound of which exists also in ergot and in the liquor 
of pickled herring. From this Dr. Winckler infers that cod-liver 
oil cannot be replaced by any other officinal oil. Propylamine 
(C 3 H.NH 2 ), a product of the reaction of ammonia on cod-liver oil, 
is also found by Winckler in normal urine and sweat ; and, view- 
ing its formation as probable by the reaction in the system by 
which cod-liver oil is assimilated and burnt up in the lungs, he 
founds upon this his theory of the utility of cod-liver oil in medi- 
cine. 

The amount of iodine in cod-liver oil does not exceed .05 per 
cent., and is too insignificant to be of great medicinal activity ; 
sometimes other oils have been substituted for it by dissolving 
iodine in them. True liver oils all give Pettenkofer's reaction ; a 
drop of sulphuric acid produces a violet color with the biliary con- 
stituents contained in the oil. 

Dugong Oil. — This oil is obtained from two herbivorous cetaceous 
animals, the family Manitidse, the one, Halicore Dugong, an in- 
habitant of the Indian Seas, the other, Halicore Australis, occur- 
ring off the northwest coast of Australia. Specimens of this oil 
from Ceylon are solid, while from Australia more fluid, though 
with a deposit of stearin. Both have a tallow-like taste and no 
fishy smell, and have been used as substitutes for cod-liver oil. I 
am not aware that any specimens have reached the United States 
as yet. 

In addition to the foregoing, no less than thirty-seven fixed oils 
and fats are found in the shops of the various nations of Europe, 
many of which were formerly officinal. Some of these are now 
called for by the more ignorant classes under the impression that 
special virtues attach to the fats of different animals and fishes. 
Goose grease is much esteemed as an application to chapped hands, 
and to be applied by inunction for rheumatic and other pains ; it is 
preserved in many families for this use. Bear's oil has a great repu- 
tation for the hair, and is undoubtedly a good application and less 



398 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 

liable to become rancid than some other oils. It is met with in 
considerable quantities in the western cities, but it is needless to 
remark that very few of the hair preparations labelled bear's oil 
are even contaminated with this ingredient. Catfish oil, sturgeon's 
oil, porpoise oil, and rabbit fiat are all occasionally in demand, but 
seldom kept by the druggist or pharmacist; it is within there- 
collection of the writer that cod-liver was equally a rara avis. 



CHAPTER VI. 

ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 

Volatile or Essential Oils. 

This important and interesting class of proximate principles con- 
tains an immense number of individuals which are distinguished 
from each other more by striking sensible and physical than by 
chemical peculiarities. By far the largest number are derived from 
plants, in which they exist ready formed, although some are the 
products of a spontaneous fermentative action set up among prin- 
ciples contained in the plants in the presence of water. Volatile 
oily products of the destructive distillation of organic substances, 
the rational composition of which is not known, are likewise con- 
veniently classed with volatile oils. Those which may be desig- 
nated as definite chemical compounds, such as creasote, may be 
more appropriately treated of under the head of the several sources 
from which derived. Natural volatile oils are mostly prepared by 
mixing plants or parts of plants containing them, with water, and, 
after maceration for a certain length of time, subjecting the mix- 
ture to distillation. The distillate is usually milky, and on stand- 
ing separates, most of the oil rising to the top, or, in a few instances, 
subsiding, while the water continues charged to saturation with 
the oil. Although the boiling point of these oils is much above 
that of water, most of them are readily volatilized in contact with 
steam at 212°, and are hence conveniently prepared by distillation 
as above. 

The unpleasant odor at first perceived in the distillate was for- 
merly believed to be empyreumatic, but is now said to be due to 
portions of tin dissolved from the neck of the still or the condensing 
worm, and to disappear with the subsequent oxidation of this metal, 
and its separation as a flocculent precipitate; this is often mistaken 
for an algseric vegetation. 

Some highly odoriferous plants, which yield by this process sparse 
and unsatisfactory results, are found to impart their volatile oils 
better by digestion with fixed fatty bodies, which, when treated 
with strong alcohol, yield the volatile oils to that solvent, forming 



VOLATILE OR ESSENTIAL OILS. 399 

essences; numerous oils or essences used in perfumery are prepared 
in this way. Others are prepared by direct expression from the 
structures containing them, as the oils obtained from the rind of 
the lemon and bergamot fruits; while others are obtained, with 
associated resins and camphors, by the use of ether ; in the Phar- 
macopoeia several of these are grouped under the head Oleoresina. 

The volatile oils are mostly soluble in water to a very limited 
extent; and dissolve a small proportion of water, which separates 
at low temperatures. They are mostly soluble to an unlimited ex- 
tent in anhydrous alcohol, ether, and the fixed oils. 

The perfume of most plants is due to the gradual elimination, 
diffusion, and oxidation, in very minute quantities, of their vola- 
tile oils. Every one must have noticed that in the moist morning 
and evening atmosphere, the odor of flowers is greatly enhanced, a 
phenomenon which is partly due to the power of vapor of water to 
aid in the diffusion of the volatilized oils, and probably partly to 
an increased tendency to oxidization in contact with aqueous 
vapor. According to Liebig, the perfume of essential oils is strong 
in proportion to their tendency to oxidize in the air, though their 
degree of volatility has also an important bearing on this property. 
Their odor is generally strong in proportion to the oxygen in their 
composition. Certain oils containing no oxygen may be temporarily 
deprived of their characteristic odors by distillation from freshly- 
burnt lime in an apparatus exhausted of air or filled with carbonic 
acid gas. The odor of essential oils is apt to be less delicate or 
grateful after they have been isolated than when spontaneously 
exhaled by the plant, and by time and exposure many of them not 
only lose their delicacy of flavor, but become less limpid, assuming 
a darker color and more resinoid consistence. In the process of 
drying certain plants at a moderate heat, the oil seems to improve 
in flavor, while very little of it is dissipated, so that the aromatic 
seeds, as of fennel and caraway, the unexpanded flowers of cloves, 
etc., as found in commerce, yield full proportions of essential oils, 
and of finer quality than the imported oils obtained from them 
when fresh. Valerian is an instance of the smell being greatly 
increased by age, owing to the oxidation of the oil. 

In judging of the odor of a volatile oil the diffusion of a very 
small quantity in the air is preferable to applying the nose directly 
to the vial. Inexperienced persons will sometimes fail to recognize 
the resemblance of the oil or essence to the plant from which de- 
rived from neglect of this; a drop rubbed upon the hand and 
moistened by the breath will generally develop the characteristic 
odor. Solutions of essential oils in alcohol often disappoint the 
expectation of amateurs from the predominance of the odor of the 
spirit, which, as the most volatile ingredient, first salutes the olfac- 
tory nerve ; and yet these solutions may be suited to the purposes 
in view, imparting a lasting perfume after the alcohol has evapo- 
rated. It is the custom of perfumers to dilute the alcoholic solu- 
tions of essential oils, colognes, toilet waters, and spirits, with as 
large a proportion of water as is compatible with the complete 



400 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 

solution of the oil. (See chapter on Distilled Products and Per- 
fumery.) 

In medicine, the essential oils, as existing naturally in plants and 
extracted by menstrua, or as isolated for separate use, are in the 
highest degree useful and important; they and their immediate 
derivatives, the camphors and resins, furnish remedies of the follow- 
ing therapeutic classes: stimulants, arterial and nervous — in the 
latter class the sulphuretted oils are especially important — -rube- 
facients, carminatives, emmenagogues, parturients, diuretics, anthel- 
mintics, sedatives, and a few of them are used with great advantage 
as remedies in hemorrhages and for important alterative effects in 
the secretions. The most familiar use made of volatile oils in ordi- 
nary prescriptions is with reference to their aromatic and corrective 
properties in combination with other remedies. Upon their employ- 
ment in this connection, see chapter on the Art of Prescribing. 

Chemical History. — Notwithstanding the admitted crude and im- 
perfect preparation of the volatile oils of commerce, and the fact that 
they consist of different proximate principles varying in their rela- 
tive proportions to each other, and therefore in the results of their 
analyses; yet much light has been thrown upon their chemical 
history by the labors of chemists. 

Volatile oils may be classed as, 1. Carbo-hydrogens or camphenes; 
2. Oxygenated oils; 3. Eltrogenated oils; 4. Sulphuretted oils; and 
5. Empyreumatic oils. Another classification, by Fourcroy, is, 1. 
Fugacious oils, obtainable only by the "intermediary" of a fixed 
oil, such as lily, jasmine, tuberose, etc. ; 2. Light oils, those extracted 
by expression; 3. Viscous oils, such as canella, cloves, cardamom, etc.; 
4. Concrete oils, extracted by distillation, which solidify on cooling 
or crystallize by slow evaporation ; 5. Cerates, or those extracted in 
a concrete state by expression, as nutmeg oil; 6. Camphorated oils, 
those from which a substance similar to camphor can be extracted, 
as lavender, rosemary, etc. 

The natural volatile oils belonging to the first class all have the 
composition C 30 H 16 , and from nearly all of the second class by frac- 
tional distillation a liquid of the same composition may be obtained, 
having, with few exceptions, a lower boiling point and being thin- 
ner and of less specific gravity than that portion distilling at a 
higher temperature; the former is called elceopten; the latter, stear- 
opten; it usually contains oxygen, and frequently has the composi- 
tion of ordinary camphor, C, H 16 O, oxide of camphene; or its com- 
position corresponds with a hydrate of camphene, C 10 H 18 O (Borneo 
camphor), C 10 H 20 O 2 (juniper camphor), C 10 H 22 O 3 (lemon camphor). 
A similar hydrate may be obtained from turpentine and most other 
camphenes by treating them with a mixture of nitric acid and al- 
cohol, when terpin, C 10 H 16 -f 6H 2 0, crystallizes, which in vacuo loses 
2H 2 0. 

By the action of hydrochloric acid gas on the camphenes, a com- 
bination of the two is effected, which may be liquid or solid; if the 
latter, it is crystalline, and from its resemblance to camphor has 
been called artificial camphor. The behavior of a number of the 






CHEMICAL HISTORY. 401 

camphenes towards polarized light has been observed; most of them 
deviate its plane to the left; the carbo-hydrogen of oil of lemon is 
an exception, turning the polarized light towards the right. 

All pure volatile oils are believed to be colorless, though a few 
have not as yet been obtained entirely destitute of color, while a 
few are so readily influenced by air and light, as, after rectification, 
to assume coloration in a short time (oil of cinnamon and cassia). 
There are very few colored oils which cannot be freed from color 
by rectification or fractional distillation; oleum matricarise and 
anthemidis have a blue color; oleum millefolii an indigo blue; 
oleum absinthii a deep-brown color; oleum sem. nigellae, which is 
of a brownish color, has the property of fluorescencing with a blue 
color, which may also be observed in its alcoholic and ethereal 
solutions. 

The volatile oils, by absorbing oxygen from the atmosphere, 
assume a deeper color, which passes through yellow, reddish, or 
greenish, to brown ; those to which a color naturally belongs also 
undergo this change, generally passing through green to brown. 
This change, as a general rule, takes place very slowly with the 
natural carbo-hydrogens; oxygenated oils change more quickly, 
usually in proportion to the oxygen they contain. With the deepen- 
ing of the color, the fluidity of the volatile oils is lessened owing 
to a resinification taking place, some gradually assuming the con- 
sistence of resins; at the same time the odor is altered and rendered 
more or less unpleasant. 

The less stearopten oils contain, the less are they influenced by 
change of temperature, while from all a few crystals may be ob- 
tained in the cold, unless they have been entirely deprived of the 
water dissolved by them in minute quantities during their prepa- 
ration. As the carbo-hydrogens are not solidified by a low tempe- 
rature, a change in the amount of the stearopten must necessarily 
alter the freezing and melting points of the volatile oils, the latter 
of which is alwaj^s several degrees above the former. Gr. H. Zeller, 
from his own observations with oils prepared by himself, gives the 
following : — 



Oleum 


anisi solidifies at 430 to G60 F. 


liquefies at 


680 


(< 


" stellati " " 54 " 59 " 


« a 


63.5 


<< 


arnicas flor. " 


<< « 


100 


" 


fceniculi (mostly elseopten) " bel.+5 " 


<( (< 


21 


" 


" (rich in stearopt.) " at 41 "45 " 






" 


matricarige " " 10 " 5 " 


H it 


21 


" 


petroselini " " 36 " 50 " 






" 


rosoe geran " " 88 


«( a 


100 



The boiling point is variable from the same cause ; volatile oils 
commence to boil at comparatively low temperatures, when elseopten 
with little stearopten distils over ; gradually the boiling point 
rises and the distillates contain more of the stearopten ; the boiling 
point of any pure compound of the volatile oils is stationary. 

The relations between certain essential oils, organic acids, and 
neutral principles found in plants, constituting regular series of 
chemical compounds, though not as yet discovered" to extend to 
26 



402 



ON" VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



any great number of them, are among the most curious and in- 
teresting developments of modern chemistry. The following sylla- 
bus embraces most of these : — 



Benzyle, Bz . 






C ]4 H 10 O 2 


Hydruret of Bz, oil of bitter almond 






C 7 H 6 


Oxide of Bz, anhydrous benzoic acid 






C 7 B 6 2 


" crystallized " 






C 7 H 6 2 -fH0 


Cynnarayle, Ci 






C 9 H 8 


Hydruret of Ci, oil of cinnamon . 






C 9 H 9 


Oxide of Ci, cinnamic acid . 






C g Hg0 2 
C 10 tf n O 


Cumyle ..... 






Hydruret of cumyle, oil of cumin 






^10^-12^ 


Oxide of cumyle, cuminic acid 






C 10 H 12 O 2 


Thymyle, Th 






^10^13 


Hydruret of Th, thymene 






^10"l4 


Oxide of Th, thymol . 






C 10 H 14 O • 


"Carvol," oil of caraway 






C 10 H l4 O 


" Carvacrol," creasote of camphor 






Ci Hi 4 O 


Rutyle, Rut .... 






Ci H 19 O 


Hydruret of But, oil of rue . 






C 10 H 20 O * 


Salicyle, Sal .... 






C 7 H 5 2 


Hydruret of Sal (spirous acid)f . 






HC 7 H 5 


Helicin -f- aq. . 






C 7 H 6 2 +C 6 H 12 6 (glucose) 


Saligenin ...... 






C 7 H 8 2 


Salicin -\- 2 aq. . 






^13^18^7 


Salicylic acid .... 






C 7 H 6 3 


Salicilate of oxide of methyle, oil of gn 


ulthe 


ria . 


CH 3 C 7 H 5 3 



Adulterations and Tests. 

Essential oils are liable to be adulterated with fixed oils, with 
alcohol, and with other and cheaper essential oils. The mode of 
detecting these adulterations is as follows : — 

With Fixed Oils. — Oils thus adulterated leave upon bibulous 
paper a greasy spot, which remains even after long-continued heat- 
ing over the name of a lamp. Sometimes, owing to the essential 
oil being partially resinified, it leaves a mark which is devoid of 
transparency and possesses a peculiar gloss, while the stain from a 
fixed oil is transparent, and, when completely absorbed by the 
paper, devoid of a distinct gloss — besides, when soaked in alcohol 
and heated, the resinous stain can be wiped off, while the fatty 
stain cannot be removed. When a mixture of volatile and fixed 
oils is distilled with water, the volatile oil passes over while the 
fixed oil remains, and may be saponified with alkali. On dissolv- 
ing the volatile oil in strong alcohol, in the proportion indicated 
in the syllabus, the greater part of the fixed oii remains undis- 
solved. Small proportions of fixed oils may escape detection if 
soluble to any extent in alcohol, and this difficulty is increased by 
the increased solubility of the fixed oils from admixture with 
essential oils. 

With Alcohol. — When the proportion of alcohol is considerable, 
the greater part of it may be extracted by water, the liquid be- 
coming turbid, and the oil finally separating. When the quantity 
of the adulteration is small, it is better to shake it with olive oil, 



* The aldehyde of caprinic acid. 



t Oil of spirsea (see Acids). 



ADULTERATIONS AND TESTS. 403 

which dissolves the essential oil, and separates the alcohol in a 
layer floating on the surface. The quantity of alcohol is shown 
approximately by shaking the adulterated oil with an equal bulk 
of water in a minim measure or test-tube graduated for the pur- 
pose, and observing the diminution of its volume. Into a gradu- 
ated tube, two-thirds filled with the oil, some pieces of chloride of 
calcium may be introduced, and a gentle heat applied for a few 
minutes with agitation. If no alcohol is present, the lumps of 
chloride of calcium appear unaltered on cooling ; if it contains 
alcohol, they will show a disposition to coalesce, and if it is in 
considerable proportion, a fluid layer will separate at the bottom, 
on which the oil will float. This is especially applicable to oil of 
lemon, of which 480 grains, mixed with 15 of alcohol, liquefies 3 
grains of chloride of calcium. The suspected oil being agitated 
with dry acetate of potassium, if dissolved, on mixture with sul- 
phuric acid, and heating, the odor of acetic ether is evolved, re- 
cognizable by its odor. Nitric acid, added to oil of bitter almonds, 
will only give off nitrous fumes in case of its adulteration with 
alcohol. 

With other Essential Oils. — One means of detecting these com- 
mon adulterations is by rubbing a small quantity upon the hand 
and noticing the odor before and after it is dried, or in setting fire 
to a small portion and blowing it out again, when the foreign odor 
may generally be perceived. If, on agitating the suspected oil 
with its own bulk of strong alcohol, it is not completely dissolved, 
probably oil of turpentine, or some other sparingly soluble oil, is 
present. Most carbo-hydrogens require over 10 parts of alcohol, of 
.85 sp. gr., to dissolve them. Oil of savine is soluble in 2 parts of 
alcohol of this strength, which affords a means of detecting its 
adulteration by the oil of turpentine. 

Oils of copaiba, cubebs, and the empyreumatic oils, are recog- 
nized by the absence of a violent fulminating reaction with iodine. 

The natural carbo-hydrogens prevent the reaction of the oxy- 
genated oils with a proportionate amount of nitroprussicle of cop- 
per, which must, therefore, be used in very small quantity only. 

This reagent is prepared, according to Wittstein, by the follow- 
ing process: 10 ounces nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, are stirred into 4 
ounces powdered ferrocyanuret of potassium, afterwards digested 
on a water-bath until the filtered solution is precipitated with a 
slate-color by a protosalt of iron; the liquid is then diluted with 
twice its measure of water, neutralized with carbonate of sodium, 
heated to the boiling point, filtered, and precipitated with sulphate 
of copper; the precipitate is well washed and dried at a moderate 
heat. 

The color imparted to oxygenated oils, so far as examined, is 
characteristic and striking: For ol. cajeputi viride, olive-green; 
ol. caryoph., pink, violet, cherry-red, reddish-brown, opaque; ol. 
cassias, hyacinthine, deep Drown, red; ol. chenopodii, instantly 
brown, red; ol. millefolii, pale blue, dark green ; ol. monardse, color- 
less, green, brown, black; ol. myrciae, greenish, greenish-brown to 



404 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 

brown-black. The others are yellow or brown, combined with 
yellow and red. (See Proceed. Am. Pharm. Asso., 1858, p. 344.) 

Nitric acid reacts energetically with but few volatile oils, unless 
heat be applied, but oxidizes them slowly. The binary essential 
oils are converted into a hard or brittle resin, with the exception 
of oleum sabinae, which yields merely a liquid of about the consis- 
tence of olive oil. The oxygenated oils, on the other hand, are 
usually converted into a thick liquid or soft resinous mass; ol. 
absinthii, aurantii corticis, calami, cari, caryophylli, cassiae, matri- 
cariae, menthae crispae, origani vulgaris, petroselini, and Valerianae 
yield with this reagent, without the application of heat, hard and 
even brittle resin, in some instances with, the evolution of vapors 
of HE"0 2 . 

Sulphuric acid, produces with but few volatile oils any character- 
istic reaction; it usually renders them more consistent; but converts 
them very rarely into a dark resin; the color of the acid, after the 
reaction has ceased, is generally of various shades of brown or 
reel dish-brown. 

The color of the following oils is finally changed to blue or violet 
by H 2 S0 4 , ol. absinthii, caryophylli, and Valerianae; to olive-green, 
ol. cinnamomi Chinens. ; to blood-red, ol. anisi stellati, origani vulg., 
and petroselini; to carmine red or purple, ol. cinnamomi Ceylon, 
cumini, foeniculi, majoranae, salviae, serpylli, and thymi. 

The sulphuric acid turns to a pure red, blood-red, or purple color, 
with ol. anisi, anisi stellati, calami, cassiae, foeniculi, macidis, and 
serpylli. 

Iodine applied in fine powder reacts very differently with the 
various essential oils, but this reaction is greatly modified by their 
age, being generally less energetic in proportion to their resinifica- 
tion and with the diminution of temperature, so that different 
results are obtained at our medium summer heat, and in winter at 
the moderate temperature at which our rooms are usually main- 
tained. 

The binary oils are fulminating in a high degree with iodine, 
except ol. copaibae, cubebae, and elemi, which are but moderately 
acted upon. Of the oxygenated oils, those of the Aurantiaceae ful- 
minate with iodine; also ol. lavandulae, macidis, origani vulg., 
petroselini, and spicae. 

Ethereal solution of iodine exerts, as a general rule, a less power- 
ful action upon the volatile oils than iodine in substance. 

Bromine fulminates with many oils most violently ; the reaction 
is frequently so forcible as to throw out of the vessel most of its 
contents. An ethereal solution of bromine is better adapted for 
this purpose, because the reaction with the oils is sufficiently slow 
to notice any changes in their color and consistency. (See Proceed. 
Am. Pharm. Asso., 1858, p. 344, and 1859, p. 338, where this sub- 
ject is fully treated of by Prof. J. M. Maisch.) 

In examining volatile oils for their purity, it is advisable to take 
into consideration all their physical properties and their behavior 
with various reagents; the greater or smaller amount of either 



CARBO-HYDROGEN ESSENTIAL OILS. 405 

stearopten or elseopten will modify, to a certain extent, their phy- 
sical and chemical properties. The preservation of the volatile oils 
free from alteration by time seems to be facilitated by keeping 
them well secured in small bottles secluded from the light, and by 
the addition of alcohol even in small proportion. Carl Frtih recom- 
mends the following method for oils of lemon and orange: to every 
pound of the oil one ounce of alcohol is added and well mixed, 
then an ounce of water is added, which withdraws the alcohol from 
the oil and collects at the bottom as diluted alcohol, separating a 
resinous film. 

To restore old and resinified volatile oils Curieux recommends a 
strong solution of borax, which is mixed with animal charcoal, 
and then agitated with the oil; the latter separates free from resin, 
and with the original odor. For large quantities the simplest pro- 
cess is, probably, redistillation with water, and sometimes with a 
little alkali. 

A process successfully applied by Charles Bullock, of Philadel- 
phia, to oil of lemon consisted of mixing the oil with a solution of 
permanganate of potassium, in the proportion of an ounce of the 
salt to eight ounces of water; this quantity is sufficient for four 
pounds of the oil. The mixed oil and solution being agitated 
together for a long time, the oil was decanted, mixed with fresh 
water, and warmed gently till it floated perfectly clear on the sur- 
face. 

Class 1st. — Carbo-Hydrogen Essential Oils. 

The most simple essential oils are those which consist of carbon 
and hydrogen alone. Some of these are frequently associated with 
the oxygenated essential oils. The conifers, leguminosse, and 
piperacese yield nearly all that are known. Although these are so 
similar in composition, they are as dissimilar in many of their pro- 
perties as they are unlike the members of the ox} T genated group. 
As already stated, when absolutely pure and exposed to no oxidiz- 
ing influences, they are quite inodorous, and it is impossible in 
this state to distinguish oil of lemon from oil of turpentine, or oil 
of juniper from oil of neroli. As soon as they are exposed to ordi- 
nary external influences, however, they develop their characteristic 
odors and become less limpid and free from color. Left in contact 
with about an equal volume of alcohol and one part of nitric acid, 
they gradually absorb water and separate an indifferent crystalliz- 
able hydrate, which has been called terpin. By nitric acid they 
are converted into hard resins, and sulphuric acid colors them, 
mostly of various shades of red; nearly all fulminate with iodine, 
or like the oils of cubebs and elemi evolve at least vapors. With 
hydrochloric acid gas they yield either solid or liquid compounds. 
As a class, they are the least soluble in alcohol and in water, and 
have the lowest specific gravity. Several of them are among the 
most useful of vegetable stimulants. The composition of the carbo- 
hydrogen essential oils is C 10 H 16 , or some multiple of C 5 H 8 ; they 



406 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



are therefore called terebenes or camphenes, and may be regarded 
as the radical of camphor, as the following table shows: — 



Camphene 
Borneo camphor 
Terpin (Juniper camphor} 
Lemon camphor 



Camphor from Camphora offi- 

cinarum . 
Camphoric acid 



C ]0 H 16 O 

C 10 B 16°4 



Syllabus of Empyreumatic Volatile Oils. 



Caoutchine, from 

caoutchouc. 
Colophene, rosin oil, from 

rosin. 

01. asphalti, from asphal- 

tum. 
01. betulse, from bark of 

Betula alba. 
01. succini, from amber. 



Oleum petrge, petroleum. 



Paraffinum, paraffin. 



1. 

Boils at 340° ; odor resembling lemon ; taste burning, aro- 
matic; sp. gr. .842. 

Colorless in transmitted, indigo-blue by reflected light; sp. 
gr. .940 ; boils at 600° ; odor peculiar, empyreumatic ; 
used in painting. 

Contains two isomeric compounds; cold HN0 3 colors it 
brown. 

Odor agreeably terebinthinate ; sp. gr. .847. 

Yellow, sp. gr. .80 to .88 ; odor empyreumatic ; used as anti- 
spasmodic internally and externally; contains several iso- 
meric oils; with 6 parts fuming HN0 3 yields artificial 
musk; formerly often employed as a substitute for musk. 



2. Composition C„H ra . 

From springs in coal regions; colorless and thin; yellow, 
brown, and almost black, and thick oily ; the American 
coal oil, kerosene, belongs to this class, as well as Barba- 
does tar; consists of numerous isomeric oils. 

Crystalline, inodorous, and tasteless ; possesses little affinity 
for chemical reagents ; fusing point varies from 91° to 149°; 
stoppers rubbed with it do not adhere to neck of bottles 
containing alkalies. 



Oleum cadinum, from the 
wood of Juniper oxyce- 
drus. 

Eupion. 

Chysene C 6 H 4 
Pyrene C 15 H 12 
Photagene. 

Naphthalin C 10 H 8 



3. Composition various. 
Used in Greece for chronic eruptions on the skin, in the form 
of plasma, etc. 

Colorless, aromatic, indifferent, boils at 110° ; isomeric bodies 

of composition C n H.n-\- 2 ' accompanies creasote. 
Golden-yellow, crystalline, in coal tar. 
Colorless microscopic needles, in coal tar. 
From the tar of turf, bituminous coal, etc. ; colorless, thin, 

of great illuminating power; with HN0 3 nitro-benzole 

and other nitrogenated compounds. 
In coal tar, soot, etc. ; colorless rhombic laminae, slightly 

aromatic, fusible at 175°. 

So far as examined, these carbo-hydrogens are not altered in ap- 
pearance on being boiled with nitro-prusside of copper, a reagent 
before adverted to as of much interest in connection with the oxy- 
genated essential oils ; they even have the power to prevent a certain 
quantity of this body from acting on the oxygenated oils. 

Notwithstanding their isomerism, their odor, boiling point, and 
optical behavior vary considerably. It is frequently only by the 
last two means that we are enabled to conclude on the purity of 
these volatile oils. Berth elot has shown that by the fractional dis- 
tillation of ordinary oil of turpentine different portions may be 
obtained, being alike in odor and composition, but having a some- 
what different boiling point, deviating polarized light with a dif- 



CARBO-HYDROGEN ESSENTIAL OILS. 



407 



ferent degree, and entering with hydrochloric acid into combina- 
tions of a slightly different character. 

The following syllabus contains those binary oils which are 
obtained as such directly from the plants, or merely by a simple 
rectification of the crude product. 

Syllabus of Plants yielding Carbo-Hydrogen Essential Oils. 



Dijj'eracece. 
Dryobalanops caniphora, Borneo 
camphor tree. In the cavities 
of the trunk. 

Terebinthaccce. 
Amyris elemifera, Elemi tree — 
oleoresiu. 

Balsnmodendron rnyrrha, myrrh — 
gum resin. 

Boswellia serrata, East India Oli- 
banum tree — gum resin. 

Hedwigia balsamifera, Mountain 
balsam — oleoresiu. 

Legiimhiosce. 
Copaifera (various species) — oleo- 



Piperaccce. 
Piper cubeba, cubeb — fruit. 



Piper nigra, black pepper — fruit. 

Conifer se. 
Abies canadensis, hemlock spruce 

fir— boughs. 
Juniperus communis, juniper — 

fruit, tops, and wood. 



Juniperus sabina, savin — leaves. 



Juniperis Virginiana, Red cedar — 
leaves. 

Pinus pumilio, Mountain pine — 

oleoresin. 
Pinus palustris and other species 

of pine — oleoresin. 



Pinus sabiniana. 



Oleum camphorse, sp. gr. .92 to .945 : the natural 
oil contains camphors; solid with HC1. 



01. elemi; yield 13 per cent.; colorless; sp. gr. 
.852 ; odor agreeable, terebinthinate ; with HC1 a 
liquid and solid compound. 

01. myrrhae ; yield 2 to 2\ per cent. ; colorless or 
yellowish; taste aromatic camphoraceous ; used 
in toothache. 

01. Olibani ; yield 4 to 5 per cent. ; colorless ; sp. 
gr. .86G ; odor terebinthinate ; contains very 
little ; explodes when heated with HN0 3 . 

01. Hedwigise ; yield 11 per cent, ; yellowish; odor 
terebinthinate ; by HN0 2 , flesh-colored and car- 
mine. 

01. Copaibse ; yield 40 to 80 per cent.; colorless; 
sp. gr. .87 to .91 ; with 20 to 30 p. alcohol a tur- 
bid solution ; C 10 H" 16 -f- 2HC1 solid ; yields terpin 
slowly ; fulminates slightly with I. 

01. cubebae ; yield 5 to 15.5 per cent. ; colorless; 
sp. gr. .92 to .93; with 27 alcohol opalescent; 
with I yellow and gray vapors ; by HgSO^, brown- 
red. 

01. Piperis nigrae ; yield 1 to 3 per cent. ; sp. gr. 
.86 to .89 ; no solid compound with HC1. 

Oil of hemlock or spruce ; yield 1 oz. per 8 lb. See 
Am. Journ. Ph., 1859, 29. 

01. Juniperi ; yield of fruit £ to 2£ per cent. ; color- 
less ; sp. gr. .85 to .91 : 30^^+ 2HC1 is liquid ; 
yields terpin very slowly; with 12 p. alcohol 
turbid ; very fulminating with I. 

01. sabinaa ; yield 1 to 5 per cent. ; colorless ; sp. 
gr. .89 to .94 ; soluble in 2 p. alcohol, with mare 
opalescent; compound with HC1 not solid ; yields 
terpin after several months 
sam ; with I very fulminating. 

01. Juniperi Virginianse ; colorless; soluble in 1 p. 
alcohol, turbid with 2^ p. alcohol and more ; 
dissolves I without reaction. 

01. templinum ; colorless or pale yellow; sp. gr. 
.85; turbid with 10 p. alcohol. 

01. terebinthinee ; colorless; sp. gr. .86 to .90; 
clear solution with 10 to 12 parts alcohol; ful- 
minates violently with I ; with HC1 a solid and 
liquid compound. 

Abietine ; sp. gr. .594 at 61.70 F. ; boils at2140 F. 
For removing paint, grease, etc. ; peculiar in 
being lighter than alcohol or ether. 

The leaves of various species of Pinus yield a 
volatile oil containing C 10 H 16 and oxygenated 
compounds. 



408 on volatile oils, camphors, and resins. 

Class 2d. — Oxygenated Oils. 

Besides carbon and hydrogen, these essential oils contain oxygen, 
either in both the eleeopten and stearopten or only in the latter. 
The elseopten is usually a carbo-hydrogen, and then mostly of the 
composition C 10 H 16 ; it is but rare that the stearopten, or camphor 
as it has been called, as in the case of oil of rose, is a carbo-hydrogen. 
Many important members of this class are obtained from the natural 
families UmbelliferaB, Labiatae, Lauraceas, and Composite, but they 
are very widely diffused in other divisions of the vegetable kingdom. 
In some instances oils belonging to different groups are obtained 
from different parts of the same plant ; thus the -oils obtained by 
distilling the oleoresinous exudations of the Conifers are carbo- 
hydrogens, while the leaves and young branches by distillation 
with water frequently yield different volatile oils containing oxygen ; 
the oils from the leaves, bark, and fruit of several species of Rosacea 
contain hydrocyanic acid, and possess decidedly sedative and even 
poisonous properties, while the flowers of the same plants and all 
parts of the herbaceous Rosacese are destitute of any volatile nitro- 
genized principle. 

Of the complex series derived chiefly from the Cruciferse, and 
containing sulphur, one only, that of garlic, numbers oxygen among 
its elements. Only three of the oxygenated oils, those of cinnamon, 
gaultheria, and bitter almond, have as yet been produced by chemi- 
cal processes from other vegetable principles. This extraordinary 
attainment of modern chemistry leads to the inference that many 
others of this class are capable of artificial production. 

Being composed of two or more different liquids, their formulas 
should give the composition of these compounds ; many, however, 
are little known. The empirical formulae will never convey a cor- 
rect idea of the composition of these oils, inasmuch as each indi- 
vidual oil varies much when obtained from fresh or dried plants, 
from plants grown in a rich or poor soil, and even collected in 
different seasons ; the stearopten, the oxygenated part, varies so 
much in quantity or proportion as to sensibly affect the specific 
gravity, the boiling point, as well as the freezing and melting point; 
all these characters, when given of an oil, belong to a particular 
one, and may be modified in another oil of like purity. 

With the action of reagents, for the same reasons, there are cer- 
tain final results, nearly alike for the same pure oil, differing though 
it may in the proportion of its components, or in the degree of its 
oxidation ; the intermediate changes by a reagent from the pure 
rectified oil to the final result, which are sometimes interesting and 
characteristic, may be lost or greatly modified on account of the 
resinification. 

The oxygenated volatile oils, though heavier than the carbo- 
hydrogens, are, with a few exceptions, lighter than water; their 
specific gravity ranges from .82 to 1.09. {See Chemical History, etc.) 

The oxygenated oils, like the carbo-hydrogens, are mostly local 
and general stimulants : some of them are of the kind called car- 



OXYGENATED OILS. 



409 



urinatives, used to expel wind in colic; others are stomachics, pro- 
moters of digestion ; a few, from their influence upon the nervous 
centres, rank as antispasmodics. ^Not a few are chiefly valued as 
perfumes, whether for the toilet or in pharmacy. 

Most of the spices, as nutmeg, mace, pimento, cloves, contain 
oxygenated oils, which, in connection with peculiar camphoraceous 
or resinous ingredients, give them their value as condiments or 
seasoners. 

The herbs used in soups and stuffings, and rendering savory many 
otherwise tasteless dishes, all contain essential oils, and most of 
them of this series. It will be observed that none of the essential 
oils rank as narcotics, except in overdoses, though those of camphor, 
valerian, serpentaria, etc., as before stated, are used as cerebro-spinal 
stimulants and antispasmodics ; the peculiar oil of tea (Thea Bohea) 
is probably concerned in producing its agreeable exhilarant effects. 

As a class of essential oils, the oxygenized are the most soluble 
in alcohol and water, and enter into the Aquce (Medicatce) and 
Spiritus introduced among the Galenical preparations. 

In the following syllabus, all the oxygenated oils will be found 
under the heads of their respective plants, arranged in S3 T stematic 
order, together with their most striking characteristics and uses. 

Syllabus of Plants Yielding Oxygenated Oils, etc. 

(Mostly dicotyledons, but few monocotyledons.) 



Dicotyledons. 

Ranunculacece. 

Nigella sativa — small fennel flower 



Magnoliaccce. 

Drimys Winteri — Winter's bark 
Illicium anisatum — Star anise 



Anonacece. 
Unonaodoratissinia — Ihlang-ihlang 

Resedacece. 
Reseda odorata — Mignonette 

Violacece. 
Viola odorata — Sweet violet 

Tiliacece. 
Tilia Europsea — European linden 



seed 



bark 
seed 



flowers 



16 oz. yield 4 scr. ; pure oil is opalescent ; 
dissolves in 30 p. ale. : 
and H 2 S0 4 color violet. 

16 oz. yield 10 to 20 grs. 

50O, melts at 620, boils at 430A (See 
Unibelliferas.) Sold for oil of anise ; 
yield 1.5 to 3.5 per cent. ; sp. gr. .97 to 
.98 ; soluble in 5 alcohol. 



Ihlang-ihlang. Distilled in Manilla and 
Singapore ; used in perfumery ; very 
costly ; odor resembling jessamine and 
lilac, but sui generis. Rissemel. 



Very minute ; extracted by a fat oil 
use in perfumery. 



for 



Blue ; delightful fragrance ; yield very 
small ; for use in perfumery extracted 
by a fixed oil. 



Yield exceedingly small 
less, very fragrant. 



oil thin, color- 



410 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



Aurantiaceae. 

Citrus aurantium — Sweet orange 
" limetta — Bergainot lemon 
*' limonum — Lemon 
" lumia 

•' medica — Citron 
" vulgaris — Seville orange 



Camelliaccce. 



Thea Bohea— Tea 



Geraniacece. 
Pelargonium radula, Roseum 



Pelargonium odoratissimum 

(Willd.) 



Rutacece. 

Diosma crenata — Buchu 

" crenullata, serratifolia 
Gallipea cusparia — Angustura 
Ruta graveolens — Rue 



LeguminoscB. 



Genista Canariensis- 
wood 



■Canary rose- 



Rosacece. 



Cydonia vulgaris- 
Rose centifolia - 



-Quince 
Hundred-leaved 



leaves, 
flowers, 

and 

peel of 

fruit 



leaves 



flowering 
herb 



rose 
Rosa sempervirens — Evergreen 
rose, and other species 



Sanguisorba officinalis — Common 

burnet 
Spiraea ulm&ria lobata, filipen- 

dula, etc. — Meadow sweet 



leaves 

leaves 

bark 

herb 



wood 



peel 
petals 



root 



herb 



The oil obtained from orange leaves is 
called essence de petit grain ; .that from 
the flowers of Citrus vulgaris is the real 
oil of neroli, though probably the flowers 
of other species are mixed with them 
before distillation ; oil from the peel is 
mostly C 10 H 16 ; all contain C 10 H 18 O 2 . 
Their sp. gr. is between .82 and .90, 
and they all fulminate with iodine. 

01. aurantii flor. yield from fresh flowers 2 
to 4 per cent. ; soluble in 1 to 3 alcohol, 
with more opalescent. 

01. aurantii corticis yield 2.8 per cent, from 
fresh peel; with 7 to 10 parts alcohol 
a slightly turbid solution. 

01. bergamottce yield 2 to 3 per cent. ; solu- 
ble in half nlcohol, with more opalescent. 

01. limonis yield 1.7 to 2.1 per cent. ; with 
10 alcohol turbid. (See Am. Journ. Phar. 
1858, 136, aud 1860, 543.) 

Small proportion ; lemon - yellow, light, 
congeals readily ; exhilarant ; combined 
with theinia said to be diuretic and dia- 
phoretic. 

Yields Turkish oil of geranium ; distilled 
at Cannes and in Algeria ; resembles 
rose in odor ; most species of Pelargo- 
nium are sweet scented. 

By fractional distillation its oil yields 
geranid C 20 H 18 O 21 ; colorless ; boils at 
232° C. ; yields with fused CaCl a crys- 
talline compound, and with hydrate of 
potassium valerianic acid. 

16 oz. yield 51 to 68 grains; yellowish- 
brown, diuretic. 

16 oz. yield 7 to 23 grs. 

Is principally C n H 22 ; stim. antispasmod. 
emmenagogue ; yield from dry plant .34 
per cent. ; sp. gr. .85 to .91 ; soluble in 
1 alcohol, with more flocculent ; has been 
made synthetically. 

80 lbs. yield from 9 to 16 drachms of oil. 
Oil of rhodium. 



16 oz. yielded by expression 4 grs. 
( 100 lb. rose leaves yield less than 3 dr. ; 
sp. gr. .83 to .87 ; below 86° it as- 
j sumes the consistence of butter ; the 
| odor not altered by H 2 S0 4 ; with 100 
alcohol turbid ; the inodorous stearop- 
l_ ten is C 4 H 16 . 
Color blue ; cordial. 

C 10 H ]6 and hydruret of salicyle C 7 H 6 2 ; 
boiling point 380° ; sp. grav. 1.173. 



OXYGENATED OILS. 



411 



Myrtaceoz. 
Caryophyllus aromaticus — Cloves 



Eugenia pimenta — Allspice 
Melaleuca cajeputi — Cajeput 



Myrtus communis — Common myr- 
tle 
Mvrcia acris — Sweet bay 



Canellacece. 

Canella alba — Canella, White, cin- 
namon 

Crassulaccce. 

Rhodiola rosea — rose rout 

Umbclliferce. 
Anethum graveolens — Dill 



Angelica Arcbangelica — Angelica 
Apium graveolens — Celery 
Apium petroselinum — Parsley 



Athatnantum aureoselinum- 

Mountain parsley 
Carum carui — Caraway 



Cicuta virosa — Water hemlock 
Coriandrum sativum — Coriander 

Cuminum cyminum — Cumin 



Daucus carota — Carrot 
Foeniculum vulgare — Fennel 



Galbanum officinale — Galbanum 



Imperatoria ostruthium — Master- 
wort. 

Levisticum officinale — Lovage 
Osmorhiza longitylis — Sweet cicely 

Phellandrium aquaticum — Water 
dropwort 



flowpr- 
buds 



fruit 

leaves 



leaves & 
flowers 
leaves 



bark 



root 



fruit 



root 
fruit 
herb 



herb 
fruit 



root 



fruit 



C 10 H ]6 and caryophyllic acid C 20 H 15 O. ; 

boils at 470° F. ; yield 11.1 to 14.28 

per cent. ; sp. gr. 1.03 to 1.06 ; soluble 

in 1 p. alcohol. (See Am. Jour. Phar. 

18G2, 25.) 
Yield as much as 6 per cent. ; compos. 

like oil cloves C ]0 H 16 and C 10 H ]2 O 2 . 
C 10 H ]6 -f-H 2 O, green; sp. gr. .91 to .97; 

stimul. antispasm. ; soluble in 1 part 

alcohol. {Am. Jour. Phar., 1861, 545.) 
Very fragrant; 100 lb. fresh leaves yield 

2£ to 4* oz. 
Sp. gr. near .97; little soluble in alcohol; 

contained in bay rum. (See Amer. Jour. 

Phar. 1861, 296.) 



[0 H, 6 , odor of cajeput, and oxygenated 
portions, perhaps caryophyllic acid ; 
yield .57 per cent. 

1 lb. yields 1 dr., substitute for oil of rho- 
dium. 



Carminative ; soluble in 1440 parts of 
water, and all proportions of alcohol ; 
sp. gr. .88 to .95; yield 1.5 to 6 per 
cent. 

16 oz. yield £ to 1 drachm, contains C 5 H g O. 

Colorless or yellowish, agreeably aromatic. 

~ l0 H 1? and C 6 H g O. Herb yields f, the 
fruit 3 per cent.; sp. gr. 1.02 to 1.14; 
soluble in 2% to 3 p. alcohol; fulmin- 
ates with I. Occasionally used as diu- 
retic. 

10 H I6 and little O ; odor reminding of 
juniper; sp. gr. .843. 
_ I-I 16 and carvol C 10 H u O ; yield 2.7 to 9 
per cent. ; sp. gr. 90 to .97 ; soluble in 
1 p. alcohol. Carminative. 

Identical with oil of cumki seed. 

16 oz. yield J to 1 dr., sp. gr. .85; C 10 H 16 
and C 10 H 18 O. 

Cymol C )0 H U and cuminol C 10 H u O ; yield 
1.2 to 3.9 ; sp. gr. .90 to .97 ; soluble in 
3 p. alcohol; acrid. 

16 oz. yield 30 grs. ; diuretic, stimulant. 

Composition like oil of anise ; but C 10 H ]2 O 
still liquid at 14°, boils at 440° ; yield 2 
to 6 per cent. ; sp. gr. .89 to 1. — ; solu- 
ble in 2 to 4 p. alcohol. 

Taste and smell like resin, camphorous; 
sp. gr. .912 ; used internally and exter- 
nally in ointments, etc. 

C 1Q H 16 and hydrur. angelyle C 5 H 8 0; boil- 
ing commences at 335° ; taste aromatic, 
burning. 

Yield about .25 per cent. 

Has the odor and taste of anise ; probably 
identical with oil of anise. 

16 oz. yield from 2 scr. to 2 dr. ; golden 
yellow ; taste sweetish, afterwards burn- 
ing. 



412 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



Pimpinella anisum — Anise 

" saxifraga 

" nigra 

Caprifoliacece. 
Sambucus nigra — Common elder 

Valcrianece. 
Valeriana officinalis — Valerian 



Composite . 
Achillea millefolium — Yarrow 



Achillea moschata — Iva or forest 
lady's herb, Switzerland 



Anthemis nobilis — English chamo- 
mile 

Arnica montana — Arnica 



Artemisia absinthium — Wormwood 



Artemisia dracunculus — Tarragon 

Artemisia contra Judaica and san- 
tonica (Semen contra, S. cyuse) 

Dahlia pinnata — Dahlia 



Erechthites hieracifolia — Fire- 
weed 



Erigeron Canadense — Canadian 
flea bane 

Erigeron Philadelphicum — Phila- 
delphia fleabane 

Inula helenium — Elecampane 

Matricaria chamomilla — German 
chamomile 



Matricaria parthenium — Feverfew 



Osmitopsis astericoides — (Cape of 
Good Hope) 



fruit 



root 



flowers 



root 



herb and 

flowers 

herb 



flowers 



flowers 
root 



herb and 
flowers 

herb 

. flower 
buds 

tubers 



herb 



root 
flowers 



flowering 
herb 

herb 



Like oil of star anise {see Magnoliaceas) ; 

yield 1.4-3 per cent. ; sp. gr. .97-1 ; 

soluble in 5 alcohol. 
Golden yellow, thin ; odor like parsley, 

not agreeable ; taste bitter acrid. 
Light blue, changing to green ; otherwise 

like former. 

Yield small ; thick, mild stimulant. 



Borneen C, H 16 and valerol C 6 H 10 O ; the 
latter oxidizes in the air to a resin and 
valerianic acid ; antispasmodic ; yield 
.35 to 1.8 ; sp. gr. .87 to .97; soluble in 
1 alcohol. (See Am. Jour. Phar. 1859, 
p. 414; 1862, p. 329.) 



16 oz. yield 5 to 13 grs. ; sp. gr. .9; color 
blue or deep green; tonic and anti- 
spasmodic. 

The oil begins to boil at 170° C The 
heavier portion has the odor of worm- 
wood ; the lighter portion agreeable 
odor, reminding of peppermint. Comp. 
C 24 H 40 O 2 , called Ivaol. 

16 oz. yield 22 to 55 grs. ; spec. gr. .908 ; 
hydrur. angelyle C 10 H 16 O 2 , angelicic acid 
C 5 H 8 2 and C, H 16 . Color blue or green. 

1 lb. yellow yields about 3 grs. ; sp. gr. .90 ; 
butyraceous; yields 4 scruples; yellow- 
ish ; odor reminding of cloves ; sp. gr. 
.987, by HN0 3 grass-green. 

Comp. C 10 H 16 O, crude oil brownish-green; 
yield 4 to 1.1 per cent. ; soluble in 1 p. 
alcohol; sp. gr. .88 to .97. 

Composition like oil anise, C 10 H 12 O, liquid ; 
boils at 400°. 

Spec. grav. .91 to .97 ; dissolves in an 
equal part of alcohol, not anthelmintic ; 
bitter; C 9 H 15 0. 

Strong odor ; sweetish, burning taste ; 
when kept with water, it becomes heavier 
than it. 

Soluble in 9 p. alcohol ; occurs sometimes 
in American oil of peppermint. {See 
Stearns's paper in Proc. Am. Ph. Ass., 
1858 ; also Am. Jour. Ph.. 1860, p. 105.) 

Spec. grav. .845 ; anti-hemorrhagic. 

Yield very small ; " 

16 oz. yield from J to 1 dr. 

Resembles oil of anthemis ; color blue ; 

yields 4 to 9 per cent. ; 5C 10 H 16 + 3H 2 ; 

sp. gr. .92 to .94 ; soluble in 8 to 10 p. 

alcohol. 
8 per cent, from fresh herb ; C 10 H 16 and 

C )0 H 16 O ; greenish or straw yellow ; light, 

odor strong camphoraceous. 
Greenish-yellow ; odor reminding of cam- 
phor and cajeput ; taste burning, acrid; 

sp.gr. .931; C 10 H 16 and C 10 H 18 O. 



OXYGENATED OILS, 



413 



Tauacetum vulgare — Tansy 



Ericaceae. 

Gaultheria procumbens — "Winter- 
green 
Ledum palustre — Labrador tea 

Jasmincce. 

Jasminum grandiflorum and fra- 
grans— Jessamine 

Verbenacece. 

Aloysia citriodora — Lemon-scented 
verbena 

Labiatce. 
Hedeoma pulegioides — Pennyroyal 

Hyssopus officinalis — Hyssop 



Lavandula spica — Spike lavender 



Lavandula vera — True lavender 



Marrubium vulgare — Horehound 
Melissa officinalis — Lemon balm 



Mentha aquatica — Watermint 
Mentha crispa — Curled-leaved mint 
Mentha piperita — Peppermint 



herb 



leaves 



flowers 



herb 



herb and 
flowers 



herb and 
flowers 



herb 



herb 



Yellow or greenish ; taste warm, bitter ; 
the oil from the flowers has an acid 
reaction; yield .5 to .8 per cent.; sp. 
gr. .91 to .95 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 

Comp. C 10 H 16 and methylsalycic acid 

C 8 H 8 3 ; boiling point 41 20. 
1£ per cent.; C 10 H 16 and oxygenated oil ; 

pale yellow; odor and taste aromatic, hot. 

Yield very small ; extracted by a fixed 
oil, from which alcohol takes it up ; very 
fragrant ; used in perfumery. 



Small proportion 
merce usually 
grass oil. 



very fragrant ; in corn- 
substituted by lemon- 



Carminative, emmenag., spec. grav. .948. 

Odor persist, arom. ; taste hot, camphor's ; 
yield 1 to 1| per cent. ; sp. grav. .89 to 
.98 ; soluble in 1 to 4 p. alcohol, with 
more opalescent. 

Oleum spicse, similar to and sold for cheap 
oil of lavender; that usually kept is 
fictitious, princ. turpentine ; the fresh 
plant yields .8 to 1.75 per cent. ; sp. gr. 
.81 to .98 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol ; ful- 
minates with iodine. 

C, TI 16 O 2 and C 15 H 28 0, ; the lightest oil from 
selected flowers is most fragrant ; yield 
3 to 4.7 per cent. ; sp. gr. .87 to .95 ; 
soluble in 1 p. alcohol ; fulminates with 
iodine. 

Very small quantity. 

Used for flavoring medicines ; also in per- 
fumery ; yield .04 to .8 per cent. ; sp. 
gr. .85 to .97 ; soluble in 5 to 6 p. al- 
cohol. 

This and other species of mentha are often 
mixed with peppermint in distilling the 
oil ; yields nearly 1 scr. to the pound. 

Not so cooling as peppermint ; freezing in 
the cold ; yield 1 to 2.3 per cent, ; sp. 
gr. .87 to .97 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 

C, fT 20 O and menthen C 10 H 18 ; boiling point 
306O ; best distilled by steam ; yield .8 
to 1.3 per cent.; sp. gr. .84 to .97; 
soluble in 1 to 3 p. alcohol ; more, opal- 
escent. (See Stearns's paper in Proc. 
Am. Ph. Ass., 1858, and Jim. Journ. Ph., 
1860, 105.) Oil of peppermint has been 
used for local anaesthesia. Prof. Fluki- 
ger has called attention to the magnifi- 
cent fluorescence of peppermint oil ; 1 
drop nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.2, added to 50 
to 70 drops of the oil, causes this to ap- 
pear after an hour or two ; heat hastens 
the appearance, and 2 or 3 times the 
quantity of acid develops it almost in- 
stantly. 



414 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



Mentha pulegium — Europ. penny 
royal 

Mentha viridis — Spearmint 



Monarda punctata — Horsemint 

Nepeta cataria — catnep 

" citriodorata — Lemon cat- 
mint 
Ocymum basilicum — Sweet basil 



Origanum creticum — Spanish hop 



Origanum majorana — Sweet mar- 
joram 



Origanum vulgare — Origanum 



Pogostemon — Patchouly 



Rosmarinus officinalis — Rosemary 



Salvia officinalis — Sage 



Satureja hortensis — Summer sa- 
vory 
Thymus serpyllum — Lemon thyme 



Thymus vulgaris — Garden thyme 



Borraginaceos. ■ 

Heliotropium peruvianum and 
grandiflorum — Heliotrope 

Convolvulacece. 

Convolvulus scoparius and flori- 
bundus. Rosewood 



herb 



herb and 
seeds 

flowering 
top3 



herb 



herb 



flowers 



subterra- 
nean 
stem 



C 10 H 16 and C 10 H 16 O ; 100 lbs. fresh herb 
yield rather less than 1 lb. ; sp. gr. 
.927; boils at 3950. 

Spec. grav. .91 ; C 16 H 28 (Kane) ; boiling 
point 320O; 100 lbs. fresh herb yield 3 
oz. ; soluble in less than 1 p. alcohol. 

C 30 H 42 O and thymol C 10 H u O, solid at 40O 
F. ; rubefacient. 

16 oz. fresh herb yield 9 grs. ; carminative. 

16 oz. yield 7J grs.; odor pleasant; ful- 
minates with iodine. 

Yield from herb 1.5 per cent., from seed 
.12 per cent, 
stearopten red by H 2 S0 4 . 

Yield 1.5 per cent.; straw-yellow, red; 
brown when old; sp. gr. .946; odor and 
taste aromatic, hot ; the commercial oil 
is generally adulterated with oil of tur- 
pentine ; used for bathing and in tooth- 
ache. 

Pale yellow ; tonic, stimulant ; its cam- 
phor is C 14 H 30 O 5 ; yield .4 to 2 2 per 
cent. ; sp. gr. .89 to .90 ; soluble in 1 
p. alcohol ; slightly opalescent with 
more. 

C 50 H 80 O, boils at 3540; rubefac. ; oil of 
commerce often adulterated; yield 1.5 
to 2.34; sp. gr. .87 to .90; with 12 to 
16 p. alcohol a turbid solution ; fulmi- 
nates with I. 

Distils at 2820 to 2940 C. ; contains a 
carbo-hydrogen C 30 H 26 and a stearopten 
homologous with Borneo camphor 
C 10 H ]8 O ; crystalline form is hexagonal, 
melting at 540 to 650 C., boiling at 
2960 C. 

C 45 H 76 2 ? boiling point 3650 ; mostly 
adulterated with oil of turpentine or oil 
of spike ; yield .8 to 2.5 per cent. ; sp. 
gr. .88 to .93 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 

C 12 B 20 O and C 9 H 15 ; tonic and diuretic; 
yield .4 to 1.34 per cent. ; sp. gr. .86 to 
.92 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 

25 per cent. ; yellowish ; fragrant ; in 
perfumery. 

The fresh plant yields oil of acid reaction ; 
reddish-yellow ; used in perfumery, and 
in liniments and ointments ; yield .07 
to .4 ; sp. gr. .89 to .95 ; soluble in 1 p. 
alcohol. 

Comp. thymen C 10 H 16 and thymol C 10 H 14 O ; 
colorless, turns yellow and brown-red; 
yield .4 to 2.5 per cent. ; sp. gr. .87 to 
.90 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 



Small quantity; extracted by oils; odor 
vanilla-like ; in perfumery. 



Nearly colorless ; thin ; odor rose-like ; 
frequently adulterated with fat oil ; used 
for adulterating otto of rose ; in per- 
fumery, oil of rhodium. 



OXYGENATED OILS, 



415 



Oleacece. 
Syringa vulgaris — Lilac 

Chenopodcce. 

CLenopodium ambrosioides — Mexi 

can tea 
Chenopodium anthelminticum — 

Worniseed 



Cinnamomum aromaticum — Chi- 
nese cinnamon 

Cinnamomum Zeylanicum — Ceylon 
cinnamon 



Cinnamomum Loureirii — Cassia 

buds 
Cinnamomum Culilavan — Culila- 

wan 

Laurus nobilis — Bay tree 
Laurus Burmanni ? — Massay bark 
Ocotea Picbury minor — Pichury 
Ocotea ? 



Persea caryophyllata — Clove cin- 
namon 

Sassafras officinale — Sassafras 



Myristicece. 
Myristica moscbata — Nutmeg 



Santalacece. 

Santalum myrtifolium ■ 
saunders 



White 



Aristolochiaccce. 

A sarum Canadense — Canada snake- 
root 
Asarum Europium — Asarabacca 



Serpentaria Virginiana — Virginia 
snakeroot 

EaphorbiacccE. 
Croton eleuteria — Cascarilla 



flowers 

herb 
seed 



bark 



flower 
buds 
bark 



berries 

bark 

fruit 

? 

bark 



wood and 
bark 



kernel 
arillus 



wood 



root 



Small proportion ; usually extracted by fat 
oils ; used in perfumery. 



16 oz. yield 26 grs. 

taste and smell. 
C 10 H 16 and C 10 H 16 O 2 ; 

1 per cent. ; sp. gr. 



burning aromatic 

anthelmintic ; yield 
.908. 



bark 



fComp. C 10 H 16 , hydruret cinnamyle= 
C 9 H 8 0, cinnamic acid = C 9 H 8 2 , and 
resin ; Chinese cinnamon yields .2 to 

j 2.0 per cent,; sp. gr. 1.03 to 1.09; 

j soluble in 1 p. alcohol ; Ceylon cin- 
namon yields .8 to 2.5 per cent. ; sp. 
gr. 1.006 to 1.09 ; soluble in 1 p. alco- 

l hoi. 
Agreeably aromatic, hot. 

Colorless ; odor of cajeput and clove ; 
heavier than water ; by HN0 3 carmine- 
red. 

16 oz. yield | to 1 dr.; sp. grnv. .914; 
comp. C 20 H 32 O, contains two isomeric oils. 

Consists of a light and heavy oil ; odor of 
sassafras ; turned red by HN0 3 

Yield .7 per cent,; greenish; contains 4 
oils, differing in boiling point and odor. 

Origin unknown, though called Guiana 
laurel oil ; C ]0 H 16 and some O ; sp. gr. 
.864 ; odor terebinthinate, agreeable. 

Thick ; dark red-brown ; odor and taste 
of cloves and cinnamon; used in per- 
fumery. 

C I0 H 16 and C 10 H 10 O 2 ; boils at 420O : yield 
2 5 to 4.5; sp. gr. 1.07 to 1.09; soluble 
in 4—5 p. alcohol. 

01. nuc. inoschat. ; yield 6 per cent. ; sp. 
gr. .92 to .95; compos, like nest. 

Oleum macidis is oftener met with in com- 
merce : C 16 H 32 5 and C 8 H ]2 ; yield 1.6 to 
9.4 per cent. ; sp. gr. .92 to .95 : soluble 
in 6 p. alcohol. 

16 oz. yield ^ to 2 dr. ; used in perfumery. 



Light colored, fragrant. 

Yield 12 grs. fr. 16 oz. ; spec. grav. 1.018, 
comp. CgH 8 ; camphor C 4 H 5 ; yellow- 
ish, thick ; odor reminding of valerian. 

Yield about J per cent. ; color green. 



16 oz. yield 27 to 68 grs. ; spec. grav. .92; 
used for fumigation 
other oil. 



416 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



Urticece. 



Humulus lupuhis — Hop 


strobiles 


Myricacecz. 




Myrica gale — Sweet gale — Dutch 
myrtle 


leaves 


Coniferce. 




Thuja occidentalis — Arbor vitse 
Monocotyledons. 


young 
o ranches 


Zingiber aceaz. 




Alpinia galanga — Galangle 
Curcuma zedoaria — Zedoary 
Elettaria cardamomum — Carda- 
mom 


root 
seed 


Zingiber officinale — Ginger 


rhizoma 


Amaryllidacece. 




Polyanthes tuberosa — Tuberose 


flowers 


Iridece. 




Crocus sativus — Saffron, 


pistils 


Iris florentina — Orris 


rhizoma 


Lilicece. 




Convallaria majalis — Lilly of the 

valley 


flowers 


Aroidece. 




Acorus calamus — Calamus 


rhizoma 



OraminecB. 

Andropogon ivarancusse — East In- 
dia lemon grass 



Andropogon Schoenanthus 



herb 



Spec. gr. .91 

burning and bitterish 



C 10 H 18 O ; taste 
yield .8 per cent. 



100 lb. yield 2 drs. ; dark yellow or brown 
thickish ; agreeable odor ; burning taste 
sp. gr. .876; with I green. 

Colorless or yellow, heavier than water 



16 oz. yield 1 to 3 scr. ; taste sim. cardam. 

16 oz. yield 1 dr. ; thick, yellowish-white. 

Odor penetrating, aromatic ; taste hot. 
camphorous ; yields 4 to 4.7 per cent. ; 
sp. gr. .93 to .96 ; soluble in 1 p. alcohol. 

16 oz. yield J to 2 dr. ; compos. C 10 H lc -f- 
variable prop. H 2 ; sp. gr. .89; odor 
agreeable, ginger-like ; taste mild ; after- 
wards burning and bitter. 



Small proportion ; extracted by fixed oils 
used in perfumery. 



16 oz. yield I J dr., yellow, heavier than 
water, acrid ; by keeping it turns white 
and lighter ; probably the active princ. 

Crystallizable ; contains 21 per cent. ; 
odor of violets. (Irin.) 

Quantity very minute ; the odor extracted 
by fat oils ; used in perfumery. 



100 lb. fr. rt. yield 16 oz. ; 1 lb. dry 25 to 
145 grs. ; sp. gr. .89 to .99 ; soluble in 1 



C 10 H 16 and oxygenated oil : yellow 



ighter 
than water ; odor resembling rose ; taste 
reminding of lemon ; used to adulterate 
the German otto of rose, and sometimes 
sold as oil of verbena. 
Resembles the former ; but odor of melissa ■; 
substituted for oil of melissa, and sold 
under the name of E. I. oil of melissa 
and oil of citronella. 



Class 3d. — Nitrogenated Oils. 

The few known contain prussic acid, from which they may be 
freed by agitating with protochloride of iron and lime and rectify- 
ing, without materially altering their odor. They do not pre-exist 
in the plants from which they are derived, but are the results of a 
reaction in the presence of water, between amygdalin with emulsin 
or similar compounds. 



SULPHURETTED OILS. 



417 



The following syllabus embraces the most prominent plants which 
yield volatile oils containing hydrocyanic acid ; it will be observed 
that they are all members of the natural order of Bosaceoe, mostly 
of the sub-order Amygdalae, and a few of Pomece : — 



Amygdalus communis, var. amara 

— Bitter almond 
Cerasus (various species) — Cherry 
Persica vulgaris — Peach 
Prunus domestica and others — 

Plum 
Pyrus communis and malus — Pear 

and apple 



kernels 

bark 
leaves & 
kernels 

leaves & 
kernels 



These oils are very similar in their sensible 
properties; the oil of almond is hydruret 
of benzyle C 7 H 6 in which hydrocyanic 
acid HCy is dissolved. All are poison- 
ous. 

25 lbs. of bitter almond cake after the ex- 
pression of the fixed oil yield about 2 
oz. oil of bitter almond. 



Nitrogenated Oils. 



Oleum amygdal. am. 



cerasi sem. 
lauro-cerasi fol. 



(Yield from 1 lb. 

16 to 80 grs. 

25 grs. 
40.5 " 



Sp. gr. 1.04-1.07. Boiling point, 320O to 
390O F. ; react acid on litmus paper. 
Iodine is quietly dissolved in small 
quantity. Nitric acid no reaction in 
cold ; on boiling very little nitrous acid 
is evolved. Sulphuric acid dissolves an 
equal quantity of oil, separated by 
water, little thickened. Alcohol of 85 
per cent, miscible in all proportions. 
Nitroprusside copper, no reaction. Pro- 
duct of boiling with alcoholic caustic 
potassa in excess dissolves in water. 



Class 4th. — Sulphuretted Oils. 

Of the oils belonging to this group, only oil of mustard has been 
used medicinally, particularly in alcoholic solution, under the name 
of spiritus sinapis, as a powerful rubefacient. But the activity of, 
all the plants yielding these oils is due to them, at least principally 
so. 

Some of these plants are valued for culinary purposes, owino- to 
the presence of the compounds of allyle. It is worthy of note that, 
with the exception of assafcetida, sagapenum, and garlic, all belong 
to the family of Crucifene, many plants of which likewise yield an 
abundance of fixed oils, obtained by expression, free from the essen- 
tial oils ; they are extensively cultivated for these. 

The sulphuretted oils are compounds of allyle, and of its homolo- 
gous carbo-hydrogen ferulyle, as the following table will show: — 



Allyle (C 3 H 5 ) 2 

Oxide of allyle (C 3 H" 5 ) 4 
Ferulyle C 6 H 12 



Sulphide of allyle (oil of garlic) (CgEs^-h S 

Sulphocyanide of allyle (oil of mustard) (C 3 H 5 CNS) 
Protosulphide of ferulyle ") oil of fC l2 H* g S 
Bisulphide of ferulyle J assafoetida 1c„H„,S 9 



27 



418 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



Syllabus of Plants yielding Sulphuretted Oils, etc. 



Dicotyledons. 






Orudferce. 






Alliaria officinalis — Jack by the 


leaves 


C 6 H 10 S, if distilled from fresh spring root 


hedge 


and root 


it is C 8 H 10 NS 2 


Capsella bursa pastoris — Shep- 


seed 


C 6 H 10 S and C 8 H 10 NS 2 . 


herd's purse 






Cheirarthus annuus — Wall-flower 


seed 


Same compos. 


Cochlearia armoracia — Horse-rad- 


root 


C 8 H 10 NS 2 ; 100 lb. fresh root yield nearly 


ish 




7 oz. 


Cochlearia officinalis — Common 


herb 


Same comp. contained in spiritus coch- 


scurvy grass 




learise. 


Iberis amara — Bitter candytuft 


herb and 
seed 


Same comp. 


Lepidium sativum, campestre, etc. 


seed 


C 6 H 10 S ; is decomposed on rectification. 


— Cress 






Raphanus raphanistrum — Wild 


seed 


C 6 H 10 S and C 8 H 10 NS 2 . 


mustard 






Raphanus sativus — Radish 


root and 
seed 


Same composition. 


Sinapis nigra — Black mustard 


seed 


C 8 H 10 NS 2 ; yield 5 per cent. 


Sisymbrium nasturtium — Water- 


seed 


Same and C 6 H 10 S. 


radish 






Thlapsi arvense — Treacle mustard 


herb and 
seed 


C 6 H 10 S and C 8 H 10 S. 


Umbelliferce. 






Ferula assafcetida — Assafoetida 


gum- 


C 12 H 22 S and C 12 H 22 S 2 ; yellow ; sp. gr. 




resin 


.942 ; on standing liberates 11 2 S. 


" persica (?) — Sagapenum 




Contains C 5 H 10 S or C 12 H 2i S (?) 


Monocotyledons. 






Liliacece. 






Allium sativum — Garlic 


bulb 


C 6 H 10 S and C 6 IT 10 O. TOO lb. yield 3 to 4 
oz. ; heavier than water 



Oils that may be obtained artificially. 

1. Oxygenated. 

Oil of cinnamon from styrone C 8 H 10 by platina black = C 9 H g O hydruret of cinnamyle. 
Oil of gaultheria from 2 parts crystal, salicylic acid C 9 H 8 b 3 , 2 anhydrous methylic 
alcohol CH 4 0, and 1 H 2 S0 4 =C 8 H 8 3 . 

2. Nitrogenated. 

Oil of bitter almonds, from styracine C 1S H 16 2 by HN0 3 , besides benzoic and nitro-ben- 
zoic acids also = C 7 H 6 2 and HCN. 

3. Sulphuretted. 

Oil of mustard, from iodide of propylene, C 3 H 5 ,I by sulpho-cyanuret of potassium 



Class 5th. — Empyreumatic Volatile Oils. 

If organic substances are subjected to dry distillation, the distil- 
late contains, besides water, some acids and also some oily liquids, 
which, so far as they are used in medicine or accompany medicinal 
products, are here treated of. Their composition varies very much, 
as would be expected, and the}^ have but few properties in common 
except their physical appearance, their empj^reumatic odor, and 
their indifference towards certain chemical reagents. After rectifi- 



CAMPHORS. 419 

cation they are usually colorless, and are mostly not affected by 
iodine and but little attacked by cold nitric acid. 

DippeVs animal oil, formerly much used in medicine, has an alka- 
line reaction, consists of various ternary alkaloids, and turns dark 
under the influence of light and air. Poisonous; used as antispas- 
modic. Dose, 5 to 25 drops. 

Camphors. 

This class of solid crystalline substances has already been shown 
to have a close relation to the essential oils. Common camphor, 
C 10 H lfl O, is obtained from an evergreen-tree growing in China and 
Japan, the roots and twigs of which are cut into chips and placed 
with water in large iron vessels, surmounted by earthen capitals 
furnished with a lining of rice straw. A moderate heat being ap- 
plied, and the camphor volatilized by the steam, it collects upon 
the straw in a crude and impure condition, and is collected and 
packed for exportation as crude camphor. It is refined by resubli- 
mation, and then constitutes the valuable and characteristic drug 
so familiar to almost every one. As already stated, camphor is an 
oxide of the radical C 10 H 16 , and one of the so-called camphene 
series. 

Some of the essential oils can be converted into camphors by 
solution in water and long exposure. The carbo-hydrogen con- 
stituents of these combine with the elements of water to form hy- 
drates, which appear to be the true camphors. These are solid, 
colorless, crystalline, fusible bodies, less volatile than the essential 
oils, soluble in alcohol and ether, and partially in water. 

Some of the substances usually treated of as neutral crystalline 
principles are classified by the German chemists as camphors ; of 
this number cantharidin, the active principle of Spanish flies, and 
nicotianin, one of the constituents of tobacco, may be instanced. 
There is much obscurity now connected with the precise habitudes 
and relations of these and other crystalline principles associated 
with oils and otherwise distributed in plants. 

Three different kinds of camphor have been distinguished by 
their behavior in the polariscope, one turning the ray of polarized 
light to the left, one to the right, and one being inactive. The 
camphor deviating to the right is stated to be that from Laurus 
camphora. 

Camphor deviating to the right. — The vapor conducted over red-hot 
iron gives an oily liquid containing naphthalin and a hydrocarbon 
of the composition of benzole. Under the influence of heat and 
nitric acid, 3 eq. of oxygen combine with camphor to form cam- 
phoric acid, C 10 H 16 O 4 , which deviates light to the right. Anhy- 
drous phosphoric acid and fused chloride of zinc produce water 
and cymol, C 10 H I4 . 

Camphor deviating to the left — From the oil of Matricaria parthe- 
nium, that portion distilling between 200° and 220° C. With 
nitric acid this furnishes camphoric acid which deviates light to 
the left. 



420 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHOES, AND RESINS. 

Inactive camphor, from the. volatile oils of many of the Labiatise, 
lavender, marjoram, sage, etc. These are without effect upon po- 
larized light. 

The camphors from oil of tansy and valerian, and that from sage 
by nitric acid, have not been tested by the polariscope. 

Borneo camphor, obtained from Dryobalanops camphora, and 
held in the East Indies at a very high price, is a hydrate of bor- 
neen, and has the composition C 10 H 18 O 2 . It is said to be deposited 
by moist oil of valerian. Its alcoholic solution deviates polarized 
light towards the right. By the action of nitric acid it loses two 
equivalents of hydrogen, and is converted into common camphor. 

Lowig describes numerous camphors, of which the following are 
illustrations: Lemon camphor, a compound of oil of lemon and 
water, has the composition C 10 H 22 O 6 ; but, by being heated, loses 
two atorn^ of water. Juniper-berry water, treated with caustic 
potassa, yields a camphor=C 10 H ]8 O. The crude oil distilled from 
parsley seed, dissolved in water, after a few days, deposits a cam- 
phor=O 10 H 7 O 2 . 

Caryophyllin, C 10 H 16 O, the camphor of cloves, occurs in white 
needles; inodorous and tasteless when pure; soluble in ether and 
boiling alcohol; colored blood-red by H 2 S0 4 . 

Mint camphor, C 10 H 20 O, from A merican oil of peppermint ; color- 
less prisms; odor and taste of peppermint: very soluble in alcohol 
and ether. 

Anise camphor, C 10 H 12 O, the crystallizable portion of oil of anise ; 
fusing point, 66°. 

Monarda camphor, C ]0 H 14 O, from oil of monarda ; white tables ; 
fuses at 118 ; congeals at 100°. 

Myristicin, C 10 H ]6 O, from oil of mace ; white needles ; odor of 
the oil ; red by H 2 S0 3 . 

Sassafras camphor, C 10 H lo O 2 , from oil of sassafras ; hexagonal 
prisms ; odor and taste of the oil ; sp. gr. 1.245 ; red solution with 

Irin, the crystallizable oil of Iris Florentina. 

Helenin, C 21 H 28 3 , from the water distilled over elecampane ; white 
quadrangular crystals ; faint odor and taste ; lighter than water ; 
with H 2 S0 4 wine-red solution. 

Asarin, C 20 H 26 O 5 , from the water distilled over Asarum Europium ; 
white crystals; gaseous CI and H a S0 4 color blood-red or brown- 
red. 

Anernonin, C ]5 H ]2 6 , from the water distilled over Eanunculus 
acris and various species of Anemone ; needles, producing heat and 
numbness upon the tongue ; yield anemonic acid when boiled with 
BaO. 

Nicotianin, from the water distilled from tobacco ; odor of tobacco 
smoke; taste aromatic and bitter; soluble in alcohol, ether, and 
potassa. 



RESINS. 421 

Caoutchouc and Caoutchoucoids. 

These principles occur in the milky juice of various plants, prin- 
cipally belonging to the natural orders Euphorbiaceas, Urticacea?, 
and Apocynacese, and are suspended therein in the form of true 
emulsions. In their pure state they are colorless, solid, and either 
at ordinary or at an elevated temperature, very elastic. They are 
amorphous, inodorous, and tasteless, lighter than water, insoluble 
in water and alcohol, and soluble in pure ether, chloroform, and 
some empyreumatic oils. They consist of carbon and hydrogen 
(the allied viscin contains also 0), and are of very indifferent che- 
mical behavior. 

Caoutchouc, gum-elastic, or India rubber, is the product of many 
plants, particularly of Siphonia elastica and various species of 
Hevea, Urceola, Artocarpus, Ficus, etc. Sp. gr. .925 ; composition 
C 8 H 14 (perhaps like the following C 10 H 16 ) ; fusible at 445°, and re- 
maining sticky for a long time ; 2 parts with 1 p. sulphur and 1 p. 
magnesia yield a mixture of such hardness that it can be polished. 

The vulcanization of caoutchouc was discovered by Hancock^ 
and consists in incorporating sulphur with the anhydrous substance, 
whereby it loses its solubility in the ordinary solvents. 

The extensive uses of caoutchouc, and particularly of the vulcan- 
ized, in the arts, are too well known to require to be particularized. 

Guttapercha is obtained from Isonandra gutta, Sapotacese, and 
contains about 14 per cent, white, and 4 to 6 per cent, of yellow 
resin, which are the oxides of the carbo-hydrogen, C 10 H 16 , consti- 
tuting the chief portion of it. It is hard and scarcely elastic at 
ordinary temperature; but becomes very elastic- at a slightly 
elevated heat ; its best solvents are chloroform and oil of turpen- 
tine. 

Pure white gutta-percha may be procured by dissolving in chlo- 
roform, filtering and precipitating with alcohol ; after washing with 
alcohol, and drying, it should be boiled in water, and while still 
hot, rolled into cylinders. 

{See Liquor G-utta-Percha?, page 377.) 

Viscin, or Bird-lime, is obtained by expressing the fruit of the 
mistletoe, Viscum album, and dilating with water; it is transpa- 
rent, very sticky (German, leim = glue) at the common temperature, 
contains about 15 per cent, (the pure?) of oxygen, and dissolves in 
ether, volatile oils, and warm lyes. It is used in Germany for kill- 
ing flies and catching small birds. 

Resins. 

The resins are very extensively diffused in the vegetable kingdom, 
and there is, perhaps, no plant which does not contain one or more 
principles which might be classified with the resins. The defini- 
tion of a resin is rather vague, but we may, in a general way, de- 
scribe among this class substances which are solid at ordinary tem- 
peratures, more or less transparent, inflammable, readily fusible, do 
not volatilize unchanged, become negatively electric by rubbing, 



422 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHORS, AND RESINS. 



are insoluble in water, soluble in alcobol, and sometimes, also, in 
ether and oil of turpentine. They are mostly inodorous, and are 
readily incorporated with fatty bodies by fusion. They are not, as 
a class, disposed to crystalline forms, being mostly amorphous ; their 
ultimate composition is carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. 

The origin of resins must be looked for in the action of the air 
on essential oils, which lose part of their hydrogen and absorb 
oxygen; this may- occur, as in the case of turpentine and copaiva, 
in the plants producing them, or after the extraction of the essential 
oils. To this fact may be traced their mixed character. The vola- 
tile oils being usually mixtures of two or more oils, the resins are 
apt to be constituted of several similar though not identical resins. 
By treatment with alcohol, ether, oil of turpentine, etc., the different 
constituents can generally be separated. Many of the resins — those 
containing most oxygen — play the part of acids, and are, in fact, 
designated as such; these form, with alkalies and metallic oxides, 
compounds, some of which are soluble and others insoluble in alco- 
hol, while some resins are quite indifferent to the action of alkalies. 
Some, so-called, soft resins possess strong odors; these are usually 
imperfectly oxidized, and contain portions of essential oil. 

Resins generally resemble the corresponding essential oils in their 
stimulating effects, though some of them, which may be termed 
acrid resins, including the cathartics, appear to bear no therapeutical 
relation to the essential oils. A few of the gum resins are adapted, 
by their control over the nervous system, to use as antispasmodics. 

Syllabus of Resins. 
I. Resins Proper. 



Name, origin, etc. 



Cistinece. 

Ladanum, labdanum. From 
Cistus Creticus and Cypri- 
cus. Sp. gr. 1.186; dark 
brown, soft. 

Zygophyllece. 

Guaiaci resina U.S. P. From 
Guaiacum officinale. Sp. gr. 
1.205 to 1 228. 

TerebinthacecB. 

Mastich. From Pistacia len- 
tiscus. Sp.gr. 1.074; yel- 
lowish grains, softens be- 
tween the teeth. 

Leguminosce. 
Copaiva resin. From Copaiba. 



Composition and properties. 



Uses. 



Volatile oil. 

86 per cent, resin, C 20 H 30 O. 

7 per cent. wax. 



80 per cent, resin. 
Guaiacic acid. 
Gum extractive. 



Acid resin sol. 

Masticin ; resin soluble in hot alcohol. 

C 20 H 3)°- 

Trace of volatile oil. 



Soft indifferent resin. 
Copaivic acid C 20 H 30 O 2 ; crystallizable 
from solution in petroleum. 



Obsolete. 



Alterative 
stimulant. 



Adjunct in pills 
and basis of a 
varnish. 



Stimulant, less 
active than the 
oil. 



RESINS. 



423 



Name, origin, etc. 



Anime. From Hymenaea cour 
baril. 



Copal. From HymenaBa ver- 
rucosa and other trees \ 
Sp.gr. 1.045 to 1.139; very 
bard ; fracture conchoidal ; 
nearly inodorous and taste 
less. 



Resin of Peruvian balsam. 
From Balsamum Peruvia- 
num. 

Convolvulaccce. 
Resina jalapae. From ipomcea 
jalapa. 

CannabinacecB. 

Extractum cannabis. From 
Cannabis Indica. 



Euphorbiacece. 

Lac (sbellac and seedlac). 
From Croton lacciferum by 
the puncture of Coccus lac- 
ca, and from Ficus religiosa 
and Indica — ( Urticcce). 

Euphorbium. From various 
species of Euphorbia ; in- 
odorous ; taste acrid, burn- 
ing. 

ConifercB. 

Cowrie, Australian Dammar. 
From Dammara Australis ; 
sp. gr. 1.04 to 1.062. 

East Indian Dammar. From 
Pinus dammara ; sp. gr. 
1.056 to 1.097; softatl670. 



Composition and properties. 



Acid resin soluble in cold alcohol. 
Lndifferent resin C 40 H 66 O, cryst. from hot 

alcohol, sol. 
2 per cent, volatile oil. 

1. Resin, soft, fusible in water-bath 
sol. in 72 per cent, alcohol, and oil of 
turpentine, C 40 H 64 O 5 . 

2. Resin, soft, fusible below 21 20 F., 
sol. in alcohol, ether, and oil of tur- 
pentine, isomeric with No. 1. 

3. Resin, white, not so readily fusible, 
soluble in alcohol and ether, C 40 H 62 O 3 . 

4. Resin, white, still less fusible, sol. in 
alcohol, solution of potassa, insol. in 
alcohol and ether. 

•"). Resin, insol. in all menstrua, C 40 H 62 O. 
Acid, C 20 H 28 O 3 , crystallizes in rhombic 
prisms. 



Convolvulin, rhodeoretin, C 3] H 50 0. 



Neutral resin soluble in alkalies, asso- 
ciated with chlorophylle. 

By the oxidizing influence of HN0 3 , sp. 
gr. 1.32, yields a crystallizable acid 
and oxycannabin C 20 H 12 O 8 , in large 
fiat, colorless prisms, insoluble in 
water and ether, soluble in bisulphide 
of carbon; melts at 1750 C. ; sub- 
limes in needles. The most reliable 
tests for ext. cannabis are its odor 
when moderately heated ; its indiffer- 
ence to alkalies ; its insolubility in 
alcohol, ether, chloroform, benzole, 
and turpentine ; and its reaction with 
nitric acid.* 



Different resins, 
matter. 



wax, gluten, coloring 



One resin (C 20 H 31 O 3 ) dissolving easily, 
and another with difficulty in cold 
alcohol — a third insoluble in cold al- 
cohol, but crystallizes from hot alco- 
holic solution (C 45 H 70 OJ. 



absolute alcohol and oil of turpentine. 
57 per cent, dammaric acid, C 20 H 30 O 3 , 

soluble in alcohol. 
Resin soluble in cold alcohol. 
Dammarine insoluble in cold alcohol. 



Uses 



Used in 
nishes. 



See part V. 
Neutral prin- 
cip. 

Narcotic. 
See Extracta. 



In varnishes, ce- 
ments, etc. 



Acrid, cathar- 
tic, vesicant, 
etc. Obsolete. 



In varnishes. 



* See paper by Prof. Procter, in the Proc. Amer. Phar. Ass., xii. 245. 



424 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHOES, AND RESINS, 



Name, origin, etc. 



Sandarac. From Juniperus 
communis in warmer cli- 
mates, and from Thuja arti- 
culata; sp. gr. 1.05 to 1.09 ; 
small grains, pale yellow, 
transparent ; faint odor. 

Resina. From Terebinthina. 



Fossil Resins. 

Succinum. Amber ; sp. gr 
1.065 to 1.070 ; colorless to 
deep yellow ; tasteless ; aro- 
matic odor when heated. 



Asphaltum. 



Composition and properties. 



Uses. 



75 per cent. C 20 H 3i O 3 , easily soluble in la yarn: 

alcohol. 
C 40 H 62 O 5 , not easily soluble in alcohol. 
C 20 H 30 O 3 , soluble in boiling alcohol. 



Colopholic acid, taken up by cold 70 per 

cent, alcohol. 
Pinic, amorphous sylvic acid, taken up 

by cold alcohol of 70 per cent. 
Sylvic acid, 

hot alcohol 



Two resins, volatile oil, succinic acid, 
and bitumen, by action of HN0 3 arti- 
ficial musk. 



Most probably the product of oxidation 
of oleum petrse. Many bituminous 
resins are mixtures of asphaltum and 
petroleum. 



In plasters, 

soaps, ce- 
ments, etc. 



For ol. succini, 
varnishes, etc. 



In varnishes, 
roofing, etc. 



II. Natural Oleoresins. 



Name, origin, etc. 


Composition and properties. 


Uses. 


Terebinlhacece. 








Elemi. From Amyris elemi- 


60 per cent, acid resin sol. in alcohol. 


Stim. in oint- 


fera and Zeylanica ; sp. gr. 


20 per cent, indifferent resin crystal- 


ments. 


1.055 ; yellowish white ; 


lizing from sol. in hot alcohol. 






fused at 2450. 


10 to 13 per cent, volatile oil. 






Cyprian turpentine. From 


Volatile oil. 




Stimulating. 


Pistacia terebinthus. The 


Resin soluble in cold alcohol. 






turpentine of the ancients. 


Soft resin insoluble in cold alcohol. 






Opaque, very thick, green- 








ish-yellow ; odor of fennel. 








Leguminosce. 








Copaiba. Sp. gr. .916 to .997. 


31 to 80 per cent, volatile oil. 




Diuretic, stimu- 


From various species of Co- 


1.6 per cent, soft brown resin. 




lant. 


paifera. 


Copaivic acid, see Resins Proper. 






Coniferoz. 








Terebinthina. From Pinus 


About 17 per cent, volatile oil. 




Stim. emmena- 


palustris, and other species 


Resina U. S. P. 




gogue. 


of Pinus ; gray, bitter, not 








transparent. 








Terebinthina Gallica. French 


Like the foregoing. 




do. 


or Bordeaux turpentine. 


The resin contains pimaric acid C 20 H 30 O.,. 




Thin, yellowish, pellucid. 


which, when heated in alcohol, 
comes sylvic acid. 


be 




Terebinthina Veneta. From 


About 20 per cent, volatile oil. 




In stimulating 


Larix Europaea. Venice tur- 


Resins and succinic acid. 




external rem- 


pentine : nearly colorless, 






edies. 


transparent. 








Terebinthina Canadensis. 


40 per cent, resin sol. in alcohol. 




Cement in mi- 


From Abies balsamea. Bal- 


33.4 sub resin sol. in alcohol with diffi- 


croscopy. 


sam of fir. 


culty. 
118.6 per cent, volatile oil. 







RESINS. 



425 



Name, origin, etc. 


Composition and properties. 


Uses. 


Strasburg turpentine, Tere- 


35 per cent, volatile oil. 


Stimulant. 


binthina Argentoratensis. 


Abietinic acid, abietin, indifferent resin, 




From Abies pectinata ; pale 


succinic acid. 




yellow, transparent, agree- 






able odor. 






Common olibanum. From Pi- 


Volatile oil. 




nus Abies. 


Resin fusible at 2120. 


Stimulating ; for 




" at 2930. 


fumigations. 



III. Gum Resins. 



Name, origin, etc. 



Guttiferce. 



Gambogia. From Stalagmitis 
cambogioides and 
species of Garcinia. 
or reddish-yellow. 



Composition and properties. 



Uses. 



19.5 per cent. gum. 
several 80 per cent, gambogic acid. 
Brown 



Terebinthacece. 

Myrrha. From Balsamoden- 
dron myrrha ; red-brown ; 
semi-transparent. 

Bdellium. From Balsamoden- 
dron Africanum ; reddish- 
gray ; semi-transparent. 

Olibanum. FromBoswelliaser- 
rata and an Amyris (?) ; yel- 
lowish ; semi-transparent. 

Umbellifcrce. 

Galbanum. From Bubon gal- 
banum, Ferula ferulago and 
Galbanum ; in grains or 
cakes ; nearly opaque. 

Assafoetida. From Ferula as- 
safcetida. 



Sagapenum. 
Persica. 



From Ferula 



Ammoniacum. From Dorema 
ammoniacum; sp. gr. 1.207; 
yellow; white internally. 

Opopanax. From Pastinaca 
opopanax ; reddish ; inter- 
nally yellow and red mar- 
bled. 

Asclcpiadece. 

Scammonium, Smyrna. From 
Periploca secamone ? 

Convolvulacece. 

Scammonium, Aleppo. From 
Convolvulus scammonia. 



40.81 per cent. Arabin. 
41.76 per cent, resin. 
2.18 per cent, volatile oil. 
59 resin, C 40 H 62 O 6 , 9.2 gum, 30.6 bas 
sorin and volatile oil. 



Powerful ca- 
thartic. 

Yellow, water- 
color. 



Astringent and 
emmenagogue. 



Obsolete. 



4 percent. (Stenhouse) volatile oil, gum. For fumigation, 
at least 2 resins, one of which = 



66.86 per cent, resin, C 40 H 54 O 7 . 

19.28 to 27.3 per cent. gum. 

1.3 per cent, mucilage. 

6.34 per cent, volatile oil. 

26 per cent, gum, 4.6 per cent, sulphu- 
retted volatile oil, 47.2 to 66 per cent, 
resin, 11.6 per cent, bassorin, malates, 
acetates, sulphates, and phosphates. 

50 per cent, resin, 32 per cent, gum, 3.7 
per cent, sulphuretted volatile oil, 3.48 
mucilage. 

22 per cent. gum. 

72 per cent, resin, C 40 H 50 O r 



42 per cent, resin. 
33 per cent. gum. 
4 per cent, stai-ch, 4 extractive, 
cent, sulphuretted vol. oil. 



per 



An adulterated 
scammonia ? 



resin of Convolvulus 



Convolvulin, resin, wax, extractive gum, 
sugar, starch. Commercial article 
from 5 to 80 per cent, resin. 



Stim., antispas- 
modic. 



Antispasmodic. 



Stim. like assa- 
fcet. 

Stim. expecto- 
rant. 

Antispasmodic. 
Obsolete. 



Cathartic ? 



Cathartic. 



426 



ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHOES, AND RESINS, 



IV. Balsams. {Containing Bz or Cin.) 



Name, origin, etc. 


Composition and properties. 


Uses. 


Styraceaz. 






Benzoinum. From Styrax ben- 


Benzoic acid, HC 7 H 5 2 , average 15 per 


As an expecto- 


zoin; sp. gr. 1.063. 


cent. ; sometimes mixed with more or 


rant and stim- 




less cinnamic acid. 


ulant exter- 




a. Resin, C 30 H 40 O 5 , soluble in ether, not 


nally. 




in K 2 C0 3 . 






b. Resin, C 35 H 42 7 , soluble in K 2 C0 3 , not 






in ether. 






c. Resin, C 40 H 44 O 9 , soluble in alcohol, not 






in ether. 




Styrax Calamita. From Sty- 


Benzoic acid, volatile oil, resins. 


For fumiga- 


rax officinalis ; grains or 




tions ; rarely 


masses; blackish-gray. 




used here. 


Leguminosce. 






Balsamum Peruvianum. Sp. 


Cinnamic acid, C 9 H 8 2 , 6.94 per cent. 


Stimulating ex- 


gr. 1.14 to 1.16 ; from Myro- 


Oil or cinnameine, 69 per cent. 


pectorant. 


spermum Peruiferum. 


Styracine (metacinnameine) crystallizes 

in prisms. 
23.1 per cent, resin, C 20 H og 3 . 




White Peruvian Balsam. From 


Not fully analyzed, myroxocarpin, C 24 H 35 


Similar to for- 


the fruit and seeds of the 


3 ; crystallizable, very indifferent 


mer. 


former by expression. 


resin. 




Balsamum tolutanum. From 


Resin, 88 per cent. 


Stimulating ex- 


Myrospermum toluiferum. 


Cinnamic acid, 12 per cent. 
Volatile oil, 0.2 per cent. 


pectorant. 


Balsaminece. 






Styrax. Semifluid juice of 


Cinnamic acid ; styrol (cinnamen) C 8 H 8 . 


do. 


Liquidambar orientale.* 


Styracine C 9 H 9 0,C 18 H U 3 . 

Cinnameine, C 9 H 7 2 (' 9 H 9 . 
2 resins. 




Gum wax. Semifluid juice of 


Cinnamic acid. (?) 


Little used as 


Liquidambar styraciflua. 


Styracine. (?) 


yet. (See Syr- 




Resin. (?) 


ups) 



REMARKS ON THE RESINS, OLEORESINS, AND BALSAMS. 

As shown in the syllabus, most of the resins proper are used ex- 
clusively in varnishes, and in the various modifications of stimu- 
lating and rubefacient applications. 

Amber is employed in medicine exclusively for the products of 
its decomposition. Oil of amber produced from it by distillation 
is a powerful rubefacient, with antispasmodic effects. 

Guaiacum may be classed as a resin, though, owing to the presence 
of a peculiar acid somewhat resembling benzoic and cinnamic, it 
may be entitled to a place among balsams, should that group be 
extended to embrace a wider range of resinous substances. Recent 
investigations of Kosmann show it to be a glucoside, splitting with 
acids into glucose and guaiaretin. 

Burgundy pitch and the so-called hemlock gum (Pix Canadensis) 
are well-known ingredients of strengthening and rubefacient plasters, 

* According to Hanbury, London Pharm. Journ., 1857. 



RESINS. 427 

which will be considered under the appropriate head. Elerni is a 
popular substitute for common resin in an unofficinal ointment 
much prescribed by surgeons. 

Of the oleoresins, the various turpentines differ in their propor- 
tion of resin to oil and their consequent consistence. "White tur- 
pentine of commerce, though exuding from the tree in a liquid 
form, is always found nearly or quite solid, while balsam of fir and 
Venice turpentine continue more or less fluid at ordinary tempera- 
ture. The former of these is much used for mounting objects for 
the microscope, and for cementing ambrotypes upon glass, its per- 
fect transparency and great adhesiveness adapting it to these uses. 
The latter is perhaps rarely met with in our commerce, being super- 
seded by a factitious article, said to be composed of about 24 lbs. 
of resin to the gallon of oil of turpentine. The genuine is esteemed 
as a useful ingredient in the finest qualities of sealing-wax. 

Copaiva, which is very commonly called balsam copaiva, is 
highly esteemed for its stimulating effects on the mucous surfaces; 
it is variously combined with mucilage or with alkali in prescrip- 
tions mentioned under the appropriate head, and is prescribed in 
the Pharmacopoeia in the form of pill mass to be made with mag- 
nesia. (See Pilulae.) 

Most of the gum resins are possessed of decided medicinal 
effects ; ammoniac, benzoin, and tolu are chiefly used as stimulating 
expectorants. Assafoetida, galbanum, and sagapenum (the latter 
almost obsolete), are distinguished by powerful effects on the ner- 
vous system. Myrrh is peculiarly adapted to the relaxed con- 
ditions of the system, consequent on pulmonary and uterine affec- 
tions ; it is well suited to combinations with iron, and is directed 
in several emmenagogue pills, and in the officinal Mistura ferri 
com posit a. 

Among the gum resins we have two drastic cathartics, gamboge 
and scammony; and among the resins proper, podophyllin, resin of 
jalap, and euphorbium. Olibauum is almost exclusively used for 
fumigation, being employed alone and combined with cascarilla, 
and benzoin, as incense, in the ceremonies of the Roman Catholic 
church. 

The balsams vary in their consistence. Benzoin is solid, hard, 
and brittle; Peruvian balsam (formerly called Myroxylon)is fluid; 
Tolu is intermediate, being a very soft and readily fusible solid. 
The best storax is liquid. The true solid storax is little used, 
though directed in some of the old recipes. A fictitious article is 
met with in commerce, which is sold for Styrax calamita, and is 
prepared at Trieste, by coarsely grinding the bark of the storax 
tree and mixing it with liquid storax. Our native "gum wax," as 
it has been called, has a very strong resemblance to storax, its con- 
sistence being semifluid, and its color and odor almost identical. 

Several products of scientific interest have been discovered by 
the analysis of balsams. Styracin, the resin of styrax, is obtained 
by treating the balsam with caustic soda in solution, dissolving the 
residue in alcohol and ether, and crystallizing ; when acted on with 



428 ON VOLATILE OILS, CAMPHOES, AND KESINS. 

nitric acid this yields the same products of decomposition as cin- 
namic acid. By distillation of the soda solution left in its prepa- 
ration, styrole is obtained, while cinnamic acid is left in the residue. 
Styrol has the composition C 8 H 8 , and styracin is a compound of 
cinnamic acid with oxide of cinnamyle, which bears the same re- 
lation to hydrated cinnamic acid as common ether does to acetic 
acid; its aldehyde, C 9 H 7 OH, is the oil of Chinese and Ceylon cin- 
namon. An analogous compound is cinnameine, or cinnamate of 
oxide of tolyle, the alcohol of which is tolylic or benzalcohol, 
C 7 H 7 OH, which by oxidation is first converted into its aldehyde oil of 
bitter almonds, C 7 H 6 0, and subsequently into benzoic acid,HC 7 H 5 2 . 
Styracine and cinnameine are therefore compound ethers, the 
former cinnamo-cinnamic, the latter cinnamo-tolylic ether. (See 
Gregory's Chemistry.) 

Tests of Purity. 

Guaiacum. — Entirely soluble in 85 per cent, alcohol and less so 
in ether ; gives a blue color to mucilage of gum Arabic, and milk, 
and turns green or blue with oxidizing agents. 

Mastich. — Softens by chewing, not entirely soluble in alcohol, 
wholly taken up by ether, chloroform, and oil of turpentine, not 
by fixed oils. 

Copal. — Readily fusible, soluble in rectified oil of turpentine. 
See syllabus for behavior to alcohol and ether. 

Jalap Resin and Scammonium. — By the action of alkalies under 
the influence of heat, they are converted into convolvulic and rho- 
deoretinic acid, which is soluble in water. The solution of the 
resins in alkalies may be rendered slightly opalescent by sulphuric 
acid, but is not precipitated. 

Copaiva. — If adulterated with fixed oil, this may be detected by 
the stain produced on paper; pure copaiba, after the evaporation 
of the volatile oil by the application of a little heat, leaves a 
resinous stain, which has a greasy margin if the copaiva was adul- 
terated with fixed oil. 

Or the balsam is boiled for several hours in an open vessel with 
water to drive off the volatile oil ; pure copaiba leaves a brittle 
resin, while a soft or semifluid resin remains if the copaiba had 
been adulterated with fixed oil. 

Fixed oils, except castor oil, maybe detected by their insolubility 
in 90 per cent, alcohol ; pure balsam furnishes a clear solution. 

An adulteration with turpentine (oleoresin) is easily detected by 
the odor produced by the evaporation of the oils, on dropping the 
suspected balsam upon a hot brick. 

Balsamum Peruvianum. — The surest way to find an adulteration 
with castor oil is, to distil about 20 grammes until about 10 
grammes have passed over and the residue begins to become 
charred. The distillate, which separates into an aqueous and oily 
stratum, is agitated with caustic baryta, the oil removed, and agi- 
tated with a concentrated solution of bisulphite of sodium. Gen- 



ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 429 

nine balsam Pern on dry distillation furnishes products, winch 
with bisulphite of sodium do not form a crystalline combination. 
The crystals obtained by this process from its admixture with 
castor oil, on being recrystallized from alcohol, have the odor of 
cenanthol, and the composition C 14 HO,S0 2 + ]STaO,S0 2 . Larger quan- 
tities of castor oil decrease the specific gravity of the balsam ; other 
oils are detected by their insolubility in alcohol. Peruvian balsam 
is much sophisticated. The genuine article produces an impression 
of a liquid diffused in the mouth, while the sophisticated is gener- 
ally a solution of resin which deposits the resin on the tongue when 
tasted. 



CHAPTER VII 

ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 



Organic Acids are distinguished as a class by characteristic pro- 
perties. They combine with inorganic and organic alkalies, some 
of them in several different proportions, according to the number 
of equivalents of basic water combined with them. Thus, citric 
is a tribasic acid, containing three equivalents of basic water; tar- 
taric bibasic, containing only two ; and benzoic monobasic, con- 
taining but one equivalent besides the water of crystallization. 
These acids are found in nature both free and in combination. 
Some are very commonly diffused throughout the vegetable king- 
dom, as tannic ; others exist exclusively in one family of plants, as 
meconic acid in the Papaveracese. Some, although existing natu- 
rally, are capable of artificial production from other organic ma- 
terial, as oxalic and valerianic. This whole class, and that of 
organic alkalies, have a much closer relation to inorganic compounds 
than the neutral crystalline and uncrystallizable principles. They 
all contain oxygen, and are destitute of nitrogen in their compo- 
sition ; an exception, however, is hydrocyanic acid, which in all its 
chemical relations bears a close resemblance to the inorganic 
hydro-acids. 

The organic acids are capable of numerous changes during the 
processes of life in the organisms by which they are produced, or 
after their introduction into the circulation of other living animals 
or vegetables. These changes are the result of obscure processes 
of nature, and of conditions and functions of the organs, which we 
are unable to imitate by art. Chemistry, however, has in some 
instances arrived, by artificial means, at close imitations of nature, 
and has produced changes which furnish connecting links between 
compounds having apparently no relation to each other. 

Of the organic acids, those occurring in plants are by far the 
most important as medicines, and of the very few animal acids em- 
ployed, most, though formerly regarded as exclusively belonging 



430 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

to the animal kingdom, have subsequently been discovered to be 
direct products of decomposition of vegetable principles, and are 
even generated by certain plants in their normal processes of growth 
and assimilation. 

In the present chapter the numerous acids are thrown together 
in groups, either from their diffusion in certain classes of vegeta- 
bles, from the harmony of some of their physical or chemical rela- 
tions, from their associations with other organic principles, or from 
the value attached to them as medicinal agents. 

The organic acids,, in this work, are classified as follows: — ■ 

1st Group — Fruit acids. 

2d " Derivatives of the fruit acids. 

3d " Acids representing the Medicinal Virtues of plants. 

4th " Acids combined with Vegetable Alkalies. 

5th " Acids derived from Essential Oils. 

6th " Astringent and allied acids. 

7th " Acids of animal origin. 

8th " Acids pertaining to coloring matters. 

First Group. — Fruit Acids. 

These acids occur in the fruits of many plants of the families 
Aurantiacese, B-osacere, Grossularieae, in grapes, tamarinds — in 
short, in all succulent acidulous fruits, and at certain periods of their 
maturity, in a free state, with the exception of oxalic acid, which 
is comparatively seldom met with in an uncombined state, though 
widely diffused, wholly or partly neutralized by certain vegetable 
alkalies, or inorganic bases. They are all agreeable refrigerants, 
and, as such, have a very extensive use; combined with alkalies or 
magnesia, they act in large doses as laxatives ; oxalic acid and its 
compounds are poisonous, unless in minute doses. 

Acetic acid, HC 2 H 3 2 . Occasionally in plants, product of fermentation. 

Oxalic " H 2 C 2 4 ,2H 2 0-{- 4Aq. In rhubarb, sorrel, many officinal roots, herbs, and 
barks. 

Tartaric acid, H 2 C 4 H 4 6 . In grapes, tamarinds, etc., obtained from wine deposits. 

Uvic " 2HO,C 8 H 4 O, -|-2Aq. In the deposit of some grape juices. 

Malic " H 3 C 4 H 3 5 . In apples, sumach berries, the berries of mountain-ash, etc. 

Citric " H 3 C 6 H 5 7 ,H 2 0-|- 2Aq. In lemons, oranges, currants, gooseberries, toma- 
toes, etc. 

Acetic acid has been already referred to as produced in the destruc- 
tive distillation of wood, and also as a product of the spontaneous 
change which takes place in articles of the saccharine and amyla- 
ceous group by the catalytic action of ferments. 

Oxalic acid is an instance of an important vegetable acid existing 
ready formed in plants, and also capable of artificial production. 
Most of the oxalic acid of commerce is obtained by the action of 
nitric acid on sugar or starch, the organic principle being oxidized 
at the expense of the acid. Nitrous acid fumes and carbonic acid 
gas are evolved, and oxalic acid is formed, which is collected and 
crystallized, and most extensively used as a bleaching agent. If 
nitric acid has been employed in sufficient quantity, no saccharic 
acid is formed ; the nitrous acid evolved is employed in the manu- 



ACIDUM TAETARIOUM. 431 

facture of sulphuric acid or for other purposes where oxidation is 
required. It is not officinal. 

The alkaline oxalates are soluble, but the other salts are mostly 
insoluble in water. Oxalic acid and its salts are decomposed by a 
red heat, into carbonic acid and carbonic oxide, without leaving 
any charcoal. If heated with sulphuric acid the same decomposi- 
tion takes place. Carbonic oxide CO is inflammable. If mixed 
with sand and heated, dry oxalic acid yields formic acid, and but 
little carbonic acid is given oft' if the temperature is well regulated. 
The precipitates formed by it with baryta and lime are soluble in 
nitric and muriatic acids. The silver precipitate dissolves in nitric 
acid and ammonia. Insoluble oxalates, boiled in concentrated solu- 
tion of carbonate of sodium, are decomposed, oxalate of sodium 
being held in solution. 

Acidum Tartaricum. T=H 2 C 4 H 4 6 . 

Tartaric acid is prepared from bitartrate of potassium or cream 
of tartar, by the addition of carbonate of calcium, whereby insolu- 
ble tartrate of calcium is formed with the excess of acid of the 
bitartrate, and neutral tartrate of potassium left in solution. The 
solution is decomposed with chloride of calcium, which forms an 
additional quantity of tartrate of calcium. Lastly, the insoluble 
tartrate of calcium is purified by washing, and decomposed by sul- 
phuric acid, which liberates the tartaric acid. This, on evapora- 
tion, crystallizes in colorless crystals, with a tendency to the form 
of oblique rhombic prisms (citric acid occurs in right rhombic 
prisms). It has a sour taste, resembling, though not identical 
with, that of citric acid. It is soluble in an equal weight of water, 
from which solution alcohol throws down no precipitate. This is 
rather a stronger acid than citric, and 100 grains saturate 138.5 
grains of bicarbonate of potassium. It is most usually sold in 
powder. Its principal use is in preparing effervescing and refrige- 
rant drinks, and as a substitute for citric acid. 

Liebig has obtained tartaric acid artificially by the oxidation of 
sugar of milk and gum by nitric acid ; besides mucic, oxalic, and 
saccharic (II 2 C 6 H 8 8 ) acids are formed, the latter of which appears 
to be converted into tartaric acid ; both these acids have identical 
reactions with potassa and lime salts. 

The salts used medicinally are the tartrates of potassium, sodium, 
ammonium, and iron, the bitartrates of potassium, sodium, and 
ammonium, and the double salts of potassium and sodium, po- 
tassium and ammonium, potassium and boracic acid, potassium and 
borate of sodium, potassium and iron, and ammonium and iron ; 
treated of under the several heads of their bases. 

Tartaric acid may be recognized by the copious white crystalline 
precipitate it furnishes on adding it in excess to any neutral salt of 
potassium. The precipitate formed by both this and citric acid 
with acetate of lead should be soluble in nitric acid. 

Neutral tartrates are precipitated on the addition of acetate of 



432 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

potassium and free acetic acid ; the precipitate by chloride of cal- 
cium is soluble in cold caustic potassa, separates on boiling, and 
redissolves on cooling ; the precipitate by lime-water dissolves in 
free tartaric acid, and in chloride of ammonium and tartrate of 
calcium crystallizes out after some time. 

If not carefully prepared, the following impurities may be present : 
heavy metals, detected by sulphuretted hydrogen, sulphuric acid 
by chloride of barium, muriatic acid by nitrate of silver, oxalic acid 
by a solution of sulphate of calcium. 

Solutions of tartaric acid and its salts are decomposed by oxygen 
like citric acid ; by oxide of manganese it is converted into formic 
and carbonic acids. 

The following well-marked varieties of tartaric acid have been 
distinguished : — 

1. Dextrotartaric acid, the ordinary tartaric acid, which in the 
free state and combined with certain inactive bases turns polarized 
light to the right. If its salt with cinchonia is heated to 338° F., 
in five or six hours it has been changed for the greatest part into — 

2. Paratartaric, uvic, or racemic acid, which also occurs naturally 
in cream of tartar from certain localities. It and its salts have a 
neutral behavior towards polarized light. Its double salt with 
ammonium and sodium is obtained in crystals, one-half of which 
show a hemiedric form to the right, the other half the same form 
to the left ; the former contain dextrotartaric, the latter the lsevo- 
tartaric acid. From a solution of paratartrate of cinchonicia crys- 
tals of the lsevotartrate, and from a solution of paratartrate of 
quinicia, the dextrotartrate is deposited first, leaving the greatest 
part of the salts with the opposite acid in solution. 

3. Lcevotartaric acid may be obtained as just stated ; it deflects 
polarized light to the left. 

4. Inactive tartaric acid is obtained by heating paratartrate of 
cinchonicia to 338° F. It has no action on polarized light, and 
cannot be resolved into the right and left tartrate. 

5. Metatartaric acid. By melting dry powdered dextrotartaric 
acid in an oil-bath ; the change takes place in a few seconds at 340° 
to 356° F. The acid is hygroscopic ; its calcium salt is soluble. 

6. Isotartaric or tartralic acid. If the heat in the last process has 
been applied too long, the product contains this acid also. The 
calcium salt is syrupy, uncrystallizable, and by boiling is resolved 
into metatartaric acid and metatartrate of calcium. 

All of these acids are of the same composition, H 2 C 4 H 4 6 , and, ex- 
cepting the last, are bibasic. 

Pyrotartaric Acid, H 2 C 5 H 6 4 . — Tartaric acid yields by dry distil- 
lation at between 350° F. and 370° F. water, carbonic and pyro- 
tartaric acids, scarcely any secondary products. This acid is very 
soluble, fusible, and not precipitated by neutral lead salts. 

Malic Acid, Hal = H 3 C 4 H 3 5 , is prepared from the juice of the 
fruit of Sorbus aucuparia, or of Rhus glabrum and typhinum, by 
precipitating with sugar of lead, recrystallizing, and decomposing 
by hydrosulphuric acid. The juice of the rhubarb plant, after 



ACIDUM CITRICUM. 433 

being clarified by isinglass, and evaporated to the consistence of 
syrup, yields about 3 J per cent, of crystallized bimalate of potassium. 
The acid crystallizes in four- and six-sided needles and prisms, is 
deliquescent, and dissolves in water and alcohol. 

Though malic acid is present in many pharmaceutical prepara- 
tions, none of its salts have been used in medicine with the excep- 
tion of an impure malate of iron, which, in Europe, is still largely 
employed as a mild chalybeate, under the name of Extractum ferri 
pomatum ; malate of manganese has likewise been somewhat used. 

The acid and its salts are not precipitated by lime-water ; chlo- 
ride of calcium occasions a precipitate soluble in acids ; the precipi- 
tate by acetate of lead melts in boiling water, assuming the 
appearance of resin fused in water. 

Malic acid has acquired some importance as a material for the 
preparation of succinic acid. 

Menispermic or coccalinic, solanic, and probably also nicotic, igasuric 
(in nux vomica and Ignatia beans), fungic (in boletus, helvella, etc.), 
and others are identical with malic acid. 

The results of the decomposition of malic acid by various influ- 
ences are as follows : — 

1. If heated with an excess of potassa to 300° F., it is converted 
into oxalic and acetic acids. 2. By quick dry distillation it is con- 
verted into equisetic or pyromalic acid. 3. If heated in an oil-bath 
to 300° E., until vapors cease to be emitted, it has been converted 
into fumaric or paramalic acid. 4. Neutral malate of calcium 
C 4 H 4 Ca 2 O fi , if kept under water, particularly by the action, as fer- 
ment, of beer yeast or old cheese, is converted into succinic, acetic, 
and carbonic acids. 5. If by this fermentation hydrogen is evolved 
with the carbonic acid gas, another change takes place, butyric acid 
being formed. 6. By long contact, no butyric, acetic, or succinic 
acid is obtained, but another product of decomposition ; lactic and 
carbonic acids. 

Acidum Citricum. Ci = H 3 C 6 H s 7 ,H 2 0. 

This is produced from lime or lemon-juice by neutralizing the 
acid with chalk, and from the citrate of calcium thus formed 
liberating the citric acid by means of sulphuric acid. 

It is in large transparent crystals without color, with a strong, 
but agreeable acid taste, very soluble in water and in weak alcohol, 
deliquescing in moist weather. Specific gravity 1.6. As usually 
obtained in crystals, it consists of one equivalent of the tribasic acid 
+ one (sometimes two) equivalent of water of crystallization. It 
is not sold in the form of powder. According to the U. S. Pharma- 
copoeia, 100 grains of crystallized citric acid will saturate 150 grains 
of bicarbonate of potassium, which is on the supposition of one 
equivalent of water of crystallization being present. Its principal 
consumption is in the preparation of so-called lemon syrup, and so- 
lution of citrate of magnesium. To make artificial lemon-juice, add 
citric acid 3ixss to water Oj ; fresh oil of lemon inj ; and sugar 3j« 
28 



434 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

This solution is much employed in making effervescing draughts. 
{See Potassii Citras.) 

There are not many salts of citric acid used in medicine, but 
most of them very extensively; they are the citrates of potassium, 
magnesium, iron, quinia, caffeina, and morphia, and the double 
salts of ammonium and iron, of potassium and iron, and strychnia 
and iron. 

Citric acid and its salts are precipitated on being boiled with an 
excess of lime-water; the greater part of the precipitate redissolves 
on cooling; neutral citrates are precipitated by chloride of calcium. 

Citric acid is scarcely ever adulterated or impure; if tartaric 
acid should be present, it may be detected by a concentrated solu- 
tion of citrate of potassium, which yields a white crystalline pre- 
cipitate of bitartrate of potassium if tartaric acid is present; if 
potassa is employed instead of the citrate, care must be taken to 
leave the liquid strongly acid; oxalic acid by a solution of sulphate 
of calcium, and sulphuric by a diluted solution of chloride of ba- 
rium ; in both the last cases the appearance of a precipitate is pro- 
moted by nearly neutralizing the acid with an alkali. 

The solution of citric acid and of its salts is decomposed by the 
influence of oxygen, with the formation of mould, and a slimy 
precipitate of apparently organic structure. On fusing the acid 
with hydrate of potassa, it is converted into oxalic and acetic acids. 

Second Group. — Derivatives of the Fruit Acids. 

The acids placed in this group may be artificially obtained from 
the fruit acids ; they are also found in a number of vegetables and 
vegetable products, and two of them are productions of animal or- 
ganisms. Of their number, three have been more or less used in 
medicine, the others, as yet, are not employed either in medicine or 
in the arts. 

Formic acid (HCH0 2 ). la ants, nettles, ergot, the leaves of some pines, old tur- 

pentine, etc. Volatile liquid ; odor penetrating, sting- 
ing; produces severe inflammation. Its salts all solu- 
ble in water, decomposed by H 2 S0 4 into 2CO and HO ; 
reduces the oxides of Ag,Hg,Au, etc. 

Succinic " H 2 C 4 H 4 4 . In amber, wormwood, Melampyrum nemorosum, Lactuca 

sat.iva. Colorless, inodorous, crystals, soluble in 5 p. 
boiling water and 1% p. boiling absolute alcohol : 
scarcely soluble in ether ; not decomposed by cold 
HN0 3 ,C1, or Cr 4 3 ; the insoluble salts dissolve in acetate 
of potassium. 

Aconitic " H 3 C 6 H 3 6 . In various species of Aconitum, Delphinium, yarrow, 

Equisetum, limonum, etc. Colorless granules ; readily 
soluble in water, alcohol, and ether ; the crystallized 
Ca salt little soluble; the lead and silver salts are 
white flocculent precipitates ; colors salts of Fe 2 2 red ; 
identical with equisetic acid. 

Fumarie " C 4 H 4 4 . In fumaria (fumatory), Corydalis bulbosa, Glaucium lu- 

teum, and Iceland moss. Colorless scales ; soluble in 200 
p. water, more in alcohol and ether; crystallizing from 
hot HN0 3 ; not precipitated by alkaline earths ; precipi- 
tates Ag salts completely; the lead salt soluble in 
boiling water without fusion. 



DERIVATIVES OF THE FRUIT ACIDS. 435 

Lactic acid, H 2 C 3 H 4 3 . From milk, many fermented vegetable juices, etc. Color- 

less uncrystallizable syrup, ; sp. gr. 1.215 ; little soluble 
in ether, in all proportions of alcohol and water; the 
salts are insoluble in ether, sparingly soluble in cold 
water and alcohol. 

Formic Acid— Chloroform and iodoform are compounds of the 
same radical, formyle, CH, of which formic acid is the hydrated 
oxide ; it may be prepared artificially by heating equal weights of 
oxalic acid and glycerin together in a retort for fifteen hours to a 
temperature of 212° to 220°. The glycerin is not changed, but 
exerts an influence by which the oxalic acid is decomposed at a 
lower temperature than would otherwise be required. On distilling 
the mixture, formic acid and water pass over. To obtain the con- 
centrated acid, it is necessary to saturate it with carbonate of lead, 
filter, evaporate to a small bulk, collect the formate of lead, dry 
it, decompose by a current of sulphuretted hydrogen, and sepa- 
rate the syrupy acid ; or distil the formate of lead with sulphuric 
acid. 

A solution of formic acid in alcohol is still occasionally em- 
ployed abroad as a rubefacient under the name of spiritusformicarum, 
prepared by distilling 4 pounds of alcohol from 2 pounds of ants. 

Succinic Acid. — Spermaceti, tallow, or margaric acid, if for several 
days digested, without boiling, with nitric acid of medium strength, 
yields, on evaporation, succinic acid. It is also prepared by fer- 
mentation of impure malate of calcium as follows: Suspend old 
cheese, 1 part, in water, and digest with the calcium salt, 12 parts, 
and 40 parts of water, at a temperature below 112° F., for four to 
six days, until gas ceases to be emitted; the precipitate is now 
washed, dilute sulphuric acid added to neutralize the carbonate of 
calcium, the same quantity of acid added and boiled until the pre- 
cipitate has lost its sandy nature; the liquid is filtered oft' and eva- 
porated until a pellicle is formed, when the lime is precipitated with 
sulphuric acid, and the filtrate further evaporated; the crystals 
may be recrystallized and purified with animal charcoal. It may 
also be obtained from amber by distillation. 

A solution of succinate of ammonium is the only preparation 
medicinally employed, and it is questionable whether its invigorat- 
ing action in low states of the nervous system is not mostly due to 
the oils with which it is associated. The Prussian Pharmacopoeia 
gives the following directions for preparing it: — 

Liquor Ammonias Succinatis. — Rub to 1 ounce succinic acid, 1 
scruple rectified oil of amber, dissolve in 8 ounces distilled water, 
and add 1 ounce (containing 15 grains of Dippel's animal oil), or a 
sufficient quantity, of pyro-oleous carbonate of ammonia. 

Aconitic Acid. — It is obtained by heating citric acid for several 
hours with muriatic acid, evaporating, and extracting by ether. 

By distillation, the following three new acids may be obtained, 
all of which have the composition C 5 H 6 4 ; itaconic, citraconic, and 
mesaconic or citracantic acids. 

Fumaric or Paramaleic Acid. — By precipitating the clarified juice 



436 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

of Fumaria officinalis with acetate of lead, decomposing the washed 
precipitate by sulphuretted hydrogen, and recrystallizing the acid 
from hot water ; or by heating malic acid to 300°. 

Maleic or mafuric acid = C 4 H 4 4 , isomeric with fumaric acid, is 
obtained by distillation of malic acid, or by heating fumaric to 400°. 
It differs from the latter by being readily soluble in water, distilling 
at 350°, and by the insolubility of its lead salt, which, being curdy 
at first, becomes crystalline on standing. 

By fermentation, fumaric and maleic acids are converted into 
succinic acid. 

Acidum Lacticum. {Lactic Acid. H 2 C 3 H 4 3 .) 

This acid is contained in many old extracts as a product of fer- 
mentation of their saccharine constituents, or of malic acid. For 
medicinal use it is prepared by the so-called lactic fermentation. 
The following process of Wackenroder is one of the most simple: 
25 parts sugar of milk, 20 parts finely powdered chalk, 100 parts 
skimmed milk, and 200 parts water are digested at about 75°; in 
six weeks the chalk will be dissolved, the whole is then heated, but 
not to boiling; the cheese is strained off, pressed, the decanted 
liquid is clarified by albumen and evaporated to let the lactate of 
calcium crystallize; the recrystallized salt is decomposed either by 
sulphuric or by the exact quantity of oxalic acid. 

The acid and its iron salt are officinal, and have been of late much 
used in medicine. It is a syrupy liquid of a sour taste, sp. gr. 1.212. 

The diluted acid must not be precipitated by chloride of barium 
— absence of sulphuric acid ; by sulphate of calcium — absence of 
oxalic acid; by sulphuretted hydrogen — absence of metallic oxides; 
or after neutralization with ammonia, by oxalate of ammonium — 
absence of lime : 90 grains of the officinal lactic acid are saturated 
by not less than 75 grains of bicarbonate of potassium. 

Third Group. — Acids representing wholly or in part the 
Medicinal Virtues of Plants. 

The acids arranged in this group have very few chemical pro- 
perties in common ; they are interesting to the physician because 
they are wholly or in part the active principles of the plants in 
which they have been generated. If those grouped in division a 
be excepted, the acid properties of most of these acids are not very 
decided ; some of them are unable to decompose the carbonates, and 
quite a number have been long taken for neutral principles. Of 
the whole number, phloridzic and santonic acids only have been 
employed in medicine in their isolated condition ; chrysophanic acid 
is attracting considerable attention as the active principle of oar 
most popular cathartics. 



BITTER ACIDS. 



437 



(a) Connected with Volatile Oils and Resins.. 



Angelicic acid, HC 5 H 7 2 . 



Guaiacic acid, HC 6 H T 3 



In the root of angelica, masterwort, etc. Long color- 
less prisms, without water of crystallization, odor 
aromatic, boiling point 3740; little soluble in cold 
water, easily in boiling water, alcohol, ether, oil of 
turpentine, and fixed oils. 

In the resin and wood of guaiacum ; colorless scales 
of vanilla odor, green with Fe 2 Cl 3 , but not blue by 
CI. 



Picrotoxic acid, C 12 H u 5 . 
Phloridzic acid, C 21 H 24 C 10 -f-H 2 O. 



Chrysophanic acid, C 10 H 8 O a 



(Sautonine.) 



Caincic acid, C 40 H fi4 1fi . 



Polygalic acid, C^H^Oj 



Cetracic acid, C 18 H u 7 ? 



Auacardic acid, C 44 H 64 7 . 



(b) Mostly Bitter Acids, some Poisonous. 

In the seed of common ivy. Insoluble in water and 
ether; without odor, of acrid taste ; colored purple 
by concentrated sulphuric acid. The salts are 
mostly gelatinous. 

In Cocculus Indicus. Colorless prisms ; extremely 
bitter; very poisonous. 

In the bark of many fruit trees, especially the apple 
tree. Yellowish silky needles, easily soluble in 
alcohol and boiling water ; little in ether and less 
in cold water; inodorous, taste bitter, and some- 
what astringent ; fuses at 220O, solid again at 2660, 
and liquid at 320O. 

In rhubarb root, senna, dock root, Parmelia parie-* 
tina, etc. Golden yellow needles of metallic lustre, 
inodorous, nearly tasteless, nearly insoluble in cold 
water, soluble in alcohol and ether, and in sulphuric 
acid without decomposition, in alkalies with a dark 
red color ; its salts are very changeable. 

In Levant wormseed, from artemisia santonica, etc. 
Flat, hexagonal, or feathery prisms, little soluble 
in cold, soluble in 250 p. boiling water, in 75 p. 
ether, in 43 p. cold, and 3 p. boiling alcohol ; the 
ethereal and alcoholic solutions are intensely bitter ; 
light colors it yellow, but recrystallization yields it 
white again ; the alcoholic solution colored carmine- 
red by alkalies. 

In cahinca root. Chiococca angiafugae. Fine silky 
needles ; inodorous ; tasteless, with an astringent 
aftertaste ; little soluble in ether and water, 
readily in alcohol ; yields kinovin (see neutral 
prin.) and glucose by alkalies and dilute acids ; the 
salts uncrystallizable. 

In the root of Polygala amara and senega. White 
amorphous powder, without odor, tasteless, after- 
wards very acrid, astringent in the throat, sternu- 
tatory, little soluble in cold water, the solution 
foams like soap-water ; easily soluble in alcohol, 
insoluble in ether ; with concentrated sulphuric 
acid in contact with air it changes yellow, red, 
dissolves, then blue, grayish, colorless ; poisonous, 
producing difficulty of breathing, vomiting, etc. 
The salts are uncrystallizable. 

In Iceland moss. Very thin needles, intensely and 
purely bitter, nearly insoluble in water, soluble in 
boiling alcohol, little in ether ; destroyed by mineral 
acids, and by boiling its solution in alcohol or its 
soluble salts. 

In cashew nuts. White, crystalline, fusible at 790; 
inodorous ; taste aromatic ; turns rancid and liquid 
in air. 



438 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

Digitalic acid. (?) In the herb digitalis. Needles of a peculiar odor ; not 

volatile, soluble in water, alcohol, less iu ether ; its 
salts soluble but change when dissolved. 

Digitaleic acid. (?) Green needles ; taste bitter, acrid, odor aromatic ; 

little soluble in water, more in alcohol and ether, 
salts yellow or green, insoluble except the alkaline 
solutions, frothing (from saponin?) 

Cornic acid. (?) In the rootbnrk of Cornus Florida. Stellate silky 

scales; bitter; soluble in water and alcohol, preci- 
pitated by 2PbO, Ac, and AgN0 4 . 

Angelicic acid may be obtained by the action of potassa on oil of 
chamomile, imperatorin and peucedanin; it is more advantageously 
prepared by exhausting 12 parts of angelica root with 1 part hy- 
drate of lime and sufficient water, evaporating, distilling with the 
addition of sulphuric acid, and redistilling the distillate after satu- 
ration with potassa and decomposing with sulphuric acid ; large 
crystals appear after some time, valerianic and acetic acids remain 
in solution. Its salts are crystallizable, and its compound with 
ether has the odor of rotten apples. It is decomposed by excess of 
caustic potassa into acetic and propionic acids. 

Guaiacic Acid is obtained by dissolving the resin in 1 part alco- 
hol, filtering, precipitating with concentrated KO, washing and 
decomposing by HC1. 

The resin of guaiacum yields by dry distillation guaiacene, a 
light volatile oil which is an oxide of a camphene, and has the* 
composition of guaiacic acid minus 2C0 2 ==C 5 H 8 0. 

Hederic Acid. — The seeds are freed of fat by ether, afterwards 
exhausted by boiling alcohol; on cooling, the acid separates in 
colorless needles or tablets. 

Pier otoxic Acid, Picrotoxin. — After the fixed oil of cocculus inclicus 
is expressed, the acid crystallizes from the decoction of the residue 
with diluted muriatic acid. 

Phloridzic Acid, Phloridzin. — It crystallizes trom the tincture of 
apple-tree bark, prepared with warm diluted alcohol. 

It yields formic acid on being treated with sulphuric acid and 
oxide of manganese; by diluted acids phloretin and sugar, C 21 H 24 O 10 

+h 2 o=c 15 h;o 5 +c 6 h 12 o 6 . 

It has been used with asserted success as a substitute for quinia 
in the treatment of intermittent fevers. 

Chrysophanic Acid. — Synonyms of this acid in various states of 
purity are, parietinic acid, rhein, rhabarbarin, rheumin, rhabarbaric 
acid, rhaponticin, rumicin, lapathin. It is prepared by extracting 
rhubarb or Parmelia parietina with weak alkaline alcohol, precipi- 
tating by carbonic acid, dissolving in 50 per cent, alcohol contain- 
ing a little caustic potassa, precipitating by acetic acid, dissolving 
in boiling alcohol, mixing the filtrate with water and recrystalliz- 
ing from alcohol. 

Investigations performed by Professor SchrofF tend to show that 
the cathartic principle of rhubarb is chrysophanic acid, which is 
modified in its action by the other constituents of the root, so that 
while powdered rhubarb acted within twelve hours, Geiger's rha- 



SANTONIN. 439 

barbarin purged in nineteen, Brandes' rhein in twenty, and pure 
chrysophanic acid in twenty-four hours ; on the other hand he found 
the duration of the activity of rhubarb to be about twenty-four 
hours, that of rhein and rhabarbarin three, and of chrysophanic 
acid live days; during this time eight grains of the latter produced 
twelve thin yellow evacuations, without the least griping. The 
acid prepared from Parmelia parietina shows no difference from 
that prepared from rhubarb. The quickness of action of rhubarb 
in pharmaceutical preparations must be due to excipients or adju- 
vants which render the chrysophanic acid soluble. 

The active vegetable principle of senna, supposed to be chryso- 
phanic acid, has been determined by DragendorfF & Kubly to be a 
peculiar acid, named by them ''cathartic acid." Dr. Martius has 
not succeeded in completely isolating chrysophanic acid from 
senna, but the reactions indicate its presence as well as the pre- 
sence of two or three other bodies first discovered in rhubarb, 
namely, aporetin, phseoretin, and probably erythroretin. 

Winkler's cathartin, found in the ripe fruit of Rhanmus cathar- 
ticus, is also believed to be identical with this acid in an impure 
state. 

Chrysophanic acid, when taken internally, passes into the urine, 
where it may be easily recognized by its striking a characteristic 
red color with alkalies. The same reaction takes place after the 
administration of rhubarb and senna; with the latter given in the 
form of infusion or aqueous extract, this reaction would often take 
place after fifteen minutes and last until twelve hours after the 
evacuations had taken place. 

The root of Eumex obtusifolius, and probably other species, owe 
their laxative properties to chrysophanic acid. (See Am, Journ. 
Pharm., xxxi. 153.) 

Santoninum, U. S. P. (Santonin, Santonic Acid.) 

This is directed to be prepared from Levant AVormseed (San- 
tonica), 48 troyounces (3 lbs. 5 oz. com.); lime recently slaked and 
in fine powder, 18 troyounces (1 lb. 3 J oz. com.) ; animal charcoal, 
diluted alcohol, alcohol and acetic acid, of each sufficient. The 
process is as follows: Digest the wormseed and lime with twelve 
pints of diluted alcohol for 24 hours and express. Repeat the 
digestion and expression twice with the residue, using the same 
quantity of diluted alcohol. Mix the tinctures, and reduce the 
mixture to eight pints by distilling off the alcohol. Then, having 
filtered, and evaporated to one-half, gradually add acetic acid until 
in slight excess, stirring during the addition, and set the whole 
aside for forty-eight hours. Place the resulting crystalline mass 
upon a funnel loosely stopped, wash it with water, and dry it. 
Next, boil the dry residue with ten times its weight of alcohol, 
and, having digested the tincture for several hours with animal 
charcoal, filter it while hot, and add sufficient hot alcohol, through 
the filter, to wash the charcoal thoroughly; then set it aside in a 
dark place to crystallize. Lastly, dry the crystals on bibulous 



440 ON" OEGANIC ACIDS. 

paper in the dark, and keep them in a well-stopped bottle, protected 
from the light. 

By evaporating the mother- water, more crystals may be obtained. 

This is a new officinal, which being made exclusively from a 
European seed, is itself, perhaps, chiefly imported. 

Santonic acid is much employed as a very reliable vermifuge, and 
often exhibited to children in the form of confection or troches. 
Dose for children, J- to 1 grain 2 or 3 times daily. It has been 
used in 2 to 5 grain doses in retention of urine. Its chief recom- 
mendation, as a vermifuge, consists in the smallness of its dose, 
and its comparative tastelessness. It is thus described in the Phar- 
macopoeia. 

A colorless substance, crystallizing in shining, flattened prisms, 
without smell, and nearly tasteless when first put into the mouth, 
but afterwards bitter. It is not altered by the air, but becomes 
yellow on exposure to light. It melts when heated, and forms, on 
cooling, a crystalline mass. When heated somewhat above its 
melting point, it rises unchanged in dense, white, irritating vapors. 
Nearly insoluble in cold water, it is dissolved by 250 parts of boil- 
ing water. It is soluble in 43 parts of cold and 3 parts of boiling 
alcohol, and in 75 parts of ether — its alcoholic and ethereal solu- 
tions are intensely bitter. 

The santonates are decomposed by being boiled with water. The 
potassa salt is uncrystallizable. The soda salt, which on account 
of its solubility has been proposed as a substitute for the acid, is 
obtained by digesting its alcoholic solution with carbonate of 
sodium, evaporating, redissolving in strong alcohol, and crystal- 
lizing. Large crystals are obtained by evaporating spontaneously 
its concentrated aqueous solution. It contains 74 per cent, santonic 
acid. 

Gaincic acid, on which the strong diuretic virtues of cahinca root 
depend, is obtained by treating the alcoholic extract with water, 
filtering, adding milk of lime gradually until all bitterness has dis- 
appeared, and treating the precipitated cahincate of calcium with 
alcoholic oxalic acid. This acid was among the rare products ex- 
hibited by Merck in the World's Fair of 1862. 

Pohjgalie Acid, Senegin, Polygalin. — The root is extracted with 
alcohol, evaporated to syrupy consistence, and this mixed with ether 
which separates fixed oils, and in which it is nearly insoluble ; after 
some time a precipitate forms which is collected on a filter, dissolved 
in boiling alcohol, treated with animal charcoal, and filtered. {See 
the paper by Prof. Procter in Proc. Am. Ph. Assoc, 1859, p. 297.) 

Cetraric Acid. — Iceland moss is extracted by boiling alcohol and 
carbonate of potassium, the liquid acidulated with muriatic acid 
and mixed with four or iive volumes of water. The precipitate 
consists principally of cetraric and lichenstearic acids. It is dis- 
solved in eight or ten times its quantity of boiling weak alcohol 
and filtered, on cooling the lichenstearic acid crystallizes in quad- 
rangular plates, afterwards the cetraric acid in needles ; the needles 



ACIDS COMBINED WITH ALKALOIDS. 441 

are separated from an amorphous body, and several times recrys- 
tallized. 

Anacardic acid is obtained from the pericarp of cashew-nuts by 
treating the ethereal extract with water, to separate tannic acid, 
dissolving in alcohol, and digesting with hydrated oxide of lead; 
the anacardate of lead is decomposed by sulphuretted hydrogen. 
The impure acid is purified by washing, recombining with lead, 
and decomposing by diluted sulphuric acid. 

Digitalic Acid. — The alcoholic extract of the aqueous extract of 
digitalis is treated with ether, which dissolves the acid and digi- 
talin ; caustic baryta precipitates digitalate of barium, which by 
decomposition with sulphuric acid yields the acid. 

I)igitaleic Acid. — The precipitate of the aqueous extract by acetate 
of lead is washed, decomposed by carbonate of sodium, the filtrate 
precipitated by muriatic acid, recrystallized from hot alcohol. 

Comic acid or Cornine is prepared by G-eiger by exhausting the 
aqueous extract of Cornus Florida with ethereal alcohol, agitating 
the solution with some HO,PbO and evaporating the filtrate spon- 
taneously. {See Maisch's paper in Proc. Am. Ph. Assoc, 1859, 
p. 315.) 

Fourth Group. — Acids combined with Vegetable Alkalies. 

It has not yet been ascertained of all alkaloids in what com- 
binations they occur naturally. The large number of vegetable 
acids in existence, and the difficulties often attending their complete 
isolation, make the recognition of an acid in its natural association 
a matter of no ordinary difficulty, and have led to the proposal of 
many new names for acids long before known, before their identity 
with those before discovered had been established beyond doubt. 
The greater the difficulty in isolating an acid, or the more widely 
diffused it is throughout organic nature, the greater will be its 
liability to receive constantly new names from plants hitherto not 
subjected to a complete analysis. It is only necessary to refer for 
illustration to malic acid, which has been named at various times 
after quite a number of plants ; under that head, attention has been 
drawn to various acids, mostly connected with alkaloids, which, by 
later investigations, have been proved to be malic acid. Of acids 
treated of in the second group, the following would likewise belong 
to this fourth group; fumaric acid, in Glaucium luteum combined 
with glaucina; aconitic acid in Aconitum napellus combined with 
aconitia. Meconic and kinic acids are important on account of 
some of their reactions. 

Chelidonic acid, C 7 H 4 6 . In celandine with lime, sanguinarina and chererythrina. 
Colorless needles, soluble in water and alcohol; purple by 
warm H 2 S0 4 ; the salts colorless; the tribasic salts lemon- 
yellow. 

Meconic acid, H 3 C 7 H0 7 . In opium with morphia. Colorless pearly scales or prisms: 
taste faintly acid and astringent; little soluble in cold 
water and ether, soluble in hot water and alcohol. Sesqui- 
salts of iron are colored deep red by a trace of acid, the 
coloration is not affected by boiling, dilute acids, or chlo- 
ride of gold (difference from sulphocjanide) ; this test is 
characteristic of the presence of opium. 



442 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

Veratric acid, C 9 H 10 O 4 . In cevadilla seed, with veratria. Four-sided needles ; sub- 
limable, soluble in alcohol and boiling water. The vera- 
trates of the alkalies are very crystallizable and soluble in 
water and alcohol. 

Columbic acid, C 21 H 22 7 . In Colombo root, with berberine. Straw-yellow powder 
nearly insoluble in water, little in ether, easily in alcohol; 
the latter solution precipitated by Pb,Ac but not by Cu,Ac~. 

Kinic acid, HC 7 ri n 6 . In Peruvian bark with quinia, cinchonia, in seeds of coffee 

with caffeina. Oblique rhombic prisms, soluble slowly in 
2£ parts cold water, little in alcohol, scarcely in ether; 
most salts are soluble. Heated over its melting point, 
decomposed into benzeic and phenylic acids, salicylous 
acid, hydrokinone and benzol : with Mn0 2 and HgSO^ con- 
verted into kinone, carbonic and formic acids. 

Chelidonic Acid. — Celandine contains, while young, chiefly malic 
acid ; when in flower, malic acid has disappeared, and the juice con- 
tains chelidonic acid. To prepare it, the juice is coagulated by 
heat, the filtrate, after being acidulated with nitric acid, is precipi- 
tated by nitrate of lead, which must not be added in excess ; the 
precipitate is decomposed by hydrosulphuric acid, the free acid 
combined with lime, the salt recrystallized, decomposed by carbon- 
ate of ammonium, and afterwards by muriatic acid. 

Meconic Acid. — The meconate of calcium obtained on the manu- 
facture of morphia is dissolved in dilute muriatic acid, and heated 
to 195°, when, on cooling, acid meconate of calcium crystallizes, 
which is treated again in the same way; meconic acid now crystal- 
lizes, is purified by repeated crystallizations, combined with ammo- 
nia or potassa, and lastly precipitated by muriatic acid. 

Komenic acid, C 6 H 4 5 = C 7 H 4 7 — C0 2 , by heating meconic acid to 
390°, or by boiling its solution, particularly with dilute muriatic 
acid. 

Hard warty crystals, colorless, insoluble in absolute alcohol, slight 
acid taste; bi basic. 

' Parakomenic acid, C fi H 4 O s , in small quantity, on the dry distilla- 
tion of the former. Feathery needles, very acid taste; bi'basic. 

Pyromeconic acid, C 5 H 4 3 = C 6 H 4 5 — C0 2 , by the dry distillation 
of meconic or komenic acid. Crystallizes in colorless, lustrous 
needles, scales, or octohedrons ; fuses at 257° ; sublimes at 212° 
completely, is easily soluble in alcohol and water, monobasic, a 
weak acid. 

All these derivatives of meconic acid show its characteristic 
coloration with sesquisalts of iron. 

Veratric Acid. — The alcoholic tincture of cevadilla seed is acidu- 
lated with sulphuric acid and precipitated by lime, the filtrate is 
distilled and decomposed by an acid. 

Columbic Acid. — The alcoholic extract of col umbo root is treated 
with lime, and the lime salt decomposed by muriatic acid. 

Kinic Acid. — The bark is exhausted by acidulated water, the 
alkalies precipitated by a little lime, more lime precipitates the cin- 
chotannic acid and coloring matter, the filtrate is evaporated, the 
crystals of kinate of lime decolorized with animal charcoal, and 
decomposed by oxalic acid. 

This acid, which has been prepared from huckleberry leaves, oc- 



ACIDS DERIVED FROM ESSENTIAL OILS. 443 

curs probably in many plants, since the extract of coffee leaves and 
seed, Paraguay tea, Ligustrum vulgare, Hedera helix, various oaks, 
elms, and ashes yield with Mn0 2 and H 2 S0 4 , the following compound. 

Kinone, C 6 H 4 2 , golden-yellow prisms, odor of iodine, fusible, 
volatilizable, little soluble in cold water, soluble in alcohol and 
ether; with sulphuretted hydrogen it turns immediately red, pre- 
cipitates floccules, which, after drying, are olive-green. 

Hydrokinone, C 6 H 6 2 , by dry distillation of kinic acid, or from 
kinone by the action of sulphurous or hydriodic acids. Colorless 
prisms, inodorous, fusible, volatile; easily soluble in water and 
alcohol. Oxidizing agents precipitate needles of 

Green hydrokinone, C 6 H 6 2 + 6 H 4 2 , of a beautiful green metallic 
lustre; fusible, but decomposed on volatilizing, little soluble in 
water, more in alcohol. 

Fifth Group. — Acids derived from or Yielding Essential Oils. 

But few of the numerous essential oils naturally contain acids, 
and have, in consequence thereof, an acid reaction ; most oils, how- 
ever, on exposure to the atmosphere, become oxidized, and while 
they assume a thicker consistence, their chemical nature is partly 
changed, and they now, in alcoholic solution, impart a red color, 
more or less decidedly, to blue litmus paper — they have become 
resinified. A similar change takes place by subjecting the essential 
oils to the influence of nitric or chromic acid, or other strong oxi- 
dizing agents. Thus the essential oils yield a large number of 
acids, mostly of a nature which may be termed resinous. The 
compounds from which essential oils are generated in the plants are 
not known ; but several principles have been discovered and isolated, 
which under various circumstances are split into two or more 
bodies, one of which has all the characteristics of an essential oil. 
But one of these principles is of an acid nature, the others will be 
found under the head of neutral principles. The following em- 
braces those acids only that are important in a medical point of 
view, or interesting on account of their relation to other proximate 
principles. 

(a) Acids occurring in the freshly-distilled Crude Oils. 

Hydrocyanic acid, HNC. In the volatile oils of amygdaleoa and pomaceae. (See 

Nitrogenated Oils.) The anhydrous acid is colorless, 
limpid, crystallizes at 50 F. ; sp. gr. .69 ; decomposed 
on keeping; extremely poisonous. 

Salicylous acid, C 7 H 8 2 . The volatile oil of herbaceous plants of the genus 

Spirsea ; oily liquid, colorless or reddish, of an 
agreeable aromatic odor and burning taste; sp. gr. 
1.17 ; it freezes at 50 F., and boils at 340O F. 

Methyl-salicylic acid, The oxygenated part of oil of wintergreen ; colorless or 

C 6 H 4 (OH 3 )0,COH. reddish-yellow oil of a well-known odor ; sp.gr. 1.18; 

boiling point 2520. 
The oxygenated part of oil of cloves ; colorless oil, of 
1.079 sp. gr. ; boiling point 4840 ; odor and taste of 
cloves; resinifies in contact with the air. The cavyo- 
phyllates of alkalies and alkaline earths are crystal- 
lizable; metallic salts are either precipitated or 
colored blue, violet, or green. 



444 



ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 



(b) Products of Oxidation by the Atmosphere. 



Valerianic acid, C 5 H 10 O 2 . 



Benzoic acid, 



Cinnamic acid, C q H R 9 



From valerol in oil of valerian and valerian root; color- 
less oily liquid, of a disagreeable odor of valerian 
and old cheese, and a similar acid taste ; its sp. gr. 
is .937 ; its boiling point 34TO F. ; it is inflammable, 
dissolves in 30 parts cold water, and in all propor- 
tions of alcohol and ether ; it dissolves camphor and 
some resins. 

In old oil of bitter almonds, benzoin with cinnamic 
acid ; inodorous needles or scales ; when sublimed 
from benzoin of a faint balsamic odor; taste slight, 
afterwards acrid ; fusible at 2480 ; boiling at 4620 ; 
soluble in 200 p. cold and 25 boiling water ; more in 
alcohol and ether. 

In old oil of cinnamon, storax, Tolu, Peru balsam, etc. 
Resembles the former in physical properties. Color- 
less prismatic and scaly crystals, melting at 2640 F., 
boiling and distilling at 6550 F. ; little soluble in 
cold water (less than benzoic acid), easily soluble in 
alcohol. 



(c) Acids obtainable by artificial oxidation of Volatile Oils. 



Anisic acid, C 8 H 8 3 . 

Pelargonic acid, C 9 H 18 2 . 

Rutinic or caprinic acid, 
C io H i&°2- 

Angelicic acid, C 5 H 7 2 



From oil of anise and fennel by oxidation with 6 p. 
K2Cr0 4 and H 2 S0 4 ; large colorless prisms, nearly 
insoluble in cold water, easily in boiling water, in 
alcohol, and ether. Melts at 3470 F., sublimes at 
higher temperature in white needles ; distilled over 
baryta, is decomposed into carbonic acid and anisol, 
C 8 H 8 3 = C0 2 -4- C 7 , H 8 ,0. Its salts are crystallizable. 

From oil of rue by diluted N0 5 , and in oil of rose gera- 
nium ; colorless oil, of a peculiar odor ; crystallizes 
in cold weather and boils at 500O; its compound with 
ether is interesting for its agreeable odor of quinces. 
(See Pelargonic Ether.) 

From oil of rue by HN0 3 , and in „ne butter of cows and 
goats, in cod-liver oil, cocoanut oil, and some fusel 
oils ; white crystalline masses, of a peculiar " buck's " 
odor, easily soluble in alcohol and ether. 

From oil of chamomile by KO. (See Third Group.) 



(d) Acids obtainea from Empyreumatic Oils 

Phenylic acid, C 6 H 5 HO. In coal tar ; from salicylic and kinic acids, and some 

resins; in castor, and the urine of many domestic 
animals. Long colorless needles, melting at 9oO, 
boiling at 3690 F. ; not very soluble in water, in all 
proportions in alcohol and ether, soluble in concen- 
trated acetic acid. By nitric acid it is converted into 
picric acid. 

Cai-bazotic acid, By HN0 3 from salicin and its derivatives, from couma- 

HCH 2 (N0 2 ) 3 0. rin, phloridzic, and phenylic acids, silk, indigo, and 

coal tar ; yellow scales or octahedrons, soluble in 86 
parts of water of 60O, easily soluble in alcohol and 
ether, explosive when suddenly heated ; it colors the 
skin yellow, is very bitter, and is a dye for silk and 
wool, but not for cotton. Its salts are yellow, crys- 
tallizable, very bitter, soluble, and explosive by 
heating. 



HYDROCYANIC ACID. 445 

Ferrocyanide of Potassium and Hydrocyanic Acid. 

Hydrocyanic or prussic acid, as formed by a reaction between 
amygdalin and emulsin, and as an ingredient in the volatile oils 
distilled from many plants belonging to the natural family of 
Rosacea^, has already been referred to (see Nitrogenated Volatile 
Oils; also Amygdalin), but for pharmaceutical use, the acid is pre- 
pared artificially, and the U. S. Pharmacopoeia gives two processes, 
the starting-point for each being the decomposition of ferrocyanide 
of potassium by sulphuric acid. 

Potassii ferrocyanidum, U. S. P., yellow prussiate of potassium, is 
only made on a large scale from animal matter free of bones. This 
is either first subjected to dry distillation in order to gain part of 
the nitrogen as ammonia, and the remaining charcoal, which is highly 
charged with nitrogen, is fused together with small fragments of 
iron and potash; or the first part of the process being omitted, the 
animal matter is at once subjected to a red heat in conjunction with 
potash and iron. After long-continued heating and stirring, a 
combination has been effected, the fused mass now containing 
cyanide of potassium, which, when dissolved in water, combines 
with finely-divided iron, and crystallizes into large yellow tabular 
prisms, which have a sweetish bitter taste, are soluble in four parts 
of cold water, and insoluble in alcohol. 

They are composed of one equivalent of cyanide of potassium and 
one of cyanide of iron, =K 4 FeCy 6 . The water of crystallization is 
given off in a dry, warm atmosphere, and the crystals become white 
and pulverulent. This salt has an extensive use in the arts, and is 
employed for the preparation of ferrocyanide of iron, hydrocyanic 
acid, and all its compounds. 

This salt is little used in medicine; it is not poisonous, but in 
very large doses is apt to produce vertigo, coldness, and fainting; 
it has been recommended as an alterative, antiphlogistic, and tonic 
astringent in the dose of from ten to twenty grains internally, and 
externally, in an eye-salve, composed of from five to twenty grains 
to one drachm of cacao-butter. 

The commercial salt, though not chemically pure, is sufficiently 
pure, if it is well crystallized, and dissolves in two parts of boiling 
water. 

Argenti Cyanidum, IT. S. ; Cyanide of Silver. — According to the 
Pharmacopoeia, the hydrocyanic acid, produced from two troyounces 
of ferrocyanide of potassium, as below, is conducted into a solution 
of two ounces of nitrate of silver. 

The cyanide of silver is precipitated as a white, tasteless, inodor- 
ous powder, which is darkened by the light, is insoluble in diluted 
nitric acid, but decomposed by it at a boiling temperature. It is 
soluble in ammonia, and in cyanide of potassium, and consists of 
one equiv. of cyanogen, and one of silver= AgCy. It is used some- 
times externally in ointments as an anti-syphilitic. 

Acidum Hydrocyanicum Dilution, IT. S. P. — From the above two 
salts the Pharmacopoeia gives two distinct processes, the first of 



446 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

which is intended for making hydrocyanic acid in larger quanti- 
ties, while the second process is given for its extemporaneous pre- 
paration, and is particularly applicable for the use of the physician. 
First Process. — Take of ferrocyanide of potassium 3ij, sulphuric 
acid ^iss, distilled water q. s. Mix the acid with distilled water 
f^iv, and pour the mixture when cool into a glass retort. To this 
add the ferrocyanide of potassium, previously dissolved in distilled 
water, f if x. Pour of the distilled water f | viij into a cooled receiver ; 
and, having attached this to the retort, distil by means of a sand- 
bath, with a moderate heat, f 3yj. Lastly, add to the product, dis- 
tilled water f^v, or q. s. to render the diluted hydrocyanic acid of 
such strength that 12.7 grains of nitrate of silver dissolved in dis- 
tilled water may be accurately saturated by 100 grains of the acid, 
and give 10 grains of the cyanide of silver, which, corresponding 
with 20 per cent, of its own weight of anhydrous hydrocyanic acid, 
indicates 2 grains, or 2 per cent, of it in 100 grains of the officinal 
acid. 

The difficulties in this process are twofold: 1st. It is difficult to 
conduct the distillation in an ordinary uncovered retort on account 
of the excessive bumping occasioned by the escape of the acid vapor 
through the mixed liquid and precipitate; and, 2d. It is trouble- 
some to adjust the strength of the distillate to the officinal standard. 
The first of these difficulties may be overcome by placing the retort 
in a sand-bath, or setting it upon fine wire-cloth, introducing at 
the same time in the liquid a piece of thick platinum wire. The 
precision necessary to be observed in regard to the strength of so 
powerful a medicine as this, and the impossibility of regulating by 
the proportions employed the amount of the acid generated and 
absorbed by the water in the receiver, make it necessary to deter- 
mine its strength by experiment at each operation. This may be 
accomplished by testing, say 100 grains of the acid distillate with 
nitrate of silver before diluting it, carefully washing the resulting 
cyanide of silver, drying and weighing it, then calculating the 
degree of dilution required by the weight of this precipitate. If 
of proper strength, this would be 10 grains, as above, but in this 
experiment of course a larger yield would be obtained. The equa- 
tion would then be as follows : As the known weight of the pre- 
cipitate from acid of standard strength, is to the weight of cyanide 
obtained from the distillate, so is the quantity of the acid weighed 
to the quantity to be obtained by dilution. Suppose the precipi- 
tate to have weighed 11.5 grains — then 10 : 11.5 : : 100 : 115 ; or to 
every 100 grains of the distillate 15 grains of water must be added, 
to make the officinal diluted hydrocyanic acid. 

For ascertaining the strength of liquids containing hydrocyanic 
acid, by volumetric analysis, see a paper by Dr. W. H. Pile, in Am. 
Journ. Phar., 1862, p. 130, where also a neat graduated tube, made 
for this purpose, is figured. The process is Liebig's, and is based 
on the formation of a soluble double cyanide of potassium and 
silver, before chloride of silver is formed. 

The plan recommended to the inexperienced is, to saturate the 



HYDROCYANIC ACID. 447 

acid which comes over by the officinal process without special re- 
ference to the quantity of water in the receiver, with nitrate of 
silver, as stated above, to form the officinal cyanide of silver, and 
further proceed, after carefully washing and drying the product, by 
the second process of the Pharmacopoeia, as follows: — • 

Second Process for Diluted Hydrocyanic Acid. 

Take of Cyanide of silver Fifty grains and a half. 

Muriatic acid Forty-one grains. 

Distilled water One nuidounce. 

Mix the muriatic acid with the distilled water, add the cyanide 
of silver, and shake the whole in a well-stoppered vial; when the 
insoluble matter has subsided, pour off the clear liquid and keep it 
for use. In preparing this medicine, a slight excess of muriatic 
acid is not objectionable, giving it greater stability. The only ap- 
parent objection to this process is its expensiveness; this is, how- 
ever, less than would at first appear. The reaction between muri- 
atic acid and the cyanide results in the production of hydrocyanic 
acid and chloride of silver, thus — AgCy -f HC1 = HCy + AgCl. 
Now, the chloride of silver is convertible into pure metallic silver 
by the introduction into it while in the condition of a moist pow- 
der, of a strip of zinc, which abstracts the chlorine, the chloride of 
zinc becoming dissolved, and the pure silver remaining as a gray- 
colored spongy mass or powder, which, on being washed and 
treated with nitric acid, yields the soluble nitrate ready for any 
further use. 

The practitioner, who wishes to be prepared for every demand 
of his practice, may, with advantage, supply himself with a suitable 
f Vs vial, containing 50J grains cyanide of silver, to which the mixed 
muriatic acid and water may be added when the occasion arises. 

The diluted acid prepared as above is a colorless liquid occasion- 
ally having, from the presence of iron, a slight blue tint, of a pecu- 
liar odor and taste; it is entirely volatilized by heat, and decom- 
poses under the influence of light. It is usually put up in one- 
ounce ground-stoppered vials, wrapped in dark blue or black paper, 
and sometimes inclosed in a tin case. It contains two per cent, of 
anhydrous HCy. Its use in medicine has been avoided by some 
practitioners, on account of the violent poisonous character of the 
anhydrous or concentrated acid; but in the diluted form, in which 
it is officinal, it is no more dangerous than many other remedies 
constantly prescribed, and, notwithstanding the alleged variable 
strength of the commercial article, I believe it will be found, as 
nearly uniform as most other pharmaceutical preparations prepared 
by manufacturers. 

As a sedative and antispasmodic, it is a favorite with some 
practitioners, who emplo}^ it simply mixed with mucilage, or with 
the galenical preparations of digitalis, valerian, etc. It should not 
be prescribed with strong alkaline, ferruginous, or other metallic 
salts. 

In this country, no stronger hydrocyanic acid is used than the 



448 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

officinal; in other countries, however, its strength varies materially. 
The acid of the London, Dublin, and Prussian Pharmacopoeias is of 
about the same strength as our own, that of the Edinburgh Phar- 
macopoeia contains about 3J per cent., Scheele's acid 5 per cent., and 
some European Pharmacopoeias even a much larger proportion of 
anhydrous acid. The dose of our officinal acid, being nuj-to t*iv, is 
so small that there is no necessity for employing a stronger, acid in 
formulas, which would be liable to lead to dangerous mistakes; be- 
sides, it must be remarked that strong acids are very prone to spon- 
taneous decomposition, while that of the officinal strength, if not 
exposed to the light or to a continued high temperature, keeps well 
for a considerable time. Of course the vials are to be well stoppered 
on account of the volatility of the acid. 

Potassii Cyanidum, U. S. P. ; Cyanide of Potassium. — This salt may 
be mentioned in this place, as having all the medicinal properties 
of hydrocyanic acid; it is given as a substitute for it. It is pre- 
pared by fusing ferrocyanide of potassium with carbonate of potas- 
sium until effervescence ceases, when the clear liquid is poured off 
the precipitated oxide of iron, and, immediately after cooling, put 
into well-stoppered bottles. It is then in white fused masses of a 
powerful caustic taste, and a composition which is expressed by the 
formula KCy, but thus prepared it is contaminated by carbonate 
and cyanate of potassium. 

The pure cyanide is equal to § of its weight of hydrocyanic acid, 
the officinal to somewhat less. The dose is ^ grain, which, with 
proper care, may be gradually increased to j- grain ; it is given dis- 
solved in alcohol or water. 

It is a useful chemical agent for removing the stains of nitrate of 
silver and durable ink, and its utility as a solvent for metallic 
oxides is well known in electro-metallurgy and photography. 

Salicylous or spirous acid is artificially obtained by oxidation of 
salicin or populin and by fermentation of helicin. 3 parts salicin 
are mixed with 3 parts bichromate of potassium, and 24 parts water; 
to this 4J parts sulphuric acid in 12 parts water are added, and 
after the reaction has ceased, heat is applied, and distilled as long 
as with the water an oily liquid comes over, which is taken up by 
ether and left after its evaporation. 

The salicylites, when kept moist, are decomposed, acquiring a 
rose odor; this reaction has been proposed for the formation of an 
artificial rose-water. 

If salicylous acid is heated with potassa, it is converted into sali- 
cylic or spine acid, C 7 H 6 3 , which is of importance as the acid con- 
tained in the following: — 

Methyl-salicylic acid, or oil of wintergreen, CH 3 C 7 H 5 3 = C 8 H 8 3 , is 
the oil obtained by distillation with water from Gaultheria pro- 
cumbens. By distillation with an excess of baryta it is converted 
into carbolate of oxide of methyle, while by the dry distillation of 
an alkaline or earthy salicylate, a carbonate and carbolic acid is 
formed, C 7 H 6 3 = C0 2 + C 6 H 6 (carbolic acid). 

Caryophyllic or Eugenic Acid. — If oil of cloves is treated with 



ACIDUM BENZOICUM. 449 

solution of potassa or soda, and the light carbo-hydrogen distilled 
off, the acid may be easily separated by a mineral acid. 

Acidum Valerianicum, IT. S. P. 

This important acid, which is developed spontaneously by the 
oxidation of valerol, one of the ingredients of oil of valerian, is also 
met with in the root of Angelica archangelica, in the inner bark 
of Sambucus niger, in assafcetida, etc., and is artificially obtained 
by the oxidation of protein compounds, some fatty acids, and par- 
ticularly of amylic alcohol or fusel oil. The Pharmacopoeia prepares 
it from valerianate of sodium by dissolving 8 troyounces in 3 fluid- 
ounces of water and decomposing it by 3 J troyounces of sulphuric 
acid ; the oily layer is repeatedly agitated with strong sulphuric 
acid until its specific gravity is reduced to below .950, when it is dis- 
tilled and only that portion preserved which is not over .940 sp. gr. 

Valerianic acid is a colorless oily liquid, repulsive odor, pungent, 
sour, acrid, disagreeable taste. Sp. gr. .933. Boils at 270°. Soluble 
in 30 parts of water. 

If agitated with water it takes up from 20 to 25 per cent, water 
without losing its oily condition, and is now converted into the 
bihydrate, HC 5 H 9 2 + 2H 2 0, which has a specific gravity of .950 
and boils at 270°. 

The salts have an unctuous touch, and are inodorous when per- 
fectly dry, but mostly have the odor of the acid; they revolve when 
thrown upon water in a crystallized state, like the butyrates. 
Most of them are soluble in water or alcohol, or in both liquids, 
and have a sweet taste. 

The following salts have been used medicinally : the valerianate 
of ammonium, zinc, iron, bismuth, morphia, quinia, and atropia. 
See the several heads for descriptions of these. 

Acidum Benzoicum, U. S. P. 

This, with cinnamic acid, is considered characteristic of the class 
of medicines called balsams. The two acids are closely allied in 
their chemical nature, as has been already shown; 
they are also related to salicylic and allied acids. iv e i7$ # 

For medicinal use it is readily obtained from 
benzoin by sublimation. For this experiment, 
which is an interesting one to the pharmaceutical 
student, the following simple directions are to be 
observed. Select an iron or tinned iron pan or 
cup — a common pint cup, without a handle, will 
answer — and, having covered the bottom with 
some powdered benzoin mixed with sand, stretch 
over the top of it a piece of porous paper, which Benzoic acid appa . 
may be secured at the edge by a string, but pre- ratus. 

ferably by glue or some firm paste. ISTow fold a 
tall conical or straight-sided cap of the diameter of the pan, and 
tie it, or cement it securely round the upper edge, and set the whole 
29 




450 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

in a sand-bath, or over a slow and will-regulated source of heat, 
leaving it for several hours. On removing the cap, it will be found 
to contain brilliant white feathery crystals of benzoic acid. The 
residue in the cup, by being again powdered, mixed with sand, and 
heated, will yield another though a less abundant and less beautiful 
crop of crystals. 

The process of Scheele consists in boiling the balsam with hydrate 
of lime, and treating the benzoate of calcium thus formed with 
muriatic acid. Thus procured, benzoic acid has but little odor, and 
is ill adapted to the uses to which it is usually applied in medicine 
and pharmacy. Sometimes the process of sublimation is resorted 
to at first, and from the residue the remaining acid is extracted by 
Scheele's process, after which the whole is mixed. 

The virtues of the acid are, partly at least, dependent on the 
odorous principles with which it is associated. Its salts have no 
smell if prepared from the chemically pure acid, but they retain 
some of the odor of the officinal acid if prepared from it. Of the 
salts only the benzoates of ammonium and of sodium have been 
occasionally employed. 

Benzoic acid, if distilled with caustic potassa in excess, is con- 
verted into carbonic acid and benzol, C 7 H 6 2 = C0 2 + C 6 H 6 ; in the 
animal organism it is changed into hippuric acid, from which it 
may be reproduced on boiling with muriatic acid ; hippuric acid oc- 
curs naturally in the urine of herbivorous animals, and from this 
source the German article, occasionally met with in our commerce, 
is derived; it has frequently a peculiar urinous odor, and quite a 
different appearance from the sublimed article, having been crys- 
tallized from an aqueous solution. 

Detection of Impurities. — All fixed impurities are left behind on 
volatilizing some of the acid ; hippuric acid is detected by its odor, 
by leaving charcoal on heating, and by evolving ammonia on heat- 
ing it with lime ; cinnamic acid imparts the odor of bitter almonds 
to the distillate, with bichromate of potassium and sulphuric acid. 

Benzoin is frequently met with in commerce, which contains little 
or no benzoic acid, it being partly or wholly replaced by cinnamic 
acid ; though unfit for the preparation of benzoic acid by sublima- 
tion, it may still be of excellent quality for other pharmaceutical 
preparations, and for the use of perfumers. 

Cinnamic Acid. — To prepare this acid, liquid storax is first dis- 
tilled with water, to obtain styrol, afterwards treated with carbo- 
nate of sodium (residue is styracin); the solution is evaporated, 
decomposed by muriatic acid, the cinnamic acid after washing 
recrystallized, and the last impure portions are treated again with 
soda. In a similar way it is obtained from Tolu balsam (here the 
residue is Toluol). With excess of baryta or lime it is converted 
into carbonic acid and cinnamen (C 8 H 8 ) ; with bichromate of po- 
tassium and sulphuric acid into oil of bitter almonds (principal dis- 
tinction from benzoic acid), and by distillation with hypochlorite 
of sodium into a chlorinated volatile oil of agreeable odor. When 



ACIDUM CABBOLICUM. 451 

fused with hydrate of potassa it is decomposed into acetic and 
benzoic acids. 

Acidum Carbolicum, U. S. P. 

Carbolic Acid, Phenic Acid, Phenylic Alcohol. — This substance has 
been introduced into the list of Materia Medica, in the last edition 
of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. It is defined to be a solid substance 
obtained from the products of the distillation of coal tar between 
the temperatures of 300° and 400°. 

In the last edition of this work it was stated that the source of 
supply of creasote was indiscrimiuately the various kinds of tar, 
especially that obtained from bituminous coal, without pointing 
out in a marked manner the difference between them. Since then 
the investigations which chemists had been prosecuting for some 
time have been published, and from their labors some of the most 
interesting and beautiful applications of modern science have re- 
sulted. 

The following table will show the difference between creasote 
and carbolic acid, and in such a manner as to clearly place them 
before the mind of the student: — 



Ckeasote. 

A colorless, oily, neutral liquid. 

Boils at 397°. 

Does not congeal at 17° below zero. 

Sp. gr. 1.046. 

Does not coagulate collodion when 
mixed with it. 

If a splinter of pine wood be im- 
mersed in an alkaline solution of crea- 
sote, dried, and then dipped into muri- 
atic acid, it does not become blue. 

Sparingly soluble in water, requiring 
80 parts. 

Formula C\H 1ft O.,. 



Carbolic Acid. 

A solid crystalline substance. 

Boils at from 359 c - to 307 : . 

Solid at ordinary temperatures. 

Sp. gr. 1.065. 

Coagulates collodion when its solu- 
tion is mixed with it. 

A splinter of pine wood, dipped first 
in an alkaline solution of carbolic acid, 
dried, and then immersed in muriatic 
acid, will become of a deep-blue color 
in about half an hour. 

Soluble in from 20 to 33 parts of 
water, the purest being most soluble. 

Formula C' ILHO. 



The uses of carbolic acid are, as will be readily surmised, much 
the same as those of creasote ; it is employed as a caustic at times ; 
its solution is used in toothache, in the same way as creasote. 

A plaster of carbolic acid has been suggested by Joseph Hirsh, 
of Chicago, formed by spreading carbolate of glycerin on cloth, 
tissue paper, or other suitable surface. A plastic surgical dressing 
has been proposed by Dr. T. E. Jenkins, made by kneading 47 
parts of prepared chalk with 17 parts of a mixture of 4 parts of 
glycerin and 1 part of carbolic acid. 

The following are several formulas, which are to be relied on as 
emanating from F. Crace Calvert, of Manchester, England: — 

As a Caustic. — Melt the acid by placing the bottle'in hot water, 
and, when melted, add one-twentieth of its bulk of water. It will 
then remain permanently fluid, and can be diluted as required. 

As a Lotion, for External Use. — Add 1 part of acid to 30 parts 
of boiling water, agitate well, and filter. 



452 OX ORGANIC ACIDS. 

For Dressings. — It is advisable that the acid should be dissolved 
in either pure sweet olive oil, or almond oil, or glycerin. 

For Burns and Scalds. — A mixture of 1 part acid and 6 parts 
pure olive oil is most frequently employed. 

Carbolic acid, when dissolved in glycerin, can readily be diluted 
to any degree of strength as required. 

An extra pure acid is sold for internal purposes ; it has but a 
very faint odor, and no objectionable taste, and is specially recom- 
mended. 

Its principal use is, however, as a disinfectant, and it is perhaps 
one of the most efficient of the various liquid purifiers known ; but 
while this is the case in regard to the article as ordinarily used, it 
must be remembered that the ordinary preparation is a mixture in 
variable proportions of phenylic and cresvlic alcohols, and from the 
experiments of Dr. E. R. Squibb, it would seem that cresylic alco- 
hol is at least double the strength of phenyl alcohol for the purpose 
of destroying fungous growths. For fuller information on this sub- 
ject, see the paper of Dr. Squibb, in Proc. Amer. Ph. Asso., vol. xvi. 
p. 429. 

The products of coal tar are thus summed up in the 14th edition 
of the U. 8. Dispensatory: — 

Six solids: carbon, naphthaline, and paraffin being the most im- 
portant. 

Liquids: which may be subdivided into three classes — acids, 
neutrals, and bases : — 

a. Acids are: carbolic or phenic, acetic, butyric, rosolic, and bumo- 
lic. Of these the three first named are by far the most important. 

b. Keutral: water, essence of tar, light oil of tar, heavy oil of 
tar, benzol, toluol, cumol, cymol, propyl, butyl, amyl, caproyl, 
hexylene, heptyiine. Of these the most interesting are benzol, 
light and heavy oil of tar, essence of tar, and toluol. 

c. Bases: ammonia, methylamine, ethylamine, anilin, quinolin, 
picolin, toluidin, lutidin, cumidin, pyrrhol, and phsetin. Of these 
the most important are ammonia and anilin. 

Gases : hydrogen, carburetted hydrogen, bicarburetted hydrogen, 
and various other carbo-hydrogens, carbonic oxide, sulphuret of 
carbon, carbonic acid, hydrosulphuric acid, hydrocyanic acid. 

Among this long list of derivatives, carbolic acid is that which 
is most important in a pharmaceutical point of view, which seems 
to render the notice of these products in this place proper, as most 
of them have no further pharmaceutic interest. 

The other products of coal tar that deserve notice from their 
intimate relation to pharmacy are, first, benzine, which is obtained 
from the light oil of tar, or coal naphtha as it is termed, this being 
derived from the first distillation of coal tar, at a temperature not 
above 390°, and when the distillate has attained a sp. gr.'of .815 to 
.830, the process must be suspended. The benzine is obtained from 
this coal naphtha by purifying, by mixing it with 5 per cent, of 
H 2 S0 4 , permitting it to rest for a day that the acid and impurities 
may settle, and then adding 2 per cent, of a solution of caustic soda, 



ACIDS YIELDING ESSENTIAL OILS. 453 

sp. gr. 1.382, to neutralize any remaining acid, and distilling with 
a current of steam. 

Benzine is a light transparent liquid, of a peculiar penetrating 
odor recalling that of gas tar, sp. gr. varying from .815° to .820°. 
It is not a pure definite chemical product, and must be carefully 
distinguished from benzole, which is a definite compound of the 
formula C 6 H 5 H, and sp. gr. .850. The principal uses of benzine in 
pharmacy depend upon its great solvent powers over fatty matters, 
resinous substances, etc. It has been suggested as a substitute for 
ether in the preparation of some of the oleo resins, but experiments 
thus far are not conclusively in its favor. It is much used as a de- 
tergent for removing grease from textile fabrics, and forms the 
basis of most preparations sold for this purpose. 

After the light oil of tar or coal naphtha has been separated, the 
heat is increased, and the distillate now has a sp. gr. of .880 to .885. 
This is purified by H 2 S0 4 and one of the fixed alkalies and redistil- 
lation, 10 per cent, of acid and 6 per cent, of soda being used. 
The heavy oil thus purified is largely consumed for illuminating 
purposes; after the heavy oil has been drawn oif there remains in 
the still while warm a semifluid mass, consisting largely of paraffine 
and naphthaline. The former of these is largely consumed in the 
manufacture of candles, and has been recommended as a substitute 
for wax in pharmaceutical preparations, but from the experiments 
of the late Mr. C. T. Carney, it was found to impart a granular 
character when used to the exclusion of wax. In this opinion he is 
supported by Mr. J. F. Babcock. 

It is from the alkaline and acid liquors obtained in the various 
purifying processes that the acids and bases above noticed are 
obtained, and among them anilin has of late years assumed an 
importance in the arts rivalling almost any of those depending 
upon chemical research. 

Picric Acid, Carbazotic Acid, Welter's Bitters. — The cheapest 
method of preparing it is from coal tar, but from indigo it is better 
obtained in a pure state. — 1 part indigo is boiled with 10 to 12 
parts of nitric acid, specific gravity 1.43, gradually added until 
nitrous acid fumes cease to be evolved; the picric acid crystallizes 
on cooling, and is purified by combining with an alkaloid and pre- 
cipitating by nitric acid. 

It precipitates gelatine, and the solution of its soda salt is a re- 
agent for potassa, which salt is but sparingly soluble. 

It has been occasionally used in medicine, and is said to be em- 
ployed in France in making beer, in place of hops. {See Potassii 
Picras.) 

(e) Acids yielding Essential Oils. 

Myronic acid, C 10 H 19 ]S"S 2 O 10 , in the form of a potassa salt is con- 
tained in black mustard seed, from which it is obtained by ex- 
hausting it, first with alcohol, afterwards with water; the last 
solution is evaporated to a syrup, freed from gum and mucilage by 
a little alcohol, and evaporated spontaneously to crystallize. The 



454 ON OEGANIC ACIDS. 

salt is in colorless needles of a cooling taste, readily soluble in water 
but insoluble in strong alcohol. Its rational composition is probably 
KHSO3 + C 3 H 5 CKS (oil of mustard) + C 6 H 12 6 H 2 (grape sugar). 

The acid forms a colorless syrup of acid reaction and bitter taste, 
soluble in water and alcohol, but insoluble in ether. Myrosin is 
the ferment of black and white mustard seed, which decomposes 
the acid, thus yielding oil of black mustard. 

Sixth Group. — Astringent and allied Acids. 

These acids are widely diffused throughout the vegetable king- 
dom, occurring more rarely in annual plants, but are met with in 
most perennials, generally in the bark, in the leaves, and morbid 
excrescences, frequently also in the wood and fruit. They are all 
with two exceptions uncrystallizable, inodorous, of an astringent 
taste, and soluble in water and alcohol. The solutions are precipi- 
tated by gelatin and albumen, most metallic oxides and the vege- 
table alkaloids; iron salts are generally rendered dark green, blue, 
or black. They are weak acids, and if kept in a moist state, are 
rapidly changed in contact with the air ; their salts are quickly 
darkened while in solution, or, if insoluble, while being washed 
upon a filter. Owing to this property, their composition and the 
nature of their changes are, in many cases, still a matter of contro- 
versy. 

Medical Properties. — The relative utility of tannic and gallic 
acids, which are too apt to be confounded by physicians, depends 
upon the fact that the former acts directly upon the mucous mem- 
brane with which it comes in contact, arresting hemorrhage or 
other excessive discharge by its direct effect on the gelatin contained 
in them. It is hence a direct and powerful styptic, while gallic 
acid, by entering the circulation, produces an astringent and tonic 
impression upon the more remote organs which cannot be directly 
impressed. The dose of tannic acid is from two to ten grains, that 
of gallic acid from five to twenty, several times a day. The former 
is much used in ointments as a substitute for powdered galls, in 
about one-fourth the quantity, and is also well adapted to astringent 
injections instead of the less soluble vegetable astringents. Its 
action is considered somewhat different (harsher than that of the 
modified forms of tannic acid contained in kino, krameria, cin- 
chona, etc. 

The list which follows contains the names of different vegetable 
astringents owing their activity wholly or in part to gallic or some 
of the modified forms of tannic acid. 

List of Vegetable or Tannic Acid Astringents. 

Acacia cochliacarpa ; the bark. Brazil bark ; cortex astrmgens Brasiliensis, 

Bistorta ; root of Polygonum bistorta. Bistort. 

Carya; bark of C. alba and other species. Hickory bark. 

Catechu ; extract of wood of Acacia catechu. Catechu. 

Chimaphila ; leaves of C. urabellata. Pipsissewa. 

Cinchona ; bark of different species of Cinchona. Peruvian bark. 



ASTRINGENT AND ALLIED ACIDS. 455 

Diospyros ; unripe fruit of D. Virgmiana. Persimmon. Bark also used. 

Epigcea; leaves of E. repens. Trailing arbutus. 

Galla ; morbid excrescence in Quercus infectoria. Galls. 

Geranium ; rhizoma of G. maculatum. Cranesbill. 

Geum ; root of G. rivale. Water avens. 

Granati fructus cortex ; from Punica granatum. Pomegranate. 

" radicis cortex ; " " " 

Hamamelis ; bark and leaves of H. Yirginiana. TVitchhazel. 
Hsematoxjlon ; wood of H. Campeckianuni. Logwood. 
Heuchera ; root of H. Americana. Alum root. 
Hippjocastanum ; bark of iEsculus H. Horsechestnut bark. 
Ilex; bark and leaves of Ilex opaca. American holly. 
Juglans;* leaves and rind (pericarp) of J. cinerea and other species. 
Kalmia ; leaves of K. latifolia. Mountain laurel. 
Kino ; inspissated juice of various plants. Kino. 
Krameria ; root of K. triandra. Khatany. 
Matico ; leaves of Artanthe elongata. Matico. 

Monesia; extract from Chrysophyllum glyeiphlseum. Extract of monesia. 
Prinos ; bark of P. verticillatus. Black alder. 
Pyrola ; leaves of P. rotundifolia and other species. 
Quercus alba ; the bark. White oak bark. 

Quercus glandes ; the fruit of various species of Quercus. Acorns. 
Quercus tinctoria ; the bark. Black oak bark. 
fflius ; bark and leaves of K. glabrum and other species. Sumach. 
Rose Gallica ; the petals. Red rose. 

Rubus ; root of R. villosus and Canadensis. Blackberry root. 
Salix ; bark of S. alba and other species. Willow bark. 
Salvia ; leaves of S. officinalis. Sage. 

Santalum ; wood of Pterocarpus santalinus. Red saunders. 
Spiraea ; root of Spiraea tomentosa. Hardback. 
Statice ; the root of S. Caroliniana. Marsh rosemary. 
Tormentilla ; the root of Potentilla T. Tormentil. 
Uva ursi ; leaves of Arctostaphylos U. U. Bearbeny leaves. 

Syllabus of Astrikgent akd Allied Acids. 

Gallotannic acid, C 27 H 22 17 . \ la galls from Quercus infectoria, and Chinese galls from 

Acidum tannicum. j Distylium racemosum, and in sumach. 

Gallic acid, H 3 C 7 IT 3 5 H 2 0. In uva ursi, sumach, etc., the seeds of mangoes (Mangifera 

Indica) contain 7 per cent. 

Pyrogallicacid, HO,C 6 E 5 2 . By destructive distillation of the former. 

Paraellagic or rufigallic, By treating gallic acid with H 2 S0 4 , and throwing into water ; 

C 7 H 4 4 -J-E1 2 0. precipitate sublimes in vermilion red prisms; little solu- 

ble in alcohol and ether. 

Ellagic or bezoaric, In oriental bezoars (animal calculi) and by decomposition 

C 14 H 6 O g -f-2H 2 0. of tannin; deposited by infusion of galls; yellowish, 

crystalline; inodorous; tasteless; insoluble in ether, 
nearly insoluble in water and alcohol. 

Tannoxylic, C 7 H 6 6 . By KO and tannin at ordinary temperature; lead salt 

brick-red. 

Tannomelanic, C 6 H 4 3 . By KO and tannin at 212°; lead salt dark brown. 

Metagallic or galhuminic, By heating gallic or tannic acid to 480° ; black, tasteless, 
C 6 H 4 2 . insoluble in water, soluble in KO. 

Quercotaunic (?). In oak-bark, black tea, etc. ; similar to gallotannic, but 

yields no gallic or pyrogallic acid. 

Catechutannic or mimotan- In catechu, probably by oxidation of catechuic acid; light 
nic (?). yellow; precipitates gelatine ; protosalts of iron grayish- 

green, sesquisalts brownish-green; tartar emetic is not 
precipitated ; yields no sugar with H 2 S0 4 . 



# Juglans, U. 6\ P. The inner bark of Juglans cinerea is cathartic. 



456 



ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 



Catechuic or Tanningic 
(Catechin), C 19 H 18 8 . 



Rufocatechuic or rubinic. 



Catechuinic or Japonic, 

C 6 H 4 2 . 
Pyrocatechuic or oxyphenic 

or Pyrodioric, C 6 H 6 2 . 



Kino or coccotannic. 
Coffeotannic or chlorogenic, 

C 15 H 18°8- 

Viridinic or coffeic, C 7 H 7 4 . 

Boheatannic, C 7 H 6 4 -{-Aq. 
Kinovotannic, C 7 H 9 4 . 



Rufikinovic (kinovic red). 
Cinchotannic, C 17 H ]6 9 . 



Ruficinchonic (Cinchona 
Red). 



Moritannic, C 13 H 10 O 6 -f H 2 0. 

Rufimoric, C 8 H 6 4 -fH 2 0. 

Moric (Morin), C 12 H 8 5 . 

Quercitritannic (?). 
Galitannic, C 7 H 8 5 . 
Aspertannic, C 7 H 8 4 . 

Callutannic, C 7 H 8 4 . 

Rhodotannic, C 7 H 6 3 -f H 2 0. 

Leditannic, C 7 H 6 3 +3H 2 0. 



In catechu ; white scales or needles ; readily soluble in 
alcohol, boiling ether, and hot water ; not precipitated 
by starch, gelatine, tartar emetic, or vegetable alkalies; 
by acetate of lead white, by sesquichloride of iron dark- 
green; by oxidation catechutannin is formed. (See 
American Journal of Pharmacy, xxviii. 326.) 

In the oxidized alkaline solution of the former. The tan- 
nin in krameria yields a similar red acid by spontaneous 
oxidation. 

Product of decomposition by KO ; black. 

By dry distillation of catechu, kino, rhatany, fustic, etc. ; 
is carbolic acid -f- 20 ; white crystals fusible at 234° ; 
freely soluble in alcohol, ether, and water; reduces 
oxides of the noble metals; salts of Fe 2 3 colored 
green; turning red by NH 3 . 

In kino ; readily soluble in alcohol and hot water, scarcely 
in ether ; precipitates sesquisalts of iron, but not tartar 
emetic ; by oxidation red. 

In coffee, cahinca root, the leaves of Ilex Paraguayensis ; 
colorless needles (?) ; sesquisalts of iron are colored 
green ; protosalts, tartar emetic, and gelatine not pre- 
cipitated; yields kinone with H 2 S0 4 and Mn0 2 (?). 

By oxidation of former, or in presence of alkalies; brown- 
ish amorphous ; solution in H 2 S0 3 carmine, precipitated 
blue by water; its solution green ; the lead salt blue. 

In tea, besides quercotannic acid; deliquescent; fuses at 
212° to a red compound. 

In Quina nova bark, not precipitated by gelatine, by 
Fe 2 Cl 3 dark green ; yields, by dry distillation, pyroca- 
techuic acid. 

By oxidation of former. 

Precipitated by sesquisalts of iron green, by tartar emetic, 
starch, gelatine, and albumen ; soluble in diluted acids, 
alcohol, ether, and water. 

In red cinchona; product of oxidation of the former; 
various ingredients of bark have received this name ; 
that of H. Hasiwetz is of a chocolate or black color, 
soluble in alcohol, ether, and alkalies. 

In fustic, Morus tinctoria ; yellow prisms fusible at 400° ; 
precipitated by gelatine ; by tersulphate of iron green- 
ish-black ; by sugar of lead yellow, and partly by tartar 
emetic ; with B0 3 a gelatinous mass ; solution in alka- 
lies turns dark brown. 

Brick-red floccules, with alkalies carmine-red solution, 
with alum, baryta, and tin, dark-red lakes ; probably 
identical with carmic acid. 

In fustic; white, crystalline, with alkalies yellow, with 
Fe 2 Cl 3 garnet-red ; olive-green precipitate with salts of 
FeO. 

In quercitron bark; green with salts of Fe 2 3 ; quercitric 
acid is probably nearly allied to it. 

In Galium verum and aparine ; precipitates Fe 2 Cl 3 dark- 
green ; sugar of lead chrome yellow ; by alkalies brown. 

In Asperula odorata; readily soluble in water and alcohol, 
little in ether; colors Fe 2 Cl 3 dark-green; not precipi- 
tated by albumen, gelatine, or tartar emetic. 

In Calluna vulgaris; precipitates Fe 2 Cl 3 green, salts of 
PbO yellow, SnCl 2 yelk-yellow ; heated with acids yields 
calluxanthin. 

In the leaves of Rhododendron ferrugineum ; amber yel- 
low ; precipitates salts of PbO chrome yellow ; with 
acids rhodozanthin. 

In Ledum palustre; reddish ; readily soluble in water and 
alcohol ; colors Fe 2 Cl 3 green ; with acids ledixanthin. 



GALLOTANNIC ACID, 



457 



Rubichloric, C u H 16 O g 



Cephaelic, Ipecacuanhic, 
C 7 H 8 3 +H 2 0. 

Pinitannic, C 7 H 5 4 . 



Oxypinitannic, C 14 H 16 9 . 

Pinicortannic, C 16 H 18 O n . 

Cortepinitannic, C 16 H 4 T 
Cissotannic, C 10 H 12 O 8 . 

Xanthotannic, C u H, 8 2 . 



In Rubia tinctorum and asperula odorata ; colorless ; solu- 
ble in alcohol and water, insoluble in ether; by HC1 
yields Chlorrubine, C 12 H 4 3 , a dark-green powder; solu- 
ble in alkalies, blood-red. 

Very bitter; reddish-brown; soluble in water, alcohol, and 
ether; colors Fe 2 C1 3 green, on addition of NH 3 violet or 
black ; precipitates salts of PbO white. 

In the leaves of Pinus silvestris and Thuja occidentalis ; 
yellow ; soluble in water, alcohol, and ether ; no pre- 
cipitate with gelatine or tartar emetic; colors Fe 2 Cl 3 
red-brown ; precipitates PbO yellow. 

With the former ; brownish ; very soluble in alcohol and 
water; colors Fe 2 Cl 3 intensely green; precipitates PbO 
and BaO yellow; not gelatine or tartar emetic. 

In the bark of Pinus silvestris ; reddish-brown ; colors 
Fe 2 Cl 3 dark-green. 

With the former ; red ; colors Fe 2 Cl 3 intensely green. 

The red coloring matter of autumnal leaves ; very weak 
acid. 

The yellow coloring matter of autumnal leaves ■ weak 
acid, not precipitated by gelatine. 



Acidum Tannicum. Tan = C 27 H 22 17 . {Gallotannic Acid.) 

The new officinal process of the Pharmacopoeia directs the mace- 
ration of powdered nutgall, previously exposed to a damp atmo- 
sphere for twenty-four hours, in ether, previously washed with 
water, sufficient to form a soft paste. This is to be set aside, closely 
covered, for six hours, then enveloped in a close canvas cloth, ex- 
pressed powerfully between tinned plates to obtain the liquid por- 
tion. The remaining mass is to be again reduced to powder and 
mixed w r ith sufficient ether, shaken with one-sixteenth its bulk of 
water to form again a soft paste, then expressed as before. The 
liquids being mixed are to be spontaneously evaporated to a syrupy 
consistence, then spread on glass or tinned plates and dried in a 
drying closet. 

Gallotannic acid is also conveniently prepared by the former pro- 
cess, which consists of treating powdered galls in a narrow covered 
displacer, w T ith washed ether. The ethereal tincture which passes 
separates, upon standing, into two layers; the lower one is aqueous, 
thick, and of a light buff or straw color; it contains the tannic acid, 
which, by the action of the small portion of water in the washed 
ether, has been dissolved out from the galls. The upper layer or 
stratum of liquor is limpid and specifically much lighter than the 
other; it has a greenish color, and contains very little tannin, but 
a small amount of coloring matter from the galls. To obtain the 
dry product, the light layer may be poured off and purified by dis- 
tillation, and combined with water for another operation, while the 
thick heavier layer is evaporated in a capsule by a carefully regu- 
lated heat till dry. 

If a white and very porous product is desired, the capsule should 
be inverted towards the end of the evaporation, and the thick 
syrupy liquid exposed to radiated heat. It is swelled up and 
whitened as the vapor is disengaged. The whole of the liquid 
which comes through may be evaporated without the precaution of 



458 ON" ORGANIC ACIDS. 

pouring off" the top layer, but the tannin then has a greener tinge. 
In large manufacturing establishments, apparatus is, of course, con- 
structed for saving all the ether for future use. The first process, 
as above, though perhaps less eligible for the use of the pharma- 
cist in making the acid on a small scale, corresponds more nearly 
with that in common use by manufacturing chemists. The results 
are nearly the same by both processes, the yield varying from 30 to 
60 per cent, of the galls employed 

Gallotannic acid is a yellowish- white powder, or in a porous pul- 
verulent condition; has a strongly astringent taste; is entirely dis- 
sipated when thrown on red-hot iron. It is freely soluble in water, 
alcohol, glycerin, in ether, in the fixed and volatile oils. Its 
aqueous solution reddens litmus and produces with solution of 
gelatin a white flocculent precipitate, with salts of sesquioxide of 
iron a bluish-black precipitate, and with solutions of the organic 
alkalies white precipitates, very soluble in acetic acid. 

Mohr, Sandrock, and others assert the syrupy liquid (the lower 
layer as above) to be a concentrated solution of tannin in ether, 
which is not miscible with ether, except by the intervention of a 
little alcohol; they therefore reject the employment of aqueous 
ether, which has a tendency to swell up the powdered galls, and 
retard percolation, and recommend a mixture of 90 per cent, alco- 
hol and ether (one to twenty parts, Guibourt). 

The concentrated ethereal solution containing 46.5 to 56.2 per 
cent, of tannic acid (Mohr), and being insoluble in ether, it was 
suggested in the second edition, might be a tannic ether; 13 equiva- 
lents of ether = 481 to 1 equivalent of tannin = 618, require exactly 
56.2 per cent, of the latter and 43.8 per cent, of the former. Prof. 
J. M. Maisch was the first to observe this, and Prof. Bolley has 
since published a similar observation ; other chemists still adhere to 
the older view of the solubility of tannin in ether. (See Amer. 
Journ. Pharm., 1861, 207, 219, 337, and Proc. Amer. Ph. Assoc, 
1862, 158.) 

Acidum Gallicum. Ga = 3HO,C 7 H 6 5 . {Gallic Acid.) 
Gallic acid is made by subjecting a portion of powdered galls 
to long-continued action of air and moisture in a warm place. 
This may be accomplished in an evaporating capsule loosely covered 
with paper. The powder is first made into a thin paste with w T ater, 
and water repeatedly added to this to prevent its drying, until after 
the lapse of thirty days (U. S. P.), when the whole of the tannic has 
passed spontaneously into gallic acid. In extracting this from the 
moist mass, advantage is taken of the solubility of gallic acid in 
hot water, and its ready precipitation on cooling ; all that is neces- 
sary is to press out from the pasty mass its water, and, rejecting 
this, to digest the remaining paste in hot water, and filter the solu- 
tion while hot through animal charcoal to decolorize it, and a nearly 
white crystalline powder of gallic acid is obtained. A water-bath 
funnel, Fig. 142, is used for filtering the solution while hot. Care 
must be taken in these processes not to employ vessels of tinned 



GALLIC ACID. 459 

iron, which, by the exposure of a small surface of iron, may blacken 
the whole product. The amount of gallic acid obtained from galls 
is about 20 per cent. 

The ferment inducing the change of tannic into gallic acid is 
identical with pectase; emulsin, yeast, albumen, and legumin are 
without action, on the contrary they retard the influence of pectase. 
Tannin, according to Strecker, is decomposed into 3 equivalents of 
gallic acid and one of grape sugar; C 27 H 22 17 + 4H 2 = 3H 3 C 7 H 3 5 
+ C 6 H 12 6 ; but Knop obtained from gallotannin 94 per cent, gallic 
acid, and Kawalier regards it as a mixture of two compounds, one 
of which yields gallic, and the other, present only in small propor- 
tion, yields ellagic acid. 

The same decomposition of tannic acid is induced by the influ- 
ence of diluted sulphuric acid, and the process for obtaining gallic 
acid can be materially shortened if, instead of exposure to the at- 
mosphere, galls or tannin are treated with dilute sulphuric acid at 
the boiling"point. Otherwise the process remains the same as above 
given. 

Gallic acid is soluble in cold water in about the proportion of 4 
grains to the ounce. Its salts with the alkalies and alkaline earths 
are crystallizable; at a boiling temperature, sesquisalts of iron are 
decomposed by being reduced to protosalts, carbonic acid being 
given oft* at the same time. 

In common with tannin, it is usually given in pills, and used 
externally in ointments or solution. It is likewise used in hair 
dyes, an ammoniacal solution of nitrate of silver being afterwards 
employed to produce the color. 

Pyrogallic Acid.—Q^ & 3 = gallic acid C 7 H 6 5 — C0 2 .— The best 
and cheapest method for preparing it is from the dry aqueous ex- 
tract of galls in an apparatus suited to subliming benzoic acid, 
heated in a bath of sand or chloride of zinc, to 400° F., and to- 
wards the end of the process a little higher. 100 parts of dry 
extract yield about 5 parts perfectly pure pyrogallic acid, and the 
same amount of impure, to be purified by another sublimation. 
By dry distillation of Chinese galls in small retorts, Liebig obtained 
a liquid, yielding, on evaporation, 15 per cent, brown crystallized 
pyrogallic acid. 

White laminse or needles of a pearly lustre, soluble in 2J parts 
water at 55° F., less in alcohol and ether; the solutions do not affect 
litmus paper; its taste is very bitter; fusible at 240° F., boiling at 
about 400°, at 480° it is blackened and converted into metagallic 
acid. Solution of pyrogallic acid, if dropped into milk of lime, 
produces a characteristic red coloration, changing to brown. Pro- 
tosulphate of iron produces a bluish-black color, a trace of sesqui- 
salt changes it to a dark green. Sesquisalts of iron color a solution 
of the acid red; h} T drated sesquioxide of iron and a pyrogallate 
give a dark blue liquid and precipitate. 

It is much employed in photography on account of its great 
sensitiveness to light in combination with silver, and for dyeing 
the hair brown and black. The salts are more soluble than the 
gallates. 



460 



ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 



Seventh Gtkoup. — Acids oe Animal Origin. 

Two acids have been described in the second group, which for a 
long time were supposed to be exclusively of animal origin, though 
likewise formed by the decomposition of certain organic com- 
pounds of vegetable products ; modern chemistry, however, has 
established the fact that formic and lactic acids are both produced 
during the natural healthful life of some vegetable organisms, and 
that the nettles, for instance, owe their powerful irritant effect to 
the same acid that nature has provided for the defence of ants, 
wasps, and bees. 

Vegetable acids, to the exclusion of but a few compounds which 
from their chemical behavior may be classed with the acids, are 
destitute of nitrogen ; the acids arranged in this group all contain 
nitrogen, one also sulphur, and are produced by the functions of 
some of the most important organs of the animal economy ; they 
comprise the acids found in the muscles, occurring in the urine, and 
being the active constituents of bile. None of them have been 
used in medicine in a free state ; the impure soda salt of one of the 
biliary acids, however, has been somewhat employed as a substitute 
for inspissated bile, and others may probably be found useful if 
attention is drawn to them. 



Inosinic acid, C 10 H 14 N 2 O u . 

Uric or Lithic acid, 
C 5 N 4 H 4 3 - 

Hippuric acid, C 9 H 9 N0 3 . 
Cholic or glycocholic acid, 

C 24 H 40°5- 

Hyocholic acid, C 25 H 40 O 4 . 



Sulphocholic, Taurocholic, or 
choleinic acid, 



Syllabus of Animal Acids. 

In the juice of the meat of most animals and ingredient 
of culinary and dietetic preparations of meat ; strong 
acid, agreeable taste of broth, decomposed by boiling; 
precipitated by alcohol in crystalline floccules ; insolu- 
ble in ether. 

Free and combined in the urine of birds, reptiles, some 
molluscs and insects; in the urinary sediment and cal- 
culi of man and quadrupeds; white silky scales or 
needles; soluble in 14,000 parts cold and 1800 parts 
boiling water, insoluble in alcohol and ether. Evapo- 
rated with diluted HN0 3 , and NH 4 added, forms murex- 
ide. Salts mostly insoluble or sparingly soluble. 

In the urine of man and herbivorous animals, increased 
by partaking of benzyle (tolyle) compounds. Color- 
less prisms or needles ; taste bitterish acid ; soluble 
in alcohol, in 400 parts cold water, less in ether. 
Salts mostly soluble in boiling alcohol and boiling 
water ; the alkaline salts soluble in the cold. 

As soda salt in the bile of most animals. Thin white 
needles ; taste sweetish and bitter; very easily soluble 
in alcohol, less in ether, with difficulty in water ; salts 
soluble in alcohol. 

Combined with soda, potassa, and ammonia in the bile 
of the hog. Colorless, amorphous, fuses in boiling 
water; little soluble in water, readily in alcohol, in- 
soluble in ether; alkaline salts soluble in alcohol and 
water, not in ether, separated from its solutions by 
NaCl. 

In small quantity in the bile of the ox and other ani- 
mals. Resinous, soluble in little water, turbid by more ; 
solution dissolves fats, fatty acids, and cholesterin. 
Alkaline salts, soluble in alcohol and water, crystallize 
in contact with ether. 



ANIMAL ACIDS. 461 

Inosinic Acid. — The mother-liquor of the preparation of creatine 
is precipitated by alcohol, the crystals in hot solution are decom- 
posed by chloride of barium ; the crystallizing inosinate of baryta 
decomposed by sulphuric acid, and the concentrated solution of 
inosinic acid precipitated by alcohol. 

Uric acid is readily prepared from guano, by exhausting it first 
with water, then treating with potassa, precipitating by chloride 
of calcium, and the filtrate by muriatic acid ; the precipitated acid 
is to be purified. 

The quantity of uric acid in urine is determined by precipitating 
this liquid with an acid ; if no albumen is present, muriatic acid 
will answer, otherwise acetic, or, better, phosphoric acid is to be 
used ; the liquid retains of uric acid only .009 per cent, of its 
weight, which loss is usually made up by the precipitation of 
coloring matter. 

Gregory's process for obtaining it is as follows : the fresh urine 
of cows or horses is mixed with milk of lime in excess, boiled, 
strained, and evaporated to J- its original measure ; it is then 
supersaturated with muriatic acid, and the crystallized acid puri- 
fied by again combining it with lime and decomposing with mu- 
riatic acid. 

The urine of cows contains 1.3, of horses .38 per cent, of hippuric 
acid ; in putrefied urine it is changed to benzoic acid. Boiled with 
dilute acids or alkalies, it splits into benzoic acid, C 7 H 6 2 , and 
glycocoll, C 2 H 5 Isr0 2 . 

Glycocoll, glycin, or amido-acetic acid, C 2 H 5 ITO 2 , is formed by the 
action of sulphuric acid or potassa upon gelatine, and is found in 
hippuric and the nitrogenated biliary acids. It occurs in colorless 
hard crystals, soluble in 4.3 p. cold water and in boiling diluted 
alcohol, has a faint acid reaction, no odor, and a sweet saccharine 
taste ; heated with a concentrated alkali, it assumes a bright fire- 
red color and decomposes. 

Bile is separated by the liver ; it is a liquid containing about 90 
per cent, water, has a strongly bitter taste and a yellowish or 
brow uish-green color, and a neutral or faint alkaline reaction. Its 
consistence is due to mucus, its coloring matters produce irides- 
cence with nitric acid and its acids, and their acid derivatives yield 
a purple coloration with sugar and. sulphuric acid. We owe most 
of our present knowledge of the constituents of bile to the re- 
searches of Prof. Strecker. 

The biliary acids are best prepared by precipitating fresh bile 
with acetate of lead, washing the precipitate with hot alcohol, and 
decomposing the residue by sulphuretted hydrogen ; cholic acid is 
thus obtained. Taurocholic acid is precipitated by subacetate of 
lead from the mother-liquor filtered from the above precipitate by 
sugar of lead. Hyocholic acid is with less trouble obtained by 
separating its soda salt with table salt, purifying by alcohol, and 
decomposing by sulphuric acid. 

Impure cholate of soda, bilin of Berzelias, has been proposed as 
a substitute for ox-gall in doses varying from 5 to 15 grains three 



462 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

or four times daily. It is easily prepared by evaporating fresh ox- 
gall to one-half, precipitating slimy and coloring matter by alcohol, 
treating the nitrate with animal charcoal, evaporating and washing 
with ether. 

The acids are copulated compounds, and split on treatment with 
boiling dilute acids or alkalies into their constituents as follows: — 

Cholic acid. C 24 H 10 O 5 4" ^2® — Cholalic acid -f- Glycocoll. 

Hyocholic acid, C 25 H 40 < ) 4 -j- H 2 = Hyocholalic acid -f- Glycocoll. 
Taurocholic " C 26 H 45 NS0 7 -j- H 2 ==Cholalic " + Taurin. 

Taurin or bilasparagin, C 2 H 7 lSrS03, crystallizes in large colorless 
prisms of a cooling taste ; soluble in 16 p. cold water, little in 
alcohol ; it is one of the most stable compounds, not being decom- 
posed by concentrated sulphuric and nitric acids. 

When the biliary acids are oxidized by nitric acid, one of the 
products is cholesteric acid, C 8 H 10 O 6 , which is likewise obtained by 
the same process from 

Cholesterin, C 26 H 43 H 2 0, which is met with frequently in the body of 
the higher animals and man, in bile, particularly in the biliary stones, 
in the nerves, brain, blood, yelk, pus, and other morbid excretions. 
It forms white shining scales, is inodorous and tasteless ; insoluble 
in water, dilute acids and alkalies, but soluble in alcohol, ether, 
and solutions of soap and the biliary acids. To detect it when 
present in small proportions, and particularly when associated with 
fats, is not without difficulty ; in the latter case the formation of a 
lead soap and its exhaustion by ether or boiling alcohol are ad- 
visable. 

Eighth Group. — Acids pertaining to Coloring Matters. 

The organic coloring matters are chemical compounds, the char- 
acter of which is not clearly ascertained, except in a few instances. 
All those substances which in their dry state or in solution are 
remarkable for decided coloration, may be called coloring principles ; 
sanguinarina and hydrastia have been thus classified ; they are, 
however, alkaloids, and will be treated of in their proper place. Of 
the coloring matters in the following lists, many of those placed in 
division a have acid properties so decided as to expel carbonic acid ; 
the acid properties of others are not so easily recognized, as they 
frequently dissolve in acids and alkalies with different colors, and 
in such solutions are readily affected by atmospheric oxygen, par- 
ticularly at high temperatures. But as far as the latter property is 
concerned, they are not the only acids changed in this way ; the 
whole group of tannins and their derivatives are equally unstable, 
and probably even more so, than many coloring acids. 

Most of those which follow are precipitated by acetate or sub- 
acetate of lead, and may be obtained in a free state by decomposing 
such precipitates, diffused in alcohol, by sulphuric acid or sulphu- 
retted hydrogen. Compounds may be formed with alumina, if 
their mixture with a solution of alum is precipitated by ammonia ; 
such colored precipitates are called lakes. 



ACIDS PERTAINING TO COLORING MATTERS. 



463 



(a) Acids from Phanerogamic Plants. 



Carthamic acid, 
carthamin. 



Carthaxanthic acid, 

Crocic acid, C 48 H 43 31 , 
polychroite. 



Rottleric acid, C n H, O 3 , 

rottlerin. 
Chrysophanic acid, C 10 H 8 O 3 . 

Xanthorhamnic acid, 



Rhamnoxanthic acid, 
C i2 H i2°6> f ran - 



Gentisic acid, C 28 H 1( 

Santalic acid, C^Hj 

santalin. 
Ruberythric acid, C a 



Ozylizaric acid, C 9 H 6 3 -f- 
H 2 0, purpurin. 



Brazilic acid, C 36 H 14 Q U , 

brazilin. 
Bixic acid (?). 

Carolic (?), C 18 H 24 0, 
Carotin. 

Quercitric, or Rutinic acid, 



Quercetin, C 27 H 18 12 . 

Luteolic acid, C., H u O 3 

luteolin. 
Thujic acid,. C 20 H 22 O 12 , 

thujin. 



Mangostin. 



(?) 



In Carthamus tinctorius ; amorphous ; carmine red, with 
a green metallic lustre ; little soluble in water ; soluble 
in alcohol. 

Yellow extract ; soluble in water ; brown in contact with 
air. 

In saffron, and in the fruit of Gardenia grandiflora ; bril- 
liantly red ; by HN0 3 green, by H 2 S0 4 indigo-blue (tests 
for saffron) ; soluble in water, more in alkalies, by hot 
diluted acids split into crocetin, C 24 H 23 O n , and sugar. 

In the hairy covering of the fruit of Rottlera tinctoria ; 
brilliant yellow crystals ; red by alkalies. 

In senna, rhubarb, etc. ; boracic acid does not turn it 
brown. (See also Rhamuin.) 

In the fruit of Rhamnus tinctoria ; crystalline ; readily 
soluble in water and hot alcohol ; insoluble in ether ; bj T 
boiling with dilute acids yields rhamnetin, C 22 H lo O 10 , and 
sugar. (See Quercitric Acid.) 

In the root and bark of Rhamnus frangula ; lemon-yellow 
crystalline powder; insoluble in water and ether ; Solu- 
ble in 160 p. hot alcohol ; in H 2 S0 4 with a ruby, in alka- 
lies with a purple color. 

Loao or Chinese green is the A1 2 3 compound of Rhamnus 
chlorophorus and utilis. 

Sap green is prepared from the unripe berries of Rhamnus 
cathartica. 

In gentian root. Yellow needles ; not bitter ; soluble in 
alcohol. 

In red saunders, Santalum rubrum ; microscopic red 
crystals ; nearly insoluble in water ; purple by alkalies. 

In madder, the root of Rubia tinctorum ; yellow prisms ; 
soluble in hot water, alcohol, and ether ; with A1. 2 3 a 
bright red lake ; is a glucoside ; yields Alizarin, lizaric 
acid, C 20 II 6 O 6 . Sublimed in orange-colored prisms ; 
from solutions, in brownish-yellow prisms with 4H 2 ; 
with alkalies purple, with lime and baryta blue. 

From madder by fermentation ; red or orange needles ; 
with alkalies cherry-red, with lime and baryta purple 
precipitates. 

In anchusa, alkanet root. Deep red ; insoluble in water ; 
the salts purple or blue, bleached by light. 

In Brazil wood. Yellowish-red prisms ; soluble in alcohol, 
ether, and water ; by alkalies purple. 

In annatto from Bixa orellana ; red, resinous ; soluble 
reddish-yellow in alkalies ; indigo-blue in H 2 S0 4 . 

Copper-red, microscopic ci'ystals ; no odor or taste ; in- 
soluble in water and ether, slightly in alcohol; soluble 
in fixed and essential oils ; blue by H 2 S0 4 and S0 3 . 

In quercitron bark, Ruta graveolens, Capparis, iE»culus, 
Fagopyrum, and Humulus; crystalline, chrome-yellow, 
bitterish ; soluble in alcohol and alkalies, less in water, 
little in ether; as found in the different plants, it is 
quercetin with various proportions of the carbohydrate, 

C 12 H 15°15- 

Crystalline, yellow ; by Fe 2 Cl 3 green ; probably identical 
with rhamnetin and the following. 

In French weld from Reseda luteola. Yellow needles by 
sublimation ; nearly insoluble in water. 

In Thuja occidentalis ; lemon-yellow, astringent; soluble 
in hot water and alcohol; green by Fe 2 Cl 3 ; it splits 
into glucose and thujetin, C 28 H 14 ]6 ; its alcoholic solu- 
tion by Fe 2 Cl 3 inky, by alkalies green. 

In the rind of Garcinia Mangostana, golden-yellow scales; 
tasteless ; insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, ether, 
and alkalies; by HN0 3 oxalic acid. 



464 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

Gambogic acid, C 20 I1 23 4 . In gamboge, amorphous, yellow; soluble red in NH 3 , and 

yellow in alcohol ; precipitated by concentrated solu- 
tions of alkaline salts, but the precipitate soluble in 
pure water. 

Pipizaic acid, C 30 H 20 O 6 . In pipizateo root, a Mexican cathartic ; readily soluble in 

absolute alcohol and ether; its alkaline salts purple and 
easily soluble in alcohol, ether, and water. 

Scop aric acid, C 21 H 22 O 10 , In Spartium scoparium ; light yellow crystals ; tasteless, 

scoparin. inodorous ; soluble in alcohol ; easily in alkalies and 

concentrated acids ; by CaCl dark-green ; precipitates 
by PbO salts. 

Ilixanthic acid, C 17 H 22 O n . In the leaves of Ilex aquifolium ; straw-yellow needles ; 

soluble in hot water and alcohol, insoluble in ether; 
with PbO yellow lakes. 

Hcematoxylic acid, C 16 H u 6 , In logwood, from Hsematoxylon Campechianum. Yellow 

hcemaloxylin. prisms; taste of liquorice; little soluble in water; by 

moisture and alkalies converted into Hcematein, C 32 H lo O 10 ; 

dark-green, metallic lustre ; with bases red, violet, or 

blue. 

Curcumic acid (?), cur cumin. In turmeric, Curcuma longa ; yellow crystals; slightly 

soluble in water; soluble in alcohol and ether, very 
soluble in benzol; does not sublime ; begins to melt at 
1650 C. ; solutions are very fluorescent; brown with 
alkalies. 

(b) Acids from Cnjptogamic Plants. 

The natural chromogenic acids form various species of the genera 
Lichen, Variolaria, Lecanora, Rosella, G-y rophora, etc., are copu- 
lated compounds, colorless, or but slightly colored, and yield by 
boiling with water, alcohol, or alkalies, orsellic acid, C 8 H 8 4 and 
another acid or neutral compound which is usually likewise copu- 
lated. The former is, by continuing the process, converted into 
orcine, C 7 H 8 2 , which by ammonia, moisture, and oxygen yields the 
coloring matter orceine, C 7 C 7 N\0 3 (orceic acid), which, with ammonia, 
furnishes a deep red, with alkafies a violet or purple solution ; this 
is the coloring principle of cudbear and archil. 

Erythric acid, C 20 H 22 O 10 . From Roccella tinctoria ; yields C 16 H 8 8 , and erythrin, 

C 26 H 22 O 10 , which again yields C 16 H 8 8 , besides Erythro- 
mannite. 

Alphaorsellic acid, C 8 H 8 4 . From a variety of the same. 

Betaorsellic acid, C 8 H 10 O 2 . From another variety. 

Evernic acid, C 17 H 16 7 . From Evernia prunastri. 

Gyrophoric acid, C 36 H 18 15 . From Gyrophora pustulata; intermediate product unknown. 

Litmus is obtained from Lecanora tartarica and some other 
lichens by a different process ; its coloring principles are probably 
derivatives of orcine, or, as Kane believes, of roccellin. The follow- 
ing have been distinguished ; all are amorphous and little soluble 
in water, and yield lakes of blue or purple color ; the formulas are 
those of Kane. 

Azolitmin, C 9 H 10 I^O 5 ; deep brown-red, soluble in alkalies with 
blue color. 

Spaniolitmin, light red, insoluble in alcohol and ether, soluble in 
alkalies blue. 

LJrythrolitmin, C 25 H 22 6 , light red, easily soluble in alcohol, not in 
ether. The hot solution deposits it in soft deep-red granules. 

Erythrolein, C ]S H 22 2 , semiliquid ; easily soluble in alcohol and 
ether with dark-red color, in ammonia purple. 



ACIDS PERTAINING TO COLORING MATTERS. 465 

(c) Azotized Vegetable Coloring Matters. 

There are but two of this div/sion, which have not the least rela- 
tion to each other ; moreover, one is a complex body never obtained 
in a state of purity. 

Indigogen, CJI 6 NO. In the juice of various plants yielding indigo. 
Chlorophylv, | : H 9 N0 4 . The green coloring matter of leaves and herbs. 

Indigogen, or Indigo white, is contained in the juice of plants 
yielding indigo in a state of combination with alkalies; owing to 
its proneness to oxidation, it is difficult to be obtained in a state 
of purity. During the process of fermentation of the leaves, it 
is oxidized and converted into indigo blue, other matters being 
separated at the same time, the whole constituting commercial 
indigo. 

The coloring principle upon which the value of indigo depends 
has been named 

Indigotin, C 8 H 5 I^O; amorphous, subliming in hexagonal prisms, 
deep blue with a tinge of purple, tasteless and inodorous ; insoluble 
in nearly all solvents; yields by dry distillation anilina, NH 3 ,HCy, 
and empyreumatic oils. 

Indigo has been used in epilepsy, taken internally; a portion is 
found in urine which deposits occasionally a blue pigment, uro- 
cyanin, which is at least frequently identical with indigotin. The 
blue coloring matter of some milk appears to be sometimes the same 
pigment, and may then be derived from plants containing indigogen. 

If indigo is exhausted with sulphuric acid, the solution treated 
with concentrated solution of acetate of potassium, the precipitate 
washed with the same solution to remove KS0 4 , and finally with 
alcohol to extract KAc, the residue is 

Indigosulphate, Sulphocceridate of potassium, or indigocarmine in a 
pure state. Schnack calls the indigo-white indican, O^H^NO^ ; it 
splits by cold acids into indigo-blue, C 8 H 5 NO, and indiglucin, C 6 II ]0 O . 
Through various influences a number of different coloring matters 
contained in the commercial indigo and other compounds are 
'formed ; among the latter are carbonic, formic, acetic, and propionic 
acids. 

Chlorophyll occurs in the green parts of plants in the form of 
globules or granules composed of a green membrane and semi-liquid 
matter, enveloping a starch granule (Bohm), or it is a transparent 
colorless membrane, containing a green liquid with some minute 
granules. It is always accompanied by protein and waxy matters, 
and the true coloring principle is present only in very minute 
quantity, which renders its separation very difficult. Its chemical 
relations are, therefore, still somewhat uncertain. 

Fremy supposes it to consist of phylloxanihin and phyllocyanin 
which, being mixed in different proportions, furnish the different 
shades of green in leaves; the latter is wanting in the yellow 
autumnal foliage. 

The yellow (xanthophyll) and red (erythrophyll) coloring matters 
of the leaves in autumn are products of decomposition of the chlo- 
30 



466 ON ORGANIC ACIDS. 

rophyll ; Wittstein and Ferrein suppose both to be weak tannins. 
(See Cisso and Xanthotannic Acid,) 

Xanthein and cyanin are said to be the yellow and blue principles 
furnishing all the innumerable shades of the yellow, blue, green, 
and red colors, which we admire in the petals of flowers ; they are 
then in combination with one another, with various alkalies and 
acids. It has, however, been proved that the flowers of Reseda 
luteola, Capparis spinosa, and Aesculus hippocastanum contain 
quercitrin, and Hlasiwetz suggests that other than yellow colors 
may be due to the same glucoside or some derivative. (See Am. 
Jour. Phar., 1860, 222.) 

(d) Ternary Animal Coloring Matters. 

Carmic acid, C u H 14 8 . In cochineal, and probably in the flowers of Monarda 

didyma, and identical with rufimaric acid, as by dry 
distillation oxyphenic acid is obtained ; brownish-purple, 
friable, freely soluble in water and alcohol, sparingly in 
ether. 

Euxanthic or Purreeic acid, In purree, an East Indian pigment from the urine of 

camels after they have eaten the fruits of Mangostana 
mangifera ; yellow shining prisms; soluble in boiling 
water, more in hot alcohol and ether ; inodorous, bitter 
sweetish taste ; salts yellow, crystalline, or gelatinous. 

(e) Azotized Animal Coloring Matters. 

Hsematin or Hsematosin, In the blood of all vertebrate animals; brownish-red; 

C 44 H 44 N 6 6 Fe. inodorous and tasteless; insoluble in alcohol, water, 

and ether, soluble in acidulated alcohol, alkalies, and 
aqueous solutions of the salts in blood. 

Urerythrin or Urohsematin ? The coloring matter of human urine; dark-red; insoluble 

in water, acids, and many salts; soluble in alcohol, 
ether, chloroform, and warm fresh urine. 

Bilifuscin, C 16 H 20 N 2 O 4 . The brown coloring matter of bile and biliary concretions ; 

dark brown with olive-green tinge; little soluble in 
water, more in alcohol and alkalies. 

The preparation of these coloring matters is connected with 
many difficulties, and we have even no proof that they can be sepa- 
rated without decomposition; moreover it is likely that as soon as* 
they are separated from the organism, they commence to undergo 
alterations under the influence of air and light. The latter two 
of the above syllabus are believed to be derivatives from the color- 
ing matter of the blood. 

Hcematin occurs naturally together with globuline as hsemato- 
globulin, and the detection of blood in physiological and forensic 
analysis is based partly on the presence of the latter, partly on the 
separation of the former, or one of its modifications, or the recog- 
nition of the iron. It has been proposed as a new remedy by Prof. 
Fabourn, of Lyons, supposed to assist the formation of blood-cor- 
puscles, and to contain 10 per cent, of iron. Prepared by thicken- 
ing the blood with an inactive salt, subjecting the resulting magma 
to pressure, extracting the press-cake with alcohol containing 2 or 
3 per cent of an acid. On neutralizing this the haBmatosin sepa- 
ixates in reddish flocks, which are to be washed successively with 



ON THE OKGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 467 

water, alcohol, aud ether, and on drying may be taken in powder 
or pill. 

Hcematoidine occurs in stagnant blood, in the form of red or 
yellowish-red crystals or is amorphous, and is insoluble in water, 
alcohol, ether, alkalies, and acids. 

Hcemin may be prepared from a minute quantity of old or fresh 
blood, by dissolving it in glacial acetic acid, boiling it for a moment, 
and evaporating a few drops upon glass. It forms red or brown 
crystals, and is insoluble in water, alcohol, ether, and chloroform, 
but soluble in potassa. The formation of these microscopic crystals 
forms now one of the principal tests for recognizing blood. 

Heller recognizes blood in urine by boiling it, when the coagu- 
lated albumen will contain all the hsematin. If to the boiling 
urine some potassa is added, the albumen is dissolved, a bottle- 
green color is produced, and the earthy phosphates settle with a 
brownish or blood-red color, showing a dichroism in green. 

Pathological liquids are mixed with some normal urine, and blood 
spots are previously dissolved in water, in alcohol acidulated with 
H 2 S0 4 , or in a solution of sulphate of sodium, when they are treated 
as before. 

Blood, if corpuscles cannot be recognized, shows its presence by 
the odor of burning feathers when heated to near redness, and by 
the production of Prussian blue when heated with some sodium, 
and precipitating the solution by a salt of Pe 2 3 -f-FeO. (See papers 
on the subject in Am. Joarn. Pharm., 1857,30; 1861,439; 1862, 
331; and Am. Drugg. Circular, 1860, 260.) 

The brown and yellow biliary coloring matters are recognized in 
the alcoholic alkaline solution, which turns green on the addition 
of HC1, and blue by the addition guttatim of H^N"0 3 . The most 
reliable test is the change of color which is produced by HX0 3 con- 
taining HNT0 2 ; the color passes then through green, blue, violet, 
red into yellow 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

The whole science of organic chemistry is comparatively new, 
the discovery of the existence of the vegetable alkalies, the most 
important class of organic principles, dating back only to 1817, 
when Serturner, a German apothecary, announced the existence of 
morphia. 

The study of all classes of organic bodies has since progressed 
rapidly, many discoveries have been announced, which have been 
subjected to revision and been superseded by others, and this pro- 
cess is still going on; all that the pharmacologist can expect to do 
is to present the actual state of knowledge upon the several sub- 



468 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

jects under examination, awaiting the progress of analytical and 
synthetical investigation to confirm existing views, or to present 
others more in accordance with the requirements of exact science. 

In the present uncertain state of chemical knowledge in regard 
to the alkaloids, we shall follow the classification indicated by 
nature in her morphological developments, and arrange the natural 
alkaloids as the other classes of organic chemical principles upon a 
botanical basis ; those of animal origin and those produced by arti- 
ficial processes being grouped separately. 

The alkaloids, as a class, are the most powerful of organic prin- 
ciples, displaying their effects especially on the nervous system, 
which they so forcibly impress as to constitute many of them viru- 
lent poisons ; a few, however, seem nearly destitute of active pro- 
perties. They all contain nitrogen, and, by destructive distillation, 
or by heating with alkalies, evolve ammonia; most of them evince 
their alkalinity by restoring the blue color to reddened litmus, 
and though not always crystalline or even solid, they combine with 
acids to form definite salts which are crystalline ; they also, like 
the alkalies proper, form double salts with bichloride of platinum. 

Most of the alkaloids are sparingly soluble in water, but dissolve 
freely in alcohol, especially with heat; some dissolve in ether, fixed 
and essential oils, and almost all in benzine, bisulphuret of carbon, 
amylic alcohol, and chloroform, which may be used for their ex- 
traction. They are nearly all precipitated from solution, whether 
alone or combined as salts, by tannic acid, which is hence, when 
taken immediately, one of the best chemical antidotes for them, 
with the exception of those soluble in water ; they are mostly pre- 
cipitated by alkalies, in an excess of which many are redissolved. 

The vegetable alkalies do not exist free in plants, but are gene- 
rally combined with peculiar vegetable acids. Certain natural 
families of plants are distinguished by containing the same or 
similar alkaloids in their several species, while in other instances 
the same plant contains two or more different alkaloids. Opium 
contains nine, St. Ignatius's bean and nux vomica three, sabadilla 
and veratrum three, while trie different species of cinchona are 
known to contain at least four. 

It is believed that every really poisonous plant contains an alka- 
loid or neutral characteristic principle. It is remarkable that the 
development of the active principle is frequently only in one organ 
of the plant, and only at a certain period of its growth. 

There is no convenient and scientific classification of the organic 
alkalies, and their composition which is known, at least empirically, 
affords no clue to their properties and relations ; indeed, their sepa- 
ration from some of the class of peculiar neutral principles, though 
sanctioned by a well-known chemical distinction, seems forced and 
unnatural when we compare their physical and therapeutic proper- 
ties, and is constantly overlooked by writers. 

Considering the recent discovery of most of this class, it might 
be expected that a uniform system of nomenclature would obtain in 
regard to them. This, however, is only measurably the case ; they 



CHEMICAL HISTORY. 469 

are most usually named from the generic title of the plants from 
which first derived, or from some distinguishing property ; but by 
many they are indiscriminately terminated by in or ia. This prac- 
tice is contrary to the rule adopted by common consent in this 
country, appropriating to the neutral principles the former, and to 
the organic alkalies the latter, termination. Even the officinal 
alkaloids are constantly misnamed from a disregard to this rule. 
In converting the foreign names into our own Latinized form, some 
discrepancies arise, as aconitina and aconitia, applied to the same 
substance. 

The symbols used in some works to designate this class of prin- 
ciples are omitted in this as interfering with the convenience of its 
mechanical execution. In these symbols the first letters of the re- 
spective names are surmounted by a -f sign, to designate the 
organic alkali, as in the case of acids the — sign is employed. A 
sufficient advantage does not seem to be secured by the use of this 
abbreviated method to compensate for its increased complexity and 
the liability to mistakes on the part of the student. 

The mode of preparation of the organic alkalies varies with their 
habitudes, and particularly according to their solubility and that 
of their native combinations. When the native salt is soluble in 
water, as meconate of morphia, and the organic alkali is itself in- 
soluble, there is no difficulty in its extraction, the simple addition 
of a strong alkali to the infusion of the vegetable substance neu- 
tralizes the organic acid with which the alkaloid was associated, 
and it is thrown down in a more or less pure form. It more fre- 
quently happens that the native alkaloid salt is not so freely soluble 
in water, and then a diluted acid is employed for its extraction; so 
that its salt with an inorganic acid is obtained, and, this being de- 
composed by an alkali, yields the pure precipitated alkaloid. In a 
large number of cases, however, these simple methods of extraction 
are quite useless, and complex processes are necessarily resorted to. 
Some of these are founded upon the alkaloid being separated from 
its associated principles by subacetate of lead. Some processes 
direct ether, benzine, or chloroform as the solvent, which separates 
the alkaloids from the other proximate principles present, and de- 
posits them upon evaporation. The volatile alkaloids are, of course, 
prepared by appropriate modifications of the process of distillation. 

The use of animal charcoal for its powerful absorbent properties, 
and the subsequent extraction of the alkaloid by appropriate 
solvents, is a process sometimes resorted to with success. 

It is not intended to go into detail on these processes except in a 
few cases, as many of the alkaloids are seldom called for, and those 
in use are prepared almost exclusively on a large scale by chemical 
manufacturers. 

Chemical History. — The study of the native organic alkalies has 
not as yet revealed their actual composition, the empirical formulas 
only being ascertained by our present means of analysis. From 
their behavior to tests we know that they have a certain relation 
to ammonia, and it is by the study of the artificial alkaloids that 



470 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

we are able to form an idea of the real chemical nature of the 
whole class. 

By the destructive distillation of many nitrogenated substances, 
compounds are obtained containing nitrogen, and having the be- 
havior of alkaloids; they are closely allied to ammonia. This base, 
though generally classed among the inorganic compounds, is, in 
fact, merely the last stage of decomposition of organic nitrogenated 
bodies, containing only two elements, nitrogen and hydrogen. Like 
it, the compounds referred to have strong alkaline properties, in 
some instances even stronger than ammonia, and, as already stated, 
like the strong inorganic alkalies, readily form crystal lizable double 
salts with bichloride of platinum. 

The organic alkalies, chiefly on account of their strong affinity 
for acids, and of their property of evolving ammonia when heated 
with caustic potassa, have long been viewed by some chemists, 
especially Berzelius, as compounds of ammonia with other complex 
bodies; since the discovery of the artificial alkaloids, and the in- 
vestigations into their constitution, this view has been somewhat 
modified so as to consider them as ammonia, in the composition of 
which one or more equivalents of hydrogen have been substituted 
by a radical; and since this view of their composition has gained 
ground, the number of the artificial alkaloids has been largely in- 
creased, and the probability has been shown of its further increasing 
to a surprising extent. 

Among the inorganic compounds, even some metals are capable 
of replacing one or more equivalents of hydrogen in ammonia to 
form bases, as in the- well-known instances of Cuprum ammoniatum 
and Hydrargyrum ammoniatum of the Pharmacopoeia ; it now re- 
mains to be shown how the elements are grouped in compounds of 
this nature, and which of the atomic elements or groups may be 
substituted for the hydrogen in ammonia to form alkaloids. 

Such substituting compounds we find among the carbo-hydrogens, 
such as methyle CH 3 , ethyle C 2 H 5 , propyle C 3 H 7 , butyle C 4 IT 9 , amyle 
C 5 H 10 , capryle C ft H 13 , phenyle (benzid) C 6 H 5 ; oxygenated radicals 
like benzoyle C 7 H 5 0, cumyle C^H^O, etc.; the elements forming 
hydracids, bromine, iodine, chlorine, cyanogen; nitric peroxide ED 2 , 
and a great variety of other elements and groups. 

The newly-formed compounds have an alkaline character as long 
as they correspond in composition with ammonia. As a general 
rule, the compounds with the radicals of the hydracids have a 
weaker basic character, which becomes less decided as the number 
of equivalents of these radicals is increased in the alkaloid; with 
three equivalents of an element of the hydracid group, all alkalinity 
is lost; such compounds, however, do not correspond with ammonia 
or the oxide of ammonium in composition. The artificial alka- 
loids, after combining with acids, correspond closely in composition 
with the ammonia salts. 



TESTS FOR THE ALKALOIDS. 471 

Series of Alkaloids containing Phenyle, C 6 H 3 , illustrating the foregoing. 

Pheny lamina (anilina) C (j H : X. 

Methylanilina C T H 9 X. 

Etkylanilina C 8 H U N. 

Diethylanilina C ]0 H 15 X, 

Methyl-ethylanilina C 12 H ls 2sT.* 

Chloranilina C 6 H,C1H. 7 X. 

Bichloranilina . . .• C 6 H,C1,H.,X. 

TricMoranilina C 6 H,C1,H X. 

Bromanilina C 6 H 4 BrH.,X\ 

Iodinanilina C ( H 4 III.X. 

Cyananilina C ( .H.CyIIX.t 

Xitranilina C G H 4 XOJI._X. 

But it is not only the hydrogen of XH 3 which can he replaced 
by elements or compounds ; even the nitrogen may thus be substi- 
tuted by elements, the chemical compounds of which show a close 
analogy to the corresponding compounds of X. Phosphorus, 
arsenic, and antimony form with 3H hydrurets, analogous in com- 
position to ffl 3 , but without basic character. When the hydrogen 
is replaced by any of the alcohol radicals methyle, ethyle, etc., the 
compounds, like P(C 2 H 5 ) 3 , are weak bases, and combined with 1 or 
20 have a stronger basic character ; the corresponding nitrogen 
compounds OTi 3 are still unknown. Strong basic properties are 
met with in the compounds analogous to XH 4 0, in which 4H 
are replaced by alcohol radicals ; the oxide of stibmethylium, 
Sb(CH 3 ) 4 0, for instance, is extremely caustic, decomposes the salts 
of ammonia and metallic oxides like potassa ; its salts are bitter, 
not poisonous, and isomorphous with the potassium salts. 

The chemical behavior of all the organic bases is closely allied 
to ammonia ; if we omit tannic acid, which is not precipitated by 
is"H 3 , but yields precipitates insoluble in water, not only with the 
vegetable alkalies but also with most neutral principles (see Chap- 
ter IX.), there are particularly five reactions characteristic of this 
class : — 

1. The residue of the treatment of uric acid with nitric acid is 
of a reddish color, and dissolves in ammonia with a beautiful 
purple, forming murexid. Precisely similar is the behavior of 
the organic alkaloids, thougb, from their different composition, this 
color is somewhat altered ; nicotia produces the purest purple, 
anilina a more violet color (Schwarzenberg). 

2. Their behavior to Sonnenschein's test is alike. "Whether free 
or combined with an acid, all alkaloids of the combination of am- 
monia are precipitated by phospho-molybdic acid with various shades 
of yellow, some pulverulent, some flocculent, some voluminous. 
The following exhibits his results : — 

The precipitate is : — 

Light yellow and flocculent with morphia, veratria, jeryia, aconitia, 
emetia, atropia, daturia, ethylamiua, diethylamina, triethylamina, nie- 
thylaraina, dimethylamina, trimethylamina, and anilina. 

* Similar combinations are formed with amyle, butyle, and other carbo-hydrogens. 
t Chlorine, bromine, iodine, etc., in the proportion of two atoms, are less basic, 
and where three atoms enter into the compound, it ceases to have basic properties. 



472 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Light yellow and voluminous with caffeina, theobromina, conia, nicotia. 

" " " pulverulent with mercuramina. 
Yellowish-white and floccident with quinia and cinchonia. 

" " " voluminous with strychnia. 

Brownish-yellow and flocculent with narcotina and piperina. 

" " " voluminous with codeia. 

Ochre-yellow and floccident with brucia. 
Dirty-yellow and flocculent with berberina. 
Orange-yellow and flocculent with colchicia. . 
Sulphur-yellow and floccident with sinamina. 
Lemon-yellow and flocculent with quinolina. 
" " " pulverulent with solania. 

3. Another very important test for the discovery of the alkaloids 
is Scheibler's phospho-tung 'state of sodium. 

The reagent is prepared by adding phosphoric acid to tungstate 
of sodium, and has been, as far as experiments performed on dogs are 
reliable, recommended as an antidote to poisonous alkaloids, with 
which an insoluble compound is formed, that cannot be assimilated. 

These precipitates are all insoluble or nearly so in water, alcohol, 
ether, and in diluted mineral acids, with the exception of phos- 
phoric. Concentrated nitric, acetic, tartaric, citric, and oxalic acids 
dissolve them on boiling, separating them again on cooling ; citric 
acid, however, easily reduces the phospho-molybdic acid. Caustic 
alkalies, their carbonates, borates, phosphates, tartrates, and ace- 
tates, dissolve the precipitates, some separating again the organic 
alkali. The oxides of the earthy metals, silver and lead, and their 
carbonates gradually decompose them, liberating the base, .00007 
gramme of strychnia in one cubic centimetre of solution is very 
plainly precipitated. A solution containing only 2 Wooe P ar ^ of 
strychnia is rendered opalescent. 

Asparagin, sinapolin, urea, hydrocyanic, hippuric, uric, and simi- 
lar acids, and nitrogenous bodies, digitalin, meconin, and similar 
organic neutral principles are not precipitated. 

4. Similar in its behavior to the alkaloids is Schultze's test 
liquid, which is prepared by adding pentachloride of antimony to 
phosphoric acid; the precipitates are usually white and flocculent 
and insoluble in diluted acids. 

5. The fifth general test for alkaloids is that of Prof. F. F. 
Mayer, who uses iodo-hydrargyrate of potassium, or rather a solution 
of corrosive sublimate in iodide of potassium. It precipitates am- 
monia only in the presence of free alkali, but the vegetable alka- 
lies are precipitated from neutral alkaline and acid solutions, and 
the precipitates are soluble in alcohol. In recommending this test 
for the quantitative determination of alkaloids in pharmaceutical 
preparations, Prof. Mayer observes that aconitia and berberina 
require, for complete precipitation, 1 equivalent ; atropia, strychnia, 
brucia, narcotina, and veratria, 2 ; morphia and conia 3 ; nicotia 4 ; 
and the cinchona alkaloids 6 equivalents of mercury. (See Proc. 
American Pharm. Association, 1862, 238.) 

For chemico-legal analyses Sonnenschein proposes the following 
easy way of detecting the alkaloids. The substances are treated 



TESTS FOR THE ALKALOIDS. 473 

with water strongly acidulated with muriatic acid several times 
until exhausted, evaporated at about 90° F., to a thin syrupy con- 
sistence, diluted with water, after standing, filtered ; precipitated 
by phospho-molybdic acid in excess, the precipitate washed with 
water on a filter, acidulated with nitric and phospho-molybdic 
acid, mixed with hydrate of baryta to alkaline reaction, and heated 
in a flask with a tube attached to collect ammonia and other vol- 
atile bases in muriatic acid. The residue is treated with carbonic 
acid, evaporated, exhausted with alcohol and evaporated ; if neces- 
sary, recrystallized to purify the bases. 

The phospho-molybdic acid is prepared by precipitating molybdate 
of ammonia with phosphate of sodium, the yellow precipitate is 
well washed with water, suspended in water, and dissolved by 
carbonate of sodium, evaporated and heated to expel ammonia; 
if reduction should take place, it is moistened with HX0 3 , and 
again heated to redness ; the mass is then dissolved in warm water 
and mixed with HN0 3 to strong acid reaction, and diluted to ten 
times the weight of the dry salt ; after filtering it has a golden 
yellow color ; it must be preserved against ammoniacal vapors. 

Besides the method by phospho-molybdic acid as above, the fol- 
lowing older method of testing for the alkaloids, first proposed by 
Stas, has been more frequently tried and found successful. 

The substance is mixed with twice its weight of pure strong 
alcohol and a little tartaric or oxalic acid, and heated to 160° to 
165° F., after cooling, filtered, washed with strong alcohol, and the 
liquors evaporated below 95° over sulphuric acid or in a current of 
air; the remaining aqueous liquid is passed through a wetted filter 
to separate fats, and again evaporated to near dryness; the product 
is exhausted with cold 95° per cent, alcohol, evaporated, dissolved 
in very little water, bicarb, sodium or potassium added until car- 
bonic acid ceases to be evolved, and agitated with four or six times 
its measure of rectified ether free from oil of wine. The residue, 
after evaporation of some of the ethereal solution, shows the pre- 
sence of either a liquid or solid alkaloid. If the former, the ether 
is shaken with a little o^ a strong solution of caustic soda or po- 
tassa, decanted, the residue washed with ether, the liquids mixed 
witli a little diluted H 2 S0 4 . This ether then contains the animal 
substances, the water, the salts of nicotia, conia, and ammonia; 
sulphate of conia is slightly soluble in ether. The aqueous solution 
is decomposed by potassa and agitated with ether, the ether evapo- 
rated spontaneously ; to get rid of all traces of ammonia, the resi- 
due is placed for a moment in vacuo over H 2 S0 4 . Conia and nicotia 
may be easily distinguished by their odor; conia is insoluble, 
nicotia soluble in water. In water mixed with conia, a few drops 
of chlorine water produce a white precipitate. 

If the alkaloid be solid, the ethereal solution is treated with 
soda or potassa, decanted, washed with much ether, evaporated, dis- 
solved in a little alcohol, evaporated, dissolved in water acidulated 
with H 2 S0 4 , evaporated in vacuo or over sulphuric acid, treated with 



474 



ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS, 



pure carbonate of potassium, then with absolute alcohol, which, on 
evaporation, yields the alkaloid crystallized. If, after the decom- 
position by an alkali, the addition of ether is delayed, morphia, 
which immediately after precipitation is more soluble, becomes 
crystalline, and ether then takes up but traces of it ; alcoholic ether, 
however, takes up larger quantities of morphia. Otto therefore 
advises to add more soda to the washed (with ether) solution to 
prevent crystallization of morphia, then add muriate of ammonia, 
when, on evaporation, all morphia will crystallize out. 

The volatile alkaloids, besides being obtained by means of ether, 
are obtained by distilling the aqueous acid solution with soda. 

Uslar and J. Erdmann obtain the alkaloids in a nearly pure state, 
by decomposing the acid infusion with an alkali and shaking with 
amylic alcohol, from which the base is extracted lyy agitating it 
with much water acidulated with muriatic acid. This method is re- 
commended for obtaining these bodies for forensic purposes or from 
the plants containing them. (See Amer. Journ. Ph., 1862, 354.) 

Meconic Acid. — For the detection of opium, it is not necessary to 
isolate the organic alkalies, since the reaction of meconic acid with 
sesquichloride of iron is unmistakable evidence of its presence. The 
substance is treated with alcohol and a few drops of muriatic acid, 
evaporated, dissolved in water, filtered, boiled with excess of mag- 
nesia, filtered, acidulated with muriatic acid, and a solution of ses- 
quichloride of iron added; a deep brown-red coloration which is 
not affected by terchloride of gold indicates the presence of meconic 
acid. 



Aconitum Napellus. 

Delphinium staphisagria 
" consolida 

Hydrastis Canadensis. 



1. Syllabus of Natural Quaternary Alkaloids. 

CI 

{ 



Ranunculaccce. 

Aconiti folia, TJ. S. 

" radix, " 
Staphisagria. 
Delphinium, TJ. S. 

Yellow root. 



Helleborus niger. 
Coptis trifolia. 

Teeta. 
Xanthorrhiza apiifolia. 



Helleborus, U. S. 
Coptis, TJ. S. 
Mahmira. 
Xanthorrhiza, TJ. S. 

31enispermacece. 
Cissampelos pareira. Pareira, TJ. S. 

Anamirta cocculus. Cocculus Indicus. 

Cocculus palmatus. Calumba, TJ. S. 

Coscinium fenestratum. Columbo wood. 

Menispermum Canadense. Yellow parilla. 

Anonaccoe. 
Codocline polycarpa. 

Berbcrideoe. 



Berberis vulgaris. 

Jeffersonia diphylla. 

Podophyllum peltatum. 



Barberry root. 

Twinleaf. 

Podophyllum, TJ. S. 



J Aconitia, C 17 H 23 N0 3 . 
1 Napellina, ? 

Delphinia, C 27 H 32 N0 2 . 

Staphisaina, (J n H 23 NO. 
f Hydrastia, 
\ Berberina, C 2 

Helleboria, 



>H 17 N0 4 . 

? 



Berberina, C 20 H 17 NO 4 . 



ina, C 18 H 21 N0 3 . 



Menispermina, C 18 H 12 N0 2 . 
Berberina, C 20 H 17 NO 4 . 



Berberina. 



Berberina, C 2 
Berbina. 

Bei-berina. 



SYLLABUS OF THE ALKALOIDS, 



475 



Papaveracece. 
Papaver somniferum. Opium, U. S. 



SaDguinaria Canadensis. Sanguinaria, U. S. 

Chelidonium majus. Celandine. 

Glaucium luteum. Horn poppy. (The herb.) 

Fumariacece. 
Corydalis fabacea, bulbosa, j Turk c ^ 

tuberosa, and formosa. ) J 

Fumaria officinalis. Fumatory. 

Violacece. 

Viola, U. S. 



f Morphia, C 17 H 19 N0 3 ,H 3 0. 

Narcotina, C 22 H 23 N0 7 . 

Codeia, C 18 H 21 N0 3 ,H 2 0. 

Thebaia, C 19 H 21 N0 3 . 

Narceina, C 23 H 29 NO g . 
- Opiania, C 21 H 21 NO r 

Papaverina, C 20 H 21 NO 4 . 

Phormia, C 27 H 9 NO r 

Opina, ? 

Metamorphia, ? 

Apomorphia, C 17 H i7 N0 2 . 
r Sanguinarina, C 36 H 64 N 4 O f 



Chelidina, C Af1 H on N,0,. 

Puccina, 
f Glaucina, 
1 Gaucina, 



• Corydalina, 
Fumerina, 



6 N0 7 . 



Viola odorata. 
Anchieta salutaris. 

Theobroma cacao. 

Thea Bohea. 

Paullinia sorbilis. 

Peganum harmala. 



Viol 



m, 



Byttneracece. 

Chocolate nut. 

Camelliece. 

Chinese tea. 
Sapindacece. 

Guar an a. 

Rutacece. 

Harmel rue. 



Xa cul 1 is XylUin ClaVa Her " WeSt IndiaQ Prick1 ^ ash ' 

Celaslrinece. 
Ilex Paraguayensis. Paraguay tea. 

Leguminosce. 
Geoffroya Jamaicensis. Jamaica cabbage-tree bark. 

" Surinamensis. Surinam " " 

Baptisia tinctoria. Wild indigo. 

Umbelliferce. 
Conium maculatum. Conium, U. S. 

iEthusa cynapium. Fool's parsley. 

Cucurbitacece. 
Trianosperma ficifolia. Tayuya. 

Monimiacece. 
Atherosperma moschatum. The bark. 

Erythroxylacece. 
Erythroxylon Coca. Coca leaves. 

Cinchonacece. 

Various Peruvian barks of \ n . . _„ TT « 
,, n- i. r Cinchona, (J. S. 

the genus Cinchona. J ' 



Jaen and Cusco bark. 
Para bark. 
Pitaya bark. 
Carthagena bark. 



Unofficinal barks. 



Anchietia, ? 

Theobromia, 7 H 8 N 4 2 . 

r 

| Theina identical with caffeiua. 
■{ (See Celastrinege and Cin- 
chonacese.) 

L 

Harmalina, C 13 H 14 N 2 0. 
Harmina, C 13 H 12 N 2 0. 

1 Berberina, C 21 H 19 N0 5 . 

Caffeina. (See Cinchonacese.) 

Jamaicina, ? 

Surinamina, ? 
Baptisina, ? 

{Conhydrina, C 8 H 17 NO. (See 
Conia among the ternary 
alkaloids.) 
Cynapia, ? 

Trianospermia, ? 

Atherospermia, C 30 M 40 NO 5 . 



Ternary Alkaloids.) 
fQuinia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O 2 3H 2 O. 
I Quinidia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O 2 2H 2 O. 
| Cinchonia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O. 
[ Cinchonidia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O. 
f Aricia, C^H^N^. 
J Paricia, ? 

1 Pitayia, ? 

I Carthagia, ? 



476 



ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 



Cephaelis ipecacuanha. 
Coffea Arabica. 



Ipecacuanha, TJ. S. 
Coffee. 



Composites. 
Eupatorium cannabinum. Water hemp. 

Apocynacece. 
Strychnos nux vomica. Nux vomica, TJ. S. 

" Ignatia. Ignatia, TJ. S. 

Geissospermum Vellosi ? Pao pereira. 

Urari or Curare. Arrow poison. 

Verbenacece. 

Chaste tree. 
Convolvulacece. 
Convolvulus Scammonia. Scammonium, TJ. S. 

Solanaceaz. 
Solanum dulcamara and Dulcamara, TJ. S. 

other species. 

Atropa belladonna. Belladonna, U. S. 

Datura stramonium. Stramonium, TJ. S. 



Emetia, C 20 H 30 NO 5 . 
Caffeina, Theina, C 8 H 10 N 4 O 8 H 8 O. 



Eupatorina, ? 

-) Strychnia, C 21 H 22 N 2 2 . 
V Brucia, C 23 H 26 N 2 4 4N 2 0. 
J Igasuria, C^H^N^. 

Pereirina, ? 

Curaria, ? 



Vitex Agnus castus. 



Hyoscyamus niger (and 

albus). 
Capsicum annuum. 



Hyoscyamus, Folium and 

Semen, TJ. S. 
Capsicum, TJ. S. 

Euphorbiacece. 
Buxus sempervirens. Boxwood. 

Croton tiglium. Croton seed. 

Euphorbia officinarum. Euphorbium. 

Lauracece. 



Nectandra Rodiei. 



Bebeeru bark. 



Piperaccce. 

Piper nigrum (longum and) p . „ ~ 

album). j-J-iper, U. b. 

Piper caudatum. Cubeba Clusii. 

Melanthacece. 
Verat r a,bu m , sabadilla f £~ ^ ££ 

Vln e " I Sabadilla, TJ. S. 



Colchicum autumnale. 



Colchicum, TJ. S. 



Cocos lapidea. 



Palmoz. 



Castina, 



Convolvulina, ? 

f Solania, ? 

\ Dulcamarina, ? 

J Atropia, C 17 H 23 N0 3 . 
\ Belladonnia, " 
Daturia, identical with atro- 
pia. 

I Hyoscyamia. 

Capsicina. 

Buxina, =Bebeerina. 
Crotonina, ? 

Euphorbina, ? 



f Bebeerina, C 19 H 21 N0 3 . 
\ Sepeerina, ? 



Piperina, C 31 H 38 N 2 6 . 



f Veratria, C 32 H 52 N 2 8 . 
\ Sabadillia, C 20 H 26 N 2 O 5 . 
[ Jervia, C 30 H 46 N 2 O 3 . 
Colchicia, ? 



Apirina, 



2. Syllabus of Artificial Quaternary Alkaloids. 



Quinicia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O 2 . 
Cinchonicia, C 20 H a4 N 2 O 2 . 



Tropia, 
Porphyrharmina, 



From quinia and quinidia. 
From cinchonia and cinchonidia. 
From atropia. 
From harmalina and harmina. 



\ (See Cinchona Alka- 
/ loids.) 



3. Native Ternary Alkaloids. 

Leguminosoe. 
Spartium scoparium. Scoparius, U. S., Broom. Sparteina, C 10 H 26 N 2 . 

TJmbelliferce. f Conia, C 8 H 15 N. 

Conium maculatum. Conium, TJ. S., Hemlock. 1 Methylconia, C 9 H 17 N. 

I Ethylconia, C 10 H 19 N. 
Cicuta virosa. Water hemlock. Cicutina, ? 



SYLLABUS OF THE ALKALOIDS, 



477 



Chserophyllina, ? 

Aribina, C 23 H 20 N. 
Hygrina, ? 

Lobelina. 
Nicotia, C 10 H, 4 N 2 . 
Mercurialina, ? 



Ch^rophyllum bulbo- j c arsl 
sum. J 

Rubiacece. 
Araribe rubra. 

Urythrozylacece. 
Erythroxylon coca. Coca leaves. 

Lobeliacece. 
Lobelia inflata. Lobelia, U. S. 

Solanacece. 
Nicotiana tabacum. Tabacum, U. S. Tobacco. 

JEuphorbiacece. 
Mercurialis annua. 

Eosacece. 

{Flowers Sorbus aucuparia, Cra- 
taegus monogyna and oxy- 
cantha. 

Chenopodece. 
Chenopodium vulvaria Herb 

Fungi. 
Secale cornutum. Ergota, U. S. 

Ecbolina. Obtained by precipitating cold aqueous infusion of ergot with acetate of 
lead, precipitating lead with H 2 S, filtering and concentrating, then precipitating 
with HC1 2 until no further precipitate falls, and filtering. The muriate thus 
obtained is decomposed by phosphate of silver ; the chloride of silver and excess 
of phosphate are filtered out, and lime added to neutralize the phosphoric acid 
combined with the ecbolina, and the lime removed by C0 2 . The liquid is then 
concentrated with a gentle heat. 

Ergotina. Obtained by treating the liquid left by precipitating with HC1 2 with 
phospho-molybdic acid, washing the precipitate obtained, and suspending it in 
water with an excess of carbonate of barium until the yellowish color has changed 
to pure white, with the evolution of C0 2 . It remains only to evaporate gently 
to obtain the ergotina. — Amer. Jour. Pharmacy, 1864, p. 193. 



j Secalina 
\ , or 
Propylami 



} NC 3 H £ 
ina. J 



4. Artificial Ternary Alkaloids. 

(a) By Decomposition of Native Alkaloids, mostly with Potassa or other 

Alkalies. 

Conia, C 8 H 15 N. From conhydrina by anhydrous phosphoric acid. 

Ethylamina, C 2 H 5 H 2 N. From narcotina; thin colorless liquid, boiling at 6GO F. ; strong 

ammoniacal odor; burning with a yellow flame; miscible with water; strong 

base. 
Propylamina, C 3 H 7 N. From narcotina and codeia. (See Secalina.) 
Methylamina, CH 5 N. From narcotina, codeia, morphia, caffeina by potassa; a lique- 

fiable gas, ammoniacal odor ; very soluble in water ; burns with a yellow flame ; 

strong base. 
Piperidina, CgH^N. From piperina by a mixture of soda and lime. 



(b) From Alkaloids, and in Coal Tar. 



C 5 H 9 N. 
C,H C N. 



From cinchonia by potassa ; colorless oil ; distils at 500O. 
Like former ; distils at 2420 ; soluble in water. 
Like former; distils at 310O; aromatic oil separated from its 
aqueous solution by heating. 
Pyrrolina, C 4 H 5 N. Like former ; distils at 2710 ; agreeable ethereal odor ; colors pine- 
wood moistened with HC1 carmine red ; turns red with HN0 3 . 
Quinolina or Leucolina, C 9 H 7 N. From quinia, cinchonia, strychnia, berberina by 
potassa ; oily; disagreeable bitter -almond odor ; distils at 4620; dissolves much 
water, in which it is little soluble. 
Picolina, C 6 H V N. From piperina and cinchonia by potassa ; distils at 2750 ; pine-wood 
is colored yellow. 



478 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

(c) From other Sources. 

Toluidina, C 7 H 9 N. From nitrotoluol by NH 3 and HS ; from oil of turpentine by HN0 3 
and KO ; little soluble in water, easily in other solvents ; liquid at 104O ; boiling 
at 3880 ; intensely yellow with pine-wood. 

Anilina, C 6 H 7 N. From coal tar ; from indigo by KO ; from nitrobenzol by HS and 
NH 4 S, etc.; vinous odor; aromatic taste; boiling point 360O ; by HN0 3 deep 
blue, yields picric acid. Synonyms : crystallin, benzidamin, phenylamin. 

Aconitia. (C 17 H 23 ^"0 3 = 289.) 

The outlines of the process of the Pharmacopoeia for preparing 
this alkaloid are as follows: Forty-eight troyounces of aconite root 
in moderately fine powder are exhausted by alcohol, the alcohol is 
distilled off until a pint remains behind, which is diluted with a 
pint of distilled water, to which a fluidounce and a half of dilute 
sulphuric acid has been added. The fixed oil and resin, which 
separate on standing, are now removed from the liquid, and this 
is evaporated to four fluidounces ; this is washed, after cooling, by 
agitation and decantation, with six fluidounces of stronger ether 
to remove the remainder of the fixed oil and resin. Stronger water 
of ammonia is now added in slight excess, and the mixture is three 
times successively agitated with six fluidounces of stronger ether ; 
the ethereal solutions, after decantation, are mixed, and, in a por- 
celain capsule, evaporated spontaneously to dryness. The dry 
residue is reduced to powder and kept in well-stopped bottles. 

Aconitia, thus prepared, is a yellowish-white powder, without 
smell, and of a bitter acrid taste, accompanied with a sense of 
numbness. It melts at a moderate heat, and, at a high tempera- 
ture, is decomposed and entirely dissipated with the smell of am- 
monia. It requires 150 parts of cold and 50 parts of boiling water 
for solution, and is readily dissolved by alcohol, ether, and chloro- 
form. It neutralizes acids, forming with them uncrystallizable salts. 

By this process aconitia is obtained in an impure state, though 
sufficiently pure for medicinal purposes. Even when pure it crys- 
tallizes with great difficulty. Its salts are readily soluble in water 
and alcohol, and are precipitated by bichloride of mercury, ter- 
chloride of gold, and sulphocyanide of potassium, but not by bi- 
chloride of platinum; solution of iodine produces a brown-red 
precipitate ; concentrated sulphuric acid colors it yellow, afterwards 
violet; with nitric acid it produces a colorless solution. 

Aconitia is one of the most virulent of poisons, and extreme 
caution is necessary if used internally. Externally applied, it pro- 
duces on the skin a prickling sensation followed by numbness and 
a feeling of constriction. Its principal use is in cases of neuralgia, 
in ointment made by triturating the alkaloid first with a little 
alcohol or oil, and then with an unctuous vehicle. From a half to 
two grains are added to one drachm of the ointment. The galeni- 
cal preparations of aconite perhaps answer every useful purpose to 
which aconitia can be applied. 

Napellina occurs in the genus Aconitum, with aconitia in very 
small proportion. It may be obtained from the crude aconitia, 



ACONITIA. 479 

which is treated with a little ether; the residue is dissolved in ab- 
solute alcohol, precipitated by acetate of lead, and the filtrate treated 
with sulphuretted hydrogen, then with carbonate of potassium, eva- 
porated, exhausted by absolute alcohol, and decolorized by animal 
charcoal. It is a white electrical powder, of a bitter, afterwards 
burning taste ; pure ether dissolves it with some difficulty. It is 
distinguished from aconitia by not being precipitated by ammonia 
from its diluted solution in muriatic acid, and by being more solu- 
ble in dilute alcohol and water. 

Delphinia, C 27 II 3r N"0. — The alcoholic extract of the seed of Del- 
phinium staphisagria is treated with dilute sulphuric acid, precipi- 
tated with an alkali, again dissolved in diluted sulphuric acid, the 
coloring matter precipitated by a few drops of nitric acid, and the 
alkaloid by potassa; it is then obtained by evaporation of its solu- 
tion in absolute alcohol. One pound yields about one drachm. 

It is a light yellowish or white powder; its taste is burning, acrid, 
very persistent in the throat; it is soluble in alcohol and ether, 
fuses at 248° F., and is decomposed at 300°, turning green; the 
salts are neutral, bitter, and acrid, some deliquescent. 

Staphisaina. — If delphinia is dissolved in ether, this alkaloid re- 
mains behind as a yellowish, uncrystallizable mass, of an acrid 
taste, which forms acid salts. 

Hydrastia may be prepared by treating the aqueous extract of hy- 
drastis with magnesia, and extracting the precipitate with boiling 
alcohol. 

Prof. Wayne, of Cincinnati, prepares a cold infusion of the root, 
removes the berberina by muriatic acicl, and precipitates hydrastin 
by an alkali, recrystallizing it from alcohol. 

This vegetable alkali was discovered by Alfred B. Durand, of 
Philadelphia, in 1850, while investigating the composition of the 
root of Hydrastis Canadensis. It forms yellow crystals, insoluble 
in water, sparingly soluble in cold alcohol and ether, soluble in 
chloroform and boiling alcohol, fusible in heated turpentine; it 
has an alkaline reaction on litmus; by concentrated nitric acid it is 
colored deep red. Concentrated sulphuric acid has little action in 
cold; when heated a purple color is produced; concentrated muri- 
atic acid dissolves it. 

The salts, which are intensely bitter, have not been obtained in 
crystals. 

Hydrastia is stated by the "Eclectics" to be a valuable tonic, 
which has an especial action on diseased mucous tissues. It is 
very rarely prescribed. 

Helleboria is obtained by treating the root with alcohol contain- 
ing one-fiftieth sulphuric acid; the tincture is treated with magne- 
sia, the nitrate acidulated with sulphuric acid, water is added, the 
alcohol distilled off, filtered, decomposed with carbonate of potas- 
sium, and by shaking with ether, the alkaloid obtained in solution. 
It is white, crystalline, easily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether ; 
taste bitter and acrid ; not volatile ; as it evolves ammonia when 



480 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

treated with potassa, its proper place appears to be among the alka- 
loids, though its chemical nature is not known. 

Cissampelina or Pelosina, C 18 H 21 N0 3 . — It is prepared by carefully 
precipitating an infusion of the root made with sulphuric acid 
water, washing, drying at 212°, and dissolving in absolute ether, 
which is free from alcohol and water. 

The yellowish, hard, semi transparent mass is colored yellow by 
sunlight ; without smell ; taste disagreeably sweetish-bitter ; solu- 
ble in alcohol and ether; insoluble in water, but swelling up and 
combining with it ; in this state it has an alkaline reaction. 

The alkaloid and its salts are rapidly oxidized in a moist atmo- 
sphere; ammonia is evolved and they turn yellow; anhydrous alco- 
hol now dissolves the new base pelluteina, C 24 H 42 N0 7 , which is in- 
soluble in ether. 

Menispermina, C 18 H, 2 N0 2 , is contained in the shell of Cocculus 
Indicus. To prepare it, the alcoholic extract is first extracted by 
cold water, then by hot water, from which solution mineral acids 
precipitate picrotoxic acid in crystals; the filtrate is precipitated 
by an alkali, the precipitate extracted with acetic acid, again pre- 
cipitated, washed with cold alcohol, and the alkaloid extracted by 
ether. 

It crystallizes in needles or prisms, has a very bitter taste, fuses 
at 248° F., is soluble in alcohol, ether, and alkalies, little in water, 
and is said to be not poisonous. 

Berberina, C 20 H 17 E"O 4 , is one of the most widely diffused organic 
alkalies, having been found in several genera and species of not 
less than ^.ve natural orders. It is prepared from the aqueous ex- 
tract of barberry root by treating it with 82 per cent, alcohol, dis- 
tilling it off, crystallizing the alkaloid in a cool place, and purifying 
it by recrystallization. By a similar process it may be obtained in 
large proportion from Colombo wood, the wood of Coscinium fene- 
st rat urn, a tree growing in Ceylon. 

As stated above, berberina is likewise obtained from the infu- 
sion of hydrastis by precipitating its muriate by an excess of muri- 
atic acid. The eclectics called this salt a resinoid, and named it 
hydrastin. Prof. Mahla, of Chicago, proved its true chemical 
nature. (Amer. Journal of Sciences and Arts, January, 1862.) 

For accounts of the presence of berberina and its mode of extrac- 
tion from other American plants, we have to refer to the interesting 
papers of Prof. F. F. Mayer (Amer. Journ. of Pharm., 1863, p. 97); 
of J. M. Maisch (Ibid., p. 301 and 303), and of J. D. Perrins (Ibid., 
p. 456). 

It crystallizes in fine yellow needles, containing 12 Aq., ten of 
which are expelled at a temperature of 212°, possesses a strongly 
bitter taste, is insoluble in ether, easily soluble in boiling water and 
alcohol. By concentrated sulphuric acid it is dissolved with an 
olive-green color; by concentrated nitric acid, red, with nitrous acid 
fumes; ammonia colors it yellowish-brown; by distillation with 
lime it yields quinolina. 

It is a dye for silk, cotton, wool, and linen. Its salts have a 



OPIUM ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 481 

yellow color, are crystallizable and precipitated by iodide, bromide, 
cyanide, ferrocyanide, and sulphocyanide of potassium, by bichlo- 
ride of mercury and of platinum; the neutral salts are soluble in 
water, but insoluble in dilute acids. 

BerberincE Murias {Muriate of Berberina), HO,HCl.— This salt has 
been used by the Eclectics under the name of hydrastin. (See Amer. 
Journ. Pharm., 1862, pp. 141, 308, and 360.) It is obtained from 
the concentrated infusions of plants containing this alkaloid by 
precipitating with an excess of muriatic acid and recrystallizing 
from hot alcohol. It occurs in bright yellow crystals, containing 
5 equivalents of water of crystallization, which is expelled at 212°. 
It has been used as a tonic in doses of 3 to 5 grains. 

If berberina is exposed to the influence of nascent hydrogen, a 
colorless base is obtained, named by its discoverers hydroberberina, 
C 20 H 21 ]TO 4 . By oxidizing agents it is readily reconverted into ber- 
berina. 

Berbina (Oxyacanthin.) — The bark of barberry root "is extracted 
with alcohol, mixed with one-eighth water, the alcohol distilled off, 
the filtrate evaporated, berberina crystallized out, the mother-liquor 
precipitated by carbonate of sodium, and the precipitate treated 
with sulphuric acid and animal charcoal. 

AVhite powder, colored brown by sunlight, bitter; nearly insolu- 
ble in water, soluble in alcohol, ether, fixed and volatile oils. 

The salts are crystallizable, colorless, bitter. 

Many of the plants in which berberina is found, in a larger or 
smaller proportion, contain also a colorless or white alkaloid, which 
is generally soluble in ether. It is uncertain yet whether these 
alkaloids are alike in the different plants, and whether they stand 
in any relation to berberina. (See the papers of Profs. Mayer and 
Maisch, above referred to.) 

The Opium Alkaloids and their Salts. 

The various kinds of opium, as produced in different localities, 
always contain morphia, on which the activity of the drug mainly 
depends; narcotina and other alkaloids are also always present, but 
some species contain, besides them, one or two alkaloids which have 
not been found in opium as generally produced. Besides the acid 
and a neutral principle, there have been discovered nine distinct 
vegetable alkalies, some of which are still little known. 

Morphia. C 17 H l9 ^"0 3 + H 2 0= 303. 

Morphia, which is the only one of the opium alkaloids commonly 
used in medicine, is the most abundant. It is the best known and 
most familiar of the whole class of vegetable alkalies. 

There are various processes for its preparation, of which that of 
the Pharmacopoeia is the simplest for the student who may be dis- 
posed to attempt this by no means difficult experiment. 

Reduced in quantity to suit the purpose, it is nearly as follows: — 
31 



482 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Take of Opium, sliced gj. 

Solution of ammonia f Jss. 

Distilled water, 

Alcohol, 

Animal charcoal, in fine powder, of each Sufficient. 

Macerate the opium with favj of water, working it with the 
hands or a pestle, as described under the head of Tincture of Opium, 
into a paste (if powdered opium is used, this is unnecessary) ; then 
digest it for twenty-four hours, and strain. Macerate or digest the 
residue in the same way, successively, with similar portions of 
water, and strain; then mix the infusions, evaporate to fsviij, and 
filter. To the concentrated aqueous solution thus obtained add 
first f 3yj of alcohol, and then f'3ij of solution of ammonia, previ- 
ously mixed with about f ^ss of alcohol ; cover the vessel and set it 
aside. After twenty-four hours pour in the remaining f 5ij of solu- 
tion of ammonia, mixed, as before, with alcohol, and again set 
aside that the morphia may crystallize out. The only remaining 
process is to purify the crystals which are formed in the bottom of 
the vessel. This is done by dissolving them in boiling alcohol, and 
filtering, while hot, through animal charcoal. A common flask 
will serve for the solution, and, for small operations, the applica- 
tion of heat to the funnel will be unnecessary. It may be conveni- 
ently arranged over an evaporating dish. The filtered liquid, as it 
falls, will be immediately cooled by contact with the dish, and the 
extended surface will favor the spontaneous evaporation of the al- 
cohol, so that a small crop of crystals (40 to 60 grains) of morphia 
may be expected. 

This is a convenient method of testing, approximately, the value 
of specimens of opium, in which case it is not necessary to carry 
out the last part of the directions, but is as well to take the weight 
of the crystallized alkaloids as at first thrown down. The animal 
charcoal deprives the product of color, but is apt to absorb a por- 
tion of alkaloid also ; so that, to get the entire yield, the charcoal 
should be digested in a further portion of alcohol, which should be 
added to the filtrate. The motive for using alcohol with the am- 
monia added to the concentrated liquid in the first instance, is to 
take up the resinous coloring matters, which would otherwise 
contaminate the precipitate. 

This method, however, can lay no claims to accuracy. Narcotia 
is exhausted by water together with morphia, and ammonia preci- 
pitates both these alkaloids, while the third one, codeia, remains in 
the mother-liquor if this be not too concentrated. Morphia is 
not entirely insoluble in water, and dissolves more freely in alco- 
holic liquids, in which narcotina is soluble to a less extent. The 
precipitate obtained by the above process, therefore, contains nota- 
ble quantities of narcotina, while a portion of morphia remains in 
the alcoholic mother-liquor. 

A better method for assaying opium, which may likewise be used 
for preparing pure morphia on a small scale, is based on its solu- 
bility in fixed alkalies. It was originally proposed by Thiboumery 



MORPHIA SALTS. 483 

and improved by Mohr as follows: One part of opium is exhausted 
by macerating it with twelve parts of cold water in four successive 
portions; the infusion is heated to boiling and mixed with hot milk 
of lime containing one-sixth caustic lime. The mixture is boiled 
for a few minutes, strained, the residue expressed, the liquid eva- 
porated to two parts, filtered, heated to boiling, and mixed with 
one-twelfth part of chloride of ammonium. Ammonia is freely 
given off and the morphia separates in a crystalline state in a nearly 
white condition, the lime having removed most of the coloring 
matter. 

Boussingault and Pay en follow a similar method, except that 
they neutralize the alkaline liquor by muriatic acid and precipitate 
the alkaloid by ammonia. 

The greatest difficulty with this process consists in the sparing 
solubility of lime and the possible loss of some morphia by the ab- 
sorption of some carbonic acid by the lime, if the alkaline solution 
becomes too concentrated. Herzog substitutes potassa for lime, and 
perhaps a still greater improvement is the employment of caustic 
baryta by Prof. F. F. Mayer. 

Morphia occurs in small but brilliant prismatic crystals, con- 
taining 2H 2 0, or nearly six per cent., which are transparent and 
colorless, intensely bitter when dissolved. It dissolves in about 
1000 parts of cold and 400 parts of boiling water, in 14 parts of 
boiling and 20 of cold alcohol, freely also in solutions of fixed 
alkalies, while ammonia dissolves but little, and with great facility 
in dilute acids, which it neutralizes, forming salts; one hundred 
parts of chloroform dissolve .57 of morphia. It is insoluble in 
ether. Heated with caustic potassa, methylamin is evolved. 

In powder, it strikes a deep blue color with neutral salts of ses- 
quioxide, or with sesquichloride of iron, decomposes iodic acid with 
liberation of iodine, the yellow or reddish-yellow color being con- 
siderably deepened by the addition of a few drops of ammonia, and 
forms with nitric acid a red compound passing into yellow; with 
nitric containing some sulphuric acid, it strikes a green color; chlo- 
rine colors morphia diffused in water orange, then red, and after 
solution yellow, and ultimately causes a flocculent precipitate. 

Morphia may be considered pure, if it is entirely dissipated by 
heat, if ether takes nothing up, if it is wholly soluble in alcohol, 
and when its solution in diluted nitric acid is not precipitated by 
nitrate of silver, nitrate of barium, phosphate and oxalate of am- 
monium. 

Morphia Salts. — These are mostly crystallizable, soluble in water 
and alcohol and insoluble in ether; their solutions have a very bit- 
ter taste and are precipitated by alkalies and their carbonates, sul- 
phocyanide of potassium, and terchloride of gold, in which case the 
latter is reduced to the metallic state. Concentrated solutions are 
also precipitated by iodide of potassium, phosphate of sodium, 
bichloride of platinum, and bichloride of mercury. 

They are made by forming solutions of the alkaloids in the ap- 
priate acids and evaporating. 



484 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Morphice Sulphas. — This is in white feathery crystals, soluble in 
about 2 parts of hot water. In the United States it is by far the 
most common of the morphia salts; it contains 5 equivalents of 
water. Dose, one-eighth to one-fourth grain. 

Morphice Murias. — This is most used in England, where it is 
officinal as morphias hydrochloras. It is soluble in about 20 parts 
of cold water. Dose, the same as of the sulphate. 

Morphice Acetas. — By treating morphia with alcohol and acetic 
acid and precipitating by ether, it is obtained in crystals, but usually 
it is a white powder, and deficient in the proportion of the acid in- 
gredient, so as to be comparatively insoluble, in which case a few 
drops of acetic acid to the liquid will make a clear solution. It is 
very freely soluble in water, less in alcohol, and is much used for 
external application, though adapted also to the form of powder or 
pill. Dose, the same as of the foregoing. 

Morphice Citras. — In some parts of the United States a solution 
of this salt is employed. It is prepared by dissolving 16 grains of 
morphia with 8 grains citric acid and J grain cochineal in one 
ounce of water. It is considered 2J times stronger than laudanum ; 
its dose is 10 drops. 

Morphice Valerianas is an unofficinal salt, made by neutralizing 
the alkaloid with valerianic acid. Its dose is from one-eighth to 
one-half grain. 

Narcotina, C 22 H 23 N0 7 4- H 2 (equiv. 431), is easily obtained by 
extracting aqueous extract of opium or crude morphia with ether, 
which leaves it, on evaporation, nearly pure. It crystallizes in 
colorless crystals, nearly insoluble in water, in fixed alkalies, and in 
a solution of table salt; it dissolves in 20 parts of hot and 150 parts 
cold alcohol ; its alcoholic solution is very bitter, but has no alka- 
line reaction; 100 parts of chloroform dissolve 37.17 parts, and 1 
ounce of olive oil 1.2 grain of narcotina; it is not acted on by ses- 
quisalt of iron or pure nitric acid, but sulphuric, with but a trace 
of nitric acid, colors it blood-red. Its salts are generally acid and 
crystallize with difficulty. Narcotina is not narcotic- It has been 
given as a tonic and antiperiodic, in doses as high as half a drachm, 
without the production of narcotic symptoms. The following four 
homologous varieties of narcotina have been distinguished, which, 
by treatment with caustic potassa, yield homologous volatile 
bases :— 

Normal narcotina, C 2] H 21 ND 7 , yields ammonia. 
Methylic narcotina, C 22 H 2 ,N0 7 , yields methylamina. 
Ethylic narcotina, C^H.^O^ yields ethylamina. 
Propylic narcotina, C 24 H 27 N0 7 , yields propylamina. 

Narcotina, by the influence of dilute H 2 S0 4 and hyperoxide of 
manganese, is decomposed into water, opianic acid and the follow- 
ing stronger alkaloid. 

Cotarnina. — Crystallizing in colorless prisms, easily soluble in 
boiling water, alcohol, ether, and ammonia, intensely bitter, alka- 
line reaction. The various homologous kinds of narcotina appear 
to furnish also homologous kinds of cotarnina : — 



OPIUM ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 485 

Normal cotarnina, C 12 H 13 ^N"0 3 . Methylic cotarnina, C 13 H 15 N0 3 . 

Ethylic cotarnina, C U H 17 JST0 3 . Propylic cotarnina, C 15 H 19 lSr0 3 . 

Codeia, C 18 H 2] N0 3 (equiv. 299), crystallizes in octohedral or 
prismatic crystals, with two equivalents of water, soluble in alcohol, 
ether, and in boiling water. It is slowly precipitated by ammonia, 
more rapidly by potassa, and is insoluble in fixed alkalies ; it is 
colored yellow by concentrated nitric acid. Its salts are neutral, 
and have a bitter taste. 

In doses from one-fifth to one-half grain, it produces a tranquil- 
lizing effect, while over two grains produce sleep, with stupefaction, 
and sometimes with nausea and vomiting. It has been much used 
of late in cases in which the salts of morphia disagree with the 
patient. 

Thebaia, or paramorphia, C ]9 II 21 1TO3 (equiv. 307), is contained in 
the precipitate produced by lime in an infusion of opium, from 
which it is obtained by extracting with muriatic acid, precipitating 
by ammonia, and crystallizing from ether. 

The small alkaline crystals have an acrid taste, are little soluble 
in water, and colored red by sulphuric acid. The solution of its 
muriate leaves a resinous mass on evaporation. It is very poisonous. 

Narceina, C 23 H 2r N"O g (equiv. 461), occurs in very thin prisms, of 
a bitter and sharp taste, which are fusible at 197.5°, easily soluble 
in hot water and in alkaline solutions, but insoluble in ether and 
in concentrated solution of potassa. Its combinations with mineral 
acids are obtained with some difficulty; they are rendered blue by . 
a little water, colorless by more water, blue again by fused chloride 
of calcium. 

Its medicinal effects appear to be directed to the lower portion of 
the spine, since it decreases the mobility and sensibility of the lower 
extremities. 

Opiania, C 2] H 2] N0 7 (equiv. 397), is contained in Egyptian opium ; 
it crystallizes in long prisms which are insoluble in water, but dis- 
solves in much hot alcohol. It has an alkaline reaction, a bitter 
taste, and is narcotic of the strength and manner of morphia. 
Nitric acid renders it yellow; if added to its solution in sulphuric 
acid, blood-red changing to light yellow. 

Papaverine/,, C 20 H 2r N"O 4 (equiv. 337), is an alkaloid in small acicular 
crystals, which turn blue with sulphuric acid; with muriatic acid 
in excess it forms very insoluble colorless prisms, which possess a 
high refractive power. It is insoluble in water, little soluble in 
alcohol and ether. It appears to be devoid of narcotic properties. 

Phormia, or Pseudomorphia, C 27 II 9 N0 7 (equiv. 457), has been ob- 
tained by Pelletier only from a few lots of opium ; after precipitat- 
ing the sulphate of morphia by ammonia, and evaporating the 
mother-liquid, white micaceous scales are separated, containing 
about one-tenth per cent, of H,S0 4 ; after removing the acid by 
ammonia, the crystals of phormia are not so lustrous as before, and 
less soluble in water, it is insoluble in absolute alcohol and ether, 
somewhat soluble in alcohol of .833 sp. gr., soluble in caustic soda 
and potassa. Nitric acid colors it red, oxidizing it ultimately to 



486 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

oxalic acid. Neutral salts of sesquioxide of iron render it blue ; 
the blue solution, in sesquichloride of iron, turns green on boiling ; 
on the addition of ammonia, wine-red. It is not poisonous. 

Opina or Porphyroxin. — Powdered opium is exhausted by cold 
ether, then by a weak solution of carbonate of potassium, again by 
ether ; codeia, thebaia, and opina are dissolved ; the extract of the 
last tincture is dissolved in muriatic acid, precipitated by ammonia 
(codeia remains in solution), the precipitate is treated with alcohol, 
which, leaving thebaia behind, dissolves opina. It crystallizes in 
fine needles, soluble in alcohol, ether, and dilute acids ; solutions in 
mineral acids turn purplish-red on boiling. 

Metamorphia. — In preparing morphia by Mohr's process, Scharf 
obtained a new alkaloid to which the above name was given by 
Wittstein. It crystallizes in hard prisms, which dissolve in about 
6000 parts of cold and 70 parts of hot water, in 9 parts of boiling 
and 330 parts of cold strong alcohol ; the last solution has a sharp 
bitter taste and a slight alkaline reaction. It is insoluble in ether, 
soluble in potassa, less in ammonia. Nitric acid colors it orange- 
red and dissolves it yellow; concentrated iodic acid gradually 
liberates iodine. Its salts are not precipitated by ammonia. Its 
action upon the animal economy appears to be closely allied to that 
of morphia. 

Apomorphw. — This was first prepared by Arppe in 1845, but at- 
tention has lately been called to it in England by Matthieson and 
Wright, who prepared it by means of hydrochloric acid. It is a 
derivative of morphia, having the elements of one equivalent of 
water taken from it ; its emetic power, being free from the most 
objectionable properties of the ordinary emetics, renders it valua- 
ble, while its peculiar properties fit it for subcutaneous injection. 
(Am. Jour, of Pharm., vol. xliv. 322.) 

The following is Merck's test for opium : — ■ 

The concentrated solution is treated with caustic potassa, and 
skaken with ether ; a strip of paper, having been dipped several 
times in the ethereal solution, is moistened with muriatic acid, and 
exposed to the vapors of boiling water; on account of the opina, 
the paper will acquire a red color if opium is present in the liquid. 
(See also Meconic Acid.) 

Sanguinarina, or Chelerythrina. C 37 H 54 N 4 8 . (Equiv. 784.) 

This alkaloid is derived from the roots of Sanguinaria Canadensis, 
Chelidonium majus, and Glaucium luteum, by exhausting them 
with weak sulphuric acid, precipitating by ammonia, dissolving it 
out by ether, and precipitating by sulphuric acid ; the sulphate is 
decomposed by ammonia. It is a white, pearly substance, of an 
acrid taste, very soluble in alcohol, also soluble in ether, in fixed 
and volatile oils. With acids it forms soluble salts, which are re- 
markable for their beautiful red, crimson, and scarlet colors. From 
this it is inferred that a native salt of this alkaloid is the occasion 
of the brilliant color of the fresh juice of the plant. The alkaloid 



CHELIDINA — VIOLIA. 487 

is poisonous in large doses, but its salts are used in medicine and 
found to be very useful in doses of fractions of a grain in expecto- 
rant remedies. 

Chelidina, C, H 20 N 3 O 3 . — The precipitate, as above, which is 
insoluble in ether, is exhausted with dilute sulphuric acid, the 
solution precipitated by ammonia, and the precipitate crystallized 
from acetic acid, when colorless flat crystals remain, which are free 
of acetic acid, have a bitter taste, and dissolve in alcohol, fixed and 
volatile oils. 

It forms colorless, acidulous salts, of a purely bitter taste, which 
are not poisonous. 

Puccina is the name given by Dr. Gibb to an alkaloid discovered 
by Prof. E. S. Wayne in the ethereal solution of sanguinarina ; its 
sulphate remains dissolved in ether after sanguinarina is precipi- 
tated ; its salts are of a deep red color. (See Am. Journ. ofPharm., 
vol. xxviii. p. 520.) 

Glaucina is prepared from the juice of the herb of Glaucium 
luteum, by precipitating it with acetate of lead, treating the filtrate 
with sulphuretted hydrogen, precipitating it with tannin, decom- 
posing the precipitate by lime, and crystallizing from alcohol. In 
the horn-poppy it is combined with fu marie acid. 

It is in pearly scales, of a burning, acrid taste, readily soluble in 
boiling water, ether, and alcohol. It assumes a red color in the 
light, dissolves in warm sulphuric acid, with a greenish-blue color, 
rendered reddish by dilution, and precipitated by ammonia, with 
a blue color. Its salts are acrid. 

Picroglaucina, gaucina, is prepared from the root in a similar way. 
It is in white crystalline scales, of a bitter, nauseous taste, soluble 
in water, alcohol, and ether, and colored deep green by sulphuric 
acid. The salts are crystallizable, and of a bitter, nauseous taste. 

Coryclalina, C 2() H 2ft N0 7 . — The juice of the root is precipitated by 
acetate of lead, dilute sulphuric acid and ammonia; the last pre- 
cipitate yields the alkaloid to alcohol. It has also been obtained 
from the American species, though by a different process. 

Soft grayish-white lumps or powder, colorless prisms or scales, 
without odor, nearly tasteless, insoluble in water, soluble in ether, 
alcohol, and alkalies; of an alkaline reaction, the solutions are 
greenish-yellow ; it melts in boiling water, and is colored greenish- 
yellow in the light ; the salts are soluble, very bitter, somewhat 
crystallizable ; nitric acid, even in dilute solutions, colors corydalina 
red or blood-red, destroying it at the same time. (See Am. Journ. 
of Pharm., vol. xxvii. p. 205.) 

Fumarina is similar to the foregoing, but soluble in water and 
insoluble in ether ; it precipitates solution of gelatine. 

Violia. — The alcoholic extract is treated with ether, then boiled 
with sulphuric acid and water, precipitated with oxide of lead, the 
precipitate treated with alcohol. Similar in its action to emetia ; 
but differing chemically from it by rendering reddened litmus paper 
green, and being more soluble in water, less in alcohol, it is insoluble 



488 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

in ether and fixed oils, and is precipitated from the solution of its 
sulphate by gallic acid. Some violets, however, contain emelia. 

Anchietia. — In the root of Anchieta salutaris, which is success- 
fully used in Brazil, for the treatment of various skin diseases. 

The bark of the root is mashed and allowed to ferment, extracted 
with muriatic acid and water, evaporated and precipitated by am- 
monia; by treatment with animal charcoal and repeated crystalliza- 
tion from alcoholic solution it is obtained pure. Yield about .42 
per cent. 

Straw-yellow needles, insoluble in ether and water, easily soluble 
in alcohol, no smell, taste sharp, nauseous ; nitric acid colors it 
orange-yellow to chrome-yellow ; sulphuric acid violet to blackish. 

The salts are soluble, crystallizable ; the muriate is colorless, 
crystallizing from hot water in star-like needles, after which it is 
insoluble in water. 

7 heobrornina, C 7 H 8 ]Sr 4 2 . — It is prepared from the chocolate nut, 
by a process similar to that for obtaining caffeina. It dissolves 
with difficulty in boiling water, alcohol, and ether ; boiling solu- 
tion of caustic baryta dissolves it, and it separates again on cooling. 
It has a slightly bitter taste, is unalterable in contact with the air, 
is rendered brown on exposure to a heat of 480°, and sublimes at 
between 554° and 563°, leaving but little charcoal. 

Its salts resemble those of caffeina. The tannate is soluble in an 
excess of tannic acid, in alcohol, and boiling water. With chlorine 
it is converted into methylamina. Prof. Strecker has found that 
by heating in a sealed tube Theobrominia -h AgO with C 2 H 3 I 
(iodide of methyle) the resulting products are Agl + HO + Caifeina. 

Caffeina, Theina, Guaranina, Psoralein, C 8 H 10 N 4 O 2 +2H 2 O. — It is 
prepared from the hot infusion of tea or coffee by precipitating the 
tannic acid with subacetate of lead, boiling the mixture, filtering, 
removing the excess of lead by hydrosulphuric or sulphuric acid, 
evaporating the clear liquor and recrystallizing the product. 

A. Vogel, jr.'s, method is as follows : Powdered coffee is extracted 
by commercial benzol, this is distilled off, leaves an oil and caffeina 
behind; the oil is removed by a little ether or by water, from 
which latter liquid the alkaloid crystallizes on cooling. 

Coffee contains about \ per cent., tea (gunpowder) 1 to 4 per cent., 
Ilex Paraguayensis (Psoralea glandulosa), .13 per cent, of caffeina. 
Black tea contains more caffeina than green tea. 

It crystallizes in needles, losing 2 eq. water of crystallization at 
302° P. ; it melts at 352° and sublimes at 725° without decomposi- 
tion ; it is soluble in alcohol, ether, chloroform, and hot water, cold 
water dissolves but little. If boiled with nitric acid, the yellow 
liquid assumes a purple color. 

Its salts and double salts are well defined and crystallizable, some 
are decomposed by water. It produces a crystalline precipitate 
with nitrate of silver. Tannate of caffeina is obtained as a white 
precipitate, soluble in boiling water. 

When caffeina is distilled with caustic baryta, the distillate con- 
tains ammonia and methylamina, and there remains in the retort 



HARMALINA — BAPTISINA. 489 

a new base caffeidina, C 7 H 12 N 4 2 , which is not precipitated by solu- 
tion of ammonia or potassa, but is separated in oily drops by solid 
KO. 

Caffeina is not an alimentary, but tonic, and in large doses a 
poisonous substance, producing death in various animals, by palsy- 
ing the nervous system. (Dr. Stuhlmann.) It seems to act chiefly 
on the ganglionic system of nerves, and but slightly on the brain. 
L. Thompson has used it in doses of from 1 to 5 grains in the low 
stages of typhoid fevers with marked success ; he also recommends 
it in hemicrania, neuralgia, and relapsing fever. Its solution in 
citric acid has been used with considerable success in the treatment 
of sick-headache. (See Extemporaneous Pharmacy.) This solution 
is frequently regarded as the solution of a citrate, the existence of 
which, however, is denied by Hager. The arseniateof caffeina has 
been used by Dr. Gastriel, of Cairo, Egypt, as a substitute for quinia 
in intermittent^. (Am. M. Monthly, xvii. 267.) 

Harmalina, C ]3 H ir N" 2 0. — The seeds of Peganum harmala (Puta 
sylvestris), a plant of Southern Pussia, are used there as a dye, and 
are said to be inebriating and soporific. 

The neutralized infusion with acidulated water is saturated with 
table salt, in which solution the chlorides are insoluble ; the purified 
salts are precipitated by excess of ammonia, when harmina crystal- 
lizes first in needles, afterwards harmalina in scales. Colorless 
scales or octohedrons, nearly tasteless, with difficulty soluble in 
water and ether. 

The salts are of a sulphur-yellow color, not dyeing ; of a purely 
bitter taste ; precipitated by excess of acids or inorganic salts. By 
digestion with alcohol another alkaloid — 

Porphyr harmina, harmala of Goebel, is obtained, of a red color, 
yielding red salts and dyeing. 

Harmina, C 13 IT 12 N 2 0, is a product of oxidation of harmalina ; it 
crystallizes in colorless prisms; its salts are colorless, but otherwise 
resemble those of harmalina. Harmina and harmalina are splendid 
red dyes, if previously converted into porphyrharmina. 

Jamaieina is obtained from the cabbage-tree bark, GeofTroya 
Jamaicensis, also called Andira inermis. 

The aqueous infusion is precipitated by basic acetate of lead, 
treated with sulphuretted hydrogen, and evaporated. It crystal- 
lizes in yellow quadrangular tables, bitter, soluble in water, little 
in alcohol, melting below the boiling point of water. The salts are 
yellow, bitter, some crystallizable; in small doses they produce rest- 
lessness, in larger purging. It is said to be vermifuge. 

Surinamina. — From the bark of Andira retusa (GeofTroya Suri- 
namensis), is prepared similarly to the above. It crystallizes in 
fine white microscopic needles, without taste or smell, nearly in- 
soluble in cold water and ether, soluble in boiling alcohol and boil- 
ing water. 

Bajptisina. — The root of Baptisia tinctoria contains an alkaloid 
which has not been isolated, unless the crystalline principle of B. 
L. Smedley (Am. Journ. Pharm., 1862, 310) is the pure alkaloid. 



490 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Cynapia is a scarcely known alkaloid, obtained by Ficinus from 
fool's parsley. (See Syllabus.) It crystallizes in rhombic prisms, 
which are soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in ether, and have 
an alkaline reaction. The sulphate is crystallizable. 

Trianospermia. — From the root of the Brazilian tayuya de pimenta 
comari, Peckolt separated this alkaloid, which is probably identi- 
cal with Herberger's tayuyina. It crystallizes in colorless needles, 
is inodorous, of a biting taste, insoluble in ether, soluble in alcohol 
and water, has an alkaline reaction, and furnishes with sulphuric 
acid a crystallizable salt. It appears to be purgative. 

Atherospermia, C, H 4Cr N"O 5 , was discovered by Zeyer in an Austra- 
lian drug. (Am. Journ. Pharm., 1862, 165.) It is a grayish-white 
powder, of a bitter taste, changing to yellowish in the sunlight. 
When carefully heated it gives off the odor of putrid meat and 
afterwards of herrings ; it probably evolves propylamina. It is 
nearly insoluble in water; dissolves in 1000 parts of cold and 100 
p. boiling ether, in 32 p. cold and 2 p. boiling stronger alcohol, in 
chloroform, bisulphide of carbon, volatile and fixed oils; concen- 
trated nitric acid produces a brown-j^ellow color; sulphuric acid 
and chromate of potassium yield slowly a green color of Cr 2 3 ; 
from iodic acid it liberates iocliue. 

Cocaina, C 17 H. 21 N0 4 is obtained from the leaves of Erythroxylon 
coca by exhausting them with acidulated alcohol, treating with 
milk of lime, neutralizing the nitrate with sulphuric acid, evapo- 
rating, diluting with water, filtering from the resin, precipitating 
by carbonate of sodium and. exhausting the alkaloid by ether, the 
last traces of coloring matter can only be removed by washing with 
alcohol. 

It crystallizes from its alcoholic solution in colorless prisms; 
soluble in 704 parts of cold water, in alcohol and ether. The solu- 
tions are alkaline to test paper; bitterish ; promote the flow of saliva 
and produce a feeling of numbness upon the tongue. 

Its salts crystallize with some difficulty, and show no striking 
reactions with tests, or peculiar coloration with oxidizing agents. 
Its precipitate with iodohydrargyrate of potassium (Mayer's test) 
dissolves in muriatic acid, in which behavior it differs from other 
alkaloids. 

Heated with muriatic acid it splits into benzoic acid and a new 
base ecgonina, CgR^'NO^-h H 2 0, which is soluble in water. 

For further accounts see the papers of Dr. A. Niemann {Am. 
Journ. Pharm., 1861, 122), of J. M. Maisch (ibid., 496), and of 
Lossen (ibid., 1862, 406). 

The Cinchona Alkaloids and their Salts. 

Quinia. C 20 H 22 ISr 2 O 2 + H 2 O. (Equiv. 324.) 

This alkaloid is prepared from various species of cinchona bark, 
which contain it in combination with kinic acid and the astringent 
principle called cincho-tannic acid. These combinations being only 
partially soluble in water, resort is had to an acid which liberates 



CINCHONA ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 491 

the alkaloid in a soluble form. That used in our officinal process 
for preparing the sulphate of quinia is muriatic, which is mixed 
with water in which the powdered bark is boiled. The very solu- 
ble muriate of quinia contained in this decoction is decomposed, 
giving up its acid to lime, while the quinia is liberated, and, being 
insoluble, is precipitated with the excess of lime added, the water 
retaining the chloride of calcium resulting from the reaction, and 
most of the impurities, in solution. The precipitated quinia and 
excess of lime being now digested in alcohol, the former is dissolved, 
and the impure quinia is obtained by evaporating this alcoholic 
solution. The remaining part of the process consists in converting 
this into the officinal sulphate, at the same time rendering it pure. 
To accomplish this, the amorphous mass is dissolved in diluted 
sulphuric acid, and filtered through bone-black, which contains 
sufficient carbonate of lime to neutralize the excess of sulphuric 
acid, and thus facilitate the crystallization of the sulphate as the 
solution cools. This process requires to be repeated, with the addi- 
tion of acid, if the charcoal is too alkaline, till a white and pure 
product is the result. 

The following is the process for preparing this alkaloid without 
alcohol, by Herring, who substitutes in place of it, oil of turpentine 
or benzole: — 

Powdered bark is boiled with caustic soda, to remove extractive, 
gum and coloring matter, exhausted with diluted sulphuric acid, 
evaporated at about 120°, filtered, precipitated by caustic soda, 
washed, redissolved in H 2 S0 4 , recry stall ized, treated with animal 
charcoal, and by fractional crystallizations purified from the other 
alkaloid. 

The soda liquor is supersaturated with muriatic acid, evaporated, 
filtered, treated with hydrate of lime, from which precipitate the 
alkaloids may be extracted by oil of turpentine or benzole. On 
adding diluted H 2 S0 4 , a solution of the alkaloid is obtained to be 
purified as above. 

Quinia occurs in silky needles, or in a crystalline powder, fusi- 
ble at 194° to an electrical mass, soluble in about 400 parts of 
water, 60 parts ether, 2 parts alcohol or chloroform, 24 parts of 
olive oil, also in alkalies, carbonate of ammonia, chloride of cal- 
cium, etc. Its solution in concentrated nitric acid turns yellow by 
heat, the solution in sulphuric acid is colored only at a high tem- 
perature. 

Its salts are mostly crystallizable; their solutions show a blue 
fluorescence, and on the addition of fresh chlorine water and a 
little ammonia, are colored violet, by an excess of NTI 3 emerald- 
green; too much chlorine causes a brown color. A solution of 
quinia in diluted sulphuric acid, mixed with some acetic acid and 
alcohol, and heated to 130°, yields, after the addition of tincture 
of iodine, beautiful emerald-green crystals of iodosulphate of quinia, 
Herapath's salt, which are nearly colorless by transmitted light. The 
solution of its salts is precipitated by alkalies, their carbonates and 
bicarbonate; but if they had been previously sufficiently acidulated 



492 ON THE OEGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

with tartaric acid, bicarbonate of sodium produces no precipitate. 
If their solution is treated first with chlorine water, free from hydro- 
chloric acid, and subsequently with finely-powdered ferrocyanide 
of potassium, a red coloration is produced, while potassa causes a 
yellow color. Quinia salts are precipitated by ferrocyanide of 
potassium, the precipitate is dissolved on boiling and by an excess 
of the precipitant. (Differences from cinchonia.) 

Quinice Sulphas, U. S. P. — Of the salts, the neutral sulphate (for- 
merly called disulphate) is officinal and mostly employed. Its mode 
of preparation has been given above. It is in feathery white crys- 
tals, much interlaced; of its eight equivalents of water, six are 
given off by exposure to dry air, while the remaining two are 
driven off at 248°. It dissolves in 740 parts of cold and 30 parts 
boiling water, in 60 parts of alcohol, but scarcely in ether. The 
addition of a mineral or of certain organic acids renders it easily 
soluble. (See above page 475.) 

The salts of quinia are all used as tonics; the sulphate, especially, 
is a well-known antiperiodic and febrifuge ; it is said to produce 
abortion when given during pregnancy. The dose varies from one 
to twenty grains. It is given in power, pill, mixture, and solution. 
(See Extemporaneous Pharmacy.) 

By heating together sulphate of quinia, solution of chlorinated 
lime, muriatic acid, and ammonia water, a green resinous mass is 
obtained, which has been called dalleochine or quinine green. Min- 
eral acids dissolve it with a brown, acetic acid with a blue color, 
the green being restored on neutralization. Its alcoholic solution, 
diluted with water, dyes silk, woollen, and cotton, the latter after 
the application of albumen as mordant. 

Quinice Valerianas, IT. S. P. — Valerianate of quinia was made 
officinal in 1860. It is obtained by dissolving freshly-precipitated 
quinia in diluted valerianic acid, heated to 180° F., and crystalliz- 
ing by cooling; the mother-liquors are evaporated below 120°. It 
combines the tonic properties of quinia with the antispasmodic 
effects of the valerianates. 

It is colorless, or white; crystallizes in rhomboidal tables, and has 
a peculiar repulsive odor and bitter taste. When heated it fuses 
and gives off white vapors. It dissolves in 110 p. of cold, and 40 p. 
of boiling water, and in 6 p. of cold and 1 part of hot alcohol, also 
in ether. The dose is from one to five grains. 

The following unofficinal salts are occasionally prescribed : — 

Quinice Murias. — The Dublin Pharmacopoeia orders 437 grains of 
crystallized sulphate of quinia (equivalent to 382 grains of the salt 
dried at 212°) dissolved in 30 ounces of boiling water, to be pre- 
cipitated by 123 grains of chloride of barium, and the filtrate evapo- 
rated until a pellicle forms. Another process is to decompose 1 
part of the sulphate in alcoholic solution by 3 parts of chloride of 
sodium. It crystallizes with 3H 2 in needles of a pearly lustre, 
more soluble than the sulphate. Baryta is detected by sulphuric 
acid, sulphate of quinia by chloride of barium. 

Quinice hypophosphis. — Introduced to notice by Prof, J. Lawrence 



CINCHONA ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 493 

Smith, is made with facility by dissolving one ounce sulphate of 
quinia in water by the aid of diluted sulphuric acid, then pre- 
cipitating the alkaloid with ammonia, washing, digesting the 
quinia in excess, in hypophosphorous acid with heat ; after filter- 
ing, it is evaporated spontaneously till it crystallizes. It may also 
be made by double decomposition between hypophosphite of baryta 
and sulphate of quinia. It is in elegant tufts of feathery crystals, 
soft to the touch, soluble in 60 parts of water, and more so in hot 
water. It loses water at 300°, melts, and turns brown. Dose, one 
to five grains. 

Quinice iodosulphas, Herapath's salt, the preparation of which 
has been noticed among the tests for quinia, has been used in 
haemoptysis, tuberculosis, scrofula, etc., in doses of J to 3 grains, 
three or four times a day. (See Am. Drug. Circ, iv. 285.) 

Quinice Hydriodas. — 5 parts of effloresced sulphate of quinia dis- 
solved in alcohol and decomposed by an alcoholic solution of 3 parts 
of iodide of potassium, precipitates sulphate of potassium, and 
yields, on cooling and evaporating, hydriodate of quinia in fine 
crystalline needles. 

Quinice antimonias is precipitated by double decomposition of 
antimoniate of potassium and sulphate of quinia, and crystallized 
from hot water or alcohol. It has been administered in periodical 
diseases in doses of from six to ten grains during apyrexia, and it 
is stated to be rarely necessary to give it a second time. 

Quinice Arsenis. — Quinia is precipitated from 100 parts of its sul- 
phate, dissolved in 600 parts alcohol, and boiled with 14 parts 
arsenious acid, the filtrate, on cooling, separates needles of this 
poisonous salt. It may be given with caution in doses from one- 
quarter to one-half grain several times a day. 

Sulphate of quinia, iron, and magnesia, as proposed by Dr. Fergus, 
contains 5 parts of the first, 15 of the second, and 80 of the third 
sulphate, it being merely an intimate mixture of the three. It is 
claimed for this preparation that the adjuvant property of both iron 
and quinia are remarkably heightened, and that in solution the 
iron is not oxidized. (?) 

Quinice lactas is obtained by saturating lactic acid with quinia, 
or by double decomposition of the baryta salt of the former with 
the sulphate of the latter, and crystallizes in soluble needles. 

Quinice tartras is crystallized in needles from the hot solution of 
quinia in tartaric acid. 

Quinice citras is separated in needles from the hot mixture of 
citrate of sodium added to sulphate of quinia until an acid reaction 
is shown to test paper. {See Citrate of Quinia and Iron.) 

Quinice Acetas. — Seventeen parts of the effloresced sulphate of 
quinia are dissolved in boiling water and mixed with six parts of 
crystallized acetate of sodium; acetate of quinia crystallizes in 
white feathery needles, nearly insoluble in cold water. (See remarks 
in Am. Journ. Pharm., xxx. 385.) 

Quinice hydrobromas. — Two hydrobromates are known ; the neutral 
which is very soluble in water and alcohol, and has an alkaline reac- 



494 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

tion, and the basic, which is much less soluble, and is alkaline in its 
reaction. 10 parts of basic sulphate of quinia and 50 parts of alco- 
hol (85°) are heated together in a small flask, 8 parts of bromide of 
potassium dissolved in 20 parts of water are mixed with 10 parts of 
diluted sulph. acid (1 per cent.) and added to the solution of quinia, 
which is then brought to the boiling point; after a few minutes the 
sulphate of potassium is separated by filtration and washed with 
hot alcohol. The filtrate and the washings are evaporated and al- 
lowed to crystallize. The salt is pearly white and opaque, and con- 
tains traces of sulphuric acid. The basic hydrobromate may be pre- 
pared in the same manner, using five parts of bromide in place of ten. 

Quinice TJras. — One part freshly precipitated quinia, one and a 
half of uric acid, and one hundred and fifty parts of water are to 
be boiled together in a glass vessel, filtered while hot, the contents 
of the filter treated with boiling water, and the filtrate mixed and 
set by in the cold to crystallize. The salt forms as a white gran- 
ular mass, the mother-liquor yielding a portion by evaporation. 
When dry it is a white powder, with a feeble lustre, under a micro- 
scope showing the form of truncated crystals ; soluble in 855 parts 
of cold water, 1580 parts of alcohol, sp. gr. 823, or 21.25 parts of 
ether; it consists of quinia 59.34, uric acid 27.47, water 13.19. 

Quinice Tannas. — Tannic acid precipitates tannate of quinia from 
all solutions which have not been too much acidulated; it has little 
taste on account of its sparing solubility in neutral liquids. 

Quinice gallas is obtained by double decomposition between a hot 
solution of sulphate of quinia and gallate of potassium. It is in 
crystalline granules, or a white powder, almost insoluble in water, 
soluble in alcohol and dilute acids. 

Quinice Kinas. — To obtain this natural salt directly from the bark, 
the following process is given by Henry and Plisson. The extract 
is dissolved in 3 parts of water, nearly neutralized by carbonate of 
calcium, then cautiously neutralized by hydra ted oxide of lead ; from 
the filtrate the lead is removed by sulphuretted hydrogen, after 
which the evaporated liquid is treated with alcohol of .842, the 
alcohol distilled off and the residue repeatedly treated with water 
and alcohol until nothing is separated by these liquids. It is ob- 
tained in white crystalline warts, soluble in 4 parts of water, and 
8 parts of alcohol. 

Quinice Hydroferrocyanas. — 1 part sulphate of quinia, 1 J parts fer- 
rocyanide of potassium, and 7 parts of boiling water yield the salt 
on cooling, which is to be recrystallized from alcohol. It appears 
in greenish-yellow needles, which are insoluble in water. Pelouze 
asserts it to be quinia mixed with some Prussian blue. Dollfuss 
found it to be C J0 H 24 ^" 2 O 4 + 2(FeCy + 2HOy)'+ 6Aq. 

Quinice Suljohocarbolas. — A formula for this salt is published in 
Amer. Journ. Pharm., xlii. 506. 



nan 



iclia, C 20 H 24 ]Sr 2 0,+ 2H 2 0. (Equiv. 360.) 



This name is now generally applied to an alkaloid which is 
isomeric with quinia, but differs from it in turning polarized light 



CINCHONA ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 495 

to the right. It occurs, in company with the other alkaloids, in 
many cinchona barks, particularly those imported from New 
Grenada. 

It is obtained from its sulphate by decomposition with ammonia, 
and crystallizes in shining colorless efflorescing crystals, which are 
readily reduced to a white powder; they melt without decomposi- 
tion, and, on cooling, concrete into a grayish-white crystalline 
mass. When ignited, they burn with the odor of kinole and the 
volatile oil of bitter almonds; they have a less intensely bitter taste 
than quinia. This alkaloid dissolves in 1500 p. cold and 750 parts 
boiling water, in 3 parts of boiling alcohol and 90 of ether, and its 
solution turns to a green color like quinia when successively treated 
with chlorine water and ammonia; a solution of either alkaloid even 
in 700,000 parts of water, according to Herapath, shows a disper- 
sion of light with a bluish milky coloration. Quinidia, treated 
with tincture of iodine under the same circumstances as quinia, 
yields crystals which appear garnet-red by transmitted light, and 
bluish-red in reflected light. Quinidia is the only cinchona alka- 
loid yielding, with the solution of an iodide, a nearly insoluble pre- 
cipitate of hydriodate of quinidia. 

Quinidice sulphas is more soluble than sulphate of quinia, and 
remains in the mother-liquor after the quinia salt has been crystal- 
lized. When the cheaper barks above referred to are manipulated 
with, this salt is an important product; it is largely produced, and, 
by some, used as a substitute for quinia. As generally found in 
commerce, it contains cinchonidia, and comes in long, shining 
white crystals, interlaced, and resembling those of sulphate of 
quinia. It is soluble' in 130 parts of cold water, freely soluble in 
alcohol, and almost insoluble in ether. It contains six equivalents 
of water of crystallization. 

Cinckonia. C 20 H 24 N 2 O. (Equiv. 308.) 

This is a cinchona alkaloid usually accompanying quinia. Hua- 
nuco bark contains almost exclusively cinchonia, which, when first 
isolated from this bark, was called huanucina, under the supposi- 
tion of its being a distinct alkaloid. 

It may be obtained from this bark by a process similar to that 
for the preparation of quinia. It is in white needles, insoluble in 
alkalies, ether, and cold water, but soluble in 13 parts of boiling 
alcohol ; chloroform dissolves 4.3; olive oil, 1 per cent, of cinchonia. 
It is less bitter than quinia and quinidia, fuses at 330° to an amor- 
phous mass, and at a higher temperature partly sublimes without 
decomposition ; polarized light is deviated to the right. 

Its salts are generally more soluble than the corresponding salts 
of quinia; they are precipitated by the caustic alkalies and their 
carbonates; and in not too diluted solutions the bicarbonates like- 
wise cause a precipitate after the previous addition of tartaric acid. 
Under similar circumstances cinchonia does not produce the reac- 
tion of quinia with chlorine and ferrocyanide of potassium. The 



496 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

precipitate of ferrocyanide of potassium in cinchonia salts is insolu- 
ble in an excess of the precipitant, but crystallizes from its hot 
solution; its composition corresponds with the quinia salt. The 
cinchonia sulphate, if treated with iodine similarly to sulphate of 
quinia, yields a brick-red deposit. 

Cinchonice Sulphas, U. S. P. — If cinchonia occurs in barks with 
quinia and quiniclia, this salt remains behind in the mother-liquor 
after the crystallization of the other sulphates. The Pharmacopoeia 
of 1860 directs to precipitate this mother-liquor by solution of soda, 
until it becomes alkaline ; collect on a filter, wash it with water, and 
dry it. Then wash it with successive small portions of alcohol to 
remove other alkaloids which may be present. Mix the residue 
with eight times its weight of water, and having heated the mix- 
ture, add gradually diluted sulphuric acid until it is saturated and 
becomes clear. Then boil the liquid with animal charcoal, filter it 
while hot, and set it aside to crystallize. Lastly, drain the crystals 
and dry them on bibulous paper. By evaporating the mother- 
liquid more crystals may be obtained. 

Sulphate of cinchonia crystallizes in white, shining, short oblique 
prisms with dihedral summits. It melts at 212°, loses its water of 
crystallization at a somewhat higher temperature, and is dissipated 
at a red heat. It dissolves in 54 parts of cold and much less boil- 
ing water, in seven parts of alcohol, and very sparingly in ether. 
Its aqueous solution gives with AuCl 3 a yellow precipitate, and 
with CaCl a white one. Ammonia added to its solution in chlo- 
rine water causes a white precipitate. If the salt be rubbed with 
water of ammonia and then treated with ether, the cinchonia 
separated by the former will not be dissolved by the latter. 

On the addition of sulphuric acid it passes into the very soluble 
acid sulphate. 

The other salts of cinchonia may be prepared like the correspond- 
ing quinia salts; the following have been occasionally used: — 

Cinchonice murias is in silky prisms, easily soluble in water and 
alcohol. This salt has been fraudulently sold for sulphate of 
quinia, which it much resembles in appearance. (See Am. Journ. 
Pharm., 43, 92.) 

Cinchonioz hydriodas crystallizes in needles. 

Cinchonice tannas is a yellowish powder, soluble in alcohol. 

Cinchonice acetas. — If acetic acid is saturated with cinchonia, on 
evaporation granular or scaly crystals of the acetate are left, which 
are easily soluble in water. 

Cinchonidia. C 20 H 24 ^ 2 O. (Equiv. 308.) 

Cinchonidia often constitutes the greatest part of commercial 
quinidia; as it contains no water of crystallization, it is not efflo- 
rescent in the air. 

Its principal peculiarities are: It is sparingly soluble in ether 
and water, dissolves in 12 parts cold alcohol, deviates polarized 
light to the left, and gives no reaction with chlorine water and 



CINCHONA ALKALOIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 497 

ammonia. By Dr. Herapath's test, viz., treating with iodine like 
quinia, the resulting idosulphate of cinchonidia is so similar in ap- 
pearance to the corresponding quinia salt, that it can only be dis- 
tinguished from it by a little difference in the tint caused by 
transmitted light. 

Its salts are freely soluble in water and alcohol, not in ether. 

The base discovered by Wittstein, and called by him cinchonidia, 
is, according to de Yry, a mixture of various alkaloids, but princi- 
pally of cinchonia and Pasteur's cinchonidia; and the huanokina of 
Erdmann, according to the same authority, is cinchonia containing 
some quinidia. 

Betacinchonia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O, was announced by "W". Schwabe as a 
constituent of some chinoidine. It crystallizes in quadrangular 
prisms, is anhydrous, fuses at 302° F., is scarcely soluble in hot 
water, soluble in 173 parts of cold and 43 of boiling alcohol, in 378 
parts of ether and 268 parts of chloroform, also readily in volatile 
and fatty oils. Its alcoholic solution deviates polarized light to 
the right. It is not affected by chlorine water and ammonia. 

Its salts are all neutral though crystallizing from an acid solu- 
tion ; the precipitate by alkalies is somewhat soluble in excess ; 
after acidulating with tartaric acid, bicarbonate of sodium produces 
no precipitate. Iodosulphate is analogous to herapathite. (See 
Am. Journ. Pharm., 1861, p. 419.) 

The reactions as stated prove this alkaloid to be closely allied to 
the two preceding ones, and it is not impossible that it may have 
been formed from one of them by some chemical influence. 0. 
Hesse, however, asserts that it is nothing but cinchonia. {Am. 
Journ. Pharm., 1863, p. 54.) 

Pay tine is the name given by Hesse to a crystalline alkaloid dis- 
covered by him in a false cinchona, resembling the quina blanca 
of Mutis. The figures obtained by its analj-sis lead to the formula 
C 20 H 2r N" 2 O. It forms a variety of salts with acids, although its 
alcoholic solution reddens blue litmus paper. Though bitter, it 
does not seem to produce physiological effects. Its color reactions 
are numerous and remarkable. 

Oxycinchonia, C 20 H 24 ^sT 2 2 , has been obtained by oxidation from 
cinchonia by Strecker in the endeavor to prepare quinia artificially. 
Though of the same composition it lacks its most prominent pro- 
perties. (Ibid. 58.) 

Quinicia and Cinchonicia. — The acid sulphates of quinia or cin- 
chonia, if heated for three or four hours to about 250° or 266°, are 
converted into alkaloids, isomeric with the original bases, the 
former into quinicia, and the latter into cinchonicia, and but very 
little coloring matter ; the neutral salts suffer partial decomposition 
at that temperature after melting. Both alkaloids are nearly in- 
soluble in water, soluble in alcohol, easily combined with carbonic 
acid, displace ammonia from its salts, and deviate the polarized 
light a little to the right. The optical behavior of the different 
alkaloids, therefore, is as follows : — 
32 



498 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Quinia, considerably to left. Cinchonia, considerably to right. 

Quinidia, " right. Cinchonidia, " left. 

Quinicia, feebly to the right. Cinchonicia, feebly to the right. 

Howard's recently discovered alkaloid of cinchona, originally de- 
scribed in the Journal of the Chemical Society, 2d series, ix. 61, has 
not been obtained in crystals, but appears in the form of a yellowish 
oil, very soluble in alcohol and ether. It is a strong base, forming 
neutral aud very soluble crystallizable salts, not as bitter as those of 
quinia; the oxalate, which is the best known, has a greenish-yellow 
hue. 

Chinoidina or Quinoidina (Chinoidine). — Is a product of alteration 
of the cinchona alkaloids. Drying of the barks, or exposure of 
solution of alkaloids to the sun, and the influence of a high tempera- 
ture appear to favor this alteration. It is prepared by precipitating 
the mother-liquor, from which the sulphates of the other alkaloids 
have been crystallized, by carbonate of soda, and extracting with 
alcohol. 

It is a reddish-brown, resin-like mass, entering into combination 
with acids like the unaltered alkaloids. The salts are resinous, 
uncrystallizable, very bitter. It is isomeric with quinia, and has, 
therefore, been also called amorphous quinia. Pasteur supposes it 
to be uncrystallizable quinicia and cinchonicia. From the com- 
mercial article the four cinchona alkaloids, quinia excepted, have 
at various times been prepared. 

It has strong febrifuge properties, and is very efficient in doses 
double those of the sulphate of quinia, either in pills or dissolved 
with a little sulphuric acid. It may be considered pure if it is 
entirely soluble in alcohol, and in diluted sulphuric acid. 

Trecij)itated extract of bark is the same preparation as the above. 
It differs from the extractum calisayacum, referred to in the chap- 
ter on Extracts by not containing the crystallizable alkaloids. 

GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CINCHONA ALKALOIDS. 

Of the remarkable principles above described as existing in cin- 
chona barks, cinchonia was the first discovered, having been isolated 
in an impure state as early as 1803, and fully described as an alka- 
loid by Pelletier and Caventou in 1820. Quinia was discovered 
soon after by the same chemists. Eot until 1833 was the existence 
of quinidia announced. In that year, Henry and Delondre an- 
nounced its discovery, but afterwards abandoned the idea of its 
being a distinct principle ; so that no further attention was bestowed 
upon it until, about the year 1844, the celebrated German chemist, 
Winkler, investigated its properties, and conferred upon it the 
name quinidine, which, to correspond with our nomenclature, is 
changed to quinidia. Pasteur has since proved that quinidia as it 
occurs in commerce is generally composed chiefly of another alka- 
loid to which he gave the name cinchonidia ; he likewise discovered 
the artificial isomeric alkaloids quinicia and cinchonicia. 

On pages 501 and 502 will be found an account of other alkaloids, 



REMARKS ON THE CINCHONA ALKALOIDS. 499 

discovered in particular barks, and most of them not fully investi- 
gated. ¥ 

The former scarcity and high price of sulphate of quinia, occa- 
sioned in part by the restrictions placed upon the trade in genuine 
Calisaya bark by the Bolivian government, had the effect to direct 
the attention of physicians to other and similar remedial agents ; 
but, notwithstanding the frequent announcement of favorable re- 
sults from the trial of such, there seems a general disposition to 
withhold confidence from any but the products of that remarkable 
family of South American trees whose history has been so long 
connected with the cure of periodical diseases. The introduction 
into commerce of large quantities of cheap cinchona barks from 
new sources, has been another result of the long-continued scarcity 
of the older and officinal kinds. Notwithstanding these have been 
regarded by many with jealousy, and doubts have been entertained 
of their therapeutic value, the study of their chemical history has 
shown that some of them are not less rich in alkaloids than the 
finest monopoly barks, and experiments in regard to the thera- 
peutic value of their characteristic alkaloids have shown a close 
resemblance in physiological effects to quinia itself. Some Bogota 
barks are now extensively employed for the manufacture of quinia, 
the price of which has, in consequence thereof, considerably de- 
clined ; some of these barks, beside the other alkaloids, abound in 
quinia. 

Dr. Pepper and other practitioners connected with hospital prac- 
tice, have used sulphate of quinidia in the same or less doses than 
the quinia salt, and with equal success ; and its value and efficacy 
are confirmed by the experience of many in private practice. 

Sulphate of cinchonia, which had been generally overlooked, has 
been much used of late years as a substitute for sulphate of quinia ; 
and, although some physicians assert that larger doses of it are 
required, and that it is more variable and less reliable in its action 
than the quinia salt, I am told by Dr. Conrad, the Apothecary of 
Pennsylvania Hospital, that in that Institution the three cinchona 
alkaloids are used indiscriminately and in the same doses. Through 
Dr. B. P. Thomas I am informed that the cinchonia salt has been 
used with satisfaction as a substitute for that of quinia in the 
Philadelphia and Northern Dispensaries, in the Western Clinical 
Infirmary, and Philadelphia Hospital, Blockley, where many inter- 
mittents are daily under treatment. It has also been successfully 
experimented with in the French hospitals as a substitute for the 
quinia salt, and has been lately introduced into the U. S. Army. 

Quinoidine is sold at a still lower price than either of the crys- 
tallized products. I am told that the demand for it has not justi- 
fied manufacturers in preparing all that is produced, for sale. 

Detection of Adulterations and Imjmrities in Sulphate of Quinia. — 
The behavior of the cinchona alkaloids and their salts has been 
mentioned under their respective heads, and, with the aid of these 
tests, it is not very difficult to distinguish the alkaloids, when pure, 
from each other. There is more difficulty experienced in detecting 



500 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

the presence of one alkaloid in another, or in finding out foreign 
substances sometimes fraudulently mixed with thera. «The follow- 
ing are the various tests proposed for these purposes. 

1. Zimmer's test. — Sixty drops of ether, twenty of ammonia water, 
and ten grains of the sulphate, previously dissolved in fifteen drops 
of water and ten drops of diluted sulphuric acid, made of one part, 
by weight, of sulphuric acid, to ^.ve of water, are mixed in a test 
tube; the quinia, being soluble in the ether, will not appear, but 
any admixture of cinchonia, or above ten per cent, of quinidia, will 
separate as a layer of white powder, between the aqueous liquid and 
the supernatant ether. If quinidia be present, it will be dissolved 
by a large addition of ether, w r hile cinchonia will not. If less than 
ten per cent, of quinidia is present, the mixture will be clear, but 
the quinidia will soon crystallize, while quinia will, after a while, 
gelatinize the ethereal solution. 

2. Bump's test is said to be even more delicate than the former. 
Six grains of the sulphate, one-half drachm of ether, two or three 
drops of ammonia water, are well agitated in a test tube; pure sul- 
phate of quinia will yield a perfectly transparent solution; if five 
per cent, of sulphate of quinidia is present, the solution will like- 
wise be clear, but, after a while will become turbid; ten per cent, 
of quinidia will leave a portion undissolved ; with less than jive 
per cent., the solution is to be evaporated spontaneously, quinidia 
will then be left in crystals, but quinia as a gummy mass. 

3. Liebig's test. — Fifteen grains of the salt are rubbed with two 
ounces of ammonia water, this is heated until nearly all odor of 
ammonia has disappeared, and agitated with two ounces of ether. 
If a turbidness remains on the margin of the two liquids, cinchonia 
is present. 

The ethereal solution may, besides quinia, also contain quinidia, 
which, like the above, will be left in crystals on spontaneous evapo- 
ration. 

4. Kernels test. — Chemically pure neutral sulphate of quinia is 
dissolved in distilled water to saturation at a temperature of 15° C. 
(59° F.); 5 c.c. of this solution are precipitated and exactly redis- 
solved by 5 c.c. of ammonia w T ater, sp. gr. 92, and by 7 c.c. of am- 
monia, sp. gr. 96. For a similarly prepared solution of sulphate of 
quinidia and cinchonidia from 10 to 13 times this quantity of am- 
monia is needed to have the same effect, while the precipitate from 
the cinchonia salt does not redissolve. Accordingly, to test the 
commercial sulphate of quinia, an excess of it is treated with dis- 
tilled water of 59° for one-half hour until a saturated solution is 
obtained; 5 cubic centimetres of the filtered solution are mixed 
with 7 c.c. of officinal water of ammonia (or with 5 c.c. of ammonia, 
sp. gr. .920); if the alkaloid is precipitated and redissolved, the 
quinia salt is pure; if more ammonia is required for solution, 
quinidia or cinchonidia is present, and if 100 c.c. ammonia do not 
effect a clear solution, cinchonia is present. 

Since sulphate of cinchonia is the most soluble sulphate of all 
the cinchona alkaloids, and since the sulphates arranged according 



CINCHONA AND OTHEK ALKALOIDS. 501 

to their solubility follow in this order: cinchonia, cinchonidia, 
quinidia, quinia, it is evident that if a commercial sample of sul- 
phate of quinia is treated with an insufficient quantity of water at 
59° F., the most soluble sulphates must be dissolved first, and con- 
seqently, the larger the excess of the commercial salt, the more 
readily will these other alkaloids be discovered in the solution by 
means of the ammonia water of the above standard strength. (See 
the very interesting paper in Am. Joarn. Pharm., 1862, 417-429.) 

5. The presence in the sulphates of cinchona alkaloids of com- 
mon adulterations may be detected as follows : — 

The sulphates are entirely soluble in cold dilute sulphuric acid, 
and entirely dissipated by heat. Sulphate of calcium may be detected 
by its insolubility in alcohol, and by remaining, after ignition, on 
a piece of platina foil. Starch would remain insoluble in dilute 
acid and in alcohol, and would be recognized by the well-known 
iodine test. Stearic and margaric acids and resins would float in 
the acid solution, and be dissolved by ether. Salicine, if more than 
ten per cent, were present, would show, with concentrated sulphuric 
acid, a red color. Phloridzin would be detected as yielding a yellow 
color with the same reagent, or by the yellow, red, and blue color 
imparted to it by gaseous ammonia under a bell glass. Sugar or 
mannite would be blackened by concentrated sulphuric acid. Oxa- 
late of ammonium would be detected by giving off ammoniacal 
vapors with caustic potassa. Solution of caustic baryta dissolves 
salicine, phloridzin, gum, mannite, etc., but leaves the alkaloids and 
sulphate of baryta; in the solution, after it has been freed from 
baryta by carbonic acid, these substances may be detected. 

Besides the foregoing, the following alkaloids have been dis- 
covered in various barks. 

Aricinia, C 20 H 24 N 2 O 2 2H 2 O, derived from Arica, the port from 
whence the bark is sent, is prepared like the other cinchona alka- 
loids, and crystallizes in white, transparent needles, which gradu- 
ally develop a bitter, warming, sharp taste, melt between 356° and 
874°, are insoluble in water, soluble in ether, alcohol, and ammonia. 
It is colored green by concentrated nitric acid. 

The salts are crystallizable, bitter, easily soluble in water and 
alcohol, insoluble in ether. 

Paricinia has been discovered in Para bark by Winckler. 

It is a white mass, uncrystaliizable, electric when rubbed to 
powder, slightly soluble in water, easily soluble in ether and alco- 
hol, and is left, after evaporation, as a golden-yellow, resinous mass. 
Its salts are amorphous, resinous. 

It appears to bear to aricina the same relation as chinoidina to 
quinia. 

Pitayia, discovered by Peretti, is prepared from the aqueous ex- 
tract, which is exhausted by alcohol, evaporated, dissolvecl in water, 
and precipitated by ammonia, washed with ether, and crystallized 
from boiling water. 



502 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

It is in colorless prisms, volatile, not bitter. Its salts are bitter 
and crystallizable. 

Carthagia, discovered by G-runer in Carthagena bark, crystallizes 
in needles, is tasteless, insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol. 

Its salts are bitter, crystallizable, resembling the quinia salts, but 
are said to be destitute of febrifuge qualities. 

Emetia. C 30 H 44 N 2 O 8 . 

Emetia is the active principle of ipecacuanha, and is also present 
in the roots of several species of Yiola. 

The root is extracted by acidulated water, and precipitated by 
ammonia ; to obtain it pure and white, according to Merck, it is 
dissolved in dilute muriatic acid, precipitated by corrosive subli- 
mate, dissolved in alcohol, decomposed by sulphuret of barium to 
precipitate mercury, and sulphuric acid to precipitate baryta, di- 
luted with water, the alcohol evaporated, and the sulphate of emetia 
precipitated by ammonia. 

It is a white, inodorous powder, not crystalline, of a bitter taste, 
soluble in alcohol, sparingly so in water, nearly insoluble in ether 
and fixed oils, fusible at about 120° F. Its native salt existing in 
the root is taken up by water, wine, and diluted alcohol. It 
assumes a dirty-green color by sulphuric acid, is converted first into 
a yellow, bitter, resinous substance, afterwards into oxalic acid. In 
minute doses it acts as a powerful emetic ; in larger doses it is 
poisonous. Nearly all its salts are easily soluble in water ; the acid 
salts, according to Liebig, are crystallizable. The commercial 
emetia is very impure, and not preferable for ordinary use to the 
various Galenical preparations of ipecac, in which the peculiar 
astringent and acid principles are associated with the alkaloid. 

The emetinum im-purum of some pharmacopoeias, which is the 
French emetin coloree, is obtained by exhausting the alcoholic 
extract of ipecacuanha with water, neutralizing with carbonate of 
magnesium, and evaporating the filtrate. 

Arnicia. — According to the analysis of Prof. Walz (Am. Journ. 
Pharm., 1861, 450), arnica flowers contain no alkaloid, the arnicia 
being a ternary glucoside, free from nitrogen. 

Eupatorina is an alkaloid, almost unknown, prepared by Pighini 
from the European water hemp. It is a white powder, of a bitter 
acid taste, soluble in alcohol and ether, and insoluble in water. 
Its sulphate crystallizes in needles. 

The Alkaloids of Strychnos and their Salts. 

Strychnia, U. S. P. C 21 H 22 N 2 2 . (Equiv. 334.) 

The Pharmacopoeia directs the rasped seed of nux vomica ; but as 
their comminution in the dry state is a work of no little difficulty, 
it is best to first heat them with some water, or expose them to hot 
steam; they will become thoroughly softened, and, while still warm, 
may be easily bruised in a warm mortar, or between two iron 
cylinders; they are then treated with water acidulated with muri- 



ALKALOIDS OF STRYCHNOS AND THEIR SALTS. 503 

atic acid ; after concentration, the muriate thus formed is decom- 
posed by lime, which precipitates the strychnia along with the 
excess of lime employed, and some impurities. The alkaloid is 
now dissolved out from the precipitate by boiling alcohol, and de- 
posited, on evaporating and cooling. To purify it still further, it 
is next converted into a sulphate, boiled with animal charcoal, and' 
precipitated by ammonia. St. Ignatius' bean contains a large pro- 
portion of strychnia and less brucia than nux vomica, but is not so 
abundant and cheap. 

Strychnia, as thus prepared, is a white or grayish-white powder 
which may be crystallized by the slow evaporation of an alcoholic 
solution. It is distinguished by extraordinary bitterness. It is 
soluble to a limited extent in water, and nearly insoluble in abso- 
lute alcohol and ether; its best solvents are 70 per cent, alcohol, 
and volatile oils; chloroform dissolves 20 per cent., and olive oil 
one per cent, of strychnia. Perfectly pure strychnia is not affected 
by nitric acid. The following are its most reliable tests: Eub a 
very little of the powder with a drop of sulphuric acid on a slab, 
and add a minute quantity of solution of chromate of potassium. 
A splendid violet color will be produced if it contain strychnia. 
Or thus : add a little of the powder to a few drops of sulphuric acid 
containing yj^ of nitric; it will form a colorless solution; but, on 
the addition of a little peroxide of lead, a bright blue color will be 
developed, which will pass rapidly into violet, then gradually into 
red, and ultimately to yellow. Its solution in sulphuric acid is 
colored red by chlorous and chloric acids, and by chlorates ; a solu- 
tion of the rose-colored sulphate of manganese causes a violet color, 
the same color is produced by ferridcyanide of potassium, and this 
reaction is not affected by the presence of other organic substances. 

The salts which strychnia forms are mostly crystallizable and 
soluble. Their solutions are precipitated by fixed alkalies and 
their carbonates, and the precipitate is insoluble in an excess of the 
precipitant ; the precipitate caused by ammonia dissolves, but after- 
wards crystallizes from an excess of it. Sulphocyanide of potassium 
produces a white crystalline deposit ; the precipitate with gaseous 
chlorine is soluble in ether and alcohol. If acidulated with tartaric 
acid, a white precipitate occurs by bicarbonate of sodium. 

Adulterations with mineral substances are discovered by the 
residue left after ignition or after solution in boiling alcohol. 
Brucia is detected by the red color on the addition of sulphuric 
acid. 

The following salts have been occasionally used in medicine, 
chiefly on account of their solubility. They are mostly prepared 
by neutralizing the acid with strychnia, and evaporating: — 

Strychnia? sulphas contains 7 Aq ; it crystallizes in prisms and 
cubes, is efflorescent, and contains 75 per cent, strychnia. It is 
used, on account of its solubility, in preference to the alkaloid. 

Strychnia? nitras crystallizes in needles of a pearly lustre, which 
are insoluble in alcohol. 

Strychnia? murias is in silky needles, easily soluble in alcohol. 



504 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

StrychnicB hydriodas is obtained by double decomposition as a 
white crystalline powder, little soluble in water, more in alcohol, 
and containing nearly 73 per cent, strychnia. 

Strychnice iodas is likewise obtained by double decomposition, 
and crystallizes in flat pearly needles, soluble in alcohol, but 
•slightly in cold water. 

Strychnice acetas crystallizes with difficulty in white silky needles, 
very soluble in alcohol and water. 

StrychnicB tannas is a white precipitate, scarcely soluble in water. 

The medicinal uses of strychnia are those of a tonic, with a special 
action upon the nerves of motion. It is much employed in a variety 
of diseases, lately recommended in typhoid fever and spermator- 
rhoea. Dose, one-twelfth to one-sixth of a grain. 

In doses exceeding two or three grains, strychnia is one of the 
most powerful and fatal of poisons. Immense quantities are sold 
for the purpose of killing animals, particularly dogs, on whom the 
most certain and rapidly fatal effect is produced by its use. In 
cases of poisoning by strychnia, the most prompt and vigorous 
efforts are necessary to arrest its effects. The jaws must be pre- 
vented from becoming permanently closed, as in tetanus. Emetics 
should be tried, but will seldom act. Tannic acid or other astrin- 
gents administered immediately will precipitate alkaloid in an in- 
soluble form. Chloroform has been found to arrest the effects of 
the poison. In one memorable case I saw the life of an individual 
saved by the application of the poles of a magnetic battery over 
the stomach, which aroused that organ, and, by excessive vomiting, 
produced complete expulsion of the poison and relaxation of the 
spasm. 

Brucia. C 23 H 2 JT 2 4 . 

If strychnia is crystallized from a hot alcoholic solution, the 
mother-liquor contains nearly all the brucia ; but it may be entirely 
freed from strychnia by nitric acid. From the neutral solution, 
the strychnia salt crystallizes first, leaving brucia in the mother- 
liquor; the acid solution, however, separates the brucia salt first in 
hard, four-sided prisms, while the strychnia salt crystallizes after- 
wards in fine needles. 

It crystallizes in oblique four-sided prisms, dissolves in 850 parts 
cold, 500 parts boiling water, is easily soluble in alcohol, insoluble in 
ether ; volatile oils dissolve a small quantity. Chloroform dissolves 
56 per cent., and olive oil nearly 2 per cent. It contains 8 eq. of Aq. 

The salts are bitter, crystallizable, precipitated by alkalies and 
alkaline earths, by morphia and strychnia; an excess of ammonia 
dissolves its precipitate ; if acidulated with tartaric acid, no pre- 
cipitate occurs on the addition of bicarbonate of sodium ; concen- 
trated nitric acid dissolves brucia and its salts to an intensely red 
fluid, which subsequently acquires a yellowish-red, and by heat a 
yellow tint; if now protochloride of tin or sulphuret of ammonium 
is added, an intense violet color is produced; concentrated sulphuric 



IGASURIA. 505 

acid colors it at first rose-red, afterwards yellowish-green ; chlorine 
gas causes no precipitate. 

The red color produced by nitric acid with'brucia is so intense 
that Kersting has proposed a solution of the latter in 1000 water 
as a test for very minute quantities of the former; one 100,000th 
part H^0 3 with the brucia solution, over a. layer of pure H 2 S0 4 , 
still produces at the margin of the two liquids a rose-red color, 
changing after a minute to yellow. 

Of the salts used medicinally, the neutral sulphate crystallizes in 
needles with 4 Aq; the neutral nitrate is a gum-like mass, but the 
acid nitrate is crystallizable in four-sided prisms. Brucia is a less 
powerful therapeutic agent than strychnia, being safely employed 
in doses of from two to four grains. 

Igasuria. 

The mother-liquors of the former two, after their precipitation 
by lime, contain this alkaloid. 

It crystallizes, is very bitter, dissolves in 200 parts boiling water, 
in weak alcohol, in acids, and alkalies. Sulphuric acid imparts a 
rose color, which turns yellowish or greenish. 

The salts are soluble, crystallizable, and poisonous. They are 
precipitated in presence of tartaric acid by alkaline bicarbonates. 

Schutzenberger has found that what has been called Igasuria is 
a mixture of various alkaloids, which he purified by fractional 
crystallization. They are all colorless, intensely bitter, poisonous 
like strychnia, soluble in boiling water and alcohol, slightly in 
ether; they crystallize in transparent needles or pearly scales, are 
colored red by nitric acid, lose their water of crystallization at 
212°. Their salts are easily crystallizable. They are distinguished 
by affixing the letters of the alphabet : — 

Igasuria, a, C. 2 ,H , ( .X,0 4 3H.,0. Very slightly soluble. 
" 6, C^tXO-SHX). Slightly soluble. 

" c, C^LXO^HjO. Moderately soluble. 

cz, c 17 h;,n.,o 8 3h:,o. 

" e, C 18 H: )6 ^r.;0 4 3H.;0. Soluble. 

" /, C. n H; K.;O 4 3H,;O. Moderately soluble. 

g, C; i H 2s :N\,O e 3H,0. Very slightly soluble. 

" h, C 21 H 2e ]Sr 2 6 2H 2 0. Moderately soluble. 

«, C 20 H 2B N 2 O 7 4H 2 O. 

Curaria. — The South American Arrow poison is supposed to be 
obtained from a plant of the family Apocynaceaa. Boussingault 
and Roulin discovered in it an uncrystallizable alkaloid, which 
was afterwards supposed by some chemists to be identical with 
strychnia, in consequence of the similarity of some of its reactions. 
This has recently been shown to be a mistake, however; in its 
physiological action it is quite the opposite of strychnia, and is 
regarded by some physicians as almost a perfect antidote to the 
poisonous effects of that alkaloid. 

It is amorphous, yellowish, bitter, hygroscopic, soluble in water 
and alcohol, insoluble in ether and volatile oils. Its salts are un- 
crystallizable. 



506 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Pereirina is obtained from a Brazilian bark, known there by the 
names of pignaciba, pao pente, and pao pereira. It is prepared like 
the cinchona alkaloids, and lastly dissolved by ether. It is a yel- 
lowish-white amorphous, bitter mass, on melting blood-red, has an 
alkaline reaction, is little soluble in water, soluble in alcohol and 
ether. Concentrated- sulphuric acid dissolves it with violet color, 
which afterwards turns brown, on diluting with water, olive-green 
and grass-green. Nitric acid dissolves it with a blood-red color, 
changing to grayish-brown. The salts are little known, they are 
precipitated by the oxalates, and are said to have febrifuge pro- 
perties. 

Gastina is, according to Landerer, contained in the seeds of the 
"Chaste tree," is crystallizable, bitter, insoluble in water, soluble 
in alcohol, ether, and dilute acids, and precipitated from the latter 
solution by alkalies. 

Convolvulina was obtained by Marquart from Scammony root ; 
its sulphate crystallizes in radiating prisms. 

Alkaloids op the Solanace^e. 

Solania. — The following comprises the older statements with re- 
gard to this principle: — 

It is prepared from the potato germs by maceration with water 
acidulated with muriatic acid, mixing with hydrate of lime, and 
exhausting the precipitate with boiling alcohol; on cooling the 
greater part is separated. It crystallizes in colorless prisms, with- 
out odor ; its taste is faintly bitter, nauseous, causes a persistent 
acrid feeling in the throat. It has an alkaline reaction, is slightly 
soluble in cold water, ether, alcohol, and fixed oils. It is a weak 
base, its salts are soluble, few crystallizable, and have a bitter taste, 
with lasting acrimony. 

Solania, as obtained from the various species of Solanum, accord- 
ing to Moitessier, differs to a considerable extent in its physical 
properties. Various different alkaloids have probably been con- 
founded under this name. Prepared from Solanum dulcamara, it 
has the composition C 43 H 70 NO lh , and all its salts are amorphous. 

Zwenger announced a few years since that solania, a weak base, 
is split on boiling with dilute acids into glucose and a stronger 
base, which he called solanidia, C 50 H 40 ]TO 2 , which is colored in- 
tensely red by sulphuric acid. 

If solania is treated with cold concentrated mineral acids for 
several days, or if solanidia is boiled with diluted acids, the pre- 
cipitate contains another alkaloid, solanieda, for which the formula 
C H, 9 M) has been found. It is amorphous, yellowish, nearly 
tasteless, almost insoluble in alcohol, ether, and water. Its salts 
are deep yellow, amorphous, bitter, and astringent. 

0. G-melin, however, asserts that it contains no nitrogen, but that 
solanidia forms compounds with acids and with PtCl 4 . Delfts re- 
gards solania as homologous with saponin, smilacin, and salicin. 

Kromayer states that the solania which is prepared with mineral 



ATROPIA. 507 

acids invariably contains solanidia, the more if treated at an ele- 
vated temperature, and the latter can be dissolved by benzin. If 
potato germs are expressed, the liquid treated with excess of lime, 
the precipitate exhausted by boiling alcohol, and the gelatinous 
mass separating on cooling, repeatedly pressed, and redissolved, 
colorless acicular crystals are obtained, which are insoluble in 
ether. The expressed germs, treated in the cold with sulphuric 
acid and afterwards with lime, etc., yield amorphous solania, con- 
taining solanidia. 

Dulcamarina, C 65 H i0 NO 27 , (?) is said to exist in early spring in the 
stem of bittersweet besides solania. It is prepared by evaporating 
the infusion with marble dust, exhausting the extract with strong 
alcohol, evaporating, removing the lactate of calcium, adding am- 
monia, precipitating with tannin, and treating the precipitate with 
by d rated oxide of lead and alcohol. 

Yellowish-white, amorphous, bitter, afterwards sweet, slightly 
soluble in water, ether, and acids, readily in alcohol. 

Atropia. C l7 H 23 M) 3 . (Equiv. 289.) 

This alkaloid and its sulphate were made officinal in the Phar- 
macopoeia of 1860 ; it is prepared by the following process : — 

Powdered belladonna root is exhausted by alcohol ; this is dis- 
tilled off from the tincture, the residue acidulated with sulphuric 
acid, diluted with water, and filtered through paper ; the filtrate 
is decomposed with potassa and repeatedly agitated with fresh 
portions of chloroform; the chloroformic solution is evaporated 
spontaneously. 

Thus prepared it is in yellowish needles of a silky lustre, with- 
out odor, and of a bitter, acrid, almost metallic taste ; it dilates 
the pupil more than any other alkaloid ; to act on the pupil, atropia 
must have entered the circulation (Harley). It melts at 212°, is 
soluble in 200 parts of cold (300 parts at 60°, U. S. P.), 50 parts of 
boiling water, without crystallizing on cooling; by continued boil- 
ing it dissolves in 30 parts of water, from which the greater part 
crystallizes ; it dissolves in 1 J parts cold alcohol ; the solution in 6 
parts of boiling ether gelatinizes on cooling into a transparent 
jelly. Chloroform dissolves 50, olive oil 2.3 percent, atropia. The 
salts are crystallizable with difficulty without odor, and with the 
taste of atropia ; they are mostly soluble in water, alcohol, and 
alcoholic ether, not in pure ether; all are very poisonous. Sul- 
phuric acid dissolves the alkaloid without color, after some time 
the solution turns red and black. It is colored yellow by chlorine. 
Nitric acid dissolves it with a pale yellow color, afterwards orange, 
then colorless. The solution is then still precipitated by tannin, 
but does not contain any atropia, as the pupil is not dilated. 

In contact with air it is easily converted into another alkaloid, 
which Berzelius has called tropia. It is very soluble in water, 
yellowish, not crystallizable, of a disagreeable odor, and strong 
alkaline reaction. According to Ludwig & PfeifTer, atropia, by 



508 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

being boiled with chromate of potassium and diluted sulphuric 
acid, gives oft* benzoic acid, and on the addition of potassa liberates 
propylamina. (See Am. Journ. Pharm., 1862, p. 33.) 

Atropice sulphas, U. S. P., is prepared by dissolving the alkaloid 
in strong ether and neutralizing with sulphuric acid diluted with 
a little alcohol; the sulphate is precipitated as a white crystalline 
powder. 

It is very soluble in water and in alcohol, insoluble in ether, 
neutral to litmus, entirely dissipated by heat. Its uses are as a 
local anodyne in solution and ointment, 2 to 4 grains to the ounce, 
and for subcutaneous injection in neuralgia. For dilating the pupil 
1 grain is dissolved in four fluidrachms of distilled water, and a 
drop or two applied to the inner surface of the lid. Dissolved in 
100 parts of water one or two drops have been recommended as a 
local anaesthetic to facilitate the extraction of teeth. The dose 
internally is gVth of a grain. 

AtropicE valerianas has recently been much recommended in 
chronic nervous complaints; it is prepared by dissolving atropia 
and valerianic acid separately in strong ether, cooling the solutions 
down to 32°, mixing and crystallizing at between 10° and 15° F. 
The crystals are soft at 68°, fuse at 90°, and turn yellow by light 
and air. Dose, the same as of sulphate. 

Belladonnia is the yellow resin adhering to atropia and prevent- 
ing it from crystallizing. 

Crude atropia is dissolved in a weak acid, neutralized by carbo- 
nate of potassium to separate a body opalescing in blue, an alkali 
is added, taking care not to produce a pulverulent precipitate, as 
long as the precipitate appears oily and resin-like, this is collected 
on linen, dissolved in an acid, treated with animal charcoal, if 
necessary again fractionally precipitated, and dissolved in absolute 
ether. 

A gum-like mass remains behind, of little bitterness, and a burn- 
ing, sharp taste; it melts on heating and decomposes with the smell 
of hippuric acid; it is easily soluble in pure and officinal ether, in 
absolute and dilute alcohol, scarcely soluble in water ; though 
strongly alkaline, it is less so than atropia; from the sulphate it is 
precipitated by ammonia as a white powder, which soon becomes 
resin-like. It was discovered by Hiibschmann. It is most likely 
a product of decomposition from atropia. 

Atrosia is the name given by Hiibschmann to a black body, pre- 
cipitated by ammonia from an aqueous solution of the alcoholic 
extract of the root; it is insoluble in alcohol, water, and ether, but 
dissolves in dilute acids with a red color. It is probably the cause 
of the red color of the juice of the fruit, and may be an alkaloid. 

Daturia is obtained from stramonium seed by the above process 
for atropia; it has been proved to be chemically identical with 
atropia. Its pharmaco-dynamical properties have been studied by 
Professor SchrofF, and carefully compared with those of atropia. 
His conclusions are, that their qualitative action is alike, but that 



BEBEERINA. 509 

there exists a vast difference in their intensity, atropia being nearly 
twice as powerful as daturia. 

Is there no doubt at all about their chemical identity? 

Hyoscyamia is obtained from the seeds of hyoscyamus by the 
process for atropia. 

It crystallizes in needles of silky lustre, when dry and pure with- 
out odor ; the moist and impure has a disagreeable narcotic tobacco 
smell ; its taste is acrid, tobacco-like. With a carefully regulated 
heat it may be distilled. It has a strong alkaline reaction, dissolves 
very readily in water, alcohol, and ether ; and is easily decomposed 
when in solution. Nitric acid dissolves it without coloration ; sul- 
phuric acid colors it brown. 

Of the salts, some few are crystallizable; they must be evapo- 
rated in vacuo to prevent them from becoming oxidized ; they are 
soluble in water and alcohol, without smell, and have the taste of 
the base. 

Capsicina is stated by AVitting to be contained in the integuments 
of the seeds of red pepper; it is said to be a crystalline powder, 
insoluble in cold water and ether, slightly soluble in hot water and 
alcohol. Its sulphate, nitrate, and acetate are crystallizable, soluble 
in water, insoluble in alcohol, and precipitated by alkalies. 

Buxina was prepared by Faure from the leaves of boxwood, and 
described as a white powder, bitter, sternutatory, soluble in water, 
alcohol, and ether, and yielding w T ith acids, salts, which crystallize 
with difficulty. 

Prof. Walz has announced that this alkaloid is identical with 
bebeerina. (See below.) 

Crotonina. — Brandes has separated from the seeds of Croton tig- 
Hum small crystals, fusible when heated, scarcely soluble in boiling 
water, soluble in boiling alcohol, with an alkaline reaction. Its 
phosphate and sulphate are crystallizable. 

Eiqihorbina is a colorless, brittle mass, inodorous, bitter, and 
acrid, insoluble in water and ether, soluble in alcohol, decomposed 
by concentrated sulphuric and nitric acids ; its salts are amorphous. 
It was obtained by Bushner and Herberger. 

Bebeerina, C ig H 21 E"0 3 , is the only alkaloid as yet discovered in 
the natural order of Lauracea?. The suggestion of AValz that 
bebeeru bark might be derived from a Euphorbiaceous tree, is 
merely based on the asserted identity of this alkaloid with buxina, 
which fact has comparatively little weight since some other alka- 
loids have been proved to exist in several different families of plants. 

It is best obtained, in a pure state, from the impure commercial 
sulphate by precipitating its solution with ammonia, redissolving 
the washed precipitate in acetic acid, adding an excess of acetate 
of lead, precipitating by potassa, and exhausting the precipitate by 
strong ether ; the yellowish syrup left after the evaporation of the 
ether is dissolved in absolute alcohol, which solution, on being 
gradually poured into cold water, yields a flocculent precipitate, 
which is free from color after washing and drying. 



510 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

It is amorphous, inodorous, bitter, of an alkaline reaction, fusible 
at 356°, scarcely soluble in water, readily soluble in ether and 
alcohol. The salts are bitter, amorphous, precipitated white by 
sulphocyanide and by iodide of potassium. 

The commercial Sulphate of bebeerina is in dark-brown glittering 
scales, readily soluble in water by the aid of acids. It is esteemed 
as a tonic and antiperiodic, much prescribed in London in doses of 
three to ten grains, to the amount of a scruple or a drachm, between 
the paroxysms of intermittents. 

Sepeerina (from the Dutch name sepeeri for bebeeru) remains be- 
hind after the exhaustion of bebeerina by ether. 

Amorphous, reddish-brown, little soluble in water, soluble in 
alcohol. The salts are amorphous, of a brown color, and generally 
obtained in very shining laminae, almost resembling crystalline 
scales. 

Piperina, C 17 H ig N0 3 .— Powdered pepper is exhausted by alcohol ; 
this is distilled off, the extract dried with lime in a water-bath, 
whereby the resin becomes insoluble while piperina is taken up by 
alcohol. 

It crystallizes in four-sided prisms, colorless when pure, when 
chewed for some time developing a hot peppery taste, scarcely 
soluble in water, easily in alcohol, less in ether, the solution is neu- 
tral to litmus, and has a burning pepper taste. It melts at 212°, 
losing 2 equivalents of water. It dissolves in cold sulphuric acid 
with a deep red color ; concentrated nitric acid decomposes it, the 
brown mass dissolves in potassa with a red color, and yields on 
boil ing piperidina. By continued boiling with an alcoholic solution 
of potassa, it splits into piperic acid and piperidina, C ]7 H 19 N0 3 H 2 0= 
C 5 H n ¥+C 12 H lo 4 (PIF). 

It has been recommended as an energetic and rapid febrifuge, 
though chiefly used in combination with quinia. It is given in 
doses of 2 to 4 grains, but may be increased to 60 grains in 24 
hours without injurious effects. Landerer believes that the same 
alkaloid is also contained in the berries of Schinus mollis, Terebin- 
thacefe. (See Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1863, 157.) 

Piperidina, C.H lr N", is probably ethyl-allyl-amina, E~(C 2 H 5 + 
C 3 H 5 + H). 

It is a colorless liquid, strongly alkaline, of an ammoniacal and 
peppery odor and taste, lighter than water, in which it dissolves in 
all proportions; boiling point 223° F. ; it precipitates the salts of 
the metallic oxides. Its salts are crystallizable. 

Piperic acid, Plp==C 12 H ]0 O 4 , is nearly insoluble in water, slightly 
soluble in ether, readily in boiling alcohol; fusible at 300°, partly 
sublimable at 390° with the odor of coumarin; sulphuric acid colors 
it blood-red, and it yields with PC1 5 vermilion-recl crystals. Pipe- 
rate of Piperidina crystallizes in colorless silky scales, turning 
yellow in the air, fusible at 248° ; piperina cannot be obtained from 
them. 



VERATRIA. 511 

Ver atria, U. S. P. 

Yeratria is procured from cevadilla seeds by treating them with 
alcohol, evaporating the tincture to an extract, and treating this 
with water acidulated with sulphuric acid; this solution, containing 
sulphate of veratria, is next evaporated to a syrupy consistence, de- 
composed by magnesia, which is added in slight excess ; the pre- 
cipitated veratria thrown down is now washed and separated from 
the excess of magnesia by alcohol, from which it is obtained by 
evaporation, but requires still further purifying with animal char- 
coal, etc. A pound of the seeds yields about a drachm of veratria. 

This product is a white, uncrystallizable powder, extremely acrid 
when diffused in the air, producing excessive irritation of the 
nostrils. It is freely soluble in alcohol, less so in ether, and almost 
insoluble in water, but soluble in diluted acids, from which ammo- 
nia and solution of tannin throw down white precipitates. Among 
its most striking peculiarities are the intense red color it assumes 
on the addition of sulphuric acid, and the yellow solution it forms 
with nitric. Veratria, as procured by the officinal process, is a 
complex body, and contains two alkaloids, sabadillia and jervia, 
with some resinous matter. 

The medical uses of veratria are confined chiefly to gouty and 
neuralgic affections, in the treatment of which it is used internally 
in doses of one-twelfth to one-sixth grain, repeated, or externally, 
in ointment, of about 3j to the ounce; it has lately also been re- 
commended in typhoid fever. 

The following is the process for obtaining the alkaloids pure: — 

Veratria, C 32 H 5r N" 2 8 . — Commercial veratria is dissolved in much 
alcohol, and mixed with water until a precipitate just commences 
to appear; on spontaneous evaporation, a white, crystalline powder 
is obtained, mixed with a brown, resinous mass, which can be re- 
moved by washing with cold alcohol. The powder, if dissolved in 
strong alcohol, and evaporated spontaneously, leaves large, rhombic, 
colorless prisms, which effloresce in the air, become porcellaneous 
and pulverulent, are insoluble, but rendered opaque in boiling water, 
readily soluble in alcohol and ether. Sulphuric acid colors it yel- 
low, then carmine red; muriatic acid produces a deep violet solu- 
tion with oily drops on the surface. The acids are completely 
neutralized, but the solutions do not. crystallize on evaporation. 

Sabadillia, C 2p H 25 N 2 5 , crystallizes in colorless prisms, which are 
soluble in^ boiling water, melt at 390° F., and have a very acrid 
taste. It is easily soluble in alcohol, but does not crystallize from 
this solution; it is insoluble in ether, and, from its solution in dilute 
sulphuric acid, is not precipitated by ammonia. It is not sternu- 
tatory. (Hubschmann.) 

Jervia, C, H 46 N 2 O 3 . — The precipitate by soda, containing the alka- 
loids, is boiled with diluted sulphuric acid; on cooling, the sulphate 
of jervia is precipitated. The precipitate may be decomposed by 
carbonate of sodium, and recrystallized from alcohol. 

It is nearly insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, crystallizes in 



512 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

colorless prisms with 4 Aq, loses its water of crystallization on beat- 
ing, melts at 375°, and is decomposed at a higher heat. 

Jervia and its soluble salts are precipitated from their solutions 
by muriatic, sulphuric, and nitric acids, forming therewith nearly 
insoluble salts; they, however, dissolve in alcohol. 

Colchicia. — According to Aschoff, the root is to be exhausted by 
cold water, precipitated by basic acetate of lead, the filtrate neutral- 
ized by carbonate of sodium, the filtrate precipitated by tannin, 
this precipitate washed, expressed, dissolved in eight parts alcohol, 
and digested with freshly precipitated oxide of iron; the filtrate is 
evaporated, the residue dissolved in a mixture of equal parts of 
alcohol and ether, evaporated, and again dissolved in water. 

The corms gathered in spring yielded but .75 grains, in the fall 
as high as 6.5 grains from the pound; the seed 16 grains to the 
pound. 

It is a white amorphous mass, of a bitter, not acrid taste, with- 
out odor, when moist of a feeble narcotic odor. It is easily decom- 
posed in aqueous solution, is not sternutatory or hygroscopic, is 
fusible and inflammable, easily soluble in water and alcohol, less in 
absolute ether. It has no reaction on vegetable colors. The fol- 
lowing is its behavior to reagents : — 

It is soluble in H 2 S0 4 , with a clear yellow color ; in HN0 3 , yellow ; 
the undissolved colchicia is brownish-red, then violet, brownish- 
green, brown-red ; fuming HJTO 3 (containing nitrous acid) imparts to 
it a violet or indigo-blue, afterwards yellow, color. The solution of 
T oV o colchicia is colored lemon yellow by muriatic acid. Bichro- 
mate of potassium and sulphuric acid impart a green color. Iodine 
causes a kermes-colored, gelatinous precipitate, soluble in alcohol 
and water. Chlorine water a yellow precipitate, soluble with 
orange color in ammonia. No crystallizable compounds have been 
obtained with acids, except that J. E. Carter thinks he obtained a 
crystalline sulphate. 

Hubschmann was unable to saturate two drops of dilute sulphuric 
acid with colchicia, though he and Carter both found it to act 
slowly on reddened litmus paper, and on paper colored with rhu- 
barb. 

Oberlin disputes the existence of a base colchicia, so does Walz, 
who renders it probable that it is a glucoside. An alkaloid does, 
however, appear to exist in colchicum, since the infusion yields 
precipitates, both with Sonnenschein's and Mayer's tests. 

By external application, several painful cases of rheumatism have 
been relieved by it. If given internally, one-sixtieth (g^) grain 
three times daily, continued, if necessary, for several weeks, has a 
most salutary effect in rheumatic complaints. It opens the bowels 
even of those who have been suffering from constipation. (See 
Thesis of J. E. Carter, of Philadelphia, Am. Journ. Pharm,., vol. 
xxx. p. 205.) 

Colchiceine, C 35 H 44 N 2 4 . — Oberlin obtained no colchicia by G-eiger 
and Hesse's process, but, on dissolving the product in water, acidu- 
lating with muriatic acid, evaporating until of an intense yellow 



TERNARY ALKALOIDS. 513 

color, a white precipitate was thrown down by water, crystallizing 
from alcohol and ether in pearly lamellae, of an intensely bitter 
taste, neutral to test paper, nearly insoluble in water, soluble in 
alcohol, ether, wood-spirit, chloroform, ammonia, and potassa; in 
ferric chloride with green, in sulphuric acid with yellow, in muria- 
tic acid with pale yellow, in nitric acid with intense yellow color, 
changing to violet, deep red, light red, and yellow. It is very 
poisonous. 

It remains to be investigated whether or not it is a product of 
decomposition of colchicia by the influence of muriatic acid. 

Apirina was obtained by Bizio from the seeds of Cocos lapidea. 
It is white, inodorous, of a sharp taste, fusible, soluble in 600 p. 
water, without alkaline reaction; forms with acids crystalline salts, 
which are less soluble in hot than in cold water. 

Tests for Distinguishing the Alkaloids. 

The following, taken from Dr. A. T. Thompson, conveys in a 
compact form the leading facts applicable to distinguishing the 
alkaloids. Some general characteristics are noticed at the beginning 
of this chapter, and the particular ones under the several heads. 

Method of Distinguishing the following Vegetable Alkaloids — Atropia 
Brucia, Delphia, Emetia, Morphia, Solania, Strychnia, Veratria — 
when they are in powder. 

Treat the powder first with nitric acid, which is colored red by 
brucia, delphia, morphia, and the strychnia of commerce, but not by 
pure strychnia. If the reddened acid become of a violet hue on 
the addition of protochloride of tin, after the nitric solution has 
cooled, the alkaline powder is brucia; if the reddened acid gradually 
become black and carbonaceous, it is delphia. If the powder be 
fusible without decomposition, and decomposes iodic acid, evolving 
free iodine, it is morphia ; if it is not fusible, and does not decom- 
pose iodic acid, it is strychnia. If the powder greens, instead of 
reddens nitric acid, it is solania ; if it is insoluble in ether, and 
does not redden nitric acid, it is emetia ; if it be soluble in ether 
and does not redden nitric acid, but melts when heated, and vola- 
tilizes, it is atropia; if it is thus affected by ether and nitric acid, 
but is not volatilized, it is veratria. 

The Ternary Alkaloids. 

Sparteina, C l0 H 26 N 2 . — A concentrated decoction of broom is dis- 
tilled with soda, and several times rectified. 

It is a colorless oil, which, in contact with water, soon becomes 
opalescent, and is colored brown by the air; it is heavier than 
water, smells faintly like anilina, has a very bitter taste, and is 
narcotic ; its boiling point is 550° F. Acids are perfectly neutral- 
ized ; the salts are soluble, the muriate and nitrate not crystallizable. 

Conia, C 8 H 15 ]Sr, is most abundant in the fresh plants gathered 
before flowering, and in the seed of the second year's growth, from 



514 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

which it is obtained by distillation with caustic potassa, purifying 
the sulphate by dissolving it in alcoholic ether, and again distilling 
with potassa. Thus obtained it frequently contains methyl and 
ethyl-conia. The seeds are richest in the alkaloid just before 
ripening. 

Conia is a volatile colorless or yellowish oily fluid (specific gravity 
.87), with a very characteristic odor resembling that of the urine 
of the mouse. It boils at 338°, is neutral to test paper when an- 
hydrous, but decidedly alkaline when containing some water. It 
is soluble in 100 parts of water, floating on its surface when dis- 
tilled with it. Alcohol dissolves it readily, as also ether, the fixed 
and volatile oils. It does not dilate the pupil, but is extremely 
poisonous. 

Like other volatile alkaloids of the composition of substituted 
ammonia, it occasions white clouds, when approached with a rod 
moistened with muriatic acid. This test, when applied to the ex- 
tract of conium, after adding to it on a tile a few drops of solution 
of potassa, is resorted to, in connection with the odor, in judging 
of the quality of that extract. 

When exposed to the air, conia undergoes oxidation, being con- 
verted into a brown resinous matter, ammonia, and butyric acid ; 
butyric acid is also formed by the reaction with nitric and chromic 
acids. By muriatic acid gas it is colored purple, changing to blue ; 
chlorine produces thick white vapors of a lemon odor. 

It neutralizes the acids, forming soluble salts, some of which are 
crystallizable, while those with oxygenated acids are most decom- 
posed on evaporation and leave a gummy residue. 

Methylconia, C 9 H ir N", resembles conia in physical and chemical 
properties, and can be distinguished from it only by elementary 
analysis. 

Ethylconia, C 10 H 19 N, is very similar, but less soluble in water. 

In this connection it is proper to mention the quaternary alka- 
loid, discovered by Wertheim, accompanying conia. 

Conhydrina, C 8 H l7 NO, occurs chiefly in the flowers and seed of 
conium; to prepare it, the crude conia is neutralized with sulphuric 
acid, the salt extracted with alcohol to separate ammonia, evapo- 
rated, treated with concentrated caustic potassa, then with ether ; 
this is distilled off, and by very slow fractional distillation in an 
oil-bath, the conia is separated ; between 300° and 400° crystals of 
conhydrina are sublimed. 

It is in colorless, pearly crystalline lamella, sublimes slowly be- 
low 212°, insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether; by distillation 
with anhydrous phosphoric acid, conia is obtained, H 2 being ab- 
stracted: NC 8 H 17 0— H 2 0=NC 8 H 15 . 

Its action on animals is similar to conia, but much weaker. The 
salts have not been studied. 

Cicutina. — The root of cicuta virosa yields, according to Polex, 
by exhausting with a diluted acid and distillation with an alkali, 
this alkaloid, which has a very agreeable odor. 

Chcerophyllina. — Its sulphate was obtained by Polstorf by distil- 



TERNARY ALKALOIDS. 515 

ling the fruit of Cheerophyllum bulbosum with potassa, and neu- 
tralizing the distillate by sulphuric acid; iridescent laminae. 

Aribina, C 23 II 20 N, was obtained by Rieth from the Brazilian tree 
Arariba rubra, and is remarkable for being the first natural vegeta- 
ble alkali of ternary composition which is solid at ordinary tem- 
perature. 

Hygrina is a volatile base obtained by Lossen from coca leaves ; 
its odor recalls that of propy lamina; it is not poisonous. It is 
probably a product of decomposition. 

Lobelina was discovered by the late Prof. S. Calhoun, of Phila- 
delphia, in 1834, and first isolated in a state of purity by Professor 
Procter, in 1842. It is most conveniently obtained by extracting 
the seed with alcohol acidulated with acetic acid, evaporating, and 
treating with magnesia, and then with ether, from which it may 
be obtained by spontaneous evaporation. 

It is a liquid lighter than water, and when dropped into that 
fluid rises to its surface and spreads out like a drop of oil, then 
gradually dissolves without agitation, forming a transparent solu- 
tion. It is very soluble in alcohol and ether, the latter readily re- 
moving it from an aqueous solution ; it also dissolves in fixed and 
volatile oils. It forms crystallizable salts, with numerous acids. 

It is not obtained on an economical scale for use in medicine. 
Lobelina, as it exists in the plant combined with lobelic acid, is de- 
composable by a moderate heat, as also by the action of strong acids. 

Nicotia, or Nicotina, C ]0 H 14 N" 2 , is prepared in the following manner: 
The acid infusion of tobacco is evaporated to about one-half, and 
distilled with caustic potassa ; or tobacco is distilled with milk of 
lime; the distillate is neutralized by oxalic acid, crystallized, the 
crystals washed with ether, decomposed by potassa, and the alkaloid 
dissolved by ether. By rectification in a current of hydrogen, it 
may be obtained colorless. 

It is a colorless, oily liquid, of strong tobacco odor, a burning 
sharp taste, heavier than water, specific gravity 1.048. It is inflam- 
mable, has an alkaline reaction, is soluble in water, and water is 
soluble in it to some extent ; miscible with alcohol, ether, and olive 
oil, scarcely soluble in oil of turpentine. It becomes yellow by 
keeping, absorbing oxygen from the air, which gradually turns it 
thick and brown. It boils at 482° F., but volatilizes at a much 
lower temperature. The vapor which rises is so powerful in its 
smell and irritating properties that one drop of it diffused in a 
room renders the atmosphere insupportable. The volatility of this 
principle insures its diffusion, along with empyreumatic products, 
in tobacco smoke, so that it is inhaled to a certain extent by 
smokers ; tobacco smoke may be freed from it by passing it over 
cotton saturated with tannin. It exists in the different commercial 
varieties of tobacco in about the following proportions ; Havana, 2 
per cent., Maryland, 2.3, Virginia, 6.87, Kentucky, 6.09. 

Orfila has lately investigated the properties of nicotia, and ascer- 
tained with precision its chemical habitudes. These are detailed in 
a paper copied in the Am. Journ. of Pharm., vol. xxiv. p. 142, from 



516 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

the London Pharm. Journ. See also a paper by Professor Procter 
in Proc. of Am. Pharm. Asso., 1858, p. 295. 

Its salts have a burning taste of tobacco, are very soluble in 
water, deliquescent, and difficult to crystallize. 

Mercurialina. — By distillation with lime from the herb and seeds 
of Mercurialis annua, an oily alkaloid is obtained, which resembles 
in odor both nicotia and conia; it is readily oxidized, and thickens 
in contact with the air. The salts are mostly soluble in water and 
alcohol. 

Secalina, C 3 H g N, or Propylamina, has the atomic composition of 
C 3 H 7 ,H 2 N', methylsethylamina CH 3 C 2 H 5 H^r, and trimethylamina 
(CH 3 ) 3 N, aud is identical with one of them, probably the former, as 
it may be obtained from propylic narcotina by distillation with 
potassa. Besides the plants mentioned in the syllabus, it has been 
obtained from the ergot of maize, from herring-pickle, crabs, the 
spirits in which anatomical preparations have been kept, and the 
urine of man. When artificially prepared, it is best known in 
medicine as Propylamina, though chemists generally regard it as 
trimethylamina. 

Propylamina is most economically prepared from herring-pickle 
by distillation with caustic potassa, neutralizing the distillate with 
muriatic acid, purifying the salt by dissolving it in strong alcohol 
or alcoholic ether, and again distilling with potassa. 

It is a colorless liquid of a strong odor of herrings, and a sweetish 
astringent taste; it is soluble in water, has an alkaline reaction, 
produces white vapors with muriatic acid. It is combustible, and 
mixed with an equal bulk of water it can still be ignited. Its 
salts are mostly soluble in water and alcohol, and crystallizable. 

According to Dr. Awenarius, of St. Petersburg, it appears to be a 
true specific for rheumatic affections, the acute as well as the chro- 
nic. He administered it in mixture, containing 24 drops of propy- 
lamina to 6 ounces of mint-water sweetened with 2 drachms of 
sugar, and gave it in doses of a tablespoonful every two hours. 
Whether it is capable of promoting uterine contraction has not 
been ascertained. 

Murias Propylamines is the form most used in practice in the 
United States ; it is prepared by crystallizing the product as at first 
obtained by passing the volatile alkaloid into diluted muriatic 
acid, as above ; to free it from muriate of ammonium it may be re- 
crystallized from its solution in strong alcohol. It is usually called 
chloride of propylamin, destitute of the unpleasant odor of the 
alkaloid itself, and has been found a useful remedy in rheumatism, 
in doses of from 3 to 5 grains. (See Propylamin Cordial.) 

See papers on this subject by Professor Procter in Proceedings of 
the American Pharmaceutical Association, 1857, and American Journal 
of Pharmacy, xxxi. 125 and 222. 

Anilina, C 6 H 5 H 2 N, also known by the names of phenylamina, 
phenamide, kyanole, crystalline, and benzidam; it is the only arti- 
ficial alkaloid which has been used in medicine. It is best pre^ 
pared, on a small scale, by the process of Bechamp, from 10 p. 



ALKALOIDS OF ANIMAL ORIGIN. 517 

nitrobenzole, 12 p. iron filings, and 10 p. strong acetic acid. The 
reaction takes place without the application of heat, but to insure 
complete reduction, the spontaneous distillate is returned to the 
retort and again distilled, when it may be at once combined with 
sulphuric acid to form the medicinal sulphate. 

The alkaloid is a colorless oil, of vinous odor and aromatic taste; 
spec. grav. 1.2; boiling point 360°; coagulates albumen; in contact 
with air turns yellow and resinifies ; separates many metallic oxides 
from their salts; colors pine wood yellow; by hypochlorites blue; 
by HN0 3 blue, and on heating oxidized to picric acid ; by H 2 S0 4 
and K 2 Cr0 4 blue, but of a different shade, as that produced under 
the same circumstances with strychnia. 

"Within a few years past it has become of great technical im- 
portance, since its products of oxidation by various agents have 
been made use of to dye animal fabrics, like silk and wool. 

Anilince sulphas is prepared by direct combination ; it dissolves in 
about 16 parts of water at 60°, slightly in cold alcohol, insoluble 
in ether; it is colorless and crystalline, but acquires a reddish color, 
when exposed to the air in a moist state. 

This salt has gained some reputation since Dr. Turnbull, of 
Liverpool, announced his success in treating with it a number of 
cases of chorea; the remedy produces a transient alteration in the 
color of the skin and lips, which disappears, however, as soon as it 
is laid aside. (See Am. Journ. Pharm., 1862, 295.) 

Alkaloids of Animal Origin. 

Some animal tissues and liquids contain alkaline substances or 
are decomposed into such by the influence of various chemical 
agents. These animal alkaloids, however, are as yet of little im- 
portance in a medicinal point of view; and it remains here merely 
to draw attention to a few of them which are either contained in 
culinary and dietetic articles, or are of importance from their pre- 
sence in various secretions. 

Creatine, C 4 H 9 ^T 3 2 H 2 0. — Though creatine is a neutral substance, 
it may be well to refer to it in this place. It is prepared by ex- 
presing fresh meat, macerating it several times with water, and 
subjecting it each time to strong pressure. From the mixed liquids, 
albumen and fibrin are removed by coagulating with, heat, and 
solution of baryta is added as long as a precipitate occurs; the 
filtrate is evaporated at a moderate heat to a syrupy liquid, and 
set aside to crystallize. 

The flesh of chickens and game is easy to clarify ; the former 
contains the largest, fishes the least quantity of creatine. It is in 
colorless pearly crystals without taste or action on litmus; it is 
soluble in 75 parts of cold water, and in 100 parts of absolute alco- 
hol. By boiling with baryta it is decomposed into sarkosina and 
urea; by evaporating with strong acids, it loses H 2 and is con- 
verted into creatinina. 



518 ON THE ORGANIC ALKALIES OR ALKALOIDS. 

Syllabus of Animal Alkaloids and the Products of their Decomposition. 

Cratinina or Creatinina, C 4 R~ 9 N 3 2 H 2 0. In the urine of calves, in flesh, and from cre- 
atine by acids ; colorless crystals; soluble in 11 water, 100 alcohol, and much 
ether; expels NH g from its salts. 

Sarkosina, C 3 H v N0 2 . From creatine by boiling with BaO ; rhombic prisms or scales, 
easily soluble in water, slightly in alcohol ; insoluble in ether; fusible at 2120. 

Glycina, C 2 H 5 N0 2 , Glycocol or amido-acetic acid. In the bile ; by treating glue or 
similar substances with boiling alkalies or acids; sweet rhombic crystals, easily 
soluble in water and dilute alcohol, slight acid reaction ; combines with acids and 
with bases. 

Leucina, C 6 H 13 N0 2 , or amido-capronic acid. In various organs of all animals except 
the very lowest, by putrefaction of casein, from glue like glycina. Shining 
scales, easily soluble in water, alkalies, and muriatic acid, slightly in alcohol ; 
insoluble in ether and chloroform ; sublimable ; fused with KO yields valerianic 
acid. 

Tyrosina, C 9 H n N0 3 . In the liver, pancreas, and other parts of man and many animals ; 
in American extract of rhatany (Wittstein), by acids or alkalies upon casein, 
glue, albumen, etc. Silky needles, soluble in acids and alkalies, slightly in 
water ; insoluble in alcohol and ether ; combined with H 2 S0 4 it colors Fe 2 Cl 3 
violet. 

Guanina, C 5 H 5 N 5 0. In the excrements of spiders and in small quantity in guano; 
white powder, insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether, somewhat soluble in lime 
and baryta water; its salts crystallizable ; precipitated by acetic and formic 
acids. 

Taurina, C 2 H 7 NS0 3 . In the lungs and kidneys of the ox and in bile after decomposition 
by acids or by fermentation ; six-sided prisms, easily soluble in water, slightly 
in alcohol ; taste cooling ; not destroyed by H 2 S0 4 or HN0 3 . 

Urea, CH 4 N 2 0. In the blood, urine, and eye of the mammalia, particularly the car- 
nivorous ; in many organs of some lower animals. 

Urea has been proposed as a remedial agent ; its mode of prepara- 
tion is as follows: — 

Urine is evaporated to a syrupy consistence, mixed with an equal 
volume of nitric acid, and set aside for twenty-four hours in a cool 
place; the crystals are redissolved in boiling nitric acid to destroy 
coloring matter, if necessary digested with animal charcoal, and 
subsequently decomposed by carbonate of barium. After evapora- 
tion, the mass is exhausted by alcohol. 

For its artificial preparation Liebig gives the following direc- 
tions: A mixture of four parts finely powdered anhydrous ferro- 
cyanide of potassium, one and a half parts carbonate of potassium, 
and two parts black oxide of manganesium is heated to redness, 
and constantly stirred until it has ignited ; it is extracted with cold 
water, the solution mixed with a solution of three parts sulphate 
of ammonium, evaporated, the sulphate of potassium removed as 
much as possible, and the residue exhausted with boiling ordinary 
alcohol. 

Urea crystallizes in long, colorless prisms, of a cooling taste similar 
to saltpetre, easily soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in ether, 
containing no water of crystallization, and fusing at 248° F. ; com- 
bines with acids and bases. 

It has been recommended as a good and reliable diuretic, in 
doses of from five to ten grains, several times a day, in diabetes, 
albuminuria, and dropsy. 

Ureas nitras is precipitated from a concentrated solution of urea 
by strong nitric acid in anhydrous white shining scales, soluble in 



ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 519 

eight parts of water, slightly in nitric acid and alcohol. Its action is 
said to be similar to urea, and it has been recommended as a solvent 
for vesical calculi composed of ammonio-phosphate of magnesium. 
It contains 52.63 per cent. urea. 



CHAPTER IX. 

ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES, MOSTLY PECULIAR TO A LIMITED 
NUMBER OF PLANTS, AND POSSESSED OF MEDICINAL PROPERTIES. 

Formerly, the virtues of most medical plants were attributed to 
extractive matter, though this, as obtained from various sources and 
by different analytical processes, was known to vary somewhat in 
its properties. 

By the improved means of proximate analysis many of these 
plants have been found to possess certain well-defined principles, 
sometimes crystalline and sometimes amorphous, to which appro- 
priate names have been given. If alkaline, these names should ter- 
minate in ia ; if neutral or subacid, in in or ine. This arrangement, 
which would conduce to accuracy if invariably observed, is, how- 
ever, not adhered to universally, and in Europe is repudiated by 
some high authorities. 

The neutral principles are in some instances active, and in others 
appear to possess little power of affecting the sj-stem. Some of them 
contain nitrogen, while most others consist of merely carbon, hydro- 
gen, and oxygen. These principles occasionally unite with acids, 
forming crystalline compounds, which are, however, acid in their 
properties; others, combining with alkalies and forming crystalliza- 
ble salts, have been considered among the acids. Many of them 
belong to the so-called copulated compounds, and decompose under 
the influence of emulsin, albumen, pectase, or when heated with 
diluted mineral acids or alkalies, into glucose or some similar sugar 
and another compound. They are generally precipitated by tannic 
acid, and many of them by subacetate of lead. The modes of ob- 
taining these principles are various, and sometimes difficult to 
follow, though the solubilities and chemical peculiarities of each, 
when ascertained, indicate approximately its mode of extraction. 

In a work of the design and scope of the present, it will suffice 
to display the more striking peculiarities of these principles, none 
of which are officinal, in a syllabus, and to give the processes of 
extraction and the leading chemical and medicinal characteristics, 
only in a few cases including the more important and familiar. 

There are here, as in the case of the alkaloids, no known chemi- 
cal relations upon which we would be justified in founding a scien- 
tific classification of these principles, and here, as in treating of the 
other proximate principles of plants, we will find the botanical 



520 



ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 



arrangement of the plants themselves to afford the best grouping. 
The natural families of plants, though arranged upon a purely 
botanical basis, are found to exhibit remarkable chemical and phy- 
siological relations among the products of their individual mem- 
bers ; this agreement, as yet but imperfectly recognized owing to 
our limited knowledge of the actual composition of organic proxi- 
mate principles, is probably one of the great universal harmonies 
of nature, which, in the progress of science, will be more fully de- 
veloped and made known. 



Syllabus of Plants and their Neutral Characteristic 
Principles. (Generally Crystalline.) 



1. Ternary Compounds. 



Ranunculaceoz. 
Cimicifuga racemosa. 



Pulsatilla pratensis. 
(Anemone pratensis.) 



Magnoliacece. 
Liriodendron tulipifera. 
Magnolia glauca, etc. 

Magnolia Tripetala. 



Menispermacece. 
Cocculus palmatus. Calumba, 
U. S. (The root.) 



Papaveracece. 
Papaver sonmiferum. Opium, 
U. S. 

Caryophyllece. 
Saponaria officinalis. 
Gypsophylla struthium. 
Agrostemma githago. 



Linacece. 
Linum catharticum. 
Purging, flax. 

Auraniiacece. 
Citrus vulgaris. 
Aurantii amari cortex, U. S. 
Citrus aurantium. 
Aurantii dulcis cortex, U. S. 
Citrus limonis. 
Limonis cortex, TJ. S 



Crystals insoluble in water, benzine, turpentine, bisul- 
phide of carbon ; soluble in alcohol, diluted alcohol, 
and chloroform ; sparingly soluble in ether ; easily 
fused. 

Anemonin, associated with anemonic acid ; rhombic crys- 
tals, nearly insoluble in ether ; product of the decom- 
position of the acrid oil of Ranunculus scleratus. 
Poisonous. 

Liriodendrin, white scales, or needles ; little soluble in 
cold water; soluble in alcohol and ether; bitter, pun- 
gent; partly sublimable. 
Magnolia, a crystalline (resinoid) principle, nearly in- 
soluble in cold water, very soluble in chloroform, 
ether, bisulphide of carbon, and alcohol; soluble in 
hot glycerine; fusible at 18(P F. 

Columbin, C 21 H 22 O r , colorless, rhombic prisms, fusible; 
very bitter; soluble in 30 parts alcohol, in ether, vola- 
tile oils, acetic acid, and in alkalies ; reprecipitated by 
acids, not precipitated by tannin. Associated with 
berberina. 

Meconin, C 10 H, O 4 , white acicular crystals, soluble in 265 
parts cold, 18 boiling water, ether, alcohol, and vola- 
tile oils ; acrid. 
Saponin,* C 12 H 20 O 7 , Struthiin, Githagin, identical; white 
powder ; soluble in hot water and diluted alcohol, in- 
soluble in ether; taste sweetish, afterwards acrid and 
bitter ; frothing in solution ; sternutatory ; splits with 
H 2 S0 4 into sugar and sapogenin, C u H 22 4 (Bolley), or 
kinovin (Rochleder). 

Linin, white powder or silky needles ; sparingly solu- 
ble in water, more in acetic acid and chloroform ; freely 
in alcohol and ether ; the alcoholic solution intensely 
bitter and acrid ; by H 2 S0 4 violet. 

Hesperidin, in the spongy portion of lemon peel, bitter ; 
crystalline ; soluble in alkalies and hot alcohol, little 
in water ; insoluble in ether and volatile oils ; by Fe 2 C 3 
red-brown. 



* Similar, if not identical, principles occur in numerous plants, the decoctions and 
tinctures of which have the property of frothing like soap-water. (See Polygalic 
Acid, Cyclamin, Convallarin, Smilacin, Aphrodsesin.) 



SYLLABUS OF PLANTS. 



521 



Citrus limonum and citrus au- 
rantium. The seed. 

Guttiferce. 
Garcinia mangostana.* Bark 
of the fruit. 

Zygophyllece. 
Guaiacum officinale. The wood 
and bark. 

Eryihroxyleoz. 
Erythroxylon cocoa. Leaves. 

Hippocastanece. 
JEsculus hippocastanum. 
(Horse chestnut.) The bark. 

The Cotyledons. 



Various species of iEsculus 
and barks of the genus 
Pavia. 

Rutctcece. 

Gallipea officinalis. The bark. 

Angustura, U. S. 

Xanthoxylum piperitum. The 
fruit. 

Xanthoxylum fraxineum. 
Xanthoxylum, U. S. (The 
bark.) 

Terebinthaceoz. 
Anacardium occidentale, ca- 
shew nut. 

Simarubaceoe. 
Simaruba excel sa ; Quassia, 
U. S., and Simaruba offici- 
nalis, Simaruba, U. S. 

Sapotacece. 
Chrysophyllum glycophlseum, 
Monesia bark. 

Aquifoliacece. 
Ilex aquifolium. European 

holly. The leaves. 
Ilex opaca. 
American holly. The fruit. 



Limonin, C 42 H 50 O 13 . From the seed by alcohol, crys- 
talline, bitter, soluble in KO ; red color with H 2 S0 4 ; 
scarcely soluble in ether. 

Mangostin, C 20 H 22 O 5 , golden-yellow scales, without smell 
or taste; insoluble in water; soluble in alcohol and 
ether, diluted acids and alkalies. 

Guaictcin, uncrystallizable, bitter, and acrid; light 
yellow powder ; easily soluble in hot water and alco- 
hol ; insoluble in ether ; precipitated by acids. 

Erythroxylin, volatile, needle-shaped crystals, very 
bitter, probably identical with caffein. (See Cocaina.) 

JEsculin, C 2] H 24 13 , polychrom, white crystalline powder, 
without smell, bitter; little soluble in cold water and 
alcohol ; soluble in alkalies ; insoluble in ether and 
volatile oils. (See page 528.) 

Argyrcescin, C 54 H 86 24 , crystallizes from diluted alcohol; 
silvery in appearance; insoluble in ether; gelatin- 
izes with warm alkalies, and forms cescinic and propi- 
onic acids ; by H 2 S0 4 , yellow solution, blood-red on 
addition of Aq ; by dilute acids splits into sugar and 
argyrcescetin = C 42 H 62 12 . 

Aphrodcesin, C 104 H 85 O 47 , amorphous, colorless, sternuta- 
tory ; resembles saponin in many respects ; splits by 
alkalies into butyric and cescinic acid, C 43 H g0 O 46 . 

Paviin, similar to sesculin, identical with fraxin. (See 
Oleaceae.) 

Cusparin, tetrahedral crystals, soluble in alcohol, acids, 
and alkalies, and in 200 parts water ; precipitated by 
tannic acid. 

Xanthoxylin, volatile, insoluble in water; soluble in 
alcohol, ether; aromatic resinous taste; stearoptene 
from the oil. 

Xanthoxylin of Dr. Staples, not investigated, probably 
identical with xanthopicrin (Dr. Wood). (See Ber- 
berina.) 

Cardol, C 21 II 31 2 , light-reddish oil, very readily oxi- 
dizing ; insoluble in water; easily soluble in alcohol 
and ether ; very acrid and blistering. 

Quassin, C 10 H 12 O 3 , white opaque granules, or prisms ; 
inodorous, intensely bitter; very soluble in alcohol, 
less in ether, slightly in water, not precipitated by 
tannin. (See page 529.) 

Monesin, gummy, or white powder ; inodorous, bitter, 
and acrid ; readily soluble in water and alcohol, the 
solutions frothing; slightly soluble in absolute alco- 
hol and ether ; identical with saponin. ? 

Ilicin, brown-yellow transparent crystals ; bitter; readily 
soluble in alcohol and water ; insoluble in ether; not 
precipitated by metallic salts. 

Ilipicrin,f acicular crystals, intensely bitter, slightly 
acrid, soluble in water and alcohol, freely in ether; 
precipitated by tannin. 



* Used in the East India Islands as a remedy for intermittents. 

f We propose to retain the name of ilicin for Delschamp's still impure principle 
as obtained from the leaves of European holly, and suggest the name ilipicrin for the 
crystalline bitter principle obtained from the fruit of American holly, as obtained by 
Dillwyn P. Pancoast } a graduate of the Phila. College Pharm. (See Amer. Journ. 
Ph., 1856, p. 314.) 



522 



ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 



Rhamnece. 

Rhamnus frangula and cathar- 
tica. 

The unripe berries (buck- 
thorn). 

Rhamnus infectoria, French 
berries. 

Leguminosoz. 
Cassia fistula. The root. 
Cassia acutifolia, C. obovata, 

C. elongata, Senna, U. S. 
Lupinus albus. White lupine. 

The seed. 
Glycyrrhiza glabra. Liquorice. 

Dipterix odorata, fruit. (Tonka 

beans.) 
Melilotus officinalis. Flowers. 



Cytisus ecoparius. 
Scoparius, U. S. (Broom). 



Ononis spinosa. The root. 



Rhamnin, volatile, tasteless, yellowish crystals 
in alkalies with yellow color (Fleury). 



soluble 



RosacecB. 
Geum urbanum. The root. 



Quillaya saponaria (Quillaia 

bark). 
Bray era anthelmintica 

(Kousso). 

Granatece. 
Punica granatum. 
Granati rad. cort., IT. S. 

Myrtaccce,. 
Caryophyllus aromaticus. 

Caryophyllus, V. S. (The 
flower bud ) 

Cucurbitaceoz. 
Bryonia alba. 



Citrullus colocynthis. 
Colocynthis, U.S. (The fruit.) 



Cathartin of Winkler, from the ripe fruit. Cathartic 
dose 1 to 3 grs. {See Crysophanic Acid ) 

Rhamnin, a coloring principle soluble in water, Rham- 
netin, coloring principle insoluble in water, Rhamno- 
tannic acid. 

Cassiin, uncrystallizable, bitter ; soluble in water and 
alcohol ; precipitated by mineral acids. 

Cathartin of Lassaigne and Fenuelle. (See Chrysophanic 
Acid.) 

Lupinine, greenish, amorphous, hygroscopic, bitter; 
insoluble in absolute alcohol and ether. 

Glycyrrhizin is a glucoside, splitting into glycyretine 

and sugar (Gorup Besanez), 
Coumarin, C 9 H 6 2 .* Colorless, quadrangular prisms; 
odor and taste aromatic ; destroyed by H 2 S0 4 ; by 
HN0 3 converted into nitro-coumarin and picric acid ; 
by boiling with alkalies, coumaric acid C 9 H 8 3 . 1 lb. 
Tonka beans yield 108 grs. 

Scoparin, C 21 H 22 O 10 , soluble in alkalies ; precipitated 
by acids ; little soluble in water, more soluble in 
alcohol, without odor or taste ; oxidized by HN0 3 to 
picric acid, appears to be the diuretic principle. 
(Stenhouse.) 

Ononin, C 62 H 68 27 , colorless needles ; inodorous ; readily 
soluble in boiling water and alcohol ; insoluble in 
ether ; red with H 2 S0 4 ; splits with caustic baryta 
into formic acid and onospin, C 60 H 34 O 25 , which, with 
diluted H 2 S0 4 or HC1, yields sugar and ononetin, 
C 4g H 44 13 . 

Onocerin, C x 
altered by'boiling, as above. 

Gein, uncrystallizable, bitter; soluble in water, readily 
in alcohol and ether ; with H 2 S0 4 red, with HN0 3 
yellow solution ; forms with alkalies, lime, and lead, 
soluble compounds. 

Saponin, see Caryophyllacese. 

Koussin, white or yellowish ; indistinctly crystalline ; 
acrid ; soluble in ether, alcohol, and alkalies ; no 
glucoside. Anthelmintic in doses of 20 to 40 grs. 

Punicin, acrid, uncrystallizable, oily, powerful errhine. 



Caryophyllin, C 10 H 16 O, yellow prisms, without taste or 
smell ; soluble in ether and boiling alcohol. 

Eugenin, C 10 H 12 O 2 , yellow pearly scales, becomes red 
with HN0 3 ; isomeric with caryophyllic acid. 

Bryonin, C 48 H 80 O 38 , amorphous, very bitter, soluble in 
water and alcohol; insoluble in ether; splits into 
sugar, bryoretin, C 21 H 35 O t , and hydrobryoretin, 

21 37 8" 

Bryonitin, crystals, soluble in alcohol, 95 per cent., and 
ether. 

Colocynthin, C 56 H 84 23 , amorphous, light-yellowish; in- 
soluble in ether, soluble in water and alcohol ; splits 
with acids into sugar and colocynthein, C 44 H 64 13 . 



* Coumarin also exists in Asperula odorata, Rubiacece, Anthoxanthum odoratum, 
Graminece, and some other herbs. 



SYLLABUS OF PLANTS. 



523 



Cucumis prophetarum. 
unripe fruit. 



The 



Momordica elaterium. Elate- 
riuni, U. S. (Squirting cu- 
cumber.) 

UmbeWferce. 

Petroseliuum sativum. The 
herb. 



Peucedanum officinale. The 
root. 



Imperatoria ostruthium. 
Athamantum oreoselinum. 
The root. 



Rubiacece. 

Cinchona calisaya and other 
species. The root bark and 
wood. 

Composites,. 
Achillea moschata. Iva herb 

of Switzerland. 
Arnica Montana. 

Artemisia absinthium. Absin- 
thium, U. S. (The herb.) 



Angelica archangelica. The 
root. 



Cnicus benedictus. 
thistle. 



Blessed 



Mikania Guaco. The leaves. 
Lactuca viiosa. The juice. 



Lactuca sativa. Lettuce. The 
juice. 

Lactucarium, U. S. 

Leontodon taraxacum. Tarax- 
acum, U. S. (The root.) 

Tanacetum vulgare. Tanace- 
tum, U. S., Tansy. (The 
flowers.) 



Colocynthitin, obtained in white prisms from the part of 
the alcoholic extract insoluble in water and cold 
alcohol ; soluble in hot alcohol and ether. 

Prophetin, C 23 H 36 7 , white resinous, little soluble in cold 
water, more in ether, very soluble in alcohol; intense- 
ly bitter; splits with acid into sugar and propheretin. 

Elaterin, C 20 H 28 O 5 , colorless prisms, very bitter, acrid; 
insoluble in alkalies, dilute acids, and water; soluble 
in alcohol, little in ether ; with H 2 S0 4 red solution. 

Apiin, C 24 H 28 13 , white powder, tasteless; nearly in- 
soluble in cold water ; gelatinizing from hot solution ; 
blood-red with FeS0 4 . 

Apiol, yellowish, oily, non-volatile, acrid, pungent, 
heavier than water ; soluble in alcohol, ether, chloro- 
form. 

Pcucedanin, C ]2 H 12 3 , colorless rhombic prisms, with- 
out taste or odor; melts at 1670 F. ; insoluble in 
water, soluble in hot alcohol, ether, fixed and volatile 
oils. Splits into angelicic acid, C 5 H 8 2 , and oreose- 
lon, C 7 H 4 0. 

Imperatorin, identical with peucedanin. 

Athamantin, C 24 H 30 O 7 , colorless needles or prisms, pe- 
culiar rancid odor on heating, taste rancid, bitter, 
acrid; melts at 1740 F. ; splits into oreoselon, 
C u H 10 O 3 , and valerianic acid, C 5 H 10 O. r 

Kinovin, C 30 H 48 O 8 , whitish, resinous, intensely bitter ; 
little soluble in water, readily in alcohol and ether; 
soluble red in H a S0 4 . By gaseous HC1 splits into 
mannitan, C 6 H 12 O ]0 , and kinovic acid, C 24 B 38 4 , which 
is tasteless, but yields bitter salts. (See page 529.) 

Ivain, C 48 H 42 6 , bitter, semi-fluid, yellow, insoluble in 
water, soluble in alcohol. 

Arnicin, C 24 H 36 5 , golden-yellow mass, soluble in alka- 
lies and in muriatic acid. 

Absynthin, C 20 H 28 O 4 -{-Aq, granular crystalline ; soluble 
in alcohol and ether, little in water ; with KO, brown- 
red solution ; H 2 S0 4 greenish-blue solution, with little 
water deep blue. 

Angclicin, amorphous and crystalline ; taste insipid, 
afterwards aromatic and burning. 

Cnicin, C 14 H 18 5 , colorless needles; faintly bitter ; fusi- 
ble ; little soluble in cold water and ether, easily 
in alcohol ; with H 2 S0 4 blood-red, HC1 green ; proba- 
bly a glucoside. 

Guacin, yellowish, uncrystallizable, bitter ; soluble in 
ether, alcohol, and boiling water. 

Lactucin, C n H 14 4 , white pearly scales, in the juice com- 
bined with lactucic acid ; bitter ; easily soluble in 
alcohol, scarcely in cold water and ether. 

Lactucone, C 40 H 68 O 5 , white granules deposited from hot 
alcohol on cooling ; insoluble in water, soluble in 
ether. 

Lactucopirin, C^rT^O^, brown, amorphous, very bitter ; 
faint acid reaction ; readily soluble in water and alco- 
hol ; not precipitated by PbO salts. 

Taraxacin, colorless crystals, bitter, acrid, fusible ; 
soluble in boiling water and alcohol. (Polex.) 

Tanaceiin, yellowish-white warts ; very bitter ; very 
soluble in ether, less in alcohol, slightly in water; 
with H 2 S0 4 hyacinth-colored solution. 



524 



ON" NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES, 



Caprifoliacece. 
Lonicera xylosteum. The 
berries. 

Ericaceae,. 
Arctostaphylos uva ursi. Uva 
ursi, JJ. S. (The leaves.) 



Erica, Ledum, Arbutus, Rho- 
dodendron, etc. The leaves. 

OleacecE. 
Vaccinium Vitis Idoea. 
Leaves of cowberry. 

Olea Europasa (olive-tree). 
The gum. 



Plumeria lancifolia. A febri- 
fuge bark from Brazil. 

Fraxinus excelsior. Common 
European ash. The bark. 



Ligustrum vulgare. Privet. 
The bark. 



Phillyria latifolia (a speeies of 
privet). 



Syringa vulgaris. Lilac. The 
bark. 



Apocynacece. 
Apocynum cannabinum, JJ. S. 

Aeclepiadece. 
Asclepias Syriaca. The milky 

juice. 
Asclepias vincetoxicum. The 

root. 

Gentianece. 
Gentiana lutea. Gentiana, 
JJ. S. (The root.) 



Xylostein, crystalline, bitter principle ; by dilute acids 
converted into sugar and other substances. (The 
seeds contain a volatile poison.) 

Arbutin, C ]2 H 16 7 , bitter, colorless crystals; soluble in 
boiling water and alcohol, slightly in ether ; glucoside ; 
a striking blue color with phospho-molybdic acid. (See 
page 530.) 

JJrson, C 10 H n O, colorless, silky, tasteless, acicular crys- 
tals ; insoluble in water, acids, and alkalies ; fusible, 
sublimes unchanged, inflammable ; orange-yellow with 
HN0 3 . 

Ericolin, C 34 H 56 21 , brown-yellow, extractive, intensely 
bitter ; by H 2 S0 4 into ericinol and sugar. 

Vacciniin, one per cent, in the leaves, crystalline ; very 
soluble in hot water, less so in cold water and alcohol, 
scarcely in ether ; not precipitated by tannin nor by 
acetate of lead. 

Olivil, C u H 18 5 , needles in starlike groups, bitter, and 
sweet taste ; melt at 25(P ; soluble in water and boil- 
ing alcohol, easily in alkalies, slightly in ether ; by 
very dilute HN0 3 red-yellow. 

Agonidine, C 10 H u O 4 , a glucoside, soluble in boiling water 
and alcohol, less so in ether. 

Frazin, C 32 H 36 O 20 , yellowish needles, slightly bitter and 
astringent ; soluble in boiling water and alcohol ; fluo- 
rescent, but blue color disappearing on adding acids ; 
splits with acids into frazetin, C 10 H 8 C 5 , and sugar; 
identical with paviin. 

Ligustrin, identical with syringin. 

Ligustropicrin, analogous to syringopicrin. 

Ligustron, needles, sublimable with an aromatic odor; 
bitter ; soluble in water, alcohol, and ether ; reduces 
Ag from its solutions in NH 3 . 

Phillyrin, C 27 H 34 P, r Crystalline, nearly tasteless, solu- 
ble in hot water and alcohol, insoluble in ether. By 
diluted HC1 forms sugar and phillygenin, C 21 H 24 6 , 
which is polymeric with saligenin. Reputed antipe- 
riodic. 

Syringin, C 19 H 28 O 10 . Colorless needles ; tasteless ; solu- 
ble in water, more in alcohol, not in ether. The solu- 
tions in H 2 S0 4 deep blue or violet; splits with acids 
into sugar and syringenin, C 13 H 13 5 . 

Syringopicrin, in all parts of lilac ; amorphous, yellowish- 
white ; bitter ; slight acid reaction ; readily soluble 
in water and alcohol ; insoluble in ether ; precipitated 
by tannin. 

Apocynin, peculiar active principle. 

Asclepion, C 20 H 34 O 3 , white crystalline mass, odorless, 
tasteless ; insoluble in water and alcohol, soluble in 
ether. 

Asclepin, pale yellow ; readily soluble in water and alco- 
hol; emetic, precipitated by tannin, HgCl 2 , and subace- 
tate of lead. 

Gentiopicrin, C 20 H 30 O 12 . Extracted from the aqueous 
infusion by animal charcoal ; crystallizable ; readily 
soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in ether; no^ 
precipitated by Tan or 2PbO,Ac. Splits with acids 
into sugar and gentiogenin, a brownish-yellow, amor- 
phous body. 



SYLLABUS OF PLANTS. 



525 



Menyanthes trifoliata. 
(Buck-bean.) 



Herb. Menyanthin, C 33 H 54 16 , whitish, amorphous, bitter ; solu- 



Ophelia Chirayta. Herb. 



Elythiae chilensis. European 

centaury. 
Sabbatia angalaris. American 

centaury. 

Convolvulacece. 
Ipomceajalapa.* Jalapa, U.S. 

(The rhizoma.) 

Ipomoea Orizabensis. False 
jalap. Jalap stalk. 



Convolvulus scammonia. 

Scammonium, U. S. (The 

concrete juice.) 
Ipomoea simulans. Tampico 

jalap. 

Solanece. 
Capsicum annuum, and other 

species. The fruit. 
Parisquadrifolia. The herb. 



Physalis alkekengi. The 

leaves of the winter cherry. 

Scrophularinece. 
Digitalis purpurea. (The 
leaves.) 



Gratiola officinalis, 
hyssop. 



Hedge 



Scrophularia nodosa, 
herb. 



Th< 



sugar and a volatile oil, menyanthol. 
Chiretin, C 26 H 48 15 , very bitter ; neutral ; precipitated by 

tannin, by the action of acids separated into ophelic 

acid and chiratogenin, C 13 H 24 3 . 
Erythro cenlaurin, white and crystalline, becoming red 

on exposure to the sun's rays; existing in minute 

quantity ; poisonous ; soluble in ether, and fuses at 

1360 C. 

Convolvulin, C 31 H 50 O 16 , white or transparent ; inodorous 
and tasteless; insoluble in ether and water, soluble in 
aleohol and acetic acid; resinous ; by H 2 S0 4 amaranth- 
red. (See page 530. ) 

Jalapin, C 34 H 56 16 , white, amorphous, resinous ; readily 
soluble in alcohol and ether, wood-spirit, benzol, oil of 
turpentine and acetic acid ; by H 2 S0 4 amaranth-red. 
(See page 530.) 

Scammonin, identical with jalapin. (Spirgatis.) 



decompose at 100O C. 
ether. 



soluble in acetic acid and in 



Capsicin, white tufts of crystals ; soluble in alcohol and 
ether. (See page 531.) 

Paridin, C 6 H )2 4 , colorless shining scales or needles, 
bitterish, acrid ; little soluble in cold water and ether, 
freely in alcohol ; by H 2 S0 4 and HP0 4 red. 

Physalin, C 14 H-, 6 5 , bitter, amorphous, yellowish ; solu- 
ble in alcohol, chloroform, and ammonia. 

Digitalin, or digitasolin, C 27 H 45 15 , light straw-yellow; 
amorphous, granular from the alcoholic solution ; 
very bitter; irritating to the nostrils; soluble in 125 
p. cold, in 42 p. boiling water ; scarcely soluble in 
ether, more in alcohol; brown and purple in H 2 S0 4 , 
green in HC1, rose-red and brown in NH 3 ; splits with 
acids into sugar, digitaliretin, C 15 H 25 5 , audparadigita- 
liretin, C 22 H 34 5 . 

Digitaletin, Delffi digitalin, C 21 H 33 9 (digitalin minus 
C 6 H 12 6 ), white warty crystals, insoluble in ether and 
cold water, soluble in 222 p. boiling water; without 
coloration in NH 3 and HC1 ; splits into sugar and 
digitaliretin. 

Digitalarin, golden-yellow, resinous, very acrid, soluble 
in ether and NH 3 ; in the pure state pearly-white 
microscopic prisms, C 11 H 22 2 . 

Gratiolin, C 20 H 34 O 7 , bitter, white, crystalline, soluble in 
boiling water and alcohol; insoluble in ether; splits 
into sugar, gratiolaretin, C l7 H 28 3 , and gratiolelin, 
C 17 H 28 0g. 

Gratiosolin, C 46 H g4 25 , amorphous, yellow ; insoluble in 
ether, soluble in water and alcohol. Products of 
decomposition numerous. (See Am. Journ. Ph., 
1859, 341.) 

Scrophularin, crystalline scales, bitter, soluble in water. 



* Ipomceajalapa, Nuttall; Ipomcea Schiedeana, Zucearini; Ipomoea purga, Schlech- 
tendal; Convolvulus jalapa, Schiede; Convolvulus purga, Wenderoth; Convolvulus 
officinalis, Pelletan; Exogonium purga, Bentliam; are all synonyms for true jalap. 



526 



ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 



Labiatoz. 
Rhinanthus Alextorolophus. 

Marrubium vulgare. Hore- 
hound. The leaves. 



Lycopus Europseus. Bugle 
weed. 

Teucrium scordium. Ger- 
mander. 



Piimulacece. 
Cyclamen Europseum. Pri- 
mula officinalis. Cowslip 
primrose. 



Thymelce. 
Daphne mezereum. Mezereum, 
U. S. (The bark.) 



Laurinece. 
Laurus nobilis. The leaves. 

Aristolochece. 
Aristolochia clematitis. 
Aristolochia serpentaria, Ser- 
pentaria, U. S. (The root.) 
Asarum Europaeum. 



Euphorbiacece. 
Croton eleuteria, Cascarilla, 

U. S. (The bark.) 
Croton tiglium, Oleum tiglii, 

U. S. (The oil.) 

Urticece. 
Humulus lupulus. (Strobiles.) 

Plumb aginacece. 
Plumbago Europsea. Lead- 
wort. The root. 



Datisca cannabina. 
and root. 



Leaves 



Cupuliferce. 
Quercus Robur. The 
bark. 



old 



Rhinanthus, C g8 H 52 O 40 , a glucoside, in stellate prisms, 

bitterish-sweet taste, soluble in water and alcohol; 

intense greenish-blue when heated with muriatic acid. 
Marrubiin, crystallizes from ether and alcohol ; little 

soluble in water ; intensely bitter, afterwards acrid ; 

with H 2 S0 4 brown-yellow solution ; not precipitated by 

tannin. 

Lycopin, pale yellowish ; hard ; very bitter ; soluble in 
water, easily in alcohol and ether ; insoluble in alka- 
lies. 

Scordmi, yellow gum-like or white powder; agreeably 
aromatic and bitter; insoluble in cold water, soluble 
in alcohol and ether; red-brown in H 2 S0 4 , yellow in 
alkalies. 

Cyclamin, C 20 H 24 O 10 , Arthanatin of Saladin, white, amor- 
phous or crystalline, inodorous; hygroscopic, light 
brown ; gelatinizes with cold water, afterwards solu- 
ble, frothing ; coagulated above 140O, but redissolving 
on standing; soluble in alcohol and acetic acid; in- 
soluble in ether ; acrid poison ; splits with emulsin 
into sugar and cyclamiretin, C 14 H 16 6 . (See Amer. 
Journ. Pharm., 1860, p. 155.) 

Daphnin, C 31 H 34 19 -{-4H 2 0, brilliant colorless prisms, 
soluble in boiling water and alcohol ; insoluble in 
ether ; bitter, astringent, inodorous ; splits with acids 
into sugar and daphnetin, C ig H 14 9 . (See Am. Journ. 
Pharm., 1861, p. 325.) 

Coccogenin, C 20 H 22 O 8 , needle-shaped, silky crystals, solu- 
ble in alcohol and hot water, insoluble in ether and 
cold water. 

Laurin, C 32 H 30 O 3 , white prisms, odorless ; taste acrid 
and bitter ; insoluble in water ; soluble in hot alcohol 
and ether. 

Clematitin, C 18 H 5 12 , is extracted by boiling water ; un- 
crystallizable. 

Serpentariin, uncrystallizable, bitter, and acrid ; soluble 
in water and alcohol. 

Asarin, yellowish-brown, amorphous, disagreeably bitter, 
emetic ; soluble in water and alcohol ; precipitated by 
tannin. 

CascarilUn, white crystals, bitter, inodorous; slightly 
soluble in water, readily in alcohol and ether ; with 
H 2 S0 4 deep red, with HCl violet solution. 

Crotonol, C 9 H u 2 , colorless oil ; soluble in alcohol and 
ether ; decomposed by alkalies and boiling water ; 
very blistering. 

Humulin (impure?), amorphous, bitter, yellow, inodor- 
ous ; little soluble in ether, soluble in alcohol, and in 
200 parts boiling water. 

Plumbagin, from the aqueous decoction of the ethereal 
extract, reddish-yellow scales; taste sweetish, sharp, 
and burning ; soluble in hot water, alcohol, and ether ; 
with PbO carmine-red compound. 

Datiscin, C 21 H 22 12 , colorless, silky needles or scales ; 
easily soluble in alcohol, less in ether and cold water; 
very bitter, fusible ; soluble in alkalies with yellow 
color, precipitated by acids ; by H 2 S0 4 forms sugar 
and datiscetin, C 15 H 10 6 . 
Quercin, small white crystals, very bitter ; soluble in 
water, acetic acid, and diluted alkalies ; insoluble in 
absolute alcohol, ether, and volatile oils ; by H 2 S0 4 
orange. 



SYLLABUS OF PLANTS. 



527 



Juglandcce. 
JuglansRegia. Common Wal- 
nut. 

BetulacecB. 
Betula lenta. Sweet birch. 
The bark. 

Salicacece. 
Populus tremula. Bark and 
leaves of the aspen. 

Salix and Populus, several spe- 
cies. The bark. 

Piperacece. 
Piper cubeba. Cubeba, U. S. 
(The berries.) 



Coniferce. 
Pinus sylvestris and Thuja 
occidentalis. The leaves or 
bark. 

Zingiberaccce. 
Curcuma longa. 

Orchidcce. 
Vanilla aromatica. Prepared 
unripe capsule. 

Amarpllidacece. 
Narcissus pseudo - narcissus, 
N. poeticus and N. Tazetta. 

Smilacece. 
Smilax officinalis and other 

species. The root. 
Sarsaparilla, U. S. : 

Asparagus communis. The 
berries. 

Liliacece. 
Inspissated juice of Aloe soco- 
trina and other species. 
Aloes. 

Convallaria majalis. Lily of 
the valley, herb and root. 



Polygonatum multiflorum. 

The herb. 
Scilla maritima. The bulb. 
Scilla, U. S. 



Regianin, elongated octohedrons or needles, but little 
soluble in water, more soluble in alcohol and benzole ; 
changes into a black amorphous acid, forming purple 
salts with the alkalies. 

Gaullherin, in the alcoholic extract; appears to be a 
copulated compound ; with acids, or the aqueous in- 
fusion of the bark, yields oil of gaultheria. 
Populin, C 20 H 22 O g -f-2H 2 O, white crystalline powder, 
sweetish and acrid taste; soluble in alcohol, slightly 
in water; by boiling with alkali forms salicin and 
benzoic acid. 

Salicin, C ]3 H 18 7 , white scales or prisms, very bitter ; 
soluble in water and alcohol; insoluble in ether and 
volatile oils. (See page 531.) 

Culebin, C ]7 H 34 5 , white, crystalline, inodorous, insipid, 
not volatilizable by heat, cryst. from alcohol; nearly 
insoluble in water, soluble in ether, acetic acid, fixed 
and volatile oils ; with H 2 S0 4 carmine-red ; deposited 
in oleoresina cubeboe. 
Pinipicrin, C 22 H 56 22 , bitter, amorphous, light yellowish- 
brown ; soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in 
ether, liquid at 2120; with dilute H 2 S0 4 a volatile oil, 
ericinol, C, H 16 O, and sugar. 

Curcumin, C 10 H 10 O 3 , orthorhombic crystals ; yellow- 
colored, fusible at 1720. 

Vanillin, C 10 H 6 2 , colorless, four-sided needles, strong 
vanilla odor, hot biting taste. (See page 538.) 

Narcitin, white, uncrystallizable ; faint odor and taste ; 
emetic ; soluble in water, alcohol, and acids. 

Smilacin, C 12 H 34 14 , sarsaparillin, pariglin, salsaparin, 
parillic acid ; colorless needles or scales ; disagreeable, 
bitter, acrid, nauseous taste ; soluble in boiling water, 
alcohol, and ether, froths in solution, similar to 
saponin; H 2 S0 4 deep violet; is a glucoside. 

Spargancine, a yellowish-red pigment, soluble in alcohol 
and ether; also spargine, a peculiar bitter principle. 

Alain, C 34 H 36 O u -f- Aq, sulphur-yellow crystals, in- 
tensely bitter ; soluble in cold water, alcohol, and 
alkalies ; insoluble in ether, chloroform, benzin, and 
volatile oils ; by H 2 S0 4 and HN0 3 red ; becomes amor- 
phous below 200O. (See page 533.) 

Convallarin, C 34 rI 62 O n , colorless prisms; acrid taste; 
little soluble in water, the solution frothing; readily 
soluble in alcohol and ammonia ;' insoluble in ether ; 
splits by acids into sugar and convallaretin, C 2S H 52 6 . 

Convallarnarin, C 23 H 44 12 , white powder ; bitter and 
sweetish ; soluble in water, ammonia, and alcohol ; 
insoluble in ether ; by H 2 S0 4 violet ; splits by acids 
into sugar and convallamaretin, C 20 H 36 O 8 . 

The crystallizable principle resembles and is probably 
identical with paridin (Walz). 

Scillitin, bitter needles ; insoluble in water ; soluble in 
alcohol and ether ; decomposed by alkalies ; emetic, 
cathartic, and narcotic poison. (Bley.) Mandet has 
separated 

Sktdeine, an irritating poison, and 

Scillitine, the diuretic and expectorant principle. No 
process published. 



528 



ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 



Lycopodiacem. 
Lycopodium chamsecyparissus. 
The herb. 

Lichenes. 
Variolaria amara. 



Parmelia physodes. 



Fungi. 
Boletus laricis (agaric). 



Lycopodin, colorless needles ; very soluble in water, 
alcohol, and ether, probably a glucoside. 

Picrolichenin, C 6 H 5 3 , small, brilliant, rhombic, pyra- 
midal crystals ; very bitter, and said to be febrifuge ; 
soluble in alcohol, ether, volatile and fixed oils, R^SO^ 
and Ac ; scarcely in water. 

Ceratophyllin, white needles, fusible at 2960 F. ; taste 
slightly acrid ; soluble in alcohol and boiling soda 
solution ; purple with little Fe 2 Cl 3 ; blood-red -with 
chlorinated lime. 

Laricin, red-brown, bitter resin; odor sweetish ; soluble 
in ether, alcohol, acetic acid, and alkalies ; insoluble 
in oil of turpentine. 



2. Quaternary or Nitrogenized Neutral Principles. 



Rosacece. 
The kernels, leaves, and flow- 
ers of many plants. 



Leguminosce. 
Also in malvacese and aspara- 
gese. (Young beans, peas, 
asparagus, beets, liquorice 
root, etc.) 



Amygdalin, C 20 H 27 NO n + 3H 2 0, white scales or prisms, 
inodorous, agreeably bitter ; soluble in water and 
alcohol ; insoluble in ether. (See page 532.) 

Emulsin. The peculiar vegetable albumen of this spe- 
cies of plants is a protein compound. (See page 351.) 

Asparagin, althcein, or malamid, C 4 H 8 N 2 3 H 2 0, oetohe- 
drons, colorless, inodorous, insipid ; insoluble in 
ether; soluble in 58 parts water and less alcohol, by 
fermentation owing to impurities converted into suc- 
cinate of ammonia, thus: — 
N 2 C 4 H 8 3 +H 2 



3. Sulphuretted Neutral Principles. 



Cruciferm. 
Sinapis alba. The seed. 



Sulpho-sinapisin, C 16 H 23 N0 5 H 2 S0 4 -f-2H 2 0, crystallizable ; 
by the action of a ferment contained in the seed, 
converted into an acrid bitter principle ; by alkalies, 
into sinapic acid, sinkalina, a very strong base, 
and hydro-sulphocyanic acid ; by acids, sinapina, 
C 1R H„NO e . 



4. Animal Neutral Principles. 



Cantharis vesicatoria. 
Cantharis, U. S. 
Cantharis vittata, U. S., and 
other species. 



Castor fiber. (Peculiar con- 
crete substance.) 
Castoreum, U. S. 



Fresh meat, 
etc. 



Chickens, game, 



Cantharidin, C 5 H 6 2 , prepared by the evaporation of 
ethereal or chloroformic tincture of flies ; crystallized 
from boiling alcohol ; white scaly micaceous crystals, 
without odor or taste ; when pure insoluble in water, 
slightly soluble in cold alcohol, soluble in ether, chlo- 
roform, benzole, fixed oils, etc., fusible and volatile ; 
soluble in water in its natural state of combination. 
A powerful vesicant. 

Castorin, crystallizes from the boiling alcoholic tincture, 
purified by washing with cold alcohol ; long fascicu- 
lated prisms, odor of castor, cuprous taste, insoluble 
in cold water and alcohol, soluble in volatile oils and 
100 parts of boiling alcohol ; Canadian castor con- 
tains .7 per cent. 

Creatine, C 4 H & N 3 2 -f H 2 0. (See page 518 ) 



REMARKS ON SOME OF THE NEUTRAL PRINCIPLES. 

Msculin, or Polychrom, is found besides in the bark of the horse- 
chestnut tree, also in quassia wood and red saunders. 

The bark is exhausted by alcohol of eighty per cent., slightly 
evaporated and set aside for several weeks, the powder washed with 



REMARKS ON SOME OF THE NEUTRAL PRINCIPLES. 529 

ice-cold water, and recrystallized from a boiling mixture of one 
part of ether and five of alcohol. 

A very dilute solution, containing one-millionth part, opalesces 
with blue color in reflected light; acids destroy this property, alka- 
lies restore it, chlorine destroys it, coloring the solution red. 

By the action of diluted acids it is converted into sugar and ces- 
culetin. C ]S H 16 O g 4- H 2 = C 9 H 6 4 + C 6 H 12 . 

Paviin may be obtained by the slow evaporation of the ethereal 
tincture in needles grown in star-like groups. 

Its properties are similar to cesculin, but, while this fluoresces 
with sky-blue color, paviin shows a green color in solution ; both 
usually occur together in the barks of this family ; the genus cescu- 
lus containing cesculin, the genus pavia, paviin, in preponderance. 

These principles, though little known except as scientific curiosi- 
ties, are worthy a trial as antiperiodics. The bark has long been 
reputed to possess febrifuge properties. 

Quassin, the active pnnciple of the intensely bitter wood and 
barks of the quassias, is best prepared by the following process : — 

The decoction is precipitated by milk of lime, the filtrate evapo- 
rated, the residue dissolved in .alcohol, treated with animal char- 
coal, evaporated and recrystallized from water. 8 lbs. quassia wood 
yield 1 drachm. 

In Martinique and other neighboring islands, the wood of Byt- 
teria febrifuga, Simarubece, there called false simaruba, is employed 
for intermittents. Gerardias found its bitter principle to be quas- 
sin, of which it contains a much larger proportion than does quassia. 

Colocynthin. — The fruit of colocynth, in fine powder, is mixed 
with and packed upon animal charcoal, displaced with alcohol, and 
evaporated spontaneously; a garnet-colored, pulverizable mass, ex- 
tremely bitter, soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in ether, re- 
mains behind. 

Active cathartic in the dose of one and a half grain. 

It is obtained pure by treating the aqueous solution of the alco- 
holic extract successively with subacetate of lead, sulphuretted 
hydrogen and tannin ; the last precipitate, after dissolving in alco- 
hol, is again treated with lead and sulphuretted hydrogen ; the 
filtrate is evaporated spontaneously, the residue is well washed with 
anhydrous ether. (Walz.) 

Kinovin (formerly erroneously called kinovic acid) was first dis- 
covered in the so-called quinquina nova, but afterwards separated 
from the officinal Peruvian barks. De Vrij found the following 
quantities in species of cinchona, cultivated in Java: Cinchona 
calisaya, wood of the root 2.57 ; bark of the root 1.08 ; wood 1.80 ; 
bark of trunk .359 ; bark of main branches .690 ; green branches 
.849 ; dry leaves .230. Cinch, lucumcefolia, wood 1.280 ; bark of 
trunk .420 per cent. 

It is prepared by exhausting the cinchona barks with boiling 
water (the bases, kinic and cincho-tannic acids are removed), after- 
wards with boiling milk of lime (cinchona red remains behind). 
The filtrate is supersaturated by HC1, and the precipitate purified 
34 



530 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 

by again combining with CaO, decolorizing by animal charcoal, and 
precipitating by HC1. 

Or the bark is boiled with very dilute NaO or KO, the filtrate 
saturated by HC1, and the precipitate freed from cinchona red by 
CaO and treating as before. It is freed from adhering kinovic acid 
by dilute alcohol or chloroform, which leave the latter insoluble. 

Arbutin. — An aqueous decoction, is precipitated by acetate of 
lead, and the filtrate, after treating with HS, evaporated to a syrupy 
consistence ; after some time, prisms of arbutin appear. By emulsin 
or H 2 S0 4 it is decomposed into sugar and hydrokinone. C 19 H lfi 7 + 

H 2 = C 6 H 12 6 +C 6 H 6 0, 

Ursin. — The alcoholic solution of the aqueous extract of uva ursi 
is repeatedly treated with animal charcoal, and evaporated sponta- 
neously- 
Colorless needles, soluble in alcohol, water, ether, and dilute 
acids ; neutral reaction. In the dose of one grain, this appears to 
be powerfully diuretic. 

The resinoid principles of jalap have already been treated of in 
their practical relations among the concentrated or resinous ex- 
tracts ; in this connection it will be proper to refer to them as the 
neutral principles giving activity to that particular family of plants. 

Convolvulin, formerly called Rhodeoretin. — The tuberous root of 
Convolvulus Schiedeanus (Ipomcea Jalapa), after exhausting it with 
boiling water, is exhausted with 90 per cent, alcohol, water is added 
until precipitation commences, it is filtered hot through animal 
charcoal, evaporated, exhausted with ether, the residue dissolved in 
alcohol, and precipitated by ether. 

Its solution in alkalies contains convolvulic acid = C 31 H 50 O 16 ; it 
is soluble in water, and is therefore not precipitated by water. 

Convolvulin, dissolved in anhydrous alcohol, and treated with 
hydrochloric acid, is decomposed into an oily, crystallizing body, 
convolvulinol and sugar. 

Convolvulic acid, in aqueous solution, treated with dilute H 2 S0 4 
suffers the same decomposition. Convolvulinol, C 2fi H 50 O 7 , separated 
from its alkaline solution, has been converted into convolvulinolic 
acid, C 26 H 46 5 . 

The above three substances are converted by HM3 3 into ipomic 
acid, HO,C 10 H t6 O 3 H 2 O. 

Jalapin. — The root of Ipomcea Orizabensis, after exhaustion with 
boiling water, is treated with alcohol, water added until turbidity 
commences, boiled with fresh animal charcoal, filtered, precipitated 
with acetate of lead and a little ammonia, the filtrate treated with 
sulphuretted hydrogen, distilled, the resin treated with boiling 
water, and dissolved in ether. 

Its solution in alkalies and alkaline earths contains jalapic acid 
= C 34 H 56 16 + Aq, which is tribasic. Mineral acids decompose 
jalapin and jalapic acid into sugar and jalapinol (white crystalline) 
= C 32 H 62 7 . Separated from its combinations with alkalies, it has 
;been converted mtojalapinolic acid, = C 32 H 40 O 5 . 



SCAMMONIN — DIGITALIN. 531 

Jalapin, jalapic, and jalapinolic acid, treated with HN"0 3 , are con- 
verted into oxalic and ipomic acid, C 10 H 16 O 3 H 2 O. 

Scammonin. — By numerous investigations it was proved that this 
resinous principle was very analogous to the two preceding, until 
Spirgatis proved its identity with the cathartic principle of the so- 
called jalap stalks, the root of Convol. Orizabensis, and that all dif- 
ferences previously observed are due to impurities obstinately ad- 
hering to it. 

It must be remembered that the pure resin of the officinal jalap, 
which by pharmacists is frequently called jalapin, is the convol- 
vulin of chemists, while jalapin of chemists is produced from an 
unofficinal plant and is identical, while the former is only homolo- 
gous with scammonin. 

Capsicin. — In the winter of 1856 and '7, one of my pupils, H. B. 
Taylor, of Philadelphia, being about to prepare his thesis for the 
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, pursued a course of experiments 
upon Capsicum annuum, under my direction, which resulted in the 
discovery of a crystalline principle, which appears to be the true 
capsicin, though that name had before been applied to oily or soft 
resinoid products. The process was as follows : Powdered capsicum 
was treated with anhydrous ether and evaporated, the oleo-resinous 
product was digested in alcohol of .809 sp. gr., the filtered alcoholic 
solution was treated with subacetate of lead, which threw down a 
copious precipitate ; this was separated by filtration, and the clear 
tincture treated with sulphhydric acid ; the precipitated sulphuret 
of lead was now removed, the solution boiled, again filtered, evapo- 
rated, and set aside, on an intensely cold day, to crystallize. On 
examination, the whole was found to have solidified into a mass of 
beautiful, nearly white, feathery crystals. Owing to the compara- 
tive insolubility of sulphhydric acid gas in alcohol, they were not 
completely free from lead salt, and were further purified and crys- 
tallized, though not with the same facility, from the change of 
temperature. These crystals seem analogous to a stearoptene; 
heated, they first melt, and then take fire, burning with a bright 
rose-colored flame, and giving off dense, suffocating fumes ; heated 
with sulphuric acid, they blacken, and give off white fumes. The 
taste is excessively fiery, inflaming all parts with which it comes in 
contact ; the odor is faint. The crystalline sediment which is sepa- 
rated during the spontaneous evaporation of the ethereal tincture 
of capsicum is probably the same compound. 

Digitalin. — The leaves of digitalis contain several neutral princi- 
ples which are closely allied to each other, are present in commer- 
cial digitalin, and are obtained, according to Walz, by one process. 
The aqueous solution of the alcoholic extract is treated with PbO, 
the filtrate freed from lead by H 2 S0 4 , neutralized by NH 3 , and pre- 
cipitated by tannin. The precipitate is rubbed together with PbO or 
subacetate of lead and repeatedly boiled with alcohol ; the filtrate 
is treated with H 2 S and evaporated. The yellowish-white residue 
is crude digitalin, from which pure ether dissolves digitalacrin ; 
water leaves digitaletin and dissolves digitalin, which is obtained 



532 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 

pure by treatment with tannin, lead, etc., as before. Digitalin is a 
powerful poison, given for the same sedative properties as the 
leaves. It has lately been much prescribed in the form of granules 
of sugar, which have been saturated with the tincture, so that each 
shall represent a given quantity of the medicine. The usual dose 
is one-thirtieth of a grain. Being among the most powerful of 
known poisons, it should be used with great care. Kosmann gives 
to digitalin the formula C 47 H 45 15 . 

Salicin. — The bark of the following plants contains no salicin : 
S. alba, Babylonica, bicolor, capraea, daphnoides, incana, fragilis, 
Russeliana, triandra, viminalis and Populus angulosa, fastigiata, 
grandiculata, monilifera, nigra, Virginica; all the other willows 
contain salicin, and it is probable that all the herbaceous kinds 
of spiraea, which yield salicylous acid (oil of spiraea), contain it 
originally. 

To prepare it the decoction of willow bark is evaporated to 
three times the weight of the bark employed, digested with oxide 
of lead, and the filtrate evaporated to syrupy consistence. After 
several days the crystals are separated and purified by recrystalliza- 
tion. (Duflos.) 

Concentrated H 2 S0 4 colors it blood-red; water decolorizes it 
again, dissolving a peculiar acid (rufisulphuric acid). Cold diluted 
H 2 S0 4 or HC1 converts it into sugar and saligenin. C 13 H 18 7 + H o 
= C 6 H 12 6 +C 7 H 8 2 = saligenin. 

If treated hot, it is converted into sugar and saliretin. 2C 13 H 17 7 
= 2C 6 H 12 O fi +C 14 H 10 O 2 =saliretin. < 

Cold HlSTOg of 1.16 specific gravity converts it into helicin. C 13 H ]8 7 
+ 0= ]3 H 16 7 + H 2 0= helicin. 

If a more diluted KN~0 3 , of 1.09 specific gravity, is used, the re- 
sult is a compound between helicin and salicin, which has been 
called helicoidin. 2C 13 H 1H 7 + 0= C 13 H ]6 6 4- H 2 = helicoidin. 

If salicin is heated with very dilute HN0 3 , just to the boiling 
point, and allowed to cool, or evaporated at a low temperature, sali- 
cylous acid is separated. 

At the boiling point, nitrosalicylic acid is formed, and by con- 
tinued influence picric and 6xalic acids. 

Melted with an excess of caustic potassa, it is converted into 
salicylate and oxalate of potassium. 

Heated with binoxide of lead, formiate of lead is obtained ; with 
black oxide of manganese and dilute H 2 S0 4 , formic and carbonic 
acids; with bichromate of potassium and H 2 S0 4 , carbonic, formic, 
and salicylous acids. 

By dry distillation it yields, among pyro products, salicylous 
acid ; and when taken internally it is found in the urine together 
with its products of decomposition — saligenin, salicylous and sali- 
cylic acids. 

Saligenin, C 7 H 8 2 , pearly crystals, easily soluble in boiling water, 
alcohol, and ether, sublimes above 212°; colored red by concen- 
trated H 2 S0 4 ; concentrated HN0 3 oxidizes it to picric, diluted 
HE"0 3 to salicylous and nitrosalicylous acids, C 7 H 8 2 + 20= C 7 H 6 3 



VANILLIN — ALOIN. 533 

-f H 2 0; heated with hydrate of potassa, it is converted into sali- 
cylic acid and hydrogen, C 7 H 8 2 + KOH 2 0=C 7 H 5 K0 3 + H 2 + H 3 . 
Sesquisalts of iron impart an indigo-blue color. Dilute acids by 
boiling convert it into 

Saliretin, C U H I4 0,= 2C 7 H 6 2 +H 2 0, which is insoluble in water 
and ammonia, soluble in alcohol, ether, concentrated acetic acid, 
and fixed alkalies; concentrated H 2 S0 4 colors it blood-red; concen- 
trated HlSr0 3 oxidizes it on boiling to picric, not to oxalic acid. 

Helicin, C ]3 TI 1& 7 , white needles, without odor, bitterish taste, 
insoluble in ether, easily soluble in hot water and alcohol. By 
synaptase and boiling with alkalies it is converted into sugar and 
salicylous acid, C 13 H 16 7 + II 2 0=C 6 H ]2 6 -f C 7 H 6 2 . < 

Helicoidin is a derivative, having the composition C 2fi II 34 14 = 
C 13 H 1(S 7 (helicin) 4- C 13 H 1R 7 (salicin). By synaptase is decomposed 
into sugar, saligenin, and salicylous acid. 

Salicin was formerly used to adulterate sulphate of quinia, which 
it resembles in appearance. It is tonic and febrifuge, though little 
used. Dose, three to thirty grains. 

Vanillin. — Vanilla of commerce is exhausted with alcohol, evapo- 
rated to an extract, this exhausted by ether, which is to be evapo- 
rated, heated with boiling water, which, on evaporation, lets fall 
the principle; recrystallized and treated with animal charcoal, it is 
obtained in colorless four-sided needles, of strong vanilla odor, hot, 
burning taste; fuses at 195°, volatilizes at 302°; little soluble in 
cold water, very soluble in hot water, alcohol, ether, and the fixed 
and volatile oils. Concentrated H 2 S0 4 dissolves it with yellow color ; 
solution of potassa dissolves it and deposits it again on being neu- 
tralized. 

The crystals observed on the surface of the fresh bean of com- 
merce are found to consist of vanillin, not benzoic acid, as hereto- 
fore supposed. 

Aloin. — This interesting proximate constituent of aloes has been 
prepared from several commercial varieties, especially from Barba- 
does and Socotrine aloes. It was introduced into medicine by T. & 
H. Smith, of Edinburgh, who are still its principal manufacturers, 
and it has recently attained commercial as well as scientific interest 
from being pretty extensively prescribed as a mild and pleasant 
cathartic. Crystals of aloin have been observed in abundance in a 
variety of Socotrine aloes of semifluid consistence from the evapo- 
ration not having been carried as far as usual. 

Preparation according to Groves. — Aloes is exhausted by boiling 
water, the decoction acidulated with muriatic acid, filtered, evapo- 
rated to a syrupy consistence, and set aside in a cool place to crys- 
tallize. The crystals, after a fortnight, are separated and purified 
by recrystallization from boiling water. Socotrine aloes yields 10 
per cent, aloin. These crystals are to be dried by bibulous paper 
at a moderate heat; when thoroughly dry aloin is permanent in 
the air, but with moisture and heat conjoined, has a tendency to 
lose its crystalline form, assuming the amorphous character of 
aloes. (See Proc. Am. Pharm. Assoc, 1860, p. 162.) 



534 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 

Its purgative properties have been denied, but the experience of 
numerous practitioners here and in Europe confirms its utility as 
a mild though pretty certain cathartic in doses of from two to three 
grains. (See Extemporaneous Pharmacy.) 

Amygdalin. — This interesting principle is obtained from bitter 
almonds by the following process: Bitter almonds, powdered and 
expressed, to free them from fixed oil, are to be boiled in succes- 
sive portions of alcohol till exhausted. The liquors thus obtained 
are placed in a still, and evaporated at a low heat, the alcohol be- 
ing recovered. The syrupy residue is then to be diluted with 
water and mixed with yeast, and subjected to fermentation to 
separate sugar. Again evaporate, at a moderate temperature, to 
the consistence of syrup, cool, and add 95 per cent, alcohol. The 
amygdalin will then precipitate, and may be collected on a strainer; 
it is then to be purified by repeated resolution in hot alcohol, and 
crystallization. Any oil it may contain may be separated by shak- 
ing the solution with ether before or after the fermentation. One 
pound of almonds yields at least two drachms of amygdalin. Heat 
decomposes it, giving off the odor of hawthorn; heated with alka- 
line solutions, it evolves ammonia and forms amygdalic acid. 

Amygdalin seems destitute of active properties, except when 
mixed in solution with emulsin (see Protein Compounds), producing 
grape sugar, 6il of bitter almonds, and hydrocyanic acid, which is 
thus explained: C 20 H 27 ^O n + 2H 2 0=2C 6 H 12 6 +C 7 H 6 0+HKC. 

On the Decomposition op Organic Bodies. 

On the foregoing pages the organic compounds have been treated 
of, and a number of pharmaceutical preparations derived from the 
organic kingdom. It is well known that such chemical and phar- 
maceutical compounds are subject to alterations by various influ- 
ences, the study of which forms a most important part of chemistry. 
To many of these changes attention has been drawn in the appro- 
priate places, and it remains now, without treating of the same 
in detail, to present them in a condensed form, conveniently ar- 
ranged. 

The decomposition of organic bodies may be treated of under 
four separate heads : — 

I. Oxidation by the Atmosphere. — As a general rule, pure chemical 
compounds are not affected by dry or moist atmosphere, except 
perhaps to deliquesce or effloresce, or, like the salts of some vola- 
tile organic acids, as acetic and valerianic, to evolve them in moist 
air. But oxidation is comparatively rare, and mostly met with 
in compounds destitute of oxygen and abounding in hydrogen ; 
examples are the ternary alkaloids and the carbo-hydrogens of the 
volatile oils. 

The influence of ozone, the peculiar active form of oxygen, dis- 
covered by Schonbein, and described on page 131, in promoting 
the organic changes which take place among organic principles, has 
not yet been fully investigated. It is undoubtedly a potent agent 



DECOMPOSITION OF ORGANIC BODIES. 535 

in those important metamorphoses, the study of which constitutes 
the branch of Organic Chemistry. 

II. Decomposition into Simpler Compounds. — 1. By air and water. 
Complex organic bodies are subject to oxidation and ultimately 
break up into the organic compounds carbonic acid, ammonia, and 
water; if this process of decomposition takes place slowly, it is 
called decay ; if rapidly in the presence of more water and with 
the evolution of an offensive smell, putrefaction; under similar 
circumstances, when the product is a useful compound, fermenta- 
tion ; of this last a distinction is made between vinous fermentation 
(see page 362) and acid fermentation, the latter being again sub- 
divided in accordance with the acid obtained, and is then called 
acetic, lactic, butyric, succinic, etc. (see the acids named); the 
presence of a nitrogenated compound is necessary, to act as a 
ferment. 

2. By acids. Of the concentrated acids, the action of sulphuric 
acid is the most violent : it abstracts water from nearly all organic 
compounds, leaving a compound with a larger amount of carbon; 
or the carbon is oxidized, and the evolved gases contain carbonic 
oxide, and formic, carbonic, and sulphurous acids ; compounds 
containing amide (NH 2 ) yield ammonia. Glacial phosphoric and 
arsenic acids have a similar action, but weaker. 

Diluted acids act differently ; they cause the combination with 
the elements of water (conversion of starch into sugar, p. 335), 
very seldom evolve carbonic acid (conversion of meconic into ko- 
menic acid), but very often decompose organic bodies into glucose 
and another compound of different behavior {see Tannic Acids, 
Salicin, etc.) ; the latter decomposition often takes place also by 
the influence of emulsin, synaptase, or similar ferments. {See 
also Glucosides, p. 347, and Copulated Compounds, p. 519.) 

3. By chloride of zinc. Aided by heat, this is capable of abstract- 
ing water from organic compounds ; it produces ether from alcohol, 
etc. 

4. By heat. Organic compounds are called volatile if they may 
be distilled without suffering decomposition; others are decom- 
posed, and the process is then termed dry or destructive distillation, 
and the products pyro products. These are, in the commencement 
of the distillation, highly oxygenated and of an acid nature, 
afterwards contain less oxygen, and at last are carbo-hyclrogens 
(marsh gas, CH 3 H, olefiant gas, C 2 H 4 ) or ternary alkaloids {see Arti- 
ficial Alkaloids); water, tar, and charcoal generally accompany the 
products of the dry distillation of all complex bodies. Exposure 
to a continued red or white heat resolves them more or less com- 
pletely into binary inorganic compounds and the elements. 

III. Artificial Oxidation. — Many highly oxygenated inorganic 
compounds, when in contact with organic bodies, part with, one or 
more equivalents of oxygen, which in its nascent state acts on the 
organic compound ; such is the case with a number of acids, viz., 
nitric {see Oxalic Acid, p. 430, and Sugars, p. 340), chromic {see 
Valerianic Acid, p. 379), chloric, and iodic acids, with peroxide of 



536 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 

manganese (see Formic Acid, p. 374), binoxide of lead (see Tartaric 
Acid, p. 431), and the oxides of the noble metals. Many organic 
compounds, when in solution together with alkalies, are thereby 
rendered more prone to oxidation by the atmosphere. 

IV. " Integration" with Elements or Inorganic Compounds. — A 
number of non-metallic elements may enter the combination of or- 
ganic bodies as integral parts ; the halogens by direct influence, 
sulphur by the influence of sulphuric acid or a sulphuric compound 
(see Artificial Volatile Oils, etc.). The integration of H]Sr0 2 has 
some importance in pharmacy ; gun-cotton (p. 322) and glonoin (p. 
388) are such compounds. 



PART Y. 

PHARMACY PROPER (GALENICAL PHARMACY). 



CHAPTER I. 

ON THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF PLANTS, THEIR COLLECTION AND 
DESICCATION. 

The plant is conveniently divided, for the purposes of the drug- 
gist, into the root, stem, bark, buds, leaves, flowers, fruit, and seed, 
and these different parts require the observance of different rules 
in regard to their collection, desiccation, and preservation for use 
in medicine. 

Roots of annual plants should be dug immediately before the 
time of flowering; of biennials, or perennials, late in the fall, or 
veiy early in the spring. If the latter, it should be immediately 
after the first appearance of the plant above the ground. Perennial 
roots should not be gathered until after two or three years' growth. 
Rhubarb is allowed to mature for four or live years — asparagus till 
three years old. 

Fleshy or succulent roots require to be cut previous to drying, so 
as to expose a large surface to the air; the mode in which they are 
sliced, whether longitudinally or transversely, is of interest in 
judging of certain foreign drugs, such as colomba root, which is 
always met with in transverse slices, gentian in longitudinal, the 
English variety of colchicum cormus, cut transversely, that from 
the Continent entire, etc. The mode of cutting is little regarded 
by herbalists in preparing the indigenous roots for market. 

In all cases, it is important that the root, or other part of the 
plant, should be thoroughly dried. In the case of taraxacum, 
parsley, and other succulent roots, it is necessary to apply a heat of 
about 150° F., in order to destroy the eggs deposited by insects, 
which, through neglect of this precaution, may occasion the speedy 
deterioration of the root by worms. For drying roots, recourse 
may be had to a barrel open at both ends, and having a network 
suspended in it for holding the roots, it is to be stood over the 
register of a common house furnace. 

The smaller and more fibrous roots, and especially those contain- 
ing essential oils, require to be less thoroughly dried, and, as soon 
as their condition will admit of it, should be carefully put away 
into tight drawers, bottles, or tin cans. The stems of herbaceous 

(537) 



538 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. 

plants should be gathered after foliation, but before flowering, 
•unless the flowers are to be used with the stem. 

Barks of trees are best gathered in the spring, of shrubs in the 
autumn, at which seasons they can be most easily separated from 
the wood. They should be generally deprived of their epidermis, 
and dried spontaneously, their porous texture and comparative 
tenuity facilitating the process. Wild-cherry bark is often defi- 
cient in quality, from being gathered at the wrong season, and 
from the wrong part of the plant. It should be taken from the 
root in the eighth month — August. I have known it to become 
mouldy and lose its aroma by being put away too damp; when of 
fine quality, it has a strong and characteristic odor. The bark of 
wild-cherry is preferred to be taken from the root of the tree, and 
that of sassafras is always derived from the root, though in Eng- 
land the, much less valuable, wood is preferred. 

Leaves should be gathered when fully developed, and before 
they have commenced to wither and fall; those of biennial plants, 
as the solanacece and digitalis, during the second season. After the 
appearance of the flowers, the leaves begin to lose their activity, 
the juices going to develop the fruit. In labiate plants the leaves 
are more aromatic as they approach the flowering tops, and the 
upper ones are frequently gathered with the tops. Leaves, slowly 
developed in a dry season, are believed to be most active. 

Herbs, in which term are included whole plants and such parts 
of the same plant as are collected and sold together, should be 
gathered when in flower. Most plants which have thick and 
branching stalks or stems, should be deprived of these before being 
put up for sale, though experiment seems to indicate that a larger 
proportion of the active principle of belladonna is contained in the 
soft stems and midribs than in the cellular structure of the leaf. 

Flowers may be gathered just before they are perfectly developed. 
The scent is less lively, and the color paler in fully expanded 
flowers, in consequence of the ovary growing at the expense of the 
accessory organs. The French or red rose is always gathered in 
bud, the astringent principle and beautiful red color being then 
best developed. A clear, dry morning, after the dew is dissipated, 
is to be preferred in either of these cases. They are dried in the 
shade, without artificial heat; the floor of a garret, through which 
is a draft of dry air, is well adapted to this purpose. Fleshy fruits, 
when designed for preservation, are generally plucked before they 
are quite ripe. It is found that raspberries, strawberries, black- 
berries, and mulberries yield a less glutinous and more agreeable 
juice when not "dead ripe;" the vegetable acids are then not so 
completely converted into sugar, and the aroma is fresher and 
stronger. The fruit of persimmon (Diospyros, U. S.), an indigenous 
astringent, is directed to be collected before ripening, owing to its 



AMERICAN MEDICINAL PLANTS. &39 

abounding in tannic acid, which, as it ripens, seems to be converted 
into sugar and apotheme. 

Seeds, which are the least perishable of vegetable productions, 
should be perfectly ripe when collected ; they require very little 
drying. 

It should be remembered, when treating of the drying of drugs, 
that those dried by mere exposure to atmospheric currents are not 
by any means free from moisture ; experiments upon this subject 
were made by Gr. W. Kennedy, of Pottsville, Pa., and published in 
vol. xliv. Am. Journ. Pharm., page 158. They show a loss, when 
exposed to 120° F., varying from 16 to 9 per cent, for roots, 12 to 
10 for stems and wood, 14 to 9 for barks, flowers, and herbs, 18 to 
9 for leaves, and 9 to 8 for powdered roots. A part of this moisture 
is reabsorbed by subsequent exposure. 

The " United Brethren," called Shakers, at their settlement in 
!New Lebanon, New York, have extensive and convenient arrange- 
ments for drying these vegetable materials. Series of shelves of 
wire network are disposed in layers at suitable distances from each 
other, in large and well ventilated apartments; upon these the 
herbs are carefully placed, and allowed to remain subject to the 
desiccating action of the air, circulating below as well as above, 
until completelj- dried. They are then removed to capacious bins, 
of which many are arranged along the sides of the room, and pre- 
served until nearly ready for pressing — an operation which, in 
common with some other herbalists, the Shakers practise upon 
every article of the Vegetable Materia Medica which they put up 
for sale. 

This practice, while it has its advantages, is liable to some objec- 
tions. It has been said that, owing to the moist condition to which 
the plants require to be brought before pressing, the packages are 
liable to become mouldy in the middle. I have never met with an 
instance of this kind, however, and believe that the excellent repu- 
tation the Shaker herbs have attained is well founded. Another 
objection to these herbs, of a very different character, is, that they 
are not adapted to the examination of the physical characteristics 
of the plants ; a pharmaceutical student, placed in an establishment 
where they are sold to the exclusion of the dried plants in bulk, 
enjoys no opportunity of familiarizing himself with the physical 
and botanical characters of this extensive class of medicines; to this 
may be added the difficulty in noticing any deficiency in quality, 
any intentional or accidental adulteration, or error in labelling the 
articles. 

Within a few years past herbs of very superior quality have been 
offered to the public packed and labelled very neatly by Messrs. 
B. 0. & Gr. C. Wilson, of Boston. These herbs have their natural 
odor and color preserved in a remarkable degree, and seem worthy 
the confidence generally given them. 

Very large quantities of several of the American medicinal plants 
enter into our commerce; spigelia and serpentaria are collected 



540 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. 

chiefly in the southern and southwestern States ; sassafras and wild- 
cherry barks, the root of asarum Canadense, and the leaves of 
hyoscyamus, belladonna, and conium (naturalized) in the New 
England States and in Canada, while taraxacum, eupatorium, lobelia, 
geranium, lappa, inula, dulcamara hydrastis, and many others, are 
gathered almost all over the country. The sources or the vast sup- 
plies of many of the leading American plants which enter into 
commerce are studiously concealed by the principal dealers, and 
the prices of the more important are subject to considerable fluctua- 
tions. 

The business of collecting and drying medicinal plants is pursued 
in the vicinity of many of our large cities by herbalists, who realize 
a living from it. These have it in their power, by taking students 
of medicine and pharmacy with them on their excursions into the 
woods and fields, to extend a knowledge of medical plants among 
a class to whom it cannot fail to be in the highest degree useful 
and interesting. 

There are few pursuits better calculated to relieve the monotony 
of a student's life, or to impart healthfulness and variety to the 
sedentary occupations of the apothecary, than a systematic out-door 
pursuit of the useful and ennobling science of botany; and the 
pharmacist or physician, by giving it a practical application to his 
business, ma} 7 , in many instances, combine pecuniary with mental 
and physical advantage. 

The cultivation of medicinal plants in the United States is mainly 
confined to the beautiful valley in Columbia County, E". Y., already 
referred to ; this district seems especially adapted to the purpose, 
and, like the celebrated "Physic Gardens" of Mitcham and Hitchin 
Hurtz, in England, furnishes a great variety, and in large quantity. 

Immense plantations of peppermint for the production of the oil 
exist in St. Joseph's County, in the southern part of Michigan, and 
in Ohio and Western New York. These are estimated to comprise 
an area exceeding 3000 acres, and to yield in oil of peppermint over 
$63,000 per annum. 

Eor an interesting account of the " Physic Gardens of Mitcham," 
see American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. p. 25 ; for some de- 
tails in regard to the N*. Lebanon Gardens, see the same journal, 
vol. xxiii. p. 386 ; and for an account, by F. Stearns, of the pepper- 
mint plantations of Michigan, see Proceedings of Am. Pharm. Asso- 
ciation, 1858. 

The question of how far the cultivation of plants diminishes or 
modifies their medicinal activity, is at present an undecided point ; 
it is, however, universally admitted, that climate and soil exercise 
an important influence on their virtues, and the late edition of the 
Austrian Pharmacopoeia particularly directs that in the case of 
aconite, the plant grown in gardens is to be rejected. 

The opinion is adopted by many that most plants are more fully 
developed in the country in which they are indigenous, than in any 
to which they may be transplanted ; but that there are many excep- 
tions to this rule, if it be a general rule, must be quite apparent. 



SPECIES. 541 

In the present state of our knowledge upon this subject, we can- 
not go further than to say that of plants indigenous to the temperate 
zones, some flourish equally on either continent, while others, owing 
to some want of congeniality in climate and soil, will only develop 
their peculiar properties fully in the localities to which they are 
indigenous. 

At the gardens in New Lebanon, the narcotic herbs indigenous 
to Europe are cultivated with apparent success, and some of the 
extracts prepared from them are among the best manufactured. 

The classification of the vegetable materia medica best adapted to 
the purposes of the druggist is that which groups the different 
parts of plants together, as indicated at the commencement of this 
chapter. This is the arrangement formerly adopted by me in the 
course of instruction in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and 
nearly adhered to by my successor Prof. Maisch. Without any 
claim to a scientific basis, it is convenient, and affords especial ad- 
vantages to the student who applies himself to the study of the 
physical peculiarities of the drugs. 

In examining students with the special object of teaching them 
to distinguish different drugs, I am accustomed to take up those 
most resembling each other in succession, relying chiefly upon the 
exhibition of characteristic specimens, and the application of the 
ready tests supplied by the senses. If every physician, druggist, 
and pharmacist were to make full use of this method, there would 
be very few instances of mistaking aconite root for taraxacum, or 
briony for Colombo. 

Species are mixtures of vegetable substances, cut or bruised, and 
designed for use in the preparation of extemporaneous infusions ; 
one of the most elegant of these, which has acquired considerable 
reputation as a substitute for many of the ordinary combinations 
containing senna, is the following: — 

Species St. Germain. 

Take of Senna, previously digested in alcohol and dried 4 ounces. 

Elder flowers 2| ounces. 

Fennel seeds, 

Aniseed, of each 10 drachms. 

Cream of tartar 6 drachms. 

Mix, and divide into papers containing five drachms. 
Directions. — Infuse the contents of one package in half a pint of 
boiling water, strain, and take at a dose. 

The treatment of senna with strong alcohol deprives it of odorous 
principles without materially impairing its cathartic properties. 

Gerhard's Tonic Tea. 

Take of Gentian, half a troyounce. 
Rhubarb, one drachm. 
Ginger, two drachms. 

Bruise them thoroughly, mix them, and add — 

Bicarbonate of soda, one drachm. 



542 ON" THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

Directions. — Infuse in a pint of boiling water, and give a wine- 
glassful three times a day. 

Anthelmintic Species.— Worm Tea. 

Take of Spigelia, half a troyounce. 
Manna, half a troyounce. 
Senna, two drachms. 
Fennel, one drachm. 

Contuse the spigelia, and mix it with the other ingredients. 

Directions. — Infuse in a pint of boiling water, and give a child 
two years old or upward, half a teacupful, warm, morning,. noon, 
and night, before eating. 



CHAPTER II. 

ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

According to the plan of this work, the first class of prepara- 
tions treated of is that of powders. 

The preparation of the material for powdering consists of garb- 
ling or sorting, and drying it. The former process pertains to the 
druggist, and the latter mainly to the drug grinder. 

The object of garbling is to separate any impurities or adultera- 
tions, and any decayed or deteriorated portions of the drug. In 
nearly all drugs, especially those of vegetable origin, there are great 
variations in quality, and even in the same lot there are frequently 
very good and quite worthless specimens. As an illustration of 
this, Chinese rhubarb may be instanced: the roots, when broken, 
are found to vary exceedingly in quality, even in the same case; 
some are heavy and compact in structure, breaking with a very 
uneven fracture, presenting a red and yellow marbled appearance, 
giving a gritty impression between the teeth, and the peculiar 
bitter, astringent taste characteristic of the drug, while other roots 
are comparatively light, spongy in structure, and almost destitute 
of the peculiar color and taste ; others, which have the requisite 
specific gravity and the external appearance of a good article, are 
dark-colored within and quite inferior; others are so worm-eaten 
as to be quite worthless. The custom of some druggists, when 
about to send a lot of rhubarb to the mill, is, either to send it in 
the mixed condition in which it is imported, or to select from it 
the finest pieces for separate sale, and for a sample, and send all the 
inferior roots, with perhaps only a small portion of the best, to be 
powdered. 

A druggist who exhibits the best roots, selected in this way, as 
a sample of the kind powdered, cannot be acquitted of a gross and 
unpardonable fraud upon his customers. If he sends the whole 
case, containing good, bad, and indifferent, as originally imported, 



DRYING AND POWDERING. 543 

he may at least claim that, though he has not improved the quality 
of the medicine in reducing it to powder, he has not rendered it 
worse. But, with a view to furnishing a good and reliable medi- 
cinal agent, without regard to price, he should garble his rhubarb, 
by cracking each root, rejecting the decayed and otherwise defec- 
tive pieces, and preserving in the form of powder only that which 
is of value. This is done by some, who are more desirous of a 
reputation for the quality than for the cheapness of their drugs. 

Notwithstanding the difficulty of distinguishing the quality of 
medicines in powder by their sensible properties, we have in the 
case of rhubarb, general indications of excellence in a bright yellow 
color, a heavy and compact character in which the particles are not 
dustlike and mobile on the surface, and a well-marked and unmixed 
rhubarb odor. By a careful study of the characteristics of pow- 
ders, their colors, compactness, or mobility, and, above all, their 
resemblance in odor and taste to good specimens of the drug, the 
physician and pharmacist may reach considerable skill in judging 
of their quality, and even in detecting adulterations. 

In a subsequent chapter I shall have occasion to refer to the 
variable quality of powdered gum Arabic ; this is mainly owing 
to the neglect of garbling, or to the use of the rejected portion, 
after garbling, for reduction to powder. It is desirable to have 
the whole gum free from dusty and gritty particles ; in this condition, 
it is more elegant and convenient for chewing, and for making the 
nutritive mucilaginous drinks so much used by invalids, and it 
commands a better price. It is, therefore, customaiy to sift gum, 
as taken from the case, and the inferior kinds of powder are made 
from these sif tings, which contain the dust, particles of sand, and 
other impurities. 

A good powdered drug must invariably command an advance 
on the price of the drug in its crude state, the loss by drying, 
waste, cost of powdering (from 6 to 12 cents per pound), and other 
incidental expenses, to say nothing of the loss by garbling, fur- 
nishes a sufficient answer to those who complain of the high price 
of choice powders. 

The chief reason for the deficiency in the quality of medicinal 
powders is found in the reluctance manifested by the public, and 
retail apothecaries and physicians, to pay a liberal price for them. 
Powders are not unfrequently sold at a less price than the whole 
drug, especially when the article is costly, and of variable quality 
in commerce. This is true, especially of rhubarb, jalap, gum 
Arabic, and the spices, which, as a general thing, cannot be re- 
commended in powder with the same confidence as in the unpow- 
dered condition, or in the form of Galenical preparations, prepared 
from the whole or contused drug. 

Drying and Powdering. — When a drug is sent to be ground in its 
ordinary condition, it generally requires drying previously to being 
submitted to the action of the mill. 

Moist and tenacious substances, such as the gum resins, opium, 
aloes, squill, jalap, and colocynth, and all fresh roots and herbs, 



544 ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

require this treatment to a certain extent, and the drug-mills are 
supplied with apartments, or steam-baths, adapted to it. These 
are heated to a temperature of about 120° F., and the drug is 
allowed to remain in them as long as is deemed necessary to de- 
prive it entirely of water. 

Some drugs are injured by this process ; the volatile ingredient, 
so often the active principle, suffers great loss, and the resulting 
powder is comparatively inefficient. Myrrh and assafcetida furnish 
good illustrations of this. 

On the other hand, substances possessed of no active volatile in- 
gredient, but containing a large amount of water, as opium, are 
enhanced in value by drying and powdering. Some specimens of 
opium diminish in drying and powdering to the extent of 20 per 
cent., which, if the process is properly conducted, increases the 
efficiency and value of the drug in that proportion. Experiments 
under my own supervision show about an average loss of 9 per 
cent., in reducing tolerably hard opium to the pulverulent con- 
dition. It is on this account, and from the fact that the powder, 
when unadulterated, is more nearly uniform in its composition 
than the drug in mass, that the JJ, S. Pharmacopoeia directs the 
use of powdered opium in making all the Galenical preparations 
of that drug. 

Elecampane root is said to lose seven-eighths of its weight in 
drying ; stramonium leaves, nine-tenths ; hyoscyamus and bella- 
donna leaves, nearly as much. If these plants lose nothing but 
moisture in the process, and retain all their active medicinal pro- 
perties unimpaired, it is obvious that they are seven or eight times 
stronger when in powder, or in a dry condition, than when recent. 
It is, moreover, a generally received opinion that vegetables yield 
their virtues by infusion more readily when dried than when they 
are fresh. 

Oily drugs, such as flaxseed and mustard seed, offer the greatest 
obstacles to the usual methods of grinding, and millers who are 
skilful adapt their processes to prevent the direct pressure of the 
grinding surface, and the consequent rise of temperature, calculated 
to " raise" the oil ; they adopt a cutting rather than a triturating 
action, using a pair of horizontal mill-stones, sharp and " dressed," 
for the special purpose, and not allowed to come in contact in the 
course of their revolutions. In this way flaxseed meal may be 
produced which contains the oil without appearing greasy, and 
from which the hull and chaff have been sifted. 

If the attempt is made to reduce these oily seeds in a mortar, 
the object will be retarded, if not frustrated, by the pressing-out 
of the oil before the requisite disintegration of the structure. 

A difficulty, liable to occur in powdering drugs at the mills, is 
due to the accidental admixture of foreign substances with them. 
The extensive grinding surface employed becomes so completely 
covered with the fine powder, that it is cleaned with great difficulty ; 
so that the next substance introduced becomes contaminated with 
it, sometimes to its great disadvantage. This is observed in certain 
articles of delicate flavor, as orris root and vanilla. 



THE PROCESS OF POWDERING DRUGS. 



545 



Ffc. 179. 



The plan of dusting powders, which insures their extreme fine- 
ness, and the separation of any earthy impurity, has gained in 
favor of late years. The apparatus now used is constructed so that 
the powdered drug, when it has passed between the grinding sur- 
faces, is thrown by a draught, created by the revolving stones, to 
a height of about live feet, and is then allowed to settle upon the 
adjacent parts, from which, after it has collected in sufficient quan- 
tity, it is removed. 

It will be appropriate, in this place, to give some observations 
upon powdering, as practised, on a small scale, in the shop and 
laboratory. This is accomplished by means of mortars, suited to 
the different processes of contusion and trituration, and by mills. 

Mortars for contusion are usually made of iron, brass, or bell- 
metal, of the shape shown in Fig. 
179. Contusion is employed for 
powdering and bruising ligneous 
substances generally, being adapted 
to breaking apart their fibres, and, 
by the violent attrition of the 
coarser particles with each other, 
reducing the whole to a more or less 
fine powder. 

Care must be taken to avoid treat- 
ing any corrosive substance in the 
iron mortar, thus allowing it to be- 
come rusty ; or, if this should oc- 
cur, it should be carefully washed 
out with diluted muriatic acid, and 
scoured with clean sand, to fit it for 
use. Any adhering material should 
be cleaned away immediately after 
the mortar is out of use, as it is then 
more easily removed than if allowed 
to remain and harden. The mortar 
is thus always ready for use. 

In powdering substances by con- 
tusion too large a quantity should 
not be introduced into the mortar 
at one time ; if the mortar is small, 
sufficient to cover the bottom for the 
depth of an inch or two ; the flat- 
tened extremity of the pestle is then 
to be brought into direct and vio- 
lent contact with it, each successive 
stroke being aimed at the same spot 
in the centre of the circle formed 
by the sides and bottom of the mor- 
tar. Many substances are too stimu- 
or otherwise injurious to 




lating 



35 



Mortar and pestle for contusion. 



546 ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

allow of their being advantageously powdered in a mortar, and the 
practice of employing apprentices in this way is more honored in 
the breach than in the performance. In cases of necessity a cover 
of leather secured around the rim of the mortar and tied -to the 
pestle at such a point as to allow of its free movement in the pro- 
cess of contusion is a wise precaution. When part of the contents 
under treatment assumes the condition of a fine powder, which is 
exhibited by the air becoming charged with the dust, it is well to 
sift it, and thus separate the fine from the coarser particles, these 
last being returned to the mortar, and further contused until a 
second sifting becomes necessarj^, and so on till it is finished. A 
small portion of the drug is usually left in powdering, which it 
seems impossible to reduce sufficiently ; this is part of the ligneous 
portion, which is frequently inert ; the drug-grinder who obtains a 
considerable quantity of this gruff, as it is called, usually retains it 
for admixture with the next lot of the same drug he is called upon 
to grind, in this way reducing somewhat the loss upon it : he is 
usually allowed a small percentage for this necessary deficiency in 
the powdered product. 

The mortar and pestle adapted for trituration are shown in Fig. 
180. Such a mortar requires to be more carefully handled than one 



Fig. 180. 




Wedgewood mortar and pestle. 

for contusion. It is adapted to the reduction of saline substances 
and chemicals generally to powder, by the friction of their particles 
with each other, between the hard and rough surfaces of the mor- 
tar and pestle. The ware, being brittle, should not be subjected to 
blows with the pestle ; it should be carefully wiped out and laid 
away, after using, so as to be dry and clean whenever needed. 
The mode of manipulating with the wedgewood mortar and 



TRITURATING, CUTTING, ETC, 



547 



pestle, after placing in it the material to be ground to powder, is 
to grasp the pestle firmly with the right hand, holding the mortar 
with the left if necessary, and gradually to traverse the mortar 
with the pestle from the centre outwards, reaching the circumference 
gradually, by a spiral. motion ; and then, by reversing the direction 
of this motion, to bring the pestle again to the centre ; in this way 
all parts are brought fully and equally under the action of the pes- 
tle. When the contents of the mortar become caked, and cease to 
fall towards the centre, when agitated, which often happens as the 
powder becomes very fine, a spatula should be occasionally run 
around the sides and bottom, to loosen and mix together the differ- 
ent portions. 

A loose and careless way of triturating substances is productive 
of no saving of labor; the conditions most favorable to pulveriza- 
tion by trituration are a constant, uniform, and hard grinding mo- 
tion communicated to the pestle, the layer of powder intervening 
between it and the mortar being thin, and the mortar so shaped as 
to present all parts of it equally to the action of the pestle. 

Many substances can neither be reduced to powder by the process 
of contusion nor by that of trituration ; of these, nutmeg may be 
instanced as one which is most conveniently grated, or scraped off 
with the blade of a knife; vanilla is another instance, this may be 
cut into short transverse pieces with shears and afterwards tritu- 
rated with a third substance; if reduced with a view to infusion or 
displacement with alcohol, sand may be conveniently employed; if 
water is to be used, or if it is to be dispensed in a dry condition, 
hard lumps of sugar may be advantageously substituted. Many 
oily substances, such as nutmeg and cardamoms and other aromatic 

Fis. 181. 




Tobacco knife. 



seeds, can be made into convenient powders with dry and ligneous 
substances, although themselves unsuited to this form of prepara- 
tion. Orange-peel, slippery elm, mezereon bark, liquorice root, are 
best comminuted by cutting them with a pair of shears, or a knife 
fastened on a lever, such as tobacconists use for cutting tobacco 
into plugs, and then drying them and introducing them into a suit- 



548 ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

able mill. The mode of cutting a piece of liquorice root into con- 
venient pieces for chewing, is shown in the drawing. 

Quassia, guaiacum, logwood, and red saunders are chipped by 
machinery, the two latter for use in the arts. 

Camphor is easily reduced to powder by adding to it a small por- 
tion of some liquid in which it is soluble, as, for instance, alcohol, 
and triturating to dryness; the proportion of alcohol proper to be 
added to camphor for this purpose is about one minim to three 
grains. As camphor thus prepared will not retain its impalpable 
condition alone, it is desirable to incorporate with it immediately 
any dry powder with which it is designed to be mixed, as, for in- 
stance, precipitated carbonate of lime, where it is to be used as a 
dentifrice. 

The following process, by my friend H. F. Fish, of Waterbuiy, 
Ct., is adapted to furnish a permanent powder of camphor: To 16 
ounces of camphor add two pints of alcohol (sp. gr. .818). In a 
porcelain mortar triturate one drachm of magnesia with as much 
water as will enable the mixture to blend freely with 8 pints of 
water, with which it is then to be thoroughly mixed in a suitable 
wide-mouthed bottle. The alcoholic solution of camphor is now to 
be poured into this in a thin, slow stream, constantly stirring the 
fast-thickening mixture. A dense, white, curdy "separate" ensues, 
which gradually condenses, and rises to the top of the liquid. 
"When collected on a filter, and cut with a spatula, this parts readily 
with its moisture, and should not be pressed or too thoroughly 
dried before being transferred to bottles excluded from the light. 
The proportion of magnesia is only one grain in 128, and consti- 
tutes no objection to its use for most purposes. 

This method is objected to, as it leaves the powder in a moist 
condition undesirable for an errhine or tooth powder. A process 
which is free from this objection is that of Mr. J. C. Loud, in 
which the camphor is placed in a small copper retort four inches in 
diameter and ten inches in height, with a curved neck two inches 
in diameter and fourteen inches long. The chamber into which 
the camphor is sublimed is a cube of 3 feet, made by pasting pro- 
perly sized paper over a light frame. After the retort neck is well 
luted to the chamber, heat is applied to the retort, by lamp or pre- 
ferably by sand-bath. Thirty minutes suffice to sublime one 
pound; if packed in full bottles, well excluded from air and heat, it 
will retain its pulverulent condition a long time. 

Some gum resins, such as assafcetida, are too tough to be reduced 
to powder unless previously heated, which, as before stated, drives 
off a portion of their active principles, while those which appear 
pulverizable cake together at the temperature produced by the 
friction of the grinding surfaces. These should be powdered m 
very cold weather, when they will suffer no loss of their volatile 
principles, and if carefully sifted, will retain the pulverulent condi- 
tion. During the warm season the powder is liable to cake some- 
what, but yields to the pressure of the pestle. 

The powders of these gum-resins, as met with in commerce, are 



MILLS FOR GRINDING DRUGS. 



549 



often nearly worthless, but prepared as above, even powdered as- 
safoetida answers an excellent purpose, and with the exception of 
its increased tendency to deteriorate from the greater extent of 
surface exposed to the action of the atmosphere, might claim a 
place among the approved preparations. All these powders should 
be kept in well-stopped glass bottles. 

Fig. 182. 




Hance's drug mill. 



Fig. 



182 represents a convenient mill for the use of druggists 
and pharmacists, manufactured by Hance Brother & White, of 
Philadelphia. 

It is an improvement on Swift's drug mill, figured in the pre- 
vious editions of this work. The advantages are that the grinding 
surfaces are horizontal and thus retain the substance for a longer 
time under the action of the plates, the speed being multiplied by 
a bevelled gear wheel working into one of smaller diameter, and 
the superior strength of those parts liable to the greatest strain. 



550 ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

For further remarks relative to this mill, the reader is referred to a 
paper by Thomas J. Co veil in the 20th vol. Am. Pharm. Association 
Proceedings, page 180. 

Numerous spice and coffee mills, sold by dealers in household 
and agricultural implements, will be found to serve useful purposes 
in the pharmaceutical store, and will often prevent a resort to con- 
tusion in the iron mortar, a noisy and laborious method of commi- 
nuting drugs, now much less used than formerly. Before intro- 
ducing tough and pliable substances, such as squill and gentian, 
into the mill, they should be well dried ; the larger roots and barks 
require to be first broken with a hatchet, or suitable knife, before 
grinding, and some will need to be first passed through the mill 
set for the coarse powder, and then, the mill being regulated, they 
can be reduced to the required condition by repeatedly passing 
them through it. The season of the year for powdering is not a 
matter of indifference, and it is believed that few drugs would 
prove intractable in the frosty weather of winter. So constant is 
the demand for powders of the various degrees of fineness adapted 
to treating the several preparations, that it would prove a useful 
precaution for the pharmacist to appropriate a few days, during 
the winter, to preparing them for the year, each being passed 
through the appropriate sieve, and put away in a tin box, properly 
labelled, till required for use. 

Sifting. — The fineness of powders is usually regulated by the use 
of sieves which will separate particles of different degrees of divi- 
sion; the finest bolting cloth will only pass those which are almost 
impalpable, while coarser sieves are adapted to the preparation of 
powders suited to percolation. In all cases when the powder is to 
be used in divided portions, care should be taken to mix the dif- 
ferent sif tings thoroughly together, as the more ligneous and least 
active portions usually resist the operation of the pestle longest and 
are in the last siftings. 

The usual kind of sieve is made in the form of a drum, and is 
designated according to the number of wires or meshes to the linear 
inch ; Nos. 20 and 40, which are adapted to coarse powders to be 
used for percolation in the preparation of certain tinctures and 
fluid extracts, have 20 and 40 meshes respectively to the linear inch, 
while No. 60 or 80 gauze, or bolting cloth, which separates all but 
the very finest particles, are used in preparing powders adapted to 
internal use. In the United States Pharmacopoeia, the terms very 
fine, fine, moderately fine, moderately coarse, and coarse are used ; 
the powder passed through a sieve of eighty or more meshes to the 
linear inch being designated as very fine; through one of sixty 
meshes,j^ne; through one of fifty meshes, moderately fine ; through 
one of forty meshes, moderately coarse; and through one of twenty 
meshes, coarse. 

An inclosed cylinder or many-sided figure is the best form for a 
sieve; by rotating it on its axis its contents are thrown constantly 
upon a fresh portion of the gauze, and thus subjected to the most 
favorable conditions for the separation of their fine particles. 



POWDERS. 



551 




Harris's sifting machine. 



Fig. 183 represents a sifting machine, patented by Samuel Har- 
ris, of Springfield, Mass., which is well adapted to facilitate the 
process. It consists of a 

wooden box, with a flange, Fig- 183. 

upon which an oblong sieve 
is made to move by a wheel 
and crank, the construction 
of which is shown in the 
drawing ; by closing the lid 
the dust is prevented from 
rising in the air, and one 
of the most common causes 
of waste and annoyance is 
thus obviated. The powder 
as it falls from the sieve is 
received into a close-fitting 
drawer beneath. The sieve 
is movable, so as to be emp- 
tied without inconvenience, and by having sieves of different degrees 
of fineness, it will be obvious that the apparatus may be adapted to 
all the purposes of the pharmacist. The sizes of this apparatus are 
so varied as to suit numerous purposes, not only in pharmacy, but 
in the arts and in agriculture. 

The operation of sifting may also be varied according to the de- 
gree of fineness required in the powder. To pass the finest particles 
only the sieve should be gently agitated, the powder being laid 
lightly upon it, and the operation being suspended as soon as it 
has ceased to pass through readily; the plan of rubbing the powder 
over the sieve with the hand, thus using more or less pressure to 
force it through the meshes, may be pursued when the fineness of 
the powder is not so much desired as the rapidity of the process; 
but this practice ought not to be pursued with bolting-cloth sieves, 
as it tends to injure them very much. 

The difficulty constantly met with by pharmacists, of fine pow- 
ders becoming caked into soft masses, is conveniently remedied by 
the use of the little instrument called Blood's patent flour sifter, 
which is constructed with a curved wire-gauze bottom, over which 
a rounded wooden bar moves by means of a lever, which also 
serves as a handle to the apparatus. It is constructed for house- 
hold purposes, but could hardly be better adapted for resifting fine 
powders, or for mixing powders, as frequently required by pharma- 
cists ; it is procurable, at small expense, at the stores for the sale- 
of household articles. 



Powders. 

Powders, as a class of remedies, possess the advantage, when 
skilfully prepared, of uniting all the proximate principles of the 
plant, in their natural condition, and may be administered without 
the intervention of any menstruum. They may be used in bulk, 



552 ON THE POWDERING OF DRUGS AND ON POWDERS. 

taken into the mouth with water or some viscid liquid ; or may be 
made into pills ; or suspended in liquids in the form of mixtures. 
{See Part VI., Extemporaneous Pharmacy.) 

The disadvantages attendant upon their use are these: they are 
frequently too bulky for convenience, the dose being so large as to 
be repulsive to the patient, vegetable powders generally containing 
a considerable proportion of inert ligneous matter; many of them 
are liable to undergo an unfavorable change by exposure to the 
influence of the atmosphere, especially when it is charged with 
moisture, and they are liable to be injured by light. Vegetable 
powders are also subject to adulteration, the detection of which is 
difficult. 

Except in the few cases, such as opium and cinchona bark, 
where we may isolate the active principle, and ascertain the pro- 
portion contained in a given sample, it is difficult to judge with 
certainty of the quality of a powdered drug ; the best safeguard 
of the physician against fraud or the effects of carelessness, where 
the vegetable powders are concerned, is to buy them of careful 
and conscientious druggists, who either powder them or exercise a 
strict supervision over the process as conducted by the drug-grinder. 

The fineness of powders affects their color, as is manifest in 
the case of white saline substances, which become whiter by long 
trituration. 

There is no separate class of simple powders in the Pharmacopoeia ; 
they are understood to be included in the Materia Medica list. 
The compound powders which are officinal are included in this 
work under the general head of extemporaneous powders and pills, 
and designated by U. S. P. A table of them will, however, be 
useful to the student in this connection. 

Pulveres, U. S. P. 



Name. 



Pulvis Aromaticus 

" Aloes et Canellae . 
(Hiera Picra) 

" Ipecacuanhse comp. J 

(Dover's Powder) 1 

" Jalapae compositus \ 

" Rhei compositus . j 

i Pulveres Effervescentes . ■< 

" " Aperientes-j 



Proportions. 



Cinnamon 

Ginger 

Cardamoms 

Nutmeg 

Aloes 

Canella 

P. Ipecac 

P. Opium 

Sulph. Potass 

P. Jalap 

Bitart. Potass 

P. Rhei 

Magnesia 

Ginger 

Sodii bicarb., pulv. 

Acidi tartarici 

Sodii et Potass. Tart. 

Sodii bicarbonatis 

Acidi tartarici 



2p.l 



2 p.. 

lp. \ 
lp.J 
4 P- \ 
lp.} 
lp. | 
lp. 
8 P. J 
lp. 
2 p. 
2 p. 
6 p. 
lp. 
gr. 30 
gr. 25 
gr. 120 ") 
gr. 40 I 
gr. 35 j 



Med. Prop. 



Carminative. 



Stomachic 
Laxative 

Sedative 
Diaphoretic 

r 

Cathartic 

Cathartic 
Antacid 

Refrigerant 

Aperient and 
Refrigerant 



Dose. 



20 grains. 
10 grains. 
20 grains. 

1 drachm. 

as directed 
in formula. 

as directed 
in formula. 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION. 553 

The necessary practical hints in regard to the mode of preparing 
and dispensing these, are given under the appropriate head in the 
chapter on Dispensing. 

" Lactinated" Powders. 

In order to render soft or semifluid preparations, especially oleo- 
resins, suitable for use in the form of powder, they are variously 
combined with dry and bulky substances, such as magnesia, sugar, 
and, preferably, lactin (sugar of milk). The hardness of lactin, and 
its comparative insolubility and inertness, adapt it to the very 
thorough division and dilution of substances triturated with it. 
Some pharmacists of the " Eclectic" school have adopted the form 
of powders for their so-called "concentrated remedies," which are 
prepared by an alcoholic menstruum from the drug, evaporated to 
an oleo-resinous consistence, and then incorporated with a dry and 
bulky powder, perhaps, in most instances, lactin. The advantages 
claimed for this method are that, while it converts inconvenient 
fluid or semifluid preparations into the eligible form of powders, it 
has little or no effect upon their composition or properties, except 
to increase their activity, by dividing and diffusing them in the 
stomach, at the same time diminishing their direct local effect 
upon that organ. These lactinated powders are, moreover, freely 
miscible with water, and much more easily dispensed than the 
isolated remedies from which prepared. They should be kept in 
dry and well-secured vials, and this form of preparation should be 
limited to articles not deliquescent in their nature, and such as are 
soluble in an alcoholic or ethereal menstruum, so that they may be 
readily incorporated with the lactin, without dissolving it, and that 
the menstruum may rapidly evaporate without too much heat. 

These lactinated preparations are made by incorporating with 
the concentrated remedy, one, two, five, or ten parts of the dry 
powder, and the degree of this dilution should be invariably stated 
in the label, together with the dose. With this precaution, they 
may serve a useful purpose in practice. 



CHAPTER III. 

ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION. 

There are two objects in view in this process, and the principal 
feature in the classification of solutions is founded on this fact. 

The simplest kind is that in which, by the use of an appropriate 
liquid, we overcome the attraction of aggregation in a solid body, 
rendering its particles invisible and more susceptible to chemical 
action, and more readily assimilated when taken into the stomach. 
The liquid used for this purpose is called a solvent, and water, the 



554 ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION. 

great neutral solvent, is most used in preparing them, though alco- 
hol, ether, chloroform, and fixed oils are also more or less employed 
as pharmaceutical solvents. 

Such solutions are designated simple solutions when the dissolved 
body may be recovered without having undergone any chemical 
change, on the evaporation of the solvent, or its removal in some 
other way. When the solution of a body is attended with some 
chemical alteration, either composition or decomposition, the term 
complex or chemical solution may be applied to it. 

It is but rarely the case that the simple solvents above named 
produce decomposition in dissolving a body ; the solvents for effect- 
ing chemical solution are mostly acid or alkaline liquids. 

A large number of the solutions used in medicine are effected by 
inducing chemical changes among the ingredients introduced into 
them, sometimes yielding soluble compounds where one or more 
of the original ingredients were insoluble. Such processes are fre- 
quently accompanied by the generation of heat, and the change of 
color and odor, the latter by the neutralization of volatile acids or 
bases. Effervescence is always produced when, by the action of an 
acid or an acid salt, carbonic or another of the few gaseous and 
sparingly soluble acids is set free ; in this case there is usually no 
change of temperature observed, as«the heat produced by the chemi- 
cal reaction is rendered latent by the gas. In the preparation of 
solution of citrate of magnesium from citric acid and calcined mag- 
nesia, the mixture becomes hot, while, if the carbonate of magnesium 
is used, the solution remains cold, and the same phenomena are 
observed on the neutralization of other acids by bases and their 
corresponding carbonates. 

When we speak in general terms of the solubility of any solid 
substance, we have reference to its relation to water, the term be- 
ing an approximate one. Yery few substances exist in nature 
wholly insoluble; and as there is no line between the least soluble, 
and those which are freely dissolved under ordinary circumstances, 
the term is not adapted to use where accuracy or precision of lan- 
guage is required. 

Solution is accomplished by bringing the material under treat- 
ment into contact with the solvent under favorable circumstances; 
these relate, 1st, to temperature; 2d, to the state of aggregation of 
the solid; 3d, to its position in relation to the solvent. 

Hot liquids dissolve substances with greater facility than do 
cold; with exceptions, among which are lime, its citrate and 
acetate, and chloride of sodium. Though heat favors solution, 
there are no substances wholly insoluble in the cold, which dis- 
solve by the aid of increased temperature. In addition to the 
greater solvent power of hot liquids, the currents produced by the 
process of heating them favor the more rapid solution of the con- 
tained solids, as shaking up the vessel favors the same result. 

To facilitate solution in a small way, mortars are much em- 
ployed; they serve the double purpose of reducing the solid to 
powder, and of facilitating its intimate mixture throughout the 




SATURATION. 555 

liquid. Mortars of porcelain ware (Fig. 184) are most suitable for 
this purpose; they are used as follows: The substance to be dis- 
solved is first placed in the mortar and 
rubbed into a powder, by which the Fig. 184. 

extent of surface to be brought in con- 
tact with the liquid is greatly increased. 
The process of solution proceeds more 
slowly as the liquid becomes more 
nearly saturated, hence a small portion 
of the solvent is first added and tritu- 
rated with the powder ; as soon as this 
portion seems to be nearly saturated, 
it is poured into another vessel, and 

an additional portion Of the Solvent Porcelain mortar. 

added, triturated, and poured off in 

the same way ; a fresh portion again being added, the process is re- 
peated, and so continued till the powder has disappeared. The 
liquids thus obtained, being mixed, furnish a stronger solution 
than could be prepared in the same length of time under the ordi- 
nary circumstances of contact. 

When a weak solution is to be made, especially of a delicate 
chemical substance, like nitrate of silver, a good way is to drop the 
crystals or powder into the liquid previously placed in a clean vial 
of suitable size, to which a cork has been fitted, and to shake it up 
until dissolved. This should only be done in the case of very 
soluble substances, and the shaking should be continued as long as 
any portion remains undissolved. 

A good arrangement for effecting solution by what is called cir- 
culatory displacement, is to place the solid on a perforated diaphragm 
resting beneath the surface of the liquid, or to inclose it in a bag 
of some porous material, and suspend it by a thread in the vessel 
near its top. By this contrivance, that portion of the liquid having 
the greatest solvent power, because the least saturated, is always in 
contact with the solid ; the solution, as it becomes saturated, be- 
comes denser and sinks to the bottom, displacing the portion less 
charged with the solid ingredient, which, in consequence of its less 
specific gravity, tends to the top, thus keeping up a continual cir- 
culation in the fluid favorable to the object in view. In large 
operations in the arts where it is impossible to shake or to stir the 
liquid conveniently, an arrangement based upon this principle is 
adopted, and in smaller pharmaceutical operations Squire's infusion 
mug, figured in a subsequent chapter, will be found to answer a good 
purpose. 

The term saturated, besides its physical and pharmaceutical appli- 
cation as above, is employed to signify that an acid is neutralized 
by an alkali, or vice versa; or, in other words, that an equivalent 
proportion of one substance has combined with an equivalent pro- 
portion of another, for which it has an affinity ; they are then said 
to have saturated each other. The term, when used for this pur- 
pose, may be said to be a strictly chemical one, but when employed 



556 ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION, 

as above, to designate the point at which a liquid ceases to dissolve 
a solid body, it is used in a pharmaceutical sense. It is worthy of 
remark that the saturated solution of one salt is frequently a sol- 
vent for other salts, a quality of great value in the preparation and 
purification of salts in the arts. 

Eapid solution, even when not accompanied by chemical reaction, 
generally causes a reduction of temperature, and thus retards the 
process to a certain extent; this is due to the increase of capacity 
of bodies for caloric, while passing from the solid into the liquid 
state ; or, in other words, to the absorption of heat. This heat 
becomes insensible, and is called latent heat, but it is set free again 
on the body resuming the solid form. 

In arrangements for solutions on a large scale, it becomes im- 
portant to counteract this effect by contrivances for keeping up the 
temperature of the liquid ; this is conveniently accomplished by 
jets of steam or coils of steam pipe. 

Solutions are not confined to solids in liquids. One liquid may 
dissolve in another, as, for instance, ether in water, and essential 
oils in alcohol. When no chemical combination takes place, volume 
and temperature remain unaltered, while chemical combination of 
the two liquids is generally accompanied by a rise of temperature, 
and a condensation of their volume ; the mixing of water with 
strong alcohol and concentrated acids furnish such examples. 

Gases are also capable of being dissolved by liquids, and if they 
are soluble therein to any extent, the process is accompanied by a 
rise of temperature, because the latent heat of the gas becomes 
sensible again, on assuming a denser state of aggregation, hence the 
application of cold or freezing mixtures favors the solubility of the 
gases, by counteracting this sensible heat. An increase of pressure, 
by condensing the volume of a gas, is also favorable to its solution 
in liquids. 

Chloride of ammonium, and carbonate and nitrate of potassium, 
and other saline substances are conveniently reduced by the process 
of granulation, which consists in dissolving the salt in water and 
evaporating to dryness, constantly stirring. The process is only 
applicable to a few articles which are freely soluble and not readily 
decomposed or volatilized by heat. The granulated powders thus 
produced are generally quite different from powders made by me- 
chanical means ; they may be gritty from being composed of small 
crystals, or, in the case of deliquescent salts, they may have a 
globular form from the heat being continued till most if not all 
the water of crystallization has been expelled. 

Many of the insoluble powders are obtained by precipitation ; as, 
for example, precipitated sulphur, prepared by dropping muriatic 
acid into a solution of bisulphide of calcium and hyposulphite of 
calcium; the calcium and chlorine present, uniting with the acid, 
form chloride of calcium and water, the former being extremely 
soluble. The sulphur, which is insoluble, is thus precipitated as a 
fine powder. 

On the same principle, the precipitated carbonate of calcium is 



CLASSIFICATION OF SOLUTIONS. 557 

prepared by adding a solution of carbonate of sodium to a solution 
of chloride of calcium. As a result of the reaction the insoluble 
carbonate of calcium is produced, and is thrown down in the form 
of a powder. 

It is worthy of remark, in regard to these powders generally, 
that they are composed of very small crystals. Their fineness is 
dependent upon the temperature and degree of concentration of 
the liquids when mixed. When the solutions are hot and concen- 
trated, the reaction takes place suddenly, and the powder is very 
fine ; when they are cold and more dilute, the precipitate is de- 
posited gradually, and more perfectly assumes the crystalline form ; 
or if the precipitate is not entirely insoluble, it is deposited in 
crystals from the hot solution on cooling. 

Tartar emetic is obtained in a very fine powder, suitable for pre- 
paring the ointment, by dissolving it in water, so as to form a 
strong solution, and then pouring it into alcohol. The strong 
affinity of water for alcohol causes them to unite, and the tartar 
emetic, being less soluble in the alcoholic liquid, is thrown down 
in an impalpable powder. 

In a similar manner a pure powder of protosulphate of iron may 
be obtained, if its filtered solution, acidulated with sulphuric acid, 
is added to strong alcohol ; the sulphate of the peroxide of iron 
remains in solution, while the protosulphate is precipitated in the 
form of a crystalline, light-greenish powder, which should be 
rapidly dried in a current of air, and is then less prone to oxidation 
than the ordinary crystallized salt. 

Another process for obtaining some powders is that known as 
elutriation. Although the vehicle used is not a solvent, and 
therefore it is not to be properly treated of under this head, still, 
as the process closely affiliates the manipulation of obtaining 
powders by solution, it will be most conveniently here described. 
The article to be powdered is ground in a mortar with a large 
quantity of liquid, and this is poured oft' into a precipitating jar; 
after the subsidence of the finest particles, the clear liquid is again 
returned to the coarser portion, which is ground anew with the 
liquid. The decantation and collection of the powder are continued 
till the process is completed. 

As stated in the beginning of this chapter, the principal effect 
of solution is shown in overcoming the cohesion of solids, and this 
is resorted to in obtaining granulated powders from various saline 
substances. 

Classification of Solutions. 

Until the revision of the national standard in 1860, the aqueous 
and a few of the alcoholic solutions (tinctures) were introduced 
throughout the work under the heads of the several chemical sub- 
stances which they contain, an arrangement adhered to in this 
treatise as most consistent with its plan. 

The strict alphabetical arrangement of the Pharmacopoeia, and 



558 



OX SOLUTION AND FILTRATION, 



the intentional avoidance of a scientific classification, have induced 
a change in that work by which all aqueous officinal solutions are 
given under one head, named Liquores. These are classified under 
several subordinate heads in the syllabus which follows. 

The waters, including solutions of essential oils and of gases in 
water, constitute a separate class in the Pharmacopoeia; those con 
taining solid and liquid essential oils are treated of under that head 
in this work, but, for obvious reasons, the others are introduced 
under their several chemical bases. 

Of the alcoholic, oily, and ethereal solutions, the Pharmacopoeia 
makes the several classes tinctures, wines, spirits, and liniments, 
and others, as Fluid Extracts, concentrated by evaporation, with 
which convenient arrangement this treatise mainly coincides; 
there is, however, no more familiar and convenient distinction be- 
tween preparations, whether in solid or liquid form, thau that 
which divides those derived from plants and parts of plants, from 
substances of mineral origin ; this distinction, which is not so com- 
pletely maintained in the Pharmacopoeia, owing to its arrangement 
as above described, is carried out in the plan of this work. 

For full directions for the preparation and properties of the solu- 
tions in water, see the several chemical heads under which they 
occur in Part III., and the extemporaneous prescriptions in Part VI. 

General View of the Officinal Solutions. 
Class 1st. — In Water. {Liquores and Aquo?.) U. S. P. 

1st Group. — Made by simple solution. 



a, of Fixed Bases. 










Contents, etc. 


Dose. 


Properties, etc. 


Liquor Potassii (2d Process) 
" Calcis .... 


H KHO toOj 
Ca2HO-{-aq., saturated 




Antacid, Antili* 
thic. 

Antacid, Astrin- 
gent. 



b, of Salts. 










Contents, etc. 


Dose. 
TT^ v 

Tr\iij to x 


Properties, etc. 


Liquor Barii Chloridi . 
" Morphiae Sulphatis 
" Potassii Permangan. 
" Sodii Arseniatis 


|j BaCl+f^iij aq 
gr. j to f ^j aq 
K 2 Mn 2 8 gr. 64 to aq Oj 
Na 4 As 2 7 gr. iv to f §j 


Alterative. 
Narcotic. 
Disinfectant. 
Alterative. 



2d Group. — Made by chemical processes. 



a, of Fixed Bases. 










Contents, etc. 


Dose. 


Properties, etc. 


Liquor Potassse .... 
" Sodse 


5.8 per cent. KHO 
5 7 " NaHO 


TT\,X 

r^x 


Antacid, Anti- 
iithic. 
do 



OFFICINAL SOLUTIONS. 








Cedents, e- 


Dose 


?::;e:::r; r.: 


Liquor Ammonii Ace: 


Dil. Ac -f- Ammon. Carb. 


"5-- 




" Arsenici Chloridi . 


.., : : gi n to fgj 


: : s 


:ive. 


M et E 








I:.-: 


Asl 3 -f- HgL, in aq 


i^v 


".: 


rili . . 


5 ".: : 5'.;: 


" -iz 


do 


" Ferri Ch'.oriii . 


*t. : ; :: f§j 


10 T 


Astringent. 


■• Citratifi . . 


5 55 Fe-0:Ciinf=j 






•• Nitratu . . 


F« S . - in aq 


"'.- 


Tonic astring't. 


" • Sabsulphatu 


An excess of Fe 




i l : 1 

cans:::. 


" •• Venolphatis 


69 grs. Fe 2 3 in f §j 




Use! to trr:::. 
Fe/yU). 


Hjdrargyi 


ag sol., sp. gr. 2.1 




ura Ung. 
Hvlr. Nitrat. 


Iodinii Compc: 


I gr smss-f-SI gr. xh : 


- ~ 


Alterative, re- 




:'S: 




s .vent. 


pfagngm CStratis . 


1 Ig . :— Sjrap, etc. 


1 bott. 


Cathai 


Plumbi Subace: 


PbO in excess 




In making lead 
■water. 


" fl ■ ba : e 1 


f Jiij to Oj aq 




Sedative, exter- 
: llv 

- 1 . ~ 7 


PotasBn Aneniiu 


gr. iv to f §j (col'd) 


rr L x 


•' Citratu . 


2KHC0 3 — Ci — aq 


-5- 


Refrigerant. 


" Sods C".:rinata . 


4-H ' . 






U Ferri lodidi .• . 

-. ■ ; r - 


1 . _ _ :. ... :: : 5 syrop 


T^xv 


■Iterative, 




Con.en.s. eta 


Dose. 


7: ertiee 


Aqua A >liei . 


l .:'.:; .-_.. .'. 


1 j- i : : 


eptie. 


! . :aici . . 


in aq 


ad. lib. 


irateful vehicle. 


■• Chlorinii .... 


Saturated with CI 




infectant. 


•• Ammonias Fortior . 


26 per ;-: I\H 3 sp. gr. .900 




Caus:. 
tic. 
Rubefacient. 


• Ammonite .... 


10 per cent. NH 3 sp. g: 




Class 2d.—. 


I . . >'.;.. 




efe. 


Contents, etc. 


: mk 


i et: 


_s Ammonias . . . 


Caustic NH S in Alcohol 


r L xx 


As a solvent, etc. 


Aromaticus 


Carbonate and Aromatics 


: O 55 


. 1^ stimu- 


I inet Ferri Chloridi . . 


Fe„C1 3 in Alcohol 


ft] XX 


ronie, Haematic. 


lodmii .... 


3- I : 1 5] Alcohol 




Z:::::: .7. iis- 
ient 


" Comp. . . 


gr. xv I -f- gr. xxx KI to f§j 


n\ XV 


i: 


^:::~:::':i >:.: ::..= _ -lit _. 


ti Camph. and Stim. Oils 




do stimulant. 


Class 3d.— In Win*. 




Contents, efe. 


I : ;f 


Properties, efe. 


'■":--_ ALiiniLii . . 


gr. ij Tart. Ant. et Pot. : : :z; 


: o0 


Bed --..~r I ia> 
pfa :retic. 


•■ Fori 


Citrate cr Tartrate 


:-: ; 


Tonic. 


Ferri ef Qi 


Citrate. Quinia, and Iron 


f#j 


Tonic. 



560 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION, 



Class 4th. — In Ethers. 





Contents, etc. 


Dose. 


Properties, etc. 


Collodium 

Liquor Gutta Perchge . 


Nitrated Cotton in Ether 
In Chloroform 




Externally, a ve- 
hicle. 
A soothing film. 



See also Linimenta, Collyria, etc. 

Filtration and Straining. — The object of this process is to sepa- 
rate any undissolved or precipitated substance suspended in a liquid 
from the liquid itself. When the liquid is viscid, and contains 
only motes of an appreciable size, as, for instance, when a syrup has 
been prepared from sugar contaminated with insoluble impurities, 
a sufficient filter may be constructed of flannel or Canton flannel by 
folding over a square piece in the manner indicated in the figure, 
the line c d being laid over the line c a, and united by a seam ; the 



Fig. 185. 



Fte. 186. 





Flannel strainer. 



bag thus formed is pointed at c, and open from a to b, the line a c 
being lapped over to form the seam. In using this strainer, the 
long end projecting toward the point 6, beyond the dotted line ef, 
may be turned over the side of the vessel, by which the strainer 
will be kept in its place while the liquid is poured into the opening 
at the top. 

In small operations this may be superseded by stretching a piece 
of flannel or other suitable material over the top of a funnel, and 
pouring the liquid upon it. "With a viscid material this will only 
partially succeed, especially if the strainer sinks into direct contact 
with the sides of the funnel. In chemical processes the method of 
stretching a strainer across a square wooden frame, and suspending 
this over an open vessel, is resorted to, but without the advantage 
of pressure which is obtained by the use of the deeper conical bag. 
Bags of felt may be obtained of the hatters, which are very well 
adapted to the filtration of oils ; their shape fits them to being sus- 
pended over the receiving vessel, properly protected from the dust. 



FILTRATION AND STRAINING, 



561 



Figs. 187 and 188 represent an apparatus I have been using for 
sometime past for straining syrups. Fig. 187 is a tin bucket into 
which a funnel-shaped wire support, Fig. 188, is suspended, resting 



Fis. 187. 



Fig. 188. 



Fis. 189. 





Apparatus for straining syrups, etc. 



Physick's jelly strainer. 




on the bucket by a projecting rim at the top ; a jelly bag is here 
unnecessary, as a sufficiently large square or round piece of flannel 
laid upon the wires will assume a convenient position for use. 

Fig. 189 represents in section a contrivance for straining jellies, 
attributed to the late Dr. Physick, and 
made by Isaac S. Williams, of Philadel- 
phia. A wire support fits into a funnel, 
which is soldered into a vessel designed to 
be kept full of hot water, so as to prevent 
the cooling and thickening of the jelly 
during straining. 

Fig. 190 exhibits a filter for fixed oils, 
also well adapted to viscid liquids and 
syrups. The upper cylindrical vessel of 
tinned iron, A, is about 22 inches high and 
10 inches in diameter, with a flanch rim 
soldered on the bottom, of rather less dia- 
meter and about an inch wide, so as to fit 
firmly into the open top of another cylin- 
drical vessel B, of the same diameter, 18 
inches high. The upper vessel is furnished 
with a lid, and with an L-shaped tube and 
stopcock c, which penetrates the side close 
to the bottom, and fits into another tube d 
at e, which tube opens into the lower ves- 
sel close to its base, and is further secured 
to B by a tubular stay. The filtering me- 
dium is a cone of hat felt, projecting up- 
wards from near the bottom of the lower 
vessel. This is arranged on a projecting 
ledge, penetrated with six holes with 
threads cut in them, in which fit pointed wamer's on Alter. 

36 






562 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION, 



Tig. 191. 



thumb-screws with shoulders. On this ring fits a similar one of 
somewhat less diameter, furnished with corresponding holes, 
through which the thumb-screws readily pass as far as the shoulders, 
and are thus capable of binding the two rings closely together. 
The felt filter, having been cut to the diameter of the vessel, is 
slipped down so as to rest evenly upon the lower ring, the upper is 
then placed over it so as to avoid overlapping of the felt, and then 
the thumb-screws, being pressed through the felt, are securely 
screwed into the lower ring, which binds the rings so closely as to 
make a tight joint ; the lower vessel is also supplied with a stop- 
cock at /to draw off the filtered oil. The stopcock e being closed, 
the upper vessel is fitted in its place, and the tube joint e rendered 
tight by wrapping with isinglass plaster; when this is dry the 
upper vessel is filled with the oil and the stopcock c opened. The 
apparatus should be placed near a source of heat, so that it may 
reach 120° F., and as the filtered oil accumulates above the felt, it 
should be drawn off so as not to retard the process. The advantage 
is gained in this apparatus of the impurities settling away from the 
filter rather than accumulating upon it. It is the 
invention of William B,. Warner, of Philadelphia. 
One of this size is capable of filtering a barrel of 
oil in a day. 

All the advantages of this apparatus may be 
obtained and the upper vessel done away with, by 
attaching a pipe to a barrel or any other vessel in 
which the oil is kept, it having been raised to a 
shelf or some place high enough to give a pressure 
adequate to force the oil through. 

A most useful strainer where large quantities of 
syrup are to be strained is made of cotton flannel 
by sewing it into the shape of a long bag, termi- 
nating in a point, to the inner surface of which at 
the point a strong tape loop is sewed. When used 
the larger end is bound securely to a wide-mouthed 
tin funnel, and this rests upon the top of a tall 
cylinder of tin, or is supported in a barrel near the 
top, the loop is drawn up to the top of the funnel and a bar of 
wood is slipped through it, the ends resting upon the sides of the 
funnel. In this way a very large extent of filtering surface is ob- 
tained, which being kept from the cooling effects of the atmos- 
phere and from currents of air, no loss is sustained by evaporation. 
The accompanying figure shows a section of this apparatus. 

This process is called straining, though a kind of filtration. In 
pharmacy, infusions, decoctions, syrups, fixed oils, and melted 
ointments are subjected to it in order to separate foreign ingre- 
dients. They pass through the strainer with much greater facility 
when quite hot, though in the case of the fixed oils and syrups, 
clearer products are obtained by conducting the operation in the 
cold, and by using several thicknesses of flannel, or by employing 




THE SIPHON". 



563 



Canton flannel with the nap on the inside. Coarse linen is some- 
times better than flannel, especially when considerable pressure is 
to be employed, as in extracting the juice from the pulp in making 
fruit syrups. 

Straining differs from clarification in its mechanical action. The 
latter term is applied where the impurities to be separated are de- 
posited on account of their greater specific gravity, or by being 
rendered heavier by the application of heat, or where, by the ad- 
dition of a foreign substance, they are aggregated together and 
separated as a coagulum. 

When the precipitate is heavy, or the coagulum obtained is suffi- 
ciently compact to be readily removed from the surface, the liquid 
may be poured off clear, frequently to almost the last drop, by the 
aid of a precipitation jar. The same object may be attained 
by the use of a well chosen w r ide-mouth packing Dottle, with a 
round shoulder, into the concavity of which the precipitate sub- 
sides, while the liquid is quietly poured off. In separating a clear 



Fig. 192. 



Fig. 193. 





supernatant liquid from a deposited precipitate, or for drawing off 
liquids from vessels ill adapted to decantation, a siphon (Figs. 192 
and 193) may be advantageously employed. 

The mode of using this instrument is to insert the shorter leg 
in the liquid, to apply the finger to the open end of the longer leg, 
and then draw the whole tube full of the liquid by sucking at the 
mouth-piece ; when this is done, the finger is withdrawn, and 
the liquid will commence to flow, and continue till it reaches 
the same level in the receiving vessel that it has in the other. 
This current is caused by the unequal weight of the columns 
of liquid in the two limbs of the siphon. An instrument of this 
kind may be replaced by an ordinary bent tube, one end of which 
enters a common long-necked farina cologne bottle, at its largest 
diameter, the bottom having been evenly cracked off. The connec- 
tion is made tight by a cork perforated to receive the siphon tube, 
and a shorter one to be used for sucking the air; in filling it, the 



564 



ON" SOLUTION" AND FILTRATION. 



mouth of the bottle will then be the orifice through which the 
liquid will flow out when in action, and must of course be lower 
than the other leg, immersed in the liquid. 

The plain siphon (Fig. 193) is constructed by simply bending an 
ordinary piece of glass tube of the requisite size over a spirit or 
gas lamp. The inconvenience in its use arises from the difficulty 
of filling it with the liquid beforehand. It might be filled with 
water, but that would dilute the preparation. If a small quantity 
has been already drawn off, the siphon may be filled by inverting 
it, and pouring into its long end from a graduated measure, then 
applying the end of the finger to prevent its running out, and in- 
serting the short limb in the liquid to be drawn off. 

These instruments are made of glass or metal, or an ordinary 
flexible tube of elastic gum will serve a good purpose, with the 
advantage which its flexibility secures of conducting the liquid 
into any receiver, provided it is lower than the containing vessel. 

Some further uses of siphons will be found in the Preliminary 
Chapter on Inorganic Chemicals. Part III. 

For ordinary aqueous, alcoholic, and ethereal liquids, the process 
of filtration, employing the term in its more limited sense, is used, 
the filtering medium being paper. The best filtering paper is made 
from cotton or linen rags, and is porous and free from any kind of 
glazing; the kind taken from woollen materials seems better 
adapted to viscid liquids, being thicker and more porous, but sel- 
dom free from coloring matter. It is, also, more soluble in alka- 
line solutions, and unfit for filtering such. Good filtering paper for 
delicate analytical processes should contain no soluble matter, 
and should not give more than ^1-$ to 5 |^ of its weight of ashes ; 
soluble matter, if present, may be removed by washing it, first 
with very dilute hydrochloric acid, and secondly with distilled 
water. 



Fig. 194. 



Fig. 195. 



y\ f 



d\ \c> 



.d a 



PLAITED FILTERS. 



565 



The construction of paper filters is an extremely simple tiling 
when once learned, and is easily taught the student by a practical 
demonstration ; it is, nevertheless, a difficult thing to describe 
clearly without giving to it more space than may appear at first sight 
due to so small a matter. 

There are two kinds of paper filters, the plain and plaited ; the 
latter of which is to be preferred, the chief advantage of the plain 
filter being where we desire to collect the solid ingredient present 
in the liquid, and to remove it afterwards from the paper ; owing 
to its being so readily folded, it is in very common use. # 

The method of folding the plain filter is similar to the first steps 
to be taken in folding the plaited filter. In the following descrip- 
tion I have endeavored to convey an idea of this process. 

A square piece of filtering paper, abed (Fig. 194), is folded over 
in the middle, so as to form a crease at the line ef; the edge c d 
being laid directly over a b. The parallelogram, a b e /, represents 
the paper thus folded; the line bf being now laid upon the line ae 9 
a crease is formed as represented by the line g h (Fig. 195); the 
folded paper, if opened, makes a cone, having 
the point h at its base, and by cutting off the 
projecting angle a, by a curved line from e to 
g, a plain filter will be the result, as shown in 
Fig. 196. 

The plaited filter is made as follows: Take 
the paper before being cut, as above, and 
having opened it again so as to expose the 
parallelogram, the line e h (Fig. 197) is laid 
upon the line c A, forming a crease at a A. 
This being opened again, the line e h is laid 
upon the line a A, producing an additional 
crease at g h (Fig. 198). The crease j A (Fig. 199) is next to be 
formed by folding a A upon the middle dotted line (Fig. 199), as 
shown in Fig. 200. 



Fig. 196. 




Tiff. 197 



Fig. 198. 




One-half of the parallelogram having thus been creased, we pro- 
ceed to form on the other the corresponding creases m A, b A, and 
k A (Fig. 201), all of which are in one direction, forming receding 
angles. The next thing to be done is to divide the eight sections 
thus formed by a crease through each in the opposite direction. To 
do this, the edge / A is laid on crease b A, and then turned back, as 



566 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION. 



shown in Fig. 202, producing the crease n h. In the same way an 
intermediate crease is formed in each of the spaces. This is better 



Fig. 199. 



i\ A 

Nv • \ 



*!\ 




accomplished by turning the paper over, so that each of the receding 
angles shall project upward, and in this way be more readily brought 




together, as shown in Fig. 203, producing a receding angle in form- 
ing the intermediate creases. 



Fig. 203. 




The paper will now have the appearance of a fan, represented by 
Fig. 204, folding it up in each of its creases like a shut fan (Fig. 
205). The projecting points, a and b, should be clipped off with a 




567 



Fig. 205. 




pair of scissors at the dotted line, so that when 

introduced into the funnel the filter should 

not project above its upper edge, otherwise 

the projecting paper will absorb the liquid 

by capillary attraction, and induce a constant evaporation, if the 

liquid be volatile, or prevent the complete washing out of soluble 

substances. Upon opening the originally doubled halves made by 

the first fold at e f (Fig. 194), it 

will be found to present the ap- Fig. 206. 

pearance indicated in Fig. 206. 

In the filter, as thus construct- 
ed, the creases occur alternately, 
except near the line ef, where the 
two creases occurring next each 
other are in the same direction. 
Sometimes, to obviate this, the 
space intervening between these is 
folded backwards, as shown in 
the figure, so as to make a narrow 
crease in the opposite direction. 

The plaited filter, as thus 
formed, is exceedingly useful for 
general purposes, exposing the en- 
tire surface of the paper to the action of the liquid, and favoring 
its unobstructed passage into the neck of the funnel. 

A funnel, such as described and figured in the Preliminary 
Chapter, is employed for supporting a filter of either kind, and is, 
as there stated, better adapted to ordinary use when grooved on its 
inner surface, so as to allow the free downward passage of the 
liquid, after it has permeated the paper, and a groove on the out- 




568 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION. 



side of the tube, so that, when inserted tightly into the neck of a 
bottle, the air within may find ready egress. 

If the tube of the funnel is smooth and ungrooved, a small plug- 
get of folded paper, a piece of thick twine, or a small wedge-shaped 
splinter of wood, should be inserted in the neck of the bottle, along 
with the tube of the funnel; this will obviate one of the most com- 
mon annoyances connected with filtration. 

In filtering into an open vessel, it is well to place the lower ex- 
tremity of the funnel in contact with the side of the vessel, thus 
preventing any inconvenience from the liquid splashing on the 
sides or over the top, and by creating a downward stream, pro- 
moting the free and rapid passage, of the filtrate. 

The paper of which the filter is formed, especially if very porous, 
is liable to be weakened by being plaited as above described ; it is 
therefore advised not to make the creases firmly down to the very 
point, but rather to leave the terminus of an undefined shape ; and 
when there is danger of breakage, either from the great weight of 
the liquid or from the weakness of the paper at its point, a very 
small plain filter may be advantageously placed under the point at 
the lowest extremity of the funnel ; this is called a cap, and acts as 
a support to the weakest and most exposed part of the filter. 




Fig. 208. 




Section of a well formed funnel. 



Filter support. 



The proper shape of a funnel for filtration is shown in section at 
Fig. 207. The lines a b and c b are straight, and a b c and acb are 
angles of 60°, making an equilateral triangle, into which the filter 
just described will fit perfectly. 

In consequence of the unequal degree of firmness of the different 
creases, some of these are liable to float up from the sides of the 
funnel, to obviate which a filter weight has been invented, which 
consists of a wire frame of the shape of the funnel, and with a wire 
for each crease ; this is laid upon the filter, and keeps it perfectly 
in its place. 

Fig. 208 is a filter support adapted to the rapid passage of liquids 
in filtration ; it, however, requires to be used in connection with an 



FILTERING OF OILS. 



569 



open or wide-mouth receiving vessel or a funnel, otherwise the 
liquid might not be perfectly collected as it passes downwards. 

The filtration of small quantities of liquid, as in chemical experi- 
ments, may be performed without a funnel or filter support by in- 
serting a plain filter directly into the open top of a beaker glass or 
other open vessel, or into a ring of glass or earthenware laid on top 
of an open vessel ; a filter of this kind, that w T ill hold one fluid- 
ounce, will filter many ounces of certain liquids in an hour. 

When paper filters are of large dimensions, or used for fluids 
which soften the texture of the paper, or for collecting heavy pow- 
ders or metallic precipitates, they may be supported on linen or 
cotton filters of similar shape. This is best done by folding the 
cloth with the paper, and in the same way as would be done with 
doubled paper, observing to place them in the funnel so as to be in 
perfect contact toward the bottom. 

An ingenious filter, invented by E. Waters, Troy, New York, 
consists of a circular sheet of paper of double thickness, composed 
of loose cotton and woollen fibre, and contains a piece of lace about 
four inches square covering the point of the filter ; this is intro- 
duced between the sheets wdien they are "couched," so that the 
pulp unites through the meshes of the lace, and thus effectually 
overcomes the difficulty of breaking. An additional process dis- 
covered by the inventor obviates the liability to break at the point 
by being folded, a difficulty which is increased in proportion to the 
thickness of the paper. 

Oils are filtered on a small scale in the way already described for 
other liquids, but in large quantities may be passed through felt 
hat bodies, which are to be had in the large cities generally, or 
through bags of Canton flannel, which are usually 
made about twelve or fifteen inches in diameter, 
and from four to eight feet long. These may be 
inclosed in bottomless casings or bags of coarse 
canvas, about five to eight inches in diameter, for 
the purpose of condensing a great extent of filter- 
ing surface into the smallest possible space. Se- 
veral of these bags secured on the inside to the 
bottom of a tinned cistern are inclosed in a closet 
with suitable arrangements for maintaining a 
slightly elevated temperature, though this is not 
always desirable, and the oil is introduced from 
above, and collected as it passes from the filter. 
For further particulars on the filtration of oils, 
etc., see Coolers Cyclopedia of Practical Receipts, 
London, 1856. 

In filtering very volatile liquids, particularly in 
hot weather, some contrivance must be resorted 
to to prevent evaporation from the wide surface 
exposed, while, at the same time, the escape 
of air from the receiving vessel must be provided niter for volatile 
for. The drawing here given (Fig. 209), from liquids. 



Fig. 209. 




570 



ON SOLUTION AND FILTRATION, 



Mohr & Eedwood, represents an arrangement of the kind. The 
glass funnel is fitted by a cork into the receiving vessel ; its top 
is ground to a smooth surface, on which is laid a plate of glass, 
c ; a little simple cerate will furnish a good luting ; b is a very 
small glass tube laid down the inside of the funnel between it 
and the filter, and so twisted at its lower end as to be supported 
in its place ; this forms a connection between the air below and 
that above the liquid, without allowing any evaporation. A very 
generally useful apparatus for this purpose, and for percolation 

Fig. 210. 




Filtering and percolating apparatus. 

also, is the filtering and percolating apparatus of Mr. E. H. Hance, 
shown in Fig. 210 ; it consists of a cylindrical vessel of glass, stone- 
ware, or tin, having a lid which can be rendered air-tight, and has 
a flange near the top upon which the funnel or percolator can rest ; 
a faucet at the side near the bottom enables the operator to draw ofF 
the liquid when desirable. 

The use of a guiding rod in pouring liquid upon a filter is found 
a great convenience ; a glass rod is well suited to this purpose. 

The lower extremity is directed 
against the side of the filter near 
the apex, while the middle portion 
is placed against the mouth of the 
vessel, as shown in the drawing ; 
by this means the stream is made 
to fall steadily, and not with too 
great force, and against the strong- 
est part of the filter; the liquid 
being poured is also prevented 
from running back upon the con- 
taining vessel, and thus wasting, a 
very annoying circumstance, which 
is especially liable to occur when 
the vessel, whether a flask, a vial, 
or an evaporating dish, is furnished 
with no lip, or a very poor one, for pouring, 

A useful precaution in pouring liquids from bottles may be men- 
tioned in this connection. It nearly always happens that the last 



(£^=t§& 




Pouring with a guiding rod. 



THE MEDICATED WATERS. 571 

drop or two of the liquid being poured remains on the lip of the 
bottle, and is liable, if the lip is ill formed, to run down the out- 
side ; this may be obviated by touching the stopper to the edge 
where the liquid is collected, thus transferring this drop to the end 
of the stopper previous to inserting it in the neck of the bottle. 

Much of the filtration in pharmacy has for its object the separa- 
tion of the insoluble ligneous portions of vegetable medicines, after 
they have been sufficiently macerated. A practical difficulty in 
this case is deserving of mention here. If a measured portion, say 
one pint of liquid, has been macerated with two, four, or six ounces 
of a vegetable substance for the purpose of making a tincture.or 
infusion, and, after the proper lapse of time, the whole is thrown 
upon a filter, the clear liquid that will pass will measure as much 
less than a pint as the vegetable substance holds by its capillary 
attraction. In order to obtain the whole quantity desired, some 
have diluted the filtered liquid till it reached precisely the required 
measure; but by the discovery of the principle of displacement {see 
Chapter VI.), it is found that an additional portion of liquid, if 
presented to the saturated powder, under favorable circumstances, 
will displace the portion of the original menstruum remaining in 
its pores. To secure this is more important from the fact that it is 
usually most highly impregnated with the active principles of the 
plant ; and, therefore, in transferring the macerated preparation to 
a filter, the swollen mass of powder should be carefully compacted 
into the filter, and after the liquid has drained off, a fresh portion 
of similar liquid should be added till the preparation measures the 
quantity originally intended. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE MEDICATED WATERS. 



Aqu^e, U. S. P. (AQUiE Medicate, U. S. P. 1850.) 

These are generally solutions in water of the essential oils, made 
by triturating the latter with a third substance (carbonate of mag- 
nesium, usually), which, either by dividing them mechanically, and 
thus presenting them to the water under favorable circumstances, 
or by a chemical union w T ith them, renders them soluble to a limited 
extent, and imparts their sensible properties to the medicated 
waters thus formed. 

A better result is often obtained by mixing the fresh herb with 
a quantity of waiter in an apparatus for distillation, and allowing 
them to remain in contact until the water has, to a certain extent, 
dissolved out the essential oil, extractive matter, coloring principle, 
etc., and then, by the application of heat, volatilizing the water 
and the essential oil, and collecting them in a refrigerated receiver. 



572 



THE MEDICATED WATERS. 



If the oil is in excess, it will be found, on standing, to collect on 
the surface of the liquid in the receiver, but a certain amount is 
retained in solution by the water, imparting to it the fragrance 
peculiar to the herb employed. There are undoubtedly other vola- 
tile principles present in odorous plants besides the essential oils, 
for without exception medicated waters prepared directly from the 
plant by distillation, possess milder and more pleasant properties 
than when prepared from the corresponding essential oils. 

When distilled in tin condensers, these preparations are con- 
taminated with small portions of the metal, which they deposit by 
age. (See chapters on Distillation and on Essential or Volatile 
Oils.) 

In the preparation of extemporaneous solutions or mixtures, the 
medicated waters are very convenient ; but where the one required 
is not at hand, it may generally be substituted by dropping the 
essential oil on a small piece of sugar, or, if in a mixture contain- 
ing gum, upon the powdered gum, and triturating with a sufficient 
quantity of water. The • proportion of the oil used, as shown in 
the table, is in all cases, excepting that of the bitter almond water 
and creasote water, one minim (frequently replaced by two drops) 
of the oil to one fluidounce of the liquid. 

Aqujb. 

(Unofficinal in Italics.) 

First Class. — Prepared by trituration with Carbonate of Magnesium 
(except Aq. Creasoti), which is afterivards separated by filtration. 



Officinal name. 


Proportion. 


Uses and doses. 


Aqua acidi carbolici 


5jx glycerite of carb. acid in Oj 


Antiseptic. 


" camphorse 


gij to Oij = 2.13 grains to fgj 


Variously used, f 5jss. 


" amygdalae amarse 


v\ xvj oil to Oij = 1 drop to f t |j 


Nervous sedative, f^ss. 


" anisi 


Tt\, xv oil to Oj = 2 drops to f 3g 


Aromatic adjuvant, f ^j 


" cinnamomi 


do. = do. 


do. do. 


" foeniculi 


do. = do. 


do. do. 


" menthse piperita 


do. = do. 


do. do. 


" " viridis 


do. = do. 


do. do. 


" creasoti 


f 5j to Oj = 6 drops to f 3J 


Antiseptic, f gij, and as a 
lotion. 


" chlorinii 


f §j should oxidize gr. x FeS0 4 7H 2 





Second Class. — Prepared by distillation from the drug which has been 

macerated in water. 



Officinal name. 


Proportion. 


Uses and doses. ' 


Aqua rosse 


§xij to Oiv, distil. Oij 




Vehicle in collyria. 


" sambuci 


ffiiss to Oiiss, distil. Oss 




do. do. 


" aurantii florum 


§xij to Oiv, distil. Oij 




Sedative adjuvant, f^ss. 


" lauro-cerasi 


ffij to Oiiss, distil. Oj 




Nerv. sedative, f5ss to f^j. 


" cinnamomi 


3xviij to Cong, ij, distil. 


Cong, j 


Adjuvant, sweet taste, f^j. 


" foeniculi 


do. do. 




do. little used, do. 


" menthae piperitse 


do. do. 




Elegant carminative, do. 


" " viridis 


do. do 




do. do. do. 



THE MEDICATED WATERS. 573 

"Working Formulas from the U. S. Pharmacopeia. 

Aqua Acidi Carbolici, U. S. P. (Carbo-lic Acid Water.) 

Take of Carbolic acid, ten fluidrachms. 

Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the glycerite of carbolic acid with a sufficient quantity of 
distilled water to make the mixture measure a pint. 

Aqua Amygdala? Amara?, IT. S. P. (Bitter Almond Water.) 

Take of Oil of bitter almond, sixteen minims. 
Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Bub the oil, first with the carbonate of magnesium, then with 
the water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 

Aqua Anisi, U. S. P. (Anise Water.) 

Take of Oil of anise, half a nuidrachm. 

Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Rub the oil first with the carbonate of magnesium, and then 
with the water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 

Aqua Cinnamomi, U. S. P. (Cinnamon Water.) 

Take of Oil of cinnamon, half a nuidrachm. 

Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Pub the oil, first with the carbonate 01 magnesium, then with the 
water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 

Aqua Fceniculi, U. S. P. (Fennel Water.) 

Take of Oil of fennel, half a nuidrachm. 

Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Rub the oil, first with the carbonate of magnesium, then with the 
water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 

Aqua Mentha? Piperita?, U. S. P. (Peppermint Water.) 

Take of Oil of peppermint, half a nuidrachm. 
Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Rub the oil, first with the carbonate of magnesium, then with the 
water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 

Aqua Mentha? Viridis, U. S. P. (Spearmint Water.) 

Take of Oil of spearmint, half a nuidrachm. 

Carbonate of magnesium, sixty grains. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Rub the oil, first with the carbonate of magnesium, then with the 
water, gradually added, and filter through paper. 



574 THE MEDICATED WATERS. 

Aqua Camphorce, IT. S. P. (Camphor Water.) 

Take of Camphor, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Alcohol, forty minims. 
Carbonate of magnesium, half a troyounce. 
Distilled water, two pints. 

Bub the camphor, first with the alcohol, then with the carbonate 
of magnesium, and lastly with the water, gradually added ; then 
filter through paper. 

In making camphor water, the chief point to be observed is to 
secure the complete division of the camphor ; this is accomplished 
by triturating it with alcohol, which brings it into a pasty mass; 
this mass must now be brought completely between the triturating 
surfaces of the pestle and mortar, for if any portion escapes it will 
be lumpy and granular, and not in a favorable condition for solu- 
tion. The carbonate of magnesium may be triturated with the 
moist camphor before it has passed into the condition of a powder, 
and after thorough incorporation the whole may be passed through 
a fine sieve ; the water is then gradually added. The undissolved 
carbonate and camphor should be thrown on the filter with the 
first portion of the liquid, so that it may be percolated by the 
liquid during its filtration. 

A simple test for the waters prepared with carbonate of mag- 
nesium is a small portion of calomel triturated with the water in 
question. If made with carbonate of magnesium, a portion of the 
calomel is reduced to black oxide, showing with the calomel a 
brownish color; no such change takes place with distilled waters. 

Aqua Acidi Carbonici. (See page 149, Carbonic Acid.) 

Aqua Chlorinii. (See page 133, under head of Preparations of 

Chlorine.) 

Aqua Creasoti, TJ. S. P. (Creasote "Water.) 

Take of Creasote, a fluidrachm. 
Distilled water, a pint. 

Mix them, and agitate the mixture until the creasote is dissolved. 

Creasote water is a new officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia of 
1860; the comparative solubility of the oil in water obviates the 
necessity for trituration as in the other instances. Creasote is 
adapted to both internal and external use in a great variety of 
cases detailed in works on therapeutics and the practice. This 
preparation is stronger than the creasote water heretofore in gene- 
ral use, and though adapted to many external applications, it 
should be somewhat diluted for use internally, as in excessive 
nausea, for which it is in much esteem. 

REMARKS ON SECOND CLASS. 
(See Chapter on Distillation.) 

Hose-water is very much employed in prescription for the prepa- 
ration of solutions of nitrate of silver, as a substitute for distilled 
water. It should be remembered, however, that it is not as de- 
sirable a solvent for the silver salt as pure distilled water. This 



DISTILLED WATERS. Did 

practice may have arisen from the comparative scarcity of distilled 
water in former times-, while distilled rose-water was easily ob- 
tained. It is liable to undergo a change, depositing a sediment, 
and becoming quite sour if long kept, especially in warm weather. 
On this account, and in consequence of the greater facility and 
cheapness of the process, some pharmacists make rose-water in the 
same way as the other medicated waters, by triturating the oil or 
attar of rose with magnesia, and then with water, and afterwards 
filtering. The jjroportions usually employed are four drops of the 
oil to a pint of water; when made in this way, however, it is not 
so well adapted to the uses above mentioned, though suitable for 
flavoring pastry. 

The Pharmacopoeia directs that 48 troyounces recent pale rose 
and 16 pints of water be mixed, and 8 pints be distilled off. 

It is important in making it by this process to guard against 
confounding the genuine attar of rose with oil of rose geranium, 
and other substitutes. 

The most conspicuous instance of the superiority of distilled 
over ordinary triturated medicated waters, is furnished by cinna- 
mon-water, which, when made by distilling from Chinese or Ceylon 
cinnamon, possesses a decidedly sweet taste, while that from the vola- 
tile oil is more pungent, and destitute of sweetness to the palate. 

The Distilled Water of Elder Flowers is a very delicate vehicle 
for saline substances in solution for collyria. It is much used in 
Europe, but is seldom kept by our pharmacists, rose-water being 
used for the same purpose. 

Orange-flower Water. — A well-known and delightful perfume, im- 
ported from France and Italy, and obtained by distillation from 
the flowers of the bitter orange tree. It is one of the most agree- 
able of flavors for medicinal preparations, though, until recently, 
confined almost entirely to the purposes of the perfumer. This is 
sometimes imitated by dissolving the oil of neroli of commerce in 
water, which furnishes a poor substitute for the true article. Ac- 
cording to Gobly, this sophistication may be detected by the dis- 
tilled water of orange-flower producing a rose color on the addition 
of 1 part of sulphuric and 2 nitric acid to 3 of water. Its sedative 
effects, which are not generally known in this country, and not no- 
ticed in our works on materia medica, adapt it especially to use in 
nervous affections. In doses of a tablespoonful it is found to allay 
nervous irritability and produce refreshing sleep. The same propor- 
tions and method are directed for this preparation as for rose-water. 

Peach Water, which is chiefly used as a flavor in cooking, is made 
by a similar process from the leaves of the Persica Vulgaris s. Amyg- 
dalis Persica. It is generally superseded, though not without dis- 
advantage, by the officinal aqua amygdalce amarce. 

Cherry-laurel Water, officinal in some of the European Pharma- 
copoeias, is directed to be made by distilling one pound of fresh- 
bruised leaves of cherry-laurel with water till one pint (Imperial 
measure) of the distilled water is obtained. To this the Edinburgh 
College directs the addition of an ounce of comp. spt. of lavender, 



576 ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 

to distinguish it in color from common water. This preparation is 
recently much prescribed, in doses of thirty minims to a fluidrachm, 
as a sedative narcotic. It contains a varying proportion of hydro- 
cyanic acid, and deteriorates very much by keeping. The custom 
of substituting for this preparation the officinal water of bitter- 
almonds is most unwarrantable, as the difference in composition and 
strength might lead to great inconvenience and disappointment. 
The mode of distinguishing them recommended is to add ammonia, 
which in bitter almond water produces a dense milkiness, while in 
cherry-laurel water it produces, after a time, only a slight turbidity. 
In view of the impossibility of obtaining cherry-laurel water fresh 
and reliable, I have adopted the following recipe for its artificial 
preparation, suggested by W. H. Pile : — 

Take of Diluted hydrocyanic acid, TJ. S. P f gj. 

Ess. oil of bitter almonds "n\iij. 

Alcohol f^iij- 

Water fgiiss.— M. 

The distilled water of wild-cherry tree leaves has been recommended 
as a substitute for cherry-laurel water, and if found by experience 
to correspond in its properties with the imported article, might be 
well substituted for it in the United States, where this tree is indi- 
genous and generally diffused. 

Under the name of Aqua Tiliaz a distilled water is used in Europe, 
obtained from the flowers and bracts of Tilia JEuropea, and con- 
siderably used as an adjuvant, mostly in diuretic and diaphoretic 
mixtures. The tree being naturalized in the United States, it would 
be easy to render it and probably our native linden useful in this form. 

All the waters directed to be made by triturating their respective 
oils with carbonate of magnesium and water are directed by an 
alternative process to be prepared by distillation from the respective 
drugs, using, in every case but one, 18 troyounces of the drug, 16 
pints of water, and distilling 8 pints. The exception is that of 
anise water, where 10 troyounces are used to the same quantity of 
menstruum, and 8 pints of distillate are to be obtained. 



CHAPTER V. 

ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 

Theee is a well recognized difference between the solutions 
treated of in the last two chapters, most of them effected by che- 
mical processes, by simple contact of soluble materials with their 
appropriate solvents, and those now to be brought into view. 

Organized vegetable structures, plants, and parts of plants, com- 
posed of proximate principles of varying solubility, some of which 
it is desirable to secure in the solutions formed, while others are to 
be rejected, require different and less ready modes of treatment. 



ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 



577 



As in the previous instances the reduction of the material to a 
more or less fine condition is the first step toward its preparation in 
a liquid form ; after this the liquid, which in this case is called the 
menstruum, is to be brought into favorable contact with it. 

When the quantity of the medical agent is small in comparison 
with the menstruum, as in most of the infusions, and where 
rapidity is not an object, the process of maceration is chiefly re- 
sorted to. 

This is accomplished in a covered queensware vessel, a common 
pitcher or bowl, for instance, or sometimes in a tin cup or measure, 
care being taken, in the case of as- 
tringent infusions, to avoid the use 
of a defective tin or an iron vessel. 
Maceration consists in pouring the 
liquid upon the medicinal substance 
previously bruised or coarsely pow- 
dered, and allowing it to stand for 
a greater or less period of time ac- 
cording to circumstances. The 
longest period directed in the Phar- 
macopoeia for infusions is twenty- 
four hours, as in the case of infusion 
of tar ; the shortest, ten minutes, as 
in the case of infusion of chamomile. 
In preparing tinctures, wines, vine- 
gars, etc., seven or fourteen days are 
generally prescribed. 

Infusions are conveniently pre- 
pared in a vessel made for the pur- 
pose, here figured, called Alsop's 
infusion mug, which contains a per- 
forated diaphragm, b, near the top, on which the substance to be 
macerated is placed ; the liquid is introduced so as barely to cover 




Section of Alsop's infusion mug. 




Section of Squire's infusion pot. 



this, reaching, perhaps to the line, e; a circulation is thus induced 
and continued in the liquid, by which the least impregnated por- 



578 



ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 



tions are brought constantly in contact with the drug, and the 
most completely saturated portion, by greater specific gravity, sinks 
to the bottom. 

Squire's Infusion Pot is an improvement on Alsop's ; it is a neat 
pharmaceutical implement adapted to making the galenical liquid 
preparations generally. In Fig. 213, we have a section, B and D, 
being two cup-shaped perforated diaphragms, either of which may 
be used at pleasure. The vessel must be of such capacity that the 
substance placed on the diaphragm shall be under the surface of 
the liquid when properly filled. A modification of this is used in 
some large establishments for the preparation of tinctures ; it has 
many advantages over ordinary apparatus for maceration, and is 
not unlike displacement in the beauty and efficiency of the prepa- 
rations made in it. 

Fig. 214. 




In preparing large quantities of tinctures or infusions by macera- 
tion, there is considerable loss of the saturated liquid unless a 
suitable press is used to obtain the last portions. The pattern, 



ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 



579 



Fig. 214, which is sold by Bullock & Crenshaw, of Philadelphia, 
price $10, is among the best in the market. 

It is substantial, and permits the application of considerable force. 
The frame is oak, 3 J inches square. The hopper is made of strong 
oak pieces separated J inch from each other — the pieces are firmly 
held together by two broad iron bands, through which a screw 
passes into each piece, securing it in its place. The hopper is 11 
inches high, and 8 inches in diameter, having a capacity of 3 gal- 
lons — it stands upon a circular base of oak, which is grooved to 
receive and collect the expressed liquid, and has a lip to discharge 
it. The screw is iron, with square thread, 1J- inch diameter, and 
passes through a heavy iron casting. Both the iron head-piece 
and the support for the hopper are let into the oak uprights, and 
secured by heavy iron bolts. 

In using the press, a press bag, having about the diameter of the 
hopper, should be used — the bag should be made of strong canvas 
of an open texture ; or the hopper may be lined with clean straw, 



Fig. 215 




Clothes-wringer press. 

after the manner of the cider press. The hopper, being opened at 
both ends, and movable, is readily cleared of its contents and 
cleansed. 

Jenk's Kitchen Press is a smaller and cheaper kind, sold by the 



580 ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 

dealers in housekeeping articles, at a price varying from $1.75 for 
five-inch cylinders to $3 for eight-inch cylinders. 

Fig. 215 exhibits an apparatus lately invented, and largely used 
as a household convenience for wringing clothes, and well adapted 
to straining infusions, or the pulpy masses of crushed fruit, from 
which the juice is to be extracted. 

This apparatus is designed to be secured, when in use, upon a 
cedar tub or other convenient receptacle, by means of the upright 
wooden lever E F, which is connected by means of a galvanized 
iron crosspiece E, so constructed as to be lengthened or shortened 
at pleasure, with the body of the apparatus. To secure the lever 
tightly to the receptacle, the thumb-screw D is arranged to work 
upon the upper part of the machine. The pressing surfaces are two 
cylinders B B, covered with thick gum-elastic, the pressure of 
which upon each other is regulated by a wooden spring, not shown 
in the drawing, and by the screws G C, which play upon a mov- 
able beam above the springs. The force is applied by a crank and 
two cogwheels, which equalize the movement of the cylinders, a 
peculiarity of this machine, which gives it advantages over a kind 
of more simple construction. It is found that without this arrange- 
ment, one of the cylinders is apt to wear out before the other. The 
operation of this press is very simple and effectual ; the mass to be 
pressed is diffused through a square canvas bag, which must be 
very strong, and drawn steadily between the rollers, moved by the 
crank; the liquid is very effectually expressed, and runs into the 
receiving vessel. This apparatus has been found particularly useful 
in pressing the juice from strawberries, currants, and similar fruits, 
and is used on a great scale in sugar refineries, for the " wringing 
out" of the felt strainers. 

Digestion differs from maceration in being confined to elevated 
temperatures, yet below the boiling point of the menstruum ; as the 
term is generally employed, it means maceration, with continued 
application of heat, and is nearly synonymous with "simmering." 

The term infusion includes both maceration in its more limited 
sense and digestion. It is often applied to the ordinary mode of 
making infusions, which is to pour the hot liquid on the bruised 
drug, and allow it to remain until cool. In a recipe worded with 
due regard to accuracy, if we are directed to macerate for any given 
time, we infer that cold infusion is intended ; if to digest, we under- 
stand that hot infusion is desired. 

In making tinctures, digestion, though seldom directed, is ofter 
very useful, particularly where rapidity is an object, and where we 
wish to form a very concentrated preparation. These and infusions 
should be strained while hot, and dispensed together with the pre- 
cipitate formed on cooling, which is a sparingly soluble compound 
frequently containing their active principles. 

Of the proximate principles of plants, it may be remarked that 
hot water has the property of dissolving the starch, and cold water 
the vegetable albumen, and both dissolve the gum, sugar, extractive, 
and other principles liable to fermentation; the absence of any 



DIGESTION. 581 

antiseptic in infusions and decoctions renders them extremely 
prone to undergo change on exposure to the atmosphere. 

When it is desirable to preserve these aqueous solutions for a 
longer period than a day or two, they should be bottled while hot, 
the bottle being filled completely and corked tightly, so as to ex- 
clude the air, and then set aside in a cold place in an inverted 
position. The addition of j- to ^ quantity of alcohol, or of some 
tincture not interfering with the medical properties of the infusion, 
is recommended where not objectionable. The officinal compound 
infusion of gentian and infusion of digitalis are rendered permanent 
preparations by this means. The infusion of wild-cherry bark will 
keep for some dajs without any addition, owing to the antiseptic 
influence of hydrocyanic acid which it contains. 

The following substances should not be prescribed mixed with or 
dissolved in infusions, being incompatible with one or more of the 
proximate principles usually present in them : Tartrate of antimony 
and potassium, corrosive chloride of mercury, nitrate of silver, 
acetate and subacetate of lead; in some cases, the alkalies, lime- 
water, and tincture of galls, and, in the instance of astringent in- 
fusions, the salts of iron. 

When mixed with either of the tinctures made with strong 
alcohol, a resinous precipitate is deposited from the tincture, and 
the mixture, if strained, loses much of its activity; the same is the 
fact, to a less extent, with many of the tinctures made with diluted 
alcohol. 

Many of the infusions which are clear when freshly prepared, 
become turbid soon after by the deposition of vegetable albumen, 
apotheme, and other insoluble principles; these precipitates are 
likely to carry down with them a portion of the active ingredients. 
The infusions of cinchona prepared by maceration with hot water 
do not become clear, even by filtration through paper. 

Infusions made by maceration may frequently be poured off clear 
from the vessel in which they were prepared, leaving the dregs in 
the bottom; this, however, is always attended with the loss of the 
last portion of the liquid; they may be strained through a muslin 
or flannel strainer, and, by using a little force in expressing the 
dregs, very nearly the whole portion of liquid may be obtained, or 
this may be done more satisfactorily, by displacement, in filtering 
them. 

This class of medicinal preparations is one of the least elegant in 
use, and is mainly confined, in the United States, to domestic prac- 
tice. Even when prescribed by physicians, the infusions are gene- 
rally made by the nurse or attendant upon the sick, rather than by 
the pharmacist. The infusions of cinchona bark, infusion of digi- 
talis, compound infusion of gentian, and compound infusion of 
roses, form the chief exceptions to this. 

The process of percolation, treated of in the next chapter, is ap- 
plied with great advantage to some of these preparations, and, in a 
majority of cases, the substitution of cold water for hot, and of 
percolation for maceration or digestion, is found to produce a more 



582 



ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 



elegant and equally efficient infusion, and one which, from con- 
taining less coloring matter, fee ula, resinous, and other inert prin- 
ciples, keeps better, and is more acceptable to the stomach. 

When an infusion is intended as an emetic draught, or to pro- 
mote the operation of emetics, or as a diaphoretic, it is usually 
given while hot, and, of course, to all such cases the above remark 
does not apply. ~Nor is it equally applicable to the demulcent infu- 
sions of flaxseed and buchu, although the former may be made very 
well with cold water, and is then less oily in its character. 

The general dose of infusions is f §ij, or a wineglassful, frequently 
repeated. This is to be varied in the case of infusion of senna, 
compound infusion of flaxseed, and others, in which a much larger 
quantity may be taken at a draught. 

There are two of the officinal infusions which it would be im- 
proper to give in the above general dose; these are infusion of digi- 
talis and infusion of capsicum, the doses of which are specially stated 
in the syllabus. 



SYLLABUS OF INFUSIONS. 
Infusa, U. S. P 

First Group. — One Troyounce to a pint. 



Infusum cinchonse flavse, 


Cold water -j- arom. sulphuric ) m • 
acid f 5J. J ° mC * 


«< 


" rubrse, 


Cold water -f- arom. sulphuric \ m . 
acidfsjj. J omc ' 


a 


cascarillse, 


Cold water (or boiling). Stimulant ; tonic. 


a 


eupatorii, 


Boiling water. Tonic ; diaph. emet. (hot) 


it 


kramerise, 


Cold water. Astringent. 


(< 


juniperi, 


Boiling water. Diuretic. 


it 


pareirse, 


Boiling water. Diuretic. 


tt 


buchu, 


Boiling water. Demulcent;* diuretic. 


«< 


sennae, 


Boiling water -j- coriander 5J- Cathartic. 




Seconi 


o Group. — Half a Troyounce to a pint. 


Infusum calumbse, 


Cold water (or boiling). Tonic. 




angusturse, 


Cold water, do. Stimulant ; tonic. 


" 


serpentarise, 


Cold water, do. Tonic. 


" 


pruni Virginianse, 


Cold water. Tonic ; nerv. sedative. 


<< 


anthemidis, 


Boiling water. Tonic ; emetic when hot. 


«< 


humuli, 


Boiling water. Tonic ; mild narcotic. 


a 


catechu comp., 


Boiling water -f- cinnamon, 5j« Astringent. 


tt 


salvias, 


Boiling water. Aromatic ; astringent. 


« 


capsici, 


Boiling water. Stimulant. Dose, §ss. 


<( 


Valerianae, 


Cold water (or boiling). Stimulant; antispasmodic. 


it 


zingiberis, 


Boiling water. Carminative. 


tt 


lini comp., 


Boiling water+liquorice root, j Demulcent# 

3'J- / 
Boiling water. Anthelmintic. 


it 


spigeliae, 


it 


gentianae comp., 


Cold water -|- alcohol, Jij, bit- 1 

ter orange-peel, 5J> cor ^" a Tonic, 
ander, 5j- J 




T 


hird Group. — Proportions varied. 


Infusum caryophylli, 


5'j to Oj boiliug water. Stimulant. 


" 


quassias, 


gij to Oj cold water. Tonic. 


it 


rhei, 


%ii to Oss boiling water. Cathartic. 



nfusum 


digitalis, 


<< 


tabaci, 


" 


taraxaci, 


<< 


rosae comp., 


" 


picis liquidae 



INFUSION'S. 583 

3J to Oh boiling water + \ ^ rcoti ^ ^^ f gy. 
tmct. cinnamon, i 5j. j ^ J 

%) to Oj boiling water. Sedative inj. in hernia, 

^ij to Oj boiling water. Diuretic. 

See formula. Adjuvant ; astringent, 

do. Expectorant ; tonic. 

As illustrations of the mode of preparing the foregoing infusions, 
the following officinal forms are selected: — 

With Boiling Water. 
Infusum Taraxaci, U. S. P. 

Take of Dandelion, bruised, two troyounces. 
Boiling water, a pint. 

Macerate for two hours in a covered vessel, and strain. 

Infusum Rosce Compositum, U. S. P. 

Take of Bed rose, half a troyounce. 

Diluted sulphuric acid, three fluidrachms. 
Sugar, in coarse powder, a tro} T ounce and a half. 
Boiling water, two pints and a half. 

Pour the water upon the rose in a covered glass or porcelain 
vessel; then add the acid, and macerate for half an hour. Lastly, 
strain the liquid, and in it dissolve the sugar. 

Compound infusion of rose is said to be an excellent addition to 
Epsom salts in solution for overcoming its bitterness. 

With Cold Water. 
Infusum Cinchonas Hubrce, IT. S. P. 

Take of Red cinchona, in moderately fine powder, a troyounce. 
Aromatic sulphuric acid, a fluidrachm. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the acid with a pint of water. Then moisten the powder 
with half a fluidounce of the mixture, and, having packed it firmly 
in a conical glass percolator, gradually pour upon it the remainder 
of the mixture, and afterwards water, until the filtered liquid mea- 
sures a pint. 

Infusum Cinchonce Flavm, IT. S. P. 
Substitute cinchona flava, and proceed as in last formula. 

Infusum Pruni Virginiance, IT. S. P. 

Take of Wild-cherry bark, in moderately coarse powder, half a troyounce. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with six fluidrachms of water, let it stand 
for an hour, pack it gently in a conical glass percolator, and gradu- 
ally pour water upon it until the filtered liquid measures a pint. 



584 ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 

Infusum GentiancB Composition, U. S. P.* 

Take of Gentian, in moderately coarse powder, half a troyounce. 
Bitter orange peel, in moderately coarse powder, 
Coriander, in moderately coarse powder, each, sixty grains. 
Alcohol, two fluidounces. 
"Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the alcohol with, fourteen fluidounces of water, and, having 
moistened the mixed powders with three fluidrachms of the men- 
struum, pack them firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour 
upon them, first, the remainder of the menstruum, and afterwards 
water, until the filtered liquor measures a pint. 

Infusum Picis Liquidce, U. S. P. ( Tar water.) 

Take of Tar, a pint. 

Water, four pints. 

Mix them, and shake the mixture frequently during twenty-four 
hours. Then pour off the infusion, and filter through paper. 

This is a new officinal in the edition of the Pharmacopoeia for 
1860, being placed under a different head from that to which com- 
mon consent has heretofore assigned it. It is a useful preparation, 
and much in request as a remedy in pectoral affections. 

With either Cold or Hot Water. 
Infusum Valerianae, U. S. P. 

Take of Valerian, in moderately coarse powder, half a troyounce. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with, two fluidrachms of water, pack it firmly 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour water upon it until the 
filtered liquid measures a pint. 

This infusion may also be prepared by macerating the valerian 
with a pint of boiling water, for two hours, in a covered vessel, and 
straining. 

Unoffictnal. 

Dr. Mettauer's Aperient 

Take of Aloes (soc.) £v. 

Bicarb, sodium ^xj. 

Valerian (contused )f §j. 

Water Oj. 

Comp. spirit of lavender f^vj. 

Make an infusion by maceration or percolation. 

* Compound Infusion of Gentian is liable to separate a pectine-like precipitate, by- 
standing, which interferes with its being dispensed conveniently. It is also rather 
bulky, which suggests its being prepared in the following concentrated form for ex- 
temporaneous dilution, as proposed by J. T. Shinn : — 
Take of Gentian powder, two ounces. 
Orange-peel powder, 
Coriander powder, each, a half ounce. 
Diluted alcohol, sufficient to make one pint. 
By percolation, make a pint, of which one part is to be added to three of water to 
make the compound infusion, 
t Some recipes omit the valerian. 



INFUSIONS. 585 

Dose. — A tablespoonful containing about 9 grs. aloes, 20 of bicarb. 
of sodium, and 14 of valerian. As a laxative for constipation, etc. 

Mistura Aloes Composita. — I. J. Grahame. 

Recommended as a substitute for compound decoction of aloes of 
the British Pharmacopceias. 

Take of Extract of liquorice i ounce. 

Liquorice-root in moderately fine powder . 1£ ounce. 

Carbonate of potassium 1 drachm. 

Aloes, myrrh, and saffron, in moderately fine 

powder, each H drachm. 

Compound tincture of cardamom .... 6^ fluidounces. 

Distilled water 18 fluidounces. 

Rub well together the aloes, myrrh, and carbonate of potassium; 
add the remaining powder, and mix all intimately. Having mixed 
the water and compound tincture of cardamom, pour of this liquid 
on the compound powder, sufficient to dampen it ; pack moderately 
in a suitable displacer, and having placed over the surface a piece 
of perforated filtering paper, pour on the remainder of the liquid, 
and when it has ceased to pass, add water sufficient to make the 
nitrate measure in all twenty-four fluidounces. A clear, rich, red- 
dish-brown liquid. {Transactions Md. Col. Phar., 1858.) 

Elixir Clauderi. 

Take of Carbonate of Potassium gj. 

Aloes gij. 

Guaiacum gij. 

Myrrh gij. 

Saffron ^ij. 

Rhubarb (contused) gij. 

Water fsxviij. 

Macerate a few days and decant. 

Dose. — A tablespoonful. 

The concentrated infusions, of which several are in common use 
in England, properly belong to the class of fluid extracts, and under 
that head a recipe will be found for infusum cinchonas spissatum, 
of the London Pharmacopoeia. 

ParrisKs Cider Mixture. 

Take of Juniper berries, 
Mustard seed, 

Ginger, each 2 ounces. 

Horseradish, 

Parsley root, each 4 ounces. 

Cider 1 gallon. 

Macerate for a week and strain, or make by displacement, adding 
a little alcohol if designed to be kept long. 

Dose. — A wineglassful three times a day, increased at discretion. 
In dropsy. 



586 ON MACERATION" AND THE INFUSIONS. 

Black Draught. 

Take of Senna ^ss. 

Sulphate of magnesium gj. 

Manna |j. 

Fennel seed gj. 

Boiling water f ^viij. 

Macerate in a covered vessel till the liquid cools. 
Dose. — One-third, to be repeated every four or five hours till it 
operates. 

JPhysick's Medicated Lye, or Alkaline Solution. 

Take of Hickory ashes '..... ^viij. 

Soot §j. * 

Water Cong. j. 

Digest for twenty-four hours and strain. 
Dose. — A wineglassful. . In dyspepsia. 

Processes Eequiring Heat. 

The generation and application of heat in pharmacy having been 
specially treated of as far as deemed necessary, we proceed to the 
consideration of the processes of decoction, evaporation, distillation, 
etc., and of the galenical preparations in which they are necessary. 

Decoction, or boiling, is a process to be applied with care to vege- 
table substances in contact with water. Although boiling water, 
from its being permeated by steam, and from its being of less spe- 
cific gravity, is more penetrating and dissolves many principles 
which resist the action of water at a lower temperature, it is, never- 
theless, liable to disadvantages as a menstruum for the preparation 
of solutions from plants and parts of plants. 

The boiling points of liquids, although constant under precisely 
the same circumstances, vary on account of increased or diminished 
atmospheric pressure, the greater or less depth of the liquid, and 
the nature of the containing vessel. Fluids boil at a lower tempera- 
ture and more quietly in vessels with rough surfaces than in those 
which are polished ; in glass vessels, especially, they display a ten- 
dency to irregularity of ebullition, and the boiling point of water, 
which, under ordinary circumstances, is at 212° F., rises sometimes 
as high as 221° in a vessel of smooth glass. 

The boiling points of infusions rise in proportion to the amount 
of contained vegetable matter, and there appears to be a difference 
between the apparent temperature of a boiling solution, and the 
actual heating or scorching influence to which it is subjected by 
contact with the bottom and sides of the containing vessel. The 
steam generated at the point of contact being under heavy pressure 
in deep vessels, and temperature rising in proportion to pressure, 
it may be supposed at the moment of its formation to be much 
hotter than 212°, and if the portion of liquid immediately in con- 
tact with the heated vessel contains substances in solution liable to 
be burnt, such a result may occur during the moment consumed in 






PROCESSES REQUIRING HEAT. 587 

converting any portion into steam. In this way we may account 
for the well known injurious effect of boiling, upon vegetable infu- 
sions. 

Starch is a proximate principle, present in a 'large number of 
vegetables ; being inert and soluble in water at a boiling tempera- 
ture, it adds to the viscidity of decoctions, and renders them disa- 
greeable to the patient, without adding to their medicinal activity. 

The extractive matter is more freely soluble in hot than in cold 
water, but the boiling temperature applied under ordinary circum- 
stances produces the decomposition of this and other vegetable 
principles, or so modifies them as to impair their efficiency. The 
access of air seems to promote this result, and hence boiling in a 
covered vessel is preferable, except where the quantity of the solu- 
tion is to be reduced by the process. In this case, by conducting 
the operation in a still, the surface of the liquid may he kept 
covered by the vapor, almost to the exclusion of the air. 

A substance called apotheme, or oxidized extractive, is also deposited 
by vegetable solutions on boiling with access of air ; this may carry 
with it a portion of the active principles, and should not be rejected 
from the preparation. 

If the plant under treatment contains a volatile oil or other vola- 
tile principle which it is desirable to retain in the decoction, long 
boiling is inadmissible, especially in an open vessel. 

Vegetable decoctions, if strained while hot, generally deposit a 
portion of insoluble matter on cooling, which may or may not con- 
tain active ingredients ; but it is generally advisable to retain the 
precipitate and diffuse it through the liquid, stirring or shaking it 
up before taking each dose. 

The proximate principle called vegetable albumen, which is 
soluble in cold water and alcohol, is coagulable at a boiling tem- 
perature, and hence is removed from decoctions on straining them. 

The existence of starch and tannic acid together, in a vegetable 
substance, forbids the long-continued application of a boiling tem- 
perature, especially during exposure to the air, as a tannate of starch 
is formed which is insoluble, and comparatively inert. The state 
of division of the drug is among the most important points to be 
observed in preparing decoctions ; if too coarse, it is liable to be 
imperfectly extracted, while, by being too finely divided, it is 
rendered difficult to separate on the strainer. In preparing decoc- 
tions of the vegetable astringents, the use of an iron or rusted tin 
vessel is to be avoided on account of the inky tannate of iron being 
formed. 

In making decoctions the ebullition should not be violent or 
long continued, as simmering answers every purpose of hard boiling. 
If the drug contains an essential oil or other volatile principle, the 
vessel should be covered. 



588 



ON MACERATION AND THE INFUSIONS. 



OFFICINAL DECOCTIONS. 

Decocta, TJ. S. 



Name. 


Proportions. 


Medical Properties. 


Decoctum 


chimaphilae 


gj to 


Oj 


Alterative, diaphoretic. 


(< 


uvse ursi 


do. 




Astringent, diuretic. 


(< 


dulcamarse 


do. 




Sedative, alterative. 


<< 


hgematoxyli 


do. 




Astringent. 


a 


quercus alb. 


do. 




do. Externally. 


<« 


cinch, flav. 


do. 




Tonic. 


(« 


" rub. 


do. 




do. 


<< 


cornus floridse 


do. 




do. 


«( 


senegse 


do. 




Acrid expectorant. 


it 


hordei 


do. 




Nutritive, diet. 


(( 


cetrariae 


|;ss to 


Oj 


Tonic, demulcent. 


a 


sarsaparilla comp. (see 










Formula) 


§iss to Oj 


Alterative. 


it 


aloes comp., Br. P. (see 










Formula) 


gr. 12 


to f §xxx 


Aperient, emmenagogue. 



REMARKS ON THE DECOCTIONS. 

The dose of the decoctions is the same as of the infusions, from 
flij to Oj, or may be generally stated at one pint in divided por- 
tions. Care has been taken by the framers of the Pharmacopoeia to 
select for this form of preparation those drugs least liable to deteri- 
oration by exposure to the influence of heat and the atmosphere. 
To this remark the decoctions of cinchona seem exceptions ; these are 
even more objectionable than the hot infusions, letting fall a copious 
precipitate on cooling, which is apt to contain most of the alkaloids. 
They are improved by the addition of a little aromatic sulphuric 
acid, and should always be strained while hot, and shaken up when 
about to be administered. 

Chimaphila and uva ursi are well adapted to this form of prepa- 
ration, the coriaceous surface of the leaves having a tendency to 
resist the action of water at a lower temperature. The decoction of 
senega is almost superseded by the syrup, which is a far more agree- 
able preparation, and is efficient in a much smaller dose. 

The formula for the preparation of these is so nearly uniform, 
that with the exceptions of decoctions of pearl barley, decoction of 
Iceland moss, and compound decoction of sarsaparilla, given sepa- 
rately, it may be thus stated : — 

Take of (the bruised drug), a troyounce. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Boil the (bruised drug) in a pint of water for fifteen minutes, 
strain, and add sufficient water, through the strainer, to make the 
decoction measure a pint. 

Decoctum Cetrarice, U. S. (Decoction of Iceland Moss.) 

Take of Iceland moss, half a troyounce. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 



DECOCTIONS. 589 

Boil the Iceland moss in a pint of water for fifteen minutes, 
strain with compression, and add sufficient water, through the 
strainer, to make the decoction measure a pint. 

Decoctum Sarsaparillce Composition, U. S. {Compound Decoction of 

Sarsaparilla.) 

Ph. Br. 

Take of Sarsaparilla, sliced and bruised, six troyounces. 10 oz. 

Bark of sassafras root, sliced, 1 oz. 

Guaiacum wood, rasped, 1 oz. 

Liquorice root, bruised, each, a troyounce. 1 oz. 

Mezereon, sliced, one hundred and eighty grains. 240 grs. 

Water, a sufficient quantit}^ Ovj imp. 

Macerate with four pints of water for twelve hours (one hour, 
Ph. Br.); then boil for a quarter of an hour (ten minutes, Ph. -Br.), 
strain, and add sufficient water, through the strainer, to make the 
decoction measure four pints. 

Compound decoction of sarsaparilla, which is an imitation of the 
celebrated Lisbon diet drink, is also officinal in some other Pharma- 
copoeias, and is much more extensively used in foreign countries 
than with us. It is often used along with or after a mercurial 
course. 

Decoctum Hordei, U. S. {Decoction of Barley.) 

Take of Barley, two troyounces. 

Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Having washed away the extraneous matters which adhere to 
the barley, boil it with half a pint of water for a short time, and 
throw away the resulting liquid. Then, having poured on it four 
pints of boiling water, boil down to two pints, and strain. 

Decoctum hordei, called barley-water, is peculiar in its mode of 
preparation, the directions requiring that the decorticated seeds, 
called pearl barley, as above, should be washed with cold water to 
separate -extraneous matters, then boiled for a short time in a small 
portion of water, which is to be thrown away: upon the seeds, 
which, by this process, are completely freed from any unpleasant 
taste, and are much swollen, the remainder of the water is poured 
boiling hot; it is now to be boiled down to two pints and strained. 
These directions are peculiar to the U. S. Pharmacopeia, in the Ph. 
Br., two ounces of pearl barley, after being washed in cold water, 
are boiled for twenty minutes in one and a half pints of water. 
Various adjuvants may be used to improve the taste of this, such 
as raisins, figs, or liquorice root, when not contraindicated. Its use 
is as a demulcent and nutritive drink in inflammatory and febrile 
diseases affecting the alimentary canal and the urinary organs. 



590 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 



CHAPTER VI. 

PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 

A knowledge of this process is justly regarded as indispensable 
to all who practise pharmacy. In previous editions of this work 
many details were rendered necessary by imperfect knowledge of 
the essential conditions of success in extracting the soluble prin- 
ciples of drugs, which are now no longer required. In accordance 
with the results of investigation and experience, the U.S. Pharma- 
copoeia has given, in the late editions, such lucid directions for its 
employment in making the numerous tinctures, wines, vinegars, 
syrups, extracts, fluid extracts, and some of the infusions, that its 
adoption has become almost universal, and has effected a correspond- 
ing improvement in these classes of preparations. 

History. — The process of percolation or displacement has been 
employed from time immemorial in the preparation of coffee in the 
celebrated Cafetilre de Doubelloy, an instrument much used in 
France, and occasionally in this country at the present time. It 
consists of a coffee-pot, surmounted by a movable cylinder, usually 
varying from three to five or six inches in diameter, and from eight 
to ten inches in length, and which contains two perforated dia- 
phragms, one permanent and soldered on to the lower extremity 
of the cylinder, and the other movable, so as to be supported 
either above or upon the top of the mass of coffee in using the 
apparatus. 

The French coffee-pot is a displacement apparatus of convenient 
construction, and had been long celebrated for the production of a 
clear and strong coffee, possessing a finer aroma than that made by 
decoction, but, until the year 1833, the idea seems not to have 
occurred of applying it to the production of pharmaceutical pre- 
parations. This application is due to M. Boullay & Son, French 
pharmaciens, who, by their admirable and well-conducted experi- 
ments, first demonstrated the adaptation of percolation to the 
general purposes of the shop and laboratory, drew the attention of 
the profession to its merits, and pointed out certain forms of ap- 
paratus, and the modes for using them. 

In 1836 an article by M. ArGaiillermond, translated from the 
Journal de Pharmacie, was published in the American Journal of 
Pharmacy, vol. vii. p. 308, and in 1838 the late Augustine Duhamel, 
a scientific pharmacist of Philadelphia, published, in the American 
Journal of Pharmacy, vol. x. p. 1, his first communication upon 
the new process. In the following year, in connection with Wil- 
liam Procter, Jr., now Professor of Pharmacy in the Philadelphia 



DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 591 

College of Pharmacy, he engaged further attention to the subject 
in an able article of the same Journal, vol. xi. p. Ib9, in which a 
series of careful experiments in the preparation of extracts, tinc- 
tures, infusions, and syrups was detailed, which so conclusively 
proved the superiority of this over the ordinary processes in use 
that intelligent pharmacists generally were induced to try, and 
eventually to adopt it. In the mean time the process was exten- 
sively made known through pharmaceutical works in England and 
on the continent of Europe, and was incorporated more or less 
fully into the several Pharmacopoeias. 

This process so far found favor with the committee having under 
care the decennial revision of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia in 1840, 
that it was sanctioned to a considerable extent in the edition of 
our national standard for that year. In 1850 it was still more fully 
adopted, though not without directions for maceration designed 
for those not practically familiar with it. At the present time, it 
is so fully recognized and extensively employed in the preparation 
of Galenical solutions, as almost to supersede the process of mace- 
ration. 

At the annual meeting of the American Pharmaceutical Asso- 
ciation in 1858, Prof. I. J. Grahame, of the Maryland College of 
Pharmacy, proposed some modifications of the process as then con- 
ducted, of so much utility as to have given a new impetus to this 
branch of pharmaceutical manipulation. His improvement con- 
sisted : First, in the use of the common funnel for all ordinary 
purposes, the conical shape allowing the swelling of the solid con- 
tents without compacting them so tightly together as in the case 
of a straight-sided cylinder. Second, the use of powders of regular 
and definite degrees of fineness, regulated by the permeability of 
the drug. Third, the proper graduation of the moisture imparted 
to the powder before packing it in the funnel. Increased atten- 
tion to these points has simplified the process and increased its 
rapidity and efficiency. 

The far more ready and universal adoption of percolation in the 
United States than in England has, perhaps, promoted the adop- 
tion, among us, of the more concentrated forms of medicines in 
preference to those prepared by the old processes, still largely em- 
ployed by the British and some continental pharmacists. 

Dr. E. P. Squibb has since done much toward improving the 
process. By frequently repeated experiments upon a great number 
of drugs of different degrees of fineness he has shown that much of 
the menstruum directed in the older formulas was often unnecessary, 
and sometimes injurious, as it required prolonged exposure to heat 
in finishing the preparations. The modifications of the process 
were such as to induce the introduction of a new term, that of re- 
percolation. The whole of the papers can be consulted in the Pro- 
ceedings of the Am. Pharm. Assoc, for the years 1865, 1866, 1867, and 
1870. The process consists essentially of submitting the same men- 
struum to different and fresh portions of the drug to be exhausted. 
The usual method of procedure is this: the powder to be acted 



592 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 



upon is divided into three portions ; the first is to be moistened with 
the desired quantity of menstruum, and, after standing half an hour 
in a covered vessel, is to be transferred to a percolating funnel ; the 
first two or three fluidounces that pass are to be returned to the 
funnel, and five parts of menstruum are to be added part at a time, 
after each one has been absorbed ; the percolation should continue 
till six and one half parts have passed, the percolate being divided 
into different portions, first of two parts, and the others of a part 
each, except the last which will be a half part. Proceed with the 
second portion of material in the same manner, using the first of 
one hundred parts of percolate in place of fresh menstruum, and 
following the last addition of percolate with fresh menstruum — 
this is to be continued as before until 7.5 parts are obtained. This 
process is to be repeated with the third portion of material, using 
the first two parts of menstruum from the second process, and it is 
to be continued until 9.5 parts of percolate have been obtained. 
The alcohol, when that is the menstruum employed, is to be re- 
covered by distillation. 

Mr. Samuel Campbell, of Philadelphia, has also written several 
papers of practical value upon this subject, in which he recommends 
maceration as being far more important than fine comminution. 
His papers are published in the Am. Journ. Pharm,., vol. 41, 42. 

The common tin displacer consists of a cylinder varying in size, 
but at least twice as long as its diameter, terminated at one end by 
a funnel, the neck of which is made small enough to insert con- 
veniently into a common tincture or narrow-mouth packing bottle; 

two perforated diaphragms of 



Fig. 216. 



Fig. 217. 



the size of the cylinder, and 
loosely fitting into it; each of 
these has a small ring of wire 
soldered on to it to facilitate 
its removal. Sometimes these 
cylinders are much larger at 
the top, tapering toward the 
lower end, and there is an ad- 
vantage in this shape over 
straight sides, as shown in the 
drawing. The lower diaphragm 
should be of finely perforated 
tin plate (the finest sold is not 
objectionable), while the upper 
may be made of ordinary tinned 
iron, pierced with compara- 
tively large holes. Occasionally the lower diaphragm is soldered 
to a very small tin tube, open at both ends, of nearly the length of 
the cylinder, near the top of which is a ledge on which the upper 
diaphragm is made to rest, as in the French coffee-pot and in the 
air-tight displacer (Fig. 222); the object of this is to allow the 
passage of air from the lower or receiving vessel into the top of the 
cylinder. A brass stopcock has been recommended to be added to 





The displacer, with upper and lower diaphragm. 



THE APPARATUS. 



593 



Fig. 218. Fig. 219. 



the lower orifice, so that maceration can be effected in the per- 
colator. 

The Queensviare Displace?-. — This is the same as the above in 
shape ; the material is more cleanly ; it is not liable to corrosion 
with acid liquids, nor to impart a black color and metallic taste to 
solutions of the vegetable astringents. 

Lamp-chimney Displacers. — No form of apparatus is cheaper for 
small operations than ordinary lamp-chimneys, either plain (Fig. 
220) or with bulb (Fig. 221). The smaller end of the chimney is 
filled with a cork cut so as to allow the free 
passage of the liquid, at the same time that 
it affords a mechanical support to the mass, 
or covered with a piece of gauze, book-mus- 
lin, or other coarse fabric, tied securely by 
a string round the chimney near its lower 
edge, and a little carded cotton being placed 
on it, the under diaphragm is rendered com- 
plete ; the upper one may be made of paper, 
when necessary, as before described, or, where 
the diameter is small, may be omitted. 

These, having no funnel-shaped termina- 
tions, require to be inserted in a wide-mouth 
bottle; one which answers the purpose should be selected and 
always kept at hand; a piece of thick pasteboard, or other firm sub- 
stance, may be used as a support for an apparatus of this descrip- 




Porcelain displacer, with two 
diaphragms. 



Fig. 220. 



Fig. 221. 






Lamp-chimney displacer, with supports. 



Tin displacer for vola- 
tile liquids. 



594 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 



tion by cutting a hole in it of the required size, so as to suspend it 
over a dish, or by the aid of a retort stand into a suitable jar or 
measure, as shown in Figs. 220 and 221. Lamp-chimneys with 
bulbs are still more convenient in this respect. 

Fig. 222 represents a tin displacer with a water-joint near the 
top for covering and preventing evaporation in making ethereal or 
other very volatile preparations ; the little tube e serves for the 
escape of the air from the lower vessel B, so as to equalize the at- 
mospheric pressure between the top of the air-tight displacer and 
the receiving bottle ; the lower diaphragm a is soldered on to the 
top of this tube, and the upper diaphragm rests on it ; c represents 
the gutter into which the top d fits, and which, being filled with 
water, constitutes an air-tight connection. The displacer fits into 
the narrow-mouth bottle either by the aid of a cork or not, as the 
case may require. 

The form of percolator devised by Dr. E. R. Squibb is, perhaps, 

the most complete for the 
■pig. 223. purpose of the pharmacist 

of any yet described ; it 
is represented in Fig. 223. 
A, percolator, 11 J in. deep 
" 7<; inside measure ; 5 J in. dia- 
meter at top ; 2 in. dia- 
*' meter at bottom, which 
should be flat ; a rim 
around the top serves to 
strengthen it ; the upper 
.— -i, edge should be ground 
flat so that it may be 
covered perfectly. The 
cover is best made of 
heavy sheet India-rubber ; 
"—* a section about one-third 
being cut nearly through 
from the lower side forms 
a good hinge, e is the 
well-tube ; /, £, siphon, 
which is automatic and 

„ empties the 'well-tube. 

. — f For a full description of 
:.:~| the method of manipu- 
™t* lating, the reader should 
consult the paper in 
Proc. Arner. Pharm. Ass., 
— «* vol. xx. p. 182. 

Broken Bottles. — A por- 
tion of the broken bottles 
in a shop have the bottom 
cracked uniformly off, 
which is likely to occur 




THE APPARATUS. 



595 



Fiff. 224. 



when hot liquids are poured into them ; they furnish a cylinder- 
shaped vessel not unlike the tin displacement apparatus above de- 
scribed (Fig. 222) ; a plug of cotton is used for a diaphragm, as in the 
case of the funnel. The bottoms of bottles may be cracked off for this 
purpose by passing gradually round them a red-hot rod of iron in 
contact with the glass, and, when fractured, removing the sharp 
edge by a file, or by inserting the bottle in a shallow vessel of cold 
water, so as to be immersed just up to the line to be fractured, and 
filling it nearly to the same line with water, then pouring in a suf- 
ficient quantity of oil of vitriol suddenly to raise the temperature 
on the inside, the bottom will generally drop out. 

Very convenient and economical glass displacement funnels are 
made of various sizes, in shape like a broken bottle, 
but thicker and more uniform, and with a smooth 
edge at both ends ; the neck is drawn out with the 
view to inserting into a bottle, and the cylinder 
may be conveniently covered with a suitable piece 
of glass when desirable. No diaphragms accom- 
pany the apparatus ; sponge, cotton, or broken glass 
being used. 

Availing ourselves of the very cheap and common 
production of syringes from glass tubes, which ex- 
tend to one and a quarter inch in diameter, and can 
be furnished at a very low price, we have procured 
the apparatus represented in Fig. 224. It is a glass 
sj 7 ringe of the largest* size, without the piston or 
cap. It can only be used for small operations, for 
which, however, it is well adapted. In treating 
Spanish flies and other substances with ether, we 
have found it convenient from the facility with 
which the top can be corked up, preventing evapo- 
ration ; a variety of preparations may be conve- 
niently made with the syringe pattern displacer. 

The Glass Funnel. — As already stated, the com- 
mon funnel furnishes one of the most complete forms 
of displacement apparatus. A porous diaphragm 
inserted at the upper and widest portion of the neck, 
may consist of a piece of moistened sponge, of cotton, or of tow, but a 
perforated cork covered with a disk of filtering paper is preferable, 
while for the purpose of spreading the liquid over the surface of the 
mass, a circular piece of porous paper or of cotton cloth will serve 
every purpose. "When a straight cylinder is used the swelling of the 
solid contents of the displacer during the progress of its saturation 
with the menstruum frequently almost arrests the passage of the 
liquid ; but in an ordinary funnel the lateral pressure is forced into 
an upward direction, owing to the tapering of the sides of the fun- 
nel, and while the mass is rendered sufficiently compact, it is not so 
compressed as to interfere with the operation of capillary attraction 
and the displacement resulting from the pressure of the superin- 
cumbent liquid. 




Small syringe pat- 
tern displacer. 



596 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 



Fig. 225. 



In the Pharmacopoeia, the form of the percolator is often, though 
not always, designated in the several formulas. When ether is 
used as a menstruum, cylindrical percolators are directed to be 
used. When a funnel is used, a circular piece of muslin or of lint 
is directed to be pressed into the neck by means of a cork with 
notched sides, but in all cases a similar piece of muslin, moistened 
slightly with the menstruum, is directed to be interposed between 
the diaphragm and the powder to prevent the passage of the line 
particles of the latter. 

Receiving Vessel. — For reasons that will more fully appear when 
describing the management of the process, it is necessary that the 
receiving vessel should be of such size as to hold 
precisely the quantity it is proposed to make, or 
be suitably graduated to this quantity. A con- 
venient plan adopted in the school of practical 
pharmacy, where various preparations are going 
on at the same time, is to mark upon a narrow 
slip of paper the name and quantity of the prepa- 
ration about being made, and paste this upon the 
receiving vessel before commencing the process, in 
such a position that when the required quantity 
has passed it will just reach the top of the slip of 
paper. 

It is convenient for common purposes to keep 
one or more graduated bottles, made by pasting a 
slip of paper longitudinally on the bottles marked 
with a pen to the f^viij, f£x, ffxvj, Oj, and fjxx 
denominations, as shown in this cut ; the paper 
may be rendered impervious to moisture by collo- 
dion or other varnish. 

Graduated receiving 
bottle. 

The Management of the Process. — The follow- 
ing general directions describe the most approved mode of conduct- 
ing percolation : — 

Reduce the substance to a uniform powder which will pass 
through a sieve of from twenty to fifty meshes to the linear inch 
(if of very close texture a sieve of sixty meshes is to be preferred) ; 
now add just sufficient of the menstruum to dampen the powder 
without wholly destroying its mobility ; this usually requires from 
one-fourth to one-half as much menstruum as powder, and may be 
accomplished on paper without moistening it. Now transfer to a 
glass funnel or other cylindrical vessel with a porous diaphragm, 
and pack it with little or much pressure, according to its tenacity or 
disposition to adhere (more firmly when alcohol or ether is the 
menstruum than when water is to be used) ; if the particles of the 
moistened powder move freely on each other, the packing should 
be with as much force as a glass vessel will bear, the whole of the 
powder being introduced at once, and packed with a pestle or pack- 
ing-stick. The percolator being now properly supported with its 
neck in a marked receiving vessel, the whole quantity of the men- 




MANAGEMENT OF THE PROCESS. 597 

struum may be poured on, or to the capacity of the funnel, and the 
process allowed to proceed to completion. The liquid must not be 
allowed to pass more rapidly than by drops, and where a continu- 
ous stream runs from the extremity it is an indication of the neces- 
sity of more thorough packing. In most cases this may be reme- 
died by corking up the tubule of the funnel and allowing the mass 
to become more compact by swelling, or it may be necessary to re- 
move and repack the mass. 

Instances in which ether or strong alcohol is used as the men- 
struum, frequently constitute exceptions to the rule of passing by 
drops; in these the operator will use his judgment as to repassing 
the liquid, being careful that the strength is fully and completely 
extracted by the quantity of liquid remaining in the preparation 
when completed. 

In the process of packing the moistened powder into the cylinder, 
reference must be had to the nature of the substance in hand and 
the menstruum ; the rule seems to be that the firmness of the pack- 
ing should be inversely as the solvent and softening power of the 
liquid upon the solid under treatment. 

When a substance in a suitable powder has been dampened and 
properly packed in a percolator, so that, on the addition of the 
liquid above, it passes drop by drop, and the first portions, being 
returned, give a clear and very strong preparation, the last portions 
of liquid should pass almost destitute of the soluble principles contained 
in the drug. This is the clearest indication of the success of the 
manipulation, and obviates the necessity of an} 7 means of expressing 
the last portions of liquid from a porous mass. 

In making preparations by displacement, we should aim by 
skilful manipulation to extract nearly all from the drug that is 
soluble, before reaching the measure indicated in the formula, the 
last addition will then serve to displace the last portion held by the 
dregs, and to dilute the liquid to the proper point. 

After the process of maceration the dregs are almost always satu- 
rated with the strongest portion of the liquid, which is wasted 
unless some means of expression are resorted to; but, if the dregs 
be thrown upon a filter and drained, and a portion of the menstruum 
poured upon it, the last drop may sometimes be displaced without 
a resort to the troublesome process of expression. 

If the liquid thus added to the dregs is different from the men- 
struum originally employed, and especially if it is a heavier liquid, 
it is liable to mix with it, and sometimes results in injury to the 
preparation. By adding about one-third less of the displacing 
liquid than the supposed quantity of menstruum remaining in the 
dregs, this inconvenience is generally obviated. 

In the preparation of tinctures in which the last portions cannot 
be recovered by adding water on to the top of the cylinder, and in 
making large quantities of extracts with strong alcohol, the con- 
siderable loss of the alcohol calls for the use of a press. Convenient 
screw -presses are made in the cities, and sold at moderate prices ; 



598 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 



those shown in the previous chapter are well adapted to the object 
in view. 

Solution of Gum Resins, etc., in Displacement Apparatus. — Vege- 
table products of this class are usually so soluble in the menstrua 
employed for their extraction as to render it a matter of little im- 
portance whether they are treated by maceration or percolation. 
They should be thoroughly divided in order to expose an extended 
surface to the action of the liquid, and, if dissolved by percolation, 
should be mixed with an equal bulk of sand to facilitate the pro- 
cess. Tinctures of this class made by maceration require to be 
filtered to free them from impurities suspended in them, the 
necessity of which is obviated when they are made by percolation. 
Continuous percolation may be accomplished by the following 
automatic arrangement, which is adapted equally to filtration : — 

A bottle or globe, capable of containing the quantity of men- 
struum necessary to complete the preparation, is fitted with a 
perforated cork, in which is inserted a glass tube of such length as 
that, being inverted over the percolator, the tube will descend below 
the surface of the liquid contained in it. The lower end of the 
tube should have a short curve turned on it; the bottle or globe 
being filled and arranged in this manner will not discharge any of 
its contents into the percolator until the surface of the liquid con- 
tained in it falls below the extremity of the tube ; a bubble of air 
will then pass up into the bottle, and a corresponding portion of 
the liquid will descend. In this way, the supply in the percolator 
will be kept up until the bottle has emptied itself; and, if the 
quantity of the liquid has been accurately 
estimated, the preparation will be finished 
without further attention. 

Instead of having merely a straight piece 
of tube inserted in the mouth of the bottle 
from which the liquid is supplied, two tubes 
may be used, as shown in Fig. 226. In this 
case, the afflux tube a is turned up at the end, 
as recommended above, and as the liquid runs 
out here air enters at b. The surface of the 
liquid into which a is immersed must, how- 
ever, be so far below the lowest point of b as 
to enable the air to depress the liquid in the 
external ascending part of b, and thus to enter 
the bottle. 

The size of the tubes must be also so ar- 
ranged that the liquid will not run from a 
unless the orifice of the tube be in contact with the contents of the 
filter, so that the cohesive attraction of the liquid may overcome 
the capillary attraction. 

The rationale of the process of percolation is very similar to that 
of filtration ; both are due to capillary attraction. In ordinary 
filtration, the capillarity of the paper causes the absorption of a 
certain quantity of liquid, but on more than enough to wet it being 



Fig. 226. 




Bottle for continuous filtra 
tion and displacement. 



MANAGEMENT OF THE PROCESS. 599 

added, the pressure of this drives out the first, taking its place, and 
so on. Precisely the same thing occurs in percolation ; a porous 
substance, being saturated with any liquid for which it has an 
affinity, will yield this up, if a portion of liquid he poured on above, 
from the force of gravitation merely ; and hence, in proportion to 
the height of the column of liquid, other things being equal, will 
be the rapidity of the process. 

The fact that alcohol and ether pass through most plants so 
much more rapidly than water, is due, perhaps, in part to these 
liquids being less forcibly held by this species of attraction, but 
mainly^to their dissolving less freely the organic proximate princi- 
ples most abounding in plants, and which render aqueous liquids 
so thick and viscid as to pass with difficulty. 

Very porous drugs, such as rhubarb, senna, squill, gentian, 
hyoscyamus, and others containing a large proportion of extractive 
matters, cannot be conveniently treated by displacement with wine 
or liquids containing a considerable proportion of water, owing to 
their powerful capillarity ; in treating these, either by water, 
diluted alcohol, or diluted acetic acid, the following points are to 
be observed: — 

a. The powder must not be too fine, though uniform. The 
Pharmacopoeia directs for rhubarb, to be treated with mixed alcohol 
and diluted alcohol, in a powder which would pass through a sieve 
of 50 meshes to the linear inch (moderately fine) ; or in instances 
where diluted alcohol is used, 40 meshes (moderately coarse). For 
senna, treated with diluted alcohol, moderately fine. Squill, treated 
either with diluted alcohol or diluted acetic acid, moderately 
coarse. Gentian is ordered in moderately fine (No. 50) and mode- 
rately coarse (No. 40) powder, according to the alcoholic strength 
of the menstruum. 

b. The coarse powder must be thoroughly moistened with the 
menstruum before being introduced into the precolator; it must be 
at first rather loosely packed, otherwise, being swelled very much 
on the absorption of the liquid, it may become too tight. The 
common funnel is to be preferred under these circumstances. 

c. When the process proceeds with difficulty, from the causes 
above described, or from otherwise defective manipulation, it may 
be partly obviated by adding a considerable column of the men- 
struum above the mass; this, acting by hydrostatic pressure, forces 
the liquid through with increased facility. 

d. Time and patience will, to a certain extent, correct the same 
difficulty; after the first portions of the liquid, which pass so slowly 
from being highly charged with the soluble principles, and from the 
continued swelling of the powder, the remainder will often come 
through more readily, increasing in rapidity to the end. 

e. The admixture of sand serves a good purpose in this case, as 
in that of the gum resius. 

^ /. Alcohol, diluted in various proportions with water, is directed 
for making fluid extract of senna, fluid extract of pink-root, syrup 
of rhubarb, syrup of seneka, compound syrup of squill, and some 



600 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS. 

other preparations, on account of the difficulty of conducting the 
percolation with water alone. 

Very compact Drugs. — Seeds and other parts of plants, when of 
close texture, not readily penetrable by menstrua, may require, as 
directed in the case of tincture of nux vomica, that the finely 
powdered drug be subjected to prolonged elevation of temperature 
in contact with the menstruum, previously to percolation. And 
the instances are frequent, not only in preparing fluid extracts, but 
also tinctures, that owing to failure to extract the whole strength 
of the drug with the quantity of menstruum ordered, it becomes 
necessary to continue the process and evaporate the excess of the 
menstruum ; in such cases, special care must be taken to preserve 
the proper alcoholic strength of the preparation by allowing for 
the greater proportional loss of the more volatile ingredient, and to 
prevent the deterioration of the preparation by heat, by the pre- 
caution almost invariably directed in the Pharmacopoeia, of setting 
aside the first, more concentrated, part, evaporating the last portion 
only, and finally mixing the liquors. 

Displacement, apjMed to hot liquids, requires some modification of 
the apparatus and the manipulation. 

The deterioration to which vegetable infusions are liable by boil- 
ing is adverted to under that head ; the chief use of percolation 
with steam or hot liquids is to obviate this, at the same time that 
the advantages of high temperature are secured. 




Smith's steam displacer. 



The steam percolator, Fig. 227, invented by the late C. Augustus 
Smith, of Cincinnati, Ohio, consists of two distinct parts, B, the 
displacer, and C, the boiler, connected by a tube of tin or lead, D. 
J. is a tin cap luted on to the top of a common displacement tube 
terminating in the funnel-shaped appendage below. This is sur- 



DISPLACEMENT APPLIED TO HOT LIQUIDS. 601 

rounded by a tin jacket, into the bottom of which the conical tube 
G conducts cold water, while the spout ^"discharges the warmed 
water from the top. The substance to be treated being placed in 
the displacer, and the liquid designed to be applied to it put into 
the boiler, the connections are luted on, and heat applied by the 
lamp E, or preferably by a gas furnace. The vapor which is gene- 
rated passes through the tube Z), and penetrates the whole mass 
in the displacer; the jacket being now filled with cold water, the 
steam is condensed and passes out below, where it is collected in 
the receiver F. The advantage is thus gained of penetrating the 
powder thoroughly by the aid of heat, while the deteriorating 
influence of decoction is avoided. 

This instrument possesses advantages over the ordinary means 
for extraction with hot liquids which should recommend it to 
general favor ; it is not only useful as a substitute for decoction, 
but obviates the difficulty above adverted to of extracting certain 
porous and largely soluble vegetables with water. The steam, 
whether of water or alcohol, being generated in the boiler and 
passed into the displacer before the addition of cold water to the 
cooler, is maintained at an elevated temperature until it has tho- 
roughly permeated the mass ; it is then, by refrigeration, converted 
into liquid, which finds ready egress through the lower orifice, and 
is highly charged with the soluble vegetable principles present. 
The removal of these, added to the pressure of the steam, continu- 
ally kept up from the boiler as fast as it is condensed, renders the 
flow rapid and the preparation concentrated. 

Fluid extract of senna can be prepared in the steam displacer 
without the use of alcohol as a menstruum ; so concentrated is the 
decoction obtained in the first instance as to require very little 
evaporation to bring it to the officinal standard. 

The apparatus, as above described, is imperfectly adapted to treat- 
ing substances with diluted alcohol ; if that liquid be placed in the 
boiler, the effect of the heat applied is to drive over the alcohol first 
and then the water, so that the first portion being stronger of the 
resinous principles, and the latter of the starch and extractive, the 
mixture of the two would be turbid. To obviate this, two boilers 
are sometimes adapted to one cylinder, one for alcohol and the 
other for water, and, by a proper regulation of the heat to each, the 
vapors may be brought over in nearly equal proportions at the same 
time. The cylinder should not be made of too great diameter nor 
length; but I am^informed by the inventor that he uses cylinders 
of the capacity of a barrel; this is perhaps the largest size that 
would answer well in practice; where larger quantities of the same 
substance are to be treated at once than will fill such a cylinder, or 
where several different operations requiring the same menstruum 
are to be conducted simultaneously, two or more cylinders may be 
attached to the same boiler, and placed in the same cooler. 

Substances heretofore digested in hot alcohol, a very inconvenient 
process, may be treated with that menstruum with great facility by 
using this apparatus. 



602 PERCOLATION, OR THE DISPLACEMENT PROCESS, 



Fis. 228. 



For percolation with ether, an ingenious apparatus, invented by 
Prof. Mohr, is figured in his work. It combines the advantages of 
a good air-tight displacer with that of a still 
for recovering the ether ; it is, however, a com- 
plex apparatus, and rather troublesome to use. 
For percolation at ordinary temperatures, 
especially where a small amount of the medi- 
cinal substance is to be treated with ether, a 
common displacer may be used, care being taken 
to cover it and the receiving vessel, to prevent 
evaporation; a narrow lamp-chimney, fitting 
below into a wide-mouth bottle, will be found 
to serve a good purpose, or, if large enough, a 
syringe pattern displacer. An adapter, such 
as is used in retort operations (Fig. 228 A), may 
be inserted through a perforated cork into a 
convenient bottle, the top being covered with 
a piece of bladder pierced with pin holes, or 
fitted rather loosely with a cork to prevent 
evaporation. 

Fig. 228 represents two forms of displacers 
for ether and other volatile liquids ; A is an 
adapter. The tube C is drawn out into a fine 
point, so as to admit the passage of the air 
without favoring evaporation. E represents a 
notched cork diaphragm, F a broken retort 
beak, suited to similar operations. 

The application of a vacuum to promote the 
rapidity of percolation is an important improve- 
ment in certain cases, and several very inge- 
nious forms of apparatus have been contrived 
by the French with this end in view ; perhaps 
the best of these are the coffee-pots, in which 
the pressure of steam is first brought to bear in penetrating the 
mass with the hot liquid, and then, by the withdrawal of the source 
of heat, the steam is immediately condensed, creating a vacuum 
which hastens the downward passage of the liquid. In using 
Smith's steam displacer, though at no time a very complete vacuum 
is formed, yet this principle comes into play, and undoubtedly faci- 
litates the percolation of the mass under treatment, in the same 
way that it operates in a vacuum displacer. 




Extemporaneous glass 
displacers. 



TINCTURES — ALCOHOL. 603 



CHAPTER VII. 

TINCTURES. 

The consideration of the process of percolation has prepared the 
student to enter upon those Galenical solutions in the preparation 
of which it is employed. Prominent among these, as the most nu- 
merous and most varied, is the class of tinctures called by the French 
alcoolatures. 

The study of these and other Galenical solutions is less attended 
to by students than their importance demands; in some respects, a 
knowledge of pharmaceutical preparations is more important than 
a familiarity with the drugs themselves. It is the preparations that 
enter into the prescriptions of the physician almost exclusively; he 
should be acquainted not only with their doses, but with their proper 
therapeutical and pharmaceutical adaptations, as modified by the 
menstrua employed in their preparation, by their degree of concen- 
tration, their miscibility with other liquids, and their other phy- 
sical peculiarities. 

With a view to conveying this knowledge, as far as practicable, 
the present chapter is devoted to the consideration of the tinctures 
officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and those unofficinal tinctures 
which are commonly used in this country. 

Tinctures invariably contain alcohol, generally more or less di- 
luted, as the vehicle for their active ingredients. 

Alcohol, as officinal in the Pharmacopoeia, is a colorless, limpid, 
very volatile liquid, of a peculiar penetrating odor, and burning 
taste, having a specific gravity of .835. Its chief impurities, as 
found in commerce, are as follows: Water, which increases its spe- 
cific gravity in the ratio of its proportion; fusel oil, a constituent 
of whiskey, which, being volatile, though less so than alcohol, is 
generally imperfectly separated in the distillation ; this may be de- 
tected, by its imparting the peculiar odor of whiskey to the alcohol, 
and particularly by the odor left on the hand, after the alcohol 
has evaporated from it: and occasionally coloring matter, derived 
from the casks in which it is kept. 

For a description of the mode of manufacture and chemical cha- 
racters of alcohol the reader is referred to Part IV., where it is 
treated of as a product of Fermentation. 

Alcohol, of .'835 sp. gr., called druggist's alcohol, contains 85 per 
cent, of pure or absolute alcohol ; it is an excellent solvent for a large 
number of vegetable substances, as resins, camphor, benzoic acid, 
tannic acid, the balsams, grape sugar, the vegetable alkalies, castor 
oil, also for some inorganic substances, as iodine, chloride of iron, 



604 OF TINCTURES. 

carbonate and muriate of ammonia, caustic potassa and soda, nearly 
all deliquescent, and a few other salts. It mixes freely in all pro- 
portions with water, ether, acetic acid, and most of the essential 
oils, and reacts with several acids, forming ethers. 

Besides its extensive solvent powers, qualifying it for so many 
uses in pharmacy, it is a most convenient antiseptic, effectually pre- 
venting fermentation in organic solutions to which it is added. 

By the low temperature at which it evaporates, it is well suited 
to the preparation of concentrated medicines requiring evaporation. 

In connection with these valuable physical properties, it has im- 
portant therapeutical relations. Alcohol is a powerful arterial 
stimulant; even in small quantities it produces fulness of pulse, and 
a general excitant influence on the system ; and hence the tinctures, 
especially those given in large doses, should not be used in the 
treatment of inflammatory diseases, and should be employed with 
prudence in all chronic cases, lest the continual stimulus derived 
from the alcohol they contain should lead to the habitual use of 
intoxicating drinks. 

The use of strong alcohol in the preparation of tinctures is con- 
fined to a comparatively small number, chiefly such as contain a 
considerable proportion of essential oil, of resin, or of resinoid 
principles. These constitute the second class in the syllabi which 
follow. 

Diluted Alcohol — Alcohol Dilution, U. S. P. — This is more exten- 
sively employed than the foregoing as a menstruum for tinctures ; 
is consists of equal parts by measure of alcohol and water ; its specific 
gravity is .941. Containing water, the great natural solvent, in so 
large proportion, this liquid is capable of extracting from plants, 
gum, extractive matter, vegetable albumen, and most coloring 
matters which are soluble in that menstruum, and, to a certain 
extent, resinous matters, essential oils, and vegetable alkalies, 
soluble in alcohol ; also sugar and tannic acid, soluble in both. 

It has been supposed that the affinity for each other of the two 
ingredients in this liquid, interferes somewhat with the solvent 
powers of each ; so that substances wholly insoluble in water would 
not be so thoroughly extracted by a given quantity of diluted 
alcohol, as by half the quantity of strong alcohol ; and so in the 
case of substances insoluble in alcohol, they would not be so tho- 
roughly extracted by the mixture as by water alone; but, according 
to the experiments of M. Jacques Personne, published in the Ame- 
rican Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xviii. pp. 21, 103, the reverse of 
this is the fact, and a mixture of alcohol and water is stated to be 
a better solvent of the resinous and extractive principles of plants, 
than the same quantity of these two liquids separately employed. 

Whatever may be the truth in theory, diluted alcohol is found 
in practice to answer a good purpose; furnishing tinctures which 
are reasonably permanent, at the same time that they are less stimu- 
lating than those made with strong alcohol, and are generally 
miscible with aqueous solutions without any portion of their active 
principles precipitating. 



SYLLABUS OF TINCTURES. 



605 



Several observers have, however, directed attention to the deposits 
universally occurring in tinctures after long standing, and the con- 
clusion has been reached, by experiment, that these generally 
contain appreciable quantities of the active ingredients of the pre- 
parations. 

There are, no doubt, advantages gained by varying the propor- 
tions of water and alcohol to suit particular drugs. 

There are several preparations officinal in the Pharmacopoeia 
which are exceptions in the proportion of alcohol contained in them. 
The infusion of digitalis, and compound infusion of gentian, as 
before stated, are rendered permanent by small quantities of alcohol 
added to them, or by being made with very weak diluted alcohol. 

The numerous fluid extracts are made with varied proportions 
of alcohol, glycerin, and water in extracting the drugs, and also 
with a suitable proportion of alcohol and glycerin added for its 
antiseptic properties. 

In the last edition of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, a change which 
was commenced in the preceding edition has been more fully 
carried out, much to the gratification of many pharmacists who 
felt the controlling authority of the Pharmacopoeia, and yet were 
well assured that menstrua of different alcoholic strengths were re- 
quired to properly extract the active principles of the various drugs 
directed in the formulas. 

The following syllabus will enable the student to fix the various 
tinctures in their relation to the menstrua most readily in his mind. 



Syllabus of Tinctures (U. S. P. 1870) showing the Alcoholic 

STRENGTH OF MENSTRUUM AND PROPORTION OF DRUG TO A PINT. 



Name of Tincture. 


Strength of menstruum. 


Proportion of drug. 


Aconiti radicis 


Alcohol 








| v j t0 Q). 


Aloes et myrrhae 


<< 








^iij of each to Oj. 


Assafcetidae 


" 








sij t0 Qj. 


Benzoini 


(< 








§iij to Oj. 


' comp. 


«( 








§iij benz., %$s soc. aloes J alco. 
3 i j storax, §j tolu \ Oij. 


Cannabis 


<< 








grs. 360 ext. to Oj. 


Castorei 


«« 








S3 t0 Oj. 


Guaiaci 


a 








§iij to Oj. 


Iodini 


(< 








|JtoOj. 

§ss iodine, 3J iodide potassium. 


" comp. 


t< 








Lupulinae 


a 








IvJ to Oj. 


Myrrhae 


a 








§iss to Oj. 


Nucis vomicae 


t< 








§iv to Oj. 


Tolutana 


" 








§iss to Oj. 


Veratri viridis 


" 








|viij to Oj. 

%\v to Oj. 


Zinziber 


« 








Arnica 


Alcohol 3 


parts, 


water 1 


part 


|iij to Oj. 


Cinchonse 


" 


" 


" 


" 


giij to Oj. [taria. 


" comp. 


<< 


<< 


(< 


tl 


§iv cinchona, grs. 360 serpen- 










§iij b. orange peel, Oiiss alco. f . 



606 



OF TINCTURES, 



Syllabus of Tinctures — Continued. 



Name of tincture. 


Strength of 


menstruum. 


Proportion of drug. 


Ferri chloridi 


Alcohol 3 


parts, 


sol. iron 1 part 






Sanguinaria 


Alcohol 3 parts, 


water 1 


part 


3tf toOj. 




Cinnamon 


Alcohol 2 


parts, 


water 1 


part 


§iss to Oj. 




Jalapse 


tt 


«« 


a 


(< 


|iij to Oj. 




Kino 


(1 


(i 


a 


<( 


grs. 720 to Oj. 




Aurantii 


Alcohol 1 part, 


water 1 


part 


§ij to Oj. 




Belladonnae 


a 


c< 


(< 


a 


|ij to Oj. 




Colchicum 


<< 


it 


(< 


" 


§y to oj. 




Colombo 


<( 


" 


<( 


" 


3y to oj. 




Cantharides 


tt 


" 


(« 


a 


]§ss to Oj. 




Capsici 


<t 


" 


a 


«' 


^ss to Oj. 




Cardamomi 


(< 


<< 


a 


<< 


§ij to Oj. 

grs. 3G0 cardamom "j 


honey 
toOi 


" comp. 


tt 


" 


tt 


«« 


grs. 120 caraway 
grs. 300 cinnamon J 












grs. 00 cochineal J 


Catechu 


i i 


" 


« 


n 


P. cinnamon 1 Q . 
^iij catechu / l0 U1J 


. 


Conii 


a 


" 


" 


a 


gij to Oj. 




Cubeba 


" 


n 


(< 


it 


gij to Oj. 




Digitalis 


" 


" 


" 


tt 


§'j to Oj. 




Gallse 


" 


" 


t< 


tt 


§ij to Oj. 
|]j gentian 




Gentian, comp. 


" 


a 


" 


". 


gj bitter orange peel 
§ss cardamom 


- to Oij. 


Hellebori 


« 


11 


" 


" 


§ij to Oj. 




Humuli 


a 


" 


a 


" 


giiss to Oj. 




Hyosciami 


" . 


" 


" 


" 


lij toOj. 




Krameria 


" 


" 


" 


" 


|iij toOj. 




Lobelia 


tt 


tt 


(< 


a 


gij to Oj. 




Opii 


a 


n 


(< 


tt 


gii toOj. 

grs. 60 opium 

grs. GO benzoic acid 




Opii camphorata 


«( 


a 


«< 


a 


grs. 40 camphor 
f5j oil anise 
|ij honey 


- to Oij. 


Quassia 


" 


n 


a 


a 


SJ to Oij. 




Rhei et gennse 


a 


" 


a 


" 






Scillee 


" 


" 


tt 


" 


§y to oj. 




Serpentariae 


" 


" 


a 


(< 


|ij to Oj. 




Stramonii 


a 


" 


a 


«c 


S'J to Oj. 




Aloes 


Alcohol 1 part, water 3 parts 


5ft to Oj. 




Opii deod. 


" 


" 


" 


(< 


la to oj. 




" acetata 


Alcohol 


i part, 


dis. vinegar 12 oz. 


gij opium. 




Guaiaci ammon. 


Spirits ammon. 


aromat 




gijj to Oj. 




Valerianae ammon. 


" 


1 1 


<( 




S'J to Oj. 





The formulas are given in this chapter for all the tinctures in the 
TJ. S. Pharmacopoeia, and some others, deemed of importance. The 
following syllabi have been prepared by way of presenting in a 
single view this important class of preparations, and the classifica- 
tion gives facilities to the student for committing to memory the 
proportions, uses, and doses of the officinal tinctures. 



THE OFFICINAL TINCTURES. 



607 



THE OFFICINAL TINCTURES. 

Classified for Study (See Formulas and Comments.) 
Tinctura, U. S. P. 1860. 

Group 1.— Narcotics,* sedatives, etc. With diluted alcohol. Proportions, |ij of the 
drug to Oj. Doses, 10 drops to fgij. 



Officinal name. 


Med. properties. 


Dose. 


Remarks. 


Tinctura belladonnae 


Narcotic 


20 to 30 drops 


From the leaves. 


C( 


stramonii 


do. 


do. 


Made from the seeds. 


" 


conii 


Alterative, narcotic 


30 to 60 drops 


Misnamed tinct.cicutse 


«< 


hyoscyanri 


Narcotic, laxative 


do. 


From the leaves. 


" 


digitalis 


Diuretic, sedative 


10 drops 


From English leaves 
of second year. 


" 


scillae 


Emetic, diuretic, etc. 


10 to 30 drops 


See Acetum scillae. 


a 


colchici 


Diuretic, etc. 


20 drops to f5j 


From the seeds. See 
Vina and Aceta 


« i 


lobelias 


Emetic, narcotic 


f^ss to f5j 


Emetic dose, i§ss 




sanguinanae 


Alcohol 3 pts., water 
1 pt., menstruum 


do. 


do. 



The first group of tinctures are all made, with one exception, in 
the proportion of two ounces of the drug to one pint of diluted 
alcohol ; they are easy of preparation by percolation, the herbs 
usually yielding their active principles and coloring matter before 
the whole amount of menstruum has passed. Stramonium and 
Colchicum tinctures are made of the powdered seeds : the former is 
remarkable for having a peculiar green or fluorescent appearance 
when seen by reflected light, though very clear and of a decided 
brown color by transmitted light. 

The majority of them are narcotics, and are given in the dose of 
from 20 to 60 drops. Considered therapeutically the six first named 
in the table form a very natural group ; the remaining four have 
fewer points of resemblance, and several cannot be classed with 
narcotics without doing some violence to their true position. The 
tincture of digitalis is not only peculiar in its therapeutical action, 
but forms an exception in the dose, which should not exceed ten 
drops. 

Group 2. — Narcotics, sedatives, etc. With strong alcohol, saturated or nearly so. 
Doses, 5 to 10 drops. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Tinctura aconiti radicis 
" nucis vomicae 
" veratri viridis 
" cannabis 


§vj to Oj 
^iv to Oj 
gviij to Oj 
^vj ext. to Oj 


gtt. v to x 
gtt. v to XV 
gtt. v to XV 
gtt. v to XX 


Nervous sedative. 
Nervous stimulant. 
Arterial sedative. 
Cerebral stimulant. 



Tinctures of the second group are among the most powerful liquid 
preparations in use. They require the utmost care in percolating 

* See Group 2, and Galenical Preparations of Opium. 



608 



OF TINCTURES. 



the several drugs, that the process shall proceed so slowly and so 
completely as to extract the active principles from the large amounts 
prescribed, or should it happen that the whole strength has not 
been extracted up to the time or near the time of the full quantity 
having passed, it is better to set aside the tincture which has been 
collected and pass the remainder into an evaporating dish, in which 
it may be concentrated at a very low temperature and added to the 
first portion. 

These tinctures should be generally diluted in prescription, rather 
than prescribed singly, except where the patient or nurse has expe- 
rience and care in dropping.* It is needless to remind the reader 
that these tinctures are powerful poisons, though the tincture of 
veratrum viride is perhaps not unfrequently taken in doses much 
larger than that indicated above. 

Group 3. — Chiefly stimulants and aromatics. Doses, generally from f^j to fgij. Made 
of varying proportions with diluted alcohol. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Med. properties, etc. 


Tinctura Valerianae 


S'j to Oj 


f3' l J 


Tonic, antispasm. 


" serpentarise 


3ij do. 


do. 


Stimulant, tonic. 


" cubebae 


§ij do. 


do. 


do. diuretic. 


" cantharidis 


§ss do. 


gtt. XX 


do. to be diluted. 


" capsici 


t ^ss do. 


f<5J 


do. do. 


" cinnamomi 


§iss do. 


^y 


Aromat. adjuvant. 


" cardamomi 


5j <io. 

[" cardamom grs. 144 "| 
| cinnamon grs. 120 | 


m 


do. do. 


" cardamomi comp. 


to Oj \ caraway grs. 48 \ 
| honey f3vj 
[ cochineal grs. 24 J 


fgss 


do. do. 








" arnicse 


_... . rk . f alcohol 3 p. ") 

SmtoOj { waterlp p } 




Used externally. 



The third group has less points of resemblance among its members 
than either of the others. Tinctures of valerian and serpentaria may 
be substituted by the corresponding fluid extracts. Tincture of 
cubebs is rarely used, the oleoresin being adapted to the form of 
lozenge and of mixture. Tincture of cantharides, which is much 
prescribed as an addition to preparations for the hair, to the growth 
of which it is an admirable stimulant, should for this purpose be 
made with strong alcohol. Tincture of arnica, which is a new r offi- 
cinal, is often made with strong alcohol, which has the advantage, 
in view of its use externally, of less color, and more powerful stim- 
ulating properties. The addition of one-third water, as directed 
in the Pharmacopoeia, should, of course, be complied with, out of 
respect to the national standard, and for the sake of uniformity. 
Three tinctures of this group are all used for the same purposes, 
as adjuvants to other medicines, in extemporaneous solutions and 

* The tincture of cannabis, which is prepared by trituration in a mortar, is quite in- 
compatible with aqueous liquids unless suspended, as directed under the head of 
Extemporaneous Preparations. It is very variable in strength, owing to the differ- 
ence in the quality of the extract in commerce. 



TONIC AND ASTRINGENT TINCTURES, 



609 



mixtures. The compound tincture of cardamom is a very elegant 
one for this purpose. In the late edition of the Pharmacopoeia this 
has been improved by the substitution, for raisins, which were for- 
merly introduced as a sweetening ingredient, of honey, which, be- 
sides being added with more facility, does not interfere with the 
permanence of the rich color, which is one of the great recommen- 
dations of this adjuvant. 

Group 4. — These are made with diluted alcohol, excepting the simple and compound 
Tinctures of Cinchona. They are generally quite incompatible with salts of iron, 
forming inky solutions. They are all astringents or tonics, or both. Doses, from 
f 3J t0 f 3U- 



Officinal Name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Med. Properties. 


Tinctura gallae 


§ij to Oj 


f#j 


Astringent. 


it 


catechu 


^iss to Oj with !|j cinnam. 


do. 


do. 


a 


kino 


„. . r.. f alcohol 2 p. 
§ 1SS t0 °J { water 1 p P 


'33 


do. 


it 


krameriae 


I"j t0 Qj 


do. 


do. 


a 


cinchouse 


i / ii v i •* f alcohol 3 p. 
do. (yellow bark) | waterlp ^ 


f3ij 


Tonio. 


< 


• comp. 


( red bark §ij ~\ to f,^xx 
■1 B. orange-peel §iss I alcohol 3 p. 
( serpentaria 3I1J J water 1 p. 


do. 


do. aromatic. 
(Huxham's.) 




calumbse 


SU to Oj 
( gentian gj 1 


do. 


Tonic. 


a 


gentianee comp. 


1 B. oraDge-peel gss j- to Oj 
( cardamom 3ij J 


do. 


do. aromatic. 


«< 


quassias 


U to Oj 


do. 


do. 


<« 


humuli 


§iiss to Oj 


do. 


do. sedative. 



In this group the tonic and astringent preparations are appropri- 
ately associated, though differing among themselves. The tinctures 
of quassia and Colombo are sui generis in containing no astringent 
principle. The dose of these will be observed to be larger than of 
the previous groups, ranging from two fluidrachms to half a fluid- 
ounce. 

Tinctures of kino and catechu are very popular astringents, but 
liable to gelatinize by age, particularly the first named, on which 
account the Pharmacopoeia directs that only half a pint should be 
made at once. In the late edition the proportions of alcohol and 
water are varied to meet this difficulty, doubtless as the result of 
experiments. 

Of this group Huxham's tincture of cinchona holds pre-eminence 
as a popular tonic, though it and the simple tincture of (yellow) 
cinchona, a most unsightly preparation, are both being superseded 
in many circles by the more elegant "elixirs of bark" recently in- 
troduced ; it should be also noticed that both the simple and com- 
pound tinctures are now made with alcohol three parts, water one 
part, and that both the saffron and red saunders have been omitted 
from the compound tincture ; the change in menstruum is in accord 
with the opinion of pharmacists of great experience and good judg- 
ment. 

39 



610 



OF TINCTURES, 



Group 5. — With diluted alcohol: cathartics, and stomachics. Doses, fgj to f §ss. 



Officinal Name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Med. Properties, etc. 


Tinct. hellebori 


|ij to Oj 


*ti 


Emmenagogue, cathart. 


" jalapge 


t'-' i. r\- f alcohol 2 p. 
3»JtoQ, { water l p P 


do. 


Cathartic used in com- 
bination. 


" rhei 


f rhubarb §iss l Q . 
\ cardamom gij / J 


f-fss 


-Tonic, cathartic. 




f rhubarb §ss 










| senna 5j 








" " et sennse 


j coriander 5ss 
"j fennel gss 
j liquorice gr. xv 
[_ raisins §iij 


- to Oiss 


do. 


Carminative, laxative. 
(Warner's Cordial.) 


" aloe'3 


j soc. aloes ^ss 1 
\ liquorice §iss J 


alco. f§iv 
water f^xij 


do. 


Cathartic. 



Tinctures of hellebo)*e and of jalap are rarely prescribed, especially 
the latter, which is not miscible with aqueous liquids without pre- 
cipitation. 

Two compound tinctures of rhubarb which were officinal in the 
older Pharmacopoeias, have been omitted from the late edition, as 
also the tincture of senna and jalap; they w^ere little prescribed. 

The tincture of rhubarb and senna is directed to be made by mace- 
ration, but, with the exception of the raisins, which should be 
separately macerated in the tincture, the ingredients, if properly 
powdered and mixed, are well adapted to displacement. 

Tincture of aloes is so very disgusting that few physicians with 
due regard for their patients will inflict it upon them, especially as 
vinum aloes is so superior to it. Several infusions containing aloes 
are given under the head of Unofficinal Infusions. 

The doses named in the tables may be considered as average adult 
doses ; it is impossible to state their variations in a syllabus. 

Group 6. — Resinous Tinctures, made with strong alcohol, incompatible with aqueous 
liquids. Doses, f5ss to f^ij. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Tinct 


ara myrrhse 


§iij to Oij 


m 


Astringent, emmenagogue. 


«« 


aloes et myrrhae 


f aloes §iss 1 
} saffron §ss J- 
( myrrh §iss ) 


fci 


Laxative, emmenagogue. 
(Elixir proprietatis.) 


<( 


guaiaci 


|iij to Oj 


*m 


Alterative, diaphoretic. 


<( 


assafoetida 


S'j toOj 


m 


Antispasmodic. 


u 


castorei 


gj toOj 


f^ss 


a 


a 


lupulinse 


5*j to Oj 


m 


Tonic, narcotic. 


a 


tolutani 


gissto Oj 


f5ss 


Stimulant, expectorant. 


u 


benzoini 


gifl to Oj 
f benzoin §iss 1 
! storax 5j * /v 
j bals. tolugss {- t0 °J 


f 3 ss 


(< <( 


a 


benzoini comp. 


f5ss 


tl tl 

(See Turlington's balsam.) 






L aloes gij J 






u 


zingiberis 


§iv to Oj 


m 


Carminative. 



Tinctures of this group are all incompatible with aqueous liquids, 
which, by rendering the resinous ingredient insoluble, precipitate it. 



FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES. 611 

Notwithstanding this apparent disadvantage, they may be added 
to aqueous mixtures, where sugar or gum are added as excipients. 
Some of the resinous tinctures are much given on sugar, which is 
allowed to dissolve slowly in the mouth; they may also be given in 
milk. 

Tinctures of tolu and ginger are used in the preparation of the 
officinal tolu and ginger syrups. The latter is extensively known 
as essence of ginger, and is one of the most popular of carminatives. 

Tincture of myrrh is almost exclusively used in the composition 
of gargles and mouth-washes, its stimulant and astringent proper- 
ties fitting it to these uses. Tincture of guaiac is remarkable for 
the green color of the precipitate produced on its addition to milk, 
which is the usual vehicle in which it is administered. The patient 
is apt to be alarmed at this appearance unless previously informed 
of it. 

The solutions of camphor and essential oils in alcohol are placed, 
by the last revision of the Pharmacopoeia, under the general head 
Spiritus. 

Group 7. — Ammoniated or Volatile Tinctures, made with aromatic spirit of ammonia. 

Tinct. guaiaci ammoniata §iv to Oiss Stimulating diaphoretic, Dose, f5J. 
" Valerianae " §ij to Oj Antispasmodic, do. 

Aromatic spirit of ammonia, itself an admirable stimulant and 
antacid, and extensively used as a remedy for sick headache, is 
used as a menstruum in this class of tinctures ; it has the advan- 
tage, for the quantity of carbonate of ammonia it contains, of in- 
creasing the solubility of resinous bodies, and also adding to their 
stimulating effects and comparative medicinal efficiency in certain 
cases. 

Volatile tincture of guaiac is prescribed in gouty affections with 
an acid diathesis. 

Volatile tincture of Valerian has been almost superseded, of late, 
by Pierlot's solution and elixir of valerianate of ammonia ; yet the 
diffusible character of the ammoniacal spirit is well adapted to add 
efficiency to this noted antispasmodic root, and when the tincture 
is carefully prepared with fresh materials, it is a most valuable 
remedy ; the percolator should be covered to prevent loss of the 
volatile ingredient. 

Working Formulas for preparing the Tinctures. 
From the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. 

Tinctura Aconiti Radicis, IT. S. P. 

Take of Aconite root, in fine powder, twelve troj-ounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with six fluidounces of alcohol, pack it 
firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 



612 OF TINCTURES. 

Tinctura Aloes, U. S. P. 

Take of Socotrine aloes, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Liquorice, three troyounces. 
Alcohol, half a pint. 
Distilled water, a pint and a half. 

Macerate for seven days, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Aloes et Myrrhce, IT. S. P. 

Take of Socotrine aloes, in moderately fine powder, 

Myrrh, in moderately fine powder, each, three troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and having moistened the mixture with two 
fluidounces of alcohol, pack it moderately in a conical percolator, 
and gradually pour alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture are 
obtained. 

This tincture may also be prepared by macerating the powders 
with two pints of alcohol for seven days, and filtering through 
paper. 

Tinctura Arnicce, IT. S. P. 

Take of Arnica, six troyounces. 

Alcohol, a pint and a half. 

Water, half a pint. 

Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the alcohol and water, and, having moistened the arnica 
slightly with a portion of the mixture, bruise it thoroughly in a 
mortar. Then pack it firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and pour 
upon it, first the remainder of the mixture, and afterwards suffi- 
cient diluted alcohol to make the tincture measure two pints. 

Tinctura Assafoetidce* U. S. P. 

Take of Assafcetida, bruised, four troyounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Aurantii. IT. S. P. ( Tincture of Orange Peel.) 

Take of Bitter orange peel, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol- 
Pack it in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Belladonna?, IT. S. P. 

Take of Belladonna leaves, recently dried and in fine powder, four troy- 
ounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

* Tincture of assafoetida may be rapidly prepared by introducing the gum resin 
into a mortar, and pouring on to it about an equal quantity of boiling water, tritu- 
rating into a paste, then adding alcohol to make up the required quantity. 



FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES. bid 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol, 
pack it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted 
alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Benzoini, U. S. P. ( Tincture of Benzoin.) 

Take of Benzoin, in moderately coarse powder, six troyounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Benzoini Composita, U. S. P. 

Take of Benzoin, in coarse powder, three troyounces. 

Socotrine aloes, in coarse powder, half a troyounce. 
Storax, two troyounces. 
Balsam of tolu, a troyounce. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Calumba?,TJ. S. P. (Tinctura Colombce, U. S. P. 1850.) 

Take of Columbo, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluiclounce of diluted alcohol, transfer 
it to a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Cannabis, U. S. P. (Tincture of Indian Hemp.) 

Take of Extract of hemp, three hundred and sixty grains. 
Alcohol, a pint. 

Dissolve the extract in the alcohol, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Cantharidis, U. S. P. 

Take of Cantharides, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with half a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, 
pack it in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Capsici, U. S. P. 

Take of Capsicum, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with half a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, 
pack it in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 



Tinctura, Cardamomi, IT. S. P. 

m, in fine powder, four troyounces 
lcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol, pack 



Take of Cardamom, in fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 



614 OF TINCTURES. 

it firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour diluted 
alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Cardamomi Composita, U. S. P. 

Take of Cardamom, in moderately fine powder, three hundred and sixty 

grains. 
Caraway, in moderately fine powder, one hundred and twenty 

grains. 
Cinnamon, in moderately fine powder, three hundred grains. 
Cochineal, in moderately fine powder, sixty grains. 
Clarified honey, two troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with half 
a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it in a cylindrical percolator, 
and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until two pints and six 
fluidounces of tincture are obtained. Lastly, mix this with the 
clarified honey, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Castorei, U. S. P. 

Take of Castor, bruised, two troyounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, express, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Catechu, U. S. P. 

Take of Catechu, in moderately coarse powder, three troyounces. 
Cinnamon, in moderately coarse powder, two troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with a 
fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it in a conical glass percolator, 
and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until two pints of tinc- 
ture are obtained. 

Tinctura Cinchona?, U. S. P. 

Take of Yellow cinchona, in moderately fine powder, six troyounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix three measures of alcohol with one of water, moisten the 
powder with two fluidounces of the mixture, pack it firmly in a 
conical glass percolator, and gradually pour the mixture upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Cinchonce Composita, U. S. P. (Uuxham's Tincture of Bark.) 

Take of Red cinchona, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 

Bitter orange peel, in moderately fine powder, three troyounces. 
Serpentaria, in moderately fine powder, three hundred and sixty 

grains. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix three measures of alcohol with one of water. Mix the pow- 
ders, and, having moistened the mixture with four fluidounces of 
the menstruum, pack it firmly in a conical glass percolator, and 
gradually pour upon it the menstruum, until two pints and a half 
of tincture are obtained. 



FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES. 615 

Tinctura Cinnamomi, U. S. P. 

Take of Cinnamon, in fine powder, three troyounces. 
Alcohol, 
"Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix two measures of alcohol with one of water. Then moisten 
the powder with a fluidounce of the mixture, pack it moderately 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour the mixture upon it 
until two piuts of filtered liquid are obtained. 

Tinctura Colchici, U. S. P. 

Take of Cholchicum seed, in moderately fine powder, four troj'-oimces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Conii, IT. S. P. 

Take of Conium leaves, recently dried and in fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol, pack 
it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Cubebce, TJ. S. P. 

Take of Cubebs, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Digitalis, U. S. P. 

Take of Digitalis, recently dried and in fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol, pack 
it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Gallce, IT. S. P. 

Take of Nutgall, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a glass percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 



616 OF TINCTUEES. 

Tinctura Gentiance Composita, IT. S. P. 

Take of G-entian, in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 

Bitter orange peel, in moderately fine powder, a troyounce. 
Cardamom, in moderately fine powder, half a troyounce. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with a 
fluidounce and a half of diluted alcohol, pack it in a conical perco- 
lator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until two pints of 
tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Guaiaci, U. S. P. 

Take of Guaiac, in moderately coarse powder, six troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powder thoroughly with an equal bulk of dry sand, pack 
the mixture moderately in a conical percolator, and, having covered 
it with a layer of sand, gradually pour alcohol upon it until two 
pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Guaiaci Ammoniata, U. S. P. ( Volatile Tincture of Guaiac.) 

Take of Guaiac, in moderately coarse powder, six troyounces. 
Aromatic spirit of ammonia, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days in a close vessel, and filter through paper. 

Tinctura Guaiaci Glycerinata. 

Take of Purified Guaiac resin §ij. 

Alcohol f^iij. 

Solution of potassa flij. 

Glycerin fjxj. 

Dissolve the guaiac in the alcohol, add the liquor potassa and 
then the glycerin. 

Tinctura Hellebori, XL S. P. 

Take of Black Helleborne, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Hamuli , U. S. P. 

Take of Hops, in moderately coarse powder, five troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted alcohol, 
pack it very firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour 
diluted alcohol upon it until two pints o.f tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Hyoscyami, U. S. P. 

Take of Hyoscyamus leaves recently dried, in fine powder, four troy- 
ounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 



FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES. 617 

Moisten the powder with two nuidounces of diluted alcohol, 
pack it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted 
alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura lodinii, IT. S. P. (Tincture of Iodine.) 

Take of Iodine, a troyounce. 
Alcohol, a pint. 

Dissolve the iodine in the alcohol. 

Tinctura Iodinii Composita, U. S. P. 

Take of Iodine, half a troyounce. 

Iodide of potassium, a troyounce. 
Alcohol, a pint. 

Dissolve the iodine and iodide of potassium in the alcohol. 

Tinctura Jalapce, U. S. P. 

Take of Jalap, in fine powder, six troyounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix two measures of alcohol with one of water. Then moisten 
the powder with two nuidounces of the mixture, pack it mode- 
rately in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour the mixture 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Kino, U. S. P. 

Take of Kino, in fine powder, three hundred and sixty grains. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix two measures of alcohol with one of water. Then mix the 
powder thoroughly with an equal bulk of dry sand, and having in- 
troduced the mixture into a conical glass percolator, gradually pour 
the menstruum upon it until half a pint of tincture is obtained. 



Take of Khatany, in moderately fine powder, six troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 



Tinctura Kramerioz, U. S. P. 

in moderately fine powder, six ti 
lcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two nuidounces of diluted alcohol, pack 
it in a cylindrical glass percolator, and gradually pour diluted alco- 
hol upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Lobelias, U. S. P. 

Take of Lobelia, in fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fiuidounces of diluted alcohol, pack 
it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 



618 OF TIXCTUKES. 

Tinctura Lupulince, U. S. P. 
Take of Lupulin, four troyounces. 

Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Pack the lupulin in a narrow cylindrical percolator, and gradu- 
ally pour alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Myrrhce* IT. S. P. 

Take of Myrrh, in moderately coarse powder, three troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the powder into a conical percolator, press it mode- 
rately, and gradually pour alcohol upon it until two pints of tinc- 
ture are obtained. 

Tinctura Nucis Vomica?, IT. S. P. 

Take of IS'ux vomica, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powder with a pint of alcohol, and digest for twenty- 
four hours, in a close vessel, with a gentle heat ; then transfer the 
mixture to a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour alcohol 
upon it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Quassiw, U. S, P. 

Take of Quassia, in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a nuidounce of diluted alcohol, pack 
it in a percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until 
two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Rhei, IT. S. P. 

Take of Rhubarb, in moderately coarse powder, three troyounces. 
Cardamom, in moderately fine powder, half a troyounce. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with a' 
nuidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it moderately in a conical per- 
colator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until two 
pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Bhei et Sennse, IT. S. P. 

Take of Rhubarb, in moderately coarse powder, a troyounce. 

Senna, in moderately coarse powder, one hundred and twenty 

grains. 
Coriander, in moderately coarse powder, 
Fennel, in moderately coarse powder, each, sixty grains. 
Liquorice, in moderately coarse powder, thirty grains. 
Raisins, deprived of their seeds, six troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, three pints. 

Macerate for seven days, express, and filter through paper. 

* Tincture of myrrh may be prepared with facility by pouring on the crude myrrh 
in a mortar about an equal quantity of boiling water and triturating into a paste, 
then adding alcohol to make the required quantity of the tincture. 






FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES. 619 

Tinctura Sanguinarice, IT. S. P. 

Take of Bloodroot, in moderately fine powder, four troj-ounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix three measures of alcohol with one of water. Moisten the 
powder with a nuidounce of the mixture, pack it in a conical per- 
colator, and gradually pour the menstruum upon it until two pints 
of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Scillce, TJ. S. P. 

Take of Squill, in moderately coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a nuidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Serpentarice, TJ. S. P. 

Take of Serpentaria, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a nuidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Stramonii, TJ. S. P. 

Take of Stramonium seed, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a nuidounce of diluted alcohol, pack 
it in a percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until 
two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Tolutana, U. S. P. 

Take of Balsam of tolu, three troyounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate the balsam with the alcohol until it is dissolved; then 
filter through paper. 

Tinctura Valeriana?, IT. S. P. 

Take of Valerian, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, pack it 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Valeriana? Amrnoniata, U. S. P. (Arnmoniated Tincture of 

Valerian.) 

Take of Valerian, in moderately fine powder, four troj-ounces. 
Aromatic spirit of ammonia, two pints. 



620 OF TINCTURES. 

Macerate for seven days, express, and filter through paper. 
It should be remembered that this preparation should be mace- 
rated and filtered in close vessels. 

Tinctura Veratri Viridis, IT. S. P. 

Take of American hellebore, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troy- 
ounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with four fluidounces of alcohol, pack it 
firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Tinctura Zingiberis, IT. S. P. {Essence of Ginger.) 

Take of Ginger, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of alcohol, pack it 
firmly in a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour alcohol upon 
it until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

Selections of Tinctures not Officinal in the U. S. 
Pharmacopoeia. 

Tinctura Ferri Amara. {Dr. PhysicVs Bitter Tincture of Iron.) 

Take of Iron filings ^iij. 

Bruised ginger, 

" gentian, of each ^j. 

" orange-peel Jss. 

Infuse in one pint of old cider for two weeks, in a bottle with- 
out a stopper, and filter. 

Modified Formula for the above. 

Take of Iron filings giij. 

Old cider . Oi. 

Acetic acid f |j. 

Citric acid gss. 

Ginger, in coarse powder §iv. 

Gentian, in coarse powder ^iv. 

Orange-peel, in coarse powder ^ij. 

Alcohol Oij. 

Water Oj . 

To the iron filings in a wide-mouth bottle add the cider and 
acetic acid ; digest for several hours by the aid of a moderate heat. 
Percolate the aromatics with the mixed alcohol and water. Add 
the citric acid to the cider preparation, mix it with the aromatic 
tincture, and after a few hours pour off the clear liquor, filter 
the remainder into this, and bottle for use. As thus made, this 
preparation has a rich wine color, becoming darker by age, but not 
black and grumous like the foregoing. 

Though not a handsome tincture, this famous chalybeate tonic 
is still esteemed as most efficient. 



FORMULAS FOR TINCTURES.. 621 

Tinctura Cinchonce Ferrata. 

On account of the large number of cases in which the tonic effects 
of cinchona and aromatics are indicated with ferruginous prepara- 
tions, it has been deemed desirable to contrive a method of com- 
bining these without producing the inky and grumous appearance 
resulting from the diffusion of tannate of iron in the preparation ; 
following the publication of formulas for this combination an ex- 
tensive demand occurred for ferrated tincture of bark, which has 
only subsided with the introduction of bitter wine of iron, wine of 
citrate of iron and quinia, and other more desirable preparations. 
Of the several processes recommended, that given among the tonic 
liquid preparations, in Part VI. of this work, is recommended as a 
simple and satisfactory extemporaneous process. 

Tinctura Quinince. ' (Br. Ph.) 

Take of Sulphate of quinia 160 grains. 

Tincture of orange-peel Oj (imperial measure). 

Digest for seven days, or till dissolved. 

Dose, f3j, containing a grain of the quinia salt. 

Tinctura Strychnia. 

Take of Strychnia gr. iij. 

Alcohol fgj. 

Make a tincture. 
Dose, n\,v to xvj. 

This is perhaps about the strength of tincture of nux vomica (as 
shown below), for which it is sometimes substituted. 



Name. 


Proportions. 


Dosa 


Tinctura nucis vomicae, U. S. 


giv to Oj ale, 


5 to 15 minims. 


" strychnia, 


gr. iij to f^j (16 minims = T ^ grain), 


do. 



Flemming's Tincture of Aconite. 

Take of Aconite root (dried and finely powdered) . . . sxyj. 

Rectified spirits Sufficient. 

Macerate for four days with sixteen ounces of the spirits, then 
pack into a percolator, add more until twenty-four fluidounces of 
tincture are obtained. 

This is the strongest of the tinctures of aconite; it is compared 
with the others in the following syllabus: — 

Name. Proportions. Dose. 

Tinctura aconiti folii, U. S. P., ^ij leaves to Oj dil. ale, 20 to 30 drops. 

" " radicis, U. S. P., ^vj root to Oj alcohol, 5 drops. 

" " (Flemming's), gviij root to f^xij do., 3 to 5 drops. 

There is not perhaps so great a difference between the last two 
as their relative proportions would indicate, both being nearly 
saturated. Care should be taken to distinguish these by their full 
names in prescribing and labelling. 



622 OF TINCTURES. 

Tinctura Medico. (Dublin Ph.) 

Take of Matico leaves, in coarse powder . . 8 ounces (commercial). 
Proof spirit 2 pints (imp. measure). 

Macerate fourteen days, strain, express, and filter. 
Dose, from f 3j to f 3iij. Used as an alterative stimulant and 
haemostatic. 

Dewees's Tincture of Guaiacum. 

Take of Guaiacum resin 3iv. 

Carbonate of potassium giss. 

Pulv. pimento gj. 

Diluted alcohol Oij. 

Digest for two weeks. Dose, from f 3j to f'3ij. 

Tinctura Bkei Aromatica. (Noble's Tonic Elixir.) 

Take of Rhubarb, 
Caraway, 

Orange-peel, of each gij. 

Brandy Oij. 

Macerate for two weeks or displace. Dose, f 3j to fass. 

Tinctura Rhei Dulcis. 

Take of Rhubarb, in moderately coarse powder ^ij. 

Anise seed, 

Liquorice root, in moderately coarse powder, of each ^j. 

Sugar . . . . fij. 

Diluted alcohol Sufficient. 

Macerate the ingredients in a conical percolator, after they have 
been moistened with three fluidounces of the menstruum for twenty- 
four hours, then pour on the menstruum until two and a half pints 
of tincture have been obtained. 

Tinctura Moschi (Medicinal). Deschamp. 

Take of Musk (in grain) 1 part. 

Alcohol (56 per cent.) 5 parts. 

Macerate together for fourteen days, or until needed for use, and 
filter. 

Ethereal Tinctures. 

The use of the several forms of ether as menstrua in tinctures is 
objectionable, owing to the variations in strength to which these 
are liable from the rapid evaporation of the ether, even at ordinary 
temperatures, and in the transfer of the liquid from the bottles; 
yet the solvent action of ether and its diffusible character adapt it 
to combination with certain remedies. 

The following preparations, prescribed by Dr. Mettauer, of Vir- 
ginia, containing spt. mtheris nitrosi, are selected, having proved use- 
ful in medical practice. 



ETHEREAL TINCTURES. 623 

Mettaner's Ethereal Tincture of Cantharides. 

Take of Cantharidis pulv Siij. 

Spt. setker. nit Oiiss. 

Macerate for eight days, and filter. 

The ethereous menstruum seems to promote the tendency of the 
flies to the genito-urinary organs without producing strangury. It 
is also used as a blister for the scalp of infants. 

Mettauer J s Ethereal Tincture of Cubebs. 

Take of Cubeba? pulv %iv. 

Spt. retkeris nit Oij. 

Macerate for eight days, and filter. 

Used for subacute inflammation of the bladder, urethra, etc., and 
of the mucous lining of the stomach and bowels. Dr. M. also uses 
spirit of nitrous ether as a menstruum for colchicum, guaiac, squill, 
ergot, ipecac, etc. 

Ethereal Tincture of Guaiacum. 

Take of Kesiu guaiacum 3 troyounces. 

Spirit of nitrous ether . : 1 pint, or q. s. 

Treat by displacement or maceration, till one pint of the tincture 
is obtained. 
Dose, a teaspoonful. 

Ethereal Tincture of Colchicum. 

Take of Colchicum 6 troyounces. 

Spirit of nitrous ether 1 pint, or q. s. 

Treat by displacement or maceration, till one pint of the tincture 
is obtained. 

Dose, 20 to 30 drops. 

Ethereal Tincture of Cannabis Indica. 

Take of Squire's extract of cannabis Half an ounce. 

Spirit of nitrous ether Half a pint. 

Triturate together in a mortar, till the extract is dissolved. 

Dose, 5 to 15 drops. 

The foregoing preparations of guaiacum, colchicum, and cannabis 
are used jointly for rheumatic and neuralgic symptoms. {See Extem- 
poraneous Prescriptions.) They are also well adapted to replace 
the alcoholic tinctures of the same drugs for most general purposes. 



Asiatic Tincture for Cholera, 



Take of Opium, in powder . 
Camphor .... 
Oil of Cloves . . . 
Capsicum, in powder 
Hoffmann's anochyne 



•z 






Sl- 
ab- 

oj. 



Macerate ten to twenty days, or prepare by percolation in a close 
percolator. 



624 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

This is a most valuable application of the Ethereal Liquor of 
Hoffmann, the diffusible character of which is admirably adapted 
to heighten the effect of the powerful stimulants prescribed. It 
has attained considerable celebrity within several years past. 

Adult dose, 20 to 60 drops every second, third, or fourth hour, 
according to circumstances, in a little sweetened water. 



CHAPTER VIII. 



MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, ELIXIRS, AND CORDIALS. 

Vina, U. S. P. 

This class of Galenical solutions is less numerous than the tinc- 
tures, to which it is closely allied. 

There are two kinds of wine officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia; 
vinum xerieum (vinum album of the former Pharmacopoeia), which 
is sherry wine (Teneriffe and Madeira are sometimes used in its 
stead), and vinum portense, which is port wine. The former contains 
about 20 per cent, of alcohol, sp. gr. .825, and the latter near 26 
per cent. 

In all the medicated wines which are officinal, sherry wine is 
directed as the menstruum. This is a clear, amber-colored liquid, 
having an agreeable pungent taste, and destitute of acidity. It 
possesses the advantage over either alcohol or diluted alcohol, of 
being less stimulating, and more agreeable in its taste and in its 
effects on the system. It is chiefly objectionable as a substitute for 
diluted alcohol, from its liability to decompose when impregnated 
with the soluble principles of plants. To meet this objection, it is 
customary with some to add from one to two fluidounces of alcohol 
to a pint of the wine, and this course is directed in the Pharma- 
copoeia in the case of vinum rhei. 

Syllabus of the Officinal Medicated Wines. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Med. properties. 


Vinum aloes 


to Oi } Si + cardamon, 1 
J \ ginger, aa 3J j 


f3 5 J t0 *5y 


Carminative, 
aperient. 


" rhei 


to Oi 1 ^ + canella 5,j \ 
t0 Uj \ dil. ale. f gij / 


ffcj to fgss 


do. 


" colchici radicis 


ivj to Oj 


gtt. x to fgj 


Diuretic, nerv. 
sedative. 


" " seminis 


i ; j do. 


«a to *su 


do. 


" ergotse 


1'^ij of fluid extract to Oj 


f 3J 


Parturient. 


" ipecacuanb.se 


f§j do. do. do. 


f3J to f^ss 


Expectorant. 


" tabaci 


IJ to Oj 


gtt. XX 


Diuretic, sedat. 


" antimonii 


2 grs. tart. emet. to f^j 


f 3j to f§ss 


Expect., emet. 



OFFICINAL WINES. 625 



REMARKS ON THE MEDICATED WINES. 

The two wines of colchicum are much prescribed in rheumatic and 
gouty affections; that of the root, as. seen in the syllabus, is much 
the stronger. Prepared according to the working formula appended, 
from the Pharmacopoeia, it furnishes a very efficient preparation. 
The wine of the seed should be made of the fresh and well-preserved 
seed ; it is preferred by some as a more uniform preparation. Large 
quantities of wine of fresh colchicum root are imported from Eng- 
land, and it is said to be more efficient than that prepared of the 
dried root. Some of the best pharmacists in England, however, 
prefer to use the recently dried root as furnishing uniform and 
satisfactory results. 

Antimonial wine is made by trituration in a mortar, owing to the 
comparative insolubility of the tartrate of antimony and potassium 
in alcoholic liquids. The late edition of the Pharmacopoeia directs a 
small portion of boiling water to be added to the salt, and this solu- 
tion to the wine. 

Wine of ipecacuanha is an elegant and very popular preparation, 
being much used by itself, and with other expectorant and diapho- 
retic remedies ; it is not as depressing in its effects as wine of anti- 
mony, and yet about equally efficacious as an emetic and nauseant. 
It will be observed that it is directed to be made by adding a fluid- 
ounce of the fluid extract to fifteen fluidounces of wine. 

Wine of ergot is perhaps more used than any other preparation of 
that drug ; it has no other fault than its proneness to decompose in 
hot weather, which makes it necessary to add a little strong alco- 
hol, or to keep it in a cool place, and in well-stopped bottles. This 
is now directed, like the last mentioned preparation, to be made by 
adding the fluid extract to wine in the proportion of f^ij to fsxiv 
of wine. 

Working Formulas from the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. 

Vinum Aloes. ( Wine of Aloes.) U. S. P. 

Take of Socotrine aloes, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Cardamom, in moderately fine powder, 
Ginger, in moderately fine powder, each, sixty grains. 
Sherry wine, a pint. 

Macerate for seven days, with occasional agitation, and filter 
through paper. 

Vinum Antimonii. ( Wine of Antimony.) U. S. P. 

Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassium, thirty-two grains. 
Boiling distilled water, a fluidounce. 
Sherry wine, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the salt in the distilled water, and, while the solution is 
hot, add sufficient sherry wine to make it measure a pint. 
40 



626 MEDICATED WINES 



Vinum Colchici Badicis. ( Wine of Colchicum Hoot) U. S. P. 

Take of Colchicum root, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Sherry wine, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with four fluidounces of sherry wine, pack 
it firmly in a conical percolator, and gradually pour sherry wine 
upon it until two pints of filtered liquid are obtained. 

Vinum Colchici Seminis. ( Wine of Colchicum Seed.) U. S. P. 

Take of Colchicum seed, in moderately coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Sherry wine, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, with occasional agitation ; then express, 
and filter through paper. 

Vinum Ergotce. ( Wine of Ergot.) U. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract ergot, four fluidounces. 
Sherry wine, twenty-eight fluidounces. 

Mix, and filter through paper. 

Vinum Ipecacuanhas. ( Wine of Ipecacuanha.) U. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract ipecacuanha, two fluidounces. 
Sherry wine, thirty fluidounces. 

Mix them, and filter through paper. 

Vinum Hhei. ( Wine of Rhubarb.) U. S. P. 

Take of Ehubarb, in moderately coarse powder, two troyounces. 
Canella, in moderately fine powder, sixty grains. 
Sherry wine, fourteen fluidounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix two fluidounces of diluted alcohol with the sherry wine, and 
moisten the powders, previously rubbed together, with half a fluid- 
ounce of the mixture ; then transfer them to a conical percolator, 
and gradually pour upon them the remainder of the mixture, and 
afterwards diluted alcohol, until a pint of filtered liquid is obtained. 

Vinum Tabaci. {Wine of Tobacco.) U. S. P. 

Take of Tobacco, in moderately fine powder, a troyounce. 
Sherry wine, a pint. 

Macerate for seven days, with occasional agitation ; then express, 
and filter through paper. 

Wines not Officinal in IT. S. P. 
Aromatic Wine. 

Take of Wormwood, peppermint, 
Rosemary, thyme, 
Hyssop, sage, 

Lavender, sweet marjoram, of each, . £ij. 
Port wine Oij. 

Macerate seven days, transfer to a percolator, and displace. 



UNOFFICINAL WINES. 627 

The principal use of aromatic wine is as an astringent and stimu- 
lating wash, applied particularly to buboes. 

Vinum Ergotce Saturatum. 

Take of Ergot, recently powdered, ^iiiss. 
Sherry wine, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the ergot with a fluidounce of the wine, transfer to a 
conical percolator, pack firmly, and slowly displace one pint. 

This preparation has been long in use as a most efficient partu- 
rient and valuable antihemorrhagic. 

Wine of Wild Cherry Bark. 

Take of Alcoholic extract (from 24 ounces) of 

wild cherry bark, about ,^vss. 

Sweet almonds giij. 

"Water 1 pint. 

Sherry wine 2 pints. 

Beat the almonds with the water to a paste, rub down the ex- 
tract with half a pint of the wine, and mix the two liquids in a 
bottle of the capacity of three pints, stop it closely, and permit it 
to stand for three days, with occasional agitation ; then add the 
remainder of the wine, allow it to stand a week, and filter. By 
this mode of proceeding, opportunity is afforded for the develop- 
ment of the hydrocyanic acid before the menstruum is made so alco- 
holic as to retard the reaction which favors its formation. 

Thus made, the wine of wild cherry bark is a transparent, wine- 
red liquid, having an astringent, bitter almond taste and odor, 
much less agreeable than the syrup, and of about the same strength. 

The dose of this preparation as a tonic and sedative is a tea- 
spoonful. 

Wine of Tar — Tar Beer — Jews' Beer. (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Ground malt, honey, and tar, of each, one pound. 
Yeast, half a pint. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the malt, honey, and three quarts of the water in an earthen 
vessel, keep them at the temperature of 150° F. (about), with occa- 
sional stirring for three hours, then suffer the whole to cool to 
about 80° F., and add the yeast. 

Fermentation soon sets in, and should be promoted by main- 
taining the temperature at between 70° and 80° F. during thirty- 
six hours. The supernatant fluid should then be decanted from 
the dregs of the malt, and the tar added gradually to these in a 
small stream, stirring constantly so as to distribute it uniformly 
among them, and prevent its conglomerating in masses. The de- 
canted fluid is then returned to the vessel, and the whole well 
stirred up from time to time, for several days or a week, observing 
to add water occasionally to keep the original measure. The whole 
is then thrown on a piece of Canton flannel or other close strainer, 
the fluid allowed to pass, and the dregs expressed strongly to re- 



628 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

move as much as possible of the fluid inclosed. The expressed 
liquid is then filtered for use ; there is an advantage in allowing it 
to stand until it gets nearly clear by subsidence, before filtering it. 
"When first made, before filtering, wine of tar has but little color, 
but soon acquires a reddish-brown hue by exposure. It smells and 
tastes strongly of tar, is slightly acid, is not unpleasant to most 
persons, and, when prepared as above, is undoubtedly a valuable 
auxiliary to the physician in pulmonary diseases. 
The dose of wine of tar is a tablespoonful. 

Wine of Iron. (T. Weaver.) 

Take of Citrate of iron* 128 grains. 

Sherry wine . 12 fluidounces. 

Hot water, and 

Sugar, of each Sufficient. 

Tincture of orange-peel, to make 1 pint. 

Dissolve the citrate in hot water, and add to it the other ingre- 
dients in proportion to suit the taste. 

Dose, a teaspoonful, containing a grain of the iron salt. 

Wine of Citrate of Iron and Quinine. 

Take of Citrate of iron and quinine . . . 384 grains. 

Hot water A fluidounce. 

Flavor of orange Half a fluidounce. 

Sherry wine Sufficient to make a pint. 

Dissolve the citrate in the hot water, add the wine and flavor 
of orange, and filter. 

Dose, a teaspoonful, containing three grains of the iron and 
quinine salt. 

Bitter Wine of Iron. (T. Weaver.) 

Take of Citrate of iron 128 grains. 

Extract of calisaya (Ellis) 16 grains. 

Citric acid, 

Hot water, 

Sugar, and 

Tincture of orange-peel, to taste. 

Sherry wine, to make 1 pint. 

Dissolve the citrate of iron and extract of cinchona separately 
in hot water, adding a small excess of citric acid ; then add the 
sugar and tincture of orange-peel, and lastly the wine. The chief 
secret in preserving the bouquet of the wine in contact with the 
iron salt is to add it after the utmost dilution. 

Dose, a teaspoonful, containing one grain of the iron salt and 
one-eighth of a grain of the extract. 

Wine of Pepsin. 

Take of the cleaned inner coating or membrane of fresh hogs' sto- 
machs ; digest this in sherry wine in the proportion of half a pint 

* For this may be substituted an equivalent quantity of the officinal solution of 
citrate of iron. Citrate of magnetic oxide of iron is preferred by some. 



ACETA. 629 

of wine to each stomach used. After macerating three days, pour 
off the wine from the stomach membranes, and digest them again 
in half the quantity of wine for three days, pour off the wine, and 
express ; mix this with the first fluid obtained, and filter. This 
liquid should now be diluted so that one fluidrachm shall digest 
in four or six hours one hundred grains of coagulated albumen 
previously mixed with one fluidounce of distilled water acidulated 
with six drops of muriatic acid. 

ACETA, U. S. P. 

Acetum (vinegar) is officinal in the list of the U. jS. Pharma- 
copoeia ; it is described as "impure diluted acetic acid prepared by 
fermentation ;" it is too familiar to require description. Vinegar 
is chiefly useful in pharmacy for furnishing acetum destillatum, 
which is made by distillation, by means of a sand-bath, from a 
glass retort into a glass receiver, rejecting from each gallon the 
last pint, which contains the impurities. This liquid, which is 
nearly pure weak acetic acid, has about the same strength as the 
crude vinegar from which it is obtained, and possesses the same 
saturating power; one hundred grains should saturate not less than 
7.6 grains of bicarbonate of potassium. 

Distilled vinegar was formerly used as the menstruum for the 
officinal aceta, but in the last two revisions of the Pharmacopeia it 
it has been superseded by diluted acetic acid. 

The chief reason for this change has been that the latter liquid 
is cheaper and much more easily obtained. The immense production 
of acetic acid for use in the arts as well as in medicine, has reduced 
its price to a much lower point than formerly. The small bulk of 
the strong acid recommends it for transportation, and it may be 
readily and immediately diluted to the point desired. It is free 
from organic impurities, while the ordinary product of the distil- 
lation of vinegar is not, as shown by the fact that, while the latter 
is apt to turn brown on the addition of an alkali, the former remains 
clear and colorless. 

For an account of acetic acid, the chief impurities found in the 
commercial article and the modes of testing it, the reader is referred 
to Part IV. of this work. 

Acidum Aceticum Dilutum. — This liquid is made by adding to one 
part of acetic acid seven parts of water (making eight parts), so that 
the proportions may be stated as one part of strong acicl in every 
eight parts of diluted. As 60 grains of bicarbonate of potassium 
saturate 100 grains of the strong acid, 7J grains (one-eighth of sixty) 
will saturate the same quantity of the diluted acid; or, observing 
very nearly the same proportion, 35 grains will saturate one fluid- 
ounce. 

The use of diluted acetic acid as a menstruum is confined by the 
U. S. Pharmacopoeia to squill, lobelia, sanguinaria, and opium. It 
is, however, used in the preparation of the fluid extracts of ergot, 
and in the solid extract of colchicum, and ammoniac plaster. 

It forms an admirable menstruum for squill, its acid taste recom- 



630 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

mending it over both water and alcohol, and its medicinal action 
promoting that of squill in most cases to which that medicine is 
adapted. 

Sangitinaria and lobelia are for the first time introduced into the 
class in the edition of the Pharmacopoeia of 1860 ; both these drugs 
contain alkaloids which are fixed in the preparation by the acetic 
acid. 

In the case of opium, the object in employing this acid is to assist 
in dissolving and extracting the morphia, with which it combines, 
furnishing a soluble salt, and one which is considered by some as 
more desirable than the meconate, as it exists in laudanum and 
other solutions prepared with neutral menstrua. 

The addition of acetic acid as an antiseptic to several of the 
syrups most liable to ferment has recently been recommended, and 
it is found to serve a useful purpose not only in preventing fermen- 
tation, but also in qualifying the cloying sweetness, which is an 
objection to this form of preparation. 

The antiseptic properties of diluted acetic acid are inferior to 
those of diluted alcohol, and on that account these preparations are 
said to be more liable to change than the tinctures. A small ad- 
dition of alcohol is sometimes made to obviate this. I have, how- 
ever, never known either of the officinal "Aceta"to ferment by 
keeping. A syllabus of this class is appended. 

Syllabus of Officinal Vinegars. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Medical properties, etc. 


Acetum scillae 
" lobelias 
" sanguinariae 
" opii 


gij to Oj 

do. 

do. 
gvtoOij 


gtt. xxx to f^ij 
gtt. xxx to fgj 

do. 
gtt. v to X 


Diuretic, sedative, etc. 
Expect., narcot., etc. 

do. do. 
See Preparations of Opium. 



Working Formulas from the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. 
Acetum Sanguinarim. {Vinegar of Bloodroot.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Bloodroot, in moderately coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted acetic acid, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two fluidounces of diluted acetic acid, 
pack it firmly in a conical glass percolator, and gradually pour upon 
it diluted acetic acid until" the filtered liquid measures two pints. 

Vinegar of bloodroot may also be prepared by macerating the 
powder with two piuts of diluted acetic acid for seven days, ex- 
pressing the liquid, and filtering through paper. 

Acetum Scillce. ( Vinegar of Squill.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Squill, in moderately coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted acetic acid, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with a fluidounce of diluted acetic acid, 
pack it in a conical glass percolator, and gradually pour upon it 
diluted acetic acid until the filtered liquid measures two pints. 



ELIXIRS AND CORDIALS. 631 



Acetum Lobelice. ( Vinegar of Lobelia.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Lobelia, in moderately coarse powder, four troyounces. 
Diluted acetic acid, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with two nuidounces of diluted acetic acid, 
pack it firmly in a conical glass percolator, and gradually pour upon 
it diluted acetic acid until the filtered liquid measures two pints. 

Vinegar of lobelia may also be prepared by macerating the pow- 
der in two pints of diluted acetic acid for seven days, expressing 
the liquid, and filtering through paper. 

Elixirs and Cordials. 

Under these names a variety of unofficinal preparations are sold, 
most of which are mixtures of aromatic wines and tinctures with 
sugar, the latter predominating. Preparations of this description 
are popular in proportion as they are palatable and commend them- 
selves to the taste of the public. 

Elixir of Calisaya. 

Take of Calisaya bark One troyounce. 

Kecent orange-peel Half a troyounce. 

Ceylon cinnamon, 
Coriander, 

Angelica seeds, of each Three drachms. 

Caraway, 
Aniseed, 

Cochineal, of each One drachm. 

Trench brandy, and water, of each . A sufficient quantity. 
Simple syrup Ten nuidounces. 

Percolate the cinchona and aromatics with the brandy, until ten 
nuidounces are obtained. Continue the displacement with equal 
parts of brandy and water, till twenty-two nuidounces are obtained, 
then add the syrup to bring it up to the measure of two pints. 

Ferrated Elixir of Cinchona. (J. T. Shinn.) 

Take of Calisaya bark, in powder Tour troyounces. 

Cinnamon water Two pints. 

Caraway water One pint. 

Tincture of orange-peel Half a pint. 

Alcohol Half a pint. 

Brandy Two pints. 

Syrup Three pints. 

Soluble pyrophosphate of iron . . . Two ounces. 

Mix the cinnamon water and caraway water with the tincture 
of orange-peel, and percolate the bark with the mixture. Dissolve 
the pyrophosphate of iron in the percolate, add the other ingredi- 
ents, and filter. 

This contains about one grain of pyrophoshate of iron (with cit- 
rate of ammonia), and two grains of cinchona bark to a drachm. 



632 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

Ferro Phosphorated Elixir of Calisaya. 

Take of Pyrophosphate of iron 128 grains. 

Extract of calisaya 24 grains. 

Sugar 4 ounces. 

Tinct. of fresh orange-peel .... 2 nuidounces. 

Water 2 nuidounces. 

Sherry wine 10 nuidounces. 

Triturate the iron salt with the extract and sugar till dissolved, 
then add the tincture and the wine, and filter twice, or till it is 
perfectly clear. 

Dose, a teaspoonful. 

This preparation originated jn New York, where it enjoys con- 
siderable popularity. The formula is that of W. C. Bakes, my 
valued assistant. 

Curasao Cordial. (L. M. Emanuel.) 

Take of Curacao bark (bitter orange) . . . 3j. 

Peel of sweet oranges 3ss. 

Cloves, 

Canella, of each gr. xv. 

Brandy Oss. 

Neutral sweet spirits Oij. 

Distilled orange-flower water . . . f ^iij. 

Sugar fibj. 

Prepare a tincture by percolation with the aromatics, brandy, and 
sweet spirits, then add the distilled orange-flower water and the 
sugar. 

Red, Curasao Cordial. {Improved Formula.) 

Take of Sweet spirits 1 pint. 

Tincture of orange-peel Sufficient. 

Syrup 1 pint. 

Oil of juniper, 

Tincture of saunders, of each, to taste. 

Mix. 

The genuine Curacao cordial is imported from Rotterdam, and is 
highly esteemed. These recipes form good imitations of it. It is 
recommended as a remedy for nausea, especially when a symptom 
of pregnancy. 

Elixir of Valerianate of Ammonia. (T. H. K. Enos.) 

Take of Valerianic acid Two fluidrachms. 

Carbonate of ammonium . . Sufficient. 
Alcohol, 

Syrup, of each Two fluidounces. 

Ext. orange-peel .... Half a fluidounce. 

Orange-flower water ... A fluidounce. 

"Water Sufficient to make half a pint. 

Dilute the valerianic acid with a fluidounce of water, neutralize 
with the carbonate of ammonium, then add the alcohol, holding the 
aromatic extract (?) in solution, then the orange-flower water and 
water, and filter. (The extract of orange-peel might be superseded 



ELIXIRS AND CORDIALS. 633 

to advantage by tincture of fresh orange-peel.) A fluidrachm, 
which is the appropriate dose, contains two grains of the salt. 

Elixir of Valerianate of Ammonia. (Goddard's.) 

Take of Yalerianic acid (from the root) Six fluidrachms. 
Carbonate of ammonium . . Sufficient. 
Carbonic acid water . . . Eight fluidounces. 
Red Curacao cordial . . . Twenty fluidounces. 
Orange-flower water . . . Eight fluidounces. 
Mucilage of gum Arabic . . Two fluidounces. 

Saturate the valerianic acid with the carbonate of ammonium, 
diluted with the carbonic acid water, then add it to the flavoring 
ingredients and mucilage, and filter. Dose, a teaspoonful. 

Ferrated Tincture of Gentian. 

Take of Gentian, in moderately fine powder, ^ij. 

Bitter orange-peel, in moderately fine powder, gj. 
Cardamom, in moderately fine powder, 3 ss. 

Moisten with diluted alcohol, and percolate with a mixture of 
one part of alcohol and three of w T ater, until four pints of tincture 
are obtained. 

Make hydrated sesquioxide of iron by precipitating four ounces 
of solution of tersulphate of iron, and wash the precipitate on a 
filter, then pass the tincture of gentian, bitter orange-peel, and car- 
damom through the magma on the filter; now add f 3viiiss of solu- 
tion of citrate of iron (gr. j to ki), and the preparation is complete. 
Dose, a teaspoonful, containing one grain of citrate of iron. 

Pierlofs Solution of Valerianate of Ammonium. {Modified Formula.) 

Take of Extract of valerian . ... Two scruples. 

Fluid extract of valerian . . . Two fluidrachms. 
Water Seven fluidounces. 

Dissolve the extract in the fluid extract and water, filter, and 
add 

Valerianate of ammonium . . Two drachms. 

Orange-flower water, 

Simple syrup, of each .... Half a fluidounce. 

Dose, a teaspoonful. 

Propylamin Cordial. 

Take of Chloride of propylamin ... 96 grains. 

Aniseed water 9 fluidounces. 

Atwood's alcohol 3 fluidounces. 

Simple syrup 4 fluidounces. 

Saffron Sufficient. 

Dissolve the chloride in the aniseed water, add the alcohol and 
syrup, digest with the saffron, and filter till clear and bright. 



634 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

Elixir Chloroformi. (Chloroform Paregoric.) Dr. H. Hartshorne. 

Take of Chloroform ....... One and a-half fluidounce. 

Tincture of opium One and a-half fluidounce. 

Tincture of camphor .... One and a-half fluidounce. 

Arom. spt. of ammonia . . . One and a-half fluidounce. 

Oil of cinnamon Twenty minims. 

Brandy Two fluidounces. 

Dose, f5ss or less, in spasmodic affections of the stomach, cholera, 
etc. 

Elixir de Gams. 

Take of Syr. Adiantum (maidenhair) lb. £ to Ov Ox. 

Spirit of garus Oviij. 

Saffron 3j. 

Orange-flower water Oss. 

Macerate two days, and filter. 

Spirit of Garus, 
Take of Aloes, 

Saffron, each gvss. 

Myrrh, 
Canella, 
Cloves, 
Cinnamon, 

Nutmegs, of each, bruised 3iv. 

Alcohol dilut Oxvj. 

Orange-flower water Oj. 

Macerate two days, and distil one gallon. 

For other formulas for elixirs the reader is referred to Am. Journ. 
Pharmacy, pages 219, 298, 310, vol. xliii., for 1871, and the report 
on this subject to Am. Pharm. Association herewith appended. 

The importance of uniformity in the composition of remedies 
bearing the same name has been so long felt and acknowledged by 
medical men and those interested in the advancement of pharma- 
ceutic knowledge, that the American Pharmaceutical Association, 
at their twentieth annual meeting in Cleveland, Ohio, appointed a 
special committee to report such formulas, for elixirs particularly, as 
w^ould be generally satisfactory and give a quasi officinal character 
to the formulas so reported ; the great increase in the variety of 
elixirs made by so many different manufacturers, who. give no in- 
formation respecting the composition of their respective prepara- 
tions, has rendered it almost impossible for any dispensing pharmacist 
to keep a complete stock of the various makes on his shelves. These 
considerations induced the committee to report the following 
formulas, which were ordered to be printed in pamphlet form as 
well as in their published proceedings. 

TOTOFFICINAL FORMULAS. 

REPORTED BY J. F. HANCOCK. 

Compound Powder of Cochineal. 

Take of Cochineal, in powder 120 grains. 

Alum, in powder 120 grains. 

Carbonate of potassium 120 grains. 

Bitartrate of potassium 240 grains. 

Mix. Keep in well-stoppered vial. 



UNOFFICINAL FORMULAS. 635 

Compound Tincture of Cochineal. 

Take of Compound powder of cochineal 120 grains. 

Diluted alcohol 2 fluidounces. 

Slightly warm the diluted alcohol and mix with the powder, 
macerate in a stoppered vial for twelve hours, and filter for use. 
This is permanent, and imparts a beautiful red color to elixirs and 
solutions which have no acid properties. 

Spirit of Orange. 

Take of Oil of sweet orange 1 fluidounce. 

Stronger alcohol 15 nuidounces. 

Mix. This is made in proportions to conform with the spirits 
of the U. S. P., and is a pleasant and convenient form of orange 
flavor. 

Simple Elixir. 

Take of Spirit of orange £ fluidounce. 

Stronger alcohol 4 nuidounces. 

Cinnamon water 6 nuidounces. 

Syrup 6 nuidounces. 

Mix. 

This is a turbid mixture. For many purposes it is not necessary 
to filter before using, but generally it should be clear, particularly 
when used for physicians' prescriptions, and in making some elixirs. 
Filtering-paper pulp, made by beating scraps of chemically pure 
filtering-paper in a mortar, in the proportion of sixty grains of 
paper to a half fluidounce of water, added to sixteen fluidounces of 
the elixir, agitated briskly for a few moments, and filtered, renders 
the elixir perfectly limpid. The paper is free from the chemical 
objections urged against carbonate of magnesium, chalk, etc., which 
are frequently used as clarifying agents. 

The very pleasant taste and odor of this elixir, its freedom from 
color and chemical impurities, commend it for general use as a 
medicating vehicle. 

Bed Elixir. 

Take of Comp. tincture of cochineal | fluidounce. 

Simple elixir 16 fluidounces. 

Mix. 

This is sometimes preferred as a simple elixir because of its 
beautiful color. 

Elixir of Calisaya Bark. 

Take of Tincture cinchona, U. 8. P. 1870 ... 22 fluidrachms. 
Simple elixir Sufficient to make 16 fluidounces. 

Mix and filter. This contains the virtues of two grains of Cali- 
saya bark in one fluidrachm. 

Elixir of Calisaya Bark with Iron. 

Take of Elixir of Calisaya bark 15 fluidounces. 

Warm distilled water 1 fluidounce. 

Citrate of iron, soluble 128 grains. 



636 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

Dissolve the iron in the warm water and add the elixir. Filter 
if necessary. Each fiuidrachm of the unfiltered elixir contains 
one grain of the iron salt, and the virtues of nearly two grains of 
Calisaya bark. 

Compound Elixir of Cinchona. 

Take of Compound tincture of cinchona, TJ. 8. P. 1870 22 fluidrachms. 
Simple elixir Sufficient to make 16 fluidounces. 

Mix and filter. If not required for immediate use, this and also 
the Calisaya elixir should stand for about twelve hours before 
filtering. 

Compound Elixir of Cinchona with Iron. 

Take of Compound elixir of cinchona 15 fluidounces. 

Warm distilled water 1 fluidounce. . 

Citrate of iron, soluble 120 grains. 

Mix. Proceed as for Elixir of Caliaysa with Iron. 

Elixir of Citrate of Iron. 

Take of Citrate of iron, soluble 256 grains. 

Warm distilled water 1 fluidounce. 

Simple elixir • 15 fluidounces. 

Dissolve the iron in the warm water, and mix with the simple 
elixir. Filter. 

Elixir of Pyrophosphate of Iron. 

Take of Pyrophosphate of iron 256 grains. 

Warm distilled water 1 fluidounce. 

Simple elixir 15 fluidounces. 

Make according to directions for Elixir of Citrate of Iron. 
This is the same in medicinal strength as Prof. Diehl's formula. 

Elixir of Citrate of Bismuth. 

Take of Citrate of bismuth and ammonium . . . 256 grains. 

Warm distilled water ........ 4 fluidounces. 

Water of ammonia (drop by drop) . . . Sufficient. 

Simple elixir Sufficient to make sixteen fluidounces 

of finished elixir. 

This is the same bismuth strength as Prof. Diehl's formula, viz., 
two grains of citrate of bismuth and ammonium in each fiuidrachm. 

Elixir of Pepsin. 

Take of Saccharated pepsin (Scheffer's formula) . 256 grains. 

Sherry wine 14 fluidounces. 

Simple syrup 2 fluidounces. 

Fluid extract of ginger 25 drops. 

Dissolve the pepsin in the wine, mix the fluid extract of ginger 
with the syrup, and mix together. Filter if necessary. Contains 
two grains of pepsin to the fiuidrachm. 



UNOFFICINAL FORMULAS. 637 

Elixir of Valerianate of Ammonium. 

Take of Valerianate of ammonium, in crystals . . 256 grains. 

Compound tincture of cochineal .... £ fluiclounce. 
Simple elixir 15£ fluidounces. 

Dissolve the valerianate of ammonium in two ounces of the 
simple elixir, and carefully add water of ammonia until the solu- 
tion is exactly neutral to test-paper. Mix with the balance of 
simple elixir, and then add the compound tincture of cochineal. 

This is the formula of Prof. C. Lewis Diehl, with the exception 
of the simple elixir. Notwithstanding this preparation contains a 
larger quantity than usual of the valerianate of ammonium (two 
grains of the salt in each fluidrachm), yet its unpleasant taste and 
odor are effectually masked by the fragrance of the simple elixir. 

Elixir of Valerianate of Ammonium with Quinia. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia 128 grains. 

Elixir of valerianate of ammonium ... 10 fluidounces. 

Mix. Filter if necessary. Sulphate of quinia is soluble in elixir 
of valerianate of ammonium to twice the quantity here ordered. 

Compound Elixir of Sumbul. 

Take of Tincture of sumbul (Brit. Ph. 1867)* ... 4 fluidounces. 

Syrup 4 fluidounces. 

Compound tincture of cochineal £ fluidounces. 

Elixir of valerianate of ammonium .... 8 fluidounces. 
Mix. 

The elixir is slightly turbid, owing to the resin of the sumbul, 
which if filtered out must lessen its medicinal powers. This is 
given as a type of extemporaneous elixirs, which should not be filtered, 
but dispensed with the direction, " Shake the vial before pouring out 
each dose." 

Elixir Pyrophosphate of Iron, Quinia, and Strychnia. 

(C. Lewis Diehl's Formula.) 

He says: " This requires particular manipulation, which precludes 
the use of simple elixirs. 

" The following formula, the result of concert experiments of my 
friend, Mr. E. Schefler, and myself, has been used by me since au- 
tumn, 1869, and I can recommend it as uniformly successful, when 
the manipulations are carefully conducted : — 

" Take of Sulphate of quinia 60 grains. 

Strychnia • 1 grain. 

Citric acid 5 grains. 

Stronger alcohol 3 fluidounces. 

Spirit of orange 80 minims. 

Syrup 6 fluidounces. 

Pyrophosphate of iron £ troyounces. 

Distilled water 7 fluidounces. 

Water of ammonia Suff. quantity. 

* This is made by macerating and displacing two and a half ounces avoirdupois of 
powdered sumbul with proof spirit so as to obtain one imperial pint (fgxix f5iss., 
IT. S. measure) of tincture. — Editoe. 



638 MEDICATED WINES, VINEGARS, AND CORDIALS. 

"Triturate the sulphate of quinia, strychnia, and citric acid 
together, until minutely divided, then add the alcohol and spirit 
of orange. Warm the syrup slightly (to about 150° F.), and add 
to the turbid mixture, when, upon stirring, the mixture becomes 
clear. To this add the pyrophosphate of iron, previously dissolved 
in the distilled water, and finally, carefully add water of ammonia, 
drop by drop, until the elixir is perfectly neutral to test-paper ; 
filter. The finished preparation has a greenish-yellow color, a plea- 
sant flavor of orange, and is permanent." 

Bitter Wine of Iron. 

(James T. Shinn's Formula, slightly modified.) 

We have had several years' experience with the following formula, 
and it has given entire satisfaction to prescriber, dispenser, and 
consumer. 

Take of Sulphate of cinchonia 45 grains. 

Sulphate of quinia 15 grains. 

Citric acid 60 grains. 

Citrate of iron, soluble 240 grains. 

Concentrated tinct. fresh sweet orange-peel 3 fluidounces. 

Distilled water 3 fluidounces. 

Sherry wine 8 fluidounces. 

Syrup 2 fluidounces. 

Dissolve the sulphates and citric acid in two ounces of the water, 
and the iron in the remaining ounce of water ; mix the two solutions, 
and add the other ingredients, previously well mixed together. 

The only change from the original formula is in the kind and 
quantity of orange flavor, for which we claim an improvement. 
See Proceedings of American Pharmaceutical Association, 1864, p. 234. 

Elixir of Gentian with Iron. 

Take of Extract of gentian 128 grains. 

Citrate of iron, soluble 128 grains. 

Distilled water 1 fluidounce. 

Simple elixir 15 fluidounces. 

Dissolve the extract and iron in the water, warmed, and add the 
simple elixir ; filter. 

Elixir of Bromide of Potassium. 

Take of Bromide of potassium . . .... 640 grains. 

Red elixir 16 fluidounces. 

Mix. 

This contains five grains of the salt in each fluidrachm, and is 
given as a type. The red elixir does not seem to answer for the 
elixir bromide of calcium; caramel is a more suitable coloring sub- 
stance for the calcium elixir. We prefer the simple elixir in this 
case, and to use no coloring substance. 



PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 639 

Syrup of Liquorice Root. 

Take of Select liquorice root, in moderately coarse 

powder 4 troyounces. 

Diluted alcohol Suff. quantity. 

Sugar 12 troyounces. 

Moisten and pack in a conical percolator; macerate for twelve 
hours, percolate to exhaustion. Place the tincture over a water- 
bath until reduced to ten fluidounces, filter, and then add the sugar; 
lastly, sufficient distilled water to make sixteen fluidounces of 
finished syrup. 

The syrup of liquorice root, when carefully prepared, is more 
effectual and more convenient for masking the bitterness of quinia, 
than is the very popular "compound elixir of taraxacum," and 
being free from the stimulating influence of alcohol, which is 
present in the elixir, is well adapted for children. The proper pro- 
portions will be one grain of quinia (any salt of it) to the fluiclrachm, 
and if those for whom quinia is ordered will take the precaution 
to chew a small quantity of liquorice root, previous to taking the 
quinia mixed with the syrup of liquorice, in the proportions here 
recommended, scarcely any bitterness will be observed. As a matter 
of course, acids mixed with quinia and liquorice syrup will imme- 
diately develop the bitter taste. 

It has of late become fashionable to use glycerin as an antiseptic 
and solvent in elixirs, as well as other compounds of pharmacy, but 
our aversion to the general use of glycerin for internal adminis- 
tration, for various reasons, has prevented its introduction in our 
formulas. 

The results of our investigations of liquid pepsin preparations 
will not warrant the introduction of more than the one formula, 
which is really a wine of pepsin, and has been found useful in 
many cases. 



CHAPTER IX. 

PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 



These preparations assume an importance to the student not be- 
longing to others, from the extensive use made of opium in almost 
every form of disease, and from the unusual number and variety 
of " Galenical" solutions made from it. 

No student should neglect to study these especially and carefully, 
so as to be familiar with their relative degrees of activity, and 
their effects as modified by the menstrua employed. On this ac- 
count I have devoted a separate chapter to their consideration. 



640 



PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 



Syllabus of Officinal Preparations of Opium, designed to 
facilitate their study. 



Officinal name. 


Composition and relative strength. 


Infgj, 


Dose. 


Tinct. opii camphorata 


Opium 5ss "] 






(paregoric) 


Beroic°ac?d ^ss [ to <* 4 ^ w 
Oil of aniseed f3ss | * «*• »» 2 <2 m. 








1.76 grs. 


f 3J to f o ss 










Honey |j J 






Tinct. opii (laudanum) 


Opium 3X to Oj = 1 gr. in 12.8 r\ 


37.5 grs. 


gtt. XXV 


" opii deodorata 


do. do. 


do. 


gtt. XX 


" opii acetata 


Opium §j ■) 








Alcohol fgiv V 1 gr. in 10 r\ 


48 grs. 


gtt. XX 




Vinegar f'Sjvj J 






Vinum opii 

(Sydenham's laud.) 


cTnTmf n 1 to ■*»** °J» 1 &- in 

Cloves, aa^j J 5TTl 


60 grs. 


gtt. XX 








Acetum opii 


Opium ^v \ 






(black drop) 


Sugar gvnj j 


75 grs. 


gtt. v to X 


Liquor morphise sulphatis 


£ gr. morphia = f gr. opium, to fgj 


8 grs. 


fcj 



REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING. 

It will be observed that the preparations are arranged in the 
syllabus in the order of their strength — the proportion of opium 
they contain. 

Camphorated tincture of opium is one of the most familiar and 
universally used of medicines ; its preparation is easy, by mace- 
rating the ingredients in a bottle ; the honey may be omitted till 
toward the end of the seven days allotted for the maceration. The 
chief use of paregoric is for children, to whom it is given in doses 
varying according to the age of the child from ten drops to a tea- 
spoonful. The adult dose is as stated in the table. It is used in 
mistura glycyrrhizaz comp., and in numerous expectorant medicines. 
An enumeration of the cases in which it is employed would be out 
of place in this work — the variety of its components adapts it to fill 
numerous indications. 

This tincture, in the Pharmacopoeia of 1830, was directed to be 
made with a portion of extract of liquorice, which, as it gave it 
a dark color, resembling that of laudanum, was superseded in the 
three last editions by honey. It has a rich brown color, and a 
rather agreeable aromatic taste. 

Laudanum is more used than any other preparation of opium. 
It is employed internally in small doses, combined with stimulants, 
and frequently repeated, to excite the nervous and arterial systems, 
as in the typhoid forms of disease. (See Prescriptions.) It is also 
used by itself or in combination to allay nervous irritation, and to 
promote sleep and relieve pain ; for these purposes, it generally re- 
quires to be given in full doses, especially when the case is urgent, 
It is sometimes employed in cancerous and other very painful dis- 
eases, and in mania-a-potu, in doses of half a nuidrachm to one 



ACETATED TINCTURE OF OPIUM. 641 

fluidrachm (60 to 120 drops), and repeated. Camphor water and 
compound spirit of ether are much used with it in its more strictly 
anodyne and sedative applications. In nervous and spasmodic af- 
fections, it is given with other antispasmodic medicines, or by itself. 
To expectorant mixtures it is a very frequent addition, though the 
camphorated tincture is generally preferable in this instance. Com- 
bined with astringents and chalk, it is much used in the treatment of 
diarrhoea, dysentery, and cholera morbus, and is a frequent addition 
to mistura cretce. For its diaphoretic effects, the best combinations 
contain an emetic, as wine of ipecac or of antimony, or frequently 
spirit of nitrous ether. It is often added to castor oil, to correct 
griping or excessive purging from its use. 

Laudanum is much used in enemata, collyria, and in lotions of 
various kinds. In an enema it may be used in three times the 
quantity employed by the mouth, with a view to the same effect. 
In an eye-wash, wine of opium, or a solution of the aqueous extract, 
is preferred, as obviating the stimulant effects of the alcohol. It 
is frequently added to cataplasms or poultices. 

Laudanum is made of deficient strength by some druggists, in 
order to sell it cheaply. If it has become turbid from the evapora- 
tion of a portion of alcohol, it is above standard strength, and 
should be filtered to free it from the precipitate, fatal results have 
occurred from neglect of this precaution. 

Tinctura opii deodorata is a new officinal in the Tharmacopceia of 
1860, it is made upon the principle, adopted by the manufacturers 
of the various elixirs of opium in vogue, of treating opium with 
water in preference to alcohol, so that the objectionable resinous 
and odorous principles are but sparingly taken up; in the new offi- 
cinal process, the aqueous fluid extract obtained is directed to be 
shaken up with ether, for the complete removal of these, and the 
ether being rejected the whole is embodied into a fluid form with 
only sufficient alcohol to preserve it. The dose by drops, as stated, 
is less than that of laudanum, with which it corresponds in strength, 
because aqueous liquids collect in larger drops than alcoholic. On 
the whole, this liquid, which will probably be generally dispensed 
as elixir of opium, is a valuable addition to our officinal preparations, 
and well worthy the favorable consideration of physicians. 

Acetated tincture of opium is not commonly designated by any syn- 
onym, and must be carefully distinguished from black drop, de- 
scribed below. It is prepared by macerating the opium in powder 
with the vinegar and alcohol for two weeks, or displacing as in the 
case of laudanum. If the opium is in mass, it should be used in 
proportionately increased quantity, and worked into a paste with a 
small portion of the vinegar, after which the remainder of that 
liquid and the alcohol is added, macerating for two weeks as in the 
other case. 

This tincture is sometimes recommended in preference to lauda- 
num, as less liable to produce those nervous symptoms which often 
follow the use of opium. As shown in the table, it is stronger than 
laudanum, but much weaker than black drop. 
41 



642 PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 

Wine of Opium. — This officinal substitute for Sydenham's lauda- 
num may be made by a similar process to the foregoing. It is 
made with a much larger proportion of opium to the quantity of 
menstruum employed than laudanum, and yet the dose directed in 
the books is the same; this must be owing to a supposed inferior 
solubility of the active principles in wine, than in diluted alcohol. 
A great many extemporaneous prescriptions for eye-washes and in- 
jections contain this ingredient. 

Vinegar of Opium, Black Drop. — The strongest of the preparations 
of opium is modified in the edition of the Pharmacopoeia for 1860, 
so as to make it comparatively easy of preparation and of more con- 
venient proportions. The very complex process of the older books 
is simplified so as to include merely the complete extraction of the 
opium and aromatics by means of diluted acetic acid, the addition 
to this of sugar, and its dilution to just the required point, which 
is a fluidounce for every 75 grains of opium used. The slight altera- 
tion in proportions, while it will be quite imperceptible in the use 
of the preparation, brings it to an even two pints for five troyounces 
of the opium used. 

Black drop is deservedly esteemed as a most valuable prepara- 
tion. The morphia it contains is in the condition of acetate ; which 
is considered by many to be more agreeable in its mode of action 
than the native meconate existing in the drug. One grain of opium 
being represented by about 6 T 4 o minims, the dose will be only from 
Hye to ten drops, because, although in the case of laudanum two 
drops are frequently required to make a minim, in this case, sugar 
being used instead of alcohol, the drops are larger, and frequently 
reach a minim in bulk. 

The popularity of black drop with persons who use opium habitu- 
ally is one of the strongest evidences of its superiority over lauda- 
num. I was informed by one lady, who is a victim to this vice, 
and who procures her black drop by the gallon, that, in comparing 
her own condition with that of others within the range of her 
acquaintance who have used laudanum to no greater excess than 
she uses black drop, while they soon exhibited in their persons the 
evidences of its poisonous effects, she was enabled to preserve to a 
great extent the natural freshness and fulness of her features ; this 
she attributed to the form in which she took the drug. Her state- 
ment cannot of course be received as evidence of the difference 
referred to, though it accords with the testimony of others, and 
;also corresponds with the observation of some physicians of large 
experience. 

Solution of sulphate of morphia (U. S.), though its strength is usu- 
ally estimated somewhat above that stated in the syllabus, is be- 
lieved to be weaker in proportion to the other preparations, than is 
there stated. 

Magendie's solution, much used in New York and Boston, is made 
in the proportion of sixteen grains to the fluidounce. Care should 
be taken, in prescribing and vending this, to distinguish between it 
and the officinal solution. 



POISONING BY OPIUM. 643 

Incompatibles. — All the preparations of opium are pharmaeeuti- 
cally incompatible with the alkalies, and their mono-carbonates 
generally, on account of their precipitating the morphia in an in- 
soluble condition from its meconate. With acetate of lead, they 
give a precipitate, chiefly of meconate of lead, the morphia remain- 
ing in solution as acetate. Astringent infusions and tinctures 
generally throw down tannates or gallates of morphia, which are 
quite insoluble. Some of the metallic salts may be considered as 
incompatible, but in practice there is no difficulty in mixing small 
quantities of laudanum with diluted solutions of these. The chief 
point to be observed, in the mixing of these preparations in prescrip- 
tion, is to add them after the full degree of dilution is obtained ; in this 
manner they may be mixed without disturbance, in the great 
majority of instances, especially where, as is mostly the case, the 
quantity added is small. 

Treatment of Poisoning by Opium. — When opium is taken in quan- 
tities sufficient to produce death, the first and invariable remedy is 
to evacuate the stomach, by administering an active emetic dose, 
as, for instance, five grains of tartar emetic or sulphate of zinc, or, 
as is frequently more convenient and equally efficacious, large doses 
of mustard suspended in warm water. If emetics refuse to act, 
which is sometimes the case after long delay, the stomach pump 
must be resorted to, and should always be at hand in the office of 
the physician. A tolerable substitute for this is found in the self- 
injecting apparatus of elastic gum, now so commonly in use, the 
tubes being transposed so as to reverse the direction of the current. 

A mode of emptying the stomach of an infant, tried with success 
in a case of poisoning, by Dr. Stebbins, of Chester Co., Pa., is to 
insert a catheter and suck up the fluid contents till the catheter is 
full, then turn the free end downwards so as to constitute a siphon, 
from which the fluid will run till the stomach is empty. 

The patient should be kept in motion, if possible, the face and 
head being splashed with cold water, when a disposition to sleep 
seems to be gaining the mastery ; in this way, patients may very 
frequently be restored, even after taking large doses of laudanum. 
Instances of the kind have been of frequent occurrence within the 
last few years in this city. The recently discovered use of tincture 
of belladonna as an antidote for opium should not be forgotten 
when other resources fail, and when this remedy is at hand." The 
dose must necessarily be large, corresponding to the quantity of 
laudanum taken. In the case of young infants too deeply narco- 
tized to swallow, subcutaneous injections of g^th of a grain of atro- 
pia may succeed in reviving the struggling vitality. 

Two cases have come under my own notice, in which the gal- 
vanic battery has been employed as a last resort, with the effect of 
restoring one patient permanently, and the other temporarily, the 
reaction not being sufficient in the latter instance to establish con- 
valescence, though life was prolonged for several weeks. Artificial 
respiration has occasionally been resorted to, when the prostrating 
influence of the poison had arrested the natural process, life being 



644 PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 

prolonged by this means, until the impression of the narcotic had 
passed off; recovery has been effected in this way. 

The Abuse of Opium. — The habitual use of the preparations of 
opium as a means of intoxication, is an evil, the extent of which is 
scarcely appreciated by the profession, or by the community at 
large. There are shops in the outskirts of our large cities in which 
the sale of laudanum forms one of the principal items of business. 
These peddle it out to every poor victim who can produce a few 
pennies to purchase a temporary relief from imaginary pains. So 
common is this article of trade that even little children are fur- 
nished with it on application, as if it were the most harmless drug. 
It is sold in these shops at half the price maintained by respectable 
establishments, and there can be no doubt that its intoxicating 
effects are sought by many, who use it as a substitute for alcoholic 
drinks. Individuals who would shrink from the habitual use of 
spirituous liquors employ this medicine, under a false persuasion 
that it is useful or necessary to allay some symptom of chronic 
disease, until they become victims to one of the worst of habits. 
There is scarcely an apothecary in our large cities who cannot re- 
late instances of opium intoxication that have come under his own 
notice, and been served at his own counter. Females afflicted with 
chronic disease ; widows bereft of their earthly support ; inebriates 
who have abandoned the bottle ; lovers disappointed in their hopes ; 
flee to this powerful drug, either in its crude form, in the form of 
tincture, or some of its salts, to relieve their pain of body or mind, 
or to take the place of another repudiated stimulant. Such, too, is 
the morbid taste of these, that they think they require the sopo- 
rific influence of opium to fill up the measure of their life enjoy- 
ment, just as the drunkard is wedded to his cups, or the tobacco- 
user to the weed. 

The responsibility for many cases of habitual intoxication, both 
with alcohol and opium, undoubtedly rests with the physician. 
Almost every apothecary of large experience has met with instances 
in which the parties attribute their habit to the use of these agents, 
for the first time, under the advice of a physician, by whose direc- 
tion it has been persisted in, in some chronic case, till it has become 
almost impossible to desist from the indulgence. 

The quantity of laudanum that may be taken varies with dif- 
ferent individuals. Those habituated to it consume from a few 
teaspoonfuls to an ounce or more per day. A medical friend in- 
formed me that a child less than two years old came under his 
observation, to whom was administered a dessertspoonful of lauda- 
num per diem to keep it quiet, while the mother was engaged at 
her daily toil ; this, of course, was the result of previous habit, 
originating in a small beginning. 

Persons" who have been addicted to the use of ardent spirits, are, 
perhaps, more apt to use laudanum in preference to the crude drug, 
or any of the salts of morphia. The cheapness of the tincture over 
the salts is a strong reason with others. We know of a lady whose 
bill for sulphate of morphia, during a single year, was ninety dol- 



THE ABUSE OF OPIUM. 645 

lars, which, if we estimate it at the usual price, and take the daily 
average of the quantity consumed, would exhibit the enormous 
consumption of over 20 grains a day. And yet the victim of this 
slavery is able to attend, in some measure, to her daily pursuits, and 
has already attained middle age, without any evidence of organic 
disease. 

Another lady, suffering from a uterine complaint, who had been 
for years in the habit of using opium, at first by the advice of a 
physician and subsequently from an impression of its value to her, 
continued it in gradually increasing doses, till the daily consump- 
tion of the gum and the tincture, taken alternately, amounted to 
many grains of the former, and half an ounce of the latter. In 
this case the patient was bedridden, and suffered a great deal of 
pain when the system was not directly influenced by the medicine. 

A degree of restlessness and nervous irritability, amounting 
almost to spasms, when not under the effects of the drug, are 
characteristic in almost every aggravated case. 

One colored woman, advanced in life, who had been advised 
many years before, by her physician, to employ laudanum for the 
relief of the painful symptoms of a chronic disease, was known for 
several years to take invariably f^iss of laudanum, which was pur- 
chased daily as required. A lady of my acquaintance, who I believe 
since recovered entirely from the habit, took for years a half grain 
powder of sulphate of morphia daily, sometimes perhaps twice a 
day. On one occasion a man proposed to purchase at the counter 
a fluidounce vial of laudanum, and when the price of it was de- 
manded, immediately swallowed the whole, as was supposed for 
the purpose of suicide. He was afterwards seen in the streets 
apparently in his usual health. 

Dr. Garrod relates a case of a young man who took one drachm 
of Smyrna opium night and morning, and frequently from an ounce 
to an ounce and a half of laudanum in addition. 

We are informed of an instance of a lady advanced to her three- 
score years and ten> who, from fear of the pains of death, from day 
to clay kept herself under the influence of this narcotic. Such was 
the morbid mental influence which kept her unhappy in the antici- 
pation of a result which has not yet occurred. 

The moral responsibility connected with the question of prescrib- 
ing and dispensing opium, may be greater than has been hitherto 
acknowledged ; and the few remarks here presented are designed 
to awaken an interest among those who by position and pursuits 
are best qualified to exercise a wholesome influence upon its abuse. 

"Who would sell an ounce of laudanum to an applicant whose 
intention to commit suicide was apparent? And yet how often it 
is sold to individuals, who are only protracting their suicide by the 
demoralizing and dissipating habit of taking it in smaller and 
gradually increasing quantities. 



646 preparations of opium. 

Working Formulas for the Preparations of Opium. 
Tinctura Opii Camphorata. {Camphorated Tincture of Opium.) U.S. P. 

Paregoric Elixir. 
Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately fine powder, 
Benzoic acid, each, sixty grains. 
Camphor, forty grains. 
Oil of anise, a fluidrachm. 
Clarified honey, two troyotfnces. 
Diluted alcohol, two pints. 

Macerate for seven days, and filter through paper. (It is well to 
omit the honey till near the close of the maceration.) 

Tinctura Opii. ( Tincture of Opium.) U. S. P. 

Laudanum. 
Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately fine powder, two troyounces and 
a half. 
Water, 

Alcohol, each, a pint. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Macerate the opium with the water for three days, with frequent 
agitation ; then add the alcohol, and continue the maceration for 
three days longer. Introduce the mixture into a percolator, and, 
when the liquid has ceased to pass, pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until two pints of tincture are obtained. 

All the preparations of opium are directed to be made from the 
powdered drug ; this is designed to prevent variations in strength, 
resulting from the different degrees of dryness of different speci- 
mens, as found in commerce. In many instances, however, the 
apothecary or physician prefers to select the drug in its crude con- 
dition, and in the absence of conveniences for drying and powdering 
it in large quantities, uses it in lump. In this case the following 
process may be observed, the necessary increase of weight in the 
opium being added, on account of the moisture it contains : — 

Modified Formula for Laudanum. 

Take of opium, sliced, two troyounces and six drachms, add to it 
four fluidounces of hot water, and by the aid of a pestle and mortar, 
work it into a uniform pasty mass ; to this add twelve fluidounces 
of water, and a pint of alcohol, making in all two pints of diluted 
alcohol ; allow it to macerate for two weeks, occasionally shaking 
it, and throw the whole upon a filter — to the pulp, remaining after 
the liquid has drained off', add about two fluidounces of diluted 
alcohol, which will displace the last portion so as to make the 
whole of the tincture measure exactly two pints. 

Tinctura Opii Deodorata. (Deodorized Tincture of Opium.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately fine powder, two troyounces and 
a half. 
Ether, 

Alcohol, each, half a pint. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 



WORKING FORMULAS, ETC. 647 

Macerate the opium with half a pint of water for twenty-four 
hours, and express ; then repeat the operation twice with the same 
quantity of water. Mix the expressed liquids, and, having evapo- 
rated the mixture to four fiuidounces, shake it when cold, in a 
bottle, repeatedly with the ether. Pour off the ethereal solution 
when it has separated by standing, and evaporate the remaining 
liquid until all traces of ether have disappeared. Mix this with 
twenty iiuidounces of water, and filter the mixture through paper. 
"When the liquid has ceased to pass, add sufficient water, through 
the filter, to make the filtered liquid measure a pint and a half. 
Lastly, add the alcohol, and mix them together. 

If the opium is not dried and powdered, the manipulation may 
be varied, using two troy ounces and six drachms of moist opium 
as indicated in the modified formula for laudanum. 

In both this formula and the one preceding, it should be re- 
membered that a very moist opium will lose more than ten per cent. 
of water, and the only accurate method of making the prepara- 
tions of opium from the unpowdered drug is to take a piece of the 
opium, say 100 grains, after it has been well kneaded to make it 
uniform, and flatten it out into a thin cake, and dry it at a temper- 
ature of 120° till it no longer loses weight. From this experiment 
the proper allowance can be readily ascertained. 

Tinctura Opii Acetata. (Acetated Tincture of Opium.) U. S. P. 

Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 
Vinegar, twelve fiuidounces. 
Alcohol, half a pint. 

Pub the opium with the vinegar ; then add the alcohol, and 
having macerated for seven days, express, and filter through paper. 

Vinum Opii. (Wine of Opium.) TJ. S. P. 

Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 
Cinnamon, in moderately line powder, 
Cloves, in moderately fine powder, each, sixty grains. 
Sherry wine, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the powders with fifteen fluidounces of sherry wine, and 
macerate for seven days, with occasional agitation ; then transfer 
the mixture to a conical percolator, and, when the liquid has passed 
the surface, gradually pour on sherry wine until a pint of filtered 
liquid is obtained. 

Acetum Opii. ( Vinegar of Opium.) 

Black Drop. 

Take of Opium, dried, and in moderately coarse powder, five troyounces. 
Nutmeg, in moderately coarse powder, a troyounce. 
Saffron, in moderately coarse powder, one hundred and fifty grains. 
Sugar, eight troyounces. 
Diluted acetic acid, a sufficient quantity. 

Macerate the opium, nutmeg, and saffron with a pint of diluted 
acetic acid for twenty-four hours. Put the mixture into a conical 



648 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

glass percolator, and return the liquid which first passes until the 
filtrate becomes clear. Then gradually pour on diluted acetic acid 
until the filtered liquid measures twenty-six fluidounces. In this 
dissolve the sugar, and having strained the solution, add sufficient 
diluted acetic acid to make the whole measure two pints. 



CHAPTER X. 

EVAPORATION. 

This process is employed in the preparation of most of the ex- 
tracts, fluid extracts, and syrups, and in the concentration of solu- 
tions generally. 

When the liquid under treatment is brought to its boiling point, 
so that the formation of vapor is upon the inner surface of the 
containing vessel, whence it escapes by its elasticity through the 
body of the liquid in bubbles, the process is termed ebullition; but 
when the liquid does not reach its boiling point, and the tempera- 
ture and other circumstances are such that it is liberated in the 
form of vapor without disturbance, directly from the surface ex- 
posed to the air, it is termed evaporation. 

Viewed as processes for dissipating the volatile ingredients, these 
differ chiefly in regard to the degree of heat employed, and the con- 
sequent rapidity with which the object is attained ; in ebullition, 
the rapidity of the conversion of the liquid into vapor is in pro- 
portion to the extent of surface of the containing vessel exposed 
to the Jire, while in evaporation it depends principally upon the 
extent of surface of the liquid exposed to the air. 

The effect of reducing the temperature below the boiling point 
is exhibited by the following ascertained rates of evaporation : at 
212° F. the rate of evaporation may be represented as 1, at 180° F. 
as J, at 150° F. as J, at 125° F. as J, at 100° F. as J g , at 79° F. as ^. 

In evaporating saline solutions reference should be had to the 
presence or absence of volatile constituents, or the liability to de- 
composition at elevated temperatures, but as a general rule the 
most rapid evaporation is preferable. 

For reasons pointed out in the last chapter, evaporation at a tem- 
perature below the boiling point is generally preferred for extracts. 
Many vegetable solutions, which would be greatly deteriorated by 
the long boiling necessary to reduce them to the condition of ex- 
tracts, may be exposed to a temperature below their boiling point 
in a wide and shallow vessel until sufficiently inspissated, with little 
danger of losing their solubility or their medicinal activity. 

Extracts are therefore to be evaporated in shallow vessels, which 
should be of porcelain or well-tinned iron or copper. Fig. 229 
represents an ordinary evaporating dish of Berlin ware, which is 
the best material. 



ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 



649 




The long exposure of vegetable solutions j?ig. 229. 

to a moderate heat, besides being tedious, 
is liable to the objection in certain cases 
of exposing the proximate constituents for 
too long a period to the oxidizing influence 
of the air, sometimes allowing of the ace- 
tous fermentation. 

The liquid to be evaporated should preferably be divided into 
smaller portions, and each reduced separately till highly concen- 
trated : then these may be mixed. By this means, no one portion 
is long kept under the unfavorable circumstances of an elevated 
temperature and exposure to the air. 

In many preparations, particularly the fluid extracts and some 
syrups, the process is directed to be carried to a certain point indi- 
cated by the quantity of the concentrated liquid. To facilitate the 
determination of this without removing the liquid from the evapo- 
rating dish, two methods are resorted to: the dish may be tared and 
from time to time placed upon the balance until it reaches the re- 
quired weight previously ascertained, or a suitable slip of wood is 
previously marked with a notch at the point reached by the required 
quantity of liquid, and this being inserted perpendicularly in the 
liquid will indicate the point to arrest the evaporation. 

Air at a certain temperature is capable of taking up a certain 
portion of vapor which is constant at that temperature, and evapo- 
ration ceases when the point of saturation is attained, therefore a 
draught greatly facilitates evaporation by carrying off the air as 
fast as it becomes charged with moisture, and constantly furnish- 
ing a dry atmosphere to become saturated in turn with the escaping 
vapor. Constant stirring, by continually exposing a large surface 
of the heated liquid to the air, also increases the rapidity of evapo- 
ration. 

The different modes of applying heat for the purposes of evapo- 
ration, are: 1st. Directly by exposing the containing vessel to the 
source of heat. 2d. By a sand-bath. 3d. By a water-bath. 4th. 
By a steam-bath. 

Whenever a vegetable solution is evaporated by a direct applica- 
tion of heat, it should be at such an ele- 
vation from the furnace or lamp, as not Fig. 230. 
to be touched by the flame, so that the 
heat should be communicated only by 
radiation. When the heat is under per- 
fect control, as in a gas furnace, and the 
process is watched, this plan may be sub- 
stituted for the use of a water-bath with 
the advantage of the liquid being raised 
to the boiling point or depressed below 
it at pleasure. 

Fig. 230 shows an arrangement for the 
direct application of radiated heat in 
evaporation ; a is a diaphragm of wire 





650 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

fauze placed between the evaporating dish b and the source of 
eat c, which spreads the flame and prevents its contact with the 
dish, though brought closely together; the diaphragm a may be 
omitted in using a gas furnace, as the flame is then under control 
by regulating the jet. 

Several retort stands have been shown in the last chapter and in 
that on displacement, and the instrument as commonly constructed 
is sufficiently familar. In the ordinary kind, it is necessary in ad- 
justing apparatus, or when it is desirable to disconnect or alter the 
position of the rings for any purpose, to slide them up the whole 
length of the rod, and remove all above them, which is sometimes 

a great inconvenience. In Wiegand's 
Tig. 231. improvement, the casting that clasps the 

rod is open on one side to the diameter 
of the rod, so that by loosening the screw 
it may be slipped off laterally, and yet, 
TXr . .. . , . ■ , when the screw is tightened so as to press 

Wiegand's improved clasp for re- _ 1 . ° m m r 

tort stand. firmly against the rod, it is sufficiently 

secure to bear any weight appropriate to 

such an apparatus. Fig. 231 gives a view of one of these separated 

from the rod, and in Fig. 230 the whole retort stand is shown in 

use, giving a front view of the improved clasp. 

The sand-bath is seldom employed in the preparation of extracts, 
possessing no advantages over the carefully regulated direct applica- 
tion of radiated heat. The water-bath is directed in all the officinal 
processes, for the preparation of extracts; its advantages are detailed 
in Chapter III. Whatever means may be resorted to for effecting the 
concentration of vegetable solutions, with a view to the preparation 
of extracts, they should be finally evaporated to the proper consist- 
ence with great care, and a water-bath furnishes a means of con- 
trolling the temperature, especially adapted to unskilful and inex- 
perienced persons. 

The steam-bath is the most eligible means of applying heat for 
the purposes under discussion, although it is confined to the few 
who manufacture pharmaceutical preparations on a large scale. 
One difference between a steam-bath and a water-bath consists in 
the facility of the application of pressure to the steam in the one 
case and not in the other. The temperature of steam, as already 
stated, bears a remarkable relation to the pressure under which it 
is maintained; steam under pressure of five pounds to the square 
inch is at a temperature of 226°, which is about as high as can be 
safely employed in making extracts; as the liquid will boil at this 
temperature, of course the evaporation is more rapid than ordinary 
surface evaporation, and yet the containing vessel is not so hot as 
in ordinary cases of the direct application of heat. The fact that 
the temperature of steam under pressure is liable to the objection 
of injuring the vegetable principles in solution has induced a modi- 
fication of the steam-bath so as to give it more the character of a 
water-bath, though with the advantages of conducting and com- 
municating heat, which apply so peculiarly to steam. 



ON EVAPORATION" AND THE EXTRACTS. 



651 



A desirable apparatus is a hemispherical iron basin, perforated 
by a pipe through which the steam is introduced, and another for 
the exit of the condensed water into a waste pipe. The steam-pipe 
communicates with the boiler in which steam is generated for all 
the processes in the establishment, and several steam-baths stand 
out in the room, in convenient positions, and are adapted by rings 
of various diameters to any of the vessels in which it is desirable 
to conduct the several evaporations. 

Fig. 232. 







£) 






«-@ 



i 



Fig. 232 shows an apparatus constructed from an ordinary gal- 
vanized iron sink and gas-pipe, which furnishes an extended evapo- 
rating surface; the pipe is three-fourths of an inch in diameter, 
and arranged horizontally in folds, the ends of the pipe being intro- 
duced through holes of appropriate size drilled in the end of the 
vessel, and well coated when the apparatus is galvanized. The 
vessel may be partially filled with sand, on which beakers, flasks, 
and other apparatus may rest, or they may be placed directly on the 
coil of pipe; or, should it be desired, a current of cold water can be 
turned into it and the coil when attached to a still be used as a 
condenser. 

In the preparation of extracts by the use of steam, the pressure 
is so regulated that, as the solution becomes inspissated, the degree 
of heat can be diminished. Near the conclusion of the process the 
extract is sometimes withdrawn, and poured in thin layers on plates 
of glass, which are placed in a drying-room or closet, and subjected 
to a current of warm and dry air, till sufficiently hard. 

The most perfect form of apparatus for the preparation of extracts, 
is a combination of the steam-bath with a vacuum pan. A suit- 
able air-tight boiler is connected with an air-pump worked by ma- 
chinery, which, by removing the pressure of the atmosphere from 
the liquid placed in it, lowers the boiling point, and greatly increases 
the rapidity of evaporation, even at a temperature of 120° to 140° 
F. The air being excluded, the principal objection to the long con- 
tinued evaporation of vegetable solutions is also removed. In the 



652 ON EVAPOKATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

absence of facilities for evaporation in vacuo, the advantage of ap- 
paratus for distillation in concentrating vegetable juices and infu- 
sions should not be overlooked. The head of the still becoming 
full of steam excludes the air for the most part, and the condensa- 
tion of the steam in the cooler brings about a partial vacuum which 
favors rapid evaporation. 

In most establishments for the manufacture of extracts, vacuum 
pans, heated by steam, are employed for their concentration, and 
their products are generally considered to furnish proof of the 
superiority of this mode of evaporation over that accomplished 
under ordinary circumstances of pressure and exposure to the air ; 
this is especially the case with those constituting the first group in 
the classification adopted in this work, which is primarily accord- 
ing to therapeutical properties, though the different modes of pre- 
paration are included in the arrangement of the groups. 

Extracta, U. S. P. 

1st Group. — Narcotic. Inspissated juices. From the fresh plant by expression, coagu- 
lation of the albumen, straining, and evaporation. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extractum belladonnee 
" conii 
" hyoscyami 


1 to 2 grains 

2 to 3 grains 


See 2d Group, Alcoholic Extracts. 
Added to alterative compounds. 
Laxative, narcotic. 



REMARKS. 

The three extracts classed above form a remarkably natural group, 
therapeutically, pharmaceutically, and physically; as commonly 
prepared and imported, they have a more or less decidedly green 
color, and this feature was formerly regarded as a test of their 
having been prepared without scorching from the employment of 
too high heat; but, on the other hand, the green coloring principle 
(chlorophyll) is associated with the inert and insoluble vegetable 
albumen, which sometimes exists to the amount of from 12 to 18 per 
cent., and which the U. S. Pharmacopoeia directs shall be first co- 
agulated and separated; the strictly officinal extracts prepared by 
inspissating the juice of the green herbs, being deprived of this, 
have a brown color, and are nearly soluble in water. An article 
answering this description is sold under the name of clarified extracts. 

The odor of extracts is one of the surest indications of their 
quality; it should, as nearly as possible, resemble that of the un- 
dried plant. 

Extracts which are made by the use of vacuum apparatus and 
clarified are stronger than the kind made by ordinary evaporation ; 
the doses stated in the books are above those usually prescribed. 
Great inconvenience results from a physician's ordering too large 
doses of clarified extracts, under a wrong impression as to the 
strength of the best commercial article. 

The United States is largely supplied with this class of extracts 



ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 



653 



from England, where the herbs from which they are prepared ap- 
pear to come to great prefection, but of the English manufacturers, 
of whom Squire, Allen, Herring, and Eansom have a high reputa- 
tion, none adopt the method of clarification which is required by 
the Pharmacopoeia of the United States. 

The following table of the yield of extracts and inspissated juices 
is compiled from Squire's Companion to the British Pharmaco- 
poeia : — 



Leaves. 


Officinal name. 


Auth'y. 


Leaves. 


Fresh. Dry. 










Extract aconite 


Ph. Br. 


100 lbs. = 50 lbs. juice =7 lbs. extract. 


100 lbs. =16 lbs. 


" belladonna 


" 


100 lbs. =56 lbs. " =4 lbs. 


100 lbs. =21 lbs. 


" conii 


" 


100 lbs. =50 lbs. " = 5£lbs. » 




" " alcoholic 




100 lbs. (dry) 21 lbs. extract. 


100 lbs. =15^ lbs. 


" hyoscyami 


Ph. Br. 


1 00 lbs. = 50 lbs. juice = 5 lbs. extract. 




" quassia 




f 48 oz. (wood) = 1 oz. extract. 
\ 16 " " = 7 drms. extract. 




" arnica 




100 lbs. (flowers) = 33 lbs. juice. 




" digitalis, ale. 


U. S. 


100 lbs. = 27 per cent. 




" colocynth 




100 lbs. = 15 to 20 lbs. 




" gentianse 


u. s. 


100 lbs. = 50 per cent. ext. by decoct. 




" nucis vomicae 




100 lbs. = 7$ lbs. extract. 




" stramonium 




100 lbs. =3 lbs. inspissated juice. 




(leaves) 








" stramonium 




100 lbs. = 13$ lbs. extract. 




(seed) 








" jalapa 




100 lbs. = 50 lbs. 



The British Pharmacopoeia directs to heat the juice to 130°, 
strain to preserve the green coloring matter, then heat to 200° 
to coagulate the albumen, and filter again, evaporate to thin syrupy 
consistence, then add the green coloring matter, and evaporate, as- 
siduously stirring, at a temperature not exceeding 140°. The U. S. 
Pharmacopoeia directs the juice to be heated to the boiling point, 
strained, and evaporated to proper consistence. 

Extract of belladonna is useful externally and internally as an 
anodyne in neuralgia, tic douloureux, and other painful affections, 
and as an antispasmodic in whooping-cough, and as a prophylactic 
in scarlet fever. It is much used in the treatment of diseases of 
the eye, and especially for the dilatation of the pupil before opera- 
tions for cataract; for this purpose the extract is softened with 
water to the consistence of a thick liquid, and applied directly to 
the eyeball and painted on the upper and lower lids, a few hours 
before the operation. The fresh leaves yield about 5 per cent, of 
this extract. 

Extract of stramonium, though no longer officinalis usually prepared 
from the whole herb, which yields about 18 per cent, of extract. 
{Gray.) It is the least employed of the group. Besides the uses to 
which the others are applied, this has been prescribed in spasmodic 
asthma. The ointment made from the extract is a popular remedy 
in piles. 

Extract of coiiium, on account of the volatility of its active prin- 



654 ON EVAPORATION" AND THE EXTRACTS. 

ciple, is one of the most difficult of the extracts to prepare and pre- 
serve. It is employed in the treatment of glandular enlargement, 
scrofula, rheumatism, etc., as an alterative and anodyne, entering 
into the composition of numerous empirical preparations, besides 
being prescribed in regular practice. The whole plant is usually 
employed in its preparation, though the Pharmacopoeia indicates 
the leaves as the officinal portion; the yield is about 3 to 5 per cent. 

It should have a strong and characteristic odor, and is readily 
tested by the following experiment: Take a small pellet of the ex- 
tract, soften it into a thin paste with water, and add a drop of solu- 
tion of potassa, or of carbonate of potassium ; immediately a strong 
characteristic odor will be observed, resembling, when faint, the 
odor of mice. This is from the liberation in a gaseous form of 
conia, the active principle of the herb, and on holding near it a rod 
moistened with muriatic acid, a copious cloud of muriate of conia 
will be produced. 

If the extract is very inferior, the experiment will not succeed, 
or will be only partially successful. A cloud of muriate of am- 
monia without the mouse-like odor will be perceived. 

Extract of hyoscyamus is the most extensively used internally of 
the series. The yield of the plant is about 5J per cent, of extract. 
Its tendency to increase the secretions and to promote the action 
of the bowels renders it a particularly useful anodyne remedy. 

Mollis Process. — Prof. F. Mohr, starting from the fact that the 
activity of narcotic herbs belongs to principles which are soluble in 
both alcohol and water, proposed a method for preparing such ex- 
tracts, the main features of which have been adopted by the 
Pharmacopoeias of the different German States. It is the following: 
The fresh herb is expressed, mixed with about one-seventh of its 
weight of water, again expressed, the liquid raised to near the 
boiling point, and strained from the precipitated albumen, which 
has coagulated and thrown down the chlorophyll ; it is then evapo- 
rated at from 120° to 130° F. to one-fourth the weight of the 
original material, mixed with an equal bulk of alcohol to separate 
gum and mucilage, strained, and with constant stirring evaporated 
to the proper consistence. This process furnishes very strong and 
reliable extracts ; they are not so variable as those obtained by the 
inspissation of the juices, which vary according to the locality and 
the season. The only principles here extracted are active, and the 
dose is correspondingly small. None of our manufacturers have as 
yet put this process in practice, though some of the best German 
pharmacists in the United States import these excellent extracts. 
It is, however, worthy of remark that inferior, almost worthless, 
extracts are manufactured in Germany for the American market. 



ON EVAPORATION" AND THE EXTRACTS. 



655 



2d Group. — Narcotics, etc., alcoholic. Extracted by alcohol and diluted alcohol, and 
evaporated. 





Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extract! 


im aconiti 


J gr. to 1 gr. 


Nervous sedative. 


<< 


belladonnas alcoholicum 




Narcotic. 


it 


stramonii 


<« 


" 


a 


conii alcoholicum 


1 to 2 grs. 


Alterative, narcotic. 


<< 


hyoscyarai alcoholicum 


" 


Laxative, narcotic. 


" 


digitalis 


\ gr. to £ gr. 


Art. sedative, diuretic. 


(< 


cannabis Americanse 


1 gr. to 2 grs. 


Intoxicant (variable). 


" 


" Indicse 


<« 


it a 


(< 


Valerianae 


3 to 5 grs. 


Antispasmodic. 


(< 


Arnicae 




In arnica plaster. 


" 


nncis vomicaB 


i gr. to 1 gr. 


Tonic, excito -motor 


" 


ignatiae 


" 


a <* 


" 


physostigma 


■h s r - t0 i s r - 


(< <( 



REMARKS. 

The use of an alcoholic menstruum for the extraction of the dried 
herbs possesses some advantages, in the preparation of extracts, 
over the inspissation of the juices of the fresh plants as obtained 
by expression. The albuminous matter, not being soluble in alcohol, 
is not present in the solution, and after evaporation the active 
principles constitute a much larger proportion of the resulting ex- 
tract ; hence the doses of the narcotic extracts are much smaller 
than of those of the first group. They are also much more easily 
prepared by the pharmacist on a small scale than the inspissated 
juices; by the use of apparatus at hand in almost every shop the 
members of this group can be satisfactorily prepared, the only 
practical difficulty being the supply of fresh and reliable herbs. 
Those imported from England at high prices are the only commer- 
cial variety of these leaves to be depended on, except in the case of 
stramonium, which may be collected in abundance in the outskirts 
of almost any town. The modes of extraction and evaporation of 
this group are varied in almost every instance; in the case of aco- 
nite, conium, digitalis, and valerian, a limited quantity of strong 
alcohol is first passed through the powdered mass ; the first perco- 
late is set aside to evaporate spontaneously, and the extraction 
being then finished with diluted alcohol, and this evaporated on a 
water-bath, it is, toward the last, incorporated with the reserved 
portion, and the whole brought to the proper consistence. Alco- 
holic extracts of belladonna, of hyoscyamus, of stramonium, and of 
arnica, are made by the inspissation, without reserving any portion 
for spontaneous evaporation, of a tincture made with two parts of 
alcohol to one of water. 

Alcoholic extracts of nux vomica and ignatia are obtained by 
inspissating tinctures of the powdered drug made with strong alco- 
hol ; they are very powerful remedies, and possess a resinous con- 
sistence, becoming dry and brittle by age. 

The extract of cannabis indica, as obtained from the East Indies, 



656 ON EVAPOKATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

often contains much insoluble and inert matter which in the above 
purified extract is separated by solution, filtration, and evaporation. 
This method, however, is less practised than the direct preparation 
by digestion or steam percolation of an alcoholic extract from the 
carefully dried imported herb. I have not met with the East India 
extract, in our markets for a long time, and have been in the habit of 
dispensing the best English extract prepared from the Gunjah itself. 

This process is now directed by the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. The 
tests most to be relied upon for extract cannabis are its solubility 
in alcohol, ether, chloroform, benzine, and oil of turpentine, peculiar 
odor when moderately heated, indifference to alkalies, and the be- 
havior towards HM) 3 (specific gravity 1.88), by which an orange- 
red resinoid substance like gamboge is produced. 

The therapeutical applications of these extracts are numerous, 
though the inspissated juices of belladonna, stramonium, conium, and 
hyoscyamus, as included in the first group, are much more used. 
The alcoholic extracts are best adapted to incorporation with oint- 
ments and plasters, from their containing less inert insoluble matter, 
also for reducing to a dry and pulverulent condition, where this is 
necessary, as for prescriptions in the form of powder. In the ab- 
sence of an inspissated juice of aconite, formerly officinal, the alco- 
holic extract should have an opportunity of a fair trial, and in view 
of its importance as a powerful internal remedy in neuralgic affec- 
tions and in fevers, and its great utility in the form of plaster, as 
well as the smallness of its dose for internal use, it will doubtless 
find a place in many prescriptions. An alcoholic extract of aconite 
root w T ould probably be an improvement on that of the leaves for 
most external applications. Alcoholic extract of arnica is for the 
first time made officinal in the Pharmacopoeia of 1860, its use being 
in the fabrication of arnica plaster. An opportunity is now fur- 
nished for the trial of this remedy internally in the form of pill 
and for the settlement of its therapeutical position. Extract of 
valerian was for the first time introduced into our national standard 
in the revision of 1860 ; the formula is a good one, and as it fur- 
nishes an opportunity for prescribing this esteemed antispasmodic 
in a less offensive form than the tincture or fluid extract, it will 
doubtless gain favor with physicians and patients. 

Extract of digitalis should have been, long since, in the U. S. 
Pharmacopoeia; it has been in common use for many years. In view 
of the perishable nature of the powdered leaves, it is adapted to 
supersede these in extemporaneous combination. 

Extract of cannabis is one of the most useful of the class of nar- 
cotic remedies, but for its great uncertainty of operation. Some 
specimens produce the most powerful and even alarming symptoms 
in doses of a single grain or even less, while others require 5 or 
even 10 grains to produce its characteristic results. Its peculiari- 
ties as a remedy consist in its producing none of those depressing 
effects generally characteristic of narcotics; it does not affect the 
pulse or the appetite, nor is it apt to cause sleep except by allaying 



ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 



657 



nervous symptoms. It is equally applicable to acute inflammatory 
and to typhoid affections. 

Alcoholic extracts of nux vomica and ignatia are two of the most 
powerful tonics within the reach of the practitioner, they are 
usually prescribed along with other bitters and sometimes with 
the mineral tonics ; it should be remembered that they contain 
strychnia and brucia, two powerful vegetable alkalies, and that 
they are cumulative in their effects and liable to produce tetanic 
symptoms, on the least appearance of which the use of the remedy 
should be arrested. The commercial extract of nux vomica is often 
given in one-grain doses, but it is frequently much below standard 
strength. 

Extract Physostigmatis, II. S. P. — This is made by displacing with 
alcohol until exhausted, after four days' maceration of the powder, 
in a conical percolator. The alcohol should be recovered by distilla- 
tion, and the remainder should be evaporated by water-bath to the 
consistence of soft extract. 

3d Group. — Cathartics, tonics, etc., alcoholic. Extracted by alcohol and water, or by 
diluted alcohol. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extractum jalapae 


10 to 15 grs. 


Cathartic. 


" podophylli 


5 to 10 grs. 


do. 


" hellebori alcoholicum 


10 to 15 grs. 


Emmenagogue, cathartic. 


" rhei " 


do. 


Cathartic. 


" colocynthidis* " 




do. 


" dulcamarse 


3 to 6 grs. 


Alterative, narcotic. 


" senegse 


1 to 3 grs. 


Stimulant, expectorant. 


" cinchoneef 


10 to 15 grs. 


Tonic. 



REMARKS. 

In preparing the above important preparations there are various 
modifications of the process of extraction by diluted alcohol and 
subsequent evaporation. This process in its simplest form is adopted 
in the case of colocynth, dulcamara, and senega, in the former of 
which maceration and strong expression precede percolation. In 
treating cinchona, jalap, and podophyllum, the alcohol and water 
are applied successively and the percolates separately evaporated to 
the consistence of thin honey, mixed and further concentrated to 
the proper consistence. Rhubarb and black hellebore are instances 
in which the percolation is, first with strong alcohol, followed by 
diluted alcohol ; the first percolate being evaporated spontaneously,, 
and the other by a water-bath, till they reach the consistence of 
syrup ; they are then directed to be mixed and further concentrated 
to the consistence of an extract. 

Of the above cathartics, each has its peculiar properties, adapting 
it to some peculiar use. 



42 



* See Extractum Colocynthidis Compositum, 
| See Extractum Calisayicum. 



658 



02* EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 



Extract of hellebore is used as an emmenagogue cathartic. In com- 
bination with aloes, myrrh, sulphate of iron, etc., it constitutes the 
celebrated Hooper's Female Pills. 

Extract of jalap is combined with compound extract of colocynth, 
calomel, and gamboge in the compound cathartic pill ; it is, per- 
haps, seldom prepared of standard quality, and is especially liable 
to sophistication and adulteration. 

Extract of podophyllum is less used than it deserves, being equal 
to extract of jalap in its cathartic effect in half the dose. Podo- 
phyllin is a more concentrated and, for many uses, a more conve- 
nient preparation, but it is not so perfect a representative of the 
root as this extract. In the opinion of Dr. Wood this extract 
might be substituted for extract of jalap in all cases. 

Extract of rhubarb is rarely employed by practitioners in the 
United States, though it offers facilities for using this valuable 
tonic cathartic in larger doses in the form of pill than the powdered 
root itself. 

Extract of cinchona is seldom used in practice in this country. 
This extract of cinchona must not be confounded with the article 
called Wetherill's Extract, nor with extractum calisayicum, which 
are superior preparations, treated of among the unofHcinal extracts. 

Extract of dulcamara has been removed into this group from the 
group of aqueous extracts in which it was formerly included ; it is 
but little prescribed, though doubtless an admirable vehicle for 
other alterative medicines in the form of pill. 

Extract of seneka is a new officinal for which there seems to me to 
be little use, as seneka root, being an expectorant, is seldom required 
in the pilular form, and its syrup and decoction are favorably 
known as liquid preparations. 

Extract of colocynth is introduced into the Pharmacopoeia with a 
view to the ready preparation of the compound extract, which is a 
well-known and popular remedy ; its properties adapt it to being 
dried and powdered. It may be advantageously prescribed as an 
active cathartic in many combinations. Extract of colocynth 
should be made of the medullary part deprived of the seed, which 
constitutes from 25 to 34 per cent, of the drug; the extract yielded 
lifter maceration is about 60 per cent., and is dry and resinous. 

4th Group. Tonics, astringents, etc. Extracted by water and evaporated. 



Officinal name. 



Estractum gentianae 
" quassias 



kramerise (rhatany) 
haematoxyli 
juglandis (butternut) 
opii 



Med. dose. 



10 to 20 grs. 

3 to 6 grs. 

10 to 20 grs. 

do. 

do. 

^ grain 



Remarks. 



Tonic. 

do. 
Astringent. 

do. 
Cathartic. 
Narcotic. 



ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 659 



REMARKS. 

Extracts of gentian, quassia, and butternut are made by precisely 
the same process, involving percolation with cold water, boiling 
down to three-fourths, straining, and evaporating. Extract of 
rhatany differs from this by being raised to the boiling point 
merely, strained, and evaporated on a water-bath, a variation made 
necessary by the proneness of the astringent principle to become 
insoluble and inert by long exposure to a boiling temperature. 
Logwood, on the contrary, is extracted by long boiling, and on 
evaporation becomes dry and pulverulent, a property which it shares 
with most of the astringent extracts. Opium is sliced and tritu- 
rated with water to obtain its soluble principles, requiring repeated 
macerations and nitrations; it forms then a perfectly smooth, uni- 
form, and soluble extract by careful evaporation. 

The great advantage of extract of quassia over extract of gentian 
in making pills, will be seen by comparing the doses. Extract of 
rhatany, when well prepared, so as to be soluble in water, is a valu- 
able substitute for kino and catechu, which it resembles in physi- 
cal as well as medical properties. It differs in medical properties 
from extract of logwood, though both are astringents ; the last 
named is more mild in its action, and is especially adapted to re- 
laxed conditions of the bowels. Extract of logwood is also largely 
used in dyeing, and in the manufacture of writing fluids. It is 
important, in selecting rhatany root, to obtain that which has the 
most bark attached to it. Prof. Procter, in a comparative assay 
of the bark and wood, found the former to yield 33 per cent., while 
the latter gave only 6.8 per cent. A very great yield of extract is 
obtained when the root is decocted, but nearly one-half of it is 
insoluble. Long exposure to the air should be avoided, as it occa- 
sions an insoluble apotheme. If the extract is purchased it is well 
to test its solubility in cold water. 

Extract of butternut, or white walnut, is a mild alterative, laxative, 
and diuretic medicine, but little prescribed, but well worthy the 
attention of practitioners in the treatment of chronic diseases. 

Aqueous extract of opium is a most useful preparation, much used 
in eye-washes and astringent injections, and well adapted to re- 
place opium itself in pill masses and for other internal uses ; the 
proximate principles of opium, soluble in water, are those most 
agreeable in their action. 

Unclassified Extracts. 

Extractum taraxaci Dose 3J By inspissating the expressed juice, 

diuretic, cholagogue. 
" colchici acet. Dose 1 to 2 grs. Extracted by diluted acetic acid, 

sedative. 
" colocynthidis comp. Dose 10 grs. Cathartic mixed powders. 

Extract of taraxacum is a most useful, though mild, remedy 
adapted to a large class of chronic cases. Much that is met with 
in the market is quite deficient in the bitterness characteristic of a 



660 ON EVAPOEATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

good article ; it is also apt to ferment or become mouldy from defi- 
cient evaporation. The evaporation should be pushed till the pilu- 
lar consistence is fully attained. 

Acetic extract of colchicum is an invaluable remedy in rheumatic 
and gouty affections, and in a variety of combinations indicated 
under the head of Extemporaneous Prescriptions is largely pre- 
scribed. 

Compound extract of colocynth is a most valuable remedy, for 
which an entirely new formula is given in the Pharmacopoeia of 
1860, found among the working formulas which follow. It is an 
exception to the extracts generally in being kept in powder. 

"Working Formulas of Extracts, including some not found in the 

Pharmacopoeia. 

SECOND GROUP. 

Extractum Digitalis Alcohilicum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Digitalis, recently dried and in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Alcohol, a pint. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the powder, previously mixed with one-third of the 
alcohol, into a percolator, and pour upon it the remainder of the 
alcohol. When the liquid has all been absorbed by the powder, pour 
diluted alcohol upon it until a pint of tincture has been obtained. 
Set this aside in a warm place, and allow it to evaporate spontane- 
ously until reduced to three fluidounces.. Continue the percolation 
with diluted alcohol until two pints more of tincture have passed, 
or until the powder is exhausted ; then evaporate this liquid, by 
means of a water-bath, at a temperature not exceeding 160°, to the 
consistence of syrup. To this add the three fluidounces of tiucture 
first obtained, and continue the evaporation, at a temperature not ex- 
ceeding 120°, until the whole is reduced to the proper consistence. 

By the same process prepare — 

Extractum Conii Alcoholicum, IT. S. P. 
From conium leaves, recently dried and in fine powder. 

Extractum Stramonii Foliorum, IT. S. P. 
From stramonium leaves, recently dried and in fine powder. 

Extractum Valeriana! Alcoholicum, IT. S. P. 
From valerian, in fine powder. 

Extractum Aconiti, IT. S. P. 
From aconite leaves, recently dried and in fine powder. 



FOKMULAS FOR THE EXTRACTS. 661 

Extraction Belladonnas Alcoholicum, U. S. P. 

Take of Belladonna leaves, in fine powder, twenty-four troyounces. 
Alcohol, four pints. 
Water, two pints. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the alcohol and water, and moisten the powder with a pint 
of the mixture; then pack it firmly in a conical percolator, and 
gradually pour upon it the remainder of the mixture. Continue 
the percolation with diluted alcohol until six pints of tincture have 
passed. Lastly, evaporate this, by means of a water-bath, to the 
proper consistence. 

By the same process prepare — 

Extractum Hyoscyami Alcoholicum, TJ. S. P. 
From hyoscyarnus leaves, recently dried and in moderately fine 
powder. 

Extractum Arnicce, U. S. P. 
From arnica, in moderately coarse powder. 



Extractum J^ucis Vomicce, U. S. P. 

Take of Nux vomica, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the nux vomica with four fluidounces of alcohol, and allow 
the mixture to stand for an hour. Then introduce it into a cylin- 
drical percolator, and gradually pour alcohol upon it until the 
tincture passes without bitterness. Distil off the alcohol, by means 
of a water-bath, until the tincture is reduced to half a pint, and 
evaporate this to the proper consistence. 

By the same process prepare — 

Extractum Ignatice Alcoholicum, U. S. P. 
From ignatia, in fine powder. 



Extractum Cannabis Americanoe. {Extract of American Hemp.) U. S. P. 

Take of American hemp, in moderately fine powder .... ^xij. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the hemp with six fluidounces of alcohol, pack it in a 
conical percolator, cover the surface with a disk of paper, and pour 
on six fluidounces of alcohol. When the liquid begins to drop from 
the percolator, close the lower orifice with a cork and cover the 
percolator closely, let it stand four days, then percolate with alcohol 
till exhausted and evaporate by means of a water-bath. 

Extractum Cannabis Indicoz. {Extract of Hemj).) U. S. P. 

Take of Indian hemp, in moderately fine powder §xij- 

Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the hemp with six fluidounces of alcohol, pack it in a 
conical percolator, cover the surface with a disk of paper, and pour 



662 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

on six fluidounces of alcohol. When the liquid begins to drop from 
the percolator, close the lower orifice with a cork, and, having 
closely covered the percolator, to prevent the evaporation, set it 
aside in a moderately warm place for four days. Then, having 
removed the cork, gradually pour alcohol upon the surface until 
two pints of tincture have been obtained, or until the hemp is ex- 
hausted. Lastly, by means of a water-bath, evaporate to a proper 
consistence. 

THIRD GROUP. 

Extraction Golocynthidis Alcoholicum, U. S. P. 

Take of Colocynth, forty-eight troyounces. 

Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Dry the colocynth, and, having removed the seeds and reduced it 
to a coarse powder by grinding or bruising, macerate it in eight 
pints of diluted alcohol for four days, with occasional stirring; then 
express strongly, and strain through flannel. Pack the residue, 
previously broken up with the hands, firmly in a cylindrical per- 
colator, cover it with the strainer, and pour diluted alcohol upon it 
until the tincture and expressed liquid, taken together, measure 
sixteen pints. Mix the tincture with the expressed liquid, and, 
having recovered from the mixture ten pints of alcohol by distilla- 
tion, evaporate the residue to dryness by means of a water-bath. 
Lastly, reduce the dry mass to powder, and keep it in a well-stopped 
bottle. 

The extract obtained by this process weighs about seven troy- 
ounces. 

Extractum Dulcamarm, IT. S. P. 

Take of Bittersweet, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the bittersweet with four fluidounces of diluted alcohol, 
pack it in a conical percolator and pour diluted alcohol gradually 
upon it until the tincture passes but slightly imbued with the pro- 
perties of the bittersweet. Distil off the alcohol from the tincture 
until reduced to one-half; then strain, and by means of a water- 
bath evaporate to the proper consistence. 

Extractum Senegoe, U". S. P. 

Prepare from seneka in moderately fine powder by the above 
process, omitting to strain the liquid when reduced to one-half. 

Extractum Jalapce. (Extract of Jalap.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Jalap, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Alcohol, four pints. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the powder, previously mixed with three fluidounces 
of alcohol, into a conical percolator, and gradually pour upon it the 
remainder of the alcohol. When the liquid ceases to pass, pour 
upon the residue sufficient water to keep its surface covered, until 
four pints of tincture have passed. Set this aside, and continue 



FORMULAS FOR THE EXTRACTS. 663 

the percolation until six pints of infusion have been obtained. 
Distil off the alcohol from the tincture, and evaporate the infusion 
until the liquids respectively have been brought to the consistence 
of thin honey; then mix them and evaporate to the proper con- 
sistence. 

By the same process prepare — 

Extraction Cinchona,* U. S. P. 
From 3'ellow cinchona, in fine powder. 

Extractum Podophylli, U. S. P. 
From May apple, in moderately line powder. 



Extractum Hellebori, U. S. P. 

Take of Black hellebore, recently dried and in fine powder, twelve troy- 
ounces. 
Alcohol, a pint. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Introduce the powder, previously mixed with one-third of the alco- 
hol, into a conical percolator, and pour upon it the remainder of 
the alcohol. "When the liquid has all been absorbed by the powder, 
pour on diluted alcohol until a pint of tincture has been obtained. 
Set this aside in a warm place, and allow it to evaporate spontane- 
ously until reduced to three fluidounces. Continue the percolation 
with diluted alcohol until two pints more of the tincture have 
passed or until the powder is exhausted ; then evaporate, by means 
of a water-bath, at a temperature not exceeding 160°, to the con- 
sistence of syrup. To this add the three fluidounces of tincture first 
obtained, and continue the evaporation, at a temperature not ex- 
ceeding 120°, until the whole is reduced to the proper consistence. 

Extractum Rhei. {Extract of Rhubarb.) U. S. P. 

Extractum Rhei, Phar. 1850. 

Take of Rhubarb, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Alcohol, a pint. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with four fluidounces of the alcohol, pack it 
in a conical percolator, and gradually pour upon it, first the remain- 
der of the alcohol, and afterwards diluted alcohol, until twelve 
fluidounces of tincture have been obtained. Set this aside in a 
warm place, and allow it to evaporate spontaneously until reduced 
to six fluidounces. Continue the percolation with diluted alcohol 
until the tincture passes nearly tasteless. Evaporate this in a por- 
celain vessel, by means of a water-bath, at a temperature not ex- 
ceeding 160°, to the consistence of syrup. With this mix the 
tincture first obtained, and continue the evaporation until the mix- 
ture is reduced to the proper consistence. 

* See Extractum Calisayicura. 



664 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

FOURTH GROUP. 

Extractum Gentiance, U. S. P. 

Take of Gentian, in moderately coarse powder, twelve troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the gentian with four fluidounces of water, pack it in a 
conical percolator, and gradually pour water upon it until the 
infusion passes but slightly impregnated with the properties of the 
gentian. Boil the liquid to three-fourths of its bulk ; then strain, 
and by means of a water-bath evaporate to the proper consistence. 

By the same process prepare — 

Extractum Quassia? , U. S. P. 
From Quassia, in moderately fine powder. 

Extractum Juglandis, U. S. P. 
From Butternut (bark), in moderately coarse powder. 



Extractum Kramerice. (Extract of Rhatany.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Rhatany, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with four fluidounces of water, pack it in a 
conical percolator, and gradually pour water upon it until the infu- 
sion passes but slightly impregnated with the astringent property 
of the rhatany. Heat the liquid to the boiling point, strain, and, 
by means of a water-bath, at a temperature not exceeding 160°, 
evaporate to the proper consistence. 

Extractum Hmmatoxyli. (Extract of Logwood.) U. S. P. 

Take of Logwood, rasped, twelve troyounces. 
Water, eight pints. 

Boil down to four pints, and strain the decoction while hot, then 
evaporate to dryness. 

Extractum Opii. (Extract of Opium.) U. S. P. 

Take of Opium, twelve troyounces. 
Water, five pints. 

Cut the opium into small pieces, macerate it for twenty-four 
hours in a pint of the water, and reduce it to a soft mass by tritu- 
ration. Express the liquid, and treat the residue with each of the 
four remaining pints of water successively in the same manner. 
Having mixed the liquids, filter the mixture, and evaporate by 
means of a water-bath to the proper consistence. 



unofficinal extracts. 665 

Unclassified. 

Extraction Taraxaci* IT. S. P. 

Take of Dandelion, gathered in September, sixty troyounces. 

Slice the dandelion, and bruise it in a stone mortar, sprinkling 
on it a little water, until reduced to a pulp. Then express and 
strain the juice, and evaporate it in a vacuum, or in a shallow dish 
over a water-bath, to the proper consistence. 

Extraction Colchici Aceticum,'U.S.'P. (Acetic Extract of Cole hi urn.) 

Take of Colchicum root, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Acetic acid, four fluidounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

To the acetic acid add a pint of water, and mix the resulting 
liquid with the colchicum root. Transfer the mixture to a conical 
glass percolator, and pour water gradually upon it until the liquid 
passes with little or no taste. Lastly evaporate the liquid, in a por- 
celain vesssel, to the proper consistence. 

Extr actum Colocynthidis Composition. (Comp. Ext. ofColoeynth) IT. S. P. 

Take of Alcoholic extract of colocynth, in fine powder, three troyounces 
and a half. 
Purified aloes, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Resin of scammony, in fine powder, three troyounces. 
Cardamom, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Soap, in fine powder, three troyounces. 

Mix the powders thoroughly, and keep the mixture in a well- 
stopped bottle. 

Unofficial Extracts. 

Of the extracts not recognized in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, de- 
scribed in former editions of this work, several have been intro- 
duced into the last edition of our national standard; without 
wishing to add unnecessarily to the numerous preparations already 
introduced, the following are deemed of sufficient importance to 
claim the attention of the student and practitioner: — 

Calisaya Extract (Ellis). — Is made by boiling coarsely-powdered 
Calisaya bark in successive portions of water acidulated with mu- 
riatic acid, precipitating the decoction with hydrate of lime, digesting 
the precipitate in hot alcohol till all taste is exhausted, and then 
evaporating the alcohol so as to leave an extract. The old-fashioned 
precipitated extract of bark was nearly identical with this, which 
is only objectionable on the score of expense. 

It contains all the quinia and cinchonia contained in the bark, 
besides the amorphous quinia, or chinoidine, and is an admirable sub- 
stitute for the celebrated "WetheriU's extract," formerly much in 
vogue. Its dose is from 2 to 5 grs. — Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xx. p. 15. 

* See Fluid Extract of Taraxacum for process for preserving the root for expression 
and evaporation. 



666 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 

Chinoidine is the name given to an insoluble residuary extractive 
principle obtained in the manufacture of quinia, which is described 
under the head of Vegetable Alkalies. 

JExtractum Lobelice Aceticum. — To prepare this, the powdered seeds 
of lobelia are macerated, and then displaced with diluted alcohol, 
to the first portion of which has been added a small portion of 
acetic acid. This liquid is then to be evaporated to the consistence 
of an extract, which will be about one-eighth the quantity of the 
seed employed. (Am. Jburn. Pharm., vol. xiv. p. 108.) Dose, from 2 
to 3 grs. The object of the use of the acetic acid is to form a 
soluble acetate of lobelina, less readily decomposable by heat than 
the native salt. 

Extract of Lupulin. — Take of lupulin half a troyounce, alcohol 
half a pint. Mix in a percolator and allow it to stand an hour, 
then displace with alcohol until two pints are obtained, or the whole 
strength extracted ; pour this into a shallow dish in a warm place, 
and allow it to evaporate spontaneously to the consistence of an 
extract; 5j of lupulin yields about 9ij of the extract, which is pro- 
posed as a substitute for the powder when prescribed in the pilular 
form. The dose is from 3 to 6 grains; it is recommended by its 
utility as a convenient and adhesive excipient for other substances. 
The reputation lupulin has obtained as an antaphrodisiac in irrita- 
ble conditions of the gential organs, calls for convenient prepara- 
tions by which the physician is enabled to make choice of the 
several forms of extemporaneous prescription. The new officinal 
fiuid extract seems less eligible for most purposes than a solid ex- 
tract such as this, proposed some years since by my late pupil, W. 
"W. D. Livermore. The empirical preparation prescribed under the 
name of "lupulin" by the Eclectics, is probably nearly identical 
with this. 

JExtractum Cimicifugaz. — This extract is made by evaporating 
separately a tincture prepared with alcohol of 95 per cent, and one 
made with diluted alcohol, until they reach a syrupy consistence, 
then mixing these and finishing the evaporation over a water-bath, 
with constant stirring. 

This process is liable, in the case of cimicifuga, which is a very 
resinous root, to a serious objection. Even after the extract has 
been completed, a partial separation of the resinous ingredient is 
liable to occur, producing great variations in quality between dif- 
ferent portions of the same lot of extract. Prof. J. E. Moore, of 
Baltimore, recommends that the tincture made with strong alcohol 
should be first evaporated to dryness, powdered, and incorporated 
with the other portion just before it is removed from the fire. The 
dose of this extract is 5 grains; it represents all the constituents 
of the root more thoroughly than the resinoid cimicifugin, and is 
worthy a trial in the anomalous cases of nervous disorder which so 
often tax the resources of the physician. Much that is sold is pre- 
pared from the root after the separation of the cimicifugin. 

JExtractum Pareiraz is prepared from sliced pareira brava, by de- 
coction with water, straining, and evaporating, A decoction is more 



UNOFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 667 

frequently prescribed ; but this extract allows the practitioner a 
choice of the pilular form, in which combinations with various other 
remedies may be conveniently prescribed. Dose, from 10 to 30 grs. 

Extractum TJvce Ursi. — The London College directs the prepara- 
tion of this, also, by maceration and decoction with water. Its dose 
is the same as the foregoing, and they are both used as tonics and 
diuretics in chronic urinary disorders. 

Ergotine. — Under this name an extract of ergot is sold in the 
shops, for which the following is the formula of M. Bonjean: — 

Exhaust powdered ergot by displacement with cold water, heat 
the solution in a water-bath, and filter ; evaporate to the consistence 
of syrup, and add rectified spirit to throw down the gummy matter; 
when settled, decant the clear liquid, and evaporate by water-bath. 
One ounce of ergot yields about 70 grains. It is said to possess the 
haemostatic without the toxic effects of ergot. Dose, from 4 to 10 grs. 

The ergotine of Wiggers consists chiefly of resinous principles, 
and is insoluble in water. 

The extracts of lettuce, poppy-heads, and hops are very weak narcotic 
extracts, occasionally prescribed, but less esteemed than lactucarium, 
opium, and lupuline, which are the more efficient products of their 
respective plants. 

Extractum glycyrrhizoe is the name given in the list of the Phar- 
macopoeia to the common drug known as liquorice, imported from 
Italy and Spain. Until recently this was the only extract of 
liquorice used ; our manufacturers now make a true and proper ex- 
tract, which is made in either of two ways, as follows : — 

1st Process. — Take of liquorice root, bruised, any convenient 
quantity, macerate in water, with the application of heat, until ex- 
hausted ; strain, and evaporate to the consistence of an extract. 

2d Process. — Take of liquorice (impure extract) any convenient 
quantity, lay the pieces of liquorice in a large displacer, or a barrel, 
in layers alternating with straw ; macerate, and then percolate the 
mass with cold water, and evaporate the clear liquid that runs off. 
The pieces of liquorice will be found to have lost their saccharine 
matter, glycyrrhizin, although retaining their shape as before. 
This is oificinal in some European Pharmacopoeias, under the name 
of Extractum s. succus liquoritse depur, and is valued particularly 
on account of its perfect solubility in water. A large proportion 
of glycyrrhizin is left behind in a modified state, and may be gained 
by exhausting the residue with a very dilute ammonia, which ren- 
ders it soluble. 

The extract has a yellow color, becoming brown by age, and as 
made by the first process has the taste of the root, and is deli- 
quescent, so as to require to be kept in jars. One part of powdered 
liquorice root to sixteen of the extract will render it firm enough to 
keep in sticks. Tilclen's extract of liquorice is made into sticks of 
a yellowish-brown color by admixture with gum Arabic ; its taste 
resembles the root more decidedly than that of black liquorice. 



i 



668 ON EVAPORATION AND THE EXTRACTS. 



Physical Properties. 

The physical properties of extracts vary, according to their composi- 
tion, age, and the circumstances in which they are kept. 

The narcotic extracts of the first class, as vended by the manu- 
facturers, are apt to be too soft for convenient use in the form of 
pills, and are disposed to deliquesce. This want of a firm consist- 
ence, which results from a disposition to preserve the more volatile 
ingredients from loss in the final concentration, causes no inconve- 
nience when the extract is used with a considerable proportion of 
dry or hard ingredients. It may be obviated by combining with 
them powdered liquorice root or marsh mallow, when the addi- 
tional bulk is no objection. The alcoholic and hydro-alcoholic ex- 
tracts are seldom liable to this objection ; they harden on exposure 
to the air, and when old are sometimes inconveniently dry. 

The extracts of jalap and podophyllum are apt to become tough 
and unmanageable, so as to resist the action of the pestle either by 
trituration or contusion. Extract of jalap is ordered, in compound 
cathartic pills, in the form of powder, and this is in some respects 
its best form for use ; it is conveniently kept in bottles, as other 
powders are, is readily weighed and incorporated with other sub- 
stances, and becomes plastic by the addition of moisture. Few 
manufacturers push the evaporation so far as to produce the extract 
dry enough for powdering ; but there is no difficulty in accom- 
plishing it in dry and frosty weather where steam is employed, and 
as a demand grows up for the article it will be more generally met 
with in the stores, although at a somewhat advanced price on the 
soft extract. Compound extract of colocynth is frequently brittle 
enough to powder, and is now directed in the Pharmacopoeia in this 
form. The addition of soap to its other ingredients prevents the 
liability to toughness, besides increasing its solubility. 

Extracts of rhatany and of logwood are always pulverulent, and 
when properly made are nearly soluble in water. 

The kind of jars usually employed for preserving extracts are 
figured in the chapter on the outfit of the physician's office. Those 
with covers or tops are most eligible. In furnishing a shop where 
a good many are needed, it is well to reserve the canopy-top jars 
exclusively for ointments, the flat tops for extracts, for the sake of 
distinction. Extracts should never be put in gallipots or tie-overs, 
except for temporary purposes. Besides the cover, which fits 
loosely on the jars, there should be a piece of bladder, or tinfoil, or 
paper saturated with oil, wax, paraffine, or soluble glass, or parch- 
ment paper which may be made after the common paper has been 
marked with the name and quantity of the extract. {See Lignin.) 
Upon covered jars these impervious coverings should be stretched 
over the open top before fitting on the lid. 

In the case of soft extracts, which have a tendency to mould, the 
occasional addition of a few drops of alcohol is found advantageous ; 
wide-mouth bottles, either with ground stoppers or corks, are pre- 
ferable to jars as affording a more'complete exclusion of the air, but 



PHYSICAL PROPERTIES. 669 

the smaller sized bottles, having too narrow mouths to admit a 
spatula of ordinary width, are inconvenient. 

The Uses of Extracts. — This class of preparations may be used 
either in the form of pill, solution, or mixture. They are chiefly 
prescribed in the pilular form, combined with other substances, and 
to this they are peculiarly adapted. One of the chief points in 
making pills is to increase or modify the effect in the highest de- 
gree, without a corresponding increase of bulk. Hence the utility 
of adding extracts to substances possessing no adhesiveness, choos- 
ing among them such as will most promote the therapeutic effect, 
while a plastic mass will be the result. Thus, in tonic pills, as of 
subcarbonate of iron or sulphate of quinia, extract of quassia or of 
gentian would be preferable to an inert substance like conserve of 
rose or mucilage. 

In dilute aqueous solutions, extracts are not generally preferable 
to the corresponding tincture or fluid extracts, but where the dose 
of the tincture would be large, the physician often avails himself 
of the extract in preference, as not containing alcoholic stimulus. 
Extracts are generally combined in mixtures containing sweet or 
viscid substances more than in solutions proper, although in cases 
where the quantity of the extract desired is large, and it is soluble 
in water, it may be employed to impart viscidity to a mixture, and 
to suspend insoluble substances without the necessity of using either 
gum or sugar. 

It will greatly facilitate the dispensing of extracts prescribed in 
ointments, to have a small jar containing the extract softened by 
working into it half its weight of glycerin, and using one and a 
half drachm of such an extract instead of one drachm. 

In triturating an extract* particularly a hard one, with viscid 
liquids, as syrup or mucilage, or with lard in making ointments, 
considerable difficulty is experienced in dissolving or diffusing it 
equally throughout the mixture ; to obviate this, it should be 
first softened with a few drops of water if aqueous, or alcohol if 
alcoholic, until it has about the consistence of thick honey or treacle, 
and then incorporated with the other ingredients. Frequently it 
will require a long and tedious trituration to accomplish the object 
thoroughly and effectually. 

The most effectual and unobjectionable method of softening ex- 
tracts for the purpose of incorporating them with other substances 
or making mixtures, is to place (if aqueous) a small quantity of 
water in the jar with the extract and place the jar in a close vessel 
of boiling water ; the combined effect of heat and moisture will 
produce the desired result quite rapidly. 

The aid of heat will greatly facilitate the softening of extracts, 
especially in making pill masses, which become dryer and more firm 
when rendered plastic by heat than when softened by a moist 
excipient. 



670 FLUIi> EXTRACTS AND OLEORESINS, 



CHAPTER XI. 

FLUID EXTRACTS AND OLEORESINS. 

The class Extracta fluida is found for the first time in the Phar- 
macopoeia in the edition of 1850. Most of those at that time made 
officinal had been used and were esteemed standard remedies for 
several years previously, though two of them (oleoresins) have 
never attained popularity. 

During the ten years immediately preceding the edition of 1860, 
the number of this class had greatly extended, and we have at 
present twenty-five officinal preparations under this head, besides 
several formerly classed with them, now named oleoresins. Of this 
number fifteen are alcoholic solutions, and may be defined as con- 
centrated tinctures, although some of them, as fluid extract of 
taraxacum, are preserved by a minimum of the alcoholic men- 
struum ; the other ten are concentrated syrups, some of which are 
less highly charged with the saccharine ingredient than would be 
necessary in the absence of alcohol, a sufficient proportion of which 
is retained in the solution to prevent decomposition. 

In making fluid extracts it is often impracticable to dissolve the 
large proportion of sugar necessary to prevent fermentation without 
rendering the fluid extract too thick to be conveniently poured from 
a bottle or spoon, and yet the form of syrup is especially adapted to 
those which are administered in large doses or are given chiefly to 
children. The Committee of Revision have shown great judgment 
in the framing of these formulas, and it is to be hoped that the offi- 
cinal fluid extracts will supersede those made by various manu- 
facturers according to their own arbitrary standards, and the precise 
composition of which has not been made public. 

The origiual idea of a fluid extract was to make it represent an 
equal portion of the drug, every troyounce weight of the material 
from which prepared being converted into a fluidounce of the fluid 
extract. The result of this, if carried out, would be to simplify the 
recollection of the doses of fluid extracts by stating the dose in each 
case to be the same as of the drug. This rule was departed from, 
even in the Pharmacopoeia of 1850, and the unofficinal formulas 
published have in many instances been quite independent of any 
uniform rule of strength. 

Among the fluid extracts made officinal in 1860, there are only 
two which form exceptions to this rule, the fluid extracts of cin- 
chona and of wild cherry; in both these instances, good reasons 
existed for reducing the strength from the usual standard. 

Alcohol, from its eminently "useful qualities as a solvent for active 
vegetable principles, and from its perfect adaptability to percola- 



SYLLABUS OF OFFICINAL FLUID EXTRACTS. 



671 



tion, and the low temperature at which it evaporates, is invariably 
selected as the menstruum used in the process of extraction ; in the 
case of conium, ergot, and ipecacuanha, the first two of which con- 
tain volatile organic alkalies, while the last named owes its activity 
to a vegetable alkali not readily separable from associated inert 
principles, acetic or muriatic acid is added to bring the natural 
bases to the condition of soluble and more permanent acetates or 
chlorides. 

Within a few years past, the views expressed first by Mr. A. B. 
Taylor, regarding glycerin as an appropriate substance to be used 
to supply the place of part of the sugar used in some fluid extracts, 
have been amply confirmed, and its use greatly increased, even to 
adopting it as a partial menstruum for a number of this class of 
preparations. 

The officinal directions of the last edition of the Pharmacopoeia 
for preparing fluid extracts require, that, unless otherwise ordered, 
the powder be moistened with a specified quantity of menstruum 
and properly packed in a suitable percolator. The surface of the 
liquid is then to be covered with a disk of paper, and the re- 
maining portion of the sixteen fluidounces of menstruum is to be 
poured upon it. When the liquid begins to drop from the percola- 
tor, close the lower orifice with a cork, and, having closely covered 
the percolator to prevent evaporation, set it aside in a moderately 
warm place for four days. The cork is then to be removed, more 
menstruum is to be gradually poured on, and the percolation to be 
continued until twenty-four fluidounces have been obtained. Of 
these the first fourteen fluidounces are to be reserved, and the re- 
mainder, having been carefully evaporated to two fluidounces, is to 
be mixed with the reserved portion, and filtered through paper if 
necessary. 

Syllabus of Officinal Fluid Extracts. 

1st Group. — Concentrated tinctures with diluted alcohol. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extract, cimifugse fluid. 
" Valerianae " 
" veratriviridis fluid. 
" lupuliaa 
" cubebas 
" mezerei 
" sabina 


TIL xv to xx 
"n\xxx 
Tt^v to X 
TT\,V to X 

nixx 

rr\, ij to iv and for cerate 

External use in cerate 


Tonic nervous sedative. 
Tonic antispasmodic. 
Arterial sedative. 
Antaphrodisiac. 
Diuretic and stimulant. 
Alterative. 
Stimulant. 



REMARKS ON GROUP FIRST. 

The several articles here grouped are directed to be exhausted 
with stronger alcohol (.817 sp. gr.), their peculiar composition be- 
ing such that a menstruum of this strength most completely re- 
moves the active principles, and at the same time, the excess of 
menstruum is most easily removed without recourse to undue 
elevation of temperature; it will be noticed, that the present offi- 
cinal directions authorize only twenty-four fluidounces of percolate 



672 



FLUID EXTRACTS. 



to be obtained, and the first fourteen to be kept as a reserve, and 
not exposed to either heat or atmospheric influence, while the re- 
maing ten fluidounces are to be carefully evaporated to two fluid- 
ounces, which when added to the reserved tincture yield the required 
quantity. 

EXTRACTA FLUIDA. 
2d Group. — Concentrated tinctures with alcohol. 



Officinal name. 



Extract, buchu fluidum 

" serpentarise fluidum 

" zingiberis " 

" erigirontis canadensis fluidum 

" gelsemii fluidum 



Doses for 


adults. 


H\ XX 


Tr\.v to x 


Tr^v to xx 


v\ v to X 


n\, ij to v 



Medical properties. 



Diuretic and stimulant. 

Tonic, stimulant. 

Aromatic, stimulant, and carminative. 

Antihemorrhagic, tonic, and astring. 

Arterial sedative. 



REMARKS ON GROUP SECOND. 

These extracts are directed to be made with alcohol (.835 sp. gr.) 
and are to be made in accordance with the general directions al- 
ready given, there being no exceptions in this class ; the volatile 
oil and resin contained in each drug being readily removed by the 
menstruum directed. When prescribed in mixtures their resinous 
character must be remembered, and some vehicle selected, which will 
prevent the deposition of resin and separation of the volatile oil. 



3d Group. 



EXTRACTA FLUIDA, U. S. 
-Concentrated tinctures with glycerin and diluted alcohol. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extract, belladonnse radic. 


fluidum 


TT\,J t0 >j (1— 2min.) 


Narcotic. 


(< 


conii fructus 


C( 


Tt\, ij to iv 


" alterative. 


(« 


hyoscyami 


a 


n\, v to XV 


" laxative. 


" 


digitalis 


(( 


mJtoij 


Diuretic, arterial, sedative. 


<< 


colchici rad. 


tc 


r\ ij to vj 


Sedative and cathartic. 


tt 


" semi. 


(( 


ttl ii to vj 


a a a 


<« 


cinchonge 


(C 


TTL x to XXX 


Tonic and antiperiodic. 


(< 


cornus floridae 


a 


n^ x to xx 


" 


tt 


gentianse 


tt 


n| x to xxx 


n 


a 


chimaphilse 


a 


TTL X to XX 


" astringent, diuretic. 


tt 


uva ursi 


tt 


TT^ xx to lx 


a tt 


a 


pareiree brava 


c< 


n^ x to xx 


11 " diuretic. 


tt 


geranii 


tt 


m, x to xx 


Astringent. 


it 


kramerige 


it 


rr\, v to xx 


" 


it 


rubi 


a 


n\, v to x 


a 


a 


ergotse 


it 


tt\, xx to xxx 


Parturient and emmenagogue. 


tt 


gossypii 


a 


TT\ X tO XX 


" " " 


a 


dulcamarse 


a 


*33 to f 3 ! J 


Eeebly narcot. and diaphoretic. 


ti 


stillingise 


" 


rr\, xxx to f£J 


Alterative. 


it 


matico 


tt 


n\, xx to xxx 


Stimulant, aromatic. 


it 


glycyrrhizse rad. 


" 


*3J to fgss 


Demulcent. 


it 


senegse 


tt 


n^ x to xx 


Expectorant and emetic. 


a 


taraxaci 


«' 


f5J to f5ij 


Diuretic, tonic, and aperient. 


(< 


sarsaparillae 


tt 


f^ss to t5'V 


Alterative. 


<< 


" comp. 


ti 


fsjss to fgi 


" 


tt 


columbse 


a 


fgss to f£j 


Tonic. 


(< 


hydrastis 


" 


n\ iij to v 


a 


(( 


rhei 


a 


nx x to xx 


Cathartic and astringent. 


<( 


scillse 


n 


TTL v to xx 


Emetic, expect , and diuretic. 



FORMULAS FOR FLUID EXTRACTS, 



673 



REMARKS ON GROUP THIRD. 

This is by far the largest class of fluid extracts ; from being second 
in number in the last edition of this work, and regarded in the 
light of concentrated syrups, it has, by the introduction of glycerin, 
been changed to glycerinated tinctures, and rendered in many in- 
stances much more desirable, both in a pharmaceutic and thera- 
peutic point of view. The strength of cinchona extract, it will be 
observed, has now been made troyounce to fluidounce. The propor- 
tion of glycerin to the pint is four fluidounces, excepting in the case 
of the six last named on the list, in two of which, sarsaparilla and 
sarsaparilla compound, half a pint is contained, in the other four 
but two fluidounces being directed. The general alcoholic strength 
is the same, except in a few instances, which will be noticed in the 
working formulas appended. 

EXTRACTA FLUIDA, U. S. 

Unclassified. Principally glycerinated tinctures. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Extract, ipecacunnhue fluidum 
" pruni virginiaDse " 
" sennre " 
" spig^lioe " 
" " et sennse " 


TTL ij to xx 
fsjss to f 5j 
fgssto^j 
gij to gss 

f 3U to ^B 83 


Emetic, expectorant. 

Tonic, sedative, expectorant. 

Cathartic, 

Anthelmintic. 

" and purgative. 



REMARKS UPON THE UNCLASSIFED FLUID EXTRACTS. 

These vary in the quantities of glycerin directed, and the strengths 
of the alcohol employed. Thus, in the formulas for fluid extracts of 
ipecacuanha, primus virginianus, and spigelia, each has half a pint 
of glycerin, and ipecacuanha and primus each requires stronger 
alcohol, while extracts of senna and spigelia require alcohol .835. 

The extract of ipecacuanha made by this process has been found 
objectionably thick, and for this reason much objected to, while 
fluid extract of rhubarb is improved when compared with the semi- 
fluid extract of older editions of the Pharmacopoeia. 

Working Formulas for Officinal Fluid Extracts. 

(Alphabetically arranged.) 

Extractum Belladonna Radicis Fluidum. Fluid, Extract of Bella- 
donna Root. 

Take of Belladonna root, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troy ounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve fluidounces of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, 

and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the belladonna 

root with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 

general formula given in a former part of this chapter. Finish 

48 



674 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen 
fluidounces, add one iluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of 
the percolate before evaporation. 

Extractum Buchu Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Buchu, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the buchu with six fluidounces of alcohol, and proceed 
according to the general formula given for fluid extracts in a former 
part of this chapter. 

Extractum Calumbce Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Columbo, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, f^ij. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix fourteen fluidounces of alcohol with the glycerin, and, having 
moistened the powder with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed 
according to the general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the 
percolation with a menstruum consisting of two parts of alcohol 
and one part of water. 

Extractum Chimaphiloe Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Pipsissewa, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and 
five of water, and, having moistened the pipsissewa with half a 
pint of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula for 
fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one iluidounce of glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extractum Cimicifugce Fluidum^J . S. P. 

Take of Cimicifuga, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the cimicifuga with four fluidounces of the stronger 
alcohol, and proceed according to the general formula for fluid 
extracts. 

Extractum Cinchonas Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Yellow cinchona, in very fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the cinchona with 
five fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 



FORMULAS FOR OFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 675 

formula for fluid extracts. Continue the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, until two pints of percolate have heen obtained, and having 
reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of glycerin to the 
remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extractum Colchici Radicis Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Colchicura root, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four nuidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve nuidounces of alcohol, three nuidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the colchicum 
root with live nuidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 
general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with 
diluted alcohol, and having reserved fourteen nuidounces, add 
one fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 

Extractum Colchici Seminis Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Colchicum seed, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four liuidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve nuidounces of alcohol, three nuidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the colchicum 
seed with four nuidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 
general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with 
diluted alcohol, and having reserved fourteen nuidounces, add 
one fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 

Extractum Conii Fructus Fluidum. ■ (Fluid Extract of Conium Seed.) 

U. S. P. 

Take of Conium seed, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four nuidounces. 
Muriatic acid, one hundred and eighty grains. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three nuidounces of glycerin, and five 
nuidounces of water, and, having moistened the conium seed with 
four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add the muriatic 
acid and one fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate 
before evaporation. 

Extractum Cornus Florida* Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Dogwood, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 



676 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and Rye 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the dogwood with five 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extraction Cubebce Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Cubeb, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the cubeb with six fluidounces of stronger alcohol, and 
proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extractum Digitalis Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Digitalis, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four nuidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve fluidounces of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and having moistened the digitalis 
with half a pint of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce 
of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extractum Dulcamaras Eluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Bittersweet, in moderately coarse powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the bittersweet with 
six fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluid- 
ounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before eva- 
poration. 

Extractum Ergotcc Eluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Ergot, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Acetic acid, half a fluidounce. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the ergot with four 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add the acetic acid and one 
fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 



FORMULAS FOR OFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 677 

Extractum Erigerontis Canadensis Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Canada erigeron, in moderately coarse powder, sixteen troyounces. 
'Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the erigeron with half a pint of alcohol, and proceed 
according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extractum Gelsemii Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Yellow jasmine, in very fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the yellow jasmine with four fluidounces of alcohol, and 
proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extract Gentiance Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Gentian, in moderately coarse powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the gentian with four 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounceof glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extractum Geranii Eluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Geranium, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the geranium with four 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extraction Glycyrrhizaz Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Liquorice root, -in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
"Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and Ave 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the liquorice root with 
four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluid- 
ounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evapo- 
ration. 



678 FLUID EXTRACTS. 



Extraction G-ossipii Radicis Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Cotton root, in very fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and 
five fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the cotton root 
with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 
general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with 
diluted alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add the 
fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 

Extractum Hydrastis Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Hydrastis, in very fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, two fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the glycerin with fourteen fluidounces of alcohol, and, having 
moistened the hydrastis with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed 
according to the general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the 
percolation with a menstruum consisting of two parts of alcohol 
and one of water. 

Extractum Hyoscyami Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Hyoscyamus leaves, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve fluidounces of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the hyoscyamus 
with half a pint of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluid- 
ounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evapo- 
ration. 

Extractum Ipecacuanhas Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Ipecacuanha, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, half a pint. 
Stronger alcohol, a pint and a half. 
Water, twelve fluidounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the stronger alcohol and water, and, having moistened the 
ipecacuanha with six fluidounces of the mixture, pack it firmly in 
a conical percolator, and pour upon it twelve fluidounces of the 
mixture. When the liquid begins to drop from the percolator, close 
the lower orifice with a cork, and, having closely covered the per- 
colator, set it aside for four days, then remove the cork, and gradu- 
ally pour on the remainder of the mixture, and finally diluted 



FORMULAS FOR OFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 679 

alcohol, until two pints of tincture have slowly passed. Reserve 
the first six ounces, and mix the remainder of the tincture with the 
glycerin, and evaporate at a temperature not exceeding 160°, till 
it shall measure ten fluidounces. Finally mix them. 

Extraetum Kramerice Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Khatany, in fine powder, sixteen troyounees. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the rhatany with four 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, 
and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of 
glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extraetum Lupulince Fluidum, 

Take of Lupulin, sixteen troyounees. 

Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the lupulin with six fluidounces of stronger alcohol, and 
proceed according to the directions given in the general formula 
for fluid extracts. 

Extraetum Matico Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Matico, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounees. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve fluidounces of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the matico with 
half a pint of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, 
and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce to the 
remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extraetum Mezerei Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Mezereon, in moderately coarse powder, sixteen troyounees. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the mezereon with six fluidounces of stronger alcohol, 
and proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extraetum Pareiraz Fluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Pareira brava, in fine powder, sixteen troyounees. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the pareira brava with 



680 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluid- 
ounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evapora- 
tion. 

Extraction Pruni Virginiance Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Wild-cherry bark, in fine powder, sixteen troyoimces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Water, half a pint. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the glycerin and water, and, having moistened the wild 
cherry with half a pint of the mixture, allow it to macerate in a 
covered vessel for four days ; then pack it in a conical glass per- 
colator, and pour on the remainder of the mixture. When this 
has disappeared from the surface, gradually pour on stronger alcohol 
until twelve fluidounces have been obtained, and set this portion 
aside. Continue the percolation with stronger alcohol until twenty 
fluidounces more have been obtained ; evaporate to four fluidounces 
and filter through paper, rinsing the filter with a small portion 
of stronger alcohol, so as to preserve the measure of four fluidounces. 
Lastly mix this with the reserved portion and keep in a well- 
stopped bottle. 

Extraction Rlxei Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Khubarb, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, two fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the glycerin with fourteen fluidounces of alcohol, and, having 
moistened the rhubarb with four fluidounces of the mixture, pro- 
ceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. Finish 
the percolation with a mixture of two parts of alcohol and one of 
water. 

Extractum Rubi Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Blackberry, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the powdered bark 
with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 
general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with di- 
luted alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one 
fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 

Extractum Sabince Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Savine, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 



FORMULAS FOR OFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 681 

Moisten the savine with half a pint of stronger alcohol, and pro- 
ceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extractum Sarsaparilla Eluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Sarsaparilla, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, half a pint. 
Water, 
Alcohol, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol with four fluidounces each of glycerin 
and water, and, having moistened the sarsaparilla with four fluid- 
ounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Continue the percolation with diluted alcohol 
until twenty-six fluidounces have been obtained. Reserve the first 
ten fluidounces, and, having added four fluidounces of glycerin to 
the remainder of the percolate, carefully evaporate to six fluid- 
ounces, and mix with the reserved portion. 

Extractum Sarsaparilla^ Fhtidum Composition, U. S. P. 

Extractum Sarsaparillse Fluidum, Pharin. 1850. 
Take of Sarsaparilla, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Liquorice root, in moderately fine powder, 
Sassafras, in moderately fine powder, each, two troyounces. 
Mezereon, in moderately fine powder, three hundred and sixty 

grains. 
Glycerin, half a pint. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol with four fluidounces each of glycerin 
and water, and, having moistened with six fluidounces of the 
mixture the powders previously well mixed, proceed according to 
the general formula for fluid extracts. Continue the percolation 
with diluted alcohol until two pints have been obtained. Reserve 
the first twelve fluidounces, and, having added four fluidounces to 
the remainder of the percolate, carefully evaporate to six fluid- 
ounces and mix with the reserved portion. 

Extractum Scillce Eluidum, U. S. P. 

Take of Squill, in moderately coarse powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, two fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the glycerin with fourteen fluidounces of alcohol, and, having 
moistened the squill with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed 
according to the general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the 
percolation with a menstruum consisting of two parts of alcohol 
and one part of water. 

Extractum Senegce Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Seneka, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
"Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 



682 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fhiidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the seneka with four 
fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula 
for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

Extraction Sennce Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Senna, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, half a pint. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol with four fluidounces each of glycerin 
and water, and, having moistened the senna with half a pint of the 
mixture, proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 
Continue the percolation with diluted alcohol until twenty-six 
fluidounces have been obtained. Reserve the first ten fluidounces, 
and, having added four fluidounces of glycerin to the remainder of 
the percolate, carefully evaporate to six fluidounces and mix with 
the reserved portion. 

Extraction Serpentarice Eluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Serpentaria, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the serpentaria with four fluidounces of alcohol, and pro- 
ceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extraction Spigelian Eluidwn, IT. S. P. 

Take of Spigelia, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, half a pint. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol with four fluidounces each of glycerin 
and water, and, having moistened the spigelia with four fluidounces 
of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula for fluid 
extracts. Continue the percolation with diluted alcohol until 
twenty-six fluidounces, have been obtained. Reserve the first ten 
fluidounces and, having added four fluidounces of glycerin to the 
remainder of the percolate, carefully evaporate to six fluidounces, 
and mix with the reserved portion. 

Extr actum Spigelian et Sennaz Fluidum. .{Fluid Extract of Spigelia 
and Senna.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract of spigelia, ten fluidounces. 
Fluid extract of senna, six fluidounces. 
Oil of anise, 
Oil of caraway, each, twenty minims. 

Mix the fluid extracts, and dissolve the oils in the mixture. 



FORMULAS FOR OFFICINAL EXTRACTS. 683 

Extractum Stillingia^ Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of Stillingia, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four lluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix twelve fluidounces of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, 
and one fluidounce of water, and, having moistened the stillingia 
with four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the 
general formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with 
diluted alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one 
fluidounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before 
evaporation. 

Extractum Taraxaci Fluidurn, U. S. P. 

Take of Dandelion, in moderatery fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of water, and, having moistened the dandelion with 
four fluidounces of the mixture, proceed according to the general 
formula for fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted 
alcohol, and, having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluid- 
ounce of glycerin to the remainder of the percolate before evapora- 
tion. 

Extemporaneous Process for the above. (Unofficinal.) 

Take of Extract of dandelion Four troyounces. 

Alcohol One fluidounce. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Triturate the extract with the water and the alcohol, and apply 
a gentle heat till it is dissolved, taking care that the product mea- 
sures just half a pint. 

This process yields a liquid which is substantially the same in 
physical and medical properties with the officinal. The usual dose 
is a teaspoonful. 



TT 



Extractum Uvai Ursi Fluidunu U. S. P. 



Take of Uva ursi, in moderately fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Glycerin, four fluidounces. 
Alcohol, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix half a pint of alcohol, three fluidounces of glycerin, and five 
fluidounces of w T ater, and, having moistened the uva ursi with half 
a pint of the mixture, proceed according to the general formula for 
fluid extracts. Finish the percolation with diluted alcohol, and, 
having reserved fourteen fluidounces, add one fluidounce of glycerin 
to the remainder of the percolate before evaporation. 

* See Succus. Taraxaci Paratus. 



684 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

Extraction Valeriana? Fluidum, II. S. P. 

Take of Valerian, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the valerian with five fluidounces of stronger alcohol, 
and proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extraction Veratri Viridis Fluidum, IT. S. P. 

Take of American hellebore, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Stronger alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the hellebore with five fluidounces of stronger alcohol, 
and proceed according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Extraction Zingiberis Fluidurn, II. S. P. 

Take of Ginger, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the ginger with four fluidounces of alcohol, and proceed 
according to the general formula for fluid extracts. 

Unofficinal Fluid Extracts. 

ParrisKs Compound Fluid Extract of Buchu. 

Take of Buchu, in coarse powder .... Twelve troyounces. 

Alcohol . . Three pints. 

Water . . Six pints, or sufficient. 

Treat the leaves by maceration and displacement, first with a 
portion of the alcohol, and then with the remainder mixed with 
the water ; evaporate the resulting liquid by a gentle heat to three 
pints, and to this add — 

Sugar ... Two and a-half pounds. 

Continue the heat till it is dissolved, and, after removing from 
the fire, add — 

Oil of cubebs,* 

Oil of juniper, of each One fluidrachm. 

Spirit of nitric ether ...... Twelve fluidounces. 

previously mixed ; stir the whole together. 

It will be perceived that this preparation differs from the officinal 
fluid extract, in containing sugar sufficient to impart sweetness to 
the taste, and the oils of cubebs and juniper and the spirit of nitric 
ether, which are not only useful as therapeutic agents in the ma- 
jority of cases in which cubebs would be used, but act as antisep- 
tics, and would render the preparation permanent without the 
presence of alcohol or sugar. 

It has been found useful, being well adapted, by its composition, 
to chronic maladies of the urino-genital organs, appearing to act 
topically in its passage through them. The dose is a fluidrachm 
three or four times daily. 

* Oleoresin of cubebs is much more efficient, and would much improve the remedy 
if substituted for it. 



FORMULAS FOR FLUID EXTRACTS. 685 

Fluid Extract of Hydrangea. (Dr. S. W. Butler.) 

Take of Boot of hydrangea arborescens . . Sixteen troyounces. 

Water Six pints, or sufficient. 

Boil the root in successive portions of water, mix them, and 
evaporate to half a pint ; mix this with — 

Honey Two pints. 

Evaporate to two pints. In the summer season push the evapo- 
ration somewhat farther, and add brandy, half a pint. 

The dose is a teaspoonful twice or three times a day. 

I have prepared fluid extract of hydrangea for some years, during 
which time I have dispensed it, under the direction of several prac- 
titioners, to numerous patients (in irritable conditions of the ure- 
thra) with satisfactory results ; its value as a remedy in gravel and 
stone is well established. 

The plant is abundant in many localities ; I have gathered it on 
the west banks of the Schuylkill, six to eight miles above Phila- 
delphia. 

Fluid Extract of Rhubarb and Senna. (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Senna, in coarse powder .... Twelve troyounces. 

Ehubarb do. do Four troj-ounces. 

Bicarbonate of potassium .... Half a troyounce. 

Sugar Eight troyounces. 

Tincture of ginger A rluidounce. 

Oil of cloves Eight minims. 

" aniseed Sixteen minims. 

Water and alcohol, of each .... A sufficient quantity. 

Mix the senna and rhubarb by grinding them together, pour 
upon them two pints of diluted alcohol, macerate twenty-four 
hours, and introduce the mixture into a percolator, furnished below 
with a stopcock or cork, to regulate the flow. A mixture of one 
part of alcohol and three of water should now be poured on above, 
so as to keep up a constant, but slow displacement of the absorbed 
menstruum, until one gallon of tincture has passed. Evaporate 
this in a water-bath to eleven fluidounces ; dissolve in it the sugar 
and bicarbonate of potassium, and after straining, add the tincture 
of ginger, holding the oils in solution, and mix ; when done, the 
whole should measure a pint. The object in adding the alkaline 
carbonate in this fluid extract is to prevent the griping which is 
apt to result from the use of the senna. The aromatics contribute 
to the same end. Dose, f5j to fjss. 

Extractum Jalapce Fluidum. (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Jalap of good quality Sixteen troyounces. 

Sugar Eight troyounces. ■ 

Carbonate of potassium Half a troyounce. 

Alcohol, 

Water, of each A sufficient quantity. 

Reduce the jalap to coarse powder, pour on it one pint of a mix- 
ture of two parts alcohol and one water, and allow it to stand 



686 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

twenty-four hours. Then introduce it into a percolator, and pour 
ordinary diluted alcohol slowly on until half a gallon of liquid has 
passed. Evaporate this in a water-bath, or still, till reduced to 
one-half, then add the sugar and carbonate of potassium, and evapo- 
rate till reduced to twelve fluidounces. Put the liquid thus ob- 
tained, while yet warm, in a pint bottle, and acid four fluidounces 
of alcohol, and mix by agitation. 

The alkali forms a resinous soap with the jalap resin, greatly 
increasing its solubility in water, and at the same time renders the 
preparation less griping. 

The object of the sugar is also to aid in the retention of the resi- 
nous matter in a fluid condition, as well as to mask the taste of the 
jalap. The dose will vary from fifteen minims to a fluidrachm, ac- 
cording to the effect desired. By means of this preparation, the 
physician may prescribe jalap in mixtures with great facility, and 
avoid the large proportion of alcohol unavoidable when he resorts 
to the officinal tincture. 

Succus Taraxaci Paratus. {Preserved Taraxacum Juice.) (Prof. 

Procter.) 

Take of Fresh dandelion root . . . Twenty pounds (avoirdupois). 
Alcohol (.835°) Four pints. 

Slice the roots transversely in short sections, and, by means of a 
mill or mortar and pestle, reduce them to a pulpy mass ; then add 
the alcohol, and mix them thoroughly. The mixture, thus far pre- 
pared at the season when the root is proper for collection, may be 
set aside in suitable vessels (stoneware jars are appropriate), and 
extracted as the preparation is needed through the other seasons. 
After having stood a week, or until a convenient time, the pulpy 
mass is subjected to powerful pressure, until as much as possible of 
the fluid is removed. This is then filtered and bottled for use. It 
is necessary that sufficient time should elapse after the pulp is set 
aside for the alcohol to penetrate the fibrous particles and com- 
mingle with the natural juices, as well as for the woody structure 
of the root to lose its elasticity, that it may yield the juice more 
completely on pressure. When the pulp has stood six months in 
this, it yields the juice with great readiness, and is possessed of the 
sensible properties of the dandelion in a marked degree. When 
twenty pounds (avoirdupois) of the root are thus treated after 
standing several months, the practical result is about six pints 
of fluid with an ordinary screw press. This yield will vary in 
amount with the condition of the root when collected, and the 
length of time it is exposed afterwards, as well as the power of the 
press used. Should the alcohol in this preparation be contraindi- 
cated, it might be partially removed by exposure in a water-bath 
until the juice is reduced to five-sixths of its bulk; then for every 
pint of the residue, eight officinal ounces of sugar may be dissolved 
in it. 



FLUID EXTRACT OF WILD CHERRY BARK. 687 

Fluid Extract of Galls. 

Take of Galls, in coarse powder ^viij. 

Alcohol Sufficient. 

Exhaust by percolation, and evaporate to a pint. 
This preparation is used by dentists in Philadelphia as a powerful 
astringent application. 

Fluid Extract of Lobelia. (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Lobelia (the plant), finely bruised . . . Eight troyounces. 

Acetic acid One fluidounce. 

Diluted alcohol .... Three pints. 

Alcohol Six fluidounces. 

Macerate the lobelia in a pint and a half of the diluted alcohol, 
previously mixed with the acetic acid, for twenty -four hours ; in- 
troduce the mixture into an earthen displacer ; pour on slowly the 
remainder of the diluted alcohol, and afterwards water, until three 
pints of tincture are obtained ; evaporate this in a water-bath to ten 
fluidounces ; strain ; add the alcohol, and when mixed, filter through 
paper. Each teaspoonful of this preparation is equal to half a fluid- 
ounce of the tincture. The dose would vary from five drops, as a 
narcotic and expectorant, to twenty or thirty as an emetic. 

Ferr cited Fluid Extract of Wild Cherry Bark. (W. E. Warner.) 

Take of Pruni Virginians contus ,?xij. 

. Amygdalae dulc ,?ij. 

Ferri oxyd. hydrat 3ss. 

Sacchari albi o x ij- 

Ferri citratis 3j -f- gr. xcvi. 

Alcoholis, 

Aquse, aa q. s. 

First exhaust the bark of its tonic principles with the alcoholic 
menstruum, and evaporate the resulting alcoholic tincture carefully 
to expel the alcohol; then mix the residue with six ounces of water, 
and add the hydrated sesquioxide of iron ; allow it to macerate for 
six hours, occasionally agitating, and filter into a bottle containing 
an emulsion, composed of the two ounces of sweet almonds in six 
ounces of water. When the reaction has ceased between the 
emulsin and the amygdalin, again filter and add the sugar, and 
finally add 576 grains of citrate of iron, previously dissolved in 
water; then dilute to make the whole fluid extract measure twenty- 
four fluidounces. 

In this formula hydrated oxide of iron is directed to be added to 
the extract for the purpose of removing the tannin, which would 
blacken on the addition of the iron salt. When effectual in ac- 
complishing the object, it proves a useful modification of this 
remedy, the astringenc3 T of which is sometimes an objection to its 
use. Iron salt is often indicated when wild cherry would be 
desirable, and the selection in this formula would seem to be a 



i 



688 FLUID EXTRACTS. 

good one, though the quantity, three grains to the ounce, would 
seem unnecessarily large. The dose would be a fluidrachm three 
times a day. 

Fluid Extract of Sanguinaria. (Samuel Campbell.) 

Take of Sanguinaria canadensis Eight troyounces. 

Acetic acid, No. 8 Two troyounces. 

Water Ten troyounces. 

Sugar Eight troyounces. 

Diluted alcohol, of each A sufficient quantity. 

Reduce the root to a coarse powder, then incorporate it with the 
acetic acid, previously mixed with the water. After allowing it to 
macerate for forty-eight hours, transfer to a glass percolator, and 
exhaust by means of diluted alcohol. By means of a water-bath 
evaporate the tincture to twelve fluidounces, then add the sugar, 
and, when dissolved, strain. 

The preparation is of a deep red color, with an intensely acrid 
taste. Each fluidrachm represents thirty grains of the root. 

Extractum Anthemidis Fluidum. (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Chamomile flowers Eight troyounces. 

Sugar Eight troyounces. 

Alcohol, 

Diluted alcohol, of each A sufficient quantity. 

Bruise the chamomile thoroughly, pour on it a pint of alcohol, 
and macerate for twenty-four hours, pack it moderately tight in a 
percolator, and pour on slowly diluted alcohol, until a pint of liquid 
has passed ; then change the recipient, and continue the process 
until two pints more of tincture are obtained. Evaporate the first 
tincture by a gentle heat, or spontaneously, to six fluidounces, and 
the other in a water-bath to four fluidounces, mix the liquids, add 
the sugar to them, dissolve by a gentle heat, and finally add alcohol 
until the whole measures a pint. 

The dose of this preparation is from one to two teaspoonfuls as 
an anti-periodic, or half a teaspoonful as a tonic; a fluidrachm re- 
presents thirty grains of chamomile flowers. 

Fluid Extract of SumbuL (Musk Boot) (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Musk-root Four troyounces. 

Ether Pour fluidounces. 

Alcohol, 

Water, each Sufficient. 

Bruise the root, moistened with a little alcohol, until reduced to 
a coarse powder. Mix the ether with twice its volume of alcohol, 
pour it on the musk-root, macerate in a covered vessel for 24 hours, 
and introduce into a suitable percolator; displace the absorbed tinc- 
ture slowly by alcohol until twelve fluidounces are obtained, when 
the process is to be continued with a mixture of equal parts of al- 
cohol and water, until a pint has passed. Water is then to be 
poured on the residue until a pint of liquid has filtered. The 



FLUID EXTRACTS OF LACTUCARIUM, ETC. 689 

ethereo-alcoholic tincture is suffered to evaporate in a warm place, 
until reduced to two fluidounces; the hydro-alcoholic tincture is 
concentrated on a water-bath to the same bulk; and the watery in- 
fusion evaporated to one fluidounce. The last two liquids are now 
to be mixed, three fluidounces of alcohol added to the first (ethereal) 
liquid, to dissolve the oleoresin, and the other mixture added gra- 
dually with agitation, so that the whole will measure eight fluid- 
ounces ; the mixture is to be afterwards shaken occasionally for 24 
hours. A portion of oleoresin and some gummy extractive remain 
undissolved, and must either be removed by iiltration or left as a 
sediment. 

When the ethereo-alcoholic tincture is evaporated to one-sixth, 
nearly all the oleoresin separates, and hence the necessity of redis- 
solving this by alcohol before adding the other liquids. 

The dose of this is fifteen minims to f 5j. It has the odor of 
musk and the antispasmodic effects of valerian. The root is used 
in Russia in delirium tremens, and has been somewhat prescribed 
in Philadelphia and elsewhere in a variety of nervous affections. 

Fluid Extract of Lactucarium. (I. H. Rowley.) 

Take of Lactucarium (English) Four troyounces. 

Glycerin Two fluidounces. 

Alcohol, 

Water, each A sufficient quantity. 

Macerate the lactucarium, previously comminuted, in a mixture 
of f 3j of glycerin, f^iiiss of alcohol, f ^iiiss of water, for four days, 
then put into a percolator, and pour on diluted alcohol until six 
fluidounces have passed, set this aside, and continue the percola- 
tion until nine fluidounces more of percolate have been obtained, 
to this add the remaining fluidounce of glycerin, and evaporate 
gently to f 3ss, then add f 3ss of alcohol and mix with the tincture 
reserved, allow it to stand twenty -four hours, and filter. 

Fluid Extract of Scutellaria Laterifolia. 

Skullcap, though not much prescribed by regular physicians, is 
greatly esteemed by the eclectic practitioners, who employ it in 
several different preparations in the treatment of nervous irritation. 
The mode of preparation indicated by Prof. Maisch is to exhaust 
sixteen ounces of the powdered herb by the use successively of di- 
luted alcohol, and a mixture of four parts of water and one of alco- 
hol, then to evaporate the mixed liquids to about a pint, add one 
pound (officinal) of sugar, and further evaporate to one pint. 

Fluid Extract of Marrubium Vulgare. 

Horehound ranks as a tonic, and is much used in the form of 
syrup, candy, and hot infusion as a domestic remedy for colds, inci- 
dent to our changeable climate. 

The fluid extract may be made exactly as the foregoing, substi- 
tuting horehound for the skullcap. — Proceedings Am. Ph.arm. Assoc, 
1857. 

44 



690 



OLEORES1NS, 



Oleoresins, U. S. P. 

The Oleoresins. 

The officinal preparations of this class were, in the Pharmaco- 
poeia of 1850, denominated fluid extracts, and classified under that 
head ; they have been, in the more recent revision, made a separate 
class, and are shown in the following syllabus : — 

Officinal Oleoresins. 



Officinal name. 


Medical properties, etc. 


Yield. 


Dose. 


Oleoresina capsici 
" cubebae 
" filicis 


Arterial stimulant 

Stimulant, diuretic 

Anthelmintic 

Tonic, narcotic, etc. 

Stimulant 

Stim., carminative 


18 per cent. 
12 to 25 p. ct. 


? 
5 to 30 drops. 
TT^ v to xv 
5 to 10 drops. 
1 to 5 drops. 

do. 


" lupylinse 
" piperis 
" z.ingiberis 




6 per cent. 
9 per cent. 



REMARKS. 

These preparations are made by passing ether through the pow- 
dered drug in a covered displacement apparatus, recovering the 
ether or allowing it to evaporate spontaneously. The resulting 
liquid is of a more or less oily consistence ; usually of a dark color 
— brown, or with a tinge of green (red in capsicum) ; extremely 
pungent, and reminding one of the drug. It consists of the essen- 
tial oil holding in solution a portion of the waxy and resinoid prin- 
ciples associated with it in the drug. These are apt to be deposited 
in part, a circumstance which modifies somewhat the properties, of 
different specimens of the same preparation. In the instance of 
fluid extract of pepper, the piperin is directed to be separated, and 
the oil of black pepper of commerce, which is similar to the fluid 
extract, is a residuary product of the manufacture of piperih. Cu- 
bebs yield from 12 to 28 per cent, of oleoresin ; black pepper about 
one-sixteenth of its weight ; ginger from 6*to 9 per cent. 

Owing to the solubility of fixed oils and fatty matters in ether, 
these, if present in the drug, are extracted, and are associated with 
the oleoresinous preparation left after the evaporation. In the oleo- 
resins of cardamom and ergot the fixed oils are conspicuous though 
inert ingredients ; from capsicum the fatty matter is obtained in a 
solid form, and is readily separated. 

The uses of the oleoresins are limited to those preparations in 
which they can be suspended by viscid ingredients, or embodied in 
pills, lozenges, or for external use added to liniments or ointments. 

Fig. 233 exhibits a section of an arrangement by which the oleo- 
resins, and other preparations requiring the use of ether as a men- 
struum, can be most conveniently prepared. A percolator of tinned 
copper is surrounded by a jacket of the same material ; the recipient 
is a copper vessel with two necks, into one of which the percolator is 




WORKING FORMULAS FOR THE OLEO RESINS. 691 

secured, and to the other a pipe connecting Fig. 233. 

with the close head of the percolator, which 
is also jacketed ; on the under side of the 
head is a perforated plate of tinned copper, 
which distributes the ether over the surface 
of the drug when it has been volatilized by 
placing the recipient in hot water. After 
the exhaustion of the drug, the recipient 
is removed, the lower orifice of the perco- 
lator closed, and the head well refrigerated ; 
a stream of hot water is then passed into 
the jacket around the percolator, by which 
means the contained ether may be reco- 
vered. 

Oleoresin of capsicum has, perhaps, but little use, unless as an ex- 
ternal remedy; it would seem too strong to be taken internally with 
any advantage, but may be added to stimulating liniments. Oleo- 
resin of cubebs (formerly fluid extract of cubebs) is a valuable addi- 
tion to copaiva mixtures for use in the chronic stages of gonorrhoea ; 
it is also adapted to the fabrication of lozenges for sore throat, 
coi\yza, etc. Oleoresin of lupulin, like the fluid extract and solid 
extract, is an efficient though mild narcotic; by being suitably sus- 
pended in mucilage it would be capable of use in mania-a-potu and 
as an antaphrodisiac. 

Oleoresin of black pepper is used in connection with sulphate of 
quinia, in pills, to the efficiency of which it is said to add ; it 
would seem to be a better adjuvant to that tonic than piperin, pre- 
scribed in the old recipes. Piperoid (oleoresin) of ginger is of most 
use in connection with the fabrication of ginger drops, of fused 
candy, and lozenges ; it may be added also to mixtures containing 
viscid ingredients, or to alcoholic preparations. It is a dark brown, 
transparent, oily liquid, extremely pungent, insoluble in water, but 
soluble in ether and strong alcohol. Ginger is said to contain about 
1J per cent. vol. oil, and 3 T 8 o per cent, soft resin. The proportion 
yielded by the root, treated as above, varies with the commercial 
variety of ginger. A commercial pound of African ginger yielded, 
by this process, one and a half ounce, or 9.3 per cent., while the 
same quantity of the Jamaica variety yielded only one ounce — 6.2 
per cent. That from the African was darker in color, thicker, and 
somewhat less pleasant than the other. One ounce of the piperoid 
added to twenty pounds of melted sugar, makes " ginger drops" of 
about the usual pungency. Oleoresin filicis is a new officinal in the 
revision of 1870, and is much relied upon as a remedy in tasnia, in 
doses of six to twenty minims. 

Working Formulas for the Oleoresins. 
Oleoresina Ccqosici, U. S. P. 

Take of Capsicum, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Ether, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the capsicum into a cylindrical percolator provided with a 



692 OLEORESINS. 

stopcock and arranged with a cover and receptacle suitable for 
volatile liquids, press it firmly, and gradually pour ether upon it 
until twenty-four fluidounces of filtered liquid have slowly passed. 
Recover the greater part of the ether by distillation on a water- 
bath, and expose the residue in a capsule until the remaining ether 
has evaporated. Lastly, remove, by straining, the fatty matter 
which separates on standing, and keep the oleoresin in a well- 
stopped bottle. 

Oleoresina Cubebse, IT. S. P. (Oleoresin of Cubeb.) 

Take of Cubeb, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Ether, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the cubeb into a cylindrical percolator, as described in last 
formula, press it moderately, and gradually pour ether upon it until 
twenty-four fluidounces of filtered liquid have slowly passed. Re- 
cover the greater part of the ether by distillation on a water-bath, 
and expose the residue in a capsule until the remaining ether has 
evaporated. Lastly, keep the oleoresin in a well-stopped bottle. 

Oleoresina Filicis, IT. S. P. (Oleoresin of Fern.) 

Take of Male fern, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Ether, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the male fern into a cylindrical glass percolator provided 
with a stopcock and arranged with covered receptacle suitable for 
volatile liquids, press it firmly, and gradually pour ether upon it 
until twenty-four fluidounces of liquid have slowly passed. Re- 
cover the greater part of the ether by distillation on a water-bath, 
and expose the residue in a capsule until the remaining ether has 
evaporated. Lastly, keep the oleoresin in a well-stopped bottle. 

Oleoresina Lupulinai, IT. S. P. 

Take of Lupulin, twelve troyounces. 
Ether, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the lupulin into a narrow cylindrical percolator, as described 
in formula for oleoresin of capsicum, press it firmly, and gradually 
pour ether upon it until thirty fluidounces of filtered liquid have 
slowly passed. Recover the greater part of the ether by distilla- 
tion on a water-bath, and expose the residue in a capsule until the 
remaining ether has evaporated. Lastly, keep the oleoresin in a 
wide-mouthed bottle well stopped. 

Oleoresina? Piperis, IT. S. P. (Extractum Piperis Fluidum, U. S. P. 

1850.) 

Take of Black pepper, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Ether, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the black pepper into a cylindrical percolator, as described in 
formula for oleoresin of capsicum, press it firmly, and gradually 
pour ether upon it until twenty-four fluidounces of filtered liquid 



UNOFFICINAL OLEORESINS. 693 

have slowly passed. Recover the greater part of the ether by dis- 
tillation on a water-bath, and expose the residue in a capsule until 
the remaining ether has evaporated, and the deposition of piperin 
in crystals has ceased. Lastly, separate the oleoresin from the 
piperin by expression through a muslin strainer, and keep it in a 
well-stopped bottle. 

Oleoresina Zingiberis, U. S. P. (Piperoid of Ginger.) 

Take of Ginger, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Stronger ether, twelve fluidounces. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Put the ginger into a cylindrical percolator, press it firmly, and 
pour upon it the stronger ether. When this has been absorbed by 
the powder, add alcohol until twelve fluidounces of filtered liquid 
have passed. Recover from this, by distillation on a water-bath, 
nine fluidounces of ether, and expose the residue in a capsule 
until the volatile part has evaporated. Lastly, keep the oleoresin 
in a well-stopped bottle. 

TJXOFFICINAL OLEORESINS. 

Oil of Asarum Canadense. — Canada snakeroot or wild ginger is 
prepared in the same way; it is used chiefly as a perfume; it is 
also gratefully stimulant in small doses, being not unlike ginger in 
its properties. 

Oil of cardamom, prepared in the same way with ether, is an 
impure oily fluid, containing both the fixed and volatile oil of the 
seeds, and esteemed a powerful carminative stimulant ; it is little 
known to practitioners. 

Oil of parsley is a diuretic remedy, sometimes called apiol. It is 
prepared by treating parsley seeds with strong alcohol, and subse- 
quently with ether or chloroform ; these menstrua are then distilled 
oft", and the oil may be further purified if desired. It is also pre- 
pared by the spontaneous evaporation of an ethereal tincture, as in 
the other cases. It is highly charged with the odor of the plant, of 
which it is probably the chief active constituent. Dose, 3 or 4 
drops in a day. 

This remedy has been highly lauded as a substitute for quinia in 
intermittents. It has been introduced in Philadelphia, in capsules, 
sold as a powerful emmenagogue, and it is believed is surreptitiously 
used to commit abortion. 

Oil of Ergot — Under this name a brown colored, acrid, oily liquid 
is sold in the shops, which is obtained by treating powdered ergot 
with ether, or a mixture of ether and alcohol, and evaporating off 
the menstruum. Its most bulky ingredient is the peculiar bland 
fixed oil, which, according to the experiments of T. Roberts Baker, 
is nearly isomeric with castor oil. My friend, Ambrose Smith, in- 
forms me that he has found oil of ergot, when made with pure 
ether, to become inconveniently thick — almost solid ; which diffi- 
culty is obviated by adding a portion of alcohol to the ether em- 



694 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

ployed. Although the pure fixed oil is destitute of any of the 
effects of ergot, this preparation, owing to its other ingredients, is 
more or less active. Its dose, in cases of labor, to promote uterine 
contractions, is from 20 to 50 drops. 

Oil of Pumpkin Seed. — This oil, though not an oleoresin, and 
consequently not strictly classed here, has been used with success 
as a remedy in taenia. It is conveniently prepared by crushing the 
seeds to a smooth pulp, transferring to a percolator after moisten- 
ing with ether, and permitting the mass to stand an hour in a 
close vessel ; it should be displaced with ether, and from the 
liquid thus obtained the ether should be removed by evaporation. 
The dose is f.lss repeated in two or three hours, and followed by a 
dose of castor oil. About 33 per cent, of oil is the yield by this 
process. 



CHAPTER XII. 

SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

Of Syrups. 

The term Syrup is applied to any saturated or nearly saturated 
solution of sugar in water, and there are numerous simple, medi- 
cated, and flavored syrups used in medicine and pharmacy, both 
officinal and unofficinal. The kind of sugar used in the officinal 
preparations is that named in the list of the Pharmacopoeia Saccha- 
rum, and called refined sugar, loaf sugar, or — as variously powdered 
— broken down, crushed, or granulated sugar. These, as supplied 
by the refineries, consist of nearly chemically pure cane sugar, and 
require no further preparation for pharmaceutical use. Sugar is 
soluble in less than half its weight of water ; to a less extent in 
alcohol, and insoluble in ether. It crystallizes from its solution 
in the form of oblique rhombic crystals, containing water, called, as 
found in the shops, rock candy. {See Part IV.-) 

The advantages of the use of sugar in pharmaceutical prepara- 
tions are, 1st. Its agreeable taste. 2d. The viscidity and blandness 
of its solution. 3d. Its conservative properties, when in sufficient 
proportion. These adapt it to numerous uses in pharmacy, among 
which the preparation of syrups is, perhaps, the most important. 
The number of medicated syrups in common use, and the great 
popularity of these among physicians and the public, are character- 
istics of French and American pharmacy as contradistinguished 
from that of Great Britain. 

The proportion of sugar in syrup is a matter of primary import- 
ance, as, owing to nitrogenized principles, which are apt to be acci- 
dentally present, even in simple syrup, fermentation will be set up, 
unless the syrup has very nearly the full officinal proportion. 

Previously to the revision of the TJ. S. Pharmacopoeia in 1860, the 



SIMPLE SYRUP. 695 

officinal directions ordered an excess of sugar in the preparation of 
most syrups; to Dr. Wilson H. Pile we owe the accurate estima- 
tion of the quantity required to produce saturation, and the precise 
increase of bulk caused by sugar in solution. In accordance with 
his suggestions and those of Dr. Squibb, the proportion of sugar 
has been slightly reduced in most of the formulas, and the degree 
of evaporation regulated so that the required proportion of result- 
ing syrup to the drug employed, shall be accurately maintained. 
By calculation, founded on its specific gravity, 12 troyounces of 
sugar = 5760 grains, produce in solution 8 fluidounces, but owing 
to a slight condensation the actual increase, as ascertained by ex- 
periment, is 7.9-J-l fluidounces; practically two-thirds of the weight 
of sugar will equal its bulk in fluidounces. In the formulas of the 
previous Pharmacopoeias 30 troyounces were prescribed to a pint of 
water, to make two pints of syrup, in the present 36 troyounces are 
directed to 20 fluidounces to make 2 pints and 12 fluidounces (= 44 
fluidounces), any evaporated water being substituted by the addi- 
tion through the strainer of exactly sufficient to bring it up to the 
required measure. The specific gravity of officinal simple syrup is 
1.317, but the several medicated syrups vary from this, in conse- 
quence of the presence of extractive and other principles. 

The following curious rule is given by Dr. Ure for ascertaining 
the quantit}^ of sugar in simple syrup: "The decimal part of the 
number denoting the sp. g\\ of a syrup multiplied hy 26 gives the 
number of pounds of sugar it contains per gallon very nearly." 
This appears to refer to the avoirdupois and not the officinal weight. 

In the absence of extraneous and particularly of nitrogenized 
principles, a syrup will keep well enough in cold weather, without 
reference to its proportions; but in a majority of instances of medi- 
cated syrups, it is absolutely necessary to observe the above well- 
established proportions, which insure a nearly saturated saccharine 
solution. 

If impure or brown sugar is employed, it is necessary to boil the 
syrup until the proper specific gravity is attained, skimming or 
straining off the scum which contains the impurities; but when the 
sugar is pure, and there are no other vegetable impurities to be 
separated, a boiling temperature is unnecessary. 

If impurities are diffused in the liquid, which will not readily 
rise as scum, it is well to add, before applying heat, a little white 
of egg, previously beaten up with water, which, by its coagulating 
at the boiling temperature, forms a clot, inclosing the impurities, 
and facilitating their removal; it maj^ also be rendered clear and 
bright by diffusing filtering paper reduced to a pulp through the 
syrup, and then separating by straining through a woollen flannel, 
which will felt with it; if the syrup is not clear it should again be 
poured through, and it will then become clear. A richer and more 
elegant syrup is produced by the use of Havana sugar, clarified in 
this way, than from the best refined sugar, and some of our most 
careful pharmacists use this process for their mineral water syrups, 



696 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

on account of its superior product, though so much more trouble- 
some. 

In some of the medicated syrups, a boiling temperature is directed, 
in order that the vegetable albumen contained in the medicinal 
ingredient may be coagulated, and thus separated. This should be 
done before adding the sugar, and the liquid should then be filtered, 
so that a perfectly clear syrup may be obtained from the first. 
Syrups may be decolorized by filtration through animal charcoal, 
and to obtain perfect transparency should be strained slowly, after 
they are partially cooled, through two or three thicknesses of flannel. 
In many instances, the presence in the drug, or in the menstruum 
employed, of antiseptic properties, insures the permanence of the 
preparation. Syrup of squill is an instance, in which, owing to the 
presence of the antiseptic element, acetic acid, in the menstruum, 
we are enabled to reduce the proportion of sugar somewhat below 
that necessary in other instances. Among the articles added to 
syrups, to prevent fermentation, the following may be mentioned : — 

Essential oils, which, of course, greatly modify the taste and other 
properties of the preparation. Brandy, which is much used with 
aromatics; a small proportion of pure alcohol ; glycerin, which does 
not alter the taste or other properties of the preparation. Sugar of 
milk, in small proportion. Sulphite of lime, a small proportion of 
which will effectually prevent or arrest fermentation, though it is 
liable to impart an odor unless afterwards subjected to heat. Hoff- 
mann's anodyne is one of the best antiseptics, though objectionable 
as imparting an ethereal odor and taste ; it should, however, be 
added in small quantity only; one fluidrachm to a pint has gene- 
rally answered the purpose, and in cases where an acid is not ob- 
jectionable acetic acid in proportion of f^j to the pint is very 
efficient. 

It must not be forgotten, in attempting to restore syrups that 
have fermented, by boiling them, that they have lost sugar in pro- 
portion to the amount of acetic acid produced, and this must be 
restored when they are heated, besides the addition of the antiseptic. 
Syrups should be kept in a cool, though not in a cold, place; those 
most liable to ferment, in small and well-stopped bottles. 

Syllabus of Officinal Syrups. 

1st Group. — Used as excipients and flavors. 
Officinal name. Constituents, etc. 

Syrupus, Sugar Ibiij (troy) -{- water f§xx = 2 pints and 12 fluidounces, 

or weigh fifty-five troyounces. 
Syr. acaciae, Sugar 14 parts -f- g um 2 -f- water 8 fluid parts. 

" amygdalae, Emulsion of sweet and bitter almonds -f- sugar. 

" aurantii cori, Sweet orange-peel (oil extracted) -}- curb, magnes , sugar, and 

water. 
" " florum, Orange-flower water -j- sugar. 

'' acidi citrici, Acid gj, oil lemon TT\,ij, syrup Oj 

" ltmonis, Lemon juice and water equal parts -f- sugar. 

" tolutanus, Tinct. -|- carb. magnes. -|- sugar and water. 

" zingiberis, Eld. ext. " + sugar and water. 

" rosse gallicse, Extracted with dil. ale, astringent. 



syrups. 697 



REMARKS. 



Simple Syrup, as made by the officinal working formula appended, 
is a viscid liquid, constituted of about two-thirds sugar and one- 
third water, and having a specific gravity, when boiling hot, of 
1.261 (30° Baume); or when cold, 1.317 (35° Baume). (Syrups pre- 
pared from the juices of fruits, or others which contain much ex- 
tractive matter, mark about 2° or 3° higher on Baume's scale.) It 
is of a pure sweet taste, without odor, when freshly prepared. The 
boiling point is 221° F. It is much used as a vehicle and to 
sweeten extemporaneous mixtures, also in the preparation of some 
of the medicinal syrups (second group). In certain chemical solu- 
tions it is found useful as preventing the oxidation of the metallic 
base by excluding contact with atmospheric oxygen. In com- 
pounding pills its adhesiveness renders it a useful excipient, though 
less so than honey, or molasses, or the next member of the group. 

Syrup of gum is a very viscid and adhesive fluid, especially useful 
in compounding prescriptions; this syrup of the Pharmacopoeia must 
be distinguished from the French Siropde Gomme, which is flavored 
with orange flower ; this, diluted with water, is a favorite demul- 
cent drink. Our syrup is a saturated solution of gum Arabic and 
sugar, so adjusted as to be permanent ; it is very viscid, so much 
so as to be only fitted for suspending insoluble substances, and for 
combining unadhesive materials in pill. The use of well-selected 
gum Arabic, in lumps, as directed in the officinal formula, insures 
a clearer and more elegant syrup than can be made from the ordi- 
nary powdered gum. 

Almond or orgeat syrup is a delightful preparation for use as a drink 
with carbonic-acid water; it is frequently modified by the addition 
of orange-flower water, vanilla, or other flavoring materials, which, 
however, seldom improve its delicate flavor. Its process involves, 
first the blanching of almonds by maceration in warm water, and 
then pressing out the kernels from the skins between the fingers, 
or by rubbing them between cloths ; second, the beating of these 
into a paste with a portion of sugar ; third, the formation of a 
milky mixture or emulsion by trituration with successive portions 
of water ; and fourth, the solution in this of the required quantity 
of sugar, which should be done without exposure to a high heat. 

In syrup of orange-peel, the fresh rind of the sweet or Havana 
orange is preferred to the bitter orange-peel prescribed in the vari- 
ous tonic preparations, this syrup being used for its flavor rather 
than for any medicinal effect. The method adopted in the officinal 
formula for the extraction of this delicate flavor of the peel is quite 
original and adapted to preserve it in perfection. The formula for 
orange syrup, among the mineral water syrups, contains also the 
juice of the fruit, and it is not so well adapted to medicinal prepa- 
rations. 

Syrup of orange-floioer is necessarily made from the imported dis- 
tilled water, as the flowers are not obtainable in a fresh condition 
except in remote situations in our southern States. This flavor is 



698 



OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 



increasingly popular in this country, and the distilled water is so 
decidedly sedative in its effects on the nervous system as to con- 
stitute a valuable remedy, either singly or in appropriate combina- 
tions. 

Lemon syrup and syrup of citric acid are familiar and grateful 
refrigerant drinks, adapted to use as adjuvants in extemporaneous 
pharmacy. The former has been reduced in strength in the late 
revision of the Pharmacopoeia; it was formerly made by dissolving 
sugar in the pure lemon juice; this is now diluted, previously, 
with an equal bulk of water; the syrup is thus more nearly like 
syrup of citric acid, which, beside being so easily made extempora- 
neously, is a rather more elegant preparation. Lemon syrup 
depends, for quality, mainly on the freshness of the lemon juice ; 
citric acid syrup on the purity and freshness of oil of lemon. 

Ginger and Tolu syrups are made, according to the last edition 
of the Pharmacopoeia, by the trituration of the concentrated tinc- 
ture, in the case of tolu and fluid extract of ginger, with carbonate 
of magnesium and a small portion of sugar, thus making an aroma- 
tized water, which is rendered clear by filtration and converted 
into a syrup by the addition of sugar in the usual way; this is 
nearly the same plan adopted in the preparation of syrup of orange- 
peel, and furnishes an unexceptional aromatized syrup, though 
requiring more manipulation and consuming more time than the 
process of the Pharmacopoeia of 1840, which directed the addition 
of the tinctures to simple syrup, as prescribed for ginger syrup under 
the head of mineral water syrups. Syrup of tolu is a useful bal- 
samic expectorant, but too week to produce a decided effect, such 
as is obtainable by the tolu mixtures, described among the extem- 
poraneous preparations. 

Syrup of red rose is a mild astringent, and may be regarded as a 
medicinal or a flavoring preparation ; its color is one of its merits 
as an adjuvant. In its mode of preparation, it belongs to the third 
group. 

2d Group. — Prepared by adding simple syrup to fluid extract. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. Dose. 


Medical properties, etc. 


Syr. ipecacuanhge 
" rhei (simp.) 
" rubi (blackberry root) 


f^j to Oj * f^j 
f^isstoOj fgij 
fjiv to Oj f§ss 


Expectorant, most used for children. 
Laxative " " " 
Astringent. 




REMARKS. 


i 



These very familiar preparations, by the late revision of the offi- 
cinal formulas, are rendered quite convenient in their mode of pre- 
paration. This mode is well adapted to a variety of syrups which 
may be made extemporaneously from the corresponding fluid ex- 
tracts. The " eclectic formularies" direct various proportions — one 
part of fluid extract to 3, 4, 7, 8, and 14 of simple syrup. 

Syrup of ipecacuanha is a most useful expectorant, and in domestic 
practice is perhaps the most popular, in Philadelphia. It is parti- 



THIRD GROUP OF SYRUPS. 



699 



cularly adapted to the treatment of the catarrhs of children. The 
dose may be so regulated as to produce a gentle relaxing, or, in the 
case of children, emetic, effect, with the advantage of causing 
neither stimulating nor depressing after-effects. The strength of 
this syrup is doubled in the edition of 1860. 

Simple syrup of rhubarb is also an excellent preparation when 
made by the new officinal process ; it is very extensively used as a 
mild carthartic for children. It is very different in its properties 
and mode of action from the aromatic syrup referred to in the next 
group ; the proportion of rhubarb is larger than in the former 
editions. 

Syrup of blackberry root (syrupus rubi) is another new officinal 
(1860), which is designed to meet the demand for an approved pre- 
paration of our indigenous blackberry root. Most of these as now 
prepared by pharmacists are rendered popular by introducing aro- 
matics, some of which class, it would seem, would have been desi- 
rable additions. The process in the new edition of the Pharmaco- 
poeia is very simple, and consists in mixing the fluid extract with 
simple syrup. 

3d Group. — Extracted by diluted alcohol, which is evaporated. 



Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose. 


Medical properties. 


Syr. lactucarii 
" seuegge 

" scillse comp. 

" (Coxe's hive syrup) 

" rhei aromat. 
" sarsap. comp. 


& to oj 

§iv to Oj 

s'kagiv/ J -1 
( ant. T. gr. j=f§j / 
rh. §iiss to Ovij 
sars. §iv to Oj 


f3J 
f5J 

f^ss 
fgss 


Mild narcotic. 
Acrid, expectorant. 

/ Expectorant, emetic. 
\ Arterial sedative. 

Laxative, carminative. 
Alterative, diaphoretic. 



REMARKS ON THE THIRD GROUP. 

The simplest statement of this process for making syrups is the 
following: Of the drug, properly powdered, make a tincture by 
percolation with diluted alcohol; evaporate this, in a capsule, to the 
point named in the Pharmacopoeia, thus getting rid of the alcohol 
contained in it; add sugar, in the proportion of two parts to one of 
the liquid, and dissolve it by the aid of heat. 

Of this important class each individual should be carefully studied 
and the working formula should be followed strictly in preparing 
them. The importance of the use of officinal weights, or their 
equivalents in the commercial weights, need hardly be insisted 
upon. 

Syrup of lactucarium is a new officinal in the Pharmacopoeia of 
1860 ; it is much stronger than Aubergier's syrup, which has been 
extensively prescribed of late years, and a formula for which is 
given among the unofficinal syrups. This new preparation is pre- 
pared by trituration and percolation with diluted alcohol, the evapo- 
ration of this tincture and its incorporation with simple syrup. It 
has a very bitter taste, is destitute of any flavoring ingredient, and 



700 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

contains about four grains to each fluidracnm. A teaspoonful con- 
taining from five to six grains is a medium dose. The Pharmacopoeia 
does not designate, in the list, whether " English" or " German " 
lactucarium shall be used; the former is the more active narcotic. 
The pharmacist who has at hand the fluid extract of "English" 
lactucarium, described in the chapter on fluid extracts, may prepare 
the officinal syrup by adding one fluidounce to a pint of simple 
syrup, previously heated, and straining while hot. 

Syrup of red rose is a mild astringent, and from its rich color and 
flavor, when prepared from the fresh and unfaded flowers, is well 
adapted to use as an adjuvant in extemporaneous pharmacy. The 
process varies from the foregoing in the use of sugar instead of 
syrup, and the reservation of the first portion of the percolate to be 
added at the close of the process. 

Syrup of seneka is prepared by the process pertaining to this 
group; the evaporated tincture is to be filtered previously to adding 
the sugar. "We have been accustomed, perhaps without sufficient 
reason, to bring this, like the following, to the boiling point before 
filtration, to promote the precipitation of inert fermentable matter. 

Coxe's hive syrup (syr. scillce comp.) has been a subject of much 
discussion with reference to its mode of preparation. As originally 
prepared, many years ago, it contained honey, which being objected 
to from its alleged agency in promoting fermentation, it was su- 
perseded, in the revision of 1840, by sugar, the preparation being 
removed from mellita to syrupi. The use of diluted alcohol in its 
preparation was esteemed a great improvement; but it is still an 
opprobrium of our art on account of its liability to ferment. 

The precaution should not be neglected in this instance, of boil- 
ing the diluted alcoholic preparation during the evaporation, and 
filtering, before adding the sugar. A copious coagulation of the 
vegetable albumen takes place at the boiling temperature, the re- 
moval of which on the filter obviates, to some extent, the tendency 
to fermentation in the resulting syrup. The solution of the tartar 
emetic in the syrup should be accomplished, while it is hot, by 
trituration in a mortar, as prescribed under the head of Solution. 

Spiced syrup of rhubarb is improved in its method of preparation, 
in the last revision of the Pharmacopoeia, by omitting the evapora- 
tion of the percolate obtained by treating the rhubarb and aroma- 
tics with diluted alcohol ; the presence of the alcohol aids in the 
therapeutic effects in view. An old recipe for this preparation, 
credited to the late Dr. James, and preferred in practice by my 
father, the late Dr. Joseph Parrish, and some contemporaneous 
practitioners, prescribes a considerable portion of French brandy, 
not to be evaporated, but retained in the syrup when finished. To 
meet this preference, the rhubarb and aromatics may be percolated 
with brandy, which may be mixed with the proper proportion of 
syrup, thus rendering the preparation more decidedly stimulating. 

Compound syrup of sarsaparilla is the only remaining member of 
this group; its composition is similar, though not identical, with 
the fluid extract, which contains mezereon, a most acrid and stimu- 



SYRUPS. 701 

lating alterative; the syrup contains, besides the soluble principles 
of sarsaparilla, those of guaiacum-wood, rose, senna, and liquorice 
root, extracted by diluted alcohol, evaporated, and made into a 
syrup, as before indicated for the syrups of this group. For the 
improvement of its flavor, and as antiseptics, the oils of anise, sas- 
safras, and partridgeberry are directed to be added, and the propor- 
tion of sugar is properly rather less than that indicated for syrups 
generally. 

Therapeutically considered, this is a most important group of 
syrups. As expectorants and ingredients of expectorant com- 
pounds, compound syrup of squill and syrup of senega are much pre- 
scribed; the former has for many j-ears been a most common remedy 
in croup; it is not, however, popular either among physicians or 
pharmacists, the former regarding it as therapeutically, and the 
latter as pharmaceutically, objectionable. The presence of the anti- 
monial salt, in the proportion of a grain to the ounce, should always 
be remembered ; it is an arterial sedative by no means indicated in 
many cases to which the other expectorant ingredients would be 
applicable. 

In croup, it is customary to increase the dose of hive syrup very 
much above that mentioned in the books, or to repeat it every fif- 
teen or twenty minutes till the patient vomits. The dose for a 
child one year old may be ten drops, for one of two years fifteen, 
of three years twenty-five drops, and so on, repeated as above. 
Syrup of seneka is the most acrid of its class; its use is indicated 
in chronic catarrh not accompanied by inflammatory action; it is 
seldom urged so as to produce its emetic effect, except in combina- 
tion with other remedies. 

In compounding expectorant and sedative remedies, syrup of 
lactucarium will be a convenient anodyne, destitute of astringency, 
and will probably be more used in that w T ay than by itself. 

Spiced syrup of rhubarb is, probably without exception, the most 
familiar remedy for the so-called summer complaint of children, the 
form of diarrhoea, usually connected with teething, so extremely 
prevalent and fatal in our large cities during the intense heat of 
summer. It has the advantage of being; a warming tonic or sto- 

o o r> 

machic, as well as a very mild laxative, and is given in doses from 
a teaspoonful for an infant of a year old to a tablespoonful or more 
for older children and adults. 

Compound syrup of sarsaparilla is manufactured in very large 
quantities by pharmacists, and, after many fluctuations, has an 
extended reputation among practitioners of medicine, as well as 
the public at large. Its chief use is in skin diseases, and in syphi- 
litic and scrofulous cases, in which it is used both alone and com- 
bined with mercurials, iodides, etc. 

The extensive range of diseases to which sarsaparilla is applicable, 
and the harmless character of the remedy, have made it a great 
favorite with, empirics, so that there are an immense number of 
quack medicines sailing under its name, and not a few called alter- 
atives and panaceas, which contain it as one of their ingredients. 



702 



OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 



So numerous and so generally popular were these, several years ago, 
that the period of their greatest popularity, from 1845 to 1850, has 
been called among druggists the " sarsaparilla era." Many of these, 
as the notorious Townsend's, the chief merit of which was its great 
dilution and the large size of the bottles in which it was put up, 
have gone into merited disuse, while a few are yet in demand. 

It is greatly to be regretted that educated physicians should so 
frequently lend their influence to the empiric by countenancing, 
and even recommending, these medicines, some of which may no 
doubt be found useful in their hands, but, besides the disadvantage 
of our being ignorant of their composition, they are generally in- 
ferior to the officinal and other legitimate preparations, in medicinal 
virtues. 



4th Group. - 


-Of syrups. Extracted and dissolved by water. 


Officinal name. 


Proportions. 


Dose 


Medical properties. 


Syr. kramerise 

" pruni Virg 
" f'erri iodid. 


rRt. ^vjtoOj I 
\ Ext, gj to Oj / 
^iiss to Oj 
gr. 58 to f^j 


f3J 

gt.vtoxx 


Astringent. 

Tonic, nerv. sedative. 
" alterative. 



REMARKS ON THE FOURTH GROUP. 

Syrup of rhatany is made either directly from the powdered root 
by percolation with cold water, evaporation, and incorporation with 
sugar, or from the fluid extract by mixing twelve fluidounces of it 
with twenty-four fluidounces of syrup. This syrup leaves nothing 
to desire as an elegant and efficient astringent, and one which is 
prepared with great facility. 

Syrup of wild cherry is also made by percolation with cold water; 
the process requires care to be successful in extracting the whole of 
the soluble principles with the small amount of water allowable; 
evaporation is inadmissible on account of the great volatility of the 
contained hydrocyanic acid. The full production of this from the 
amj^gdalin and emulsin contained in the bark suggests the precau- 
tion of subjecting the powder to the action of water for twenty- 
four hours previous to displacement, as directed in the Pharma- 
copoeia. The infusion acquires richness of flavor and color by 
standing until a precipitate begins to form in it, before adding the 
sugar. In this instance, less than the full proportion of sugar 
directed for syrups, generally, is sufficient to preserve it, owing to 
the antiseptic properties of the hydrocyanic acid. 

Syrup of wild cherry is one of the most popular and really valu- 
able of tonic and sedative remedies, being much used in pulmonary 
affections, connected with an atonic condition and harassing cough. 

5th Group.— Syrups containing acetic acid. 

Syrupus allii. By maceration of garlic, ^vj, in dil. acet. acid. Oj, sugar being after- 
wards added. Antispasmodic. Dose, f5J- 
" scillae. Vinegar of squill Oj + sugar 35ij. Expectorant. Dose, f^j. 



OFFICINAL SYRUPS. 703 

Of these, the first is but rarely used ; but the second is an ex- 
tremely common expectorant, used both by itself and in combination 
with camphorated tincture of opium, tincture of digitalis, syrup of 
ipecacuanha, and other medicines. The presence of the acetic 
element takes from this preparation the cloying character which 
belongs to the syrups generally. 

Working Formulas for the Officinal Syrups. 
Syrupus. {Simple Syrup.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Sugar, in coarse powder, thirty-six troyounces. 
Distilled water, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the sugar, with the aid of heat, in twenty fluidounces 
of distilled water, raise the temperature to the boiling point, and 
strain the solution while hot. Then incorporate with the solution 
a sufficient quantity of distilled water, added through the strainer, 
to make the syrup measure two pints and twelve fluidounces, or 
weigh fiftj'-five troyounces. Syrup, thus prepared, has the specific 
gravity 1.317. 

My judgment coincides with that of some others in preferring 
to make syrup with a very slight excess of water, not only on 
account of the convenient relations of the commercial weights to 
the required proportion of liquid by mensure, but also, because it 
is, on the whole, more satisfactory. There is always some waste 
of the fluid by evaporation where heat is applied, and when the full 
officinal proportion of sugar is used, a portion is liable to crystallize 
out on standing, and thus by abstracting sugar weaken the re- 
mainder, unless the direction given in the above formula for sup- 
plying the loss by evaporation is carefully and accurately complied 
with, which, on the large scale in which syrups are generally made, 
is not to be expected. 

Reduced to commercial or avoirdupois weights, the right propor- 
tion to make syrup of standard strength is a pound of sugar to 
eight fluidounces and a fluidrachm of water ; the fluidrachm is 
obviously superfluous, and hence is omitted in the following formula, 
which I have used for many vears with satisfaction : — 

Simple Syrup. 

Take of Sugar 2 lbs. com. 80 lbs. com. 

Water 1 pint. 5 gallons. 

Dissolve the sugar in the water without heating unnecessarily. 

The yield from the pint of water will be nearly thirty-five fluid- 
ounces, not a quart (thirty-two fluidounces) as formerly stated ; to 
make a quart, fifteen fluidounces of water and a pound and fourteen 
ounces of sugar should be used. The yield from the larger quantity 
in the formula, would bear the same proportion, being a fraction 
over nine and a half gallons. 



704 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

Syrupus Acacice. {Syrup of Gum Arabic.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Gum Arabic, in pieces, two troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (15£ oz. com.), fourteen troyounces. 
Water, eight lluidounces. 

Dissolve the gum Arabic in the water, without heat ; then the 
sugar with a gentle heat, and strain. 

Syrupus Acidi Citrici. (Syrup of Citric Acid.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Citric acid, in fine powder, one hundred and twent}^ grains. 
Oil of lemons, four minims. 
Syrup, two pints. 

Rub the citric acid and oil of lemon with a fluidounce of the 
syrup ; then add the mixture to the remainder of the syrup, and 
dissolve with a gentle heat. 

Syrupus Allii. {Syrup of Garlic.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Garlic, sliced and bruised, six troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 10 oz. com.), twenty -four troyounces. 
Diluted acetic acid, a pint. 

Macerate the garlic with ten fluidounces of the diluted acetic 
acid, in a glass vessel, for four days, and express the liquid. Then 
mix the residue with the remainder of the acid, and again express 
until sufficient additional liquid has been obtained to make the 
whole, when filtered, measure a pint. Lastly, introduce the sugar 
into a two-pint bottle, pour upon it the filtered liquid; and agitate 
until it is dissolved. 

Syrupus Amygdalae . (Syrup of Almond.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Sweet almond, twelve troyounces. 
Bitter almond, four troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (4 lbs. 15 oz. com. ), seventy-two troyounces. 
Water, three pints. 

Having blanched* the almonds, rub them in a mortar to a very 
fine paste, adding, during the trituration, three fluidounces of the 
water and twelve troyounces of the sugar. Mix the paste thoroughly 
with the remainder of the water, strain with strong expression, add 
to the strained liquid the remainder of the sugar, and dissolve it 
with the aid of a gentle heat. Lastly, strain the solution through 
muslin, and, having allowed to cool, keep it in well-stopped bottles 
in a cool place. 

Syrupus Aurantii Corticis. (Syrup of Orange- Peel.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Sweet orange-peel, recently dried, and in moderately fine powder, 
two troyounces. 

Carbonate of magnesium, half a troyounce. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 14^ oz. com.), twenty-eight troy- 
ounces. 

Alcohol, 

Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 



* Almonds are to be blanched by pouring hot water over them and permitting them 
to remain till the skin is soft, when a slight squeeze between the thumb and ringer 
will cause the almond to slip out of the skin ; no unnecessary heat should be used, 
nor should it be continued longer than is required to soften the skin. 



OFFICINAL SYRUPS. 705 

Moisten the orange-peel with half a fluidounce of alcohol, intro- 
duce it into a conical percolator, and pour alcohol upon it until six 
fluidounces of tincture have passed. Evaporate this, at a tempera- 
ture not exceeding 120°, to two fluidounces, add the carbonate of 
magnesium and a troyounce of the sugar, and rub them together, 
gradually adding half a pint of water during the trituration. Then 
filter, and, having added sufficient water to make the liquid mea- 
sure a pint, dissolve in it the remainder of the sugar with the aid 
of a gentle heat, and strain. 

Syrupus Aurantii Florum. {Syrup of Orange Flowers.) U. S. P. 

Take of Orange-flower water, twenty fluidounces. 

Sugar (in coarse powder), thirty-six troy ounces. 

Dissolve the sugar in the orange-flower water, with the aid of a 
gentle heat. 

Syrupus Ferri Iodidi, U. S. P. 

Take of Iodine, two troyounces. 

Iron, in the form of wire, and cut in small pieces, three hundred 

grains. 
Distilled water, three fluidounces. 
JSyrup, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the iodine, iron, and distilled water in a flask of thin glass, 
shake the mixture occasionally until reaction ceases and the solution 
has a green color and has lost the smell of iodine. Then, having 
introduced the pint of syrup into a graduated bottle, heat it by 
means of a water-bath to 212°, and through a small funnel inserted 
in the mouth of the bottle, and reaching below the surface of the 
syrup, filter into it the solution already prepared. When this has 
passed, close the bottle, shake it thoroughly, and when the liquid 
has cooled, add sufficient syrup to make the whole measure twenty 
fluidounces. Lastly, again shake the bottle and transfer the con- 
tents to two ounce vials, which must be well stopped. 

Syrupus Ipecacuanhas. (Syrup of Ipecacuanha.) U. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract of ipecacuanha, two fluidounces. 
Syrup, thirty fluidounces. 

Mix them. 

Syrupus Kramerice. (Syrup of Bhatany.) U. S. P. 

Take of Ehatany, in moderately fine powder, twelve troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (2 lbs. 1 oz. com. ), thirty troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the rhatany with half a pint of water, and, having allowed 
the mixture to stand for two hours, introduce it into a glass perco- 
lator and gradually pour water upon it until four pints of filtered 
liquid are obtained. Evaporate this, by means of a water-bath, to 
seventeen fluidounces, and having added the sugar, dissolve it with 
the aid of a gentle heat, and strain the solution while hot. 
45 



706 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

This syrup may also be prepared in the following manner : — 

Take of Fluid extract of rhatany, twelve fluidounces. 
Syrup, twenty-four fluidounces. 

Mix them. 

Syi^upus Lactucarii. {Syrup of Lactucarium.) U. S. P. 

Take of Lactucarium, a troyounce. 
Syrup, fourteen fluidounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a suflicient quantity, 

Rub the lactucarium with sufficient diluted alcohol, gradually 
added, to bring it to a syrupy consistence. Then introduce it into 
a conical percolator, and, having carefully covered the surface with 
a piece of muslin, gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until half 
a pint of tincture has passed. Evaporate this, by means of a water- 
bath, at a temperature not exceeding 160°, to two fluidounces, mix 
it with the syrup, previously heated, and strain while hot. 

Syrupus Limonis. {Syrup of Lemon.) U. S. P. 

Take of Lemon juice, recently expressed and strained, a pint. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (3 lbs. 5 oz. com.), forty-eight troy ounces. 
"Water, a pint. 

Mix the lemon juice and water, and, having added the sugar to 
the mixture, dissolve it with the aid of a gentle heat, and strain 
the solution while hot. 

Syrupus Pruni Virginians. {Syrup of Wild Cherry Bark.) U. S. P. 

Take of Wild cherry bark, in coarse powder, five troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 14£ oz. com.), twenty-eight troy- 
ounces. 
Water, a suflicient quantity. 

Moisten the bark thoroughly with water, and allow it to stand 
for twenty-four hours in a close vessel; then pack it firmly in a 
glass percolator, and gradually pour water upon it until a pint of 
filtered liquid is obtained. To this, transferred to a bottle, add the 
sugar, and agitate occasionally until it is dissolved. 

Syrupus Rhei. {Syrup of Rhubaro.j IT. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract of rhubarb, three fluidounces. 
• Syrupj twenty-nine fluidounces. 

Mix them thoroughly. 

Syrupus Rhei Aromaticus. {Aromatic Syrup of Rhubarb.) U. S. P. 

Take of Rhubarb, in moderately fine powder, two troyounces and a half. 
Cloves, in moderately fine powder, 
Cinnamon, in fine powder, each, half a troyounce. 
Nutmeg, in moderately fine powder, one hundred and twenty 

grains. 
Syrup, six pints. 
Diluted alcohol, a suflicient quantity. 

Mix the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with two 



OFFICINAL SYRUPS. 707 

fluidounces of diluted alcohol, introduce it into a conical percolator, 
and pour diluted alcohol upon it until a pint of tincture has passed. 
Add this to the syrup, previously heated, and mix them thoroughly. 

Syrupus Rosce Gallicce. {Syrup of Red Rose.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Bed rose, in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 3^ oz. com.), eighteen troyounces. 

Diluted alcohol, 

Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the rose with diluted alcohol, pack it firmly in a conical 
glass percolator, and gradually pour diluted alcohol upon it until a 
fluidounce of tincture has passed. Set this aside, and continue the 
percolation until live fluidounces more of tincture are obtained. 
Evaporate this with a gentle heat to a fluidounce and a half, and 
mix it with seven fluidounces of water. Then, having added the 
sugar, dissolve it with the aid of a gentle heat, and strain the solu- 
tion while hot. Lastly, when the solution is cold, add the fluid- 
ounce of reserved tincture, and mix them thoroughly. 

Syrapus Rubi. (Syrup of Blackberry Root.) U. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract of blackberry, half a pint. 
Syrup, a pint and a half. 

Mix them. 

Syrupus Sarsaparillse Compositus. (Compound Syrup of Sarsapa- 

rilla.) U. S. P. 

Take of Sarsaparilla, in moderately coarse powder (1 lb. 10 ozs. com.), 
twenty-four troyounces. 
Guaiacum wood, in moderately coarse powder, three troyounces. 
Pale rose, in moderately fine powder 
Senna, in moderately fine powder, 

Liquorice root, in moderately fine powder, each, two troyounces. 
Oil of sassafras, 
Oil of anise, each, five minims. 
Oil of gaultheria, three minims. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (6 lbs. 9 oz. com.), ninety-six troyounces. 
AVater, a pint. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the solid ingredients, except the sugar, with three pints of 
diluted alcohol, and allow the mixture to stand for four days ; then 
transfer it to a cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour diluted 
alcohol upon it until six pints of tincture have passed. Evaporate 
this, by means of a water-bath, to three pints, add the water, filter, 
and add the sugar, dissolve it with the aid of heat, and strain the 
solution while hot. Lastly, rub the oils with a small portion of 
the solution, and mix them thoroughly with the remainder. 

Syrupus Scillce. (Syrup of Squill.) U. S. P. 

Take of Vinegar of squill, a pint. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 10 ozs. com.), twenty-four troy- 
ounces. 

Dissolve the sugar in the vinegar of squill, with the aid of a 
gentle heat, and strain the solution while hot. 



708 or syrups and honeys. 

Syrupus Scillce Compositus. (Compound Syrup of Squill.) U.S. P. 

Take of Squill, in moderately coarse powder, 

Seneka, in moderately fine powder, each, four troyounces. 

Tartrate of antimony and potassium, forty-eight grains. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (2 lbs. 14 oz. com.), forty-two troyounces. 

Diluted alcohol, 

Water, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the squill and seneka, and, having moistened the mixture 
with half a pint of diluted alcohol, allow it to stand for four days. 
Then transfer it to a conical percolator, and pour diluted alcohol 
upon it until three pints of tincture have passed. Boil this for a 
few minutes, evaporate it by means of a water-bath to a pint, add 
fourteen fluidounces of boiling water, and filter. Dissolve the 
sugar in the filtered liquid, and, having heated the solution to the 
boiling point, strain it while hot. Then dissolve the tartrate of 
antimony and potassium in the solution while still hot, and add 
sufficient boiling water, through the strainer, to make it measure 
three pints. Lastly, mix the whole thoroughly together. 

Syrupus Senegce. (Syrup of Seneka.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Seneka, in moderately fine powder, four troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. £ oz. com.), fifteen troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, two pints. 

Moisten the seneka with two fluidounces of the diluted alcohol ; 
then transfer it to a conical percolator, and gradually pour on it the 
remainder of the diluted alcohol. "When the tincture has ceased 
to pass, evaporate it, by means of a water-bath, at a temperature 
not exceeding 160°, to half a pint ; then filter, and, having added 
the sugar, dissolve it with the aid of a gentle heat, and strain the 
solution while hot. 

Syrupus Tolutanus. (Syrup of Tolu.) U. S. P. 

Take of Tincture of Tolu, two fluidounces. 

Carbonate of magnesium, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Sugar, in coarse powder (1 lb. 12£ oz. com.), twenty-six troy- 
ounces. 
Water, a pint. 

Rub the tincture of Tolu first with the carbonate of magnesium 
and two troyounces of the sugar, then with the water, gradually 
added, and filter. To the filtered liquid add the remainder of the 
sugar, and, having dissolved it with the aid of a gentle heat, strain 
the solution while hot. 

Syrupus Zingiberis. (Syrup of Ginger.) U. S. P. 

Take of Fluid extract of ginger, a fluidounce. 

Carbonate of magnesium, one hundred and sixty grains. 
Sugar, in coarse powder, seventy-two troyounces. 
Water, forty-two fluidounces. 

Rub up the fluid extract of ginger first with the carbonate of 
magnesium and two troyounces of sugar, and then with the water 



UNOFFICINAL SYRUPS. 709 

gradually added, and filter. To the filtered liquid add the re- 
mainder of the sugar, and, having dissolved it with the aid of a 
gentle heat, strain the solution while hot. 

Unofficinal Syrups. 
Sy?*up of Chamomile. (Syrupus Anthemidis.) 

Take of Chamomile flowers, in coarse powder One troyounce. 

Cold water Twelve fluidounces. 

Kenned sugar, in coarse powder . . Twenty ounces. 

Make an infusion by displacement of the chamomile flowers and 
water, remove the residue from the apparatus, and place the coarsely 
powdered sugar in its stead ; on this pour the infusion until it is 
entirely dissolved. 

The foregoing formula by the author was published in the Ame- 
rican Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xvi. p. 18, and although not an 
active medicinal agent, has been acceptable to some of the many 
admirers of chamomile. 

The dose might be stated at a tablespoonful. 

Syrup of Pipsissewa. (Syrupus Chimaphilce.) (Prof. Procter.) 

Take of Pipsissewa (Chimaphila, U. S.) . . Four troyounces. 

Sugar Twelve troyounces. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Macerate the pipsissewa, finely bruised, in eight fluidounces of 
water for thirty-six hours, and then subject it to displacement, 
until one pint of fluid is obtained ; reduce this by evaporation to 
eight fluidounces, add the sugar, and form a syrup in the usual 
manner. 

The long preliminary maceration is rendered necessary by the 
coriaceous character of the leaves, which impedes their easy ex- 
haustion by the menstruum. 

On account of this property, some have preferred boiling them 
in successive portions of water, mixing the decoctions, evaporating, 
and, after the sugar has been dissolved, adding a small portion of 
alcohol, to obviate the proneness to decomposition common to most 
syrups made in this way. 

One fluidounce of this syrup represents two drachms of the leaves. 
Syrup of pipsissewa is an efficient preparation of one of our most 
valuable and abundant indigenous tonic and alterative medicines. 
Dose, a tablespoonful. 

Pipsissewa is much used in combination with sarsaparilla and 
other alteratives, and enters into numerous private recipes of that 
description. 



Syrup of Uva Ursi. (Syrupus Uvai Ursi.) (Duhamel and Procter.) 

Take of Bearberry leaves (Uva Ursi, 77. 8. ) . Four troyounces. 

Water A sufficient quantity. 

Sugar One pound. 

To the finely bruised uva ursi, add water till it is thoroughly 



710 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

moistened, then place it in a displacement apparatus, and operate 
by percolation till it is exhausted of all its soluble active principles ; 
then evaporate to ten fluidounces ; add the sugar, and form a syrup, 
marking 31° Baume. 

The dose of this might be stated as a tablespoonful. Like the 
foregoing, this syrup is a good preparation of a valuable medicine; 
the two may often be advantageously associated in diseases of the 
urinary organs. 

Compound Syrup of Carrageen. 

Take of Horehound (Marrubium, U. S.) . . 1 ounce. 

Liverwort (Hepatica, 77. 8.) ... 6 drachms. 
Water 4 pints. 

Boil for 15 minutes, express, and strain ; then add 

Carrageen (Chondrus, 77. S.) . . . 6 drachms, 

previously well washed with cold water. Boil again for 15 or 20 
minutes, strain through flannel, and add 

Sugar, 1 lb. (commercial) to each pint by measure. 

The dose of this agreeable medicine is a teaspoonful occasionally; 
it is a good demulcent, without sedative effects. 

The foregoing recipe has been in use for some twenty years in 
our establishment, and the syrup has been pretty extensively used 
as a popular cough medicine. It does not keep well in summer, 
unless in a cool place. 

Compound Syrup of Blackberry Root (Syrupus Hubi Comp.) 

Take of Blackberry root, bruised 8 troyounces. 

Cinnamon, 
Cloves, and 

Nutmegs, of each 3 drachms. 

Sugar 4 pounds (commercial). 

Water 4 pints. 

Boil the root and the aromatics in the water for one hour ; ex- 
press and strain; then add the sugar, form a syrup, and again 
strain; then add 

French brandy 6 fluidounces. 

Oil of cloves, and 

Oil of cinnamon, of each 4 drops. 

Dose, from a teaspoonful for a child of two years old, to a table- 
spoonful for an adult, repeated as occasion requires. 

The astringent virtues of blackberry root are almost universally 
known, and it is much used in the form of decoction and syrup 
throughout the country, both as a domestic remedy and in regular 
medical practice. This preparation has been long in use, and has 
the merit of an aromatic and gently stimulant effect combined with 
astringency. 



UNOFFICINAL SYRUPS. 711 

Syrup of Sweet Gum Bark. (Liquidambar Styraciflua.) 

Dr. Charles W. Wright, Professor of Chemistry in the Kentucky 
School of Medicine, recommends a syrup made from the bark of 
liquidambar styraciflua, or sweet gum tree of our forests, as a remedy 
in the diarrhoea so prevalent among children in our large cities in 
hot weather, and which frequently terminates in cholera infantum. 
His formula is that of the officinal syrup of wild cherry, merely 
substituting one bark for the other. The advantage claimed for 
it is that of being retained by an irritable stomach when almost 
every other form of astringent medicine is rejected; the taste is 
very agreeable. The dose for an adult is a fluidounce after each 
operation of the bowels; children may take from a naidrachm to 
half a fiuidounce. 

Syrup of Frostwort. (Syrupus Helianthemi.) 

Take of Frostwort (the herb) 4 ounces. 

Water, and 

Alcohol, of each A sufficient quantity. 

Sugar 16 ounces. 

Macerate the bruised herb in eight fluidounces of diluted alcohol, 
for twenty-four hours; percolate with a mixture of one part of 
alcohol to three of water, till the liquid comes over nearly free from 
the taste and color of the plant ; then evaporate to one pint, add 
the sugar, boil for a minute or two, and strain. 

Rock rose, frostwort, and frost weed are common synonyms of 
the herb which is officinal in the secondary list of the Pharmacopxia 
as helianthemum, the herb of helianthemum Canadense; but more 
familiarly known as cistus Canadensis, the name given to it by 
some botanists. 

Having for some years prepared a syrup of this plant, which was 
used with success by my brother, the late Dr. Isaac Parrish,in scro- 
fulous affections of the eyes, and also by several other practitioners 
in diseases of the scrofulous type, I insert the formula as above for 
the information of such as are disposed to make a trial of this 
valuable indigenous alterative. 

The dose of this syrup is a nuidrachm three times a day. 

Syrup of Bittersweet (Syrupus Dulcamarce.) 

Take of Bittersweet, coarsely powdered 4 ounces. 

Water . 12 ounces. 

Alcohol 4 fluidounces. 

Mix the liquids, and having moistened the bittersweet with six 
fluidounces of the menstruum, set it aside for four days, then pack it 
in a displacer, pour on the powder menstruum sufficient to obtain 
one pint of tincture, using water to displace the mixed alcohol and 
water ; evaporate to half a pint, add fifteen ounces of sugar, and make 
a syrup. Dose, a tablespoonful. 

This recipe furnishes a syrup which is adapted to use by itself, or 
in combination with those of sarsaparilla and other alteratives in 
cutaneous and rheumatic diseases. 



712 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

* 

Syrup of Gillenia. 

Take of Gillenia (root) ^ij. 

Diluted alcohol . Oj. 

Sugar Thirty troyounces. 

Water Sufficient. 

Reduce the gillenia to coarse powder, treat it by displacement 
with diluted alcohol till Oj is obtained. Evaporate to f.lvj, filter, 
and add sufficient water to make the liquid measure Oj, then add 
the sugar and dissolve by the aid of heat. 

This syrup has the same proportion of the medicinal ingredient 
contained in syrup of ipecacuanha, which it resembles in properties, 
though less agreeable to the taste. The dose is £5j. 

The high price which ipecacuanha has so long sustained has led 
to inquiries for a good substitute growing on our own soil, and 
always attainable. " Gillenia trifoliata," Indian physic, is a common 
indigenous herb, the root of which has long been known to possess 
very decided nauseant and emetic properties. It cannot be claimed 
for it that it is identical with ipecacuanha in therapeutical action, 
although sufficiently allied to it to be used in many cases, particu- 
larly of catarrhal affections, as a substitute. The foregoing syrup 
I have contrived with a view to remove one of the chief objections 
on the part of the physician to the trial of indigenous drugs, namely, 
the absence of suitable preparations. As far as it has yet been 
used, it gives promise of answering a good purpose. 

Williams' Sarsaparilla Syrup. 

This preparation was much prescribed by the late Dr. J. K. 
Mitchell, who furnished the following formula : — ■ 

Take of Compound syrup of sarsaparilla Oj. 

Corrosive chloride of mercury gr. ij. 

Extract of conium ,§j. 

Triturate the corrosive chloride with a little alcohol and water 
till dissolved, then incorporate it and the extract of conium with 
the syrup. 

Dose, a tablespoonful. 

Syrup of Assafoztida. (R. Peltz.) 

The object of this formula is to furnish a preparation of assafce- 
tida, free from alcoholic stimulus, and yet tolerably permanent. 
Although an old specimen of this syrup has a more fetid odor than 
a recent one, yet the change takes place much less rapidly, and to 
a less extent, than in the case of the milk or mixture of assafcetida, 
for which it may be substituted by the physician when it is not 
convenient to prepare the former: — 

Take of Assafcetida One ounce. 

Boiling water One pint. 

Sugar Two pounds. 

Rub the assafcetida with part of the boiling water, till a uniform 
paste is made ; then gradually add the rest of the water, strain, and 



UNOFFICINAL SYRUPS. 713 

• 

add the sugar, applying a gentle heat to dissolve it. Dose, a table- 
spoonful, containing seven grains and a half (15 grains to the fluid- 
ounce) of assafoetida. 

By adding one part of tincture of assafoetida to four parts of 
syrup, and evaporating off' the alcohol, a substitute for the fore- 
going may be prepared. 

Syrup of Poppies. (Syrupus Papaveris.) 

Take of Poppy heads 16 ounces. 

Diluted alcohol 4 pints. 

Sugar 30 ounces. 

Deprive the poppy-heads of their seeds ; bruise them thoroughly, 
macerate them in twice their weight of diluted alcohol for two 
days, express powerfully, add the remainder of the diluted alcohol, 
and after twenty-four hours again express ; evaporate the liquid to 
one pint, strain, and add the sugar, and dissolve by the aid of a 
gentle heat. 

This S} T rup, which, as usually prepared, is extremely liable to 
ferment, and on that account is a very troublesome preparation to 
apothecaries who have occasional calls for it, may be conveniently 
made by the above process of Professor Procter, so as to be perma- 
nent. 

The proportion of the capsules, though somewhat, smaller in this 
than in the formula of the London Pharmacopoeia, is larger than 
those of most of the continental authorities ; the dose may be stated 
to be from a fluidrachm to a half fluidounce. There is consider- 
able difference in the strength of this syrup, if the weight of the 
capsules is taken before the removal of the seeds, as implied in this 
recipe, instead of afterwards, as implied in the recipe of the London 
College. The London College directs its preparation with boiling 
water, and the subsequent addition of alcohol to prevent fermenta- 
tion, a very inferior process to that recommended above. 

Dorvault recommends the syrup of poppies to be prepared by dis- 
solving half a troyounce of extract of poppies in eight troyounces 
of water, filtering, and adding this solution to fifty troyounces of 
simple syrup, and evaporating to fifty troyounces weight. 

Syrup of Sulphate of Morphia. 

I believe there is no published recipe for this except one that is 
given in Griffith's Formulary, credited to Cadet, which prescribes 
one grain of the salt to four fluidounces of syrup. Under the head 
of Syrup of Poppies, in the U. S. Dispensatory, Dr. Wood suggests 
the use of a syrup made by dissolving four grains of the sulphate 
of morphia in a pint of syrup (a quarter of a grain to the ounce, 
the same as Cadet's) as a substitute for the syrup of poppies, which, 
made by the old recipe, is so prone to ferment. 

Notwithstanding that we have no officinal or other recognized 
recipe (that of Cadet being almost unknown in this country), physi- 
cians frequently prescribe syrupus morphiee sulphatis, and generally, 



714 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

as far as I have inquired, under the impression that there is a 
syrup corresponding in strength with the officinal liquor morphias 
sulphatis, one grain to the ounce, and hence the habit has grown 
up with apothecaries of making this preparation extemporaneously 
of that strength. 

This is more remarkable, from the fact that the syrups of acetate 
and muriate of morphia of the Dublin Pharmacopoeia are in the 
proportion of one grain to four fluidounces. 

This discrepancy in practice cannot, I think, be remedied by the 
further publication of unauthorized recipes, and physicians should 
not fail to indicate the proportions designed in prescribing the salt 
in solution in syrup. Should there not be an officinal preparation 
with such a distinctive name and authorized proportions as would 
remedy so serious a departure from uniformity? 

Jackson' 's Pectoral Syrup. 

Alfred B. Taylor, in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. 
xxiv. p. 34, holds the following language : — 

"A prescription of Prof. Samuel Jackson, of Philadelphia, fami- 
liarly known as his 'pectoral syrup/ has obtained considerable 
reputation from its beneficial action in cases of coughs, colds, etc. 
We believe the prescription was originally given to Mr. E. Durand, 
but as the syrup has for some time been a standing preparation 
with many of our druggists, we have thought that a published 
formula would be acceptable both for the purpose of giving its 
benefit to those who may not be familiar with its composition, and 
of promoting uniformity among those who may already be ac- 
customed to prepare it. Dr. Jackson has furnished us with the 
following recipe : — ■ 

Take of Sassaf. medullse 3j. 

Acacise 3j. 

Sacchari fojf. 

Morphise muriat gr. viij. 

Aquae Oj. or q. s. 

" The sassafras pith and gum Arabic are to be put into the water 
and allowed to stand ten or twelve hours with occasional stirring. 
The sugar is to be dissolved, cold, in the mucilage, which, after 
being strained, should be made to measure two pints by the addi- 
tion of water; lastly, the muriate of morphia is to be dissolved in 
the syrup." 

In one recipe which has been used for a number of years, half a 
grain of sulphate of morphia is prescribed, in place of a quarter of 
a grain, to the ounce, as in the above, and to this is added about 
half a drachm of Hoffmann's anodyne, and a drop of oil of sassafras 
to each pint. 

A recipe used by some pharmacists is as follows : — 

Take of Syrup of gum Arabic One pint. 

Muriate of morphia Four grains. 

Oil of sassafras Four drops. 

Mix. 

The adult dose of this syrup is a teaspoonful. 



UNOFFICINAL SYRUPS. 715 

» 

Aubergier's Syrup of Lactucarium. 

The recipe of Aubergier contains 45 grains of extract of "Eng- 
lish" lactucarium, 15 grains of citric acid, and sufficient boiling 
water with the proper proportion of sugar, and sufficient orange- 
flower water to flavor it, to constitute one pint of syrup. It is, 
however, a very mild preparation, the extract being very partially 
soluble in the citric acid and water, so that scarcely half a grain 
of lactucarium is contained in the teaspoOnful. The new officinal 
syrupus lactucarii, on the contrary, is a comparatively strong prepa- 
ration, which would be very unsuitable to dispense when Auber- 
gier's is called for. The fluid extract of lactucarium, described in 
the chapter on that class of preparations, was originally prepared 
by "W. C. Bakes and myself (see Amer. Journ. of Pharm., 1860, p. 
225) for the purpose of making a substitute for Aubergier's syrup 
and for tincture of lactucarium ; the following is the modified 
formula for the syrup : — 

Take of Fluid ext. of (English) lactucarium . . A fluidrachm. 

Sugar Two pounds (com.). 

Water One pint. 

Syrup of orange-flower Four fluidounces. 

Triturate the fluid extract with a portion of the sugar, dissolve 
this and the remainder of the sugar in the water by the aid of heat, 
strain, and add the syrup of orange-flower. 

To those having the officinal syrup prepared, the following for- 
mula may be a convenience in preparing a modified Aubergier's: — 

Take of Syrup of lactucarium, 77. S. P 1 part. 

Simple syrup 10 parts. 

Syrup of orange-flower 4 parts. 

Mix them. 

This is a mild expectorant and sedative preparation, given in 
doses of a teaspoonful to a tablespoonful. 

A more efficient syrup of lactucarium may be readily prepared as 
follows : — 

Take of Fluid extract of lactucarium f,f j. 

Glycerin i|j. 

Sugar . . Six troyounces. 

Stronger alcohol f^ij. 

Rub the lactucarium with 1 oz. sugar ; then add very gradually 
with trituration f3yj of water, and filter; pass water through the 
filter till fourteen fluidrachms have been obtained, to which add 
f3ij of alcohol ; then mix with syrup made by dissolving five tnw- 
ounces of sugar with two fluidounces of water and a fluidounce of 
glycerin. 

Syrup of Manna. (Syrupus Mannce.) 

This is often directed by practitioners, without a very clear idea 
of what they are prescribing, since neither of the British Pharma- 
copoeias nor our own contains any mention of it. The following 



716 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

recipe, taken from the Pharmacopee TJniverselle, I have used with 
satisfactory results : — 

Take of Flake manna Ten ounces. 

Water Twelve ounces. 

Make a solution, strain, and add 

Sugar • One pound (com.). 

"Which dissolve by the aid of heat. 

This is an elegant laxative, where not contraindicated by debility 
of the digestive organs, and is chiefly prescribed for children and 
parturient women. 

When extemporaneously prepared, there seems no necessity of 
adding the sugar at all, as a simple solution of manna in water is 
sufficiently agreeable, besides being stronger than the above. The 
peculiar sugar of manna is not fermentable. 

Syrupus Gallce. (Syrup of Galls. Aromatic Syrup of Galls.) 

This old and esteemed recipe is attributed to several eminent 
physicians of the last generation. It is used in chronic diarrhoea, 
and obstinate cases of dysentery. 

Take of Bruised galls ^ss. 

Brandy fjviij. 

Introduce into an fsviij vial, digest in hot water for half an 
hour, and filter ; then pour it into a saucer, and inflame the spirit 
with a lighted taper; add sugar 3ij, by melting it in the flame on 
a fine wire support, and allowing it to drop into the brandy, which 
must be stirred till it ceases to burn, and a syrup is formed. Then 
introduce it again into the f'Sviij vial, and fill it up with water. 

Some recipes direct that cinnamon and mace, of each 3ij, shall be 
digested in the brandy, which is an improvement on the foregoing. 
Dose, a teaspoonful to a tablespoonful ; for infants from 10 to 20 
drops. 

Syrup of Lacto-phosphate of Lime. 
Take of Precipitated phosphate of lime . ^iv. 

Dissolve in fgvj of muriatic acid diluted with flxvj of water; 
precipitate with sufficient water of ammonia. Wash rapidly on a 
filter, press out the excess of water, and add f^iv of concentrated 
lactic acid ; when dissolved, add f 3x1 of distilled water and 54 oz. 
(avoir.) of sugar ; dissolve the sugar without heat and add f ^x of 
orange-flower water. Let the finished syrup be made up to 80 
fluidounces by the addition of water. 

This syrup has been much prescribed in cases where the phos- 
phatic lime salt is indicated. 

Mellita. Honeys. 

The officinal class Mellita differs from the syrups in being made 
with honey, a mixed saccharine product described in Part IV. 
They are only three in number, as follows : — 



GLYCERITA — GLYCERITES. 717 

Mel Despumatum. (Clarified Honey.) IT. S. P. 
Take of Honey, a convenient quantity. 
Melt it by means of a water-bath, and then remove the scum. 

Mel Rosce. (Honey of Rose.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Red rose, in moderately fine powder, two troy ounces. 
Clarified honey, twenty-five troyounces. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with half a fluidounce of diluted alcohol, 
pack it firmly in a conical glass percolator, and gradually pour 
diluted alcohol upon it until six fluidrachms of filtered liquid have 
passed. Set this aside, and continue the percolation until half a 
pint more of liquid is obtained. Evaporate this, by means of a 
water-bath, to ten fluidrachms, add the reserved liquid, and mix 
the whole with clarified honey. 

Mel Sodii Boratis. (Honey of Borax.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Borate of sodium, in fine powder, sixty grains. 
Clarified honey, a troyounce. 

Mix them. 

The uses of these will be apparent. Honey of rose is an elegant 
astringent adapted to relieve diseased conditions of the throat and 
fauces, as an adjuvant to gargles, mouth washes, etc. Honey of 
borax has similar uses, and is especially efficient in the sore mouth 
of infants. The peculiar adhesiveness of honey adapts it to these 
purposes better than sugar. 

Oxymel of squill, officinal in the previous editions of the Pharma- 
copoeia, was dismissed from that of 1860. It consists of two pints 
of vinegar of squill to one and a half pints of honey, evaporated to 
the sp. gr. of 1.32. 

Simple oxymel, formerly officinal in the British Colleges, consists 
of mixtures of acetic acid, water, and honey r . 

Citromels and tartromels are solutions of citric and tartaric acid 
in honey, with the aid of a small proportion of water ; they have 
been proposed as vehicles for iodide of iron, which these vegetable 
acids are said to aid in preserving from decomposition. The use of 
honey with vegetable acids is preferred over cane sugar on account 
of the liability of the latter to pass into grape sugar in contact with 
acids. 

Glycerita, U. S. P. Glycerites. (Glycerin a, PL Br. Glycerines.) 
Glyceritum Acidi Carbolici, IT. S. P. (Glycerite of Carbolic Acid.) 

Take of Carbolic acid Two troyounces. 

Glycerin Half a pint. 

Hub them together in a mortar, until the acid is dissolved. 

Glyceritum Acidi Gallici, IT. S. P. (Glycerite of Gallic acid.) 

Take of Gallic acid Two troyounces. 

Glycerin Haifa pint. 



718 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

Rub them together in a mortar; then transfer to a glass or por- 
celain capsule, and heat gently until the acid is dissolved. 

Glyceritum Acidi Tannici, U. S. P. {Glycerite of Tannic Acid.) 

Take of Tannin Two troyounces. 

Glycerin Half a pint. 

Rub them together in a mortar; then transfer them to a glass or 
porcelain capsule and heat gently until the acid is dissolved. 

Glyceritum Picis Liquidce, U. S. P. {Glycerite of Tar.) 

Take of Tar A troyounce. 

Carbonate of magnesium, in powder . . Two troy ounces. 

Glycerin Four nuidounces. 

Alcohol Two nuidounces. 

Water Ten nuidounces. 

Having mixed the glycerin, alcohol, and water, rub the tar in a 
mortar, first with the carbonate of magnesium and then with six 
fluidounces of the mixed liquids gradually added, and strain with 
expression. Rub the residue in like manner with half the remain- 
ing liquid, and strain as before. Repeat the process again with the 
remaining liquid. Put the residue into a percolator, add gradu- 
ally the expressed liquids previously mixed, and afterwards a suffi- 
cient quantity of water to make the liquid which passes measure a 
pint. 

Glyceritum Sodii Boratis, U. S. P. {Glycerite of Borate of Sodium.) 

Take of Borate of sodium, in powder Two troyounces. 

Glycerin Half a pint. 

Rub them together in a mortar, until the borate of sodium is 
dissolved. 

This class was made officinal at the late revision of the Pharma- 
copoeia. The numerous purposes to which glycerin has been found 
applicable, and its ready miscibility with aqueous preparations, 
have rendered it important that some authoritative standard should 
be had for preparations of this class. The great reduction in the 
price of glycerin renders its introduction much more easy than it 
would have been a few years since. (For remarks respecting the 
nomenclature of this class of preparations, see 13th edition of U. S. 
Dispensatory, page 1197.) 

This class succeeds that formerly termed glyceroles, which are 
preparations in which glycerin is used in the place of other anti- 
septics, wholly or chiefly, in the preparation of remedies for inter- 
nal use. In England they were called glycerides; those used 
externally are called plasma, liniments, lotions, etc., mentioned 
among the topical remedies. Of those used internally, one or two 
will be found among the chemical remedies. The special uses of 
glycerin in pharmacy are, First ) as a solvent, in which capacity it 



FLAVORING SYRUPS. 719 

has very numerous applications. Second, as an antiseptic, for which 
it is well adapted. Third, as an emollient in irritable and inflam- 
matory conditions of the mucous surface and in skin diseases; and 
fourth, as a bland nutritive material to replace oils and fats. The 
chief objections to its use are founded on its comparatively high 
price, and the fact that the glyceroles are not usually as agreeable 
in taste as corresponding syrups. 

The solvent powder of glycerin is, in general, between that of 
water and alcohol, and generally substances may be said to be more 
soluble in glycerin, the more they are so in alcohol. A high tem- 
perature greatly increases its solvent power. 

Glycerole of Lactucarium. (F. Stearns.) 

Take of Lactucarium One ounce. 

Diluted alcohol, 

Boiling water, each Sufficient. 

Glycerin Twelve lluidounces. 

Citric acid Fifteen grains. 

Orange-flower water Two iiuidounces. 

Reduce the lactucarium to a moderately fine powder; moisten 
with one fluidounce of diluted alcohol and pack into a small dis- 
placer. After macerating twelve hours, pour upon it gradually 
diluted alcohol until the filtrate measures sixteen fluidounces, or 
until it passes without taste. Evaporate this on a water-bath nearly 
to dryness, then boil this residue with six fluidounces of water ; 
pour this off from the undissolved residue into a filter placed over 
a bottle containing the glycerin; add four fluidounces of water to 
the undissolved residue, boil, and filter into the first portion. Then 
evaporate the whole on a water-bath to fourteen fluidounces, and, 
when cool, add the orange-flower water in which the citric acid has 
been previously dissolved. Each fluidounce represents a half drachm 
of lactucarium. Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 

Glycerole of Sumach. (W. C. Bakes.) 

Take of Sumach berries Sixteen tro3^ounces. 

Boiling water Three pints. 

Macerate the sumach for an hour and a half, then express strongly, 
and add another pint of boiling water to the mass and express 
again. Mix the infusions and evaporate to eight fluidounces, then 
add glycerin sufficient to make the whole measure one pint, and 
filter. 

Flavoring Syrups used Chiefly in Connection with "Mineral 
Water" and other Beverages. 

Lemon Syrup. 

This is now almost universally made from citric or tartaric acid 
and oil of lemon, instead of lemon juice. Some of the confectioners, 
when they are overstocked with lemons, make them into syrup, 
but from the use of fruit that has partially spoiled, and from the 
syrup being made in such large quantities at once as to become 



720 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

more or less altered by keeping, before it is consumed, the article 
thus made is inferior to that made from acid and oil of lemon. A 
very fine flavoring syrup may, however, be made by using fresh 
lemons and making the syrup in small quantities, by the Pharma- 
copoeia process. 

Citric acid is preferable to tartaric for preparing the syrup; when 
made with the former acid it has a more agreeable flavor, which it 
retains longer unimpaired. The syrup made with either acid, when 
longer kept, is liable to throw down a white granular deposit of 
grape sugar. A u turpentine taste" is very common in the lemon 
syrup which is manufactured and sold wholesale, and may frequently 
be due to the employment of old or impure oil of lemon. A com- 
mon adulteration of this oil is the admixture of recently distilled 
oil of turpentine or camphene, and the adulterated oil may contain 
a considerable portion of it without its being perceptible by taste 
or odor while new, but as the camphene becomes resinous, the tur- 
pentine flavor is developed. But even pure oil of lemon degenerates 
in flavor and odor when long kept ; therefore, it is better to pre- 
pare the syrup in small quantities, so that it will be consumed 
before there is any change in its quality. 

A more delicate flavor of the lemon may be obtained by macerat- 
ing the outer portion of lemon-peel in deodorized alcohol, allowing 
this to evaporate spontaneously, and, when it is nearly all dissipated, 
adding it to sugar to be incorporated with the syrup, or triturating 
with magnesia, adding water, filtering, and making a syrup; as 
directed in the officinal process for syrup of orange-peel. 

The simple syrup used as a basis of these flavoring syrups may 
be made by the process given on page 703, or may contain a less 
proportion of sugar, say seven avoirdupois pounds to half a gallon 
of water. The lemon syrup will then be made easily, as follows: — ■ 

Take of Oil of lemon 20 drops. 

Citric acid An ounce. 

Simple syrup One gallon. 

Rub the oil of lemon with a little sugar and afterwards with a 
portion of syrup, and having dissolved the acid in a gill of water 
mix the whole thoroughly together. The addition to this, and to 
ginger, orange, and capsicum syrups of a little syrup of gum Arabic 
promotes their frothing. 

Lemonade may be made, of good quality, by mixing one pint of 
this syrup with two gallons of iced water, stirring thoroughly. 

Orange Syrup. 
1st Process. — 

Take of Syrup of orange-peel, U. 8. P One pint. 

Citric acid 45 grains. 

Dissolve the acid in the syrup. 

2d Process. — Take of oranges, the fresh fruit, a convenient number, 
grate oft" the yellow outside peel, cut the oranges and express the 
juice, to each quart of which add 

Water 1 pint. 

Susar 6 lbs. (com.). 



SARSAPARILLA SYRUP FOR MINERAL WATER. 721 

Mix the sugar with the grated peel, add the mixed water and 
juice, and apply a gentle heat till it is dissolved, then strain. 

One dozen oranges will make one and a half to two gallons of 
syrup. 

If a pure and fresh article of oil of orange can be obtained, the 
syrup may be made by the following formula: — 
3d Process. — 

Take of Syrup 2 pints. 

Oil of orange 5 minims. 

Citric acid 1 drachm. 

Mix. 

Ginger Syrup. 

The syrup made by the formulae of the Pharmacopoeia, lately 
revised, is all that can be desired, in the way of a bright, clear 
syrup, it being of the proper strength for mineral water use. 

Some druggists prefer to boil ginger in water, which extracts a 
large amount of starchy matter, and makes a richer and more 
frothy mineral-water syrup. The following is the recipe: — 

Take of Ginger, bruised 3 ounces. 

Water 2 pints. 

Boil for half an hour in a covered vessel, strain, and add 

Sugar 4 lbs. (com.). 

Continue the heat until it is dissolved. 

Capsicum Syrup. 

Take of Simple syrup Two pints. 

Tincture of capsicum A fluidounce. 

Heat the simple syrup, add the tincture, keep heated until the 
alcohol has evaporated, then mix immediately ; care should be 
taken not to allow the globules of resin of capsicum to separate 
from the syrup. 

This is a fine stimulant, which is used to advantage in mineral 
water, in intensely hot and debilitating weather, when the relaxed 
condition of the digestive organs seems to contraindicate the use of 
cold drinks. 

Sarsaparilla Syrup for Mineral Water. 

As this syrup is intended for making a pleasant beverage, it is 
made much weaker of sarsaparilla than the compound syrup of the 
Pharmacopoeia, and the senna, guaiac, etc., which enter into the 
composition of the latter, are very properly omitted. 

The following is the formula of Ambrose Smith: — 

Take of Sarsaparilla, finely bruised, 

Liquorice root, finely bruised, of each . . . 2 lbs. (com.). 

Sugar . . 30 lbs. (com.). 

Oil of anise, wintergreen, and sassafras, of each 40 drops. 

Oil of cinnamon 5 drops. 

Water q. s. 

Digest the roots 12 hours, with 2 gallons of warm water, then 
put into a percolator and displace, adding sufficient water until 2 
46 



722 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

gallons of infusion are obtained. In this dissolve the sugar with 
the aid of heat, and to the syrup when cooled add the oils, pre- 
viously rubbed up with a little sugar. 

The following formula is employed by some druggists: — 

Take of Sarsaparilla, liquorice root, each 1 lb. 

Cinnamon, sassafras, each 6 oz. 

Cloves, anise, coriander, each 2 oz. 

Red saunders, cochineal, each 1^ oz. 

Alcohol 2 pints. 

Water . 2 gallons. 

Digest the above for 4 days, strain, and make a syrup with 27 
lbs. (com.) of sugar. It is also frequently made by diluting the 
compound syrup with twice its measure of simple syrup, and adding 
the essential oils. The fluid extract of sarsaparilla, if mezereon 
enters into its composition, does not answer, as the persistent acri- 
mony of this bark is so perceptible even in the diluted syrup as to 
make it unpalatable. 

The following is our own formula: — 

Take of Simple syrup Oij. 

Comp. syrup of sarsap 15 ij. 

Caramel f^vj. 

Oil of gaultheria, and 

Oil of sassafras, of each 3 drops. 

Mix by shaking up in a bottle. 

Orgeat Syrup. 

This corresponds with the officinal syrupus amygdalae (see p. 704), 
with the addition of some more decided flavoring substance, as 
orange-flower water, bitter almond oil, or vanilla. 

The following formula is sometimes preferred, as requiring less 
time and trouble in its preparation : — 

Take of Cream syrup, 

Vanilla syrup, each 1 pint. 

Oil of bitter almonds 4 drops. 

Mix well together, observing not to make more than sufficient 
for one day's sales. 

Fruit Syrups. 

To make one gallon of strawberry, raspberry, or blackberry 
syrup :— 

Take of the fresh fruit 4 quarts. 

Water Sufficient. 

Sugar 8 lbs. (com.). 

Express the juice and strain, then add water till it measures four 
pints; dissolve the sugar in this by the aid of heat, raise it to the 
boiling point, and strain. If it is to be kept till the following 
season, it should be poured while hot into dry bottles, filled to the 
neck, and securely corked. 

The clothes-wringer (Fig. 215, page 579) will be found a good 
press for obtaining the juice from the fruit, which should be first 



FRUIT SYRUPS, 



723 



thoroughly mashed into pulp and inclosed in a very strong square 
canvas bag. 

Strawberry syrup is made by inclosing the ripe fruit in a strong 
bag, then applying pressure by means of a screw or lever press, or 
between elastic rollers as above ; small quantities may be pressed 
sufficiently by hand. The juice is now diluted, mixed with sugar, 
and transferred to a kettle, in which it is heated to the boiling 
point, and then strained while hot. 

The yield of juice from strawberries is from one-half to one-third 
the bulk of the berries, and the dilution with water, by the above 
rule, will be accordingly. 

Fig. 234 represents the straining bag ; and Figs. 235 and 236 the 
apparatus for straining and expressing, by means of a square piece 
of flannel or muslin. The mode of using them will be apparent. 



Pirr. 234. 



Fig. 235. 



Fig. 236. 




Another way to prepare this syrup, where a fine and very deli- 
cate flavor is desired, is to macerate the ripe berries in layers 
interspersed with powdered sugar, one and three-quarter pounds 
of sugar to a pound of the picked berries for twenty-four hours, 
in a cellar, and then throw them on a sieve or perforated 
capsule for the syrup to drain off. This juice is to be put into a 
bottle, loosely corked, set into a vessel of water, and heated to the 
boiling point ; after which it is to be tightly sealed and laid away 
in a cool place. 

Raspberry syrup is made by the same process ; the juice is richer 
in pectin and more liable to glutinize than the foregoing, so that 
it bears a larger dilution ; it improves the flavor of this syrup to 
use a small proportion of pie cherries, or currants — say a pound to 
four quarts of the raspberries. 

Blackberry syrup does not differ from the other fruit syrups in its 
mode of preparation, except in the usual addition of a small pro- 
portion of French brandy, say a fluidounce to each pint of syrup. 

The formula for these three syrups being the same, as the fruits 
yield variable quantities of juice, the degree of dilution is so regu- 
lated that every quart of the fruit will yield a quart of syrup. 

Blackberry brandy contains a much larger proportion of brandy 
and less sugar, with some aromatics. 



724 OF SYRUPS AND HONEYS. 

Aromatic Blackberry Syrup. (Dr. P. B. G-oddard.) 

Take of Blackberry juice Oij. 

Sugar Tbj. 

Nutmegs, grated No. vj. 

Cinnamon, bruised ^ss. 

Cloves 3ij. 

Allspice ^ij. 

Brandy . . . Oj. 

Make into a syrup secundem artem. 

The astringent properties of blackberry juice adapt it particu- 
larly, in combination with carminatives, to the treatment of bowel 
complaints. 

Raspberry Vinegar. 

Take of Easpberry syrup Oij. 

Acetic acid f^ss. 

Mix them. 

Added to iced water according to taste, this is one of the most 
delightful of refrigerant drinks. 

Take of Easpberry juice Oijss. 

White wine vinegar Oj. 

Sugar , . fcs. 6 (com.). 

Dissolve the syrup with a gentle heat, and strain, if necessary. 

This latter formula yields a much more delicate preparation. 

With the object of removing pectin from the juice of fleshy fruits, 
the Prussian Pharmacopoeia directs the production of incipient fer- 
mentation. The following is a type of the class : — 

Cherry Syrup. 

Take of fresh sour cherries, a convenient quantity, bruise them 
with the stones and let them stand for three days, then express the 
juice and set aside until, after fermentation, it has become clear. 
To 20 ounces (weight) of this filtered juice add of sugar 36 ounces, 
and make into a syrup by raising to the boiling point. 

The raspberry and other similar juices, as imported into this 
country from France and Germany, are, or ought to be, the juices 
prepared in the above way; they are devoid of the mucilaginous 
principles (pectin, etc.), contain a small quantity of alcohol, and 
keep well in sealed bottles ; exposed to the air, of course they soon 
undergo acetous fermentation. 

Artificial Syrup of Raspberry. 

The following formula, though not recommended as a substitute 
for the true fruit syrup, will be found a tolerable approximation 
to it : — 

Take of Orris root (selected) 1 oz. 

Cochineal 2 dr. 

Tartaric acid 2 dr. 

"Water 1 quart. 

Powder the orris root coarsely, together with the cochineal, 
infuse in the water with the acid for twenty-four hours ; strain, 
and add four pounds of sugar ; raise to the boiling point and again 



FLAVORING EXTRACTS. 725 

strain. A few drops of artificial extract of raspberry (see Part IV.) 
may be added when cold. 

Pineapple Syrup. 

Take of the fruit a convenient number, pare them and mash 
them, without slicing, in a marble or porcelain mortar, express the 
juice, and take for each quart — 

Water 1 pint. 

Sugar 6 lbs. (com.). 

The water and sugar may be placed on the fire and heated to 
near the boiling point before adding the juice, after which, continue 
the heat till the syrup boils, then remove from the fire, skim, and 
strain. Preserve this as the foregoing. 

Vanilla Syimp. 

Take of Vanilla 6 drachms. 

Boiling water 4^ pints. 

Sugar 8 lbs. (com.). 

Reduce the vanilla to fine powder by trituration with a portion 
of sugar, boil this with water two hours in a covered vessel, then 
strain, and dissolve in it the remainder of the sugar. 

Another formula, which is preferable, is — 

Take of Fluid extract of vanilla f ^j. 

Syrup f3xv. 

Mix. 

Coffee Syrup. 

Take of Roasted coffee 4 oz. 

Boiling water 2 pints. 

Sugar 4 lbs. (com.). 

Digest the coffee in coarse powder in the boiling water, in a 
covered vessel, filter, or clarify with white of egg, strain, and add 
the sugar. 

Wild Cherry Syrup is a popular and wholesome flavor for mineral 
water ; the officinal article can hardly be improved upon. 

Cream Syrups. 

These are mixtures of highly flavored syrups with fresh cream. 
They must be made fresh every few clays, and may contain equal 
parts of their ingredients, or, preferably, two parts of the flavored 
syrup to one of cream. 

Some pharmacists prefer to make syrup of cream, and to flavor 
this by the addition of strong fruit, and other syrups, in the glass, 
on drawing the mineral water. 

Simple Syrup of Cream. 

Take of Fresh cream 1 pint. 

Powdered sugar 1 lb. (com.). 

Mix and shake well together. To be kept in bottles not exceed- 



726 CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ETC. 

ing a pint. The formula of A. T>. Taylor directs equal parts of 
cream and milk with the same proportion of sugar. That of 0. S. 
Hubbell directs fourteen pounds of sugar to each gallon of cream. 

Nectar Cream is variously made from cream syrup and flavored 
syrups. The following is a good mixture : — 

Take of Simple syrup of cream 1 part. 

Yanilla syrup 3 parts. 

Pineapple syrup 1 part. 

Lemon syrup 1 part. 

Mix. 

Hubbell's formula directs the addition of sherry wine, against 
which objections might be urged as tending to promote a taste for 
alcoholic stimulants. A great variety of fancy names are given to 
these combinations of cream syrup with alcoholic and other flavor- 
ing ingredients. 

Factitious Cream Syrujp. 

Take of 01. amygd. dulcis (recent) f t fiij. 

Pulv. acacise ^ij. 

Aquae ^ix. 

M. ft. Emulsio, et adde 

Sacchari albi ftj. 

Albumen ovi JSTo. ij. 

Dissolve the sugar by a gentle heat, strain, and when cold add 
the white of egg ; fill small bottles and keep in a cool place, well 
corked. This preparation will keep for a long time. For use, mix 
one part with eight of any of the ordinary syrups, or add about a 
drachm to every glass. 

It forms an imitation of orgeat by mixing two drachms or more 
with two ounces of simple syrup, and flavoring with bitter almond 
and orange-flower water. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

OF CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ELECTUARIES, PASTES, LOZENGES, AND 

CANDIES. 

Preparations having pectin as their basis, or containing medi- 
cinal substances suspended in a semi-solid form by the aid of honey 
and syrup, are variously termed Conserves, Electuaries, and Con- 
fections. 

The officinal class Pulpce of a previous Pharmacopoeia, consisting 
of the pulps of prunes, tamarinds, and figs, was dismissed in the 
revision of 1860, and the class Confectiones altered so as to embrace 
the process formerly included in it. 



CONFECTIONES. 727 

CONFECTIONES, U. S. P. 

This class naturally subdivides into two, which are nearly alike 
in their properties, but quite unlike in their mode of preparation. 

1st Class. — Conserves. 

Confectio Aurantii corticis, TJ. S., 1 part peel (grated) to 3 sugar. 
" Rosce (by an unofficinal process), 1 part rose leaf to 3 sugar. 
" Amygdalae, (Lond. Ph.), sweet almonds, gum, and sugar. 

By beating with powdered sugar a fresh, moist substance, as uu- 
dried rose petals, or the rind of a fresh orange, or a fruit rich in oil, 
and naturally moist, like the almond, we obtain a true conserve. 
The trituration should be continued till a smooth and uniform firm 
paste is produced, which will generally be permanent if kept in a 
well -covered vessel, except in the instance of the almond, which will 
be rendered unfit for use by long keeping, and hence the confection 
has been omitted in the recent editions of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. 

Confection of rose is more frequently made, according to my obser- 
vation, by the above process, with the common hundred-leaved and 
damask-rose petals, than by that of the Pharmacopoeia, in which the 
powdered red-rose petals are directed to be made into an electuary ; 
so that Confectio Rosas, as usually met with, is not decidedly 
astringent. 

Confection of orange-peel is made chiefly, as directed by the officinal 
formula, from the rind of the common sweet orange, so abundant 
in our market, and not from bitter orange-peel. The proportion is 
one part of the grated rind to three of sugar. 

Confection of almonds is made from the blanched almonds, tritu- 
rated through a fine sieve, and thoroughly incorporated with the 
gum and sugar, thus forming the whole into a mass. It furnishes 
a ready mode of forming almond mixtures. 

2d Class. — Electuaries. 

Confectio Rosse. Powd. red rose 2 p., sugar 15 p., honey 3 p., rose-water 4 p. 
" Aromaticus. Aromatic powder, honey, equal parts. 
" Opii (1 gr. in 36). Opium powd., aromatic powd., and honey. 
" Sennae. P. senna and coriander, added to pulp of prunes, figs, tarmarinds, 
and purging cassia. 

All of this division of the confections are made from dried and 
powdered materials, incorporated mechanically with a saccharine 
liquid into mass. 

Confection of rose is used as a vehicle in the preparation of pills, 
which is almost its only use ; it is directed in the formula for blue 
pills. 

Aromatic confection and confection of opium are somewhat used as 
vehicles ; the latter is prescribed in old recipes, and sometimes in 
prescriptions, as Theriaca Andronica. It enters into the compo- 
sition of a celebrated fever and ague mixture introduced among 
extemporaneous preparations; it is sometimes called Venice treacle. 

Confection of senna is a fine laxative, and, when properly pre- 



728 CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ETC. 

pared is one of the most agreeable remedies of its class. If given 
in large enough quantities to purge actively, it is liable to disagree 
with the stomach when there is a want of tone in that organ, and 
to become distasteful to the patient. 

Confectio Sennce, U. S. P. (Confection of Senna. Lenitive Electuary.) 

Take of Senna, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 

Coriander, in fine powder, four troyounces. 

Purging cassia, finely bruised, sixteen troyounces. 

Tamarind, ten troyounces. 

Prune, sliced, seven troyounces. 

Fig, bruised, twelve troyounces. 

Sugar, in coarse powder, thirty troyounces. 

"Water, a sufficient quantit} r . 

Digest, in a close vessel, by means of a water-bath, the purging 
cassia, tamarind, prune, and fig in three pints of water for three 
hours. Separate the coarser portions with the hand, and pass the 
pulpy mass, by rubbing, first through a coarse hair sieve, and then 
through a fine one, or a muslin cloth. Mix the residue with a pint 
of water, and, having digested the mixture for a short time, treat 
it as before, and add the product to the pulpy liquid first obtained. 
Then by means of a water-bath, dissolve the sugar in the pulpy 
liquid, and evaporate the whole until it weighs eighty-four troy- 
ounces, or until it has been brought to the consistence of honey. 
Lastly, add the senna and coriander and incorporate them thoroughly 
with the other ingredients while yet warm. The whole should 
weigh ninety -six troyounces. 

Few manufacturers take the trouble to make this preparation in 
perfection. The above, which is an improved and simplified formula, 
should induce every pharmacist to make the confection, and by 
following the formula carefully, and securing a perfectly fine powder 
of coriander seed, a good preparation will be the result. 

Hemorrhoid Electuary. 

The following recipe has been in use for many years as a remedy 
for piles, and, from the numerous cases in which it has afforded 
relief, is believed worthy a place among our unofiicinal formulas: — 

Take of Bitartrate of potassium, 
Powdered jalap, 

Powdered nitrate of potassium, of each . . Half an ounce. 
Confection of senna An ounce. 

Make an electuary with syrup of ginger. 

Dose, a piece the size of a marble three times a day. 

Pile Electuary. (Dr. Parrish, Sr.) 

Take of Senna, in fine powder ^ij. 

Extract of liquorice ,^j. 

Sulphur |j. 

Bhubarb, in fine powder ^ij. 

Ginger ^ij- 

Honey, q. s. ft. mass. 

Dose, a piece the size of a hazel-nut two or three times a day. 



PASTES. 729 

Confection of Black Pepper. ( Ward's Paste.) 

The following is the recipe from the London Pharmacopoeia for 
this celebrated preparation, which is not unfrequently prescribed 
for piles ; it is said to require to be used continuously for some 
months to realize good results : — 

Take of Black pepper, Eeduced. 

Elecampane, each 1 pound 5J. 

Fennel (seeds) 3 pounds ^iij. 

Honey, 

Sugar, each 2 pounds §ij. 

Rub the dry ingredients together into a very fine powder, and 
keep them in a covered vessel ; but, whenever the confection is to 
be used, add the powder gradually to the honey, and beat them 
until thoroughly incorporated. Dose, 5j to 3ij, three times a day. 

Pastes. 

Medicines having sugar and gum for their basis, of a firm yet 
flexible consistence, intermediate between confections and lozenges, 
are called Pastes. These are usually sold in sheets, or in small 
squares, each of which is of suitable size to be taken at one time 
into the mouth, and covered with powdered sugar, or, in the case 
of jujube paste, with oil, to prevent their sticking together. 

The object proposed in their preparation is the production of an 
agreeable demulcent and expectorant form of medicine ; as their 
pleasant qualities are to a great extent lost by age, they should be 
frequently prepared. 

The transparent kinds are allowed to cool and harden spontane- 
ously, while the opaque varieties are stirred and beaten as they cool. 
A few recipes for pastes are appended : — 

Jujube Paste. (Transparent Gum Paste.) 

Take of Gum Arabic 6 ounces. 

Water 8 fluidounces. 

Bruise the gum, and make it into a clear mucilage, which may 
be conveniently done by inclosing it in a bag of coarse gauze sus- 
pended near the top of a vessel of cold water ; introduce the muci- 
lage into an evaporating dish, and add — 

Syrup 7 ounces (by weight). 

Evaporate to a very thick consistence, adding, towards the last — 

Orange-flower water 2 fluidrachms. 

Let it cool, remove the crust which will have formed on the sur- 
face, and run the paste into shallow tin pans, which lay away in a 
warm place to dry. In order to turn out the paste, some are in the 
habit of slightly greasing the pans ; but, this oil sometimes becom- 
ing rancid and giving unpleasant properties to the paste, it is sug- 
gested by Dorvault to make use of tin pans prepared by spreading 
with a rag a globule of mercury over the whole inside surface, and 



730 CONSERVES, CONFECTION'S, ETC. 

then wiping it well. The moulds need to be gone over with the 
mercury only once in eight or ten times. The French Codex directs 
the addition of a decoction of jujube ; but this, which was the original 
practice, and gave name to the preparation, is now generally aban- 
doned. The use of orange-flower water is generally substituted in 
this country by oil of lemon or rose, and, where the latter is used, 
a red color is imparted to the paste for the sake of distinction. 
Other flavors may be used. 

Marshnallow Paste. {Opaque Gum Paste. Pate de Guimauve.) 

Take of Gum Arabic (white), 

Sugar, of each ibj. 

Water Sufficient. 

Orange-flower water f giij. 

"White of eggs ]S[o. x. 

Bruise the gum, dissolve it in the water, and strain ; put the gummy 
solution upon the fire in a deep, wide pan, add the sugar, stirring 
continually until it has the consistence of thick honey, carefully 
regulating the temperature. Then beat the eggs to a froth, add 
them and the orange-flower water gradually to the paste, which 
must be constantly stirred ; continue to beat the paste until, in ap- 
plying it with the spatula upon the back of the hand, it does not 
adhere to it, then run it out upon a slab, or into pans covered with 
starch. 

Formerly this contained marshmallow ; now it is, properly speak- 
ing, only an opaque paste of gum. 

The Iceland moss paste, so extensively advertised of latter years, 
may be closely imitated by this process, slightly varying the flavor. 
The asserted presence of Iceland moss in it improves it only in 
name. 

Carrageen Paste. (Mouchon.) 

Take of Carrageen ^j. 

Water Ovj. 

Boil the carrageen (previously soaked) first in four pints, and then 
in the remainder of the water, and mix the liquids ; to this add — 

Pure gum Arabic, 

Sugar, of each 8 ounces. 

Strain, evaporate to a very thick consistence, cool it, and separate 
any crust, and run it out into pans or on a slab. 

Iceland Moss Paste. (French Codex.) 

Take of Iceland moss ^ij. 

Gum Arabic Jx. 

Sugar Iviij. 

Water Sufficient. 

Wash the Iceland moss in boiling water, and, having rejected 
this, boil it in an additional portion of water during an hour. 
Express and strain, add the gum and sugar, and evaporate till a 
drop does not adhere to the back of the hand ; then cool it on a 
marble slab. 



TROCHISCI — LOZENGES. 



731 



Trochisci. — Lozenges. 

The manufacture of lozenges, as of confections, and of some 
syrups, pertains to the confectioner, in common with the pharma- 
cist, and is principally confined to the former; yet the obvious 
eligibility of this form of preparation, for certain expectorant and 
other medicines, particularly for children, makes a knowledge of 
them desirable both to the physician and pharmacist. 

The process for preparing them is quite simple, and so well 
adapted to all insoluble, tasteless, and agreeable medicines, that we 
may with propriety resort to it for ordinary purposes in prescribing. 

The author has repeatedly made up medicines in this form extem- 
poraneously by physician's prescription, and with considerable 
advantage, as compared with the usual pharmaceutical forms. 

The lozenges to be described are of two varieties. 

First — Those which consist of white sugar combined with a 
medicinal substance, and made up by the addition of mucilage. 
The dry ingredients are first to be thoroughly reduced to powder 
and mixed together ; then beaten in a suitable mortar, with suffi- 
cient mucilage of tragacanth or gum Arabic to form a tenacious 
and tolerably firm mass ; this mass, being dusted with a little 
powdered sugar (not starch, which is sometimes used), is to be 
rolled out upon a suitable board, or marble slab, to the required 
thickness, previously ascertained ; and then, with a small punch, 
either round, oval, stellate, or cordate, to suit the taste of the 
maker, cut out singly, and laid away to dry on a suitable tray or 
sieve. 

A manufacturer of great experience informed the editor that he 
had found a steel roller turned perfectly true, and a slab with sup- 
porting strips made very accurately, were essential to secure hand- 
some lozenges. If it be desirable to have the roller warm, such a 
one, having one of the handles to unscrew and gum-elastic u washer" 
interposed, will enable the operator to keep the temperature at any 
heat a little below that of boiling water for some time, and by 
renewing the heated water to maintain the desired temperature. 

Fig. 237 represents a simple apparatus used for rolling and cutting 
this description of lozenges. Among the recent inventions is a 
glass roller of considerable 
strength and durability, de- 
signed for rolling out pastry ; 
being open at both ends, it 
may be filled with warm water 
and securely corked ; in this 
way a temperature is main- 
tained favorable to the softness 
and tenacity of the mass. It 
is well adapted to use in 
making lozenges. The roller 
shown in the cut is of hard 
wood. The rolling-board is 
adjusted as follows: Having a 



Fig. 237 




Board, roller, and punch, for making lozenges. 



732 CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ETC. 

punch of a certain diameter, a small portion of the mass is rolled 
and cut out, and its weight ascertained ; if it be too heavy, the 
cake is rolled thinner, and so on until adjusted to the required 
weight ; a strip is now tacked on to each side of the board, within 
the range of the roller, and corresponding in thickness with the 
cake, so that the roller, when passed over, will reduce the medicated 
mass to the right thickness. A board arranged in this way should 
be kept for each kind of lozenges, as the weight of different materials 
varies, and, in adjusting it, a small allowance must be made for the 
moisture present in the soft mass, which increases its bulk. In 
dividing a mass extemporaneously, it is convenient to roll the whole 
out into a square or oblong cake of suitable size, and then, with a 
spatula, divide it equally into a definite number of rectangular 
masses. 

Some manufacturers have, independently of their cutting punches, 
a stamp bearing the name of the base of the lozenge, or the card of 
the manufacturer, which they impress upon each lozenge ; for 
white lozenges, the punch is sometimes dipped in an infusion of 
cochineal. The cutting punches are sometimes so made as to com- 
bine cutting and marking in one operation. 

In order to have lozenges nicely cut, it is important to clean the 
cutting punch frequently by steeping it for a moment in water, 
then wiping it dry. 

In lozenges made of vegetable powders, as, for instance, those of 
ipecacuanha, the use of thick mucilage is advised to prevent the 
extractive matter from coloring the product. 

The mucilage used is nearly always made of gum tragacanth, 
but some pharmacists prefer that of gum Arabic, as giving them a 
more translucent appearance ; white of egg is recommended for the 
same purpose. 

The quantity of mucilage necessary to thicken substances varies 
somewhat ; it is greater for lozenges which contain dry powders 
than for those made of extractive substances. It may be remarked 
that lozenges containing a large proportion of mucilage become 
very hard by time. 

Mucilages are sometimes made with simple water, and sometimes 
with aromatic waters, or the latter are replaced by essential oils 
added directly to the mass, or in advance to the dry powders. 

M. G-arot mentions a German method which confectioners some- 
times make use of to aromatize lozenges extemporaneously after 
their desiccation. It consists in dissolving a volatile oil in ether, 
and pouring this solution upon the lozenges contained in a bottle 
with a large mouth, shaking them well, then pouring the lozenges 
upon a sieve, and instantly placing them in a stove to dispel the 
ether. This method is very convenient, as it permits the prepara- 
tion of a large quantity of inodorous lozenges, which may be 
flavored as they are needed. 

By means of an atomizer a large number of lozenges may be 
flavored very quickly and uniformly. The flavoring ingredient is 
dissolved in ether or strong alcohol and put into the bottle of the 



OFFICINAL LOZENGES 



733 



atomizer ; the current of air driven rapidly through the instru- 
ment is directed for an equal length of time to every part of the 
mass of lozenges, which should be exposed in thin layers for this 
purpose. 

Second. — Two of the officinal lozenges contain liquorice, and con- 
sist of adhesive, saccharine, and mucilaginous materials, softened 
by water and beaten into a mass with flavoring and medicinal in- 
gredients, and then rolled into lozenges, generally of a different 
shape from the others. 

Trochisci, U. S. B 

1st Group. 



Officinal name. 


Proportion. 


Adjuvants. 


Med. properties. 


Trochisci acidi tannici 


1 grain in each 


Sugar, tragacanth 


Astringent. 


" cretse 


4 grains " 


Sugar, gum Arabic, 


Antacid and astrin- 






and nutmeg 


gent. 


" magnesias 


3 " " 


Sugar, tragacanth, 


Antacid and ape- 






and nutmeg 


rient. 


" sodii bicarb. 


3 » 


Sugar, tragacanth, 
and nutmeg 


Antacid. 


" ferri subcarb. 


5 " " 


Sugar, tragacanth, 
and vanilla 


Tonic, "haematic." 


" ipecacuanhas 


I grain 


Sugar, tragacanth, 
orange-flow, water 


Expectorant. 


" potassii chloratis 


5 grains " 


Sugar, tragacanth, 
and vanilla 


Disinfectant. 


" santonini 


^ grain " 


Sugar, tragacanth, 
orange-flow, water 


Vermifuge. 


" menthae piperita? 


\ minim " 


Tragacanth 


Carminative. 


" zingiberis 


Tinct. mjj " 


Sugar, tragacanth. 


(< 



2d Group. 



{Ext. opii, 1 gr. in 20 lozenges 
Liquorice, gum Arabic 
Sugar, oil anise 

Oleoresin, J rr^ in each lozenge 
gum Arabic 
sassafras, and Tolu 
Morphia sulph. -^ gr. 
morphias et ipecacuanhas <j Ipecacuanha -,V gr. 
Sugar, tragacanth 



Trochisci glycyrrhizae et opii 



cubebse 



{Oleoresin, 
Liquorice, 
Sugar, oil 



Sedative, 
ipectorant. 



|Sed 
JExi 

r 

JExj 



Stimulant. 
Expectorant. 



lodyne. 
Expectorant. 



The preparation of these is best described by introducing the 
officinal formulas; their therapeutical properties may be noticed as 
follows: Of the three antacid lozenges, those of chalk may be re- 
garded as astringent, adapted to an acid condition of the secretions 
of the stomach with diarrhoea; those of magnesia, as laxative and 
adapted to remed}^ costiveness connected with acidity ; those of 
soda, as more purely alkaline. The lozenges of carbonate of iron 
have been recommended in the former editions of this work, from 
which the new officinal formula was taken, as having been long 
prepared by the author and found to be a most eligible method of 
giving this nearly tasteless preparation of iron. The dose for chil- 
dren is one, for adults two, three times a day. 






734 CONSERVES, CONFECTION'S, ETC. 

The lozenges of ipecac, are rarely prescribed, though perhaps well 
adapted to the treatment of catarrhal affections of children ; among 
the extemporaneous preparations in Part VI., a combination, in this 
form, containing ipecac, and citrate of potassa is recommended as 
a diaphoretic. Peppermint and ginger lozenges are well-known car- 
minatives. Those sold by the confectioners have seldom any special 
relation to the proportions directed in the Pharmacopoeia. Lozenges 
of tannic acid are introduced as a pure astringent well suited to cer- 
tain relaxed conditions of the throat. Lozenges of santonine have 
been introduced in the last edition of the Pharmacopeia', their 
extensive reputation being the result of years of trial. Lozenges 
of morphia and ipecacuanha have been made officinal since the last 
publication, and have been long made under the improved formula 
for Wistar's. 

Wistar's cough lozenges (trochisci glycyrrhizse et opii), of which an 
improved formula is given in the sequel, have long afforded a very 
prominent popular expectorant in Philadelphia and throughout 
the United States; their peculiar merit consists in their soothing 
effect in coughs caused by local irritation, and a tickling sensation 
in the throat; frequently a single lozenge taken at night will allay 
this symptom and compose the patient to sleep. In some cases of 
pulmonary consumption they are complained of as producing cos- 
tiveness, a defect remedied in the improved formula by the sub- 
stitution of morphia for opium in their composition. It is to be 
regretted, that, for a small increase of profit, to undersell conscien- 
tious pharmacists, some of the largest manufacturers of these loz- 
enges depart from the long-established and well-recognized propor- 
tions, producing a very inferior preparation. 

Trochisci cubebce are designed to supersede numerous empirical 
preparations containing cubebs, which are extensively used for 
hoarseness and coryza. The new formula is nearly that of Spitta's 
lozenges; its chief fault is that in aiming to combine great efficiency 
with a form of preparation generally designed to be agreeable, it 
aims in this case at an impossibility. Most of the popular cubeb 
lozenges contain much less of the active ingredient, but being less 
disagreeable, they are taken freely and accomplish the purpose. 

"Working Formulas for the Officinal Lozenges. 

Trochisci Acidi Tannici, U. S. P 

Take of Tannic acid, a troyounce. 

Sugar, in fine powder, ten troyounces. 

Tragacanth, in fine powder, one hundred and twenty grains. 

Orange-flower water, a sufficient quantity. 

Rub the powders together until they are thoroughly mixed; 
then with the orange-flower water form a mass to be divided into 
four hundred and eighty troches. 



FORMULAS FOR LOZENGES. 735 

Trochisci Cretce. ( Troches of Chalk.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Prepared chalk, four troyounces. 

Gum Arabic, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Nutmeg, in fine powder, sixty grains. 
Sugar, in fine powder, six troyounces. 

Pub them together until they are thoroughly mixed; then with 
water form a mass, to be divided into four hundred and eighty 
troches. 

Trochisci Magnesia. {Troches of Magnesia.) U. S. P. 

Take of Magnesia, four troyounces. 

Nutmeg, in fine powder, sixty grains. 
Sugar, in fine powder, nine troyounces. 
Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient quantity. 

Pub the magnesia and the powders together until they are tho- 
roughly mixed; then with mucilage of tragacanth form a mass, to 
be divided into four hundred and eighty troches. 

Trochisci Sodii Bicarbonatis. ( Troches of Bicarbonate of Sodium.) 

U. S. P. 

Take of Bicarbonate of sodium, four troyounces. 
Sugar, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient quantity. 

Pub the bicarbonate of sodium with the sugar until they are 
thoroughly mixed; then with mucilage of tragacanth form a mass, 
to be divided into four hundred and eighty grains. 

Trochisci Ferri Subcarbonatis, U. S. P. (Iron Lozenges). 

Take of Subcarbonate of iron, five troyounces. 
Vanilla, sixty grains. 
Sugar, in fine powder, fifteen troyounces. 
Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient quantity. 

Pub the vanilla first with a part of the sugar into a uniform 
powder, and afterwards with the subcarbonate of iron and the re- 
mainder of the sugar until they are thoroughly mixed. Then with 
mucilage of tragacanth form a mass, to be divided into four hun- 
dred and eighty troches. 

Ferruginous Chocolate Drops. (TTnofficinal.) 

Take of Eeduced iron (by hydrogen) 1 part. 

Vanilla chocolate 15 parts. 

With the fused chocolate incorporate the iron uniformly, and 
form into moulds each containing eight grains. Dose, one for a 
child, two for an adult, three times a day. 

Trochisci Ipecacuanhas. ( Troches of Ipecacuanha.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Ipecacuanha, in fine powder, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Tragacanth, in fine powder, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Arrowroot, in fine powder, two troyounces. 
Sugar, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 
Syrup of orange-peel, a sufficient quantity. 



736 CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ETC. 

Hub the powders together until they are thoroughly mixed ; then 
with syrup of orange-peel form a mass, to be divided into four 
hundred and eighty troches. 

Trochisci Menthce, Piperitce. ( Troches of Peppermint.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Oil of peppermint, a fluidrachm. 

Sugar, in fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient quantity. 

Rub the oil of peppermint with the sugar until they are 
thoroughly mixed; then with mucilage of tragacanth form a mass, 
to be divided into four hundred and eighty troches. 

Trochisci Zingiber is. ( Troches of Ginger.) U. S. P. 

Take of Tincture of ginger, a fluidounce. 

Tragacanth, in fine powder, half a troyounce. 
Sugar, in fine powder, twenty troyounces. 
Syrup of ginger, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the tincture of ginger with the sugar, and, having exposed 
the mixture to the air until dry, reduce it to fine powder ; to this 
add the tragacanth, and mix it thoroughly. Lastly, with syrup of 
ginger form a mass, to be divided into four hundred and eighty 
troches. 

Trochisci Cnbebce. ( Troches of Cubeb.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Oleoresin of cubeb, half a fluidounce. 
Oil of sassafras, a fluidrachm. 
Liquorice, in fine powder, four troyounces. 
Gum Arabic, in fine powder, two troyounces. 
Sugar, in fine powder, three troyounces. 
Syrup of Tolu, a sufficient quantity. 

Rub the powders together until they are thoroughly mixed ; then 
add the oleoresin and oil, and incorporate them w T ith the mixture. 
Lastly, with syrup of Tolu form a mass, to be divided into four 
hundred and eighty troches. 

These are conveniently made into the shape of Spilta's lozenges, 
for which a formula was given in a previous edition. The mass being 
divided into portions of half a troyounce, each of these is rolled 
out between two boards to a cylindrical stick, and then after it has 
partially dried it is cut with a sharp knife into twenty-four equal 
parts, each weighing about ten grains. 

Trochisci Glycyrrhizce et Opii. ( Troches of Liquorice and Opium.) 

IT. S. P. 

Take of Extract of opium, in fine powder, twenty-four grains. 
Liquorice, in fine powder, two troyounces. 
Gum Arabic, in fine powder, one troyounce. 
Sugar, in fine powder, three troyounces. 
Oil of anise, fifteen minims. 

Rub the powders together until they are thoroughly mixed; then 
add the oil of anise, and incorporate it with the mixture. Lastly, 



FORMULAS FOR LOZENGES. 737 

with water form a mass, to be divided into troches, each weighing 
six grains. 

The formation of a mass with these ingredients possessing the 
requisite softness and pliability, and yet firm enough to retain the 
shape given to it, is a matter of considerable difficulty, even with 
tnose who are somewhat accustomed to it, while those who are not 
often waste their material, as well as their time, in the manipulation. 

The following modified formula will be found an improvement : — 

Take of Powdered liquorice, 

Powdered gum Arabic, 

Powdered sugar, each 5 ounces. 

Oil of aniseed 30 drops. 

Sulphate of morphia 12 grains. 

Water, and 

Tincture of Tolu, of each A sum. quantity. 

Dissolve the sulphate of morphia in one fluidounce of water, and 
add the oil of aniseed, with sufficient powdered gum Arabic to in- 
corporate it thoroughly. To this add one fluidounce of water, or a 
sufficient quantity ; add this, now, to the mixed powders, and beat 
thoroughly into a mass of the proper consistence. This is to be 
divided into lozenges, each weighing six grains, and these, after 
they are dry, are to be varnished with tincture of Tolu. 

The mode of rolling and dividing these (and, consequently, their 
shape) is different from that indicated for the lozenges of the first 
group. After beating the ingredients into a mass, portions of 168 
grains each are weighed out, and each of these, being rolled between 
two smooth pieces of board, into a cylindrical stick 28 inches in 
length, is laid away upon a drying board until nearly dry and 
brittle, and then cut with a sharp knife or scissors into 24 equal 
lozenges, each about 1J- inch in length, and weighing 7 grains when 
moist, but reduced in weight by drying. 

About twelve lozenges contain an ordinary adult dose of sulphate 
of morphia. Made by this recipe, they are less liable to constipate 
the bowels, and are less bitter to the taste than the officinal. 

Trochisci Morphice et Ipecacuanhas. {Troches of Morphia and 
Ipecacuanha.) ^ 

• Take of Sulphate of morphia, twelve grains. 

Ipecacuanha, in fine powder, forty grains. 

Sugar, in fine powder, ten troyounces. 

Oil of gaultheria, five minims. 

Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient quantity. 

Rub the powders together until they are thoroughly mixed ; then 
add the oil of gaultheria, and incorporate it with the mixture. 
Lastly, with mucilage of tragacanth form a mass, to be divided 
into four hundred and eighty troches. 

Fig. 238 exhibits the apparatus used for making lozenges of the 
form that AVistar's and Spitta's, two popular lozenges in Phila- 
delphia and many other parts of this country, are ordinarily made. 

A represents a board about 27 inches long, 20 wide, and an inch 
thick; at five inches from one side, the surface is planed off to a 
47 



ETC 



thickness of one-fourth of an inch, slanting uniformly. On the under 
side at each end is a strip § of an inch thick, extending the whole 
width of the board; and at each end on the top are brass pieces i 
of an inch in thickness, secured by screws. B represents the roller 




board, which is about 33 inches long, four or five inches wide, and 
f of an inch thick, with guides which fit the guides on the board 
upon which the mass is rolled ; in the back of this board parallel 
pieces of brass are set § of an inch apart. C represents a board 
having parallel semi-cylindrical grooves extending from end to end, 
in which the lozenges are received and kept till dry enough to pack. 

Unofficinal Lozenges. 

Dr. Jackson's Pectoral Lozenges. 

Take of Powdered ipecacuanha 10 grains. 

Sulphuretted antimony 5 grains. 

Muriate of morphia 6 grains. 

Powdered gum Arabic, 

Powdered sugar, 

Powdered ext. of liquorice, of each ... 11 drachms. 

Tincture of Tolu 4 drachms. 

Oil of sassafras 4 drops. 

To be made into a stiff mass with simple syrup, and divided into 
200 lozenges, or into lozenges of 10 grains each. Each lozenge con- 
tains o'er grain of ipecac, -£■§ grain, of the antimonial, ^\ grain of 
morphia. They are usually rolled into flat cakes, and cut out with a 
round punch, as described under the head of the officinal lozenges. 

Few remedies for pectoral affections requiring anodyne and nau- 
seant treatment are so popular as this. Dose, one every three or 
four hours. 

Dr. Jackson's Ammonia Lozenges. 

Take of Muriate of ammonia H drachms. 

Muriate of morphia 3 grains. 

Powdered elm bark 6 drachms. 

Powdered gum Arabic, 

Powdered sugar, 

Powdered ext. of liquorice, of each ... 7 drachms. 

Tincture of Tolu 3 drachms. 

Oil of partridge-berry 4 drops. 

To be made with syrup into 180 lozenges, or into lozenges of 10 
grains each, containing \ grain muriate of ammonia, and g V °f a 
grain of the morphia salt. 



UNOFFICINAL LOZENGES. 739 

These are used for somewhat similar affections with the fore- 
going, and are made into the same shape. 

Par risk's Cough Lozenges. 

Take of Powdered ipecacuanha 50 grains. 

Kermes mineral 100 grains. 

Sulphate of morphia 16 grains. 

Powdered sugar, 

Powdered gum Arabic, 

Powdered ext. of liquorice, of each ... 3 ounces. 

Oil of anise 40 drops. 

Syrup of Tolu Sufficient. 

To be made into a mass and divided into 320 lozenges, each con- 
taining about \ grain of ipecacuanha, J grain of kermes, 5 'o grain 
of morphia salt. 

We have been in the habit, for the last ten years, of preparing 
these pectoral lozenges, which are not unlike those of Dr. Jackson. 
The recipe was made with the advice of a medical friend, and has 
proved a useful one, producing a comparatively active preparation. 

The dose of these is one three or four times a day. 

Phosphatic Lozenges. 

Take of Phosphate of calcium 10 ounces. 

Phosphate of iron 2 ounces. 

Phosphate of sodium 6 drachms. 

Phosphate of potassium ; . 2 drachms. 

Phosphoric acid 2 drachms. 

Sugar, in powder 17 ounces. 

Powdered ginger, 

Syrup, of each Sufficient. 

Mix the phosphates of calcium and iron with the sugar and 
ginger, by passing through a fine sieve; then, by the aid of heat, 
dissolve the phosphates of sodium and potassium and phosphoric 
acid in the syrup, and make into a mass with the mixed powders. 
Roll this into a cake of the proper thickness, dusting it with a sifted, 
mixture of one part of phosphate of iron and eight parts of sugar, 
and cut out the lozenges, each weighing fifteen grains. 

Each lozenge contains five grains of phosphate ot calcium, one 
grain of phosphate of iron, and half a grain of the mixed phos- 
phates of sodium and potassium. 

The use of the phosphates prescribed above has recently been 
adopted, to a large extent, with a view to supplying elements to 
the system which are apt to be deficient, particularly among chil- 
dren, in large cities. It is asserted that these salts not only aid 
in building up the bony structure, when it is deficient, but assist 
in maintaining the irritability, without which assimilation and 
nutrition are always lacking. The dose for children may be from 
one to two, three times a day. 



740 CONSERVES, CONFECTIONS, ETC. 

Astringent Rose Leaf Tablets. 

Take of Powdered catechu, 

Powdered red rose, of each 6 parts. 

Powdered tragacanth 1 part. 

Powdered sugar 48 parts. 

Mix, and make into a mass with rose-water and vanilla syrup, 
then divide into lozenges of ten grains each. To be taken ad 
libitum for chronic relaxed conditions of the throat and mouth. 

Chlorate of Potassium Tablets. 

Take of Chlorate of potassium 200 grains. 

Powdered red rose 300 grains. 

Powdered sugar 500 grains. 

Oil of rose 15 drops. 

Oil of orange 100 drops. 

Reduce the chlorate of potassium to a very fine powder, sepa- 
rately, for fear of explosion, and incorporate it thoroughly with the 
other dry ingredients by sifting together ; add to these the flavoring 
oils and make up the mass with jelly of black currants, then divide 
into 100 lozenges, each containing ten grains. Dose, one occa- 
sionally in sore throat, ulcerated mouth, etc. 

Catechu Lozenges. 

Take of Catechu 2 ounces. 

Tragacanth £ ounce. 

White sugar 12 ounces. 

Kose water Sufficient. 

Make into ten-grain lozenges; to be used ad libitum. 
These are particularly adapted to cases of relaxation of the uvula, 
irritation of the larynx, etc. 

Wild Cherry Tablets. 

Take of "Wild cherry hark, finely powdered . . . . ftj. (officinal). 
Alcohol q. s. 

Make a tincture by percolation, evaporate to dryness, and power 
the extract — to this add 

Powder of blanched almonds ,^iij. 

Gum %\y. 

Sugar Ibiij-^iv. 

The above modification of the formula of W. ~R. Warner pro- 
duces a fine preparation, retaining the sedative virtues of the drug 
as concentrated as is safe in this form of preparation. 

Make a mass, and divide into oval lozenges of ten grains each. 
They are very bitter, and develop hydrocyanic acid when intro- 
duced into the mouth, acting with energy as a sedative remedy. 
One lozenge is a dose, repeated as occasion requires. 

The pharmacist will often find, especially in very damp, warm 
weather, difficulty in drying lozenges, particularly those which con- 
tain deliquescent and very soluble salts, such as muriate of ammo- 



CANDY AND DROPS. 741 

ma. This difficulty has been overcome by the use of a box, made 
of well-seasoned wood free from cracks or loose knots, lined with 
paper pasted carefully over the inside, the lid being hinged on, and 
the edge of the box where the lid rests being covered with thick, 
soft, white skin. Shelves are arranged on w T hich to support the 
lozenges or other substances while drying, and a tray in the bottom 
is provided for holding a quantity of unslaked freshly burnt lime; 
after the lime and articles to be desiccated are arranged in the case, 
the lid is securely closed and kept shut for such a space of time as 
is requisite to insure the absorption of the moisture from the article 
by the lime. 

Candy and Drops. 

Various kinds of candy are used in medicine for the well-known 
expectorant or demulcent properties of the sugar alone, or for the 
effects of such medicines as may be conveniently combined with it. 
The manufacture of these pertain almost exclusively to the confec- 
tioner, who prepares a thick semifluid mass by using with the sugar 
a small portion of water, and boiling till it is brought to such con- 
dition that a small portion removed from the fire upon a glass rod 
will solidify into a transparent candy on cooling; it is then poured 
out upon a marble slab. If the coloring or flavoring ingredient is 
in powder, as, for instance, tartaric acid used in making lemon 
drops, it is worked in with the melted candy on the slab ; other- 
wise it must be added before testing its hardness and removing 
from the fire. The sheet of melted candy, being smoothed upon 
the surface, if designed for secrets, a very common form, is par- 
tially cut through into squares, and then, when brittle, broken off; 
if designed for drops, the candy requires to be run into moulds 
upon a machine constructed for the purpose; if for sticks, it is 
rolled and drawn out to the required thickness. 

By kneading and working this material while soft, its whiteness 
is increased. The principal art in making candies is in the remov- 
ing them from the fire at just the right moment before caramel 
begins to be formed, and not until the whole of the uncombined 
water is driven off; besides the proximate mode, with a glass rod, 
given above, the elevation of the boiling point to exactly a certain 
point is an indication that the candy is finished. 

The fruit essences, so called, prepared by artificial processes from 
fusel oil, have been much used of late to flavor drops. Lemon and 
ginger drops are also much in vogue; the latter are best prepared 
from the piperoid or oleoresin of ginger (see p. 693). 

The following recipes are appended, as of utility to the pharma- 
cist, who may procure the admixture of the medicinal ingredients, 
with candy at the confectioner's for a few cents per pound advance 
on the cost of the suo;ar. 



742 EXTRACTA EESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

Ginger Drops. 

To ten pounds of the melted candy add one ounce of piperoid of 
ginger, and, by means of an appropriate apparatus, run it into 
drops the size of cherry-stones. 

Medicated Secrets, or Cough Candy. 

To ten pounds of melted candy add the following mixture, and 
divide into secrets: — 

Take of Tincture of squill f^iv. 

Camphorated tincture of opium. 

Tincture of Tolu, of each f^ss. 

Fluid extract of ipecacuanha, 

Oil of gaultheria, of each "Hlviij. 

Oil of sassafras ^vj. 

Oil of aniseed ]T l u J« 

Used ad libitum in ordinary coughs. 



CHAPTER XIV. 

EXTRACTA RESINA AND "CONCENTRATED REMEDIES." 

The number of Eclectic Concentrated Remedies in common use, 
and the general interest felt in them, which has now extended to 
transatlantic countries, seem to demand that an effort should be 
made to include in this work some notice of all of them, which are 
liable to be met with by physicians and pharmacists. The manu- 
facturers of these preparations are all independent of each other; 
each claiming the superiority of his own preparations over those 
of his rivals; each adopting such formulas, and such nomenclature, 
as his own convenience suggests. For many of them no formulas 
are published, and no accurate description of their chemical and 
physical properties has appeared, while an examination for the pur- 
poses of this work would be unnecessary. 

Some of the " Eclectic remedies" are nearly pure resins, like 
three Resince of the British Pharmacopoeia. Viewed as pharmaceu- 
tical preparations, eligible for use in medicine, though not purified 
so as to rank as distinctive proximate principles, these are very 
appropriately named resinous extracts or resins. The term " Resi- 
noid," so commonly used, is less appropriate to the class, implying, 
as it does, a resemblance to resins, while all of these are either 
resins, oleoresins, or more or less mixed proximate principles pos- 
sessing no real resemblance to the class of resins. Some of the 
concentrated remedies lay claim to the title of " Alkaloids ;" these 
either are or are not vegetable alkalies, though never pure ; and the 
same objection applies to designating them under a name which is 



EXTttACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 743 

far from being clearly descriptive of their chemical character. It is 
a scientific objection to the nomenclature of the eclectics that they 
use the terms employed by chemi'sts to designate the distinctive 
principles isolated from the plants by analysis, and it is a practical 
objection to their system that medicines of such totally different 
chemical properties are grouped together under similar designa- 
tions. The termination in, so appropriate to resins and neutral 
principles, is not adapted to extractive matters containing no resin ; 
and the termination ia, though quite appropriate to organic alka- 
lies, is unsuited to the mixed principles precipitated b}* the empi- 
rical processes of these manufacturers. Two preparations differ- 
ently prepared from the same drug, such as " sanguinarin and 
sanguinarina," possessing different degrees of therapeutic power — 
the one classed by them as a resinoid, and the other as an alkaloid 
— should be more definitely designated than by names differing 
only in the terminal letter. 

A frequent cause of error in the practice of pharmacy arises out 
of the substitution of the " Eclectic byoscyainin,atropin, veratrin, 
and similar preparations," for the pure vegetable alkalies found in 
commerce. The dose is, of course, very different ; and, the genuine 
articles imported from England, France, and Germany bearing a 
very high price, the substitution of cheaper and inferior products 
labelled with the same names should be carefully guarded against. 

In the present chapter the principal resinous and other " Eclectic 
concentrated remedies" are noticed without regard to their strictly 
chemical characters, while the definite proximate principles of 
plants used in medicine, which have been isolated and examined, 
are noticed under their several heads in Part IV. Many of the 
formulas and descriptions given in this chapter are not practically 
familiar to the author, and are given as recorded in the several 
works on this system of practice. Of these, the chief that have 
been consulted are the following: " The American Dispensatory, by 
John King, M.D.," published in Cincinnati in 1859, and recom- 
mending the " resinoid and alkaloid" preparations of \V. S. Merrill 
and others of that city. " Concentrated Organic Medicines, being a 
Practical Exposition of the Therapeutic Properties and Clinical Em- 
ployment of the Combined Proximate Medicinal Constituents of Indi- 
genous and Foreign Plants, by Grover Coe, M.D.," fourth edition, 
1862, published by B. Keith & Co., New York, of whose prepara- 
tions it treats. And "Formulas for making Tinctures, Infusions, 
Syrups, Wines, Mixtures, Pills, etc., from the fluid and solid extracts 
prepared at the laboratory of Tilden & Co., New Lebanon, N. Y." 

The statements of these authors are not to be accepted as impar- 
tial. Each of the two first named is much engaged throughout in 
disparaging the preparations recommended by the other. The Cin- 
cinnati work, in which many formulas appear, justly charges the 
New York manufacturers with concealing their formulas, and ad- 
vances the following criticism : " Unfortunately some persons are 
so wrapped up in what are called 'concentrated remedies' that they 



744 EXTRACTA RESINa AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

will blindly employ anything presented as such without stopping 
to inquire or examine into its claims ; this is decidedly wrong." 

On the other hand, Dr. Grover Coe, writing in the interest of the 
New York manufacturers of concentrated remedies, repudiates the 
single principles or precipitates obtained by the same process for 
almost every variety of vegetable substance as recommended by 
Merrill and indorsed by Dr. King. He claims for his remedies 
that they embody not merely single " resinoid," or " alkaloid," or 
" neutral" principles from plants, but all these as contained in 
their several plants first separately isolated and then recombined, 
which is practically impossible and scientifically absurd. 

This extraordinary assertion, taken in connection with the great 
number and variety of remedies advertised claiming to be the 
" concentrated equivalents" of plants but little known to chemists, 
and never satisfactorily analyzed, cannot but strike the mind of 
any one in the least acquainted with the difficulties of the subject 
as too severe a tax on credulity. 

The classification of the proximate principles of plants adopted 
by Dr. Coe is, moreover, different from any known to science, and 
some of the definitions given to the several classes named do not 
correspond with those of the recognized authorities. Thus the 
oleoresins are stated to be compounds of fixed oils, wax, and resin, 
while balsams are defined as mixtures of resin and volatile oil. A 
distinction is drawn without a difference between resins and resi- 
noids. Neutral principles, which the author claims to have been 
"the first to recognize in their true remedial value, and the first to 
establish in their identity as a class of distinct proximate principles, 
and the first to record their physical and chemical characteristics," 
are said to be altered in their composition or completely destroyed 
in the preparation of extracts, etc. In the definition of these they 
are quite confounded Avith the nondescript and almost infinitely 
varied " extractive" substances which have no single character in 
common, and are fast disappearing from the catalogue of vegetable 
products before the searching scrutiny of modern chemistry. 

It is but simple justice to those who are asked to accept remedies 
prepared by secret processes upon faith in the manufacturer, that 
his claims, and those of his sponsors, should be somewhat inquired 
into. 

It would be in vain to deny that improvement in the extraction 
aud concentration of medicines is a growing demand of our times, 
but the efforts of the so-called " eclectic pharmaceutist" in that 
direction have been marred by a too exclusive reliance upon the 
single process of precipitation from a strong alcoholic tincture by 
water — a process well adapted to those cases in which the active 
principle of the drug is distinctly resinous, but unsuited to a large 
number of vegetable substances, the active principles of which are 
more or less completely soluble in water. 

The practice of bringing all these concentrated remedies to the 
condition of powders by the addition of sugar of milk, or other 



RESINS. 



745 



dry material, to those which are naturally soft or oily, has many 
objections, among which are their unnecessary dilution, and the 
increased exposure of their particles to oxidation or evaporation. 

An important objection to this system of practice is that while 
it claims to be eclectic, it is, in fact, exclusive, confining its reme- 
dies almost entirely to indigenous drugs of vegetable origin. It 
must be confessed that the variety of our indigenous materia medica 
is very great, and perhaps sufficient for most purposes of the phy- 
sician ; bat there is neither philosophy nor policy in creating an 
exclusively American system of practice, while by commerce, hy 
literature, and science, our country is linked with all the civilized 
world. 

The remaining objection to this system is the want of candor and 
scientific truthfulness which pervades its literature. There is an 
obvious special pleading in arguments, and an aim to promote local 
business interests in its publications, which necessarily detract from 
its reputation and shut out its professors from the sympathy and 
countenance of the class whose influence can least be spared from 
any scientific reform. 

The so-called " American system of practice" requires a protest 
against its exclusiveness, its empiricism, and its unprofessional 
character; but that whatever of good it contains may be made 
known, the present chapter is devoted to a notice of the remedies 
offered by its rival schools. 

The " Eclectic remedies" are preceded in the present chapter by 
the new officinal class Resince, one of which, resina podophylli, ori- 
ginated with practitioners of that school, and is the most popular 
representative of its class. 

Resince, U. S. P. 



Officinal name. 


Dose. 


Properties. 


Synonyme. 


Resinae jalapae 
" podophylli 
" scammouii 


grain v 
grain ij 
grain v 


Cathartic 


Jalapin. 
Podophyllin. 
Resin of scammony. 



REMARKS. 

The resins of jalap and May-apple roots, as above, are prepared 
by percolation with alcohol through the finely powdered root until 
the percolate ceases to cause a precipitate on being dropped into 
water, in the case of the former preparation, but in the case of po- 
dophyllin acidulated water is directed to be used. This is then to 
be reduced to about half the quantity of the root employed (the 
alcohol being recovered by distillation), and thrown into eight times 
its bulk of water, which precipitates the resin ; this is then washed 
and dried and powdered, in which state it is dispensed. 

For the characteristic distinctions of resin of jalap and podo- 
phyllin, the reader is referred to Am. Journ. Pharm., 1862, p. 113. 

Resin of podophyllum is of a color varying from a drab to a bright 



746 EXTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

yellow. As above prepared, it is less tinged with yellow than in 
the usual process of the manufacturers, in which muriatic acid is 
added to the water with which it is to be precipitated. It is partly 
soluble in ether, and the residue, when dissolved in solution of 
potassa, is precipitable by dilute muriatic acid in excess. Prof. F. 
Fullager has lately announced the existence in the root of podo- 
phyllum of the alkaloid berberina, which was previously noticed by 
Mr. Hodgson, Jr., as yellow coloring matter; being soluble in cold 
water this is lost by the officinal method of preparation ; but owing 
to the insolubility of the yellow muriate of berberina it is mixed 
with the precipitated resin, and accounts for the yellow color of 
the commercial podophyllin, and in part for some of its properties. 

Resin of scammony is directed to be prepared according to the 
U. S. P. from commercial scammony by digesting with successive 
portions of boiling alcohol until exhausted, mixing the tinctures, 
evaporating to a syrupy consistence by distilling off the alcohol, 
adding the concentrated liquid to water, washing and drying the 
precipitate. It is wholly soluble in ether, also in officinal solution 
of potassa, from which solution an excess of diluted muriatic acid 
does not precipitate it. 

A resin of scammony is prepared from the dried roots by the pro- 
cess of the British Pharmacopoeia, which differs from the foregoing. 
The roots are digested with water and with diluted acid, by which 
means they are deprived of all matter soluble in these menstrua, 
then with alcohol, which dissolves out the resin, which is collected 
on the recovery of the alcohol by distillation. The roots are col- 
lected in Asia Minor, dried and shipped to London, where this 
resin is now manufactured. The physical qualities of the scam- 
mony thus prepared differ considerably from virgin scammony and 
from the officinal resin, being non-porous, not producing a lather 
when rubbed with water, and, instead of possessing a musty or sour 
cheese-like odor, having an aromatic and fruity smell. Its dose is 
from four to twelve grains. 

Medical Properties. — The medical properties of these three resins 
are somewhat similar. Pesin of jalap has long been known as a 
powerful cathartic, in doses of from one to five grains, triturated 
with sugar or other diluents or correctives. 

Podophyllin is undoubtedly one of the most powerful purgatives 
in use, acting, in doses of two to four grains, as a drastic cathartic, 
accompanied in its action with much nausea and griping. In 
smaller doses (J grain to one grain), it operates as an alterative and 
cholagogue. It is claimed for this remedy that it is a regulator of 
the secretions, tending to restore them to normal activity, and that 
it completely supersedes mercury in all cases where it is indicated, 
even, in some cases, producing ptyalism. It is seldom or never 
employed alone, its effects being greatly increased, and its dose 
lessened, according to the testimony of practitioners accustomed to 
its use, by long trituration with four to ten times its weight of 
sugar or sugar of milk. " Caulophyllin" combined with it is said 
to'materially lessen its painful and disagreeable effects. A com- 



UNOFFICINAL CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 747 

pound of podopbyllin, with ten parts of " leptandrin" and ten of 
sugar, is esteemed as an alterative in dyspepsia ; the discovery of 
the presence of berberina in the commercial podopbyllin explains 
its known tonic effects. 

Resin of scammony has been very rarely prescribed ; it was offi- 
cinal for the first time in 1860, as distinct from the impurities asso- 
ciated with it as commercial scammony. It was made officinal for 
the purpose of introducing it as an ingredient into the compound 
extract of colocynth. Its high cost deters all but the most consci- 
entious manufacturers from complying with the officinal directions 
in this respect. 

Unofficinal Concentrated Remedies. 

Apocynin is the name given to a preparation by J. B. Robinson, 
formerly of Cincinnati, from the root of Apocynumandrossemifolium, 
and recommended by Dr. John King in his Dispensatory. The 
formula directs the preparation of a saturated tincture of the root, 
treating this with ammonia, then filtering and precipitating the 
apocynin with sulphuric acid, added graduallj 7 ; it is to be washed 
in one or two waters and then dried. One pound of the root yields 
about half an ounce. It is represented as a powder of a dark brown 
color, a strong odor of the root, and a bitter, nauseous, and unplea- 
sant taste. It is recommended in jaundice, hepatic torpor, and 
constipation, combined in equal parts with leptandrin and myricin. 
This dose, as given by Tilden, is \ to 2 gr. Another remedy called 
apocynine is mentioned by " eclectic" writers, described as being 
very bitter and of a dark orange color. 

Alnuine and Alnuin are names given to preparations derived from 
the bark of Alnus rubra (Tag Alder). The last named is recom- 
mended as possessing alterative, tonic, and sub-astringent properties 
in doses of one to three grains three or four times a day. The 
other is said to be adapted to the same purposes. Alnuin is an- 
nounced in Tilden's Formulary as useful in herpes, syphilis, 
scorbutus, impetigo, etc., and by Dr. GrOver Coe as adapted to 
scrofula, eruptions of the skin, rheumatism, and syphilis, and 
wherever an alterative is required. 

Ampclopsin is a preparation from Ampelopsis quinquefolia (Vir- 
ginia creeper), made by an unpublished process ; it is reputed to be 
alterative, diuretic, expectorant, anti-syphilitic, astringent, and 
tonic. Dose, 3 to 10 grains. 

Asclepidin is a concentrated preparation from Asclepias tuberosa 
(pleurisy root), obtained by a process similar to that for the resin 
cimicifugin, and is a dark semi-liquid extractive-like mass. Its 
dose is from 1 to 5 grs. three times a day, as an expectorant, dia- 
phoretic, and tonic. It is recommended in fevers of every type, 
inflammatory diseases, hooping-cough, and in chronic diseases of 
digestive organs, and Dr. Coe speaks of Keith's asclepin as uni- 
versally admissible in the treatment of disease. 

Ascletine is described as a white powder, with but little taste or 



748 EXTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

odor, recommended as the active principle of the plant ; but the 
editor of the Eclectic Dispensatory thinks it " an imposition upon 
the profession." 

Barosrnin, derived from buchu by an unpublished process, is 
asserted by Dr. Grover Coe to be a diuretic, alterative, diaphoretic, 
tonic, stimulant, antispasmodic — properties which have not been 
claimed for the leaves themselves. Dose, from 2 to 4 grains. 

Baptism is a preparation prescribed by the ''eclectic" practitioners 
from the bark of the root and the leaves (?) of Baptisia tinctoria 
wild indigo), one of our familiar indigenous weeds. In its chemi- 
cal nature it seems to be a resinous extractive, which is said to be 
precipitated by an acid, or by acetate of lead, from the saturated 
tincture. The formula has not been published. It is described as 
of a yellowish-brown color, a strong and characteristic odor, and a 
bitter, disagreeable, persistent taste. It is only partially soluble in 
alcohol, much more so on the addition of ammonia or potassa. It 
is given in a dose of from \ to J grain with a view to increase the 
action of the glandular system and to arouse the liver, also as an 
external application to gangrenous and erysipelatous ulcerations. 
Variously combined it is much prescribed in " eclectic" practice. 
In large doses it is said to produce very disagreeable prostration. 

Caulophyllin. — This preparation, from the root of Leontice thalic- 
troides (Michx.), Caulophyllum thalictroides (blue cohosh), is made 
by Merrill, by precipitation from the saturated tincture, similar to 
the preparation of podophyllin and cimicifugin, using, however, as 
small a quantity of water as possible to prevent waste, as the pre- 
cipitate is soluble. Caulophyllin thus prepared is an extractive 
substance of a light brown color, with a peculiar, not unpleasant 
odor, and a slightly bitter taste, and some degree of pungency. It 
is said to be insoluble in ether, partially soluble in water, more so in 
alcohol; the addition of solution of ammonia renders it soluble in 
either menstruum, and the solution becomes a dark wine color. 

The following process for obtaining caulophyllin is by Dr. F. D. 
Hill, of Cincinnati : Exhaust the root of caulophyllum with alcohol 
and obtain a thick fluid extract, add this to twice its volume of 
saturated aqueous solution of alum, and place it aside to rest for 
three or four days; then place it on a filter cloth, and allow the 
water to filter through ; wash the product two or three times with 
fresh water, and let the residuum dry in the open air. When dry, 
it readily forms a powder of a light grayish color. 

The ordinary dose of caulophyllin is from one-fourth of a grain 
to one grain, three or four times a day, its therapeutic effect being 
exerted on the uterus, as a tonic and alterative. As a parturient 
it is given in doses of from two to four grains, at intervals of 15 to 
30 minutes after actual labor has commenced. 

Caulophyllin is said to be prepared by some manufacturers from 
an aqueous infusion of the root, decolorized by animal charcoal, and 
concentrated in vacuo by adding infusion of galls, or 96 per cent, 
alcohol, collecting the precipitate, drying and powdering it. It is 
then sold as an " alkaloid" although its properties are said not to 



UNOFFICINAL RESINOIDS. 749 

vary much from those of the first, which is usually considered as a 
" resinoid." 

Ceanothine is the name given to a preparation described in the 
New York Journal of Organic and Medical Chemistry, vol. i. page 
43, as prepared from the leaves of the New Jersey tea, Ceano- 
thus Americanus, by the following process : First extract the color- 
ing and resinous matter from the leaves by alcohol, then place the 
mass in an alembic apparatus (?) and displace the alcohol remaining 
in it, after which the mass is to be subjected to the percolating 
process with hot distilled water until the active principle is dis- 
placed. The aqueous solution is then evaporated in vacuo to the 
consistency of thick syrup, and precipitated and purified in nearly 
absolute alcohol. The precipitate is then directed to be dried into 
a partially crystalline mass, in a vacuum at about 100° E. The 
preparation reduced to powder is said to be nearly white, and to 
resemble green tea in odor and taste. It is soluble in water, but 
nearly insoluble in alcohol, in which properties it appears to re- 
semble some of the so-called eclectic "alkaloids," as caulophyllin. 

This process, like many others, is too obscure to be used by the 
uninitiated, and the preparation can only be adopted by those who 
accept it on the ground of confidence in the manufacturers. 

Cerasein is the only preparation derived from the unofficinal bark 
of Cerasus Virginiana (choke cherry). It is highly lauded by Dr. 
Grover Coe as a substitute for quinine in certain conditions of the 
system wherein the vegetable alkali is inadmissible. He represents 
that cerasein contains " resinoid" and neutral principles besides 
amygdalin, phloridzin, and picrin. Dose, 5 to 10 grains. It is not 
made by the eclectic manufacturers generally. 

Chelonin is a "resinoid," prepared from Chelone glabra (balmony). 
No formula is published for it, but it appears to be given in doses 
of from 1 to 2 grains, as a representative of the leaves from which 
it is prepared. These are accounted tonic, cathartic, and*anthel- 
mintic. 

Cimicifugin, or Macrotin, another eclectic " resinoid," is prepared 
by forming a concentrated tincture of black snakeroot, Cimicifuga 
racemosa, diluting it with its bulk of water, and distilling off the 
alcohol. It is then collected from the bottom of the vessel and 
powdered. A modification of this process by Prof. E. S. "Wayne, 
yields a more elegant and more active preparation. He directs 
that the strong tincture shall be allowed to evaporate sponta- 
neously, until a solid mass is deposited, the remaining fluid is 
poured off and the mass dissolved in alcohol, slowly evaporated to 
the consistence of a fluid extract, and then placed in thin layers 
upon glass and allowed to dry. 

As usually found in commerce, this is a dark-brown powder, of 
a faint odor, and a slightly bitter nauseous taste. It has not been 
analyzed, but appears to be an impure resin. I obtained 4f per 
cent, of it in my experiments. (See paper on Eclectic Pharmacy, 
Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xxiii. p. 329.) Its medical properties are 
described in Dr. King's Dispensatory as tonic, alterative, nervine, 



750 EXTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

anti-periodic, with an especial affinity for the uterus. It does not, 
according to this authority, possess the narcotic properties of the 
root. Dr. Grover Coe considers the macrotin of Keith as alterative, 
antispasmodic, stimulant, diaphoretic, diuretic, expectorant, resol- 
vent, nervine, emmenagogue, parturient, tonic, and narcotic, and 
enumerates twenty-eight diseases in which it is employed. In re- 
gard to this particular manufacture, it may he remarked that it 
claims to be composed of three principles, "resinoid, alkaloid, and 
neutral." Cimicifugin is considerably used by practitioners in the 
treatment of chorea. Of course, a great variety of combinations 
may be resorted to as occasion requires, and it undoubtedly deserves 
a fair trial of its merits, especially as it is a preparation free from 
the suspicion of empiricism or secrecy. Its dose is from 1 to 6 
grains. 

Chimaphilw , catalogued among the concentrated medicines of 
one of the eclectic manufacturers as an alterative, tonic, diuretic, 
and astringent, is derived from Chimaphila umbellata by the fol- 
lowing process: Agitate a tincture of pipsissewa with chloroform, 
allow the mixture to stand, remove the lighter liquid, and permit 
the chloroformic solution to evaporate. The crystalline residue 
should be purified by solution in alcohol, filtration, and spontane- 
ous evaporation. The dose is 2 or 3 grains. 

Collinsonin, derived from Colli nsonia canadensis (hard-hack, or 
stone root), is represented by Dr. Coe as a valuable tonic, astringent, 
diaphoretic, alterative, resolvent, and diuretic, in doses of 5 grains. 

Cornine is the name applied to a precipitate, obtained by adding 
to water a saturated tincture of the bark of Cornus Florida (dog- 
wood). The details of this method are probably varied by the 
several manufacturers, and the results, doubtless, differ accordingly. 
It is usually a light grayish-brown powder, of a peculiar odor, 
slightly bitter, astringent taste ; insoluble in water, diluted acids, 
and vokttile oils ; nearly soluble in alcohol, entirely with the assist- 
ance of ammonia or caustic potassa, which also renders it partially 
soluble in water. It is soluble in ether, and ammonia added removes 
the cornine in solution, leaving the ether transparent on the surface. 
(King's Dispensatory.) The peculiar bitter principle seems to have 
been obtained by Prof. J. M. Maisch in solution, but its extreme 
facility of decomposition prevented its isolation. 

How far this product is a representative of the active principles 
of the bark has not been fully shown, nor do I know whether it 
resembles the preparation long vended under the same name by the 
late G-. W. Carpenter, of Philadelphia. 

Dr. Coe's work represents the cornin of B. Keith & Co. as con- 
taining the proximate principles soluble in alcohol and those solu- 
ble in water — tannic acid, etc.— in the proportion in which they exist 
in the bark, and hence that it is a more perfect representative of 
the bark than the "resinoid" cornine of Merrill and other manu- 
facturers. A specimen I have examined was equally soluble in 
water and alcohol, and was evidently composed in great part of 
tannic acid. 



RESINOIDS, 751 

Dog-wood bark has, for many years, had an excellent reputation 
as a tonic and astringent, and has been used with success in the 
treatment of interna ittents, and it is claimed that cornine in 10- 
grain doses is an excellent anti-periodic, adapted to supersede 
quinia where, from any cause, it is contraindicated, or where it is 
not readily procurable. Of course, this statement must be taken 
with allowance. As a general tonic, it is prescribed in doses vary- 
ing from one to ten grains. 

Corydalia. — The small round tubers of Corvdalis formosa are 
largely collected in the Western States of the Union, and conside- 
rably used under the name of Turkey corn, as a domestic and 
eclectic alterative remedy. Analysis has discovered the presence 
of a vegetable alkali named corydalina, which is described in the 
chapter on vegetable alkalies. The eclectic preparations, as issued 
by different manufacturers, are called corydalia and corydalin ; the 
former claiming to be an "alkaloid," and the latter a "resinoid" 
principle. Merrill's process for corydalia consists in adding water 
to the tincture, collecting the precipitate, then adding ammonia and 
collecting the additional precipitate, filtering and adding muriatic 
acid, when " the balance of the alkaloid" is precipitated. That the 
mixed precipitates, which, according to Merrill, amount to little 
more than an ounce from four pounds of the tubers, can lay claim 
to be the alkaline active principle of the drug, will be disputed by 
many ; it is, however, highly spoken of as an alterative by Dr. 
King, who says " it will be found useful in all scrofulous and syphi- 
litic affections, as well as in many cutaneous diseases." Corydalin, 
issued as a "resinoid," of which there is no published formula, is 
recommended for the same purposes, in the same dose — from J- grain 
to 1 grain. (King.) Keith's preparation containing resin, resinoid, 
alkaloid, and neutral principle, is given, according to Coe, in 2-grain 
doses. Combinations of these preparations with berberin, hydras- 
tin, ptelein, etc., are recommended as tonic, and with podophyllin, 
xanthoxylin, stillingin, iridin, phytollaccin, etc., as alterative. The 
custom of giving these combinations to the exclusion of individual 
remedies is not favorable to a clear appreciation of their respective 
therapeutical properties. 

Cypripedin. — This preparation, named on the catalogues of the 
manufacturers of eclectic remedies, is generally described as an oleo- 
resin; it is directed to be prepared by the precipitation of a concen- 
trated tincture of the root of Cypripedium pubescens, yellow ladies' 
slipper root, by adding it to water. It is given in doses of half a 
grain to three grains as an antispasmodic and anodyne. Ten grains 
are mentioned as a maximum dose of Keith's preparation, which is 
stated to be composed of a " resinoid and a neutral principle." 

Dioscorein is a resinous extract, prepared from a saturated tinc- 
ture of the root of Dioscorea villosa, wild yam, by adding it to its 
weight of water and distilling off the alcohol, when the precipitate 
remaining in the water may be collected, dried, and pulverized ; 
this process, which is the same as for other resinous extracts, yields 
a product described in King's Dispensatory as a light yellowish- 



752 EXTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

brown powder, growing darker by age, deliquescent, of a faint smell 
and slightly sweetish, resinous, very bitter, acrid, and persistent 
taste. Like some other resinous extracts, it is much more soluble 
in alcohol when fresh than after long exposure. This preparation 
is said to be a valuable antispasmodic remedy, especially useful in 
bilious colic, in which disease Dr. King believes it to be as much 
a specific as quinia is in intermittent. It is given in doses of 1 to 
4 grains every ten or twenty minutes in colic ; also variously com- 
bined in some forms of uterine disease, and in combination with 
extract of Cornus cericea to overcome the vomiting of pregnancy. 

Euonymin is an empirical preparation, issued by one of the manu- 
facturers of eclectic remedies, of which the mode of preparation is 
not published. It is a product from the bark of Euonymus Ame- 
ricanus, and is represented as consisting of a " resinoid, a neutral, 
and an alkaloid principle," and as possessed of tonic, laxative, alte- 
rative, and expectorant properties. Dose, from \ to 4 grains. 

Eupatorine and Eupurpurin, prepared, according to King, from 
eupatorium purpureum, differ somewhat in their mode of prepara- 
tion and properties, though, according to the published process, 
both are precipitated from the alcoholic solution ; the former by an 
equal bulk of water acidulated with muriatic acid, and the latter 
by twice the bulk of water alone. Eupatorine, as prepared by J. 
B. Robinson, of Cincinnati, is described as a solid dark-brown resin, 
with a peculiar slighly aromatic odor, and a slightly bitter taste ; 
though readily pulverizable, it rapidly runs into a mass, which 
blackens by age ; it is soluble in ammonia and potassa, and is pre- 
cipitated of a lighter color from the latter solution by muriatic acid. 
Its therapeutic properties seem rather undetermined. Tilden & Co. 
prepare eupatorine from Eupatorium perforatum, and give the dose 
as from 1 to 2 grains as a tonic diaphoretic, while eupurpurin is 
made from E. purpureum, and prescribed as a diuretic in doses of 
from 3 to 4 grains. 

Eupurpurin, of Merrill, is stated by him to be an oleoresin, of a 
thick pilular consistence, of a dark greenish-brown color, having a 
faint peculiar smell, and a slightly nauseous taste ; soluble in alcohol 
and ether and in oil of turpentine, from which ether precipitates 
the resin, holding the oily portion in solution, and on the addition 
of alcohol, the resin is redissolved ; it is almost completely soluble 
in alkalies, but completely so on the addition of a small quantity 
of ether. This is prescribed in doses of 3 grains, repeated every 
three or four hours, as a powerful diuretic. 

Dr. Coe repudiates the nomenclature of Tilden and the Cincinnati 
eclectics in case of two or more plants from the same genera yielding 
concentrated remedies, and prefers to call that from eupatorium 
perforatum, eupatorin (perfo) and that from E. purpureum, eupa- 
torin (purpu). To the concentrated remedies issued under these 
names by B. Keith & Co., he attributes very different properties, 
though each is said to be a mixture of three principles — a "resinoid, 
neutral, and alkaloid." Although the E. (purpu) is recommended 
by Coe as a diuretic, and as useful in gravel, he does not mention 



RESINOIDS. 753 

it as a powerful diuretic, but considers its powers as more directly 
alterative ; he says it operates in dropsy by reason of its stimulant 
influence on the absorbents, as well as by its powers as a diuretic. 

Euphorbin, derived from the root of Euphorbia corollata, is one 
of the so-called " concentrated medicines," made in New York, and 
recommended as an emetic, cathartic, diaphoretic, expectorant, and 
vermifuge. The dose is 1 grain or less. 

Fraserin, derived from the root of Frasera Carolinensis, American 
Colombo, consists, according to Dr. Coe, of a resin, a neutral prin- 
ciple, and a " muci-resin; "! ! its properties tonic, stimulant, and 
mildly astringent; its dose from 2 to 10 grains. 

Gelsemin is the name given to a " concentrated remedy" prepared 
by B. Keith & Co., from the root of one of the most beautiful indi- 
genous products of our Southern States, Gelseminum semper virens, 
yellow jessamine. Tilden & Co. prepare a " resinoid" from the same 
root, under the name of Gelseminin ; neither of these preparations 
is brought within the range of legitimate practice by the publica- 
tion of the formula for their preparation, nor are physicians even 
assured of their actual chemical and physical characters. Like 
many other medicines of their class, they are presented for our 
adoption solely on the personal guarantee of their respective manu- 
facturers that they represent the drug from which prepared, and 
however high the estimate physicians may place upon the knowl- 
edge, skill, and integrity of their respective manufacturers, and the 
judgment of the few physicians who have published the results of 
their experience in the use of the preparations, the medical and 
pharmaceutical profession universally feel a proper hesitation in 
adopting any remedy the preparation of which is confined to a single 
house, of whose processes they are not allowed to judge, and whose 
preparations are not thrown open to the results of free competition 
and scientific criticism. 

Gelsemin is recommended in doses of from \ to 2 grains in fevers, 
pneumonia, pleuritis, hysteria, amenorrhcea,anddysmenorrhcea, etc., 
and the popularity of this root, and the scarcity of well-known pre- 
parations of it, have given this currency among physicians. 

Geranin or Geraniin is prepared from the root of Geranium macu- 
latum, cranesbill, or crowsfoot, a well-known indigenous astringent. 
The process described in King's Dispensatory is similar to that 
for preparing podophyllin and other resinous extracts, though it 
would seem that the most important constituent of the root, tannic 
acid, from its ready solubility in water, would be lost by this method 
of preparation. Dr. King says that " many manufacturers prefer 
making it by evaporating an aqueous decoction of the root to dry- 
ness and evaporating," a process which would yield the tannin. 
The dose indicated in the books is from one to five grains. 

Hamamelin is the name of a preparation from the root of witch- 
hazel, Hamamelis Virginica ; its principal utility seems to be as an 
astringent, of which we have an immense number in use. Dr. Coe 
states that it also possesses sedative powers. The dose is 5 grains. 

Helonin, derived from Helonias dioca, false unicorn root, is a so- 
48 



754 EXTRACTA KESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

called neutral principle, employed in eclectic practice as a uterine 
tonic, used in prolapsus uteri, and diseases peculiar to females, and 
" to remove the tendency to repeated and successive miscarriage." 
Dose, j- grain to 2 grains. It is recommended as a vermifuge in 4- 
grain doses. 

Hydrastin is the name applied in commerce to a yellow crystalline 
precipitate, produced on the addition of muriatic acid to an infusion 
of hydrastis Canadensis, golden seal or yellow puccoon root, a plant 
of the family Ranunculaceae. The true nature of this precipitate 
was not suspected till in the number of the American Journal of 
Science and Arts for January, 1862, Prof. F. Mahla, of Chicago, 
announced the discovery that the so-called hydrastin is muriate of 
berberina. The vegetable alkaline salt, under the name hydrastin, 
is extensively used as a tonic remedy, especially adapted to treating 
dyspepsia and chronic inflammation of the stomach, and is said, 
combined with bitters, to have the effect of gradually removing the 
abnormal condition of the stomach in cases of intemperance, and 
in many instances of destroying the appetite for liquor. The dose 
for an adult is 3 to 5 grains, repeated three to six times a da}'. 

The existence of another alkaloid in this root, the true hydrastia, 
was discovered by A. B. Durand, of Philadelphia, in 1850, and an- 
nounced by him in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. p. 
113. The reader is referred to the chapter on Vegetable Alkalies, in 
Part IY. of this book, for further account of these principles. 

Iridin is classed as an oleoresin by the Cincinnati School of Ec- 
lectics, though under the name Irisin a different preparation is 
made in New York. Both are derived from the root of Iris versi- 
color, blue flag, and recommended as possessed of alterative, siala- 
gogue, laxative, diuretic, and anthelmintic properties. Dose, from 
\ grain to 5 grains. 

Juglandin is a laxative, diuretic, and in larger doses cathartic 
agent, prepared from the bark of the root of Juglans cinerea, but- 
ternut, or white walnut. The process is identical with that given 
for the other precipitated resinous extracts. It is said to be nearly 
soluble in alcohol, and completely in ammonia and potassa, being 
precipitated from its solution in alkalies by muriatic acid. The 
dose, is from 2 to 5 grains ; combined with leptandrin, in pills of 
2 to 4 grains each given after eating, it is highly recommended by 
eclectic authors for chronic hepatic disorders and constipation. 

Lupulin. — The preparation of a "concentrated remedy" from hops 
is the undoubted right of any manufacturer, but we protest against 
the appropriation of the well-known and recognized name of a drug 
by which it is universally known in commerce and in the Pharma- 
copoeia to designate a proprietary preparation. We have had a 
prescription for lupulin in combination, which we have ascertained 
from the physician issuing it was meant to designate this peculiar 
preparation, and although, as pharmacists, wedded to no exclusive 
views, we were disposed to furnish the medicine intended, we 
should certainly have been held blameless if we had dispensed an 
officinal article when ordered by its appropriate officinal name. 



RESINOIDS. 755 

The lupulin of Keith, Tilden, and perhaps other manufacturers is a 
mixed resinous material, prepared by an unpublished process ; it is 
prescribed in doses of from 5 to 10 grains.* 

Lycopin is represented as astringent, styptic, sedative, and tonic ; 
it is derived from Lycopus Virginicus (bugle weed), and is highly 
recommended by Dr. Coe in hemorrhages, diabetes, dysentery, and 
cardiac affections. Dose, 2 or 3 grains. 

Leptandrin. — This is an impure " resinoid," obtained from the 
root of Leptandra Virginica (black root), an indigenous plant, 
formerly, but not at present, officinal in the U. S. P. It is pre- 
pared like the foregoing, using high proof alcohol for the extrac- 
tion of the root, as a small proportion of water present in the tinc- 
ture prevents its successful precipitation. The character of the 
precipitate is also affected by the temperature, which should not 
exceed 180° F. Roots of the second year's growth are said to yield 
the most of this product. 

Leptandrin, as thus prepared, is of a gray or brown color, with 
a peculiar faint odor and taste. Like most of these preparations, 
it is generally sold in powder. Though at first soluble in alcohol, 
it becomes less so by age ; it dissolves in solution of ammonia and 
potassa, from which acids throw it down. 

B. Keith & Co., of New York, claim for leptandrin, of their 
manufacture, that it contains four distinct principles, " resin, resi- 
noid, alkaloid, and neutral." In view of the fact, ascertained by 
Prof. E. S. Wayne, that this root contains a bitter crystalline prin- 
ciple, soluble in water, it would seem that the method of precipi- 
tation by water from a concentrated tincture would fail to secure 
a preparation representing the full therapeutic power of the drug, 
but in the absence of any information in regard to the process of 
Keith, or any analysis of his preparation, it is impossible to tell 
how far it meets the requirements of a preparation representing the 
root from which it is prepared. 

The remedy is highly valued by many practitioners as a chola- 
gogue or stimulant to the hepatic secretion, without so decided a 
purgative action as usually pertains to that class of remedies ; it is 
highly recommended in chronic dysentery and diarrhoea, and in 
typhoid and other fevers ; according to Dr. Coe, it possesses the 
advantage of being a tonic, which invigorates while it deterges. 
Like podophyllin, it is a leading article of production with several 
large manufacturing pharmacists in the United States. The close 
is two to four grains. 

Menispermin is prepared by Keith & Co. from Menispermum 
Canadense, yellow parilla, but, no formula being published, and no 
analysis having been made, it is only prescribed by those who are 
prepared to accept medicinal agents on trust. It is said to be an 
alterative, tonic, laxative, diuretic, and stimulant, in a medium 
dose of two grains. {See Vegetable Alkalies.) 

Myricin. — The published formula of Dr. Hill & Co. for this 

* See Extract of Lupulin. 



756 EXTRACTA RESINA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

remedy exhibits a departure from the usual method of preparation 
of the class, which appears to be an improvement. A saturated 
tincture of bay berry bark (Myrica cerifera), being evaporated by a 
water-bath until of a syrupy consistence, is spread in thin layers 
on glass plates till dried by spontaneous evaporation, requiring 
several weeks. 

This is then an alcoholic extract, carefully dried to a pulverulent 
condition, which, as the bark does not appear to possess important 
volatile or readily oxidizable constituents, gives a convenient repre- 
sentative of the soluble principles of the bark. It is a stimulant 
and decided astringent, and is asserted to possess alterative, diuretic, 
and antispasmodic properties. Dose, 2 to 10 grains. 

Phytolaccia, Phytolaccin, is a concentrated remedy from poke root 
(Phytolacca decandra). So process is published for its preparation, 
and it is not made by all the " eclectic" pharmacists, nor recom- 
mended by all the authors of that school. It is said to be a light- 
brown powder, soluble in water and insoluble in alcohol or ether, 
and to be alterative, aperient, and slightly narcotic. Dose, from 
one-fourth of a grain to a grain three times a day. 

Populin, from the bark of Populus tremuloides, aspen, or Ameri- 
can poplar, is recommended by eclectics as a tonic and febrifuge; and 
Dr. Coe attributes to it numerous valuable properties alone and in 
combination. Dose, 4 to 8 grains. 

Trunin, a " concentrated remedy" prepared from wild cherry 
bark, Cerasus serotina, by the same manufacturers, finds no favor 
with the author of the American Dispensatory ; Dr. Coe, however, 
claims for Keith's preparation that it contains three principles, 
" resinoid, neutral, and amygdalin," of which the neutral principle 
is the long-sought active constituent of the bark. It is, of course, 
destitute of hydrocyanic acid, though stated to be stimulant, tonic, 
expectorant, and in large doses, sedative. The dose as a tonic is 2 
grains, as an expectorant 1 to 2 grains, as a sedative 4 to 8 grains. 
We have no process for nor analysis of this and many of the pre- 
ceding preparations, and little or no impartial testimony as to their 
merits. Like many others of their class, they are introduced in 
this work from no design to recommend them, but for the necessary 
information of physicians and pharmacists who meet with them in 
the course of their professional practice. 

Ptelein.— Prepared from the bark of the root of Ptelea trifoliata, 
wafer ash, by adding a saturated tincture to twice its volume of 
water and distilling off the alcohol, when the ptelein remains as a 
soft oleoresinous precipitate, of a dark-brown color, a peculiar odor, 
and an oily, bitter, acrid, persistent taste; soluble in alcohol, ether, 
and oil of turpentine', and imperfectly in alkaline solutions. It is 
recommended as a tonic, and, in combination with various other 
remedies, has been used in dyspepsia, hepatic torpor, chronic erysi- 
pelas, and chronic dysentery. 

Rhusin. — The account of this substance, given by Dr. King in 
his Dispensatory, taken from the Eclectic Journal of Medicine, Ro- 
chester, vol. iv., No. vi., p. 232, is one of the most curious instances 



UNOFFICINAL. CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. VO I 

of the inaccuracy of many of the processes and descriptions of the 
eclectic works. It is represented to be the active principle of the 
leaves of Rhus glabrura, sumach, which are to be percolated by 
alcohol of sp. gr. .830, and this displaced by means of a vacuum 
apparatus. "The rhusine is then precipitated and washed with 
distilled water, dried on filter cloth in an airy, dry room, and 
reduced to a fine powder." It is said to be a "light brown powder, 
soluble in hot water, insoluble in alcohol, and having a slightly 
bitter taste." 

The reader will observe that a precipitate thrown out of solution 
in alcohol by water is, when dried, said to be soluble in hot water 
and insoluble in alcohol. If this were the only instance of similar 
inconsistency, it might be attributed to carelessness in the compiler, 
or incompetency in the proof-reader. The well-known existence 
of tannic and gallic acids in large proportion in the leaves of 
sumach, renders it impossible that a preparation representing their 
medical properties could be prepared by the process above quoted. 
The rhusin of Keith & Co. is stated to be from the bark of the root, 
and to contain resinoid and neutral principles; tannin is not men- 
tioned, and yet the remedy is esteemed tonic, astringent, and anti- 
septic. 

Rumin is a concentrated preparation from yellow dock root, Rumex 
crispus. The formula is not published. The manufacturers attri- 
bute alterative, mildly astringent, and laxative properties to it, 
and assert that it resembles rhubarb. It is generally prescribed in 
combination. Average dose, 3 grains. 

Rhein. — One of the" eclectic" manufacturers has, of late, attempted 
the application of his unpublished modes of preparation to rhubarb 
root, with what success we do not know. The dose, as given by 
Dr. Coe, is from 1 to 4 grains. 

Scutellariae, Scutellaria. — The formula of Prof. C. EL. Cleaveland 
is as follows: Make a tincture of the herb Scutellaria lateriflora 
with alcohol of 76 per cent,, distil off' the alcohol until the liquid is 
of the consistence of a fluid extract, add to it several times its 
weight of water, and precipitate with solution of alum. "Wash the 
precipitate to free it from the alum, and dry it in the open air with- 
out heat. This process furnishes an extractive material of a light 
greenish-brown color, partially soluble in alcohol and more so in 
ether ; insoluble in water. Its medical properties are those of a 
nervine and tonic. Dr. King considers it especially useful in cases 
of depression of the nervous and vital powers after long sickness, 
over-exercise, excessive study, or from long-continued exhausing 
labor. Dose, from 2 to 6 grains. 

Sanguinarina and sanguinarin are two veiy different preparations, 
from the root of Sanguinaria Canadensis (bloodroot), which belongs 
to the natural family Pa paver •acice, the poppy tribe. Of the alka- 
loid sanguinarina mention is made in Part IV. It is a powerful 
remedy, being used in doses of one-tenth to one-thirtieth of a grain, 
and should be carefully distinguished from the so-called "alka- 



758 EXTRACTA RESXNA AND CONCENTRATED REMEDIES. 

resinoid," which is chiefly used in the eclectic practice, and which 
contains an uncertain proportion of it. 

Sanguinarin is thus prepared: Take of bloodroot, in coarse 
powder, a convenient quantity, and alcohol sufficient; make a satu- 
rated tincture, as in the case of the other u resinoids ;" filter and 
add an equal quantity of water; distil oft* the alcohol and allow the 
residue to rest until precipitation ceases. Remove the supernatant 
liquid, wash the precipitate in water, dry it carefully by moderate 
heat, and pulverize it for use. As thus prepared, the powder is of 
a deep reddish-brown color, peculiar odor, and bitter, rather nause- 
ous taste, followed by a persistent pungency on the fauces. It is 
insoluble in water, soluble in boiling alcohol, and partially soluble 
in alkaline solutions, acetic acid, and ether. This is given as a 
tonic in doses of from \ to 1 grain, and as a hepatic and alterative 
from J a grain to 2 grains. 

Senecin, the "concentrated active principle" from Senecia gracilis* 
precipitated from a saturated tincture of the root and herb, by add- 
ing it to an equal bulk of water and distilling off the alcohol. It 
is called an oleoresin by Dr. King, but is sold in powder by some 
manufacturers who mix it with dry materials to give it this char- 
acter. The dose, as a diuretic, emmenagogue, and expectorant, is 
from 3 to 5 grains, but it would seem that dilution with an inert 
powder would modify the quantity required to produce a given 
effect. 

Senecionine is a modification of the foregoing, directed to be pre- 
pared, according to Dr. F. Hill, by adding two or three times its 
weight of water to the tincture, evaporating to the consistence of 
a fluid extract, and further precipitating with a solution of alum, 
washing, and drying without heat; it forms a dark-green powder, 
which may be given, as the representative of the plant, in doses of 
from 1 to 5 grains. 

Stillingin is advertised as the active principle of Stillingia sylva- 
tica, Queen's delight, a plant indigenous to our Southern States. 
The process for its preparation is concealed. Dr. King, in his Dis- 
pensatory, asserts that the specimen he has seen is, undoubtedly, the 
preparation known as oil of stillingia, triturated with sugar or 
sugar of milk. The oil of stillingia is made by treating the root 
with 95 per cent, alcohol or with ether, and evaporating off the 
menstruum. It is not a uniform liquid, but is liable to deposit 
flocculi on standing. According to Dr. King, it contains about 40 
per cent, of fixed oil, the remainder consisting chiefly of extrac- 
tive matter and resin. Externally applied, it is recommended as 
a valuable stimulating application, too acrid for internal use, un- 
less incorporated with viscid ingredients and largely diluted. Dr. 
Coe gives it in doses of 1 drop, which he repeats every half hour 
in croup, or in bronchitis and laryngitis, every four or six hours, 
incorporated with mucilage or dropped on sugar. 

Smilasin is the name applied to a preparation of sarsaparilla, 
lauded in the work of Dr. Coe. I confess to incredulity about its 
merits, though founded on no experiment or positive information. 



759 

The dose is 2 to 5 grains. It must, of course, be distinguished 
from the neutral crystalline principle obtained from sarsaparilla, 
and resembling saponin. See chapter on Neutral Crystalline Prin- 
ciples, Part IV. 

Trilliin, a " concentrated medicine" extracted from Trillium pen- 
dulum, bethroot, is represented as an astringent, tonic, alterative, 
and expectorant, in doses of 4 to 8 grains. It must not be con- 
founded with trilline, a neutral acrid principle, resembling saponine, 
isolated from this root by Prof. E. S. Wayne. 

Viburnin is the name applied by one of the " eclectic" manufac- 
turers to a secret preparation, said to be obtained from the bark of 
Viburnum opulus, and recommended as an antispasmodic, anti- 
periodic, expectorant, alterative, and tonic, in doses of 2 grains. 



CHAPTER XV. 

ON DISTILLATION, DISTILLED PRODUCTS, AND PERFUMERY. 

The process of distillation, the reverse of evaporation in its ap- 
plications, is, like it, designed to separate the volatile from the 
fixed ingredients in a solution. While in evaporation the object is 
to dissipate and reject what is volatile, preserving and retaining 
what is comparatively fixed, in distillation the volatile ingredient 
is to be secured. To distil a solution, it is first converted into 
vapor by the application of heat, and the vapor is then condensed 
in a separate part of the apparatus. 

In a work of the design and scope of the present, any elaborate 
description of the apparatus used in distillation, and the mode 
of conducting the process on a large scale, would be quite superfluous. 
The uses of the still in the manufacture of spirituous liquors, spirit 
of turpentine, and coal oil of commerce, and in the rectification of 
these, and of petroleum, and in various other branches of manu- 
facture, are among the most important subjects connected with 
chemical technology, and occupy a prominent place in works on 
that subject. 

The reader is referred to papers upon this subject, describing stills 
suitable for the use of pharmacists, in Amer. Journ. Pharmacy, vol. 
xxxvi. 12, 22, xxxvii. 166, xli. 197 ; those desirous of obtaining 
information respecting stills for rectification of spirits can consult 
Muspratt's Chemistry, subject Alcohol, and a paper by Dr. E. P. 
Squibb, in vol. xxx. page 1, of Amer. Journ. Pharmacy. 

It should be remembered in performing distillations that the 
largest quantity of liquid that can be drawn off in a given time is 
not to be regarded as the most desirable result ; the sp. gr. of the 
spirit obtained must also be considered. If the heat be too great, 
more of the less volatile portions will pass over and the distillate 



760 



ON DISTILLATION, ETC, 



be less desirable for future use, while the liquid remaining in the 
still will be objectionably strong in spirit. For this reason the re- 
frigeration must be attended to. The condensation of liquids of 
alcoholic or ethereal character should be conducted at such tempe- 
ratures as will permit the less volatile matters associated with them 
to flow back to the still while the stronger spirit passes on, to be 
fully refrigerated, and then kept for the use designed. Without 
thorough refrigeration great loss of material must necessarily occur, 
and serious accidents have happened from the vapor of volatile 
liquids impregnating the apartment in consequence of deficient re- 
frigeration. 

In the chapter preliminary to the treatise on pharmaceutical 
chemistry, Part III., the forms of apparatus adapted to the pur- 
poses of the pharmacist in his more strictly chemical processes are 
described and figured ; in the present chapter only such apparatus 

is figured and described as is 
Fig. 239. adapted to the preparation of dis- 

tilled spirits and waters, and the 
recovery of alcohol from evapora- 




ting tinctures. 



Fig. 239 exhibits a copper still 
and block-tin condensing worm, 
such as may be conveniently used 
for the distillation of liquids which 
are not liable to corrode metallic 
vessels. Such an apparatus is par- 
ticularly adapted to distilling water for pharmaceutical use, also 
rose-water and the alcoholic solution of essential oils, called spirits. 
If of sufficient capacity, it is adapted to the distillation of essential 
oils. The chief obstacle to its general use for the various purposes 
of the pharmacist lies in the comparative difficulty of depriving the 




Tin retort with water joints. 



condensing worm of the odor of different substances distilled and 
the consequent liability of these to contaminate the next succeeding 
distillate. 



THE PHARMACEUTICAL STILL. 



7G1 



Fig. 240 represents a vessel of tinned iron which I have used as 
a substitute for a glass retort in operations in which no corrosive 
or acid substance enters into the liquid to be distilled. Near the 
top of a deep tin vessel is soldered on a small gutter, so arranged 
on its inside as not to reach quite up to the level of the sides of the 
vessel. The top, 6, has a rim projecting downwards, which sets 
into this gutter, as shown at c, in the section. When about to use 
this, after charging it with the substance to be distilled, the little 
gutter is filled with water and the top fitted on. The water joint 
thus formed prevents the escape of any portion of the vapor, while 
it is prevented from becoming empty by the moisture condensed on 
the inside of the conical top dropping into it as it descends. 

This may be used in connection with any means of refrigeration 
at hand, such as a worm and tub, or a Liebig's condenser figured 
in the first chapter on Pharmaceutical Chemistry. Among its ad- 
vantages are the absence of bumping, a phenomenon which inter- 
feres with the use of glass retorts, and its freedom from the liability 
to fracture. In using it, however, care must be taken to withdraw 
the heat as soon as the required quantity of liquid has been dis- 
tilled ; otherwise the solid contents, becoming caked on the bottom 
of the retort, will give rise to empyreumatic products, contaminating 
the distillate. 

Fig. 241 shows a cooler which may be attached to any still-head 
or retort, and is especially applicable to the condensation of alco- 
holic vapor ; it consists of a square 
box of tinned iron, twice the height 
of its diameter, with a diaphragm 
soldered on diagonally so as to be 
lower at one corner than at the 
other three. At this lowest corner 
a vertical tube is soldered in the 
diaphragm, which descends in that 
corner of the box nearly to a lower 
diaphragm. Between this dia- 
phragm and the upper one the 
space is separated into equal parts 
by a series of transverse partial 
partitions or plates, meeting alter- 
nately at acute angles, within an 
inch of the opposite sides of the 
box, so as to separate the water 
for condensing, which passes down 
through the tube and gradually 
fills one side, from the condensing 
surface and space for the vapor, which enters at a conical neck c 
just below the upper diaphragm; a series of plates are soldered to 
the side penetrated by the neck so as to extend into the condensing 
space and compel the vapor to take a zigzag course, as indicated 
by the arrows. As the coldest part of the condensing surface is 



Fte. 241. 




Warner's condenser. 



762 



ON 



Fig. 242. near the bottom, the vapor is tho- 

roughly condensed in its course through 
the apparatus; the cold water entering 
at / is discharged warmed at e, the dis- 
tillate finds an outlet at d. 

The pharmaceutical still, invented by 
Prof. Procter, is a cheap and very con- 
venient apparatus for the uses now 
under consideration ; it is well adapted 
to recovering the alcohol from tinctures 
to be made into syrups, fluid extracts, 
or extracts; the alcohol obtained, even 
though impure and below standard 
strength, is suited to preparing the same tincture again ; and the 
saving of alcohol by this means will be very considerable. 

It may be made of tinned iron, but preferably of tinned copper, 
of any required size from a gallon up to five or even ten gallons 
capacity ; the condenser is in this case immediately over the boiler 
in which the liquid is heated, and the distillate is collected by means 
of a ledge or gutter on its lower surface. Fig. 243 represents a sec- 




Pharmaceutical still. 



Fig. 243. 

IP V7 <> 




Section of pharmaceutical stilL 



tion of this still. J. is a deep tin boiler, with a rim soldered round 
its top at a a, forming a gutter for the water joint, by which it is 
connected with the dome or head B. This is the refrigerator, on 
the inner surface of which the condensation occurs ; C is the neck 
or tube for carrying off the distillate ; c c is a circular rim sol- 
dered on to the base of the head B in such a position that the upper 
projection forms a gutter for conducting the condensed fluid as it 
runs down on the under surface of the cone d d into the neck C, 



THE PHARMACEUTICAL STILL. 763 

while the lower part projects downward into the gutter a a to form 
the water joint. 

The course of the circular rim c c is of necessity inclined down- 
wards towards the under edge of the neck 0, as indistinctly shown 
in the section, in order to determine its liquid contents in that 
direction. 

b is an opening in the top of the condenser, stopped by a cork, for 
inspecting the progress of the distillation, and adding to the con- 
tents of the boiler ; e is a funnel tube into which a current of cold 
water is directed during distillation, while as it becomes warm it 
ascends and escapes by the tube on the other side. The water joint 
is to be nearly filled at the commencement of. the operation, and 
effectually prevents the escape of the vapor. It is important that 
the inner rim which forms part of the water joint be kept lower 
than the outer one, so that any liquid which is added by condensa- 
tion to the water in the joint shall flow back into the still. 

The long-continued application of a pretty high heat, which is 
necessary in distillation, involves an expense which, if gas or even 
charcoal fuel is employed, may approach the value of the alcohol 
recovered, so that in the winter time it is well to avail ourselves 
of the stove used for heating the apartment by fitting the still to it, 
and distilling slowly at the moderate heat thus obtained. The ad- 
vantage gained by the exclusion of the atmosphere in distillation 
is not to be overlooked when vegetable preparations are being con- 
centrated. The head of the still becoming full of steam excludes 
the air, for the most part, and the condensation of the steam brings 
about a partial vacuum which favors evaporation at low tempera- 
tures. 

The proper refrigeration of the condensing surface requires pretty 
free use of cold water ; and the application of this has direct relation 
to the degree of heat required to vaporize the liquid being distilled. 
An indication by which the operator may always judge when the 
refrigeration is insufficient, is the escape of uncondensed vapor. 
When this is observed, he should diminish the heat applied, and 
increase the application of cold to the condensing surface ; this pre- 
caution is very important when the vapor is inflammable. The 
methods indicated in Part III. for the continuous application of 
cold water by a funnel, and by a small cock, near the bottom of a 
tin bucket, are also well adapted to the kinds of apparatus now 
described. In using this still I have usually conducted the opera- 
tion by the use of a movable gas stove, Fig. 127, on a counter, at 
the end of which are a sink and hydrant ; by the use of a few feet 
of elastic tube, the cold stream from the hydrant may be determined 
into the cooler, while the warmed water is conducted off into the 
sink by a similar attachment. 

The application of heat must of course be regulated by the vola- 
tility and inflammability of the liquid treated. Strong alcoholic or 
ethereal liquids, being volatilized at low temperatures, may be 
heated by a water-bath or a sand-bath, not too hot, which, besides 



764 

preventing the excessive boiling of the liquid, will diminish the 
danger from fracture if a glass vessel is used. 

In distilling from flowers or herbs for obtaining essential oils or 
medicated waters, there is great liability to scorching from the con- 
tact of masses of the solid material with the heated surface of the 
still, thus producing empyreumatic products which quite destroy 
the agreeable fragrance of the product. A false bottom or perfo- 
rated diaphragm, a few inches above the point of contact with the 
flame, is a preventive of this, adopted in large operations. In some 
cases even this is not sufficient, and, as in preparing oil of bitter 
almonds, it will be found necessary to introduce the pulpy mass 
upon a layer of straw over the bottom or upon a diaphragm ; by 
this means the contact of the material with the spot where the 
heat is applied is effectually prevented. The application of care- 
fully regulated steam heat is, of course, in this as in most other 
heat operations on a large scale, a great improvement. 

Distillation is frequently applied to obtain products for the per- 
fumer, and, in some instances, particularly those of the fragrant 
waters, the terms double distilled and triple distilled are frequently 
used; the meaning being that the same liquid has been twice or 
three times distilled from separate fresh portions of the flowers. 

Galenical Preparations made by Distillation. 
Aquce Destillata, U. S. P. (Distilled Water.) 

This is directed to be used in a great many preparations in the 
Pharmacopoeia. In some, its employment seems called for, while 
in others, the river or spring water, so freely supplied in nearly all 
towns and cities, answers every purpose. 

The inorganic impurities imparted to spring waters by the rocks 
through which they permeate are in the highest degree important 
in connection with solutions of delicate chemical substances, and 
the same may be said of the organic substances which contaminate 
some of the natural sources of water, and form precipitates with 
nitrate of silver, tartrate of antimony and potassium, and a few other 
very delicate chemical agents. It is, however, generally sufficient 
that water should be pure enough for safe and wholesome drinking 
to be fit for use in preparing the Galenical and even many of the 
chemical preparations. 

One of the most important uses, to the apothecary and physician, 
of the apparatus for distillation figured and described on the fore- 
going pages, is to enable him to prepare, and keep at hand for spe- 
cial occasions, aqua destillata. 

Aquje Medicate. 

Under the head of Medicated Waters, Chapter IV., it has been 
stated that most of this class of preparations may be made by the solu- 
tion of the essential oils in water, or preferably by the distillation 
of water from the flowers or other odorous parts of plants which 
contain the essential oils in their fresh and unchanged condition. 



SPIRITS OR ESSENCES. 765 

Perhaps the most important case of this kind is aqua cinnamomi, 
which, as before stated, when made by the distillation of water 
from the true Ceylon cinnamon, is one of the most delicious of 
flavors, and besides the peculiar odor of the cinnamon is pleasantly 
sweet to the taste, a property which must be due to some volatile 
ingredient at present unknown. The proportion of true cinnamon 
to the water used is 18 troyounces to the two gallons. The bark 
should be coarsely powdered and macerated some hours before 
applying the fire, and from the two gallons only one gallon is 
recovered. 

Aqua rosce is one of the medicated waters in most common use, 
designed to be made by distillation, and prescribed as a solvent for 
salts which are incompatible with chemical substances often present 
in minute quantities in water from springs and rivers. It is, how- 
ever, very liable to undergo spontaneous changes which render it 
unfit for use. 3 lbs. and 5 oz. com. of rose petals are directed to two 
gallons of water, from which one gallon is to be collected. The 
rose petals collected in season may be preserved in salt till needed. 

Aqua aurantii florum is also directed to be made in the same 
manner. 

Fennel water, mint water, and peppermint water are all indicated in 
the Pharmacopoeia as adapted to this mode of preparation, the pro- 
portion indicated being 18 troyounces (1J lbs. com.) to two gallons, 
from which one gallon is to be distilled ; while anise water is 
directed to be made with ten troyounces to two gallons, from which 
one gallon is to be distilled. 

Olea Destillata, U. S. P. 

The distilled oils are prepared by mixing the bruised herb or 
other part containing the oil with a small portion of water in a 
still, when, after macerating for a suitable length of time, and ad- 
justing the apparatus, heat is applied. The oil, though its boiling 
point is always much above that of water, is readily diffused in the 
steam ; and when this is condensed in the refrigerated part of the 
apparatus, the oil, if in excess, separates, and if specifically lighter 
collects on the surface of the distilled water ; or, if heavier, it set- 
tles to the bottom, and may be separated. The mode of preparing 
the officinal aqua rosaz, and other common distilled waters, corre- 
sponds with this, the proportion of water being so adjusted that 
no excess of the oil beyond what is soluble in the water shall be 
present. 

Spiritus, U. S. P. 

Alcoholic solutions of essential oils are usually called spirits or 
essences ; they are sometimes prepared by distilling alcohol from 
the fresh herb, which thus gives up its essential oil, and on conden- 
sation retains it in solution. In the last edition of the Pharmaco- 
poeia (1870) this method of making the spirits lavand. and nutmegs 
was dropped. This is to be regretted, as the spirits obtained by 



766 



ON DISTILLATION, ETC. 



distillation, as lias been already observed, are much more free from 
resinous and terebinthinate flavor than those made by solution. They 
are also prepared by dissolving the oil directly in alcohol, as in the 
spiritus menthee piperita^, spiritus menthse viridis, called essences 
of peppermint and spearmint, and spiritus camphorse. For the 
preparation of all spirits by solution, fresh volatile oils ought to be 
selected, to impart the flavor in its purity ; old resinified oils should 
be rejected for this purpose, or, if used, should be purified by redis- 
tillation, with the previous addition of a little water. The greater 
portion of the class spiritus are merely solutions of the essential oil 
in alcohol. 

In the edition of the Pharmacopoeia for 1860, several preparations 
were added to this series which were formerly classed among the 
chemicals. Spiritus cetherus compositus, spiritus cetherus nitrosi,' 
spiritus ammonia?, spiritus ammonice aromaticus, and spiritus chloro- 
formi, are of this description. The reader is referred to the chemical 
part of this work for a description of these. The following syllabus 
displays those which do not belong to any chemical series. 

Spiritus, U. S. P. 

Solutions of essential oils. 



Officinal name. 


Proportion. 


Use. 


Spiritus anisi 


Oilfgi, alcohol .817f|xv 


Carminative. 


" camphoraa 


fg'y, " .835f'^xvj 


Antispasmodic, nervous stim. 


" cinnamomi 


Oil f |j, " .817 f |sv 


Aromatic, carminative. 


" juniperi 


" f§j, " .817 f gxlviij 

- juniper f 3 i SS) I akoh 0v 


Carminative, diuretic. 


a " com. ■] 


" caraway, } r.... 
c r? ii -«, water Oil] 
" Fen 1, ea. nix 1 J 




" lavandula 


" f§j, alcohol .817 fgxlviij 


Stimulant, aromatic. 


" " comp 


See formula 


Stim., aromatic, carminative. 


" limonis 


" f§ij, lemon-peel §j, alco- 
hol .817 fgxxxij 


Flavoring adjuvant. 


" menthse piperita 


" f m, alcohol .817 f |xv 


Carminative. 


" " viridis 


" f f j, « .817 f $xv 


" 


" myristicae 


» f§j, « .817fgxlviij 


Flavoring adjuvant. 



The uses of this class are familiar to most ; they are chiefly used 
as flavoring ingredients of various preparations, and this use is also 
connected in some cases with medical properties. Comp. spirit of 
juniper is a close approximate to Holland gin, and may take the 
place of schiedam schnapps as a stimulating diuretic. The other 
spirits are mostly the kind of stimulants conveniently designated 
as carminatives. 

The simple spirit of lavender prepared by distillation is one of the 
most pleasant of perfumes. That made by solution from the recipe 
to be given hereafter is dependent on the freshness and fine quality 
of the oil for its value as a perfume. The cultivated or garden 
lavender yields a much better oil than the common wild plant ; the 
finest quality oil of garden lavender comes from England, and com- 
mands a high price. The next in quality is of French origin, dis- 



OFFICINAL SPIRITS. 767 

tilled by A. Cliiris, and is somewhat cheaper, though not identical 
in flavor. 

The only preparations of this series which are much prescribed 
are compound spirit of lavender and spirit of camphor. The former is 
very often directed by practitioners as a flavoring and coloring 
ingredient in prescription. The choice of saunders as the coloring 
agent is, however, unfortunate from the resinous deposit which is 
apt to separate by dilution with water and on long standing. 
Cochineal is a much brighter and handsomer coloring ingredient, 
and the compound tincture of cardamom is, on that account, to be 
preferred to the lavender compound as a coloring ingredient in 
solutions and mixtures. Spirit of camphor is made by solution of 
the camphor in alcohol ; it is ill adapted for internal use, owing to 
its precipitating on being added to water. The dose when properly 
suspended is twenty drops. 

Working Formulas for some of the Officinal Spirits. 
Spiritus Anisi. {Spirit of Anise.) IT. S. P. 

Take of Oil of anise, a fluidounce. 

Stronger alcohol, fifteen fluidounces. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol. 

In the same way make spiritus cinnamomi, from oil of cinnamon. 

Spiritus Camphorce. {Spirit of Camphor.) U.S. P. 

Tinctura Camphora?, U. S. P. 1850. 
Take of Camphor, four troyounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Dissolve the camphor in the alcohol, and filter through paper. 

Spiritus Limonis. {Spirit of Lemon. Essence of Lemon.) U. S. P. 

Take of Oil of lemon, two fluidounces. 

Lemon peel, freshly grated, a troyounce. 
Stronger alcohol, two pints. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol, add the lemon peel, 
macerate for twenty-four hours, and filter through paper. 

Spiritus Menth.ai Piperitaz. {Spirit of Peppermint.) IT. S. P. ' 

Tinctura Olei Mentha? Piperita?, U. S. P. 1850, 
Take of Oil of peppermint, a fluidounce. 

Peppermint, in coarse powder, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Stronger alcohol, fifteen fluidounces. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol, add the peppermint, 
macerate for twenty-four hours, and filter through paper. 
In the same way, make — 

Spiritus Menthol Viridis. {Spirit of Spearmint.) U. S. P. 
From oil of spearmint. 



768 

Spiritus Myristicce. 
Take of Oil of nutmeg, a fluidounce. 
Stronger alcohol, three pints. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol. 

Spiritus Lavandulae, IT. S. P. {Spirit of Lavender.) 

Take of Oil of lavender, a fluidounce. 
Stronger alcohol, three pints. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol. 

Spiritus Lavandulae Compositus. (Compound Spirit of Lavender.) 

IT. S. P. 

Take of Oil of lavender, a fluidounce. 

Oil of rosemary, two fluidrachms. 

Cinnamon, in moderately fine powder, two troyounces. 

Cloves, in moderately fine powder, half a troyounce. 

Nutmeg, in moderately fine powder, a troyounce. 

Red saunders, in moderately fine powder, three hundred and sixty 

grains. 
Alcohol, six pints. 
Water, two pints. 
Diluted alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, and add the water. Then mix 
the powders, and, having moistened the mixture with a fluidounce 
of the alcoholic solution of the oils, pack it firmly in a conical per- 
colator, and gradually pour upon it the remainder of the alcoholic 
solution, and afterwards diluted alcohol, until the filtered liquid 
measures eight pints. 

Spiritus Juniperi. (Spirit of Juniper.) 

Take of Oil of juniper, a fluidounce. 
Stronger alcohol, three pints. 

Dissolve the oil in the stronger alcohol. 

Spiritus Juniperi Compositus. (Compound Spirit of Juniper.) IT. S. P 

Take of Oil of juniper, a fluidrachm and a half. 
Oil of caraway, 

Oil of fennel, each, ten minims. 
Diluted alcohol, eight pints. 

Dissolve the oils in the diluted alcohol. 

On Perfumery and Toilet Articles. 

Among the uses to which the products of distillation are applied, 
those connected primarily with the sense of smell possess an interest 
and importance, especially to the pharmacist, who has, from the 
earliest time, been called upon to manufacture and sell them, which 
justifies the appropriation of a portion of this work to their modes 
of preparation. 

Besides the use of fragrant essences for the mere gratification of 
the sense of smell, they serve a good purpose in headache, and as 



ON PERFUMERY AND TOILET ARTICLES. 769 

grateful refrigerant applications in dry and hot conditions of the 
skin. 

Although some of the finest perfumes are derived from the East 
Indies, Ceylon, Mexico, and Peru, yet we owe most of the supplies 
used in the perfumer's art to the extensive flower farms of Sice, 
Grasse, Montpellier, and Cannes, in France, and owing to the pecu- 
liar fitness of the climate of those provinces, and the adaptation. of 
the French people to pursuits requiring delicate perceptions and 
refined tastes, the art of perfumery has attained a perfection in 
France towards which most of our manufacturers make but a faint 
approximation. The French recipes call for so many ingredients 
not readily obtained in this country, and altogether derived from 
their own gardens and manufactories, that they require consider- 
able modification to make them practicable to us. I shall, there- 
fore, confine myself to inserting a few tried recipes which constitute 
a pretty good assortment of essences. 

Unlike the medicinal preparations spoken of throughout the 
other parts of this work, these perfumes allow of an unlimited 
choice of ingredients, and a corresponding variety of combinations 
and proportions, restricted only by that most capricious of all 
standards — taste. 

For further accounts of the art of making fragrant essences and 
all other perfumes, see the admirable work on the subject by G. W. 
Septimus Piesse, published in London, and republished in Phila- 
delphia, in 1856 and 1863. 

Colognes. 

Eau de Cologne, as imported from Cologne and from Paris, is a 
highly rectified spirituous perfume obtained by distillation from a 
variety of fragrant plants. Of the numerous Farina colognes im- 
ported, all are highly rectified and apparently distilled from the 
plants, while, as prepared in this country, Cologne water is almost 
always made from essential oils dissolved in alcohol. This may be 
very good, if the oils are fresh and combined with reference to their 
relative strength and accord. 

Best Cologne Water. (No. 1.) 

Take of Oil of bergamot fsij. 

Oil of neroli f gij. 

Oil of jessamine fo ss « 

Oil of garden lavender f ^ij. 

Oil of cinnamon n\J. 

Benzoated tincture ......... f^iij. 

Tincture of musk f fss. 

Deodorized alcohol Cong. j. 

Rose water Oij. 

Mix, and allow the preparation to stand a long time before filter- 
ing for use. 

49 



770 ON DISTILLATION, ETC. 

Common Cologne Water, {No. 2.) 

Take of Oil of lavender f ^iss. 

Oil of rosemary fsss. 

Oil of lemon ffj. 

Oil of cinnamon gtt. xx. 

Alcohol Cong. j. Mix. 

Much cheaper than the foregoing. 

Benzoated Tincture for Colognes, etc. 

Take of Tonqua beans Jj. 

Vanilla gij. 

Nutmeg, grated No. j. 

Mace 3ij. 

Benzoic acid gr. x. 

Alcohol Oj. 

Macerate the solid ingredients, in coarse powder, in the alcohol 
ad libitum, and filter. 



fSij. 

f^ss. \ 

fass. 

f^ij. 
Cons. 1. 



Toilet Waters. — (Substitutes for Eau de Cologne.) 
Rose Geranium 
Take of Essential oil of citronella (India) 

Essential oil of lemon grass (India) 
Essential oil of bergamot . . . 
Essential oil of lavender (Erench) 
Extract of jessamine (from pomade) 

Benzoated tincture 

Alcohol (95 per cent, deodorized) 

Mix and reduce with water which has previously been saturated 
with oil of citronella by trituration, after the manner of the offici- 
nal medicated waters, as long as it can be done without precipi- 
tating too much of the essential oils; let it stand for a few days and 
filter. 

Orange Blossom. 

Take of Essential oil of neroli (petal bigarade No. 1) f £j. 

Essential oil of orange peel (bigarade No. 1) gtt. xl. 

Essential oil of rosemary (from flowers only) f gss. 

Essential oil of bergamot f 3j. 

Extract of orange flowers (from pomade), 

Extract of jessamine (from pomade), each . f.^ij. 

Alcohol (95 per cent, deodorized) .... Oiv. 

Distilled orange-flower water Oj, or q. s. 

Mix, and proceed as before. 

Putcha Pat. (Patchouly.) 

Take of Essential oil of patchouly ...... fgij. 

Essential oil of copaiva f^ss. 

Essential oil of orange-peel (bigarade) . . tii v. 

Essential oil of valerian iryj. 

Essential oil of rosemary (from flowers only) nixv. 

Tincture of ginger £iss. 

Benzoated tincture f Jss. 

Alcohol (95 per cent, deodorized) .... Cong. j. 
Patchouly water (made with oil of patchouly, 
after the method of medicated waters, as 

in rose geranium) Oj, or q. s. 



TOILET WATERS. 771 



Hose. 

Take of Balsam Peru n\,xxv. 

Essential oil of bergamot f ^iij. 

Essential oil of santal m xl. 

Essential oil of neroli (bigarade petal No. 1) tf\,xx. 

Essential oil of rosemary (aux fleurs) . . . f ^iss. 

Essential oil of rose (kisamlic) f^ij. 

Essential oil of citronella (India) .... f 3iss. 

Extract of rose (from pomade) f §ij. 

Alcohol (95 per cent, deodorized) .... Ovj. 

Kose water (distilled) Oj. 

Add the last after the mixed oils and alcohol have stood two or 
three days, and filter the whole. 

Lavender. 

Take of Essential oil of lavender (aux fleurs) . . . f^iss. 

Essential oil of lemon fSiij- 

Essential oil of lemon thyme f Jj. 

Essential oil of orange-peel, siceet .... f^j. 

Essential oil of nutmeg . . . ... . . fgj. 

Essential oil of sage f £ss. 

Tincture of musk f^vj. 

Tincture of benzoin f,^j. 

Sweet spirit of nitre f^ij. 

Alcohol (95 per cent, deodorized) .... Cong. ss. 
X«a vender water (made from the oil and water) Oj. 

Millefleur. 

Take of Balsam Peru f^iij. 

Oil of bergamot f 3yj. 

Oil of cloves f 3iij. 

Oil of neroli {pet. gr. ) f^vj. 

Extract of musk f ^iij. 

Orange-flower water Oiss, or q. s. 

Alcohol (deodorized) Ovj. 

Mix. 

Heliotrope. 

Take of Tincture of tonka f fxvj. 

Oil of bitter almonds rr\^iij- 

Oil of rose n\,x. 

Mix. 

Frangipanni. 

Take of Essential oil of rose it^xx. 

Essential oil of neroli (bigarade) .... nix. 

Essential oil of melisse ""Iv. 

Essential oil of bergamot f 3j. 

Essential oil of santal wood f ^ij. 

Extract of vanilla f.^ss. 

Extract of magnolia (from pomade) . . . f^j. 
Tincture of santal wood saturated, 

Alcohol, aa Cong. ss. 

Sandal water from oil * q. s. to dilute. 

Mix. 



772 



ON DISTILLATION, ETC. 



Verbena Water. 

Take of Oil of balm melisse f^iij. 

Deodorized alcohol Oij. 

Water Sufficient. 

Make a clear solution. 

This may be made somewhat stronger, though of a less pure ver- 
bena flavor, by the addition of a little oil of lemon. Oil of balm 
melisse is imported ; its smell seems identical with our garden 
lemon trifolia. 

Lavender Water. (Simple Spirit of Lavender.) 

Take of English oil of garden lavender f ^ij. 

Deodorized alcohol Oj. 

Make a solution. 

A little fresh calamus root macerated in the above improves it. 



Florida Water. 



Take of Oil lavender, 

Oil of bergamot, 



Oil of lemon, each, . 
Tincture of curcuma, 
Oil of neroli, of each 
Oil of melisse . . . 
Oil of rose .... 
Alcohol 



%ij- 



Mix. 



Essence of Patchouly. 



«. 


gtt. XXX 


gtt. X. 


Oij. 


gtt. XX. 


gtt. iij. 


gtt. j. 


gtt. j. 


gtt. XX. 


q. s. 



Take of Oil of copaiva . . 
Oil of orange . . 
Oil of valerian . 
Oil of rosemary- 
Tincture of Tolu . 
Alcohol, ginger, aa 
Mix. 

VlNEGAKS. 

Camphorated Acetic Acid. 

Take of Camphor Half ounce. 

Acetic acid 6| fluidounces. 

Pulverize the camphor by means of a few drops of spirits of wine, 
and dissolve it in the acetic acid. Used as a fumigative in fevers, 
an embrocation in rheumatism, and a refreshing and pungent 
perfume. 

Aromatic Vinegar. 

A pungent and reviving perfume, formerly esteemed a preventive 

of contagion. 

Take of Acetic acid, very strong, 
Camphor, in powder, 
Oil of cloves, of each, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix them, and secure in a strong and well-stoppered bottle. 






MUSK PERFUMES. 773 

Hygienic or Preventive Vinegar. (Piesse.) 

A toilet preparation, to be mixed with water for lavatory pur- 
poses and the bath. 

Take of Brandy 1 pint. 

Oil of cloves 1 drachm. 

Oil of lavender 1 drachm. 

Oil of marjoram i drachm. 

Gum benzoin 1 ounce. 

Macerate together for a few hours, then add — 

Brown vinegar 2 pints. 

and strain or filter, if requisite, to be bright. 

Vinaigre de Cologne. 

To Eau de cologne 1 pint. 

add Strong acetic acid i oz. 

Filter if necessary. 

These may be varied by substituting any other perfume, such as 
orange-flower or verbena water, observing, where either of these 
perfumed vinegars is required to produce opalescence when added 
to water, it should contain myrrh, benzoin, or Tolu. 

Musk Perfumes. 

Tincture of Husk. 

Take of Musk ^ij. 

AVater Oss. 

Macerate twenty-four hours, and add — 

Solution of potassa, 77. S. P f^ij. 

Macerate twenty-four hours, and add — 

Alcohol Oss. 

Let it stand at summer temperature for one month, and decant. 

Extract of Mush (Piesse.) 

For mixing with other perfumes. 

Take of Grain musk 2 ounces. 

Kectified spirit 1 gallon. 

After standing for one month at a summer temperature, it is fit 
to draw off. 

Extrait de Muse. (Piesse.) 

Adapted to retailing for use in perfumery. 

Take of Extract of musk (as above) 1 pint. 

Extract of ambergris ± pint. 

Extract of rose (triple) \ pint. 

Mix and filter. 

The chief uses of musk in perfumery are due to its persistent 
character. Though not itself desirable as a perfume, yet mixed in 
small proportion with rose, violet, and other essences, it enables 
them to give to the handkerchief a mixed odor which is retained 
after the first perfume is dissipated. 



774 DENTIFRICES, 



Tooth Preparations. 

A few only of these are here given, with reference to meeting 
the popular demand and the ordinary requirements of the dental 
profession. 

Marshall's or Hudson's Dentifrice. 

Take of Prepared chalk 3 pounds (com.). 

Powdered myrrh, 

Powdered orris root, each 1 pound. 

Eose pink 1 ounce. 

Thoroughly powder the ingredients and mix them through a fine 
sieve. 

Charcoal Dentifrice. 

Take of Recently-burnt charcoal, in fine powder .... 6 parts. 
Powdered myrrh, 
Powdered cinchona bark (pale), each 1 part. 

Mix thoroughly. 

Charcoal Tooth-paste. 

Take of Chlorate of potassa A half drachm. 

Mint water 1 fluidounce. 

Triturate to form a solution, then incorporate with — 

Powered charcoal 2 ounces. 

Honey 1 ounce. 

Cuttle Fish Powder. (Piesse.) 

Take of Powdered cuttle fish } pound. 

Precipitated carbonate of lime 1 pound. 

Powdered orris ^ pound. 

Oil of lemons 1 ounce. 

Oil of neroli £ drachm. 

Thoroughly powder and mix. 

Mialhe's Tooth Powder. 

Take of Sugar of milk 1000 parts. 

Lake 10 parts. 

Tannin 15 parts. 

Oil of mint, 
Oil of anise, 
Oil of neroli, of each, sufficient to flavor to taste. 

Rub well the tannin and lake together, and gradually add the 
sugar of milk, previously powdered and sifted, and lastly the essen- 
tial oils. 

A Superior Mouth Wash. 

Take of Old white Castile soap ^ij. 

Alcohol . fsiij. 

Honey ." gj. 

Perfume, as below . . f^iv. 

Dissolve the soap in the alcohol, and add the honey and perfume. 



SACHET POWDERS AND FUMIGATORS. 775 

Perfume f 07* adding to Mouth Washes. 

Take of Asarum Canadense §ss. 

Orris root Jss. 

Strong alcohol (Atwood's) f^viij. 

Make a tincture and add— 

Tincture of musk f£j. 

Essence of millefleurs f 3ss. 

Essence of patchouly gtt. xx. 

Violet Mouth Wash. (Piesse.) 

Take of Tincture of orris £ pint. 

Esprit de rose £ pint. 

Spirit ^ pint. 

Oil of bitter almonds 5 drops. 

Mix. 

Botanic Styptic. (Piesse.) 

Take of Rectified spirit 1 quart. 

Rhatany, 

Myrrh, 

Cloves, of each 2 ounces. 

Macerate 14 days and strain. 

Sachet Powders and Fumigators. 

The great popularity of this class of perfumes consists in their 
persistent odors, and their perfect adaptation in envelopes or scent- 
bags to diffusing an agreeable perfume in drawers, glove-boxes, etc., 
without soiling the purest white materials. 

The following formulas, modified from those of Piesse, I have 
found entirely satisfactory : — 

Sachet a la Frangipanni. 

Take of Orris root powder 3 pounds. 

Vetivert powder { pound. 

Santal wood powder \ pound. 

Oil of neroli, 
Oil of rose, 

Oil of santal, each 1 drachm. 

Grain musk 1 drachm. 

Mix well. 

Sachet a la Marechale. 

Take of Powder of santal wood ^ lb. 

Powder of orris root £ lb. 

Powder of rose leaves \ lb. 

Powder of cloves 2 oz. 

Powder of cassia \ lb. 

Grain musk £ drachm. 

Mix. 



776 



FUMIGATIONS. 



Millefleur Sachet. 

Take of Lavender flowers, ground, 
Orris root, ground, 

Rose leaves, ground, each 1 lb. 

Benzoin, 
Cloves, ground, 
Tonqua, ground, 
Yanilla, ground, 

Santal, ground, each ^ lb. 

Cinnamon, 

Allspice, each 2 ounces. 

Musk, grain 2 drachms. 

Mix well together. 

Heliotrope Sachet. 

Take of Powdered orris 2 lbs. 

Rose leaves, ground 1 lb. 

Tonqua beans, ground . } lb. 

Yanilla beans, ground \ lb. 

Grain musk \ oz. 

Oil bitter almonds 5 drops. 

Mix well by sifting in a coarse sieve. 

Fumigating Poxoder. 
Take of Frankincense, 
Benzoin, 

Amber, of each Three parts. 

Lavender flowers One part. 

Mix. 

This is designed to be ignited upon coals, a stove, or hot iron, to 
diffuse an agreeable aroma in an apartment, and incidentally to 
destroy noxious effluvia. 

Dr. Paris' Fumigating Pastille. 
Take of Benzoin, 

Cascarilla, each \ lb. 

Myrrh 1\ oz. 

Powdered charcoal H lb. 

Oil of nutmegs, 

Oil of cloves, each f oz. 

Nitre . . . . 2 oz. 

The benzoin, cascarilla, and myrrh are to be separately powdered, 
and mixed on a sieve with the charcoal ; the nitre is then to be 
dissolved in mucilage of tragacanth, with which the whole is to be 
made into a paste and divided with a pastille mould, Fig. 244, and 
gradually dried. 

Fig. 244. 




Pastille mould. 



HAIR PREPARATIONS. 777 

The mode of using the pastille mould will be sufficiently ob- 
vious; the mass, rolled into cylinders of appropriate size, is pressed 
between the brass cutting surfaces and completely divided into 
twenty-four cones of the required shape. 

The mode of using pastilles is to place a piece of glazed paper 
over a glass of water and to stand the pastille upon it when ignit- 
ing it. As soon as it is sufficiently consumed it will burn a hole 
through the paper and be extinguished by falling into the water. 
Sometimes serious injury is done to mantles and articles of furni- 
ture by carelessly overlooking the intense heat produced by the 
combustion of these little fumigateurs. 

Hair Preparations. 
Rosemary Hair Wash. 

To be used after oils have been habitually applied. 

Take of Distilled water of rosemary 1 gallon. 

Rectified spirit ^ pint. 

Pearlash 1 ounce. 

Dissolve the pearlash in the mixed alcohol and water. 

Essence or Spirit of Mustard. 

Take of Black mustard 2 parts. 

Water 4 parts. 

Alcohol 1 part. 

Macerate and distil 1 part of spirit. 

To be added to hair washes to supply sulphur to the hair and 
stimulate its growth. 

Perfumed Hair Oil. 

Take of Castor oil f ,^x. 

Very strong alcohol f 5ij. 

Ess. of jessamine f^ij. 

Mix. 

Any other essential oil may be substituted for the essence of 
jessamine, and we usually label the vials according to their per- 
fume, and color the rose oil red. 

Hair Restorative. 

Take of Castor oil f gvj. 

Alcohol fjxxvj. 

Dissolve, then add — 

Tinct. of cantharides (made with strong 
alcohol) fgj. 

Ess. of jessamine (or other perfume) . . . f ^iss. 

Mix. 

This preparation has the property of rendering the hair soft and 
glossy, at the same time that, by its tonic and stimulant properties, 
it tends to arrest its premature decay. To accomplish this it should 
be rubbed thoroughly into the roots at least once a day. 



778 PREPARATIONS FOR THE HAIR. 

Modified Formula. (Highly esteemed by some.) 

Take of Castor oil ^iss. 

Water of ammonia f gij. 

Tinct. of cantharides f^j. 

Cologne f Jiv. 

Water q. s. ft. f$x. 

Mix according to art. 

Marrow Pomatum. (Piesse.) 

Take of Purified lard 4 lb. 

Suet 2 1b. 

Oil of lemon 1 oz. 

Oil of bergamot £ oz. 

Oil of cloves 3 dr. 

Melt the greases, then beat them up with a whisk or wooden 
spatula for half an hour or more, to make the mass white and 
spongy ; perfume with the oils. 

Philicome. (Piesse.) 

Take of White wax 5 oz. 

Almond oil 2 lb. 

Oil of bergamot 1 oz. 

Oil of lemon i oz. 

Oil of lavender 2 dr. 

Oil of cloves 1 dr. 

Melt the wax and oil, stir as the mixture cools, and add the per- 
fume. 

Iwiggs' Hair Dye. 

An excellent application to the hair, which is also a remedy for 
skin diseases, blemishes of the complexion, etc. 

Take of Precipitated sulphur, 

Acetate of lead, of each £j. 

Kose water f Jiv. 

Triturate together in a mortar. This is not an instantaneous 
dye, but should be applied twice a day till it gradually restores the 
color to its natural shade. The addition of half an ounce of glycerin 
will take from it a drying property which is undesirable. 

Bandoline. 

Take of Gum tragacanth (choice) 6 oz. 

Kose water 1 gallon. 

Otto of rose §- oz. 

Steep the gum in the water, agitating from time to time as it 
swells into a gelatinous mass; then carefully press through a coarse, 
clean linen cloth, and incorporate the otto of rose thoroughly 
through the soft mass. 



PART VI. 

EXTEMPORANEOUS PHARMACY. 



CHAPTER I. 

ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

In assigning a place in this work to prescriptions, and to the art 
of prescribing medicines, it is with a full appreciation of its inti- 
mate connection with therapeutics, a branch of knowledge with 
which, as a pharmacist, I lay claim to but little practical acquaint- 
ance; and yet this subject has bearings which are peculiarly adapted 
to arrest the attention of one whose daily avocations place him 
directly between the physician and the patient, and give him favor- 
able opportunities for judging of the pharmaceutical eligibility of 
combinations, and not unfrequently of their effects. 

The art of prescribing medicines has so intimate a connection 
with that of preparing and dispensing them, that a treatise on the 
latter subject, not embracing the former, would be wanting in its 
most interesting feature to the student of medicine and the physi- 
cian. In a work like the present, it seems appropriate to approach 
the art of dispensing through a brief general treatise on that of 
prescribing. 

It is a common remark of recent graduates of medicine, that one 
of their greatest difficulties is in writing prescriptions; lacking the 
means of systematic instruction in this most important practical 
duty, they are apt to fall into confused and unscientific methods 
of prescribing, from which no amount of experience entirely rids 
them. 

The art of prescribing is the practical application of the knowl- 
edge of therapeutics, chemistry, and pharmacy, to the cure of dis- 
ease. No department of his duties puts the skill of the physician 
to a closer test; none calls for the exercise, to a greater extent, of 
that invaluable quality, whether intuitive or acquired, called tact ; 
and yet few departments of medical knowledge are less insisted 
upon as necessary branches of a medical education. 

Although the art of prescribing can only be acquired practically, 
the general principles pertaining to it are capable of classification, 
and have been fully discussed. 

The celebrated Pharmacologic!, of Dr. Paris, of London, published 
originally in 1812, contains the fullest dissertation in our language 

(779) 



780 . ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

upon "the science and art of prescribing." Many of the views 
taught at that time, however, are now abandoned, and the subject 
is capable of being simplified in accordance with modern improve- 
ments in pharmacy. The large number of efficient and permanent 
Galenical preparations makes prescribing comparatively easy to the 
practitioner who has kept pace with the advance of the times, 
while the publication of Formularies, in which a variety of pre- 
parations of each drug are detailed, has to a certain extent super- 
seded an original and extemporaneous system of selection and com- 
bination of remedies. 

Medicinal preparations which are kept on hand by the apothe- 
cary, to be dispensed alone or used in compounding prescriptions, 
are called permanent, while those compounded by direction of the 
practitioner to meet the indications as they arise in practice, are 
called extemporneaous. 

This distinction, however, is far from being well marked.' Some 
of those called permanent are known to deteriorate in a greater or 
less degree by age, while many classed as extemporaneous will 
keep an indefinite length of time. For most of the permanent 
class we have recipes, or prescriptions, published in Pharmacopoeias, 
Dispensatories, or Medical Formularies, while the extemporaneous 
are usually the product of the skill and ingenuity of the prescriber 
at the bedside of his patient. Objections lie against the use of 
established prescriptions to the exclusion of those dictated by the 
emergencies of the case, from the impracticability of adapting any 
set of formulas to every shade of disease and of idiosyncrasy, and 
from the impossibility of the practitioner storing in his memory 
their ingredients, proportions, etc. ; so that the thorough student 
does well to acquire a knowledge of the principles, to regulate the 
selection and combination of remedies, and to learn the art of pre- 
scribing experimentally. 

A limited number of prescriptions, framed with a view of illus- 
trating these principles and modes of combination, will, with this 
object in view, be highly useful to the student; but these must be 
regarded as stepping-stones to a knowledge of the art of prescribing 
rather than as embodying that knowledge. The vast extent and 
variety of adaptation of the Materia Medica preclude the possibility 
of compressing into any series of prescriptions, a complete view of all 
the modifications attainable on enlightened therapeutical and phar- 
maceutical principles. 

Under the head of Galenical preparations, a prominent distinc- 
tion has been drawn between those which are officinal in the U. S. 
and British Pharmacopoeias and those which are not ; the use of 
Italics for the unofficinal, calling attention to their comparatively 
unimportant position, has been a conspicuous feature in the syllabi 
intended for the use of the student in committing to memory their 
names, proportions, properties, and doses. In the part of the work 
which follows, this distinction is regarded as less important, and 
most of the formulae are introduced less with a view to impress 



THE LANGUAGE USED IN PRESCRIPTIONS. 781 

them upon the memory, than to illustrate the pharmaceutical 
principles on which they are based. 

The very obvious division of preparations into simple and com- 
pound needs no other mention than to explain that the addition 
of a vehicle or menstruum, not added with a view to its medical 
effect, does not render a preparation compound, in the sense in 
which that term is ordinarily applied. Simple rhubarb pills con- 
tain rhubarb and soap; while compound rhubarb pills contain rhu- 
barb, aloes, myrrh, and oil of peppermint; and with a view to 
furnish distinctions between preparations which have very similar 
composition, the term compound is sometimes useful. 

TJie Language used in Prescriptions. 

In Great Britain and the North of Europe, prescriptions are 
written in Latin ; in France, in the vernacular language. We 
mostly follow the British custom, although some of our practitioners 
depart from the usual style, and follow the Pharmacopoeia by in- 
diting their prescriptions in plain English. The relative adaptation 
of Latin and English for the purpose has long been discussed, and 
is still a mooted point among physicians and pharmacists. It is 
unnecessary to dwell upon the arguments advanced on either side, 
and which seem naturally to suggest themselves. The chief deside- 
ratum is to secure accuracy without an unnecessary and cumbersome 
phraseology, and for this purpose the officinal names of all medicines 
are to be preferred to either of their common and changing syno- 
nyms. 

Many medicines are called by very different names in different 
parts of the country, and the same name is liable to be applied to 
either of several different drugs. If snakeroot were 'ordered, the 
pharmacist might be at a loss whether serpentaria, cimicifuga, 
asarum, senega, 'eryngium, or some of the numerous other roots 
occasionally, or perhaps locally, denominated snakeroots, were 
desired; while, if the specific English name, as Virginia, Canada, 
black or button snakeroots, was applied, the merit of conciseness 
would be sacrificed. 

If chamomile were ordered, it would be necessary to specify 
whether Roman, German, or American; while in Latin, anthemis, 
matricaria, or maruta would be both short and distinctive. 

In the foregoing illustrations, however, we have the least forcible 
instances. There can be no comparison in eligibility between the 
names sugar of lead and Plumbi acetas, white vitriol and Zinci 
sulphas, liver of sulphur and Potassii sulphuretum, salt of tartar and 
Potassii carbonas. The name which expresses the chemical compo- 
sition of a substance is generally, of all that can be devised, the 
best ; and hence, even in common language, many familiar chemical 
substances are beginning to be called by their chemical names. 
Although there is little difference between the English and the 
Latin chemical names, the latter has the advantage for use in pre- 
scription: it is easier of abbreviation, or its abbreviations are more 



782 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

familiar ; while the omission of the connecting preposition of, be- 
tween the two parts of the name, reduces it to a single compound 
word, rendering it shorter and more quickly written. 

It is often urged that the Latin used in prescription is, for the 
most part, quite incorrect, especially when the terminations are 
attempted ; but grammatical errors are certainly far less important 
than either chemical, pharmaceutical, or therapeutical ; and when 
we consider how few physicians, even among those classically edu- 
cated, have advantages for keeping up, throughout the busy scenes 
of their professional career, the knowledge of Latin acquired in 
their schoolboy daj^s, we can scarcely wonder that many errors of 
this description occur. Moreover, the language used in prescription, 
viewed with reference to its abbreviations, signs, and Latinized 
names of various origin, must be regarded as distinct from the 
Latin taught in schools, and requires to be studied in connection 
with scientific nomenclature generally, and, in fact, constitutes a 
part of the study of Materia Medica and Pharmacy. Every officinal 
drug and preparation has its particular name given to it authorita- 
tively in the Pharmacopoeia, and those not there mentioned may be 
distinguished by their appropriate botanical or chemical designa- 
tions. The groundwork of the correct writing of prescriptions is a 
knowledge of these names; and it matters little whether the phy- 
sician writes his prescriptions in Latin or English, if he designates 
each individual article by its officinal name. 

The propriety of using the officinal Latinized names in a plain 
English formula may admit of a doubt, but, if sanctioned by custom 
and authority, might be adopted, and thus the principal objection 
to the English prescription would be removed. The officinal name, 
though framed upon a Latin model, might be separated from the 
idea of its origin, and used in the prescription as a distinctive 
pharmaceutical term, following the genius of the language in which 
it is used : in a Latin prescription, its terminations would be varied 
as the construction of that language requires ; and in an English 
prescription, might follow the rules for the construction of a correct 
English sentence. We have very many officinal names that are as 
commonly incorporated into our language as the English synonyms 
attached to them, and the objections to considering all the names 
in the American and British Pharmacopoeias as English words are, 
it appears to me, not such as to overrule a custom which, on so 
many accounts, is to be desired. 

The officinal names are spoken of in detail in the chapter on the 
Pharmacopoeia, and the importance of a study of them has been 
elsewhere referred to ; and I repeat, if these were properly mastered 
by the student, and invariably used to designate the drugs and pre- 
parations to which they belong, the framework in which the pre- 
scription is inclosed would be, comparatively, of little importance. 

There are some cases in which the use of an explanatory synonym 
in parentheses seems quite necessary, whether the name be Latinized 
or not ; and in such cases it should never be omitted for the sake 
of elegance or attempted correctness of diction. In prescribing the 



GRAMMATICAL EXPLANATION OF A PRESCRIPTION. 783 

finer kinds of magnesia, there is no other resource than to say in 
parentheses (Henry's), (Husband's), or" (Ellis'), as the case may be. 
Liquor aloes, comp. would be quite indefinite without (Mettauer) 
appended, and tinct. guaiaci comp. would be misunderstood unless 
accompanied by the added (Dewees') to explain it. 

The remarks before made apply to the names of substances desig- 
nated in prescriptions ; the other parts of the prescription, which 
will be referred to more particularly in the sequel, consist chiefly 
of abbreviations and signs which custom has long sanctioned, and 
which are considered to pertain particularly to the Latin prescrip- 
tion, though, as before stated, occasionally, and without any breach 
of propriety, used in connection with the English. 

In the prescriptions appended to the several chapters which fol- 
low, numerous examples are given of both Latin and English pre- 
scriptions, and they will be appropriately preceded by the following, 
taken from Dr. Pereira's " Selecta e Prescriptis" 

Grammatical Explanation of a Prescription. 

(1) R- — Ferri carbonatis, drachmam cum semissse (3Jss). 
( l Z) Rhei pulveris, grana quindecim (gr. xv). 

(3) Olei anthemidis, guttas quinque (gtt. v). 

(4) Conservae rosae, quantum sufficiat ut fiat massula in pilulas viginti divi- 
denda, quarum sumat seger tres octavis horis. 

(1) Recipe, verb active, imp. mood, 2d pers. sing, agreeing -with Tu, understood; from 

Recipio, gre, cepi, ceptum, 3d conj. act. Governs an accusative, 
Drachmam, noun, subst. ace. sing, from Drachma, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Recipe. 
Cum, preposition. Governing an ablative case. 

Semisse, subst. abl. case, from Semissis, is, f. 3d decl. Governed by cum. 
Carbonatis, subst. gen. sing, from Carbonas, atis, f. 3d decl. Governed by Drach- 
mam. 
Ferri, subst. gen. sing, from Ferrum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Carbonatis. 

(2) Recipe, understood. 

Grana, subst. ace. pi. from Granum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Recipe, understood. 
Quindecim, adj. indeclin. 

Pulveris, subst., gen. sing, from Pulvis, eris, m. 3d decl. Governed by Grana. 
Rhei, subst. gen. sing, from Rheum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Pulveris. 

(3) Recipe, understood. 

Guttas, subst. ace. pi. from Gutta, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Recipe, understood. 
Quinque, adj. indeclin. 

Olei, subst., gen. sing, from Oleum, ei, n. 2d declen. Governed by Guttas. 
Anthemidis, subst. gen. sing, from Anthemis, idis, f. 3d decl. Governed by Olei. 

(4) Recipe, understood. 

Quantum, adverb. Governing the genitive case. 

Sufficiat, verb impers. potent, mood, pres. tense, from Sufficio, gre, feci, fectum, neut. 

and act. 3d conj. 
Conserve, subst. gen. sing, from Conserva, ce, f. 1st. decl. Governed by Quantum. 
RoSiE, subst. gen. sing, from Rosa, ce, f. 1st. decl. Governed by Conservce. 
Ut, conjunct. Governing a subjunct. mood. 
Massula, subst. nom. case a, ce, f. 1st decl. 
Fiat, verb. subj. mood, pres. tense, 3d person singular, from Fio, fis, f actus sum vel 

fui, fieri, neut. Governed by Ut, and agreeing with the nominative case Massula. 
Dividenda, particip. nom. case, fern. gend. from Dividendus, a, um (a dividor, i, sus, 

pass. 3d conj.). Agreeing with Massula. 
In, preposition. Governing an accusative case. 

Pilulas, subst. ace. pi. from Pilula, ce, f. 1st. decl. Governed by In. 
Viginti, adj. indecl. 
Quarum, relative pronoun, gen. pi. fem. from Qui, quce, guod. Agreeing with its 

antecedent Pilulas in gender and number. Governed in the gen. case by Tres. 
JEger, adj. mas. gend. nom. JEyer, aegra, cegrum. Agreeing with homo, understood. 



784 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

Sumat, verb, 3d pers. sing. imp. mood, from Sumo, ere, psi, ptum, act. 3d conj. 

Agreeing with homo, understood ; governing an ace. case. 
Tres, ad. ace. pi. fern, from Tres, ires, tria. Agreeing -with Pilulas, understood, and 

which is governed by Sumat. 
Horis, subs. abl. plural, from Ilora, ce, f. 1st decl. ; signifying part of time, and 

therefore put in the abl. case. 
Octavis, adj., abl. plur. fern, from Oclavus, a, um. Agreeing with horis. 

Abbreviations. — Mistakes not unfrequently arise from unskilful 
abbreviations, for, while there can be no objection to shortening 
many of the long names given to medicines, there is certainly great 
danger from the inordinate and unskilful exercise of this privilege ; 
the word cat. is an occasional and very poor abbreviation for 
hydrargyri chloridum mite. Through a careless termination of 
familiar words, serious accidents are liable to occur. Several years 
have elapsed since I received a prescription for hydrate potassa? 3j, 
to be dissolved in water fiiij (dose, a teaspoonful), and it was only 
through a care which has become habitual that I saved a delicate 
lady in that case from taking large doses of hydrate of (caustic) 
potassa instead of hydriodate of potassa. There were no directions 
for use appended, so that I had not the advantage they give in cases 
of doubt. The abbreviations allowable in prescriptions might fill 
some pages if tabulated, but to the physician for his own use, no 
practical advantage would result from it, while the habit once ac- 
quired, of vmting every word so fully that it could be mistaken for no 
other, would quite obviate the evils complained of, yet for the phar- 
macist's sake most of them will be given. 

Symbols or Signs used in Prescriptions. 

i*l. Minim, g V part of a fluidrachm. 
gtt. Gutta, a drop; guttse, drops. 

9j. Scrupulus vel scrupulum, a scruple = 20 grains. 

3j. drachma, a drachm = 60 grains. 
f3j. fluidrachma, a fluid or measured drachm. 

^j. Uncia, a troyounce= 480 grains. 
f Sj. Fluiduncia, a fluidounce. 

33bj. Libra, a pound, understood in prescriptions to apply to an 
officinal pound of 5760 grains. 

Oj. Octarius, a pint. 

gr. Granum, a grain ; plural grana, grains. 

ss. Semis, half, affixed to signs as above. 

The Latin numerals are employed in prescription — i, ij, iij, iv, v, 
vi, vij, viij, ix, x, xi, xij, xv, xx, XL, L, C, etc.; and in the direc- 
tions, when written in Latin, a variety of antiquated terms, ex- 
plained in Dr. Pereira's little work before mentioned, but requiring 
too much space for insertion here. 

Before leaving the subject of the signs employed in prescriptions, 
it seems proper to advert to the errors which frequently occur from 
their careless use, and which have led some practitioners to advo- 
cate their entire abandonment. They are, however, too well 
established in the actual practice of this country and England, and 
too convenient, to be readily supplanted. The angle and curve 3 



METHOD OF WRITING PRESCRIPTIONS. 785 

may be made so carelessly as to resemble the 3 with a flourish at 
top, and 3j may look like a 3j, or may be so completely perverted 
from its recognized shape as to leave the reader in doubt whether 
a 3 or 3 is intended. Notwithstanding the apparent absurdity of 
this, there are not a few prescriptions on our files in which the sign 
intended has been reached only by guessing, or by reasoning upon 
the known dose of the drug, rather than upon the shape of the sign. 
A flourishing style of chirography is nowhere less in place than on a 
physician's prescription. The numerals are equally liable to error 
if carelessly made, the difference between j and v, and between iv 
and iij, and between x and v, is often quite obscured by a neglect 
of the plain and necessary precautions of accuracy and care. It is 
not easy to illustrate in print what an examination of the chiro- 
graphy of many prescriptions would make apparent, that the read- 
ing of a prescription frequently requires more skill and judgment 
than compounding it. 

Method of Writing Prescriptions. 

The first care to observe in writing a prescription is to have suit- 
able paper and pencil, or preferably, pen and ink. The habit of 
some of using the margin of a newspaper, the fly-leaf of a school- 
book, or any piece of flimsy material at hand, for inditing a pre- 
scription, upon which ma}' depend the life of the patient, cannot 
be too strongly condemned. It indicates a want of care in the 
physician, which, if carried into other duties, would quite unfit him 
for the responsibilities of his profession. Many physicians adopt 
the plan of cutting, from time to time, suitable fragments of good 
paper, which are carried in a pocket-book or wallet, and are always 
at hand on emergencies. With a view to economy, the fly-leaves 
of letters and notices, which would be otherwise wasted, may be 
pressed out, and appropriated to this object. Some pharmacists are 
in the habit of printing their cards at the head of suitable prescrip- 
tion sheets, and distributing them among physicians with a view 
to attracting business to their shops ; a practice more honored* in 
the breach than in the observance. Some physicians provide pre- 
scription papers, with their name and address attached, which is 
not without one advantage — it enables the pharmacist always to 
trace the prescription readily to its source in case of difficulty. 

Having the proper prescription paper, the next step is to write at 
the top the name of the patient; this precaution, which is very 
often neglected, is important for several reasons : 1st. It enables 
the nurse or attendant to distinguish, by a certain and ready means, 
between prescriptions designed for different patients ; and the 
name being transferred to the label, there is no excuse for a similar 
mistake in " administering." 2d. It enables the apothecary, in 
every case, to avoid the mistake so often made in the hurry of 
business, of dispensing a package of medicine to one of several cus- 
tomers in waiting, which should have been given to another. 3d. 
It facilitates the recognition of the prescription upon the apothe- 
50 



78b ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

cary's file when its renewal is called for; and, finally, it evinces a 
care which is commendable on so important an occasion as pre- 
scribing for the sick. 

The practice of heading a prescription with the generic name of 
the class of medicines to which it belongs, should be observed when 
there are two or more in use ; as the Gargle, the Liniment, or the 
Fever Mixture. Frequently, however, this is superseded by giving 
its designation in the Subscrip)tion, accompanied by directions for 
its use. As a general rule, I would say that all topical remedies 
should be distinctly marked For external use. Some mistakes 
have originated from neglect of this precaution which would be 
most ludicrous if the subject was not often too serious for merri- 
ment: for instance, the administration of ammoniated liniment, in 
tablespoonful doses, while a cinchona bark mixture is applied over 
the seat of rheumatic pain. 

It is well, in some cases, to copy on the label the entire prescrip- 
tion. A physician in large practice, unless he has a very retentive 
memory, will forget the details of his prescription of the previous 
day ; this precaution is important in prescribing for patients travel- 
ling from home. It is often prudent for the physician to direct the 
apothecary to mark the medicine prescribed Poison, or, as is some- 
times done, " Use with core ;" giving, at the same time, the parti- 
cular instructions for its use. 

The prescription may be divided, for the purpose of study, into 
the following parts, each of which will be separately considered : 
1. The superscription. 2. The inscription. 3. The subscription. 
4. The signatura. 

The Superscription consists of a very short abbreviation of the 
Latin verb Recipe, imperative mood of Recipio, I take, viz. : the 
letter R, which is often printed near the top of the prescription 
sheet. In French, the letter P is used for Prenez. In English for- 
mulas, the R should be substituted by Take of. 

The Inscription is the indication, seriatim, of the names and quan- 
tities of the remedies prescribed. The order in which these are 
written is not a matter of much real importance, as a competent 
pharmacist will, in mixing them, depart from the sequence ob- 
served in the prescription^ if thought' best ; while the physician 
will find it more convenient to follow the order of their therapeu- 
tical importance rather than the rotation in which they should be 
added to the mixture. 

In the sequel I shall refer to the therapeutical classification of 
ingredients, which, in a well-contrived prescription, would be writ- 
ten in the following order: 1. The basis. 2. The adjuvant, 3. 
The corrective. 4. "The excipient. 5. The diluent. 

This is not only the most elegant, but the most natural rotation 
to be observed. 

One of the greatest difficulties to the beginner, in connection 
with this subject, is in determining, as the prescription proceeds, 
the appropriate quantity of each ingredient, so as to have each in 



METHOD OF WRITING PRESCRIPTIONS. 787 

due proportion, and with its right dose ; this becomes easy by the 
employment of the following 

Rale for Apportioning Quantities. — -Write down the names of the • 
several ingredients first, without regard to quantity ; then having 
determined upon the quantity of the whole preparation, and the 
dose to be prescribed, the whole number of doses will be readily 
calculated, and the quantity of each ingredient may be affixed. 

As doses are, at best, onlj r approximate, we may depart from the 
precise figures obtained by dividing the whole number of drachms, 
grains, etc., in the preparation, by the number of doses it will con- 
tain, as far as necessary to get even numbers, or convenient frac- 
tions of a drachm and ounce. 

In directing pills, or powders, we have the means of attaining 
considerable accuracy, and may readily direct a combination of in- 
gredients to be divided into ten, twenty, or thirty parts, from the 
very convenient relations of these numbers to the drachm and 
scruple weights ; but it will be found more convenient in dis- 
pensing and administering the preparations, to have six, or twelve, 
or twenty -four parts ordered, as these numbers have relation to the 
number of grooves in the pill machine, and to the number of hours 
in a day. 

The Table below will assist the beginner in prescribing liquids, 
and will serve for reference until he becomes accustomed, practi- 
cally, to this rather difficult part of his duties. Having fixed 
upon the bulk of his mixture or solution, he will remember that 
there are about 

8 wineglassfuls (each f^ij) in a pint (f sxvj). 

30 tablespoonfuls ( " f^ss) in a pint (f^xvj). 

15 tablespoonfuls ( " f ,lss) in half a pint (f^viij). 

12 tablespoonfuls ( " f^ss) in 6 fluidounces (fsyj). 

20 dessertspoonfuls ( " f5ij) in 6 fluidounces (fovj). 

15 dessertspoonfuls ( " f3ij) in 4 fluidounces (f.siv). 
30 teaspoonfuls ( " f'5j) in 4 fluidounces (foiv). 
15 teaspoonfuls ( " f 5j) in 2 fluidounces (f Sij). 

8 teaspoonfuls ( " f 5j) in 1 fluidounce (f 5J). 

We have an illustration of this method of division in the officinal 
liquor morphise sulphatis, in which one grain of the salt is dissolved 
in one fluidounce of water; as there are about eight teaspoofuls in 
an ounce, one teaspoonful represents about one-eighth grain, which 
is the dose. 

In the case of liquids to be given by drops, care must be taken 
to distinguish between aqueous, alcoholic, and oily liquids. By re- 
ference to the table given in the chapter on Weights and Measures, 
the relative size of drops pertaining to different liquids will appear; 
in this connection it will be only necessary to refer to that table, 
and to apply the same general mode of calculation to the appor- 
tionment of doses of these. 

One cause of fallacy, with the student, in prescribing by drops, 
arises from confounding the size of drops of one ingredient of a pre- 



788 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

paration with the size of drops of the preparation after it is made. 
Thus, if a fluidrachm of tincture of veratrum viride were added to 
seven fluidrachms of an aqueous solution of morphia, or tartar 
emetic, we should calculate about sixty drops to each fluidrachm, 
not one hundred and twenty, which would be proper were the 
alcoholic liquid in much the larger proportion. 

The subscription has reference to the manner of mixing and divid- 
ing the medicine. In Latin prescriptions, it usually consists of 
short abbreviations, or signs, which are familiar to pharmacists, 
though in some cases it is written out in full in Latin, and in others 
in plain English. The verb Misce (imperative mood of misceo, I 
mix), or the letter Jf., designed to represent it, constitutes the most 
common subscription. Sometimes, where especial skill or care is 
required in the preparation, secundem artem, or S. A., is affixed to 
it ; when omitted, however, this is understood. The verb Solve 
(imperative of solvo, I dissolve) is more appropriate where a simple 
solution is prescribed ; or Macera (imperative of macero), where the 
process of maceration is directed ; where filtration is necessary, 
write thereafter et cola. When a medicine is directed in very fine 
powder, the practitioner may make choice of Tere bene (triturate 
well), or Fiat pulvis subtilissimus (make a very fine powder). It is, 
perhaps, an improvement on the above to direct more specifically 
the sort of preparation designed ; it gives the pharmacist a clue 
which is sometimes useful to him in compounding, as well as in 
correcting gross errors. The following terms, with their proper 
abbreviations and translations, may serve to guide the student in 
writing his Subscription. They include the appropriate directions 
for dividing medicines into powders, pills, lozenges, etc., and will 
appropriately close the notice of this part of the prescription. 

Fiat pulvis, Ft. pulv. Make a powder. 

Fiant pulveres xij ; Ft. pulv. xij. ~] Mftke 

Fiat pulvis et divide in chartulas xij ; Ft. pulv. et divid. in chart, xij. ! ' , 

Fiat pulvis in chartulas xij dividenda ; Ft. pulv. in ch. xij div. j , 

Fiant chartulse xij : Ft. chart, xij. J ^ 

Fiat solutio, Ft. solut. Make a solution. 

Fiat injectio, Ft. inject. Make an injection (for urethra). 

Fiat collyrium, Ft. collvr. Make an eye-wash. 

Fiat enema, Ft. enema. Make an injection (for rectum). 

Fiat suppositoriuni, Ft. supposit. Make a suppository. 

Fiant suppositoria iv ; Ft. suppos. iv. Make 4 suppositories. 

Fiat massa, Ft. massa. Make a mass. 

Fiant pilulse xij; Ft. pil. xij. ^| „ ke twelye 

Fiat massa in pilulas xij dividenda; Ft. mas. in pil. xij div. I .,, 

Fiat massa et divide in pilulas xij ; Ft. mas. div. in pil. xij. J ^ 

Fiat infusum, F. infus. Make an infusion. 

Fiat haustus, Ft. haust. Make a draught. 

Fiat gargarisma, Ft. garg. Make a gargle. 

Fiat mistura, Ft. mist. Make a mixture. 

Fiat emulsio, Ft. emuls. Make an emulsion. 

Fiat electuarium, Ft. elect. Make an electuary. 

Fiat confectio, Ft. confect. Make a confection. 

Fiat emplastrum, G x 4 ; Ft. emp. 6x4. Make a plaster 6 by 4 inches. 

Fiat emp. epispasticum, Ft. emp. epispast. ") ^^ & blister. 

Fiat emp. vesicatorium, Ft. emp. vesicat. / 

Fiat unguentum, Ft. ung. Make an ointment. 

Fiat ceratum, Ft. cerat. Make a cerate. 

\ 



METHOD OF WRITING PRESCRIPTIONS. 789 

Fiat cataplasma, Ft. cataplasm. Make a poultice. 

Fiat linimeutum, Ft. linim. Make a liniment. 

Fiat trochisci xxiv; Ft. troch. xxiv. Make 24 lozenges. 

Fiat massa in trochiscos xl dividenda ; Ft. mas. in trock. xl. div. Make 40 lozenges. 

The habit of writing the signatura or directions for taking the 
medicine prescribed in Latin has become so nearly obsolete that 
large numbers of quite skilful apothecaries would be at a loss to 
append the directions thus given, to a prescription ; especially so is 
this the case since many of the more recently published treatises on 
pharmacy have omitted the lists of terms generally used and their 
abbreviations. With the design of supplying this want, the fol- 
lowing list is compiled and made as full as is thought necessary to 
serve the purposes of the pharmacist. 

A, aa, ana. Of each. 
Abdom., abdomen. The belly. 

Abs. febr., absente febre. Fever being absent. 

Ad 2 vie., ad secundem vicem. To the second time. 

Ad. or add., adde or addantur. Add, or let them be added. 

Ad def. an., ad defectionem animi. To fainting. 

Ad del. an., ad deliquium animi. To fainting. 

Ad grat. acid., ad gratam aciditatem. To an agreeable acidity. 

Ad lib., ad libitum. At pleasure. 

Adjac, adjacens. Adjacent. 

Admov., admove, admoveatur, admoveantur. Apply, let it be applied, let them be 

applied. 
Ads. febr., adstante febre. While the fever is present. 
Alter, hora, alternis horis. Every other hour. 
Alv. adst., alvo adstricta. The bowels being confined. 
Aq. astr. , aqua astricta. Frozen water. 
Aq. bull., aqua bulliens. Boiling water. 
Aq. comm., aqua communis. Common water. 
Aq. ferv., aqua fervens. Hot water. 
Aq. fluv. , aqua fiuviatilis. River water. 
Aq. font., aqua fontis. Spring water. 
Aq. mar., aqua marina. Sea water. 
Aq. niv., aqua nivalis. Snow water. 
Aq. pluv., aqua pluviatilis or pluvialis. Rain water. 
B A., balneum arerue. Sand-bath. 
Bals., balsamum. Balsam. 
B.B., B.B.S., Barbadensis. Barbadoes. 
Bib., bibe. Drink. 
Bis in d., bis in die. Twice a day. 

B. M., balneum maris. A salt-water bath. 
Bol. Bolus. 

Bull., bulliat. Let it boil. 
But., butyrum. Butter. 

B. V., balneum vaporis. A vapor-bath. 
Cserul., cseruleus. Blue. 

Calom., calomel. Mild chloride of mercury. 
Cap., capiat. Let him (or her) take. 

C. C, cornu cervi. Hartshorn. 

C. C. U. , cornu cervi ustum. Burnt hartshorn. 

C. M., eras mane. To-morrow morning. 

C. N., eras nocte. To-morrow night. 

C. V., eras vespere. To-morrow evening. 

Chart., charta, chartula. Paper, or small paper. 

Cochleat., cochleatim. By spoonfuls. 

Coch. ampl., cochleare amplum. A large (or table-) spoonful, about half a fluidounce. 

Coch. infant., cochleare infantis. A child's spoonful. 

Coch. magn., cochleare magnum. A large spoonful. 



790 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

Coch. med. "J A medium or moderate spoonful, a dessertspoonful, about two flui- 

Coch. mod. / drachms. 

Coch. parv., cochleare parvum. A small (or tea-) spoonful, about one fluidrachm. 

Col., cola, colatur. Strain, let it be strained. 

Colat., colaturge. To the strained liquor. 

Color., coloretur. Let it be colored. 

Collyr., collyrium. An eye-wash. 

Comp., compositus. Compounded. 

Conf., confectio. Confection. 

Cong., congius. A gallon. 

Cons, conserva. A conserve; may mean, keep. 

Cont., continuetur. Let it be continued. 

Coq., coque, coquantur. Boil, let them be boiled. 

Coq. ad med. consump., coque or coquatur ad medietatis consumptionem. Boil, or let 

it be boiled, to the consumption of one-half. 
Coq. S. A., coque secundem artem. Boil according to art. 

Coq. in S. A., coque in sufficiente quantitate aquae. Boil in a sufficient quantity of water. 
Cort, cortex. Bark. 
Cras., crastinus. For to-morrow. 
Cuj., cujus. Of which. 
Cujusl., cujuslibet. Of any. 
Cyath. the., cyatho these. In a cup of tea. 
Cyath., cyathus. "I A wineglass, about an ounce and a half to two fluid- 

C. vinar., cyathus vinarius. J ounces. 
D., dosis. A dose. 

D. et S. Detur et signetur. 

D. D., detur ad. Let it be given in or to. 

D. D. vit., detur ad vitrum. Let it be given in a glass. 

Deaur. pil., deaurentur pilulse. Let the pills be gilded. 

Deb. spiss., debita spissitudo. A due consistence. 

Dec, decanta. Pour off. 

Decub. hor., decubitus bora. At the hour of going to bed. 

De d. in d., de die in diem. From day to day. 

Deglut., deglutiatur. Let it be swallowed. 

Dej. alv., dejectiones alvi. Stools. 

Det., detur. Let it be given. 

Dieb. alt., diebus alternis. Every other day. 

Dieb. ter., diebus tertiis. Every third day. 

Dig., digeratur. Let it be digested. 

Dil., dilue, dilutus. Dilute, diluted. 

Diluc. diluculo. At day-break. 

Dim., dimidius. One-half. 

Dist, distilla. Distil. 

Div., divide. Divide. 

D. in 2 plo, detur in tuplo. Let it be given in twice the quantity. 

D. in p. aeq., dividatur in partes eequales. Let it be divided in equal parts. 

D. P., directione propria. With a proper direction. 

Donee alv. bis dej., donee alvus bis dejecerit. Until the bowels have been twice opened. 

Donee dol. neph. exulav., donee dolor nephriticus exulaverit. Until the nephritic pain 

has been removed. 
Drachm, drachma. A drachm. 
Eburn., eberneus. Made of ivory. 
Ed., edulcorata. Edulcorated. 
Ejusd., ejusdem. Of the same. 
Elect., electuarium. Electuary. 
Enem., enema. A clyster. 
Exhib., exhiberatur. Let it be administered. 

Ext. super alut. moll., extende super alutam mollem. Spread upon soft leather. 
F., fac. Make. 

Ft., fiat, fiant. Let it be made, let them be made. 
F. pil., fiant pilulae. Let pills be made. 
Fasc, fasciculus. A bundle. 
Feb. dur., febre durante. During the fever. 
Fern, intern., femoribus internis. To the inside of the thighs. 
Fict., fictilis. Earthen. 






METHOD OF WHITING PRESCRIPTIONS. 791 

F. H., fiat haustus. Let a draught be made. 

F. venass, fiat venaesectio. Let bleeding be performed. 

Fil., filtrum. A filter. 

Fist, arm., fistula armata. A clyster-pipe and bladder ready for use. 

Fl., fluidus. Fluid. 

F. L. A., fiat lege artis. Let it be made by the rules of art. 

F. M., fiat mistura. Let a mixture be made. 

F. S. A., fiat secundem artem. Let it be made according to art. 
Flor., flores. Flowers. 

Frust., frustillatim. In small pieces. 

Garg., gargarysma. A gargle. 

Gel. quav., gelatina quavis. In any jelly. 

G. G. G., gummi gutta gambae. Gamboge. 
Gr., granum. A grain. 

Gr. vi pond., grana sex pondere. Six grains by weight. 

Gtt., gutta, gutta?. A drop, drops. 

Gtt. quibusd., guttis quibusdem. With some drops. 

Gum., gummi. Gum. 

Guttat., guttatim. By drops. 

Har. pil. sum. iij, harum pilularum sumantur tres. Of these pills let three be taken. 

Haus., haustus. A draught. 

Hor. dec, hora decubitus. At bedtime. 

H. S., hora somni. At the hour of going to sleep. 

Hor. interm., hora intermediis. In the intermediate hours. 

Hor. un. spatio, horoa unus spatio. At the expiration of one hour. 

Hor. lima mat., hora undecima matutina. At eleven o'clock in the morning. 

In d., in dies. Daily. 

Inf., infund. Infuse. 

Iuj. enem., injiceatur enema. Let a clyster be injected. 

In pulm., in pulmento. In gruel. 

Jul., julepus, julapium. A julep. 

Kal. ppt., kali praaparatum (potassii carbonas). 

Lat. dol., lateri dolenti. To the affected side. 

Lb., lib., libra. A pound; lib., libra?, pounds. 

Liq. Liquor. 

M., misce. Mix. 

Mane pr., mane primo. Early in the morning. 

Manipulus. A handful. 

Meusura. By measure. 

Minimum. A minim ; -g^th part of a fluidrachm. 

M. P., massa pilularum. A pill mass. 

Mass., massa. A mass. 

M.R., mistura. A mixture. 

Mic. pan., mica panis. Crumb of bread. 

Mitt., mitte send, mittantur. Let them be sent. 

Mitt. sang, ad f^sij, mitte sanguinem ad f§xij. Take blood to twelve fluidounces. 

Mod. praescr., modo praescripto. In the manner prescribed. 

Mor. die, more dicto. In the way ordered. 

Mor. sol., more solito. In the usual way. 

Muc, mucilago. Mucilage. 

N. M., nux moschata. A nutmeg. 

Ne tr. s. num., ne tradas sine nummo. Do not deliver it without the money. 

No., numero. In number. 

0., octarius. A pint. 

01. lini s. i., oleum lini sine igne. Cold-pressed linseed oil. 

Omn. hor., omni hora. Every hour. 

Omn. bid., omni biduo. Every two days. 

Omn. bih., omni bihorio. Every two hours. 

0. M., or omn. man., omni mane. Every morning. 

0. N, or omn. noct., omne nocte. Every night. 

Omn. quad, hor., omni quadrante hora. Every quarter of an hour. 

0. 0. 0., oleum olivaa optimum. Best olive oil. 

Ov., ovum. An egg. 

Ox. Oxymel. 

Oz. The avoirdupois ounce, in contradistinction to that prescribed by physicians. 



792 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 

P., pondere. By -weight. 

P. se., part, aequal., partes sequales. Equal parts. 

P. d., per deliquium. By deliquescence. 

Past., pastillus. A pastil, or a ball of paste. 

Part, vie, partitis vicibus. In divided doses. 

Per op. emet., per acta operatioue emetici. The operation of the emetic being over. 

Ph. Br. Pharmacopoeia Britannica. 

Ph. D. Pharmacopoeia Dublinensis.' 

Ph. E. Pharmacopoeia Edinensis. 

Ph. L. Pharmacopoeia Londinensis. 

Ph. U. S. Pharmacopoeia of the United States. 

Pil., pilula, pilulae. Pill or pills. 

Pocul., poculum. A cup. 

Pocill., pocillum. A small cup. 

Post sing. sed. liq., post singulas sedes liquidas. After every loose stool. 

Pot., potio. A potion ; a liquid medicine from four to eight ounces in quantity. 

Ppt., praeparatus. Prepared. 

P. r. n., pro re nata. Occasionally. 

P. rat. setat., pro ratione setatis. According to the age. 

Pug., pugillus. A pinch ; a gripe between the thumb and two first fingers. 

Pulv , pulveris, pulverizatus. A powder; pulverized. 

Q. L., quantum Tibet. ) A , , 

p: -p, ' H , . , y As much as you please. 

Q. P., quantum placet. / J r 

Q. S., quantum sufficiat. As much as may suffice. 

Quar., quarum. | . 

Quor., quorum. / 

Quantum vis. As much as you will. 

Bad., radix. A root. 

Bas., rasurse. Shavings. 

Red. in pulv., redactus in pulverem. Reduced to powder. 

Bedig. in pulv., redigatur in pulverem. Let it be reduced into powder. 

Beg. umbilici. The umbilical region. 

Bepet,, repetatur or repetantur. Let it or them be repeated. 

S , signa. Write. 

S A., secundum artem. According to art. 

Scat., scatula. A box. 

Sem., semen. A seed. 

Semidr., semidrachma. Half a drachm. 

Semih., semihora. Half an hour. 

Sesunc, sesuncia. Half an ounce. 

Sesquih., sesquihora. An hour and a half. 

Si n. val., si non valeat. If it does not answer. 

Si op. sit, si opus sit. If it be necessary. 

Si ver. perm., si vires permittant. If the strength allow it. 

Signat., signatura. A label. 

Sign. n. pr., signetur nomine proprio. Let it be written upon; let it be signed with 

the proper name (not the trade name). 
Sing., singulorum. Of each. 
Solv., solve. Dissolve; 

S. S. S., stratum super stratum. Layer upon layer. 
Ss., semis. A half. 

St , stet, stent. Let it stand, let them stand. 
Sub fin. coct., sub finem coctionis. Towards the end of the boiling; when the boiling 

is nearly finished. 
Sum. tal., suinat talem. Let him take such a one as this. 
Surnm., summitates. The summits or tops. 
Sum., sume, sumat, sumatur, sumantur. Take, let him or her take, let it be taken, let 

them be taken. 
S. V., Spiritus vini. Spirit of wine. 

S. V. B., Spiritus vini rectificatuy. Bectified spirit of wine. 
S. V. T., Spiritus vini tenuis. Proof spirit. 
Syr., syrupus. Syrup. 
Tabel., tabella. A lozenge. 

Temp, dext., tempori dextro. To the right temple. 
T. 0., tinctura opii. Tincture of opium. 



METHOD OF WKITING PRESCRIPTIONS. l\J6 

T. 0. C, tinctura opii camphorata. Camphorated tincture of opium. 

Tra., tinctura. Tincture. 

Ult. proescr., ultimo piaescriptus. Last prescribed. 

V. 0. S., vitello ovi solutus. Dissolved in the yolk of an egg. 

Vom. urg., vomitione urgente. The vomiting being troublesome. 

V. S., veneesectio. Venesection. 

V. S. B., venaesectio brachii. Bleeding from the arm. 

Zi\, zingiber. Ginger. 

The Signatnra is rarely written in Latin. It comprises the 
directions as to the dose and mode of administering the medicine, 
and is especially addressed to the patient, or those in attendance 
upon him. This should he distinctly written in familiar language. 
None of the reasons for the employment of a learned, or technical 
language, in the other portions of the prescription, apply to this; 
on the contrary, a due regard to the avoidance of mistakes by the 
apothecary, and by the patient or his attendant, forbids it. It is 
very common to omit this part of the prescription entirely, and to 
depend upon a verbid direction as to the use to be made of the me- 
dicine. {Sometimes two boxes of pills are ordered for the same 
patient simultaneously, or at short intervals, without any reliable 
means of distinguishing them, and when they are to he renewed, 
the apothecary may confound them, in consequence of the patient 
sending the wrong box, or through a slight error in his own 
labelling. Of 500 prescriptions taken indiscriminately from the 
files of three different dispensing stores, I find 43 per cent, have no 
definite directions, and a considerable proportion have no signatura. 

The practice of writing — " To be used as directed" — is equivalent 
to omitting this part of the prescription, and in labelling, this is 
adopted by the apothecary in all cases, where the physician has 
omitted giving any directions. 

As an example of the results which may follow from this kind 
of direction, the following incident has been related by a professional 
friend: Two vials were in the chamber of a patient, each containing 
a fluidounce of liquid, and each about the same size ; one contained 
sweet spirit of nitre, and the other blistering collodion. The spirit 
was to be given in teaspoonful doses occasionally, and the blistering- 
liquid was of course to be applied externally. At twilight, the 
nurse, not noticing the difference in the color and consistency of the 
liquids, and finding them both labelled alike, put in the patient's 
mouth what she should have applied over her chest, thus producing 
a most distressing inflammation, which long deprived the poor 
patient of her proper food, and doubtless contributed to exhaust her 
struggling vitality. 

The danger of this kind of mistake is lessened Ivy using for any 
two prescriptions of very different properties, different kinds of 
vials; thus, for a preparation to be taken internally, a fluted flint 
vial, and for a liniment, one of the plain German flint, or better 
still, in the one case a round, and in the other an oval vial. 

The only remaining part of the prescription to be mentioned, is 
the addition to the foregoing of the name or initials of the writer, 
and the date ; of these, it may be remarked, that the name in full 



794 SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 

is on every account preferable. In a large city, where there are 
hundreds of physicians, it is impossible for pharmacists, and much 
less all their assistants, to become familiar with the handwriting 
and initials of every one of them, to say nothing of those instances 
in which two or more have the same initials. JsTow if this practice 
of signing prescriptions has any utility at all, it must be that it 
should be understood by the apothecary, so that if he suspects an 
error, or requires any explanation, he may make the necessary in- 
quiries to correct it, without interrogating his customer and exciting 
alarm. Besides, there are some dangerous substances, and such as 
are used for criminal purposes, that the druggist is only justified in 
vending by the sanction of a responsible name, and this name 
should, therefore, be clearly and intelligibly written. 

The date of the prescription is almost universally written in 
numerals, at least in Philadelphia ; this convenient fashion is 
probably owing, mainly, to a large number of eminent practitioners 
of the last generation being members of the Society of Friends, and 
to the wide diffusion of the peculiarities of this sect in the " Quaker 
City," and from it, as the centre of medical instruction, to other 
localities. 

When the patient is in moderate circumstances, the physician 
indicates that fact to the apothecary by the letter P, in one of the 
lower corners of the paper. If very poor, P P is written ; from a 
conscientious apothecary, either of these marks secures a reasonable 
reduction in the price charged, and its omission by the physician 
leads to suspicion that the patient is not deserving of special charity. 



CHAPTER II. 

ON THE ART OF SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 

The study of Materia Medica and Therapeutics is designed to 
acquaint the student with the uses and powers of remedies, and to 
prepare him to make a proper selection from these to meet the ever 
varying phases of diseases. 

The importance of this kind of knowledge cannot be appreciated 
until the actual emergencies of practice arise, and the necessity be- 
comes apparent of an extended and a thorough knowledge of the 
weapons for combating disease. 

A full and recent treatise on Materia Medica should always be 
within reach of the physician, and one or more of the best medical 
journals should replenish his library with the most recent dis- 
coveries and improvements ; nowhere can a professional man less 
afford to economize than in his books. 

A very few years suffice to produce important changes, both in 
the theory and practice of medicine ; and the physician who stands 



SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 795 

still while progress is all around him can expect no better fate than 
that of the mechanic, the farmer, or the man of business who is 
content with the appliances of the past age in endeavoring to com- 
pete with those possessed of the facilities of the present. 

While a sound conservatism, a becoming deference to those who 
have gone before us, and to the great medical authorities in our 
own time, should prevent a hasty departure from established prin- 
ciples or modes of treatment, there is a wide and profitable range 
for experiment in the vast extent and variety of the materia medica, 
and the combinations of which individual remedies are susceptible. 

It is true that many skilful physicians employ a very restricted 
materia medica ; there are hundreds in the United States who carry 
the weapons they use for treating the usual forms of disease, in 
some twenty or thirty vials, carried about their person or inclosed 
in a pair of saddle-bags ; while, for unusual cases, they keep perhaps 
as many more on their office shelves. Though the frequent success 
of such, through skill and experience, cannot be questioned, we can 
draw no inferences from this fact to disparage the employment of 
an extended and varied assortment of remedies. 

To what purpose has the bounty of nature spread everywhere 
plants of such varied and unsuspected properties ; and why is art 
from the exhaustless mine of nature ever turning up some new 
product, endowed with varied, and, perhaps, health-restoring powers, 
if the physician, into whose special keeping the business of testing 
their virtues is given, neglects the injunction, " Prove all things; 
hold fast that which is good?" 

In the foregoing remarks, I would not be understood as counte- 
nancing a departure from the usual materia medica, except where 
called for by the requirements of practice, and justified by sound 
discretion ; and much less would I encourage any of those innova- 
tions upon well-established principles, which have taken shape in 
the various pathies, now so prevalent and so lamentably deficient 
in the indispensable elements of common sense and common honesty. 

In the selection of medicines, then, let the physician have before 
his mind the whole materia medica, with a complete knowledge of 
which he should be equipped from the start. Let him first select 
an individual from its class, with a view to all its properties, as 
likely to affect the immediate symptoms he is combating, and the 
general result of the case ; and second, let him select the best prepa- 
ration of it with reference to efficiency, to safety, to physical pro- 
perties, and to all other circumstances. 

When there is a single medicine, which will fully meet the indi- 
cation, there is no use of mixing it with others, except so far as its 
preparation in eligible form requires, as in the sequel ; when there 
is an officinal preparation, whether simple or compound, which is 
adapted to the case, it is generally better to prescribe it by its offi- 
cinal name, than to attempt a similar original combination; thus 
JPihdce catharticm composites are found to answer a common indica- 
tion in diseases so very frequently, that they have almost superseded 
extemporaneous preparations of the same, or nearly the same in- 



796 SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 

gredients ; this is the case, though to a less extent, of other officinal 
preparations. A common exception is furnished in Pilidoe quinice 
sulphatis, which are frequently prescribed extemporaneously, in 
proportions varying from the officinal in order to secure their being 
freshly prepared, and still more frequently varied somewhat in 
composition to secure greater solubility or adaptation to the case 
in hand. 

Officinal preparations are best selected in emergencies, since they 
are ready without the delay of compounding them, while most 
forms of extemporaneous prescription require time for their prepa- 
ration. Physicians should be somewhat influenced by economical 
motives, in prescribing for persons of moderate means ; preparations 
which are kept on hand by the apothecary, are cheaper than those 
which are mixed extemporaneously. In almost every class of 
medicines, there are those which are very costly ; and it is well 
when they can be superseded by others in prescribing for the poor. 
Many practitioners are in the habit of directing for such, the sul- 
phate of cinchonia or chinoidine, instead of a salt of quinia ; a plan 
much resorted to by those residing in remote situations, who have 
to act as their own apothecaries, and find their practice among the 
poor a source of expense rather than revenue. 

The Art of Combining Medicines. 

Notwithstanding the advantage obtained by combining, in a 
single preparation, the virtues of several medicines, there is, I 
think, more danger of the inexperienced attempting complications 
not sanctioned by sound science, than of erring on the side of 
simplicity. 

In the remarks which follow, I shall endeavor to treat methodi- 
cally, and as briefly as possible, the several advantages to be attained 
by medicinal combinations, and the means by which they may be 
most readily and safely fulfilled ; and in the series of Prescriptions 
appended, shall endeavor further to illustrate the subject. 

In compound prescriptions, we usually recognize one ingredient 
selected from the materia medica as the most important in a thera- 
peutical point o'f view. This is designated as the basis. Sometimes 
two or three remedies may be combined to form the basis, but if 
they have different therapeutical effects, they are considered as 
adjuvants, correctives, etc. 

Although this classification of ingredients is not absolute, it 
facilitates the study of the subject, and we proceed to notice — 

First. The Objects to be attained by adding to the Basis. 

Dilution. — A great many remedies are too strong to be eligible 
for use without the addition of a menstruum, to increase the dose 
and to allow a more ready division. In giving calomel, in very 
small alterative doses, it is impossible to apportion it properly with- 
out dilution with some suitable substance, such as sugar, sugar of 
milk, or gum Arabic. In using small doses of tartar emetic, sul- 



SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 797 

phate of morphia, or other soluble salts, in the liquid form, it is 
usual to dilute them with water. In the case of concentrated 
liquid preparations, as tinctures of aconite root, nux vomica, etc., 
a less active liquid should generally be added, so as to bring the 
strength of the preparation to a less dangerous point, especially 
when prescribed for ignorant or careless persons. 

The simple act of dilution may then be regarded as the first, 
though one of the least important objects in view, in adding to the 
basis or starting point of the prescription, and the substance so 
employed, if simply for this end, may be called the diluent. Many 
prescriptions consist merely of the basis and diluent. 

To heighten or give Direction to the Effects of the Basis. — It was 
formerly considered that substances of similar therapeutical powers 
were mutually increased in energy by admixture. This idea is now 
generally abandoned, except in so far as the powers of medicines 
may be heightened by combining them with others capable of 
rendering the system more susceptible to their action, or of giving 
specific direction ; thus, aromatic stimulants greatly heighten the 
effects of tonics, and will be found generally combined with them 
in tonic preparations. (See Tonic Tinctures and Prescriptions Nos. 
7, 13, and 18.) Ehubarb, by its astringency, modifies the effects 
of other cathartics, as in Warner's Cordial. "We have a further 
illustration of this in the use of tartar emetic, to give a sedative 
and diaphoretic direction to saline remedies ; and of Dover's Pow- 
der, to render extract of colchicum more sedative, as in Prescrip- 
tion No. 34. 

Not to multiply illustrations, many of which will be found in 
the context, it requires to be mentioned that, in some cases, the 
adjuvant may be best given at a different time from the basis, or 
rather, that the two may be most profitably separated. Thus, it is 
customary to purge a patient affected with intermittent before 
giving quinia; but few 7 practitioners w 7 ould combine the cathartic 
with the antiperiodic. 

There are sometimes ingredients in a prescription which may be 
considered either in the light of adjuvants or of vehicles. Thus 
sulphuric acid in quinia solutions both adds to the effect, as is com- 
monly considered, and affords a means of solution. So extracts, 
combined with other remedies, may heighten their action, while 
affording a convenient vehicle for making them into a pilular mass. 
The adjuvant is, however, rarely introduced, practitioners generally 
relying upon the independent action of one agent, modified, if re- 
quired, by another, which is used for the next object. 

To Correct some objectionable Property in one or both of the Active 
Ingredients. — The instances in which this motive for adding to the 
basis is called into play are fully illustrated in the prescriptions 
which follow. The combination of opium with calomel, in dysen- 
tery, is one of the strongest cases in point. The mercurial is, by 
this means, adapted to conditions of the system in which, if em- 
ployed singly in the same dose, it might aggravate the symptoms. 
Certain effects of opium, as a basis, are obviated by correctives, as 



798 ON" POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

compound spirit of ether, which is said to diminish its nauseating 
effect on the stomach. 

In administering oil of turpentine, or wormseed oil, as a vermi- 
fuge, some corrective is needed which will insure a purgative effect, 
and prevent its undue absorption. Oil of turpentine and laudanum 
are used as correctives to castor oil, in irritable conditions of the 
bowels diminishing its purgative effects, and preventing griping. 
In prescribing senna, the custom is almost universal of adding some 
aromatic seed to the infusion, to prevent griping. 

We may frequently make one substance answer the double pur- 
pose of a corrective, and diluent or vehicle. In this connection we 
find the medicated waters useful for liquid preparations; soap for 
pills; aromatics for powders; and certain stimulating oils in oint- 
ments and liniments. 

It will be observed that the corrective may be either therapeuti- 
cal or chemical in its operation, or both; while the effect of adding 
essential oils or opiates to cathartics, is purely therapeutical, that 
of combining soap with resins, to correct insolubility, is chemical 
or pharmaceutical. So, in combining mastich, or other insoluble 
resin with aloes, the effect of that cathartic is diminished and pro- 
tracted, as in Chapman's Dinner Pill, and the officinal Piluke Aloes 
et Mastiche. 

The proper incorporation of the ingredients together is an object of 
paramount importance in the preparation of medicines. The excipient 
added for this purpose may be either chemical or mechanical, or 
both; it may be connected with the therapeutic plan of the prescrip- 
tion, or may be added solely to make the preparation more agree- 
able to the taste, and more uniform in consistence. This ingredient 
is important to be designated by the physician, from the fact that 
it cannot always be left to the choice of the pharmacist, who is 
ignorant of the therapeutical indications, though his practical 
acquaintance with the subject would qualify him to select the best 
excipient. The rules that suggest themselves in regard to the pro- 
per incorporation of ingredients together can be best brought into 
view in connection with the different forms of medicines, which 
will next be treated of in detail, and in such rotation as experience 
has shown to be most convenient to the student. 



CHAPTER III. 

on powders, pills, suppositories, etc. 

Pulveres. (Powders.) 

In the chapter on Drying and Powdering Drugs, etc., some gene- 
ral views are given on the utility of this form of preparation, but 
it yet remains to point out in a particular manner the uses of 
powders in extemporaneous prescribing. 



POWDERS. 799 

1. The land of Substances adapted to this Form of Prescription. 

a. Those medicines which are insoluble; as calomel, phosphate of 

lime, subnitrate of bismuth, subcarbonate of iron, magnesia, 
etc. 

b. Drugs possessing, in the natural condition, peculiar properties, 

differing from those which are artificially prepared from them ; 
as cinchona, colomba, etc. 
e. Those which, in solution, would possess more nauseous or bitter 
properties than in their undissolved, finely-divided condition ; 
as sulphate of quinia, kino, catechu, etc. They are, for the 
most part, best suited for making into pills. 

d. Those which, combined in a liquid form, would be chemically 

imcompatible. 

e. The extracts and blue mass, when dry enough to be reduced to 

powder. 

2. The kind of Substances unsuited to this Form. 

a. Deliquescent substances; as carb. potass, unless with special pre- 

cautions. 

b. Substances containing a lars:e amount of water of crystallization 

(unless dried); as carbonate of sodium. 

c. Substances, the active principles of which are very volatile; as 

valerian and assafcetida, unless dispensed in bottles. 

d. Substances physically unsuited to mechanical division; as cam- 

phor and guaiacum, unless with certain precautions. 

e. Blue mass, and the extracts in their usual condition, although 

the former and some of the latter are very convenient in the 
form of powder. 

Powders may be prescribed suspended in the form of mixture or 
draught, always directing the bottle to be shaken before pouring 
out the dose; or in pill, if their dose is small. They are usually 
prescribed in papers (chartulas), each containing a dose, or in a 
single large package, the dose being indicated in the directions by 
some familiar standard of measurement. 

Soluble substances, prescribed in powder, may be directed to be 
dissolved in water, and the solution taken in appropriate doses, so 
as to save expense to the patient, or to have the medicine in a more 
portable form, as in travelling. This, however, is apt to lead to 
mistakes unless accompanied by very specific directions. Seidlitz, 
soda, and citric fever powders are elegant forms for giving single 
doses of soluble salts. 

"When the dose of an insoluble powder is large, as in the case of 
magnesia, or of phosphate of calcium, and it is to be mixed by the 
patient or attendant, it is well to direct the particular mode of sus- 
pending it in water. The directions for magnesia are as follows: — ■ 

Put the requisite quantity of clear and cold water (not too much) 
in a clean glass, and drop into it from the blade of a knife or spoon, 
the required dose; allow it gradually to mix with the water and 



800 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

subside, after which stir it up and drink immediately. This will 
be found more satisfactory than to pour the water upon the dry 
powder in the bottom of the glass. 

Powders which are viscid and slightly soluble are, generally, 
more disagreeable than those which are not. Rhubarb is much 
less pleasant to take in fine powder than when chipped into very 
small shavings or grated, and suspended through a glass of water. 

Some viscid vehicle seems quite necessary to heavy powders like 
calomel, or mercury with chalk, as by sinking to the bottom of the 
spoon from which administered, these are liable to miss of being 
swallowed. 

With medicines prescribed in the form of powders, there is no 
occasion for the use of excipients, as they are not, strictly speaking, 
incorporated together; where the dose is small, however, an addi- 
tional substance may be directed for the purpose of dilution, such 
as sugar, or a mixture of sugar and gum, or liquorice, or arrowroot 
fecula. In Castillon's Powders, an antacid and astringent, calcu- 
lated to act as a remedy for the diseased condition, are combined 
with appropriate nutritious ingredients. 

In Dover's Powder we have an instance of the diluent being 
made to subserve an important mechanical end ; and I am informed 
by an intelligent pharmacist that, in his vicinity, physicians com- 
bine sugar of milk with powders in prescription for a like purpose, 
directing long trituration ; calomel is said by this means to acquire 
increased efficiency where a rapid constitutional effect is desired. 
Although the assertions of homoeopathists, in regard to the virtues 
of trituration are absurd, yet it is quite possible that, in a case like 
that of calomel, long attrition with a hard substance, in contact with 
the atmosphere, may produce chemical, as well as physical, changes 
of importance. 

The use of adjuvants and correctives is appropriate in the case of 
powders, equally with other classes of remedies; and, by reference 
to the prescriptions appended, it will be observed that they are very 
commonly added. 

Pilule. 

Pills are the most popular and convenient of all forms of medi- 
cine. In common with powders, they have the .advantage of being 
accurately divided, so that the patient is not dependent upon any 
of the uncertain means of approximate measurement necessary in 
administering liquids. They are also more portable. The contact 
is so slight with the organs of taste, in swallowing, that the most 
offensive substances can be swallowed in this form with compara- 
tively little inconvenience. There are, however, a few people who 
cannot swallow them; this is the case, too, with young children, 
for whom some other form is preferable. 

The size of pills is necessarily limited to from four to five grains 
of vegetable powders, or five to six grains of heavy mineral sub- 
stances including the excipient, though these quantities are larger 
than usual. 



PILULE. 801 

The kind of Substances adapted to the Pilular Form. 

a. All those suitable to the form of powders which are given in 

small doses. 

b. The gum resins, balsams, and turpentine. 

c. Substances the operation of which it is desirable to retard; as 

in certain aperient and alterative pills. 

d. Insoluble substances, which are too heavy to give conveniently 

suspended in liquids. 

e. Very disagreeable and fetid substances. 
/. The vegetable extracts. 

The kind of Substances unsuited to the Pilular Form. 

a. Those which operate only in doses exceeding fifteen or twenty 

grains, or too large for three or four pills. 

b. Deliquescent salts, and those containing a large proportion of 

water, unless this be suitably absorbed by associated dry 
powder. 

c. Bodies of such consistence as to require an undue proportion of 

dry or viscid material to make a mass, except such as have a 
very small dose ; as croton oil. 

d. Very volatile substances ; as carbonate of ammonium, except 

with certain precautions. 

e. Those which are prescribed for immediate effect ; as emetics and 

diffusible stimulants. 
/. Essential oils, in quantity exceeding half a drop to each pill. 

The formation of a pill mass is sometimes a matter of considerable 
difficulty, from a want of adhesiveness of the ingredients, or some- 
times from the difficulty of incorporating them equally together. 
Under the head of The Art of Dispensing, some hints upon the 
mode of overcoming difficulties of this kind will be appropriate. 

Should the physician indicate the excipient, or leave it optional 
with the apothecary ? In answering this, we necessarily bring into 
view the therapeutical relations of this ingredient, and shall find 
that it may be active or inert, at the option of the prescriber. 

If the basis be rhubarb or aloes, or a similar vegetable powder, a 
mass can be readily formed by moisture, without the aid of any 
adhesive material : if, on the contrary, it be a metallic salt, or an 
unadhesive vegetable powder, it requires an addition to give it the 
form of a mass ; that addition will add to the bulk of the ingre- 
dients prescribed, and perhaps, if the dose be large, will make the 
pills too bulky ; in this case, it is important that the physician 
should not overlook the excipient, which he may include among 
the medicinal ingredients, or make due allowance for, in apportion- 
ing the quantity to each pill. 

The following rule for prescribing pills will obviate the disad- 
vantage of adding to the size by the use of inert excipients : when 
the basis is an unadhesive material , one of the other medicinal ingre- 
dients should be an extract or a vegetable powder, which will form a 
mass by moisture alone. 
'51 



802 



ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC, 



Tabular View of Pharmaceutical Adaptations. 

Medicines adapted to the form of Powder. 

INSOLUBLE MINERAL SUBSTANCES, VEGETABLE PRODUCTS, AND SOME SOLUBLE SUBSTANCES. 



INSOLUBLE ; TOO LARGE DOSES FOR 
PILLS. 

Carbo ligni. 

Magnesia. 
Calcii Phosph. 
Potass, bitart. 
Sulphur sublim. 
Creta ppt. 
Ferri subcarb. 
Ferri phosph. and others. 
Vegetable Powders : — 
Powd. cinchona. 

" colomba. 

" gentian. 

" rhubarb (coarse). 

" jalap. 

" cubebs, 

and others. 



IN CERTAIN COMBINATIONS, AND WHEN 
PILLS ARE OBJECTED TO. 

Powd. pil. hydrarg. 

" ext. coloc. comp. 

" opium. 

" digitalis. 

" nux vom. 

" kino. 

" acid, tannic. 

" " gallic. 

" " potas. nit. 
Opium alkaloids. 
Cinchona " 
Subnit. bismuth. 
Calomel, 

and many others. 



Diluents for Substances prescribed in Form of Powders. 



Sugar. 
Lactin. 
Mannite. 
Powd. acacia. 
" cinnamon. 



Aromatic powder. 
Powd. ext. liquorice. 

" tragacanth. 

" elm bark, 

and others. 



Medicines adapted to Pilular Form. 

POWDERS GIVEN IN LESS THAN GR. XV DOSES, GUM RESINS, EXTRACTS ; ALSO OLEORESINS AND 
OILS IN SMALL PROPORTION. 



UNADHESIVE MATERIALS. 

Calomel. 

Pulv. ipecac, et opii. 

Bismuth, subnit. 

Morphise acetas, etc. 

Strychnia. 

Pulv. digitalis. 

" ipecac. 
Plumbi acetas. 
Antim. et pot. tart. 

•' sulphuret. 
Argenti nitras. 

" oxidum. 
Ferri pulvis. 
" subcarb. 
(other salts.) 
Potas. iodid. 
Camphor, and others. 
Difficult to combine, except by Peculiar 
Treatment :— 
01. tiglii. 
" terebinth. 
Ferri iodidum. 
Copaiba, and others. 



GOOD MEDICINAL EXCIPIENI. 

Extracts. 
Pil. hydrarg. 
" copaibsB. 
" ferri carb. 
Terebinthina. 
With Moisture : — 
Pulv. aloes. 
" rhei. 
" kino. 
" acidi tannici. 
" opii. 
" scillse. 
Bebeerinse, sulph. 
Ferri citras. 
Assafoetida, and others. 
With Alcohol and Tinctures: — 
Guaiacum. 
Resinous Extracts, 
and others. 
With Dil. H 2 S0 4 :— 
Quinise sulph. 
Cinchonise sulph. 
Quinidise sulph. 
Quinoidina. 



EXCIPIENTS. 803 

Under the head of Dispensing Medicines, directions will be found 
for the granulation of powders and the coating of pills in such a 
way as to diminish their taste. 

Excipients. 

It will be proper in this connection to pass in review the several 
excipients, added with a view to giving body to pill masses, or 
adapting medicines to the pilular form, and to point out the special 
adaptations of each. 

Soap, which is employed in the officinal pills more than any other 
excipient, is well adapted to combine with resinous substances, the 
solubility of which it increases, while it acts as an antacid, and per- 
haps aperient. It has been suggested, that it is incompatible with 
opium, with which it is prescribed in the officinal pil. opii, as the 
alkali, especially when present in excess, tends to separate the mor- 
phia from its native combination. Camphor is well combined with 
a mixture of soap and honey, and sometimes with an inert resin. 

Syrup is often used as an excipient, which adds but little to the 
bulk of a pill mass, and is effectual in some cases, where water 
alone would not give the requisite tenacity; it does not answer a 
good purpose, however, with certain metallic salts, which dispose 
the mass to crumble. 

Honey and molasses, uncrystallizable forms of sugar, are well 
adapted to the general purposes of pill making ; masses made with 
these are not so liable to crumble, and possess the great advantage 
of remaining moist and soluble for a longer period. On account 
of the last-named property, honey is directed in the officinal recipe 
for sulphate of quinia pills. Honey, combined with tragacanth, is 
a very adhesive excipient for insoluble powders. Honey which has 
been evaporated to one-half its bulk is much better than before it 
is so treated, but honey, molasses, manna, and syrup are unsuitable 
excipients for those metallic salts that are liable to be reduced by 
the presence of sugar ; calomel is a notable instance. 

Glycerin (Bowers', preferably), ^j, powdered tragacanth, whitest, 
20 grains ; rub these together in a mortar and put into a suitable 
recipient ; after twenty-four hours it is fit to use. For further infor- 
mation on this subject, the reader is referred to 42d vol. Amer. 
Journ. Pharmacy, page 195. Soluble cream of tartar, with the 
twelfth of a grain of powdered gum tragacanth in each pill, has 
been much praised by Mr. J. B. Barnes, in a paper published in 
Amer. Journ. Pharmacy, vol. 44, page 17. 

Gum Arabic is directed to be added, where the requisite adhesive- 
ness will not result from the use of syrup or honey alone; it is not 
a very good excipient, whether added in the form of powder, or of 
a thick mucilage. Pills made with gum are apt to be very hard. 
Tragacanth forms a less hard and insoluble mass than acacia. The 
officinal syrup of gum Arabic is made with a special view to use in 
making pills. 

Alcohol and essential oils, by softening down resinous substances, 



804 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

facilitate their incorporation together in mass, and, being held by 
these with considerable tenacity, prevent their rapidly becoming 
too hard. Lactucarium may be brought to a pilular consistence by 
the use of a small proportion of chloroform, which rapidly evapo- 
rates, leaving the pills of an elegant consistence. Oil of turpentine 
is well adapted to softening white turpentine, so as to incorporate 
it with other ingredients, as in Otto's emmenagogue pills. These 
excipients must, however, be added with care, or they will render 
the mass quite too soft. 

An important use of essential oils in pills is to prevent mouldi- 
ness, and the disagreeable odor which vegetable powders acquire 
when moistened; they should be added in very small proportion for 
this purpose, as they interfere with the adhesiveness of the mass. 

Crumb of bread furnishes a convenient and tenacious vehicle for 
substances given in small dose, and which require diluting, rather 
than combining in a small bulk. 

Confection of rose is adapted to similar uses, though more moist 
and of a less tough consistence. When made from the Rosa Gallica, 
it is astringent, and adapted to combining certain vegetable powders 
belonging to that class; as usually met with, however, it contains 
no tannin, being made from our common varieties of rose. Con- 
fection of orange-peel, and aromatic confection, are adapted to 
similar uses. 

The Officinal Pill Masses. — These may be described in this 
place as preparations well adapted to use as excipients, though very 
frequently prescribed singly. 

PilulcB Hydrargyria U. S. P. 

This is the officinal designation of the preparation commonly 
called blue mass, which is directed in the Pharmacopoeia to be di- 
vided into pills of three grains each ; as usually kept by physicians 
and druggists in an undivided state, it is more appropriately called 
Massa pilul. Hydrargyria mercurial mass. It is prepared by drug 
millers and chemical manufacturers, by triturating together, in ap- 
propriate mechanical contrivances, mercury, conserve of rose, 
liquorice root in powder, and some viscid material, as powdered 
althea root, in such proportion that three parts by weight of the 
mass shall contain one of mercury, thoroughly divided, and partly 
oxidized. 

The process used in the U. S. Army Laboratory, while in opera- 
tion, and elsewhere, consists of the rapid and continuous shaking of 
the mercury with a portion of honey in a strong bottle till it is 
extinguished, and the subsequent incorporation of the mixture with 
the powdered rose petals and liquorice root. The shaking is done 
by securing the bottle upon a wooden upright frame worked by the 
steam engine. In a few hours the semifluid mass is ready to mix 
with the dry powders, which is done by mixing in a kettle and 
successively passing the mass between rollers, frequently folding 
the thin sheets together till they are uniformly mixed. 



POWDERED BLUE MASS. 805 

To my former pupil, Thomas Weaver, the reader is indebted for 
the following good extemporaneous process for the preparation of a 
small quantity of this pill mass. Its importance as a practical im- 
provement will be appreciated by those who have attempted to 
prepare blue mass with the pestle and mortar by the officinal 
process : — 

Extemporaneous Blue Mass. 

Take of Mercury gj. 

Powdered liquorice root Jss. 

Powdered rose leaves 3vj. 

Honey 3yj. 

Triturate the honey, liquorice root, and mercury, rapidly together 
for three minutes, or until all the globules of mercury disappear, 
then add the rose leaves, and work the whole into a uniform mass ; 
if it is too stiff, moisten with a little water. 

Powdered Blue Mass. 

Take of Mercury jfj. 

Powdered liquorice root 3j. 

Powdered rose leaves 3yj. 

Simple syrup f gij. 

Triturate the mercury, one-fourth of the powdered liquorice root, 
and the simple syrup rapidly together for- three minutes, or until 
the globules disappear, and then incorporate the powdered rose 
leaves, and the remainder of the powdered liquorice root, and spread 
the whole out to dry in a warm place. Reduce this to powder. 

From specimens of blue mass which have been dried at a moderate 
heat, a very convenient powder may be prepared, which is well 
suited for conversion into the pilular form, and into compound 
powders. 

Blue mass is, perhaps, the most popular, as it is the mildest 
form of mercurial preparation ; it is well adapted to use in pill or 
powder, either combined, as in several prescriptions which follow, 
or singly, in doses of from one to ten grains. 

Blue mass, when designed to act on the liver without producing 
a cathartic effect, may be combined with opium or a pure astrin- 
gent. It is frequently, however, combined with vegetable cathar- 
tics, to increase its tendency to operate on the bowels. Perhaps a 
majority of the mild cathartic pills, prescribed by practitioners and 
those sold as universal remedies, contain this useful ingredient; and, 
in fact, blue pills are very commonly known and taken by those 
who prescribe for themselves for what is popularly knowm as 
" biliousness," and various forms of liver complaint. 

Pilulce. Ferri Carbonatis, IT. S. P. 

Vallette's Mass is a very mild and soluble preparation of iron, 
made by incorporating freshly-precipitated protocarbonate of iron 
with honey, or some mixed saccharine vehicle, and by evaporation 
concentrating into a pilular mass. This may be taken by itself, in 



806 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

a dose of from ten to thirty grains, or may be used as an adjuvant 
or vehicle to other medicinal substances, particularly dry powders, 
as in those numerous cases where iron, in small doses, is indicated 
along with bitter tonics. {See Preparations of Iron.) 

PilulcB Copaibce, U. S. P. 

Copaiba mass, although seldom employed as a vehicle, is not un- 
suited to this use ; it is directed to be made by incorporating one 
drachm of calcined magnesia with two troy ounces of copaiva, a 
recipe by which it is very difficult to get a sufficiently solid mass. 
The copaiva must be thick and resinoid, and the magnesia recently 
calcined, or the required thickening will not occur. The introduc- 
tion of wax and some vegetable powder w T ill be found an improve- 
ment. The dose is from five to ten grains. 

The Extracts. 

This class, which is well adapted to the pilular form, should not 
be overlooked in prescribing dry ingredients ; some one extract can 
usually be selected which will meet a therapeutical indication, while 
it serves the purpose of an excipient. 

Thus, in sedative or narcotic pills, we have the choice of five or 
six extracts to incorporate with any unadhesive or other material, 
so as to gain efficiency without too large a bulk. In directing a 
tonic remedy in this form, extract of gentian, quassia, cinchona, or 
nux vomica will come in play. While as a vehicle, for the mer- 
curials in cutaneous or syphilitic diseases, extract of conium, or of 
sarsaparilla, may be used. The use of the cathartic extracts, and 
of extract of taraxacum for similar purposes, is too common to need 
comment. We have an elegant and efficient compound, made on 
this principle, in the so-called Dr. Vance's Gout Pills. 

Formulary of Officinal and other Powders and Pills. 

In the following officinal and extemporaneous prescriptions, some 
of which are selected from standard works, others from the pre- 
scription files of the dispensing establishment over which I preside, 
and a few of which I venture to offer for trial, the most approved 
methods of compounding medicines in the form of powders and 
pills are indicated. 

When active remedies are prescribed in the form of powders, the 
diluent should be weighed first and a small portion of it thrown 
into the mortar and triturated till quite finely powdered ; this will 
prevent the active remedy from adhering to the mortar; then the 
active ingredient, which should be well mixed, and the remainder 
of the diluent added and the trituration continued till a powder 
of proper fineness is obtained. 

The accurate division of powders is facilitated by having a glass 
tile ruled into squares of one-fourth of an inch ; the powder, being 
uniformly distributed over the surface of as many squares as there 



ASTRINGENTS. 807 

are powders to be made, can be readily divided with great exact- 
ness by following the lines ruled with the spatula in making the 
division. 

Astringents. 
!N"o. 1. — Powders used in Obstinate Diarrhoea. 

Each Powder. 

Take of Alum gij 20 grs. 

Kino 3ss 5 grs. 

Mix and reduce to a very fine powder, and distribute this into 
six papers. Dose, one every two or three hours. 

Alum and kino are incompatible in liquid form, and hence, when 
associated together, should always be prescribed in powder. The 
dose is too large for the pilular form. 

]STo. 2. — Pills of Tannic Acid. 

Each Pill. 

Take of Tanic acid gr. xij 1 grain. 

Confection of rose gr. vj £ grain. 

Make a mass and divide into twelve pills. Dose, one every two 
hours. 

The above maybe made into powders by substituting an aromatic, 
astringent, or inert powder for the confection. 

Kb. 3. — Astringent and Sedative Powders. 

Each Powder. 

Take of Tannic acid Bj 2 grs. 

Acetate of morphia gr. j y^ gr. 

Sugar gr. x 1 gr. 

Oil of caraway THj trace. 

Triturate together, and distribute into ten papers. Dose, one 
every three hours. 

Five grains of opium may be substituted for the morphia salt, or 
by the substitution of sufficient syrup for the sugar, the whole may 
be made into the pilular form. 

No. 4. — Chalk Powders. 

Each. 

Take of Prepared chalk £ij 15 grs. 

Gum Arabic, in powder, 

Sugar, each 3j 7£ grs. 

Cinnamon, in powder gr. x 1\ grs. 

Triturate together into a uniform powder, and divide into eight 
doses. 

Chalk mixture spoils by keeping in hot weather, and is, more- 
over, much more bulky than an equal quantity of the ingredients 
in the above form, which is especially convenient for travellers. 
Opium, kino, or other remedies adapted to increase or modify its 
action, may be added in powder. One of the very best additions 
for a common form of diarrhoea is that of powdered blue mass, of 
which gr. xvj to 3ss may be added to the above. 



808 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

'No. 5. — Antacid Powder with Opium and Blue Mass. 

Each. 

Take of Precipitated carbonate of calcium . gj 6 grains. 

Tincture of opium f 3j 6 minims. 

Pulv. pil. hydrarg gr. x 1 grain. 

Triturate in a mortar and expose till it is dry, then divide into 
ten powders. Dose, one every three hours until the symptoms are 
cheeked. 

No. 6. — Powders for the Diarrhoea of Infants. 

Each. 

Take of Acetate of lead gr. ij ^ gr. 

Opium gr. ss fo gr. 

Camphor gr. j T \ gr. 

Sugar gr. iij \ gr. 

Triturate, and divide into twelve papers. Dose, one every two 
or three hours. For adults, the whole quantity prescribed may be 
taken at one dose. 

The child should be kept quiet, and fed upon arrowroot, flour 
boiled in milk, or a mixture of barley-water and cream. 

No. 7. — Pilul. Plumbi Acet. (University College, London.) 

To Each. 

Take of Acetate of lead gr. vj £ gr. 

Muriate of morphia ...... gr. iij \ gr. 

Extract of hyoscyamus gr. xxiv 2 grs. 

Mix ; make into twelve pills. 

Tonics and Aromatics. 
"No. 8. — Anti-Intermittent Powders. 

Each. 

Take of Powdered cinchona 3j gj. 

Powdered serpentaria gij gr. xv. 

Sulphate of quinia gr. viij gr. j. 

Mix, and distribute into eight papers. Dose, one every hour, 
commencing eight hours before the expected paroxysm. 

The sulphate of quinia may be omitted, but is useful when the 
bark is not of the finest quality. The serpentaria may be re- 
placed by more powerful stimulants, as cloves, or capsicum, or oil 
of black pepper ; to obviate costiveness, a saline cathartic may be 
added. 

No. 9. — Pilvlce Quinice Sulphatis, IT. S. P. 

Eeduced. Each. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia . . . Ij By 1 gr. 

Powdered gum Arabic . . gij gr. x \ gr. 

Clarified honey q. s. q. s. 

Mix the sulphate of quinia and gum Arabic, then beat them with 
clarified honey so as to make a mass, and divide into 480 pills (re- 
duced quantity 40), of which the dose in intermittents is one every 
hour, between the paroxysms. 



TONICS AND AEOMATICS. 809 

These officinal pills are less used than formerly for the full anti- 
periodic effect of the sulphate of quinia, as it is now customary to 
give large doses, less frequently repeated, and the officinal pills are 
found less convenient than pills or powders, of three, four, or five 
grains each. 

Sulphate of quinia may be made into pills by the following pro- 
cess, which has been called Parrish's. (See paper by the author, in 
the American Journal of Pharmacy , vol. xx.v. p. 291.) 

"No. 10. — Pills of the Soluble Sulphate of Quinia. 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia 9j gr. v. 

Aromatic sulphuric acid ^xij. ^hj. 

Drop the acid upon the sulphate on a tile or slab, and triturate 
with a spatula, until it thickens and assumes a pilular consistence, 
then divide into four pills. 

Persons not accustomed to this process sometimes allow the sul- 
phate to become too dry and unadhesive to mould into pills. This 
is from not seizing the proper moment just as the mass has ceased 
to be too soft, and before it becomes dry ; it is then quite plastic, 
and becomes particularly so by contact with the warmth and mois- 
ture of the thumb and fingers. A drop of syrup or honey, which 
should always be at hand on the counter, by being added at the 
proper moment, will prevent this hardening. 

The five-grain quinine pill made in this way is not larger than 
many pills in common use; soluble quinine pills may be conve- 
niently made of two, three, four, or five grains. 

The large number of combinations in which sulphate of quinia 
is associated with other remedies cannot be here noticed ; to some 
of these, as in combining the other alkaloids with it, the elixir of 
vitriol process is well adapted ; in other cases it is inadmissible. If 
an extract in small quantity, or a vegetable powder, is to be added 
to the mass, it should be incorporated with the quinia salt, when 
by trituration on the slab it begins to thicken into a paste. 

Sulphate of quinia will make a very good pill mass by using one 
grain of glacial phosphoric acid, or a quarter of a grain of tartaric 
acid, to each grain of the quinia salt. 

!Nb. 11. — Pills of Sulphate of Cinchonia. 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of cinchonia 9j gr. j. 

Powdered tragacanth gr. ij. gr. T ^. 

Triturate together, and add sufficient honey to make a mass, 
which divide into twenty pills ; these pills are esteemed about equal 
to those of sulphate of quinia in most cases. 

"No. 12. — Pills of Sulphate of Quinidia. 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of quinidia 9j gr. j. 

Powdered tragacanth ...... gr. ij. gr. -fa. 



810 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

Triturate together, and add honey sufficient to make a mass, 
which divide into twenty pills. These are esteemed about equal 
to sulphate of quinia pills of the same proportion. 

No. 13. — Pills of Chinoidine. 

Each. 

Take of Chinoidine 3j 3 grains. 

Aromatic sulphuric acid Illv or q. s. trace. 

Soften the chinoidine with the acid, in a mortar, and divide into 
twenty pills. Each pill is esteemed about equal to a one-grain 
quinia pill. 

"No. 14.— Powders of Iron and Quinia. 

Each. 

Take of Subcarbonate of iron £j 5 grs. 

Sulphate of quinia gr. vj £ gr. 

Aromatic powder gr. xij 1 gr. 

Triturate together, and distribute into twelve powders. Dose, 
a powder three times a day before meals. 

The proportion of sulphate of quinia should be increased when 
it is to be employed in convalescence from intermittents. 

ISTo. 15.' — Pills of Proto-Carbonate of Iron and Quinia. 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia 9 j 1 gr. 

Pill mass of carbonate of iron . . . 3j 3 grs. 

Mix, and make into twenty pills. Dose, one twice or three 
times a day. 

In this class of prescription, designed for anaemic conditions, the 
sulphates of cinchonia and quinidia, and of bebeerina, may gene- 
rally be substituted for that of quinia without disadvantage. 

~No. 16. — Pills of Quevenne's Iron. 

Each. 

Take of Keduced iron gr. CC 2 grs. 

Manna gr. C 1 gr. 

Triturate into a mass and divide into 100 pills. 

Manna is an excellent excipient for Ferrum Hedactum, and will 
answer in less proportion, if very small pills are desired ; when not 
at hand, it may be superseded by honey and a little gum Arabic 
or tragacanth. 

In a number of cases it will be desirable to introduce adjuvants, 
which ma}^ be in the form of extract. Extracts of conium, of aconite, 
cinchona, nux vomica, and quassia are favorite adjuvants with 
Quevenne's iron. 

No. 17. — Pulvis Aromaticus, U. S. P. 

Take of Cinnamon, in fine powder, 

Ginger, in fine powder, each, two troyounces. 
Cardamom, deprived of the capsules, and in fine powder, 
Nutmeg, in fine powder, each, a troyounce. 

Eub them together until they are thoroughly mixed. 



TONICS AND AROMATICS. 811 

In this preparation, the dry powders of cinnamon and ginger, if 
triturated with the oily nutmeg, grated, and the cardamom, coarsely 
powdered, enable us to reduce them to a fine condition; the whole 
should be passed through a sieve. 

By trituration with honey, syr up of orange-peel, and saffron, this 
furnishes Confectio aromatica. 

Ko. is.— Dr. Mitch.elVs Tonic Pills. 

Each. 

Take of Extract of quassia gr. xxxvj 3 grs. 

Extract of conium | gr. 

Subcarbonate of iron, of each . . . gr. iij { gr. 

Make into a mass with a few drops of solution of arsenite of 
potassium (if required); then divide into twelve pills. Dose, a pill 
twice or three times daily. 

No. 19. — Tonic and Aromatic Pills. (Dr. Parrish, Senior.) 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia gr. vj \ gr. 

Powdered capsicum ^ gr. 

Mace ^ gr. 

Powdered cloves £ gr. 

Carbonate of ammonium, each . . gr. xij § gr. 

Oil of caraway gtt. vj \ \\. 

Confection of rose Sufficient, q. s. 

Form a uniform tenacious mass, and divide into twenty-four pills. 
~No, 20. — Pills used in Obstinate Intermittents. (Dr, Chapman.) 

Each. 

Take of Sulphate of copper 

Powdered opium 

Powdered gum Arabic . . . 
Syrup 

Make a mass, and divide into twelve pills. Dose, one every three 
hours. 

No. 21. — Pihdee Ferri Composites, U. S. P. 

Each. 

Take of Myrrh, in fine powder gij 1} gr. 

Carbonate of sodium ) Ee,C0 3 

Sulphate of iron, of each . . . . gj J | gr. 

Syrup q. s. q. s. 

Rub the myrrh first with the carbonate of sodium, and afterwards 
with the sulphate of iron until they are thoroughly mixed ; then 
beat them with syrup so as to form a pilular mass, to be divided 
into eighty pills. 

This pill is similar in composition to Griffith's Iron Mixture. 
Supposing a reaction to take place between the salts present, proto- 
carbonate of iron would be produced, which, with the myrrh, forms 
an admirable remedy in chlorosis ; a lump of fresh myrrh is to be 
preferred to the powdered article of commerce. 



gr. iij i gr. 

gr. iv I gr. 

gr. viij f gr. 
Sufficient. 



812 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

No. 22.— Pilules Ferri Iodidi, IT. S. P. (Blancard's Pills.) 

Take of Iodine, three hundred grains. 

Iron, in the form of fine wire and cut in small pieces, one hundred 

and twenty grains. 
Sugar, in fine powder, 
Liquorice root, in fine powder, each, one hundred and ninety -two 

grains. 
Liquorice, in fine powder, 

Gum Arabic, in fine powder, each, forty-eight grains. 
Reduced iron, ninety-six grains. 
Water, a fluidounce and a half. 

Mix the iodine with ten fluidrachms of the water in a glass flask, 
and gradually add the iron, agitating until the solution has become 
a light pea-green color; then filter into a porcelain capsule contain- 
ing the reduced iron, and add the remainder of the water in order 
to wash the filter. Evaporate the solution till a pellicle forms, and 
add the remaining powders, previously mixed together; continue 
the evaporation by means of a water-bath, with constant stirring, 
until the mixture is reduced to a pilular consistence ; lastly, divide 
into three hundred and eighty pills. 

Dissolve sixty grains of balsam of Tolu in a fluidrachm of ether, 
shake the pills with the solution till they are uniformly coated, and 
put them on a plate of glass to dry, occasionally stirring them until 
the drying is completed. Keep the pills in a well-stopped bottle. 

These pills, as prepared by the above new officinal formula, are 
devoid of the smell of iodine ; and distilled water, rubbed with 
them and filtered, does not color solution of starch, or gives it only 
a slight blue tint. No other form of iodide of iron is so easily 
taken or so permanent. 

E"o. 23. — Permanent Iodide of Iron Pills. 

(Extemporaneous process of I. Coddington.) 

Take of Iodine 50 grains. 

Iron, reduced by hydrogen 25 grains. 

Water 30 minims. 

Althaea powder 60 grs. or q. s. 

Triturate the iodine in the water and add the iron gradually ; 
w T hen the color becomes a dark gray and there ceases to be any 
indication of free iodine to starch water, add the althaea powder, 
taking care not to make the mass too stiff. Then roll it into sixty 
pills containing one grain of iodide of iron, each, with an excess 
of iron. 

Iodine and iron may be combined in melted cocoa butter, which 
should be kept melted till the union is complete, and then made 
into pills, coated with sugar or some vegetable powder. 

No. 24. — Compound Pills of Iodide of Iron. 

(Prescribed by Dr. Buckler, of Baltimore.) 

Each Pill. 

Take of Iodide of potassium ^ij 2 grains. 

Iodide of iron 3j 1 grain. 

Iodine gr vj T x o grain. 

Extract of conium &j 1 grain. 



NERVOUS STIMULANTS; ANTISPASMODICS. 813 

Triturate the iodide of potassium, iodide of iron, and iodine 
together with a few drops of water to the consistence of a soft 
paste, then add powdered gum Arahic in the proportion of half a 
grain to each pill, and rub into a smooth paste. Incorporate with 
the whole extract of conium and make into a soft mass, with a 
mixture of equal parts of finely powdered elm bark and liquorice 
root. Then divide into sixty pills. 

Ko. 25.— Pills of Chloride of Iron. (J. T. Shinn.) 

Take of Tincture of muriate of iron f^ij. 

Evaporate nearly to dryness, and add — 

Powdered althaea root gss. 

Triturate into a pill mass, and divide into two hundred and forty 
pills, each of which represents about ten drops of the tincture. 
They should be kept and dispensed in vials. 

~No. 26. — Powder for Chronic Indigestion and Gastric Irritability. 

Each. 

Take of Bismuthi subnitratis 3j 10 grs. 

Pulveris rhei 5 grs. 

Pulveris aromatici, of each .... ^ss 5 grs. 

Misce et divide in chart, vj. Signa. — Take one before each meal. 

Nervous Stimulants ; Antispasmodics. 
No. 27. — Pilulce Assafcetidce, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Assafcetida ^iss gr. xxxvj gr. iij. 

Soap, in fine powder . . . 3ss gr. xij gr. j. 

Beat them together with water, so as to form a pilular mass, to 
be divided into 240 pills. (The reduced quantity into 12 pills.) 
Dose, one to four pills. 

No. 28.— Pilulce Aloes et Assafcetidce, IT. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Socotrine aloes, in fine powder ] gr. 1^. 

Assafcetida fgr. xyj gr. 1^. 

Soap, in fine powder, each . ^ss J gr. 1^. 

Beat them together with water, so as to form a pilular mass, to 
be divided into 180 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) Dose, one to four 
pills. 

No. 29.— Pilulce Galbani Composite?, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Galbanum gr. 1£. 

Myrrh, each £vj eachgr. xviij gr. lj. 



Assafcetida gij gr. vj gr. 



Syrup Sufficient Sufficient q. s. 

Beat them together, so as to form a pilular mass, to be divided 
into 240 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) Dose, one to three pills. 



814 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

ISTo. 30. — Dr. Otto's Antispasmodic Powders. 

Take of Black mustard seed, 
Powdered sage, 
Powdered ginger, equal parts by measure. 

Mix thoroughly. 

Dose, in epilepsy, three teasponfuls, for three mornings in succes- 
sion ; discontinue three; then give as before. To be moistened 
with water or molasses. 

No. SI.— Pills of Nitrate of Silver. 

Take of Nitrate of silver 9j. 

Turpentine (terebinthina, U. S.) . . . . . . 5j. 

Triturate, with the addition of a few drops of oil of turpentine if 
necessary, to make a uniform pilular mass, which divide into thirty 
pills. 

Dose, in typhoid fever and epilepsy, one pill every three or four 
hours. 

Arterial Stimulants. 

This class of remedies is least adapted to the pilular form of any 
in the materia medica. 

No. 32. — Powders or Pills of Carbonate of Ammonia, etc. 

Take of Muriate of ammonium (granulated), 

Dried carbonate of sodium, each £}ij. 

Powdered capsicum J)j. 

Triturate into a uniform fine powder, and divide into ten papers, 
which should be wrapped in tinfoil. 

By the aid of moisture, these powders are made to react with 
each other and develop carbonate of ammonium. To make into 
pills, add a portion of firm and rather dry conserve of rose. Divide 
into twenty pills, and keep them in a vial. 

A solution of mastich in ether is a good varnish for coating these 
and similar pills : they should be as dry as possible before using 
this varnish. 

Cerebral Stimulants, or Narcotics. 
No. m.—Piluloe Opii, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Opium in fine powder . . . 3j gr. xij gr. j. 

Soap, in fine powder . . . gr. xij gr. iiss gr. \. 

Beat them together into a mass with water, and divide into 60 
pills. (Seduced, 12.) 

Old opium fills are sometimes in request, from their being better 
retained by an irritable stomach, and from the fact that by their 
more gradual solution, they afreet more favorably the diseases of 
the lower intestine. The best way to make pills to be kept for this 
purpose is to select a portion of the solid mass in its natural and 



! 



RHEUMATISM AND GOUT PILLS. 815 

plastic condition, and to divide it, without admixture, into the re- 
quired number of pills ; these, as they contract and harden, will 
become compact and of slow solubility. 

"No. 34. — Pills of Camphor and Opium. 

Each. 

Take of Camphor gr. xxiv gr. 2. 

Powdered opium gr. vj gr. £. 

Alcohol gtt. vj trace. 

Confection of rose q. s. q. s. 

Misce, et fiant, secundum artem, pilulse xij. Dose, from one to 
two pills. 

No. 35. — Anodyne Pills. 

Each. 

Take of Acetate of morphia gr. j gr. £. 

Extract of hyoscyamus gr. iv gr. ^. 

Triturate into a mass, and divide into eight pills. Dose, one 
pill, repeated if necessary. 

These are very small, and are not astringent in their effects on 
the bowels. 

ETo. 36. — Pulvis Morphias Attenuatus. 

Take of Sulphate of morphia gr. j. 

Sugar of milk gr- v. 

Misce. 

The sugar of milk should be first put into the mortar and broken 
into pieces as small as black mustard seeds, when the morphia salt 
should be added and the trituration continued until an impalpable 
powder has been obtained. 

One grain is designed to be an equivalent to one grain of opium; 
it furnishes a convenient form for administering small doses of 
morphia in prescription. 

No. 37. — Pills of Extract of Indian Hemp. 

Take of Ext. cannabis, 

Pulv. saponis, aa gr. xx. 

Triturate the extract with the soap in a warm mortar till a good 
mass is formed, then divide into forty pills. Dose, one to three pills. 

Rheumatism and Gout Pills. 
No. 38. — "Dr. Vance' 's Rheumatism and Gout Pills." 

Each. 

Take of Extracti colchici 5ss gr. 1|. 

Pulveris ipecacuanha? comp. . . 3iss, gr. vj gr. iv. . 

Misce, et divide in pilulas xxiv. Signa. — Take two at night and 
one before breakfast and dinner. 

This is a most valuable combination, having been found effica- 
cious in a great many cases, both chronic and acute. 

Similar combinations are used in the several London hospitals, 
as follows : King's College, to each pill, acet. ext. colch. 1 grain ; to 



816 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

Dover's powder, 3 grains. St. George's, aeetic ext. colch. 1 gr. ; to 
Dover's powder, 2J grains. Middlesex, aeetic ext. colch. 2 grs. ; to 
Dover's powder, 3 grains. London Hospital, acet. ext. colch. J gr. ; 
Dover's powder, J gr. (See Squire's Hospital Pharmacopoeia.) 

No. 39. — Lartique's Gout Pills. 

Each. 

Take of Extracti colocynthidis compositi . giss, gr. vj gr. 4. 
Extract! colchici acetici . . . . gr. x gr. f . 

Extracti digitalis gr. v gr. £. 

Misce, fiat mass, in pilulas xxiv dividenda. Take two for a dose. 

This is the common recipe in Philadelphia ; according to Wittstein 
each of the French Lartique's pills contains 2 grains of powdered 
colchicum seed. 

No. 40. — BecquereVs Gout Pills. 

Each pill. 

Take of Sulphate of quinia 2 drahms 2^ grains. 

Extract of digitalis 15 grains T 3 ff grain. 

Powd. colchicum seed .... 2 scruples f grain. 

Mix, and divide into 50 pills. Dose, 1 to 3 pills for several days. 
These pills are stated to have removed attacks of acute gout in 
seven or ei^ht hours. 

'No. 41. — Pil. Colchici c. Hydrarg. (King's College, London.) 

Each. 

Take of Acet. ext. colchicum 24 grains 2 grs. 

Mercurial mass 36 grains 3 grs. 

Mix. Make 12 pills. 

" Excito-Motor Stimulants." 
E"o. 42. — Powders given in Uterine Hemorrhages. 

Each. 

Take of Ergot, freshly powdered . . . 3j gr. 10. 

Alum, in powder §j gr. 3^. 

Mix, and divide into six equal parts. 

Arteeial Sedatives. 
No. 43. — Powders of Nitre and Tartrate of Antimony. 

Each. 

Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassium . gr. j gr. T V. 

Nitrate of potassium gr. 2^. 

Sugar, each £ss gr. 2%. 

Triturate into powder, and distribute equally into twelve papers. 

Emetics. 
No. 44. — A Prompt and Efficient Emetic. 

Each. 

Take of Pulveris ipecacuanhse gss gr. xv. 

Antimonii et potassii tartratis . . . gr. ij gr. j. 



CATHARTICS AND LAXATIVES. 817 

Misce, et divide in pulveres ij. Signa. — Take one in a little mo- 
lasses, or sugar and water, and follow it by a draught of warm 
water. If one powder does not produce the effect, the second may 
be taken soon after. 

Sometimes calomel is added to emetic powders, and both a pur- 
gative and emetic effect are produced. Emetics, as such, are never 
given in pill. 

Cathartics and Laxatives. 

To this class belong six of the pills, and two of the compound 
powders of the Pharmacopoeia. 

No. ±o.— Pilulce Rhei, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Rhubarb, in powder .... 5vj gr. xxxvj gr. 3. 
Soap 3ij gr. xij gr. 1. 

Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 
120 pills. (Reduced, into 12 pills.) 

The following recipe will make an elegant rhubarb pill without 
the use of soap, which is objectionable as imparting a disposition 
to become mouldy, and produce an unpleasant odor when damp. 

Each. 

Take of Powdered rhubarb gr. xlviij gr. iv. 

Comp. tincture of cardamom . . . gtt. xlviij gtt. iv. 

Triturate into a mass, and divide into twelve pills. 
No. 46. — Pilulce Ehei Compositce, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Rhubarb, in powder . . . ^j gr. xxiv 2 grs. 

Aloes " ... gvj gr. xviij 1^- grs. 

Myrrh " . . . ^ss gr. xij 1 gr. 

Oil of peppermint . . . . f3ss 1TLij i Vf[. 

Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 
240 pills. (Reduced, into 12 pills.) 

No. ±7.— Pilulce Aloes, U. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Aloes, in powder .... 2 grs. 

Soap, each ^j Bij 2 grs. 

Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 
240 pills. (Reduced, 20 pills.) 

No. 48.— Pilulce Aloes et Myrrhce, XT. S. P. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Aloes, in powder . . . . ^ij gr. xxiv 2 grs. 

Myrrh " . . . . Jj gr. xij 1 gr. 

Saffron " . . . . 5§ss gr. vj ^ gr. 

Syrup, sufficient quantity q. s. 

Beat the whole together so as to form a mass, to be divided into 
480 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) 
52 



818 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

A tonic and emmenagogue cathartic, known as Rufus's pills. 
Saffron may be reduced to powder by heating it in a capsule till it 
becomes crisp, then triturating in a mortar. 

No. 49. — Dr. Chapman's Dinner Pills. 

Reduced. Each. 

Take of Powdered aloes .... 1^ gr. 

" mastich, of each . gij gr. xviij li gr. 

" ipecac §iv gr. xij 1 gr. 

Oil of caraway Til xij TTUj Trace. 

Mix, and make into mass with water, and divide into eighty 
pills. (Reduced quantity, twelve pills.) 

These pills are much used in habitual costiveness ; the presence 
of the mastich protracts the solvent action of the fluids upon the 
aloes, so that one pill, which is a dose, taken before dinner, will 
produce a gentle operation the next morning. 

No. 50.— Pilules Aloes et Mastiches, U. S. P. (Lady Webster's Pills.) 

Take of Socotrine aloes, in fine powder, a troyounce and 

a half If gr. 

Mastich, in fine powder, 

Bed rose, in fine powder, each, half a troyonnce § gr. 

Beat them together with water, so as to form a pilular mass, to 
be divided into 400 pills. 

This is now an officinal preparation, which has long been known 
as a popular remedy for costiveness. One or two taken before dinner 
will usually produce an evacuation on the following day. 

No. 51. — Dr. Mitchell's Aperient Pills. 

Each. 

Take of Pulveris aloes gr. xij 1 gr. 

" rhei gr. xxiv 2.grs. 

Hydrarg. chlor. mit gr. ij ^ gr. 

Antim. et potas. tart gr. j j\ gr. 

Mi see, fiant pilulse No. xij. 

One acts as an aperient, two or three as a cathartic. 

No. 52. — Laxative Tonic Pills. (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) 

Each. 

Take of Powdered Socotrine aloes . . . . ^ij 1 gr. 

" rhubarb 9iv 2 grs. 

Oil of caraway gtt. xij | drop. 

Extract of gentian §ij 1 gr. 

Make into forty pills. Dose, two before dinner. 

No. 53. — Pulvis Aloes et Canellce, IT. S. P. (Hiera Picra.) 

Eeduced. 

Take of Socotrine. aloes, in fine powder . . ^xij ^iss. 

Canella, in fine powder £iij ^iij. 

Rub them together until they are thoroughly mixed. 
Hiera picra is generally macerated in some kind of spirit, and 
taken in draughts as a stomachic laxative. 



CATHARTICS AND LAXATIVES. 819 

No. 54. — Pulvis Jalapce Compositus, IT. S. P. 

Take of Jalap, in fine powder ^j. 

Bitartrate of potassium, in fine powder . . . . gij. 

Mix them. 

This is a mild laxative, given in doses of gr. xv to 3ss. Sulphur 
and bitartrate of potassium are much associated in about equal bulks. 

No. 55. — Calomel and Jalap Powder. 

Take of Hydrargyri chloridi mitis gr. xv. 

Pulveris jalapse §j. 

Misce. — To be given at a dose. 

In the same way rhubarb is very commonly associated with 
calomel. 

No.. 56. — Pulvis Rhei Compositus, IT. S. P. 

For one dose. 
Take of Khubarb, in fine powder, four troyounces ... gr. xv. 

Magnesia, twelve troyounces gr. xlv. 

Ginger, in fine powder, two troyounces .... gr. viiss. 

Rub them together until they are thoroughly mixed. 

This was a new officinal compound powder in 1860, which is well 
adapted to use as a laxative and antacid. Charcoal and magnesia 
are much used for a similar purpose. 

No. 57. — Neutralizing Powder. 

Take of Bicarbonate of sodium, 
Powdered rhubarb, 
Powdered mint (the herb) Equal parts. 1 

Pub the mixed ingredients through a sieve of sixty meshes to 
the linear inch. 

Dose, a teaspoonful as an antacid remedy in diarrhoea and dys- 
pepsia. 

No. 58. — Pulveres Effervescentes Aperientes, IT. S. P. (Seidlitz 

Powders.) 

Each powder. 
Take of Bicarbonate of sodium, in fine powder, a troyounce £)ij. 
Tartrate of potassium and sodium, in fine powder, 

three troyounces gij. 

Tartaric acid, in fine powder, four hundred and 
twenty grains gr. xxxv. 

Mix intimately the bicarbonate of sodium with the tartrate of 
potassium and sodium, and divide this mixture into twelve equal 
parts. Then divide the tartaric acid into the same number of equal 
parts. Lastly, keep the parts severally of the mixture and of the 
acid in separate papers of different colors. 

The character of the paper used for dispensing Seidlitz powders is 
very important; a rag blue indigo-dyed paper is the proper one, its 
color being permanent, and a glazed well-calendered white paper 
is the most appropriate for containing the acid. Tin boxes are best 



820 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

for keeping them in, as pasteboard, if placed on a damp or wet sub- 
stance, will be softened, and the contained powders injured. 

Directions J "or Use. — Take two glasses with about a gill of cold 
water in each, dissolve in one the contents of the blue, and in the 
other of the white paper, mix, and drink immediately. 

No. 59. — Pills for Habitual Costiveness. (Dr. E. Cutter, Woburn ? 

Mass.) 

Take of Pulv. ipecacuanhse gr. x. 

Hydrarg. chlor. mit gr. iij. 

Ext. taraxaci gij. 

Misce. — Ft. pilulse. No. xxx. 

Dose, one three times a day. A mild and effectual remedy for a 
very common symptom. 

No. 60. — Pihdce Catharticce Composite, IT. S. P. 

Each. 

Take of Compound extract of colocynth . . gr. xxxij 1^ gr. 

Extract of jalap, in fine powder . . 1 gr. 

Mild chloride of mercury, each . . gr. xxiv 1 gr. 

Gamboge, in powder gr. vj \ gr. 

Mix the powders together; then with water form a pilular mass, 
to be divided into 24 pills. 

These well-known and popular pills are very easy to make, if the 
extracts, both of colocynth and jalap, are of proper consistence, or 
powdered before being incorporated with the other ingredients ; 
but if the extract of jalap is of a tough consistence, which it fre- 
quently reaches by partial drying, it is almost impossible to incor- 
porate it with the other ingredients. Powdered extract of jalap, 
when obtainable, may be kept in a salt-mouth bottle like any other 
powder, and a few drops of moisture will form it into a plastic 
mass. The tough extract should be further dried and powdered, 
or may be softened by heating and triturating in a capsule with 
diluted alcohol. 

Under the name of Antibilious pills, this preparation, of more or 
less perfect quality, is vended in great quantities over the country, 
and by its admirable combination of cathartic properties is well 
adapted to supersede, as a popular remedy, the numerous nostrums 
advertised and sold for similar purposes. 

No. 61. — Pills of Colocynth and Hyoscyamus. (Middlesex Hospital, 

London.) 

Each. 

Take of Extracti colocynthidis composite . . ^ss 3 grs. 

Extracti hyoscyami §j 2 grs. 

M. — Ft. pilulse x. Dose, one to three pills. 



No. 62. — Tonic Pills of Podophyllin. 



Each. 



Take of Podophyllin gr. ij i grain. 

Powd. rhubarb gr. xviij 3 grains. 

Powd. capsicum gr. iv f grain. 

Mix and make into six pills. 



Dose, one to two. 



DIURETICS AND EXPECTORANTS. 821 

To produce ptyalism podophyllin should be combined with opium 
in small doses frequently and continuously. 

]STo. 63.— Modified Cathartic Pills. (E. Parrish.) 

Each. 

Take of Gamboge, in powder gr. v i grain. 

Podophyllin, in powder gr. ij j 1 ^ grain. 

Aloes, in powder gr. xxx lj grain. 

Calomel gr. xx 1 grain. 

Ginger, in powder, 

Capsicum, in powder, each . . . . gr. ij T l o grain. 

Fluid extract of podophyllum, sufficient. 

Mix the dry powders, and triturate with the fluid extract into a 
pilular mass; divide this into twenty pills. 

The object of this formula, prepared for a physician in the "West, 
is to furnish an Antibilious pill the ingredients of which are readily 
obtainable, genuine, and of good quality. The difficulties met with 
by practitioners, in procuring the costly extracts of colocynth and 
of jalap of standard quality, have led to inquiries for a modified 
formula with cheap and common materials. 

"No. 64. — Pills of Aloin and Podophyllin. 

Each. 

Take of Aloin gr. xxiv 1 grain. 

Podophyllin gr. xij ^ grain. 

Oleoresin of ginger nrt iv i minim. 

Triturate the solid ingredients into a uniform powder, add the 
oleoresin or piperoid of ginger, make a mass, and divide into 
twenty-four pills. Dose, from one to three. 

!N"o. 65. — Dr. AlbertVs Small Antibilious Pills. 

Each. 

Take of Calomelanos gr. x I gr. 

Pulv. gambogise gr. v g gr. 

Misce et fiant pilulse xxx. Dose, two or three pills. 
Eo. 66.— Pills of Croton Oil. 

Each. 

Take of Croton oil ""I iv n\, \. 

Crumb of bread gr. xvj gr. j. 

Make into sixteen pills. 

Croton oil and castor oil are both capable of forming soaps with 
caustic soda, which, being purified by solution in alcohol, and 
solidified in moulds, are eligible cathartic preparations. 

Diuretics and Expectorants. 

These classes of medicines are very little given in the form of 
pill or powder. 



"No. 67. — Piluloe Scillce Composites, IT. S. P 






Reduced. 


Each. 


Take of Squill, in fine powder . . . gj 


gr- vj 


igr. 


Ginger, in fine powder . . gij 


gr. xij 


lgr. 


Ammoniac, in fine powder . 5ij 


gr- xrj 


lgr. 


Soap, in fine powder . . . ^iij 


gr. xvnj 


1* gr. 


Syrup, a sufficient quantity. 




q. s. 



822 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

Mix the powders, then beat them with the syrup so as to form a 
pilular mass, to be divided into 120 pills. (Twelve pills for the 
reduced quantity.) 

Soap and syrup seem a poor kind of mixture, especially as either 
would be a sufficient excipient without the other; the pills are so 
large that the syrup is not only unnecessary but renders the pill 
larger than if made with water. 

No. 68.— Aromatic Pills. (Mutter's.) 

Take of Oil of copaiva, 
Oil of cubebs, 

Oil of turpentine, each f gj. 

Magnesia 3ij. 

Mix, and form sixty pills. 

Some recipes direct 4 grains of powdered opium to this number. 
They would be improved in a pharmaceutical aspect by substituting 
copaiva and Venice turpentine for the oils of copaiva and turpen- 
tine. One drachm of white turpentine is necessary to form the 
mass. The dose is two pills three times a day in gonorrhoea. 

M. Bicord prescribes tar and copaiva combined; they are said 
to neutralize each other's noxious tastes and to be less liable to 
disagree with the patient than copaiva alone. The proportions of 
this mixture are 275 parts of copaiva to 35 of tar and 25 of 
magnesia. 

!N"o. 69. — Compound Copaiva Pills. 

Take of Copaiva . . . gij 

Powdered cubebs £>iijss. 

Wax. . 3j. 

By a gentle heat melt the wax, then add the copaiva, and imme- 
diately afterwards sift in the cubebs, stirring thoroughly. While 
it is yet warm, roll out and divide into 100 pills. 

Diaphoretics, etc. 
"No. 70. — Pulvis Ipecacuanha? Compositus, U. S. P. (Dover's Powder.) 

(Pulvis Ipecacuanhse et Qpii, XL S. P. 1850.) 

Reduced. 

Take of Ipecacuanha, in fine powder .... gr. j. 

Opium, dried and in fine powder, each . £j gr. j. 

Sulphate of potassium ...... Jj gr. viij. 

Rub them together into a very fine powder. Dose, ten grains, 
the reduced quantity in the above recipe. 

This valuable preparation is too well known to require much 
comment ; it is used in a great variety of cases in which a sedative 
diaphoretic is indicated. It should be remembered that the opium 
is to be dried before being weighed, otherwise the powder will be 
deficient in strength. It should also be well and thoroughly tritu- 
rated from containing hard crystals to an almost impalpable powder. 
It is said to be less liable to nauseate in the form of pills, which 
may be made with some suitable extract or with honey, to contain 
3 to 4 grains of the powder. 



ALTERATIVES — EililENAGOGUES. 823 

Alteratives. 
iso. 71. — Pilulm Antimonii Composite, U. S. P. (Plummer's Pills.) 

Each. 

Take of Sulphurated antimony | grain. 

Mild chloride of mercury, each, one 

hundred and twenty grains . . . (£ij) % grain. 

Guaiac, in fine powder 1 grain. 

Molasses, each, half a troy ounce . . (^ss) 1 grain. 

Rub the sulphurated antimony first with the mild chloride of 
mercury and afterwards with the guaiac and molasses so as to form 
a pilular mass. To be divided into 240 pills. 

This is a new officinal, though long known and much employed 
in England, where it is known as the compound calomel pill. Sul- 
phurated antimony is the new name given to the precipitated sul- 
phuret of former Plxarmacopozia.s. 

Dose of the pills, from one to two twice a day, as a powerful 
alterative. 

~No. 72. — Compound Pills of Iodide of Mercury. 

Each. 

Take of Green iodide of mercury . . . . gr. x £ gr. 

Kesin of guaiacum § ij 2 gr. 

Extract of conium 3ss 1^ gr. 

Triturate the resin of guaiacum into a mass with a little alcohol, 
then incorporate with it the extract of conium and iodide of mer- 
cury, and divide into twenty pills. 

These pills are alterative, and maybe used in scrofulous and skin 
diseases. Extract of sarsaparilla may be added to, or substituted 
for, some of the other ingredients. 

Ko. 73. — Alterative Powders of Calomel. 

Each. 

Take of Hydrargyri chloridi mitis .... gr. j. T V. 

Sacchari gr. xj \\. 

Misce, fiat pulvis in chartulas xij dividenda. 

Signa. — Take one every hour (or two hours), till the gums are 
touched. 

When there is a disposition to undue purging, from gr. ss to gr. 
ij of powdered opium may be added to the above quantities. 

"No. 74. — Pil. Hydrarg. Bichlorid. (Westminster Hospital.) 

One pill. 

Take of Corrosive sublimate .... Three grains. £ grain. 

Muriate of ammonium . . . Four grains. ^ grain. 

Crumb of bread Sufficient. 

Mix. Make into 24 pills. Dose one pill three times a day. 

Emmenagogues. 

~No. 75. — Dr. Otto's Emmenagogue Pills. 

Take of Dried sulphate of iron gr. xlviij. 

Aloes, in powder gr. xij. 

Turpentine gr. xxx:j. 

Oil of turpentine gtt. x or q. s. 



824 ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 

Make a mass, and divide into thirty pills. Dose, two, three 
times a day. 

Prescribed originally by the late Dr. J. C. Otto, and very fre- 
qently by the late Dr. Isaac Parrish. A similar recipe is often di- 
rected by Dr. Pepper, in the Pennsylvania Hospital Clinique. 

The cautious addition of oil of turpentine insures an adhesive 
and plastic mass. 

Numerous pills containing aloes, myrrh, and iron, given under 
the head of tonics and cathartics, are much used as emmenagogues. 
(See also Hooper's Female Pills, among the patent medicines.) 

Trochisci. — Lozenges. 

In addition to the description of this class of preparations at 
page 788, etc., I append the following as an example of the mode 
of prescribing them extemporaneously : — 

No. 76. — Prescription for Diaphoretic Lozenges. 

Each. 

Take of Pulv. ipecac . gr. vj | gr. 

Potass, citrat 3j 2^ gr. 

P. ext. glycyrrh 4 gr. 

Pulv. acacia?, aa Sjj, 9ij 4 gr. 

Tinct. Tolutani gtt. vj \ drop. 

M. — Ft. trochisci xxiv. Dose, for a child, one every two hours. 

The mode of dividing this mass after rolling it into a rectangular 
sheet may be to cut it equally into six oblong sheets, each of which 
may be cut into four equal parts by a spatula, the surface being 
dusted with powdered liquorice or sugar. 

Panis Laxans. Laxative Cake. 

This preparation, which is somewhat used abroad, has not, I be- 
lieve, been introduced into the United States. It is prepared by 
painting the under side of small biscuits with an alcoholic solution 
of jalap resin, 2 grains of the resin to each, and covering the sur- 
face with a thin layer of a mixture consisting of white of egg^ 
sugar, and a little tragacanth, beaten together. The dose is 2 or 3 
cakes for a grown person, 1 for a child of 6 to 8 years. The substi- 
tution of resin of podophyllum would be an improvement, on the 
score of cheapness. 

Granules or Pellets. 

This species of preparation was introduced into practice by the 
homoeopathic practitioners, and, as applied to some powerful reme- 
dies, has been introduced into regular practice. Sugar granules are 
made by the confectioner. They are medicated by the pharma- 
cist as follows: The dose to be contained in each granule is first 
determined ; the required quantity of the medicinal substance is 
now dissolved in strong alcohol or ether, sufficient to moisten the 
requisite quantity of pellets ; these being now counted out are to be 
agitated with the solution in a shallow dish till it is equally divided 



SUPPOSITORIES. OZO 

among them and until the solvent has evaporated. The granules 
are liable to vary somewhat in the quantity of the absorbed solu- 
tion, and it is therefore important that the agitation be continued 
without intermission until no trace of moisture can be detected ; 
the employment of the strongest alcohol or ether is necessary, so 
that a larger amount of the solvent may be employed without lique- 
fying the sugar. Such medicines only are prepared in this way as 
are given in very small doses, and the vegetable alkalies and neu- 
tral principles are particularly adapted to it. Generally, more than 
one of the granules contain the full dose of the medicine. It has 
become customary to have them contain the one-hundredth, one- 
fiftieth, one-twentieth, or the one-sixteenth part of a grain of the 
medicinal compound. 

It should be borne in mind that the granules here described must 
not be confounded with those made by pharmacists of known and 
respectable standing ; the process pursued in making them is the 
same as that in use in making pills ; after the formation and divi- 
sion of the mass the granules are coated with sugar, and thus ren- 
dered acceptable to the palate and stomach of the most fastidious. 

Suppositories. 

These are rounded, generally elongated, masses, designed to be 
inserted into the rectum for the purpose of affecting the lower in- 
testine, or, by absorption, the system generally. 

!Nb. 77. — Pihdce Saponis Composites, IT. S. P. 

Take of Opium, in fine powder, sixty grains. 

Soap, in fine powder, half a tro}-ounce. 

Beat them together with water, so as to form a pilular mass. 

The foregoing and simple soap suppositories are formed by cut- 
ting the mass and rolling it into convenient shapes. Suppositories 
are also prepared from honey, by boiling down this substance till it 
becomes sufficiently hard to retain its shape. There are also for- 
mulas given in the books for several anthelmintic, anti-hemorrhoidal, 
astringent, emmenagogue, laxative, and vaginal suppositories, as 
well as for belladonna, calomel, cicuta, mercurial, and quinine sup- 
positories. 

From Gray's Supplement to the Pharmacopoeia, the following for- 
mula for an anthelmintic suppository, taken from the Codex Medic. 
Hamburg, 1845, is selected. 

No. 78. — Take of Aloes 3vj. 

Common salt 5iss. 

Spanish soap ^iss. 

Starch ^viij. 

Mix and make into a mass with honey, and then form into cones 
of the required size. 

~No. 79. — Anthelmintic Suppositories. 

Take of Aloes, in powder ^ss. 

Chloride of sodium 3iij. 

Flour gij. 

, Honey Sufficient. 



826 



ON POWDERS, PILLS, SUPPOSITORIES, ETC. 



Form into a firm paste, and make into twelve suppositories. 
Used in the treatment of ascarides. 

The following syllabus exhibits the composition of the supposi- 
tories directed in the last edition of the U. JS. and British Pharma- 
copoeias. 



Remedy. 


Excipient. 


Suppositoria Acidi Carbolici, gr. 12, U. S. P. 


Oil of Theobroma, 360 gr., 12 suppositories. 


" 


" Tannici, gr. 30, 


" 


'<■ 


300 gr., 12 


<< 


" " gr. 36, Ph. Br. 


«< 


tt 


Benzoated lard and white 
wax, 12 suppositories. 


<< 


Aloes, gr. 60, U. S. P. 


<( 


a 


300 gr., 12 suppositories. 


<< 


Assafcetidse (Tr. f^j), U.S. P. 


" 


a 


320gr.,12 


" 


Belladonna (Ex. gr. 6), " 


" 


a 


354 gr., 12 


«( 


Hydrar. (Ung. gr. 60), Ph. Br. 


<( 


a 


Benzoated lard and white 
wax, 12 suppositories. 


«< 


Morphise (Mur. gr. 6), " 


<( 


a 


Benzoated lard and white 
wax, 12 suppositories. 


(< 


Morphise (Sul. gr. 6), U. S. P. 


it 


a 


354 gr., 12 suppositories. 


<( 


Opii (Extr. gr. 12), " 


" 


a 


348 gr., 12 


<( 


Plumbi (Acet. gr. 36), " 


a 


a 


324 gr., 12 


«< 


Plumbi Comp., Ph. Br. 










/ " Acet. gr. 36 \ 
\ Opii Pulv. gr. 1 2 J 


n 


a 


Benzoated lard and white 








wax, 12 suppositories. 


(< 


Plumbi et Opii, U. S. P. 










f Plumbi Acet. gr. 36 "1 
\ Opii Extr. gr. 6 } 


<< 


a 


318 grains. 



The following directions are given in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia : 
Mix the medicinal portion with a small quantity of oil of theobroma 
by rubbing them together, and add the mixture to the remainder of 
the oil of theobroma previously melted and cooled to the tempera- 
ture of 95°. Then mix thoroughly without applying more heat, 
and immediately pour into suitable moulds having the capacity of 
thirty grains each. The moulds, having been previously made cold, 
must be kept so by immersion in iced water. All difficulty in re- 
moving suppositories from the moulds may be obviated by having 
the moulds previously dusted with lycopodium. In the absence of 
suitable moulds, suppositories may be formed by allowing the mix- 
ture, prepared as above, to cool, care being taken to keep the ingre- 
dients well mixed, and dividing it into parts, each of which shall 
weigh thirty grains, and may be made into a conical or other con- 
venient form for a suppository. 

Medicated Suppositories of Cocoa-butter. 

Since the recent general introduction of suppositories in Phila- 
delphia, attention has been increasingly turned to the use of cocoa- 
butter, as a vehicle for all the remedies prescribed in that form; 
this fat is, however, rather too soft for such use without admixture. 
Dorvault directs about an eighth part, by weight, of wax to be 
added, to impart the proper hardness. Common tallow, mixed 
with the same proportion of wax, serves as a cheap, though perhaps 



EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 827 

inferior substitute. In the chapter on Dispensing, full directions 
are given for the preparation of these. 

The following proportions are used in Philadelphia, but the 
medicinal ingredients may be mixed and varied to any extent. 



Cocoa-butler alone, 








and combined w 


'th Extract of opium 


J to 2 grains. 


tt 


" 


Acetate of morphia, 


\ to £ grain. 


tt 


tt 


Extract of belladonna 


£ to 1 grain. 


tt 


tt 


Tannic acid, 


3 to 5 grains. 


<< 


a 


Acetate of lead, 


3 to 5 grains. 


tt 


<( 


Mousell's salt, 


1 to 3 grains. 


tt 


(« 


Santonine, 


1 to 3 grains. 


tt 


(« 


Sulphate of quinia, 


1 to 5 grains. 


« 


tt 


Podophyllin, 


1 to 2 grains. 


tt 


«( 


Mercurial ointment, 


6 grains. 



Some pharmacists issue catalogues of suppositories with numbers 
affixed to each formula, by which it is designed they shall be pre- 
scribed ; there seems no advantage in this method to compensate 
for its liability to lead to confusion and mistakes. {See paper on 
this subject by E. Parrish and W. C. Bakes, American Journal of 
Pharmacy, 1861, p. 5 ; also paper by "W. C. Bakes, 1863, p. 228 ; also 
the chapter on the Art of Dispensing.) 

In the occasional instances in which it- is desirable to thrust the 
suppository some distance above the external orifice of the rectum, 
the instrument here figured may be used ; it is made of syringe- 
Fig. 245. 

Q(r=€r====g> 

Tube and piston for introducing suppositories. 

metal, or of wood. A. B. Taylor, in the American Journal of 
Pharmacy, vol. xxxiii. p. 202, has figured a metallic piston, called a 
" suppositer," adapted to introduce suppositories, having a smaller 
cylindrical termination at the base of the cone, such as he prepares, 
but it is not adapted to the ordinary shaped cones. 



CHAPTER IV. 

LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

The term mixture is applied strictly to those liquids in which 
insoluble substances are suspended, but, in a more general sense, to 
all liquid medicines not included in one of the several classes of 
solutions, infusions, tinctures, etc. In the present chapter I shall 
for convenience include all extemporaneous preparations prescribed 
for internal use in the liquid form, endeavoring to adopt such a 



828 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC 

classification as will aid the student in acquiring a knowledge of 
the principles which should guide the practitioner in their compo- 
sition. 

The hints given towards the preparation of ingredients into the 
form of pills are generally quite reversed in the case of mixtures, 
which should mostly be composed of substances in part or entirely 
soluble, or by their lightness readily diffusible in water. In mix- 
tures, the use of excipients is not limited, as in the other case, by 
the necessity of not exceeding a certain bulk, but they may be 
freely added with a view of improving the composition physically, 
pharmaceutically, and therapeutically, and within certain pretty 
wide bounds, while the range of medicinal agents prescribed is 
enlarged by the addition of a great number of fluids, as the fixed 
and essential oils, ethers, solutions of ammonia, etc. There are 
reasons, however, which make the art of combining in the liquid 
much more difficult than in the solid form. In the presence of 
water, the great neutral solvent, the chemical affinities of various 
saline ingredients are fully brought into play, which, when in a 
dry or even a plastic condition, are without action upon each other; 
again, the physical difficulties to be overcome in this form of prepa- 
ration are greater than in the foregoing, because the variety of 
materials to be combined is increased. The proper suspension of 
fixed and essential oils, for instance, is a matter of no little skill, 
and the division and diffusion of various powders require judg- 
ment and skill attainable by a familiarity with their physical 
properties. 

There is also in the introduction of excipients and adjuvants, 
great scope for the exercise of ingenuity, to improve not only the 
flavor, but the appearance of mixtures. 

Next to a considerable range of practice in the composition of 
mixtures, I know of no better way to become familiar with the 
subject, than by a study of the syllabus like that here presented, 
together with a number of approved formulas, such as are grouped 
together in this chapter. 



MEDICINES SUITED TO LIQUID FORM. 



829 



Medicines suited to Liquid Form, 

MOST SOLUBLE SALTS, LIGHT INSOLUBLE POWDERS, EXTRACTS, GUM RESINS, FIXED AND 
ESSENTIAL OILS, AND ALL THE GALENICAL SOLUTIONS. 



FORMING ELIGIBLE SOLUTIONS WITH 
WATER. 

Alumen. 

Ammon. murias. 
Antim. et potass, tart. 
Barii chloridum. 
Calcii chloridum. 

" hypophosphis. 
Ferri sulphas. 

" et pot. tartras. 
" pyrophosphas. 
Manganesii sulphas. 
Magnesii sulphas. 
Potassii acetas. 
" bicarbonas. 
" carbonas. 
" citras. 
" chloras. 
" hypophosphis. 
" tartras. 
" bromidum. 
" iodidum. 
Morphias acetas. 
" murias. 
" sulphas. 
Sodii bicarbouas. 
" boras 
" carbonas. 
" chloridum. 
" hypophosphis. 
" sulphas. 
" et pot. tartras. 
" phosphas. 
Acidum citricum. 
" tartaricum. 
" tannicum. 



INSOLUBLE. 



MIXING WITH WATER, BUT NOT FORMING 
CLEAR SOLUTIONS. 

Diffused by agitation : — 
Magnesia. 
Potassii bitart. 
Sulphur prsecip. 
Pulv. cinchonas. 

" ipecac. 
Calcis phosphas. 
Quinias sulph. 
Miscible by trituration alone: — 
Extractum aconiti. 

" belladonnas. 

" conii. 

" hyoscyami. 

" stramonii. 

" taraxaci. 

" krameriae. 

" glycyrrhizae. 

Confectiones. 
Assafcetida. 
Ammoniacum. 
Guaiacum. 
Myi-rha. 
Scammonium. 
Suspended by the aid of viscid ezcipients : — 
Copaiba. 
01. amygdalas. 
01. riciui. 
01. olivas. 
Olea essentia. 
Ferri protocarb. 
Best combined with a fixed oil or yelk of 

egg ••— 

Ext. Cannabis Indicas. 

Camphora. 

01. terebinthinas. 

Chloroformum. 



REQUIRING CERTAIN AD- 
DITIONS TO FORM ELI- 
GIBLE SOLUTIONS. 

Quinias sulphas. 

Cinchenias sulphas. 

Quinidias sulphas. 

Chinoidine. 

Iodinium. 

Hydrarg. iodid. rub. 

Requiring viscid sub- 
stances, as correctives 
or vehicles. 

Ammonii carbonas. 

Hydrargyri chloridi 
corros. 

Plumbi acetas. 

Potassii cyanuretum. 

Potassa. 



BEST FORMED INTO SO- 
LUTION IN MAKING THE 
CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS. 

Ammonii acetas. 
Magnesii citras. 
Acid, phosphoric. 
Potassii arsenis. 

" bitartras. 
Arsenici et hyd. iod. 
Potassa. 
Ferri citras. 

" nitras. 

" phosphas. 



830 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

For preparations adapted to use as vehicles or correctives of the 
unpleasant taste, and other properties, especially of saline sub- 
stances, see page 725. 

Of the most numerous class in the syllabus, those which form 
eligible solutions without the addition of any chemical or other 
excipients, it should be remarked that many are so well adapted to 
combinations with other medical or corrective substances as to be 
rarely prescribed alone. Thus, muriate of ammonia is nearly 
always prescribed with expectorant remedies in cough mixtures. 
The bicarbonate and carbonate of potassium and of sodium with 
prophylactics, as in hooping-cough mixtures, or with stimulants, as 
in ordinary carminative and antacid remedies ; acetate of potassium 
is much used with other diuretics. Alum and borax are best 
adapted to gargles and astringent washes, in which other medicines, 
not incompatible, may be combined. Bromide and iodide of po- 
tassium are instances of mineral substances, often combined with 
vegetable alteratives, which increase their effect and take off at the 
same time their very unpleasant sensible properties. 

In the formulas which follow, these modes of combination are 
illustrated as well as those of the less soluble substances displayed 
in the other groups of the syllabus. 

The part of this work devoted to pharmaceutical chemistry con- 
tains the mode of preparing those solutions, the medicinal ingredients 
of which are developed spontaneously in the process of preparation. 

Chemical and Pharmaceutical Incompatibles. 

The subject of incompatibles is, it appears to me, too much of a 
stumbling-block to the student. A moderate amount of chemical 
knowledge will serve to guard the practitioner against the use of 
incompatibles entirely, while the observance of a few simple rules 
will be sufficient to protect from glaring errors in this respect. In 
the list of substances incompatible with each other, as published in 
the older works, perhaps a majority are not likely to be ordered, 
on account of any fitness they have for each other in their thera- 
peutical relations, while it is well known that some of the most 
popular of prescriptions are framed with the especial design of pro- 
ducing precipitates, which, being diffused in the resulting liquid, 
aid its general effect. 

Authors have given too absolute a sense to the term incompatible, 
by giving sanction to the idea that all substances which form in- 
soluble precipitates are incompatible with each other. An insoluble 
compound is not necessarily inert, but, as experience abundantly 
proves, is frequently the best and most eligible form for a medicine. 

The reactions which occur in the organism are not to be judged 
of by ordinary chemical laws, as manifested in the laboratory of 
the chemist. The difference of action between the animal solvents 
under the influence of the life force, and those employed by the 
chemist with the mechanical means at his command, are too well 
known and appreciated to require extended notice. Living beings 



PHARMACEUTICAL INCOMPATIBLES. 831 

can dissolve, appropriate, and circulate in their fluids, substances 
which, to ordinary agencies, are most intractable and insoluble. 

Corrosive sublimate, when precipitated by albumen, gluten, and 
casein, is presented in the most insoluble form possible, and yet this 
mode of combination is highly recommended by the French as 
being more easily endured by the stomach, while the alterative 
effect is both mild and certain. This mode of procedure is stated 
by Dorvault to be adapted to a number of mineral salts, such as 
lead, tin, zinc, copper, silver, platinum, and gold, all of which form, 
with albuminous substances, compounds insoluble in water and 
ordinary solvents, but soluble in the liquids of the alimentary canal, 
by the aid of which they are placed in condition very suitable for 
medicinal action. 

These facts are applicable to toxicology. "When, in a case of 
poisoning from vegetable alkalies, tannin or an astringent decoc- 
tion is given ; or, after the use of a poisonous dose of arsenious 
acid, we give hydrated peroxide of iron; or, after corrosive subli- 
mate, albumen; an insoluble compound is formed in each case, and 
yet it does not follow that these compounds are inert, but only that 
their immediate effects are destroyed, and their absorption dimin- 
ished; indeed it has been proved that, in cases of poisoning, where 
antidotes had been used successfully, the urine contained both the 
poison and antidote five or six days after they were taken. The 
practice of administering purgatives and emetics for the complete 
evacuation of poisons, even after neutralization, is founded on the 
fact that they are still capable of slow absorption. 

In connection with this subject, it may be well to mention the 
fact that when active metallic substances, as, for instance, the salts 
of mercury and of antimony, are taken for some time continuously, 
they seem to be deposited in the alimentary canal in an insoluble 
form, so that, by administering a chemical preparation which forms 
with them soluble salts, they sometimes display their activity to 
an alarming and even dangerous extent. The rationale of the use 
of iodide of potassium, after the long-continued use of mercurials, 
is, that it forms an iodide of mercury, which it dissolves and carries 
off through the secretions; salivation is sometimes induced, unex- 
pectedly, in this way. It is stated that patients, who have used 
antimonials, are sometimes nauseated by lemonade made from tar- 
taric acid, owing to the formation of tartar emetic from the undis- 
solved oxide of antimony. These facts are not without interest, in 
connection with the subject of prescribing. 

Considering it necessary, as a general rule, to avoid the associa- 
tion of substances which, by contact, may produce unknown or ill- 
defined compounds, or compounds different from those intended to 
be administered, I proceed to state briefly the most important rules 
relative to incompatibles: — 



832 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTION'S, MIXTURES, ETC. 

Conditions resulting in Chemical Incompatibility* 

1. "Whenever two salts in solution can, by the exchange of their 
bases and acids, form a soluble and an insoluble salt, or two insolu- 
ble salts, the decomposition takes place — the insoluble salt is pre- 
cipitated, or, rarely, by combining with, the soluble salt, gives birth 
to a double salt. 

2. If we mix solutions of two salts which cannot create a soluble 
and an insoluble salt, a precipitate will not be formed, though often 
there will be decomposition. 

3. In mixing any salt and a strong acid, a decomposition is very 
apt to take place ; salts containing feeble acids, especially carbonic 
and acetic, are always decomposed by strong acids. 

4. Alkalies in contact with the salts of the metals proper, or of 
the alkaloids, decompose them, precipitating their bases. 

5. Metallic oxides, in contact with acids, combine with them 
and form salts the properties of which are sometimes unlike either 
the acid or the oxide. 

6. Vegetable astringents precipitate albumen, gelatin, vegetable 
alkalies, and numerous metallic oxides, and with salts of iron pro- 
duce inky solutions. 

7. Grlucosides, such as santonin and colocynthin, should not be 
prescribed with free acids or with emulsin. 

8. The condition most favorable to chemical action is a solution 
of the salts in concentrated form without the intervention of viscid 
substances, so that when the indications require the employment 
of two substances which are incompatible, it is well to form a dilute 
solution of one of them in a mucilaginous or syrupy liquid before 
adding the other. In this way the decomposition may often be 
averted. 

In the table appended, some preparations are mentioned which, 
as a general rule, the practitioner should avoid combining with 
other chemical substances; they are best given in simple solution, 
or some of them, with the addition of the Galenical preparations, 
or simple saccharine or mucilaginous excipients: — 

Aeidum hydrocyanicum. Potassii cyanidum. 

" nitro-muriaticum. " bromidum. 

Liquor hydrarg. et arsen. iod. " iodidum. 

" potassii arsenitis. " permanganas. 

" calcis. Ferri et pot. tartras. 

" barii chloridi. Quinise sulphas. 

" calcii chloridi. Cinchonise sulphas. 

" iodinii compositus. Quinidise sulphas. 

" potassse. Morphias sulphas. 

" ferri citratis. " murias. 

" ferri nitratis. " acetas. 

" morphias sulphatis. " valerianas. 

Tinct. ferri chloridi. Zinci acetas. 

Tinct. iodinii. Potassii acetas. 
Antimonii et potassii tartras. 

In addition to what has been said, it seems proper to notice 
what will be more particularly brought into view in commenting 

* See all the 1st chapter on Inorganic Chemicals, page 109. 



EXCIPIENTS USED IN MIXTURES. 833 

on the formulas which follow; the intentional use of medicines, in 
one sense incompatible, for the purpose of producing new and more 
desirable compounds. The proto-carbonate of iron is in this way 
produced from the sulphate and a carbonated alkali ; the acetate of 
ammonium by the addition of acetic acid to a solution of the car- 
bonate. In the same way black and yellow wash are extemporane- 
ously prepared by adding to lime-water, calomel and corrosive sub- 
limate, respectively. The association of sulphate of zinc and acetate 
of lead furnishes a familiar illustration of the same fact; the result- 
ing precipitate of sulphate of lead, occurring as an impalpable 
powder or magma, is favorable to the therapeutic object in view. 

Laudanum is quite incompatible with subacetate of lead ; but 
one of the most popular of lotions contains these ingredients asso- 
ciated, so that it is not correct to say that these substances are 
incompatible in a medical sense, however, in a purely chemical 
point of view, they may be considered so. 

Pharmaceutical incomp edibles are those in which a disturbance of 
a solution takes place in a way not considered strictly chemical. 
Observation has satisfied me that these are very commonly asso- 
ciated, both in pills and liquid preparations. If we add tincture 
of Tolu to an aqueous solution, the resin of the Tolu separates 
almost entirely as a coagulum, and collects on the side of the bottle, 
thus being lost as a medicinal ingredient of the preparation, besides 
rendering it very unsightly. The same remark applies to tincture 
of myrrh added to solution of astringent salts, and to other resinous 
tinctures prescribed in connection with aqueous liquids. 

On the admixture of tincture of guaiacum with the spirit of 
nitric ether, the resinous tincture gelatinizes into a mass, and is 
unfit for use. The addition of tincture of cinnamon to infusion of 
digitalis after filtration, as directed in the Pharmacopoeia, occasions 
a precipitate. 

List of Pharmaceutical Incompatibles. 

Comp. infusion of cinchona, with comp. infusion gentian. 

Essential oils with aqueous liquids in quantities exceeding one drop to f ^j. 

Fixed oils and copaiva, with aqueous liquids, except with excipients. 

Spirit of nitric ether with strong mucilages. 

Infusions generally with metallic salts. 

Compound infusion of gentian with infusion of wild cherry. 

Tinctures made with strong alcohol, with those made with weak alcohol. 

Tinctures made with strong alcohol, with infusions and aqueous liquids. 

Excipients used in Mixtures. 

The consideration of excipients will bring into view the best 
modes of overcoming some pharmaceutical incompatibilities. 

In the form of mixture the following liquids are used as 
diluents : — 

Water. Compound infusion of rose. 

The medicated waters. Emulsion of almonds. 

Syrups. Honey of rose. 
53 



834 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

As excipients or constituents in a stricter sense — 

Powd. acacia, | mixed Qr { T Many of the extracts, 

bugar, j to J Yelk of egg. 

Powd. tragacanth. White of egg. 

Confections. 

As flavoring agents with viscid ingredients as above — 

Oil of caraway. Tincture of Tolu. 

Oil of cinnamon. Tincture of ginger. 

Oil of cloves. Spirits of aniseed. 

Oil of gaultheria. Spirits of lemon. 

Oil of sassafras. Spirits of nutmeg. 

Oil of bitter almond, etc. Spirits of the mints. 

As flavoring and coloring agents with or without viscid ingre- 
dients — 

Tincture of cinnamon. Comp. tincture of gentian. 

Aniseed cordial. Fluid extract of vanilla. 

Tincture of cardamom.. Ginger syrup. 

Compound tincture of cardamom. Tolu syrup. 

Compound spirit of lavender. Curacoa cordial. 

Tincture of fresh orange-peel. Fruit syrups, etc. 

The diluents are useful by enabling us to divide the doses of an 
active medicine to almost any extent ; they correspond to the sugar, 
gum, aromatic powder, etc., prescribed for a similar purpose with 
powders, and with conserve of rose and other bulky additions used 
in pill masses. 

The immense utility of excipients, and flavoring agents generally, 
will be best illustrated by the examples which follow. The skilful 
employment of these adds greatly to the success of the prescriber. 

The necessity of limiting the assortment of prescriptions given, 
and the importance of including in them a considerable variety of 
medicinal agents, will forbid the illustration of all the numerous 
points in this connection, and much is necessarily left to the inge- 
nuity of the learner. 

Extemporaneous Solutions, Mixtures, etc. 

Astringents. 

No. 80. — Mistura Cretce, IT. S. P. {Chalk Mixtures, or Chalk Julep.) 

Take of Prepared chalk ^ss. 

Sugar, 

Powdered gum Arabic, each ^ij. 

Cinnamon water, 

Water, each f ^iv. 

Rub them together until they are thoroughly mixed. 

To this, which is a popular antacid astringent, the addition is 
often made of tincture of kino, or some similar vegetable astrin- 
gent, either with or without tincture of opium. In the absence of 
cinnamon water, two drops of the oil of cinnamon for each ounce 
of that water ordered may be added to the dry ingredients. As 
the mixture does not keep very well, it is a convenient plan for the 
physician and pharmacist to keep the powders ready mixed, and 



ASTRINGENTS. 835 

add the water when required. Chalk mixture is given in an adult 
dose of a tablespoonful. 

No. 81.— Blue Mass and Chalk Mixture. 

Take of Mercurial mass, in powder ^ss. 

Prepared chalk 3j. 

Gum Arabic, in powder, 

Sugar, of each gss. 

Tincture of opium rr\,xxx. 

Aromatic syrup of rhubarb f 5J, f^vj. 

Triturate into a uniform mixture. 

Dose, f5j to stimulate the secretion of bile and check diarrhoea. 
Tincture of kino or other astringents maybe added. It should be 
shaken before being administered. 

No. 82. — Carbonate of Bismuth Mixture. 

Take of Carbonate of bismuth . . . ^ij. 

Cinnamon water, 

Syrup of gum Arabic, each fgij. 

Mix them. 

Dose, a teaspoonful in cholera infantum, or for an adult foss. 

No. 83. — Parrish's Camphor Mixture. (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) 

Take of Aqua? camphors f .^iij. 

Spirit. Lavandulae compos f % j. 

Sacchari 3j. 

Misce. 

Give a tablespoonful every two hours in diarrhoea and cholera 
morbus, adding ten drops of laudanum where there is much pain. 

This preparation, which was originally prescribed in 1832, has 
been found so generally useful and safe that it has become a stan- 
dard remedy, and is prepared and sold by all druggists in Phila- 
delphia, and prescribed extensively throughout the United States. 

!N*o. 84. — Hope's Camphor Mixture. 

Take of Aqua? camphorse f 5iv. 

Acidi nitrosi rr\xxx. 

Tincturse opii "n\xx. 

Misce. 

Dose, a tablespoonful every two hours in diarrhoea and dysentery. 

This formula was originally made public, after twenty-six years' 
experience of its use in dysentery, by Thomas Hope, Esq., surgeon, 
Chatham, in the Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal, January, 
1824. Dr. Hope was in the habit of directing nitrous acid, not 
nitric, which he says he has "not found to produce any good effect." 
I have been careful to follow his formula literally, and have for the 
purpose prepared nitrous acid by the process given on p. 155 ; 
though nitrous readily passes into nitric acid by contact with water, 
this reaction does not occur in presence of an excess of nitric acid. 
Few remedies have a more general and wide-spread reputation than 
this; it is now frequently prescribed, more than sixty years after 
its virtues were originally discovered. 



836 extemporaneous solutions, mixtures, etc. 

Tonics. 

"No. 85. — Fever and Ague Mixture. 

Take of Powdered red bark giij. 

Confection of opium, 

Lemon-juice, each ^iss. 

Port wine f Siij. 

Mix by trituration in a mortar. 

Dose, three tablespoonfuls morning, noon, and night, the day the 
fever is off. 

Some recipes direct powdered serpentaria, 9j, in addition to the 
above. 

Though not an elegant, this is a most efficient and valuable com- 
bination. 

No. 86. — Solution of Acetate of Chinoidine. 

Take of Chinoidine * . . . £j. 

Acetic acid f ij. 

Water f^xxix. 

Make a solution. 

Each fluidrachm contains about two grains of chinoidine, and 
serves as a dose. 

This is a cheap form of cinchona preparation, used with success 
in the Moyamensing Dispensary, Philadelphia. 

No. S7.—3fistura Ferri Composita, U. S. P. (Griffith's Myrrh 

Mixture.) 
Take of Myrrh, 

Sugar, of each 3j. 

Carbonate of potassium gr. xxv. 

Triturate together into a fine milky mixture with — 

Rose water f gviiss. 

Then add — 

Spirit of lavender (simple) f 3SS. 

Sulphate of iron, in coarse powder Bj. 

Pour the mixture immediately into a bottle, which must be 
well stopped. 

Dose, a tablespoonful, as a tonic in phthisis, and in anaemic cases 
generally. 

The strict phraseology of the Pharmacopoeia has been departed 
from above in the hope of rendering the pharmaceutical points in 
the preparation more clear. The sulphate of iron and carbonate of 
potassium here used form by double decomposition sulphate of 
potassium and protocarbonate of iron, which latter floats in the 
milky mixture of myrrh and sugar, giving it a green color. This 
is in very small proportion, so that in each flss dose, there is not 
more than gr. ss. This preparation is, however, a very useful and 
elegant one. (See PiL Ferri Carbonatis and Pil. Ferri Composita.) 



tonics. 887 



No. 88. — A good Preparation of Iron and Cinchona. 

(Substitute for Tinctura Cincbonae Ferrata. — See p. 621.) 

Take of Tinct. cinchona? comp f 5iv. 

Ferri citratis 3j. 

Acidi citrici gr. xv. 

Triturate the citric acid and citrate of iron together, and dissolve 
in the tincture of cinchona and quassia. Liq. ferri citratis f 3\j 
(see p. 233) may be used as a substitute for the rather insoluble dry 
salt. 

The dose is a teaspoonful, containing two grains of citrate of iron. 

The citric acid breaks up any tannate of iron as soon as formed, 
and although there is a liability to considerable precipitate of cin- 
chonic red, and. probably of the alkaloids, but very little iron is 
thrown down. 

No. 89. — A Concentrated Solution of Quinia and Iron. 

Take of Quinia? sulphatis 5j. 

Tr. ferri ckloridi f 3iiss. 

Ft. solutio. 

One grain of sulphate of quinia is contained in every 7J minims 
(about 15 drops) of the solution, which is an appropriate dose ; it 
may be made with three times the proportion of quinia salt. To 
prescribe it in a more diluted form, add water fsij, and syrup of 
orange-peel (or other suitable flavor) f3iij- The dose will then be a 
teaspoonful, equivalent to 1 gr. of the quinia salt. 

Dr. Gilbert, of Philadelphia, informs me that he finds this a very 
useful remedy in cases of carbuncle, accompanied by an atonic con- 
dition and erysipelatous tendencies. 

No. 90. — A Bitter Tonic for Dyspepsia. 

Take of Tinct. cinchona? comp f ^iv. 

Tinctura? nucis vomica? f 3j. 

Misce. 

A teaspoonful three times a day in a little sugar and water. 

This is one of the best combinations of its kind, though its effect 
should be carefully watched and its use omitted when symptoms 
of muscular contraction appear. 

No. 91. — A Tonic Cholagogue. 

Take of Quinia? sulphatis 3ij. 

Extracti leptandra? 3j. 

Tinctura stillingia? f Jiv. 

Extracti podophylli ^iij. 

Olei sassafras, 

Olei gaultheria?, aa gtt. x. 

Theriaci q. s. ut ft. f ^viij. 
Misce. 

Dose, a teaspoonful three times a day. 

This formula, by Dr. Mayes, of South Carolina, is said nearly to 
represent the celebrated Osgood's Cholagogue so extensively used 
in the Valley of the Mississippi and elsewhere. 



4 
838 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

No. 92. — Mixture of Quinia, for children. 

Take of Quinise sulphatis, pulv gss. 

Acacise pulveris ^ss. 

Syrupi zingiberis f^iv. 

Ft. mistura. 

Sig. — A teaspoonful, containing a grain of the quinia salt, three 
times a day. 

The method of prescribing sulphate of quinia dissolved by the 
aid of aromatic sulphuric acid, develops its taste to the utmost, 
while, on the contrary, by suspending it in a very viscid liquid as 
above, the contact with the organs of taste is less perfect, and if 
followed immediately by a cracker or piece of bread the bitterness 
is not inconveniently experienced. When not contraindicated a 
few grains of tannic acid may be added to obtund the bitterness. 

Arterial and Nervous Stimulants. 
No. 93. — Carbonate of Ammonium Mixture. 

Each dose contains. 

Take of Carbonate of ammonium gr. x. 

Powdered gum Arabic gr. x. 

Sugar, each giss gr. x. 

Comp. spirit of ether Tt\xv. 

Comp. tinct. of cardam., each . . . f^ij n\,xv. 

Water fo n J ss - 

Make a mixture. 

Dose, a tablespoonful every two or three hours. A stimulant in 
low conditions, as in the last stages of disease. 

No. 94. — Oil of Turpentine Mixture. 

Take of Olei terebinthinse ^ f ^iij. 

Olei olivse . * f 3v. 

Pulv. acacise, 

Sacchari, aa . . . . , 3ij„ 

Tincturse opii n(L. 

Aquas cinnamomi f ^vss. 

Mix the oil of turpentine with the olive oil, and triturate these 
with the gum and sugar, previously incorporated with a little cin- 
namon water, then dilute with the remainder of the cinnamon water, 
add the laudanum, and shake the vial till they are well mixed. 

Oil of turpentine does not readily form an emulsion with gum 
and sugar unless mixed with some fixed oil, though the yelk of an 
egg may be successfully substituted for all other excipients, Dose 
of the above mixture f 3j (a teaspoonful) containing ffiiv of the oil 
of turpentine and nij of laudanum. 

No. 95.— Mistura Assafoetida?, U. S. P. (Milk of Assafoetida.) 

Take of Assafoetida gij. 

Water Oss. 

Rub the assafoetida with the water gradually added until they 
are thoroughly mixed. 



ARTERIAL AND NERVOUS STIMULANTS. 839 

A good extemporaneous way to prepare this very popular anti- 
spasmodic, is to form a wine of assafcetida, as directed by Henry N. 
Ritteuhouse, by triturating ^ss of the gum resin with f5x wine. 
The gum resin should be carefully selected, so as not to require 
straining; this wine will keep, and is converted into the mixture 
by adding to water in the proportion of 5j (by weight) to each f5j. 

James T. Shinn, of this city, proposes the following mode of pre- 
paration, which, while it keeps well,; enables the practitioner to 
double the strength of the mixture if desired, or by dilution to fur- 
nish it of the officinal strength. 

Take of xissafcetida ^ss. 

Diluted acetic acid f^ij. 

Water f|iv. 

Sugar . . . . £iv. 

Triturate together into a mixture. To make milk of assafcetida 
dilute with an equal portion of water. 

Milk of assafoetida is much prescribed and extensively used as a 
domestic remedy. Dose, from f 5j to f 5ss. 

!N*o. 96. — Chloroform Mixture, without Camphor. 
Take of Chloroform, 

Fixed oil of almonds, of each 2 fluidrachms. 

Powdered gum Arabic, 

Sugar, of each 2 drachms. 

Orange-flower water 1 fluidounce. 

Water 2£ fluidounces. 

Make a mucilage with the gum Arabic and sugar and about half 
a fluidounce of the water, then add the chloroform and almond oil, 
previously mixed together, triturate into a uniform milky liquid, 
and gradually dilute with the remainder of the water and the 
orange-flower water. 

Dose, a, teaspoonful, containing about ien drops of chloroform. 
The liability of chloroform to separate from mucilaginous excipients 
is, in this case, obviated by combining it with almond oil, which 
may be replaced by good olive oil, and furnishes an excellent mix- 
ture. (See Elixir Chloroformi, page 634.) 

Syrupus amygdalae furnishes one. of the best vehicles for the ad- 
ministration of chloroform ; f 3j of chloroform and 1'5 v or f 3vij of 
syrup when shaken together form an excellent mixture. 

!No. 97. — Mistura Chloroformi, U. S. P. (with Camphor). 
Take of Purified chloroform, half a troyounce. 
Camphor, sixty grains. 
The yelk of one egg. 
Water, six fluidounces. 

Rub the yelk in a mortar first by itself, then with the camphor, 
previously dissolved in the chloroform, and lastly, with the water, 
gradually added, so as to make a uniform mixture. 

This new officinal preparation contains about ten minims of 
chloroform and four grains of camphor to each tablespoonful, which 
would be the maximum dose.. 



840 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTION'S, MIXTURES, ETC. 

No. 98. — An Anodyne Mixture. (Dr. Jos. Parrish, Sen.) 

Take of Spt. setheris comp., 

Spt. lavandulse comp., aa fgj. 

Spt. ammonise aromat gtt. xl. 

Liq. morphiae sulphatis f jfj. 

Aquse f|iij. 

Sacchari ^ij. 

Misce. 

Sig.—A small teaspoonful every hour until relieved. 
This old recipe possesses unusual interest, from having been pre- 
scribed for a gentleman in Philadelphia who had it renewed at one 
establishment, at intervals, for nearly 30 years. 

No. 99. — Mixture of Cannabis Indica. 

Take of Ext. cannabis Ind gr. xvj. 

Olei olivse f^j. 

Ft. solutio et cum — 

Acacias pulv., 

Sacchari, aa gss. 

Aquae cinnamomi fsij« 

Misce, secundum artem. 

Dose, a teaspoonful, representing one grain of the extract. 

Narcotics and Nervous Sedatives. 
No. 100. — Liquor Morphice Sulphatis,~U. S. P. 

Reduced. 

Take of Sulphate of morphia gr. viij gr. j. 

Distilled water Oss f Jj. 

Dissolve the morphia in the distilled water. 

This is an illustration of the most convenient method of giving 
small doses of soluble substances ; here the proportions are so 
adjusted, that each teaspoonful shall represent J gr. of morphia, 
which is a rather small dose. 

A favorite prescription for after-pains in obstetric practice is a 
solution of sulphate of morphia in camphor water, in the same pro- 
portion as the above. Dose, the same. 

Arterial and Nervous Sedatives. 
No. 101. — A Sedative, Diajihoretic Combination. 

Each f2j. 

Take of Yini antimonii n\,viij. 

Spt. setheris nit., aa f^ss ffiviij. 

Tinct. digitalis f3j ># ""lij. 

Syr. acidi citrici f 5iij. 

Misce. 

Sig. — Take a teaspoonful every three or four hours. 






CATHARTICS. 811 

No. 102. — Remedy in Pulmonary and Catarrhal Diseases, etc., 
unattended by Fever. 

Take of Acidi hyclrocyanici gtt. xl. 

Yini antimonii fgss. 

Syrupi tolutani f^iss. 

Mucil. acacise f5ij- 

M., fiat mistura, capiat cochl. parvum ter quarterve die. 

This, with several similar combinations of hydroc} T anic acid, is 
highly recommended by Dr. Horace Green, and published by him 
among his selections from favorite prescriptions collected from dis- 
tinguished American physicians, in a scrap-book kept for the pur- 
pose. Rendered much more dilute, this is recommended as one of 
the best of remedies for hooping-cough. 

No. 103. — Creasote Mixture. 

Take of Creasote gtt. xvj. 

Powdered gum Arabic 3j. 

Sugar gss. 

Water f^ij. 

Triturate the creasote with the gum and sugar, then gradually 
add the water and triturate to a uniform mixture. 

Dose, a teaspoonful, containing one 'drop of creasote, used in 
bronchitis, phthisis, etc., and to check vomiting. Creasote is soluble 
in water to the extent of ^lv to f^j,and for external use is best 
made into a suitable solution by shaking up with water. 

No. 104.— Aqua Creasoti,TJ. S. P. 

Take of Creasote, a fluidrachm. 
Distilled water, a pint. 

Mix them, and agitate the mixture until the creasote is dissolved. 

Cathartics. 

No. 105.— Castor Oil Mixture. 

Take of Gum Arabic, in powder, 

Sugar, of each ^iij. 

Oil of mint gtt. iv. 

Triturate into a uniform powder, and add water f 5yj, or suffi- 
cient to bring the mucilage to the consistence of castor oil, then 
add, by degrees, castor oil, f^j, continuing the trituration till it 
combines into a perfect emulsion, with a uniform milky appear- 
ance ; should this fail to appear, add a little more water, or, if the 
mucilage is evidently too dilute, a little more gum, care being taken 
to produce the uniform milkiness. Dilute this by adding water 
sufficient to make f^iv. 

This will make a perfect castor oil emulsion. If oil of turpentine 
is to be incorporated with it, let it be added to the mixed gum and 
sugar, before introducing the water and oil, or let it be first per- 
fectly mixed with the castor oil. If laudanum, or some carmina- 
tive and coloring adjuvant is desirable, it may be added at the 



842 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

time of bottling. In no case should the oil be introduced into the 
bottle until combined with the other ingredients, as a portion will 
then adhere to the sides, and be imperfectly incorporated with the 
gum. Each tablespoonful of this mixture contains f3j of oil, and 
may be given every hour till the desired effect is produced. 

Several demulcent mixtures — as those of olive oil, almond oil, 
etc. — may be made upon this model. Copaiva mixture, introduced 
among the diuretics, may have a similar composition. The pro- 
portion of gum and sugar to the oily ingredient (5iij each, to f~j) 
should be remembered, as it applies equally to the other cases named. 

ISTo. 106. — Extemporaneous Cream of Tartar Draught. 

Take of Tartaric acid £ix. 

Water f3vj. 

Make a solution and label No. 1. 

Bicafb. potassium 3vj. 

Water f^vj. 

Make solution, and label No. 2. 

Mix from one to two tablespoonfuls of No. 1 with the same 
quantity of !N"o. 2, and drink immediately. 

In this way, the bitartrate of potassium is obtained in solution, 
although, if allowed to stand a few minutes, the liquid will deposit 
the salt in a white crystalline powder. 



!No. 107. — A Charcoal and Blue Mass Mixture. 

Take of Carbo ligni 3j. 

Sodii bicarb ' gss. 

Mass. pil. hydrarg gr. viij. 

Syrupi rhei aromat f |jij. 

Aquae fjij. 

Triturate together into a uniform mixture. Dose, a tablespoonful. 
This was furnished by Dr. John D. G-riscom, who finds it to meet 
a very common indication in general practice. 



No. 108. — A Magnesia Mixture for Children. 

Take of Magnesia (Husband's) 3j. 

Powd. gum Arabic 3ss. 

Triturate together, and add 

Aromat. syrup of rhubarb f 6 n J« 

Fennel water fjjiss. 

A teaspoonful is an appropriate dose. 

To this mixture may be added, gr. xv of mercurial mass, which 
should be triturated with the powder, and, if required, the addition 
of say niviij of laudanum, or f $j of paregoric. The precaution of 
shaking up before administering should not be overlooked. 



refrigerants and antacids. 843 

Refrigerants and Antacids. 

No. 109. — Mistura Potassii Citratis. {Liquor Potasses Citratis, U. S. P. 
1850. Neutral Mixture, or Saline Draught) 

Take of Lemon juice, fresh Oss. 

Bicarbonate of potassium q. s. 

Add the bicarbonate gradually to the lemon-juice till the acid is 
completely saturated, then strain through muslin. 

No. 110.— Liquor Potassce Citratis, IT. S. P. 1860. 

Take of Citric acid 3ss. 

Bicarbonate of potassium 3vss. 

"Water Oss. 

Dissolve the acid and bicarbonate in the water, and strain the 
solution through muslin. 

In preparing Mistura potassii citratis, the use of fresh lemons is 
indispensable, and it is to provide for the occasional scarcity of 
these that the officinal Liquor potassii citratis is prescribed. Oil 
of lemon, which was formerly directed in this preparation, is now 
omitted, and this and sugar, when considered desirable, should be 
prescribed with the solution. Care must be taken in adding the 
bicarbonate to use a glass rod, porcelain spatula, silver spoon, or 
similar utensil, which will not corrode or impart a metallic taste 
to the preparation. It will also facilitate the operation of satu- 
rating the acid to triturate the crystals of bicarbonate in a dry 
mortar into a powder before adding it, little by little, to the liquid. 
The delay of filtering through paper may be very much obviated by 
using a tine muslin strainer, or by plugging the base of a glass funnel 
with some cotton, and pouring the liquid through it into the con- 
taining vial; it is an object to conduct this operation quickly, so as 
to retain and bottle up, as much as possible, the carbonic acid gas 
liberated in the reaction. 

In making the solution both citric acid and the bicarbonate are 
directed to be weighed beforehand, and then the whole amount 
being added there will be no doubt as to the exact saturation of the 
acid: this is not practicable in the lemon-juice process, as there is 
no certainty as to its strength. In saturating lemon-juice it is well 
to cease adding the bicarbonate before it becomes perfectly satu- 
rated, or rather to err on the side of acidity than that of alkalinity. 
A slight excess of alkali may render the mixture quite disagreeable, 
while, on the other hand, the excess of acid should be extremely 
small. This subject may be concluded by presenting the following 
additional formulas for similar preparations: — 

Reduced. 

No. 111. — Take of Citrate of potassium . . gvj ^iij. 

Water Oss fjiv. 

Sugar gss gr. xv. 

Oil of lemon tt\j gtt. j. 

Make a solution. 

Here there is no effervescence, and, consequently, no carbonic acid 
in the solution. In other respects it is the best recipe, because so 



844 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

readily made. The sugar may be omitted or not, at pleasure, but 
seems to me to improve it. The substitution of carbonic acid 
water for common water is an improvement in making this pre- 
paration. 

The following recipe is that of my friend, Ambrose Smith : — 

No. 112. — To make Effervescing Neutral Mixture Extemporaneously. 

Reduced. 

Take of Bicarbonate of potassium . . . . ^iij ^vj. 

Citric acid |ij, giij ^ss, Bij, gr. v. 

Sugar ■ . giss giij. 

Oil of lemon gtt. xvj wuv. 

Mix thoroughly and reduce to a uniform powder, and keep in a 
well-stopped bottle. To make neutral mixture, dissolve 3vj, 9j in 
Oss water (3iij, gr. x to f^iv); this proportion, however, is some- 
what less than the strength of the lemon-juice saturated with 
bicarbonate of potassium, and is considered an improvement, in 
view of the free and constant use of the preparation. 

No. 113. — Effervescing Draught. 

Take of Bicarbonate of potassium gij, ^ij. 

Water f^iv. 

Make a solution. 

Directions. — Take a tablespoonful of lemon-juice diluted with a 
tablespoonful of water, and add to it in a tumbler a tablespoonful 
of this solution, then drink immediately. 

No. 114. — Effervescing Draught without Lemon-juice. 

Take of Bicarbonate of potassium ^ij, 9ij. 

Sugar 3j. 

Water fsiv. 

Make a solution and label No. 1, the alkaline solution. 

Take of Citric acid £ij. 

Oil of lemon ny. j. 

Water f Jiv. 

Make a solution and label No. 2, the acid solution. 

Directions. — To a tablespoonful of No. 1, add a tablespoonful of 
water, and to the mixture, in a clean tumbler, add a tablespoonful 
of No. 2 ; drink immediately. 

No. 115. — Effervescing Fever Powders. 

Take of Citric acid, dried and powdered £v. 

Divide into twelve parts, wrapped in white writing paper. 
Take of Bicarbonate of potassium, dried and powdered . 3viss. 

Divide into twelve parts, wrapped in blue paper. 
Inclose these white and blue powders alternately in a tin box. 
In drying the bicarbonate the temperature should never rise 
above 120° F. 



ANTACIDS. 845 

Directions. — Dissolve the contents of a white paper in a tumbler, 
one- third full of cold water, then stir in the contents of a blue 
paper, and drink immediately. 

A dose is usually given every two or three hours duriug the 
prevalence of the fever. 

The various forms of citrate of potassium, which are now described, 
constitute favorite remedies in fever; sometimes spirit of nitric 
ether, tartar emetic, tincture of digitalis, tincture of veratrum viride, 
or'other remedies are added to them. 

The effervescing draught is said to be the best way to give altera- 
tive or sedative doses of tartar emetic when the stomach is irritable. 

No. 116. — Liquid Substitute for Dover's Powder. 

Take of Yin. ipecac Tr\,xvj. 

Tinct. opii TTl^iij. 

Spirit, setheris nit f3j. 

Misce. 

Sig. — Take at one dose diluted with water at going to bed. 

Antacids. 
No. 117. — A Mild Antacid for Young Infants. (Soda Hint.) 

Take of Sodii bicarb gss. 

Aquse mentlise f giv. 

Ft. solutio. 

Prescribed by Dr. Meigs and others. Dose, a teasjooonful, as an 
innocent substitute for the numerous carminatives. 

No. 118. — Aromatic and Antacid Corrective of Indigestion. 

Take of Sodii bicarbonatis 9iv. 

Infus. gentianae coinp f 3iiss. 

Aqiue menthse pip f* 5 iij . 

Tinct. cardainomi comp f 3ss. 

Misce. 

Dose, a tablespoonful as required. 

The above makes a handsome preparation ; it was furnished me 
by my friend Dr. J. J. Levick. 

No. 119. — Carbonated Soda Powders. 

For making a draught of soda water extemporaneously. 

Take of Bicarbonate of sodium . gr. xxiij. Fold in a blue paper. 
Tartaric acid .... gr. xx. Fold in a white paper. 

Directions for use. — Dissolve the powders contained in the white 
and blue papers in separate tumblers, each nearly half full of water, 
then mix their contents and drink immediately. A little syrup 
may be added to one or both of the glasses before mixing. These 
are usually put into boxes containing twelve of each kind of 
powders. (See Seidlitz Powders, p. 552.) 



84G EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

Yeast Powders. 

A substitute for yeast in making batter cakes, having the ad- 
vantage of making the batter perfectly light and ready for baking 
without delay, and greatly diminishing the liability to become 
sour. Many dyspeptics, who cannot tolerate fresh light cakes when 
made with yeast, can eat them with impunity when raised in this 
way. 

Fold in a blue paper, Bicarbonate of sodium 120 grs. 

Fold in a white paper, Tartaric acid 100 grs. 

Directions for use. — Put the contents of a white and blue paper 
into separate teacups filled with water, and stir until perfectly dis- 
solved. Mix a sufficient quantity of batter for six or eight persons 
a little thicker than usual, to allow for the liquid in which the 
powders are dissolved ; and when ready for baking stir in well the 
contents of one teacup, then add the other and stir it well, and 
commence baking immediately. 

A more economical way, and sufficiently accurate in view of the 
harmlessness of the ingredients, is to keep supplies of the bicarbonate 
of sodium and tartaric acid in separate bottles, which will insure 
their perfect dryness, and then when wanted for use take a small 
teaspoonful of each, and dissolve as above. The equivalent weights 
of these ingredients have very nearly the same bulk. If bitartrate 
of potassium is substituted for tartaric acid, it must be used in 
about twice the quantity, and being insoluble, must be suspended 
in water and thoroughly stirred in. 

Demulcents and Diuretics. 
!No. 120. — Mistura Amygdaloe, U. S. P. {Emulsion of Almonds.) 

Take of Sweet almonds, half a troy ounce t ^ss. 

Gum Arabic, in fine powder, thirty grains . . . ^ss. 

Sugar, one hundred and twenty grains . . . . gij. 

Distilled water, eight fluidounces f Jviij. 

Having blanched the almond, beat it with the gum Arabic and 
sugar, in a mortar, until they are thoroughly mixed, then rub the 
mixture with distilled water, gradually added, and strain. 

The almonds may be conveniently blanched by soaking them in 
warm water until the skin is softened, and then separating the 
kernels by rubbing them between two cloths or pressing each be- 
tween the thumb and forefinger. This elegant emulsion is often 
varied by the use of one-fourth the quantity of bitter almonds. By 
diluting the officinal syrup of almonds a* substitute is obtained. It 
is a very bland and nutritious demulcent, taken ad libitum or used 
as a vehicle for other medicines. As a demulcent nutrient in pul- 
monary consumption, it has been found a useful domestic remedy. 

No. 121. — Emulsion of Fluid Extract of Cubebs. 

Take of Oleoresin of cubebs 120 drops. 

Yelk of egg one. 

Sugar, powdered 2 drachms. 

Mint water sufficient to make three fluidounces. 



TARAXACUM MIXTURES. 847 

Triturate the fluid extract with the powdered sugar and yelk of 
egg, and then dilute with the water. Direct a teaspoonful four 
times a day. 

This may be made by substituting 3ij powdered gum Arabic and 
3j sugar for the yelk of egg. It is a fine stimulant to the mucous 
surfaces, adapted to catarrhs, etc., as well as to urinary diseases. 
The dose is ±"3j, containing gtt. v. of the oleoresin of cubebs. 

Taraxacum Mixtures. 

These useful cholagogue and laxative preparations may be made 
by the addition of fluid extract of taraxacum to any other ingre- 
dients desirable to incorporate with it, either for the purpose of 
increasing its action on the bowels, on the liver, or on the kidneys, 
as the case may require. The solid extract is also adapted to being 
incorporated in mixtures by trituration with about four times its 
weight of water. 

No. 122. — Alkaline Copcriva Mixture. 

Take of Copaiba?, 

Liq. potassae, aa f^ij. 

Fulv. acacia?, 

Pulv. sacchari, aa gij. 

Aq. nienth. virid. . . . q. s. ut fiat f^iv. 

Mix the copaiva and solution of potassa, add the water, and tri- 
turate with the gum and sugar. 

In this prescription, which is prescribed by my friend, Dr. Wil- 
liam Hunt, the copaiva is combined into a soap with the alkali, and 
would be perfectly suspended without the aid of gum and sugar, 
which are added to obtund the acrid taste. Of coarse, oil of cubebs, 
tincture of opium, and other adjuvants, may be added if required. 
The usual method of suspending copaiva is similar to that given in 
Prescription No. 105. The dose is a tablespoonful, containing *n,xv 
of copaiva. 

No. 123. — Extemporaneous Solution of Acetate of Potassium. 

Take of Acetic acid f^vj. 

Water f.Siij- 

Bicarb, potassium ^iijss, or sufficient to form 

a neutral solution. 

This is designed to obviate the necessity of weighing the very 
deliquescent acetate of potassium, and will contain, to each f3j, 
about ten grains of the salt, which is an appropriate dose. The 
admixture of fluid extract of taraxacum, or of buchu, or of spirit of 
nitric ether, or comp. spirit of juniper, will be appropriate in cer- 
tain cases. 

No. 124. — Benzoa.ted Alkaline Mixture. 

Take of Potassii bicarbonat giij. 

Acid, benzoic sjj. 

Aquee fgv. 

Syr. aurant f^j. 

Mi see. 



848 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 

Sig. — One tablespoonful three times a day, after meals. Pre- 
scribed by Dr. Ellwood Wilson in torpid conditions of the kidneys 
and albuminuria. 

No. 125. — Scudamore's Mixture for Gout. 

Take of Sulphate of magnesium gj. 

Mint water f^x. 

Vinegar of colchicum fgj. 

Syrup of saffron f^j. 

Magnesia SU? By. 

Mix. 

Dose, one to three tablespoonfuls every two hours till four to six 
evacuations are procured in the twenty-four hours. 

This recipe is often varied by the substitution of a less propor- 
tion of the wine of colchicum for the vinegar, the omission of the 
syrup of saffron, etc. The above is, I believe, the original prescrip- 
tion. 

No. 126. — De-wees' Colchicum Mixture. 

Take of Wine of colchicum seed gtt. xxx. 

Denarcotized laudanum gtt. xxv. 

Sugar gr. xxx. 

Water 
Mix. 
To be taken at night in one draft. 

No. 127. — Dr. Atlee's Prescription for Neuralgic and Rheumatic 

Symptoms. 

Take of Ethereal tincture of guaiacum f Jj. 

Ethereal tincture of colchicum f gvj. 

Ethereal tincture of cannabis Ind f gij. 

Mix. 

Dose, twenty-five to thirty drops every four hours, on sugar. 

Expectorants, etc. 

No. 128. — Mistura Ammoniaci, TJ. S. P. (Lac Ammoniac.) 

Take of Ammoniac 3\1- 

Water Oss. 

Rub the ammoniac with the water, gradually added, until they 
are thoroughly mixed. 

Dose, a tablespoonful as a stimulating expectorant. 

• 
' No. 129. — Mistura Glycyrrhizm Composita, TJ. S. P. (Brown 

Mixture.) 







Reduced. 


Take of Liquorice, in fine powder, 






Gum Arabic, in fine powder, 






Sugar, in coarse powder, each . 


. . 3ss 


fi 


Camph. tincture of opium . . 


• • m 


f!fsS. 


Wine of antimony 


. . m 


fSij. 


Spirit of nitrous ether . . . 


. . f.^ss 


f J$:.. 


Water 


. . fgxij 


f£nj 



EXPECTORANTS, ETC. 849 

Rub the liquorice, gum Arabic, and sugar with the water gra- 
dually added ; then add the other ingredients, and mix the whole 
together. 

The dose of this very popular cough medicine is a tablespoonful, 
or for children f 3j. 

No. 130. — A Coryza Mixture of Cubebs, etc. 

Take of Oleoresiu of cubeb f 5j. 

Sulphate of morphia gr. iss. 

Syrup of senega, 

Syrup of wild-cherry, of each f 51J. 

Mix. 

Dose, a teaspoonful occasionally. Cubeb, by its excellent effects 
upon the mucous surfaces, is well adapted to the treatment of 
chronic coughs, coryza, and sore throat. 

No. 131. — A Balsamic Expectorant Mixture. 

Take of Syrupi tolutani, 

Syrupi ipecacuanha, aa f §j. 

Pulv. acacise 3j. 

Tinct. opii camph., 

Tinct. lobelise, aa f^iij- 

Aquae fgj. 

Triturate the gum and water together, and add the other ingre- 
dients in the vial. Dose, a teaspoonful. 

This was furnished by Dr. S. W. Butler, of Philadelphia Hospital, 
Blockley, who has prescribed it with satisfaction. 

No. 132.— Tolu Cough Mixture. 

Take of Syr. scillre f 3j. 

Fulv. acacise, 

Sacchari, aa . giij. 

Ama3 f,$vj. 

Tiuct. tolutanse f 5ij. 

Misce secundum artem. Dose, f 5j. 

No. 133. — Mixture of Acetone, Tar, etc. 

Take of Acetone f 5j. 

Camph. tinct. of opium, 

Antimonial wine, of each f^j. 

"Wine of tar (Jew's beer) f 5ij. 

Mix. Dose, a teaspoonful. 

Prescribed in asthma by Dr. Washington L. Atlee. 

No. 134. — Spermaceti Mixture. 

Take of Spermaceti gij. 

Olive oil f^j. 

Powd. gum Arabic gss. 

Water fgiv. 

Triturate the spermaceti with the oil, until reduced to a paste, 
then add the gum, and lastly the water gradually. Dose, f3j. 
54 






850 EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTION'S, MIXTURES, ETC. 

No. 135. — Cochineal Hooping-Cough Mixture, 

Take of Carbonate of potassium 9j« 

Powdered cochineal £)ss. 

Sugar . 5j, 

Water f^iv. 

Make a mixture. Dose for children, f3j, every two or three 
hours. An old and very popular remedy. 

No. 136. — For Hooping-Cough. (By Golding Bird.) 

Take of Aluminis gr. xxiv. 

Ext. conii gr. xij. 

Aq. anethi (vel foeniculi) f^iij- 

Syrupi papaveris f ^ij. — M. 

Sig. — For an adult, a dessertspoonful every six hours. 
The use of simple tincture of belladonna in doses of from 1 to 5 
drops, three times a day, is useful in most cases of hooping-cough. 

Fixed Oils. 

The taste of fixed oils may he best destroyed hy adding a few 
drops of oil of bitter almonds to a pint of the oil, though this will 
not remove rancidity, which when present is the greatest obstacle 
to their being acceptable. 

The mode of administering the fixed oils may here claim atten- 
tion ; by observing to prevent their contact with the mouth in 
swallowing, the chief objection to them is obviated. This may be 
variously accomplished by enveloping them in the froth of fer- 
mented liquors, or by pouring them into a glass partially filled with 
iced water, or an aromatized water, so that no portion of the oil 
shall touch or adhere to the sides of the glass. When carbonic 
acid water is convenient, it furnishes, with sarsaparilla syrup, one 
of the best vehicles for castor or cod-liver oil ; there should be but 
little w^ater drawn, but it should be thrown up as much as possible 
into froth. 

There is no doubt that oil mixtures, though less conveniently 
taken, are more rapid and more active in their effects than the oils 
themselves, and the following, with the castor oil and copaiva mix- 
tures, Nos. 105 and 122, will illustrate their best modes of preparation. 

No. 137. — Mixture of Cod-liver Oil. 

Take of Cod-liver oil, six fluidounces. 
Lime-water, nine fluidounces. 

To the lime-water, in a pint bottle, add the oil, and shake them; 
flavoring ingredients may be added at pleasure. 

No. 138. — Mistura Olei Morrhuce Amara. (St. Mary's Hospital.) 

To one ounce. 

Take of Cod-liver oil f&j. 1 drachm. 

Powdered gum Arabic ^ij, Bij 1 scruple. 

Spirit of peppermint f^j 5 minims. 

Infusion of quassia favij 7 drachms. 



ALTERATIVES — ANTHELMINTICS. 851 

Make an emulsion as directed in the case of castor oil mixture, 
p. 841 ; dilute, and add the other ingredients. 

No. 139. — Mistura Olei Amygdala. (London Consumption 

Hospital.) 

In one ounce. 

Take of Oil of almonds f gj 1 drachm. 

Solution of potassa ~n\ xl 5 minims. 

Water f ^vij 7 drachms. 

Combine the alkaline solution with the oil, and dilute. 

Olive oil may be substituted in this formula, and neat's foot oil 
with a slight increase in the proportion of solution of potassa. A 
medicated water, as mint or bitter-almond water, may be used, in 
part or entirely superseding water. 

No. 140. — Mistura Olei Cocos Nucis. (London Consumption 

Hospital.) 

Reduced. 

Take of Cocoanut oil ]§j, £vj 100 grains. 

Spirit of ammonia f ^iij 20 minim. 

Water f^vj 6 drachms. 

Mix. 

Alteratives. 

Alterative preparations are often made by the addition of the 
various iodine, mercurial, and other alterative salts, to the Galeni- 
cal preparations of sarsaparilla, conium, etc. As a general rule, 
these salts are incompatible with each other ; those which are 
insoluble are conveniently prescribed with iodide of potassium, 
which is, in fact, one of their natural associated solvents. {See 
Syrups.) 

~No. 141. — Cod-liver Oil and Red Iodide of Mercury. 

Take of Red iodide of mercury gr. viij. 

Cod-liver oil Oj. 

Triturate together. 

This forms a clear solution, and each tablespoonful dose contains 
J gr. of the red iodide of mercury ; it is a combination occasionally 
indicated. Iodine itself is sometimes given in the oil, and from \ 
to J- gr. to f^j makes a good addition in certain cases. 

Anthelmintics. 
No. 142. — Anthelmintic Syrup.* 

Take of Syrup of rhubarb f.?iv. 

Fluid extract of senna f ^ij. 

Oil of chenopodium f 3ij. 

Mix them. 

Dose, a teaspoonful three times a day. 

* See also Prescription No. 94, Oil Turpentine. 



852 

"So. 143. — Emulsion of Pumpkin Seeds. 

Take of Pumpkin-seeds, fresh oviij. 

Sugar ^ij. 

Gum Arabic, in powder ^ss. 

Water Oj. 

Blanch the seeds, beat them into a mass with the sugar, then add 
the gum Arabic, and gradually the water. 

Dose, a pint in the course of the day, for tapeworm. 

The use of the seeds of Cucurbita pepo (pumpkin) in tapeworm 
originated in the United States. I believe the first account of their 
properties was published by Dr. Jones, of Boston ; their use has 
now extended to Europe and to Algeria, where they have been 
recently reported on favorably by M. Tarneau, a military surgeon. 
The form of electuary is perhaps better than the emulsion pre- 
scribed above. It is directed to be made by depriving ten drachms 
of the seed of their husks, pounding them in a mortar with suffi- 
cient sugar into a paste, and adding to this a small cup of milk ; 
to be taken at one dose, following with a dose of castor oil in two 
hours. 

Jellies. 

Jellies made of fixed oils have the advantage of diminishing the 
adhesion of these to the mouth, which is their most disagreeable 
property. Cod-liver oil and castor-oil jellies, as patented by Queru, 
of New York, enjoy a large sale, and are much prescribed by phy- 
sicians. Without interfering with this patent, the physician may 
prescribe jellies of any of the fixed oils or of copaiva by the following 
recipe, contrived with the aid of my colleague, ¥m. C. Bakes: — 

Take of The fixed oil, an ounce. 

Honey and syrup, of each, half a fluidounce. 
Powd. gum Arabic, two drachms. 
Russian isinglass, forty grains. 
Orange-flower water, six fluidrachms. 

Dissolve the isinglass, by the aid of heat, in half an ounce of the 
orange-flower water, replacing the water as it evaporates, triturate 
"the other ingredients with the remainder of the orange-flower water 
into a homogeneous mass, in a warmed mortar, then form an emul- 
sion by adding the solution of isinglass, stir as it cools, and set 
aside to gelatinize. 

The orange-flower water may soon become distasteful, and should 
then be replaced by other flavors, of which bitter almond most 
completely disguises the fishy taste of cod-liver oil. 



STYPTIC POWDERS, LOTIONS, ETC 853 



CHAPTER V. 

STYPTIC AND DEPILATORY POWDERS, LOTIONS, COLLYRIA, INJECTIONS, 
ENEMAS, GARGLES, BATHS, INHALATIONS, AND FUMIGATIONS. 

Styptic Powders. 

The persulphate of iron (MonselPs salt), described under the head 
of Preparations of Iron, is perhaps best adapted to arresting hemor- 
rhage. The following may be instanced as a combination suited to 
the same purpose. 

Take of Resinae pulv., 

Aluminse exsiccat., 

Acaciae pulveris, aa, partes sequales. 

M. et in pulv. trit. 

Causticum DcpiUitorium. (London Skin Hospital.) 

Take of Orpiment 3j. 

Quicklime ^iss. 

Starch 3ix. 

Mix and triturate together into a fine powder. 

Lotions. 

Soluble salte, chiefly of the astringent class, dissolved in distilled 
water, or in distilled rose-water, designed for external application, 
constitute lotions, or washes; these are to be applied to the surface, 
usually upon a folded piece of muslin or lint, chiefly for cooling and 
astringent purposes. Lead-water (page 274) is the only officinal 
lotion. Vinegar and water, or water alone, is applied for the same 
purposes. In various chronic skin diseases, lotions containing sul- 
phuret of potassium, chloride of zinc, corrosive chloride of mercuiw$ 
borax, solution of chlorinated soda, and other chemical agents, are 
employed. Glycerin, by its solubility in water, and its emollient 
properties, is well adapted to this form of application. The recipes 
appended are selected as illustrations of this class ; they are gene- 
rally well-known preparations. 

!No. 144. — Creasote Lotion. 

Take of Creasoti , . . gtt. x. 

Aceti f^ij. 

Aquae f^ij. 

Misce. 

Applied to phagedenic ulceration, chancres, and a variety of 
sores. 



854 STYPTIC AND DEPILATORY POWDERS, ETC. 

i 

No. 145. — Yellow Wash. {Aqua Phagedaznica.) 

Take of Hydrargyri chloridi corrosivi gr. xvj. 

Liquoris calcis f ^viij. 

Misce. 

The binoxide of mercury is precipitated as a yellow powder, and 
diffused through the liquid ; sometimes the proportion is diminished 
to gr. j in each f 3j. It is a very popular application to certain 
affections and to venereal sores. 

Ko. 146.— Black Wash. 

Take of Hydrargyri chloridi mitis 3j. 

Liquoris calcis f |iv. 

Misce. 

Protoxide of mercury is here thrown down by the lime as a black 
precipitate, though there is quite an excess of calomel. It has 
similar applications to the foregoing. 

Granville's Counter-irritant or Antidynous Lotions. 
No. 147.— The mild:— 

"Take of Liquoris ammonise fortioris f 3j. 

Spiriti rosmarini f^vj. 

Tincturae campkorse f^ij. 

Misce. 

No. 148.— The strong:— 

Take of Liquoris ammonise fortioris f £x. 

Spiriti rosmarini f 3iv. 

Tincturee camphorse f^ij. 

Misce. 

These preparations will blister in periods varied from two to ten 
minutes, by saturating with them a piece of linen folded five or six 
times over a coin, and pressing it upon the part. Over more ex- 
tended surfaces, a similar method is adopted by protecting the 
lotion from evaporation. 

No. 149. — Lotion for Chilblains. 

Take of Muriate of ammonium ^ss. 

Water f^iv. 

Muriatic acid f gj. 

Alcohol f ^iss. 

Apply morning and evening. 

No. 150. — Dr. Thomas's Nipple Wash. 

Take of Alum gj. 

Tincture of galls f3J. 

Triturate together until as nearly dissolved as possible. 

No. 151. — Clemens' Almond Lotion. 

Take of Gum Senegal ,^iv. 

Boiling water Cong. j. 



COLLYRIA. 855 

Strain, and when cold add — 

Tinct. benzoin f^ij. 

Alcohol f ^ij. 

Corrosive chloride of mercury 3j\ B j- 

Dissolve the corrosive chloride in the alcohol, before mixing with 
the other ingredients. 

No. 152. — Milk of Roses for Chapped Hands. 

Take of Almonds, blanched gj. 

Beat to a paste, and mix with — 

Rose-water f^vj. 

Heat to about 212° F., and incorporate with — 

White wax ^j. 

Almond oil ^ij. 

White Castile soap 3J. 

Melt together and thoroughly incorporate, then add — 

Honey water f.^ij. 

Cologne water f Sjj. 

Oil of bitter almond gtt. iv. 

Oil of rose geranium gtt. v. 

Glycerin fo ss - 

After washing the hands with warm water and Castile or other 
mild soap, apply the milk of roses, and rub it thoroughly in, then 
wipe them with a dry towel. 

Milk of roses is adapted to being put up in rather wide-mouth 
vials, and is directed to be applied to chapped hands, or other ex- 
coriated parts. 

COLLYRIA. 

Collyria are lotions or applications to the eye, called eye-washes. 
They are generally composed of astringent salts, as sulphate or ace- 
tate of zinc, sulphate of copper, or of iron or nitrate of silver, the 
proportion seldom exceeding gr. viij to f^j. 

No. 153. — Thomas's Eye Water. 

Take of Sulphate of zinc, 

Chloride of sodium, each 9 j. 

Rose water (distilled) f §j. 

Make a solution, and apply, suitably diluted, to inflamed eyes. 

The infusion of sassafras-pith is a good addition to this and simi- 
lar eye-washes. The aqueous extract, or the wine of opium, is 
much used in collyria. 

No. 154. — Colly rium Atropiai Sulphatis. (Guy's Hospital.) 

Take of Atropioe sulphatis . gr. iij. 

Aquse fgj. 

Ft. solut. 

A substitute for solutions of extract of belladonna for dilating 
the pupil. 



856 styptic and depilatory powders, etc. 

Injections. 

Injections are solutions intended to be thrown into the external 
ear, the urethra, bladder, vagina, etc. They resemble the fore- 
going class in composition and in strength. In gonorrhoea, the use 
of injections of the astringent metallic salts is very common, as also 
of vegetable astringents. 

"No. 155. — Injectio Argenti Nitratis. (Westminster Hospital.) 

Take of Nitrate of silver, six grains. 

Diluted nitric acid, five minims. 
Distilled water, four ounces. 

Make a solution. 

Eo. 156. — Campbell's Injection for Gonorrhoea. 

Take of Zinci sulph gss. 

Plumbi acet 3j. 

Tinct. opii, 

Tinct. catechu, aa f gij. 

Aquas rosse f ^vj. 

Misce. 

This is an instance in which chemical incompatibles are mixed 
advisedly so as to produce a very fine precipitate, which, being dif- 
fused in the liquid and deposited on the mucous membrane of the 
urethra, favors the therapeutic effect intended. 

No. 157. — Take of Sulpho-carbolate of zinc gr. vj.* 

Water f Jij. 

Dissolve, for injection in gonorrhoea. 

An improved form of glass penis syringe has an enlargement of 
the tube, which enters the urethra, at the extreme end, so as to "fill 
the whole diameter of the tube and prevent the backward flow of 
the liquid, while the rounded end is less liable to produce irritation 
than a more pointed termination. 

Enemata. 

The custom of injecting tepid water and various bland and medi- 
cinal liquids into the rectum, for the relief of costiveness, has be- 
come very common of latter years, and the forms of apparatus 
contrived are numerous and ingenious, constituting a considerable 
article of trade with druggists and apothecaries. 

The forms of self-injection apparatus made by Davidson, Mattson, 
and others, consisting of a gum-elastic bag designed to be grasped 
in the hand, and, by alternate contraction and expansion, to draw 
the fluid from a basin and throw it through a flexible tube and 

* Sulpho-carbolate of zinc may be prepared by saturating with carbonate of zinc 
free from iron sulpho-carbolic acid, made by melting one troyounce of Calvert's pure 
crystallized carbolic acid with one troyounce of sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84) gradually 
added, heating to 280° F., and adding three fluidounces of distilled water after per- 
mitting the mixture to stand 12 hours. The solution is then filtered, evaporated 
at 150° F., and set aside to crystallize. For a full account of the various salts of this 
acid and their modes of preparation, see Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1870, 133, 1871, 10, 265. 



GARGLES. 857 

metallic injection-pipe into the rectum or vagina, has almost super- 
seded the old kind which worked with a piston. A French pattern, 
however, which consists of a cylinder and piston working by a 
spring, designed to be wound up to its utmost tension, and then, 
on the opening of a faucet, to throw the whole contents in a con- 
tinuous stream through the flexible tube and pipe, is preferable to 
any other in use, but has two objections: first, for a person who has 
but little strength of wrist, it is very difficult to wind it up ; secondly, 
the expense is very much greater than the best Mattson syringe. 
The only valve in this instrument is in the piston, and is so simple 
and durable as to remove one of the most common objections to 
cylinder injection apparatus. 

Medicated enemata are much used for the relief of painful flatu- 
lence and for relaxing spasm. The following are adapted to this 
object : — 

No. 158. — Enema Terebinthince. 

Take of Oil of turpentine f 5ss. 

Castor oil f5j. 

Gum Arabic 5ss. 

Water Oss. 

Make an emulsion, secundum artem. 

In the above the white of an egg maybe substituted for the gum 
with advantage. 



No. 159. — Enema Assafoetidce. (St. Bartholomew's Hospital.) 

Tincture of assafoetida, half a 
Decoction of barley, one pint. 



Take of Tincture of assafoetida, half a fluidounce. 



Mix. 

Gargles. 

Gargles and Mouth-washes are applications much used in the 
treatment of so-called sore-throat, and in scorbutic affections of the 
gums, which are exceedingly common ; these are popularly treated by 
counter-irritation, and by the use of astringent and stimulating 
gargles. Infusions of capsicum, of vegetable astringents, and of 
sage, with the addition of alum, borax, or sulphate of zinc, and 
almost invariably honey, are the prevailing remedies of this class. 
The following recipes may be given : — 

"No. 160. — G-argarysma Sodce Chlorinatce. 

Take of Solution of chlorinated soda f £ss. 

Water f5iij. 

Mix. 

No. 161. — G-argarysma Acidi Tanniei. (London Consumption 

Hospital.) 

Take of Tannic acid 1 drm. 

Honey 2 drms. 

Water 4 ounces, 

Mix. 



858 STYPTIC AND DEPILATORY POWDERS, ETC. 

No. 162.— Gargle and Mouth-Wash. 

Take of Sodii boratis 3j. 

Aquae rosse f3ii. 

Mellis f£j. 

Misce, et adde — 

Tincturse myrrhse f ^ss. 

Tincturse capsici f gij. 

Sig. — Use as a gargle every two or three hours, diluted with water. 

No. 163. — Gargle of Alum. 

Take of Aluminis ^ss. 

Infusi lini Oss. 

Mellis q. s. 

Fiat gargarysma. 

Baths. 

Baths are either hot, warm, tepid, or cold, or consist in the ap- 
plication of vapor merely. They are variously medicated for the 
treatment of diseases of the skin, and for producing general or 
local revulsive effects. 

The production of artificial sea-water is a desideratum for bathing, 
and may be accomplished either by the evaporation of sea-water to 
a granular powder, to be dissolved in water as occasion requires, or 
approximately by the use of the following formula : — 

"No. 164. — Artificial Sea- Water. (Balneum Mar inum.) 

Take of Chloride of sodium, two pounds. 
Chloride of calcium, three ounces. 
Chloride of magnesium, one and a half ounce. 
Sulphate of magnesium, three ounces. 
Sulphate of sodium, six ounces. 
Iodide of potassium, one drachm. 

Mix, and dissolve in 30 gallons of water, for a single bath. 

"No. 165. — Iodine Bath. (Balneum Iodinii.) 

Take of Iodine, two drachms. 

Solution of potassa, two ounces. 
Water, thirty gallons. 

Used in the Skin Hospital, of London. 

Inhalations, Fumigations, Disinfectants, etc. 

Inhalation has lately been a good deal resorted to as a remedy in 
chronic catarrhs, bronchitis, incipient phthisis, etc. I have re- 
peatedly prepared the apparatus and furnished the ingredients for 
the following : — 

No. 166. — Prescription for Inhalation. 

Into an inhaler of glass put infusum humuli, U. S., f .liv, at a 
temperature of about 120° F., and add Liq. iodinii compositus, 



INHALATIONS, FUMIGATIONS, DISINFECTANTS, ETC. 859 

t»Ixx. Inhale from five to ten minutes, morning and evening. In 
acute cases, this is found to give great relief, and by continued ap- 
plication produces most happy restorative effects. In place of LugoPs 
solution, it has been suggested to use an ethereal or chloroformic 
tincture of iodine, adding a little iodide of potassium to prevent 
precipitation on adding it to the hop-tea, or other aqueous liquid. 

In the London Consumption Hospital the following formula is 
used : — 

]STo. 167. — Take of Chloric ether 30 minims. 

Tincture of hyoscyamus 30 minims. 

Infusion of hops (or water) .... 8 ounces. 

Mix, and inhale. 

In several cases under my observation the use of powdered cubebs, 
a teaspoonful to each charge of warm water, a fresh portion being 
added each time, inhaled three times 
every day, has had an excellent effect Fig. 246. 

in treating bronchial affections. 

Fig. 246 exhibits a simple form of 
inhaling apparatus. An ordinary wide- 
mouth packing bottle is fitted with a 
cork which is perforated by the cork- 
borer or rat-tail file (see Figs. 150 and 
151, page 113), so as to admit 'of two 
tubes, the smaller for the ingress of 
air passing nearly to the bottom of the 
bottle, while the larger, which is bent 
to be applied to the mouth, may have 
its origin just below the bottom of the 
cork. A little cork may be put into 
the top of the small tube when not in 
use. In replenishing the inhaler, be- 
fore each operation, the cork is re- 
moved. The tube may be bent by inhaler, 
softening it over the flame of an alco- 
hol lamp or gas furnace, and holding it in such a position that its 
own weight will cause it to bend gradually and uniformly to the 
required curve. 




Vapores. ( Vapors. Inhalations.) 
This is a new class of preparations of the British Pharmacopoeia. 

Vapor Acidi Hydrocyanici. {Inhalation of Hydrocyanic Acid.) 

Take of Diluted hydrocyanic acid, ten to fifteen minims. 
Water (cold), one fluidrachm. 

Mix in a suitable apparatus, and let the vapor that arises be 
inhaled. 



i 



860 STYPTIC AND DEPILATORY POWDERS, ETC. 

Vapor Chlori. {Inhalation of Chlorine.) 

Take of Chlorinated lime, two ounces. 
Water (cold), a sufficiency. 

Put the powder into a suitable apparatus, moisten it with the 
water, and let the vapor that arises be inhaled 

Vapor Gonial. {Inhalation of Conia.) 

Take of Extract of hemlock, sixty grains. 
Solution of potash, one fluidrachm. 
Distilled water, ten fluidrachms. 

Mix. Put twenty minims of the mixture on a sponge, in a suit- 
able apparatus, so that the vapor of hot water passing over it may 
be inhaled. The solution of potash is added to free the conia 
present in the extract. A strong mouse-like odor being emitted is 
evidence of the genuineness of the vapor. 

Vapor Creasoti. (Inhalation of Creasote.) 

Take of Creasote, twelve minims. 

Boiling water, eight fluidounces. 

Mix the creasote and water in an apparatus so arranged that air 
may be made to pass through the solution and may afterwards be 
inhaled. 

Vapor Iodi. (Inhalation of Iodine.) 

Take of Tincture of iodine, one fluidrachm. 
Water, one fluidounce. 

Mix in a suitable apparatus, and, having applied a gentle heat, 
let the vapor that arises be inhaled. 

Fumigations. 

In various affections it is desirable to have the medicines act on 
the skin in the form of vapor or gas. For such fumigations, sul- 
phuretted hydrogen is generated by decomposing sulphuret of 
potassium or calcium with muriatic or nitric acid ; nitrous fumes 
by nitrate of potassium, or of sodium and sulphuric acid ; chlorine 
from chlorinated lime by muriatic acid, or by adding to a mixture 
of three parts of chloride of sodium and one of black oxide of man- 
ganese two parts of sulphuric acid. These are chiefly used for skin 
diseases, and as antiseptics and disinfectants. 

Alcoholic fumigations are made by setting fire to half an ounce or 
an ounce of alcohol in an ordinary plate ; acetic fumigations, by 
gradually adding vinegar to a hot brick ; ammoniacal fumigations, 
by throwing carbonate of ammonium upon a hot brick, or adding 
spirits of hartshorn to boiling hot water; such fumigations are 
generally applied in rheumatic and similar affections. 

Fumigations are applied either to a part or to the whole body ; 
the simplest mode of doing it is to envelop the patient in a blanket, 
while sitting upon a cane-seat chair, and then prepare them under 



CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 861 

the chair in the proper manner. The fumes or vapors are then 
allowed to reach the affected part of the body. The head is not 
subjected to this treatment unless in the case of vapor baths 
designed also to reach the lungs. 

Disinfectants. 

Aromatic fumigations are much employed for correcting the bad 
odor of sick rooms ; aromatic resins and balsams are used for this 
purpose. 

In the Chapter on Perfumery and Toilet Articles some prepara- 
tions adapted to this use are referred to. Disinfectants which 
operate on chemical principles are, however, much more effectual. 

Prof. R. E. Rogers has directed for some of the hospitals a mix- 
ture of lime and sulphate of iron in such proportion that the 
protoxide of iron is rapidly reduced on exposure to the air, and by 
its disposition to pass rapidly into sesquioxide readily decomposes 
effete matters with which it comes in contact, rendering them in- 
noxious. Under the heads of Chlorine and Bromine in Part III., 
some of these chemical disinfectants are described. 

M. Agata, of London, has patented a process for calcining common 
cockle and other shells found on the sea-shore until they are friable 
and readily powdered ; this powder he mixes with half the quantity 
of sulphate of iron, thus producing an inodorous powder resembling 
ochre, which is designed to be mixed in the proportion of one part 
to a hundred with any feculent matter which it is designed to 
deodorize. When used for urine two per cent, of common tar is to 
be added. 

Dr. Crace Calvert has recently called attention to the immense 
utility of carbolic acid (coal tar creasote) as an antiseptic ; he states 
that the addition of two or three drops of this acid to a pint of 
freshly made urine will preserve it from any marked chemical 
change for several weeks. (See Ozone, p. 130.) 



CHAPTER VI. 

CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

These classes of preparations are widely separated in the Thar- 
macopoeia, where an alphabetical arrangement is adopted, but they 
so closely resemble each other in a pharmaceutical point of view as 
to be naturally associated in a work like the present. 

The difference between a cerate and an ointment is in their rela- 
tive firmness and fusibility; the former is designed to be adhesive 
at the temperature of the body, so as to be applied in the form of a 
dressing or sort of plaster ; the latter is intended to be rubbed upon 
the surface or applied by inunction ; this distinction is, however, 



862 



CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS, 



not absolute, and the two classes nearly approach each other in 
properties ; the name cerate is derived from cera, wax, and most of 
the cerates, as also some of the oitments, contain this ingredient. 

The medicinal ingredients which enter into these classes of prepa- 
rations are very numerous; indeed, almost every kind of medicine 
capable of exercising a topical effect may be prescribed in this form. 
The unctuous ingredients used in ointments are chiefly bland 
and unirritating fats and fixed oils, with more or less wax; the 
reader is referred, for some account of these, to pages 382-398. 

The preparation of inodorous grease is accomplished by repeated 
washing with water; this may be done ou a slab a little on the 
incline, a stream of water being set to trickle over it ; the surface 
of the grease is then constantly renewed by an operator working a 
muller over it in the same way that a color-maker grinds paints in 
oil. The firmer kinds, such as suet, require more powerful me- 
chanical arrangements for washing them, and in fact in France 
this purifying of fats is a separate branch of business, the per- 
fumers being the chief consumers of these elegant products. 

Of the different ingredients of cerates and ointments lard and suet 
resemble each other in most of their properties, except that the latter 
is more solid and fuses at a higher temperature, while spermaceti 
is still more firm, almost brittle in consistence, and fuses with still 
less facility; it is recommended by a beautiful pearly whiteness 
which it imparts, to a certain extent, to its oily combinations. 
Wax is more tough in consistence and still less fusible, its chief use 
being to give body to cerates and the stiffer ointments. 

The uses of resin and turpentine are twofold, to give body to the 
cerates into which they enter, and to render them useful as stimu- 
lants and fit vehicles for other stimulating substances. 

The greatest practical difficulty with ointments arises from their 
tendency to become rancid by keeping, par- 
ticularly in warm climates; this is best over- 
come by observing to free them from moisture 
by the application of well-regulated heat till 
the adhering water is entirely evaporated, 
and to keep them in well-covered jars. The 
ointment jar, Fig. 247, is made for the pur- 
pose, but as the lid is not air-tight, a piece of 
stout tin-foil, or of bladder, or of waxed 
paper, should be stretched over the top before 
covering it with the lid. 

Ointments made with the fixed oils and a 
suitable proportion of wax, suet, or cocoa- 
butter, are less liable to rancidity than those 
made with lard, and the introduction into 
the latter of small portions of balsams and 
some essential oils seems to have a favorable 
effect upon this tendency; and it is observed 
that the resinous ointments are not liable to it. 

A frequent cause of rancidity, in even freshly prepared oint- 



Fie. 247. 




Ointment jar. 



FIRST GROUP. 863 

ments and cerates made from materials perfectly free from ran- 
cidity, is the absorbent character of the jars used to keep them in ; 
the glazing after a short time becomes full of fine cracks through 
which the grease permeates to the body of the jar ; the grease, by 
frequent exposure to the air, becomes rancid, and in turn imparts 
rancidity to the ointment placed in it. A very elegant style of 
jar, but quite expensive, being the real porcelain or china vase, is 
free from this objection. Glass tumblers small enough to fit in- 
side of the jar may be used with great advantage in overcoming 
this trouble. 

Classification. 

For the purposes of study, the cerates and ointments may be 
thus classified : — 

1st. Those adapted to use as vehicles for medicinal substances. 

2d. Those prepared by the fusion of their medicinal ingredients 
together. 

3d. Those prepared from the first, or from lard alone, by me- 
chanical incorporation with some active medicinal agent. 

Uh. Those in which the unctuous ingredient is decomposed in 
the process of preparation. 

So great a variety of ointments and cerates have been made offi- 
cinal, that there seems less occasion for departing from the national 
standards than in the other classes of extemporaneous preparations. 

Of these classes, all which are officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia 
are displayed according to the above classification in the following 
Syllabi, and the leading points of interest in connection with them 
are given further in detail ; the working formulas from the Phar- 
macopoeia are given, and the unofficinal, which are deemed of suffi- 
cient importance for insertion, are described in connection with the 
appropriate formulas for their preparation. 

First Group. — Cerates and Ointments, much used as Vehicles for 
Medicinal Substances. 

~ . • ( 2 p. soap plaster, 2£ p. white wax, ) *-,. , „« *. ,, , 

Ceratuni saponis. < *. *:. r > z 1 > v tirmest "healing dressing. 

Ceratum. 1 part white wax, 2 lard. Firmer "healing" dressing. 

,, , . f 1 p. spermaceti, 3 white wax, 5 1 ,-,. .,,' ,. ,, , 

Ceratum cetacei. \ \ \ \ * nrm healing dressing. 

Unguentum. 1 part yellow wax, 4 lard. Softer "healing" dressing. 

TT (Almond oil, sp. ceti, white wax,) „ -. . .. , ,. „ , 

Ung. aquae rosa3. j rose-water. ' j So/tea* " healing " dressing. 

Unguentum benzoini. 1 part benzoin, 16 lard. Vehicle, consistence of lard. 

Ceratum resin*. \ 5 P« tB resin ' 8 ? arts lard ' 2 P arts 1 Stimulant dressing. 

( yellow wax. f b 

Preparation and Uses. 

All these are simple in their mode of preparation ; the ingre- 
dients are to be placed in a skillet or capsule, and brought to the 
melting point, care being taken not to burn them, which may be 
known by the melted mass giving off the odor and appearance of 
smoke. When there is a great difference in the fusing points, the 



864 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

least fusible shall be placed over the fire first, and the others added 
afterwards, so as to involve no unnecessary application of heat. 
Then the whole is to be stirred or triturated together till thickened 
by cooling into a homogeneous soft mass ; it may now be set away 
to harden by further cooling. "With a view to the whiteness and 
smoothness of the product, it is best that the melted ingredients 
should be poured while fluid, though not too hot, into a mortar, in 
which they should be triturated with a pestle till firm. If sper- 
maceti is an ingredient, the mortar should be warmed to obviate 
its tendency to separate in a granular condition on contact with a 
cool surface ; when rose-water is added, as in the case of " cold 
cream," it is well to warm it a little, otherwise it may chill the 
spermaceti to its solidifying point and deposit it in a granular con- 
dition before the mixed oil and wax are sufficiently stiffened to be 
homogeneous with it. 

The use of a mortar in the preparation of cerates and ointments 
of this class is often obviated by stirring the melted preparation in 
the vessel in which it was heated, or that to which it is transferred 
for keeping, with a wooden spatula, till it thickens beyond the 
danger of separation; but, on the whole, the use of the mortar is 
most approved. Some pharmacists keep a marble or large wedg- 
wood mortar for the special purpose ; it is so difficult to remove 
every trace of grease that it is not desirable to use the same mortar 
for this use and the general purposes of the shop. When the mortar 
is to be warmed, an ounce or two of alcohol may be poured into it 
and burned. When a marble slab or tile is used, it may be warmed 
over a slow and diffused gas flame, or the furnace shown in Fig. 
127, without the wire gauze attachment, or laid a few minutes on 
a heated stove. 

The first five preparations on the above list are distinguished by 
different degrees of firmness and fusibility; they are all perfectly 
bland and unirritating, and are used for their property of pro- 
tecting the part to which applied from external irritating causes 
and from the drying action of the air. 

Ceratum saponis, as now directed to be made by the improved 
process of the Pharmacopoeia, is an elegant application to exposed 
surfaces, requiring to be spread on some suitable fabric; it is too 
firm to be conveniently incorporated with medicinal ingredients, 
except by the aid of heat, but would be a very suitable vehicle for 
some of the alterative and mild astringent remedies, if softened at 
the time of their admixture. 

Simple cerate, ceratum adipis, of U. S. P. 1860, like the foregoing, 
is almost exclusively applied to blistered or other exposed surfaces, 
for the complete exclusion of the atmosphere and the prevention of 
desiccation during the process of healing ; it is not adapted to use 
as a vehicle for medicinal substances to be applied by inunction, nor 
can it be conveniently mixed with powders at ordinary tempera- 
tures. From overlooking this fact, the mistake is constantly made 
by physicians of prescribing simple cerate as the vehicle for iodine, 
the mercurials, etc. ; and in view of this, some of the apothecaries 



FIRST GROUP — PREPARATION. 865 

vary the proportions, putting in one-fourth instead of one-third 
wax; this partially unfits it for the use for which it is mainly 
designed, to furnish a firm dressing which will not fuse entirely at 
the temperature of the body. 

Simple cerate, as is well-known, is very liable to become raucid 
by exposure to the air; the late Ferris Bringhurst, in a report to 
the American Pharmaceutical Association, pointed out the superi- 
ority of cerate made with unbleached yellow wax. (See paper in 
Proceedings, vol. xvi. 416.) 

Sim-pie ointment, ointment of lard of U. S. P. 1860, is designed for 
the purpose just mentioned as not suited to the cerate, that of fur- 
nishing, in warm weather, a good vehicle for medicines in the form 
of ointment. In the winter, it is frequently replaced by lard, when 
that vehicle can be obtained fresh and sweet. It is not unusual to 
add to simple cerate and simple ointment, when fused in the pro- 
cess of preparing them, a little rose-water, and sometimes a very 
small portion of borax, which renders them very white without 
interfering with their remedial qualities. 

Spermaceti cerate is intermediate between the foregoing, and has 
the advantage of being made without the use of lard, which is 
sometimes difficult to procure of good quality, and always objec- 
tionable for use about the face ; it is an elegant preparation, though 
dependent for its whiteness and sweetness upon the quality of the 
olive oil employed in making it. It is a perfectly bland and un- 
irritating application, better adapted to use as a healing dressing 
than as a vehicle for more active medicines. 

Ointment of rose-water, commonly called "cold cream," is an appli- 
cation adapted to chapped or excoriated skin, and may be used as 
a substitute for lard as an excipient for medicines to be applied by 
inunction; an unofiicinal formula, containing wax instead of sper- 
maceti, is given among the working formulas, which is highly 
approved among some connoisseurs. 

Benzoated lard is the name applied to the new officinal Un- 
guentum benzoini, adapted to replace lard in seasons and in situa- 
tions in which commercial lard would become rancid; its pleasant 
balsamic odor also recommends it in preference to ordinary lard; it 
is, however, not white, and on that account less elegant than the 
ointment of rose-water or glycerin ointment. 

Resin cerate or basilicon, though included in the series, is not, 
like the others, free from irritating properties; it is much used as 
an application to burns and chilblains, and as a dressing to blistered 
surfaces with a view to keep up the discharge; it is also a very 
suitable vehicle for stimulating applications in the form of powder 
incorporated by the aid of heat. The resin present is also useful 
by preventing the tendency to rancidity to which unctuous ingre- 
dients are liable. 



55 



i 



866 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Second Group. — Those in which the Medicinal Substances are mixed 
with the Unctuous Ingredient by Fusion and Digestion. 

ru„„ + „ n ci»~ „ v, f Resin, suet, yellow wax, turpentine, 1 aj . , ,. 

Cerat. resinae comp. j flaxseed oil. / Stimulating. 

Unguent, picis liq. Tar iind suet, equal parts. Stimulating antiseptic. 

Ceratum cantharidis. j ™^' 12 P arts . ; larc !> 3° P^ts ; 1 Epispnstio (Blistering Ce- 
( yellow wax, resin, each, t parts. j rate). 

REMARKS. 

Compound resin cerate, or Deshler's salve, is both firmer and more 
stimulating than basilicon, though used for similar purposes in 
burns, scalds, etc.; it is too firm for ready incorporation with dry 
powders, and is mostly used by itself. An inconveniently tough 
consistence is one of the disadvantages attendant upon this pre- 
paration, though when it has been suitably spread, it forms a very 
good and adhesive application. 

Tar ointment, which is made by melting suet, and, while it is 
fluid, stirring into it an equal weight of tar until it cools and 
thickens, is used in scald head and various scaly eruptions with 
excellent effects. 

Blisters and Blistering Cerates. 

Ceratum cantharidis is conveniently made by the working formula 
appended by melting together lard, wax, and resin, and sifting into 
the fused mass, powdered Spanish flies, continuing the heat for half 
an hour, and then removing from the fire and stirring till cool ; the 
active principle of the flies, cantharidin, is extracted to a great 
extent by this digestion in the grease, and the powder itself is also 
retained and adds to the effect of the preparation. , 

This is sometimes kept in jars, and sometimes, by increasing the 
proportion of wax and resin a very little, is made firm enough to 
roll out into rolls like plasters. 

Blistering cerate, when ordered in prescription as a cerate to be 
dispensed by weight and spread at the bedside of the patient, is 
ordered by its officinal name; when designed to be spread as a 
plaster, it is called Emplastrum epispasticum, the size being gene- 
rally conveyed thus, 3x6 (meaning three inches wide by 6 long), 
or any other size desired, or a pattern may accompany, giving the 
shape and size. Sometimes the purpose for which it is required is 
expressed, and the precise size and shape are left to the pharmacist; 
at others, it is left optional with the attendant whether to spread 
the blister himself, or to have it spread at the shop by a prescrip- 
tion like the following : R. — Carati cantharidis, q. s., ut fiat emplas- 
trum epispasticum 3x6. 

Besides the familiar Ceratum cantharidis, the Pharmacopoeia now 
recognizes a preparation under the name Ceratum extracti cantha- i 
rides, in which an alcoholic extract of the flies is mixed with resin, 
wax, and lard ; it is a more elegant preparation, but is as yet but 
little prescribed. It is well adapted to dilution with simple cerate 
iu the proportion of one part to four or eight as a stimulating 



BLISTERS AND BLISTERING CERATES. 867 

dressing to blistered surfaces for maintaining their discbarge and 
preventing healing. (See Working Formulas.) 

The best material on which to spread a blister is adhesive plaster 
cloth ; if a wide margin is left, it is readily made to adhere by 
warming the margin over a lighted lamp, and pressing it carefully 
on to the part. It should also be so incised from the edges inward 
as to be readily adapted to the inequalities of the surface to which 
applied. Kid or split sheepskin, or even thick glazed paper, also 
answer a good purpose, in which case the margin is made very 
narrow, and three or four strips, about half an inch wide, of adhe- 
sive plaster are warmed and drawn over the outside to hold it in 
its place. 

Blisters to be applied behind the ears are much prescribed ; in 
spreading these care must be taken to have them the reverse of 
each other, or, after they are spread, it may be found they both fit 
the same ear. It is well, in the case of these, to leave the margin 
much the widest at the part furthest from the ear and below, where 
the hair will not interfere with its adhesion. 

The mode of spreading blisters is too simple to require comment; 
in cold weather, or when the cerate is very stiff, I use the thumb, 
which makes a smooth and very neat surface ; a spatula slightly 
warmed answers very well. After the blister is spread, it is well 
to paint over its surface with ethereal tincture of cantharides, 
which increases its activity, or lay a piece of tissue paper over its 
whole surface, and coat this with the ethereal tincture. 

It is considered a good precaution to remove the blister as soon 
as it has thoroughly reddened the skin, and then to apply a cata- 
plasm of bread and milk, elm bark, or ground flaxseed, to raise the 
skin. A blistering plaster usually requires from six to twelve hours 
to raise the skin. 

The different blistering tissues are, I believe, all made by extract- 
ing cantharidin from the flies with ether or oil of turpentine, and 
forming it into a plaster, which is then spread on paper, silk, or 
other suitable fabric. The proportions indicated by Mohr and 
Redwood are as follows : To one part of the yellowish oily residue 
left after the evaporation of the ether from ethereal tincture of 
flies, add two parts of melted white wax, and spread a thin layer 
over the surface of paper. 

The following formula is from the London Pharmaceutical Journ., 
1860 :— 

Take of Cantharidin gr. j. 

White wax 3j 

Olive oil 3v 

Melt together. With a brush paint it over some white bibulous 
paper and hang it up to dry in a current of air. Take a piece of 
pink paper of the form and size required ; the under colored side 
paint over with a weak solution of India rubber (or gutta-percha) r 
cut the cantharidin paper to the form and size of the pink paperless 
a margin, and while the pink paper is still sticky place the other 



868 



CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 



upon it. Before applying, this blister should be held over the 
steam escaping from a vessel of hot water. 

Charta Cantharidis, IT. S. P. {Cantharides Paper.) 

Take of White wax, four troyounces. 

Spermaceti, one and a half troyounce. 

Olive oil, two troyounces. 

Canada turpentine, 

Cantharides, in powder, each, half a troyounce. 

Water, five fluidounces. 

Mix all the substances in a tinned vessel, and boil gently for two 
hours, constantly stirring. Filter through a woollen strainer with- 
out expressing, and keep the mixture in a liquid state by means of 
a shallow water-bath with an extended surface. Coat strips of 
paper upon one side only with the melted plaster, by passing them 
successively over the surface of the liquid, and cut the strips when 
dry into rectangular pieces. 

Charta Sinapis,JJ. S. P. {Mustard Paper.) 

Take of Black mustard, in powder, ninety grains. 

Solution of gutta-percha, a sufficient quantity. 

Mix the mustard with as much of the solution as may be neces- 
sary to give it a similiquid consistence; then apply the whole. of 
the mixture by means of a suitable brush to a piece of rather stiff 
paper four inches square, so as completely to cover one side of it, 
and allow the surface to dry. Before being applied to the skin, 
let the mustard paper be dipped for about fifteen seconds in warm 
water. 

These two preparations are new officinals in the last edition of 
the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and are designed to supply the places of 
popular remedies of this class. They are to be greatly commended 
on the score of cleanliness, efficiency, and portability. 



Third Group. — Cerates and Ointments, in 
dients are incorporated by trituration with 



Cerat. sabinse. 
Ung. gallge. 

Ung. acidi carbolici. 

Ung. acidi tannici. 
Ung. veratrise. 

Cerat. zinci carb. 

Ung. zinci oxidi. 

Ung. antimonii. 

Ung. hydrargyri. 

Ung. hydrar. ammon. 
Ung. hyd. iod. rub. 
Ung. hyd. oxid. flav. 

Ung. Cantharidis. 



Fluid ext. from 1 part savin. 

4 parts resin cerate. 

1 part powdered galls. 

7 parts lard. 

1 part carbolic acid. 

7 parts simple ointment. 

5ss + Aq. f'3 s s to §j lard. 

§>j to §j lard. 

1 part ZnC0 3 . 

5 parts ointment of lard. 
1 part ZnO, 5 parts lard. 

1 part tart. ant. et potass. 
4 parts lard. 

2 parts mercury. 

1 each lard and suet. 

1 part NH ? HgCl. 

12 parts simple ointment. 

gr. xvi to §j. 

1 partHgO. 

7 parts ointment. 

1 part cer. canth. 

3 parts resin cerate. 



which the Medicinal Ingre- 
the Unctuous Ingredients. 

\ Stimulating dressing applied 
/ to blisters. 

I Astringent, used in piles. 



V Antiseptic. 

Astringent, used in piles. 
An anodyne in neuralgia. 

I Mild astringent and desiccant. 

Mild astringent and desiccant. 
\ Vesicant, producing pustular 
/ eruptions. 

} Alterative, used to produce 
mercurial impression. 

I Alterative, desiccant. 

Discutient. 

> Stimulant. 

I Stimulant. 



SYLLABUS OF CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 



869 



Ung. hyd. oxid. rub. 
Ung. iodinii. 
Ung. iodinii comp. 
Ung. potassii iodid. 
Ung. plumbi carb. 

Ung. plumbi iodidi. 

Ung. sulphuris. 
Ung. belladonnge. 
Ung. stramonii, 

Ung. tabaci. 

Ung. creasoti. 

Ung. zinci oxidi. 



/I part HgO (fine powder). 
\ 8 parts ointment of lard. 
f 1 part I, I part KI. 
\ 21 parts lard + Aq. 
f 1 part I, 2 parts KI. 
\ 32 parts lard, 
f 1 part KI -|- 1 part Aq. 
\ 8 parts lard. 
J 1 part PbC0 3 . 
\ 7 parts ointment of lard, 
f 1 part Pbl 2 . 
( 7 parts ointment. 

1 part S to 2 lard. 

1 part extract, 8 lard. 

1 part extract, 7 lard. 



i Stimulating, alterative. 
Discutient, alterative. 



I Discutient, alterative. 
1 Discutient, alterative. 
1 Astringent and desiccant. 

Discutient. 

Specific in itch. 

Anodyne. 

Anodyne. 



{X- " m 2 par n Anodyne 



\ 16 parts lard, 
f 5ss to lard ^j. Antiseptic, mild escharotic. 

Gr. 80 to ointment benzoin 400 "^ p. . , 
grs. j esiccan ' 



It would extend this chapter beyond convenient limits to dwell 
in detail upon each of these numerous officinal triturated ointments. 
They may be made in a mortar with the use of the pestle, or on a 
tile or slab with a spatula. The medicinal ingredients of a dry 
substance should be invariably in a very fine powder before incor- 
porating it with the ointment. (See chapter on Dispensing.) This 
condition may be attained without the necessity of soiling a mor- 
tar, by the use of a muller. Iodine is a crystalline substance which 
cannot be conveniently reduced to fine powder, and is therefore 
directed to be dissolved by the u^e of iodide of potassium and a 
few drops of water. In a few instances it is found necessary to 
soften the unctuous ingredients beforehand by a moderate heat, 
applied either to the spatula or by warming the tile ; the combus- 
tion of a little alcohol on the surface of a tile will give it the requi- 
site warmth without the risk of fracturing it by the application of 
heat from beneath. 

The use of the narcotic extracts in the preparation of ointments is 
a recent improvement, and may be extended to all medicines of 
that class, including opium, which in aqueous extract, possesses 
advantages over the powdered drug. 

Belladonna and stramonium ointments, as shown in the syllabus, 
are made by trituration from the extracts, taking care to soften the 
extract by triturating with water before adding the simple oint- 
ment or lard. This process is only adapted to small quantities to 
be speedily used, it will separate in warm weather by the softening 
of the lard, and is liable to be gritty on account of the formation 
of ciwstals of oxalate of potassa in the extracts. 

Aconite ointment is made in the same way and in the same pro- 
portion, 3j to 5J. 

Red precipitate ointment (ung. hydr. oxid. rub.) is a very impor- 
tant preparation, being most extensively used as an eye-salve and 
the basis of many of the popular medicines of that description. By 
trituration, the oxide becomes changed to an orange-colored powder, 
which imparts a similar hue to the ointment ; it is variously diluted 



870 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

to meet the case for which prescribed ; when it becomes rancid it 
assumes a red color, or changes to blue, and should be thrown away. 

Fourth Group. — In which the Fatty Ingredient is Chemically 

Changed. 

Ung. hydrargyri nitratis. A powerful stimulant, "sub-caustic," and alterative. 
Cerat. plumbi subacetatis. A cooling sedative application. 

This group, containing one each of the officinal classes unguenta 
and cerata, has been reduced by the transfer of cerat um saponis, by 
the substitution of an improved process, to the first group. 

Citrine Ointment — The first named is made by adding an acid 
solution of nitrate of mercury to lard heated to 200°, an efferves- 
cence occurs, sometimes inconveniently, and by stirring with a 
wooden or horn spatula the ointment subsides in the form of a 
beautiful citrine-colored mass of convenient consistence, which is 
much esteemed as a " sub-caustic" application. The oil undergoes 
a change in this process, being, as is supposed, partially converted 
into elaidin and elaic acid, and the nitrate of mercury being re- 
duced to a yellow sub-nitrate. Owing to circumstances not fully 
understood this preparation varies much in consistence and in color, 
sometimes too by age it is changed to a dark color by the deposi- 
tion of suboxide of mercury, when fusion for a short time with a 
little nitric acid will restore the color. 

Much of the trouble experienced in obtaining a handsome oint- 
ment of good consistence will be avoided by adding the mercurial 
solution at a temperature of about 108° F. 

Goulard's cerate of subacetate of lead is a very desirable cooling 
application, but of all the officinal ointments is the most prone to 
change ; a sort of lead soap is formed by the action of the solution 
of subacetate upon the melted oily mixture. The preparation 
should have a rich, yellowish -green tinge, derived from the olive 
oil, and a pleasant odor of camphor, without rancidity. If per- 
fectly excluded from the air it will keep pretty well, but should be 
made in small quantity. When of a white color and rancid odor 
it should be invariably rejected as worse than worthless. {See Ex- 
temporaneous Process, page 872.) 

Working Formulas for Preparing the Cerates and Ointments. 

Cerata. 
Ceratum, U. S. P. (Cerate.) 

Ceratum Adipis, U.S. P. 1860. 
Take of Lard, eight troyounces. 

White wax, four troyounces. 

Melt them together, and stir the mixture constantly until cool. ! 

Ceratum Cantharidis, U. S. P. (Blistering Cerate.) 

Take of Cantharides, in very fine powder, twelve troyounces. 
Yellow wax, 

Resin, each, seven troyounces. 
Lard, ten troyounces. 



WORKING FORMULAS. 871 

To the wax, resin, and lard, previously melted together, and 
strained through muslin, add the cantharides, and, by means of a 
water-bath keep the mixture in a liquid state for half an hour, 
stirring occasionally. Then remove it from the water-bath, and 
stir it constantly until cool. 

It is important and essential to making the cerate smooth and 
efficient that the flies should be reduced to an extremely fine pow- 
der and passed through a bolting cloth, as many particles of the 
flies are very light and pass over in dusting, which when mixed in 
the cerate will render it very uneven and unsightly. 

Ceratum Cetacei, U. S. P. {Cerate of Spermaceti.) 

Take of Spermaceti, a troy ounce. 

White wax, three troyounces. 
Olive oil, five troyounces. 

Melt together the spermaceti and wax ; then add the oil r^re- 
viously heated, and stir the mixture constantly until cool. 

Ceratum Extracti Cantharidis, U. S. P. {Cerate of Extract of 
Cantharides.) 

Take of Cantharides, in fine powder, five troyounces. 

Stronger alcohol, two pints and a half, or a sufficient quantity. 
Resin, three troyounces. 
Yellow wax, six troyounces. 
Lard, seven troyouuees. 

Moisten the cantharides with stronger alcohol, pack them in a 
cylindrical percolator, and gradually pour on stronger alcohol, 
until the liquid passes nearly colorless. Evaporate the filtered 
liquid, by means of a water-bath, to the consistence of a soft extract. 
Mix this with the resin, wax, and lard, previously melted together, 
and keep the whole at the temperature of 212° for fifteen minutes. 
Lastly, strain the mixture through muslin, and stir it constantly 
until cool. 

Ceratum Plumbi Subacetatis, IT. S. P.* (Goulard's Cerate.) 

Take of Solution of subacetate of lead, two nuidounces and a half. 
White wax, four troyounces. 
Olive oil, eight troyounces. 
Camphor, thirty grains. 

Mix the wax, previously melted, with seven troyounces of the 
oil. Then remove the mixture from the fire, and, when it begins 
to thicken, gradually pour in the solution of subacetate of lead, 
stirring constantly with a wooden spatula until it becomes cool. 
Lastly, add the camphor dissolved in the remainder of the oil, and 
mix them. 

A second formula is given in the Pharmacopoeia, which admits of 
its being made extemporaneously, and this in the editor's opinion is 
the better course, as the cerate made by the first formula is rarely 
good if prepared even for a short time. 

* See remarks on page 870. 



872 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Take of Cerate, three hundred and fifty grains. 
Olive oil, fifty grains. 

Solution of subacetate of lead, a fluidrachm and a half. 
Liniment of camphor, twelve grains. 

Mix intimately. 

Ceratum Resince, TJ. S. P. (Basilicon Cerate.) 

Take of Resin, ten troyounces. 

Yellow wax, four troyounces. 
Lard, sixteen troyounces. 

Melt them together, strain the mixture through muslin, and stir 
it constantly until cool. 

Ceratum Besince Composition, TJ. S. P. (Deshler's Salve.) 
Take of Resin, 
Suet, 

Yellow wax, each, twelve troyounces. 
Turpentine, six troj'ounces. 
Flaxseed oil, seven troyounces. 

Melt them together, strain the mixture through muslin, and stir 
it constantly until cool. 

Ceratum Sabince, TJ. S. P. (Cerate of Savine.) 

Take of Fluid extract of savine, three fluidounces. 
Resin cerate, twelve troyounces. 

Melt the cerate, add the fluid extract, and stir them together at 
a moderate heat till the alcohol has evaporated, then stir till cool. 

Ceratum Saponis, TJ. S. P. {Soap Cerate.) 

Take of Soap plaster, two troyounces. 

White wax, two troyounces and a half. 
Olive oil, four troyounces. 

Melt together the plaster and wax, add the oil, and, after con- 
tinuing the heat a short time, stir the mixture until cool. 

Ceratum Zinci Carbonatis, TJ. S. P. 

Substitute for Ceratum Calaminse, Pharm. 1850. 
Take of Precipitated carbonate of zinc, two troyounces. 
Ointment of lard, ten troyounces. 

Mix them. 

TJnguenta. 

Unguentum, TJ. S. P. (Unguentum Adipis, Pharm. 1860.) 

Take of Lard, eight troyounces. 

Yellow wax, two troyounces. 

Melt them together with a moderate heat, and stir the mixture 
constantly while cooling. 

Unguentum Aeidi Carbolici, TJ. S. P. 

Take of Carbolic acid, sixty grains. 

Ointment, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Mix them thoroughly. 



OINTMENTS. 873 



Unguentum Acidi Tannici, U. S. P. 

Take of Tannic acid, thirty grains. 
Water, half a fluidrachin. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Rub the acid first with the water, and then with the lard, until 
they are thoroughly mixed, avoiding the use of an iron spatula. 

Unguentum Antimonii, U. S. P. {Tartar Emetic Ointment.) 

Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassa, in very fine powder, one hun- 
dred and twenty grains. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Hub the powder with a little of the lard, then add the remainder 
and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Aquce Rosaz, U. S. P. {Cold Cream.) 

Take of Oil of sweet almond, three troyounces and a half. 
Spermaceti, a troyounce. 
White wax, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Rose water, two tiuidounces. 

Melt together, by means of a water-bath, the oil, spermaceti, and 
wax ; then gradually add the rose water, and stir the mixture con- 
stantly while cooling. 

Unguentum Belladonna:, IT. S. P. {Ointment of Belladonna.) 

Take of Extract of belladonna, sixty grains. 
Water, half a nuidrachm. 
Lard, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Rub the extract first with the water until rendered uniformly 
soft, then with the lard, and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Benzoini, U. S. P. {Benzoated Lard.) 

Take of Benzoin, in moderately coarse powder, a troyounce. 
Lard, sixteen troyounces. 

Heat them together, by means of a water-bath, for two hours, 
with occasional stirring ; then strain without pressure, and stir the 
product constantly while cooling. 

Unguentum Creasoti, U. S. P. {Ointment of Creasote.) 

Take of Creasote, half a nuidrachm. 
Lard, a troyounce. 
Mix them. 

Unguentum Gallce, U. S. P. {Gall Ointment.) 

Take of Nutgall, in very fine powder, a troyounce. 
Lard, seven troyounces. 
Mix them. 

Unguentum Hydrargyri Iodidi Rubri, U. S. P. 

Take of Red iodide of mercury, in very fine powder, sixteen grains. 
Ointment, a troyounce. 
Rub them together till they are thoroughly mixed. 



874 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Unguentum Hydrargyria U. S. P. {Ointment of Mercury.) 

Take of Mercury, twenty-four troyounces. 
Lard, 
Suet, each, twelve troyounces. 

Pub the mercury with a troyounce of the suet and a small por- 
tion of the lard, until the globules cease to be visible, then add 
the remainder of the lard, and of the suet softened with a gentle 
heat, and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Hydrargyri Ammoniata, TJ. S. P. ( White Precipitate 

Ointment.) 

Take of Ammoniated mercury, in very fine powder, forty grains. 
Ointment of lard, a troyounce. 
Mix them. 

Unguentum Hydrargyri Nitratis,~U.8. P. (Citrine Ointment.) 

Take of Mercury, a troyounce and a half. 

Nitric acid, three troyounces and a half. 
Lard, sixteen troyounces and a half. 

Dissolve the mercury in the acid, then heat the lard in an earthen 
vessel, and when the temperature reaches 200° remove the mix- 
ture from the fire. To this add the mercurial solution, and, with 
a wooden spatula, stir constantly so long as effervescence continues, 
and afterwards occasionally until the ointment stiffens. 

Unguentum Hydrargyri Oxidi Flavi, U. S. P. (Ointment of Yellow 

Oxide of Mercury.) 

Take of Yellow oxide of mercury, in very fine powder, sixty grains. 
Ointment, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Rub the oxide with the ointment gradually added until they 
are thoroughly mixed. 

Unguentum Hydrargyri Oxidi JRubri, TJ. S. P. (Bed Precipitate 

Ointment.) 

Take of Red oxide of mercury, in very fine powder, sixty grains. 
Ointment of lard, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Add the oxide of mercury to the ointment previously softened 
with a gentle heat, and thoroughly mix them. 

This ointment should have a distinctly orange-color, and should 
be free from rancidity and grit. 

Unguentum Cantharidis, TJ. S. P. Ointment of Cantharides. 
Take of Cantharides cerate, one hundred and twenty grains. 
Resin cerate, three hundred and sixty grains. 
Mix them thoroughly. 

* This ointment is usually made by manufacturers on a large scale, as it sometimes 
contains only one part of mercury to two or three of the unctuous ingredients. 
When ordering it, the physician should specify il one-half mercury." Its uses are 
numerous, one of the chief of which is that of inducing the mercurial impression by 
its application to the thighs, armpits, etc. The numerous curious synonyms applied 
to this ointment it would be interesting to collect. 



OINTMENTS. 875 

Unguentum Jodinii, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Iodine.) 

Take of Iodine, twenty grains. 

Iodide of potassium, four grains. 
Water, six minims. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Pub the iodine and iodide of potassium first with the water, and 
then with the lard until they are thoroughly mixed. 

Unguentum Iodinii Compositum, IT. S. P. (Compound Ointment of 

Iodine.) 

Take of Iodine, fifteen grains. 

Iodide of potassium, thirty grains. 
Water, thirty minims. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Hub the iodine and iodide of potassium first with the water, and 
then with the lard, until they are thoroughly mixed. 

Unguentum Mezerei, IT. S. P. (Mezereon Ointment) 

Take of Fluid extract of mezereon, four fluidounces. 
Lard, fourteen troyounces. 
Yellow wax, two troyounces. 

Melt the lard and wax together with a moderate heat, add the 
fluid extract of mezereon, and stir the mixture constantly until 
the alcohol has evaporated, then continue to stir while cooling. 

Unguentum Picis Liquidce, IT. S. P. ( Tar Ointment.) 

Take of Tar, 

Suet, each, twelve troyounces. 

Mix the tar with the suet previously melted with a moderate 
heat, and having strained the mixture through muslin, stir it con- 
stantly while cooling. 

Unguentum Plumbi Carbonatis, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Carbonate of. 

Lead.) 

Take of Carbonate of lead, in very fine powder, sixty grain?, 
. Ointment of lard, four hundred and twenty grains. . 

Add the carbonate of lead to the ointment previously softened 
with a gentle heat, and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Plumbi Iodidi, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Iodide of Lead.) 

Take of Iodide of lead, in very fine powder, sixty grains. 
Ointment, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Pub the iodide of lead with the ointment gradually added, until 
they are thoroughly mixed. 

Unguentum Potassii Iodidi, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Iodide of 
Potassium.) 

Take of Iodide of potassium, in fine powder, sixty grains. 
Water, a fluidrachm. 
Lard, four hundred and twenty grains. 



876 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Dissolve the iodide of potassium in the water in a warm mortar, 
then add the lard gradually and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Stramonii, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Stramonium.) 

Take of Extract of stramonium, sixty grains. 
"Water, half a fluidrachm. 
Lard, four hundred and twenty grains. 

Rub the extract first with the water until rendered uniformly 
soft, then with the lard, and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Sulphuris, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Sulphur.) 

Take of Sublimed sulphur, a troyounce. 
Lard, two troyounces. 
Mix them. 

Unguentum Sulphuris lodidi, U. S. P. (Ointment of Iodide of Sulphur.) 

Take of Iodide of sulphur, thirty grains. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Rub the iodide of sulphur, first reduced to a fine powder, with a 
little of the lard, then add the remainder, and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Tabaci, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Tobacco.) 

Take of Tobacco, in fine powder, half a troyounce. 
Lard, eight troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the tobacco with a little water, introduce it into a conical 
glass percolator, and, having pressed it firmly, pour water upon it 
until four fluiclounces of filtered liquid have passed. Evaporate 
this to the consistence of a soft extract, and mix it thoroughly with 
the lard. 

Unguentum Veratrice, U. S. P. (Ointment of Ver atria.) 

Take of Veratria, twenty grains. 
Lard, a troyounce. 

Pub the veratria with a little of the lard; then add the re- 
mainder and thoroughly mix them. 

Unguentum Zinci Oxidi, IT. S. P. (Ointment of Oxide of Zinc.) 

Take of Oxide of zinc, eighty grains. 

Ointment of benzoin, four hundred grains. 

Mix them thoroughly. 

Selections from TTnofficinal Cerates and Ointments. 
Glycerin Ointment. (J. H. Eckey.) 

Take of Spermaceti ^ss. 

White wax 3jL-_ 

Oil of almonds i '^y- 

Glycerin f Jj. 

Melt the wax and spermaceti with the oil of almonds at a mode- 



UNOFFICINAL CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 877 

rate heat ; put these into a wedgewood mortar, add the glycerin, 
and triturate until cold. 

Glycerin can only be incorporated with fats when they are 
softened to about its consistence ; it is not, like an oil, a solvent for 
fats. This is a bland and pleasant application, which if desired 
may be appropriately perfumed to render it more popular. 

Cold Cream. (Dr. L. Turnbull's Recipe.) 

Take of White wax gj. 

Oil of almonds ' f §iv. 

Eose-water fgij. 

Borax 3ss. 

Oil of roses niv. 

Let the wax be melted and dissolved in the oil of almonds by a 
gentle heat, then dissolve the borax in the rose-water and add the 
solution to the heated oil, stirring constantly till cool ; then add 
the oil of roses, stirring. It is well to warm the rose-water a little, 
or to add it to the ointment before it is much cooled, thus prevent- 
ing any granulation of the wax ; to secure the advantage of the 
borax the quantity of rose-water ought to be increased to at least 
f 5v and that slightly w T armed, as borax requires twelve parts of 
water for solution. 

Thus prepared, cold cream is a beautiful snow-white, smooth, 
bland ointment, about the consistence of good lard, and an admir- 
able substitute for that excipient. It is too soft for a convenient 
lip salve, and the following is preferred: — 

Rose Lip Salve. 

Take of Oil of almonds giij. 

Alkanet 3ij. 

Digest with a gentle heat and strain ; then add — 

White wax ^iss. 

Spermaceti £ss. 

Melt with the colored oil and stir it until it begins to thicken, 
then add — 

Oil of rose geranium gtt. xxiv. 

This may be put into small metallic boxes for the waistcoat pocket. 

Elemi Ointment. 

Take of Elemi (resin) 3ij. 

Simple cerate ^ij. 

Resin cerate 3 ss. 

Peruvian balsam ^ss. 

Fuse together and mix thoroughly. 

It is much prescribed by Prof. Pancoast, of the Jefferson Medical 
College, as an elegant substitute for resin cerate. 

The London Pharmacopeia contains another formula, which nearly 
agrees with the following, of the Prussian Pharmacopoeia : — 

Take of Elemi, 

Turpentine, 

Suet, 

Lard, each, equal parts. 

Fuse, strain, and mix. 



873 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Compound Cerate of Lead. 

Take of Cerat. plumbi subacet. , 

Cerat. simp., aa gss. 

Hydrarg. chlor. mit., 

Pulveris opii, aa • • • 3j. 

Mix. 

Used in cutaneous eruptions of local character. 

The above prescription is attributed to Dr. Parrish, Senior. 

Improved Tobacco Ointment 

Take of Tobacco leaves gv. 

Vinegar Oij. 

Digest the leaves in the vinegar till evaporated to Oss ; strain 
and express the liquid, then evaporate by moderate heat to about 
fsiij; triturate this with — 

Extract of belladonna ^j. 

Then take of— 

Camphor, in powder . gviss. 

Kesin cerate §viss. 

Mix these by fusion at a moderate heat, and incorporate them 
with the mixed extracts of tobacco and belladonna. 

This is a very superior stimulating and anodyne application, first 
published by Wm. J. Allinson, of Burlington, !N". J. 

Garlic Ointment. 

Take of Fresh garlic 2 or 3 cloves. 

Lard 3j. 

Digest at a moderate heat for half an hour, and strain ; a useful 
application to the chest in croup. 

Ung. cantharidis, restored in the late edition of the Pharmaco- 
poeia, is made by mixing 5ij of cerate of cantharides with 3yj of 
resin cerate, which, as in the case of savine ointment in the last 
group, is used as a vehicle. These two ointments are chiefly used 
for the same purpose, as stimulating applications to blistered sur- 
faces. 

Care must be taken to distinguish, in prescriptions, between tho 
cerate and ointment of cantharides; the former being blistering 
cerate, and the latter only a stimulating dressing for blisters. 

Aconitia Ointment 

Take of Aconitia . gr. xvj. 

Olive oil Sss. 

Triturate together, and then incorporate with — 

Lard 3j. 

A good substitute for this very expensive preparation will be 
found among the liniments. 



UNOFFICINAL OINTMENTS. 879 

No. 145. — Tetter Ointment prescribed by the late Dr. S. Gr. Morton. 

Take of Calomel, 

Alum (dried), in powder, 
Carbonate of lead, 

Oil of turpentine, each 3ij. 

Simple ointment Siss. 

Triturate the powders together till they are impalpable and 
thoroughly mixed, then incorporate them with the oil and cerate. 

This is one of the very best ointments of its class, as proved by 
trials during a series of years. 

The mode of using it is to apply it at night, wash off with pure 
Castile soap in the morning, wipe dry, and dust with pure starch. 

Tetter Ointment prescribed by Dr. Physic. 

Take of Hydrarg. ammoniat 9j. 

Hydrarg. clilor. corros gr. x. 

Alcoholis f^j. 

Plumbi acetatis 3ss. 

Adipis Sj. 

Triturate the corrosive chloride with the alcohol, add the white 
precipitate and sugar of lead, and make an ointment, to be applied 
twice daily. 

A Salve resembling " Becker's Eye Balsam." 

Take of Calamine, 

Tutty, of each giss. 

Red oxide of mercury gyj. 

Camphor, in powder gj. 

Almond oil 3j. 

White wax ^iss. 

Fresh butter |viij. 

Reduce the mineral substances to a very fine powder, and incor- 
porate with the oil in which the camphor has been dissolved with 
the wax and butter previously melted together. The butter must 
be deprived of salt, if present, by washing with warm water. 

The reputation of Becker's Eye Balsam is widely extended. 

Compound Iron Ointment. 

Take of Common iron rust ohjss. 

Powdered red oxide of mercury oj\ 3j« 

Make into an impalpable powder, and add to — 

Washed lard ^ij. 

For the cure of chronic inflammation of the eyelid (conjunctiva)* 
particularly of a scrofulous character, eruptions on the face and 
body of young children, etc. 

Unguentum Cretan. (Westminster Hospital.*) 

Take of Prepared chalk gij. 

Olive oil . giss. 

Lard 3ivss. 

Mix. 

*Frora Squire's Pbarm. of London Hospitals. 



880 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

Ting. Picis c. Sulphure. (Middlesex Hospital.*) 

Take of Sulphur and tar, of each 2 drachms. 

Hydro-sulphuret of ammonia 5 minims. 

Prepared chalk 1 drachm. 

Lard to make 7 drachms. 

Mix. 

Unguentum Ferri Chloridi. {Haemostatic Ointment.*) 

Take of Ferri chloridi £ij. 

Axungiae |j. 

Misce. 

Ointment of Cod-liver Oil. 

Take of Fresh cod-liver oil 7 parts. 

White wax, 

Spermaceti, of each 1 part. 

Melt together, stirring as it cools. 

This is used in ophthalmia and opacity of the cornea, either 
alone or combined with a little citrine ointment, also as a friction 
or dressing for scrofulous indurations and sores, in rheumatism, 
stiff joints, and several skin diseases. It is said to have been used 
in porrigo or scald-head when other remedies have failed. 

Ointment of Croton Oil. 

Take of Croton oil nixxx. 

Lard (softened) Jj. 

Mix well. 

Rubefacient and counter-irritant in rheumatic and other diseases. 
When rubbed repeatedly on a part, it produces redness and a pus- 
tular eruption. 

Hufeland's Stimulating Ointment. 

Take of Beef gall ^iij. 

White soap giij. 

Althea ointment 3j. 

Petroleum 3ij. 

Mix by the aid of heat, and as it cools add — 

Powdered carbonate of ammonium gss. 

Powdered camphor 3j. 

Triturate together. 
. Althea ointment is still officinal in most European Pharmacopeias ; 
but some have discontinued it for the use of the mucilaginous 
decoctions of marshmallow root and flaxseed. Bavarian and Greek 
Pharmacopoeias order, instead of it, an ointment of yellow wax and 
lard, colored by turmeric. The following embraces the directions 
of the French Codex of 1839 :— 

Take of Powdered fcenugreek 2 parts. 

Olive oil 32 parts. 

* From Squire's Pharm. of London Hospitals. 



OFFICINAL LINIMENTS, 



881 



Digest for six hours, strain, and add — 

Yellow wax 8 parts. 

Burgundy pitch 4 parts. 

Turpentine 4 parts. 

Strain, and stir until cool. 

Pile Ointment. 

Take of Acetate of morphia gr. v. 

Tannic acid gss. 

Liniment of subacetate of lead f gss. 

Simple ointment ^vij. 

Triturate the tannic acid first with the liniment, and then incor- 
porate it with the ointment. 

Llnimenta, U. S. P. (Liniments.) 

These are fluid or semifluid preparations designed to be rubbed 
upon the surface, and either covered by lint or rubbed on until 
partially absorbed. The officinal members of this class are dis- 
played in the following syllabus. 



The Officinal Liniments. 
Group 1. — In which the Oily Ingredient is partially Saponified. 

( Stimulating, rubefacient. 



Linimentum ammouise 
(Volatile liniment.) 

Linimentum calcis. 



( Ammonia water, f §j. 
( Olive oil, §ij. 



Linimentum saponis. 



Liniment, cantharidis. 
Liniment, camphorge. 

Liniment, cbloroformi. 

Liniment, terebinthinae. 
(Kentish's ointment.) 

Liniment, aconiti. 
Liniment, plumbi subacet. 



( Lime-water, f§viij. 
( Flaxseed oil, §vij. 
f Castile soap, |ij, 
| Camphor, Jj. 
■{ Oil rosemary, f^ij. 
| Alcohol, Oj. 
I Water, f §iij. 



t "Healing," or demulcent. 

| The soap dissolved in the diluted 
[- alcohol by heat, and the stimu- 
lants added. 
J 



Group 2.' 

( Cantharidis, §j. 
\ Oil turpentine, Oss. 
( Camphor, 1 part. 
( Olive oil, 4 parts. 
{ Chloroform, ^iij. 
( Olive oil, ^iv. 
( Resin cerate, ffij. 
( Oil turpentine, Oss. 

Yconite root, §viij. 

Glycerin, f i§j. 

Alcohol, q. s. 
i 01. olivge, 3 iij . 
( Liq. plumbi subacet. §ij 



{? 



Oily Mixtures. 

1 Digested and strained. 
i Triturated in a mortar. 

I Shaken together. 

) Semifluid, by fusing the ingre- 
) dients together. 

V Percolated, evaporated to f ^viij. 

} 



Sedative. 



REMARKS ON THE LINIMENTS. 

Volatile liniment is a powerful stimulant, much used as a counter- 
irritant in sore throats, and also in rheumatism. 

Lime liniment is applied with the most happy effects to recent 
scalds and burns ; it is one of the most useful of preparations in 
the apothecaries' daily routine of minor surgery. 

Soap liniment is a useful application for similar purposes with 
56 



882 CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 

volatile liniment, but less active ; it is also readily removed by 
washing, containing no oil which is not saponified. 

Opodeldoc, formerly officinal under the name of Linimentum 
Saponis Camphorata, but dismissed from the later editions, is used 
as an application to sprains, rheumatic pains, etc. ; it is put up in 
small wide-mouth vials, into which the finger is inserted, to soften 
and extract it, and differs from officinal soap liniment chiefly in 
being made from animal oil soap, which thickens into a soft mass 
when it cools. 

Liniment of Spanish flies, though usually applied as a local irri- 
tant and rubefacient, is capable of use as a vesicant, being applied 
on lint, and covered to confine its vapor. 

Camphor liniment is well adapted as a vehicle of many substances 
applied in the form of stimulating liniment; it is well combined 
with aq. ammonise, as in Linim. Ammonias Camphorata, p. 883. 

Kentish's ointment, though so different from lime liniment, is used 
in nearly the same cases ; it is applied to recent burns, until the 
peculiar inflammation, called " the fire," subsides. 

Working Formulas for the Liniments. 
Linimentum Aconiti, U. S. P. {Aconite Liniment) 

Take of Aconite root, in fine powder, eight troyounces. 
Glycerin, a fluidounce. 
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the powder with four fluidounces of alcohol and let it 
macerate for twenty -four hours, then pack it in a conical percolator, 
and gradually pour alcohol upon it until two pints of tincture have 
been obtained. Distil off a pint and a half of alcohol, and evapo- 
rate the remainder until it measures seven fluidounces ; to this add 
the glycerin and mix thoroughly. 

This tincture is designed to supply 'the place of ointment of aco- 
nitia, and is best used by saturating a piece of lint of the desired 
size with the liniment, and, after applying it to the part affected, 
covering it with a piece of oiled silk a little larger than the lint. 
It must be used with care, and not over an abraded surface. 

Linimentum Ammoniw, IT. S. P. ( Volatile Liniment.) 

Take of Water of ammonia, a fluidounce. 
Olive oil, two troyounces. 
Mix them. 

. Linimentum Calcis, U. S. P. {Lime Liniment) 

Take of Solution of lime, eight fluidounces. 
Flaxseed oil, seven troyounces. 

Mix them. 



Linimentum Camphorx, U. S. P. {Liniment of Camphor.) 

Take of Camphor, three troyounces. 
Olive oil, twelve troyounces. 

Dissolve the camphor in the oil. 






UNOFFICINAL LINIMENTS. 888 

Linimentum Cantharidis, U. S. P. (Liniment of Cantharides.) 

Take of Cantharides, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Oil of turpentine, half a pint. 

Digest the cantharides with the oil for three hours in a close 
vessel, by means of a water-bath, and strain. 

Linimentum Chloroformi, U. S. P. (Liniment of Chloroform.) 

Take of Purified chloroform, three troyounces. 
Olive oil, four troyounces. 

Mix them. 

Linimentum Saponis, U. S. P. (Soap Liniment.) 

Tinctura Saponis Camphorata, Pharm. 1850. 
Take of Soap, in shavings, four troyounces. 
Camphor, two troyounces. 
Oil of rosemary, half a fluidounce. 
Water, six nuidounces. 
Alcohol, two pints. 

Mix the alcohol and water, digest the soap with the mixture, by 
means of water-bath, until it has dissolved; then filter, and, having 
added the camphor and oil, mix the whole thoroughly together. 

Linimentum Terebinthince, IT. S. P. (Kentish's Ointment.) 

Take of Kesin cerate, twelve troyounces. 
Oil of turpentine, half a pint. 

Add the oil to the cerate previously melted, and mix them. 

Linimentum Plumbi Subacetatis, U. S. P. 

Take of Olive oil giij. 

Liq. plumbi subacet ^ij. 

Mix them. 

Unoffictnal Liniments. 

Linimentum Ammonice Camphorata. 

Take of Camphor liniment 2 parts. 

Water of ammonia 1 part. 

Mix. 

An improvement on volatile liniment, having the additional 
advantage of camphor. 

Liniment Prescribed, in Catarrhal Croup. 

Take of Camphor ^ij, ^ij. 

Oil of turpentine f 5j. 

Make a solution. 

Liniment of Tannin. 

Take of Tannic acid ,^j. 

Glycerin . f |j. 

Make a solution. 

This is adapted to the treatment of sore nipples and engorge- 
ments of the neck of the uterus ; it may be diluted with water at 
pleasure. 



884 



CERATES, OINTMENTS, AND LINIMENTS. 



Linimentum Plumbi Subacetatis. 

Take of Solution of subacetate of lead, 

Glycerin, of each f ^j. 

Mix. 

This is designed to enable the physician to apply subacetate of 
lead in a concentrated form, and to facilitate its dilution with neu- 
tral liquids, without its becoming so readily decomposed. 

Linimentum Hyperici. {Red Oil.) 

Take of Flower of Hypericum (fresh), a convenient quantity. 
Olive oil, sufficient to cover it. 

Macerate in the sun for fourteen days, express and strain. 

A well-known and popular application to recent bruises and 
sprains. 

The flowers of hypericum (St. John's wort) are also used inter- 
nally in the form of tincture and infusion. 



Milk of Hoses for Chapped Hands, etc. 

Take of Almonds, blanched 
Rose-water . . . 
"White wax . . . 
Almond oil . . . 
White Castile soap 
Honey .... 
Cologne . . . . . 
Oil of bitter almond 
Oil of rose geranium 
Glycerin 

Blanch the almonds and beat to a paste, adding the rose-water, 
heat this to about 212° and incorporate wi 
oil, and soap, melted together, then add the other ingredients. 

Directions. — After washing the hands with warm water and Cas- 
tile or palm soap, apply the milk of roses, rubbing it thoroughly in, 
then wipe the hands with a dry towel. 



f^viij. 
ij- 

f»- 

gtt. iv. 
gtt. v. 

fiss. 



Arnica Liniment. (Glycerole of Arnica.) 

Take of Arnica flowers, bruised 4 ounces. 

Glycerin 1 pound. 

Digest at a moderate temperature on a water-bath, express and 
strain, or preferably, with Smith's steam displacer, displace the 
glycerin by steam pressure. 

For this preparation, the cheap, impure glycerin of commerce 
answers an excellent purpose. 

Linimentum JSulphuris. 

Take of Sulphur, prsecip., 
Almond oil, 
Lime-water. 

Triturate the sulphur with the oil, and add lime-water in slight 



PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 885 

excess; shake it thoroughly together, and dispense in a wide-mouth 
vial. 

This is designed as an improvement on sulphur ointment. 

Glycerin Lotion. 

Take of Rose-water 1 pint. 

Quince seed 2 drachms. 

Macerate, strain, and add — 

Glycerin 1 lb. 

This is an elegant application to chapped hands, and may do very 
well for a hair dressing. Orange-flower water or other aqueous 
perfume may be substituted for rose-water. 

Liniment of Iodide of Potassium. 

Take of Common soap 5J, 3yj. 

Alcohol f.^viijss. 

Iodide of potassium 5jiss. 

Water f^iss. 

Oil of garden lavender 5ss. 

Dissolve the soap in the alcohol by means of a gentle heat, and 
filter if it is not perfectly transparent ; then add the oil of laven- 
der and the iodide of potassium dissolved in the water, mix, and 
bottle while warm. 

The strength of this liniment is about one drachm to the ounce. 

Qelatinizcd Chloroform. 
Take of Chloroform, 

White of egg, each f o v J- 

Put them into a wide-mouth two-ounce vial, shake it, and allow 
it to stand for three hours. 

This is applied as a local anaesthetic with remarkable success. 



CHAPTER VII. 

PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 

Emplastra. (Plasters.) 

These are external applications of a consistence thicker than 
cerates, and of such tenacity and adhesiveness at the temperature 
of the body that when warmed and applied they will adhere firmly. 
They are used for two principal objects : 1st, to furnish mechanical 
support and to protect the part from the air ; and, 2d, to convey 
medicinal effects, especially of a stimulant and discutient character. 

In the chapter on Fixed Oils, the subject of the preparation and 
properties of lead plaster, oleo-margarate of lead, is fully presented. 



886 



PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 



This preparation is the basis of most plasters, though many are 
made from resinous substances, which are treated of under the ap- 
propriate head on pages 422 to 429. 

In accordance with the general plan of this work, a syllabus is 
presented embracing the composition of the officinal plasters, and 
remarks upon them, and the working formulas from the Pharma- 
copoeia are appended with selections from unofficial formulas. Some 
practical directions for their preparation and the mode of spreading 
them follow. 



Emp. plumbi. 
Emp. resinse. 

Emp. saponis. 
Emp. aconiti. 



Emp. belladonnae. 



Emplastra. — Syllabus of Officinal Plasters. 

(See page 386.) Diachylon plaster 



Emp. opii. 



Emp. assafoetidas. 



{1 part 
3 part 
12pai 



Emp. galbani comp. ■{ 



Emp. hydrargyria 



Emp. ammoniaci. 

Emp. ammoniaci 
hydrarg. 



f 1 part p. resin. 

\ 6 parts lead plaster. 

J 1 part soap. 

\ 9 parts lead plaster. 

oz. powdered aconite root, 

exhausted with alcohol. 

oz. resin plaster. 

1 part ale. extract. 

2 parts resin plaster. 
1 part ext. opium. 

ts B. pitch, 
parts lead plaster, 
f 2 parts assafoetida. 
j 2 parts lead plaster. 
| 1 part galbanum. 
L 1 part yellow wax. 
f 8 parts galbanum. 
1 part turpentine. 

3 parts B. pitch. 
[36 parts lead plaster, 
f 3 parts mercury. 

j 1 part olive oil. 

} 1 part resin. 

l_ 6 parts lead plaster. 

i G \Z S tl^ d ^ dilUt6d \ Stimulant; resolvent. 
^ acetic acid. j 



i Adhesive plaster. 
Very mild and less adhesive. 

Anodyne in neuralgia. 

> Anodyne in neuralgia, etc. 

> Anodyne. 

1 
i 
}■ Antispasmodic. 



Stimulant; antispasmodic. 

1 

}■ Discutient ; alterative. 
I 

J 



Emp. ferri. 

Emp. picis Burgundicse. 
Emp. picis canadensis. 
Emp. arnicse. 
Emp. picis cum canth. 
Emp. antimonii. 



f Ammoniac 
j Mercury §iij. 
j Olive oil 5j. 
[ Sulphur gr. viij. 

{1 part Fe 2 3 -fFe 2 C0 3 . 
8 parts lead plaster. 
2 parts B. pitch. 
12 parts B. pitch. 
1 part yellow wax. 
j 12 parts Canad. pitch. 
\ 1 part yellow wax. 
f 1 part ale. ext. aimica. 
\ 2 parts resin plaster, 
f 7 parts B. pitch. 
\ 1 part cerat. canth. 
f 1 part tart, antimony. 
\ 4 parts B. pitch. 



1 



Discutient; stimulant. 



Red strengthening 
plaster. 



roborant 



I Strengthening ; rubefacient. 
I Strengthening ; rubefacient. 
I Stimulant ; roborant. 
I Warming plaster. 

} 



Counter-irritant, producing 
"pustulation." 



REMARKS ON THE OFFICINAL PLASTERS. 

Lead plaster associated with soap is rendered less adhesive and 
more bland in its characters, furnishing an emollient preparation, 
SoajJ plaster, often confounded with soap cerate. 



WORKING FORMULAS FROM THE PHARMACOPOEIA. 887 

By mixing with resin, lead plaster is rendered more adhesive, 
and somewhat more irritating; this is Resin plaster, a very familiar 
preparation, and, when spread on cotton cloth, constitutes Adhesive 
plaster cloth. Some elegant plaster cloths are also prepared in which 
this excellent " body" is incorporated with mercury, belladonna, 
opium, etc., and spread upon cotton, linen, or silk fabrics. 

These should be kept in tin cans, and, when disposed to crackle, 
should be held to the lire till fused on the surface, and then laid 
away to cool thoroughly before being again rolled up. 

The skilful association of the medicinal substances prescribed in 
the officinal plasters, is accomplished mainly by fusion and stirring 
together. Belladonna and Aconite plasters are made by incorporat- 
ing the alcoholic extracts with resin and lead plaster, the extracts 
being softened and added as the plasters thicken by cooling. 
Opium plaster by the direction of the last ~Pharmacopazia is made 
from aqueous extract of opium. 

In Mercurial plaster the globules of mercury are extinguished by 
the use of resin, and in Blaster of ammoniac with mercury a little 
sulphur and oil are used to extinguish the mercury before asso- 
ciating it with the ammoniac. 

Ammoniac plaster is peculiar in its mode of preparation ; it con- 
sists of the pure gum-resin as dissolved in vinegar, strained and 
evaporated. Assafoctida and other imperfectly soluble gum-resins 
are purified by solution in alcohol, and evaporation to bring them 
to a suitable condition for incorporation into this form. A small 
proportion of these plasters sold by manufacturers come up to the 
officinal standard. 

Working Formulas from the Pharmacopoeia. 
Emplastrum Resinaz, U. S. P. {Adhesive Plaster.) 

Take of Resin, in fine powder, six troyounces. 
Lead plaster, thirty-six troyounces. 

To the plaster, melted over a gentle fire, add the resin, and mix 
them. 

Emplastrum Saponis, IT. S. P. (Soap Plaster.) 

Take of Soap, sliced, four troyounces. 

Lead plaster, thirty -six troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 

Pub the soap with water until brought to a semiliquid state ; 
then mix it with the plaster, previously melted, and boil to the 
proper consistence. 

Emplastrum Aconiti. 

Take of Aconite root, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, 
Resin plaster, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the aconite root with six fluidounces of alcohol, and 
pack in a conical percolator. Cover the surface with a disk of 
paper, and pour upon it ten fluidounces of alcohol. "When the 



PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 

liquid begins to drop from the percolator, close the lower orifice 
with a cork and set it aside for four days. Then remove the cork, 
and gradually pour on alcohol until two pints of tincture have been 
obtained, or the aconite root is exhausted. Distil off' a pint and a 
half of alcohol by means of a water-bath, and evaporate the residue 
to the consistence of a soft uniform extract. Add to this sufficient 
resin plaster, previously melted, to make the mixture weigh sixteen 
troyounces, and then mix thoroughly. 

Emplastrum Belladonnas, U. S. P. [Plaster of Belladonna.) 

Take of Belladonna root, in fine powder, sixteen troyounces. 
Alcohol, 
Kesin plaster, each, a sufficient quantity. 

Moisten the belladonna root with six fluidounces of alcohol, pack 
it in a conical percolator, and, having covered the surface with a 
disk of paper, pour on ten fluidounces of alcohol. When the liquid 
begins to drop from the percolator, close the lower orifice with a 
cork, and, having closely covered the percolator, set it aside for four 
days. Then remove the cork, and gradually pour on alcohol until 
two pints of tincture have slowly passed. Distil off by means of a 
water-bath a pint and a half of alcohol ; introduce the residue into 
a two-pint capsule, and evaporate on a water-bath to a soft uniform 
extract ; ascertain its weight, and, having added sufficient resin 
plaster, previously melted, to make the whole weigh sixteen troy- 
ounces, mix them thoroughly. 

Emplastrum Galbani Compositum, U. S. P. {Compound Plaster of 

Galbanum.) 
Take of Galbanum, eight troyounces. 
Turpentine, a troyounce. 
Burgundy pitch, three troyounces. 
Lead plaster, thirty-six troyounces. 

To the galbanum and turpentine, previously melted together and 
strained, add first the Burgundy pitch, and afterwards the plaster, 
melted over a gentle fire, and mix the whole together. 

Emplastrum Hydrargyria IT. S. P. {Plaster of Mercury.) 

Take of Mercury, six troyounces. 
Olive oil, 

Resin, each, two troyounces. 
Lead plaster, twelve troyounces. 

Melt the oil and resin together, and, when they have become 
cool, rub the mercury with them until globules of the metal cease 
to be visible. Then gradually add. the plaster, previously melted, 
and mix the whole together. 

Emplastrum Opii, TJ. S. P. {Plaster of Opium.) 

Take of Extract of opium, a troyounce. 

Burgundy pitch, three troyounces. 
Lead plaster, twelve troyounces. 
Water, a sufficient quantity. 



WORKING FORMULAS FROM THE PH A RM A C OPCEI A . 889 

Mix the extract with three fluidounces of water, and evaporate, 
by means of a water-bath, to a fluidounce and a half. Add this to 
the Burgundy pitch and plaster, melted together by means of a 
water-bath, and continue the heat for a short time, stirring con- 
stantly, that the moisture may be evaporated. 

Emplastrum Ammoniaci, U. S. P. (Plaster of Ammoniac.) 

Take of Ammoniac, five troy ounces. 

Diluted acetic acid, half a pint. 

Dissolve the ammoniac in the diluted acetic acid, and strain ; 
then evaporate the solution by means of a water-bath, stirring con- 
stantly, until it acquires the proper consistence. 

Emplastrum Ammoniaci cum Hydrargyro, U. S. P. (Plaster of Am- 
moniac with Mercury.) 

Take of Ammoniac, twelve troyounces. 
Mercuiy, three troj-ounces. 
Olive oil, sixty grains. 
Sublimed sulphur, eight grains. 

Heat the oil, and gradually add the sulphur, stirring constantly 
until they unite; then add the mercury, and triturate until globules 
of the metal cease to be visible. Boil the ammoniac with sufficient 
water to cover it, until they are thoroughly mixed ; then strain 
through a hair sieve, and evaporate, by means of a water-bath, until 
a small portion taken from the vessel hardens on cooling. Lastly, 
add the ammoniac, while yet hot, gradually to the mixture of oil, 
sulphur, and mercury, and thoroughly incorporate all the ingredients. 

Emplastrum Assafoetida?, U. S. P. (Plaster of Assafoetida.) 

Take of Assafoetida, 

Lead plaster, each, twelve troyounces. 

Galbanum, 

Yellow wax, each, six troyounces. 

Alcohol, three pints. 

Dissolve the assafoetida and galbanum in the alcohol by means of 
a water-bath, strain the liquid while hot, and evaporate to the con- 
sistence of honey ; then add the plaster and wax, previously melted 
together, stir the mixture well, and evaporate to the proper con- 
sistence. 

Emplastrum Eerri, U. S. P. (Strengthening Plaster.) 

Take of Subcarbonate of iron, three troyounces. 
Lead plaster, twenty-four troyounces. 
Burgundy pitch, six troyounces. 

Add the subcarbonate of iron to the plaster and Burgundy pitch, 
previously melted together, and stir them constantly until the 
mixture thickens on cooling. 



890 PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 

JEmplastrum Picis Burgundicce, U. S. P. {Burgundy Pitch Plaster.) 

Take of Burgundy pitch, seventy-two troyounces. 
Yellow wax, six troyounces. 

Melt them together, strain, and stir constantly until they thicken 
on cooling. 

PJmplastrum Picis Canadensis, U. S. P. (Hemlock Pitch Plaster.) 

Take of Canada pitch, seventy-two troyounces. 
Yellow wax, six troyounces. 

Melt them together, strain, and stir constantly until they thicken 
on cooling. 

Emplastrum Arnicai, U. S. P. (Arnica Plaster.) 

Take of Alcoholic extract of arnica, a troyounce and a half. 
Resin plaster, three troyounces. 

Add the extract to the plaster, previously melted by means of a 
water-bath, and mix them. 

Emplastrum Picis cum Cantharide, IT. S. P. (Warming Plaster.) 

Take of Burgundy pitch, forty-eight troyounces. 
Cerate of cantharides, four troyounces. 

Melt them together by means of a water-bath, and stir constantly 
until the mixture thickens on cooling. 

Emplastrum Antimonii, U. S. P. 

Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassium, in fine powder, a troyounce. 
Burgundy pitch, four troyounces. 

Melt the pitch by means of a water-bath, and strain; then add 
the powder, and stir them well together until the mixture thickens 
on cooling. 

Tartar emetic, if precipitated by pouring its solution into alcohol, 
95 per cent., is reduced to a very fine powder, which when dried is 
in the best condition for making ointment or plaster. 



Take of Litharge, 



Unofficinal Plasters. 
Logan's Plaster. 



Carbonate of lead, of each ......IS com. 

Castile soap 12 oz. com. 

Fresh butter . . 4 oz. 

Olive oil 2£ pints. 

Powdered gum mastich 2 drachms. 

Mix the soap, oil, and butter together; then add the oxide of 
lead and boil it gently over a slow fire for an hour and a half, or 
until it has a pale brown color, stirring constantly ; the heat may 
then be increased and the boiling continued, till a portion of the 
melted plaster being dropped on a smooth board is found not to 
adhere, then remove it from the fire and add the powdered gum 
mastich. 



THE SPREADING OF PLASTERS. 891 

Emplastrum Universalis. 

A plaster is officinal in several of the European Pharmacopoeias 
under different names, which appears to be identical with Keyser's 
Universal plaster, sold extensively in this country as a nostrum. 

The following is the formula of the Prussian Pharmacopoeia ; the 
proportions are by weight : — ■ 

Take of Ked lead, in very fine powder .f viij. 

Olive oil o xv J- 

Boil them in a proper vessel with constant agitation until the 
whole has assumed a blackish-brown color, then add — 

Yellow wax 5iv. 

And after this has been melted and well mixed — 

Camphor ^ij. 

Previously dissolved in a little olive oil. 

]\ T ow pour it out into suitable boxes, or into paper capsules, to be 
cut into square cakes when cold. 

Devices' Breast Plaster. (A Modified Formula.) 

Take of Lead plaster jfiij. 

Ammoniac plaster jfss. 

Logan's plaster 5iss. 

Spermaceti, 

Camphor, of each gij. 

Melt the plasters, then add the spermaceti and camphor, and re- 
move from the fire. 

Pancoasfs Sedative Plaster. 

Take of Extract of belladonna, 
Mercurial plaster, 
Lead plaster Equal parts. 

Mix by fusion and trituration. 

Plaster for Mammary Abscess. (Dr. Ell wood "Wilson.) 

Take of Belladonna plaster 1 part. 

Logan's plaster 2 parts. 

Melt them together and spread upon chamois leather. (See page 
893.) . 

Spreading of Plasters. 

Plasters are spread on skin of various kinds and finish, on cotton 
cloth of different qualities, and rarely on silk and paper; of those 
spread upon skin, the size is indicated in prescription, by the 
number of inches in each direction, or, when irregular shapes are 
ordered, by a pattern furnished the pharmacist. 

The spreading of plasters, which was formerly an important part 
of the business of the apothecary, has now, like many other opera- 
tions of his art, been monopolized by manufacturers, who, by making 



892 

this single branch of manufacture a specialty, acquire facility for 
the production of cheap and salable varieties. Machine-spread 
strengthening plasters are immensely popular outside the profession 
for a great variety of ailments, and they are undoubtedly better 
adapted to meet the public demand for cough remedies, and "pain 
eradicators," than the great majority of the "pectoral syrups," "hot 
drops," and anodynes, so extensively vended. Recently, the manu- 
facturers have prepared specific kinds of plasters, and sold them 
under appropriate names as Burgundy pitch, hemlock, and warm- 
ing plasters, so as to put them within the range of physicians' pre- 
scriptions. Some of them should make the series of officinal plasters 
in appropriate sizes and compounded of the best ingredients and 
strictly according to the Pharmacopoeia ; there would certainly be 
a demand for them, as apothecaries seldom covet the labor of pre- 
paring them extemporaneously. 

. In Prof. Procter's edition of Mohr and Redwood's Pharmacy, a 
machine for spreading the ordinary strengthening plasters is figured ; 
it consists of a block of hard wood, about twelve inches long, eight 
inches wide, and three and a half inches high ; the upper surface is 
curved from end to end, a tinned, iron, or steel frame cut out of 
the size and shape of the plaster to be spread is secured to the block 
by a hinge-joint, and when the end is brought down and fastened 
by hasps, it presses evenly and with force over the convex surface; 
a frame accompanies it for marking out the pattern on the leather, 
which is to be cut previously to being put on the machine. 

Another part of the apparatus is a bar of cast-steel an inch 
square, perfectly smooth, the ends drawn out and mounted with 
wooden handles; this is to be warmed gently by an alcohol lamp 
or by immersion in hot water previously to being used to smooth 
the surface of the plaster for which it is designed. The material, 
being melted in a copper skillet, is poured on the skin, properly 
secured on the curved surface by the steel frame, and smoothed by 
the warmed smoothing iron till of uniform thickness, the excess of 
plaster being pushed on to the frame and afterwards removed ; the 
plaster is then removed and laid away to harden. Skill in the use 
of this apparatus can only be acquired by experience ; but the most 
obvious precautions in this, as in the case of extemporaneous plasters, 
depend on the proper regulation of the temperature, both of the 
melted plaster when poured on, and of the smoothing iron applied; 
if too hot, the skin will be penetrated and the plaster will show 
on the unspread side, besides in most instances being deteriorated; 
if not hot enough the plaster will be laid on too thickly, and with 
an unpolished surface. 

Plasters to be spread extemporaneously of various sizes and 
patterns may be melted in a small metallic vessel over a gas or 
spirit lamp, and poured directly upon the skin, properly secured 
upon a flat surface, with several thicknesses of paper under it, then 
smoothed with a small plaster iron, moderately heated, or a large 
spatula, which skilfully managed answers equally well; or the 
plaster may be, as is perhaps more common, fused by the heat of 



THE SPREADING OF PLASTERS. 



893 



the plaster iron upon a piece of stout paper, transferred from this 
to the skin, and then smoothed by the gradually cooling iron. 

Figs. 248 and 249 show plaster irons of the kinds adapted to 
different sizes and kinds of plasters, the larger sizes being suitable 



Fig. 248. 






to spread a large plaster of slowly fusible material. "When the 
heat necessary to melt the plaster is derived from the iron, it 
should be first warmed to such temperature that, while it will 
occasion the plaster to flow, it will not scorch it. The iron should 
also retain sufficient heat, till the 
operation is complete, to impart a Fig. 249. 

smooth surface to the stiffened plas- 
ter. The small iron will do well to 
spread a warming plaster, belladonna 
plaster, or the similar easily fusible 
kinds. it; " 

The pattern of the plaster is usually a- 
cut out of a piece of smooth, stiff 

hardware paper, which is then pasted on to the skin with a good 
deal of flour or tragacanth paste, so that it shall not dry and adhere 
too firmly to the skin before its removal is allowable. "When the 
plaster is properly smoothed over the leather, the paper pattern 
is torn up, and leaves a clean neat edge of the prescribed shape ; 
where the material is brittle, it may be requisite that the warm 
plaster iron should be passed around the edge while removing the 
paper pattern. The margin of plasters should be at least half an 
inch wide where the material is very fusible and adhesive, thus 
saving much annoyance to those requiring to use them ; in a few 
instances, however, as in the case of soap plasters to be applied to 
bed sores, any required extent of the skin may be spread, and por- 
tions of the required size and shape may be cut off as needed ; this 
plaster, not being liable to " run," requires no margin. 

The material on which plasters are spread may be varied ac- 
cording to their use. Resinous plasters or warming plasters to be 
applied to the back or breast, as counter-irritants and mechanical 
supports, are spread on thick sheepskin, while opium and belladonna 
plasters, which are generally smaller and frequently applied about 
the face, may be spread on kid, split skin, or cotton cloth, and if 
they have precisely the consistence proper for this kind of applica- 
tion, they are less cumbrous and disagreeable than those spread on 
kid. I have found advantage in spreading the large circular plasters 
to be applied over the breast of the female on the kind of skin called 



891 



PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 



"chamois" wliich is more flexible and yielding, though equally 
durable with the differently dressed "sheepskin." 

Breast Plasters. — The frequent demand for stimulating, emollient, 
and sedative applications to the mammae of females, as prevent- 
ives or remedies for mammary abscess, has given rise to several 
combinations, described on page 891 ; it now remains to indicate a 
suitable pattern for this kind of plaster. 

The usual shape prescribed is that of a circle, about 8 inches in 
diameter, with a hole in the middle ; the diameter should be varied 
with the size of the mammae, and the hole should in no case be less 
than an inch in diameter, so as to allow ample room for the nipple 
to project and even for the infant to be nursed if required. 

In order to supply these to physicians in distant localities, who 
have not facilities for spreading them or ready resort to competent 
pharmacists, I have made the pattern shown in the drawings. The 
diameter of the spread plaster is 7 inches, the margin 1 inch, the 
orifice for the nipple is placed nearer to one side, in conformity with 
the shape of the enlarged mammae, and the fact that the hardness 
is apt to be on the under, swagging portion. This hole has the 
diameter of 1J inch, besides a very narrow margin. The strip 
remaining unspread is designed to be cut open on the dotted lines, 
Fig. 251, adapting the plaster to the curved shape of the breast 
and to breasts of different sizes. The pattern of tinned iron, Fig. 
250, is designed to be tacked over the smooth skin to facilitate the 



Fia:. 250. 



Fig. 251. 




Pattern for breast plaster. 



Mammary abscess plaster. 



spreading of these plasters, which are of various materials, the most 
highly esteemed composition being that given on page 891, as 
recommended by Dr. Ell wood Wilson. In some cases the simple 
Logan's plaster is spread, for others tobacco ointment, and for 
others Deshler's salve. The plasters proper are best spread on 
chamois skin, but ointments and cerates will, perhaps, do better on 
highly glazed cotton cloth, which, as it is less elastic and flexible 



THE SPREADING OF PLASTERS. 



895 



than the skin, may require to be somewhat nicked to adapt it to 
the convex surface for which it is designed. 

Annular Corn-Plasters. — Under this name is prepared a very con- 
venient application to corns. Adhesive plaster is spread on thick 
buckskin, and then, with a punch, cut into small round plasters, 
about | inch in diameter, then with another punch a small hole is 
cut in the middle. Applied over a sore corn, it protects /rom the 
pressure of the shoe and gives great relief. 

White felt and amidou plasters, imported from England, have the 
same shape and general character of these ; they consist of a gelati- 
nous preparation, similar to that used in making court-plaster, 
spread upon peculiar thick material of great softness and elasticity. 

Plaster Cloth. — -The method of spreading plaster on muslin or 
cotton cloth, for sale by the yard, requires the use of peculiar appa- 
ratus, which is kept with great secrecy by the few manufacturers 
who possess them, and I do not know of their being heretofore 
figured in works on pharmacy. This material is not so well adapted 
as sheepskin to plasters which require to be spread thickly or which 
are very volatile or easily deteriorated by exposure; it has been, 
until recently, employed almost exclusively in spreading adhesive 
plaster for the surgeon and for popular use. 

Since procuring the apparatus shown in Fig. 252 I have used 
it for belladonna and mercurial plasters, and find it applicable to 
almost any of the kinds having lead plaster as a basis, which 
from their convenience of application and comparative cheapness, 
when spread in this way, are well adapted to popular employment. 

Fig. 252. 




£ 



v 



a 



/ 



Machine for spreading plaster cloths. 

The frame of this machine is of cast iron ; its construction will 
be obvious from a study of the drawing ; the cotton cloth is wound 
tightly on to the roller on the extreme right, by the aid of the 



896 PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 

crank and passed under the iron rod beneath, and is thence drawn 
by a gentle and uniform motion under the receptacle for the plaster 
which is shown near the left end of the machine ; this consists of a 
marble slab at bottom, and two movable heavy steel knives fitting 
into grooves in the ends, and pressing by their weight upon the 
cloth passing under them ; this pressure is designed to be so adjusted 
as to occasion the proper thickness of plaster to be left smoothly 
deposited upon the cloth as it is drawn from under them ; this 
thickness will also be much influenced by the heat and consequent 
fluidity of the melted plaster. One of the steel knives is shown in 
the lower figure, removed from its position, with the tin vessel in 
wdiich it is designed to be warmed by the application of hot water 
previous to being used. 

The muslin selected for spreading must be first " calendered,'' a 
process of smoothing between hot rollers which gives it a perfectly 
smooth and close surface, and prevents the melted plaster from 
being too much absorbed. The art of using the machine consists 
in securing the proper degree of smoothness and fluidity of the 
plaster, upon which the thickness of the coat left upon the cloth 
will depend, and in the steadiness with which the cloth is drawn 
through the machine. Any irregularity in this motion will occa- 
sion variations in the thickness and a streaked appearance across 
the plaster ; variations are produced longitudinally by any deflec- 
tion or irregularity of surface of the scraping and smoothing irons, 
or by any solid particles present in the melted plaster. On the 
whole, it appears to be the conclusion of all who attempt the 
spreading of plaster cloth, that the operation is too difficult to 
justify any in undertaking it whose demand for the plaster will 
not be such as to make it a frequent operation. Probably those 
who practise plaster spreading on a large scale have expedients for 
regulating the flow of the melted plaster, the pressure of the 
smoothing irons, and the steady movement of cloth, which are not 
present in the machine above described. 

A description of plaster-cloth is imported from England under 
the name of doeskin, the tissue of which is much thicker and has 
a nap on the uns|)read surface ; it is not unlike canton flannel. Its 
superiority consists in its greater body and thickness, adapting it 
to some applications to which ordinary muslin is less suited. 

Plasmata.* 

Under the name of glyceroles, glycamils, and plasmata, some 
unofficinal preparations of the consistence of pomades have been 
introduced into medicine within a few years. They are made by 
heating starch and glycerin together ; the glycerin may be pre- 
viously medicated, and the preparation thus adapted to therapeu- 
tical applications, or medicinal substances in powder may be 
incorporated mechanically with the starch, and thus suspended in 
the preparation. They do not vary with changes of temperature as 

* See Pliarm. Journ. and Trans., Feb. 1858, and Amer. Journ. Pharin., 1858, p. 252. 



PLASMATA. 897 

ointments do, and are not liable to become rancid or change in their 
chemical composition, though their consistence becomes thinner by 
time. The following are introduced as among the most useful for- 
mulas of this class : — 

Plasma. (G. F. Schacht.) 

Take of Glycerin, one fluidounce. 

Starch, in powder, seventy grains. 

Mix the powdered starch with the glycerin and gradually heat 
the mixture to about 240°, constantly stirring. 

This constitutes a basis from which may be produced prepara- 
tions corresponding with most of the cerates and ointments of the 
Pharmacopoeia, 

Plasma of Tar. (Glycerole de Goudron.) 

Take of Glycerin, one ounce. 

Purified tar, half a drachm. 
Powdered starch, half an ounce. 

Heat the starch with the glycerin and tar, stirring them 
together. 

This application is recommended as an astringent and resolvent, 
without producing irritation; it allays itching, dries up excoria- 
tions, and dissipates cutaneous phlegmasia^. 

Plasma Belladonnas. (London Ophthal. Hospital.*) 

Take of Extract of belladonna 30 grains. 

Glycerin 1 ounce. 

Starch 1 drachm. 

Make a plasma secundum artem. 

Plasma Plumbi. (C. S. Tilyard.) 

Take of Glycerin, two fluidounces. 

Sol. subacetate of lead, three fluidrachms. 

Camphor, ten grains. 

Bermuda arrowroot, one and a half drachm. 

Rub the arrowroot into a fine powder, and having mixed the 
glycerin and extract of lead, stir it into the mixture. Pour the 
whole into a capsule and heat over a spirit lamp cautiously, con- 
stantly stirring until it becomes transparent, and assumes the 
consistence of paste. Having powdered the camphor by means of 
a few drops of alcohol, rub a little of the plasma with it in a 
mortar until well incorporated, then add the remainder and stir a 
few minutes. 

When first made it is viscid and ropy, but in a day or two loses 
these properties and becomes at the ordinary temperature (say 60° 
F.) of the consistence of soft ointment. 

* From Squire's Pharmacopoeia of the Loudon Hospitals. 

57 



898 PLASTERS, PLASMATA, AND CATAPLASMS. 

Glycamyl Sinapis. (M. GTrimault.) 

Take of Glycerin 13 drachms. 

Starch 2 drachms. 

Volatile oil of mustard 80 drops. 

Mix them by the aid of heat. 

This preparation is designed as an extemporaneous sinapism ; it 
is an elegant though costly substitute. 

Glycerin Pomade of Iodide of Potassium. (M. Thirault.) 

Take of Glycerin 1000 parts. 

Almond soap 50 parts. 

Powd. iodide of potassium 130 parts. 

Dissolve in a water-bath, pour immediately into a warm mortar 
and triturate briskly for a quarter of an hour. It may be aroma- 
tized at pleasure. 

It is a permanent preparation ; the iodine salt is in solution and 
in a favorable condition for absorption. It neither colors the skin 
nor the linen. 

Basis for Topical Application. (M. Startin.) 

Take of Gum tragacanth ^ ounce. 

Glycerin 1 ounce. 

Lime-water 2 ounces. 

Rose-water, sufficient to form a soft jelly. 

This is an elegant material, said to be less deliquescent than the 
Plasma of Schacht. 

Glycerinum Amyli, Ph. Br. 

Take of Starch, one ounce avoir. 

Glycerin, eight fluidounces imp. 

E,ub together in a mortar until intimately mixed and then trans- 
fer to a porcelain capsule, heat to 250°, stirring constantly till the 
starch particles are broken and a perfectly smooth jelly is formed. 

This is practically the same as the plasma introduced by Mr. 
Schacht, noticed a few pages back. 

Cataplasms. 

The following is introduced as a specimen of the unofficinal class 
of cataplasms, to which mustard plaster and the numerous varieties 
of poultices belong. 

Cataplasma Lini. {Flaxseed Poultice.) 

Take of Flaxseed meal, four ounces. 
Boiling water, sufficient. 

Stir them together into a suitable mass. 

The oil existing naturally in the flaxseed meal serves to render 
this a very emollient application. Some physicians prefer a mix- 
ture of flaxseed meal with cake meal (from which the oil has been 
extracted) for the purpose. 



ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 899 

Cataplasma Sinapis. (Mustard Plaster or Sinapism.) 

Take of Mustard flour, four ounces. 

Wheat or rye flour, three ounces. 
Boiling water, half a pint, or sufficient. 

Stir the whole into a soft mass upon a suitable dish. 

The strength of the sinapism is varied by changing the relative 
proportions of the ingredients. For children there should be about 
half the proportion of mustard. Care should be taken to remove 
it before a blister is created. 

Spice Plaster, (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) 

Take of Powd. capsicum, 
Powd. cinnamon, 

Powd. cloves, each 2 ounces. 

Eye meal, 

Spirits, 

Honey, of each Sufficient. 

To be made into a cataplasm by trituration on a plate, and 
spreading upon a close fabric. It should be made up extempora- 
neously when required. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

All the processes described in the previous practical parts of this 
work are subservient to the important operations of supplying or 
administering remedial agents to the public, called dispensing, and 
the art of compounding extemporaneous prescriptions of physicians. 

The formulas given in the last chapter have been introduced 
mainly with a view to acquainting the physician and pharmacist with 
the best forms for combining the leading remedies ; the act of com- 
pounding these is a difficult branch of knowledge, only acquired by 
an habitual training of the faculties of observation and reflection, 
and the attainment of a certain manual dexterity and expertness of 
manipulation, of more or less importance in every practical pursuit, 
and indispensable in this. 

The ordinary process of handing out medicines to the applicants 
over the counter involves responsibilities connected with no other 
branch of the trade, and calls for the exercise of constant vigilance 
to guard against the least thoughtlessness or inattention, and to 
fortity the mind against the many distracting influences constantly 
present in a place of business. To these must be added occasional 
vexatious evidences of ignorance or carelessness on the part of phy- 
sicians, to overcome which, the pharmacist must tax the utmost 
resources of his art, while many evidences of ignorance, prejudice, 



900 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

and perversity on the part of his customers and his rivals in busi- 
ness, call for all his patience, self-control, and conscientiousness. 

It is thus apparent that the subject of this chapter constitutes the 
most difficult practical branch of pharmacy, for, in addition to the 
variety and extent of knowledge required for the performance of 
the various duties involved in it, a salesman and dispenser of medi- 
cines must possess rare personal qualities to render him popular 
and successful in his calling. 

Neatness, agility, and readiness of manner, combined with uni- 
form watchfulness and care in all the important manipulations re- 
quired of him, will inspire confidence, and secure patronage; while 
slothfulness, negligence, and indifference to what may seem petty 
details, will invariably inure to the disadvantage of their possessor. 
As the art of dispensing can only be acquired by practical expe- 
rience at the counter, its numerous and varied details cannot be 
taught by books. Authors when treating of this subject in a truly 
useful way can at best only lay down general rules, and set forth 
leading principles in regard to what must become the subject of 
daily experience. 

In the hint ^ which are here offered, I have chiefly in view the 
country practitioner, whose necessities compel him to undertake 
the business of dispensing and compounding, and the student of 
medicine and pharmacy, who would seek to obtain from books the 
leading topics on which to found his practical and experimental 
routine of studies. 

Tlie Furniture of the Physician 1 s Dispensing Office. 

In the first preliminary chapter, most of the forms of apparatus 
required by the country practitioner in dispensing were described 
and fully illustrated, and in the succeeding parts of the work, many 
useful implements, chiefly employed in manufacturing processes, 
have been introduced in connection with their uses and modes of 
construction; a few will be illustrated along with the manipula- 
tions yet to be treated upon. It will be observed that many of 
these forms of apparatus are by no means indispensable, and that 
all the processes described throughout the work can be performed 
with but few and cheap implements. 

The dispensing office should have a counter of size proportioned 
to its anticipated use, with a closet in it, and a few drawers; it 
should be placed very near to the bottles containing the medicines. 
The physician will require no more than a table of perhaps six or 
eight feet long, unless his dispensing business exceeds the require- 
ments of his own medical and surgical practice, but this should be 
made of about three feet in height, solid, and with a heavy top of 
hard wood, or otherwise covered with oil cloth. 

The counter should contain a pair of large scales and the pre- 
scription scales and case, which, however, should be so placed as 
not to be jarred by the contusion of substances with the pestle and 
mortar, and may very appropriately be placed on an adjacent shelf 



physician's dispensing office. 901 

or table appropriated exclusively to them, and quite within reach 
in manipulating at the counter. 

A closet or shelves under the counter may be appropriated to 
mortars and pestles, funnel, etc. ; one shallow drawer with divi- 
sions should be appropriated to papers, cut for dispensing, as below 
described ; another to labels, pill boxes, powder boxes, corks, scis- 
sors, etc., each in a separate apartment ; another may contain the 
pill machine and tile, the spatulas, and plaster iron ; a place must 
be appropriated to a towel, and a tank, or, preferably, a hydrant with 
a sink should be near at hand ; a few deep drawers will be found 
useful for containing the drugs bought in packages, and for which 
no bottles are provided. 

On the top of the counter, the cork presser, the twine reel, and 
the alcohol lamp and graduated measure, may be appropriate orna- 
ments. If practicable to have another counter for small manufac- 
turing operations, it would be well to avoid cumbering the dis- 
pensing counter with a gas furnace, but otherwise the arrange- 
ments described in part second will be convenient ; gas may be led 
by a flexible tube from the pendant or side-light nearest at hand, 
and will be very convenient for heating purposes. It is well to have 
immediately under the top of the dispensing counter, two slides, on 
which most of the manipulations are performed ; one of these should 
be kept exclusively for powders, and the other used indiscrimi- 
nately, to save the top from being soiled. 

The stock of medicines should be arranged in a case, or on 
shelves, within a few feet of the counter. In the appendix will be 
found the dimensions necessary for the outfits there published. 
The shelves should be somewhat more extended than the actual 
dimensions required at first, to allow for additions from time to 
time, and care should be taken in making these additions to have 
the glassware correspond with the original stock. In the first pre- 
liminary chapter, the whole subject of glassware and tin boxes is 
fully considered. 

The books of reference, which should be ample — and if the pro- 
prietor himself, and those under his instructions, would keep pace 
with the advance of the times, should include the American Jour- 
nal of Pharmacy, and American Druggist's Circular, bound from 
year to year — should be in a neighboring case ; this might be ad- 
vantageously arranged to contain also a skeleton, and the surgical, 
dental, and obstetric instruments, bandages, splints, etc. The bou- 
gies and catheters should be in a tin case, so also the adhesive plas- 
ter, blistering tissue, gum-elastic bougies, nipple shields, etc. 

It is to be regretted that the proper arrangement and garnishing 
of the dispensing office should be generally considered of so little 
importance by practitioners at the commencement of their career; 
it is apt to have more effect upon the future success of the physi- 
cian than he can appreciate in advance. 

There is a difference of sentiment and a varying practice in regard 
to compounding prescriptions, behind a case or screen, or in full 



902 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

view of customers ; the practice has gained ground of latter years 
of conducting all the operations of compounding at a screened 
counter, and holding intercourse with the customers only at the 
time of receiving the prescription and handing out the preparation. 
Although it has been observed that where this is the practice there 
is often less care bestowed upon the cleanliness and nicety of the 
operation, than where the whole is subjected to the scrutiny of a 
customer, who, though perhaps no pharmacist, may be a critical 
observer of the neatness and expertness of manipulations ; yet this 
should not permit the proprietor of any pharmaceutical establish- 
ment from taking this very important method of preventing this 
most common cause of accident, conversation while engaged in 
compounding remedies. Too much care can hardly be bestowed 
upon the accuracy of the weighings and the completeness of the 
admixture of the ingredients prescribed, and. the circumstances 
attending their being compounded and dispensed should all be cal- 
culated to carry out the instructions of the physician and to win 
the confidence of the patient and his friends. 

Dispensing. 

The peculiar qualities and great variety of the drugs and prepa- 
rations called for by his customers require of the dispenser of 
medicines considerable experience and aptness to understand the 
numerous inquiries, besides a retentive memory to recall the locali- 
ties of the different, and sometimes rare, articles in his shop, with 
their cost and selling price. 

This difficulty is increased by the fact that ignorant people and 
children often apply to him for medicines, the names of which are 
only imperfectly known to them, and he is compelled to form a 
notion of their requirements after a series of questions, which may 
or may not be skilfully put and cheerfully answered. 

Every dispenser of medicines, and especially every young man 
who has yet to win a reputation, should cultivate habits of polite- 
ness and deference, even to the poor and ignorant, and to aid him 
in this let him remember how little opportunity the public generally 
have had to acquaint themselves with drugs, which were for so 
many centuries wrapped in an obscure nomenclature, and considered 
as falling within the special province of a single profession, priding 
themselves upon the secrecy and even mystery of their craft. This 
reflection should also induce the pharmacist to seek occasions in the 
course of his daily contact with the public to interest inquiring 
minds in the commercial, botanical, and chemical history of the 
articles he dispenses, and to explain their uses, and even in conversa- 
tion with the least intelligent to remove the rough edge of their 
ignorance, by well-directed remarks and explanations. This course 
is not only useful to the customer but serves to interest and im- 
prove the dispenser, and to raise him in the esteem of those, the 
meanest of whom may have it in their power to add to or detract 
from his reputation and his business. 



DISPENSING OF SOLIDS. 903 

One of the most common annoyances to the apothecary arises 
from the idea, which not unfrequently finds expression, that he is 
charging an undue profit upon his articles ; this is a natural con- 
clusion in the mind of the purchaser of drugs from their wide 
difference between the relative prices charged for small and larger 
quantities. Many answers to comments on his prices will suggest 
themselves to the ingenious salesman, bat to make these conclusive 
he must show by the precision and judgment with which he con- 
ducts his business, and by the neatness and exactness which he 
brings to bear upon every little package he sends out, that he 
regards his vocation not as a common trade, merely to buy and sell 
and get gain, but that as a man of science and a careful conservator 
of the interests of his customer, as well as his own, he amply earns 
all the pecuniary advantages which his business is supposed to bring. 

Dispensing of Solids. 

The business of dispensing involves the manipulation of weigh- 
ing, measuring, wrapping, and labelling. These require little 
description or comment here. The usual practice with pharmacists 
is to weigh all solid articles upon the paper in which they are to be 
wrapped, and where great nicety is required, as in the case of very 
costly articles, to balance the paper with a piece of like size upon 
the opposite dish of the scales. Avoirdupois weights are used in 
all ordinary dispensing operations. Some liquids which would soil 
a graduated measure, such as copaiva, Venice turpentine, Canada 
balsam, and the fixed oils, are usually weighed in the vessel in 
which they are to be dispensed; this may be a bottle, gallipot, oint- 
ment box, tumbler, or other convenient vessel with a wide mouth ; 
in other cases the quantity is conveniently determined by the size 
of the vial, the retail prices of liquids being usually graduated 
according to their liquid measure. 

Folding and Dispensing of Powders. — The first operation taught 
students in the school of practical pharmacy is this ; there are thou- 
sands who have felt the want of such instruction all their lives. 

The paper usually purchased for folding packages of medicine is 
called " white druggists' wrapping paper ;" its size is called double 
medium, each sheet being about 38 x 24 J inches. This sheet cut 
into 2 sheets 24 J x 19 = the medium size. The thickness of the 
paper is quite important; a flimsy paper renders it almost impossible 
to make neat packages, and as the thickness of paper is determined 
greatly by its weight, the proper thickness is that of paper of 45 
to 50 lbs. per ream. The medium sheet is thus conveniently 
divided for dispensing purposes : — 

Into 4 sheets 12 x 9 J inches suitable for j- flb papers. 
6 " 9J x 8 " " I Bb papers. 

12 " 6J x 6J " " 1 oz. papers. 

Fig. 253 shows a \ ft> paper. To fold a package, this is laid upon 
the scale dish and filled with an appropriate quantity; of a moder- 



904 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS, 




Paper for packages. 



Fig. 253. ately heavy article, like Epsom salts or 

cream of tartar, this will be 4 oz. ; of a light 
article, like senna or chamomile, say 1 oz. 
The paper is placed before the operator in 
the direction here shown ; a little crease is 
made on the nearest end so as to form a 
•flap into which the furthest edge is fitted, 
and the whole turned over upon the con- 
taining substance so as to form a crease 
when laid evenly down upon it, at the 
middle or near the further side, according 
as a wide or narrow bundle is desired. 

The oval cylinder is now loosely closed 
up at one end by turning it over, and is 
held up with the crease towards the ope- 
rator, the thumb pressing it firmly to pre- 
vent its bulging. Now, with the forefinger, the upper end of the 
cylinder is pressed in against the containing substance, and the 
two sides of the paper being rolled into the position they naturally 
take, the whole upper flap is laid down immediately above the con- 
taining substance and pressed into a firm and even crease. The 
package is now inverted, the other end is opened out, rolled in, 
and folded over in like manner. 

The next operation is to label the package; this requires very 
little paste, only sufficient should be applied to prevent its slipping 

about; the label is put immediately in line 
with the crease, unless this is too low down, 
and then it connects the crease with the 
part below. The next operation is to tie 
the package, which is done by laying it on 
the fiat or labelled side, and passing the 
string first across it and then lengthwise, se- 
curing it by a bow-knot at the edge where it 
was first creased. When the package is 
large or quite oblong, the string is made to 
pass twice across it and once lengthwise. The string used should 
be thin and free from fuzz ; linen is the best material. The ball of 
tying string may be put into a small apartment of the drawer and 
gradually unwound as required, or it may be used from a reel. 

Small powders for containing but a single dose of medicines 
should be put up in glazed writing paper. The kind called flat-cap 
is economical and adapted to the purpose. A sheet of fiat-cap will 
furnish sixteen of the most common size, or nine of the larger or 
Seidlitz powder size. Fig. 255 represents the shape of these. A 
little crease is made along the long side into which the opposite 
edge is laid, and the paper being folded over is laid down in the 
crease just beyond the middle, or at the middle, according to the 
width desired. The ends are now folded over a spatula so as to 
make flaps of equal length, and the package or powder, as it is 
called, is complete. In dispensing simple powders, I use small 



Fiff. 254. 




Paper package. 



PACKAGES AND POWDERS. 



905 



envelopes, Fig. 257 ; there are several sizes, which leave nothing to 
desire. Those opening at the end, Fig. 258, are in greater request, 
as the papers contained are less liable to drop out. 



Fig. 255. 



Fig. 256. 



Fig. 258. 




Powder. 



Fig. 25: 





Paper for power. 



Envelope for powder. 



Powders are often directed in considerable numbers, frequently, 
as in Prescription ^o. 73, twelve at once ; in this case, it is impor- 
tant to have the powders all of one length, so as to fit in a little 
box, called a powder-box or lozenge-box. 

The boxes used for pills (when pasteboard ones are employed), 
lozenges, and powders should have their appropriate labels pasted 
on them beforehand, so that there will be no unnecessary detention, 
and no liability of causing the ink to " run" and thus disfigure and 
render the directions indistinct. Directions for Seidlitz powders in 
single pairs, which are dispensed most neatly in envelopes, should 
be thus affixed and dried before the powders are placed in them. 

Gauges for folding powders are sold by dealers in druggists' 
sundries ; their use is twofold — to regulate the length of the pow- 
der, and to facilitate the folding ; the two end creases are made by 
simply pressing the paper over the blades between the thumb and 
finger. 

The expense of these is saved by cutting a piece of tin of the 
required width, and tacking it on to one corner of the slide appro- 
priated to powders. With a penknife, the board may be cut out 
to the thickness of the tin, so that the paper will slip readily on to 
the tin, and be turned over by the thumb and finger; this is sub- 
stituted on the counter shown in Figs. 34 and 35 by a small wooden 
powder gauge screwed on to the face of the slide appropriated to 
dispensing powders ; a great many powders can be folded in a few 
minutes by the use of this simple contrivance which takes up no 
room and is never out of the way when wanted. 

Powders are often dispensed in bulk to be divided by the patient 
according to some standard of proximate measurement, for instance, 
as much as will lay on a sixpence, or may be taken up by the point 
of a penknife, or will fill a salt spoon ; this has the advantage of 
economy in cases where the treatment is likely to be continued for 
a long time; but, as a general rule, it is better that the doses should 
be divided by the pharmacist, whose eye becomes accustomed to 
the least deviation from accuracy in dividing. The pharmaceutical 



906 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS, 



tyro should practise weighing successively definite quantities of 
the more commonly prescribed medicines, and laying them out on 
appropriate papers so as to become proficient in dividing them by 
the eye. 

When dispensed in bulk with a view to being taken at intervals 
in approximate doses, powders should be put into vials with tole- 
rably wide mouths, or into turned wooden boxes, such as are used 
for tooth powders, not into ordinary paper packages. Volatile or 
deliquescent powders, whether in bulk or divided in separate 
papers, should be dispensed in wide- mouth vials well corked — the 
same is true of charcoal and magnesia, which are otherwise apt to 
be scattered over surrounding objects and wasted. 

The Dispensing of Liquids. — By attention to the liability of 
liquids to ferment, or to part with volatile active principles, or to 
deteriorate by exposure to atmospheric influence, the pharmacist will 
learn that advantages almost invariably result from the selection 
of well-stoppered pint and quart tincture bottles for the dispensing 
shelves in preference to half gallons and gallons. These bottles are 
necessarily frequently opened, admitting air and allowing of evapo- 
ration, and they are exposed to bright light which is one of the 
most potent causes of chemical change ; bottles of these sizes are 
also much more convenient to handle than larger ones, and by 
having suitable funnels at hand, may be replenished as often as 
required from stock bottles kept in the cellar or other appropriate 
depository. 

Under the head of solution, in the third part of this work, and 
of the liquid forms of medicines in the fifth part, and, indeed, 
throughout all the practical parts, I have endeavored to impress 
such facts connected with the preparation and use of this class of 
medicines as would be most useful to the student, and I may con- 
clude the subject here by reference to the selection of vials, corking, 
labelling, etc. 

Of the several varieties of vials shown in Part I., the kind best 

adapted to the purposes of the country physician and to the great 

majority of pharmacists is the German flint, Fig. 

Fig. 259. 259 ; it has the advantage over the flint vial of being 

A cheaper, and stronger ; while it is far better than the 

common quality of green glass. The manufacturers 
of green glass make many of their vials without 
lips, from the fact that dealers in handling and re- 
packing the lipped vials suffer loss from these being 
much broken about the lip. A vial is, however, of 
little use for many of the purposes of the physician 
without a good, rather broad, and thin lip, which 
will allow of. the pouring of the liquid from it with- 
out its running back and down the outside. This is especially true 
of small vials from which drops are to be administered. 

Many of the large dispensing establishments have adopted their 
own distinctive and uniform styles of vials, which are made in 
moulds of all the sizes required for ordinary dispensing, and are 




German flint vial. 



DISPENSING OF LIQUIDS. 907 

certainly more recherche and characteristic than any that could be 
found in commerce. Other leading stores, not seeking any pecu- 
liarity in their style of vials, are content to purchase the best pro- 
ductions of the !N"ew England Glass Company, who produce glass- 
ware probably unsurpassed in elegance by any in the world. 
Numerous manufactories in other parts of the United States, espe- 
cially in Pittsburg, Pa., are largely concerned in supplying flint- 
glass prescription and dispensing vials lit for the best class of 
customers in our country. 

With a view to economy of time, the sink for washing vials, the 
vials themselves, the labels and corks, will be conveniently located 
near the front of the shop, and it is very desirable that an assort- 
ment of these necessary articles for dispensing liquids shall be 
always within reach of the counter clerks, in a condition for im- 
mediate use. The mode of disposing the assortment of washed 
vials differs in different establishments ; some hang them while yet 
moist on nails or pegs with the mouth inclined downward that they 
may drain and be free from liability to collect dust, until wanted 
for use. This method takes more space than is generally at com- 
mand, and seems to be less desirable than keeping them in a par- 
titioned drawer. The sink should have shelves or racks arranged 
over it for draining recently washed articles, and the vials should 
not be put into the drawer for use till dry. In the Preliminary 
Chapter, the variable quality of corks is referred to, and it is only 
necessary again to call attention to the great ad- 
vantage in this as in most other purchases of Fig. 260. 
selecting the best, and especially those of the kind 
called homoeopathic, which are fitted with much 
greater facility to the vials. 

There is no economy in procuring cheap corks, 
as prices are pretty exactly according to quality, 
and of the inferior qualities a lar°;e number are ™ 

., j.. „ J- & Tapering and 

quite mint tor use. straight corks. 

The cork drawer should not be too near the fire, 
as they are deteriorated by long-continued drying. The cork should 
always be adjusted to the bottle before putting the liquid into it, 
so that if it should not fit, it may not be injured by contact with 
the liquid, and may be thrown in with the corks again. 

The neat appearance depends chiefly on its being clean and 
having a clear fresh surface at top ; this may generally be attained 
by the use of a sharp knife, care being taken not to cut it off' so 
short as to be inconvenient to extract again. The practice of cap- 
ping over the cork with a piece of fancy paper or damp kid gives a 
handsome finish to the preparation, and secures it from being opened 
by children or others who may be sent for the medicine ; but in 
small sales it scarcely repays for the time consumed. 

The most finished method for dispensing prescriptions is without 
doubt the metallic foil cap made of a size appropriate to the vials 
to be capped; these are generally stamped with the name of the 
dispenser. 




908 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Fig. 261. 




Spirit lamp. 



Heavy and good quality tinfoil is a beautiful capping for corks, 
and may be applied without a string to secure it; it will take the 
impression of a stamp with considerable distinctness. With a view 
of capping operations, a small pair of scissors, different from those 
adapted to the general purposes of the counter, will be 
almost indispensable. 

The fashion of stamping the cork at the top with a 
die upon sealing wax has lately become quite general; 
to accomplish it with facility and neatness a small 
spirit lamp, Fig. 261, or a similar lamp made with a 
vial and glass tube should be provided ; the flame of 
alcohol is best for the purpose, because not liable to 
smoke the wax. A stamp should be provided with 
the name or initials, or some appropriate device or 
trade mark, which will give character to the preparation dispensed 
and indicate its origin. 

The cork presser, Fig. 262, is now so common and well known as 
scarcely to require mention ; in using it, care should be taken to 

press the whole length of the cork, 
Fig. 262. otherwise, if it is rather dry, it 

may be cracked at the point where 
the pressure of the machine ceases, 
and hence will break off in at- 
tempting to remove it from the 
bottle. It is best adapted to the 
larger sized corks, and is quite 
unsuitable to be applied to " ho- 
cork presser. mceopathic corks." An improved 

cork press patented by C. Lochman 
is also figured. It consists of a segment of cast-iron spiral fastened 
to a suitable block, and a wheel which is partially rotated, thus 




Fig 263. 




IiOchman's rotary cork press. 



running the cork between the interior of the spiral and the surface 
of the circle. As the wheel rotates it carries the cork further into 
the space, which gradually diminishes; the cork is thus pressed 
uniformly, and is not so likely to be crushed. 



physician's blank labels. 



909 



Foi 



! Take a teaspoonful every hours, 

as directed. 

Dr 



For.. 



Take a teaspoonful times 

a day, as directed. 

Dr 



A.S DIRECTED. 





Take 
Dr. 


drops times a day, 
as directed. 








Take 
Dr. 


drops every hours, 1 
as directed. 





For 


Take a tablespoonful 

a day, as directed. 

Dr 


times 







Powders. 




Take one every 


hours, 


as directed. 




Dr. 















Powders. 








Take < 


jne 


times 


a day, 




as 


directed. 




Dr. 

I 










- 



D, 




910 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Fig. 264. 



Labelling medicinal preparations is very much neglected by 
country practitioners, frequently for want of facilities ; it is, how- 
ever, too important a matter to be overlooked in any well-ordered 
dispensary. A small sheet of blank labels may be procured for a 
trifling sum, adapted exactly to the wants of the particular .indi- 
vidual, or the druggist should have them printed for his customers. 
I have for several years sold sets somewhat like that on the pre- 
ceding page, which by filling up the blanks serve most the purpose 
of the physician. 

The apothecary will of course have, besides his ordinary printed 
slip labels, suitable prescription labels, with his business card and 
an appropriate space for filling up with the names 
of drugs, or with directions and the number and 
date of the prescription, for future reference. Few 
things add more to the reputation of the apothecary 
than the neatness and elegance of his labels, both 
in printing and chirography. 

Some pharmacists prefer to gum all their 
labels so that they will adhere by moistening alone; 
this is done by a solution of dextrine in water 
painted over the surface and allowed to harden, or 
by a mixture of one part of sugar to two of white 
glue, dissolved in five parts of water by heat, and 
applied while yet warm. 

Fig. 264 shows a convenient wide-mouth bottle, 
which may be of f^ij or fgiv capacity, with a per- 
forated cork into which a plug is inserted, extend- 
ing half an inch below the cork, on to which is glued a camel-hair 
brush, always dipping into the paste ; this little vial may be sup- 
plied with paste from another and larger bottle. The paste may 
be made by either of the following processes : — ■ 




Paste bottle and 
brush. 



Paste containing Glycerin. 

Take of Gum Arabic One ounce. 

Boiling water Two fluidounees. 

Glycerin Two fluidrachms. 

Make a solution. 



Paste preserved with Acetic Acid. 

Take of Powdered gum Arabic, 

Powdered tragacanth, of each ^ss. 

Water ^iss or sufficient. 

Acetic acid n\,xx. 

Mix them. 

If tragacanth paste is made stiff enough, it will keep without 
the addition of an antiseptic. 

When not previously prepared, the labels require to be pasted at 
the time they are applied ; this may be accomplished by laying 
them successively upon a piece of soft paper, which must be renewed 
as soon as it becomes somewhat daubed, or by laying them on a 



DISPENSING OF PILLS. 911 

piece of smooth and hard wood, which should be cleaned and dried 
once every day. When the label is applied to glass, it should be 
covered by a piece of paper somewhat larger than itself, and tightly 
and uniformly pressed till quite smooth ; it is a mistake to put a 
thick coating of paste on the paper, as it then spreads on to the 
surrounding parts of the vial, soiling them, and in drying shrinks 
and wrinkles the label. When tilled and properly corked, the vial 
should be carefully wiped off and wrapped in a piece of white 
paper. The Jib. size, 9 J x 8 inches, is suitable for a fsiv vial. 

A good pen, with a tine point, suitable for filling up the blanks 
on the labels, and a desk, should be within convenient reach ; also 
a blank book or file on which to preserve the prescription for future 
reference, the day book or blotter, the book of "wants," in which 
each article is to be entered for purchase or preparation, before it is 
entirely out, and a note-book of facts and experiences, which, if 
diligently kept, will, by lapse of time, become a valuable heirloom 
of the office or shop. 

Beading the Prescription. 

The first process, on receiving a prescription to be compounded, 
is to read and thoroughly to understand it ; this can be done, in 
many cases, only after some study and consequent delay, which, if 
perceived by the applicant, may occasion distrust and a suspicion 
that something wrong is contained in it; to obviate the appearance 
of a misunderstanding, it is a good plan to commence by preparing 
a label ; this is done with the prescription before the eye of the 
writer, and allows time for thoroughly studying it and deciphering, 
as far as practicable, the obscure parts, before attempting to com- 
pound it. After the preparation has been completed and labelled, 
the prescription should be carefully reviewed and the several 
articles, as added, recalled so as to insure its correctness before 
sending it out freighted, as it may be, with the issues of life or 
death to the sufferer for whom it has been prescribed ; there are few 
errors occurring from carelessness which would not be obviated by 
this precaution. If there should be an obvious error in a prescrip- 
tion which might lead to serious consequences, it would become 
the duty of the pharmacist either to supply the medicine, so modi- 
fied as to be safe, and to fulfil the intention as nearly as he can 
arrive at it, or, on a plea of necessary delay, to obtain an opportunity 
to have the error corrected by the physician himself. 

The maintenance of a spirit of professional comity between the 
physician and pharmacist, by which each is bound to screen the 
other from unjust censure, while they mutualhy endeavor to protect 
the community from the dangers unavoidably attendant upon the 
administration of remedies, is the only true basis of their successful 
co-operation. 

Preparation and Dispensing of Pills. 

The advantages of this form of preparation having been fully 
detailed in Chapter III., the substances best adapted to it having 



912 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Fig. 265. 



Fig. 266. 




Bottle with drop 
machine. 



been enumerated, and the general principles on which they should 
be compounded having been treated of, it remains now to convey 
such information upon the mode of mixing and forming pill masses 
as can be put into a brief description, premising that of the manual 
processes of pharmacy, none more distinctly require to be learned 
by experience. 

To form a pill mass, the ingredients in the form of powder, being 
weighed, are placed in a mortar, or on a tile, and thoroughly mixed ; 
two spatulas being at hand, a small addition of some excipient, as 

already pointed out, is to be made, 
care being taken not to add an excess, 
which the inexperienced are apt to 
do. The little bottle, Fig. 266, is 
made for the use of the analytical 
chemist in moistening substances 
with a single drop of a reagent; 
it will be useful to contain water for 
the purpose named. The drop guide, 
Fig. 265, or a similar extemporane- 
ous contrivance, will answer the same 
purpose. Many pill masses are spoiled 
by getting a few drops too much 
water accidentally into them ; they 
should always be very thoroughly 
triturated before the addition of fresh 
portions of liquid. 
The use of extracts in making pills has already been adverted to 
as aiding in their pharmaceutical eligibility ; but the toughness of 
certain resinous extracts, as extract of jalap, is one of the greatest 
causes of difficulty in the manipulation. The extract seems some- 
times to have dried to just that condition which forbids the idea 
of reducing it to powder, or softening it to the proper consistence 
of an excipient, and therefore it cannot be successfully incorporated 
with other extracts, or with dry powders. Under these circum- 
stances the aid of heat should be called in; a mortar being warmed 
upon the stove, the extract may be introduced into it and thoroughly 
softened by trituration, or if still too tough, being broken up, the 
mass may be subjected to drying, until, on cooling, it is so brittle 
as to be readily reduced to powder, and then incorporated with the 
other ingredients and rendered plastic by suitable excipients. 

Another difficulty in manipulating with extracts is owing to 
their sometimes being too soft to form a mass of sufficient firmness 
with the other ingredients prescribed; in this case it is, perhaps, 
generally best to spread the extract in a thin layer upon the tile 
and warm this till, a portion of the moisture being evaporated, it 
assumes the proper consistence. Care is, of course, necessary not to 
deteriorate the extract by burning, or the evaporation of any volatile 
principles. The warmth, moisture, and flexibility of the hand may 
frequently be brought into requisition with materials that refuse to 
soften and adhere, though generally it is desirable to avoid working 



Bottle for moisten- 
ing pill mass. 



PREPARATION OF PILLS, 



913 




Graduated pill tile. 



the mass in the hands in presence of the Fig. 267. 

customer ; when the materials are readily 
miscible, the whole process may be con- 
veniently performed in the mortar, and 
the removal of the mass completely effected 
by the use of the pestle and spatulas. 

Some pharmacists prefer the use of the 
pill tile and spatula for the whole mani- 
pulation, and I have observed that some 
of the most successful pill makers avoid 
the use of the mortar almost entirely; on 
the other hand the greater force imparted 
to trituration by the convex surface of the 
pestle upon the concave mortar, and the 
facility it affords in thoroughly powdering 
and mixing the ingredients, seem to me to 

indicate the superiority of this old-fashioned method ; the force of 
early training and of habit in this as in most other cases has a con- 
trolling influence. 

In using the pill tile, Fig. 267, for mixing the mass, an imple- 
ment is required which will facilitate the powdering of crystals, 
dry extractive, and resinous materials, and powders, which have 
agglutinated. Fig. 268 shows a muller, made of glass 
for this purpose; the flat bottom surface is ground to 
adapt it to trituration ; it is not used in forming the mass, 
but is well suited to the preparation of the dry materials. 

With a view to securing both tenacity and firmness in 
a pill mass, it seems essential that the several ingredients 
should combine the property of fluidity with that of hard- 
ness or insolubility. A solid substance, like aloes or 
almost any of the resins or gum resins, can readily be 
formed into pills with a little alcohol or some appropriate 
tincture, but for want of a substance insoluble in this ex- 
cipient the pills will be apt to fail of that firmness of con- 
sistence which results from the combination of solid with liquid 
particles; soap is in this case a better excipient, being less of a 
solvent for the resinous particles, and possessing a body which pre- 
vents the softening and flattening out of the pills. 

Whenever practicable, it is best for the pharmacist to use the- 
excipient prescribed by the physician, but there is nothing to pre- 
vent his adding inert excipients, when necessary, according to his 
own judgment, and the frequent absence of any specific directions 
on the subject makes it necessary for him to choose the best excipient 
to insure smallness of bulk, adhesiveness and firmness in the mass; 
experience and a careful study of the subject, as presented in 
Chapter III., will aid in this selection. 

Pills may be divided with a spatula, by the eye, or by the aid of 
a graduated tile; a great many pharmacists use this altogether, 
but it has always appeared to me it must be from want of famili- 
arity with the use of the pill machine, Fig. 269. If the mass is 
58 




914 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

plastic, it may be rolled between the smooth surfaces, or by use of 
the pill roller, Fig. 270, into a perfect cylinder equally thick at 
both ends, and by then adjusting the cutting surfaces, the whole 
mass will be immediately turned into the appropriate number of 




n?. 270. 



Pill roller. 



Brass pill machine. 

pills, which, if about the size appropriate to the machine, will be 
so round as to require no further rolling. In large dispensing es- 
tablishments, several machines are sometimes kept adapted to 
different sizes, one for pills of opium or Quevenne's iron, another 
for compound cathartic or aloetic pill, and another for compound 
rhubarb and other large pills. In the IT. S. Army laboratories 
immense numbers of pills were made with these machines by female 
operatives. There is a practical hint in relation to the use of the 
pill machine which should be mentioned in this connection ; it is, 
that the cutting surfaces will sometimes only work on each other 
perfectly in one way ; every roller is, therefore, marked with a star, 
a little brass tack, a number, or some other designation, and a cor- 
responding one is made on the machine, indicating in which direc- 
tion the roller is to be worked on the machine in cutting. From 
not being aware of this precaution, many abandon the use of a 
machine, which is one of the greatest of conveniences in pharmacy. 
In the machines made by Wurtz the rollers work equally well in 
both directions. 

Pills should not be put away for dispensing purposes until well 
dried on a tray, an open box lid, or paper folded at 
the edges for the purpose. There are several kinds 
of pill boxes described on page 56, of which the best 
Jill n) is that made of paper with projecting top and bottom 

piece, Fig. 82. Pills containing volatile ingredients 
should be dispensed in a small wide-mouth vial. Such 
are made for this purpose. 

Fig. 271 shows a bottle arranged to contain lycopo- 
dium, powdered liquorice root, or sifted arrowroot, 
one or more of which may be kept at hand in dispen- 
sing pills, both for the dusting of the pill machine, and 
forfilling boxes in which they are dispensed. One of 
Dusting bottle, these bottles may have powdered gum Arabic also, so 



Fig. 271. 





COATIXG OF PILLS. 915 

as to add that ingredient conveniently to pill masses in process of 
their manufacture. The mode of construction will scarcely need a 
remark; a perforated cork, short piece of tube, and =§j or Jij vial 
constitute the apparatus. 

Coating of Pills. — Though the least repulsive form of medicine, 
yet pills, especially when they contain bitter and nauseous ingre- 
dients, are disagreeable to some, and many ways have been devised 
to render them more attractive and pleasing to the eye and to hide 
the odor and taste of drugs given in this form. 

Since the issue of the earlier editions of this work the ancient 
practice of coating pills with silver and gold leaf has been revived. 
The apparatus I have had constructed for this purpose is shown in 
Fig. 272. It consists of two hemi- 
spheres of hard wood fitting by a Fig. 272. 
screw and highly polished on their 
inner surface. In rolling the pills 
care is taken to use no dusting 
powder of any kind, and to have 
them moderately damp, otherwise 

tO moisten them With a little Symp. Apparatus for silvering pills. 

They are then introduced into the 

hollow sphere along with the requisite quantity of silver or gold 
leaf, it is tightly closed by screwing the separate parts together and 
a rapid motion is communicated to it; in a few seconds the pills 
are removed with a clean and bright coating. One dozen pills of 
average size require one sheet of foil and larger numbers in propor- 
tion. Some difficulty is experienced in giving a handsome coating 
to pills of Quevenne's iron, on account of their black color ; this can 
be obviated by the use of a large proportion of foil, which may be 
objectionable as interfering with their solubility, notwithstanding 
the extreme tenuity of the foil. The taste of the pills is of course 
disguised in proportion to the completeness of the coating ; in dis- 
pensing no powder is necessary, the tendency of the fresh pills to 
adhere to each other being obviated. 

This apparatus may be substituted by using a gallipot laid 
against the palm of the hand, or by two porcelain capsules fitted 
to each other, the opening at the lips being covered by the thumb, 
but there is a saving in the use of an apparatus as above figured ; any 
portion of the foil not adhering to one charge of pills will be ready 
for the next, besides an advantage which is gained by the leverage 
of the handle. 

The former belief that a coating with metallic leaf, if sufficient 
to hide the taste and smell of the pills, would interfere with their 
solubility, has been very much modified by recent experience. The 
pharmacist should assure himself of the genuineness of his gold- 
leaf, as Dutch metal, which is so often substituted for it, contains 
both copper and zinc. 

A coating with gelatin is one of the most elegant and efficient 
expedients for disguising the odor and taste of pills ; this is accom- 
plished by preparing a solution of one part of gelatin in two of 



916 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

water, by a water-bath beat ; and having prepared the pills, pretty 
firm and dry and free from any powder on their surface, they are 
dipped into the gelatin by means of long pins, which are then 
placed in a position to allow the pills to dry without contact with 
each other. On being removed from the pins any superfluous gela- 
tin is clipped off with scissors and the holes touched with gelatin 
from the point of a camel's hair brush if deemed necessary. This 
coating is smooth and glossy, and when the pills are kept dry leaves 
nothing to desire ; it effectually excludes all deteriorating influ- 
ences, and pills thus covered may be kept for an indefinite time 
without losing their medicinal properties; they, moreover, have an 
elegant appearance from the transparent nature of their surface, 
which may be colored to suit the fancy, by introducing into the 
solution of gelatin a sufficient quantity of coloring matter, which 
is soluble in water. 

Sugar-coated pills are now very popular and widely diffused. 
Their method of manufacture is much better understood by confec- 
tioners than by pharmacists ; the coating of objects with a glossy 
saccharine covering is, in fact, a prominent part of their business. 
On a large scale the sugar coating is managed by constantly rota- 
ting the moistened pills in a mixture of starch and sugar contained 
in a copper pan suspended at a considerable distance above a small 
charcoal fire ; they thus acquire a smooth and glossy surface, fami- 
liar to us in pills from most of the leading pharmaceutical manu- 
facturers. There are several ways in which a similar coating may 
be effected at the prescription counter ; in all cases very finely- 
powdered " dusted" sugar is requiste ; some use a mixture of sugar 
and gum Arabic, which must be intimate and rubbed to the very 
finest powder. Upon a pill tile, six or eight pills receive a thin 
covering of mucilage of gum Arabic or tragacanth, by being rolled 
in it quickly by means of the fingers ; they are then immediately 
transfered to another tile, upon which a thin layer of the saccha- 
rine powder has been dusted, and the sugar is made to adhere by 
giving the pills a rotary motion with the ends of the fingers, 
slightly pressing on them. 

The covering of sugar may also be satisfactorily made by using 
the silvering globe, the inside of which has been highly polished. 
Some of the powder is sprinkled into the hemisphere, and, after 
the introduction of the pills previously moistened with mucilage 
as before, an even coating is effected by giving the box a quick cir- 
cular movement. The pills are afterwards allowed to dry in a box, 
and may be made somewhat smoother by rolling them in finely- 
powdered starch. 

If thus treated, a good white coating is obtained, which, how- 
ever, lacks smoothness and elegance if compared with the confec- 
tioners' manufacture, but answers all the required purposes. 

If it appears desirable, the sugar may be previously colored by 
incorporating a few grains of carmine with it, or rubbing with it 
some good saffron to a very fine powder, if a yellow color is desired; 
the latter fades if exposed to the light. 



COATING OF PILLS. 917 

Pills may be extemporaneously coated with sugar by first moist- 
ening them with a strong solution of balsam of Tolu in ether, 
throwing them immediately into a box containing sugar in very 
fine powder, and shaking the box for a few minutes ; the applica- 
tion may be repeated if the first coating is not sufficiently thick. 
The ethereal solution has the advantage of extreme volatility and 
of not dissolving the ordinary constituents of pill, but should it 
prove objectionable on account of a solvent action on the pills it 
may be replaced by mucilage as before indicated. 

Farley's process, patented in England, is directed to be per- 
formed with two saucers, the inner surface of one is coated with 
albumen, prepared by well agitating the white of an Qgg, the other 
contains a fine powder, composed of equal parts of sugar and traga- 
canth. The pills are placed in the first saucer and are made to 
revolve in it by a series of horizontal circular motions ; this speedily 
coats them with a thin film of albumen ; then they are quickly 
transferred to the other saucer in which they are again caused to 
revolve and become coated with the mixed powder of sugar and 
tragacanth. The peculiar tenacious consistence of the albumen 
tends to prevent the pills from getting a very thick coating, but it 
is sufficient if continuous to fix a thin surface of the powder suffi- 
cient to form a thin but firm and tough coating when dry. The 
quantity of albumen to place in the saucer must be learned by ex- 
periment ; it should not be in excess, lest the pills get too heavy a 
coating and dry too slowly. Albumen has the merit of ready solu- 
bility in the stomach, and seems to be well adapted to the object 
in view. 

In an elaborate article on coating pills, Bernard S. Proctor, of 
RTewcastle-on-Tyne, England, has given the results of no less than 
forty-five experiments, which go to show that the process is in the 
main advantageous. He prefers those processes in which the pills 
are first rolled in a mixture of alcohol and water, or in lac varnish, 
and then in an appropriate powder. Boiling first in tincture of lac, 
and then in a mixture of three parts of French chalk and one of 
resin, gave a coating not liable to absorb moisture, and possessing 
most of the requisites sought. He recommends that the quantity 
of tincture should not exceed 4 or 5 minims to a dozen pills, and it 
is evidently an important precaution in any of the processes to 
moisten the pills as little as practicable to secure a continuous 
coating. 

The covering with sugar is preferred generally in the United 
States; it prevents the smell and taste from manifesting themselves 
for a number of days ; but, if freshly-made pills have been thus 
coated, the evaporating moisture, in penetrating through the sugar, 
may carry some soluble matter with it and gradually discolor the 
covering ; in a similar way, odorous principles will penetrate to the 
surface, and finally impart their smell ; sugar-coated assafcetida 
pills, though at first nearly free from odor, develop it on keeping. 

The observation of those whose opportunities have given them 
'abundant means of forming a correct judgment has resulted in a 



918 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

preference for well-made sugar-coated pills over those not so protect- 
ed, as the coating prevents the desiccating action of the atmosphere 
and its other accompanying injurious effects. The Pharmacopoeia 
sanctions the custom of sugar-coating so far as concerns those pills 
which are designed to be slow in their action but not in regard to 
others. 

Sugar pellets or granules, variously medicated, have been very 
much prescribed within a few years. They have gained favor with 
physicians from their portability, and with many patients on account 
of their very small size, which adapts them to be taken more 
readily and easily than ordinary pills. Sugar granules are made 
by the confectioner, of white sugar, sometimes artificially colored. 
They are medicated in the following way : The dose to be contained 
in each granule is first determined; the medicinal substance is then 
weighed out in such a quantity as may be evenly divided into the 
proper doses ; it is now dissolved in strong alcohol or ether, suffi- 
cient to moisten the requisite quantity of pellets, which are to be 
constantly agitated in a shallow dish so that the solution may be- 
come evenly divided among them, until the solvent has evaporated. 

It is evident that, prepared in this way, the globules may vary 
somewhat in the quantity of the absorbed solution, and it is there- 
fore important that the agitation be continued without intermis- 
sion until no trace of moisture can be detected ; the employment 
of the strongest alcohol or ether is necessary, so that the larger 
amount of the solvent may be employed without liquefying the 
sugar. Only such medicines are adapted to this mode of prepara- 
tion as are given in very small doses, and the vegetable alkaloids 
and some neutral principles are particularly adapted to it. Gene- 
rally, more than one of the granules contain the full dose of the 
medicine. It has become customary to have them contain the one- 
hundredth, one-fiftieth, one-twentieth, or the one-sixteenth part of 
a grain of the. medicinal compound. As before noticed, this process 
is that introduced by the homoeopathic practitioners, and has such 
defects inherent in the practice as are pointed out above. The only 
true plan is to divide exactly the medicinal agent into the fractional 
portions intended, and then coat these skilfully with sugar. 

Preparation of Mixtures. — In the chapter on Liquid Preparations, 
pages 829 to 834, a list is given of medicines best adapted to this 
form, and a pretty full account of the principles which should 
govern the prescriber in the exercise of this part of his duties. 
The study of such a treatise by physicians would save many blun- 
ders which fall under the observation of pharmacists ; it would also 
add to the facilities of the physician for combating disease, and to 
the comfort of those compelled to undergo medical treatment. 

The preparation of mixtures and other liquid extemporaneous 
preparations involves the exercise of greater judgment and skill, 
because of the frequent unskilfulness of prescribers. The experi- 
enced pharmacist will frequently have opportunities to correct 
apparent incompatibilities without materially varying from the 
prescription, and in this as in other forms of prescription it will 



PREPARATION OF MIXTURES. 919 

sometimes be his privilege to detect and obviate errors which might 
be of serious import. Let him never allow a preparation to pass 
from his hands without a careful consideration as to whether a 
mistake of his own or of the prescriber has escaped his notice. 

The ingredients contained in mixtures are generally both solid 
and liquid, and of the solids some are soluble and others diffused 
in the liquid only by admixture ; the object of the pharmacist 
should be the intimate blending of all the ingredients, so that every 
dose when taken shall be of the same composition. In most of the 
formulae involving any difficulties as given in the previous chapter, 
the mode of admixture has been indicated, but a large number will 
fall into the hands of the pharmacist in which the mode of incor- 
porating the ingredients together will be left entirely to his judg- 
ment. 

If all the ingredients prescribed are liquids, or if the only solid 
is freely soluble, they may all be introduced directly into the bottle, 
previously prepared, and the whole may be mixed by agitation. 
The most ready mode of dissolving crystals is explained in the fifth 
part of this work, in the chapter on Solutions, page 553, and the 
distinction to be observed between those substances readily soluble 
by agitation and those requiring the triturating action of the pestle 
and mortar. 

With a view to obviating the liability to precipitation from 
mixing either chemical or pharmaceutical incompatibles, it is desi- 
rablej^rst, to make as dilute solutions as the prescription will allow, 
of any chemical substances ordered; second, to incorporate with 
these the syrups or viscid excipients, if any such are prescribed, 
before mixing them. In this way the play of incompatibilities is 
diminished by the twofold influence of dilution and viscidity, and 
the liability to unsuspected chemical changes, the fear of which 
occasions such trepidation to the inexperienced prescriber, will be 
greatly lessened. 

As a general rule the mortar and pestle should be used in case of 
incorporating an insoluble substance in powder with a liquid ; the 
plan of mixing by agitating in a vial is seldom perfectly successful, 
and where these are suspended by the aid of gum and sugar it is 
best to have them thoroughly triturated together as powders before 
adding the liquid ingredients. 

JEmidsions are mixtures of oils, fats, or resins with water, gene- 
rally promoted by alkalies, gum, or gum and sugar, and white or 
yelk of egg;. Numerous examples of this kind of preparation are 
given among the foregoing prescriptions. Mistura Assafcetida and 
Mistura Ammoniaci are instances of what might be called natural 
emulsions, the conditions of an insoluble resinous ingredient and a 
soluble gum being present in the gum-resin prescribed. In Copaiva 
Mixture, No. 122, Castor Oil Mixture, No. 105, Chloroform and Oil 
of Almond Mixture, ~No. 96, Emulsion of Cannabis Indica, No. 99, 
and others, we have instances of artificial emulsions in which an 
oily ingredient is properly suspended. The instructions for making 
each of these are so specific that they can scarcely fail to realize a 



920 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Fig. 273. 



successful combination and furnish a clue to similar preparations. 
It may happen that an emulsion constructed on this plan will par- 
tially separate into layers and need shaking before being taken ; 
but if properly made it will never have the oil floating in globules 
upon the surface. There can be no doubt of the increased action 
of emulsionized oils over those in which the oil globules have not 
been broken up, though on the other hand it is less easy to take a 
dose of oil emulsionized than floating on the surface of water or 
enveloped in the froth of porter or sarsaparilla mead. It is gene- 
rally customary to weigh the fixed oils or copaiva in dispensing 
them, but if this is done when they are to be made into emulsions 
it should not be done in the bottle in which they are to be dis- 
pensed. The adhesion of the oil to the glass will interfere with its 
complete separation into an emulsion, and a portion of this adhering 
oil will contaminate the emulsion when made and be apparent in 
each dose drawn from the vial. In the elegant emulsions of 
almonds, No. 120, and of pumpkin seeds, ~No. 143, the fixed oils 
present in the seeds are naturally associated with mucilaginous 
ingredients which emulsionize them in water without the addition 
of any foreign ingredient. 

Volatile oils, especially oil of turpentine and oil of copaiva, re- 
quire the admixture of fixed oils in order properly to incorporate 

them with viscid materials, or they 
may be mixed with yelk of eggs, an 
admirable natural mixture of a fixed 
oil with albumen. 

For making emulsions I prefer the 
French pattern porcelain mortar, Fig. 
273; in this a thick mucilage is first 
made and the oil added, while by 
trituration the combination is ef- 
fected completely and satisfactorily. 
It is noticeable that emulsions are 
usually quite incompatible with neu- 
tral or acid salts, though rather im- 
proved by some alkaline salts, as 
borax, by carbonated alkali, and by 
caustic ammonia. They are also incompatible with any considerable 
proportion of alcohol, though moderate quantities of the tinctures, 
made with diluted alcohol, may be added after they 
are fully diluted. 

If spirit of nitric ether is prescribed, associated with 
gum Arabic, it is well to dilute the mucilage to the 
greatest extent allowable before adding the spirit, other- 
wise there is danger of the precipitation of the gum. 

In making neutral mixture the use of fresh lemon- 
juice is prescribed, and when the juice of the lemon is 
separated by expression with a " lemon squeezer," or 
otherwise, a strainer, Fig. 275, is a useful appliance. It 
is sometimes quite impracticable to filter this prepara- 




French porcelain mortar. 



Fig, 274. 




Measure for 
fixed oils. 




PREPARATION OF MIXTURES. 921 

tion while the patient waits, and the Pharmacopoeia directs that it 
should be strained through muslin, which should be of an open 
texture and previously moistened with water. 

In the compounding of mixtures and of other forms of liquid 
preparations, as well as in the ordinary operations of dispensing, 
one or more graduated mea- 
sures will be required ; these Fig. 275. 
should always be at hand in a 
designated place, cleaned ready 
for use ; the duty of placing 
them there should devolve upon 
one person in the shop, or upon 
each one after using them, as 
may best suit the general regu- 
lations. 

For convenience in measur- strainer. 

ing oils and copaiva it is well 

to keep a separate graduated glass, and the small round bottom 
graduate used for medicine chests, Fig. 274, will serve a good pur- 
pose, being easily cleaned and of sufficient capacity for the purpose. 

In measuring liquids the pharmacist draws from the tincture 
bottle both for dispensing directly and mixing in prescription, and 
the habit should be fixed, of holding the stopper by the little linger, 
while holding the measure with the thumb and forefinger. The 
measure must be held opposite the eye to measure the quantity with 
accuracy, and, after it has been clone, the stopper is immediately to 
be replaced and the bottle set back on the shelf. The whole process 
is well shown in Fig. 276. The liability to mistakes in compound- 
ing is greatly increased by the accumulation of bottles on the counter; 
and it should be the habit to replace each bottle immediately, and 
to note the label as it is taken down and as it is put back ; if a drop 
of liquid remains on the lip after decanting, it should be collected 
on the point of the stopper before putting it in again, and thus pre- 
vented from running clown the side. 

Much also depends on the method of restoring the stopper as to 
the facility with which it can be withdrawn again. Syrups, when 
allowed to remain in quantity between, the ground stopper and neck 
of the bottle, dry and harden so as to be withdrawn with great 
difficulty; the same is true of alkaline solutions and resinous tinc- 
tures to a still worse degree. In handling the bottles it is important 
that the stopper and neck should be somewhat cleared of adhering 
liquid before restoring the stopper in its position. In the case of 
alkaline solutions it has been recommended to coat the stopper with 
paraffine, wdiich is not acted on by alkali and prevents the adhesion 
complained of. 

The modes of removing adhering stoppers — by the well-directed 
force of the thumb and fingers, by sudden strokes of a spatula 
handle or mallet, by soaking the stopper in any appropriate solvent 
collected on the lip, and by the various modes of heating the neck 



922 ON" DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 

of the bottle — will suggest themselves to the ingenious manipulator, 
and will doubtless meet with varying success. 

Tw. 276. 




Ointments and Cerates. — ~Ro part of the duties of the pharmacist 
is considered so disagreeable as that which involves those manipu- 
lations with fatty matters necessary to bring them to the condition 
of ointments and cerates. The only practical details which I deem 
it necessary to insist upon, are : 1st. The importance of fineness of 
all medicinal substances incorporated in ointments and cerates. 2d. 
The necessity of proper precautions to avoid rancidity in ointments; 
and 3d, cleanliness as absolutely essential to success in this depart- 
ment of the business. 

Upon the first point no remarks are necessary other than to call 
attention to it in connection with the special directions contained 
in each formula. The solid ingredients of ointments should never 
appear through them as distinct specks ; their consistence should 
be uniformly smooth. Whenever an ointment is rancid it should 
be thrown away — this is an invariable rule — and in order to pre- 
vent rancidity occurring they should be kept in well-glazed and 
well-covered jars, a piece of tinfoil being interposed between the 



SUPPOSITORIES. 923 

top of the ointment and the jar. The ointment closet should be in 
a cool place ; large quantities, if kept on hand, should be in the 
cellar. 

The youngest apprentice, who has generally the duty of " cleaning 
up," should be early instructed to keep the ointment slab or tile 
free from grease ; this he may do by having a bottle of solution of 
caustic potassa near at hand and dropping a little on to the slab 
after it has been thoroughly rubbed with porous paper, and then 
washing it off with water ; a little tincture of soap or of the officinal 
soap liniment will also aid much 'in cleaning the slab. Greasy 
spatulas should never be thrown with others into water to be 
cleaned; soft paper is the best material for cleaning them, and in 
all the cleaning processes it should be remembered that water rather 
interferes with than facilitates the removal of grease. 

Suppositories. — Few pharmaceutical preparations have been con- 
sidered so difficult as these, but this has chiefly arisen from the 
absence of specific and accurate directions for their preparation, and 
of suitable moulds in which to form them. The attempt to fbrm 
pure cocoa-butter into suppositories is hardly ever completely suc- 
cessful, and combination with wax as directed by Dorvault (see 
page 826) is now found to be inferior to, the admixture of a small 
proportion of spermaceti, which has the merit of congealing much 
more rapidly than wax, and hence favors the rapid and complete 
solidifying of the cones. The proportion of spermaceti may be 
varied according to the haste with which they are to be completed, 
and the exposure to heat to which they are liable afterward. In sum- 
mer one-fifth of the whole may be spermaceti, in winter one-sixth. 

There are two ways suggested for medicating suppositories; the 
most ready method is to introduce the medical ingredients, in 
powder or mass, into a conical opening in the base of the finished 
and hardened cone, which is then closed up by replacing into the 
orifice sufficient of the hardened cocoa-butter; the other and pre- 
ferable process is to mix the dried and powdered ingredients with 
a portion of the melted fat by thorough trituration, and then to 
add the remainder, taking care to stir the mixture until it has 
sufficiently cooled and thickened to prevent the subsidence of the 
powder, and then to form it into moulds. 

fSome extracts may be incorporated very satisfactorily by rubbing 
them with a spatula on a tile, first with a drop of w 7 ater, then with 
a little of the melted cocoa-butter. The aqueous extract of opium, 
which is much prescribed in this form of preparation, is best dried 
on a clear dry clay upon a pill tile, reduced to a very fine powder, 
and triturated with sufficient melted cocoa-butter, so that five grains 
of the mass contain one of the extract ; in this state it is not 
affected by the w r eather, and is readily distributed, either alone or 
with acetate of lead, tannin, Monsell's salt, or other astringents. 

Substances soluble in cocoa-butter may be incorporated into the 
form of suppositories with great facility,, by digesting them in the 
melted cocoa-butter previously to adding the spermaceti. "Where 
there is liability to the presence of crystals of nitrate of potassium. 



924 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 




Suppository 
mould. 



Fte. 278. 



as in old extracts, or where any insoluble portion would 
interfere with the perfect smoothness of the supposi- 
tory, the melted material should be strained before 
moulding it. 

Fig. 277 shows a metallic mould of the proper size to 
make a suppository of twenty-five grains weight, the 
size preferred for adults, although sixty grains each has 
been sometimes prescribed. There does not seem to be 
any advantage in a large excess of the vehicle, and by 
having the cones of uniform size, their preparation is 
greatly facilitated. Fig. 278 is designed to show the 
arrangement of suppository moulds, with a view to their 
being readily chilled ; this may be made of tin, the 
moulds fitting into a diaphragm which rests upon the 
surface of some iced water; when the suppository has 
quite hardened it will fall out by inverting the mould and striking 
it suddenly on a slab or tile. These moulds sometimes require 
cleaning, which is readily done by wrapping a piece of soft paper 
around the plug used for making paper 
cones, Fig. 279, and turning it several times 
in the mould. In the absence of these me- 
tallic moulds, paper cones will answer a good 
purpose ; as their size is important, the fol- 
1 1, llllL ^ owm g directions are given: a piece of glazed 

flUl jfjp^ paper, not too thick, is cut into oblong 

pieces, 2J inches long by 1J wide, and rolled 
into a cone, which should be If inch long 
and J an inch at the base ; the free end of 
the paper is secured by a tip of sealing wax, which should be run 
around the base, and upon hardening retains the shape of the stick 
and keeps the cone from flattening ; at the extreme point of the 
cone an eighth of an inch may be clipped off and the 
opening sealed up, though this is omitted by some of 
the best manipulators. A little wooden form we have 
had turned for folding the paper moulds upon is shown 
in Fig. 279 ; by having a shoulder on this to mark the 
base of the cone it may be trimmed with the point of a 
pair of fine scissors, following that line. After the re- 
quisite number of these cones has been made, the object 
is next to arrange them with the open end in a proper 
position to be filled ; this is conveniently done in a box 
lid or other shallow vessel filled with flaxseed ; sand is 
objectionable from its liability, if accidentally thrown 
into the cone, to produce irritation when the suppository 
My friend, Ferris Bringhurst, of Wilmington, Del., to 
whom I am indebted for some valuable hints upon this subject, 
uses a wooden stand with conical excavations, into which the paper 
moulds fit ; this he sets in the ice chest in summer, or the open air 
in winter. The paper should not be removed from the suppository 
until it has become thoroughly hardened, and by this means it will 




Suppository moulds iu refrig- 
erator. 



Fio-. 279. 



Form for pa 
per moulds. 



is applied. 



TESTINGS. 925 

acquire a clean, polished surface. The time required to prepare and 
cool sufficiently a dozen or more suppositories is from half an hour 
to an hour. The physician prescribing them should bear this in 
mind, and not anticipate their being furnished by the apothecary 
immediately, unless of standard kinds known to be kept on hand. 

The chief points to be observed to insure successful manufacture 
of this useful form of preparation are, first, the complete incorpo- 
ration of the medicinal ingredient, in an impalpable powder, with 
the melted mixture of cocoa-butter and spermaceti ; second, the 
chilling of the melted mass to such point that while it will flow 
from the cup or capsule it will not allow the rapid subsidence of 
the suspended powder; third, when using metallic moulds to have 
them so refrigerated in advance as to harden the suppositories 
almost immediately on contact. 

The most convenient and useful mould has been found to be 
the brass mould, Fig.- 280, opening like an ordinary bullet mould; 

Fig. 280. 




the cavities being included equally in either half of the mould 
renders their speedy removal from the instrument quite easy; as 
many as six or eight dozen suppositories can be made with a mould 
having a dozen cavities in an hour and a half. 

Testings. 

The following list of preparations of the British Pharmacopoeia 
is here inserted under the head of extemporaneous pharmacy as a 
class, which the student should test by the different volumetric solu- 
tions, to familiarize himself with the process. The solutions have 
been described on pages 311-318, and the apparatus necessary to 
prepare and use these solutions comprises the following, using the 
weights and measures employed in the British Pharmacopoeia. 

1st. A flask capable of holding, when filled to a mark in the 
neck, exactly 10,000 grains of distilled water at 60°. 

2d. A graduated cylindrical jar holding 10,000 grains of distilled 
water, and graduated into one hundred equal parts, the graduation 
beginning at and being continued downward. 

3d. A burette, which is a graduated tube capable of holding 
1000 grains of distilled water, and graduated into 100 equal parts, 
commencing at the upper portion of the tube; each degree, of course, 
is equal to 10 grain measures. 

The following lists are taken from Squire's Companion to the 
British Pharmacopoeia. 

The following are to be tested with the volumetric solution of 
bich romate of potash : — 



926 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Grains Grain- 
weight of = measures of 
Substance. Vol. Sol. 


20 = 


170 


20 = 


330 


20 = 


83 


20 = 


250 



Ferri Arsenias ..... 
" Carb. Sacchar. .... 

" Oxid. Mag 

" Phosphas. ..... 

The following are to be tested with the volumetric solution of 
hyposulphite of soda : — 

Grains Grain- 

weight of = measures of 
Substance. Vol. Sol. 



Calx Chlorinata 






10.0 = 850 


Iodum 






12.7 = 1000 


Liq. Calc. Chlora 


ta . 




^0 = 500 


" Chlori 






439.0 == 750 


" Sodae Chlora 


iae . 




70.0 = 500 


The three following are to be tested with the volumetric solution 


of iodine : — 










Grains 




Grain- 




weight o 


f = measures of 




Substance. 


Vol. Sol. 


Acid. Arseniosum 


4.0 


— 


808 


Acid. Sulphurosum 

f §j distilled water, a lit 


tie [ 34.7 


=: 


1000 ■ J before a permanent blue 
1 color is obtained. 


mucilage of starch 


J 




1 


Liq. Arsenicalis 


. 441.5 


= 


808 


" Arsenici Hydrochloric 


jus 441.5 


= 


810 


The three folio win 


g preparations of the British Pharmacopoeia 


are to be tested by the volumetric solution of nitrate of silver :— 




Grains 


Grain- 




wei 


ghtof 


= measures of 




Substance 


Vol. Sol. Per cent. 


Acid. Hydrocynn. 


. ■ . 2 


70 


= 1000 = 2 anhydrous acid. 


Potass. Bromid. 




10 


= 840 


Sodae Arsenias, dry 




10 


= 1613 


The following are 


to be tested 


with the volumetric solution of 


oxalic acid : — 










Grains 




Grain- 




weight o 


f = 


measures of 




Substance. 


Vol. Sol. Per cent. 


Ammonias Carb. 


59.0 


==: 


1000 


Borax . 


191. 


= 


1000 


Liq. Ammonias 


85. 


= 


500 = 10. by wt. of Ammonia. 


Fort. 


52.3 


= 


1000 = 32.5 


" Calcis . . ' 


4380 


= 


1000 


" " Sacchar. 


460.2 


= 


254 


" Plumbi Subacet. 


413.3 


= 


810 


" Potassae 


462.9 


= 


482 


" " Etferves. . 


4380 


= 


150 


" Sodae . 


458. 


= 


470 


" " Effervescens . 


4380 


= 


178 


Piumbi Acetas 


38. 


= 


200 


Potassae Caustica 


56. 


— 


900 


" Bicarb. . 


50. 


= 


500 


" Carb. 


83. 


= 


980 


" Citras 


102. 


= 


1000 


" Tartras . 


113. 


= 


1000 


" " Acida 


188. 


= 


1000 


Sodae Caustica 


40.0 


= 


900 


" Tartarata 


141. 


= 


1000 


" Bicarb. 


84. 


= 


1000 


" Carb. . 


143. 


= 


960 



MANAGEMENT AND DISCIPLINE OF THE SHOP. 



927 



The following preparations of the British Pharmacopoeia are to 
be tested by the volumetric solution of soda : — 









Grains 




Grain- 












weight. 


= measures 


of 












Vol. Sol. Soda. 


Per cent. 


Acetura 


. 


445.4 


ss 


402 


= 


4.6 of anhydrous acid. 


Acid 


Acetic. 




182.0 


= 


1000 


= 


28 


<< 


" Dil. 




440. 


— 


313 


= 


3.63 


" 


" Glacial 




GO. 


= 


990 


= 


84 


<< 


Citricum 




70. 


SSS5 


1000 






" 


Hydrochloricum 




114.8 


= 


1000 


= 


31.8 of gaseous hydroohl. acid. 


<« 


(t 


Dil. 


845. 


ss= 


1000 


= 


10.58 of real acid. 


<< 


Nitricum . 




90. 


z= 


1000 


== 


60 of anhydrous acid. 


" 


Dil. 




301.2 


== 


1000 


ss= 


14.95 


" 


Nitro-Hydrochloric. 


352.4 


ESS 


920 






i < 


Sulph. 




50.6 


= 


1000 


ESS 


79 


«< 


" Arom. 




304.2 


= 


830 


= 


10.91 


» 


" Dil. 




359.0 


= 


1000 


ssss 


10.14 " " 


" 


Tartaricum 




75. 


== 


1000 







Management and Discipline of the Shop. 

The requirements of modern pharmacy call for greater discrimi- 
nation than formerly, in the selection of youths as apprentices ; 
these should possess a liberal education, a knowledge at least of the 
elements of the Latin language, and, what is more important, some 
preliminary knowledge of and taste for the natural and physical 
sciences, especially botany and chemistry. ~No lad should be allowed 
to undertake the duties and responsibilities of the drug business 
whose faculties of observation and reflection have not been awakened 
by previous training, and who does not bring to the pursuit a desire 
and a capacity to render himself master of it. 

Much of the success of the pharmaceutical store will be dependent 
upon the discipline maintained among those to whom the details 
of the business are necessarily intrusted, and the difficulties sur- 
rounding the proper management of the business will increase as it 
extends and involves the employment of more numerous apprentices 
or other employees, unless the general duties of all are specifically 
laid down* and the particular duties of each well defined and 
insisted upon. 

The rules which follow were prepared by my valued friend, the 
late Henry C. Blair, a man of many estimable traits of character 
and of high standing as a pharmacist; they were designed for a 
store employing three apprentices, and as originally prepared were 
so admirable that I have inserted them with but little alteration. 
Although, of course, they require modifications to suit the circum- 
stances of different establishments, their general tenor is adapted 
to all, and the high tone of professional and moral rectitude they 
require renders them worthy the acceptance of every apprentice 
who would deserve the approval of his employer, and of every em- 
ployer who desires the best interests of his apprentice. 



928 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 
RULES OF A PHARMACEUTICAL STORE. 

General Regulations of the Store. 

1. Business hours will include the time between breakfast and 6 
o'clock P. M., except when special duty may require it otherwise. 

During business hours all hands must be on their feet, and must 
be employed either in waiting on the counter or at some regular 
store duty. 

2. As waiting on the counter is a duty which requires .most 
knowledge and experience, the Senior apprentice must always serve 
where there is one customer; when two, the first Junior apprentice 
will assist, and when three the second Junior will aid. 

The Senior apprentice must always take that part of the duty 
which requires most knowledge and skill. This order of duty must 
never be deviated from if circumstances will at all admit of it. 

3. Never put up an article without you are certain it is right. 

4. In every instance, customers must be waited on with prompti- 
tude, and in case one only is present and several articles are wanting, 
or a prescription, or in any instance where assistance will expedite, 
the first Junior, and the second, if necessary, will aid. 

Every other duty must give way to that of waiting on the counter 
except when serious detriment would be the consequence. 

5. Every person entering the store, whether pauper or president, 
infant or adult, white or colored, must be treated with courtesy and 
kindness. 

6. Boisterous mirth and a sullen temper are to be equally avoided 
as productive of neither business nor business character. The 
acquisition of a uniformly cheerful temperament is an attainment 
worth far beyond the price it usually costs. 

7. There are to be no masters and no servants. Each one is to 
feel conscious of the fact that the performance of the duties assigned 
to him are just as necessary and as important as what pertains to 
any other hand in the store. All useful employment is honorable. 
Indolence is a disgrace. 

8. An afternoon of every week will be devoted to cleaning the 
store, in which all must share as occasion offers. 

As neatness, order, cleanliness, and accuracy are necessary and not 
mere accomplishments in a Pharmacist, all are required to practise 
them constantly. 

9. Every apprentice will be expected to become a graduate of 
the College of Pharmacy, and will be furnished with tickets for 
the lectures of the College and every opportunity for availing 
himself of the honor of the degree of that Institution. 

To deserve this degree will require a severe economy of leisure 
hours, and their application to the study of those books which re- 
late to the theoretical and practical knowledge necessary to make 
an accomplished Pharmacist. 

10. Apprentices need but few social acquaintances, and they 
should be very select. While the occasional visit of a well-behaved 



KULES OF A PHARMACEUTICAL STORE. 929 

young friend will be countenanced, lounging in the store will not 
be tolerated. 

11. Each apprentice will have at his disposal an afternoon and 
evening every week, and every other Sunday. The afternoon will 
comprise the time between 12 o'clock, at noon, and 6 o'clock P.M., 
and the evening between 6 o'clock P.M., and the closing of the 
store. These privileges will not be interfered with unnecessarily. 
A vacation of two weeks, every year, will be allowed each ap- 
prentice. 

12. ~No apprentice residing in the house will be allowed to be 
absent at night after the closing, of the store, without special 
permission. 

13. It is not the wish of the proprietor of the store that any of 
his apprentices should extol an article beyond its merit to advance 
his pecuniary interest, or to say or do aught in the performance of 
his duty that he would not be willing that others should say or do 
to him under the same circumstances. 

14. As all are presumed to be members of the proprietor's family, 
their intercourse will be characterized with the courtesy becoming 
young gentlemen. 

No bond of apprenticeship will be required except the honor of 
the individual. 

Should the party wishing to leave before the allotted time ex- 
pires have a good reason for so doing, the proprietor will not 
probably object ; and should his cause be a bad one and be per- 
sisted in, the proprietor will certainly not offer a hindrance to his 
going. 

15. A cheerful compliance with the foregoing rules is confi- 
dently expected, and the repeated infraction of a known regula- 
tion of the store will be cause for a dismissal. 

Specific Duties of the Senior Apprentice. 

1. To see that the specific duties of his Juniors are promptly and 
well performed. 

2. To wait on the counter in the morning before breakfast, that 
they may not be hindered in the performance of their duties. 

3. In case of the absence of either of his Juniors, to take the 
place of his first Junior. 

4. He is to take charge of the books. 

5. To take knowledge of and properly note any articles that 
may be needed for the store, including goods to be purchased, and 
preparations to be made. 

6. To see that the drawers, shelves, and cases are well supplied 
with such articles as are kept on hand in any quantity. 

7. To keep a note-book of what is necessary to be done in the 
ordinary business of the store, and to designate employment for 
his Juniors. 

8. In the absence of the Proprietor, to take entire charge of the 
store, and to be alone responsible for its business. 

59 



L 



930 ON DISPENSING AND COMPOUNDING PRESCRIPTIONS. 



Specific Duties of the First Junior Apprentice. 

1. It will be his duty to dust the counters and desks thoroughly 
every morning. This service must be performed before breakfast, 
and repeated as often through the day as necessary. 

2. In case of the absence of the second Junior apprentice he is 
to perform his duties. 

3. He is to paste the prescriptions in the book kept for that 
purpose or to file or copy them, once every week. 

4. He will copy the bills into the bill-book once every week. 

5. It will be his duty to keep the drawers well supplied with 
paper for wrapping purposes, including the various sizes of cut 
paper. 

6. It will be his duty to clean the scales, large and small, once 
every week, and oftener, if necessary. 

Specific Duties of the Second Junior Apprentice. 

1. He is to open the store in the morning, make the fire, and 
attend to it through the day, sweep out the store, w r ash the mortars, 
etc., keep the mineral-water counter clean, and the syrup bottles 
filled. These duties are to be performed in part before breakfast. 

2. It will be his duty to take entire charge of the labels, keep- 
ing a register of those needed, and having the drawers always well 
supplied with labels trimmed for use; also, to have the proper 
drawers well provided with clean vials, and with pill, powder, and 
ointment boxes. 

3. It will be required of him to do such errands as the business 
of the store may demand, and to close the store at night. 



APPENDIX 



ON THE MANAGEMENT OF A SICK CHAMBER. 

The following hints on the management of the sick chamber are chiefly 
from the pen of a lad}' of intelligence and experience. Although ad- 
dressed especially to nurses, they should be carefully studied b}^ prac- 
titioners of medicine, upon whom the responsibility of giving direction to 
the conduct of the sick chamber mainly devolves. 

Ventilation. 

Few persons who are in the habit of visiting the sick can have failed 
to notice the great difference in the state of the air, in chambers where 
cleanliness and good management have been in exercise, and those wherein 
the value and importance of neatness and the careful admission of a free 
current of fresh air have been overlooked. If, then, temporary visitors 
are sensible of the difference, how much more deeply interested must the 
suffering patient be in the attainment of a free and healthy atmosphere. 

Cleanliness. 

Since it is often difficult to get a sick room swept, it may be desirable, 
if it can be done unheard, to get at least a part of the carpeting away 
now and then, that it ma} r be well shaken. A few tea-leaves may be 
thrown over a part of the room at a time, and very quietly taken up with 
a hand-brush. And in those cases which are not at all critical, and where 
anything damp can be admitted into the room with impunity, a mop, 
which, after being dipped in water, has been well trundled, may be just 
used for a few r minutes to remove the flue from under the bed ; or it may 
be very carefully passed over a carpet, if nailed down. 

Change of Posture, Arrangement of the Bed, etc. 

It is scarcely to be believed, until experienced, the relief from suffering 
which a change of posture produces; neither is it generally thought of, 
how much alleviation could be attained in many instances, even b} T the 
fresh cording of the sacking, with special attention to a level position ; a 
hard bed or mattress, for a suffering invalid, is not recommended, but an 
arrangement for a level position will often afford great comfort. The 
sacking first tightly corded (but splines instead of sacking are much 
better), then a straw palliasse, which, if not newly made, ought to be raised 
*by a fresh supply of straw^ in the middle, where a heavy pressure may 
have rendered it uneven ; over this, a good feather bed, which ought to 
be gently pressed and made level, then a mattress, composed first of a 
thick bed of horsehair, and well overlaid with excellent long wool ; it 
ought to have room for the bed-post at each of its four corners, so that it 

(931) 



932 APPENDIX. 

may not only be turned daily from side to side, but also from the head to 
the feet; indeed, it is better, as it regards even the straw palliasse, to 
adopt such a plan as may admit of the turning of it, and, as it is heavy 
and unyielding, it is better to have the corners cut out at each of its two 
parts, making a small oblong of the same material and height, to tie on 
in the middle ; or an inconvenient aperture might be made there. The 
proper arrangement of pillows is of no small importance, and in cases of 
fever a change of pillows is desirable ; this, too, furnishes an opportunity 
for putting on fresh pillow-cases. 

Make circular cushions, in the form of a ring, of old linen and stuffed 
with bran. A patient, obliged by disease to lie continually on one side, 
will find great relief to the ear or prominent bones by these " ring- 
cushions." 

Cleanliness of the Person. 

Wash and refresh the patient whenever suitable, also brush the teeth 
and hair — the latter may be bathed with bay rum, lavender water, cologne, 
etc. All this, subject to the strength of the patient, and the permission 
of the medical attendant. It may be deemed needless to give the above 
hint, but it cannot be doubted that by far too many lose the full enjoy- 
ment and benefit of a thorough attention to the cleanliness of the person. 

Washing Gups and Glasses. 

An appropriate table, not liable to injury, is a great convenience in a 
sick room ; so is a small wicker basket, with compartments to hold the 
different bottles of medicine and articles of diet. It may be also useful 
to have a couple of baskets witli compartments to hold glasses or cups, 
one of these being sent out with the things which need washing, and 
always ready to be exchanged. 

Preservation of Ice. 

In our hot summers, one of the greatest practical difficulties in nursing 
arises from the spoiling of articles of food prepared for the sick or for 
infants, and which must be kept at hand for use, especially during the 
night ; it is also a desideratum to have ice at hand for cooling drinks, etc. 
A good contrivance for this purpose is made by I. S. Williams, of Phila- 
delphia. It consists of a double can, the inside of galvanized iron, and 
the outside of tin, with an air-chamber between ; near the bottom is a 
diaphragm, below which a piece of ice is placed, and a bowl or other utensil 
is arranged to set upon this, and to be conveniently lifted out by a wire 
handle. This answers a good purpose. 

Change of Linen. 

A frequent change of linen is a great comfort and benefit, in most cases. 
Let the bed linen be frequently changed (when suitable), and, in serious 
cases of fever, it may be useful to untuck the bottom of the bed and gently 
shake the upper clothes, so as to let the warm and impure air pass away. 
Let the sheets and blankets be of full size, that they may be tucked 
thoroughly under the mattress, or whatever is at the top. It is a comfort 
to the patient to have all straight and smooth under him, and nurses are 
recommended to attend to this more than once in a day. 



APPENDIX. 933 

Change of Room. 

In some particular cases of long and depressing sickness, a change of 
room, conducted with great prudence, ruay be found a powerful aid to- 
wards recovery. 

On removing the patient into another room this ought, if in the spring, 
autumn, or winter, and even in part of the summer, to be very carefully 
prepared with not 01113- a good fire, but an attention to the doors and win- 
dows, that all be shut, and the temperature brought to that of the room 
about to be left. When at any time a patient's room is to be aired, the 
curtains should be drawn closely round the bed. Just raising the window 
for an inch or two will be useful, if it be for a short time ; but, rather 
than run any risk to the invalid, throw on an additional blanket. 

Avoidance of Noise and Excitement. 

Much conversation is often injurious, and whispering offensive. 
Place a pan covered with sand underneath the fire to receive the cinders, 
and have a second ready to make an exchange when this is taken up. 
Let the number of the visitors in the room be chiefly confined to those 
whose services are effective, and let all wear shoes with list or cloth soles 
or slippers. The rustling of silk gowns may prove an annoyance to those 
who are in a very weak state, also the rattling of cups, stirring the fire, 
etc. Those only who have suffered from severe illness can well judge of 
the importance of preserving a quiet mental atmosphere ; hoiv little those 
suffering with languor and pain are competent to sustain the pressure 
which a tale of woe may impose. The subject of conversation should be 
much guarded, while a cheerful demeanor, and innocently lively manner, 
may help to assuage or lessen the sense of distress. 

Sitting up. 

Let the linen-horse be timely placed before the fire, with every article 
likely to be needed ; and, if the clothes are to be put on and washing in- 
cluded, let the hot water and all be ready, so as to avoid the least bustle. 
Spread a blanket on the floor for the patient to walk over. 

Neatness. 

An increased delicacy of the stomach and sense of nicety are the con- 
comitants of disease, and, therefore, the nurse and all around should be 
particularly careful, not only as to the neatness of their own persons, but 
that every close of medicine, and all food, be presented in the most tempt- 
ing, clean, and delicate way. To promote this, it may be desirable, in 
long illnesses, to have at hand a variety of small vessels of different sizes. 

Protection from Light, and from the Blaze of Fire and Candle. 

Diseases are so variable in their effects, that no minute plan is suggested 
for any particular case. However cheering the light of the sun in many 
instances, there are affections where a judicious nurse would be called 
upon to screen the invalid from the blaze of day. She should remember 
that, by a little arrangement of shutters and curtains, a room may still 
be made cheerful by a sort of subdued light ; while in some distressing 
affections of the head, etc., from severe fever, the patient can hardly be 
too much indulged b}- the darkening of the room. In such a case, the 
blaze of the fire must greatly augment suffering. Screens ought to be at 
hand, as well for that as for the candle. The nursery lamp will be 



934 APPENDIX. 

found useful not only to keep a screened light at hand, but also for 
warming soups, beef-tea, or other articles of nourishment. 

Important that the Nurse be taken care of. 

The nurse who is much engaged in night service ought to be carefulty 
spared in the day ; she must have rest, or she cannot long hold out. 
When sitting up at night, some strong coffee or tea, ready made, should 
be prepared, that it ma} r be warmed and taken without the least disturb- 
ance to the sick person. Some nurses make a great noise with the 
clattering of tea-things, which ought to be avoided. 

Gentleness and Kindness, 

All who surround the patient should be kind, gentle, and patient ; not 
a sound of harshness or evidence of discord should reach his ear. Any 
discussion as to whether this or that be best, should be avoided in his 
presence. Some persons, with the greatest desire to do right, do too 
much, and, without intending it, interrupt a sufferer by unimportant 
questions and inquiries, and by moving about the room, when they would 
often do a much greater service by sitting quietly beside the bed, attend- 
ing to requests emanating from the patient, whose feelings and preferences 
should always be consulted and accorded with, if not interfering with 
medical directions, or being in themselves palpably improper and in- 
jurious. There is, perhaps, scarcely any situation in which the call is 
greater upon the Christian virtues than in a sick chamber, for it very 
often happens that disease makes a great impression upon the nervous 
sj^stem, and pain and suffering disturb the accustomed placidity of the 
invalid, who, with every desire to bend patiently under the affliction, may 
now and then seem scarcely able to appreciate the kindest efforts to 
minister to his need. 

To avoid Unreasonable Interruption. 

Particularly guard the sufferer who has just fallen asleep. The person 
having the chief responsibility should be instructed to pass the feathery 
end of a quill through the keyhole, whenever sleep or any other cause 
renders interruption unsuitable ; and this sign should be strictly regarded. 
It is far better than risking disturbance to the patient b}^ trying a locked 
door. Tie the quill to the handle of the door, that it be not lost. 

A Dying-bed. 

Let no one annoy the patient by sitting on the bed, or indulging in 
earnest expressions of surprise or grief. All around ought to be still ; 
no calling out, " Oh, he's dying," etc. 

It should be carefull}^ ascertained that the bod}^ be placed in the easiest 
posture. The bed-curtains should be, in most cases, gently undrawn, and 
the least possible interruption given to the admission of fresh air. All 
but those who are fanning the patient, or perhaps moistening the parched 
mouth or otherwise promoting his comfort, should be careful to keep at 
a distance from the bed, and be quietly seated. It is believed that few 
can tell the suffering often inflicted on the dying by the thoughtless 
bustle of attendants and even friends. The speaking in a loud tone, the 
setting down of even a glass or vial, may often cause distress. No sound 
should disturb, beyond an occasional and necessary whisper, the solemn 
period of dissolution. 



APPENDIX. 935 

Preparations used as Articles of Diet for the Sick and 
Convalescent. 

Arrowroot Pap. 

Take of Arrowroot, one large tablespoonful. 
Water, one pint. 

First mix the arrowroot well into a paste with a little of the cold 
water ; bring the remainder of the water to a boiling heat ; then stir in 
the arrowroot ; let it boil a few minutes ; sweeten it with loaf sugar. 

The preparation of arrowroot pap with milk renders it richer and more 
nutritious, though sometimes not allowable. 

The application of direct heat to preparations of this description, 
always involves the danger of scorching them, and the intervention of a 
water-bath is found to prevent the accident. The apparatus known as 
Hecker's farina boiler, figured on page 106, is made for the purpose, and 
is a useful utensil in an}' family. 

Arrowroot Pap, with Milk. 

Put in a saucepan, to boil, one pint of milk ; stir very smoothly, into 
a cup of cold milk, a dessertspoonful of arrowroot ; when the milk boils, 
stir in the arrowroot ; continue to stir until it is cooked, which will be in 
five or ten minutes ; then remove it from the fire, and sweeten to the taste. 

Toast Water. 

Cut a slice of stale bread half an inch thick, a finger length long; cut 
off the crust, and toast it quite brown, but not scorched ; while hot, put 
it into a small pitcher; pour over half a pint of boiling water; cover it 
tightly and when cool pour it off and strain. 

Mulled Wine. 

Put cinnamon or allspice (to the taste) into a cup of hot water to 
steep ; add three eggs, well beaten, with sugar ; heat to a boil a pint of 
wine ; then put in the spice and eggs, while boiling, and stir them until 
done, which will be in three minutes. 

Jelly for Invalids. 

Cut a penn3 T roll into thin slices ; toast them to a light brown ; then 
boil gently in a quart of water until it jellies ; strain it upon a few shavings 
of lemon-peel ; sweeten, and add, if liked, a little wine and nutmeg. 

Eggnog. 

Take the yelks of eight eggs ; beat them with six large spoonfuls of 
pulverized loaf sugar ; when this is a cream, add the third part of a nut- 
meg, grated ; into this stir one tumblerful of good brand}', and one wine- 
glass of good Madeira wine ; mix them well together ; have ready the 
whites of the eggs, beaten to a stiff froth, and beat them into the mixture ; 
when all are well mixed, add three pints of rich milk. 

Panada. 

Cut two slices of stale bread half an inch in thickness ; cut off the crust ; 
toast them a nice brown ; cut them into squares of two inches in size ; 
lay them in a bowl, sprinkle a little salt over them, and pour on a pint 
of boiling water ; grate a little nutmeg. 



936 APPENDIX. 

Tapioca. 

Soak two tablespoonfuls of very clean tapioca in two teacups of cold 
water over night ; in the morning, add a little salt, one pint of milk, or 
water if milk cannot be taken ; simmer it until quite soft ; stir well while 
cooling ; when done, pour into a bowl, and, if allowed, add sugar, a spoon- 
ful of wine, and a little nutmeg. 

Rice Jelly. 

Take of rice, one-quarter of a pound ; white sugar, half a pound ; water, 
one quart. Boil these well together, carefully stirring them till the whole 
becomes a glutinous mass. Strain off into a dish or form. When cool, it 
is fit for use. This preparation may be flavored with rose-water, orange- 
flower water, or lemon-juice, as may best suit the palate of the patient, 
or as directed by the physician. 

Iceland Moss Jelly. 

Take of Iceland moss, two ounces ; water, one quart. First wash the 
moss in some cold water ; then put it into the quart of water, and boil 
slowly till very thick, adding white sugar till sumcientl} 7 sweet, then strain 
through a cloth. When cold, it will be fit for use, and may be eaten with 
spices, if allowed. Irish moss jelly may be prepared in the same way. 

Sago Jelly. 

Take four tablespoonfuls of sago, one quart of water, juice and rind of 
one lemon ;• sweeten to the taste. Mix all the ingredients well together ; 
let it stand for half an hour ; then put it on to boil, till the particles are 
entirely dissolved ; it should be constantly stirred. It is very much im- 
proved by the addition of wine. 

Calves 1 Feet Jelly. 

Boil two calves' feet in one gallon of water, down to a quart ; then 
strain it, and, when cold, skim off all the fat ; take up all the clear jelly. 
Put the jelly into a saucepan, with a pint of wine, half a pound of loaf 
sugar, the juice of four lemons, the white of six or eight eggs beaten 
into a froth. Mix all well together. Set the saucepan upon a clear fire, 
and stir the jelly till it boils. When it has boiled ten minutes, pour it 
through a flannel bag till it runs clear. 

Essence of Beef. 

This is prepared from lean meat, by cutting it into small pieces, adding 
a little salt, then introducing into a wide-mouth bottle, corked tightly, 
and heating it gradually by immersing in a kettle of water, to which heat 
is applied till it boils. After a few hours digesting in this way, the juice 
is drawn off, and constitutes the most concentrated form of nourishment. 

Beef Tea. 

Take of lean beef one-quarter of a pound, a pint and a half of water, 
salt sufficient to season it. When it begins to boil, skim it five minutes ; 
then add two blades of mace ; continue the boiling ten minutes longer, 
when it will be ready for use. (See Liebig's Broth, page 366.) 



APPENDIX. 937 

Chicken Broth. 

Clean half a chicken ; on it pour one quart of cold water, and a little 
salt ; put in a spoonful of rice ; boil two hours very slowly, and tightly 
covered ; skini it well ; just before using it, put in a little chopped parsley. 

Chicken Jelly. 

Cut up a chicken ; put it into a stone jar ; break all the bones ; cover 
very closely; set the jar into boiling water ; keep it boiling three hours 
and a half; strain off the liquor ; season with salt and a very little mace. 

Rice Jelly. 

Boil a quarter of a pound of the best rice flour, with half a pound of 
loaf sugar, in a quart of water, until the whole becomes one glutinous 
mass ; strain off the jelly, and let it stand to cool. This is nutritious 
and light. 

Slippery Elm Bark Jelly. 

Four large spoonfuls of the bark, chipped ; pour on it one quart of 
cold water ; let it stand all night ; stir it, and let it settle ; the next 
morning pour off the water ; slice the rind of a lemon very thinly, and, 
with the juice, put it in the water strained; let it simmer, very gently, 
fifteen minutes ; then sweeten, and pour in a mould to cool and harden ; 
take out the rind before putting it in the mould. 

Wine Whey. 

Boil a pint of new milk ; add to it a glass or two of white wine ; put 
it on the fire until it just boils again; then set it aside till the curd 
settles ; pour off the clean whey ; sweeten to the taste ; cider serves as 
well as wine to curdle milk, if it is good country cider. 

Corn Meal, or Oatmeal Gruel. 

Put in a clean saucepan one pint of water to boil ; when boiling, mix 
of oatmeal two large spoonfuls, in a half pint of milk, and a little salt ; 
stir this into the boiling water ; stir it well ; let it simmer thirty minutes ; 
then strain through a hair-sieve ; if the patient can bear it, stir in a large 
spoonful of the best brandy after it is strained and sweetened, and add a 
little grated nutmeg ; if corn meal is us/jd, stir the dry co^n meal into 
the boiling water ; two large spoonfuls to a pint of boiling water, and a 
half pint of new milk ; season as the other. 

Vegetable Soup. 

Take two white potatoes, one onion, a piece of well-baked bread. Put 
these into a clean stewpan, in one quart of water ; boil them down to a 
pint ; throw into the vessel some parsley or celery ; cover the vessel 
closely ; remove it from the fire, and allow the herbs to steep, while the 
liquor is cooling, under cover ; season to the taste. 

Castillon's Powders. 
Take of Powdered tragacanth, 
Powdered sago, 
Powdered salep, 
Siigfar, each, one ounce. 
Prepared oyster-shell, two drachms. 



938 



APPENDIX. 



Mix them thoroughly, and fold into papers containing each one 
drachm. 

Directions. — Mix a powder with four tablespoonfuls of cold milk in a 
bowl. Then transfer it to a milk-pan, and while stirring, pour upon it 
gradually one pint of boiling milk, and boil for a quarter of an hour. 
Sugar may be added, to the taste. 

SMALL OUTFIT 



FOR A PHYSICIAN COMMENCING PRACTICE IN THE COUNTRY. 

The following list of Medicines and Preparations may be regarded as the least 
on which a physician who is obliged to dispense his own prescriptions can 
commence practice. It is intended that the Medicines and Preparations 
should be put up in substantial Ground-Stoppered Bottles. 

4 oz. Pulvis extract, glycyr- 

rhizse. 
1 oz. Pulvis gambogias. 
1 oz. " ipecacuanhas 

3 oz. Pulvis ipecacuanhas 
comp. 

1 oz. Pulvis opii. 

4 oz. " rhei (E. Ind.). 

2 oz. " scillas. 
6 oz. " sodas boratis. 
8 oz. Quassia. 
1 oz. Quinias sulphas. 
4 oz. Rheum. 
6 oz. Sapo (Castil. alb.). 
4 oz. Senega. 
4 oz. Serpentaria. 
1 lb Sodii bicarb. 
8 oz. Sulphur sublim. 
1 pint Spiritus astheris nit. 
J pint Spirit, astheris comp. 
1 pint Spiritus lavandulas 

comp. 

| pint Syrupus ipecacu- 
anhse. 

J pint Syrupus scillas. 

| pint " rhei arom. 

1 pint Tinctura cinchonas 
comp. 

1 pint Tinctura opii. 

1 pint " " camph. 
4 oz. Unguentum hydrarg. 

(| mercury). 
4 oz. Unguentum hydrarg. 

nitratis. 
\ pint Vin. colchici rad. 

2 oz. Zinci oxidum. 
6 oz. " sulphas. 



OX. J 



8 oz. Acacia. 

J pint Acidum aceticum. 

3 oz. " citricum. 

2 oz. " muriaticum. 

3 oz. " nitricum. 

\ pint " sulph. arom. 

1 oz. " tannicum. 

2 pints Alcohol. 

4 oz. Alumen. 

4 oz. Ammonii carbonas. 
4 oz. " murias. 

1 pint " Aqua. 
\ pint Ammonias spiritus 
arom. 

1 oz. Antim. et potass, tart. 
\ oz. Argenti nitras. cryst. 
\ oz. " " fusa, 
4 oz. Assafoetida. 

8 oz. Camphora. 

2 oz. Cardamomum. 

4 oz. Ceratum cantharidis. 

3 oz. Chloroformum. 
2 oz. Collodium. 

\ pint Copaiba. 

1 oz. Creasotum. 

6 oz. Creta prseparata, or ) 

4 oz. Calcis carb. prascip. / 
4 oz. Cupri sulphas. 

2 oz. Ergota (whole or pow- 
dered). 

\ pint iEther (Letheon). 

1 oz. Extractum aconiti 

1 oz. Extractum belladonnas. 

1 oz. Extractum colocynth 
comp. pulv. 

2 oz. Extractum gentianae. 
1 oz. Extractum hyoscyami. 



1 oz. Extractum jalapas pul- 

veris. 
8 oz. Extractum valerianas 

fluid. 
8 oz. Ferri subcarbonas. 

1 oz. Ferrum redactum. 

\ pint Ferri chloridi tinct. 

4 oz. Foeniculum. 

8 oz. Gentiana contus. 

4 oz. Hydrarg. massa. 

4 oz. " chlorid. mit. 

2 oz. " oxid. rub. 

2 oz. " cum creta. 

1 oz. Iodinium. 

\ pint Liquor hydrarg. et 

arsen. iodid. 
\ pint Liquor potassii arse- 

nitis. 

3 oz. Magnesia. 

2ffi " sulphas. 

\ oz. Morphias sulphas. 

2 oz. Myrrha. 

\ oz. Oleum cinnamomi. 

\ oz. " limonis. 

\ oz. " menthas pip 

1 pint " ricini. 

1 pint " terebinthinae. 

\ oz. " tiglii. 

6 oz. Plumbi acetas. 

3 oz. Potassii bicarb. 



12 oz. 

3 oz. 

4 oz. 
6 oz. 



bitartras. 
citras. 

chloras. 
nitras. 



2 oz. Potassii iodidum. 
6 oz. Pulvis acacias. 

3 oz. " aloes, Soc. 



Scales and weights, 
f §iv. Grad. Measure. 
1 Mortar and pestle. 

1 Pill tile. 

2 Spatulas. 



IMPLEMENTS. 



\ gross vials. 
German flint. 



\ doz. f gviij. 

\ doz. f §vj. 

\\ doz. f §iv. 

1J doz. f.^ij. 

\\ doz. f|i. 

I 1 doz. f^ss. 



1 Funnel. 

1 qr. Wrapping & filtering paper. 

1 gross Vial corks. 

2 papers Pill boxes. 

2 yards Adhesive plaster in tin 

case. 



APPENDIX. 



939 



This Catalogue is retained as a guide to the Practitioner of Medicine who 
intends dispensing his own prescriptions, and was formerly termed 



A MOKE COMPLETE OUTFIT. 



But the great changes which have taken place, from various causes, render 
the value quite different and constantly fluctuating. 



Bb Acacia. 

Hi " pulvis. 

pint Alcohol. 

pint Acidum aceticum. 

oz. " benzoicum. 

oz. " citricum. 

oz. " hydroc. dil. 

oz. " muriaticum. 

oz. " nitricum. 

pint " sulpb. arom. 

oz. " tannicura. 

oz. Aloe pulvis (Soc). 

oz. Alumen. 

oz. Ammonii carbonas. 

pint " aqua. 

oz. " murias. 

pint " spt. arom. 

oz. Antim. et potass, tart. 

oz. Argenti nitras. cryst. 

oz. " " fusa. 

oz. Assafoetida. 

oz. Bismutbi subnitras. 

oz. Camphora. 

oz. Cardamomum 

oz. Creta prasparata, or 

oz. Calc. carb. prascip. 

oz. Chloroform am. 

oz. Cinchona rub. pulv. 

oz. Cinchonas sulphas. 

oz. Creasotum. 

oz. Ceratum cantharidis. 

oz. " resinas. 

oz. " simplex. 



i pint Copaiba. 

1 E3 Cubebas pulv. 

2 oz. Collodium. 



1 oz. " 
4 oz. Ergota. 
1 Bb .Ether. 
1 oz. Extract. 
1 oz. " 

1 oz. " 

1 oz. " 

2 oz. 
2 oz. 

1 oz. " 

1 oz. " 
8 oz. " 
1 lb 
1 lb 

nas fluiuum. 



cantharidal. 



aconiti. 
belladonnas, 
conii. 

hyoscyami. 
coloc. c. pulv. 
jalapas pulv. 
nucis vomicae, 
quassias, 
taraxaci. 
sennas fluid, 
spigel. et sen- 



pint Ext. Valerianae fluid, 
cz. Ferri carbon, massa 
(Vallet). 

oz. Ferri subcarb. 
oz. '' citras. 
pint " sesquisulph. sol. 
(with directions for pre- 
paring hydrated peroxide 
■when required), 
oz. Ferrum redactum. 
oz. Fceniculum. 
oz. Gambogise pulv. 
Bb Gentianas contus. 
oz. Glycyrrhizas ext. pulv. 
oz. " rad. " 

oz. Glycerinum. 
Bb Hydrarg. massa. 
Bb 4i chlor. mit. 
oz. " cum creta. 
oz. " oxid. rub. 
oz. " iodidum. 
oz. Iodinium. 
oz. Ipecacuanhas pulvis. 
oz. Jalapas pulvis. 
oz. Juniperus. 
oz. Kino. 

oz. Liquor iodinii comp. 
pint li hyd. et ars. iod. 
pint " potass, arsenit. 
tb bot. Magnesia. 
lb Magnesii carb. 
Bb " sulphas, 
oz. Manna, 
oz. Morphias sulphas, 
oz. " acetas. 

oz. " murias. 

oz. Myrrha. 
oz. Oleum anisi. 



oz. 

oz. 

oz. 

bot. 

pint 

pint 

oz. 



cinnamomi. 

limonis. 

menthas pip. 

olivas. 

ricini. 

terebinthinas. 

ti sclii. 



oz. Opii pulvis. 
oz. Plumbi acetas. 
oz. " carbonas. 
oz. Potassa (caustic), 
oz. Potassii bicarbonai 
B) " bitartras. 



4 oz. Potassii citras. 
4 oz. " nitras. 

8 oz. " sulphas. 

2 oz. " iodidum. 

3 oz. Pulvis ipecac, comp. 
8 oz. Quassia. 

1 oz. Quiuias sulphas 

6 oz. Rheum (E. Ind.). 

4 oz. Pthei pulvis. 

4 oz. Sapo (CastiL). 
8 oz. Sarsaparilla. 

2 oz. Scillas pulv. 

8 oz. Senna (Alex.). 

8 oz. Senega. 

8 oz. Serpentaria. 

1^ Bb Sodii bicarbonas. 

4 oz. " borat. pulv. 

8 oz. " et potass, tart. 

4 oz. " phosphas. 

8 oz. Spigelia. 

^ oz. Strychnia. 

4 oz. Sulphur prascip. 

| Bo " sublim. 

^ pint Spirit, ammon. arom. 

£ pint " astheris comp. 

1 pint " M nitrici. 

i pint " lavand. comp. 

| pint Syrup, ipecacuanhas. 

| pint Syrupus ferri iod. 

1 pint " pruni virg. 

1 pint " rhei aromat. 

1 pint " scillas. 

£ pint " senegas. 

4 oz. Tinctura aconiti rad. 



1 pint 
h pint 
I pint 
1 pint 
1 pint 
1 pint 



cinchonas c. 
digitalis. 
ferri chloridi. 
opii. 

" camph. 
zingiberis. 



i lb Ung. hydrarg. 

f Bb " " nitratis. 

^ lb " simplex. 

}j E5 Uva ursi. 

h lb Valeriana. 

1 pint Yinum antimonii. 

h pint li ergotas. 

^ pint •' colchici rad. 

| oz. Yeratria. 

4 oz. Zinci oxidum. 

8 oz. " sulphas. 



I 



940 APPENDIX. 



RECIPES FOR SOME OF THE MORE IMPORTANT POPULAR MEDICINES. 

Dalby's Carminative. 

The published recipes for this, as found in the formularies, are not those 
used generally by druggists. Some of the ingredients in the original 
recipes are procurable with difficulty, and add so much to the expense of 
the preparation, that by common consent they are left out. The formula, 
as given by the College of Pharmacj 7 , is nearly identical with that which 
I have used for a number of years, and I give it below. 

Parts. 

Take of Carbonate of magnesium . . . . ^vj 75. 

Carbonate of potassium £ij 3.125. 

Sugar ,^xvj 200. 

Tincture of opium fgiij op. 37.5. 

Water Ov 1000. 

Oils of caraway, 

Fennel, 

Peppermint, each itix. 

(To the above may be added — 

French brandy f ^iv. 

Prepared chalk ; . . . . gij.) 

Triturate together the essential oils, sugar, magnesium (and prepared 
chalk, if added), then add the water, and afterwards the remainder. 
Dalby's carminative contains one grain of opium to about an ounce. 

Dewees 1 Carminative. 

Take of Carbonate of magnesium giss. 

Sugar . . . giij. 

Tincture of assafcetida f giij. 

Tincture of opium f :fj. 

Water Oiss. 

Triturate together until the} 7 are mixed. 

Bateman's Pectoral Drops. 

Take of Diluted alcohol Cong, j 1000. 

Ked sanders,* rasped 5SS 31.25. 

Digest for twenty-four hours, filter, and add — 

Opium, in powder 3ss 31.25. 

Catechu, in powder ...... I ss 31.25. 

Camphor £ss 31.25. 

Oil of anise f£j 7.81. 

Digest for ten days. 

This preparation contains about one grain each of opium, catechu, and 
camphor, to the f gss, corresponding in strength with tinctura opii cam- 
phorata, U. S. P. 

Godfrey's Cordial. 

Parts. 

Take of Tincture of opium fgvj op. 34.51 

Molasses (sugar house) Oiv 367.8 I wqqq 

Alcohol f,lviij 46. j 

Water Oviss 551.7 j 

" Carbonate of potassium £v 57.5. 

Oil of sassafras f 3j 11. 

* Superseded by Caramel siij. 



I 



APPENDIX. 941 

Dissolve the carbonate of potassium in the water, acid the molasses, 
and heat over a gentle fire till they simmer, remove the scum which rises, 
and add the laudanum and oil of sassafras, having previously mixed them 
well together. 

This preparation contains a little over one grain of opium to the ounce, 
and is about half the strength of the foregoing. 

Balsam of Honey. 

Take of Balsam Tolu gj. 

Benzoic acid £iss. 

Honey 3yj. 

Opium (powd.) gij. 

Cochineal 3j. 

French brandy Oiij. 

Mix, and digest together for a few da} T s, then filter. 

Composition Powders. (Thompsonian.) 

Take of Powdered bayberry root ftj. 

Powdered ginger ftss. 

Powdered cayenne §j. 

Powdered cloves 3j. 

Mix, by passing through a sieve. 

No. 6 — Hot Drops. (Thompsonian.) 

Take of Capsicum (powd.) 3j. 

Myrrh (contus.) ,^iv. 

Alcohol Oij. 

Displace. 

Haarlem Oil. 

Take of 01. Sulphurat Oiij. 

Petrol. Barbadens Oj. 

Ol. succin (crude) Oiss. 

01. terebinth. . . . • Oviij. 

01. lini Oiv. 

Mix. 

Turlington's Balsam of Life. 

The officinal tinctura benzoini composita is sold under this name, but 
the druggists who put it up in the peculiar and very odd-shaped vials, in 
which it was originally vended in wrappers descriptive of its virtues, use 
various recipes for making it. The following is that published by the 
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and used in many of the best estab- 
lishments. The original recipe for this, as filed in the office of rolls 
in London, contained twentj'-eight ingredients. 

Take of Alcohol Oiv . 

Benzoin ^yj. 

Liquid storax £ij. 

Socotrine aloes gss. 

Peruvian balsam ^j. 

Myrrh ^ss. 

Angelica gij. 

Balsam Tolu |ij. 

Extract of liquorice 3ij. 

Digest for ten days and strain. 



942 APPENDIX. 

Opodeldoc. 

Take of Common soap (sliced), three ounces. 
Camphor, an ounce. 
Oil of rosemary, 

Oil of origanum, each, a fluidrachm. 
Alcohol, a pint. 

Digest the soap, by means of a sand-bath, with the alcohol till it is 
dissolved, then add the camphor and oils, and when they are dissolved 
pour the liquid into wide-mouth two-ounce bottles. 

British Oil. 

Take of Oil of turpentine f ^iv. 

Oil of flaxseed Oiij. 

Oil of amber Oj. 

Oil of juniper f,^ss. 

Petroleum (Barbadoes) . 31J. 

Petroleum (American) 5ij. 

Mix them well together. 

Whitehead's Essence of Mustard. 

Take of 01. terebinth Oxij. 

Camphorse 1\ ft>. com. 

01. succin. rectif. f %iv. 

Sem. sinapis, pulv. (Flava) 16 oz. com. 

Digest for seven days, filter, and add — 

Tr. curcuma q. s. — Add color. 

Hooper's Female Pills. 

Parts. 

Take of Aloes .' gyiij 400. 

Dried sulphate of iron ,§ij 3iss. ] qoo 

or Crystallized sulphate of iron ^iv J 

Extract of black hellebore ^ij 100. 

Myrrh ^ij 100. 

Soap 3jj 100. 

Powdered canella ^j 50. 

Powdered ginger 2j 50. 

1000. 

Beat them well together into a mass with syrup, or water, and divide 
into pills, each containing two and a half grains. 

Richards 1 Chalk Mixture. 

Take of Precip. carbonate of calcium, 

Sugar, of each ^j. 

Comp. spt. lavender, 

Tinct. kino, of each f *j. 

Essence of cinnamon 15 drops. 

Water f3jij. 

Tincture of opium f 3j. 

Mix. 



APPENDIX. 



943 



Marshall's Pills. 



Take of Corap. extract of colocynth, 
Mercurial mass, 
Powdered aloes, 
Powdered Castile soap, 
Powdered rhubarb, of each 

Make into five-grain pills. 



1 drachm. 



Anderson's Scots' Pills. 



Parts. 



Take of Aloes . . 
Soap . . 
Colocynth . 
Gamboge . 
Oil of anise 



5 xxiv. 


787. 


5iv. 


131. 


5j. 


33. 


SJ- 


33. 


f^SS. 


16. 



1000. 



Let the aloes, colocjmth, and gamboge be reduced to a very fine powder, 
then beat them and the soap with water into a mass of a proper con- 
sistence to divide into pills, each containing three grains. 

Worm Tea.* 
Take of Senna, 
Manna, 
Spigelia, of each .... 

Fennel seed 

Worm seed 

Savine 

Bitartrate of potassium . . 



5ss. 

3ss. 
Bij. 
Bij. 



Make into one package. 

Directions. — Pour on to this a quart of boiling water, and let it digest 
for ten or fifteen minutes ; of the clear liquor sweetened, give to children 
two years old and upwards a small teacupfnl warm, morning, noon, and 
night, on an empty stomach. It may be given three or four clays suc- 
cessively, if necessary. 

Ginger Beer. 

Take of Pace ginger (bruised) Four ounces. 

Bitartrate of potassium Three ounces. 

Mix them. 

Directions. — Add to these ingredients five pounds of loaf sugar, two 
lemons (sliced), and five gallons of boiling water. Let it stand twelve 
hours ; then add a teacupful of }-east to the mixture, and bottle imme- 
diately and securely. In a clay or two it will be ready for use. 

Pipsissewa Beer. 

The virtues of this excellent alterative diuretic are obtained in an 
agreeable form, by the following process : — 

Take of Pipsissewa (chimaphila, TJ. S. P.) . . Six ounces. 
Water One gallon. 



See page 542. 



944 



APPENDIX. 



Boil, strain, and add — 

Brown sugar One pound. 

Powdered ginger ........ One-half ounce. 

Yeast A sufficient quantity. 

Set it aside till fermentation has commenced ; then bottle it for use. 
Dose, a small tumblerful three or four times a day. 

In the same way, sarsaparilla, sassafras, uva ursi, and other medicinal 
substances, may be made into Gere visise, or beers. 



INDEX. 



ABBREVIATIONS in pre- 
scriptions, 783 
Abietin, 425 
Abietine, 407 
Absynthin, 523 
Acacia, 337 

powdering, 543 
Acarus scabiei, 145 
Aceta, 629 
Acetaldehyd, 365 
Acetates. See Bases. 
Acetic fermentation, 363 
Acetone, 331 

mixture, 849 
Acetum, 331 

tested volum., 927 
colchici (drops), 80 
destillatum, 629 
(drops), 80 
lobelia?, 630, 631 
opii, 630, 640, 642, 647 

(drops), 79 
sanguinariae, 630 
scillae, 630 

(drops), 80 
Acid, 147 

bottle, 25 
fermentation, 535 
Acid (Acidum), 
abietinic, 425 
acetic, 330, 365, 430, 629 
(drops), 79 
saturating power, 176 
camphorated, 772 
diluted, 629 
(drops), 79 
tested volumet., 
927 
glacial, 330 

(drops), 79 
tested volumet., 
927 
monohydrated, 330 
aconitic, 434, 435, 441 

artif., 435 
acrylic, 385 
sescinic, 521 
alpba-orcellic, 464 
amido-acetic, 461, 518 
amido-capronic, 518 
anacardic, 437, 441 
anchusic, 463 
anemonic, 420, 522 
angelicic, 412, 437, 438, 
444 

60 



Acid- 
anisic, 444 

antimonic, 285 

antimonious, 285, 288 

arachic, 384 

arsenic, 148, 292, 294 

arsenious, 292, 293 
See Arsenic. 

aspertannic, 456 

balaenic, 385 

behenic, 385 

benzoic, 426, 444, 449 
anhydrous, 402 
apparatus, 449 

beta-orcellic, 464 

bezoaric, 455 

bixic, 463 

boheatannic, 456 

boracre, 148, 153 

brazil ic, 463 

bumolic, 452 

butyric, 379 

caffeotannic, 456 

caincic, 437, 440 

callutannic, 456 

camphoric, 406 

caprinic, 384, 402 note, 
4U 

capronic, 384 

caprylic, 384 

carbazotic, 444, 453 

carbolic, 332, 448, 451 
preparations, 451 
test, 451 
water, 559, 572, 573 

carbonic, 148, 149, 385 
apparatus, 124 
processes, 123 
water, 149, 559 

carmic, 456, 466 

carotic, 463 

carthamic, 463 

carthaxanthic, 463 

caryophyllic, 411, 443, 
448 

cateehuic, 456 

catechuinic, 456 
. catechutannic, 455 

cathartic, 439 

cephaelic, 457 

cerotinic, 385 

cetraric, 437, 440 

chelidonic, 441, 442 

chlorogenic, 456 

cblorohydric, 154 



Acid — 

chlorohydrocyanic, 148, 

165 
cholalic, 462 
choleic, 358 
choleinic, 460 
cholic, 358, 460, 461 
cholesteric, 462 
chromic, 148, 154 
chrysophanic, 436, 437, 

438 
cinchotannic, 442, 456 
cinnamic, 402, 415, 426, 
444, 450 

hydrated, 428 
cissotannic, 457 
citracantic, 435 
citraconic, 435 
citric, 430, 433 

saturating power, 
168, 176 

tested volum., 927 

yield from lemon - 
juice, 168 
coccalinic, 433 
coccotannic, 456 
coflfeic, 456 
coffeotannic, 456 
colophonic, 424 
convolvulic, 530 
convolvulinolic, 530 
copaivic, 422, 424 
cornic, 438, 441 
cortepinitannic, 457 
coumaric, 522 
crocic, 463 
crotonic, 385 
cuminic, 402 
curcumic, 464 
damaluric, 385 
dammaric, 423 
dextro-tartaric, 432 
digitaleic, 438, 441 
digitalic, 438, 441 
elaic, 385 
ellagic, 455, 459 
equisetic, 434 
erucic, 385 
erythric, 464 
eugenic, 448 
euxanthic, 466 
evernic, 464 
formic, 374, 434, 435 

artif., 435 
fumaric, 433, 434, 435,441 

(945) 



946 



INDEX. 



Acid — 

fungic, 433 

galhuminic, 455 

galitannic, 456 

gallic, 347, 455, 458 

gallotannic, 347, 455, 457 

gambogic, 425, 464 

geadic, 385 

gentisic, 463 

glyceric, 388 

glycocholic, 460 

guaiacic, 437, 438 

gyrophoric, 464 

haematoxylic, 464 

hederic, 437, 438 

hippuric, 450, 460 

hydriodic, dilut. , 148, 
163 

hydrobromic, 148, 164 

hydrochloric, 148, 154 
(drops), 79 
tested volum., 927 
diluted, J 48, 155 

tested volum., 
927 

hydrocyanic, dilut., 443, 

445, 452 
(drops), 79 
different strength, 

448 
volumetric test of, 

446, 926 
hydrosulphuric, 148, 164 
hydrothionic, 164 
hyocholalic, 462 
hyocholic, 460, 461 
hyperchloric 248 
hypochlorous, 189 
hypogaeic, 385 
hypophosphorous, 145, 

148, 164, 165 
igasuric, 433 
ilixanthic, 464 
inosinic, 460, 461 
ipecacuanhic, 457 
ipomie, 530 
isotartaric, 432 
itaconic, 435 
jalapinolic, 530 
japonic, 456 
kinic, 442 
kinovatannic, 456 
kinovic, 523, 529 
komenic, 442 
lactic, 435, 436 
lactucic, 523 
leevo-tartaric, 432 
laurinic, 3S4 
laurostearic, 384 
leditannic, 456 
lichenstearic, 440 
lithic, 460 
lizaric, 463 
lobelic, 515 
luteolic, 463 ■ 
mafuric, 436 
malic, 430, 432 
maleic, 436 
mangostic, 463 
margaric, 384 
meconic, 441, 442 
test, 441, 474 



Acid — 

menispermic, 433 
mesaconic, 435 
metagallic, 455 
metapectic, 336 
metaphosphoric, 161 
metatartaric, 432 
methylsalicic, 413 
methylsalicylic, 443, 448 
mimotannic, 455 
moric, 456 
moringic, 385 
moritannic, 456 
mucic, 335, 339 
muriatic, 148, 154 

(drops), 79 

tested volumetric, 
927 

dilute, 148, 155 

tested volumet., 
927 
myristic, 384 
myronic, 351, 453 
nicotic, 433 
nitric, 148, 155 

(drops), 79 

tested volumetric, 
927 

dilute, 148, 157 
(drops), 79 
saturating 

power, 176 
tested volumet- 
ric, 927 

stains removed, 200 
nitro-muriatic,' 148, 158 

tested volumetric, 
927 

diluted, 148, 158 
nitro-salicylic, 532 
nitro-salicylous, 532 
nitroso-nitricum, 148, 157 

extemporaneous, 158 
cenanthylic, 384 
oleic, 385 
olinic, 385 
ophelic, 525 
opianic, 484 
orceic, 464 
orsellic, 464 
oxalic, 430 
oxylizaric, 463 
oxyphenic, 456, 466 
oxypinitannic, 457 
palmitic, 384 
para-ellagic, 455 
parakomenic 442 
paramalic, 433, 435 
parapectic, 336 
paratartaric, 432 
parietinic, 438 
parillic, 527 
pectic, 336 
pectosic, 336 

pelargonic, 381, 384, 444 
phenic, 451 
phenylic, 444 
phloridzic, 437, 438 
phospho-molybdic, 471, 

473 
phosphoric, 145, 165 

dilute, 148, 162 



Acid, phosphoric — 

glacial, 148, 161 

tribasic, 161 
phosphorous, 145 
physetic, 385 
picric, 444, 453 
picrotoxic, 437, 43S 
pimaric, 424 
pinicortannic, 457 
pinitannic, 457 
piperic, 510 
pipizaic, 464 
polygalic, 437, 440 
propionic, 465 
purreeic, 466 
pyrocatechuic, 456 
pyrodeoric, 456 
pyrogallic, 455, 459 
pyromeconic, 442 
pyrophosphoric, 161 
pyrotartaric, 432 
quercitric, 456, 463 
quercitritannic, 456 
quercotarmic, 455 
racemic, 432 
rhabarberic, 438 
rhamnotannic, 522 
rhamnoxanthic, 463 
rhodanic, 165 
rhodotannic, 456 
ricin-oleic, 385 
rosolic, 452 
rottleric, 463 
ruberythric, 463 
rubichloric, 457 
rubinic, 456 
rufi-cinchonic, 456 
rufigallic, 455 
rufikinovic, 456 
rufimoric, 456 
rufisulphuric, 532 
rufo-catechuic, 456 
rutinic, 444, 463 
saccharic, 339,430 
salicylic, 402, 448 
salicylous, 347, 443, 448 
santalic, 463 
santonic, 437, 439 
scoparic, 464 
sinapic, 385, 528 
solanic, 433 
spiric, 448 
spirous, 402, 448 
stearic, 384 
succinic, 424, 434, 435 

artificial, 435 
sulpho-carbolic, 856 note, 
sulpho cholic, 460 
sulpho-hydrocyanic, 148, 

165 
sulphovinic, 365 
sulphuric, 148, 158 

freed from arsenic, 
159 

(drops), 79 

tested volumetric. , 
927 

aromatic, 148, 160 
(drops), 79 
tested volumet- 
ric, 927 

dilute, 148, 159 



INDEX, 



947 



Acid, sulphuric, dilute — 
(drops), 79 
saturating pow- 
er, 176 
tested volumet- 
ric, 927 
sulphurosum, 148, 160 
tested volumetric, 
926 
sulphydric, 164 
sylvic, 424 
tannic, 455, 457 

pills, 807 
tanningic, 456 
tanno-melanic, 455 
tannoxylic, 455 
tartaric, 430, 431 
artificial, 431 
inactive, 432 
saturating power, 

168, 176 
tested volumetric, 
927 
tartralic, 432 
thujic, 463 
taurocholic, 460, 461 
tungstic, 172 
uric, 460, 461 
usnic, 340 
uvic, 430, 431 
valerianic, 379, 3S4, 444, 

449 
veratric, 442 
viridinic, 456 
xanthoproteic, 349 
xanthorhamnic, 4C3 
xanthotamiic, 457 
Acidometer, 87 
Acids, administration of, 148 
astringent, 454 
combined with alkaloids, 

441 
anhydrous, 129 
animal, 460 
antidote, 148 
biliary, 461 
bitter, 437 
chromogenic, 462, 463, 

464 
yielding colors, 462, 463, 

464 
from cryptogamic plants, 

464 
fatty, 384 
fruit, 430 

derivatives, 434 
inorganic, 147 
representing medicinal 

activity of plants, 436 
mineral, 148 
from essential oils, 443 
yLlding essential oils, 

453 
organic, 429 
Aconitia, 474, 478 
Acrolein, 387 
Adapter, 110 
Adeps, 390 
Adjuvants, 797 
Aerugo, 263 
JEseuletin, 347, 529 
^Isculin, 347, 521, 528 



-Ether, 366, 369 

fortior, 366, 369 
lotus, 370 
See Ether. 
Agonidine, 524 
j Alberti's antibilious pills, 821 
Albumen, 350, 352 

pure, insoluble, 349 
test, 351 
Albuminose, 361 
Albuminous principles, 348 
Alcohol, 364, 366, 369, 603 
(drops), 79 
absolute, 364, 368 
amylic, 366, 368, 379, 380 
Atwood's patent, 368 
blast lamp, 94 
butylic, 379 
deodorized, 367, 368 
dilute, 366, 369, 604 

(drops), 79 
druggists', 367, 603 
ethylic, 364 

derivatives, 364 
expan ion table, 368 
fortius, 366, 369 
lamps, 93 
methylic, 331, 374 

derivatives, 374 
per cent, in wine, 364 
phenylic, 451 
tolylic, 428 
Alcoholic fermentation, 362 
Alcoolatures, 603 
Aldelvde, 365 
Ale, 364 
Aleuron, 351 
Algaroth's powder, 288 
Alkalies, 166, 169, 174, 1S4, 
192, 194 
organic, 467 
Alkaline solution, Physick's, 

586 
Alkaloids, 467 
animal, 517 
chemical history, 469 

and phvsical proper- 
ties, 498 
Howard's, 498 
how to dissolve, 48 
nomenclature, 468 
preparation, 469 
phenyl series, 471 
quaternary, 474 

artif., 476 
ternary, 476, 513 

artif. , 477 
tests, 471, 472, 473, 513 
Alkapton, 344 
Allanit, 223 
Allyle, 417 

oxide, 417 
sulphide, 417 
sulphocyanide, 417 
Almonds, blanched, 704 note 
confection, 727 
lotion, 854 
mixture, 846 
syrup, 696, 697, 704 
Alnuin (eclect.), 747 
Alnuine (eclect.), 747 
Aloin, 527, 533 



Alsop's infusion mug, 577 
Alterative pills, 823 

powders, 823 
AlthEea flores, 337 
ointment, 880 
radix, 337 
Althasin, 528 
Alum, 220, 221 

ammonia, 220, 221 

ammorJo-ferric, 222, 233 

bath, 119 

chrome, 222 

dried, 220, 221 

gargle, 858 

iron, 222, 233 

and ammonia, 222, 
233 
manganese, 222 
potassa, 220 
Alumen, 220, 221 

exsiccatum, 220, 221 
Alumina, 220 
Aluminii acetas, 220, 222 

et ammonii sulphas, 220, 

221 
et potassii sulphas, 220 
sulphas, 220, 222 
Aluminium salts, 220 

weights, 43 
Amaryllidacea?, neutral prin- 
ciples, 527 
essent, oils, 416 
Amber, 424, 426 
American system of practice, 

745 
Amidin, 333 

Amidon, reproduced from xy- 
loidin, 32S 
plasters, 895 
Ammonia, aqua, 194, 196, 559 
(drops), 79 
tested volum., 926 
fortior, 194, 196, 559 
tested volum., 
926 
preparations, 194 
spiritus, 194, 196, 559 
aromaticus. 194, 198, 
559 
Ammoniac, muriate, 195 
Ammoniacum, 425, 427 
Ammoniates. See Bases. 
Ammonii acetas liquor, 194, 
198, 559 
arsenias, 292, 294 
benzoas, 184, 194, 200 
bicarbonas, 194, 198 
broinidum, 139, 141 
carbonas, 194, 197 

saturating power, 168 
tested volum., 926 
chloridum, 194, 195 
powdering, 556 
purified, 194, 195 
oitras, 194, 199 
hydrosulphas, 200 
hypophosphis, 194, 200 
iodidum, 134, 137 
etmagnesii sulphas, 194, 

196 
murias, 194, 195 
nitras, 194, 196 



948 



INDEX. 



Ammonii — 

phosphas, 194, 200 

proto-carbon. hydrat., 
197 

sesquicarbonas, 197 

sulphas, 194, 195 

sulphuret., 194, 200 

valerianas, 194, 200 
elixir, 632, 633 
Pierlot's solution, 
633 
Ampelopsin (eclect.), 747 
Amygdalin, 347, 528, 534 
Amyl, nitrite, 379, 380 
Amyluin, 334 

See Starch. 
Analysis, volumetric, 175, 316 
Anchietia, 475, 488 
Anderson's pills, 943 
Anemone camphor, 420 
Anemonin, 420, 520 
Angelicin, 523 
Angelyle, 411, 412 
Anhydrides, 129, 147 
Anilin, 452, 471, 478, 516 

sulphate, 517 
Animal acids, 460 

alkaloids, 517 

charcoal, 329 

oils, 390 
Anime, 423 
Anise camphor, 420 
Anisol, 444 
Anonaceae, alkaloids, 474 

essent. oils, 409 
Antacids, mixtures, 843 

powders, 844 
Anthelmintics, mixture, 852 

syrup, 851 
Antidote, Bibron's, 140 
Antimoniates. See Bases. 
Antimonic oxide, 288 
Antimony (Antimonium), 284 

ablutum, 290 

butter, 285, 288 

et calcii sulphuret., 285, 
288 

chloride, 285, 288 

non ablutum, 290 

oxide, 285, 288 

oxysulphuret, 285, 286 

et potassii tartras, 285, 
290 
as mordant, 291 

quinque-sulphuret, 285, 
287 

regulus, 284 

et sodii sulphuret., 285, 
287 

sulphuratum, 285 

sulphuret. aureum, 285, 
287 
black, 285 
precipit., 285 

teroxide, 288 
Antispasmodics, pills, 813 

powders, 813 
Antozone, 130, 131 
Aperient, Mettauer's, 584 
Aphrodaesin, 521 
Apiin, 523 
Apiol, 523, 693 



Apirina, 476, 513 
Apocynaceae, alkaloids, 476 

neutral principle, 524 
Apocynin, 524 

(eclect.), 747 
Apomorphia, 475, 486 
Aporetin, 439 
Apothecaries' weight, 44, 70, 

71 
Apotheme, 587 
Apportioning quantities, 787 
Apprentices' duties, 929, 930 
Aquaacidicarbolici, 559,572, 
573 
carbonici, 149, 559 
ammoniae, 194, 196, 559 
(drops), 79 
tested volum., 926 
fortior, 194, 196, 559 
tested volumet- 
ric , 926 
amygdal. amarae, 572, 573 
anisi, 572, 573, 765 
aurantii florum, 572, 575, 

765 
calcis, 203, 204, 558 
camphorae, 572, 574 
chlorinii, 133, 559, 572 
cinnamomi, 572, 573, 575, 

765 
creosoti, 333, 572, 574, 

841 
destillata, 764 
(drops), 79 
fortis, 148, 155 
foeniculi, 572, 573, 765 
laurocerasi, 572, 575 

artificial, 576 
menthae piperitae, 572, 
573, 765 
viridis, 572, 573, 765 
phagedaenica, 854 
regia, 158 
rosae, 572, 574, 765 
sambuci, 572, 575 
tiliae, 576 
Aquae, 558, 571 
destillatae, 572 
medicatse, 571, 764 
test, 573 
Aquifoliaceae, neutral princi- 
ple, 521 
Arabin, 335 
Arachin, 385 
Arbutin, 347, 524, 530 
Archil, 464 
Areca nut, 329 
Areometer, 87 
Argand burner, 97 
Argentum (Silver), 277 
Argenti chloridum, 277, 279 
cyanidum, 277, 280, 445 
ioclidum, 277, 279 
nitras cryst., 267 

how to dissolve, 
555 
fusa, 277, 278 
stains removed, 279 
oxidum, 277, 279 
Argols, crude, 192 
Argyraescetin, 521 
Argyraescin, 521 



Aribina, 477, 515 
Aricia, 475 
Aricinia, 501 

Aristolocheae, neutral princi- 
ple, 526 

essential oils, 415 
Army scales, 41 
Arnicia, 502, 523 
Aroideae, essential oils, 416 
Aromatics, pills, 808 

powders, 808 
Arrack, 364 
Arrowroot, 334 

curcuma, 334 

pap, 935 
Arseniates. See Bases 
Arsenic, 291 

antidote, 293 

iodide, 292, 295 

et hydrargyr. iodid. li- 
quor, 292, 295 

preparation, 292 

tested volum., 926 

white, 293 
Arsenites. See Bases. 
Arterial sedatives, mixtures, 
840 
powders, 816 

stimulants, mixtures, 838 
pills, 814 
powders, 814 
Arthanatin, 526 
Arum, 334 
Asarin, 420, 526 
Asarum camphor, 420 
Asclepiadeae, gum resins, 425 

neutral principle, 524 
Asclepidin (eclect.), 747 
Asclepin, 524 
Asclepion, 524 
Ascletine (eclect.), 747 
A?paragin, 337, 528 
Asphaltum, 424 
Assafcetida, 425, 427 

enema, 857 

powdering, 548 
Assamar, 341 
Astringents, mixtures, 834 

pills, 807 

powders, 807 
Athamantin, 523 
Atherospermia, 475, 490 
Atlee's asthma mixture, 849 

neuralgia remedy, 848 
Atropia, 476, 507 

sulphate, 508 

collyrium, 855 

test, 513 

valerianate, 508 
Atrosia, 508 
Attfield's Chemistry, 110 

saturation table, 168 
Atwood's patent alcohol, 

368 
Aubergier's syrup, 699, 715 
Aurantiaceae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 520 

essential oils, 410 
Aurum (Gold), 307 
Auri chloridum, 308, 309 

cyanidum, 308, 310 

iodidum, 308, 310 



INDEX. 



949 



Aiui — 

limatura, 308 

oxidum, 308, 309 

pulvis, 308 

et sodii chloridum, 308, 
309 
Automatic washing-box, 328 
Avena? farina, 335 
Avery's weight, 43 
Avoirdupois weight, 70, 71 
Azolitmin, 464 



BAKES' elixir calisaya 
ferro-phosphor., 632 
glycerole of sumach, 719 
Balance, hydrostatic, 81 

platform, 42 
Balneum iodinii, 858 

marinutn, 858 
Balsam, Canada, 424 

copaiva, 424, 427, 428 

resin, 422 
fir, 424, 427 
of honey, 941 
Peru, 426, 427, 428 
resin, 423 
test, 428 
white, 426 
Tolu, 426, 427 
Turlington's, 941 
Balsams, 426 

Balsamineae, balsams, 426 
Bandoline, 337, 778 
Baptism (eclect), 748 
Baptisina, 475, 489 
Barium, 201 

carbonate, 201, 202 
chloride, 201, 202 

liquor, 201, 202, 558 
iodide, 201, 202 
Barks, collection, 538 
Barley, 335 
sugar, 341 
water, 589 
Barosmin (eclect.), 748 
Barr's magnesia table, 215 
Baryta, 201 
Bases, 129 

Basilicon cerate, 865, 872 
Basis of prescription, 796 

for topical applications, 
898 
Bassorin, 335 
Bateman's drops, 940 
Bath, alum, 119 
iodine, 858 
oil, 119 
salt, 184 
sand, 104, 650 
sea-water, 85S 
steam, 107, 650 

modified, 651 
water, 105, 650 

high pressure, 106 
chloride of zinc, 119 
Baths, 858 
Baume's hydrometer, 87 

and specific gravity, 88, 
91 
Bdellium, 425 
Bears' oil, 397 



Bebeerina, 476, 509 

sulphate, 510 
Becker's eye balsam, 879 
Becquerel's gout pills, 816 
Bed, arrangement of, 931 

pan, covered, 56 

slipper, 56 
Bedbug poison, 298 
Beef essence, 936 

tea, 936 
Beer, 364 

ginger, 943 

Jews', 627 

pipsissewa, 943 

tar, 627 
Beeswax, 390 
Belladonna, 476, 508 
Benne, 337 
Benzalcohol, 428 
Benzidam, 516 
Benzidamin, 478 
Benzine, 452 
Renzoates. See Bases 
Benzoin, 426, 427 
Benzol, 402 
Benzyl, hydruret, 402 

oxide, 402 
Beranger's pendulum scales, 

42 
Berberidece, alkaloids, 474 
Berberina, 442, 474, 475, 480, 
746 

muriate, 4S1, 746, 756 
Berbina, 474, 481 
Berzelius' lamp, 94 
BestuckefFs nervine tincture, 

250 
Beta-cinchonia, 497 
Beta-orcina, 340 
Betulacese, neutral princip. , 

527 
Bezoars, 455 
Bibron's antidote, 140 
Bicarbonates. See Bases. 
Bichloranilin, 471 
Bichlorides. See Bases. 
Biette's arsenical solution, 

292, 294 
Bilasparagin, 462 
Bile, 358, 461 

acids, 461 

test, 346, 467 
Bilifuscin, 466 
Bilin, 461 
Birdlime, 421 
Bismuth, 280 

subcarbonate, 280, 282 

subnitrate, 2S0 

tannate, 280, 283 

valerianate, 280, 2S3 
Bittern, 139, 140 
Black draught, 586 

drop, 630, 640, 642, 647 
(drops), 79 

wash, 854 
Blackberry brandy, 723 

syrup, 722, 723, 724 
Blancard's pills, 812 
Blank labels, 909 
Blast lamp, 94 
Bleaching powder, 205 
Blende, 263 



Blistering cerate, 866 

collodion, 328 

tissue. 867 
Blisters, 866 
Blood serum, 350 

test, 467 
Blood's flour sifter, 551 
Blue mass, 804 

extemporaneous, 805 
powdered, 805 

indigo, 465 

Prussian, 248 

vitriol, 260 
Board for lozenges, 731, 738 
Boedeker's albumen test, 345 
Boetger's sugar test, 345 
Boiler, Hecker's farina, 106 
Boiling, 586 

bumping avoided, 119 
Bone, 358 

black, 330 
Bonjean's ergotine, 667 
Boraginese, essent. oils, 414 
Borax, 169, 171, 172 

and ointments, 172 

tested volum., 926 
Borneen, 412 

hydrate, 420 
Borneo camphor, 400, 406, 

420 
Botanic styptic, 775 
Bottle, acid, 25, 147 
cement, 147 

broken, as percolator, 
594 

colored, 24 

corks, 54 

dusting, for pills, 914 

for extracts, 668 

continuous filtering, 598 

German, 53, 54 

labelling, 24, 25 

moistening, 912 

oil, 22 

packing, 23, 24 

paste, 910 

pouring from, 570 

receiving (graduated), 
596 

salt-mouth, 20, 21 

siphon, 151 

specific gravity, 82 

extemporaneous, 84 

spritz, 125 

syrup, 22 

tincture, 21 
size, 906 
Bougies, tin can for, 56 
Bower's glycerine, 387 
Boxes, paper, 55 

pill, 55 

turned wood, 55 
Brackets, shelf, 26 

window, 28 
Brandy, 364, 366 

blackberry, 723 
Brazilin, 463 
Breast-plaster, 894 
British oil, 942 
Bromalhydrat, 378 
Bromanilin, 471 
Bromides. See Bases. 



950 



INDEX. 



Bromine, 139, 140 

chloride, 139, 141 

iodide, 141 
Bromoform, 374, 379 
Broth, chicken, 937 

Liebig's, 355 
Brown mixture, 848 

stout, 364 
Brucia, 476, 504 

test, 513 
Bryonin, 522 
Bryonitin, 522 
Bryoretin, 522 
Buchu, 337 

Bullock's carboy siphon, 62 
Bumping avoided in boiling, 

119 
Bunsen's burner, 101 
Burdock, 335 
Burette, 76 

stand, 76 
Burgundy pitch, 426 
plaster, 890 

wine, 364 
Burner, 96 

Bunsen's, 101 

Griffin's, 102 

horizontal, 101 

McGlensey's, 102 
Burnett's cocoaine, 394 
Burton ale, 384 
Butler's fluid extr. hydrangea, 

685 
Butter, 353, 390 

of antimony, 285, 288 

cacao, 390, 393 

milk, 354 

of zinc, 267 
Butyl, 452 
Butyrum, 353, 390 
Buxina, 476 
Byttneracese, alkaloids, 475 



CACAO butter, 390, 393 
Cadmium, 269 
iodide, 270 
sulphate, 270 
Cafetiere de Doubelloy, 590 
Caffeidina, 489 
Caffeina, 475, 476, 488 
arseniate, 489 
citrate, 489 
Calamina, 263, 264 
praeparata, 264 
Calcination, 121 
Calcium (Lime), 203 

et antimon. sulphuret., 

285, 288 
bicarbonate, 203, 210 
butyrate, 380 
carbonate, precip., 203, 

205 
chloride, 203, 205 
chlorinated, 203, 206 

tested volum., 926 
hypophosphite, 203, 208 

syrups, 203, 209 
iodide, 134, 137, 203, 212 
metagummate, 336 
phosphate, precipit., 203, 
207 



Calcium phosphate — 

syrups, 238, 239, 240 

saccharate, 203, 211, 341 

sulphite, 203, 211 

sulphuret, 203, 212 

syrup, 211 

triphosphate, 143 
Calluxanthin, 456 
Calomel, 298 

biniodide, 297, 302 

English, 299 

hydro-sublimed, 299 

iodide, 297, 302 

and jalap powder, 819 

powders, alterative, 823 
Calves' feet, 357 

extract, 357 
jelly, 936 
Calx, 203, 2*04 

See Calcium. 
Camelliacese, alkaloids, 475 

essential oils, 410 
Campbell's fluid extract san- 
guinaria, 688 

injection, 856 
Camphene, 406 

hydrate, 400 

oxide, 400 
Camphor, 400, 406 

anemone, 420 

anise, 420 

artificial, 400 

asarum, 420 

Borneo, 400, 406, 420 

can, 19 

clove, 420 

inactive, 420 

inula, 420 

iris, 420 

juniper, 400, 406, 420 

how to keep, 19 

lemon, 400, 406, 420 

liniment, 881, 882 

mace, 420 

matricaria, 419 

mint, 420 

mixture, Hope's, 835 
Parrish's, 835 

monarda, 420 

monobromated, 142 

and opium pills, 815 

parsley, 420 

powdering, 120, 548 

sassafras, 420 

spirit, 766, 767 

sublimed, 120 

tobacco, 420 

water, 572, 574 
Camphors, 419 
Can, camphor, 19 

extract, 30 

herb, 19 

japanned, 19 

oil, 22 

patent safety, 30 
Canada balsam, 424 
Candy, 741 

cough, 742 

rock, 339 
Cane sugar, 338, 340 
Canellaceas, essential oils, 411 
Canna, 334 



Cannabinaceee, resins, 423 
Cantharidin, 419, 528 
Caoutchene, 406 
Caoutchouc, 421 

vulcanized, 421 
Caoutchoucoids, 421 
Cap, metallic foil, 907 
Capping of corks, 907 
Caprifoliacese, neutral prin- 
pie, 524 

essential oils, 412 
Caproyl, 452 

Capsicin, 476, 502, 525, 531 
Capsicum syrup, 721 
Capsule, 52 
Caramel, 341, 741 
Carat, 308 
Carbo animalis, 329, 330 

ligni, 329 
Carbohydrates, 338 
Carbon, bisulphide. 146 
Carbonates. See Bases. 
Carbonization, 122 
Carboy siphon, Bullock's, 62 
Cardamoms, powdering, 547 
Cardol, 521 
Care in compounding, 901 

of nurse, 934 
Carmine, indigo, 465 
Carminative, Dalby's, 940 

Dewees', 940 
Caro, 353, 355 
Carotae radix, 348 
Carotin, 463 
Carrageen, 335 

paste, 730 

syrup, 710 
Carrageenin, 335 
Carrara water, artificial, 210 
Carrot, wild, 348 
Carthagia, 475, 502 
Carthamin, 463 
Cartier's hydrometer, 87 
Carvacrol, 402 
Carvol, 402, 411 
Caryophyllese, neutral prin- 
ciple, 520 
Caryophyllin, 420, 522 
Cascarillin, 526 
Cases, 27 

for pamphlets, 56 

prescription scales, 
39, 40 
Casein, 350 

vegetable, 350 
Cassia, 348 
Cassiin, 522 
Castile soap, 389 
Castillon's powders, 937 
Castina, 476, 506 
Castor oil, 390, 394 

mixture, 841 
Castorin, 528 
Catalysis, 363 
Cataplasma aromatica, 899 

ad deeubitum, 272, 277 

lini, 898 

sinapis, 899 
Cataplasmata, 898 
Catechin, 456 
Catechu, 454 

lozenges, 740 



IXDEX, 



951 



Catechutannin, 456 
Cathartics, mixtures, 841 

pills, 817 

powders, 817 
Cathartin, 439, 522 
Caulophyllin (eclect.), 748 
Caustic, carbolic acid, 451 

corrosive sublimate, 327 

lunar, 278 

vegetable, 177, 178 
Causticum dep'latorium, 853 
Ceanothine (eclect.), 749 
Celastrineae, alkaloids, 475 
Cellar, 57 
Cellulin, 320 
Cellulose, 320 
Cement, 113 

for acid bottles, 147 
glass labels, 24 
pestles, 47 
Centigrade thermometer, 103 
Cera alba, 390 

chinensis, 390 

flava, 390 

japonica, 390 

myricae, 390 
Cerasein (eclect.), 749 
Cerasin, 336 
Cerates, 861, 922 

blistering, 866, S70 
Ceratum (cerate), 863, 864, 
865, 870 

adipis, 863, 864, S65, 870 

basilicon, 865, 872 

cantharidis, S66, 870 

cetacei, 863,865, S71 

extract, cantharid., 866, 
871 

Goulard's, 870, 871 

plumbi subacetatis, 870, 
871 
comp., 878 

resinae, 863, 865, 872 
comp., 866, 872 

sabinae, 868, 872 

saponis, 863, 864, 872 

simplex, 863, 864, 865 

spermaceti, 863, 865, 871 

zinci carbon., 868, S72 
Cerebral stimulants, pills, 814 

powders, 814 
Cerite, 223 
Cerium, 223 

oxalate, 223 
Ceryle, oxide, 385 
Cetaceum, 390 

cerate, 863, 865, 871 

mixture, 849 
Cetin, 3S5 
Cetraria, 335 
Cetyle, oxide, 3S5 
Chserophvllina, 477. 514 
Chalk, 203 

julep, 834 

lozenges, 733, 735 

mixture, S34 

Richard's, 942 
and blue mass, 835 

powder, 807 

ointment, 879 
Chameleon mineral, 259 
Champagne, 364 



Change of linen, 932 
posture, 931 
room, 933 
Chapman's dinner pills, 818 

pills in intermittents, 811 
Chapped hands, wash, 855, 

S84 
Charcoal, animal, 329, 330 

areca nut, 329 

and blue mass mixture, 
842 

dentifrice, 774 

tooth paste, 774 

willow. 329 

wood, 329 
Charring, 122 
Charta cantharidis, 868 

sinapis, 868 
Cheese, 354 

cream, 354 
Chelerythrina, 441, 486 
Chelidina, 475, 4S5 
Chelonin (eclect.), 749 
Cheltenham salt, 184 
Chemicals, how to keep, 20 
Chemical food, 226, 240 

processes, 109 
Chemistry, Attfield's, 110 

inorganic, 109 

organic, 319 

science of, 109 
. Chehopodere, alkaloids, 477 

essential oils, 415 
Cherry. laurel water, 572, 575, 

576 
Chicken broth, 937 

jelly, 937 
Chilblains, lotion, S54 
. Chimaphilin (eclect.), 750 
Chimney lamp, 94 
Chinese green, 463 
| Chinoidina, 498, 666 

pills, 810 
Chiratogenin, 525 
Chiretin, 525 
, Cholera, Asiatic, tincture, 623 
i Chloral hydrat., 374, 378 
Chloranilina, 471 
Chlorates. See Bases. 
Chlorides. See Bases. 
Chlorine, 132 

disinfectant preparation, 
132 

solution, 133, 559, 572 

water, 133, 559, 572 
Chloroform, 374 

administration, 839 

(drops), 79 

commercial, 374 

gelatinize !, 885 

liniment, 881, S83 

mixture, 839 

paregoric, 634 

purificat, 374, 375 

venale, 374 
Chlorophyll, 465 
Chlorrubin, 457 
Chocolate drops, ferruginous, 

735 
Cholagogue, tonic, 837 
Cholesterin. 35S, 462 
Chondrin, 356 



Chondrogen, 356 
Chondrus, 335 
Chulariose, 338 
Churchill, hypophosphites, 

144, 209 
Cicutine, 476, 514 
Cider, 364 

mixture, Parrish's, 585 
Cimicifugin (eclect.), 666, 749 
Cinchona alkaloids, 490 

chemical and 
physical pro- 
perties, 49S 
Howard's, 49S 
red, 456 
Cinchonaceae, alkaloids, 475 
Cinchonia, 475, 495 
acetate, 496 
hydriodate, 496 
muriate, 496 
sulphate, 496, 499 
tannate, 496 
Cinehonicin, 476 
Cinchonidin, 475, 496 
Cincinnati wine, 364 
Cinnabar, artificial, 304 
Cinnameine, 426, 42S 
Cinnamen, 426, 450 
Cinnamyle, 402, 415 
hydruret, 402 
oxide, 402 
Circulatory displacement, 555 
Cissampelina, 474, 480 
Cistineae, resins, 422 
Citrates. See Bases. 
Citrate corks, 54 
Citrine ointment, 870, S74 
Citromels, 717 
Clamp for mortar, 36 
Claret, 364 
Clarification, 563 
Clasp, Wiegand's, 650 
Clauder's elixir, 5S5 
Clay furnace, 92 
Cleanliness in sick chamber, 
931 
of person, 932 
Clematitin, 526 
Clemens' almond lotion, 854 
Clothes-wringer press, 579 
Cloves, camphor, 420 
Cnicin, 523 
Coagulation, 349 
Coal naphtha, 452 

tar products, 452 
Coating of pills, 915 
Cobaltum, 271 
oxide, 271 
Cocaina, 475, 490 
Coccogenin, 526 
Cocoa. See Cacao. 
Cocoaine, Burnett's, 394 
Codeia, 475, 485 
Coddington's iodide of iron 

pills, 812 
Cod-liver oil, 390, 396 

andbiniodide of mer- 
cury, 851 
mixture, 850 
ointment, 8S0 
Coins, U. S., 72 
fineness, 308 



952 



INDEX. 



Colchicine, 512 
Colchicia, 476, 512 

sulphate, 512 
Cold cream, 863, 865, 872 

Turnbull's, 877 
Collagen, 356 

Collection of plants, etc., 537 
Collinsonin (eclect.), 750 
Collodion, 322, 324, 560 

aconital, 328 

atropia, 328 

belladonnal, 328 

blistering, 328 

cantharidal, 328 

caustic, 327 

composition, 327 

flexile, 325 

iodinal, 328 

modified, Rand's, 325 

stypticum, 329 

tinct. prseparat., 327 

uses, 327 

vial, 326 
Colloids, 321 
Collyria, 855 
Collyrium atropise sulphatis, 

855 
Colocynthein, 347, 522 
Colocynthin, 347, 522, 529 
Colocynthitin, 523 
Cologne water, 769, 770 
Colophene, 406 
Coloring-matter, animal, 466 

biliary, 467 

vegetable, 465 
Colors, show, freezing pre- 
vented, 28 
Columbin, 520 
Combination of medicines, 

794 
Combustion, 129 
Comfrey, 335 
Compositaa, alkaloids, 476 

neutral principles, 523 

essent. oils, 412 
Composition powder, 941 
Compounding prescriptions, 
899 

care, 901 
Concavity in minim measures 

corrected, 78 
Conchinicia, 497 
Concentrated remedies, 742 
Condenser, Liebig's, 113, 114 

Squibb's, 114 

Warner's, 761 
Condensing worm, 760 
Confection, 726 

almonds, 727 

aromatic, 727 

opium, 727 

orange-peel, 727 

black pepper, 729 

piles, 728 

roses, 727 

senna, 727, 728 
Conhydrina, 475, 514 
Conia, 476, 477, 513, 654 
Coniferae, neutral principle, 
527 

essent. oils, 407, 416 

oleoresins, 424 



Conifer as — 

resins, 423 
Conserves, 727 
Convallamai-etin, 527 
Convallamarin, 527 
Convallaretin, 347, 527 
Convallarin, 347, 527 
Convolvulaceae, alkaloids, 476 

gum resins, 425 

neutral principle, 525 

essent. oils, 414 

resins, 423 
Convolvulin, 423, 425, 476, 

506, 525, 530 
Convolvulinol, 530 
Cooler's, soda-water, 151 

syrup, Parrish's, 152 
Cooper's gelatina, 357 
Copaiba, 424, 427, 428 

resin, 422 
Copal, 423 
Copper, 260 

salts. See Cuprum 
Copperas, 227 
Copuliferae, neutral principle, 

526 
Cordial, Curacao, 632 ■ 

Godfrey's, 940 

propyl amin, 633 

Warner's, 610 
Cordials, 631 
Corks, 54, 907 
Cork borer, 113 

bottle, 54 

capping, 907 

citrate, 54 

homoeopathic, 54 

presser, 908 

Lochman's, 908 

tapering, 54, 907 

velvety, 54 
Cornine, 441 

(eclect.), 750 
Corn-meal gruel, 937 

plasters, annular, 895 
Correctives in prescription, 

797 
Corrosive sublimate, 298 
collodion, 327 
pills, 823 
Corydalia (eclect.), 751 
Corydalina, 475, 487 
Coryza lozenges, 736 

mixture, 849 
Cotarnina, 484 

ethylic, 485 

methylic, 485 

normal, 485 

propylic, 485 
Cotton, 320 

prepared, ethereal solut., 
322 

reproduced from pyroxy- 
lin, 327 
Cough candy, 742 

lozenges, Jackson's, 738 
Parrish's, 739 
Spitta's, 734, 736 
Wistar's, 734, 736, 
737 

mixtures, 848 
Coumarin, 522 



Counter-irritant, Granville's, 

854 
Counters, 30 

dispensing, 31 

prescription, 35 

soda-water, 30 

working, 38 
Court-plaster, 357 
Cowrie, 423 
Cows' milk, 352 
Coxe's sparkling gelatine, 357 

hive syrup, 699, 700, 701 
Crassulaceae, essent. oils, 411 
Cratinina, 518 
Cream, 354 

cheese, 354 

syrup, 725, 726 

of tartar, 192 

draught, 842 
tested volum., 926 
Creasote, 332 

(drops), 79 

lotion, 853 

test, 451 
Creatina, 353, 517, 528 
Creatinina, 353, 518 
Creta, 203 

pr separata, 203 
Creuse's syrup of iodide of 

manganese, 257 
Crotonina, 476, 506 
Croton oil, 390, 395 
Crotonol, 526 
Crucible, Hessian, 122 

jacket, 95 

platinum, 122 

porcelain, 122 

support, 100 
Cruciferae, neutral principle, 

528 
Crystallin, 350, 376, 478 
Crystallization, 127 
Crystalloids, 321 
Cubeb lozenges, 733, 734, 736 

mixture, 846, 849 
Cubebin, 527 
Cucurbitaceae, alkaloids, 475 

neutral principle, 522 
Cudbear, 464 
Cultivation of plants, 540 
Cumidin, 452 
Cuminol, 411 
Cumol, 452 
Cumyle, 402 

hydruret, 402 

oxide, 402 
Cupweights, 72 
Cuprum (Copper), 260 

aluminatum, 260, 263 

ammoniatum, 260, 262 

ammonio- sulphate, 262 

carbonate, 260, 261 

chloride, 260, 262 

nitr-ate, 260, 262 

nitroprusside, 403 

oxide, 260, 261 

ammoniacal solution, 
320 

subacetate, 260, 263 

subcarbonate, bydrated, 
260, 261 

sulphate, 260 



INDEX, 



953 



Curasao cordial, 632 
Curaria, 476, 505 
Curcuma, 334 

arrowroot, 334 
Curcumin, 464, 527 
Curds, 354 
Currant wine, 364 
Curve for gas-tube, 97 
Cusparin, 521 
Cuttlefish powder, 774 
Cyananilina, 471 
Cyanides. See Bases. 
Cyanin, 466 
Cyclamin, 526 
Cyclamiretin, 526 
Cydonium, 337 
Cymol, 452 
Cynapia, 475, 490 
Cyprian turpentine, 424 
Cypripedin (eclect.), 751 



DALBY'S carminative, 940 
Dalleochine, 492 
Dammar, Australian, 423 

East India, 423 
Dammarane, 423 
Dammarene, 423 
Daphnetin, 347, 526 
Daphnin, 347, 526 
Datiscetin, 347, 526 
Datiscin, 347, 526 
Daturia, 476, 508 
Death-bed, 934 
Decimal system, 70, 73 

weights, 70 
Decoeta, 588 
Decoction, process, 586 
Decoctum (Decoction) 

aloes comp., 588 

substitute, 585 

barley, 588 

bittersweet, 588 

cetrarise, 588 

chiniaphilse, 588 

cinchonae flavae, 588 
rubra?, 588 

cornus floridae, 588 

dulcamaras, 588 

haematoxyli, 588 

hordei, 588 

Iceland moss, 588 

logwood, 588 

oak bark, 588 

pipsissewa, 588 

quercus albae, 588 

sarsaparillaa comp., 588, 
589 

senega?, 588 

UV83 ursi, 588 
Decoloration, 124 
Decomposition of organic 

bodies, 534 
Dehydration, 121 
Delff's digitalin, 525 
Delphinin, 474, 479 

test, 513 
Demulcent mixtures, 846 
Dentifrice, 774 
Depilatory, 853 
Deshler's salve, 866, 872 
Dessertspoonful, 78 



Dewees's breast plaster, 891 

carminative, 940 

colchicum mixture, 848 

tincture of guaiacum, 622 
Dextrin, 320, 344 
Diabetic sugar, 341 
Dialysis, 321 
Diaphoretics, mixtures, 840 

powders, 822 
Diastase, 342, 362, 363 
Didymium, 223 
Diet for the sick, 935 
Diet drink, Lisbon, 589 
Diethylanilina, 471 
Digestion, 580 
Digitalacrin, 531 
Digitalarin, 525 
Digitaletin, 347, 525, 531 
Digitalin, 347, 525, 531 
Digitaliretin, 525 
Digitasolin, 525 
Diluents for powders, 802 

in prescriptions, 797 
Dinitro-cellulin, 322 
Dinnerford's fluid magnesia, 

214 
Dioscorein (eclect.), 751 
Dippel's animal oil, 419 
Dipteraceae, essential oils, 407 
Discipline of the shop, 927 
Discoloration of skin by io- 
dine, 135 
by nitric acid, 200 
Disinfectants, 861 
Disinfecting fluid, Ledoyen's, 
276 

preparation, chlorine, 132 
Dispensatory, U. S., 65 
Dispensing, 902 

counter, 32, 33 

difficulties, 902 

liquids, 906 

medicines, 899 

office, 900 

pills, 911, 914 

powders, 903 
small, 904 

prescriptions, 899 

solids, 903 

store, arrangement, 17 
Displacement, 571, 590 

apparatus, 52 

circulatory, 555 

continuous, 598 

by ether, 602 

history, 590 

by hot liquids, 600 

by steam, 600 

by volatile liquids, 593 
Displacer, broken bottle, 594 

ether, 602, 691 

funnel, 591, 595 

Hance's, 570 

lamp-chimney, 593 

porcelain, 593 

queensware, 593 

Squibbs's, 594 

steam, Smith's, 600 

syringe, 595 

tin, 592 

for volatile liquids, 593 
Distearin, 386 



Distillation, 110, 118, 759 

apparatus, 760 

destructive, 119, 535 

double, 764 

dry, 535 

of flowers, 764 

fractional, 119 

of herbs, 764 

of oils, 398 

triple, 764 

of volatile liquids, 763 

of waters, 572 
Diuretics, mixtures, 846 

pills, 821 
Division of paper, 903 

powders, 905 

pills, 913 
Dolomite, 213 
Donovan's solution, 295 
Dover's powder, 552, 822 

liquid substitute, 845 
Drachm, 71 
Drachma, 784 
Draught, black, 586 

cream of tartar, 842 

effervescing, 844 

saline, 843 
Drawers, 18 
Drawer-pulls, 18 
Dressing, carbolic acid, 452 

plastic surgical, 451 
Drop, 78 

guide, 913 

machine, 913 
Drops, 741 

chocolate, ferruginous, 
735 

ginger, 619, 742 

golden, Lamotte's, 250 

hot, 941 

pectoral, Bateman's, 940 

size of, 78 

table (Durand ; Parrish ; 
Procter, Jr.), 79 
Drug mill, Hance's, 549 
Drugs, drying, 539, 543 

garbling, 542 

powdering, 542, 543 

oily, powdering, 544 
Duhamel, syrup. uva3 ursi, 

709 
Dulcamarina, 476, 507 
Dulcite, 339 
Dulcose, 339 
Dumb-waiter for ointments 

and syrups, 38 
Durand, drop table, 79 

syrup, phosph. calc, 207 
Dusting of powders, 545 

bottle for pills, 914 
Duties of apprentices, 929, 930 
Dying-bed, 934 
Dyspeptics' bitter tonic, 837 



EARTHS and preparations, 
200, 201, 203, 212, 220, 
223 
Eau de Cologne, 796, 770 
Ebullition, 648 
Ecbolina, 477 
Ecgonina, 490 



954 



INDEX. 



Eclectic remedies, 742 
Edinburgh ale, 364 
Effervescence, 554 
Effervescing draught, 844 

fever powders, 844 
Egg, 352, 353 
Eggnog, 935 
Elasometer, 87 
Elaeopten, 400 
Elaterin, 523 
Elder-berry wine, 364 

-flower water, 572, 575 
Elecampane, 335 
Electuary, 727 

haem' rrhoid, 728 
lenitive, 728 
pile, 728 
See Confection. 
Elements, non-metallic, 128" 
Elemi, 424, 427 

ointment, 877 
Elixir ammon. valerian., 200, 
632, 633, 637 
with quinia, 637 
bismuth, citratis, 636 
calisayse. See EI. cin- 

chonae. 
choloroformi, 634 
cinchonae, 631, 635 
comp., 636 

ferrat., 636 
ferratum, 631, 635 
ferro-phosphor., 632 
Clauderi, 585 
De Garus, 634 
ferri citratis, 636 

pyrophosph., 636 
quiniae et strychnise 
pyroph., 637 
gentianas ferratum, 638 
magnesii acetatis, 219 
pepsini, 636 
potnssii bromidi, 638 
proprietatis, 610 
red, 635 
simple, 635 
sumbul comp., 637 
of vitriol, 160 
Elixirs, 631, 634 
Ellis, extract of calisaya, 665 
magnesia, 215 
magnesii citras granul., 
219 
preparat., 219 
Elutriation, 557 
Emetia, 476, 502 
coloree, 502 
test, 513 
Emetics, powders, 816 
Emetinum impurum, 502 
Emmenagogues, pills, 823 
Empiastra, 885 

unofficinal, 890 
Emplastrum aconiti, 886, 887 
adhaasivum, 886, 887 
ammoniaci, 886, 889 

c. hydrargyro, 886, 
889 
antimonii, 886, 890 
arnicas, 886, 890 
assafoetidae, 886, 889 
diachylon simpl., 386 



Emplastrum — 

epispasticum, 866 
ferri, 886, 889 
galbani comp., 886, 888 
hydrargyri, 886, 888 
opii, 886, 888 
picis burgund., 886, 890 
canadensis, 886, 890 
c. cantharide, 886, 
890 
plumbi, 272, 386, 389, 

886 
resinae, 886, 887 
saponis, 886, 887 
universale, 891 
Emulsin, 351, 528 
Emulsion of almonds, 846 
castor oil, 841 
cubebs (fluid extr.), 846 
pumpkin seeds, 852 
Emulsions, preparations, 919 
Emydin, 351 
Enema, assafcetidae, 857 

terebinthinae, 857 
Enemata, 856 

Enos's elix. ammon. vale- 
rian., 632 
Envelope paper, 55 

powder, 905 
Epsom salts, 213 
Erdmann and Uslai's alka- 
loid test, 4 74 
Ergotina, 477, 667 
Bonjean's, 667 
Wiggers's, 667 
Ericaceae, neutral principle, 
524 
essential oils, 413 
Ericolin, 524 
Erythrin, 340, 464 
Erythrocentaurin, 525 
Erythrolein, 464 
Ei-ythrolitinin, 464 
Erythromannite, 340, 464 
Erythrophyll, 465 

Erythroretin, 439 
Erythroxylaceae, alkaloids, 477 

neutral principle, 521 
Erythroxylin, 521 
Essence, aniseed, 766, 767 
apples, 381 
arrack, 382 
bananas, 381 
beef, 936 

bergamot pear, 381 
ginger, 620 
jargonella pear, 381 
lemon, 766, 767 
millefleurs, 771 
mustard, 777 

Whitehead's, 942 
patchouly, 772 
peppermint, 766, 767 
petit-grain, 410 
pineapple, 381 
quince, 381 
raspberries, 381 
rum, 382 
Essences, fruit, artificial, 380 

perfumery, 769 
Essential oils. See Oils. 
Ether, 365, 369 



Ether— 

(drops), 79 

acetic, 365 

amylo-acetic, 379 

amylo-valerianic, 379 

butyric, 379 

chloric, 374, 377 

(chloroform), 376 

cinnamo-cinnamic, 428 

cinnamo-tolylic, 428 

ethylic, 365, 369 

formic, 374 

formo-ethylic, 374 

hydrated, 370 

hyponitrous, 365 

mono-chlorinated, 378 

nitric, 365 

nitrous, 365, 373 

oenanthic, 3S1, 382 

pelargonic, 381 

percolating with, 602 

sulphuric, 365, 369 

tannic, 458 

tetrachlorinated, 378 

washed, 370 
Ethereal oil, 365, 370 
Etherin, 365 
Etherol, 365 
Ethiops mineral, 304 
Ethylallylamina, 510 
Ethylamina, 477 
j Ethylanilina, 471 

Etbylconia, 476, 574 
I Eucalyne, 339 
Eugenin, 522 
Euonymin (eclect.), 752 
Eupatorina, 475, 502 
Eupatorine (eclect.), 752 
Euphorbiaceaa, alkaloids, 476, 
477 

neutral principle, 526 

essent. oils, 415 

resins, 423 
Euphorbin (eclect.), 753 
Euphorbina, 476, 509 
Euphorbium, 423, 427 
Eupion, 406 

Eupurpurin (eclect.), 752 
Evaporating dish, 52, 649 
Evaporation, 648 
Excipient in mixtures, 833 

pills, 801, 802, 803, 806 

prescriptions, 798 
Excitement of sick avoided, 

933 
Excito-motor stimulants, pow- 
ders, 816 
Exhaustion in percolating, 

597 
Expansion of alcohol, 368 

glass bottles, 85 
Expectorants, mixtures, 848 

pills, 821 
Explanatory synonyms, 783 
Extemporaneous pharmacy, 
779 

preparations, 780 
Extract (Extractum) 

aconiti, 655, 656, 660 
yield, 653 

arnicae, 655, 656, 660 
yield, 653 



INDEX. 



955 



Extract — 

bark, precipitated, 498 
beef, 356 
belladonnas, 652, 653 

yield, 653 

alcohol., 655, 661 
bittersweet, 657, 658, 662 
butternut, 658, 659, 664 
Calabar bean, 655, 657 
calisaya, Ellis', 665 
calves' feet, 357 
cannabis, 655, 656, 660 

test, 656 
carnis, 356 
citnicifuga?, 666 
cinchona, 657, 658, 663 

Wetherill's, 665 

prascipit., 498 
colchici acetic, 659, 660, 

665 
colocvnthid, 657, 658, 662 

yield, 653, 658 

comp.,659, 660, 665, 
668 
conii, 652, 653, 660 

yield, 653 

alcohol., 655 

test, 654 
digitalis, 655, 656, 660 

yield, 653 
dulcamaras, 657, 658, 662 
ergotae, 667 
ferri pomatum, 433 
foxglove, 655, 656, 660 
gentiana? ; 658, 659, 664 

yield, 653 
glycyrrhiza?, 348, 667 
haainatoxyli, 658, 659, 

664, 668 
hellebori, 657, 658, 663 
henbane, 652, 654, 655, 

661 
hops, 667 
hyoscyami, 652, 654 

yield, 653 

alcohol., 655, 661 
ignatiae amarae, 655, 657, 

661 
Indian hemp, 655, 656, 

660 
jalapae, 657, 658, 662, 66S 

yield, 653 
juglandis, 658, 659, 664 
krameria?, 658, 659, 664, 
668 

yield, 659 
lettuce, 667 
liquiritia? depur., 667 
lobelia? aceticum, 666 
logwood, 658, 659, 664, 

668 
lupulin, 666 
may-apple, 657, 658, 663, 

668 
meat, 356 
musk, 773 
nuc. vornic. 655, 657, 661 

yield, 653 
opii, 658, 659, 664 

in suppositories, 923 
papaveris, 667 
pareira? bravas, 666 



Extract — 

physostigmatis, 655, 657 
podophylli, 657, 658, 663, 

668 
poppyheads, 667 
quassia?, 658, 659, 664 

yield, 653 
rhatany, 658, 659, 664, 

668 
rhei, 657, 658, 663 
senega?, 657, 658, 662 
stramonii, 653, 655 

yield, 653 
taraxaci, 659, 665 
uvae ursi, 667 
Valeriana?, 655, 556, 660 
Extracta resina, 742 
Extracts, 652 

astringent, 658 
bottle, 668 
cathartic, 657 
clarified, 652 
English, 653 

fluid. See Fluid extracts. 
German, 654 
jars, 30, 668 
how to keep, 29, 30, 668 
narcotic, alcoholic, 655 
inspissated, 652, 668 
Mohr's proce. s, 
654 
therapeutical applic. , 
656 
for ointments, 669 

pills, 912 
physical properties, 668 
preparation, 651 
softening, 669 
in suppositories, 923 
tonic, 657, 658 
unclassified, 659 
unofficinal, 665 
uses. 669 
yield, 653 
Extractive, oxidized, 587 
Eye-balsam, Becker's, 879 
washes, 855 
water, 855 

Thomas', 855 



FAHRENHEIT'S thermo- 
meter, 103 
Fancy paper, 55 
Farina boiler, Hecker's, 106 
Farinaceous principles, 333 
Fats, 382 

how to keep, 28 
Faucet, syrup, Williams', 153 
Fecula. See Starch. 
Fehling's sugar test, 344 
Fel bovinum, 358 
Felt bags, 560 
Fermentation. 362, 535 

acetic, 363 

acid, 535 

alcoholic, 362 

butyric, 363, 379 

lactic, 363, 436 

viscous, 363, 535 
Fermentum cerevisia?, 363 
Ferric citrate, 234 



Ferric — 

hypophosphite, 242, 243 
nitrate, 247 
oxide, hydrated, 232 
salts, 224, 225 
tannate, 245 
Ferroso-ferric salts, 224 
Ferrous hypophosphite, 242, 
243 
nitrate, 247 
salts, 224, 225 
sulphate, 227 
tartrate, 246 
Ferrum (Iron), 224 
(Ferri) acetas, 226, 244, 245 
ammoniat., 248, 251 
et amnion, citras, 226, 
234 
sulphas, 226. 233 
tartras, 226, 246 
arsenias, 292, 295 

tested volum., 926 
bromidum, 248, 253 
carbonas effervescens, 
226, 229 
praecipitat., 228 
saccharat., tested 
volum., 926 
chloridum, 248, 249 
citras, 226, 234 
ferrocyanid., 248, 251 
hydrocyanas, 248, 252 
by hydrogen, 226, 229 
hyperchloratis liquor, 

226, 248 
hypophosphis, 226, 242 
iodidum, 248, 252 
lactas, 226, 244 
et magnesii citras, 226, 

236 
nitratis liquor, 226, 247, 

559 
oxalas, 226, 237 
oxid. hydrat., 226, 232, 
293 
mag., tested volum., 
926 
perchloratis liquor, 226, 

248 
persulphas, 231 
phosphas, 226, 237 

tested volum., 926 
et potassii sulphuret. , 

248, 254 
et potassii tartras, 226, 

245 
protocarbonatis syrup., 

229 
protocitratis syrup., 226, 

236 
protonitratis syrup., 226, 

247 
prototartras, 226, 246 
pulvis, 229 

pyrophosphas, 226, 240 
et quinia citras, 226, 234 

sulphas, 226, 232 
redactum, 226, 229 
sesquioxide hydrat., 232 
et strychnia? citras, 226, 

235 
subsulphas, 231 



956 



INDEX, 



(Ferri)— 

sulphas, 226, 227 

exsiccata, 226, 227 
granulata, 227, 557 
powdering, 557 
sulphuret., 248, 254 
superphosphates syrup., 

226, 238 
tannas, 226, 245 
tartras, 226, 246 
tersulphatis liquor, 226, 

230, 559 
valerianas, 226, 245 
et zinci citras, 226, 236 
Ferulyle, 417 

bisulphide, 417' 
protosulphide, 417 
Fever and ague mixture, 836 
powders, effervescing, 
844 
Fibrin, 350 
Ficus, 348 
Fig, 348 

File, rat-tail, 113 
Filter, 564 
cap, 568 

construction, 564, 566 
drying, 106 
French, 55 
lace, Walters's, 569 
oil, Warner's, 561 
plain, 565 
plaited, 565 
support, 568 
weight, 568 
Filtering apparatus, Hance's, 
570 
oils, 561, 569 
paper, 55, 564 

Swedish, 55 
volatile liquids, 569 
Filtration, 560, 564 
continuous, 598 
hot, 106 
Fish glue, 356 
Flannel strainer, 560 
Flask, 52, 118 
Flaxseed, 337 
meal, 544 
poultice, 898 
Flavoring syrups, 719 
Flemming's tinct. aconiti, 621 
Flint vials, 53 
Flores martiales, 251 
Florida water, 772 
Flowers, collection, 538 
distillation, 764 
farms, 769 
of sulphur, 146 
zinc, 265 
Fluidrachma, 75, 784 
Fluid extract (fluid extract- 
um), 
anthemidis, 688 
belladonnas i\,d.,672, 

673 
bittersweet, 672, 676 
bloodroot, 688 
buchu, 672, 674 
comp., 684 
calumbae, 672, 674 
capsici, 690, 691 



Fluid extract — 

chamomile, 688 
chimaphilas, 672, 674 
cimicifugse, 671, 674 
cinchonas, 672, 674 
colchicirad., 672,675 

sem., 672, 675 
conii fructus, 672, 

675 
cornus floridae, 672, 

675 
cubebse, 671, 676 
digitalis, 672, 676 
dogwood, 672, 675 
dulcamaras, 672, 676 
erigerontis canad., 

672, 677 
gall as, 687 
gelsemii, 672, 677 
gentianae, 672, 677 
geranii, 672, 677 
ginger, 672, 684 
glycvrrhizas rad. , 

672, 677 
gossypii, 672, 678 
hemlock, 672, 675 
horehound, 689 
hydrangeas, 685 
hydrastis canad., 

672, 678 
hyoscyami, 672, 678 
jalapae, 685 
krameriae, 672, 679 
lactucarii, 689 
lobelias, 687 
lupulini, 671, 679 
marrubii, 689 
matico, 672, 679 
mezerei, 671, 679 
muskroot, 688 
pareiras bravae, 672, 

679 
pepper, 692 
pinkroot, 673, 682 

and senna, 673, 
682 
pipsissewa, 672, 674 
pruni virgin., 673, 
680 
ferratum, 687 
rhei, 672, 680 

et senna?, 685 
rubi, 672, 680 
sabinas, 671, 680 
sanguinarias, 688 
sarsaparillas, 672, 
681 

comp , 672, 681 
scillas, 672, 681 
Scutellariae, 689 
senegas, 672, 681 
sennas, 673, 683 
serpentarias, 672, 682 
spigelias, 673, 682 

et sennas, 673, 
682 
stillingias, 672, 683 
sumbul, 688 
taraxaci, 672, 683 

extemporan., 
683 
uvae ursi, 672, 683 



Fluid extract — 

Valerianae, 671, 684 

(drops), 79 
veratri viridis, 671, 

684 
wild cherry, 673, 680 

ferrated, 687 
zingiberis, 672, 684 
Fluid extracts, 670 

with alcohol, 672 
diluted, 671 
with glycerin, 672 
unclassified, 673 
unofficinal, 684 
Fluid magnesia, 214 
Fluidounce, 75 
uncia, 784 
Fluted vials, 53 
Flystone, 271 
Folding of packages, 903 

powders, 904 
Formyle, 435 

terbromide, 374 
terchloride, 374 
teriodide, 374 
Fowler's solution, 293 
Fractional distillation, 119 
Frangipanni, essence, 771 

sachet, 775 
Frangulin, 463 
Fraserin (eclect.), 753 
Fraxetin, 524 
Fraxin, 524 
Fruits, collection, 538 

essences, artificial, 380 
jar, 24 

sugar, 338, 341 
syrups, 722 

Prussian Ph., 724 
Fumariaceas, alkaloids, 4 75 
Fumarina, 475, 487 
Fumigating pastilles, 776 

powder, 776 
Fumigations, 860 
Fungi, alkaloids, 477 

neutral principle, 528 
Fungin, 322 
Funnel, 51, 567 
glass, 52 
grooved, 567 
gutta-percha, 52 
as percolator, 591, 595 
porcelain, 51 
for volatile liquids, 52 
vulcanized rubber, 52 
Furley's process, 917 
Furnace, clay, 92 
French hand, 93 
gas, Parrish's, 100 
Furniture, 17, 900 
Fusel oil, 366, 368, 379, 380 
test, 368 
of wine, 382 



GADTJIN, 397 
Galbanum, 425, 427 
Galenical pharmacy, 537 
Gallipots, 29 
Gallon, 75 
Gambogia, 425, 427 
Garbling, 642 



INDEX, 



957 






Gargarysma acid, tannic , 857 

sodae chlorinat., 857 
Gargle, alum, 858 
Gargles, 857, 858 
Garus, elixir, 634 

spirit, 634 
Gas burner, 96 

Bunsen's, 101 
Griffin's, 102 
horizontal, 101 
McGlensey's, 10% 

distributor, 96 

furnace, Parrish's, 100 

laughing, 196 

screen. 98 

stove, 98 

tube, flexible, 97 
Gases, solution of, 556 
Gasogene, 149 
Gaucina, 475, 487 
Gauge for powders, 905 
Gaultherin, 527 
Gay-Lussac's holder, 115 
Gein, 522 
Gelatine, 356 

Cooper's, 357 

Coxe's sparkling, 357 

French, 357 
Gelatinous principles, 356 
Gelsemin (eclect.), 753 
Gelseininin (eclect.), 753 
General apparatus stand, 

Squibb's, 116 
Gentianeae, neutral principle, 

524 
Gentian, percolating, 599 
Gentiogenin, 524 
Gentiopicrin, 524 
Gentleness in sick chamber, 

934 m 
Geraniaceae, essent. oils, 410 
Geranid, 410 
Geraniin (eclect.), 753 
Geranin (eclect.), 753 
Gerhard's tonic tea, 541 
Gill, 78 

mug, 78 
Gillenia trifoliata, 712 
Gin, Holland, 364 
Ginger beer, 943 

drops, 691, 742 
Githagin, 520 
Glass bottles, expansion, 85 

crown, 183 

cylinder, loaded, 85 

flint, 183 

labels, 24 

cement, 24 

measure, 44 

mortar, 48 

soluble, 183 

tubes, how to break, 148 

window, 183 
Glauber's salt, 184 
Glaucina, 441, 475 
Gliadin.,351 
Glonoin, 340, 388 
Glucose, 338, 341 
Glucosides, 346 
Glue, 356 

fish, 356 

liquid, 356 



Gluten, 351 
Glycamyl, 896 

sinapis, 898 
Glycerides, 718 
Glycerin, 340, 386 

(drops), 79 

uses in pharmacy, 718 

lotion, 885 

ointment, 892 

pomade of iodide of po- 
tassium, 897 
Glycerines, 717 
Glycerinum amyli, 892 
Glycerite, 388, 717 

acid, carbol., 717 
gallici, 717 
tannici, 718 

picis liquidae, 718 

sodii boratis, 718 
Glycerole, 388, 718, 796 

arnica, 884 

hypophosphites, 210 

lactucarium, 719 

sumach, 719 

de Goudron, 897 
Glyceryle, 386 

oxide, 384 
Glycina,461, 518 
Glycocoll, 461, 518 
Glyeyrretin, 347, 522 
Glycyrrhiza, 348 
Glycyrrhizin, 340, 342, 347 
Goddard's elixir amnion, va- 

ler., 633 
Godfrey's cordial, 940 
Gold, 308 

salts. See Aurum. 
Golden sulphur, 285, 287 
Gooseberry wine, 364 
Goose grease, 397 
Gossypium, 320 
Goulard's cerate, 870 

extract, 274 
Gout pills, 815 
Graduated measures, 44, 76 
Hodgson's, 77 

pill tile, 913 

receiving bottle, 596 
Graduation of hydrometers, 

87 
Grahame's displacement pro- 
cess, 591 

mistura aloes comp., 585 
Grain, 70, 71 

Gramineaa, essent. oils, 416 
Gramme, 74, 76 
Granateae, neutral principl., 

522 
Granulation, 128, 556 
Granules, 824, 918 
Granum, 784 
Granville's lotion, 854 
Grape sugar, 338, 341 
Gratiolaretin, 525 
Gratioletin, 525 
Gratiolin, 525 
Gratiosolin, 525 
Gray powder, 307 
Grease, inodorous, 862 
Green, Chinese, 463 
mineral, 261 
quinia, 492 



Green — 

sap, 463 
Griffin's gas-burner, 102 
Griffith's myrrh mixture, 836 
Gruel, corn meal, 937 

oatmeal, 937 
Gruff, 546 
Grummets, 112 
Guacin, 523 
Guaiacene, 438 
Guaiacin, 521 
Guaiacum, 422, 426, 428 
Guaiaretin, 426 
Guanina, 518 
Guaranina, 488 
Guiding rod, 570 
Gumbo, 337 
Gums, 335 
Gum Arabic, 337 

powdering, 543 
and sweet spirits of 
nitre in mixtures, 
920 
cloth, 357 
elastic, 421 

tu! es, rendered flex- 
ible, 117 
paste, 729, 730 
resins, 425, 427 

percolating, 598 
powdering, 54S 
solution, 548 
wax, 426, 427 
Gun cotton, 322 

drying, 324 
soluble, 322 
Gutta, 784 
Gutta-percha, 421 
funnel, 52 
purified, 421 
solution, 377, 560 
Guttiferae, gum-resins, 425 
neutral principl., 525 



HAARLEM oil, 941 
Haamacrystallin, 350 

Haamaglobulin, 350 

Hamiatein, 464 

Hoematin, 350, 466 

Haamato-globulin, 466 

Haematoidin, 467 

Haematosin, 466 

Haematoxylin, 344, 464 

Haamin, 467 

Haemorrhoidal electuary, 728 

Hair dye, Twiggs', 778 
oil, 777 

preparations, 777 
restorative, 777, 778 
wash, rosemary, 777 

Hamamelin (eclect.), 753 

Hance's drug-mill, 549 

filtering and percolating 
apparatus, 570 

Handling of tincture bottles, 
922 

Harle's solution, 294 

Harmala, 489 

Harmalina, 475, 489 

Harmina, 475, 489 

Harris' sifting machine, 551 



958 



INDEX. 



Hartshorne's chloroform pare- 
goric, 634 
Hay's syrup, iodide of iron, 

253 
Heading of prescriptions, 786 
Heat, generation, 92 

latent, 556 

measurement, 103 

radiated, 649 
Hecker's farina boiler, 106 
Helenin, 420 

Helicin, 347, 402, 532, 533 
Helicoidin, 532, 533 
Heliotrope essence, 771 

sachet, 776 
Helleboria, 474, 479 
Heller's sugar test, 344 
Helonin (eclect.), 753 
Hemlock gum, 426 

plaster, 890 
Henry's magnesia, 215 
Heptylene, 452 
Herapath's salt, 491, 493 
Herbalists, 540 
Herb's, collecting and drying, 
537, 539 

destination, 764 

Shaker's, 539 

Wilson's, 539 
Hessian crucibles, 122 
Hesperidin, 520 
Hexylene, 452 
Hiera picra, 552, 818 
Hippocastaneae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 521 
Hive syrup, 699, 700, 701 
Hock wine, 364 
Hodgson's measures, 46, 77 
Hoffmann's anodyne, 366, 371 
(drops), 79 
German, 372 
Holder, Gay-Lussac's, 115 
Holland gin, 364 
Hollyhock, 337 
Homoeopathic corks, 54 
Honey, 348, 716 

balsam of, 941 

of borax, 717 

clarified, 348, 717 

of roses, 717 
Hooper's pills, 658, 942 
Hooping-cough mixture, 850 
Hope's camphor mixture, 835 
Horn, 356 

Horsley's sugar test, 344 
Hot drops, 941 
Howard's cinchona alkaloid, 

498 
Huanokina, 497 
Hudson's dentifrice, 774 
Hufeland's stimulating oint- 
ment, 880 
Hull's automatic washing box, 

126 
Humulin, 526 
Husband's magnesia, 215 

fluid magnesia, 214 
Huxham's tincture of bark, 

609, 614 
Hydrargyrum (Mercury), 296 
(Hydrargyri) acetas, 297, 305 

ammoniatum, 297, 306 



(Hydrargyri) — 

et arsenic! iodid. liquor, 

292, 295 
bibromidum, 297, 303 
bichloridum, 297, 298 
biniodide, 297, 300 
binitratis liquor, 297 
bi-persulphas, 296 
bromidum, 297, 303 
chloridum corrosivum, 
297, 298 
mite, 297, 298 
cum creta, 297, 307 
cyanidum, 297, 303 
iodide, green, 297, 300 
red, 297, 300 
yellow, 297, 301 
iodidumflavum, 297, 301 
rubrum, 297, 300 
and cod-liver oil, 
851 
viride, 297, 300 
oxide, black, 297, 305 

red, 297, 304 
oxidum nigrum, 297, 305 

rubrum, 297, 304 
perchloridum, 298 
peroxidum, 304 
phosphas, 297, 306 
precipitate, white, 306 
protiodide, 300 
proto-nitratis liquor, 297, 

306 
subiodide, 300 
subphosphate, 306 
sulphas flava, 297, 299 
sulphuret., black, 297, 304 
nigrum, 297, 304 
red, 297, 304 
rubrum, 297, 304 
Hydrastia, 474, 479, 480, 754 
Hydrastin (eclect.), 754 
Hydroberberina, 481 
Hydrobryoretin, 522 
Hydrogen, bicarburetted, 452 
peroxide, 132 
sulphuretted, 164 
Hydrokinone, 347, 443, 530 

green, 443 
Hydrometer, 87 
Baunie, 87 
Cartier, 87 

Pemberton's remarks, 89 
Pile, 89 
Hydrostatic balance, 81 
Hygienic vinegar, 773 
Hygrina, 477, 515 
Hyoscyamia, 476, 509 
Hypophosphites, 144. 
See Bases. 



TCE, 60 

X preservation in sick room, 
932 
vault, 59 
Iceland moss, 335 
jelly, 936 
paste, 730 
Ichthidin, 351 
Ichthin, 351 
Ichthulin, 351 



Ichthyocolla, 356 
Igasuria, 476, 505 
Ignition, 122 
Ilicin, 521 
Ilipicrin, 521 
Imperatoria, 523 
Imperial measure, 75 
Implements, 17 
Incineration, 122 
Incorporation of ingredients, 

^98 
Incompatibles, chemical, 830 
conditions of, 832 
how best mixed, 832 

of infusions, 581 
opium, 643 

pharmaceutical, 833 
India rubber, 421 
In die an, 465 
Indiglucin, 465 
Indigo, 465 

blue, 465 

carmine, 465 

sulphate, 465 

white, 465 
Indigogen, 465 
Indigotin, 465 
Infusions, incompatibles, 581 

mug, Alsop's, 577 

pot, Squire's, 577 
Infusion, 580, 582 
(Infusum), angustura?, 582 

anthemidis, 582 

boneset, 582 

buchu, 582 

calumbas, 582 

capsici, 582 

caryophylli, 582 

cascarillae, 582 

catechu eomp., 582 

chamomile, 582 

cinchona? flava?, 582, 583 
rubra?, 582, 583 

cloves, 582 

digitalis, 583 
(drops), 79 

eupatorii, 582 

flaxseed comp., 582 

gentiana? comp., 582, 584 
cone, 584, note 

ginger, 582 

hops, 582 

humuli, 582 

juniperi, 582 

krameria?, 582 

lini comp., 582 

pareira?, 582 

picis liquid., 583, 584 

pruni virgin., 582, 583 

quassise, 582 

rhatany, 582 

rhei, 582 

rosa? comp., 583 

sage, 582 

salvia?, 582 

sennas, 582 

serpentaria?, 582 

spigelia?, 582 

tabaci, 583 

taraxaci, 583 

Valeriana?, 582 

wild cherry, 582, 583 



INDEX. 



959 



(Infusum) — 

zingiberis, 582 
Inhalations, 858, 859 

acidi hydrocyan., 859 

chlorine, 860 

conia, 860 

creasote, 860 

iodine, 860 
Inhaler, 859 
Injections, 856 

argent, nitrat., 856 

gonorrhoea, 856 
Ink, Runge's, 170 
Inorganic pharmaceutical 

chemistry, 109 
Inosit, 339, 353 
Inscription, 786 
Integration, 536 
Interruption, unreasonable, 

avoided, 934 
Inula, 335 
Inulin, 334, 335 
Iodinanilina, 471 
Iodides. See Bases. 
Iodine, 134, 135 

bath, 858 

bisulphuret, 146 

bromide, 141 

chlorides, 139 

protochloride, 139 

terchloride, 139 

tested volum., 926 

weighing, 301 
Iodoform, 374, 37S 
Iodum, 135 

Irideae, essent. oils, 416 
Iridin (eclect.), 754 
Irin, 416, 420 
Irisin (eclect.), 754 
Iron, 224 

salts. See Ferrum. 

alum, 222, 233 

chocolate drops, 735 

halogen compounds, 248 

oxysalts, 226 

protosalts, 225 

Quevenne's, 229 

sesquisalts, 225 

sulphur compounds, 248 
Isinglass, 356 

plaster, 357 

Russian, 357 
Itch insect, 145 
Ivain, 523 
Ivaol, 412 



TACKSON'S ammonia loz- 
•J enges, 738 

pectoral lozenges, 738 

phosphates, 144 
Jalapa, resinoid principle, 530 

synonyms, 525, note 
Jalapin, 347, 525, 530 
Jalapinol, 347, 530 
Jamaicina, 475, 489 
James' powder, 291 
Jar, extract, 30, 668 

fruit, 24 

ointment, 29 

precipitating, 127, 563 

show, 28 



Jar — 

specia, 23 

stoneware, 20, 28 

tie-over, 29 
Jasmineaa, essent. oils, 413 
Jellies, 357, 852 
Jelly, calves' feet, 936 

chicken, 937 

for invalids, 935 

Iceland moss, 936 

rice, 936, 937 

sage, 936 

slippery elm bark, 937 

strainer, Physic's, 561 
Jenk's kitchen press, 579 
Jervia, 476, 511 
Jew's beer, 627 
Juglandeae, neutral principle, 

527 
Juglandin (eclect.), 754 
Jujube paste, 729 
Juniper camphor, 400, 406, 
420 



KENTISH'S ointment, 881, 
882, 883 
Keratin, 356 

K rmes mineral, 285, 286 
Kerner's quinia test, 500 
Keyser's universal plaster, S91 
Kilogramme, 76 
Kindness against the sick, 934 
Kino, 455, 456 
Kinone, 443 
Kinovic, red, 456 
Kinovin, 437, 520, 523, 529 
Kissingen water, artificial, 

153 
Kitchen range, 61 
Knapp's sugar test, 344 
Koussin, 522 
Kreatin, 353, 517, 528 
Kreatinine, 353, 518 
Kreosot, 332 
test, 451 
Kyanol, 516 



LABARRAQUE'S solution, 
188 
Labdanum, 422 
Labelling, 910 
Labels, blank, 909 

in cellar, 58, 59 

drawer, 18 

gilt, 24 

glass, 24 

cement, 24 

gummed, 910 

paper, 18, 25 
varnish, 325 

pasting, 910 

prescription, 909 
Labiatas, neutral principl., 526 

essent. oils, 413 
Laboratory, pharinaceut. , 60 
Lac, 423 

ammoniaci, 848 

vaccinum, 352 

sulphuris, 146 
Lactates. See Bases. 



Lactic fermentation, 363, 436 
Lactin, 338, 348 
Lactinated powders, 553 
Lactometer. 89, 354 
Lactose, 338 
Lactucarium in pilular form, 

804 
Lactucin, 523 
Lactucone, 523 
Lactucopicrin, 523 
Ladanum, 422 
Lady Webster's pills, 818 
Lakes, 462 

Lamotte's golden drops, 250 
Lamp, alcohol, 93, 908 

blast, 94 

Berzelius', 94 

chimney, 94 

as displacer, 593 

Mitchell's, 93 

Russian, 94 

universal, 94 
Language of prescriptions, 781 
Lanthanum, 223 
Lapathin, 438 
Lapis divinus, 260, 263 

ophthalmicus, St. Yves, 
263 
Lappa, 335 
Larch, 338 
Lard, 390 

benzoated, 865, 873 

washed, 862 
Laricin, 528 

Lartique's gout pills, 816 
Latent heat, 556 
Latin terms, 785, 7S9 
Laudanum, 640, 646 

(drops), 80 

modified, 646 

Sydenham's, 640, 642 
Laughing gas, 196 
Laurin, 526 
Laurineae, alkaloids, 476 

neutral principle, 526 

essent. oils, 415 
Lavender water, 771, 772 
Laxative cakes, 824 
Laxatives, pills, 817 

powders, 817 
Lead, 272 

salts. See Plumbum. 

cerate, 870, 871 

plaster, 272, 386, 389, S86 

red, 272, 273 

sugar, 272, 273 

water, 274 

white, 272, 273 
Leaves, collection, 538 

skeletonizing, 189, 321 
Ledixanthin, 456 
Ledoyen's disinfecting fluid, 

276 
Legumin, 350 

Leguminosas, alkaloids, 475, 
476 

balsams, 426 

neutral principle, 522, 
528 

essent. oils, 407, 410 

oleoresins, 424 

resins, '422 



960 



INDEX, 



Lehmann's sugar test, 344 
Lemon camphor, 400, 406, 420 

juice, artificial, 433 

yield of citric acid, 
168 

squeezer, 920 
Lepidina, 477 
Lepidolite, 173 
Leptandrin (eclect.), 755 
Leucina, 349, 356, 518 
Leucolina, 477 
Libra, 784 
Lichenes, neutral principle, 

528 
Lichenin, 334, 335 
Liebig's broth, 355 

condenser, 113, 114 

quinia test, 500 
Light, polarization, 338, note 
Ligneous fibre, 319 
Lignin, 320 

Schweitzer's solvent, 320 
Ligustrin, 524 
Ligustron, 524 
Ligustropicrin, 524 
Liliaceae, neutral principle, 
527 

essent. oils, 416 
Lime, 203, 204 

salts. See Calcium. 

liniment, 881, 882 

syrup, 211 

water, 203, 204, 558 
Limonin, 521 
Linaceae, neutral principle, 

520 
Linen, change of, 932 
Linimenta, 881 

unofficinal, 883 
Linimentum (Liniment) 

atoniti, 881, 882 

ammonise, 881, 882 
camphor., 883 

arnicae, 884 

calcis, 881, 882 

cainpboree, 881, 882 

cantharidis, 881, 882, 883 

chloroformi, 881, 883 

croup, catarrhal, 883 

hyperici, 884 

lead, 388, 881, 883, 884 

lime, 881, 882 

plumbi subacet., 388, 881, 
883, 884 

potassii iodidi, 885 

saponis, 559, 881, 883 

sulphuris, 884 

tannin, 883 

terebinthinae, 881, 882, 
883 

volatile, 881, 882 
Linin, 520 
Lint, patent, 321 
Lip salve, 877 
Lipyle, oxide, 384 
Liquids, dispensing of, 906 

inflammatle, how to keep, 
58 

preparations, 827 
Liquores, 558 
Liquor aloes comp., 783 

ammon., 194, 196, 559 



Liquor ammon. — 

(drops), 79 
tested volum., 926 
acetatis, 124, 198, 

559 
arseniat, 292, 294 
fortior, 194, 196, 559 
tested volum., 
926 
succinatus, 435 
arsenicalis Fowleri, 292, 
293, 559 
drops, 79 

tested volum., 926 
arsenic, chlorid., 559 

tested volum., 
926 
et hydrargyri iodidi, 
292, 295, 659 
auri nitro-muriat., 309 
barii chloridi, 201, 202, 

558 
bismuth, et ammon. ci- 

trat., 280, 283 
calcis, 203, 204, 558 

tested volum., 926 
calcii bicarbonat., 203, 
210 
chlorata, tested volu- 
metric, 926 
chloridi, 203, 205, 

559 
saecharat., 203, 211 
chlori, 133, 559, 572 

tested volum., 926 
ferri acetatis, 226, 245 
bromid., 139, 142,248 
chloridi, 248, 250, 

559 
citratis, 226, 233, 559 
hyperchloratis, 226, 

248 
nitratis, 226, 247, 

559 
perchloratis,226, 248 
persulphatis, 226, 

230, 559 
subsulphatis, 226, 

231, 559 
tersulphatis, 226,230, 

559 
gutta-perchae, 377, 560 
hydrargyr. et arsenici 
iodid.,292,295 
(drops), 79 
nitratis, 297, 305, 

559 
protonitratis. 297,306 
subnitratis, 306 
iodi, 139 

iodinii comp., 134, 139, 
559 
(drops), 79 
Magendie, 642 
magnesii citratis, 212, 

216, 217, 559 
morphiae sulphatis, 558, 
640, 642, 840 • 
Magendie, 642 
plumbi nitratis, 276 

subacetatis, 272, 274, 
559 



Liquor plumbi subacetatis — 
tested volum., 

926 
dilutus, 272, 274 
559 
potassae, 174, 177, 558 
administration, 178 
tested volum., 926 
effervesc, tested vo- 
lum., 926 
potassii arsenitis, 292, 
293, 559 
(drops), 79 
tested volum., 
926 
citratis, 174, 559, 
843 
extempor., 844 
permanganatis, 558 
sodse, 184, 185, 558 
tested volum., 926 
effervesc, tested vo- 
lum., 926 
sodii arseniatis, 292, 294, 
558 
arseniti?, 292, 293 
chlorinat., 184, 188, 
559 
tested volum., 
926 
tartro-citratis, 184, 
190 
zinci chloridi, 267 
Liquorice root, 348 
Liriodendrin, 520 
Lisbon diet drink, 589 

wine, 364 
Liston's isinglass plaster, 357 
Litharge, 272 
Lithia, 169, 173 
Lithii carbonas, 169, 173 
Lithium mica, 173 
Litmus, 464 
Litre, 74, 76 
Loao, 463 

Lobeliaceae, alkaloids, 477 
Lobelina, 477, 515 
Loewenthal's sugar test, 345 
Logan ; s plaster, 891 
London porter, 364 
Lotion, 853 

almond, 854 
antidynous, 854 
carbolic acid, 451 
chilblain, 854 
creasote, 853 
glycerin, 885 
Granville's, 854 
Lovi's beads, 84 
Lozenges, 731 

See Trochisci. 
ammonia, Jackson's, 738 
astringent rose leaf, 740 
board for, 731, 738 
catechu, 740 
chalk. 733, 735 
cough, Parrish's, 739 
Wistar's, 734, 736 
improved, 737 
cubebs, 733, 734, 736 
diaphoretic, 824 
drying, 740 



INDEX. 



961 



Lozenges — 

flavoring, 732 

ginger, 733, 734, 736 

ipecac, 733, 734, 735 

iron, 733, 735 

Jackson's ammonia, 738 
pectoral, 738 

magnesia, 733, 735 

mint, 733, 734, 736 

Parrish's cough, 739 

pectoral, Jackson's, 738 

phosphatic, 739 

soda, 733, 735 

Spitta's, 734, 736 

unofficinal, 738 

wild cherry, 740 

Wistar's cough, 734, 736 
improved, 737 
Lugol's solution, 139 
Lunar caustic, 461 
Lupinine, 522 
Lupulin (eclect.), 666, 754 
Luteolin, 463 
Lutidin, 452, 477 
Luting, 113 
Lycopin, 526 

(eclect.), 755 
Lycopodiaceae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 528 
Lycopodin, 528 
Lye, medicated, 586 



MACERATION, 576 
McGlensey's gas-burner, 
102 
Mackey's extract calves' feet, 

357 
Macrotin (eclect.), 749 
Madeira wine, 364 
Magendie's solution, 642 
Magnesia, 212, 214 
alba, 213 
Barr's table, 215 
calcined, 212, 214 
Dinnerford's fluid, 214 
effervescent, Moxon's, 

212, 219 
Ellis's, 215 
fluid, 214 
Henry's, 215 
Husband's, 215 
ponderous, 215 
and rhubarb, 819 
Weaver's, 215 
Magnesii acetas, 212,219 

bicarbon. (fluid), 212,214 
carbonas, 212, 213 

ponderos., 212, 214 
saturating power, 168 
citras, 212, 216 

granulata, 218, 219 
liquor, 212, 216, 217, 

559 
prasparata, 219 
solubilis, 217, 218 
et potassii borotartratis, 

212, 220 
sulphas, 212, 213 
sulphuret, 212, 220 
Magnesite, 213 
Magnolia, 520 

61 



Magnoliacese, neutral prin- I 
pie, 520 

essent. oils, 409 
Malaga wine, 364 
Malamid, 528 
Malmsey wine, 364 
Malt, 363 

liquors, 364 
Management of the shop, 927 

of sick room, 931 
Manganese, 254 

acetate, 255, 256 

carbonate, 255, 256 

chloride, 255, 259 

hypophosph., syrup, 257 

iodide, syrup, 257 

and iron iodide, syrup, 
258 

lactate, 255, 256 

oxide, 255 

phosphate, 255, 256 

protoxide, 254 

sulphate, 255 
Manganous sulphate, 255 
Mangostin, 463, 521 
Manna, 348 

Australian, 338, 339 
Mannitan, 343, 523 
Mannite, 339, 342, 348 

anhydrous, 343 
Marauta, 334 
Marble, 203 
Marechale, sachet, 775 
Marmor, 203 
Marrow pomatum, 778 
Marrubin, 526 
Marshall's dentifrice, 774 

pill's, 943 
Marshmallow ointment, 880 

paste, 730 
Mass, blue, 804 

extemporan., 805 
powdered, 805 

copaiba, 806 ( 

Vallette's, 805 
Massa pilul. hydrargyri, 804 
extemp., 805 
powdered, 805 
Mash, 366 
Mastich, 422, 428 
Masticin, 422 
Materia medica, classification, 

541 
Matricaria camphor, 419 
Maughan's Carrara water, 210 
Maumene's sugar test, 346 
Mayer's alkaloid test, 472 
Meal, flaxseed, 544 

oat, 335 
Measures, 44, 69, 75 

glass, 44, 76 

Hodgson's, 46, 77 

imperial, 75 

metrical, 76 

minim. 46, 78 

concavity corrected, 
78 

oil, 920 

tested, 45 

tin, 46 

wine, 75 
Measurement, approximate, 78 



Meat, 353, 355 

juice, preserved, 355 
Meconin, 520 
Medicated cough candy, 742 

secrets, 742 

waters, 571, 764 
Medicines, selecting, 793 

in liquid form, 829 
Medulla sassafras, 337 
Medullin, 322 
Mel, 348 

despumatum, 348, 717 

rosae, 717 

sodii boratis, 717 
Melampyrite, 339 
Melanthacese, alkaloids, 476 
Meleze, 338 
Melezitose, 338 
Melitose, 338 
Mellita, 716 

Menispermaceae, alkaloids, 
474 

neutral principle, 520 
Menispermin (eclect.), 755 
Menispermina, 474, 480 
Menthen, 413 
Menyanthin, 525 
Menyanthol, 525 
Merck's opium test, 486 
Mercure, acide nitrate de, 

306 
Mercurialina, 477, 516 
Mercuric amido-chloride, 306 

chloride, 298 

iodide, 300 

oxide, 304 
Mercurous acetate, 305 

chloride, 398 

oxide, 305 

phosphate, 306 
Mercury, 296 

salts. See Hydrargyrum. 

cap for gas-burner, 96 

with chalk, 297, 307 

weighing, 301 
Meta-albumen, 352 

cinnameine, 426 

morphia, 475, 486 

pectin, 336 
Metals, noble, 123 
Methylaethylamina, 471, 516 
Methylamina, 471, 477 
Methyl, bichloride, 374 

conia, 476, 514 

oxide, hydrated, 332 
salicylate, 402 
Methylic alcohol, 331, 374 
Metre, 70, 73 
Metrical measure, 76 

system, 70, 73, 76 
Metrology, 69 
Mettauer's aperient, 584 

ethereal tinctures, 622 
Metyle, oxide, 385 
Mezquite gum, 336 
Mialhe's tooth-powder, 774 
Mice, prevent injury from, 18 
Milk, 352 

assafoetida, 838 
cone, 839 

butter, 354 

cow's. 352 



962 



INDEX. 



Milk— 

of roses for chapped 

hands, 855, 884 
skim, 354 
solidified, 355 
sugar, 338, 342, 348 
of sulphur, 146 
Mill, drug, 49 

Hance's, 549 
Millefleurs, essence, 771 

sachet, 776 
Millon's protein test, 349 
Minderer's spirit, 198 
Mineral green, 261 
"water, 149 

artificial, 153 

coolers, 151 

syrups, 719 
Minim, 784 

measure, 46, 78 

concavity corrected, 
78 
Minium, 273 
Mint camphor, 420 
Mistura (Mixture), 
acetone, 849 
alkaline, benzoated, 847 

copaiva, 847 
aloes comp. , 585, 588 
almonds, 846 
ammoniaci, 848 
ammonii carbon., 838 
amygdalae, 846 
anodyne, 840 
antacid, 843 

for young infants, 
845 
assafoetida, 838 

concentrated, 839 
astringent, 834 
Atlee's neuralgia, 848 

rheumatic, 848 
balsamic, 849 
benzoated alkaline, 847 
bismuth, carbon., 835 
blue mass and chalk, 835 

charcoal, 842 
brown, 848 
camphor, Hope's, 835 

Parrish's, 835 
cannabis Indica, 840 
castor oil, 841 
catarrhal, 841 
cathartic, 841 
chalk, 834 

and blue mass, 835 

Richards', 942 
charcoal and blue mass, 

842 
chinoidine, acetate, 836 
chloroform, 839 
cholagogue, 837 
cider, Parrish's, 585 
cochineal, 850 
cod-liver oil, 850 
colchicum, Dewees', 848 

Scudamore's, 848 
copaiva, alkaline, 847 
coryza, 849 
cough, 849 
cream of tartar, 842 
creasote, 841 



Mistura — 

cretae, 834 

cubebae, 846 & 

demulcent, 846 

Dewees's colchicum, 848 

diaphoretic, 840 

diuretic, 846 

effervescent, 843 

expectorant, 848 

ferri comp., 836 

fever and ague, 836 

glycyrrhizae comp., 848 

gout, Scudamore's, 848 

Griffith's myrrh, 836 

hooping-cough, 850 

indigestion, 845 

iron and cinchona, 837 
and myrrh, 836 
and quinia, 837 

magnesia, for children, 
842 

myrrh, Griffith's, 836 

narcotic, 840 

neuralgia, Atlee's, 848 

neutral, 843, 844 

oil of turpentine, 838 

olei amygdalae, 851 
cocos nucis, 851 
morrhuae amara, 850 

potassii citratis, 843 

pulmonary, 841 

quiniae, for children, 838 

refrigerant, 843 

rheumatism, Atlee's, 848 

common salt, 132 

Scudamore's, 848 

sedative, 840 

spermaceti, 849 

stimulant, 838 

sulphuric acid, 133 

taraxacum, 847 

tolu, 849 

tonic, 836 
• turpentine, 838 
Mitchell's lamp, 93 

aperient pills, 818 

tonic pills, 811 
Mixtures, 827 

Sre Mistura. 

eligible substances, 829 

excipients, 833 

oleaginous, 850, 919, 920 

preparation, 918 
Mohr's preparation of ex- 
tracts, 654 
Moistening bottle, 912 
Molasses, 340, 347 

sugar-bouse, 340 
Monesin, 521 

Monimiaceae, alkaloids, 475 
Mononitrocellulin, 322 
Monostearin, 386 
Monsel's solution, 231 
Moore's sugar test, 343 
Morin, 456 
Morphia, 475, 481 

abuse, 644 

acetate, 484 

citrate, 484 

hydrochlorate, 484 

muriate, 484 

poisoning, treatment, 643 



Morphia — 

powders, 815 

salts, 483 

sulphate, 484 

test, 483, 513 

valerianate, 484 
Mortars, 46 

bell-metal, 49 

brass, 49, 545 

clamp, 36 

for eontusion, 48 

glass, 48 

iron, 49, 545 

marble, 48 

porcelain, 47, 555 
French, 920 

Wedgewood, 46, 546 
Morton's tetter ointment, 879 
Moschus artificialis, 406, 424 
Mother-liquor, 127 
Mould for pastilles, 857, 858 
Mouth wash, 774 

perfume, 775 

violet, 775 
Moxon's effervescent magne- 
sia, 212, 219 
Mucilage, 335 
Mucilaginous principle, 333 
Mucin, 351, 352 
Mulder's sugar test, 345 
Mulled wine, 935 
Muller, 913 
Muriates. See Bases. 
Murexide, 460 
Musk, artificial, 406, 424 

extract, 773 

perfumes, 773 

tincture, 773 
Mustard, essence, 777 

Whitehead's, 942 

plaster, 899, 942 

seed, powdering, 544 
Mutter's aromatic pills, 822 
Mycose, 338 

Myricaceae, essent. oils, 416 
Myricin, 385 

(eclect.), 755 
Myristicese, essent. oils, 415 
Myristicin, 420 
Myrosin, 351, 454 
Myroxocarpin, 426 
Myroxylon, 427 
Myrrha, 425, 427 
Myrtaceae, neutral principle, 
522 

essential oil, 411 



\TAPELLTNA, 474, 478 
IN Naphtha aceti, 366 

wood, 331 
Naphthalina, 406, 452, 453 
Narceina, 475, 485 
Narcitin, 527 
Narcotic mixture, 840 

pills, 814 

powders, 814 
Narcotina, 475, 484 

ethylic, 484 

methylic, 484 

normal, 484 

propylic, 484 



inde: 



963 



Neatness in sick-room, 933 
Neck pill box, 56 
Nervous sedatives, mixture, 
840 

stimulants, mixture, 838 
pills, 813 
powders, 813 
Neutral mixture, 843, 844 

organic principles, 519 

spirits, 363 
New England Glass Company, 

20, 907 
Niccolum, 270 

sulphate, 271 
Nickel, 270 
Nicotia, 477, 515 
Nicotianina, 419, 420 
Nipple wash, Thomas's, 854 
Nitranilina, 471 
Nitrates. See Bases 
Nitre, 169 

cubic, 169 
Nitro cellulose, 322 

coumarin, 522 

glycerine, 348 

inosite, 339 
Nitrogen binoxide, 157 

oxide, 196 
Nitrum flammans, 196 
Noble's tonic elixir, 622 
Noise in sick-room avoided, 

933 
Nomenclature, 65 
Numerals in prescriptions, 784 
Nurse, cafe of, 934 
Nutmegs, powdering, 547 



OATMEAL, 335 
gruel, 937 
Ochra, 337 
Octarius, 784 
Officinal, 65 
Oil bath, 119 
bottle, 22 
can, 22 
filter, 561, 569 

Warner's, 561 
Oil (Oleum), absinthii, 412 
adipis, 390, 393 
Eethereum, 365, 366, 370 
alliariae, 418 
allii, 417, 418 
almonds, bitter, 402, 417, 
450 
sweet, 389, 392 
(drops), 79 
allspice, 411 
amber, 406, 426 
amygdal. ainar. , 402, 417, 
450 
dulc, 389, 392 
(drops), 79 
anethi, 41 1 
angelicas, 411 
angustura, 410 
animal, Dippel., 419 
anisi, 412 

(drops), 79 
solidifies, 401 
stellati, 409 

solidifies, 401 



Oil- 



anthemidis, 412 
apii, 411 
apple, 381, 417 
arachidis, 389, 392 
arbor vitas, 416 
arnicae, 412 

solidifies, 401 
asarabacca, 415 
asari canad., 415, 693 
asphalti, 406 
assafcetida, 417, 418 
aurant. cort., 410 

preserved, 405 

flor.,410 
balsam. Peru, 426 
bay, 411 
bayberry (fixed), 390 

(essent.), 415 
bear's, 397 
beech, 390 
behen, 389 
benne, 389, 392 
bergamottse, 410 
berthelotiae, 390, 393 
betulse, 406 
birch, 406 

bitter candy tuft, 418 
brazil nut, 390, 393 
British, 942 
bubulurn, 390, 393 
buchu, 410 
common burnet, 410 
bursa) pastoris, 418 
butter, 355 
cade, 406 
cadinum, 406 
cajeputi, 411 
calami, 416 
camphoraa, 407 
Canada snakeroot, 415 
canellae, 411 
caraway, 411 
cardamomi, 416, 693 
carron, 393 
carrot, 411 
carui, 411 

(drops), 79 
caryophyll., 411 

(drop'), 79 
cascarillas, 415 
cassiae, 415 
cassiabuds, 415 
castor, 390, 394 
catfish, 398 
catnip, 414 
celery, 411 
cetacei, 390, 394 
chamomile, German, 412 
solidifies, 412 

English, 412 
cheiranthi, 418 
chenopodii, 415 

(drops), 79 

ambrosioidis, 415 
cherry, 417 
cherry-laurel, 417 
chocolate-nuts, 390, 393 
cicutao, 411 
cinnamon, 402, 415 

(drops), 79 
citronellae, 416 



Oil- 



cloves, 411 

(drops), 79 
clove-cinnamon., 415 
cochleariae, 418 
cocois, 390, 393, 394 
cocos-nut, 390, 393, 394 
cod-liver, 390, 396 

how to keep, 29 

and red iodide of 
mercury, 851 
copaibae, 407 
coriandri, 411 
cottonseed, 390, 394 
cress, 418 
croci, 416 
croton, 390, 395 

(drops), 79 
cubebaa, 407 

(drops), 79 
culilawan, 415 
cumin, 402, 411 
cyna?, 412 
dahliae, 412 
dill, 411 
dracunculi, 412 
dugong, 390, 397 
eggs, 353 
elderflowers, 412 
elecampane, 412 
elemi, 407 
ergot, 693 
erigeron, 412 
ethereal, 365, 366, 370 
fagi, 390 
fennel, 411 

(drops), 79 

solidifies, 401 
feverfew, 412 
fireweed, 412 
fish, test, 383 
flaxseed, 3S9, 393 
fconiculi, 411 

(drops) , 79 

solidifies, 401 
gal an gal, 416 
galbani, 411 
garlic, 417, 418 
gaultheriaa, 402, 413, 448 

(drops), 79 
geranium, 410 
ginger, 416 
gossypii, 390, 394 
groundnut, 389, 392 
Haarlem, 941 
halicore, 390, 397 
hedeomae, 413 

(drops), 79 
Hedwigiae, 407 
heliotrope, 414 
hemlock, 407 
hops, 416 
horehound, 413 
horsemint, 414 
horseradish, 418 
humuli, 416 
hyssopi, 413 
ihlang-ihlang, 409 
inulae, 412 

iridis, florentin., 416 
iva, 412 
jasmini, 413 



964 



INDEX. 



Oil- 
jessamine, 413 
juniper, 407 

virgin., 407 
empyreum., 406 
Labrador tea, 413 
lard, 390, 393 
laurel (fixed), 390 
(essent.), 415 
(guiana), 415 
laurocerasi, 417 
lavandulae, 413 
ledi palustris, 413 
lemon, 410 

preservat., 405 
restoration, 405 
lemonbalm, 413 
lemongrass, 416 
levistici, 411 
lilac, 415 

lily of the valley, 416 
limonis. See Oil, lemon, 
linden, 409 
lini,389, 393 
lovage, 411 
mace (fixed), 390, 394 

(essent.), 415 
majoranse, 414 
marrubii, 413 
massey bark, 415 
masterwort, 411 
matricariae, 412 
meadow-sweet, 402, 410 
melissae, 413 
menthae crisp., 413 
piperit., 413 

(drops), 79 
viridis, 414 

(drops), 79 
Mexican tea, 415 
mignonette, 409 
millefolii, 412 
monardae, 414 
morrhuas, 390, 396 

how to keep, 29 
mustard (essent.), 417, 

418 
myricae gale, 416 
myristicae (fixed), 390, 
393 
(essent.), 415 
myrrhas, 407 
myrtle, 411 
neafs-foot, 390, 393 
neroli, 410 
nigellae, 409 
nuc. moschat., 415 
nutmeg (essent ), 415 

(fixed), 390, 393 
olibani, 407 
oliva?, 3S9, 391 

adulteration, 391 
(drops), 79 
orange flower, 410 
peel, 410 

preservat., 405 
origani, 414 

cretici, 414 
orris root, 416 
osmitopsis, 412 
palm, 390, 394 
papaveris, 390, 392 



Oil- 



parsley, 411, 693 
solidifies, 401 
patchouly, 414 
peach, 417 
pear, 417 

pennyroyal, 413, 414 
(drops), 79 
peppermint, 413 

(drops), 79 
petrae, 406 
petroselini, 411, 693 

solidifies, 401 
phellandrii, 411 
pichury, 415 
pimentae, 411 
pimpinellas, 412 
piperis nigri, 407 
poppy seed, 390, 392 
porpoise, 393 
pumpkin-seed, 694 
quince, 410 
radish, 418 
red, 884 
resedas, 409 
rhodium, 410, 414 
ricini, 390, 394 
rosae, 410 
rose geranium, 410 

solidifies, 401 
rosemary, 414 

(drops), 79 
rose root, 411 
rosin, 406 
rosmarini, 414 

(drops), 79 
rue, 402, 410 
sabinae, 407 

(drops), 79 
saffron, 416 
sage, 414 
sagapenum, 418 
salvias, 414 
sambuci, 412 
sanguisorba, 410 
santali, 415 
santonicas, 412 
sassafras, 415 

(drops), 79 
satureja, 414 
white saunders, 415 
scurvy grass, 418 
serpentarise, 415 
serpylli, 414 
sesaini, 389, 392 
sinapis, 417, 418 
Spanish hops, 414 
spearmint, 414 

(drops), 79 
spermaceti, 390, 394 
spicae, 413 
spike, 413 
spiraea, 402, 410 
spruce, 407 
star-anise, 409 

solidifies, 401 
sturgeon, 398 
succini, 406, 426 
summer savory, 414 
sweet basil, 414 

cicely, 411 

gale, 416 



Oil— 

sw^et marjoram, 414 

syringae, 415 

tanaceti, 413 
(drop), 79 

tanzy, 413 

(drop), 76 

tarragon, 412 

tea, 410 

templinum, 407 

terebinthinae, 407 

theobromae, 390, 393 

thymi, 414 

tiglii, 390, 395 
(drop), 79 

tilise, 409 

tuberose, 416 

Valerianae, 412 
(drop), 79 

verbenas, 413 

violet, 409 

vitriol, 158 

(drops), 79 

wallflower, 418 

water-hemlock, 411 

wine, 365, 366, 370 

winter's bark, 409 

wintergreen, 413, 448 
(drops), 79 

wormseed, 415 
(drops), 79 

wormwood, 412 

yarrow, 412 

zedoary, 416 

zingiberis, 416 
Oils, distilled, 765 

See Oil?, essential. 

empyreumatic, 418 

essential, 398 

adulteration, 402 
artificial, 418 
carbo-hydrogen, 405 
chemical history, 400 
classification, 400 
color, 401 
distillation, 398 
how to keep, 30 
nitrogenated, 416 
oxygenated, 408 
preservation, 405 
restoration, 405, 766 
solidification, 401 
sulphuretted, 451 
tests, 402 
fixed, 382 

adulteration, 383 
animal, 390 
chemical history, 384 
how to keep, 28 
in mixtures, 850 
vegetable, 389 
yield, 383 
volatile. See Oils, essen- 
tial.. 
Ointment. See Unguentum. 
aconitia, 878 
althaea, 880 
basilicon, 865, 872 
chalk, 879 
citrine, 870, 874 
cod-liver oil, 880 
croton oil, 880 



INDEX, 



965 



Ointment — 

elemi, 877 

galls, 868. 873 

garlic, 878 

glycerin, 876 

hasmostatic, 880 

iron compound, 879 

lard, 865, 872 

lead, carbonate, 875 
iodide, 875 

mercury, 874 

pile, 881 

red precipitate, 869, 874 

rose water, 863, 865, 
873 

simple, 865, 872 

stimulating, Hufeland's, 
880 

stramonium, 869 

tar, 866, 875 

and sulphur, 884 

tartar emetic, 868, 873 

tetter, 879 

tobacco, 876 

compound, 878 

white precipitate, 874 
Ointments, 861, 922 

and borax, 172 

dumb-waiter, 38 

jars, 29, 862 

how to keep, 29, 38, 59, 
862 

slab, how to clean, 923 

unofficinal, 876 
Olea destillata, 765 

See Oils, essential. 
Oleaceae, neutral principle, 
524 

essent. oils. 415 
Olein, 385 
Oleoresins, 427, 690 

natural, 424 

in powder form, 553 

unofficinal, 693 

uses, 690 
Oleoresina asari Canad., 693 

black pepper, 690, 691, 
692 

capsici, 690, 691 

cardamomi, 693 

cubebee, 690, 691, 692 

ergotse, 693 

fern, 690, 691 , 692 

filicis, 690, 691, 692 

ginger, 690, 691, 693 

lupulinre, 690, 691, 692 

parsley, 693 

piperis, 690, 691, 692 

pumpkin seed, 694 

zingiber!?, 690, 691, 693 
Oleum. See Oil. 
Olibanum, 495, 427 

common, 425, 427 
Olivil, 524 
Onocerin, 522 
Ononetin, 522 
Ononin, 522 
Onospin, 522 
Opiania, 475, 485 
Opina, 475, 486 
Opium abuse, 644 

alkaloids, 481 



Opium — 

assay, 482 

drying, 544 

eaters, 644 

incompatibles, 643 

poisoning, treatment, 643 

powdering, 544 

preparations, 639 

test, 441, 474, 486 
Opodeldoc, solid, 389, 882, 

942 
Opoponax, 425 
Orange wine, 364 

blossom essence, 770 
Orceine, 340, 404 
Orchidese, neutral principle, 

527 
Orchis mascula, 337 
Orcine, 340, 464 
Orcite, 340 
Oreoselon, 523 

Organic bodies, decomposi- 
tion, 534 
products of distil- 
lation, 119 

chemistry, 319 
Orris root, 335 
Oryza, 335 
Os, 358 

Osseine, 356, 358 
Otto, antispasmodic powders, 
814 

emmenagogue pills, 823 
Ounce, 71 
Ovum, 302 

albumen, 352 

testa, 352, 353 

vitellus, 352, 353 
Outfits for physicians, 938, 

939 
Oxgall, 358 

inspissated, 358 
Oxidation, 123 

artificial, 535 
Oxides, reduction, 122 

See Bases. 
Oxidized extractive, 587 
Oxyacanthin, 481 
Oxycannabin, 423 
Oxycinchonia, 497 
Oxygen, 128 

apparatus, 130 

yield from chlorate of 
potassium, 129 
I Oxymel, scillas, 717 

simplex, 717 
Oxysalts, 167 
Oyster shells, 203 
; Ozone, 130 

Schoenbein's test, 131 
! Ozonides, 131 



PACKAGES, 903 
folding of, 903 
Packer, 23 

Packing bottle, 23, 24 
Palma Christi leaves and 

seeds, 39 
Palmae, alkaloids, 476 
Palmitin, 385 
Pamphlet case, 56 



Panada, 935 

Panaquilon, 340 

Pancoast's sedative plaster, 

891 
Panis laxans, 824 
Pancreatin, 352 
Pa paver, 337 
Papaveracese, alkaloids, 475 

neutral principles, 520 
Papaverina, 475, 485 
Paper, 321 
cut, 903 
division of, 903 
envelope, 55 
fancy, 55 
flat cap, 55, 904 
filtering, 55, 564 
Swedish, 55 
labels, 18, 25 
package, 904 
parchment, 321 
prescription, 785 
white wrapping, 50, 903 
Para-albumen, 352 
digitaliretin, 525 
morphia, 485 
pectin, 336 
Paraffin, 406, 452, 453 
Parchment paper, 321 
Paregoric, 640, 646 

chloroform, 634 
Paricia, 474 
Paricinia, 501 
Paridin, 525, 527 
Pariglin, 527 

Parrish, anodyne mixture, 840 
camphor mixture, 835 
cathartic pills, 821 
chemical food, 226, 240 
cider mixture, 585 
cough lozenges, 739 
drop table, 79 
fluid extract buchu, 

comp., 684 
gas furnace, 100 
magnesia citrate, 216 
pile electuary, 728 
pills, laxative and tonic, 
818 
tonic and aromatic, 

811 
quinia sulphat. so- 
lut,, 809 
syrup, carrageen comp., 
710 
chamomile, 709 
frostwort, 711 
gillenia, 712 
hypophosphites, 210 
phosphates, comp., 

238 
cooler, 152 
Parsley camphor, 420 
Paste, 729, 910 
bottle, 910 
carrageen, 730 
charcoal, 
gum, opaque, 730 

transparent, 729 
Iceland moss, 730 
jujube, 729 
marsh mallow, 730 



i 



966 



INDEX. 



Paste — 

Ward's, 729 

Pastilles, fumigating, 776 

mould, 776 
Pasting labels, 910 
Patchouly essence, 772 
Pate de guimauve, 730 
Patent lint, 321 

safety can, 30 
Paviin, 521, 529 
Paytina, 497 
Pearlash, 174 

tested volum., 926 
Pearl barley, 589 
Pearson's arsenical solution, 

294 
Pectase, 336 
Pectin, 336 

Pectoral drops, Bateman's, 
940 
lozenges, 738 

Jackson's, 738 
Parrish's, 739 
Spitta's, 734, 736 
syrup, Jackson's, 714 
Pectose, 336 

Peligot's sugar test, 346 
Pelosina, 480 
Pellets, 824, 918 
Pelluteina, 480 
Peltz, syrup of assafoetida, 

712 
Pemberton, on hydrometers 

89 
Pennyweight, 70 
Peppermint plantations, 540 
Pepsin, 359 
Peptone, 344, 361 
Percolation, 390 

continuous, 598 
history, 590 
Percolating compact drugs, 
600 
porous drugs, 599 
with ether, 602, 691 
gum resins, 598 
hot, 600 

management, 596 
by vacuum, 602 
Percolators. See Displacers. 
Pereirina, 476, 506 
Perfumery, 768 
Pese acide, 87 
esprit, 87 
sirop, 87 
Pestles, cement, 47 
Petalite, 173 
Petroleum, 406 
Pettenkofer's sugar test, 346 
Peucedanin, 523 
Phaeoretin, 439 
Phaatin, 452 
Phantom bouquet, 321 
Pharmaceutical incompati- 
bles, 833 
laboratory, 60 
steam-boiler, 107 
still, 760, 762 
Pharmacology, how to study, 

541 
Pharmacopoeias, 63 
British, 65 



Pharmacopoeias — 

U. S., 64 
Pharmacy, extemporaneous, 
779 
galenical, 537 
proper, 537 
Phaseomannite, 339 
Phenamide, 516 
Phenylamin, 471, 473, 516 
Phenyl series, 471 
Philicome, 778 
Phillygenin, 524 
Phyllyrin, 524 
Phloretih, 339, 438 
Phloridzin, 437, 438 
Phloroglucin, 339 
Phormia, 475, 485 
Phosphates. See Bases. 
Phosphatic lozenges, 739 
Phosphoric oxide, 145 
Phosphorus, 143 
black, 144 
red, 144 
in pills, 144 
Photogene, 406 
Photographic prints, washed, 

525 
Phycite, 340 
1 hyllocyanin, 465 
Phylloxanthin, 465 
Physalin, 525 

Physic's alkaline solution, 586 
bitter tinct. of iron, 620 
jelly strainer, 561 
medicated lye, 586 
tetter ointment, 879 
Physicians' bad hand-writing, 

785 
Phytolaccia (eclect.), 756 
Phytolaccin (eclect.) 756 
Picolin, 452,477 
Picroglucina, 4S7 
Picrolichenin, 528 
Picrotoxin, 437, 438 
Pierlot's solut. ammon. vale- 
rian., 633 
Pile confection, 728 
electuary, 728 
ointment, 8S1 
of weights, 73 
Pile's cherry-laurel water, 
576 
hydrometer, S9 
specific gravity bottle, 82 
table of specific gravity 
of water, 86 
Pills, boxes, 55 

necked, 56 
coating, 915 
Furley, 917 
Proctor, 917 
dispensing, 911, 914 
division, 913 
dusting, 914 
excipients, 801, 802, 803, 

806 
forming, 912 
gelatine coating, 915 
gilding, 915 
machine, 50, 913, 914 
Wilson's, 51 
Wurtz's, 51 



Pills- 
masses, 804 
preparation, 911 
roller, 50, 914 
silvering, 915 
size of, 800 

substances adapted, 801, 
802 
unsuited, 801, 802 
sugar-coated, 918 
tile, 50, 913 
Pills (Pilulge), 800 
acid, tannic, 807 
aloes, 817 

and assafoetida, 813 
and mastich, 818 
and myrrh, 817 
aloin and podophyllin, 

821 
alterative, 823 
ammon. carbon., 814 
Anderson's 943 
anodyne, 815 
antibilious, 820 

Alberti's, 821 
antimon. comp., 823 
antispasmod., 813 
aperient, Mitchell's, 818 
argent, nitratis, 814 
aromatic and tonic, 811 

Mutter's, 822 
assafoetida, 813 
astringent. 807 
Becquerel's gout, 816 
Bl an card's, 812 
blue, 804, 805 
calomel, comp., 823 
camphor and opium, 815 
cathartic, 817 
comp., 820 

modified, 821 
Chapman's dinner, 818 
chinoidine, 810 
cinchon. sulph., 809 
colchic. c. hydrargyr., 

816 
colocynth. and hyoscy- 

am., 820 
copaiba, 806 

comp., 822 
costiveness, habitual, 820 
croton oil, 821 
diaphoretic, 822 
dinner, Chapman's, 818 
diuretic, 821 
Doveri, 822 
emmenagogue, 823 
expectorant, 821 
extract, cannabis, 815 
female, Hooper's, 658, 942 
ferri carbonat., 226, 228, 
805 
chloridi, 813 
comp., 81 1 
iodid., 812 

Buckler, 812 
permanent, 812 
protocarbon. et qui- 

nia, 810 
Quevenne's, 810 
et quinias, 810 
galbani comp., 813 



INDEX. 



967 



Pills- 
gout, Becquerel's, 816 
Lartique's, 816 
Vance's, 815 
Hooper's female, 658, 942 
hydrargyri, 804 

externporan.,805 
powdered, 805 
bichloridi, 823 
iodidi comp., 823 
inter inittents, obstinate, 

811 
ipecacuanh. et opii, 822 
iron. See Pil. ferri. 
Lady Webster's, 818 
Lartique's gout, 816 
laxative, 817 

and tonic, 818 
Marshall's, 943 
mercury. See hydrargyr. 
Mitchell's aperient, 818 

tonic, 811 
Mutter's aromatic, 822 
narcotic, 814 
opii, 814 

old, 814 

et camphor., 815 
phosphorus, 144 
plumbi acet., 808 
Plummer's, 823 
podophyllin. etaloin,S21 

tonic, 820 
Quevenne's iron, 810 
quiniae sulph., 808 

soluble, S09 
quinidiae sulph., 809 
rhei, 817 

comp., 817 
rheumatic. See Gout. 
Ricord's tar and copaiva, 

822 
Rufus', 818 
saponis comp., 825 
scilla3 comp., 821 
Scott's, 943 
sedative, 816 
silver nitrate, 814 
stimulant, 813, 814, 816 
tar and copaiva, 822 
tonic, 808 

aromatic, 811 
laxative, 818 
podophyllin, 820 
Mitchell's, Sll 
Vance's gout, 815 
Pinipicrin, 527 
Pinite, 339 
Pint, 75 

Piperaceae, alkaloids, 476 
neutral principl., 527 
essent. oils, 407 
Piperidina, 477, 510 

piperate, 510 
Piperina, 476, 510 
Piperoid of ginger, 691, 693 
Pipsissewa beer, 943 
Pitayia, 475, 501 
Pitch, Burgundy, 426 
Pix canadensis, 426 
Plants, collection, 537 
cultivation, 540 
desiccation, 537, 539 



Plants- 
drying, 537, 539 
Plasma, 897 

belladonnas, 897 

picis, 897 

plumbi, 897 

potassii iodid., 898 

sinapis, 898 

tar, 897 
! Plasmata, 896 
Plaster, acid carbolic, 451 

adhesive, 895 
tin can, 56 

amidon, 895 

breast, 894 

Dewees', 891 
Wilson's, 891 

Burgundy pitch, 890 

corn, annular, 898 

court, 357 

diachylon, 386 

hemlock pitch, 890 

isinglass, 357 

lead, 272, 386, 3S9 

Logan's, 890 

mammary abscess, S91 

mustard, 899 

roborant, 889, 992 

sedative, Pancoast's, S91 

spice, 899 

strengthening, 8S9, 892 

fchapsia, 326 

universal, 891 

•worming, 890 

white felt, 895 
Plaster block, 892 

cloth, S95 

iron, 892, 893 

spreading, 892 
machine, 895 
Plasters, 8S5 

unofficial, 890 
Platform balances, 42 
Platinum, 310 

binoxide, 310 

crucible, 122 

oxide, 310 

perchloride, 311 

and sodium chloride, 311 
Plumbagin, 526 
Pluinbagineae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 526 
Plumbum (Lead), 272 

(Plumbi), acetas, 272, 273 
tested volum., 926 

carbonas, 272, 275 

chloridum, 272. 276 

iodidum, 272, 275 

nitras, 272, 575 
fusa, 276 

oxidum rubrum, 272, 
273 
semivitreum, 272 

protoxidum, 272 

tannas, 272, 277 
Pluinmer's pills, 823 
Podophyllin, 427, 658, 746 

pills, 821 
Poisons, how to keep, 37 
Polariscope, 338, note. 
Polarization, 338, note. 
Pollenin, 322 



I Polychroite, 463 
i Polychrome, 521, 528 
j Polygalin, 440 

; Pomade of iodide of potas- 
sium, 898 
Pomatum, 778 
Poppyheads, 337 
Populin, 347, 527 
(eclect.), 756 
Porcelain cup, 52 
Porphyrharmina, 476, 4S9 
Porphyroxin, 486 
Port wine, 364 
Porter, 364 

Posture, change of, 931 
Potash, 174 
Potassa, 174, 178 

tested volum., 926 
caustic, 178 
cum calce, 174, 179 
hydrate, 178 
hydriodate, 136 
Potassii acetas, 174, 179 
antimonias, 2S5, 290 
arsenitis liquor, 293 
bicarbonas, 174, 175 

saturating power, 

168, 178 
tes ed volum., 926 
bichromas, 1G9, 170 
bisulphas, 1G9, 171 
bitartras, 192 

tested volum., 926 
boraeico-tartras, 192, 194 
et boracis tartras, 192, 

194 
bromidum, 139, 141 

tested volum., 926 
carbnzotas, 183 
carbonas, 174, 175 

tested volum., 926 
impura, 174 
para, 1 74, 176 
saturating power,168 
hloras, 174, JS0 

yield of oxygen, 129 
tablets, 740 
chromas, 169, 170 
citras, 174, ISO 

tested volum., 926 
cyanidum, 448 
ferrocyanid., 445 
iodidum, 134, 136 
iodo-hydrargyr., 297,302, 

472 
et hydrargyr. iodid., 297, 

302, 472 
hydras, 178 

hypermanganas, 255, 259 
hyperphosphis, 174, 183 
nitras, 169 

powdering, 556 
permanganas, 255, 259 
mode of applying, 
324 
phosphas, 174, 182 
picras, 174, 183 
prussiate, yellow, 445 
sesquicarbonas, 177 
silicas, 174, 183 
et sodii tartras, 192, 193 
sulphas, 169, 171 



INDEX, 



Potassii — 

sulpho-cserulas, 465 

tartras, 192, 193 

tested volum., 926 
Potato starch, 334 
Poultice, 898 
Pound, 71 
Pouring, 570, 921 
Powder (Powders), 542, 551, 
798 

Algaroth's, 288 

alterative, 823 

ammon. carbon., 814 

antacid, 808 

antimonial, 285, 291 
Tyson's, 289, 291 

anti-intermittent, 808 

antispasmodic, 814 

aromatic, 552, 808, 810 

astringent, 807 

bleaching, 205 

calomel, alterative, 823 
and jalap, 819 

Castillon's, 937 

cathartic, 817 

chalk, 807 

cochineal, comp., 634 

composition, 941 

compound, 552 

diaphoretic, 822 

diarrhoea, 807 

of infants, 808 

diluents of, 802 

division of, 806, 905 

dispensing, 903, 904 

Dover's, 552, 822 

liquid substitute, 845 

dusting of, 545 

envelope, 905 

emetic, 816 

ergot, comp., 816 

fever, effervescing, 844 

fineness, 545, 550 

folding, 903 

fumigating, 776 

gastric irritability, 813 

gauge, 905 

gray, 307 

heavy, administration, 
800 

indigestion, chronic, 813 

James's, 285, 291 

lactinated, 553 

laxative, 817 

magnesia and rhubarb, 
819 

morphia, diluted, 815 

neutralizing, 819 

nitre and tart, antim., 816 

paper, 905 

precipitated, 556 

sachets, 775 

sedative, 808, 816 

Seidlitz, 552, 819 

simple, 552 

soda, 845 

stimulant, 813, 814, 816 

styptic, 853 

substances adapted to, 
799, 802 
unsuited to, 799, 802 

tonic, 808 



Powder- 
uterine hemorrhage, 816 
yeast, 846 
Powdering, 542, 543 

of camphor, 120, 548 
gum resins, 548 
oily drugs, 544 
salts, 556 
Pravage's solution, 249 
Precipitant, 126 
Precipitate, 126 
red, 304 
white, 306 
Precipitation, 126, 556 

jar, 563 
Preparations, best given 
alone, 832 
extemporaneous, 780 
liquid, 827 
permanent, 780 
Prescription, 779 

abbreviations, 784 
adjuvant, 797 
basis, 796 
chirography, 785 
compounding, 899 
corrective, 797 
counter, 35, 901 
diluent, 797 
dispensing, 899 
excipient, 798 
grammatical explana- 
tions, 783 
heading, 786 
inscription, 786 
labels, 909 
language, 781 
numerals, 784 
paper, 785 
reading of, 911 
scales, 39, 40 
signatura, 789, 793 
signs, 784 
subscription, 788 
superscription, 786 
symbols, 784 
synonym, explanatory, 

782 
vials, 53, 906 
writing of, 785 
Press, 578 

clothes-wringer, 579 
Jenks's kitchen, 579 
Primulaceae, neutral princi- 
ple, 526 
Principles, neutral, 519 
animal, 528 
nitrogenized, 528 
sulphuretted, 528 
quaternary, 528 
ternary, 520 
Procter, Jr., drop table, 79 
fluid extr. anthemis, 688 
jalapae, 685 
lobelia?, 687 
rhei cum sennse, 685 
sumbul, 688 

resins, decoloration, 125 
succus taraxaci paratus, 

686 
syrup, hypophosphites, 
comp., 243 



Procter, Jr., syrup, hypophos- 
phites — 
of calcium, 209 
iodide iron and man- 
ganese, 258 
iodide manganese, 

257 
phosphates, undis- 
solved, 240 
pipsissewa, 709 
uvae ursi, 709 
wine of tar, 627 
Proctor, on coating pills, 917 
Proof spirits, 366, 367 
Prophetin, 523 
Propheretin, 523 
Propyl, 397, 452 
Propylamina, 397,477, 516 
chloride, 516 
cordial, 633 
iodide, 418 
muriate, 516 
Protection from light (of 

sick), 933 
Protein, 349 

compounds, 349, 350 
Prunin (eclect.), 7^6 
Prussian blue, 248, 251 
Pseudomorphia, 485 

sugars, 339 
Psoralein, 488 
Ptelein (eclect.), 756 
Puccina, 475, 487 
Pulpge, 726 
Pulveres, 552, 798 

effervescentes, 552 

aperientes, 552, 819 
Pulvis, Algarothi, 288 

aloes et canellae, 552, 818 
antimonialis, 285, 291 
aromaticus, 552, 810 
ipecacuanhae, comp., 552, 
822 
et opii, 552, 822 
Jacobi, 291 

jalaps, comp., 558, 819 
morphise attenuatus, 815 
rhei, comp., 552, 819 
Punicin, 522 
Purpurin, 463 
Purree, 466 
Putchapat, 770 
Putrefaction, 535 
Pyin, 352 
Pyrene, 406 
Pyridina, 477 
Pyroxylin, 322 
Pyroxylon, 322 
Pyrrhol, 452 
Pyrrolina, 477 

QUANTITIES, apportion, 
ed, 787 
Quassin, 521, 529 
Quercetin, 463 
Quercin, 526 
Quercite, 339 
Quercitrin, 339, 466 
Quevenne's iron, 229 • 
Quince seed, 337 
Quinia, 475, 490 



INDEX, 



969 



Quinia — 

amorphous, 498 

artificial, 497 

tests, 492 
Quiniae acetas, 493 

antimonias, 493 

arsenias, 493 

eitras, 493 

disulphas, 492 

gallas, 494 

ferri et magnesii sulphas, 
493 

hydriodas, 493 

hydrobromas, 493 

hydroferrocyanas, 494 

hypophosphis, 492 

iodosulphas, 491, 493 

kinas, 494 

lactas, 493 

murias, 492 

sulphas, 492, 499 

administration, 639 
adulterat., 499, 501 
neutral, 492 

sulpho-carbolas, 494 

tannas, 494 

tartras, 493 

uras, 494 

valerianas, 492 
Quinicia, 476, 496 
Quinidia, 475, 494 

hydriodate, 495 

sulphate, 495 
Quinine, green, 492 
Quinoidia, 498, 666 
Quinolin, 452, 477 



RABBIT fat, 398 
Rademacher's tinct. ferri 
acet , 226 
Radiated heat, 649 
Raisins, 348 
Rand's collodion, 325 
Ranges, 61 
Ranunculacese, alkaloid?, 474 

neutral principle, 520 

essent. oils, 409 
Rat-tail file, 113 
Rats, prevent injury from, 18 
Rattlesnake, Bibron's anti- 
dote, 140 
Rea mur's thermometer, 103 
Receiver, quilled, 111 

tubulated, 110 
r Red, cinchona, 456 

kinovic, 456 

oil, 8S4 

precipitate, 304 
Reduction, 122 

tube, 121, 123 
Refrigerants, m xture, 843 

powder, 843 
Regianin, 527 
Regulus antimonii, 284 
Reperc Nation, 591 
Resedaceae, essent. oils, 409 
Resina, 424 

jalapae, 423, 427, 428, 745 

poolophylli, 745 

gcammonii, 745, 746, 747 
English, 746 



Resinoids, 742 
Resins, 421 

decoloration, 125 

fossil, 424 

proper, 422 
Retort, plain, 110 

stand, 115 

tin, 760 

tubulated, 112 
Rhabarberin, 438 
Rhamneae, neutral principle, 

522 
Rhamnetin. 347, 463, 522 
Rhamnin, 522 
Rhaponticin, 438 
Rhein, 438 

(eclect.), 757 
Rheumatism pills, 815 
Rheumin, 438 
Rhinanthin, 526 
Rhodeoretin,,423, 530 
Rhodoxanthin, 456 
Rhubarb — 

and magnesia, 819 

percolating, 599 

powdering, 542 
Rhusin (eclect.), 756 
Rice, 335 

jelly, 936, 937 
Richards' chalk mixture, 942 
Richardson's comp. syrup of 

phosph., 239 
Roasting ores, 122 

organic substances, 122 
Roberts's syrup, phosph. iron 

et ammon., 238 
Robiquet's citrate of magne- 
sia, 218 
Roccellin, 464 
Rochelle salt, 193 
Rock candy, 341 
Room, change of, 933 
Root, collection, 535 

drying, 537 
Rosacea?, alkaloids, 477 

neutral principle, 522, 
528 

essent. oils, 410, 417 
Rose confection, 727 

essence, 771 

leaf tablets, 740 

lip salve, 877 

water, 572, 574, 765 
Rosin, 424 
Rottlerin, 463 
Rowley's fluid extract, lactu- 

carii, 689 
Rubiaceae, alkaloids, 477 

neutral principle, 523 
Rules of pbarmaceut. store, 

928 
Rum, 364 
Rumicin, 438 
Rumin (eclect.), 757 
Rump's quinia test, 500 
Runge's ink, 170 

sugar test, 346 
Russian isinglass, 357 

lamp, 94 
Rutaceae, alkaloids, 475 

neutral principle, 521 

essent. oils, 410 



Rutyle, 402 

hydruret, 402 



Q ABADILLIA, 476, 511 
IJ Saecharates, 341 
Saccharides, 339 
Saccharine principles, 333 
Saccharometer, 87, 90 
Saccharum, 338, 340, 347 

lactis, 348 

saturni, 273 
Sachet powders, 775 

frangipanni, 775 

heliotrope, 776 

marechale, 775 

millefleur, 776 
Safety tube, 118 
Sagapenum, 425, 427 
Sago, 334 

jelly, 936 
Sal aaratus, 174 

soda, 187 

ammoniac, 195 

diureticus, 179 

Epsomensis, 213 

prunellas, 169 

Rochelle, 193 

soda, 185 
Salep, 337 
Salicaceae, neutral principle, 

527 
Salicin, 347, 402, 527, 532 
Salicyle, 402 

hydruret, 402, 410 
Salicylites, 448 
Saligeuin, 347, 402, 532 
Saline draught, 843 
Saliretin, 347, 532, 533 
Salsaparin, 527 
Salt bath, 184 
Salt mouths, 20, 21 
Saltpetre, 169 
Salt, Cheltenham, 1S4 

common, lb4 

Epsom, 213 

Glauber's, 184 

Rochelle, 193 

smelling, 197 

of tartar, 175, 177 
Salve, Becker's eye, 879 

Deshler's, 872 
Sandarac, 424 
Sand-bath, 104, 650 
Sanguinarin (eclect.), 758 
Sanguinarina, 441, 475, 486 

(eclect.), 757 
Santalaceaa, essent. oils, 415 
Santalin, 463 
Santonates, 440 
Santonin, 437, 439 
Sap green, 463 
Sapindaceae, alkaloids, 475 
Sapo, 389 

mollis. 389 

niger,'389 

viridis, 389 

vulgaris, 389 
Sapogenin, 520 
Saponin, 520, 522 
Sapotacese, neutral principle, 
521 



970 



INDEX. 



Saratoga water, artificial, 153 
Sarkina, 353 
Sarkosina, 518 
Sarsaparilla era, 702 
Sars iparillin, 527 
Sassafras camphor, 420 

medulla, 337 

pith, 337 
Saturation, chemical, 555 

pharmaceutical, 555 
Sauterne wine, 364 
Scales, 39 

army, 41 

Beranger's pendulum, 42 

prescription, 39 

tea, 42 
Scammonin, 525, 531 
Scammony, 425, 427, 428 
Seheffer, lime, hypophosphite, 
209 

syrup, phosphate comp., 
239 

pepsin, 360 
Scheibler's alkaloid test, 472 
Schiedam schnapps, 364, 766 
Schiff's spec. grav. method, 

86 
Schmidt's sugar test, 346 
Schoenbein's ozone test, 131 
Schultz.-'s alkaloid test, 472 
Schwartzenberg's alkaloid 

test, 471 
Schweitzer's solvent for lig- 

nin, 320 
Scillitin, 527 
Scillitine, 527 
Scoparin, 464, 522 
Scorcliin, 526 
Scott's pills, 943 
Screen for gas lamp, 98 
Scrophularin, 525 
Scrophularineae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 525 
Scruple, 71 
Scrupulus, 784 
Scudamore's gout mixture, 

848 
Scutellarin (eclect.), 757 
Scutellarine (eclect.), 757 
Scyllite, 339 
Sea water, artificial, 858 
Secalina, 477, 516 
Secrets, medicated, 742 
Sedatives, arterial, mixtures, 
840 
powders, 816 

nervous, mixtures, 840 
Seedlac, 423 
Seidlitz mixture, 193 

powders, 552, 819 
Selde Vichy, 167, 172 
Selection of medicines, 794 
Semis, 784 

Senecin (eclect.), 758 
Senecionine (eclect.), 758 
Senegin, 440 
Senna, percolating, 599 
Sepeerina, 476, 510 
Serum, blood, 350 

lactis, 352 

vinosum, 937 
Serpentariin, 526 



Sesami folium, 337 
Sevum, 390 
Shakers' herbs, 539 
Shelf-brackets, 26 
Shell of egg, 353 
Shellac, 423 
Shelving, 25, 26 
Sherry wine, 364 
Shinn, collodions, 328 

elixir cinchonae ferratum, 
631 

infos, gentian, comp. 
cone, 584, note. 

mistura assafoetidae cone, 
839 

pills of chloride of iron, 
813 
Show-colors, freezing pre- 
vented, 28 
Shop, management, 927 
Show-jars, 28 , 
Sick room, management, 931 
Sieves, 49, 550 
Sifter, Blood's flour, 551 
Sifting, 550 

machine, Harris's, 551 
Signatura, 793 
Signs in prescription, 784 
Silver, 277 

salts. See Argentum. 
Silvering pills, 915 
Simarubaoeae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 521 
Simmering, 580 
Sinapina, 528 
Sinapism, 899 
Sink, 37 
Sinkalina, 528 
Siphon, 563: 

bottle, 151 

Bullock's carboy, 62 
Sitting up, 933 

Skeletonizing leaves, 189, 321 
Skim milk, 354 
Skuleine, 527 
Slipper, 56 

Slippery elm bark jelly, 937 
Small beer, 364 
Smelling salts, 197 
Smilaceas, neutral principl., 

527 
Smilacin, 527 

(eclect.), 758 
Smith's steam displacer, 600 
Soap, 384, 388 

antidote to acids, 148 

black, 389 

Castile, 389 

common, 389 

fat, 389 

glass, 389 

green, 389 

palm, 389 

potassa, 3S8 

resin, 389 

soda, 388 

soft, 389 

"Windsor, 3S9 
Soda, 184, 186 

tested volum., 926 

caustic, 186 

chlorinata, 184, 188 



Soda — 

lozenges, 735 
mint, 845 
powders, 552, 845 
salaeratus, 187 
tartarata, tested volum., 

926 
washing, 185 
water, 149 

cooler, 151 
counter, 30 
syrup, 719 
Sodii acetas, 184, 196 

et antimon. sulphuret., 

285, 287 
antimonio-sulphuret. , 

285, 287 
arsenias, 292, 294 

tested volum., 926 
et auri chlorid., 308, 309 
benzoas, 184, 192 
biboras, 169, 17i, 172 
bicarbonas, 184, 186, 187 
saturating power, 

168 
tested volum., 926 
boras, 169, 171, 172 
bromidum, 142 
carbonas, 184, 185 

tested volum., 926 
calcinat., 185 
exsiccata, 184, 185 
saturating power, 
168 
chloras, 174, 182 
chloridum, 184 
cholas, 461 
choleinas, 358 
citras, 184, 190 
citro-tartras effervescens, 

191 
hypophosphis, 184, 188 
hyposulphis, 184, 189- 
iodidum, 134, 137 
nitras, 169 
phosphas, 184, 187 
phospho-tungstas, 472 
et platini chlorid., 311 
pyrophosph., 241 
subboras, 171, 172 
sulphas, 184 
sulphovinas, 184, 191 
supercarbonas, 186 
tartras, tested volum., 

926 
tartro-citras effervesc, 

191 
tungstas, 169, 172 
valerianas, 184, 191 
Solanaceae, alkaloids, 476, 
477, 506 
neutral principl., 525 
Solania, 347, 476, 506 

test, 513 
Solanidia, 506 
Solanieda, 506 
Solution, 

acid, boracic. (test), 313 
oxalic (volum), 318 
tartaric, (test), 315 
albumen (test), 312 
alkaline, Physic's, 586 



INDEX, 



971 



Solution — 

alumina, benzoated, 222 
ammonia, 194, 196 

in alcohol, 194, 196 
in water, 194, 196 
strong, 196 
acetate, 198 
carbon, (test), 313 
chloride (test), 313 
hydrochloride (test), 

313 
oxalate (test), 314 
sulphide (test), 315 
valerianate, Pierlot's, 
633 
arsenical., Biette's, 292, 
294 
Fowler's, 293 
Pearson's, 294 
bismuth, and amnion, ci- 
trate, 2S3 
bromine, 140 

(test), 313 
calc. chloric!., 205 

saturated (test), 313 
calcii chlorid., 205 

tested volum., 926 
saturat. (test), 313 
chinoidina, acetate, 836 
chlorine, 133 

tested v lum., 926 
copper acetate (test), 311 
amnion, nitrat.(test), 
312 
ethereal, of prepared cot 

ton, 322 
Donovan's, 295 
Fowler's, 293 
gelatin (test), 314 
gold chloride (test), 313 
gutta-percha, 377 
Hade's, 294 
indigo-sulphate (test), 

315 
iodine (volum.), 317 
iron chloride, 250 
nitrate, 247 
perchlorate, 248 
subsulphate, 231 
sulphate (test), 315 
tersulphnte, 230 
Labarraque's, 188 
lead, diacetate, 274 
Ledoyen's, 276 
lime, 204 

tested volum., 926 
saccharated, 21 1 

tested volum., 
925 
sulphate (test), 311 
Lugol's, 139 
Magendie's, 642 
magnesium and ammon. 

sulphat. (teat), 312 
magnesium citrate, 216, 

217 
mercury, nitrate, 305 
Monsel's, 231 
morphia, sulphate, 558, 
640, 642, 840 
Magendie's, 642 
Pierlot's, 633 



Solution — 

platinum perchloride 

(test), 314 
potassa, 177 
potassium, acetate, 180 
(test), 312 
exteinporan., 
847 
bichromate (volum.), 

316 
ferridcyanide (test), 

315 
ferrocyanide (test), 

315 
iodate (test), 314 
iodide (test), 314 
red prussiate (test), 

315 
yellow prussiate 
(test), 315 
Pravaze's, 249 
quiniaa et ferri, 837 
silver, ammonio-nitrate 
(test), 312 
nitrate (volum.), 317 
soda (volum.), 318 
sodium acetate (test), 312 
chlorate, tested volu- 
metric, 926 
hyposulphite (volu- 
metric), 316 
phosphate (test), 314 
tartro-citrate, 190 
tin, chloride (test), 313 
zinc, chloride, 267 
Solutions, 553 

in alcohol, 559 
chemical, 554 
classification, 557 
complex, 554 
in ether, 560 
simple, 554 
test, 311 

volumetric, 175, 316 
in water, 558 
in wine, 559 
Solvent, 553 
Sonnenschein's alkaloid test 

471 
Sorbin, 339 
Sorbite, 339 
Soup, vegetable, 937 
Spaniolitmin, 404 
S|iargancin, 527 
Spargine, 527 
Sparteina, 476, 513 
Spatula, bone, 50 
glass, 50 
ivory, 50 
porcelain, 121 
steel, 49 
Specia jar, 23 
Species, 541 

anthelmintic, 542 
St. Germain, 541 
Specific gravity, 80 

and Baume, 88, 91 
bottle, extemporun., 
84 
Pile's, 82 
of minute quantities 
ot liquids, 84 



Specific gravity — 

Schiff's method, 86 
and temperature, 85 
of water at different 
temperatures, 86 
Spermaceti, 390 
cerate, 871 
mixture, 849 
Spice plaster, 899 
Spitta's lozenges, 734, 736 
Spirit (Spiritus), 765 
aethereus, 372 
setheris acetic, 366 
chlorid., 366 
compositus, 366, 370 

(drops), 79 
nitrici, 366, 372, 373 
nitrosi, 366, 372, 373 
(drops), 79 
and gum Arabic 
in mixtures, 
920 
ammonia, 194, 196, 559 
198, 



aromat., 194, 
559 
anise, 766, 767 
of ants, 374, 435 
camphor, 766, 767 
chloroform, 374, 377 
cinnamon, 766 
ether. See Spir. eether. 
ferri chlorat. aether., 248, 

250 
formieae, 374, 435 
frumenti, 3<i6 
of Garus, 634 
hartshorn. 196 
iron chloride, 248, 250 
juniper, 766, 768 

conip., 766, 768 
methylic, 332 
lamp, 908 
lavender, 766, 768, 772 

comp , 766, 767, 768 
lemon, 766, 767 
menthae piperitse, 766, 
767 
viridis, 766, 767 
Minderer's, 198 
mustard, 777 
myristicae, 766, 768 
neutral, 363 

sweet, 363 
nitri dulcis, 366. 372, 373 
(drops), 79 

and gum Arabic in 
mixtures, 920 
nutmeg, 766 
orange, 635 
peppermint, 766, 767 
proof, 366, 367 
pyro-acetic, 331 
pyroxylic, 331 
salis dulcis, 366 

volatilis, 196 
sinapis, 417, 777 
spearmint, 766, 767 
turpentine, 407 
vini gallic, 366 
wood, 374 
Spodumene, 173 
i Sponges, how to keep, 28 



972 



INDEX. 



Spoonfuls, 78 
Spritz, 125 

Squibb 's general apparatus 
stand, 116 
burette stand, 76 
condenser, 114 
grummet, 112 
percolator, 594 
Squills, percolating, 599 
Squire's infusion pot, 577 
St. Germain tea, 541 
St. Yves' lapis ophthalmicus, 

263 
Stains of nitric acid removed, 
229 
nitrate of silver removed, 
279 
Stand, general apparatus, 116 
burette, 76 
retort, 115 
Staphisaina, 474, 479 
Starch, 333, 334 

iodide, soluble, 139 

syrup, 139 
tannate, 587 
Stas' alkaloid test, 473 
Steam bath, 107, 650 
modified, 651 
boiler, pharmaceutical, 

107 
displacer, Smith's, 600 
Stearin, 385 

Stearns' citrate of magnesium, 
217 
glycerole of lactucarium, 
719 
Stearopten, 400 
Stibium, 284 
Stibmethylium, 471 
Still, 367, 587 
copper, 760 
pharmaceut., Procter's, 

762 
tin, 760 
Stillingin (eclect.), 758 
Stimulants, arterial, mixtures, 
838 
pills, 814 
powders, 814 
cerebral, pills, 814 

powders, 814 
excito-motor, powders, 

816 
nervous, mixtures, 838 
pills, 813 
powders, 813 
Stopper, gum elastic, 54 
removed, 92 L 
restored to bottle, 921 
Storax, 426, 427 
Store, dispensing, arrange- 
ment, 17 
rules and regulations, 928 
Stove, gas, 98 
Strainer, 921 

flannel, 560, 723 
jelly, Physic's, 561 
Straining, 560, 562 

syrups, 561, 562, 723 
Strassburg turpentine, 425 
Struthiin, 520 
Strvchnia, 476, 502 



Strychnia — 

acetate, 504 

hydriodate, 504 

iodate, 504 

muriate, 503 

nitrate, 503 

sulphate, 503 

tannate, 504 

test, 513 
Strychnos, alkaloids, 502 
Styptic, botanic, 775 
Styraceae, balsams, 426 
Styracin, 418, 426, 427 
Styrax, 426, 427 

calamity 426, 427 
Styrol, 426, 428 
Styrone, 418 

Sublimate, corrosive, 298 
Sublimation, 120 
Subscription, 788 
Succinum, 424, 426 
Succus liquiritise depurat., 
667 

taraxaci paratus, 686 
Suet, 389 

mutton, 390 
Sugar, 337, 347 

barley, 341 

bulk of, 695 

cane, 338, 340 

coating pills, 918 

of diabetes, 341 

ergot, 338 

fruit, 338, 341 

granules, 824, 918 

grape, 334, 338, 341 

of lead, 273 

and lead compound, 121 

milk, 338, 342, 348 

pellets, 824, 918 

and salt compound, 341 

in urine, 341 

specific gravity, 695 

tests, 343 
Sulphates. See Bases. 
Sulphosinapisin, 528 
Sulphur, 145 

flowers, 145 

golden, 285, 287 

in hair dressings, 146 

iodide, 145, 146 

lotum, 145 

milk, 146 

prEecipitatum, 145, 146 

sublimed, 145 

washed, 145 
Superscription, 786 
Suppositer, 827 
Suppositories, 825, 923 

anthelmintic, 825 

with cacao-butter, 826 

list of, 826, 827 

moulds, 924, 925 

numbered, 827 

with tallow, 826 
Surinamina, 475, 489 
Sweet oil, 389, 391 

adulterations, 391 

spirit, 363 

of nitre, 366,372, 373 
Sydenham's laudanum, 640, 
'642 



Syllabus — 

acids, astringent, 455 

combined with alka- 
loids, 441 
animal, 460 
chromogenic, 463 
fatty, 384 
fruit, 430, 434 
mineral, 148 
from essent. oils, 443 
albuminous principles, 

352 
alcohol, amylic, 379 
butylic, 379 
ethylic, 364, 366 
methylic, 374 
alkaline salts, 169, 174, 

184, 192, 194 
alkaloids, animal, 518 
quaternary, 474 
artific , 476 
ternary, 476 

artific, 477 
aluminium, 220 
amylaceous medicines, 

334 
antimony, 285 
aquas, 572 
arsenic, 292 
astringents, 454 
balsams, 426 
barium, 201 
bismuth, 280 
bromine, 139 
calcium, 203 
camphors, 406 
cerates, 863, 866, 868, 

870 
conserves, 727 
copper, 260 
decoctions, 588 
earths, 201, 203, 212, 220, 

223 
electuaries, 729 
extracts, 652, 655, 657, 

658, 659 
fats, 389 
fluid extracts, 671, 672, 

673 
glucosides, 347 
gold, 308 
gums, 337 
gum resins, 425 
infusions, 582 
iodine, 134 

iron (halogen and sulphur 
compounds), 248 
(oxysalts), 226 
lead, 272 
lignin, 322 
liniments, 881 
lozenges, 731 
magnesia, 212 
manganese, 255 * 

mercury, 297 
mixtures, 829 
mucilaginous medicines, 

337 
neutral principles, ani- 
mal, 528 
vegetable, nitro- 
genized, 528 



INDEX. 



973 



Syllabus- 
neutral principles, vege- 
table— 
qu;i ternary, 

528 
sulphuret- 
ted, 528 
ternary, 520 
oils, essential, 402 

carbo-hydrogen, 

407 
nitrogenated, 

417 
oxygenated, 409 
sulphuretted, 418 
fixed, 389 

volatile, empyreuma- 
tic, 406 
ointments, 863, 866, 868, 

870 
oleoresins, 424, 690 
opium preparations, 640 
plasters, 886 
powders, 552 
protein compounds, 350 

animal, 352 
resins, 422, 745 
saccharine substances, 

347 
saccharoids, 339 
silver, 227 
soap, 389 
solutions, 558 
spiritus, 766 
true sugars, 338 
pseudo sugars, 339 
starches, 334 
sulphur, 145 
suppositories, 826, 827 
syrups, 696, 698, 699, 702 
tinctures (general), 605 
astringent, 609 
ammoniacal, 611 
aromatic, 608 
cathartic, 610 
narcotic, 607 
sedative, 607 
stimulant, 608 
stomachic, 610 
resinous, 610 
tonic, 609 
troches, 731 
waters, 572 
wines, 624 
zinc, 264 
Symbols in prescriptions, 7S4 
Symphytum officinale, 335 
Synanthrose, 338 
Synaptas, 351 
Syntonin, 350 
Syringe displacer, 595 
Syringenin, 524 
Syringin, 524 
Syringopicrin, 524 
Syrup (Syrupus), 690, 09 7, 
703 
acaciae, 696, 697, 704 

(drops), 79 
acidi citrici, 696, 698, 704 
allii, 702, 703, 704 
almond, 696, 697, 704 
amygdalae, 696, 697, 704 



Syrup— 

anthelmintic, 851 
anthemidis, 709 
assafoetidaa, 712 
Aubergier's, 699, 715 
aurantii cortic, 696, 704 

florum, 696, 705 
bittersweet, 711 
blackberry, 722, 723 
aromat., 724 
root, 698, 699, 707 
comp., 710 
calcis, 211 

hypophosph. (Proc- 
ter), 203, 209 
lactophosphat., 716 
phosph. (Durand), 
203, 207 
(Wiegand), 203, 
208 
capsici (soda), 721 
carrageen comp., 710 
chamomile, 709 
cherry, 724 
chimaphilaa, 709 
coffee, 725 
cream, 725 

artificial, 726 
dulcamara, 71 1 
ferri et ammon. phos- 
phat., 226, 238 
bromid., 248, 254 
chlorid., 24S, 250 
citratis (Ber.il), 237 
(proto- and mag- 
netic oxide), 
226, 236 
hyperchloratis, 226, 

248 
hypophosphit. (fer- 
ric), 226, 243 
(ferrous) 226, 

242, 243 
comp. (Procter), 
226, 243 
(Thompson), 
226, 243 
iodidi, 248, 252, 254, 
559, 702, 705 
administration, 

253 
(Hays), 253 
iodo-hydrargyr., 297, 

302 
et manganes. iodid., 

255, 258 
et potass, iodo-hy- 
drargyr., 297, 302 
protocarbonatis, 229 
protocitratis, 226, 

236 
protonitratis, 226, 

247 
pyrophosphatis, 226, 

242 
superphosphatis, 226, 

238 
tannatis, 245 
ferrous nitrate, 247 , 
flavoring, 719 
- frostwort, 711 
fruit, 722, 724 



Syrup— 

gallas aromat., 716 
galls, 7x6 

garlic, 702, 703, 704 
gillenia, 712 
ginger, 696, 698, 708 

(soda), 721 
glycyrrhizae radic, 639 
gum Arabic, 090, 697, 704 

(drop?), 79 
helianthemi, 711 
hive (Coxe : s), 699, 700, 

701 
hypophosphit. comp. , 203, 

210 
ipecacuanhas, 698, 705 
iron. See Syrup, ferri. 
Jackson's pectoral, 714 
krameriae, 702, 705 
lactucarii, 699, 701, 706 

Aubergier's, 699, 715 
lemon, 696, 698, 706 

(soda), 719 
lime, 211 

See Syrup, calcis. 
lactophosphate, 716 
limonis, 696, 698, 706 
liquidambar, 711 
liquorice root, 639 
magnesii acetat. , 219 
mangan. hypophosph., 
255, 257 
iodid. (Creuse), 255, 
257 
(Procter), 255, 
257 
phosphat., 255, 257 
manna), 715 
morphia? sulphat., 713 
nectar, 726 

orange-peel, 696, 697, 704 
(soda), 720 
flower, 696, 697, 705 
orgeat, 696, 697, 704 

(soda), 722 
papaveris, 713 
pectoral, Jackson's, 714 
phosphates, comp. (Par- 
rish), 238 
(Richardson), 

239 
(Scheffer), 239 
undissolved, 240 
pineapple, 725 
pipsissewa, 709 
poppy, 713 

pruni virginianas, 702,706 
raspberry, 722, 723 

artificial, 724 
rhatany, 702, 705 
rhei, 698, 699, 706 

aromat., 699, 700, 
701, 706 
rhubarb, simple, 698, 
699, 706 
spiced, 699,700,701, 
706 
rosae gallicae, 696, 698, 

700, 707 
rubi, 698, 699, 707 

comp., 710 
sacchari, 696, 697 



974 



INDEX. 



Syrup— 

sarsaparillae, 721 
(soda), 

(Williams's), 712 
coinp.,699, 700, 701, 
707 
scillae, 702, 703, 707 
(drops), 79 
comp.,699, 700, 701, 
708 
senega, 699, 700, 701, 708 
simple, 696, 697, 703 

(soda), 720 
squills. See Syr. scillae. 
starch, iodide, 139 
strawberry, 722, 723 
sweet gum bark, 711 
tolutanus, 696, 698, 708 
uvae ursi, 709 
vanilla?, 725 
wild-cherry bark, 702, 706 

(soda), 725 
zingiberis, 696, 698, 708 
Syrups, 694 

antiseptics, 630, 696 
bottle, 22 

cooler, Parrish's, 152 
dumb-waiter, 38 
faucet, Williams's, 153 
fermentation prevented, 

630, 696 
fruit, 722 

Prussian Ph., 724 
holder, 151 
how to keep, 38, 59 
mineral and soda water, 

719 
straining, 561, 562, 723 
strength, 695 
unofficinal, 709 



TABLE, alcohol, expansion, 
368 _ 
approximate measure- 
ment, 78 
avoirdupois weights, 71 
U. S. coins, 72 
decimal weights, 73 
drops, 79 

liquids, spec, gravity, 91 
pharmacopoeias, 63 
saturation, Attfield's, 168 
saturating power of 
potass, bicarbon., 176 
troy weights, 71 
weights of European 

States, 74 
water, spec, grav., 86 
wine, p. c. of alcohol, 364 
Tablets, chlorate of potas- 
sium, 740 
rose leaf, 740 
wild- cherry, 740 
Tampicin, 525 
Tanacetin, 523 
Tannates. See Bases. 
Tannin, 455, 457 
Tapioca, 334 

preparations, 936 
Taraxacum juice, preserved, 
686 



Taraxacum- 
mixture, 847 
Taraxacin, 523 
Tar beer, 627 
Tartar, crude, 192 

emetic, 285, 290 

powdering, 557 

soluble, 193 

vitriolated, 171 
Tartarus boraxatus, 194 
Tartras boracico-potassicus, 

194 
Tartromels, 717 
Taurina, 462, 518 
Tayuyina, 490 
Tea, beef, 936 

cupful, 78 

scales, 42 

spoonful, 78 

tonic, Gerhard's, 541 

worm, 542, 943 
Temperature, 92 

and spec, gravity, 85 
Teneriffa, 364 
Terebenes, 406 
Terebinthacese, gum resins, 
425 

neutral principle, 521 

essent. oils, 407 

oleoresins, 424 

resins, 422 
Terebinthina, 424 

■argentoratensis, 425 

canadensis, 424 

gallica, 424 

veneta, 424 
Terms, Latin, 788, 789 
Terpin, 400, 405, 406 
Testa, 203, 352, 353 

pra?parata, 203 
Testing apparatus, 925 

volumetric, 925 
Tests, acid carbolic, 451 

hydrocyan. (volum.), 

446 
meconic, 441, 474 
muriatic, 155 
nitric, 156 
sulphuric, 159 

albumen, 351 

alcohol (origin), 364 

alkaloids, 471, 513 

chemico-legal, 472, 
473 

alumina, 221 

ammon. ehlorid. , 195 

antimony, 284 

arsenic, 292 

atropia, 513 

bals.^Peru, 428 

baryta, 201 

biliary coloring matter, 
•467 

bismuth, 280 

blood, 467 

Boettger's, 345 

borax, 172 

brucia, 504, 513 

cadmium, 269 

chloroform, 376 

cinchonia, 495 

cobalt, 271 



Tests— 

copaiva, 428 

copal, 428 

copper, 260 

cotton from linen, silk, 

woollen, 321, 322 
creasote, 451 
delphia, 513 
emetia, 513 

Erdmann andUslar's, 474 
extract cannabis, 423,656 

conii, 654 

meat, 356 
Fehling's, 344 
fusel oil, 368 
gold, 308 
guaiac, 428 
Heller's, 344 
Horsley's, 344 
iron (proto- and sesqui- 

salts), 225 
jalap resin, 428 
Kerner's, 500 
Knapp's, 344 
lead, 272 
Lehinann's, 344 
Liebig's, 500 
lime, 203 

chlorinated, 206 

phosphate, 207 

water, 204' 
linen from cotton and 

woollen, 321, 322 
Loewenthal's, 345 
magnesia, 212 

sulphate, 213 
manganese, 254 
mastich, 428 
Maumene's, 346 
Mayer's, 472 
mercury, 296 
morphia, 483, 513 
Mohr's, 343 
Mulder's, 345 
oil almonds, 389, 392 

cod liver, 397 

essential, 402 

fish, 383 

olive, 391 
opium, 441, 474, 486 
ozone, 131 
Peligot's, 346 
Pettenkofer's, 346 
phosphorus, 144 
platinum, 311 
potass, bicarbon., 176 

bichromate, 170 

bitartrate, 193 

sulphate, 171 

tartrate, 193 
protein compounds, 349 
qualitative, 311 
quantitative, 316 
quinia, 492, 500 
Rochelle salt, 193 
Rump's, 500 
Runge's, 346 
saltpetre, 169 
scammony, 428 
Scheibler's, 472 
Schmidt's, 346 
Schultze's, 472 



INDEX. 



975 



Tests— 

Schwartzenberg's, 471 
silk from cotton, 322 
silver, 277 
solania, 513 
Sonnenschein's, 471 
Stas', 473 
Strychnia, 503, 513 
sugar, diabetic, 343 
Tromnier's, 344 
Uslar & Erduiann's, 474 
veratria, 513 
Vogel's, 345 
water, medicated, 573 
wool from cotton and lin- 
en, 322 
Zimmer's, 500 
zinc, 264 
Tetter ointment, Morton's, 
879 
Physic's, 879 
Thapsia resin, 326 
Thebaia, 475, 485 
Theina, 475, 488 
Theobromia, 475, 488 
Theriaca, 347 
Thermometer, 103 
chemical, 103 
Thomas' eyewater, 855 

nipple wash, 854 
Thomson's syrup of hypophos- 

phites, 242, 243 
Thujetin, 347, 463 
Thujin. 347 
Thymeleas, neutral principle, 

526 
Thyroen, 414 
Thymene, 402 
Thymol, 402, 414 
Thymyle, 402 

hydruret, 402 
oxide, 402 
Tie-overs, 29 
Tilden's extract of liquorice, 

667 
Tiliaceas, essent. oils, 409 
Tilia europasa, 329 
Tinctura (Tincture) 
aconiti folii, 621 

rad., 605, 607, 

611, 621 
(drops), 79 
Fleruming's, 621 
aloes, 606, 610, 612 

et myrrhas, 605, 610, 
612 
arnicas, 605, 608, 612 
assafoetidas, 605, 610, 612 
(drops), 79 

extempor., 612, note 
aurantii, 606,612 
belladonnas, 606, 607, 612 
benzoated (cologne), 770 
benzoini, 605, 610, 613 

comp., 605, 610, 613 
calumbas, 606, 609, 613 
cannabis, 605, 607, 608, 
note, 613 
ethereal, 623 
cantharidis, 606, 608, 613 

elhereal, 623 
capsici, 606, 608, 613 



Tinctura — 

cardamomi, 606, 608, 613 
comp., 606,608, 609, 
614 
castorei, 605, 610, 614 
catechu, 606, 609, 614 
cholera, Asiatic, 623 
cicutas, 607 

cinchonas, 605, 609, 614 
comp., 605, 606, 614 
ferrata, 621, 837 
cinnamomi, 606, 608, 615 
cochineal, comp., 635 
colchici, 606, 607, 615 

ethereal, 623 
conii, 606,607, 615 
cubebas, 606, 608, 615 

ethereal, 623 
digitalis, 606, 607, 615 

(drops), 80 
ferri acetatis, Rade- 
macher, 226, 245 
amara, Physick's, 

620 
chloridi, 248, 251, 
559, 606 
(drops), 80 
gallas, 606, 609, 615 
gentianas ferrata, 633 

comp., 606, 609, 616 
guaiaci, 605,610, 611,616 
(drops), 80 
ammoniata, 606, 611, 
comp.. 783 
Dewees', 622 
ethereal, 623 
hellebori. 606, 610, 616 
humuli, 606, 609, 616 
hyoscyami, 606, 609, 616 
iodi, 138 

iodinii, 134,138, 559,605, 
617 
(drops), 80 
comp., 134, 138, 559, 
605, 617 
iron. See Tinct. ferri. 
jalapas, 606, 610, 617 
kino, 606, 609, 617 
krauierise, 606. 609, 617 
lobelias, 606, 607, 617 
lupulinas, 605, 610, 618 
matico, 622 
moschi, 622 
musk, 773 

myrrhas, 605, 610, 611, 
618 
extempor., 618, note 
nervina, Bestuoheff's, 

250 
nucis vomicas, 605, 609, 

618 
olei limonis, 766, 767 

menth. pip., 766, 767 
opii, 606, 640, 646 
(drops), 80 
incompatibles, 

643 
modified, 646 
acetata, 606, 640, 

641, 647 
camphorata, 606, 640, 
641 ^ 



Tinctura opii, camphorata — 
(drops), 80 
deodorata, 606, 640, 
646 
quassias, 606, 608, 609 
quininae, 621 
rhei, 610, 618 

aromatica, 622 
dulcis, 622 
et sennas, 606, 610, 
618 
sanguinarias, 606, . 607, 

619 
scillas, 606, 607, 619 
serpentarias, 606,608,619 
stramonii, 606, 607, 619 
strychnia?, 621 
sumbuli, 637 
tolutana, 605, 610, 611, 
619 
(drops), 80 
Valeriana?, 606, 608, 619 

ammoniata, 606, 611 
veratri viridis, 605, 607, 

620 
zincriberis, 605, 610, 611, 
620 
Tinctures, 603 
(bottles), 21 
astringent, 609 
ammoniated, 611 
aromatic, 608 
cathartic, 610 
ethereal, 622 
narcotic, 607 
resinous, 610 
sedative, 607 
stimulant, 608 
stomachic, 611 
tonic, 609 
unofficial, 620 
volatile, 611 
Toast water, 935 
Tobacco, camphor, 420 

knife, 547 
Tolu, 426, 427 
Toilet vinegars, 772 
See Vinegar, 
waters, 770 
See Water. 
Toluidina, 478 
Toluol, 450 
Tolyle, cinnamate of oxide, 

428 
Tonic, bitter, for dyspeptics, 
837 
cholagogue, 837 
Tonics, mixtures, 836 
pills, 808 
powders, 808 
Tooth paste, charcoal, 774 
powders, 774 

charcoal, 774 
cuttlefish, 774 
Hudson's, 774 
Marshall's, 774 
Mialhe's, 774 
preparations, 774 
Topical applications, basis, 

898 
Torrefaction, 122 
Tous-les-mois, 334 



976 



INDEX. 



Tragacantha, 337 

Treacle, 340, 347 

Trehala, 338 

Trehalose, 338 

Trianospermia, 475, 490 

Trichloranilina, 471 

Trilliin (eclect.), 759 

Trilline, 759 

Trimethylamina, 516 

Trinitrocellulin, 322 

Triphane, 173 

Triphylene, 173 

Tripod, 52 

Tristearine, 386 

Trituration, 546 

Trochisci, 731, 824 
See Lozenges, 
acidi tannici, 733, 734 
cretae, 733, 735 
cubebaa, 733, 734, 736 
ferri subcarbon., 733, 735 
glycyrrhizae et opii, 733, 
734, 736 
improved, 737 
ipecacuanha?, 733, 734, 

735 
magnesiae, 733, 735 
inenthae pip,, 733, 734, 

736 
morph. et ipecac, 733, 

734, 737 
potassii chlorat., 733 
santonini, 733, 734 
sodii bicarbon., 733, 735 
zingiberis, 733, 734, 736 

Trommer's sugar test, 344 

Tropia, 476, 587 

Trousseau, syrup of lime, 211 

Troy weight, 70, 71, 72 

Tube, glass, how to break, 148 
gum-elastic, how render- 
ed flexible, 117 
safety, 118 
for suppositories, 827 

Tungsten, 172 

Turlington's balsam, 94 

Turpentine, 424 
Bordeaux, 424 
Cyprian, 424 
French, 424 
Strasburg, 425 
Venice, 424, 426, 427 
white, 427 

Turpeth mineral, 299 

Tutia, 264 

Tutty, 264 

Twiggs's hair dye, 778 

Tyrosina, 349, 356, 518 

Tyson's antimonial powder, 
289, 291 



TTMBELLIFEJLE, alkaloids, 
U 475, 476 

gum-resins, 425 

neutral principle, 523 

essent. oils, 411 
Uncia, 784 

Unguenta. See Ointments. 
Unguentum, 863, 865, 872 

adipis, 863, 865, 872 

allii, 878 



Unguentum — 
aconiti, 869 
aconitiaa, 878 
acidi carbolici, 868, 872 

tannici, 868, 873 
altheae, 880 
antimonii, 868, 873 
aquaa rosae, 863, 865, 873 
belladonnas, 869, 873 
benzoini, 863, 865, 873 
cadmii iodidi, 270 
creasoti, 333, 869, 873 
cretas, 879 
elemi, 877 
ferri chloridi, 880 
gall», 868, 873 
hydrargyri, 868, 874 
ammon., 868, 874 
iodid. rubr., 868 
nitratis, 870, 874 
oxid. flav., 868, 874 
rubr., 869, 874 
iodinii, 869, 875 

comp., 869, 875 
mezerei, 875 
picis liquidae, 866, 875 

cum sulphure, 880 
plumbi carbon., 869, 875 

iodidi, 869, 875 
potassii iodidi, 869, 875 
simplex, 863, 865, 872 
stramonii, 869, 876 
sulphuris, 869, 876 

iodidi, 876 
tabaci, 869, 876 
comp., 878 
veratriae, 868, 876 
zinci oxidi,.868, 876 
United Brethren, 539 
United States coins, 72 
I fineness, 308 

dispensatory, 65 
pharmacopoeia, 64 
Universal lamp, 94 
Urea, 518 

nitrate, 518 
Urerythrin, 466 
Urine, test for albumen, 351 

test for sugar, 343, 346 
Urinometer, 87, 89 
Urocyanin, 465 
Uroh*matin, 466 
Ursin, 530 
Urson, 524 

Urticeae, neutral principle, 526 
essent. oils, 416 
resins, 423 
Uslar and Erdmann's alka- 
loid test, 474 



T7ACCINIIN, 524 
V Vacuum pan, 651 
Valerianeae, essent. oils, 412 
Valerianates. See Bases. 
Valerol, 412, 444 
Vallefs mass, 226, 228, 805 
Vance's gout pills, 815 
Vanilla, powdering, 547 
Vanillin, 527, 533 
Vapor acidi hydrocyanici, 859 
chlori, 134, 860 



Vapor — 

conias, 860 
creasoti, 860 
iodi, 135, 860 
Vapors, 859 

Varnish for paper labels, 325 
Vaults, 57, 59 

ice, 59 
Vegetable caustic, 177, 178 

soup, 937 
Venice turpentine, 424, 426, 

427 
Ventilation in sick-room, 931 
Veratrates, 442 
Veratria, 476, 511 

test, 513 
Verbena water, 772 
Verbenaceae, alkaloids, 476 

essent. oils, 413 
Verdigris, 260, 263 

distilled, 260, 263 
Vermilion, 304 
Vials, 52 

collodion, 326 
colored, 54 
for external use, 54 
flint, 53 

German, 53, 906 
fluted, 53 
green glass, 53 
prescription, 906 
Viburnin (eclect.), 759 
Vichy, sel de, 169, 172 

water, artificial, 172 
Vina medicata, 624 
Vinaigre de cologne, 773 
Vinegar, 331, 629 

tested volum., 727 
aromatic, 772 
bloodroot, 630 
colchicum (drops), 80 
distilled, 629 

(drops), 80 
hygienic, 773 
lobelia, 630, 631 
opium, 630, 640, 642, 647 
preventive, 773 
raspberry, 724 
squills, 630 

(drops), 80 
Vinegars, 629 
toilet, 772 
Vinum (Wine) 
album, 624 
aloes, 624, 625 
antimonii, 285, 291, 559, 
624, 625 
(drops), 80 
aromatic, 626 
assafoetida, 839 
colchici rad., 624, 625, 
626 
semin., 624, 625, 626 
(drops), 80 
ergotae, 624, 625, 626, 627 
ferri, 559, 628 

modified, 236 
amarum, 628, 638 
et quiniae citrat., 628 
ipecacuanhae, 624, 625, 

626 
iron. See Vin. ferri. 



INDEX. 



977 



Vinum — 

Madeira., 624 

mulled, 935 

opii, 640, 642, 647 
(drops), 80 

pepsini, 628 

picis, 627 

Port, 624 

pruni virgin., 627 

rhei, 624, 626 

rhubarb, 624, 626 

Sherry, 624 

tabaci, 624, 626 

tar, 627 

Teneriffa, 624 
(drops), 80 

whey, 937 

wild cherry, 627 

xericum, 624 
Violacese, alkaloids, 475 

essent. oils, 409 
Violia, 475, 487 
Viscin,421 
Viscous fermentation, 363, 

535 
Vitellin, 351 
Vitellus ovi, 352, 353 
Vitriol, blue, 260 

green, 227 

white, 264 
Vitriolated tartar, 171 
Vogel's sugar test, 345 
Volumetric analysis, 316 

solutions, 175, 316 



WARD'S paste, 729 
Warming plaster, 890 
"Warner's cordial, 610 

ferrated fluid extr. wild 

cheny, 687 

oil filter, 561 

Wash, black, 854 

nipple, Thomas's, 854 
yellow, 854 
Washing box, Hull's automa- 
tic, 126 
of chemical, 125 
cup and glass in sick- 
room, 932 
soda, 185 
Water, basic, 121 
bath, 105, 650 

high-pressure, 106 
constitutional, 121 
crystallization, 121 
hydration, 121 
saturating with gases, 124 
acid, carbolic, 559, 572, 
573 
carbonic, 149 
anise, 572, 573, 765 
barley, 589 

bitter almond, 572, 573 
camphor, 572, 574 
Carrara, Maugham's, 210 
cherry-laurel, 572, 575 

artificial, 576 
chlorine, 133. 559, 572 
cinnamon, 572, 573, 575, 

765 
cologne, 769, 770 

62 



Water— 

crensot.e, 333, 572, 574, 
841 

distilled, 764 

elderflower, 572, 575 

fennel, 572, 573, 765 

Florida, 772 

frangipanni, 771 

heliotrope, 771 

Kissingen, artific, 153 

lavender, 771, 772 

lead, 274 

strong, 274 

lime, 203, 204, 558 
tested volum., 926 

lindenflower, 576 

millefleur, 771 

orange-blossom, 770 

orange-flower, 572, 575, 
765 

ozonized, 131 

patchouly, 770 

peach, 575 

peppermint, 572, 573, 765 

putcha pat, 770 

rose, 572, 574, 765 
(toilet), 771 
geranium, 770 

Saratoga, artificial, 153 

soda, 149 

spearmint, 572, 573, 765 

toast, 935 

verbena, 772 

Vichy, artificial, 172 

wild-cherry leaves, 576 
Waters, distilled, 572 

origin of still smell, 
398 

medicated, 571, 764 
test, 573 

mineral, artificial, 153 

toilet, 770 
Waters's lace filter, 569 
Wax, Chinese, 390 

Japan, 390 

white, 390 

yellow, 390 
Weaver's wines of iron, 628 
Weights, 43, 67, 72 

aluminium, 43 

apothecaries', 71 

Avery's, 43 

avoirdupois, 70, 71 

cup, 72 

decimal, 70, 73 

European States, 74 

German, inaccuracy, 43 

pile, 73 

troy, 70, 71, 72 
Welter's bitters, 453 
WetherilTs extract, 665 
Whey, 352, 354 

wine, 937 
Whiskey, 364, 366 
Whitehead's essence of mus- 
tard, 942 
White precipitate, 306 

vitriol, 264 
Wiegand's retort clasp, 650 

syrup, phosphat. calc., 
208 
Wiggers's ergotin, 667 



Wild-cherry bark, collection, 

538 
Wilson's breast plaster, 891 

herbs, 539 

pill machine, 51 
Window brackets, 28 
Wine. See Vinum. 

bouquet, 382 

glassful, 78 

measure, 75 

table of p. c. of alcohol, 
364 
Wines, 624 

unofficinal, 626 
Wistars lozenges, 734, 736,737 
Wolfram, 172 

Wood, products of distilla.- 
tion, 329 

naphtha, 331 

spirit, 374 
Worm, condensing, 760 

tea, 542, 943 
Writing fluid, cheap, 170 
Wurtz's pill machine, 51 



y ANTHEIN, 466 

.A. Xanthophyll, 465 
Xanthopicrin, 521 
Xanthorhamnin, 347 
Xanthoxylin, 521 
Xyloidin, 322 
Xylostein, 524 



yEAST, 363 
X powders, 846 

Yellow wash, 854 
Yolk of egg, 352, 353 



ZIMMER'S quinia test, 500 
Zinc, 263 

acetate, 264, 266 
butter, 267 
carbonate, impure, 
native, 264 
precipitat., 2-64, 
265 
chloride, 264, 267 

bath, 119 
cyanide, 264, 268 
ferrocyanide, 264, 

26S 
flowers, 265 
iodide, 264, 268 
lactate, 264, 268 
oxide, 264, 265 
impure, 264 
phosphide, 264, 269 
sulphate, 264 
sulphocarbolate, 856, 

note. 
tree, 266 

valerianate, 264. 269 
Zingiberaceae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 527 
essent. oils, 416 
Zvgophylleae, neutral prin- 
ciple, 521 
resins, 422 
Zymome, 351 



HENEY C. LE^'S 

(LATE lea k blanchabd's) 

CLASSIFIED 0-A.T^I_.0<3 TTIE 

OF 

MEDICAL AND SURGICAL PUBLICATIONS. 



In asking the attention of the profession to the works contained in the following 
pages, the publisher would state that no pains are spared to secure a continuance of 
the confidence earned for the publications of the house by their careful selection and 
accuracy and finish of execution. 

The printed prices are those at which books can generally be supplied by booksellers 
throughout the United States, who can readily procure for their customers any works 
not kept in stock. Where access to bookstores is not convenient, books will be sent 
by mail post-paid on#eceipt of the price, but no risks are assumed either on the 
money or the books, and no publications but my own are supplied. Gentlemen will 
therefore in most cases find it more convenient to deal with the nearest bookseller. 

An Illustrated Catalogue, of 64 octavo pages, handsomely printed, will be for- 

warded by mail, postpaid, on receipt of ten cents. 

HENRY C. LEA. 
Nos. 706 and 708 Sansom St., Philadelphia, March, 1874. 



ADDITIONAL INDUCEMENT FOR SUBSCRIBERS TO 

THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF THE MEDICAL SCIENCES, 



THKEE MEDICAL JOURNALS, containing over 2000 LARGE PAGES, 
Free of Postage, for SIX D0LLAKS Per Annum. 

TEKMS FOR 1874: 
The American Journal of the Medical Sciences, and 1 Five Dollars per annum, 
The Medical News and Library, both free of postage, J in advance. 

OIR 

The American Journal of the Medical Sciences, published quar- 
terly (1150 pages per annum), with 
The Medical News and Library, monthly (384 pp. per annum), and 
Th^ Half- Yearly Abstract of the Medical Sciences, published 
Feb. and August (600 pages per annum), all free of postage. 



Six Dollars 
per annum 
in advance. 



SEPARATE SUBSCRIPTIONS TO 

The American Journal of the Medical Sciences, subject to postage when not paid 

for in advance, Five Dollars. 
The Medical News and Library, free of postage, in advance, One Dollar. 
The Half-Yearly Abstract, Two Dollars and a Half per annum in advance. Single 

numbers One Dollar and a Half. 
It is manifest that only a very wide circulation can enable so vast an amount of 
valuable practical matter to be supplied at a price so unprecedentedly low. The pub- 
lisher, therefore, has much gratification in stating that the rapid and steady increase 
in the subscription list promises to render the enterprise a permanent one, and it is 
with especial pleasure that he acknowledges the valuable assistance spontaneously 
rendered by so many of the old subscribers to the "Journal," who have kindly made 
known among their friends the advantages thus offered and have induced them to 
subscribe. Relying upon a continuance of these friendly exertions, he hopes to be 
able to maintain the unexampled rates at which these works are now supplied, and to 



(For "The American Chemist, 1 ' see p. 11.) 
(For " The Obstetrical Journal," see p. 22 ) 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — {Dictionaries). 



D 



UNGLISON {ROBLEY), M.D., 

Professor of Institutes of Medicine in Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. 

MEDICAL LEXICON; A Dictionary op Medical Science: Con- 
taining a concise explanation of the various Subjects and Terms of Anatomy, Physiology, 
Pathology, Hygiene, Therapeutics, Pharmacology, Pharmacy, Surgery, Obstetrics, Medical 
Jurisprudence, and Dentistry. Notices of Climate and of Mineral Waters; Formulae for 
Officinal, Empirical, and Dietetic Preparations; with the Accentuation and Etymology of 
the Terms, and the French and other Synonymes ; so as to constitute a French as well as 
English Medical Lexicon. A New Edition. Thoroughly Prevised, and very greatly Mod- 
ified and Augmented By Richard J. Dunglison, M.D. In one very large and hand- 
some royal octavo volume of over 1100 pages. Cloth, $6 50; leather, raised hands, $7 50. 
{Just Ready.) 
The object of the author from the outset has not been to make the work a mere lexicon or 
dictionary of terms, but to afford, under each, a condensed view of its various medical relations, 
and thus to render the work an epitome of the existing condition of medical science. Starting 
with this view, the immense demand which has existed for the work has enabled him, in repeated 
revisions, to augment its completeness and usefulness, until at length it has attained the position 
of a recognized and standard authority wherever the language is spoken. 

Special pains have been taken in the preparation of the present edition to maintain this en- 
viable reputation. During the ten years which have elapsed since the last revision, the additiors 
to the nomenclature of the medical sciences have been greater than perhaps in any similar period 
of the past, and up to the time of his death the author labored assiduously to incorporate every- 
thing requiring the attention of the student or practitioner. Since then, the editor has been 
equally industrious, so that the additions to the vocabulary are more numerous than in any pre- 
vious revision. Especial attention has been bestowed on the accentuation, which will be found 
marked on every word. The typographical arrangement has been much improved, rendering 
reference much more easy, and every care has been taken with the mechanical execution. The 
work has been printed on new type, small but exceedingly clear, with an enlarged page, so that 
the additions have been incorporated with an increase of but little over a hundred pages, and 
the volume now contains the matter of at least four ordinary octavos. 

A book well known to our reatiers, and of which We are glad to see a new edition of this invaluable 
every American ought to be proud. When the learned 
author of the work passed away, probably all of us 
feared lest the book should not maintain its place 
in the advancing science whose terms it defines. For- 
tunately, Dr. Richard J. Dunglison, having assisted his 
father in the revision of several editions of the work, 
and having been, therefore, trained in the methods and 
imbued with the spirit of the hook, has been able to 
edit it, not in the patchwork manner so dear to the 
heart of book editors, so repulsive to the taste of intel- 
ligent book readers, but to edit it as a work of the kind 
should be edited — to carry it on steadily, without jar 
or interruption, along the grooves of thought it has 
travelled during its lifetime. To show the magnitude 
of the task which Dr. Dunglison has assumed and car- 
ried through, it is only necessary to state that more 
than six thousand new subjects have been added in the 
present edition.. Without occupying more space with the 
theme, we congratulate the editor on the successful 
completion of his labors, and hope he may reap the well- 
earned reward of profit and honor.— Pkila. Med. Times, 
Jan. 3, 1874. 

About the first book purchased by the medical stu- 
dent is the Medical Dictionary. The lexicon explana- 
tory of technical terms is simply a sine qua nan. In a 
science so extensive, and with such collaterals as medi- 
cine, it is as much a necessity also to the practising 
physician. To meet the wants of students and most 
physicians, the dictionary must be condensed while 
comprehensive, and practical while perspicacious. It 
was because Dunglison's met these indications that it 
became at once the dictionary of general use wherever 
medicine was studied in the English language. In no 
former revision have the alterations and additions been 
so great. More than six thousand new subjects and terms 
have been added. The chief terms have been set in black 
letter, while the derivatives follow in small caps; an 
arrangement which greatly facilitates reference. We 
may safely confirm the hope ventured by the editor 
" that the work, which possesses for him a filial as well 
as an individual interest, will be found worthy a con- 
tinuance of the position so long accorded to it as_ a 
standard authority." — Cincinnati Clinic, Jan. 10, 1874. 



work, and to find that it has been so thoroughly revised, 
and so greatly improved. The dictionary, in its pre- 
sent form, is a medical library in itself, and one of 
which every physician should be possessed. — N. Y. Med. 
Journal, Feb. 1874. 

With a history of forty years of unexampled success 
and universal indorsement by the medical profession of 
the western continent, it would be presumption in any 
living medical American to essay its review. No re- 
viewer, however able, can add to its fame; no captious 
critic, however caustic, can remove a single stone from 
its firm and enduring foundation. It is destined, as a 
colossal monument, to perpetuate the solid and richly 
deserved fame of Robley Dunglison to coming genera- 
tions. The large additions made to the vocabulary, w e 
think, will be welcomed by the profession as supplying 
the want of a lexicon fully up with the march of sci- 
ence, which has been increasingly felt for some years 
past. The accentuation of terms is very complete, and, 
as far as we have been able to examine it, very excel- 
lent. We hope it may be the means of securing greater 
uniformity of pronunciation among medical men. — At- 
lanta Med and Surg. Journ., Feb. 1874. 

It would be mere waste of words in ns to express 
:>ur admiration of a work which is so universally 
and deservedly appreciated. The most admirable 
work of its kind in the English language. — Glasgow 
Medical Journal, January, 1866. 

A work to which there is no equal in the English 
language.— Edinburgh Medical Journal. 

Few works of the class exhibit a grander monument 
of patient research and of scientific lore. The extent 
of the sale of this lexicon is sufficient to testify to its 
usefulness, and to the great service conferred by Dr. 
Robley Dunglison on the profession, and indeed on 
others, by its issue. — London Lancet, May 13, 1865. 

It has the rare merit that it certainly has no rival 
in the English language for accuracy and extent of 
references. — London Medical Gazette, 



TJOBLYN {RICHARD D.), M.D. 

A DICTIONARY OF THE TERMS USED IN MEDICINE AND 

THE COLLATERAL SCIENCES. Revised, with numerous additions, by Isaac Hays, 
M.D., Editor of the "American Journal of the Medical Sciences." In one large royal 
12mo.' volume of over 500 double-columned pages ; extra cloth, SI 50 ; leather, $2 00. 

It is the best book of definitions we have, and ought always to be upon the student's tMe.-Southern 
Mtd. and Surg. Journal. 



Henry (J. Lea's Publications — {Manuals). 



fflEILL {JOHN), M.D., and &MITH [FRANCIS G.), M.D., 

+■ * . **r Prof, of the Institutes of Medicine tn the Univ. of Penna. 

AN ANALYTICAL COMPENDIUM OF THE VARIOUS 

BRANCHES OF MEDICAL SCIENCE ; for the Use and Examination of Students. A 
new edition, revised and improved. In one very large and handsomely printed royal 12mo. 
volume, of about one thousand pages, with 374 wood cuts, extra cloth, $4 ; strongly bound 
in leather, with raised bands, $4 75. 



The Compend of Drs. Neilland Smith is incompara- 
bly the most valuable work of its class ever published 
In this country. Attempts have been made in various 
quarters to squeeze Anatomy, Physiology, Surgery, 
fche Practice of Medicine, Obstetrics, Materia Medica, 
and Chemistry into a single manual; but the opera- 
tion has signally failed in the hands of all up to the 
advent of " Neil'l and Smith's' ' volume, which is quite 
a miracle of success. The outlines of the whole are 
admirably drawn and illustrated, and the authors 
are eminently entitled to the grateful consideration 
of the student of every class.— N. 0. Med. and Surg. 
Journal. 

There are but few students or practitioners of me- 
dicine unacquainted with the former editions of this 
anassuming though highly instructive work. The 
whole science of medicine appears to have been sifted, 
is the gold-bearing sands of El Dorado, and the pre- 



cious facts treasured up in this little volume. A com- 
plete portable library so condensed that the student 
may make it his constant pocket companion. — West- 
ern Lancet. 

In the rapid course of lectures, where work for the 
students is heavy, and review necessary for an exa- 
mination, a compend is not only valuable, but it is 
almost a sine qua non. The one before us is, in most 
of the divisions, the most unexceptionable of all books 
of the kind that we know of. Of course it is useless 
for us to recommend it to all last course students, but 
there is a class to whom we very sincerely commend 
this cheap book as worth its weight in silver — that 
class is the graduates in medicine of more than ten 
years' standing, who have not studied medicine 
since. They will perhaps find out from it that the 
science is not exactly now what it was when they 
left it off. — The Stethoscope. 



TTARTSRORNE (HENRY), M. D., 

■* Professor of Hygiene in the University of Pennsylvania. 

A CONSPECTUS OF THE MEDICAL SCIENCES; containing 

Handbooks on Anatomy, Physiology, Chemistry, Materia Medica^ Practical Medicine, 

Surgery, and Obstetrics. Second Edition, thoroughly revised and improved. In one large 

royal 12mo. volume of more than 1000 closely printed pages, with over 300 illustrations on 

wo od . ( Preparing . ) 

The favor with which this work has been received has stimulated the author in its revision to 

render it in every way fitted to meet the wants of the student, or of the practitioner desirous to 

refresh his acquaintance with the various departments of medical science. The various sections have 

been brought up to a level with the existing knowledge of the day, while preserving the condensa 

tion of form by which so vast an accumulation of facts have been brought within so narrow a 

less valuable to the beginner. Every medical student 
who desires a reliable refresher to his memory when 
the pressure of lectures and other college work crowds 
to prevent him from having an opportunity to drink 
deeper in the larger works, will find this one of the 
greatest utility. It is thoroughly trustworthy from 
beginning to end; and as we have before intimated, 
a remarkably truthful outline sketch of the present 
state of medical science. We could hardly expect it 
should be otherwise, however, under the charge of 
such a thorough medical scholar as the author has 
already proved himself to be.— N. York Med. Record, 
March 15. 1869. 



This work is a remarkably complete one in its way, 
and comes nearer to our idea of what a Conspectus 
should be than any we have yet seen. Prof. Harts- 
home, with a commendable forethought, intrusted 
the preparation of many of the chapters on special 
subjects to experts, reserving only anatomy, physio- 
logy, and practice of medicine to himself. As a result 
we have every department worked up to the latest 
date and in a refreshingly concise and lucid manner. 
There are an immense amount of illustrations scat- 
tered throughout the work, and although they have 
often been seen before in the various works upon gen- 
eral and special subjects, yet they will be none the 



TVDLOW (J.L.), M.D. 
A MANUAL OF EXAMINATIONS upon Anatomy, Physiology, 

Surgery, Practice of Medicine, Obstetrics, Materia Medica, Chemistry, Pharmacy, and 
Therapeutics. To which is added a Medical Formulary. Third edition, thoroughly revised 
and greatly extended and enlarged. With 370 illustrations. In one handsome royal 
12mo. volume of 816 large pages, extra cloth, $3 25 ; leather, $3 75. 
The arrangement of this volume in the form of question and answer renders it especially suit- 
able for the office examination of students, and for those preparing for graduation. 



/TANNER {THOMAS HAWKES), 31. D., frc. 

A MANUAL OF CLINICAL MEDICINE AND PHYSICAL DIAG- 

NOSIS. Third American from the Second London Edition. Revised and Enlarged by 

Tilbury Fox, M. D., Physician to the Skin Department in University College Hospital, 

&e. In one neat volume small 12mo., of about 375 pages, extra cloth. $150. {Jzist Issued.) 

*#* By reference to the " Prospectus of Journal" on page 3, it will be seen that this work i9 

offered as a premium for procuring new subscribers to the "American Journal of the Medical 

Sciences." 



Taken as a whole, it is the most compact vade me- 
cum for the use of the advanced student and junior 
practitioner with which we are acquainted. — Boston 
Med. and Surg. Journal, Sept. 22, 1870. 

It contains so much that is valuable, presented in 
so attractive a form, that it can hardly be spared 
even in the presence of more full and complete works. 
The additions made to the volume by Mr. Fox very 
materially enhance its value, and almost make it a 
Dew work. Its convenient size makes it a valuable 
companion to the country practitioner, and if con- 
stantly carried by him, would often render him good 
service, and relieve many a doubt and perplexity. — 
Leavenworth Med. Herald, July, 1870. 



The objections commonly, and justly, urged against 
the general run of "compends," "conspectuses," and 
other aids to indolence, are not applicable to this little 
volume, which contains in coneise phrase just those 
practical details that are of most use in daily diag- 
nosis, but which the young practitioner finds it diffi- 
cult to carry always in his memory without some 
I quickly accessible means of reference. Altogether, 
the book is one which we can heartily commend to 
those who have not opportunity for extensive read- 
ing, or who, having read much, still wish an occa- 
sional practical reminder. — N. T. Med. Gazette, Nov. 
10, 1870. 



6 Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Anatomy). 

QRAY {HENRY), F.R.S., 

Lecturer on Anatomy at St. George's Hospital, London. 

ANATOMY, DESCRIPTIVE AND SURGICAL. The DrawiDgs by 

H. V. Cabter, M. D., late Demonstrator on Anatomy at St. George's Hospital ; the Dissec- 
tions jointly by the Author and Dr. Carter. A new American, from the fifth enlarged 
and improved London edition. In one magnificent imperial octavo volume, of nearly 90© 
pages, with 465 large and elaborate engravings on wood. Price in extra cloth, $6 00 ; 
leather, raised bands, $7 00. (Just Issued.) 
The author has endeavored in this work to cover a more extended range of subjects than is cus- 
tomary in the ordinary text-books, by giving not only the details necessary for the student, but 
also the application of those details in the practice of medicine and surgery, thus rendering it both 
a guide for the learner, and an admirable work of reference for the active practitioner. The en- 
gravings form a special feature in the work, many of them being the size of nature, nearly all 
original, and having the names of the various parts printed on the body of the cut, in place of 
figures of reference, with descriptions at the foot. They thus form a complete and splendid series, 
which will greatly assist the student in obtaining a clear idea of Anatomy, and will also serve to 
refresh the memory of those who may find in the exigencies of practice the necessity of recalling 
the details of the dissecting room ; while combining, as it does, a complete Atlas of Anatomy, with 
a thorough treatise on systematic, descriptive, and applied Anatomy, the work will be found of 
essential use to all physicians who receive students in their offices, relieving both preceptor and 
pupil of much labor in laying the groundwork of a thorough medical education. 

Notwithstanding the enlargement of this edition, it has been kept at its former very moderate 
price, rendering it one of the cheapest works now before the profession. 



The illustrations are beautifully executed, and ren- 
der this work an indispensable adj unct to the library 
of the surgeon. This remark applies with great force 
to those surgeons practising at a distance from our 
large cities, as the opportunity of refreshing their 
memory by actual dissection is not always attain- 
able.— Canada Med. Journal, Aug. 1870. 

The work is too well known and appreciated by the 
profession to need any comment. No medical man 
can afford to be without it, if its only merit were to 
serve as a reminder of that which so soon becomes 
forgotten, when not called into frequent use, viz., the 
relations and names of the complex organism of the 
human body. The present edition is much improved. 
—California Med. Gazette, July, 1870. 

Gray's Anatomy has been so long the standard of 
perfection with every student of anatomy, that we 
need do no more than call attention to the improve- 
ment in the present edition. — Detroit Review of Med. 
and Pharm., Aug. 1870. 



From time to time, as successive editions have ap- 
peared, we have had much pleasure in expressing 
the general judgment of the wonderful excellence of 
Gray's Anatomy.^ — Cincinnati Lancet, July, 1870. 

Altogether, it is unquestionably the most complete 
and serviceable text-book in anatomy that has ever 
been presented to the student, and forms a striking 
contrast to the dry and perplexing volumes on the 
same subject through which their predecessors strug- 
gled in days gone by. — N. T. Med. Record, June 15, 
1870. 

To commend Gray's Anatomy to the medical pro- 
fession is almost as much a work of supererogation 
as it would be to give a favorable notice of the Bible 
in the religious press. To say that it is the most 
complete and conveniently arranged text book of its 
kind, is to repeat what each generation of students 
has learned as a tradition of the elders, and verified 
by personal experience. — N. Y. Med. Gazette, Dec. 
17, 1870. 



VMITH (HENRY H.), M.I)., and TJORNER ( WILLIAM E.), M.D., 

Prof, of Surgery in the Univ. of Penna. , Ac. Late Prof, of Anatomy in the Univ. of Penna. , Ac . 

AN ANATOMICAL ATLAS, illustrative of the Structure of the 

Human Body. In one volume, large imperial octavo, extra cloth, with about six hundred 

and fifty beautiful figures. $4 50. 
The plan of this Atlas, which renders it so pecu- I the kind that has yet appeared ; and we must add, 
liarly convenient for the student, and its superb ar- | the very beautiful manner in which it is "got up," 
tistical execution, have been already pointed out. We j is so creditable to the country as to be flattering to 
must congratulate the student upon the completion our national pride. — American MedicalJournal. 
of this Atlas, as it is the most convenient work of I 



UHARPEY ( WILLIAM), M.D., and Q UAIN (JONES fr RICHARD). 
HUMAN ANATOMY. Revised, with Notes and Additions, by Joseph 

Leidv, M. D., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania. Complete in two 
large octavo volumes, of about 1300 pages, with 511 illustrations; extra cloth, $6 00. 
The very low price of this standard work, and its completeness in all departments of the subject, 
should command for it a place in the library of all anatomical students. 



JTODGES (RICHARD M.), M.D., 

Late Demonstrator of Anatomy in the Medical Department of Harvard University. 

PRACTICAL DISSECTIONS. Second Edition, thoroughly revised. In 

one neat royal 12mo. volume, half-bound, $2 00. 
The object of this work is to present to the anatomical student a clear and concise description 
of that which he is expected to observe in an ordinary couise of dissections. The author has 
endeavored to omit unnecessary details, and to present the subject in the form which many years' 
experience has shown him to be the most convenient and intelligible to the student. In the 
revision of the present edition, he has sedulously labored to render the volume more worthy of 
the favor with which it has heretofore been received. 



Henry C. Lea>s Publications — (Anatomy). 



7 



TfflLSON {ERASMUS), F.B.S. 

A SYSTEM OF HUMAN ANATOMY, General and Special. Edited 

by W.H. Gtobrecht, M.D., Professor of General and Surgical Anatomy in the Medical Col- 
lege of Ohio. Illustrated with three hundred and ninety-seven engravings on wood. In 
one large and handsome octavo volume, of over 600 large pages; extra cloth, $4 00; lea- 
ther, $5 00. 
The publisher trusts that the well-earned reputation of this long-established favorite will be 
more than maintained by the present edition. Besides a very thorough revision by the author, it 
has been most carefully examined by the editor, and the efforts of both have been directed to in- 
troducing everything which increased experience in its use has suggested as desirable to render it 
a complete text-book for those seeking to obtain or to renew an acquaintance with Human Ana- 
tomy. The amount of additions which it has thus received may be estimated from the fact that 
thu present edition contains over one-fourth more matter than the last, rendering a smaller type 
and an enlarged page requisite to keep the volume within a convenient size. The author has not 
only thus added largely to the work, but he has also made alterations throughout, wherever there 
appeared the opportunity of improving the arrangement or style, so as to present every fact in its 
most appropriate manner, and to render £he whole as clear and intelligible as possible. The editor 
has exercised the utmost caution to obtain entire accuracy in the text, and has largely increased 
the number of illustrations, of which there are about one hundred and fifty more in this edition 
than in the last, thus bringing distinctly before the eye of the student everything of interest or 
importance. 

TJEATH {CHRISTOPHER), F. R. C. S., 

-*-*■ Teacher of Operative Surgery in University College, London. 

PRACTICAL ANATOMY: A Manual of Dissections. From the 

Second revised and improved London edition. Edited, with additions, by W. W. Keen, 

M. D., Lecturer on Pathological Anatomy in the Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. 

In one handsome royal 12mo. volume of 578 pages, with 247 illustrations. Extra cloth, 

$3 50 ; leather, $4 00. {Lately Published.) 
Dr. Keen, the American editor of this work, in his Such manuals of anatomy are always favorite works 
preface, says: "In presenting this American edition I with medical students. We would earnestly recom- 
of 'Heath's Practical Anatomy,' I feel that I have I mend this one to their attention; it has excellences 
been instrumental in supplying a want long felt for I which make it valuable as a guide in dissecting, as 
a real dissector's manual," and this assertion of its well as in studying anatomy. — Buffalo Medical and 
editor we deem is fully justified, after an examina- SurgicalJournal, Jan. 1871. 

Hon of its contents, for it is really an excellent work. The fir8t Englisn edition was issued about six years 
Indeed, we do not hesitate to say, the best ol its class | ag0 and was favoraWy rece ived not only on account 
with which we are acquainted ; resembling Wilson of the great reputation of its author, but also from 
in terse and clear description, excelling most of the ' 
so-called practical anatomical dissectors in the scope 
of the subject and practical selected matter. . . . 
In reading this work, one is forcibly impressed with 
the great pains the author takes to impress the sub- 
ject upon the mind of the student. He is full of rare 
and pleasing little devices to aid memory in main- 
taining its hold upon the slippery slopes of anatomy. 
— St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journal, Mar. 10, 1871. 

It appears to us certain that, as a guide in dissec- 
tion, and as a work containing facts of anatomy in 
brief and easily understood form, this manual is 
complete. This work contains, also, very perfect 
illustrations of parts which can thus be more easily 
understood and studied; in this respect it compares 
favorably with works of much greater pretension. 



its great value and excellence as a guide-book to the 
practical anatomist. The American edition has un- 
dergone some alterations and additions which will 
no doubt enhance its value materially. The conve- 
nience of the student has been carefully consulted in 
the arrangement of the text, and the directions given 
for the prosecution of certain dissections will be duly 
appreciated. — Canada, Lancet, Feb. 1871. 

This is an excellent Dissector's Manual ; one which 
is not merely a descriptive manual of anatomy, but 
a guide to the student at the dissecting table, enabling 
him, though a beginner, to prosecute his work intel- 
ligently, and without assistance. The American edi- 
tor has made many valuable alterations and addi- 
tions to the original work.— Am. Journ. of Obstetrics 
Feb. 1871. . 



JDELLAMY {E.) , F.R. C.S. 

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE TO SURGICAL ANATOMY: 



Book for Students preparing for their Pass Examination. With Engravings 
ono handsome royal 12mo. volume. Cloth, $2 25. {Just Ready.) 



A Text- 

on wood. In 



JMACLISE {JOSEPH). 

SURGICAL ANATOMY. By Joseph Maclise, Surgeon. In one 

volume, very large imperial quarto; with 68 large and splendid plates, drawn in the best 
style and beautifully colored, containing 190 figures, many of them th& size of life; together 
with copious explanatory letter-press. Strongly and handsomely bound in extra cloth. 
Price $14 00. 

gions have hitherto, we think, been given. While 
the operator is shown every vessel and nerve where 
in operation is contemplated, the exact anatomist is 
refreshed by those clear and distinct dissection*, 
which every one must appreciate who has a particle 
of enthusiasm. The English medical press has quite 
exhausted the words of praise, in recommending thiB 
admirable treatise.— Boston Med. and Surg. Journ. 



We know of no work on surgical anatomy which 
can compete with it. — Lancet. 

The work of Maclise on surgical anatomy is of the 
highest value. In some respects it is the best publi- 
cation of its kind we have seen, and is worthy of a 
place in the library of any medical man, while the 
student could scarcely make a better investment than 
this. — The Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. 

No such lithographic illustrations of surgical re- 



H 



ARTSHORNE [HENRY), M.D., 

Professor of Hygiene, etc , in the Univ. ofTenna. 

HANDBOOK OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 

tion, revised. In one royal 12mo. volume, with numerous illustrations. 



HORNER'S SPECIAL ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY. 
B'ghth edition, exujueiveiy revised and modified. 



Second Edi- 

{Preparitig.) 



In 2 vols. Svo., of over 1000 pages, with more than 
300 wood-cuts; extra cloth, $6 00. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications— -(Physiology). 



MARSHALL {JOHN), F. R. S., 

JJM. Professor of Surgery in University College, London, dec 

OUTLINES OF PHYSIOLOGY, HUMAN AND COMPARATIVE. 

With Additions by Francis Gubney Smith, M. D., Professor of the Institutes of Medi- 
cine in the University of Pennsylvania, &c. With numerous illustrations. In one large 
and handsome octavo volume, of 1026 pages, extra cloth, $6 50: leather, raised bands, 
$7 50. 

In fact, in every respect, Mr. Marshall has present- 
ed us with a most complete, reliable, and scientific 
work, and we feel that it is worthy our warmest 
commendation. — St. Louis Med. Reporter, Jan. 1869. 

We doubt if there is in the English language any 
compend of physiology more useful to the student 
than this work.— St. Louu Med. and Surg. Journal, 
Jan. 1869. 

It quite fulfils, in our opinion, the author's design 
of making it truly educational in its character — which 
is, perhaps, the highest commendation that can be 
asked. — Am. Journ. Med. Sciences, Jan. 1869. 

We may now congratulate him on having com- 
pleted the latest as well as the best summary of mod- 
ern physiological science, both human and compara- 



tive, with which we are acquainted. To speak of 
this work in the terms ordinarily used on such occa- 
sions would not be agreeable to ourselves, and would 
fail to do justice to its author. To write such a book 
requires a varied and wide range of knowledge, con- 
siderable power of analysis, correct judgment, skill 
in arrangement, and conscientious spirit. — London 
Lancet, Feb. 22, 1868. 

There are few, if any, more accomplished anatomists 
and physiologists than the distinguished professor of 
surgery at University College ; and he has long en- 
joyed the highest reputation as a teacher of physiol- 
ogy, possessing remarkable powers of clear exposition 
and graphic illustration. We have rarely the plea- 
sure of being able to recommend a text-boot so unre- 
servedlyasthis.— British Med.Journal, Jan 25,1868, 



ffARPENTER [WILLIAM B.), M.D., F.R.S., 

w Examiner in Physiology and Comparative Anatomy in the University of London. 

PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY; with their chief appli- 
cations to Psychology, Pathology, Therapeutics, Hygiene and Forensic Medicine. A new 
American from the last and revised London edition. With nearly three hundred illustrations. 

' Edited, with additions, by Francis Gurney Smith, M. D., Professor of the Institutes of 
Medicine in the University of Pennsylvania, &c. In one very large and beautiful octavo 
volume, of about 900 large pages, handsomely printed; extra cloth, $5 50 ; leather, raised 
bands, $6 50. 



With Dr. Smith, we confidently believe "that the 
present will more than sustain the enviable reputa- 
tion already attained by former editions, of being 
one of the fullest and most complete treatises on the 
subject in the English language." We know of none 
from the pages of which a satisfactory knowledge of 
the physiology of the human organism can be as well 
obtained, none better adapted for the use of such as 
take up the study of physiology in its reference to 
the institutes and practice of medicine. — Am. Jour. 
Med. Sciences. 



We doubt not it is destined to retain a strong hold 
on public favor, and remain the favorite text-book in 
our colleges. — Virginia Medical Journal. 

The above is the title of what is emphatically the 
great work on physiology ; and we are conscious that 
it would be a useless effort to attempt to add any- 
thing to the reputation of this invaluable work, and 
can only say to all with whom our opinion has any 
influence, that it is our authority.— Atlanta Med. 
Journal. 



DY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

PRINCIPLES OF COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. New Ameri- 

can, from the Fourth and Revised London Edition. In one large and handsome octavo 
volume, with over three hundred beautiful illustrations. Pp.752. Extra cloth, $5 00. 
As a complete and condensed treatise on its extended and important subject, this work becomes 
a necessity to students of natural science, while the very low price at which it is offered places it 
within the reach of all. 



JT'IRKES ( WILLIAM SENHOUSE), M.D. 

A MANUAL OE PHYSIOLOGY. Edited by W. Morrant Baker, 

M.D., F.R.C.S. A new American from the eighth and improved London edition. With 
about two hundred and fifty illustrations. In one large and handsome royal 12mo. vol- 
ume. Cloth, $3 25; leather, $3 75. {Now Ready.) 
Kirkes' Physiology has long been known as a concise and exceedingly convenient text-book, 
presenting within a narrow compass all that is important for the student. The rapidity with 
which successive editions have followed each other in England has enabled the editor to keep it 
thoroughly on a level with the changes and new discoveries made in the science, and the eighth 
edition, of which the present is a reprint, has appeared so recently that it may be regarded as 
the latest accessible exposition of the subject. 



On the whole, there is very little in the book 
which either the student or practitioner will notfind 
of practical value and consistent with our present 
knowledge of this rapidly changing science ; and we 
have no hesitation in expressing our opinion that 
this eighth edition is one of the best handbooks on 
physiology which we have in our language. — N. Y. 
Med. Record, April 15, 1873. 

This volume might well be used to replace many 
of the physiological text-books in use in this coun- 
try. It represents more accurately than the works 
of Dalton or Flint, the present state of our knowl- 
edge of most physiological questions, while it is 
much less bulky and far more readable than the lar- 



ger text-books of Carpenter or Marshall. The book 
is admirably adapted to be placed in the hands of 
students. — Boston Med. and Surg. Journ., April 10, 
1873. 

In its enlarged form it is, in our opinion, still the 
best book on physiology, most useful to the student. 
—Phila. Med. Times, Aug. 30, 1873. 

This is undoubtedly the best work for students of 
physiology extant. — Cincinnati Med. News, Sept. '73 

It more nearly represents the present condition of 
physiology than any other text-book on the subject. — 
Detroit Rev. of Med. Pharm., Nov. 1873. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Physiology). 



nALTON (J. G), M. D., 

-*S Professor of Physiology in the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York, &c. 

A TREATISE ON HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. Designed for the""use 

of Students and Practitioners of Medicine. Fifth edition, revised, with nearly three hun- 
dred illustrations on wood. In one very beautiful octavo volume, of over 700 pages, extra 
cloth, $5 25 ; leather, $6 25. {Just Issued.) 

Preface to the Fifth Edition. 
In preparing the present edition of this work, the general plan and arrangement of the previous 
editions have been retained, so far as they have been found useful and adapted to the purposes uf 
a text-book for students of medicine. The incessant advance of .all the natural and physical 
sciences, never more active than within the last five years, has furnished many valuable aids to 
the special investigations of the physiologist; and the progress of physiological research, during 
the same period, has required a careful revision of the entire work, and the modification or re- 
arrangement of many of its parts. At this day, nothing is regarded as of any value in natural 
science which is not based upon direct and intelligible observation or experiment ,• and, accord- 
ingly, the discussion of doubtful or theoretical questions has been avoided, as a general rule, in 
the present volume, while new facts, from whatever source, if fully established, have been added 
and incorporated with the results of previous investigation. A number of new illustrations have 
been introduced, and a few of the older ones, which seemed to be no longer useful, have been 
omitted. In all the changes and additions thus made, it has been the aim of the writer to make the 
book, in its present form, a faithful exponent of the actual conditions of physiological science. 
New York, October, 1871. 
In this, the standard text-book on Physiology, all that is needed to maintain the favor with which 
it is regarded by the profession, is the author's assurance that it has been thoroughly revised and 
brought up to a level with the advanced science of the day. To accomplish this has required 
some enlargement of the work, but no advance has been made in the price. 



The fifth edition of this truly valuable work on 
Human Physiology comes to us with many valuable 
improvement^ and additions. As a text-book of 
physiology tire work of Prof. Dalton has long been 
well known as one of the best which could be placed 
ia the hands of student or practitioner. Prof. Dalton 
has, in the several editions of his work heretofore 
published, labored to keep step with the advancement 
in science, and the last edition shows by its improve- 
ments on former ones that he is determined to main- 
tain the high standard of his work. We predict for 
the present edition increased favor, though this work 
has long been the favorite standard.— Buffalo Med. 
and Surg. Journal, April, 1872. 

An extended notice of a work so generally and fa- 
vorably known as this is unnecessary. It is justly 
regarded as one of the most valuable text-books on 
the subject in the English language.— St. Louis Med. 
Archives, May, 1872. 

We know no treatise in physiology so clear, com- 
plete, well assimilated, and perfectly digested, as 
Dalton's. He never writes cloudily or dubiously, or 
In mere quotation. He assimilates all his material, 
and from it constructs a homogeneous transparent 
argument, which is always honest and well informed, 
and hides neither truth, ignorance, nor doubt, *o far 
as either belongs to the subject in hand. — Brit. Med. 
Journal, March 23, 1872. 



Dr. Dalton's treatise is well known, and by many 
highly esteemed in this country. It is, indeed, a good 
elementary treatise on the subject it professes to 
teach, and may safely be put into the hands of Eng- 
lish students. It has one great merit — it is clear, and, 
on the whole, admirably illustrated. The part we 
have always esteemed most highly is that relating 
to Embryology. The diagrams given of the various 
stages of development give a clearer view of the sub- 
ject than do those in general use in this country ; and 
the text may be said to be, upon the whole, equally 
clear. — London Med. Times and Gazette, March 2,3, 
1872. 

Dalton's Physiology is already, and deservedly, 
the favorite text-book of the majority of American 
medical students. Treating a most interesting de- 
partment of science in his own peculiarly lively and 
fascinating style, Dr. Dalton carries his reader along 
without effort, and at the same time impresses upon 
his mind the truths taught much more successfully 
than if they were buried beueath a multitude of 
words. — Kansas City Med. Journal, April, 1S72. 

Professor Dalton is regarded j ustly as the authority 
in this country on physiological subjects, and the 
fifth edition of his valuable work fully justifies the 
exalted opinion the medical world has of his labors. 
This last edition is greatly enlarged. —Virginia Clin- 
ical Record, April, 1872. 



T\UNGLISON {ROBLEY), M.D., 

-*S Professor of Institutes of Medicine in Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. 

HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. Eighth edition. Thoroughly revised and 

extensively modified and enlarged, with five hundred and thirty-two illustrations. In two 
large and handsomely printed octavo volumes of about 1500 pages, extra cloth. $7 00. 



TEHMANN{G. 6?.). 

PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY. Translated from the second edi- 
tion by George E. Day, M. D., F. R. S., Ac, edited by R. E. Rogers, M. D., Professor of 
Chemistry in the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, with illustrations 
selected from Funke's Atlas of Physiological Chemistry, and an Appendix of plates. Com- 
plete in two large and handsome octavo volumes, containing 1200 pages, with nearly two 
hundred illustrations, extra cloth. $6 00. 



B 



Y THE SAME AUTHOR. 

MANUAL OE CHEMICAL PHYSIOLOGY. Translated from the 

German, with Notes and Additions, by J. Cheston Morris, M.D., with an Introductory 
Essay on Vital Force, by Professor Samuel Jackson, M. D., of the University of Pennsyl- 
vania. With illustrations on wood. In one very handsome octavo volume of 336 pages, 
extra cloth. $2 25. 



10 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Chemistry). 



ATTFIELD (JOHN), Ph.D., 

Professor of Practical Chemistry to the Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain, &c. 

CHEMISTRY, GENERAL, MEDICAL, AND PHARMACEUTICAL ; 

including the Chemistry of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. A Manual of the General Principles 
of the Science, and their Application to Medicine and Pharmacy. Fifth Edition, revised 
hy the author. In one handsome royal 12mo. volume ; cloth, $2 75 ; leather, $3 25. 
{Just Ready.) 



We commend the work heartily as one of tbe best 
text-books extant for the medical student.— Detroit 
Rev. of Med. and Pharm., Feb. 1872. 

The best work of the kind in the English language. 
27. T. Psychological Journal, Jan. 1872. 

The work is constructed with direct reference to 
the wants of medical and pharmaceutical students; 
and, although an English work, the points of differ- 
ence between the British, and United States Pharma- 
copoeias are indicated, making it as useful here as in 
England. Altogether, the book is one we can heart- 
ily recommend to practitioners as well as students. 
—N. Y. Med. Journal, Dec. 1871. 

It differs from other text-books in the following 
particulars : first, in the exclusion of matter relating 
to compounds which, at present, are only of interest 
to the scientific chemist ; secondly, in containing the 
chemistry of every substance recognized officially or 
in general, as a remedial agent. It will be found a 
most valuable book for pupils, assistants, and others 
engaged in medicine and pharmacy, and we heartily 
commend it to our readers. — Canada Lancet, Oct. 
1871. 

When the original English edition of this work was 



published, we had occasion to express our high ap- 
preciation of its worth, and also to review, in con- 
siderable detail, the main features of the book. As 
the arrangement of subjects, and the main part of 
the text of the present edition are similar to the for- 
mer publication, it will be needless for us to go over 
the ground a. second time ; we may, however, call at- 
tention to a marked advantage possessed by the Ame- 
rican work— we allude to the introduction of the 
chemistry of the preparations of the United States 
Pharmacopoeia, as well as that relating to the British 
authority. — Canadian Pharmaceutical Journal, 
Nov. 1871. 

Chemistry has borne the name of being a hard sub- 
ject to master by the student of medicine, and 
chiefly because so much of it consists of compounds 
only of interest to the scientific chemist ; in this work 
such portions are modified or altogether left out, and 
in the arrangement of the subject- matter of the work, 
practical utility is sought after, and we think fully 
attained. We commend it for its clearness and order 
to both teacher and pupil. — Oregon Med. and Surg. 
Reporter, Oct. 1871. 



TDLOXAM (C.L.), 

J-* Professor of Chemistry in King's College, Tjondon. 

CHEMISTRY, INORGANIC AND ORGANIC. From the Second Lon- 
don Edition. In one very handsome octavo volume, of 700 pages, with about 300 illustra- 
tions. Cloth, $4 50 ; leather, $5 50. {Just Ready.) 
It has been the author's endeavor to produce a Treatise on Chemistry sufficiently comprehen- 
sive for those studying the science as a branch of general education, and one which a student 
may use with advantage in pursuing his chemical studies at one of the colleges or medical schools. 
The special attention devoted to Metallurgy and some other branches of Applied Chemistry renders 
the work especially useful to those who are being educated for employment in manufacture. 

very short paragraphs. One is surprised at the brief 



It would be difficult for a practical chemist and 
teacher to find any material fault with this most ad- 
mirable treatise. The author has given us almost a 
cyclopedia within the limits of a convenient volume, 
and has done so without penning the useless para- 
graphs too commonly making up a great part of the 
bulk of many cumbrous works. The progressive sci- 
entist is not disappointed when he looks for the record 
of new and valuable processes and discoveries, while 
the cautious conservative does not find its pages mo- 
nopolized by uncertain theories and speculations. A 
peculiar point of excellence is the crystallized form of 
expression in which great truths are expressed in 



space allotted to an important topic, and yet, after 
reading it, he feels that little, if any more, should 
have been said. Altogether, it is seldom you see a 
text-book so nearly faultless.— Cincinnati Lancet, 
Nov. 1873. 

Professor Bloxam has given us a most excellent 
and useful practical treatise. His 666 pages are 
crowded with facts and experiments, nearly all well 
chosen, and many quite new, even to scientific men. 
. . . It is astonishing how much information he often 
conveys in a few paragraphs. We might quote fifty 
instances of this. — Chemical News. 







DLING (WILLIAM), 

Lecturer on Chemistry at St. Bartholomew's Hospital, &c. 

A COURSE OE PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY, arranged for the Use 

of Medical Students. With Illustrations. From the Fourth and Revised London Edition. 
In one neat royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth. $2. {Lately Issued.) 



riALLOWAY (ROBERT), F.G.S., 

Uf~ Prof, of Applied Chemistry in the Royal College of Science for Ireland, &c. 

A MANUAL OF QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS. From the Fifth Lon- 

don Edition. In one neat royal 12mo. volume, with illustrations ; extra cloth, $2 50. {Just 

Issued.) 
The success which has carried this work through repeated editions in England, and its adoption 
as a text-book in several of the leading institutions in this country, show that the author has suc- 
ceeded in the endeavor to produce a sound practical manual and book of reference for the che- 
mical student. 



Prof. Galloway's books are deservedly in high 
esteem, and this American reprint of the fifth edition 
(1869) of his Manual of Qualitative Analysis, will be 
acceptable to many American students to whom the 
English edition is not accessible. — Am. Jour, of Sci- 
ence and Arts, Sept. 1872. 



We regard this volume as a valuable addition to 
tbe chemical text-books, and as particularly calcu- 
lated to instruct the student in analytical researches 
of the inorganic compounds, the important vegetable 
acids, and of compounds and various aecretions and 
excretions of animal origin.— Am. Journ. of Pharm., 
Sept. 1872. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Chemistry, Pharmacy, &c). 11 
ffHANDLER (CHARLES F.), and pHANDLER (WILLIAM H.), 

V/ Prof, of Chemistry in the N. Y. Coll. of v^ Prof, of Chemistry in the Lehigh 

Pharmacy. University. 

THE AMERICAN CHEMIST: A Monthly Journal of Theoretical, 

Analytical, and Technical Chemistry. Each number averaging forty large double col- 
umned pages of reading matter. Price $5 per annum in advance. Single numbers, 50 cts. 

0^=* Specimen numbers to parties proposing to subscribe will be sent to any address on receipt 
of 25 cents. 

*.£* Subscriptions can begin with any number. 

The rapid growth of the Science of Chemistry and its infinite applications to other sciences 
and arts render a journal specially devoted to the subject a necessity to those whose pursuitg 
require familiarity with the details of the science. It has been the aim of the conductors of "The 
American Chemist" to supply this want in its broadest sense, and the reputation which the 
periodical has already attained is a sufficient evidence of the zeal and ability with which they 
have discharged their task. 

Assisted by an able body of collaborators, their aim is to present, within a moderate compass, 
an abstract of the progress of the science in all its departments, scientific and technical. Import- 
ant original communications and selected papers are given in full, and the standing of the " Chem- 
ist" is such as to secure the contributions of leadinsr men in all portions of the country. Besides 
this, over one hundred journals and transactions of learned societies in America, Great Britain, 
France, Belgium, Italy, Russia, and Germany are carefully scrutinized, and whatever they offer 
of interest is condensed and presented to the reader. In this work, which forms a special feature 
of the "Chemist," the editors have the assistance of M. Alsberg, Ph.D., Prof. G. P. Barker, T. 
M. Blossom, E.M., H. C. Bolton, Ph.D., Prof. T. Egleston, E.M , H. Endemann, Ph.D., Prof. C. 
A. Goessmann, Ph.D.,S. A. Goldschmidt, A.M., E.M., E. J. Hallock, Prof. C. A. Joy, Ph.D., 
J. P. Kimball, Ph.D., 0. G. Mason, H. Newton, E.M., Prof. Frederick Prime, Jr., Prof. Paul 
Schweitzer, Ph.D., Waldron Shapleigh, Romyn Hitchcock, and Elwyn Waller, E.M. From the 
thoroughness and completeness with which this department is conducted, it is believed that no 
periodical in either hemisphere more faithfully reflects the progress of the science, or presents a 
larger or more carefully garnered store of information to its readers. 



UrOWNES (GEORGE), Ph.D. 
A MANUAL OF ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY; Theoretical and 

Practical. With one hundred and ninety-seven illustrations. A new American, from the 

tenth and revised London edition. Edited by Robert Bridges, M. D. In one large 

royal 12mo. volume, of about 850 pp., extra cloth, $2 75 ; leather, $3 25. (Lately Issued.) 

This work is so well known that it seems almost] other work that has greater claims on the physician, 

superfluous for us to speak about it. It has been a I pharmaceutist, or student, than this. We cheerfully 



favorite text-book with medical students for years 
and its popularity has in no respect diminished 
Whenever we have been consulted by medical stu- 
dents, as has frequently occurred, what treatise on 
chemistry they should procure, we have always re- 
commended Fownes', for we regarded it as the best. 
There is no work that combines so many excellen- 



recommend it as the best text-book on elementary 
chemistry, and bespeak for it the careful attention 
of students of pharmacy. — Chicago Pharmacist, Aug. 
1869. 

Here is a new edition which has been long watched 
for by eager teachers of chemistry. In its new garb, 



ces. It is of convenient size, not prolix, of plain! and under the editorship of Mr. Watts, it has resumed 
perspicuous diction, contains all the most recent ' V ts j>. ld Placets the most successful of text-books.- 
discoveries, and is of moderate price.— Cincinnati j Indian Medical Gazette, Jan. 1, 1869 
Med. Repertory, Aug. 1869. It win continue, as heretofore, to hold the first rank 

Large additions have been made, especially in the ! is a text-book for studeuts of medicine. — Chicago 
department of organic chemistry, and we know of no ' ifed. Examiner, Aug. 1869. 



JfifOHLER AND FIT TIG. 

rr OUTLINES OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Translated with Ad- 

ditions from the Eighth German Edition. By Ira Remsen, M.D., Ph.D., Professor of 

Chemistry and Physics in Williams College, Mass. In one handsome volume, royal 12mo. 

of 550 pp. extra cloth, $3. (Just Ready.) 

As the numerous editions of the original attest, this work is the leading text-book and standard 

authority throughout Germany on its important and intricate subject — a position won for it by 

the clearness and conciseness which are its distinguishing characteristics. The translation has 

been executed with the approbation of Profs. Wbhler and Fittig, and numerous additions and 

alterations have been introduced, so as to render it in every respect on a level with the most 

advanced condition of the science. 

f>0 WMAN (JOHN E.) , M. D. 

PRACTICAL HANDBOOK OF MEDICAL CHEMISTRY. Edited 

by C. L. Bloxam, Professor of Practical Chemistry in King's College, London. Sixth 
American, from the fourth and revised English Edition. In one neat volume, royal 12mo., 
pp. 351, with numerous illustrations, extra cloth. $2 25. 
J£Y THE SAME AUTHOR. (Now Ready.) 

INTRODUCTION TO PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY, INCLUDING 

ANALYSIS. Sixth American, from the sixth and revised London edition. With numer- 
ous illustrations. In one neat vol., royal 12mo., extra cloth. $2 25. 

KUAPP'S TECHNOLOGY; or Chemistry Applied to I very handsome octavo volumes, with 500 wood 
the Arts, and to Manufactures. With American engravings, extra cloth, $6 00. 
additions, by Prof. Waltek B. Johsson. In two | 



12 Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Mat. Med. and Therapeutics). 



pARRlSH {EDWARD), 

Professor of Materia Medica in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. 

A TREATISE ON PHARMACY. Designed as a Text-Book for the 

Student, and as a Guide for the Physician and Pharmaceutist. With many Formulae and 
Prescriptions. Fourth Edition, thoroughly revised, by Thomas S. Wiegand. In one 
handsome octavo volume, with several hundred illustrations, tin Press.) 
The delay in the appearance of the new U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and the sudden death of the au- 
thor, have postponed the preparation of this new edition beyond the period expected. The notes 
and memoranda left by Mr. Parrish have been placed in the hands of the editor, Mr. Wieganrl, 
who has labored assiduously to embody in the work all the improvements of pharmaceutical sci- 
ence which have been introduced during ohe last ten years. It is therefore hoped that the new 
edition will fully maintain the reputation which the volume has heretofore enjoyed as a standard 
text-book and work of reference for all engaged in the preparation and dispensing of medicines. 
We have examined this large volume with a good not wish it to he understood as very extravagant 



deal of care, and find that the author has completely 
exhausted the subject upon which he treats ; a more 
complete work, we think, it would be impossible to 
find. To the student of pharmacy the work is indis- 
pensable ; indeed, so far as we know, it is the only one 
of its kind in existence, and even to the physician or 
medical student who can spare five dollars to pur- 
chase it, we feel sure the practical information he 
will obtain will more than compensate him for the 
outlay. — Canada Med. Journal, Nov. 1864. 

The medical student and the practising physician 
will find the volume of inestimable worth for study 
and reference. — San Francisco Med. Press, July, 
1864. 

When we say that this book is in some respects 
the best which has been published on the subject in 
the English language for a great many years, we do 



praise. In truth, it is not so much the best as the 
only book. — The London Chemical News. 

An attempt to furnish anything like an analysis of 
Parrish' s very valuable and elaborate Treatise on 
Practical Pharmacy would require more space than 
we have at our disposal. This, however, is not so 
much a matter of regret, inasmuch as it would be 
difficult to think of any point, however minute and 
apparently trivial, connected with the manipulation 
of pharmaceutic substances or appliances which has 
not been clearly and carefully discussed in this vol- 
ume. Want of space prevents our enlarging further 
on this valuable work, and we must conclude by a 
simple expression of our hearty appreciation of its 
merits. — Dublin Quarterly Jour, of Medical Seienc t, 
August, 1864. 



OTILLE [ALFRED), M.D., 

*J Professor of Theory and Practice of Medicine in the University of Penna. 

THERAPEUTICS AND MATERIA MEDICA; a Systematic Treatise 

on the Action and Uses of Medicinal Agents, including their Description and History 
Fourth edition, revised and enlarged. In two large and handsome octavo volumes. {Pre- 
paring.) 



Dr. Stille's splendid work on therapeutics and ma- 
teriatotedica. —London Med. Times, April 8, 1865. 

Dr. Stille stands to-day one of the best and most 
honored representatives at home and abroad, of Ame- 
rican medicine ; and these volumes, a library in them- 
selves, a treasure-house for every studious physician, 
assure his fame even had he done nothing more. — The 
Western Journal of Medicine, Dec. 1868. 

We regard this work as the best one on Materia 
Medica in the English language, and as such it de- 
serves the favor it has received. — Am. Journ. Medi- 
cal Sciences, July 1868. 

We need not dwell on the merits of the third edition 
of this magnificently conceived work. It is the work 
on Materia Medica, in which Therapeutics are prima- 
rily considered — the mere natural history of drugs 
being briefly disposed of. To medical practitioners 
this is a very valuable conception. It is wonderful 
how much of the riches of the literature of Materia 
Medica has been condensed into this book. The refer- 
ences alone would make it worth possessing. But it 
is not a mere compilation. The writer exercises a 
good judgment of his own on the great doctrines and 
points of Therapeutics. For purposes of practice, 
Stille's book is almost unique as a repertory of in- 
formation, empirical and scientific, on the actions and 
uses of medicines. — London Lancet, Oct. 31, 1868. 

Through the former editions, the professional world 
Is well acquainted with this work. At home and 



abroad its reputation as a standard treatise on Materia 
Medica is securely established. It is second to no 
work on the subject in the English tongue, and, in- 
deed, is decidedly superior, in some respects, to any 
other. — Pacific Med. and Surg. Journal, July, 1868. 

Stille's Therapeutics is incomparably the best work 
on the subject.— N. Y. Med. Gazette, Sept. 26, 1868. 

Dr. Still6's work is becoming the best known of any 
of our treatises on Materia Medica. . . . One of the 
most valuable works in the language on the subjects 
of which it treats. — N. T. Med. Journal, Oct. 1868. 

The rapid exhaustion of two editions of Prof. Still6'» 
scholarly work, and the consequent necessity for a 
third edition, is sufficient evidence of the high esti- 
mate placed upon it by the profession. It is no exag- 
geration to say that there is no superior work upoa 
the subject in the English language. The present 
edition is fully up to the most recent advance in the 
science and art of therapeutics. — Leavenworth Medi- 
cal Herald, Aug. 1868. 

The work of Prof. Still6 has rapidly taken a high 
place in professional esteem, and to say that a third 
edition is demanded and now appears before us, suffi- 
ciently attests the firm position this treatise has ma&o 
for itself. As a work of great research, and scholar- 
ship, it is safe to say we have nothing superior. It in 
exceedingly full, and the busy practitioner will find 
ample suggestions upon almost every important point 
of therapeutics. — Cincinnati Lancet, Aug. 1868. 



/GRIFFITH [ROBERT E.), M.D. 



A UNIVERSAL FORMULARY, Containing the Methods of Pre- 

paring and Administering Officinal and other Medicines. The whole adapted to Physicians 
and Pharmaceutists. Third edition, thoroughly revised, with numerous additions, bj John 
M. Maisch, Professor of Materia Medica in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. In one 
large and handsome octavo volume of about 800 pages : cloth, $4 50 ; leather, $5 50. (Jvisi 
Ready.) 
Under the care of Prof. Maisch this favorite work has been thoroughly revised, introducing all 
the changes prescribed in the new editions of the Pharmacopoeias of the U. States, Great Britain, 
France, Germany, &c. Notwithstanding the omission of all matter rendered obsolete by the ad- 
vance of science, and the most careful condensation, the volume will be found enlarged by nearly 
one hundred and fifty pages. 
We know of none in our language, or any other, so comprehensive ia its details. — London Laziest. 
One of the most complete works of the kind in any language. — Edinburgh Med. Journal. 
We are not cognizant of the existence of a parallel work.— London Med. Gazette. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications— {Mat. Med. and Therapeutics). 13 

p ERE IRA {JONATHAN), M.D., F.R.S. and L.S. 

MATERIA MEDIC A AND THERAPEUTICS; being an Abridg- 
ment of the late Dr. Pereira's Elements of Materia Medica, arranged in conformity with 
the British Pharmacopoeia, and adapted to the use of Medical Practitioners, Chemists and 
Druggists, Medical and Pharmaceutical Students, &c. By F. J. Farre, M.D , Senior 
Physician to St. Bartholomew's Hospital, and London Editor of the British Pharmacopoeia ; 
assisted by Robert Bentley, M.R.C.S., Professor of Materia Medica and Botany to the 
Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain; and by Robert Warington, F.R.S. , Chemical 
Operator to the Society of Apothecaries. With numerous additions and references to the 
United States Pharmacopoeia, by Horatio C. Wood, M.D., Professor of Botany in the 
University of Pennsylvania. In one large and handsome octavo volume of 1040 closely 
printed pages, with 236 illustrations, extra cloth, $7 00; leather, raised bands, $8 00 
The task of the American editor haa evidently been , poeia, none will be more acceptable to the student 
no sinecure, for not only has he given to us all that and practitioner than the present. Pereira's Materia 
is contained in the abridgment useful for our pur- , Medica had long ago asserted for itself the position of 
poses, but by a careful and judicious embodiment of being the most complete work on the subject in ths 
over a hundred new remedies has increased the size English language. But its very completeness stood 
of the former work fully one-third, besides adding in the way of its success. Except in the way of refer- 



xnany new illustrations, some of which are original. 
We unhesitatingly say that by so doing he has pro- 
portionately increased the value, not only of the con- 
densed edition, but has extended the applicability of 
the great original, and has placed his medical coun- 
trymen under lasting obligations to him. The Ame- 
rican physician now has all that is needed in the 
shape of a complete treatise on materia medica, and 
the medical student has a text-book which, for prac- 
tical utility and intrinsic worth, stands unparalleled. 
Although of considerable size, it is none too large for 
the purposes for which it has been intended , and every 
medical man should, in justice to himself, spare a 
place for it upon his book-shelf, resting assured that 
the more he consults it the better he will be satisfied 
of its excellence.— N. Y. Med. Record, Nov. 15, 1866. 

It will fill a place which no other work can occupy 
iu the library of the physician, etudeut, and apothe- 
cary. — Boston Med. and Surg. Journal, Nov. 8, 1866. 

Of the many works on Materia Medica which have 
appeared since the issuing of the British Pharmaco- 



ence, or to those who made a special study of Materia 
Medica, Dr. Pereira's work was too full, and its pe- 
rusal required an amount of time which few had at 
their disposal. Dr. Farre has very judiciously availed 
himself of the opportunity of the publication of the 
new Pharmacopoeia, bybrinsjingout an abridged edi- 
tion of the great work. This edition of Pereira is by 
no means a mere abridged re-issue, but contains many 
improvements, both in the descriptive and thera- 
peutical departments. We can recommend it as a 
very excellent and reliable text-book.— Edinburgh 
Med. Journal, February, 1S66. 

The reader cannot fail to be impressed, at a glance, 
with the exceeding value of this work as a compend 
of nearly all useful knowledge on the materia medica. 
We are greatly indebted to Professor Wood for his 
adaptation of it to our meridian. Without his emen- 
dations and additions it would lose much of its value 
to the American student. With them it is an Ameri- 
can book. — Pacific Medical and Surgical Journal, 
December. 1S66. 



JjjLLIS {BENJAMIN), M.D. 

THE MEDICAL FORMULARY: being a Collection of Prescriptions 

derived from the writings and practice of many of the most eminent physicians of America 
and Europe. Together with the usual Dietetic Preparations and Antidotes for Poisons. The 
whole accompanied with a few brief Pharmaceutic and Medical Observations. Twelfth edi- 
tion, carefully revised and much improved by Albert H. Smith, M.D. In one volume 8ve». 
of 376 pages, extra cloth, $3 00. (Lately Published.) 
This work has remained for some time out of print, owing to the anxious care with which the 
Editor has sought to render the present edition worthy a continuance of the very remarkable 
favor which has carried the volume to the unusual honor of a Twelfth Edition. He has sedu- 
lously endeavored to introduce in it all new preparations and combinations deserving of confidence, 
besides adding two new classes, Antemetics and Disinfectants, with brief references to the inhalation 
of atomized fluids, the nasal douche of Thudichum, suggestions upon the method of hypodermic 
injection, the administration of anaesthetics, &g. &g. To accommodate these numerous additions, 
he has omitted much which the advance of science has rendered obsolete or of minor importance, 
notwithstanding which the volume has been increased by more than thirty pages. A new feature 
will be found in a copious Index of Diseases and their remedies, which cannot but increase the 
value of the work as a suggestive book of reference for the working practitioner. Every precaution 
has been taken to secure the typographical accuracy so necessary in a work of this nature, and it 
is hoped that the new edition will fully maintain the position which " Ellis' Formulary" has 
long occupied. 



ff ARSON {JOSEPH), M.D., 

*S Professor of Materia Med,ica and Pharmacy in the University of Pennsylvania, &c. 

SYNOPSIS OF THE COURSE OF LECTURES ON MATERIA 

MEDICA AND PHARMACY, delivered in the University of Pennsylvania. With three 
Lectures on the Modus Operandi of Medicines. Fourth and revised edition, extra cloth, 
$3 00. 






DUNGLISON'S NEW REMEDIES, WITH FORMUL2E 
FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND ADMINISTRA- 
TION. Seventh edition, with extensive additions. 
One vol. 8vo., pp. 770; extra cloth. $4 00. 

BOYLE'S MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEU- 
TICS. Edited by Joseph Carson, M. D. With 
ninety-eight illustrations. 1 vol. Svo., pp. 700, ex- 
tra cloth. $3 00. 

CHRISTISON'S DISPENSATORY. With copious ad- 
ditions, and 213 large wood-engravings. By B. 



One vol. 8vo., pp. loon ; 



Eglesfeld Griffith, M.D. 
extra cloth. $4 00. 

CARPENTER'S PRIZE ESSAY ON THE USE OF 
Alcoholic Liquors in Health and Disease. New 
edition, with a Preface hy D. F. Condte, M.D.. and 
explanations of scientific words. In one neat 12mo 
volume, pp. 178, extra cloth. 60 cents. 

Db JONGH ON THE THREE KINDS OF COD-LIVER. 
Oil, with their Chemical and Therapentie Pro- 
perties 1 vol. 12mo., cloth. 75 cents. 



14 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Pathology, Sc). 



JPENW1CK (SAMUEL), M.D., 

Assistant Physician to the London Hospital. 

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE TO MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS. From Hie 

Third Revised and Enlarged English Edition . With eighty-four illustrations on wooJ. 
In one very handsome volume, royal 12mo., cloth, $2 25. (Now Ready.) 

The very great success which this work has obtained in England, shows that it has supplied an 
admitted want among elementary books for the guidance of students and junior practitioners. 
Taking up in order each portion of the body or class of disease, the author has endeavored to 
present in simple language the value of symptoms, so as to lead the student to a correct appreci- 
ation of the pathological changes indicated by them. The latest investigations have been care- 
fully introduced into the present edition, so that it may fairly be considered as on a level with 
the most advanced condition of medical science. The arrangement adopted may be seen from the 
subjoined 

coisriDEnsrsEiD s>TJj*rnjLj±Tt.-Y of contents. 

Chapter I. Introductory. II. Diseases of the Heart and Pericardium. III. Diseases of the 
Lungs. IV. Diseases of the Throat and Larynx. V. Diseases of the Kidneys. VI. Diseases of 
the Liver. VII. Diseases of the Stomach. VIII. Diseases of the Peritoneum and Intestines. 
IX. Abdominal Tumors. X. Diseases of the Brain. XI. Fevers. XII. Rheumatism and Gout. 
XIII. Diseases of the Skin. 



G 



RE EN {T. HENRY), M.D., 

Lecturer on Pathology and Morbid Anatomy at Charing-Cvoss Hospital Medical School. 

PATHOLOGY AND MORBID ANATOMY. With numerous Illus- 
trations on Wood. In one very handsome octavo volume of over 250 pages, extra cloth, 
$2 50. (Lately Published.) 

thology and morbid anatomy. The author shows that 
he has been not only a student of the teachings of his 
confreres in this branch of science, but a practical 
and conscientious laborer in the post-mortem cham- 
ber. The work will prove a useful one to the great 
mass of students and practitioners whose time for de- 



We have been very much pleased by our perusal of 
this little volume. It is the only one of the kind with 
which we are acquainted, and practitioners as well 
as students will find it a very useful guide ; for the 
information is up to the day, well and compactly ar- 
ranged, without being at all scanty. — London Lan- 
cet, Oct. 7, 1871. 

It embodies in a comparatively small space a clear 
statement of the present state of our knowledge of pa- 



votiou to this class of studies is limited. 
of Syphilography, April, 1872. 



Am. Journ. 



GLUGE'S ATLAS OF PATHOLOGICAL HISTOLOGY. 
Translated, with Notes and Additions, by Joseph 
Leidy, M. D. In one volume, very large imperial 
quarto, with 320 copper-plate figures, plain and 
colored, extra cloth. $4 00. 

SIMON'S GENERAL PATHOLOGY, as conducive t< 
the Establishment of Rational Principles for th* 
Prevention and Cure of Disease. In one octavo 
volmme of 212 pages, extra cloth. $1 25. 

SOLLY ON THE HUMAN BRAIN ; its Structure, Phy- 
siology, and Diseases. From the Second and much 
enlarged London edition. In one octavo volume of 
500 pages, with 120 wood-cuts; extra cloth. $2 50. 

LA ROCHE ON YELLOW FEYER, considered in its 
Historical, Pathological, Etiological, and Therapeu- 



tical Relations. In two large and handsome octavo 
volumes of nearly 1500 pages, extra cloth. $7 00. 

HOLLAND'S MEDICAL NOTES AND REFLEC- 
TIONS. 1 vol. 8vo., pp. 500, extra cloth. $3 50. 

WHAT TO OBSERVE AT THE BEDSIDE AND AFTER 
Death in Medical Cases. Published under the 
authority of the London Society for Medical Obser- 
vation. From the second London edition. 1 vol. 
royal 12mo., extra cloth. $1 00. 

LAYCOCK'S LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES 
and Methods of Medical Observation and Re- 
search. For the use of advanced students and 
junior practitioners. In one very neat royal 12mo. 
volume, extra cloth. $1 00. 



G 



ROSS {SAMUEL D.), M. D., 

Professor of Surgery in the Jefferson Medical College of Philadelphia. 

ELEMENTS OE PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Third edition, 

thoroughly revised and greatly improved. In one large and very handsome octavo volume 
of nearly 800 pages, with about three hundred and fifty beautiful illustrations, of which a 
large number are from original drawings ; extra cloth. $4 00. 

TONES (C. HANDFIELD), F.R.S., and SIEV EKING [ED. H.), M.D., 

** Assistant Physicians and Lecturers in St. Mary's Hospital. 

A MANUAL OF PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. First American 

edition, revised. With three hundred and ninety-seven handsome wood engravings. In 
one large and beautifully printed octavo volume of nearly 750 pages, extra cloth, $3 50. 

qTURGES {OCTAVIUS), M.D. Cantab. 

O Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians, &c &c. 

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF CLINICAL MED- 

ICINE. Being a Guide to the Investigation of Disease, for the Use of Students. In one 

handsome 12mo. volume, extra cloth, ifi»l 25. (Now Ready.) 
Table op Contents. I. The Sort of Help needed by the Student at the Bedside. II. Some 
General Rules with Reference to the Examination of Patients. III. The Family and Personal 
History of the Patient. IV. Examination of the Functions. V. Examination of the Phenomena 
connected with the Brain and Cord. VI. The Physical Examination of the Chest, its Inspection 
and Palpation. VII. Percussion Applied to the Heart and Lungs. VIII. Auscultation of the 
Chest. IX. Examination of the Abdomen and of the Secretions. X. The Diagnosis. XI. The 
Treatment. 



Henry C Lea's Publications — {Practice of Medicine). 



15 



WLINT [AUSTIN), M.D., 

-*• Professor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine in Bellevue Med. College, 2V. Y. 

A TREATISE ON THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF 

MEDICINE ; designed for the use of Students and Practitioners of Medicine. Fourth 

edition, revised and enlarged. In one large and closely printed octavo volume of about 1100 

pages; handsome extra cloth, $6 00 j or strongly bound in leather, with raised bands, $7 00. 

(Just Issued.) 

Ey common consent of the English and American medical press, this work has been assigned 

to the highest position as a complete and compendious text-book on the most advanced condition 

of medical science. At the very moderate price at which it is offered it will be found one of the 

cheapest volumes now before the profession. 



Admirable and unequalled. — Western Journal of 
Medicine, Nov. 1869. 

Dr. Flint's work, though claiming no higher title 
than that of a text-book, is really more. He is a man 
of large clinical experience, and his book is full of 
such masterly descriptions of disease as can only be 
drawn by a man intimately acquainted with their 
various forms. It is not so long since we had the 
pleasare of reviewing his first edition, and we recog- 
nize a great improvement, especially in the general 
part of the work. It is a work which we can cordially 
recommend to our readers as fully abreast of the sci- 
ence of the day. — Edinburgh Med. Journal, Oct. '69. 

One of the best works of the kind for the practi- 
tioner, and the most convenient of all for the student. 
— Am. Journ. Med. Sciences, Jan. 1869. 

This work, which stands pre-eminently as the ad- 
vance standard of medical science up to the present 
time in the practice of medicine, has for its author 
one who is well and widely known as one of the 
leading practitioners of this continent. In fact, it is 
seldom that any work is ever issued from the press 
more deserving of universal recommendation. — Do- 
minion Med. Journal, May, 1S69. 

The third edition of this most excellent book scarce- 
ly needs any commendation from us. The volume, 
as it stands now, is really a marvel : first of all, it is 



9xcellently printed and bound — and we encounter 
that luxury of America, the ready-cut pages, which 
the Yankees are 'cute enough to insist upon — nor are 
these by any means trifles ; but the contents of the 
book are astonishing. Not only is it wonderful that 
any one man can have grasped in his mind the whole 
3Cope of medicine with that vigor which Dr. Flint 
shows, but the condensed yet clear way in which 
this is done is a perfect literary triumph. Dr. Flint 
is pre-eminently one of the strong men, whose right 
to do this kind of thing is well admitted ; and we say 
ao more than the truth when we affirm that he is 
very nearly the only living man that could do it with 
such results as the volume before us. — The London 
Practitioner, March, 1869. 

This is in some respects the best text-book of medi- 
cine in our language, and it is highly appreciated on 
the other side of the Atlantic, inasmuch as the first 
edition was exhausted in a few months. The second 
edition was little more than a reprint, but the present 
has, as the author says, been thoroughly revised. 
Much valuable matter has been added, and by mak- 
ing the type smaller, the bulk of the volume is not 
much increased. The weak point in many American 
works is pathology, 'but Dr. Flint has taken peculiar 
pains on this point, greatly to the value of the book. 
—London Med. Times and Gazette, Feb. 6, 1S69. 



BARLOWS MANUAL OF THE PRACTICE OF 
MEDICINE. With Additions by D. F. Condie, 
M. D. 1 vol. 8vo., pp. 600, cloth. $2 50. 



TODD'S CLINICAL LECTURES ON CERTAIN ACUTE 
Diseases. In one neat octavo volume, of 320 pages, 
extra cloth. $2 50. 



p A VY {F. W.), M. D., F. R. S., 

JL Senior Asst. Physician to and Lecturer on Physiology, at Guy's Hospital, &c. 

A TREATISE ON THE FUNCTION OF DIGESTION; its Disor- 
ders and their Treatment. From the second London edition. In one handsome volume, 
small octavo, extra cloth, $2 00. {Lately Published.) 
The work before us is one which deserves a wide treatise, and sufficiently exhaustive for all practical 
circulation. We know of no better guide to the study purposes.— Leavenworth Med. Herald, July, 1869. 
of digestion and its disorders.— St. Louis Med. and A very va i uaD i e work on the subject of which «t 
Surg. Journal, July 10, 1869. treats. Small, yet it is full of valuable information. 

A thoroughly good book, being a careful systematic — Cincinnati Med. Repertory, June, 1869. 



B 



Y THE SAME AUTHOR. (In Press.) 

ON FOOD, PHYSIOLOGICALLY, DIETETICALLY, AND THE- 
RAPEUTICALLY CONSIDERED. In one handsome ootavo volume. 



flHAMBERS ( T. K.), M. D., 

v-/ Consulting Physician to St. Mary's Hospital, London, die. 

THE INDIGESTIONS ; or, Diseases of the Digestive Organs Functionally 

Treated. Third and revised Edition. In one handsome octavo volume of 333 pages, extra 

cloth. $3 00. (Lately Published.) 
So very large a proportion of the patients applying 
to every geueral practitioner suffer from some form 
of indigestion, that whatever aids him in their man- 
agement directly "puts money in his purse," and in- 
directly does more than auythingelse to advance his 



i merit, we know of no more desirable acquisition to 
! a physician's library than the book before us. Fie 
i who should commit its contents to his memory would 
I find its price an investment of capital that returned 
! him a most usurious rate of interest. — N. Y. Medical 



reputation with the public. From this purely mate- Gazette, Jan. 28, 1871. 
rial point of view, setting aside its higher claims to | 



Tf Y THE SA ME A TJTHOR. (Lately Published) 

RESTORATIVE MEDICINE. An Harveian Annual Oration, deliv- 
ered at the Royal College of Physicians, London, on June 24, 1871. With Two Sequels. 
In one very handsome volume, small 12mo., extra cloth, $1 00. 



16 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Practice of Medicine), 



fTARTSHORNE {HENRY), M.D., 

AJL Professor of Hygiene in the University of Pennsylvania. 

ESSENTIALS OF THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MEDI- 
CINE. A handy-book for Students and Practitioners. Fourth edition, revised and im- 
proved. In one handsome royal ]2mo. volume. {Preparing.) 



This little epitome of medical knowledge has al- 
ready been noticed by us. It is a vade mecum of 
value, including in a short space most of what is es- 
sential in the science and practice of medicine. The 
third edition is well up to the present day in the 
modern methods of treatment, aud in the use of newly 
discovered drugs.— Boston Med. and Surg. Journal, 
Oct. 19, 1871. 

Certainly very few volumes contain so much pre- 
cise information within so small a compass. — N. T. 
Med. Journal, Nov. 1871. 

The diseases are conveniently classified; symptoms, 
causation, diaguosis, prognosis, and treatment are 
carefully considered, the whole being marked by 
briefness, but clearness of expression. Over 250 for- 



mulas are appended, intended as examples merely, 
not as guides for unthinking practitioners. A com- 
plete index facilitates the use of this little volume, in 
which all important remedies lately introduced, such 
as chloral hydrate and carbolic acid, have received 
their full share of attention. — Am. Journ. of Pharm., 
Nov. 1871. 

It is an epitome of the whole science and practice 
of medicine, and will be found most valuable to the 
practitioner for easy reference, and especially to the 
student in attendance upon lectures, whose time is 
too much occupied with many studies, to consult the 
larger works. Such a work must always be in great 
demand.— Cincinnati Med. Repertory, Nov. 1871. 



W: 



'ATSON {THOMAS), M. D., frc. 

LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF 

PHYSIC. Delivered at King's College, London. A new American, from the Fifth re- 
vised and enlarged English edition. Edited, with additions, and several hundred* illus- 
trations, by Henry Hartshorne, M.D., Professor of Hygiene in the University of Penn- 
sylvania. In two large and handsome 8vo. vols. Cloth, $9 00 ; leather, $11 00. (Just Issued .) 



At length, after many months of expectation, we 
have che satisfaction of finding ourselves this week in 
possession of a revised and enlarged edition of Sir 
Thomas Watson's celebrated Lectures. It is a sub- 
ject for congratulation and for thankfulness that Sir 
Thomas Watson, during a period of comparative lei- 
sure, after a long, laborious, and most honorable pro- 
fessional career, while retaining full possession of his 
high mental faculties, should have employed the op- 
portunity to submit his Lectures to a more thorough 
revision than was possible during the earlier and 
busier period of his life. Carefully passing in review 
some of the most intricate and important pathological 
and practical questions, the results of his clear insight 
and his calm judgment are now recorded for the bene- 
fit of mankind, in language which, for precision, vigor, 
and classical elegance, has rarely been equalled, and 
never surpassed. The revision has evidently been 
most carefully done, and the results appear in almost 
every page. — Brit. Med. Journ., Oct. 14, 1871. 

The lectures are so well known and so justly 
appreciated, that it is scarcely necessary to do 
more than call attention to the special advantages 
of the last over previous editions. In the revi- 
sion, the author has displayed all the charms and 



advantages of great culture and a ripe experience 
combined with the soundest judgment and sin- 
cerity of purpose. The author's rare combination 
of great scientific attainments combined with won- 
derful forensic eloquence has exerted extraordinary 
influence over the last two generations of physicians. 
His clinical descriptions of most diseases have never 
been equalled ; and on this score at least his work 
will live long in the future. The work will be 
sought by all who appreciate a'great book. — Amer. 
Journal of Syphilography, July, 1872. 

We are exceedingly gratified at the reception of 
this new edition of Watson, pre-eminently the prince 
of English authors, ou "Practice." We, who read 
the first edition as it came to us tardily and in frag- 
ments through the "Medical News and Library," 
shall never forget the great pleasure and profitwe 
derived from its graphic delineations of disease, its 
vigorous style and splendid English. Maturity of 
years, extensive observation, profound research, 
and yet continuous enthusiasm, have combined to 
give us in this latest edition a model of professional 
excellence in teaching with rare beauty in the mode 
of communication. But this classic needs no eulo- 
gium of ours.— Chicago Med. Journ., July, 1872. 



flUNGLISON, FORBES, TWEEDIE, AND CONOLLY. 

•^THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF PRACTICAL MEDICINE: comprising 

Treatises on the Nature and Treatment of Diseases, Materia Mediea and Therapeutics, 
Diseases of Women and Children, Medical Jurisprudence, &c. &c. In four large super-royal 
octavo volumes, of 3254 double-columned pages, strongly and handsomely bound in leather. 
$15; extra cloth. $11. 
*#* This work contains no less than four hundred and eighteen distinct treatises, contributed 
sixty-eight distinguished physicians. 



POX {WILSON), M.D., 

-*- Holme Prof, of Clinical Med., University Coll., London. 

THE DISEASES OF THE STOMACH: Being the Third Edition of 

the "Diagnosis and Treatment of the Varieties of Dyspepsia." Ke vised and Enlarged. 
With illustrations. In one handsome octavo volume. 
*%*■ Publishing in the " Medical News and Library" for 1873 and 1874. 

The present edition of Dr. Wilson Fox's very admi- i Dr. Fox has put forth a volume of uncommon ex- 
rable work differs from the preceding in that it deals cellence, which we feel very sure will take a high 
with other maladies than dyspepsia only.— London j rank among works that treat of the stomach.— Am. 
Mad. Times, Feb. 8, 1873. | Practitioner, March, 1873. 



JORINTON ( WILLIAM), M. D., F. R. S. 

•^LECTURES ON THE DISEASES OF THE STOMACH; with an 

Introduction on its Anatomy and Physiology. From the second and enlarged London edi- 
tion. With illustrations on wood In one handsome octavo volume of about 300 pages, 
extra cloth. $3 25. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Diseases of Lungs and Heart). 17 



T/JLINT {AUSTIN), M.D., 

-*• Professor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine in Bellevue Hospital Med. College, N. Y. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DIAGNOSIS, PATHOLOGY, 

AND TREATMENT OF DISEASES OP THE HEART. Second revised and enlarged 

edition. In one octavo volume of 550 pages, with a plate, extra cloth, $4. (Just Issued.) 

The author has sedulously improved the opportunity afforded him of revising this work. Portions 

of it have been rewritten, and the whole brought up to a level with the most advanced condition of 

science. It must therefore continue to maintain its position as the standard treatise on the subject,. 

Dr. Flint chose a difficult subject for his researches, 
and has shown remarkable powers of observation 



able for purposes of illustration, in connection with 
cases which have been reported by other trnstwortb y 
observers. — Brit, and For. Med.-Ohirurg. Review. 



and reflection, as well as great industry, in his treat- 
ment of it. His book must be considered the fullest 
and clearest practical treatise on those subjects, and 
should be in the hands of all practitioners and stu- 
dents. It is a credit to American medical literature. 
— Amer. Journ. of the Med. Sciences, July, 1860. 

We question the fact of any recent American author 
in our profession being more extensively known, or \ With more than pleasure do we hail the advent of 
more deservedly esteemed in this country than Dr. | this work, for it fills a wide gap on the list of text- 
Flint. We willingly acknowledge his success, more I books for our schools, and is, for the practitioner, the 
particularly in the volume on diseases of the heart, I most valuable practical work of its kind.— N. 0. Med. 
in making an extended personal clinical study avail- I News. 



In regard to the merits of the work, we have do 
hesitation in pronouncing it full, accurate, and judi- 
cious. Considering the present state of science, such 
a work was much needed. It should be in the hands 
of every practitioner. — Chicago Med. Journ. 



DY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE PHYSICAL EXPLORA- 
TION OF THE CHEST AND THE DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES AFFECTING THE 
RESPIRATORY ORGANS. Second and revised edition. In one handsome octavo volume 
of 595 pages, extra cloth, $4 50. 



Dr. Flint's treatise is one of the most trustworthy 
guides which he can consult. The style is clear and 
distinct, and is also concise, being free from that tend- 
ency to over-refinement and unnecessary minuteness 
which characterizes many works on the same sub- 
ject.— Dublin Medical Press, Feb. 6, 1867. 

The chapter on Phthisis is replete with interest ; 
and his remarks on the diagnosis, especially in the 
early stages, are remarkable for their acumen and 
great practical value. Dr. Flint's style is clear and 
elegant, and the tone of freshness and originality 



which pervades his whole work lend an additional 
force to its thoroughly practical character, which 
cannot fail to obtain for it a place as a standard work 
on diseases of the respiratory system. — London 
Lancet, Jan. 19, 1867. 

This is an admirable book. Excellent in detail and 
execution, nothing better could be desired by the 
practitioner. Dr. Flint enriches his subject with 
much solid and not a little original observation.— 
Ranking' s Abstract, Jan. 1867. 



FULLER {HENRY WILLIAM), M. D., 

-*■ Physician to St. George's Hospital, London. 

ON DISEASES OF THE LUNGS AND AIR-PASSAGES. Their 

Pathology, Physical Diagnosis, Symptoms, and Treatment. From the second and revised 
English edition. In one handsome octavo volume of about 500 pages, extra cloth, $3 50. 
Dr. Fuller's work on diseases of the chest was so accordingly we have what might be with perfect jus- 
favorably received, that to many who did not know ; tice styled an entirely new work from his pen, the 
the extent of his engagements, it was a matter of won- portion of the work treating of the heart and great 
der that it should be allowed to remain three years j vessels being excluded. Nevertheless, this volume is 
out of print. Determined, however, to improve it, of almost equal size with the first. — London Medical 
Dr. Fuller would not consent to a mere reprint, and , Times and Gazette, July 20, 1867. 



w- 



ILLIAMS (C. J. B.), M.D., 

Senior Consulting Physician to the Hospital for Consumption, Brompton, and 

LLIAMS {CHARLES T.), M.D., 

Physician to the Hospital for Consumption. 

PULMONARY CONSUMPTION; Its Nature, Varieties, and Treat- 

ment. With an Analysis of One Thousand cases to exemplify its duration. In one neat 
octavo volume of about 350 pages, extra cloth. (Just Isstied.) $2 50. 



He can still speak from a more enormous experi- 
ence, and a closer study of the morbid processes in- 
volved in tuberculosis, than most living men. He 
owed it to himself, and to the importance of the sub- 
ject, to embody his views in a separate work, and 
we are glad that he has accomplished this duty. 
After all, the grand teaching which Dr Williams has 
for the profession is to be found in his therapeutical 
chapters, and in the history of individual cases ex- 
tended, by dint of care, over ten, twenty, thirty, and 
even forty years. — London Lancet, Oct. 21, 1S71. 

His results are more favorable than thoss of any 



previous author; but probably there is no malady, 
the treatment of which has been so much improved 
within the last twenty years as pulmonary consump- 
tion. To ourselves, Dr. "Williams's chapters on Treat- 
ment are amongst the most valuable and attractive in 
the book, and would alone render it a standard work 
of reference. In conclusion, we would record our 
opinion that Dr. Williams's great reputation is fully 
maintained by this book. It is undoubtedly one of 
the most valuable works in the language upon any 
special disease.— Lond. Med. Times and Gaz., Nov. 
4, 1821. 



LA ROCHE ON PNEUMONIA. 1 vol. 8vo. f extra 
cloth, of 500 pages. Price $3 00. 

BUCKLER ON FIBRO-BRONCHITIS AND RHEU- 
MATIC PNEUMONIA. 1 vol. 8vo. $1 25. 

FISKE FUND PRIZE ESSAYS ON CONSUMPTION. 
I vol Svo,, extra cloth. $1 00. 



SMITH ON CONSUMPTION ; ITS EARLY AND RE- 
MEDIABLE STAGES. 1 vol. 8vo., pp. 254. $2 25. 

WALSHE ON THE DISEASES OF THE HEART AND 
GREAT VESSELS. Third American edition. la 
1 vol. 8vo., 420 pp., cloth. $3 00. 



18 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Practice of Medicine). 



A 



ROBERTS ( WILLIAM). M. D., 

Lecturer on Medicine in the Manchester School of Medicine. &c. 

PRACTICAL TREATISE ON URINARY AND RENAL DIS- 

EASES, including Urinary Deposits. Illustrated by numerous cases and engravings. Sec- 
ond American, from the Second Revised and Enlarged London Edition. In one large 
and handsome octavo volume of 616 pnges, with a colored plate j extra cloth, $4 50. (Jtist 
Issued.) 
The author has subjected this work to a very thorough revision, and has sought to embody in 
it the results of the latest experience and investigations. Although every effort has been made 
to keep it within the limits of its former size, it has been enlarged by a hundred pages, many 
new wood-cuts have been introduced, and also a colored plate representing the appearance of the 
different varieties of urine, while the price has been retained at the former very moderate rate. 
In every respect it is therefore presented as worthy to maintain the position which it has acquired 
as a leading authority on a large, important, and perplexing class of affections. A few notices 
of the first edition are appended. 

The pla.n, it will thus be seen, is very complete, ( diseases we have examined It is peculiarly adapted 

to the wants of the majority of American practltion- 



au I the manner in which it has been carried out 
iu the highest degree satisfactory. The characters 
of the different deposits are very well described, and 
the microscopic appearances they present are illus- 
trated by numerous well executed eDgravings It 
only remains to us to strongly recommend to our 
readers Dr. Roberts's work, as comainiug an admira- 
ble r^sumi of the present state of knowledge of uri- 
nary diseases, and as a safe and reliable guide to the 
clinical observer. — Edin. Med. Jour. 
The most complete and practical treatise upon renal 



ers from its clearness and simple announcement of the 
facts in relation to diagnosis and treatment of urinary 
disorders, and contains in condensed form the investi- 
gations of Bence Jones, Bird, Beale, Hassall, Prout, 
and a host of other well-known writers upon this sub- 
ject. The characters of urine, physiological and pa- 
thological, as indicated to the naked eye as well as by 
microscopical and chemical investigations, are con- 
cisely represented both by description and by well 
executed engravings. — Cincinnati Journ. of Med. 



J> ASH AM {W.R.), 31. D., 

J-J Senior Physician to the Westminster Hospital, &c. 

RENAL DISEASES : a Clinical Guide to their Diagnosis and Treatment. 

With illustrations. In one neat royal 12mo. volume of 304 pages. $2 00. 



The chapters on diagnosis and treatment are very 
good, and the student and young practitioner will 
find them full of valuable practical hints. The third 
part, on the urine, is excellent, and we cordially 
recommend its perusal. The author has arranged 
his matter in a somewhat novel, and, we think, use- 
ful form. Here everything can be easily found, and, 
what is more important, easily read, for all the dry 
details of larger books here acquire a new interest 
from the author's arrangement. This part of the 
book is full of good work.— Brit, and For. Medico- 
Chirurgical Review, July, 1870. 

The easy descriptions and compact modes of state- 



ment, render the book pleasing and convenient. — Am. 
Journ. Med. Sciences, July, 1870. 

A book that we believe will be found a valuable 
assistant to the practitioner and guide to the student. 
— Baltimore Med. Journal, July, 1870. 

The treatise of Dr. Basham differs from the rest in 
its special adaptation to clinical study, and its con- 
densed and almost aphorismal style, which makes U 
easily read and easily understood. Besides, the 
author expresses some new views, which are well 
worthy of consideration. The volume is a valuable 
addition to this department of knowledge.— Pacific 
Med. and Surg. Journal, July, 



L870. 



MORLAND ON KETENTION IN THE BLOOD OF THE ELEMENTS OF THE URINARY SECRETION. 
1 vol. 8vo., extra cloth. 75 cents. 

TONES (C. HANDFIELD), M. D., 

€/ Physician to St. Mary' 's Hospital, &c. 

CLINICAL OBSERVATIONS 

DISORDERS. Second American Edition. 
extra cloth, $3 25. 

Taken as a whole, the work before us furnishes a 
short but reliable account of the pathology and treat- 
ment of a class of very common but certainly highly 
obscure disorders. The advanced student will find it 
a l'ich mine of valuable facts, while the medical prac- 
titioner will derive from it many a suggestive hint to 
aid him in the diagnosis of "nervous cases," and in 
determining the true indications for their ameliora- 
tion or cure. — Amer. Journ. Med. Sci., Jan. 1867. 



ON FUNCTIONAL NERYOTT3 

In one hamdsome octavo volume of 348 pages, 

We must cordially recommend it to the profession 
of this country as supplying, in a great measure, a 
deficiency which exists in the medical literature of 
the English language. — New York Med. Journ., April, 
1867. 

The volume is a most admirable one— full of hints 
and practical suggestions. — Canada Med. Journal, 
April, 1867. 



ULADE {D. D.), M.D. 
DIPHTHERIA ; its Nature and Treatment, with an account of the His- 



tory of its Prevalence in various Countries, 
royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth. $1 25. 



Second and revised edition. In one nea* 



TJUDSON (A.), M. D., M. R. 1. A. 

•*~J- Physician to the Meath Hospital. 



Physician to the Meath Hospitc 

LECTURES ON THE STUDY OP FEVER. 

Cloth, $2 50. 



In one vol. 8vo., extra 



TYONS [ROBERT D.), K.O.G. 
A TREATISE ON FEVER; or, Selections from a Course of Lectures 

on Fever. Being part of a Course of Theory and Practice of Medicine. In one neat oofcavo 
volume, of 362 pages, extra eloth. $2 25. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Venereal Diseases, etc.). 



19 



f> (JUSTE AD [FREEMAN J.), M.D., 

-D Professor of Venereal Diseases at the Col. of Phys and Surg., New York, &c. 

THE PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT OF VENEREAL DIS- 

EASES. Including the results of recent investigations upon the subject. Third edition, 

revised and enlarged, with illustrations. In one large and handsome octavo volume of 

over 700 pages, extra cloth, $5 00 ; leather, $6 00. {Just Issued.) 

In preparing this standard work again for the press, the author has subjected it to a very 

thorough revision. Many portions have been rewritten, and much new matter added, in order to 

bring it completely on a level with the most advanced condition of syphilography, but by careful 

compression of the text of previous editions, the work has been increased by only sixty-four pages. 

The labor thus bestowed upon it, it is hoped, will insure for it a continuance of its position as a 

complete and trustworthy guide for the practitioner. 



It is the most complete book with which we are ac- 
quainted in the language. The latest views of the 
best authorities are put forward, and the information 
is well arranged — a great point for the student, and 
still more for the practitioner. The subjects of vis- 
ceral syphilis, syphilitic affections of the eyes, and 
the treatment of syphilis by repeated inoculations, are 
very fully discussed. — London Lancet, Jan. 7, 1871. 

Dr. Bumstead's work is already so universally 
known as the best treatise in the English language on 
venereal diseases, that it may seem almost superflu- 
ous to say more of it than that a new edition ha* been 
Issued. But the author's industry has rendered this 
new edition virtually a new work, and so merits as 



much special commendation as if its predecessors had 
not been published. As a thoroughly practical book 
on a class of diseases which form a large share of 
nearly every physician's practice, the volume before 
us is bv far the best of which we have knowledge. — 
N. Y. Medical Gazette, Jan. 28, 1871. 

It is rare in the history of medicine to find any one 
book which contains all that a practitioner needs to 
know; while the possessor of "Bumstead on Vene- 
real" has no occasion to look outside of its covers for 
anything practical counected with the diagnosis, his- 
tory, or treatment of these affections. — N. Y. Medical 
Journal, March, 1871. 



(1ULLERIER (A.), and 

V^ Surgeon to the Hdpital du Midi. 



T>UMSTEAD {FREEMAN J.), 

•*-* Professor of Venerea I Diseases in the College of 
Physicians and Surgeons, N. Y. 

AN ATLAS OF VENEREAL DISEASES. Translated and Edited by 

Freeman J. Bumstead. In one large imperial 4to. volume of 328 pages, double-columns, 
with 26 plates, containing about 150 figures, beautifully solored, many of them the size of 
life; strongly bound in extra cloth, $17 00 ; also, in five parts, stout wrappers for mailing, at 
$3 per part. {Lately Published.) 
Anticipating a very large safe for this work, it is offered at the very low price of Three Dol- 
lars a Part, thus placing it within the reach of all who are interested in this department of prac- 
tice. Gentlemen desiring early impressions of the plates would do well tTo order it without delay. 
A specimen of the plates and text sent free by mail, on receipt of 25 cents. 

which for its kind is more necessary for them to have. 



We wish for once that our province was not restrict- 
ed to methods of treatment, that we might say some- 
thing of the exquisite colored plates in this volume. 
—London Practitioner, May, 1869. 

As a whole, it teaches all that can be taught by 
means of plates and print. — London Lancet, March 
13, 1869. 

Superior to anything of the kind ever before issued 
on this continent. — Canada Med. Journal, March, '69. 

The practitioner who desires to understand this 
branch of medicine thoroughly should obtain this, 
the most complete and best work ever published. — 
Dominion Med. Journal, May, 1869. 

This is a work of master hands on both sides. M. 
Cullerier is scarcely second to, we think we may truly 
say is a peer of the illustrious and venerable Ricord, 
while in this country we do not hesitate to say that 
Dr. Bumstead, as an authority, is without a rival. 
Assuring our readers that these illustrations tell the 
whole history of venereal disease, from its inception 
to its end, we do not know a single medical work, 



—California Med. Gazette, March, li 

The most splendidly illustrated work in the lan- 
guage, and in our opinion far more useful than the 
French original. — Am. Journ. Med. Sciences, Jan. '69. 

The fifth and concluding number of this magnificent 
work has reached us, and we have no hesitation in 
saying that its illustrations surpass those of previous 
numbers. — Boston Med. and Surg. Journal, Jan. 14, 
1869. 

Other writers besides M. Cullerier have given ns a 
good account of the diseases of which he treats, but 
no one has furnished us with such a complete series 
of illustrations of the venereal diseases. There i«, 
however, an additional interest and value possessed 
by the volume before us ; for it is an American reprint 
and translation of M. Cullerier's work, with inci- 
dental remarks by one of the most eminent American 
syphilographers, Mr. Bumstead. — Brit, and For. 
Medico-Chir. Review, July, 1S69. 



IF 



in 



LL {BERKELEY), 

Surgeon to the Lock Hospital, London. 

ON SYPHILIS AND LOCAL CONTAGIOUS DISORDERS. 

one handsome octavo volume ; extra cloth, $3 25. {Lately Published.) 

to whom we would most earnestly recommend its 
study ; while it is no less useful to the practitioner. — 
St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journal, May, 1869. 



Bringing, as it does, the entire literature of the dis- 
ease down to the present day, and giving with great 
ability the results of modern research, it is in every 
respect a most desirable work, and one which should 
find a place in the library of every surgeon. — Cali- 
fornia Med. Gazette, June, 1869. 

Considering the scope of the book and the careful 
attention to the manifold aspects and details of its 
subject, it is wonderfully concise. All these qualities 
render it an especially Valuable book to the beginner, 



The most convenient and ready book of reference 
we have met with.— N. Y. Med. Record, May 1,1869. 

Most admirably arranged for both student and prac- 
titioner, no other work on the subject equals it ; it is 
more simple, more easily studied. — Buffalo Med. and 
Surg. Journal, March, 1869. 



7EISSL (H.), M.D. 

A COMPLETE TREATISE ON VENEREAL DISEASES. Trans- 

lated from the Second Enlarged German Edition, by Frederic It. Sturgis, M.D In one 
octavo volume, with illustrations. {Preparing.) 



20 



Henry C. Lea's Publications— -(Diseases of the Skin). 



W: 



JLSON {ERASMUS), F.R.S. 

ON DISEASES OF THE SKIN. With Illustrations on wood. Sev- 

enth American, from the sixth and enlarged English edition. In one large octavo volume 
of over 800 pages, $5. 

A SERIES OF PLATES ILLUSTRATING "WILSON ON DIS- 
EASES OP THE SKIN ;" consisting of twenty beautifully executed plates, of which thir- 
teen are exquisitely colored, presenting the Normal Anatomy and Pathology of the Skin, 
and embracing accurate representations of about one hundred varieties of disease, most of 
them the size of nature. Price, in extra cloth, $5 50. 
Also, the Text and Plates, bound in one handsome volume. Extra cloth, $10. 

No one treating skin diseases should be without 
a copy of this standard work. — Canada Lancet, 
A-ugust, 1863. 

We can safely recommend it to the profession as 
the best work on the subject now in existence in 
the English language. — Medical Times and Gazette. 



Such a work as the one before us is a most capital 
and acceptable help. Mr. Wilson has long been held 
as high authority in this department of medicine, and 
his book on diseases of the skin has long been re- 
garded as one ot the best text-books extant on the 
subject. The present edition is carefully prepared, 
and brought up in its revision to the present time. In 
this edition we have also included the beautiful series 
of plates illustrative of the text, and in the last edi- 
tion published separately. There are twenty of these 
plates, nearly all of them colored to nature, and ex- 
hibiting with great fidelity the various groups of 
diseases. — Cincinnati Lancet. 



Mr. Wilson's volume is an excellent digest of the 
actual amount of knowledge of cutaneous diseases ; 
it includes almost every fact or opinion of importance 
connected with the anatomy and pathology of the 
skin. — British and Foreign Medical Review. 



JDY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

THE STUDENT'S BOOK OF CUTANEOUS MEDICINE and Dis- 

eases or the skin. In one very handsome royal 12mo. volume. $3 50. {Lately Issued.) 



their value justly estimated; in a word, the work is 
fully up to the times, and is thoroughly stocked witii 
most valuable information. — New York Med. Record, 
Jan. 15, 1867. 

The most convenient mauual of diseases of the 
skin that can be procured by the student. — Chicago 
Med. Journal, Dec. 1866. 



fiTELIGAN (J. MOORE), M.D., M.R.I. A. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON DISEASES OF THE SKIN. 

Fifth American, from the second and enlarged Dublin edition by T. W. Belcher, M.D. 
In one neat royal 12mo. volume of 462 pages, extra cloth. $2 25. 

Fully equal to all the requirements of students and 
young practitioners. — Dublin Med. Press. 

Of the remainder of the work we have nothing be- 
yond unqualified commendation to offer. It is so far 
the most complete one of its size that has appeared, 
and for the student there can be none which can com- 
pare with it in practical value. All the late disco- 
veries in Dermatology have been duly noticed, and 
JJY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

ATLAS OF CUTANEOUS DISEASES. In one beautiful quarto 

volume, with exquisitely colored plates, &c, presenting about one hundred varieties of 
Extra cloth, $5 50. 

inclined to consider it a very superior work, com- 
bining accurate verbal description with sound views 
of the pathology and treatment of eruptive diseases. 
— Glasgow Med. Journal. 

A compend which will very much aid the practi- 
tioner in this difficult branch of diagnosis Taken 
with the beautiful plates of the Atlas, which are re- 
markable for their accuracy and beauty of coloring, 
t constitutes a very valuable addition to the library 



The diagnosis of eruptive disease, however, under 
all circumstances, is very difficult. Nevertheless, 
Dr. Neligan has certainly, "as far as possible," given 
a faithful and accurate representation of this class of 
diseases, and there can be no doubt that these plates 
will be of great use to the student and practitioner in 
drawing a diagnosis as to the class, order, and species 
to which the particular case may belong. While 
looking over 'the "Atlas" we have been induced to 
examine also the "Practical Treatise," and we are J of a practical man. — Buffalo Med. Journal. 



JJILLIER (THOMAS), M.D., 

^-- Physician to the Skin Department of University College Hospital, Sec. 

HAND-BOOK OF SKIN DISEASES, for Students and Practitioners. 

Second American Edition. In one royal 12mo. volume of 358 pp. With Illustrations. 
Extra cloth, $2 25. 

We can conscientiously recommend it to the stu- 
dent; the style is clear and pleasant to read, the 
matter is good, and the descriptions of disease, with 
the modes of a treatment recommended, are frequently 
illustrated with well-recorded cases. — London Med. 
Times and, Gazette, April 1, 1865. 



It is a concise, plain, practical treatise on the vari- 
ous diseases of the skin ; just such a work, indeed, 
as was much needed, both by medical students and 
practitioners. — Chicago Medical Examiner, May, 
1865. 



A NDERSON (McCALL), M.D., 

-£*- Physician to the Dispensary for Skin Diseases, Glasgow, &c. 

ON THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES OF THE SKIN. With an 

Analysis of Eleven Thousand Consecutive Cases. In one vol. 8vo. $1. {Just Ready,) 

The very practical character of this work and the extensive experience of the author, cannot 

fail to render it acceptable to the subscribers of the "American Journal op the Medical. 

Sciences." When completed in the "News and Library, " it will be issued separately in a 

neat octavo volume. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Diseases of Children's. 21 

StMITH {J. LE WIS), M. D., 

*3 Professor of Morbid Anatomy in the Bellevue Hospital Med. College, N. T. 

A COMPLETE PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF 

CHILDREN. Second Edition, revised and greatly enlarged. In one handsome octavo 
volume of 742 pages, extra cloth, $5; leather, $6. {Just Issued.) 
From the Preface to the Second Edition. 

In presenting to the profession the second edition of his work, the author gratefully acknow- 
ledges the favorable reception accorded to the first. He has endeavored to merit a continuance 
of this approbation by rendering the volume much more complete than before. Nearly twenty 
additional diseases have been treated of, among which may be named Diseases Incidental to 
Birth, Rachitis, Tuberculosis, Scrofula, Intermittent, Remittent, and Typhoid Fevers, Chorea, 
and the various forms of Paralysis. Many new formulae, which experience has shown to be 
useful, have been introduced, portions of the text of a less practical nature have been con- 
densed, and other portions, especially those relating to pathological histology, have been 
rewritten to correspond with recent discoveries. Every effort has been made, however, to avoid 
an undue enlargement of the volume, but, notwithstanding this, and an increase in the size of 
the page, the number of pages has been enlarged by more than one hundred. 

227 West 49th Street, New York, April, 1872. 

The work will be found to contain nearly one-third more matter than the previous edition, and 
it is confidently presented as in every respect worthy to be received as the standard American 
text-book on the subject. 



Eminently practical as well as judicious in its 
teachings. — Cincinnati Lancet and Obs., July, 1872. 

A standard work that leaves little to he desired. — 
Indiana Journal of Medicine, July, 1872. 

We know of no hook on this subject that we can 
more cordially recommend to the medical studeut 
and the practitioner. — Cincinnati Clinic, June 29, '72. 



We regard it as superior to any other single work 
on the diseases of infancy and childhood. — Detroit 
Rev. of Med. and Pharmacy, Aug. 1S72. 

We confess to increased enthusiasm in recommend- 
ing this second edition. — St. Louis Med. and Surg. 
Journal, Aug. 1872. 



ffONDIE (D. FRANCIS), M.D. 

^ A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF CHILDREN. 

Sixth edition, revised and augmented. In one large octavo volume of nearly 800 closely- 
printed pages, extra oloth, $5 25 ; leather, $6 25. {Lately Issued.) 



The present edition, which is the sixth, is fully up 
to the times in the discussion of all those points in the 
pathology and treatment of infantile diseases which 
have been brought forward by the German and French 



teaehers. As a whole, however, the work is the best 
American one that we have, and in its special adapta- 
tion to American practitioners it certainly has no 
equal. — New York Med. Record, March 2, 1868. 



VTEST [CHARLES), M.D., 

' * Physician to the Hospital for Sick Children, &c. 

LECTURES ON THE DISEASES OP INFANCY AND CHILD- 
HOOD. Fifth American from the sixth revised and enlarged English edition. In one 
large and handsome octavo volume. {Nearly Ready.) 
Of all the English writers on the diseases of chil- I living authorities in the difficult department of medi- 
dren, there is no one so entirely satisfactory to us as | cal science in which he is most widely known. — 
Dr. West. For years we have held his opinion as I Boston Med. and Surg. Journal, April 26, 1866. 
Judicial, and have regarded him as one of the highest | 



s 



J^T THE SAME AUTHOR. {Lately Issued.) 

ON SOME DISORDERS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN CHILD- 

HOOD; being the Lumleian Lectures delivered at the Royal College of Physicians of Lon- 
don, in March, 1871. In one volume, small 12mo., extra cloth, $1 00. 

MITH {EUSTACE), M. D., 

Physician to the Northwest London Free Dispensary for Sick Children. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE WASTING DISEASES OF 

INFANCY AND CHILDHOOD. Second American, from the second revised and enlarged 
English edition. In one handsome octavo volume, extra cloth, $2 50. {Lately Issued.) 

scribed as a practical handbook of the common dis- 
eases of children, so numerous are the affections con- 
sidered either collaterally or directly. We are 
acquainted with no safer guide to the treatment of 
children's diseases, and few works give the insight 
into the physiological and other peculiarities of chil- 
dren that Dr. Smith's book does.— Brit. Med. Journ., 
April 8, 1871. 



This is in every way an admirable book. The 
modest title which the author has chosen for i t scarce- 
ly conveys an adequate idea of the many subjects 
upon which it treats. Wasting is so constant an at- 
tendant upon the maladies of childhood, that a trea- 
tise upon the wasting diseases of children must neces- 
sarily embrace the consideration of many affections 
of which it is a symptom ; and this is excellently well 
done by Dr. Smith. The book might fairly be de- 



G 



VERS ANT {P.),M.D., 

Honorary Surgeon to the Hospital for Sick Children, Paris. 

SURGICAL DISEASES OF INFANTS AND CHILDREN. Trans- 
lated by R. J. Dunglison, M. D. In one neat octavo volume, extra cloth, $2 50. {Now 
' ) 



DEWEES ON THE PHYSICAL AND MEDICAL TEEATMENT OF CHILDREN. Eleventh edition. 1 toI. 
8vo. of 5-48 pages. $2 80. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications— (Diseases of Women), 



T 



HE OBSTETRICAL JOURNAL. 

THE OBSTETRICAL JOURNAL of Great Britain and Ireland; 

Including Midwifery, and the Diseases of Women and Infants. With an American 
Supplement, edited by Willtam F. Jenks, M.D. A monthly of about 80 octavo pages, 
very handsomely printed. Subscription, Five Dollars per annum. Single Numbers, 50 
cents each. 

Commencing with April, 1873, the Obstetrical Journal will consist of Original Papers by Brit- 
ish and Foreign Contributors ; Transactions of the Obstetrical Societies in England and abroad ; 
Reports of Hospital Practice; Reviews and Bibliographical Notices; Articles and Notes, Edito- 
rial, Historical, Forensic, and Miscellaneous; Selections from Journals; Correspondence, &c. 
Collecting together the vast amount of material daily accumulating in this important and ra- 
pidly improving department of medical science, the value of the information which it will pre- 
sent to the subscriber may be estimated from the character of the gentlemen who have already 
promised their support, including such names as those of Drs. Atthill, Robert Barnes, Henry 
Bennet, Thomas Chambers, Fleetwood Churchill, Matthews Duncan, Graily Hewitt, 
Braxton Hicks, Alfred Meadows, W. Leishman, Alex. Simpson, Tyler Smith, Edward J. 
Tilt, Spencer Wells, &c. &c. ; in short, the representative men of British Obstetrics and Gynae- 
cology. 

In order to render the Obstetrical Journal fully adequate to the wants of the American 
profession, each number will contain a Supplement devoted to the advances made in Obstetrics 
and Gynaecology on this side of the Atlantic. This portion of the Journal will be under the 
editorial charge of Dr. William F. Jenks, to whom editorial communications, exchanges, books 
for review, &c, may be addressed, to the care of the publisher. 

##'* Gentlemen desiring complete sets will do well to forward their orders without delay. 



/THOMAS {T. GAILLARD),M.D., 

•*■ Professor of Obstetrics, Ac, in the College of Physicians and Surgeons, N. Y, &c. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF WOMEN. Third 

edition, enlarged and thoroughly revised. In one large and handsome octavo volume of 
784 pages, with 246 illustrations. Cloth, $5 00; leather, $6 00. {Lately Issued.) 
The author has taken advantage of the opportunity afforded by the call for another edition of 
this work to render it worthy a continuance of the very remarkable favor with which it has been 
received. Every portion has been subjected to a conscientious revision, several tiew chapters 
have been added, and no labor spared to make it a complete treatise on the most advanced con- 
dition of its important subject. The present edition therefore contains about one-third more 
matter than the previous one, notwithstanding which the price has been maintained at the former 
very moderate rate, rendering this one of the cheapest volumes accessible to the profession. 

We are free to say that we regard Dr. Thomas the 



As compared with the first edition, five new chap- 
ters on dysmenorrhoea, peri-uterine fluid tumors, 
composite tumors of the ovar)', solid tumors of the 
ovary, and chlorosis, have been added. Twenty- 
seven additional wood-cuts have been introduced, 
many subjects have been subdivided, and all have 
received important interstitial increase. In fact, the 
book has been practically rewritten, and greatly in- 
creased in value. Briefly, we may say that we know 
of no book which so completely and concisely repre- 
sents the present state of gynaecology ; none so full 
of well-digested and reliable teaching; none which 
bespeaks an author more apt in research and abun- 
dant in resources.— N. Y. Med. Record, May 1, 1872. 

We should not be doing our duty to the profession 
did we not tell those who are unacquainted with the 
book, how much it is valued by gynaecologists, and 
how it is in many respects one of the best text-books 
on the subject we possess in our language. We have 
no hesitation in recommending Dr. Thomas's work as 
one of the most complete of its kind ever published. 
It should be in the possession of every practitioner 
for reference and for study. — London Lancet, April 
27, 1872. 

Our author is not one of those whose views ' ' never 
change." On the contrary, they have been modified 
in many particulars to accord with the progress made 
in this department of medical science : hence it has the 
freshness of an entirely new work. No general prac- 
titioner can afford to be without it. — St. Louis Med. 
and Surg Journal, May, 1872. 

Its able author need not fear comparison between 
it and any similar work in the English language ; 
nay more, as a text-book for students and as a guide 
for practitioners, we believe it is unequalled. In the 
libraries of reading physicians we meet with it 
oftener than any other treatise on diseases of women. 
We conclude our brief review by repeating the hearty 
commendation of this volume given when we com- 
menced : if either student or practitioner can get but 
one book on diseases of women, that book should be 
" Thomas." — Araer. Jour. Med. Sciences, April, 
1872. 



best American authority on diseases of women. Seve- 
ral others have written, and written well, but none 
have so clearly and carefully arranged their text and 
instruction as Dr. Thomas. — Cincinnati Lancet and 
Observer, May, 1S72. 

We deem it scarcely necessary to recommend this 
work to physicians as it is now widely known, and 
most of them already possess it, or will certainly do 
so. To students we unhesitatingly recommend it as 
the best text-book on diseases of females extant.— St. 
Louis Med. Reporter, June, 1869. 

Of all the army of books that have appeared of late 
years, on the diseases of the uterus and its appendages, 
we know of none that is so clear, comprehensive, and 
practical as this of Dr. Thomas', or one that we should 
more emphatically recommend to the young practi- 
tioner, as his guide. — California Med. Gazette, June, 
1869. 

If not the best work extant on the subject of which 
it treats, it is certainly second to none other. So 
short a time has elapsed since the medical press 
teemed with commendatory notices of the first edition, 
that it would be superfluous to give an extended re- 
view of what is now firmly established as the American 
text-book of Gynaecology.— N. Y. Med. Gazette, July 
17, 1869. 

This is a new and revised edition of a work which 
we z-ecently noticed at some length, and earnestly 
commended to the favorable attention of our readers. 
The fact that, in the short space of one year, this 
second edition makes its appearance, shows that the 
general judgment of the profession has largely con- 
firmed the opinion we gave at that time. — Cincinnati 
Lancet, Aug. 1869. 

It is so short a time since we gave a full review of 
the first edition of this book, that we deem it only 
necessary now to call attention to the second appear- 
ance of the work. Its success has been remarkable, 
and we can only congratulate the author on the 
brilliant reception his book has received. —N. Y. Med. 
Journal, April, 1869. ■ 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Diseases of Women). 



23 



JTODGE {HUGH L.), M.D., 

■*-■*■ Emeritus Professor of Obstetrics, &c, in the University of Pennsylvania. 

ON DISEASES PECULIAR TO WOMEN; including Displacements 

of the Uterus. With original illustrations. Second edition, revised and enlarged. In 
one beautifully printed octavo volume of 531 pages, extra cloth. $4 50. {Lately Issued.) 



From Prof. W. H. Btford, of the Rush Medical 
College, Chicago. 

The book bears the impress of a master band, and 
must, as its predecessor, prove acceptable to the pro- 
fession. In diseases of women Dr. Hodge has estab- 
lished a school of treatment that has become world- 
wide in fame. 

Professor Hodge's work is truly an original one 
from beginning to end, consequently no one can pe- 
ruse its pages without learning something new. The 
book, which is by no means a large one, is divided into 
two grand sections, so to speak : first, that treating of 
the nervous sympathies of the uterus, and, secondly, 
that which speaks of the mechanical treatment of dis- 
placements of that organ. He is disposed, as a non- 
believer in the frequency of inflammations of the 



uterus, to take strong ground against many of the 
highest authorities in this branch of medicine, and 
the arguments which he offers in support of his posi- 
tion are, to say the least, well put. Numerous wood- 
cuts adorn this portion of the work, and add incalcu- 
lably to the proper appreciation of the variously 
shaped instruments referred to by our author. As a 
contribution to the study of women's diseases, it is of 
great value, and is abundantlv able to stand on its 
own merits.— N. Y. Medical Record, Sept. 15, 1868. 

In this point of view, the treatise of Professor 
Hodge will be indispensable to every student in its 
department. The large, fair type and general perfec- 
tion of workmanship will render it doubly welcome. 
—Pacific Med. and Surg. Journal, Oct. 1868. 



WEST {CHARLES), M.D. 

LECTURES ON THE DISEASES OF WOMEN. Third American, 

from the Third London edition. In one neat octavo volume of about 550 pages, extra 
cloth, $3 75 ; leather, $4 75. 

As a writer, Dr. West stands, in our opinion, se- | seeking truth, and one that will convince the student 
cond only to Watson, the "Macaulay of Medicine;" 
he possesses that happy faculty of clothing instruc- 
tion in easy garments ; combining pleasure with 
profit, he leads his pupils, in spite of the ancient pro- 
verb, along a royal road to learning. His work is one 
which will not satisfy the extreme on either side, but 
it is one that will please the great majority who are 



that he has committed himself to a candid, safe, and 
valuable guide. — N. A. Med.-Ohirurg Review. 

We have to say of it, briefly and decidedly, that it 
is the best work on the subject in any language, and 
that it stamps Dr. West as the facile princeps of 
British obstetric authors. — Edinburgh Med. Journal. 



T>ARNES [ROBERT), M. D., F.R. C.P., 

J-* Obstetric Physician to St. Thomas's Hospital, A-c. 

A CLINICAL EXPOSITION OF THE MEDICAL AND SURGI- 
CAL DISEASES OF WOMEN. In one handsome octavo volume of about 800 pages, with 
169 illustrations. Cloth, $5 00; leather, $6 00. (Just U"ady.^ 
The very complete scope of this volume and the manner in which it has been filled out, may 
be seen by the subjoined Summary of Contents. 

Introduction. Chapter I. Ovaries ; Corpus Luteum. II. Fallopian Tubes. III. Shape of 
Uterine Cavity. IV. Structure of Uterus. V. The Vagina. VI. Examinations and Diagnosis. 
VII. Significance of Leucorrhoea. VIII. Discharges of Air. IX. Watery Discharges. X. Puru- 
lent Discharges. XI. Hemorrhagic Discharges. XII. Significance of Pain. XIII. Significance 
of Dyspareunia. XIV. Significance of Sterility. XV. Instrumental Diagnosis and Treatment. 
XVI. Diagnosis by the Touch, the Sound, the Speculum. XVII. Menstruation and its Disor- 
ders. XVIII. Amenorrhoea. XIX. Amenorrhoea (continued). XX. Dysmenorrhoea. XXI. 
Ovarian Dysmenorrhoea, &c. XXII. Inflammatory Dysmenorrhoea. XXIII. Irregularities of 
Change of Life. XXIV. Relations between Menstruation and Diseases. XXV. Disorders of Old 
Age. XXVI. Ovary, Absence and Hernia of. XXVII. Ovary, Hemorrhage, &o., of. XXVIII. 
Ovary, Tubercle, Cancer, &c, of. XXIX. Ovarian Cystic Tumors. XXX. Dermoid Cvsts of 
Ovary. XXXI. Ovarian Tumors, Prognosis of. XXXII. Diagnosis of Ovarian Tumors. XXXIII. 
Ovarian Cysts, Treatment of. XXXIV. Fallopian Tubes. Diseases of. XXXV. Broad Liga- 
ments, Diseases of. XXXVI. Extra-uterine Gestation. XXXVII. Special Pathology of Ute- 
rus. XXXVIII. General Uterine Pathology. XXXIX. Alterations of Blood Supply. XL. 
Metritis, Endometritis, &c. XLI. Pelvic Cellulitis and Peritonitis, &a.- XLII. Hematocele, &e. 
XLIII. Displacements of Uterus. XLIV. Displacements (continuerl). XLV. Retroversion and 
Retroflexion. XLVI. Inversion. XLVII. Uterine Tumors. XLVIII. Polypus Uteri. XLIX. 
Polypus Uteri (continued). L. Cancer. LI. Diseases of Vagina. LII. Diseases of the Vulva. 



CHURCHILL ON THE PUERPERAL FEVER AND 
OTHER DISEASES PECULIAR TO WOMEN. 1 vol. 
8vo., pp. 450, extra cloth. $2 50. 

DEWEES'S TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF FE- 
MALES. With illustrations. Eleventh Edition, 
with the Author's last improvements and correc- 
tions. In one octavo volume of 536 pages, with 
plates, extra cloth. $3 00. 

WEST'S ENQUIRY INTO THE PATHOLOGICAL 
IMPORTANCE OF ULCERATION OF THE OS 
UTERI. 1 vol. 8vo. f extra cloth. $1 25. 



MEIGS ON WOMAN: HER DISEASES AND THEIR 
REMEDIES. A Series of Lectures to his Class. 
Fourth and Improved Edition. 1 vol. 8vo., over 
700 pages, extra cloth, $5 00 ; leather, *6 00. 

MEIGS ON THE NATURE, SIGNS, AND TREAT- 
MENT OF CHILDBED FEVER. 1 vol. Svo., pp. 
365, extra cloth. $2 00. 

ASHWELL'S PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DIS- 
EASES PECULIAR TO WOMEN. Third American, 
from the Third and revised London edition. I vol. 
Svo., pp. 528, extra cloth. $3 50. 



24 



Henry C. Lea's Publications— {Midwifery). 



JTODGE {HUGH L.), M.D., 

•*■-*■ Emeritus Professor of Midwifery, &c, in the University of Pennsylvania, &e. 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF OBSTETRICS. Illus- 

trated with large lithographic plates containing one hundred and fifty-nine figures from 
original photographs, and with numerous wood-cuts. In one large and beautifully printed 
quarto volume of 550 double-columned pages, strongly bound in extra cloth, $14. 



We have examined Professor Hodge's work with 
great satisfaction ; every topic is elaborated most 
fully. The views of the author are comprehensive, 
and concisely stated. The rules of practice are judi- 
cious, and will enable the practitioner to meet every 
emergency of obstetric complication with confidence. 
— Chicago Med. Journal, Aug. 1864. 

More time than we have had at our disposal since 
we received the great work of Dr. Hodge is necessary 
to do it justice. It is undoubtedly by far the most 
original, complete, and carefully composed treatise 
on the principles and practice of Obstetrics which has 
ever been issued from the American press. — Pacific 
Med. and Surg. Journal, July, 1864. 



The work of Dr. Hodge is something more than a 
simple presentation of his particular views in the de- 
partment of Obstetrics ; it is something more than an 
ordinary treatise on midwifery ; it is, in fact, a cyclo- 
paedia of midwifery. He has aimed to embody in a 
single volume the whole science and art of Obstetrics. 
An elaborate text is combined with accurate and va- 
ried pictorial illustrations, so that no fact or principle 
is left unstated or unexplained. — Am. Med. Times, 
Sept. 3, 1864. 

"We should like to analyze the remainder of this 
excellent work, but already has this review extended 
beyond our limited space. We cannot conclude this 
notice without referring to the excellent finish of the 
work. In typography it is not to be excelled ; the 
paper is superior to what is usually afforded by our 
American cousins, quite equal to the best of English 
books. The engravings and lithographs are most 
beautifully executed. Th« work recommends itself 
for its originality, and is in every way a most valu- 
able addition to those on the subject of obstetrics. — 
Canada Med. Journal, Oct. 1864. 

It is very large, profusely and elegantly illustrated, 
and is fitted to take its place near the works of great 
obstetricians. Of the American works on the subject 
it is decidedly the best. — Edinb. Med. Jour., Dec. '64. 

#*# Specimens of the plates and letter-press will be forwarded to any address, free by mail, 
en receipt of six cents in postage stamps. 

TANNER {THOMAS H), M.D. 

ON THE SIGNS AND DISEASES OF PREGNANCY. First American 

from the Second and Enlarged English Edition. With four colored plates and illustrations 



We have read Dr. Hodge's book with great plea- 
sure, and have much satisfaction in expressing our 
commendation of it as a whole. It is certainly highly 
instructive, and in the main, we believe, correct. The 
great attention which the author has devoted to the 
mechanism of partui'ition, taken along with the con- 
clusions at which he has arrived, point, we think, 
conclusively to the fact that, in Britain at least, the 
doctrines of Naegele have been too blindly received. 
— Glasgow Med. Journal, Oct. 1864. 



T 



on wood. 



In one handsome octavo volume of about 500 pages, extra cloth, $4 25. 



The very thorough revision the work has undergone 
has added greatly to its practical value, and increased 
materially its efficiency as a guide to the student and 
to the young practitioner. — Am. Jottrn. Med. Sci., 
April, 1868. 

With the immense variety of subjects treated of 
and the ground which they are made to cover, the im- 
possibility of giving an extended review of this truly 
remarkable work must be apparent. We have not a 
single fault to find with it, and most heartily com- 
mend it to the careful study of every physician who 
would not only always be sure of his diagnosis ®f 



pregnancy, but always ready to treat all the nume- 
rous ailments that are, unfortunately for the civilized 
women of to-day, so commonly associated with the 
function.— N. Y. Med. Record, March 16 1868. 

We recommend obstetrical students, young and 
old, to have this volume in their collections. It con- 
tains not only a fair statement of the signs, symptoms, 
and diseases of pregnancy, but comprises in addition 
much interesting relative matter that is not to be 
found in any other work that we can name. n 
burgh Med Journal, Jan. 1868. 



■Edin- 



tt WAYNE {JOSEPH GRIFFITHS), M. D., 

**-? Physician-Accoucheur to the British General Hospital, &c. 

OBSTETRIC APHORISMS FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS COM- 
MENCING MIDWIFERY PRACTICE. Second American, from the Fifth and Revised 
London Edition with Additions by E. R. Hutchins, M. D. With Illustrations. In one 
neat 12mo. volume. Extra cloth, $1 25. {Now Ready.) 
*$* See p. 3 of this Catalogue for the terms on which this work is offered as a premium to 
subscribers to the "American Journal op the Medical Sciences." 



It is really a capital little compendium of the sub- 
ject, and we recommend young practitioners to buy it 
and carry it with them when called to attend cases of 
labor. They can while away the otherwise tedious 
hours of waiting, and thoroughly fix in their memo- 
ries the most impoi'tant practical suggestions it con- 
tains. The American editor has materially added by 
his notes and the concluding chapters to the com- 
pleteness and general value of the book. — Chicago 
Med. Journal, Feb. 1870. 

The manual before us contains in exceedingly small 
compass — small enough to darry in the pockei — about 
all there is of obstetrics, condensed into a nutshell of 
Aphorisms. The illustrations are well selected, and 
serve as excellent reminders of the conduct of labor — 
regular and difficult.— Cincinnati Lancet, April, '70. 

This is a mostadmirable little work, and completely 



answers the purpose. It is not only valuable for 
young beginners, but no one who is not a proficient 
in the art of obstetrics should be. without it, because 
it condenses all that is necessary to know for ordi- 
nary midwifery practice. We commend the book 
most favorably. — St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journal, 
Sept. 10, 1870. 

A studied perusal of this little book has satisfied 
us of its eminently practical value. The object of the 
work, the author says, in his preface, is to give the 
student a few brief and practical directions respect- 
ing the management of ordinary cases of labor ; and 
also to point out to him in extraordinary cases whea 
and how he may act upon his own responsibility, and 
when he ought to send for assistance.— iV. ¥. Medical 
Journal, May, 1870. 



IftTINCKEL {F.), 

' ' Professor and Director of the Gynaecological Clinic in the University of Rostock. 

A COMPLETE TREATISE ON THE PATHOLOGY AND TREAT- 
MENT OF CHILDBED, for Students and Practitioners. Translated, with the consent of 
the author, from the Second German Edition, by James Read Chad wick, M D. 
octavo volume. (Preparing.) 



In one 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Midvjifery). 



25 



TEISHMAN (WILLIAM), M.D., 

Regius Professor of Midwifery in the. University of Glasgow, &c. 

A SYSTEM OF MIDWIFERY, INCLUDING THE DISEASES OF 

PREGNANCY AND THE PUERPERAL STATE. In one large and very handsome oc- 
tavo volume of over 700 pages, with one hundred and eighty-two illustrations. Cloth, 
$5 00 ; leather, $6 00. {Just Ready.) 



This is one of a most complete and exhaustive cha- 
racter. We have gone carefully through it,!and there 
is no subject in Obstetrics which has not been con- 
sidered well and fully. The result is a work, not 
only admirable as a text-book,- but valuable as a work 
of reference to the practitioner in the various emer- 
gencies of obstetric practice. Take it all in all, we 
have no hesitation in saying that it is in our judgment 
the best English work on the subject. — London Lan- 
cet, Aug. 23, 1873. 

The work of Leishman gives an excellent view of 
modern midwifery, and evinces its author's extensive 
acquaintance with British and foreign literature ; and 
not only acquaintance with it, but wholesome diges- 
tion and sound judgment of it. He has, withal, a 
manly, free style, and can state a difficult and compli- 
cated matter with remarkable clearness and brevity. 
—hdin. Med. Journ., Sept. 1S73. 



It was written to supply a desideratum, and we will 
be much surprised if it does not fulfil the purpose of 
its author. Taking it as a whole, we know of no 
work on obstetrics by an English author in which the 
student and the practitioner will find the information 
so clear and so completely abreast of the present state 
of our knowledge on the subject.— Glasgow Med. 
Journ., Aug. 1S73. 

Dr. Leishman's System of Midwifery, which has 
only just been published, will go far to supply the 
want which has so loDg been felt, of a really good 
modern English text-book. Although large, as is in- 
evitable in a work on so extensive a subject, it is so 
well and clearly written, that it is never wearisome 
to read. Dr. Leishman's work may be confidently 
recommended as an admirable text-book, and is sure 
to be largely used. — Lond. Med. Record, Sept. 1S73. 



DAMSB0TRA3I [FRANCIS H.), M.D. 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF OBSTETRIC MEDI- 
CINE AND SURGERY, in reference to the Process of Parturition. A new and enlarged 
edition, thoroughly revised by the author. With additions by W. V. Keating, M. D., 
Professor of Obstetrics, <fcc, in the Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. In one large 
and handsome imperial octavo volume of 650 pages, strongly bound in leather, with raised 
bands ; with sixty-four beautiful plates, and numerous wood-cuts in the text, containing in 
all nearly 200 large and beautiful figures. $7 00. 



We will only add that the student will learn from 
It all he need to know, and the practitioner will find 
It, as a book of reference, surpassed by none other.— 
Stethoscope. 

The character and merits of Dr. Kamsbotham's 
work are so well known and thoroughly established, 
that comment is unnecessary and praise superfluous. 
The illustrations, which are numerous and accurate, 
are executed in the highest style of art. We cannot 
too highly recommend the work .to our readers. — St. 
Louis Med. and Surg. Journal. 



To the physician' 8 library it is indispensable, while 
to the student, as a text-book, from which to extract 
the material for laying the foundation of an education 
on obstetrical science, it has no superior. — Ohio Med. 
and Surg. Journal. 

When we call to mind the toil we underwent in 
acquiring a knowledge of this subject, we cannot but 
envy the student of the present day the aid which 
this work will afford him. — Am. Jour, of the Med. 
Sciences. 



/JHURCHILL [FLEETWOOD), M.D., M.R.LA. 

ON THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF MIDWIFERY. A new 

American from the fourth revised and enlarged London edition. With notes and additions 
by D. Francis Condie, M. D., author of a "Practical Treatise on the> Diseases of Chil- 
dren," &c. With one hundred and ninety-four illustrations. In one very handsome octavo 
volume of nearly 700 large pages. Extra cloth, $4 00 ; leather, $5 00. 

ha» been added whicn could be well dispensed with. 
An examination of the table of contents shows how 
thoroughly the author has gone over the ground, and 
the care he has taken in the text to present the sub- 
j ects in all their bearings, will render this new edition 
even more necessary to the ..obstetric student than 
were either of the former editions at the date of theii 
appearance. No treatise on ob -tetrics with which we 
are acquainted can compare favorably with this, in 
respect to the amount of material which has been 
gathered from evei'y source. — Boston Med. and Surg. 
Journal. 



These additions render the work still more com- 
plete and acceptable than ever; and with the excel- 
lent style in which the publishers have presented 
this edition of Churchill, we can commend it to the 
profession with great cordiality and pleasure.— Cin- 
cinnati Lancet. 

Few works on this branch of medical science are 
equal to it, certainly none excel it, whether in regard 
to theory or practice, and in one respect it is superior 
to all others, viz., in its statistical information, and 
therefore, on these grounds a most valuable work for 
the physician, student, or lecturer, all of whom will 
tind in it the information which they are seeking. — 
BrH. Am. Journal. 

The present treatise is very much enlarged and 
amplified beyond the previous editions but nothing 



There is no better text-book for students, or work 
of reference and study for the practising physician 
than this. It should adorn and enrich every medical 
library. — Chicago Med. Journal. 



MONTGOMERY ( W. F.), M.D., 

Professor of Midwifery in the King's and Queen's College of Physicians in Ireland. 

AN EXPOSITION OF THE SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF PREG- 

NANCY. With some other Papers on Subjects connected with Midwifery. From the second 
and enlarged English edition. With two exquisite colored plates, and numerous wood-cuts. 
In one very handsome octavo volume of nearly 600 pages, extra cloth. $3 75. 

RIGBY'S SYSTEM OF MIDWIFERY. With Notes improvements and corrections. In one octavo vol- 

and Additional Illustrations. Second American ume, extra cloth, of 600 pages. $3 50.1 

edition. One volume octavo, extra cloth, 422 pages MEIGS' OBSTETRICS: THE SCIENCE AND THE 

* 2 <><}. ART. Fifth edition. With 130 illustrations. 1 vol, 

DEWEES'S COMPREHENSIYE SYSTEM OF MID> 8vo. Extra cloth, $5 50 ; leather, $6 50. 
WIFERY. Twelfth edition, with the author's last 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Surgery). 



61 ROSS {SAMUEL D.), M.D., 
* Professor of Surgery in the Jefferson Medical College of Philadelphia. 

A SYSTEM OF SURGERY: Pathological, Diagnostic, Therapeutic, 

and Operative. Illustrated by upwards of Fourteen Hundred Engravings. Fifth edition, 
carefully revised, and improved. In two large and beautifully printed imperial octavo vol- 
umes of about 2300 pages, strongly bound in leather, with raised bands, $15. {Just Ready .) 
The continued favor, shown by the exhaustion of successive large editions of this great work, 
proves that it has successfully supplied a want felt by American practitioners and students. In the 
present revision no pains have been spared by the author to bring it in every respect fully up to 
the day. To effect this a large part of the work has been rewritten, and the whole enlarged by 
nearly one-fourth, notwithstanding which the price has been kept at its former very moderate 
rate. By the use of a close, though very legible type, an unusually large amount of matter is 
condensed in its pages, the two volumes containing as much as four or five ordinary octavos. 
This, combined with the most careful mechanical execution, and its very durable binding, renders 
it one of the cheapest works accessible to the profession. Every subject properly belonging to the 
domain of surgery is treated in detail, so that the student who possesses this work may be said to 
have in it a surgical library. 



It must long remain the most comprehensive work 
on this important part of medicine. — Boston Medical 
and Surgical Journal, March 23, 1865. 

We have compared it with most of our standard 
works, such as those of Erichsen, Miller, Fergusson, 
Syme, and others, and we must, in justice to our 
author, award it the pre-eminence. As a work, com- 
plete in almost every detail, no matter how minute 
or trifling, and embracing every subject known in 
the principles and practice of surgery, we believe it 
stands without a rival. Dr. Gross, in his preface, re- 
marks "my aim has been to embrace the whole do- 
main of surgery, and to allot to every subject its 
legitimate claim to notice;" and, we assure our 
readers, he has kept his word. It is a work which 
we can most confidently recommend to our brethren, 
for its utility is becoming the more evident the longer 
it is upon the shelves of our library.— Canada Med. 
Journal, September, 1865. 

The first two editions of Professor Gross' System of 
Surgery are so well known to the profession, and so 
highly prized, that it would be idle for us to speak in 
praise of this work.— Chicago Medical Journal, 
September, 1865. 

We gladly indorse the favorable recommendation 
of the work, both as regards matter and style, which 
we made when noticing its first appearance.— British 
and Foreign Medico-Chirurgical Review, Oct. 1865. 

The most complete work that has yet issued from 
the press on the science and practice of surgery.— 
London Lancet. 

This system of surgery is, we predict, destined to 
take a commanding position in our surgical litera- 
ture, and be the crowning glory of the author's well 
earned fame. As an authority on general surgical 
subjects, this work is long to occupy a pre-eminent 
place, not only at home, but abroad. We have no 



hesitation in pronouncing it without a rival in our 
language, and equal to the best systems of surgery in 
any language. — N. Y. Med. Journal. 

Not only by far the best text-book on the subject, 
as a whole, within the reach of American students, 
but one which will be much more than ever likely 
to be resorted to and regarded as a high authority 
abroad. — Am. Journal Med. Sciences, Jan. 1865. 

The work contains everything, minor and major, 
operative and diagnostic, including mensuration and 
examination, venereal diseases, and uterine manipu- 
lations and operations. It is a complete Thesaurus 
of modern surgery, where the student and practi- 
tioner shall not seek in vain for whai they desire. — 
San Francisco Med. Press, Jan. 1865. 

Open it where we may, we find sound practical in- 
formation conveyed in plain language. This book is 
no mere provincial or even national system of sur- 
gery, but a work which, while very largely indebted 
to the past, has a strong claim on the gratitude of the 
future of surgical science.— Edinburgh Med. Journal, 
Jan. 1865. 

A glance at the work is sufficient to show that the 
author and publisher have spared no labor in making 
it the most complete "System of Surgery" ever pub- 
lished in any country. — St. Louis Med. and Surg. 
Journal, April, 1865. 

A system of surgery which we think unrivalled in 
our language, and which will indelibly associate his 
name with surgical science. And what, in our opin- 
ion, enhances the value of the work is that, while the 
practising surgeon will find all that he requires in it, 
it is at the same time one of the most valuable trea- 
tises which can be put into the hands of the student 
seeking to know the principles and practice of this 
branch of the profession which he designs subse- 
quently to follow. — The Brit. Am.Journ., Montreal. 



DY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON FOREIGN BODIES IN THE 

AIR-PASSAGES. In 1 vol. 8vo. cloth, with illustrations, pp. 468. $2 75. 



SKEY'S OPERATIVE SURGERY. In 1 vol. 8vo. I GIBSON'S INSTITUTES AND PRACTICE OF SUR- 
cloth, of over 650 pages ; with about 100 wood-cats. [ gery. Eighth edition, improved and altered. With 
$3 25 i thirty-four plates. In two handsome octavo vol- 

COOPER'S LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND | umes, aboutl000pp.,leather,raiseu bands. $6 50. 

Practice of Surgery. In 1 vol. 8vo. cloth, 750 p. $2. 



liflLLER (JAMES), 

•+&JL L a t e Professor of Surgery in the University of Edinburgh, &c. 

PRINCIPLES OF SURGERY. Fourth American, from the third and 

revised Edinburgh edition. In one large and very beautiful volume of 700 pages, with 
two hundred and forty illustrations on wood, extra cloth. $3 75. 

B 



Y THE SAME AUTHOR. 

THE PRACTICE OF SURGERY. Fourth American, from the last 

Edinburgh edition. Revised by the American editor. Illustrated by three hundred and 
sixty-four engravings on wood. In one large octavo volume of nearly 700 pages, extra 
cloth. $3 75. 

OARGENT {F. W.\ M.D. 

° ON BANDAGING AND OTHER OPERATIONS OF MINOR 

SURQERY. New edition, with an additional chapter on Military Surgery. One handsome 
royal 12mo. volume, of nearly 400 pages, with 184 wood-cute. Extra cloth, $1 75. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Surgery). 27 

j^SHHURST {JOHN, Jr.), M.D., 

Surgeon to the Episcopal Hospital, Philadelphia. 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SURGERY. In one 

very large arid handsome octavo volume of about 1000 pages, with nearly 550 illustrations, 
extra cloth, $6 50; leather, raised bands, $7 50. (Just Issued.) 
The object of the author has been to present, within as condensed a compass as possible, a 
complete treatise on Surgery in all its branches, suitable both as a text-book for the student and 
a work of reference for the practitioner. So much has- of late years been done for the advance- 
ment of Surgical Art and Science, that there seemed to be a want of a work which should present 
the latest aspects of every subject, and which, by its American character, should render accessible 
to the profession at large the experience of the practitioners of both hemispheres. This has been 
the aim of the author, and it is hoped that the volume will be found to fulfil its purpose satisfac- 
torily. The plan and general outline of the work will be seen by the annexed 
CONDENSED SUMMARY OF CONTENTS. 
Chapter I. Inflammation. II. Treatment of Inflammation. III. Operations in general : 
Anaesthetics. IV. Minor Surgery. V. Amputations. VI. Special Amputations. VII. Effects 
of Injuries in General : Wounds. VIII. Gunshot Wounds. IX. Injuries of Bloodvessel?. X. 
Injuries of Nerves, Muscles and Tendons, Lymphatics, Bursae, Bones, and Joints. XI. Fractures. 
XII. Special Fractures. XIII. Dislocations. XIV. Effects of Heat and Cold. XV. Injuries 
of the Head. XVI. Injuries of the Back. XVII. Injuries of the Face and Neck. XVIII. 
Injuries of the Chest. XIX. Injuries of the Abdomen and Pelvis. XX. Diseases resulting from 
Inflammation. XXI. Erysipelas. XXII. Pyaemia. XXIII. Diathetic Diseases : Struma (in- 
cluding Tubercle and Scrofula); Rickets. XXIV. Venereal Diseases; Gonorrhoea and Chancroid. 
XXV. Venereal Diseases continued : Syphilis. XXVI. Tumors. XXVII. Surgical Diseases of 
Skin, Areolar Tissue, Lymphatics, Muscles, Tendons, and Bursae. XXVIII. Surgical Disease 
of Nervous System (including Tetanus). XXIX. Surgical Diseases of Vascular System (includ- 
ing Aneurism). XXX. Diseases of Bone. XXXI. Diseases of Joints. XXXII. Excisions. 
XXXIII. Orthopaedic Surgery. XXXIV. Diseases of Head and Spine. XXXV. Diseases of the 
Eye. XXXVI. Diseases of the Ear. XXXVII. Diseases of the Face and Neck. XXXVIII. 
Diseases of the Mouth, Jaws, and Throat. XXXIX. Diseases of the Breast. XL. Hernia. XLI. 
Special Herniae. XLII. Diseases of Intestinal Canal. XLIII. Diseases of Abdominal Organs, 
and various operations on the Abdomen. XLIV. Urinary Calculus XLV. Diseases of Bladder 
and Prostate. XLVI. Diseases of Urethra. XL VII. Diseases of Generative Organs. Index. 

Indeed, the work as a whole must be regarded as 
an excellent and concise exponent of modern sur- 
gery, and as such it will be found a valuable text- 
book for the student, and a useful book of reference 
for the general practitioner.— N. Y. Med. Journal, 
Feb. 1872. 

It gives us great pleasure to call the attention of the 
profession to this excellent work. Oar knowledge of 
its talented and accomplished author led us to expect 
from him a very valuable treatise upon subjects to 
which he has repeatedly given evidence of having pro- 
fitably devoted much time and labor, and we are in no 
way disappointed.— Phila. Mtd. Times, Feb. 1, 1872. 



Its author has evidently tested the writings and 
experiences of the past and present in the crucible 
of a careful, analytic, and honorable mind, and faith- 
fully endeavored to bring his work up to the level of 
the highest standard of practical surgery He is 
frank and definite, and gives us opinions, and gene- 
rally sound ones, instead of a mere resume of the 
opinions of others. He isconservative, but not hide- 
bound by authority. His style is clear, elegant, and 
s«holarly. The wtrk is an admirable text book, and 
$■ useful book of reference It is a credit to American 
professional literature, and one of the first ripe fruits 
of the soil fertilized by the blood of our late unhappy 
war.— N. Y. Med. Record, Feb. 1, 1S72. 



P 



IRRIE { WILLIAM), F. R. S. E., 

Professor of Surgery in the University of Aberdeen. 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SURGERY. Edited by 

John Neill, M. D., Professor of Surgery in the Penna. Medical College, Surgeon to the 
Pennsylvania Hospital, &c. In one very handsome octavo volume of 780 pages, with 316 
illustrations, extra cloth. $3 75. 



TJAMILTON {FRANK H.), M.D., 

Professor of Fractures and Dislocations, Ac, in Sellevue Hosp. Med. College, New York. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON FRACTURES AND DISLOCA- 

TIONS. Fourth edition, thoroughly revised. In one large and handsome octavo volume 
of nearly 800 pages, with several hundred illustrations. Extra cloth, $5 75 ; leather, $6 75. 
( Jttst Issued. ) 



It is not, of course, our intention to review in ex- 
tenso, Hamilton on "Fractures and Dislocations." 
Eleven years ago such review might not have been 
out of place; to-day the work is an authority, so well, 
so generally, and so favorably known, that it only 
remains for the reviewer to say that a new edition is 
just out, and it is better than either of its predeces- 
sors. — Cincinnati Clinic, Oct. 14, 1871. 

Undoubtedly the best work on Fractures and Dis- 
locations in the English language. — Cincinnati Med. 
Repertory, Oct. 1871. 

We have once more before us Dr. Hamilton's admi- 



rable treatise, which we have always considered the 
most complete and reliable work on the subject. As 
a whole, the work is without an equal in the litera- 
ture of the profession.— Boston Med. and Surg 
Journ., Oct. 12, 1871. 

It is unnecessary at this time to commend the book, 
except to such as are beginners i« the study of this 
particular branch of surgery. Every practical sur- 
geon in this country and abroad knows of it as a most 
trustworthy guide, and one which they, in common 
with us, would unqualifiedly recommend as the high- 
est authority in any language. — N. Y. Med. Record 
Oct. 16, 1871. 



MORLAND (W. W.), M.D. 

DISEASES OF THE URINARY ORGANS; a Compendium of their 

Diagnosis, Pathology, and Treatment. With illustrations In one large and handsome 
octavo volume of about 600 pages, extra cloth. $8 56. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Surgery). 



PRICHSEN {JOHN E.), 

•*-f Professor of Surgery in University College, London, etc. 

THE SCIENCE AND ART OF SURGERY; being a Treatise on Sur- 

gical Injuries, Diseases, and Operations. Revised by the author from the Sixth and 
enlarged English Edition. Illustrated by over seven hundred engravings on wood. In 
two large and beautiful octavo volumes of over 1700 pages, extra cloth, $9 00 ; leather, 
$11 00. {Just Ready.) 

Author's Preface to the New American Edition. 

1 ' The favorable reception with which the ' Science and Art of Surgery' has been honored by the 
Surgical Profession in the United States of America has been not only a source of deep gratifica- 
tion and of just pride to me, but has laid the foundation of many professional friendships that 
are amongst the agreeable and valued recollections of my life. 

"I have endeavored to make the present edition of this work more deserving than its predecessors 
of the favor that has been accorded to them. In consequence of delays that have unavoidably 
occurred in the publication of the Sixth British Edition, time has been afforded to me to add to this 
one several paragraphs which I trust will be found to increase the practical value of the work." 
London, Oct. 1S72. 

On no" former edition of this work has the author bestowed more pains to render it a complete and 
satisfactory exposition of British Surgery in its modern aspects. Every portion has been' sedu- 
lously revised, and a large number of new illustrations have been introduced. In addition to the 
material thus added to the English edition, the author has furnished for the American edition such 
material as has accumulated since the passage of the sheets through the press in London, so that 
the work as now presented to the American profession, contains his latest views and experience. 

The increase in the size of the work has seemed to render necessary its division into two vol- 
umes. Great care has been exercised in its typographical execution, and it is confidently pre- 
sented as in every respect worthy to maintain the high reputation which has rendered it a stand- 
ard authority on this department of medical science. 

These are only a few of the points in which the ; states in his preface, they are not confined to any one 
present edition of Mr. Erichsen's work surpasses its ; portion, hut are distributed generally through the 
predecessors. Throughout there is evidence of a \ subjects of which the work treats. Certainly one of 
laborious care and solicitude in seizing the passing i the most valuable sections of the book seems to us to 
knowledge of the day, which reflects the greatest I be that which treats of the diseases of the arteries 
credit on the author, and much enhances the value j and the operative proceedings which they necessitate, 
of his work. Wecanonly admire the industry which | In few text-books is so much carefully arranged in- 
has enabled Mr. Erichsen thus to succeed, amid the formation collected. — London Med. Times and Gaz., 
distractions of active practice, in producing emphatic- | Oct. 26, 1872. 

ally the book of reference and study for British prac- j The entire work, complete, as the great English 
ti tioners of surgery.— London Lancet, Oct. 26, 1 872. treatise on Surgery of our own time, is, we can assure 

Considerable changes have been made in this edi- our readers, equally well adapted for the most junior 
lion, and nearly a hundred new illustrations have student, and, as a book of reference, for the advanced 
been added. It is difficult in a small compass to point j practitioner. — Dublin Quarterly Journal. 
out the alterations and additions ; for, as the author i 



D 



RUITT {ROBERT), M.R.C.S., &c. 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MODERN SURGERY." 

A new and revised American, from the eighth enlarged and improved London edition Illus- 
trated with four hundred and thirty-two wood engravings. In one very handsome octavo 
volume, of nearly 700 large and closely printed pages. Extra cloth, $4 00 ; leather, $5 0(t. 

practice of surgery are treated, and so clearly and 
perspicuously, as to elucidate every important topic. 
We have examined the book most thoroughly, and 
Gan say that this success is well merited. His book, 
moreover, possesses the inestimable advantages of 
having the subjects perfectly well arranged and clas- 
sified, and of being written in a style at once clear 
and succinct. — Am. Journal of Med. Sciences. 



All that the surgical student or practitioner could 
desire. — Dublin Quarterly Journal. 

It is a most admirable book. We do not know 
when we have examined one with more pleasure. — 
Boston Med. and Surg. Journal. 



In Mr. Druitt's book, though containing only some 
seven hundred pages, both the principles and the 



j^SHTON (T. J.). 

ON THE DISEASES, INJURIES, AND MALFORMATIONS OF 

THE RECTUM AND ANUS ; with remarks on Habitual Constipation. Second American, 
from the fourth and enlarged London edition. With handsome illustrations. In one very 
beautifully printed octavo volume of about 300 pages. $3 25. 

T>IGELO W {HENRY J.), M. D., 

■*-* Professor of Surgery in the Massachusetts Med. College. 

ON THE MECHANISM OF DISLOCATION AND FRACTURE 

OP THE HIP. With the Reduction of the Dislocation by the Flexion Method. With 
numerous original illustrations. In one very handsome octavo volume. Cloth. $2 50. 
(Lately Issued.) 

TAWSON {GEORGE), F. R. C. S., Engl., 

"&-** Assistant Surgeon to the Royal London Ophthalmic Hospital, Moor fields, &c. 

INJURIES OF THE EYE, ORBIT, AND EYELIDS: their Imme- 

diate and Remote Effects. With about one hundred illustrations. In one very hand- 
some octavo volume, extra cloth, $3 50. 

It is an admirable practical book in the highest and best sense of the phrase. — London Medical Timed 
and Gazette, May 18, 1867. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — (Surgery). 



29 



T>RYANT {THOMAS), F.R.C.S., 

•*-* Surgeon to Guy's Hospital. 

THE PRACTICE OF SURGERY. With over Five Hundred En- 

gravings on Wood. In one large and very handsome octavo volume of nearly 1000 pages, 

extra cloth, $6 25 ; leather, raised hands, $7 25. (Just Ready.) 
Again, the author gives us his own practice, his 
own beliefs, and illustrates by his own cases, or those 
treated in Guy's Hospital. This feature adds joint 
emphasis, and a solidity to his statements that inspire 
confidence. One feels himself almost by the side of 
the surgeon, seeing his work and hearing his living 
words. The views, etc., of other surgeons are con 
sidered calmly and fairly 
adopted. Thus the work 

other writings ; it is not an encyclopaedia, but the 
plain statements, on practical points, of a man who 
has lived and breathed and had his being in the 
richest surgical experience. The whole profession 
owe a debt of gratitude to Mr. Bryant, for his work 
in their behalf. We are confident that the American 



profession will give substantial testimonial of their 
feelings towards both author and publisher, by 
speedily exhausting this edition. We cordially and 
heartily commend it to our friends, and think that 
no live surgeon can afford to be without it — Detroit 
Review of Med. and Pharmacy, August, 1873. 

As a manual of the practice of surgery for the use 
of the student, we do not hesitate to pronounce Mr. 
Bryant's book a first-rate work. Mr. Bryant has a 
good deal of the dogmatic energy whicn goes with 
the clear, pronounced opinions of a man whose re- 
flections and experience have moulded a character 
not wanting in firmness and decision. At the same 
time he teaches with the enthusiasm of one who has 
faith in his teaching; he speaks as one having au- 
thority, and herein lies the charm and excellence of 
his work, fle states the opinions of others freely 



and fairly, yet it is no mere compilation. The book 

combines much of the merit of the manual with the 

merit of the monograph. One may recognize in 

almost every chapter of the ninety-four of which the 

work is made up the acuteness of a surgeon who has 

seen much, and observed closely, and who gives forth 

the results of actual experience. In conclusion we 

but Mr. Bryant's are J repeat what we stated at first, that Mr. Bryant's book 

not a compilation of i is one^ which we can conscientiously recommend both 

" to practitioners and students as an admirable work. 

— Dublin Journ. of Med. Science, August, 1873. 

Mr. Bryant has long been known to the reading 
portion of the profession as an able, clear, and graphic 
writer upon surgical subjects. The volume before 
us is one eminently upon the practice of surgery and 
not one which treats at length on surgical pathology, 
though the views that are entertained upon this sub- 
ject are sufficiently interspersed through the work 
for all practical purposes. As a text-book we cheer- 
fully recommend it, feeling convinced that, from the 
subject-matter, and the concise and true way Mr. 
Bryant deals with his subject, it will prove a for- 
midable rival among the numerous surgical text- 
books which are offered to the student. — N. Y. Med. 
Record, June, 1873. 

This is, as the preface states, an entirely new book, 
and contains in a moderately condensed form all the 
surgical information necessary to a general practi- 
tioner. It is written in a spirit consistent with the 
present improved standard of medical and surgical 
science. — American Journal of Obstetrics, August, 
1S73. 



w- 



ELLS [J. SOELBERG), 

Professor of Ophthalmology in King' 



College Hospital, &c. 



A TREATISE ON DISEASES OF THE EYE. Second American, 

from the Third and Revised London Edition, with additions; illustrated with numerous 
engravings on wood, and six colored plates. Together with selections from the Test-types 
of Jaeger and Snellen. In one large and very handsome octavo volume of nearly 800 
pages ; cloth, $5 00 ; leather, $6 00. (Just Ready.) 
The continued demand for this work, both in England and this country, is sufficient evidence 
that the author has succeeded in his effort to supply within a reasonable compass a full practical 
digest of ophthalmology in its most modern aspects, while the call for repeated editions has en- 
abled him in his revisions to maintain its position abreast of the most recent investigations and 
improvements. In again reprinting it, every effort has been made to adapt it thoroughly to the 
wants of the American practitioner. Such additions as seemed desirable have been introduced 
by the editor, Dr. I. Minis Hays, and the number of illustrations has been largely increased. The 
importance of test-types as an aid to diagnosis is so universally acknowledged at the present day 
that it seemed essential to the completeness of the work that they should be added, and as the 
author recommends the use of those both of Jaeger and of Snellen for different, purposes, selec- 
tions have been made from each, so that the practitioner may have at command all the assist- 
ance necessary. Although enlarged by one hundred pages, it has been retained at the former 
very moderate price, rendering it one of the cheapest volumes before the profession. 
A few notices of the previous edition are subjoined. 

In this respect the work before us is of much more i found difficult to th« student, he has dwelt at length 
service to the general practitioner than those heavy I and entered into full explanation. After a careful 
compilations which, in giving every person's views, I perusal of its contents, we can unhesitatingly com- 
too often neglect to specify those which are most in I mend it to all who desire to consult a really good 
accordance with the author's opinions, or in general j work on ophhtalmic science. — Leavenworth Mde. Her- 
acceptance. We have no hesitation in recommending 
this treatise, as, on the whole, of all English works 
on the subject, the one best adapted to the wants of 



the general practitioner. - 
March, 1870. 



■Edinburgh Med. Journal, 



A treatise of rare merit. It is practical, compre- 
hensive, and yet concise. Upon those subjects usually 



aid, Jan. 1870. 

Wi thout doubt, one of the best works upon the sub 
ject which has ever been published ; it is complete on 
the subj ect of which it treats, and is a necessary work 
for every physician who attempts to treat diseases of 
the eye.— Dominion Med. Journal, Sept. 1869. 



T A URENGE {JOHN Z.), F. R. C. S., 

Editor of the Ophthalmic Review, &c. 

A HANDY-BOOK OF OPHTHALMIC SURGERY, for the use of 

Practitioners. Second Edition, revised and enlarged. With numerous illustrations. In 
one very handsome octavo volume, extra cloth, $3 00. (Lately Issued.) 
For those, however, who must assume the care of edition those novelties which have secured the confi- 
diseases and injuries of the eye, and who are too dence of the profession since the appearance of his 
much pressed for time to study the classic works on last. The volume has been considerably enlarged 
the subject, or those recently published by Stellwag, and improved by the revision and additions of its 
Wells, Bader, and others, Mr. Laurence will prove a author, expressly for the American edition. — Am. 
K aie and trustworthy guide. He has described in this Journ. Med. Sciences, Jan. 1870. 



30 Henry C. Lea's Publications— (Surgery, &c). 



/THOMPSON (SIR HENRY), 

J- Surgeon and Professor of Clinical Surgery to University College Hospital. 

LECTURES ON DISEASES OF THE URINARY ORGANS. With 

illustrations on wood. In one neat octavo volume, extra cloth. $2 25. 
These lectures stand the severe test. They are in- I tical hints so useful for the student, and even more 
structive without heing tedious, and simple without valuable to the young practitioner. —Edinburgh Med. 
being diffuse ; and they include many of those prac- | Journal, April, 1869. 



B 



7 THE SAME AUTHOR. 



ON THE PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT OE STRICTURE OP 

THE URETHHA AND URINARY FISTULiE. With plates and wood-cuts. From the 
third and revised English edition. In one very handsome octavo volume, extra cloth, $3 50. 
(Lately Published.) 
This classical work has so long been recognized as a standard authority on its perplexing sub- 
jects that it should be rendered accessible to the American profession. Having enjoyed the 
advantage of a revision at the hands of the author within a few months, it will be found to present 
his latest views and to be on a level with the most recent advances of surgical science. 

With a work accepted as the authority upon the I ably known by the profession as this before us, must 
subjects of which it treats, an extended notice would | create a demand for it from those who would keep 
be a work of supererogation. The simple announce- I themselves well up in this department of surgery.— 
ment of another edition of a work so well and favor- | St. Louis Med. Archives, Feb. 1870. 



B 



Y THE SAME AUTHOR. (Just Ready.) 



THE DISEASES OF THE PROSTATE, THEIR PATHOLOGY 

AND TREATMENT. Fourth Edition, Revised. In one very handsome octavo volume of 

355 pages, with thirteen plates, plain and colored, and illustrations on wood. Cloth, $3 75. 

This work is recognized in England as the leading authority on its subject, and in presenting 

it to the American profession, it is hoped that it will be found a trustworthy and satisfactory 

guide in the treatment of an obscure and important class of affections. 



Y/^ALES (PHILIP &), M. B., Surgeon V.S.N. 



MECHANICAL THERAPEUTICS: a Practical Treatise on Surgical 

Apparatus, Appliances, and Elementary Operations : embracing Minor Surgery, Band- 
aging, Orthopraxy, and the Treatment of Fractures and Dislocations. With six hundred 
and forty -two illustrations on wood. In one large and handsome octavo volume of about 
700 pages: extra cloth, $5 75; leather, $6 75. 



rPAYLOR (ALFRED S.), M.D., 

•*- Lecturer on Med. Jurisp. and Chemistry in Guy's Hospital. 

MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. Seventh American Edition. Edited 

by John J. Reese, M.D., Prcf. of Med. Jurisp. in the Univ. of Penn. In one large 
octavo volume. Cloth, $5 00 ; leather, $6 00. (Now Ready.) 

In preparing for the press this seventh American edition of the " Manual of Medical Jurispru- 
dence" the editor has, through the courtesy of Dr. Taylor, enjoyed the very great advantage of 
consulting the sheets of the new edition of the author's larger work, " The Principles and Prac- 
tice of Medical Jurisprudence," which is now ready for publication in London. This has enabled 
him to introduce the author's latest views upon the topics discussed, which are believed to bring 
the work fully up to the present time. 

The notes of the former editor, Dr. Hartshorne, as also the numerous valuable references to 
American practice and decisions by his successor, Mr. Penrose, have been retained, with but few 
slight exceptions ; they will be found inclosed in brackets, distinguished by the letters (H.) and 
(P.). The additions made by the present editor, from the material at his command, amount to 
about one hundred pages; and his own notes are designated by the letter (R.). 

Several subjects, not treated of in the former edition, have been noticed in the present one, 
and the work, it is hoped, will be found to merit a continuance of the confidence which it has so 
long enjoyed as a standard authority. 



JJY THE SAME AUTHOR. (Now Ready.) 

THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MEDICAL JURISPRU- 

DENCE. Second Edition, Revised, with numerous Illustrations. In two very large 

octavo volumes, cloth, $10 00; leather, $12 00. 
This great work is now recognized in England as the fullest and most authoritative treatise on 
every department of its important subject. In laying it, in its improved form, before the Ameri- 
cau profession, the publisher trusts that it will assume the same position in this country. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications — {Psychological Medicine, &c). 31 



/TUKE [DANIEL HACK), M.D ., 

-*- Joint author of " The Manual of Psychological Medicine,'''' &c. 

ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE INFLUENCE OF THE MIND UPON 

THE BODY IN HEALTH AND DISEASE. Designed to illustrate the Action of the 
Imagination. In one handsome octavo volume of 416 pages, extra cloth, $3 25. {Now 
Ready.) 
The object of the author in this work has been to show not only the effect of the mind in caus- 
ing and intensifying disease, but also its curative influence, and the use which may be made of 
the imagination and the emotions as therapeutic agents. Scattered facts bearing upon this sub- 
ject have long been familiar to the profession, but no attempt has hitherto been made to collect 
and systematize them so as to render them available to the practitioner, by establishing the seve- 
ral phenomena upon a scientific basis. In the endeavor thus to convert to the use of legitimate 
medicine the means which have been employed so successfully in many systems of quackery, the 
author has produced a work of the highest freshness and interest as well as of permanent value. 

ULANDFORD [G. FIELDING), M. D., F. R. G P., 

-*~* Lecturer on Psychological Medicine at the School of St. George's Hospital, &c. 

INSANITY AND ITS TREATMENT: Lectures on the Treatment, 

Medical and Legal, of Insane Patients. With a Summary of the Laws in force in the 
United States on the Confinement of the Insane. By Isaac Ray, M. D. In one very 
handsome octavo volume of 471 pages: extra cloth, $3 25. {Just Issued.) 
This volume is presented to meet the want, so frequently expressed, of a comprehensive trea- 
tise, in moderate compass, on the pathology, diagnosis, and treatment of insanity. To render it of 
more value to the practitioner in this country, Dr. Ray has added an appendix which affords in- 
formation, not elsewhere to be found in so accessible a form, to physicians who may at any moment 
be called upon to take action in relation to patients. 

It satisfies a want which must have been sorely ; actually seen in practice and the appropriate treat- 
felt by the busy general practitioners of this country, i ment for them, we find in Dr. Blandford's work a 
It takes the form of a manual of clinical description ; considerable advance over previous writings on the 
of the various forms of insanity, with a description J subject. His pictures of the various forms of mental 
of the mode of examining persons suspected of in- disease are so clear and good that no reader can fail 
sanity. We call particular attention to this feature 
of the book, as giving it a unique value to the gene- 
ral practitioner. If we pass from theoretical conside- 
rations to descriptions of the varieties of insanity as 



to be struck with their superiority to those given in 
ordinary manuals in the English language or (so far 
as our own reading extends; in any other. — London 
Practitioner, Feb. 1871. 



w 



INSLOW {FORBES), M.D., D.C.L., frc. 

ON OBSCURE DISEASES OF THE BRAIN AND DISORDERS 

OF THE MIND; their incipient Symptoms, Pathology, Diagnosis, Treatment, and Pro- 
phylaxis. Second American, from the third and revised English edition. In one handsome 
octavo volume of nearly 600 pages, extra cloth. $4 25. 



EA [HENRY C). 
SUPERSTITION AND FORCE: ESSAYS ON THE WAGER OF 

LAW, THE WAGER OF BATTLE, THE ORDEAL, AND TORTURE. Second Edition, 
Enlarged. In one handsome volume royal 12mo. of nearly 500 pages ; extra cloth, $2 75. 
{Lately Published.) 



We know of no single work which contains, in so 
small a compass, so much illustrative of the strangest 
operations of the human mind. Foot-notes give the 
authority for each statement, showing vast research 
ana wonderful industry. We advise our confreres 
to read this book and ponder its teachings. — Chicago 
Med. Journal, Aug. 1870. 

As a work of curious inquiry on certain outlying 
points of obsolete law, "Superstition and Force" is 
one of the most remarkable books we have met with. 
—London Athenceum, Nov. 3, 1866. 

He has thrown a great deal of light upon what must 
be regarded as one of the most instructive as well as 



interesting phases of human society and progress. . . 
The fulness and breadth with which he has carried 
out his comparative survey of this repulsive field of 
history [Torture], are such as to preclude our doing 
justice to the work within our present limits. But 
here, as throughout the volume, there will be found 
a wealth of illustration and a critical grasp of the 
philosophical import of facts which will render Mi. 
Lea's labors of sterling value to the historical stu- 
dent. — London Saturday Review, Oct. 8, 1870. 

As a book of ready reference on the subject, it is of 
the highest value. — Westminster Review, Oct. 1867. 



DI THE SAME AUTHOR. {Lately Published.) 

STUDIES IN CHURCH HISTORY— THE RISE OF THE TEM- 
PORAL POWER— BENEFIT OF CLERGY— EXCOMMUNICATION. In one large royal 
12mo. volume of 516 pp. extra cloth. $2 75. 

literary phenomenon that the head of one of the first 
American houses is also the writer of some of its most 
original books. — London Athenaium, Jan. 7, 1871. 



The story was never told more calmly or with 
greater learning or wiser thought. We doubt, indeed, 
if any other study of this field can be compared with 
this for clearness, accuracy, and power. — Chicago 
Examiner, Dec. 1870. 

Mr. Lea's latest work, "Studies in Church History," 
fully sustains the promise of the first. It deals with 
three subjects — the Temporal Power, Benefit of 
Clergy, and Excommunication, the record of which 
has a peculiar importance for the English student, and 
is a ehapter on Ancient Law likely to be regarded as 
final. We can hardly pass from our mention of such 
works as these — with which that on "Saeerdotal 
Celibacy" should be included — without noting the 



Mr. Lea has done great honor to himself and this 
country by the admirable works he has written on 
ecclesiologicaland cognate subjects. We have already 
had occasion to commend his "Superstition and 
Force" and his "History of Sacerdotal Celibacy." 
The present volume is fully as admirable in its me- 
thod of dealing with topics and in the thoroughness — 
a quality so frequently lacking in American authors — 
with which they are investigated. — N. Y. Journal of 
Psychol. Medicine, July, 1870. 



Henry C. Lea's Publications. 



INDEX TO CATALOGUE. 



American Journal of the Medical Sciences 
American Chemist (The) . 

Abstract, Half-Yearly, of the Med. Sciences 
Anatomical Atlas, by Smith and Horner 

Anderson on Diseases of the Skin 

Ashton on the Rectum and Anus . 
Attfieid's Chemistry .... 

Ashwell on Diseases of Females . 

Ashhurst's Surgery .... 

Barnes on Diseases of Women 

Bellamy's Surgical Anatomy 

Bryant's Practical Surgery . 

Bloxam's Chemistry . 

Blandford on Insanity .... 

Basham on Renal Diseases . 

Brinton on the Stomach 

Bigelow on the Hip .... 

Barlow's Practice of Medicine 

Bowman's (John E.) Practical Chemistry 

Bowman's (John E.) Medical Chemistry 

Buckler on Bronchitis .... 

Bumstead on Venereal .... 

Bumstead and Cullerier's Atlas of Venereal 

Carpenter's Human Physiology . 

Carpenter's Comparative Physiology . 

Carpenter on the Use and Abuse of Alcohol 

Carson's Synopsis of Materia Medica . 

Chambers on the Indigestions 

Chambers's Restorative Medicine 

Christison and Griffith's Dispensatory 

Churchill's System of Midwifery . 

Churchill on Puerperal Fever 

Condie on Diseases of Children . 

Cooper's (B. B ) Lectures on Surgery . 

Cullerier's Atlas of Venereal Diseases 

Cyclopedia of Practical Medicine . 

Dalton's Human Physiology . 

De Jongh on Cod-Liver Oil . 

Dewees' s System of Midwifery 

Dewees on Diseases of Females . 

Dewees on Diseases of Children . 

Druitt's Modern Surgery 

Dunglison's Medical Dictionary . 

Dunglison's Human Physiology . 

Dunglison on New Remedies 

Ellis's Medical Formulary, by Smith . 

Erichsen's System of Surgery 

Fenwick's Diagnosis .... 

Flint on Respiratory Organs . 

Flint on the Heart . ..... 

Flint's Practice of Medicine . 
Fownes's Elementary Chemistry . 

Fox on Diseases of the Stomach . 

Fulleron the Lungs, &c. 

Green's Pathology and Morbid Anatomy 

Gibson's Surgery 

G luge's Pathological Histology, by Leidy 
Galloway's Qualitative Analysis . 

Gray's Anatomy 

Griffith's (R. E.) Universal Formulary 
Gross on Foreign Bodies in Air-Passages 
Gross's Principles and Practice of Surgery 
Gross's Pathological Anatomy 
Guersant on Surgical Diseases of Children 
Hamilton on Dislocations and Fractures 
Bartshorne's Essentials of Medicine . 
Hartshorne's Conspectus of the Medical Sciences 
Hartshorne's Anatomy and Physiology 
Heath's Practical Anatomy . 
Hoblyn's Medical Dictionary . ■ . 

Hodge on Women 

Hodge's Obstetrics ..... 
Hodges' Practical Dissections 
Holland's Medical Notes and Reflections 
Horner's Anatomy and Histology 
Hudson on Fevers .... 

Hill on Venereal Diseases 
Hillier's Handbook of Skin Diseases 
Jones and Sieveking's Pathological Anatomy 
Jones (C. Handfield) on Nervous Disorders 
Kirkes' Physiology ..... 
K-napp's Chemical Technology 



PAGE 

] 
11 

3 
6 

20 



Science 



abridged 



Lea's Superstition and Force 

Lea's Studies in Church History . 

Leishman's Midwifery . . , . 

La Roche on Yellow Fever . 

La Roche on Pneumonia, &c. 

Laurence and Moon's Ophthalmic Surgery 

Lawson on the Eye .... 

Laycock on Medical Observation . 

Lehmann's Physiological Chemistry, 2 vols 

Lehmann's Chemical Physiology . 

Ludlow's Manual of Examinations 

Lyons on Fever ...... 

Maclise's Surgical Anatomy . 

Marshall's Physiology .... 

Medical News and Library . 

Meigs's Obstetrics, the Science and the Art 

Meigs's Lectures on Diseases of Women 

Meigs on Puerperal Fever 

Miller's Practice of Surgery . 

Miller's Principles of Surgery 

Montgomery on 'Pregnancy . 

Morland on Urinary Organs . 

Morland on Uraemia 

Neill and Smith's Compendium of Med 

Neligan's Atlas of Diseases of the Skin 

Neligan on Diseases of the Skin 

Obstetrical Journal , 

Odling's Practical Chemistry 

Pavy on Digestion 

Pavy on Food .... 

Prize Essays on Consumption 

Parrish's Practical Pharmacy 

Pirrie's System of Surgery . 

Pereira's Mat. Medica and Therapeutics. 

Quain and Sharpey's Anatomy, by Leidy 

Ranking's Abstract 

Roberts on Urinary Diseases . 

Ramsbotham on Parturition . 

Rigby's Midwifery . 

Royle's Materia Medica and Therapeuti 

Swayne's Obstetric Aphorisms 

Sargent's Minor 'Surgery 

Sharpey and Quain's Anatomy, by Leidy 

Simon's General Pathology . 

Skey's Operative Surgery 

Slade on Diphtheria 

Smith (J. L.) on Children 

Smith (H. H.) and Horner's Anatomical Atlas 

Smith (Edward) on Consumption . 

Smith on Wasting Diseases of Children 

Solly on Anatomy and Diseases of the Brain 

Still^'s Therapeutics 

Sturges on Clinical Medicine 

Tanner's Manual of Clinical Medicine 

Tanner on Pregnancy 

Taylor's Medical Jurisprudence 

Taylor's Principles and Practice of Med Ju 

Tuke on the Influence of the Mind 

Thomas on Diseases of Females . 

Thompson on Urinary Organs 

Thompson on Stricture . 

Thompson on the Prostate 

Todd on Acute Diseases . 

Wales on Surgical Operations 

Walshe on the Heart 

Watson's Practice of Physic . 

Wells on the Eye .... 

West on Diseases of Females 

West on Diseases of Children 

West on Nervous Disorders of Childre 

West on Ulceration of Oa Uteri 

What to Observe in Medical Cases 

Williams on Consumption 

Wilson s Human Anatomy . 

Wilson on Diseases of the Skin . 

Wilson's Plates on Diseases of the Ski 

Wilson's Handbook of Cutaneous Med 

Wilson on Spermatorrhoea 

Winslow on Brain and Mind 

Wohler's Organic Chemistry 

Winckel on Childbed 

Zeissl on Venereal .... 



PAGE 
. 31 
. 31 



. 14 

. S 
. & 



For "The American Chemist" Five Dollars a year, see p. 11. 
For "The Obstetrical Journal" Five Dollars a year, see p. 22. 



